Details On Secret Israeli Missile Base Accidentally Posted To US Government Website

W2SDXXXXXXXXXX
Project Title: BMD Launcher LS 13103, Israel

The Site Visit and Pre Proposal Training/Discussion are scheduled for 23 May 2013, 1000 hours local time. All attendees will meet at the Main
Gate of Tal Shahar Base to gain entry. The USG POC for the site visit is Mr. Yair Shani, yair.shani@usace.army.mil. Contractors shall
provide, via email, the following to the USG POC no later than 17 May 2013.
The Subject of the Email should say BMD Site Visit.
Provide the following information in your Registration Email:
1. Full name of attendee.
2. Name of company the attendee is affiliated with.
3. US Passport number if the attendee is an American citizen or the Todot Zehut number if the attendee is Israeli.
In accordance w ith DFARS 236.204, the estimated magnitude of this project is between $10,000,000 and $25,000,000.
MICHAEL D PEARSON 011-49-611-9744-2834
NOTE: In sealed bid solicitations " offer" and " offeror" mean " bid" and " bidder" .
10. THE GOVERNMENT REQUIRES PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK DESCRIBED IN THESE DOCUMENTS
NEGOTIATED
14-May-2013
(RFP)
(IFB)
X
CALL:
B. TELEPHONE NO. (Include area code) (NO COLLECT CALLS)
See Item 7
2. TYPE OF SOLICITATION
SEALED BID
3. DATE ISSUED
9. FOR INFORMATION A. NAME
SOLICITATION
NSN 7540-01-155-3212
1442-101
STANDARD FORM 1442 (REV. 4-85)
Prescribed byGSA
FAR (48 CFR) 53.236-1(e)
11. The Contractor shall begin performance within _______
7
calendar days and complete it within ________
485
calendar days after receiving
award, X notice to proceed. This performance period is mandatory, negotiable. (See _________________________ 52.211-10
12 A. THE CONTRACTOR MUST FURNISH ANY REQUIRED PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS?
(If "YES," indicate within how many calendar days after award in Item 12B.)
X YES NO
13. ADDITIONAL SOLICITATION REQUIREMENTS:
A. Sealed offers in original and __________
6
copies to performthe work required are due at the place specified in Item8 by ___________
local time ______________
14 J un 2013
(date). If this is a sealed bid solicitation, offers must be publicly opened at that time.
shall be marked to show the offeror's name and address, the solicitation number, and the date and time offers are due.
B. An offer guarantee X is, is notrequired.
C. All offers are subject to the (1) work requirements, and (2) other provisions and clauses incorporated in the solicitation in full text or by reference.
D. Offers providing less than _______
120
calendar days for Government acceptance after the date offers are due will not be considered and will be rejected.
SOLICITATION, OFFER,
AND AWARD
(Construction, Alteration, or Repair)
1. SOLICITATION NO.
IMPORTANT - The "of f er " sect ion on t he r ever se must be fully complet ed by of fer or .
4. CONTRACT NO.
7. ISSUED BY CODE
CONTRACTING OFFICE
US ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS
KONRAD ADENAUER RING 39
D-65187 WIESBADEN GERMANY
WIESBADEN 65187
W912GB
PAGE OF PAGES
1 OF
CODE
(Title, identifying no., date):
.)
12B. CALENDAR DAYS
7
03:00 PM
(hour)
Sealed envelopes containing offers
5. REQUISITION/PURCHASE REQUEST NO. 6. PROJ ECT NO.
8. ADDRESS OFFER TO (If Other Than Item 7)
FAX: TEL: TEL: FAX:
W912GB-13-R-0027 148

20B. SIGNATURE
(REV. 4-85) STANDARD FORM 1442 BACK
TO SIGN
NSN 7540-01-155-3212
SOLICITATION, OFFER, AND AWARD (Conti nued)
(Construction, Alteration, or Repair)
CODE FACILITY CODE
17. The offeror agrees to performthe work required at the prices specified below in strict accordance with the terms of this solicitation, if this offer is
accepted by the Government in writing within ________ calendar days after the date offers are due.
the minimum requirements stated in Item 13D. Failure to insert any number means the offeror accepts the minimum in Item 13D.)
AMOUNTS SEE SCHEDULE OF PRICES
18. The offeror agrees to furnish any required performance and payment bonds.
19. ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF AMENDMENTS
(The offeror acknowledges receipt of amendments to the solicitation -- give number and date of each)
AMENDMENT NO.
DATE
20A. NAME AND TITLE OF PERSON AUTHORIZED TO SIGN
OFFER (Type or print)
AWARD (To be compl et ed by Gover nment )
21. ITEMS ACCEPTED:
22. AMOUNT 23. ACCOUNTING AND APPROPRIATION DATA
24. SUBMIT INVOICES TO ADDRESS SHOWN IN ITEM
(4 copies unless otherwise specified)
CODE
(Insert any number equal to or greater than
20C. OFFER DATE
25. OTHER THAN FULL AND OPEN COMPETITION PURSUANT TO
10 U.S.C. 2304(c) 41 U.S.C. 253(c)
CODE 27. PAYMENT WILL BE MADE BY: 26. ADMINISTERED BY
(Include ZIP Code) 14. NAME AND ADDRESS OF OFFEROR 15. TELEPHONE NO. (Include area code)
See Item 14
(Include only if different than Item 14) 16. REMITTANCE ADDRESS
30B. SIGNATURE
29. AWARD (Contractor is not required to sign this document.)
document and return _______ copies to issuing office.) Contractor agrees Your offer on this solicitation, is hereby accepted as to the items listed. This award con-
to furnish and deliver all items or perform all work, requisitions identified summates the contract, which consists of (a) the Government solicitation and
on this form and any continuation sheets for the consideration stated in this your offer, and (b) this contract award. No further contractual document is
contract. The rights and obligations of the parties to this contract shall be necessary.
governed by (a) this contract award, (b) the solicitation, and (c) the clauses,
representations, certifications, and specifications or incorporated by refer-
ence in or attached to this contract.
30A. NAME AND TITLE OF CONTRACTOR OR PERSON AUTHORIZED
31A. NAME OF CONTRACTI NG OFFI CER (Type or print)
30C. DATE
(Type or print)
TEL: EMAI L:
31B. UNITED STATES OF AMERICA 31C. AWARD DATE
BY
CONTRACTING OFFICER WILL COMPLETE ITEM 28 OR 29 AS APPLICABLE
(Contractor is required to sign this 28. NEGOTIATED AGREEMENT
(Must be f ul l y compl et ed by of f er or ) OFFER
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 3 of 148

Section 00010 - Solicitation Contract Form

ITEM NO SUPPLIES/SERVICES QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT
0001 1

CLINs incuded in this section will be
FFP
used for award purpose. Offerors shall provide pricing on the Bid Schedule
included as an attachment to this solicitation.
FOB: Destination
PURCHASE REQUEST NUMBER: W2SDXXXXXXXXXX

NET AMT

TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(All Information Presented in this TOC is Incorporated into this Solicitation)

SECTION 00010 Solicitation/Contract Form (SF 1442)
SECTION 00100 Schedule/Instructions to Offerors
SECTION 00600 Representations & Certifications
SECTION 00700 Contract Clauses
SECTION 00800 Special Contract Requirements

Special Technical Requirements (STRs)

Special Contract Requirements BMD Launcher LS 13103, 9 May 2013
Special Specifications BMD Launcher LS 13103, 13 May 2013
Soil Boring Logs, 14 J une 2010

Department of the Army, Manual No. EM 385-1-1, September 2008. Safety, Safety and Health Requirements,
http://140.194.76.129/publications/eng-manuals/em385-1-1/2008_Dari/toc.htm

Specifications

00 73 15 General Conditions, April 2010
00 73 15.01 Government Field Office, J une 2011
00 73 15.15 Time Extensions for Unusually Severe Weather, J anuary 2009
00 73 16.01 Special Conditions for Projects in Israel, February 2010
01 32 01.00 10 Project Schedule, May 2008
01 33 00 Submittal Procedure, J uly 2009
01 35 26 Safety and Occupational Health Requirements, November 2012
01 45 01 USACE Quality Control, March 2012
01 45 01.01 Additional Quality Control Personnel, J une 2008
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 4 of 148

01 45 01.10 USACE Quality Control Systems, April 2008
01 78 00 Completion Procedures, February 2010
01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data, March 2009
02 41 00 Demolition, March 2011
EP 310-1-6a Construction Signs, J une 2006

Host Nation Technical Requirements

01 -HNTR for Earthworks, 1993
02 - HNTR for Concrete Cast in-Situ Works, 1998
03 - HNTR for Precast Concrete Products, 1990
04 - HNTR for Construction Works, 1995
05 - HNTR for Waterproofing Works, 2004
06 - HNTR for J oinery and Steel Works, 2004
07 - HNTR for Sanitary Installations, 1990
08 - HNTR for Electrical Installations, 1997
09 - HNTR for Plaster Works, 1985
10 - HNTR for Flooring and Covering Works, 2001
11 - HNTR for Painting Works and Methods of Measurements, 2002
12 - HNTR for Aluminum Metal Works, 1990
14 - HNTR for Stone Works, 1991
15 - HNTR for Air-Conditioning Installations 1997
16 HNTR for Heating and Steam Installation 1992
17 - HNTR for Elevators, 2002
18 HNTR for Communications Infrastructure, 2005
19 - HNTR for Steel Structures Works, 2000
21 - HNTR for Precast Concrete Constructions, 1995
22 - HNTR for Prefabricated Elements in Building, 1995
23 - HNTR for Piles Bored and Cast In Site and Take-off Procedures, 2000
29 - HNTR for Signage and Directions in Buildings
30 - HNTR for Furniture/Equipment in the Building (Installed [Fixed] and not Installed [Mobile])
34 - HNTR for Fire Detection and Fire Extinguishing Systems, 1995
36 - HNTR for Compressed Air Installations, 1988
40 - HNTR for Site Development, 1993
41 - HNTR for Gardening and Irrigation Works, 1993
43 HNTR for Outdoor Lighting, 1982
50 - HNTR for Concrete Pavements
51 - HNTR for Paving Runways, Roads and Aprons, 1998
57 - HNTR for Water Lines, Sewage and Channeling, 1990
67 - HNTR for Antenna Mast Installation, 1984

Drawings

Refer to List of Drawings for BMD Launcher LS 13103

Attachments

Attachment (1) - Experience Overview Sheet
Attachment (2) - Experience Information Sheet
Attachment (3) - USACE Past Performance Questionnaire
Attachment (4) - USACE PPQ to be Completed by Client
Attachment (5) - Sample Bank Letter of Assurance
Attachment (6) - Sample Bank Letter of Guarantee
Attachment (7) - Sample OSP Worksheet and Directions
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 5 of 148

Attachment (8) - SF LLL Disclosure of Lobbying Activities
Attachment (9) - Bid Schedule

FMS REQUIREMENT
This contract is an FMS Requirement for the Israeli Ministry of Defense.

Offerors are advised that members/employees on the Israeli Ministry of Defense and the Israeli Armed Forces may
serve as technical advisors and price analysts in the source selection process. These individuals will be authorized
access to the proposal data and participate in discussions if required.

In accomplishing their duties related to the source selection process, the aforementioned may require access to
proprietary information contained in the offerors' proposals. If the Offeror wishes to restrict any portion of their
proposal which they consider proprietary from the aforementioned, the Offeror must issue a formal letter explaining
the portions which should not be released to the Contracting Officer along with their proposal.

BASIC PROPOSAL REQUIREMENTS
A. BASIS FOR AWARD (Section 00100)

When the word Offeror is encountered throughout Section 00100, it is intended to
mean a company seeking to do business with the Government that submits a proposal
in response to this solicitation. When the word Government is encountered throughout
this Section 00100, it is intended to mean U.S. Army Corps of Engineers.

The award will be made based on the best overall (i.e., best value) proposal that is
determined to be the most beneficial to the Government, with appropriate consideration
given to the five (5) evaluation factors: Experience, Past Performance, Management
Plan, Schedule and Price. Experience is slightly more important than Past
Performance. Past Performance is slightly more important than Management Plan.
Management Plan is slightly more important than Schedule. To receive consideration
for award, a rating of no less than Acceptable must be achieved for each of the non-
priced factors. Offerors will be cautioned that the award may not necessarily be made
to the lowest price offered. NOTE: ALL NON-PRICED FACTORS COMBINED ARE
APPROXIMATELY EQUAL TO PRICE AS AN INDIVIDUAL FACTOR. The
Government reserves the right to award to other than the lowest proposed price;
however, the degree of importance of price related elements as a factor will become
greater as the technical proposals approach equality. The greater the equality of
technical proposals, the more important price shall become in selecting the Best Value
to the Government.

The awarded Contract will incorporate the successful Offerors proposal to the extent it
offers betterments and does not conflict with the Request for Proposal.

B. FACTORS TO BE EVALUATED
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 6 of 148

The following evaluation factors will be used to evaluate each proposal: Award will be
made to the Offeror proposing the combination most advantageous to the Government
based upon an integrated assessment of the evaluation factors described below.

Evaluation of the Offerors proposal shall address each factor as it applies to the
solicitation requirements. A detailed explanation of the criteria for the evaluation is set
forth in the Evaluation Approach, Paragraph C of this section. During evaluations of
each proposal, the Government will assign each factor an adjectival rating and write a
narrative evaluation reflecting the identified findings.

Factor 1: Experience: Each Offerors proposal will be evaluated to determine depth and
relevance of their experience.

Factor 2: Past Performance: Each Offerors past performance will be reviewed to
determine relevancy and confidence assessment.

Factor 3. Management Plan: The Offerors management plan will be evaluated for the
reasonableness, risk, and the logic associated with the overall organization structure
and how it is organized, structured, and staffed to execute the entire scope of work.

Factor 4. Schedule: The Offerors schedule will be evaluated for completeness, logic,
reasonableness, and risk associated with the proposed schedule as compared to the
solicitation requirements.

Factor 5: Price: The resulting award will be a Firm-Fixed-Price (FFP) Contract. Price
reasonableness will be utilized in the evaluation of the Firm-Fixed Price effort.

C. EVALUATION APPROACH

All proposals shall be subject to evaluation by the Source Selection Team (SST)
to include any and all information submitted by the Offeror, regardless of whether it was
specifically asked for herein.

1. The overarching evaluation approach for all factors is as follows:

a. Adequacy of Response. The proposal will be evaluated to determine
whether the Offerors methods and approach have adequately and completely
considered, defined, and satisfied the requirements specified in the RFP. The proposal
will be evaluated to determine the extent to which each requirement has been
addressed in the proposal in accordance with the proposal submission section of the
RFP.

b. Feasibility of Approach. The proposal will be evaluated to determine
the extent to which the proposed approach is workable and the end results achievable.
The proposal will be evaluated to determine the extent to which successful performance
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 7 of 148

is contingent upon proven devices and techniques. The proposal will be evaluated to
determine the extent to which the Offeror is expected to be able to successfully
complete the proposed tasks and technical requirements within the required schedule.

2. FACTOR 1- EXPERIENCE

1. The Proposal shall contain no more than seven (7) projects performed within six (6)
years of the solicitation issue date or currently being performed (at least 50% complete)
that show experience constructing facilities of a similar dollar value, physical size,
complexity and function, utilizing techniques relevant to those required by this
solicitation. Of the seven (7) projects submitted, at least two projects should be for the
prime contractor and in the case of a joint venture, at least one project for each joint
venture partner. The Offeror will be evaluated on the depth and relevance of their
experience as submitted in the proposal in accordance with the following items which
are approximately equal to each other in importance:

Projects which involve construction of base facilities.
Projects including multi-phase utility infrastructure construction.
Projects similar in magnitude $10,000,000 to $25,000,000 and complexity and of
a similar duration as the work required under this solicitation
Projects built in an active environment and phased construction particularly those
which complex scheduling and logistic requirements similar to this project.
Projects that demonstrate experience working in Israel.
Projects that are completed (as opposed to in-progress or on-going).
Projects performed within the last six (6) years. Projects older than six (6) years
will be evaluated but may be considered less relevant

2. Projects demonstrating that the Offerors team members have previously worked
together are considered more relevant, especially where the roles were similar to those
that are proposed for this work. Projects that are closer to the completion date (either
recently completed or nearing completion) are considered more relevant than those that
are further from the completion date. Projects for the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
and to a slightly lesser extent other U.S. Government agencies, are considered more
relevant.

3. Offerors demonstrating multiple projects with experience in the categories listed
above will be considered more relevant than Offerors submitting one example.

4. For Projects that are not considered fully relevant, the government will evaluate
which projects demonstrate various aspects of relevancy. Offerors are encouraged to
submit a combination of projects demonstrating experience with as many relevant
aspects as possible. Offerors are cautioned that if they submit no recent experience,
this may negatively affect the evaluation of the depth of experience.

5. If more than seven (7) projects are submitted, only the first seven will be evaluated.
If less than seven (7) projects are submitted, the proposal will be evaluated; however,
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 8 of 148

the proposal might not receive the highest rating available. If less than two (2) projects
for the prime are submitted, the proposal will be evaluated; however, the proposal might
not receive the highest rating available. An Offeror will not receive credit under this
factor for the relevant experience of an individual or for key personnel experience
proposed for this project. An Offeror should not submit basic indefinite quantity
contracts and multiple award construction contracts as projects, however,
individual task orders under those contracts may be submitted as projects.

The adjectival ratings from FACTOR 1: EXPERIENCE are listed and defined below:

3. FACTOR 2 - PAST PERFORMANCE

There are two aspects to the past performance evaluation. The first aspect is to
evaluate the Offerors past performance to determine how relevant project work is, as
described in Factor 1 Experience, for recent projects. The second aspect is to evaluate
the Offerors performance to determine a confidence assessment of the Offerors
performance. With respect to relevancy, more relevant past performance will typically
be a stronger predictor of future performance and have more influence on the past
performance confidence assessment than past performance of lesser relevance.
TABLE 1 COMBINED TECHNICAL/RISK RATINGS
Color Rating Description
Blue Outstanding Proposal meets requirements and indicates an exceptional approach and
understanding of the requirements. Strengths far outweigh any
weaknesses. Risk of unsuccessful performance is very low.

Purple Good Proposal meets requirements and indicates a thorough approach and
understanding of the requirements. Proposal contains strengths which
outweigh any weaknesses. Risk of unsuccessful performance is low.

Green Acceptable Proposal meets requirements and indicates an adequate approach and
understanding of the requirements. Strengths and weaknesses are
offsetting or will have little or no impact on contract performance. Risk of
unsuccessful performance is no worse than moderate.

Yellow Marginal Proposal does not clearly meet requirements and has not demonstrated
an adequate approach and understanding of the requirements. The
proposal has one or more weaknesses which are not offset by strengths.
Risk of unsuccessful performance is high.

Red Unacceptable Proposal does not meet requirements and contains one or
more deficiencies. Proposal is unawardable.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 9 of 148

Past Performance will be evaluated for projects performed within six (6) years of the
solicitation issue date or currently being performed (at least 50% complete).

The Offeror's past performance will be evaluated based on performance on projects
submitted under Factor 1 Experience, to include the past performance of any
Subcontractors or J oint Venture partners whose projects the Offeror may have
submitted, as well as any other Past Performance information obtained by the
Government through other available sources. An Offeror may not establish past
performance based on individual or key personnel performance, apart from the Offerors
entity that is proposing. Past performance will be evaluated in accordance with the
following criteria:

a. Quality: The degree to which the Offeror has complied with the contract
requirements ; met quality standards; was timely in regard to problem resolution
without extensive customer guidance; and the shown effectiveness of his prior
quality control program.

b. Schedule/Timeliness of Performance: Whether the Offeror met contract
completion dates including significant milestones and where schedules were
exceeded, whether the Offeror identified valid justifications for the delays or if
liquidated damages were assessed due to late delivery by the Offeror.

c. Customer Satisfaction: The degree to which end-users were satisfied with
the project; whether the Offeror was reasonable and cooperative in regard to
resolving disagreements; whether the Offeror was responsive and businesslike
with concern for the customer, and whether the Offeror achieved customer
satisfaction.

d. Management Personnel/Labor: Whether the Offeror used effective
business practices for on-site management for subcontractors, suppliers,
materials, and labor force. Whether and the extent to which the Offeror
displayed an ability to hire and retain a qualified workforce; controlled
government/ owner property when applicable; provided a workforce with the
required expertise; successfully managed multiple projects simultaneously and
multiple disciplines of construction; easily assimilated and incorporated changes
in requirements and priorities in response to the owner; and provided an effective
overall management and control of projects and programs.

e. Cost/Financial Management: Whether the Offeror met the contract
requirements by completing the project at the agreed to price and where not, the
extent to which the Offeror was responsible for cost increases; whether the
Offeror provided alternative methods that benefited the client; whether the
Offeror submitted invoices timely with sufficient documentation to substantiate
requested payment and avoided significant unexplained variances from the
original price..
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 10 of 148

f. Safety/Security: The Offerors prior record for maintaining an environment
of safety, adherence to a safety plan, and compliance with safety requirements,
including following safety regulations, housekeeping, and correcting noted
deficiencies, as well as the Offerors prior compliance with all security
requirements and personnel security requirements when applicable.

g. General: The ability to respond to emergency situations; ability to
effectively communicate; compliance with contract terms and conditions. This
includes if prior customers would prefer to do business with the Offeror again, if
given the choice.

1. Offerors are reminded that the Government reserves the right to obtain past
performance information from any source available and has the right to contact
customers other than those listed by the Offeror to evaluate past performance.

2. The Government reserves the right to verify statements the Offeror makes regarding
its past performance to determine whether they are substantiated.

3. The Government will consider past performance information in evaluating overall risk
associated with a particular Offeror. When evaluating these criteria, the following will be
taken into consideration for evaluation purposes:
a. The relevance of the past performance;
b. How recently the project submitted was performed;
c. Trends in the Offerors performance;
d. Evaluations, letters of appreciation, and commendations from customers; and
e. Positive and/or negative comments that impact evaluation of Offerors past
performance.

4. Unavailability of Past Performance Information: IAW FAR 15.305(a)(2)(iv), in the
case of an Offeror without a record of relevant past performance or for whom
information on past performance is not available; the Offeror may not be evaluated
favorably or unfavorably on past performance.

The adjectival ratings for FACTOR 2: PAST PERFORMANCE are listed and defined
below:
(i) RELEVANCY: The first aspect of the past performance evaluation is to assess
the Offerors past performance to determine how relevant a recent effort
accomplished by the Offeror is to the effort to be acquired through the source
selection. Relevancy is not separately rated, however, the following criteria will
be used to establish what is relevant which shall include similarity of
service/support, complexity, dollar value, contract type, and degree of
subcontract/teaming.

Past Performance Relevancy Ratings:
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 11 of 148

Rating Definition
Very Relevant Present/past performance effort involved essentially
the same scope and magnitude of effort and
complexities this solicitation requires.
Relevant Present/past performance effort involved similar scope
and magnitude of effort and complexities this
solicitation requires.
Somewhat Relevant Present/past performance effort involved some of the
scope and magnitude of effort and complexities this
solicitation requires.
Not Relevant Present/past performance effort involved little or none
of the scope and magnitude of effort and complexities
this solicitation requires.

(ii) PERFORMANCE CONFIDENCE ASSESSMENT: The second aspect of the past
performance evaluation is to determine how well the contractor performed on the
contracts. The past performance evaluation gathers information from customers on
how well the Offeror performed those past contracts. In conducting the performance
confidence assessment, each Offeror shall be assigned one of the ratings identified
below:

Performance Confidence Assessments:
Rating Definition
Substantial Confidence Based on the Offerors recent/relevant performance
record, the Government has a high expectation that the
Offeror will successfully perform the required effort.
Satisfactory Confidence Based on the Offerors recent/relevant performance
record, the Government has a reasonable expectation that
the Offeror will successfully perform the required effort.
Limited Confidence Based on the Offerors recent/relevant performance
record, the Government has a low expectation that the
Offeror will successfully perform the required effort.
No Confidence Based on the Offerors recent/relevant performance
record, the Government has no expectation that the
Offeror will be able to successfully perform the required
effort.
Unknown Confidence
(Neutral)
No recent/relevant performance record is available or the
Offerors performance record is so sparse that no
meaningful confidence assessment rating can be
reasonably assigned.

iii. Offerors (a) for whom compliance with FAR 52.219-8 has been established;
and/or (b) for whom no negative information has been reported; or (c) certifying no past
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 12 of 148

performance history of contracts containing FAR 52.219-8 will be rated as complying
with FAR 52.219-8. Such a rating shall have neither positive nor negative impact on
the Offerors overall Past Performance evaluation. Offerors for whom negative
information has been reported shall have such negative information, along with any
explanations or comments responding to such negative information supplied by the
Offeror, evaluated in accordance with the evaluation criteria for Past Performance.
Such evaluation shall be substantiated and factored into the Offerors overall Past
Performance evaluation.

4. FACTOR 3: MANAGEMENT PLAN

The Offerors management plan will be evaluated for the reasonableness, risk, and the
logic associated with the overall organization structure and how it is organized,
structured, and staffed to execute the entire scope of work. The management plan
which includes the organizational structure and staffing, and execution plan will be rated
as one (1) factor. The Government will consider the organization and clarity of the
management plan and whether the management plan:

1. Clearly delineated lines of authority on the organizational chart (graph) organized in a
precise and logical manner including the relationship between the headquarters office
and the site office, including all involved with the management of the contract including
subcontractors and joint venture partners.

2. The graph and the narrative description clearly display the planned organization
structure to include clearly identifying prime contractor versus subcontractor positions
and where those position our located.

3. Comprehensive descriptions of duties, roles, major responsibilities, and authorities for
key personnel, including roles of authorities for subcontractors and joint ventures
presented as a logical approach to perform the work throughout the contract, including
which roles and personnel are identified to communicate with the Government. The
resumes for the key personnel shall be included in the proposal and at a minimum will
include project manager, site superintendant, site quality control manager, and site
safety manager.
Note: The positions of project manager, site superintendant, site quality control
manager and site safety manager must be filled by full time employees of the prime
contractor, directly hired by the prime contractor. The cannot be employees or officials
of a subcontractor and cannot also serve or be dual hatted as subcontractor
employees or officials. The prime contractor may have additional positions filled by its
employees but the four positions listed herein are the minimum acceptable.

4. A precise explanation illustrating an understanding of the contract requirements by
describing management for performance of the contract including start-up / mobilization,
summary of quality control plan, staffing of the field offices, summary to supply labor,
summary to acquire materials, plan to obtain, retain, coordinate and manage
subcontractors, summary for compliance with security requirements and additional
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 13 of 148

and/or unique management advantages provided to the Government. In evaluating
proposed key personnel the government may consider any relevant information known
to it concerning the proposed personnel, including performance on previous government
contracts.

The plan must be specifically-tailored to the project contemplated by the
solicitation.

The adjectival ratings for FACTOR 3: MANAGEMENT PLAN are listed and defined
below:

5. FACTOR 4: SCHEDULE

The Offerors schedule will be evaluated for completeness, logic, reasonableness, and
risk associated with the proposed schedule as compared to the solicitation
requirements. In assessing reasonableness, the Government will take into account how
well the proposed summary schedule supports the contract duration as compared with
the solicitation requirements. In addition, the Government may use independent
judgment concerning logic, constraints and typical construction durations. The length of
the schedule must be equal to the contract duration. The Government will evaluate the




W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 14 of 148

schedule to assess conformance with the solicitation requirements, the strength of
understanding of the project scope, and restrictions which must be considered in the
schedule (e.g., long lead items, logicalness of proposed phasing, etc.). The Government
will evaluate the strength of understanding of events associated with the Offeror's
capability to schedule the complete project within the proposed contract duration and
the realism of the schedule.

The schedule must be specifically-tailored to the project contemplated by the
solicitation.

6. FACTOR 5: PRICE

The contract will be a Firm-Fixed-Price (FFP) contract. Price will not be scored, but will
be evaluated in accordance with this section. In order to be considered acceptable,
offers must contain prices for all of the contract line items (CLINs) for the base items
and any options. Failure to submit a Bid Schedule and failure to complete all CLINs
may result in the Offerors proposal package being rejected by the Government after
initial evaluation without further consideration. The Offeror's price proposal will be
evaluated to determine reasonableness, completeness, performance risk and
affordability in order to assess the Offerors understanding of the scope of work for the
project (the Governments assessment of the Offerors ability to perform the work at the




W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 15 of 148

proposed price), i.e. whether the price is reasonable for the work to be performed,
whether the price reflects the Offerors understanding of the requirements, and whether
the price is consistent with the technical proposal. Price will be evaluated based on the
total sum of all CLINs. Should the Government determine proposed prices are
unreasonably low (an indication of buy-in), this will be considered a performance risk.

a. Completeness To be complete, the Offeror must provide all data that is
requested and necessary to evaluate the prices, including completing all
CLINs on the Bid Schedule. The Government will assess the extent to which
the proposed prices comply with the content and format requirements set
forth in this solicitation.

b. Reasonableness The Offeror's proposal will be evaluated through price
analysis techniques as described in FAR Part 15. For Price to be reasonable,
it must represent a price that provides best value to the Government when
consideration is given to prices in the market, (market conditions may be
evidenced by other competitive proposals), and the technical and functional
capabilities of the Offeror. The Offeror's proposed prices will be evaluated to
determine if any are unreasonably high or low in relation to the anticipated
work under the contract as well as with current industry standards. The
Offerors price shall include and incorporate all costs associated with currency
fluctuation and inflation. The Offerors price shall include and incorporate all
costs associated with performance of the project, including labor, materials,
securing and storage of materials, and equipment. Because the evaluation of
the price proposal will represent a portion of the total evaluation, it is possible
that an Offeror might not be selected for award because of unreasonable,
unbalanced, incomplete, inaccurate, noncurrent price proposal information
and/or project pricing data.

The Government reserves the right to accept other than the lowest priced offer or to
reject any and all offers.

FFP Requirements

1) The RFP requires firm-fixed-prices contract line items. A price
reasonableness approach will be utilized by the Government to determine
that the proposed prices offered are fair and reasonable and that a buy-in or
unbalanced pricing between CLINs or Option Periods is not occurring. In
evaluating price reasonableness, other than cost and pricing data, shall be
utilized.

2) The Government will examine price proposals for artificially low unit prices.
Offers found to be unreasonably high, unreasonably low (an indication of buy
in), or unbalanced, may be considered unacceptable and may be rejected
on that basis.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 16 of 148

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:

1. This contract is firm-fixed-price, payable entirely in United States of America Dollars.
No additional sums will be payable due to any escalation in the cost of materials,
equipment or labor. The Contractors failure to properly estimate or accurately predict
the cost and/or difficulty in achieving the results required by this contract is not
reimbursable. The contract price will not be adjusted on account of fluctuations in the
currency exchange rates. No Bill of Quantities will be provided by the Government or
will be utilized during this Contract. Changes in the contract price and/or time to
complete will be made only due to changes made by the Government in the work to be
performed/due to delays caused by the Government as determined and approved in
accordance with FAR clauses 52.243-4 Changes, and FAR 52.211-13 Time Extensions,
and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Advance payments are not authorized and
the contractor will be paid only for work as the work is accomplished in defined intervals
as the work proceeds, in accordance with FAR clause 52.232-5 Payments under Fixed-
Price Construction Contracts.

2. Responsibility: In accordance with FAR Subpart 9.1, the Contracting Officer will
perform an affirmative responsibility determination to ensure that the Offeror has the
adequate resources to perform the work.

D. PROPOSAL SUBMISSION (Section 00100)

1. Introduction. The Offerors proposal shall be submitted in hard copy, with
accompanying digital copies, as set forth below. Volume 1: Technical Proposal and
Volume II: Price Proposal / Administrative Submission shall be received at the following
address by the date and time indicated on the Solicitation Standard Form 1442. No.
facsimiles of Volume I or Volume II are permitted:

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Europe District
Contracting Division (CENAU-CT)
Attn: Michael Pearson, Contracting Specialist
7
th
Floor, Room 709A
Konrad-Adenauer Ring 39
D-65187 Wiesbaden
Germany

Email: michael.d.pearson@usace.army.mil
Telephone Confirmation: +49(0)611-9744-2834

Files shall not contain classified data. The use of hyperlinks in proposals is
prohibited.

Offerors are cautioned that parroting of the Technical requirements or the PWS
with a statement of intent to perform does not reflect an understanding of the
requirement or capability to perform. Offerors are responsible for including sufficient
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 17 of 148

details to permit a complete and accurate evaluation of each proposal. Proprietary
information shall be clearly marked.

2. PROPOSAL SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

The Government will not make assumptions concerning intent, capabilities, or
experiences. Clear identification of proposal details shall be the sole
responsibility of the Offeror. The proposal shall meet the following basic
requirements.

a. The Proposal shall be typed and submitted in English and easy to read.

b. Proposal shall be organized, concise, and submitted in two volumes. Volumes
shall be clearly identified and tabbed. Each factor shall be described in a
separate tabbed section.

c. Each volume shall be contained within a separate binder.

d. Each volume shall be identified by the solicitation number, volume number,
and name, address, and telephone number of the prime Offeror on the cover.

e. Each volume shall contain a Table of Contents and include at the bottom left
side of each page the volume and page number.

f. Volume I: Offerors shall verify that the information for all forms submitted is
current, correct and complete including names of the points-of-contact, email
address, and telephone number.

g. Volume II: The Bid Schedule shall be completed in full, including all options, if
any.

h. Volume II: Offerors shall submit a signed Offer Standard Form 1442 for this
solicitation including verification of all amendments received.

i. Initial proposals should be submitted based on the most favorable terms the
Offeror can submit to the Government from a technical and price position.
You are referred to the section entitled: Basis for Award

j. Offerors shall submit a CD copy of each Volume, including the Electronic Bid
Schedule.

k. Proposals shall completely and adequately address the requirements of this
solicitation. Offerors are reminded that elaborate corporate marketing
information, formatting, special reproduction techniques, etc., are not
necessary.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 18 of 148

l. Contractors are cautioned against submitting conditional proposals. All
questions and concerns shall be addressed to the Contracting Officer prior to
the closing date of the solicitation, providing adequate time for the Contracting
Officer to answer the concerns.

m. Failing to submit attachments or failing to complete the proposal properly,
may result in rejection of the offer without further evaluation. Therefore,
Offerors are urged to follow instructions and speak with the Contracting
Officer if instructions are not understood.

Note: Proposal Expenses and Pre-Contract Costs: The Request for Proposal
(RFP) solicitation does not commit the Government to pay any costs incurred
in the preparation and submission of a proposal or for any other costs
incurred by any firm submitting a proposal in response to this solicitation.

n. Proposals shall be submitted in the following format:

PROPOSAL PACKAGE ORIGINAL COPIES CD

VOLUME I TECHNICAL PROPOSAL 1 6 1

FACTOR 1 Experience
FACTOR 2 Past Performance
FACTOR 3 Management Plan
FACTOR 4 Schedule

This volume shall also include the following:

Letters of Commitments for Committed Subcontractors
J oint Venture Agreement (if applicable)

VOLUME II PRICE PROPOSAL 1 1

FACTOR 5 Price

This volume shall include the information as detailed in paragraph
PROPOSAL FORMAT FOR VOLUME II.

Committed Subcontractors.

If an Offeror wishes to be credited with the experience, expertise and/or past
performance of a committed subcontractor (i.e., a firm that is not the prime contractor) a
letter of commitment signed by the committed subcontractor and the prime contractor
shall be submitted. The commitment letter shall be submitted even if the firm is in some
way related to the prime contractor (for example, the committed subcontractor is
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 19 of 148

subsidiary of the prime contractor, or a subsidiary of a firm to which the prime contractor
is also a subsidiary). If a letter of commitment is not submitted, the experience will not
be considered. The Offeror shall include their letter of commitment as part of Volume I.

Joint Ventures.

An Offeror that is part of a J oint Venture must submit a legally binding joint venture
agreement. The Government will not evaluate the capability of any Offerors that are not
included in the J oint Venture agreement. J oint Ventures must include a copy of the legal
joint venture agreement signed by an authorized officer from each of the firms
comprising the J oint Venture with the chief executive of each entity identified and must
be translated into English, if the original agreement is in a language other than English.

If submitting a proposal as a joint venture, the experience, past performance, and
management approach of each of the joint venture partners can be submitted for the
joint venture entity. The experience for each joint venture partner will be considered the
experience of the joint venture entity. J oint ventures shall submit the following additional
documentation regarding their business entities:

a. A copy of their joint venture agreement in English.

b. A detailed statement outlining the following in terms of percentages, where
appropriate.

1) The relationship of the joint venture parties in terms of business ownership,
capital contribution, and profit distribution or loss sharing. The joint venture
agreement must show that joint venture members are jointly and severally
liable for any obligations under the contract.

2) The management approach of the joint venture in terms of who will conduct,
direct, supervise and control the project and have custody and control of the
assets of the joint venture and perform the duties necessary to complete the
work.

3) The structure of the joint venture and decision-ranking responsibilities of the
joint venture parties in terms of who will control the manner and method of
performance of the work.

4) The bonding responsibilities of the joint venture parties.

5) Identification of the key personnel having authority to legally bind the joint
venture to subcontracts and state who will provide or contract for the labor
and materials for the joint venture.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 20 of 148

6) Identification of party maintaining the joint venture bank accounts for the
payment of all expenses and the deposits of all receipts, keep the books and
records, and pay applicable taxes for the joint venture.

7) Identification of party furnishing the facilities, such as office supplies and
telephone service.

8) Identification of party having overall control of the joint venture.

Other sections of the proposal shall identify, where appropriate, whether key personnel
are employees of the individual joint venture parties and identify the party, or hired as
employees of the joint venture.

If one of the joint venture parties possesses relevant experience and/or past
performance, the experience and/or past performance of that firm will be considered as
the experience and/or past performance of the joint venture.

A complete and legally binding document with all the information required under this
section titled J oint Ventures shall be included.

*** All members of the Joint Venture shall sign the SF 1442 and the Bank Letter of
Assurance or Bid Bond. Make sure to include as part of Volume I.

3. PROPOSAL FILES

a. Format. The submission shall be clearly indexed and logically assembled.
Each volume shall be clearly identified and shall begin at the top of a page. All pages of
each volume shall be appropriately numbered and identified by the complete company
name, date and RFP number in the header and/or footer. A Table of Contents should
be included.

b. Content Requirement. All information shall be confined to the appropriate file.
The Offeror shall confine submissions to essential matters, sufficient to define the
proposal in a concise manner, to permit a complete and accurate evaluation of each
proposal. Each file of the proposal shall consist of a Table of Contents, Summary
Section, and the Narrative discussion. The Summary Section shall contain a brief
abstract of the file. Proprietary information shall be clearly marked. The following shall
be included in the Narrative discussion:

VOLUME I Technical. The volume shall be organized into the following sections:

FACTOR 1 EXPERIENCE

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 21 of 148

For Factor 1 Experience, Offerors shall submit two attachments, Attachment 1 and
Attachment 2, detailing previous work experience (projects) meeting the requirements of
this solicitation.

1. Information for completing Attachment 1 and Attachment 2:

a. Offerors shall complete an Experience Overview Sheet, Attachment 1, with a total
listing not-to-exceed (NTE) seven (7) projects, performed within six (6) years of the
solicitation issue date or currently being performed (at least 50% complete), that best
represent the Offerors work experience required on this solicitation. If more than seven
(7) projects are submitted, only the first seven (7) projects will be evaluated. If less than
seven (7) projects are submitted the proposal may not receive the highest rating
possible. Offerors should not submit an overarching IDIQ constract as experience since
the IDIQ itself does not demonstrate any work. Offerors may submit a specific task
order from the IDIQ contact since the task order itself is issued for a specific project.
Offerors are reminded that if the Offeror submits IDIQ task orders for experience, each
task order will count as one project..

b. Offerors shall provide an Experience Information Sheet, Attachment 2, Page 1, for
each project listed on Attachment 1 Experience Overview Sheet.

2. The Experience Information Sheets must be filled out completely. The information
provided on the Experience Information Sheets will be used to evaluate the relevancy of
each Offerors experience. When we evaluate your experience, we may contact your
references in order to confirm the project information on the Experience Information
Sheets. Offerors are responsible for providing project descriptions in sufficient detail to
permit evaluation of project relevancy and should clearly articulate what the offeror did
on the project. The project description must include the type of construction used (e.g.
CMU block, pre-engineered steel, concrete panel, etc.). You are encouraged to provide
additional descriptive, narrative information and pictures on projects (not only project
lists or titles) in addition to the Experience Information Sheet, but any additional
information must pertain specifically to these seven (7) projects. An English speaking
point of contact must be provided for each project submitted. Please include name,
email, phone number and fax number for each POC.

3. If a committed subcontractors experience is submitted for evaluation purposes,
clearly address the prime contractors experience with those subcontractors. If a joint
venture, clearly address the experience of each of the joint venture partners, and the
relationship of the J V partners with each other for the project. If submitting experience
as a previous subcontractor, explain how this experience enhanced your knowledge for
work as a prime contractor.

FACTOR 2 - PAST PERFORMANCE

The Past Performance Questionnaire (PPQ), Attachment 3, included in the solicitation is
provided for the Offeror or its team members to submit to the client for projects included
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 22 of 148

in the proposal for Factor 1 Experience. The completed Attachment 3 shall be included
in the proposal under Factor 2 Past Performance. Ensure correct phone numbers and
email addresses are provided for the client point of contact. Completed Past
Performance Questionnaires should be submitted with your proposal. If the Offeror is
unable to obtain a completed PPQ from a client for a project(s) before proposal closing
date, the Offeror should complete and submit with the proposal the first page of the
PPQ Attachment 3, which will provide contract and client information for the respective
project(s). Offerors should follow-up with clients/references to ensure timely submittal of
questionnaires. If the client requests, questionnaires may be submitted directly to the
Government's point of contact, Michael Pearson, via email at
michael.d.pearson@usace.army.mil prior to proposal closing date. Offerors shall not
incorporate by reference into their proposal PPQs previously submitted for other
RFPs. However, this does not preclude the Government from utilizing previously
submitted PPQ information in the past performance evaluation.

Offerors may provide a completed Department of Defense, DD 2626 form, Final
Construction Performance Evaluation, in lieu of Attachment 3. DD 2626 shall be signed
by all designated authorities for consideration for evaluation.

Also include performance recognition documents received within the last six (6) years
such as awards, award fee determinations, customer letters of commendation, and any
other forms of performance recognition.

In addition to the above, the Government may review any other sources of information
for evaluating past performance. Other sources may include, but are not limited to, past
performance information retrieved through the Past Performance Information Retrieval
System (PPIRS), including Contractor Performance Assessment Reporting System
(CPARS), using all CAGE/DUNS numbers of team members (partnership, joint venture,
teaming arrangement, or parent company/subsidiary/affiliate) identified in the Offeror's
proposal, inquiries of owner representative(s), Federal Awardee Performance and
Integrity Information System (FAPIIS), Electronic Subcontract Reporting System
(eSRS), and any other known sources not provided by the Offeror.

While the Government may elect to consider data from other sources, the burden of
providing detailed, current, accurate and complete past performance information rests
with the Offeror.

FACTOR 3-MANAGEMENT PLAN

For Factor 3 Management Plan, The Offeror shall provide a management plan for
successful execution of this project. Organization Structure and Staffing and Execution
are not subfactors and will be evaluated as one complete factor. The plan should
describe and include the following at a minimum:

1. Organization Structure and Staffing. The Offeror shall clearly describe its
organization structure for this particular project, including lines of authority and the
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 23 of 148

relationship between its home office and the site office (office which is directly
responsible for execution of this project), and how they are related. An organization
chart including, titles, and explanations of the major responsibilities and authorities for
key personnel in the home office, support office and site offices shall be provided. The
proposal shall clearly explain the proposed project staffing and how the work effort can
be effectively managed.

The roles of any J oint Venture partners and/or major Subcontractors must be
clearly stated in this section. If subcontractors will be used for a significant portion of
the work, a Letter of Commitment will be required and included in Volume 1.
Submission shall be referenced appropriately. The Offeror may not change
subcontractors without approval of the Contracting Officer. If a J oint Venture, the
Offeror should address the respective roles of the J oint Venture partners

2. Execution. The Offeror shall describe its plan for executing all of the major
requirements of this project to include, at a minimum:

Project start up/mobilization the Offeror shall identify the activities that will take
place immediately after contract award.
Quality Control - the Offeror shall provide an abbreviated summary of their
Quality Control Plan. The summary shall address method of inspection, how
construction deficiencies will be tracked and resolved by the contractor, Quality
Control tracking procedures, and the Offerors ability to utilize (Resident Engineer
Management System) RMS. The Quality Control Plan shall be in compliance
with Specification Sections 01 45 01, 01 45 01.10 and 01 45 01.01.
Staffing of the field office(s) the Offeror shall explain what positions will be
located at the field office(s), the proposed location of the office(s), and the
planned timeframe to establish the office(s). The Offeror shall identify all
personnel by job title who will be located on the site and shall clearly identify
whether the personnel are prime contractor or subcontractor employees.
The Offeror shall provide a short summary on how it will supply labor explain
where and how skilled and non-skilled labor will be obtained. Reference 00 73
16.01 Special Conditions for Projects in Israel.
The Offeror shall provide a short summary on how it will acquire materials
explain where and how it will acquire and transport the necessary materials. The
Offeror shall ensure the Offshore Procurement Regulations and the Balance of
Payment clauses are followed.
The Offeror shall provide a plan to obtain, retain, coordinate, and manage
subcontractors the Offeror must identify the significant aspects of the work that
are to be self-performed and those that will be subcontracted.
The Offeror shall provide a short summary on how it will comply with the security
requirements of the project including the initial obtaining of access to the site(s),
registration of workers and the controlling of the access to the site(s) during
construction.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 24 of 148

FACTOR 4- SCHEDULE

For Factor 4 Schedule, The Offeror shall provide a proposed summary schedule.

1. The Offeror shall provide a summary schedule in sufficient detail to describe how it
will perform the required work within the time allotted. The schedule shall be consistent
with the Management Plan (Factor 3) described above and with the proposed manning
of the projects. The schedule shall include all of the major portions of work and describe
any phasing required for this project. The schedule shall address the submittals,
reviews and approval periods. The schedule shall address long lead-time items and
shall take into consideration all major portions of work. For the purposes of this section
only, the Offeror shall use the date of 30 Aug 2013 for Notice to Proceed and should
prepare the schedule assuming that all bid items and options will be awarded at time of
award.

VOLUME II Price. For Volume II the Offeror shall provide the Price Proposal and
Administrative requirements at the same time as the submission of the Technical
Proposal (Volume I).This volume shall consist of all information, required to support
proposed prices. Certified cost and pricing data are not currently required; however, the
Government reserves the right to request such data prior to award. The information
submitted in this volume shall comply with FAR 15.408and the requirements set forth
below. There are no page limitations for this volume.

1. Offerors shall submit a complete Price Proposal to include a completed Bid
Schedule.

2. The Offer (SF 1442) duly executed with an original signature by an official
authorized to bind the company.

3. Acknowledgement of all amendments to the solicitation is accordance with the
instructions on the Standard Form 30 (amendment form).

4. Section 00600 Representations and Certifications fully completed.

5. Security (e.g., bid bond or bank letter of assurance)

6. The name, address, telephone and fax numbers, e-mail addresses of the Point(s)
of Contact with the authority to legally bind the Contractor.

7. Name, Address, DUNS, CAGE, and TAX Identification Number of the Contractor
submitting the proposal.

Request for Additional Other than Cost and Pricing Data. During the course of the
evaluation, should the SSA have reason to question the fairness and reasonableness of
a price proposal, or has reason to believe the price proposal is unbalanced, the SSA
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 25 of 148

may conduct an additional analysis as required in order to determine a price fair and
reasonable in accordance with FAR 15.403-1.

In addition to the Bank Letter of Assurance or Bid Bond and Bank Letter of Guarantee
or Performance Bond as described in Section 00800, Offerors may be required to
provide additional information at a later date if needed to verify financial responsibility to
perform the contract, such as a Financial Responsibility Form, Balance Sheet / Profit
and Loss Statement, etc.

Note: Offerors must be registered in CCR prior to receiving an award. (See CCR
Registration in Section 00600)

E. DISCUSSIONS

1. GENERAL INFORMATION. It is the Governments intent to award without
discussions. However, in accordance with FAR 15.306(d), discussion sessions
with each Offeror may be held. Should discussions take place, all Offerors in the
competitive range will be notified in accordance with FAR 15.503 and will be
allowed a minimum of seven (7) calendar days to submit Final Proposal
Revisions.

2. DISCUSSION SCHEDULING. If discussions are conducted, the Contracting
Officer will schedule the discussion sessions, and each Offeror will be notified of
the time and place at least three (3) business days prior to their discussion
session. Appropriate security clearances should be provided by the Offerors in
sufficient time to process the requests. The Contracting Officer will provide
additional instructions with the notification. The discussion sessions will be held
telephonically or take place at a facility of the Governments choosing in the
Wiesbaden, Germany or Tel Aviv, Israel area.

3. Competitive Range: The competitive range may be limited for purposes of
efficiency in accordance with FAR 15.306(c)(2). Offerors are urged to reflect their
best possible terms; to include cost related elements, since less than the best
potential terms/price(s) could result in exclusion of the proposal from further
consideration.

INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE TERMS

Supplies/services will be inspected/accepted at:

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 26 of 148

CLIN INSPECT AT INSPECT BY ACCEPT AT ACCEPT BY
0001 N/A N/A N/A Government

DELIVERY INFORMATION

CLIN DELIVERY DATE QUANTITY SHIP TO ADDRESS UIC

0001 N/A N/A N/A N/A

CLAUSES INCORPORATED BY FULL TEXT

52.000-4106 DEFENSE BASE ACT INSURANCE RATES LIMITATION FIXED-PRICE (APRIL 2011)

(a) The U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) has entered into a contract with CNA Insurance to provide all
Defense Base Act (DBA) insurance to USACE, C-3 and the 408
th
CSB contractors and subcontractors at a
contracted fixed rate. The fixed rates for this insurance are as follows:

Service $3.50 per $100 of employee remuneration
Construction $4.25 per $100 of employee remuneration
Security $10.00 per $100 of employee remuneration
Aviation $17.00 per $100 of employee remuneration

(b) Bidders/Offerors should compute the total compensation or total payroll, (salary, plus overseas recruitment
incentive and post differential, but excludes per diem, housing allowance, travel expenses, temporary quarters
allowance, education allowance and other miscellaneous post allowances to include fee or profit) to be paid to
employees who will be covered by DBA insurance. Compute the cost of DBA Insurance by utilizing the spaces
provided below for the base period and whatever extension there may be thereafter, if applicable.

(1) Compensation of Covered Employees: __________________
(Total Payroll Not Total Contract Value) Ex: If total Payroll is $100,000.00

(2) Applicable DBA Rate: ___________________
(Use appropriate Rate) Ex: If a Service, the rate is $3.50/$100 or 3.5%

(3) Total DBA Cost: _________________
(Amount of DBA Premium) Ex: $100 K multiplied by 4% is $4,000.00

(c) Bidders/Offerors shall include a statement as to whether or not local nationals or third country nationals will be
employed on the resultant contract.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 27 of 148

(d) CNA Insurance is utilizing Rutherfoord International as their managing Broker. The primary POC is the
USACE DBA Program Administrator is Nikki Houngmany, (703) 813-6571 usace@rutherfoord.com. The alternate
POC is Sara Payne, Senior Vice President, (703) 813-6503 sara.payne@rutherfoord.com.

(e) Labor Category/J ob Classification Definitions:

SERVICE: White-collar workers providing IT, engineering/consulting services, and restaurant services. Security
consultants are included in this category if they are only providing risk assessment services
and no form of armed protection.

CONSTRUCTION: Blue-collar workers providing services such as carpentry, electrical, plumbing,
mechanical, concrete/asphalt, de-mining, roofing, landscaping, janitorial, trash removal, Port-a-J ohn/septic
cleaning, pest exterminating, auto repair/dismantling, drivers/couriers, and heavy equipment operation and
maintenance. Construction site supervisors/managers and life support service providers are included in this
category as well as all Unskilled and Manual Labor Day Laborers. * Most work will fall into this category*

SECURITY: Personal Security Detail (PSD) and Static or Convoy Guarding of property or personnel.

AVIATION: Pilot and Crew of any aircraft excluding ground personnel who provide maintenance or services and
stay on the ground.

End of clause


52.000-4132 WORKERS COMPENSATION INSURANCE (DEFENSE BASE ACT) (APRIL 2011)

(a) This Special Contract Requirement supplements FAR Clause 52.228-3 Workers Compensation Insurance
(Defense Base Act).

(b) The contractor agrees to procure Defense Base Act (DBA) insurance pursuant to the terms of the contract
between the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) and CNA Insurance unless the contractor has a DBA self-
insurance program approved by the Department of Labor. Proof of this self-insurance shall be provided to the
Contracting Officer. The contractor shall submit proof of a valid DBA Insurance policy with CNA Insurance for
the Prime and their Subcontractors at every tier prior to performance of the contract. The current rates under the
USACE, C3 and 408
th
CSB contract are as follows:


(c) Labor Category/Job Classification Definitions:

SERVICE: White-collar workers providing IT, engineering/consulting services, and restaurant services. Security
consultants are included in this category if they are only providing risk assessment services
and no form of armed protection.

CONSTRUCTION: Blue-collar workers providing services such as carpentry, electrical, plumbing,
mechanical, concrete/asphalt, de-mining, roofing, landscaping, janitorial, trash removal, Port-a-J ohn/septic
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 28 of 148

cleaning, pest exterminating, auto repair/dismantling, drivers/couriers, and heavy equipment operation and
maintenance. Construction site supervisors/managers and life support service providers are included in this
category as well as all Unskilled and Manual Labor Day Laborers.

SECURITY: Personal Security Detail (PSD) and Static or Convoy Guarding of property or personnel.

AVIATION: Pilot and Crew of any aircraft excluding ground personnel who provide maintenance or services and
stay on the ground.

NOTE: More than one rate may be applicable as more than one type of labor may be applicable for a
particular contract.

(d) The contractor agrees to insert a Special Contract Requirement substantially the same as this one in all
subcontracts (at every tier) to which DBA is applicable. Every subcontractor shall procure its own DBA Insurance
coverage directly from CNA Insurance Co.

(e) Should the rates for DBA insurance coverage increase or decrease during the performance of this contract,
USACE shall modify the contract accordingly. However, the revised rates will not be applicable until the
Contractors or Subcontractors DBA Insurance policy is due to be renewed.

(f) CNAs Broker (Rutherfoord International) shall provide proof of confirmation of coverage within 3 working
days of receipt of a complete insurance application. This confirmation should be used by the Contracting Officer to
issue notice to proceed with performance.

(g) Premiums will be reimbursed only if coverage is purchased through the USACE mandatory requirements DBA
contract administered by CNA Insurance and their Managing Broker, Rutherfoord International.

(h) Claims Reporting - The Contractor shall make timely Defense Base Act insurance claims on behalf of each
employee who is injured or killed in the course of their employment under this contract, and shall ensure that similar
language is in each Subcontractors contract. The Contractors Safety Officer shall, in addition to any other duties
required to be performed under the contract, perform the following:

(i) Make timely Defense Base Act insurance claims on behalf of each employee who is injured or killed in
the course of their employment under this contract; and

(ii) Make monthly written reports to the Contracting Officer, Administrative Contracting Officer, and the
District/Center Safety and Occupational Health Manager, providing the names of each such injured or deceased
employee, the circumstances surrounding each injury or death, the dates of each injury or death, the date the
insurance claim was made on behalf of each employee, and the current status of each claim.

The District/Center Safety and Occupational Health Manager POC is:

Commander U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Europe District
ATTN: CENAU-SO Mr. J onathan A. Bach, Safety Officer
CMR-410, BOX 15
APO AE 09049-0015
Telephone: (49) (0)611 9744-2477
E-mail: jonathan.a.bach@usace.army.mil
DSN: 314-570-2477

(i) The Insurance carrier/Broker will conduct periodic audits of actual contractor payroll amounts. When a return
is due for over-payment of premium on a specific audit, such returned premium shall be returned to the U.S.
Department of Treasury.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 29 of 148

(j) Failure to comply and purchase Defense Base Act (DBA) Insurance in accordance with FAR Clauses 52.228-3
Workers Compensation Insurance (Defense Base Act), from the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers mandatory
Insurance Carrier/Broker (CNA Insurance/Rutherfoord International) for the Prime and all of the Subcontractors at
every tier, shall be considered a material breach and could cause your contract to be terminated for default/cause.

End of clause


52.000-4133 WORKERS COMPENSATION INSURANCE (DEFENSE BASE ACT) COUNTRIES WITH
WAIVERS (AUGUST 2011)

(a) This clause supplements FAR Clause 52.228-3. The Department of Labor has waived
application of the Defense Base Act for performance of work by employees other than U.S.
citizens and employees recruited in the U.S. in the following countries: American Samoa,
Bahama Island, Belgium, Botswana, El Salvador,France, Germany, Honduras, Israel, Italy,
J apan, Kazakhstan, Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, South America, South Korea, Spain,
Territory of Guam, The Republic of Uzbekistan, The Russian Federation, Turkey, United
Arab Emirates. Accordingly, this clause applies to work performed by U.S.
citizens, employees recruited in the U.S. and also to work by any employee performed outside
a country for which a Defense Base Act waiver is not in place.

(b) The contractor agrees to procure Defense Base Act (DBA) insurance pursuant to the terms of
the contract between the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) and CNA/Continental
Insurance Company unless the contractor has a DBA self-insurance program approved by the
Department of Labor. The contractor shall submit a copy of the Department of Labors
approval to the contracting officer upon contract award. The current rates under the USACE,
C3 and 408
th
CSB contract are as follows:


(c) The contractor agrees to insert a clause substantially the same as the one in all subcontracts to
which DBA is applicable. Subcontractors shall be required to insert a similar clause in any of
their subcontracts subject to the DBA.

End of Clause

52.204-6 DATA UNIVERSAL NUMBERING SYSTEM NUMBER (DEC 2012)

(a) Definition. Data Universal Numbering System (DUNS) number, as used in this provision, means the 9-digit
number assigned by Dun and Bradstreet, Inc. (D&B) to identify unique business entities, which is used as the
identification number for Federal Contractors.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 30 of 148

(b)The offeror shall enter, in the block with its name and address on the cover page of its offer, the annotation
DUNS or DUNS+4 followed by the DUNS number or DUNS+4 that identifies the offeror's name and address
exactly as stated in the offer. The DUNS number is a nine-digit number assigned by Dun and Bradstreet, Inc. The
DUNS+4 is the DUNS number plus a 4-character suffix that may be assigned at the discretion of the offeror to
establish additional CCR records for identifying alternative Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT) accounts (see Subpart
32.11) for the same concern.

(c) If the offeror does not have a DUNS number, it should contact Dun and Bradstreet directly to obtain one.

(1) An offeror may obtain a DUNS number--

(i) Via the Internet at http://fedgov.dnb.com/webform or if the offeror does not have internet access, it may call Dun
and Bradstreet at 1-866-705-5711 if located within the United States; or

(ii) If located outside the United States, by contacting the local Dun and Bradstreet office. The offeror should
indicate that it is an offeror for a U.S. Government contract when contacting the local Dun and Bradstreet office.

(2) The offeror should be prepared to provide the following information:

(i) Company legal business name.

(ii) Tradestyle, doing business, or other name by which your entity is commonly recognized.

(iii) Company physical street address, city, state and Zip Code.

(iv) Company mailing address, city, state and Zip Code (if separate from physical).

(v) Company telephone number.

(vi) Date the company was started.

(vii) Number of employees at your location.

(viii) Chief executive officer/key manager.

(ix) Line of business (industry).

(x) Company Headquarters name and address (reporting relationship within your entity).

(End of provision)


52.211-6 BRAND NAME OR EQUAL (AUG 1999)

(a) If an item in this solicitation is identified as brand name or equal, the purchase description reflects the
characteristics and level of quality that will satisfy the Government's needs. The salient physical, functional, or
performance characteristics that equal products must meet are specified in the solicitation.

(b) To be considered for award, offers of equal products, including equal products of the brand name
manufacturer, must--
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 31 of 148

(1) Meet the salient physical, functional, or performance characteristic specified in this solicitation;

(2) Clearly identify the item by--

(i) Brand name, if any; and

(ii) Make or model number;
(3) Include descriptive literature such as illustrations, drawings, or a clear reference to previously furnished
descriptive data or information available to the Contracting Officer; and

(4) Clearly describe any modifications the offeror plans to make in a product to make it conform to the solicitation
requirements. Mark any descriptive material to clearly show the modifications.

(c) The Contracting Officer will evaluate equal products on the basis of information furnished by the offeror or
identified in the offer and reasonably available to the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer is not
responsible for locating or obtaining any information not identified in the offer.

(d) Unless the offeror clearly indicates in its offer that the product being offered is an equal product, the offeror
shall provide the brand name product referenced in the solicitation.

(End of provision)


52.214-34 SUBMISSION OF OFFERS IN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE (APR 1991)

Offers submitted in response to this solicitation shall be in the English language. Offers received in other than
English shall be rejected.

(End of provision)


52.215-1 INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS--COMPETITIVE ACQUISITION (J AN 2004)

(a) Definitions. As used in this provision--

Discussions are negotiations that occur after establishment of the competitive range that may, at the Contracting
Officer's discretion, result in the offeror being allowed to revise its proposal.

In writing or written means any worded or numbered expression which can be read, reproduced, and later
communicated, and includes electronically transmitted and stored information.

Proposal modification is a change made to a proposal before the solicitation's closing date and time, or made in
response to an amendment, or made to correct a mistake at any time before award.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 32 of 148

Proposal revision is a change to a proposal made after the solicitation closing date, at the request of or as allowed
by a Contracting Officer as the result of negotiations.

Time, if stated as a number of days, is calculated using calendar days, unless otherwise specified, and will include
Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays. However, if the last day falls on a Saturday, Sunday, or legal holiday, then
the period shall include the next working day.

(b) Amendments to solicitations. If this solicitation is amended, all terms and conditions that are not amended
remain unchanged. Offerors shall acknowledge receipt of any amendment to this solicitation by the date and time
specified in the amendment(s).

(c) Submission, modification, revision, and withdrawal of proposals. (1) Unless other methods (e.g., electronic
commerce or facsimile) are permitted in the solicitation, proposals and modifications to proposals shall be submitted
in paper media in sealed envelopes or packages (i) addressed to the office specified in the solicitation, and (ii)
showing the time and date specified for receipt, the solicitation number, and the name and address of the offeror.
Offerors using commercial carriers should ensure that the proposal is marked on the outermost wrapper with the
information in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and (c)(1)(ii) of this provision.

(2) The first page of the proposal must show--

(i) The solicitation number;

(ii) The name, address, and telephone and facsimile numbers of the offeror (and electronic address if available);

(iii) A statement specifying the extent of agreement with all terms, conditions, and provisions included in the
solicitation and agreement to furnish any or all items upon which prices are offered at the price set opposite each
item;

(iv) Names, titles, and telephone and facsimile numbers (and electronic addresses if available) of persons authorized
to negotiate on the offeror's behalf with the Government in connection with this solicitation; and

(v) Name, title, and signature of person authorized to sign the proposal. Proposals signed by an agent shall be
accompanied by evidence of that agent's authority, unless that evidence has been previously furnished to the issuing
office.

(3) Submission, modification, or revision, of proposals.

(i) Offerors are responsible for submitting proposals, and any modifications, or revisions, so as to reach the
Government office designated in the solicitation by the time specified in the solicitation. If no time is specified in
the solicitation, the time for receipt is 4:30 p.m., local time, for the designated Government office on the date that
proposal or revision is due.

(ii)(A) Any proposal, modification, or revision received at the Government office designated in the solicitation after
the exact time specified for receipt of offers is late and will not be considered unless it is received before award is
made, the Contracting Officer determines that accepting the late offer would not unduly delay the acquisition; and--

(1) If it was transmitted through an electronic commerce method authorized by the solicitation, it was received at the
initial point of entry to the Government infrastructure not later than 5:00 p.m. one working day prior to the date
specified for receipt of proposals; or

(2) There is acceptable evidence to establish that it was received at the Government installation designated for
receipt of offers and was under the Government's control prior to the time set for receipt of offers; or

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 33 of 148

(3) It is the only proposal received.

(B) However, a late modification of an otherwise successful proposal that makes its terms more favorable to the
Government, will be considered at any time it is received and may be accepted.

(iii) Acceptable evidence to establish the time of receipt at the Government installation includes the time/date stamp
of that installation on the proposal wrapper, other documentary evidence of receipt maintained by the installation, or
oral testimony or statements of Government personnel.

(iv) If an emergency or unanticipated event interrupts normal Government processes so that proposals cannot be
received at the office designated for receipt of proposals by the exact time specified in the solicitation, and urgent
Government requirements preclude amendment of the solicitation, the time specified for receipt of proposals will be
deemed to be extended to the same time of day specified in the solicitation on the first work day on which normal
Government processes resume.

(v) Proposals may be withdrawn by written notice received at any time before award. Oral proposals in response to
oral solicitations may be withdrawn orally. If the solicitation authorizes facsimile proposals, proposals may be
withdrawn via facsimile received at any time before award, subject to the conditions specified in the provision at
52.215-5, Facsimile Proposals. Proposals may be withdrawn in person by an offeror or an authorized representative,
if the identity of the person requesting withdrawal is established and the person signs a receipt for the proposal
before award.

(4) Unless otherwise specified in the solicitation, the offeror may propose to provide any item or combination of
items.

(5) Offerors shall submit proposals in response to this solicitation in English, unless otherwise permitted by the
solicitation, and in U.S. dollars, unless the provision at FAR 52.225-17, Evaluation of Foreign Currency Offers, is
included in the solicitation.

(6) Offerors may submit modifications to their proposals at any time before the solicitation closing date and time,
and may submit modifications in response to an amendment, or to correct a mistake at any time before award.

(7) Offerors may submit revised proposals only if requested or allowed by the Contracting Officer.

(8) Proposals may be withdrawn at any time before award. Withdrawals are effective upon receipt of notice by the
Contracting Officer.

(d) Offer expiration date. Proposals in response to this solicitation will be valid for the number of days specified on
the solicitation cover sheet (unless a different period is proposed by the offeror).

(e) Restriction on disclosure and use of data. Offerors that include in their proposals data that they do not want
disclosed to the public for any purpose, or used by the Government except for evaluation purposes, shall--

(1) Mark the title page with the following legend: This proposal includes data that shall not be disclosed outside the
Government and shall not be duplicated, used, or disclosed--in whole or in part--for any purpose other than to
evaluate this proposal. If, however, a contract is awarded to this offeror as a result of--or in connection with-- the
submission of this data, the Government shall have the right to duplicate, use, or disclose the data to the extent
provided in the resulting contract. This restriction does not limit the Government's right to use information
contained in this data if it is obtained from another source without restriction. The data subject to this restriction are
contained in sheets [insert numbers or other identification of sheets]; and

(2) Mark each sheet of data it wishes to restrict with the following legend: Use or disclosure of data contained on
this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this proposal.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 34 of 148

(f) Contract award. (1) The Government intends to award a contract or contracts resulting from this solicitation to
the responsible offeror(s) whose proposal(s) represents the best value after evaluation in accordance with the factors
and subfactors in the solicitation.

(2) The Government may reject any or all proposals if such action is in the Government's interest.

(3) The Government may waive informalities and minor irregularities in proposals received.

(4) The Government intends to evaluate proposals and award a contract without discussions with offerors (except
clarifications as described in FAR 15.306(a)). Therefore, the offeror's initial proposal should contain the offeror's
best terms from a cost or price and technical standpoint. The Government reserves the right to conduct discussions
if the Contracting Officer later determines them to be necessary. If the Contracting Officer determines that the
number of proposals that would otherwise be in the competitive range exceeds the number at which an efficient
competition can be conducted, the Contracting Officer may limit the number of proposals in the competitive range
to the greatest number that will permit an efficient competition among the most highly rated proposals.

(5) The Government reserves the right to make an award on any item for a quantity less than the quantity offered, at
the unit cost or prices offered, unless the offeror specifies otherwise in the
proposal.

(6) The Government reserves the right to make multiple awards if, after considering the additional administrative
costs, it is in the Government's best interest to do so.

(7) Exchanges with offerors after receipt of a proposal do not constitute a rejection or counteroffer by the
Government.

(8) The Government may determine that a proposal is unacceptable if the prices proposed are materially unbalanced
between line items or subline items. Unbalanced pricing exists when, despite an acceptable total evaluated price, the
price of one or more contract line items is significantly overstated or understated as indicated by the application of
cost or price analysis techniques. A proposal may be rejected if the Contracting Officer determines that the lack of
balance poses an unacceptable risk to the Government.

(9) If a cost realism analysis is performed, cost realism may be considered by the source selection authority in
evaluating performance or schedule risk.

(10) A written award or acceptance of proposal mailed or otherwise furnished to the successful offeror within the
time specified in the proposal shall result in a binding contract without further action by either party.

(11) If a post-award debriefing is given to requesting offerors, the Government shall disclose the following
information, if applicable:

(i) The agency's evaluation of the significant weak or deficient factors in the debriefed offeror's offer.

(ii) The overall evaluated cost or price and technical rating of the successful and the debriefed offeror and past
performance information on the debriefed offeror.

(iii) The overall ranking of all offerors, when any ranking was developed by the agency during source selection.

(iv) A summary of the rationale for award.

(v) For acquisitions of commercial items, the make and model of the item to be delivered by the successful offeror.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 35 of 148

(vi) Reasonable responses to relevant questions posed by the debriefed offeror as to whether source-selection
procedures set forth in the solicitation, applicable regulations, and other applicable authorities were followed by the
agency.

(End of provision)


52.216-1 TYPE OF CONTRACT (APR 1984)

The Government contemplates award of a Firm-Fixed-Price (FFP) contract resulting from this solicitation.

(End of provision)


52.217-5 EVALUATION OF OPTIONS (J UL 1990)

Except when it is determined in accordance with FAR 17.206(b) not to be in the Government's best interests, the
Government will evaluate offers for award purposes by adding the total price for all options to the total price for the
basic requirement. Evaluation of options will not obligate the Government to exercise the option(s).

(End of provision)


52.228-1 BID GUARANTEE (SEP 1996)

(a) Failure to furnish a bid guarantee in the proper form and amount, by the time set for opening of bids, may be
cause for rejection of the bid.

(b) The bidder shall furnish a bid guarantee in the form of a firm commitment, e.g., bid bond supported by good and
sufficient surety or sureties acceptable to the Government, postal money order, certified check, cashier's check,
irrevocable letter of credit, or, under Treasury Department regulations, certain bonds or notes of the United States.
The Contracting Officer will return bid guarantees, other than bid bonds, (1) to unsuccessful bidders as soon as
practicable after the opening of bids, and (2) to the successful bidder upon execution of contractual documents and
bonds (including any necessary coinsurance or reinsurance agreements), as required by the bid as accepted.-

(c) The amount of the bid guarantee shall be twenty (20) percent of the bid price or $3,000,000.00, whichever is
less.-

(d) If the successful bidder, upon acceptance of its bid by the Government within the period specified for
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 36 of 148

acceptance, fails to execute all contractual documents or furnish executed bond(s) within 10 days after receipt of the
forms by the bidder, the Contracting Officer may terminate the contract for default.-

(e) In the event the contract is terminated for default, the bidder is liable for any cost of acquiring the work that
exceeds the amount of its bid, and the bid guarantee is available to offset the difference.

(End of provision)


52.233-2 SERVICE OF PROTEST (SEP 2006)

(a) Protests, as defined in section 33.101 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation, that are filed directly with an
agency, and copies of any protests that are filed with the Government Accountability Office (GAO), shall be served
on the Contracting Officer (addressed as follows) by obtaining written and dated acknowledgment of receipt from:

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
Attn: Contracting Officer, Mr. J effrey J . Harrington
Konrad Adenauer Ring 39
D-65187 Wiesbaden, Germany

(b) The copy of any protest shall be received in the office designated above within one day of filing a protest with
the GAO.

(End of provision)


52.236-3 SITE INVESTIGATION AND CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE WORK (APR 1984)

(a) The Contractor acknowledges that it has taken steps reasonably necessary to ascertain the nature and location of
the work, and that it has investigated and satisfied itself as to the general and local conditions which can affect the
work or its cost, including but not limited to

(1) conditions bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling, and storage of materials;

(2) the availability of labor, water, electric power, and roads;

(3) uncertainties of weather, river stages, tides, or similar physical conditions at the site;

(4) the conformation and conditions of the ground; and (5) the character of equipment and facilities needed
preliminary to and during work performance. The Contractor also acknowledges that it has satisfied itself as to the
character, quality, and quantity of surface and subsurface materials or obstacles to be encountered insofar as this
information is reasonably ascertainable from an inspection of the site, including all exploratory work done by the
Government, as well as from the drawings and specifications made a part of this contract. Any failure of the
Contractor to take the actions described and acknowledged in this paragraph will not relieve the Contractor from
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 37 of 148

responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty and cost of successfully performing the work, or for proceeding
to successfully perform the work without additional expense to the Government.

(b) The Government assumes no responsibility for any conclusions or interpretations made by the Contractor based
on the information made available by the Government. Nor does the Government assume responsibility for any
understanding reached or representation made concerning conditions which can affect the work by any of its
officers or agents before the execution of this contract, unless that understanding or representation is expressly
stated in this contract.

(End of clause)


52.236-27 SITE VISIT (CONSTRUCTION) (FEB 1995)

(a) The clauses at 52.236-2, Differing Site Conditions, and 52.236-3, Site Investigations and Conditions Affecting
the Work, will be included in any contract awarded as a result of this solicitation. Accordingly, offerors or quoters
are urged and expected to inspect the site where the work will be performed.

(b) The Site Visit and Pre Proposal Training/Discussion are scheduled for 23 May 2013, 1000 hours local time. All
attendees will meet at the Main Gate of Tal Shahar Base to gain entry. The USG POC for the site visit is Mr. Yair
Shani, yair.shani@usace.army.mil. Contractors shall provide, via email, the following to the USG POC no later
than 17 May 2013.

The Subject of the Email should say BMD Site Visit.
Provide the following information in your Registration Email:
1. Full name of attendee.
2. Name of company the attendee is affiliated with.
3. US Passport number if the attendee is an American citizen or the Todot Zehut number if the attendee is Israel

(End of provision)


52.236-28 PREPARATION OF PROPOSALS--CONSTRUCTION (OCT 1997)

(a) Proposals must be (1) submitted on the forms furnished by the Government or on copies of those forms, and (2)
manually signed. The person signing a proposal must initial each erasure or change
appearing on any proposal form.

(b) The proposal form may require offerors to submit proposed prices for one or more items on various bases,
including--

(1) Lump sum price;

(2) Alternate prices;
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 38 of 148

(3) Units of construction; or

(4) Any combination of paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(3) of this provision.

(c) If the solicitation requires submission of a proposal on all items, failure to do so may result in the proposal being
rejected without further consideration. If a proposal on all items is not required, offerors should insert the words no
proposal in the space provided for any item on which no price is submitted.

(d) Alternate proposals will not be considered unless this solicitation authorizes their submission.

(End of provision)


52.252-1 SOLICITATION PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE (FEB 1998)

This solicitation incorporates one or more solicitation provisions by reference, with the same force and effect as if
they were given in full text. Upon request, the Contracting Officer will make their full text available. The offeror is
cautioned that the listed provisions may include blocks that must be completed by the offeror and submitted with its
quotation or offer. In lieu of submitting the full text of those provisions, the offeror may identify the provision by
paragraph identifier and provide the appropriate information with its quotation or offer. Also, the full text of a
solicitation provision may be accessed electronically at this/these address(es):

https://www.acquisition.gov
http://farsite.hill.af.mil
http://www.usace.army.mil/cect/pages/efars.aspx

(End of provision)

52.252-5 AUTHORIZED DEVIATIONS IN PROVISIONS (APR 1984)

(a) The use in this solicitation of any Federal Acquisition Regulation (48 CFR Chapter 1) provision with an
authorized deviation is indicated by the addition of"(DEVIATION)" after the date of the provision.

(b) The use in this solicitation of any Defense Federal Acquisition Regulations Supplement (48 CFR Chapter 2)
provision with an authorized deviation is indicated by the addition of "(DEVIATION)" after the name of the
regulation.

(End of provision)


252.204-7001 COMMERCIAL AND GOVERNMENT ENTITY (CAGE) CODE REPORTING (AUG 1999)

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 39 of 148

(a) The offeror is requested to enter its CAGE code on its offer in the block with its name and address. The CAGE
code entered must be for that name and address. Enter CAGE before the number.

(b) If the offeror does not have a CAGE code, it may ask the Contracting Officer to request one from the Defense
Logistics Information Service (DLIS). The Contracting Officer will--

(1) Ask the Contractor to complete section B of a DD Form 2051, Request for Assignment of a Commercial and
Government Entity (CAGE) Code;

(2) Complete section A and forward the form to DLIS; and

(3) Notify the Contractor of its assigned CAGE code.

(c) Do not delay submission of the offer pending receipt of a CAGE code.

(End of provision)

252.225-7031 SECONDARY ARAB BOYCOTT OF ISRAEL (J UN 2005)


(1) Foreign person means any person (including any individual, partnership, corporation, or other form of
association) other than a United States person.

(2) United States means the 50 States, the District of Columbia, outlying areas, and the outer Continental Shelf as
defined in 43 U.S.C. 1331.

(3) United States person is defined in 50 U.S.C. App. 2415(2) and means--

(i) Any United States resident or national (other than an individual resident outside the United States who is
employed by other than a United States person);

(ii) Any domestic concern (including any permanent domestic establishment of any foreign concern); and

(iii) Any foreign subsidiary or affiliate (including any permanent foreign establishment) of any domestic concern
that is controlled in fact by such domestic concern.

(b) Certification. If the offeror is a foreign person, the offeror certifies, by submission of an offer, that it--

(1) Does not comply with the Secondary Arab Boycott of Israel; and

(2) Is not taking or knowingly agreeing to take any action, with respect to the Secondary Boycott of Israel by Arab
countries, which 50 U.S.C. App. 2407(a) prohibits a United States person from taking.

(End of provision)

252.225-7042 AUTHORIZATION TO PERFORM (APR 2003)

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 40 of 148

The offeror represents that it has been duly authorized to operate and to do business in the country or countries in
which the contract is to be performed.

(End of provision)

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 41 of 148

Section 00600 - Representations & Certifications


52.000-4103 DISCLOSURE OF LOBBYING ACTIVITIES Approved by
OMB 0348-0046

INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETION OF SF-LLL, DISCLOSURE OF LOBBYING ACTIVITIES

This disclosure form shall be completed by the reporting entity, whether subawardee or prime Federal recipient, at
the initiation or receipt of a covered Federal action, or a material change to a previous filing, pursuant to title 31
U.S.C. section 3152. The filing of a form is required for each payment or agreement to make payment to any
lobbying entity for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a member of
Congress, an officer or amployee of Congress, or an employee of a member of Congress in connection with a
covered Federal action. Complete all items that apply for both the initial filing and material change report. Refer to
the implementing guidance published by the Office of Management and Budget for additional information.

1. Identify the type of covered Federal action for which lobbying activity is and/or has been secured to
influence the outcome of a covered Federal action.

2. Identify the status of the covered Federal action.

3. Identify the appropriate classification of this report. If this is a follow-up report caused by a material
change to the information previously reported, enter the year and quarter in which the change occurred. Enter the
date of the last previously submitted report by this reporting entity for this covered Federal action.

4. Enter the full name, address, city, State and zip code of the reporting entity. Include Congressional
District, if known. Check the appropriate classification of the reporting entity that designates if it is, orexpects to
be, a prime or subaward recipient. Identify the tier of the subawardee, e.g., the first subawardee of the prime is the
1
st
tier. Subawards include but are not limited to subcontracts, subgrants and contract awards under grants.

5. If the organization filing the report in item 4 checks Subawardee, then enter the full name, address, city,
State and zip code of the prime Federal recipient. Include Congressional District, if known.

6. Enter the name of the Federal agency making the award or loan commitment. Include at least one
organizational level below agency name, if known. For example, Department Transportation, US Coast Guard.

7. Enter the Federal program name or description for the covered Federal action (item 1). If known, enter the
full Catalog of Federal Domestic Assistance (CFDA) number for grants, cooperative agreements, loans, and loan
commitments.

8. Enter the most appropriate Federal identifying number available for the Federal actin identified in item 1
(e.g., Request for Proposal (RFP) number; Invitation for Bid (IFB) number; grant announcement number; the
contract, grant, or loan award number; the application/proposal control number assigned by the Federal agency).
Include prefixes, e.g., RFP-DE-90-001.

9. For a covered Federal action where there has been an award or loan commitment by the Federal agency,
enter the Federal amount of the award/loan commitment for the prime entity identified in item 4 or 5.

10. (a) Enter the full name, address, city, State and zip code of the lobbying registrant under the Lobbying
Disclosure Act of 1995 engaged by the reporting entity identified in item 4 to influence the covered Federal action.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 42 of 148

(b) Enter the full names of the individual(s) performing services, and include full address if different from 10(a).
Enter Last Name, First Name, and Middle Initial (MI).

11. The certifying official shall sign and date the form, print his/her name, title, and telephone number.

According to the paperwork Reduction Act, as amended, no persons are required to respond to a collection of
information unless it displays a valid OMB Control Number. The valid OMB control number for this information
collection is OMB No. 0348-0046. Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to
average 10 minutes per response, including time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources,
gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information Send
comments regarding the burden estimate or any other aspect of this collection of information, including suggestions
for reducing this burden, to the Office of management and Budget, Paperwork Reduction Project (0348-0046),
Washington, DC 20503. (See Attachment A-6 below)


52.203-2 CERTIFICATE OF INDEPENDENT PRICE DETERMINATION (APR 1985)

(a) The offeror certifies that --

(1) The prices in this offer have been arrived at independently, without, for the purpose of restricting competition,
any consultation, communication, or agreement with any other offeror or competitor relating to

(i) Those prices,

(ii) The intention to submit an offer, or

(iii) The methods of factors used to calculate the prices offered:

(2) The prices in this offer have not been and will not be knowingly disclosed by the offeror, directly or indirectly,
to any other offeror or competitor before bid opening (in the case of a sealed bid solicitation) or contract award (in
the case of a negotiated solicitation) unless otherwise required by law; and

(3) No attempt has been made or will be made by the offeror to induce any other concern to submit or not to submit
an offer for the purpose of restricting competition.

(b) Each signature on the offer is considered to be a certification by the signatory that the signatory --

(1) Is the person in the offeror's organization responsible for determining the prices offered in this bid or proposal,
and that the signatory has not participated and will not participate in any action contrary to subparagraphs (a)(1)
through (a)(3) of this provision; or

(2) (i) Has been authorized, in writing, to act as agent for the following principals in certifying that those principals
have not participated, and will not participate in any action contrary to subparagraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) of this
provison ______________________________________________________ (insert full name of person(s) in the
offeror's organization responsible for determining the prices offered in this bid or proposal, and the title of his or her
position in the offeror's organization);

(ii) As an authorized agent, does certify that the principals named in subdivision (b)(2)(i) above have not
participated, and will not participate, in any action contrary to subparagraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) above; and
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 43 of 148

(iii) As an agent, has not personally participated, and will not participate, in any action contrary to subparagraphs
(a)(1) through (a)(3) of this provision.

(c) If the offeror deletes or modifies subparagraph (a)(2) of this provision, the offeror must furnish with its offer a
signed statement setting forth in detail the circumstances of the disclosure.

(End of clause)


52.203-11 CERTIFICATION AND DISCLOSURE REGARDING PAYMENTS TO INFLUENCE CERTAIN
FEDERAL TRANSACTIONS (SEP 2007)

(a) Definitions. As used in this provision--``Lobbying contact'' has the meaning provided at 2 U.S.C. 1602(8). The
terms `àgency,'' `ìnfluencing or attempting to influence,'' `òfficer or employee of an agency,'' ``person,''
``reasonable compensation,'' and ``regularly employed'' are defined in the FAR clause of this solicitation entitled
``Limitation on Payments to Influence Certain Federal Transactions'' (52.203-12).

(b) Prohibition. The prohibition and exceptions contained in the FAR clause of this solicitation entitled ``Limitation
on Payments to Influence Certain Federal Transactions'' (52.203-12) are hereby incorporated by reference in this
provision.

(c) Certification. The offeror, by signing its offer, hereby certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief that no
Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to influence
an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee
of a Member of Congress on its behalf in connection with the awarding of this contract.

(d) Disclosure. If any registrants under the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995 have made a lobbying contact on
behalf of the offeror with respect to this contract, the offeror shall complete and submit, with its offer, OMB
Standard Form LLL, Disclosure of Lobbying Activities, to provide the name of the registrants. The offeror need not
report regularly employed officers or employees of the offeror to whom payments of reasonable compensation were
made.

(e) Penalty. Submission of this certification and disclosure is a prerequisite for making or entering into this contract
imposed by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Any person who makes an expenditure prohibited under this provision or who fails to
file or amend the disclosure required to be filed or amended by this provision, shall be subject to a civil penalty of
not less than $10,000, and not more than $100,000, for each such failure.

(End of provision)


52.204-8 ANNUAL REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS (DEC 2012)

(a)(1) The North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) code for this acquisition is 236220
[insert NAICS code].
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 44 of 148

(2) The small business size standard is N/A [insert size standard].

(3) The small business size standard for a concern which submits an offer in its own name, other than on a
construction or service contract, but which proposes to furnish a product which it did not itself manufacture, is 500
employees.

(b)(1) If the clause at 52.204-7, Central Contractor Registration, is included in this solicitation, paragraph (d) of this
provision applies.

(2) If the clause at 52.204-7 is not included in this solicitation, and the offeror is currently registered in CCR, and
has completed the ORCA electronically, the offeror may choose to use paragraph (d) of this provision instead of
completing the corresponding individual representations and certifications in the solicitation. The offeror shall
indicate which option applies by checking one of the following boxes:

( ) Paragraph (d) applies.

( ) Paragraph (d) does not apply and the offeror has completed the individual representations and certifications
in the solicitation.

(c)(1) The following representations or certifications in ORCA are applicable to this solicitation as indicated:

(i) 52.203-2, Certificate of Independent Price Determination. This provision applies to solicitations when a firm-
fixed-price contract or fixed-price contract with economic price adjustment is contemplated, unless--

(A) The acquisition is to be made under the simplified acquisition procedures in Part 13;

(B) The solicitation is a request for technical proposals under two-step sealed bidding procedures; or

(C) The solicitation is for utility services for which rates are set by law or regulation.

(ii) 52.203-11, Certification and Disclosure Regarding Payments to Influence Certain Federal Transactions. This
provision applies to solicitations expected to exceed $150,000.

(iii) 52.204-3, Taxpayer Identification. This provision applies to solicitations that do not include the clause at
52.204-7, Central Contractor Registration.

(iv) 52.204-5, Women-Owned Business (Other Than Small Business).This provision applies to solicitations that--

(A) Are not set aside for small business concerns;

(B) Exceed the simplified acquisition threshold; and

(C) Are for contracts that will be performed in the United States or its outlying areas.

(v) 52.209-2, Prohibition on Contracting with Inverted Domestic Corporations--Representation. This provision
applies to solicitations using funds appropriated in fiscal years 2008, 2009, 2010, or 2012.

(vi) 52.209-5, Certification Regarding Responsibility Matters. This provision applies to solicitations where the
contract value is expected to exceed the simplified acquisition threshold.

(vii) 52.223-5, Pollution Prevention and Right-to-Know Information (May 2011) (E.O. 13423) (Applies to services
performed on Federal facilities).

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 45 of 148

(viii) 52.215-6, Place of Performance. This provision applies to solicitations unless the place of performance is
specified by the Government.

(ix) 52.219-1, Small Business Program Representations (Basic & Alternate I). This provision applies to solicitations
when the contract will be performed in the United States or its outlying areas.

(A) The basic provision applies when the solicitations are issued by other than DoD, NASA, and the Coast Guard.

(B) The provision with its Alternate I applies to solicitations issued by DoD, NASA, or the Coast Guard.

(x) 52.219-2, Equal Low Bids. This provision applies to solicitations when contracting by sealed bidding and the
contract will be performed in the United States or its outlying areas.

(xi) 52.222-22, Previous Contracts and Compliance Reports. This provision applies to solicitations that include the
clause at 52.222-26, Equal Opportunity.

(xii) 52.222-25, Affirmative Action Compliance. This provision applies to solicitations, other than those for
construction, when the solicitation includes the clause at 52.222-26, Equal Opportunity.

(xiii) 52.222-38, Compliance with Veterans' Employment Reporting Requirements. This provision applies to
solicitations when it is anticipated the contract award will exceed the simplified acquisition threshold and the
contract is not for acquisition of commercial items.

(xiv) 52.223-1, Biobased Product Certification. This provision applies to solicitations that require the delivery or
specify the use of USDA-designated items; or include the clause at 52.223-2, Affirmative Procurement of Biobased
Products Under Service and Construction Contracts.

(xv) 52.223-4, Recovered Material Certification. This provision applies to solicitations that are for, or specify the
use of, EPA-designated items.

(xvi) 52.225-2, Buy American Act Certificate. This provision applies to solicitations containing the clause at
52.225-1.

(xvii) 52.225-4, Buy American Act--Free Trade Agreements--Israeli Trade Act Certificate. (Basic, Alternates I, II,
and III.) This provision applies to solicitations containing the clause at 52.225-3.

(A) If the acquisition value is less than $25,000, the basic provision applies.

(B) If the acquisition value is $25,000 or more but is less than $50,000, the provision with its Alternate I applies.

(C) If the acquisition value is $50,000 or more but is less than $77,494, the provision with its Alternate II applies.

(D) If the acquisition value is $77,494 or more but is less than $100,000, the provision with its Alternate III applies.

(xviii) 52.225-6, Trade Agreements Certificate. This provision applies to solicitations containing the clause at
52.225-5.

(xix) 52.225-20, Prohibition on Conducting Restricted Business Operations in Sudan--Certification. This provision
applies to all solicitations.

(xx) 52.225-25, Prohibition on Contracting with Entities Engaging in Certain Activities or Transactions Relating to
Iran--Representation and Certifications. This provision applies to all solicitations.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 46 of 148

(xxi) 52.226-2, Historically Black College or University and Minority Institution Representation. This provision
applies to--

(A) Solicitations for research, studies, supplies, or services of the type normally acquired from higher educational
institutions; and

(B) For DoD, NASA, and Coast Guard acquisitions, solicitations that contain the clause at 52.219-23, Notice of
Price Evaluation Adjustment for Small Disadvantaged Business Concerns.

(2) The following certifications are applicable as indicated by the Contracting Officer:

(Contracting Officer check as appropriate.)

(i) 52.219-22, Small Disadvantaged Business Status.

(A) Basic.

(B) Alternate I.

(ii) 52.222-18, Certification Regarding Knowledge of Child Labor for Listed End Products.

(iii) 52.222-48, Exemption from Application of the Service Contract Act to Contracts for Maintenance,
Calibration, or Repair of Certain Equipment Certification.

(iv) 52.222-52, Exemption from Application of the Service Contract Act to Contracts for Certain
ServicesCertification.

(v) 52.223-9, with its Alternate I, Estimate of Percentage of Recovered Material Content for EPA
Designated Products (Alternate I only).

(vi) 52.227-6, Royalty Information.

(A) Basic.

(B) Alternate I.

(vii) 52.227-15, Representation of Limited Rights Data and Restricted Computer Software.

(d) The offeror has completed the annual representations and certifications electronically via the Online
Representations and Certifications Application (ORCA) website accessed through https://www.acquisition.gov.
After reviewing the ORCA database information, the offeror verifies by submission of the offer that the
representations and certifications currently posted electronically that apply to this solicitation as indicated in
paragraph (c) of this provision have been entered or updated within the last 12 months, are current, accurate,
complete, and applicable to this solicitation (including the business size standard applicable to the NAICS code
referenced for this solicitation), as of the date of this offer and are incorporated in this offer by reference (see FAR
4.1201); except for the changes identified below [offeror to insert changes, identifying change by clause number,
title, date]. These amended representation(s) and/or certification(s) are also incorporated in this offer and are
current, accurate, and complete as of the date of this offer.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
FAR Clause Title Date Change
------------------------------------------------------------------------
------ ---------- ------ ------
------------------------------------------------------------------------

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 47 of 148

Any changes provided by the offeror are applicable to this solicitation only, and do not result in an update to the
representations and certifications posted on ORCA.
(End of provision)

52.209-5 CERTIFICATION REGARDING RESPONSIBILITY MATTERS (APR 2010)

(a)(1) The Offeror certifies, to the best of its knowledge and belief, that-

(i) The Offeror and/or any of its Principals-

(A) Are ( ) are not ( ) presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, or declared ineligible for the award
of contracts by any Federal agency;

(B) Have ( ) have not ( ), within a three-year period preceding this offer, been convicted of or had a civil judgment
rendered against them for: commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to
obtain, or performing a public (Federal, State, or local) contract or subcontract; violation of Federal or State
antitrust statutes relating to the submission of offers; or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery,
falsification or destruction of records, making false statements, tax evasion, violating Federal criminal tax laws, or
receiving stolen property (if offeror checks have, the offeror shall also see 52.209-7, if included in this
solicitation); and

(C) Are ( ) are not ( ) presently indicted for, or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a governmental entity
with, commission of any of the offenses enumerated in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(B) of this provision.; and

(D) Have , have not , within a three-year period preceding this offer, been notified of any delinquent
Federal taxes in an amount that exceeds $3,000 for which the liability remains unsatisfied.

(1) Federal taxes are considered delinquent if both of the following criteria apply:

(i) The tax liability is finally determined. The liability is finally determined if it has been assessed. A liability is not
finally determined if there is a pending administrative or judicial challenge. In the case of a judicial challenge to the
liability, the liability is not finally determined until all judicial appeal rights have been exhausted.

(ii) The taxpayer is delinquent in making payment. A taxpayer is delinquent if the taxpayer has failed to pay the tax
liability when full payment was due and required. A taxpayer is not delinquent in cases where enforced collection
action is precluded.

(2) Examples. (i) The taxpayer has received a statutory notice of deficiency, under I.R.C. Sec. 6212, which entitles
the taxpayer to seek Tax Court review of a proposed tax deficiency. This is not a delinquent tax because it is not a
final tax liability. Should the taxpayer seek Tax Court review, this will not be a final tax liability until the taxpayer
has exercised all judicial appeal rights.

(ii) The IRS has filed a notice of Federal tax lien with respect to an assessed tax liability, and the taxpayer has been
issued a notice under I.R.C. Sec. 6320 entitling the taxpayer to request a hearing with the IRS Office of Appeals
contesting the lien filing, and to further appeal to the Tax Court if the IRS determines to sustain the lien filing. In
the course of the hearing, the taxpayer is entitled to contest the underlying tax liability because the taxpayer has had
no prior opportunity to contest the liability. This is not a delinquent tax because it is not a final tax liability. Should
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 48 of 148

the taxpayer seek tax court review, this will not be a final tax liability until the taxpayer has exercised all judicial
appeal rights.

(iii) The taxpayer has entered into an installment agreement pursuant to I.R.C. Sec. 6159. The taxpayer is making
timely payments and is in full compliance with the agreement terms. The taxpayer is not delinquent because the
taxpayer is not currently required to make full payment.

(iv) The taxpayer has filed for bankruptcy protection. The taxpayer is not delinquent because enforced collection
action is stayed under 11 U.S.C. 362 (the Bankruptcy Code).

(ii) The Offeror has ( ) has not ( ), within a three-year period preceding this offer, had one or more contracts
terminated for default by any Federal agency.

(2) Principal, for the purposes of this certification, means an officer, director, owner, partner, or a person having
primary management or supervisory responsibilities within a business entity (e.g., general manager; plant manager;
head of a division or business segment; and similar positions).

(b) The Offeror shall provide immediate written notice to the Contracting Officer if, at any time prior to contract
award, the Offeror learns that its certification was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of
changed circumstances.

(c) A certification that any of the items in paragraph (a) of this provision exists will not necessarily result in
withholding of an award under this solicitation. However, the certification will be considered in connection with a
determination of the Offeror's responsibility. Failure of the Offeror to furnish a certification or provide such
additional information as requested by the Contracting Officer may render the Offeror nonresponsible.

(d) Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to
render, in good faith, the certification required by paragraph (a) of this provision. The knowledge and information
of an Offeror is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course
of business dealings.

(e) The certification in paragraph (a) of this provision is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was
placed when making award. If it is later determined that the Offeror knowingly rendered an erroneous certification,
in addition to other remedies available to the Government, the Contracting Officer may terminate the contract
resulting from this solicitation for default.

(End of provision)


52.209-4005 Certification Regarding Debarment Suspension Proposed Debarment and Other Responsibility Matters

(a)(1) The Offeror certifies, to the best of its knowledge and belief, that--
(i) The Offeror and/or any of its Principals--
(A) Are / / are not / / presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, or declared ineligible for the
award of contracts by any Federal agency;
(B) Have / / have not / /, within the three-year period preceding this offer, been convicted of or had a civil
judgment rendered against them for: commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining,
attempting to obtain, or performing a public (Federal, state, or local) contract or subcontract; violation of Federal or
state antitrust statutes relating to the submission of offers; or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery,
falsification or destruction of records, making false statements, tax evasion, or receiving stolen property;
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 49 of 148

(C) Are / / are not / / presently indicted for, or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a governmental
entity with, commission of any of the offenses enumerated in paragraph (a)(1)(i)(B) of this provision; and
(ii)(A) The offeror, aside from the offenses enumerated in paragraphs (a)(1)(i)(A), (B), and (C) of this
provision, has / / has not / / within the past three years, relative to tax, labor and employment, environmental,
antitrust, or consumer protection laws--
(1) Been convicted of a Federal or State felony (or has any Federal or State felony indictments currently
pending against them); or
(2) Had a Federal court judgment in a civil case brought by the United Stats rendered against them; or
(3) Had an adverse decision by a Federal administrative law judge, board, or commission indicating a
willful violation of law.
(B) If the offeror has responded affirmatively, the offeror shall provide additional information if requested
by the Contracting Officer; and
(iii) The Offeror has / / has not / /, within a three-year period preceding this offer, had one or more contracts
terminated for default by any Federal agency.
(2) "Principals," for the purposes of this certification, means officers; directors; owners; partners; and, persons
having primary management or supervisory responsibilities within a business entity (e.g., general manager; plant
manager; head of a subsidiary, division, or business segment, and similar positions).
THIS CERTIFICATION CONCERNS A MATTER WITHIN THE J URISDICTION OF AN AGENCY OF THE
UNITED STATES AND THE MAKING OF A FALSE, FICTITIOUS, OR FRAUDULENT CERTIFICATION
MAY RENDER THE MAKER SUBJ ECT TO PROSECUTION UNDER SECTION 1001, TITLE 18, UNITED
STATES CODE.
(b) The Offeror shall provide immediate written notice to the Contracting Officer if, or at any time prior to
contract award, the Offeror learns that its certification was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by
reason of changed circumstances.
(c) A certification that any of the items in paragraph (a) of this provision exists will not necessarily result in
withholding of an award under this solicitation. However, the certification will be considered in connection with a
determination of the Offeror's responsibility. Failure of the Offeror to furnish a certification or provide such
additional information as requested by the Contracting Officer may render the Offeror nonresponsible.
(d) Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order
to render, in good faith, the certification required by paragraph (a) of this provision. The knowledge and
information of an Offeror is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the
ordinary course of business dealings.
(e) The certification in paragraph (a) of this provision is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was
placed when making award. If it is later determined that the Offeror knowingly rendered an erroneous certification,
in addition to other remedies available to the Government, the Contracting Officer may terminate the contract
resulting from this solicitation for default.

(End of Clause)


252.209-7001 DISCLOSURE OF OWNERSHIP OR CONTROL BY THE GOVERNMENT OF A TERRORIST
COUNTRY (J AN 2009)

(a) "Definitions."

As used in this provision --

(a) "Government of a terrorist country" includes the state and the government of a terrorist country, as well as any
political subdivision, agency, or instrumentality thereof.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 50 of 148

(2) "Terrorist country" means a country determined by the Secretary of State, under section 6(j)(1)(A) of the Export
Administration Act of 1979 (50 U.S.C. App. 2405(j)(i)(A)), to be a country the government of which has repeatedly
provided support for such acts of international terrorism. As of the date of this provision, terrorist countries subject
to this provision include: Cuba, Iran, Sudan, and Syria.

(3) "Significant interest" means --

(i) Ownership of or beneficial interest in 5 percent or more of the firm's or subsidiary's securities. Beneficial
interest includes holding 5 percent or more of any class of the firm's securities in "nominee shares," "street names,"
or some other method of holding securities that does not disclose the beneficial owner;

(ii) Holding a management position in the firm, such as a director or officer;

(iii) Ability to control or influence the election, appointment, or tenure of directors or officers in the firm;

(iv) Ownership of 10 percent or more of the assets of a firm such as equipment, buildings, real estate, or other
tangible assets of the firm; or

(v) Holding 50 percent or more of the indebtness of a firm.

(b) "Prohibition on award."

In accordance with 10 U.S.C. 2327, no contract may be awarded to a firm or a subsidiary of a firm if the
government of a terrorist country has a significant interest in the firm or subsidiary or, in the case of a subsidiary,
the firm that owns the subsidiary, unless a waiver is granted by the Secretary of Defense.

(c) "Disclosure."

If the government of a terrorist country has a significant interest in the Offeror or a subsidiary of the Offeror, the
Offeror shall disclosure such interest in an attachment to its offer. If the Offeror is a subsidiary, it shall also disclose
any significant interest the government of a terrorist country has in any firm that owns or controls the subsidiary.
The disclosure shall include --

(1) Identification of each government holding a significant interest; and

(2) A description of the significant interest held by each government.

(End of provision)


252.225-7000 BUY AMERICAN--BALANCE OF PAYMENTS PROGRAM CERTIFICATE (J UN 2012)

( a) Definitions. Commercially available off-the-shelf (COTS) item, component, domestic end product,
foreign end product, qualifying country, qualifying country end product, and United States have the
meanings given in the Buy American Act and Balance of Payments Program clause of this solicitation.

(b) Evaluation. The Government--

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 51 of 148

(1) Will evaluate offers in accordance with the policies and procedures of Part 225 of the Defense Federal
Acquisition Regulation Supplement; and

(2) Will evaluate offers of qualifying country end products without regard to the restrictions of the Buy American
statute or the Balance of Payments Program.

(c) Certifications and identification of country of origin.

(1) For all line items subject to the Buy American Act and Balance of Payments Program clause of this solicitation,
the offeror certifies that--

(i) Each end product, except those listed in paragraph (c)(2) or (3) of this provision, is a domestic end product; and

(ii) For end products other than COTS items, components of unknown origin are considered to have been mined,
produced, or manufactured outside the United States or a qualifying country.

(2) The offeror certifies that the following end products are qualifying country end products:

-----------------------------------------------------------------------
(Line Item Number Country of Origin)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------
(Country of Origin)

(3) The following end products are other foreign end products, including end products manufactured in the United
States that do not qualify as domestic end products, i.e., an end product that is not a COTS item and does not meet
the component test in paragraph (ii) of the definition of ``domestic end product'':

(Line Item Number)-----------------------------------------------------

(Country of Origin (If known))-----------------------------------------

(End of provision)


252.247-7022 REPRESENTATION OF EXTENT OF TRANSPORTATION BY SEA (AUG 1992)

(a) The Offeror shall indicate by checking the appropriate blank in paragraph (b) of this provision whether
transportation of supplies by sea is anticipated under the resultant contract. The term supplies is defined in the
Transportation of Supplies by Sea clause of this solicitation.

(b) Representation. The Offeror represents that it:

____ (1) Does anticipate that supplies will be transported by sea in the performance of any contract or subcontract
resulting from this solicitation.

____ (2) Does not anticipate that supplies will be transported by sea in the performance of any contract or
subcontract resulting from this solicitation.

(c) Any contract resulting from this solicitation will include the Transportation of Supplies by Sea clause. If the
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 52 of 148

Offeror represents that it will not use ocean transportation, the resulting contract will also include the Defense FAR
Supplement clause at 252.247-7024, Notification of Transportation of Supplies by Sea.

(End of provision)

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 53 of 148

Section 00700 - Contract Clauses


52.000-4004 IMMUNITY FROM LEGAL PROCESS

The Contractor agrees to indemnify and save harmless the United States Government against all claims and suits of
whatsoever nature arising under or incidental to performance of this contract by any subcontractor against the
United States Government. The Contractor further agrees to waive his rights to bring suit or other legal action
against the United States Government, except as provided in the "Disputes" clause of this contract and in the United
States Federal Statutes. (September 1993)
(End of Clause)


52.000-4023 UNAUTHORIZED SERVICE

The Contractor shall not undertake any action that will increase the price of this contract without the written
approval of the Contracting Officer. Any such unauthorized action taken by the Contractor or any Contractor
employee, which might be construed to be approved by the U.S. Government, shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and shall be resolved by the Contractor at no expense or embarrassment to the U.S. Government. Third-
party claims resulting from such unauthorized actions shall also be resolved by the Contractor without expense or
embarrassment to the U.S. Government.

End of Clause


52.000-4038 ENGLISH SPEAKING REPRESENTATIVE (AUG 1993)

At all times when any performance of the work at the site is being conducted by any member of the Contractor or its
subcontractors, the Contractor shall have a representative present on the site who is capable of explaining the work
operations and receiving instructions in the English language. The Contracting Officer shall have the right to
determine, without appeal of such decision, whether the proposed representative has sufficient technical and
linguistic capabilities, and the Contractor shall immediately replace any individual not acceptable to the Contracting
Officer.

End of Clause


W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 54 of 148

52.000-4043 CORRESPONDENCE IN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE (ADDITIONAL INFORMATION)

In additional to FAR 52.215-1, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to prepare proposals and all
documents related to this contract, to include, change orders, shop drawings and submittals, quality control reports,
computations, and all correspondence, in the English language. In the event of disputes or litigation arising out of
performance of this contract, the contractor will provide English language translations of any documents that are
provided to the Government in support of the contractors position or any documents pertinent to the dispute that
are requested by the Government. For the purposes of this clause, pertinent means any documents that would
normally be considered to be within the scope of discovery in an ASBCA or court proceeding concerning the
dispute. The term documents includes electronic documents including but not limited to email and includes
documents generated by subcontractors or suppliers.
In the event a dispute results in litigation, including actions at the ASBCA or actions in U.S. courts, the contractor
will be responsible for providing translations of any documents that are within the scope of a discovery request filed
by the U.S. Government and for providing certified translations upon request by the U.S. Government.
(End of Clause)


52.000-4059 LETTER OF ASSURANCE (RFP) (SEP 1993)

Offerors are required to furnish with their offer an assurance that they can secure a performance guaranty as
required by the clause entitled "Bank Letter of Guaranty" if awarded a contract and pursuant to this proposal. The
Letter of Assurance will be countersigned by the Bank Official(s) from which the offeror intends to obtain the Bank
proposal. The Letter of Assurance shall be an original in English. The offeror acknowledges that failure to furnish
the original Letter of Assurance with the offer may result in rejection of the offer as "nonconforming".

(End of Clause)

52.000-4062 BANK LETTER OF GUARANTY (NOV 2007)

Within SEVEN calendar days after the date of contract award, the Contractor shall furnish the Contracting Officer a
Bank Letter of Guaranty for the performance of the work in the amount of 10% of the anticipated maximum
contract value, or lesser amount, at the discretion of the Contracting Officer, conforming to the format of the
sample letter. Failure to furnish the Bank Letter of Guaranty may be deemed a breach of contract. The Bank Letter
of Guaranty will be dated as of the contract award date or as soon thereafter as possible. The Bank Letter of
Guaranty shall state that it will continue in effect without change in amount or terms until the work has been finally
inspected and accepted by the Government, and that thereafter it will continue in effect until expiration of any
applicable warranty periods or extensions thereof in an amount equal to five percent (5%) of the contract price. The
Bank Letter of Guaranty shall also state that the bank agrees and consents that the contract may be modified by
change order or supplemental agreement without affecting the validity of the Bank Letter of Guaranty. The
Contracting Officer may require and the Contractor shall furnish the Contracting Officer an increase in the amount
of the Bank Letter of Guaranty because of increases to the contract value. The authorization to issue "Notice to
Proceed" will not be effected until after approval and acceptance by the Contracting Officer of the Bank Letter of
Guaranty. The Bank Letter of Guaranty shall be interpreted in accordance with U.S. law and is subject to the Choice
of Law and Immunity for Legal Process clauses in the solicitation.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 55 of 148

(End of Clause)

52.000-4074 TAX RELIEF (FOREIGN COUNTRIES OTHER THAN GERMANY)

(a) Prices contained in this contract are exclusive of all taxes and duties from which the U.S. Government is
exempt by virtue of any tax agreements between the United States Government and the Contractor's
Government. The following taxes and duties have been excluded from the contract prices:
NAME OF TAX PERCENTAGE
Enter calculated VAT from basic contract amount.
Value Added Tax % IT
(b) The Contractor's invoice shall separately list the gross price, amount of the tax deducted, and the net price
changes.
(c ) When items manufactured to United States Government specifications are being acquired, the Contractor
shall identify the materials or components intended to be imported in order to ensure relief from import duties are
obtained. If the Contractor intends to use imported products from inventories on hand, the price of which
included a factor for import duties, arrangements will be made to pay a refund to the Contractor by its government;
by the duty free import of a corresponding amount of supplies or components used from
inventory; or otherwise, to ensure the exemption of the United States Government from these taxes.

(End of Clause)


52.000-4127 Steel (MAR 2010)

None of the funds made available for payment of this Contract may be used for procurement of steel for
any construction project or activity for which American steel producers, fabricators, and manufacturers
have been denied an opportunity to compete for such steel procurement.

52.202-1 DEFINITIONS (J AN 2012)

(a) When a solicitation provision or contract clause uses a word or term that is defined in the Federal Acquisition
Regulation (FAR), the word or term has the same meaning as the definition in FAR 2.101 in effect at the time the
solicitation was issued, unless--

(1) The solicitation, or amended solicitation, provides a different definition;

(2) The contracting parties agree to a different definition;

(3) The part, subpart, or section of the FAR where the provision or clause is prescribed provides a different
meaning; or

(4) The word or term is defined in FAR Part 31, for use in the cost principles and procedures.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 56 of 148

(b) The FAR Index is a guide to words and terms the FAR defines and shows where each definition is located. The
FAR Index is available via the Internet at http://www.acquisition.gov/far at the end of the FAR, after the FAR
Appendix.

(End of clause)


52.203-3 GRATUITIES (APR 1984)

(a) The right of the Contractor to proceed may be terminated by written notice if, after notice and hearing, the
agency head or a designee determines that the Contractor, its agent, or another representative--

(1) Offered or gave a gratuity (e.g., an entertainment or gift) to an officer, official, or employee of the Government;
and

(2) Intended, by the gratuity, to obtain a contract or favorable treatment under a contract.

(b) The facts supporting this determination may be reviewed by any court having lawful jurisdiction.

(c) If this contract is terminated under paragraph (a) of this clause, the Government is entitled--

(1) To pursue the same remedies as in a breach of the contract; and

(2) In addition to any other damages provided by law, to exemplary damages of not less than 3 nor more than 10
times the cost incurred by the Contractor in giving gratuities to the person concerned, as determined by the agency
head or a designee. (This subparagraph (c)(2) is applicable only if this contract uses money appropriated to the
Department of Defense.)

(d) The rights and remedies of the Government provided in this clause shall not be exclusive and are in addition to
any other rights and remedies provided by law or under this contract.

(End of clause)


52.203-5 COVENANT AGAINST CONTINGENT FEES (APR 1984)

(a) The Contractor warrants that no person or agency has been employed or retained to solicit or obtain this contract
upon an agreement or understanding for a contingent fee, except a bona fide employee or agency. For breach or
violation of this warranty, the Government shall have the right to annul this contract without liability or, in its
discretion, to deduct from the contract price or consideration, or otherwise recover, the full amount of the contingent
fee.

(b) "Bona fide agency," as used in this clause, means an established commercial or selling agency, maintained by a
contractor for the purpose of securing business, that neither exerts nor proposes to exert improper influence to
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 57 of 148

solicit or obtain Government contracts nor holds itself out as being able to obtain any Government contract or
contracts through improper influence.

"Bona fide employee," as used in this clause, means a person, employed by a contractor and subject to the
contractor's supervision and control as to time, place, and manner of performance, who neither exerts nor proposes
to exert improper influence to solicit or obtain Government contracts nor holds out as being able to obtain any
Government contract or contracts through improper influence.

"Contingent fee," as used in this clause, means any commission, percentage, brokerage, or other fee that is
contingent upon the success that a person or concern has in securing a Government contract.

"Improper influence," as used in this clause, means any influence that induces or tends to induce a Government
employee or officer to give consideration or to act regarding a Government contract on any basis other than the
merits of the matter.

(End of clause)


52.203-6 RESTRICTIONS ON SUBCONTRACTOR SALES TO THE GOVERNMENT (SEP 2006)

(a) Except as provided in (b) of this clause, the Contractor shall not enter into any agreement with an actual or
prospective subcontractor, nor otherwise act in any manner, which has or may have the effect of restricting sales by
such subcontractors directly to the Government of any item or process (including computer software) made or
furnished by the subcontractor under this contract or under any follow-on production contract.

(b) The prohibition in (a) of this clause does not preclude the Contractor from asserting rights that are otherwise
authorized by law or regulation.

(c) The Contractor agrees to incorporate the substance of this clause, including this paragraph (c), in all subcontracts
under this contract which exceed the simplified acquisition threshold.

52.203-7 ANTI-KICKBACK PROCEDURES. (OCT 2010)

(a) Definitions.

"Kickback," as used in this clause, means any money, fee, commission, credit, gift, gratuity, thing of value, or
compensation of any kind which is provided, directly or indirectly, to any prime Contractor, prime Contractor
employee, subcontractor, or subcontractor employee for the purpose of improperly obtaining or rewarding
favorable treatment in connection with a prime contract or in connection with a subcontract relating to a prime
contract.

"Person," as used in this clause, means a corporation, partnership, business association of any kind, trust, joint-stock
company, or individual.

"Prime contract," as used in this clause, means a contract or contractual action entered into by the United States for
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 58 of 148

the purpose of obtaining supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any kind.

"Prime Contractor," as used in this clause, means a person who has entered into a prime contract with the United
States.

"Prime Contractor employee," as used in this clause, means any officer, partner, employee, or agent of a prime
Contractor.

"Subcontract," as used in this clause, means a contract or contractual action entered into by a prime Contractor or
subcontractor for the purpose of obtaining supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any kind under a prime
contract.

"Subcontractor," as used in this clause, (1) means any person, other than the prime Contractor, who offers to furnish
or furnishes any supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any kind under a prime contract or a subcontract
entered into in connection with such prime contract, and (2) includes any person who offers to furnish or furnishes
general supplies to the prime Contractor or a higher tier subcontractor.

"Subcontractor employee," as used in this clause, means any officer, partner, employee, or agent of a subcontractor.

(b) The Anti-Kickback Act of 1986 (41 U.S.C. 51-58) (the Act), prohibits any person from -

(1) Providing or attempting to provide or offering to provide any kickback;

(2) Soliciting, accepting, or attempting to accept any kickback; or

(3) Including, directly or indirectly, the amount of any kickback in the contract price charged by a prime Contractor
to the United States or in the contract price charged by a subcontractor to a prime Contractor or higher tier
subcontractor.

(c)(1) The Contractor shall have in place and follow reasonable procedures designed to prevent and detect possible
violations described in paragraph (b) of this clause in its own operations and direct business relationships.

(2) When the Contractor has reasonable grounds to believe that a violation described in paragraph (b) of this clause
may have occurred, the Contractor shall promptly report in writing the possible violation. Such reports shall be
made to the inspector general of the contracting agency, the head of the contracting agency if the agency does not
have an inspector general, or the Department of J ustice.

(3) The Contractor shall cooperate fully with any Federal agency investigating a possible violation described in
paragraph (b) of this clause.

(4) The Contracting Officer may (i) offset the amount of the kickback against any monies owed by the United States
under the prime contract and/or (ii) direct that the Prime Contractor withhold, from sums owed a subcontractor
under the prime contract, the amount of any kickback. The Contracting Officer may order the monies withheld
under subdivision (c)(4)(ii) of this clause be paid over to the Government unless the Government has already offset
those monies under subdivision (c)(4)(i) of this clause. In either case, the Prime Contractor shall notify the
Contracting Officer when the monies are withheld.

(5) The Contractor agrees to incorporate the substance of this clause, including this subparagraph (c)(5) but
excepting subparagraph (c)(1), in all subcontracts under this contract which exceed $150,000.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 59 of 148


52.203-8 CANCELLATION, RESCISSION, AND RECOVERY OF FUNDS FOR ILLEGAL OR IMPROPER
ACTIVITY (J AN 1997)

(a) If the Government receives information that a contractor or a person has engaged in conduct constituting a
violation of subsection (a), (b), (c), or (d) of Section 27 of the Office of Federal Procurement Policy Act (41 U.S.C.
423) (the Act), as amended by section 4304 of the 1996 National Defense Authorization Act for Fiscal Year 1996
(Pub. L. 104-106), the Government may--

(1) Cancel the solicitation, if the contract has not yet been awarded or issued; or

(2) Rescind the contract with respect to which--

(i) The Contractor or someone acting for the Contractor has been convicted for an offense where the conduct
constitutes a violation of subsection 27(a) or (b) of the Act for the purpose of either--

(A) Exchanging the information covered by such subsections for anything of value; or

(B) Obtaining or giving anyone a competitive advantage in the award of a Federal agency procurement contract; or

(ii) The head of the contracting activity has determined, based upon a preponderance of the evidence, that the
Contractor or someone acting for the Contractor has engaged in conduct constituting an offense punishable under
subsections 27(e)(1) of the Act.

(b) If the Government rescinds the contract under paragraph (a) of this clause, the Government is entitled to recover,
in addition to any penalty prescribed by law, the amount expended under the contract.

(c) The rights and remedies of the Government specified herein are not exclusive, and are in addition to any other
rights and remedies provided by law, regulation, or under this contract.

(End of clause)


52.203-10 PRICE OR FEE ADJ USTMENT FOR ILLEGAL OR IMPROPER ACTIVITY (J AN 1997)

(a) The Government, at its election, may reduce the price of a fixed-price type contract and the total cost and fee
under a cost-type contract by the amount of profit or fee determined as set forth in paragraph (b) of this clause if the
head of the contracting activity or designee determines that there was a violation of subsection 27 (a), (b), or (c) of
the Office of Federal Procurement Policy Act, as amended (41 U.S.C. 423), as implemented in section 3.104 of the
Federal Acquisition Regulation.

(b) The price or fee reduction referred to in paragraph (a) of this clause shall be--

(1) For cost-plus-fixed-fee contracts, the amount of the fee specified in the contract at the time of award;

(2) For cost-plus-incentive-fee contracts, the target fee specified in the contract at the time of award,
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 60 of 148

notwithstanding any minimum fee or "fee floor" specified in the contract;

(3) For cost-plus-award-fee contracts--

(i) The base fee established in the contract at the time of contract award;

(ii) If no base fee is specified in the contract, 30 percent of the amount of each award fee otherwise payable to the
Contractor for each award fee evaluation period or at each award fee determination point.

(4) For fixed-price-incentive contracts, the Government may--

(i) Reduce the contract target price and contract target profit both by an amount equal to the initial target profit
specified in the contract at the time of contract award; or

(ii) If an immediate adjustment to the contract target price and contract target profit would have a significant
adverse impact on the incentive price revision relationship under the contract, or adversely affect the contract
financing provisions, the Contracting Officer may defer such adjustment until establishment of the total final price
of the contract. The total final price established in accordance with the incentive price revision provisions of the
contract shall be reduced by an amount equal to the initial target profit specified in the contract at the time of
contract award and such reduced price shall be the total final contract price.

(5) For firm-fixed-price contracts, by 10 percent of the initial contract price or a profit amount determined by the
Contracting Officer from records or documents in existence prior to the date of the contract award.

(c) The Government may, at its election, reduce a prime contractor's price or fee in accordance with the procedures
of paragraph (b) of this clause for violations of the Act by its subcontractors by an amount not to exceed the amount
of profit or fee reflected in the subcontract at the time the subcontract was first definitively priced.

(d) In addition to the remedies in paragraphs (a) and (c) of this clause, the Government may terminate this contract
for default. The rights and remedies of the Government specified herein are not exclusive, and are in addition to any
other rights and remedies provided by law or under this contract.

(End of clause)

52.203-12 LIMITATION ON PAYMENTS TO INFLUENCE CERTAIN FEDERAL TRANSACTIONS (OCT
2010)

(a) Definitions. As used in this clause--

Agency means executive agency as defined in Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 2.101.

Covered Federal action means any of the following actions:

(1) Awarding any Federal contract.

(2) Making any Federal grant.

(3) Making any Federal loan.

(4) Entering into any cooperative agreement.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 61 of 148

(5) Extending, continuing, renewing, amending, or modifying any Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative
agreement.

Indian tribe and tribal organization have the meaning provided in section 4 of the Indian Self-Determination and
Education Assistance Act (25 U.S.C. 450b) and include Alaskan Natives.

Influencing or attempting to influence means making, with the intent to influence, any communication to or
appearance before an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of
Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with any covered Federal action.

Local government means a unit of government in a State and, if chartered, established, or otherwise recognized by a
State for the performance of a governmental duty, including a local public authority, a special district, an intrastate
district, a council of governments, a sponsor group representative organization, and any other instrumentality of a
local government.

Officer or employee of an agency includes the following individuals who are employed by an agency:

(1) An individual who is appointed to a position in the Government under Title 5, United States Code, including a
position under a temporary appointment.

(2) A member of the uniformed services, as defined in subsection 101(3), Title 37, United States Code.

(3) A special Government employee, as defined in section 202, Title 18, United States Code.

(4) An individual who is a member of a Federal advisory committee, as defined by the Federal Advisory Committee
Act, Title 5, United States Code, appendix 2.

Person means an individual, corporation, company, association, authority, firm, partnership, society, State, and local
government, regardless of whether such entity is operated for profit, or not for profit. This term excludes an Indian
tribe, tribal organization, or any other Indian organization eligible to receive Federal contracts, grants, cooperative
agreements, or loans from an agency, but only with respect to expenditures by such tribe or organization that are
made for purposes specified in paragraph (b) of this clause and are permitted by other Federal law.

Reasonable compensation means, with respect to a regularly employed officer or employee of any person,
compensation that is consistent with the normal compensation for such officer or employee for work that is not
furnished to, not funded by, or not furnished in cooperation with the Federal Government.

Reasonable payment means, with respect to professional and other technical services, a payment in an amount that
is consistent with the amount normally paid for such services in the private sector.

Recipient includes the Contractor and all subcontractors. This term excludes an Indian tribe, tribal organization, or
any other Indian organization eligible to receive Federal contracts, grants, cooperative agreements, or loans from an
agency, but only with respect to expenditures by such tribe or organization that are made for purposes specified in
paragraph (b) of this clause and are permitted by other Federal law.

Regularly employed means, with respect to an officer or employee of a person requesting or receiving a Federal
contract, an officer or employee who is employed by such person for at least 130 working days within 1 year
immediately preceding the date of the submission that initiates agency consideration of such person for receipt of
such contract. An officer or employee who is employed by such person for less than 130 working days within 1 year
immediately preceding the date of the submission that initiates agency consideration of such person shall be
considered to be regularly employed as soon as he or she is employed by such person for 130 working days.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 62 of 148

State means a State of the United States, the District of Columbia, or an outlying area of the United States, an
agency or instrumentality of a State, and multi-State, regional, or interstate entity having governmental duties and
powers.

(b) Prohibition. 31 U.S.C. 1352 prohibits a recipient of a Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement
from using appropriated funds to pay any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee
of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of
Congress in connection with any covered Federal actions. In accordance with 31 U.S.C. 1352, the Contractor shall
not use appropriated funds to pay any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of
any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress
in connection with the award of this contractor the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of
this contract.

(1) The term appropriated funds does not include profit or fee from a covered Federal action.

(2) To the extent the Contractor can demonstrate that the Contractor has sufficient monies, other than Federal
appropriated funds, the Government will assume that these other monies were spent for any influencing activities
that would be unallowable if paid for with Federal appropriated funds.

(c) Exceptions. The prohibition in paragraph (b) of this clause does not apply under the following conditions:

(1) Agency and legislative liaison by Contractor employees.

(i) Payment of reasonable compensation made to an officer or employee of the Contractor if the payment is for
agency and legislative liaison activities not directly related to this contract. For purposes of this paragraph,
providing any information specifically requested by an agency or Congress is permitted at any time.

(ii) Participating with an agency in discussions that are not related to a specific solicitation for any covered Federal
action, but that concern--

(A) The qualities and characteristics (including individual demonstrations) of the person's products or services,
conditions or terms of sale, and service capabilities; or

(B) The application or adaptation of the person's products or services for an agency's use.

(iii) Providing prior to formal solicitation of any covered Federal action any information not specifically requested
but necessary for an agency to make an informed decision about initiation of a covered Federal action;

(iv) Participating in technical discussions regarding the preparation of an unsolicited proposal prior to its official
submission; and

(v) Making capability presentations prior to formal solicitation of any covered Federal action by persons seeking
awards from an agency pursuant to the provisions of the Small Business Act, as amended by Pub.L. 95-507, and
subsequent amendments.

(2) Professional and technical services. (i) A payment of reasonable compensation made to an officer or employee
of a person requesting or receiving a covered Federal action or an extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or
modification of a covered Federal action, if payment is for professional or technical services rendered directly in the
preparation, submission, or negotiation of any bid, proposal, or application for that Federal action or for meeting
requirements imposed by or pursuant to law as a condition for receiving that Federal action.

(ii) Any reasonable payment to a person, other than an officer or employee of a person requesting or receiving a
covered Federal action or an extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of a covered Federal
action if the payment is for professional or technical services rendered directly in the preparation, submission, or
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 63 of 148

negotiation of any bid, proposal, or application for that Federal action or for meeting requirements imposed by or
pursuant to law as a condition for receiving that Federal action. Persons other than officers or employees of a person
requesting or receiving a covered Federal action include consultants and trade associations.

(iii) As used in paragraph (c)(2) of this clause, ``professional and technical services'' are limited to advice and
analysis directly applying any professional or technical discipline (for examples, see FAR 3.803(a)(2)(iii)).

(iv) Requirements imposed by or pursuant to law as a condition for receiving a covered Federal award include those
required by law or regulation and any other requirements in the actual award documents.

(3) Only those communications and services expressly authorized by paragraphs (c)(1) and (2) of this clause are
permitted.

(d) Disclosure. (1) If the Contractor did not submit OMB Standard Form LLL, Disclosure of Lobbying Activities,
with its offer, but registrants under the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995 have subsequently made a lobbying
contact on behalf of the Contractor with respect to this contract, the Contractor shall complete and submit OMB
Standard Form LLL to provide the name of the lobbying registrants, including the individuals performing the
services.

(2) If the Contractor did submit OMB Standard Form LLL disclosure pursuant to paragraph (d) of the provision at
FAR 52.203-11, Certification and Disclosure Regarding Payments to Influence Certain Federal Transactions, and a
change occurs that affects Block 10 of the OMB Standard Form LLL (name and address of lobbying registrant or
individuals performing services), the Contractor shall, at the end of the calendar quarter in which the change occurs,
submit to the Contracting Officer within 30 days an updated disclosure using OMB Standard Form LLL.

(e) Penalties. (1) Any person who makes an expenditure prohibited under paragraph (b) of this clause or who fails
to file or amend the disclosure to be filed or amended by paragraph (d) of this clause shall be subject to civil
penalties as provided for by 31 U.S.C.1352. An imposition of a civil penalty does not prevent the Government from
seeking any other remedy that may be applicable.

(2) Contractors may rely without liability on the representation made by their subcontractors in the certification and
disclosure form.

(f) Cost allowability. Nothing in this clause makes allowable or reasonable any costs which would otherwise be
unallowable or unreasonable. Conversely, costs made specifically unallowable by the requirements in this clause
will not be made allowable under any other provision.

(g) Subcontracts. (1) The Contractor shall obtain a declaration, including the certification and disclosure in
paragraphs (c) and (d) of the provision at FAR 52.203-11, Certification and Disclosure Regarding Payments to
Influence Certain Federal Transactions, from each person requesting or receiving a subcontract exceeding $150,000
under this contract. The Contractor or subcontractor that awards the subcontract shall retain the declaration.

(2) A copy of each subcontractor disclosure form (but not certifications) shall be forwarded from tier to tier until
received by the prime Contractor. The prime Contractor shall, at the end of the calendar quarter in which the
disclosure form is submitted by the subcontractor, submit to the Contracting Officer within 30 days a copy of all
disclosures. Each subcontractor certification shall be retained in the subcontract file of the awarding Contractor.

(3) The Contractor shall include the substance of this clause, including this paragraph (g), in any subcontract
exceeding $150,000.

(End of clause)

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 64 of 148


52.203-13 CONTRACTOR CODE OF BUSINESS ETHICS AND CONDUCT (APR 2010)


Agent means any individual, including a director, an officer, an employee, or an independent Contractor, authorized
to act on behalf of the organization.

Full cooperation

(1) Means disclosure to the Government of the information sufficient for law enforcement to identify the nature and
extent of the offense and the individuals responsible for the conduct. It includes providing timely and complete
response to Government auditors' and investigators' request for documents and access to employees with
information;

(2) Does not foreclose any Contractor rights arising in law, the FAR, or the terms of the contract. It does not
require--

(i) A Contractor to waive its attorney-client privilege or the protections afforded by the attorney work product
doctrine; or

(ii) Any officer, director, owner, or employee of the Contractor, including a sole proprietor, to waive his or her
attorney client privilege or Fifth Amendment rights; and

(3) Does not restrict a Contractor from--

(i) Conducting an internal investigation; or

(ii) Defending a proceeding or dispute arising under the contract or related to a potential or disclosed violation.

Principal means an officer, director, owner, partner, or a person having primary management or supervisory
responsibilities within a business entity (e.g., general manager; plant manager; head of a division or business
segment; and similar positions).

Subcontract means any contract entered into by a subcontractor to furnish supplies or services for performance of a
prime contract or a subcontract.

Subcontractor means any supplier, distributor, vendor, or firm that furnished supplies or services to or for a prime
contractor or another subcontractor.

United States means the 50 States, the District of Columbia, and outlying areas.

(b) Code of business ethics and conduct. (1) Within 30 days after contract award, unless the Contracting Officer
establishes a longer time period, the Contractor shall--

(i) Have a written code of business ethics and conduct;

(ii) Make a copy of the code available to each employee engaged in performance of the contract.

(2) The Contractor shall--

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 65 of 148

(i) Exercise due diligence to prevent and detect criminal conduct; and

(ii) Otherwise promote an organizational culture that encourages ethical conduct and a commitment to compliance
with the law.

(3)(i) The Contractor shall timely disclose, in writing, to the agency Office of the Inspector General (OIG), with a
copy to the Contracting Officer, whenever, in connection with the award, performance, or closeout of this contract
or any subcontract thereunder, the Contractor has credible evidence that a principal, employee, agent, or
subcontractor of the Contractor has committed--

(A) A violation of Federal criminal law involving fraud, conflict of interest, bribery, or gratuity violations found in
Title 18 of the United States Code; or

(B) A violation of the civil False Claims Act (31 U.S.C. 3729-3733).

(ii) The Government, to the extent permitted by law and regulation, will safeguard and treat information obtained
pursuant to the Contractor's disclosure as confidential where the information has been marked confidential or
proprietary by the company. To the extent permitted by law and regulation, such information will not be released
by the Government to the public pursuant to a Freedom of Information Act request, 5 U.S.C. Section 552, without
prior notification to the Contractor. The Government may transfer documents provided by the Contractor to any
department or agency within the Executive Branch if the information relates to matters within the organization's
jurisdiction.

(iii) If the violation relates to an order against a Governmentwide acquisition contract, a multi-agency contract, a
multiple-award schedule contract such as the Federal Supply Schedule, or any other procurement instrument
intended for use by multiple agencies, the Contractor shall notify the OIG of the ordering agency and the IG of the
agency responsible for the basic contract.

(c) Business ethics awareness and compliance program and internal control system. This paragraph (c) does not
apply if the Contractor has represented itself as a small business concern pursuant to the award of this contract or if
this contract is for the acquisition of a commercial item as defined at FAR 2.101. The Contractor shall establish the
following within 90 days after contract award, unless the Contracting Officer establishes a longer time period:

(1) An ongoing business ethics awareness and compliance program.

(i) This program shall include reasonable steps to communicate periodically and in a practical manner the
Contractor's standards and procedures and other aspects of the Contractor's business ethics awareness and
compliance program and internal control system, by conducting effective training programs and otherwise
disseminating information appropriate to an individual's respective roles and responsibilities.

(ii) The training conducted under this program shall be provided to the Contractor's principals and employees, and
as appropriate, the Contractor's agents and subcontractors.

(2) An internal control system.

(i) The Contractor's internal control system shall--

(A) Establish standards and procedures to facilitate timely discovery of improper conduct in connection with
Government contracts; and

(B) Ensure corrective measures are promptly instituted and carried out.

(ii) At a minimum, the Contractor's internal control system shall provide for the following:

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 66 of 148

(A) Assignment of responsibility at a sufficiently high level and adequate resources to ensure effectiveness of the
business ethics awareness and compliance program and internal control system.

(B) Reasonable efforts not to include an individual as a principal, whom due diligence would have exposed as
having engaged in conduct that is in conflict with the Contractor's code of business ethics and conduct.

(C) Periodic reviews of company business practices, procedures, policies, and internal controls for compliance with
the Contractor's code of business ethics and conduct and the special requirements of Government contracting,
including--

(1) Monitoring and auditing to detect criminal conduct;

(2) Periodic evaluation of the effectiveness of the business ethics awareness and compliance program and internal
control system, especially if criminal conduct has been detected; and

(3) Periodic assessment of the risk of criminal conduct, with appropriate steps to design, implement, or modify the
business ethics awareness and compliance program and the internal control system as necessary to reduce the risk of
criminal conduct identified through this process.

(D) An internal reporting mechanism, such as a hotline, which allows for anonymity or confidentiality, by which
employees may report suspected instances of improper conduct, and instructions that encourage employees to make
such reports.

(E) Disciplinary action for improper conduct or for failing to take reasonable steps to prevent or detect improper
conduct.

(F) Timely disclosure, in writing, to the agency OIG, with a copy to the Contracting Officer, whenever, in
connection with the award, performance, or closeout of any Government contract performed by the Contractor or a
subcontractor thereunder, the Contractor has credible evidence that a principal, employee, agent, or subcontractor of
the Contractor has committed a violation of Federal criminal law involving fraud, conflict of interest, bribery, or
gratuity violations found in Title 18 U.S.C. or a violation of the civil False Claims Act (31 U.S.C. 3729-3733).

(1) If a violation relates to more than one Government contract, the Contractor may make the disclosure to the
agency OIG and Contracting Officer responsible for the largest dollar value contract impacted by the violation.

(2) If the violation relates to an order against a Governmentwide acquisition contract, a multi-agency contract, a
multiple-award schedule contract such as the Federal Supply Schedule, or any other procurement instrument
intended for use by multiple agencies, the contractor shall notify the OIG of the ordering agency and the IG of the
agency responsible for the basic contract, and the respective agencies' contracting officers.

(3) The disclosure requirement for an individual contract continues until at least 3 years after final payment on the
contract.

(4) The Government will safeguard such disclosures in accordance with paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this clause.

(G) Full cooperation with any Government agencies responsible for audits, investigations, or corrective actions.

(d) Subcontracts.

(1) The Contractor shall include the substance of this clause, including this paragraph (d), in subcontracts that have
a value in excess of $5,000,000 and a performance period of more than 120 days.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 67 of 148

(2) In altering this clause to identify the appropriate parties, all disclosures of violation of the civil False Claims Act
or of Federal criminal law shall be directed to the agency Office of the Inspector General, with a copy to the

(End of clause)

52.204-7 CENTRAL CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION (DEC 2012)


Central Contractor Registration (CCR) database means the primary Government repository for Contractor
information required for the conduct of business with the Government.

Data Universal Numbering System (DUNS) number means the 9-digit number assigned by Dun and Bradstreet, Inc.
(D&B) to identify unique business entities.

Data Universal Numbering System +4 (DUNS+4) number means the DUNS number assigned by D&B plus a 4-
character suffix that may be assigned by a business concern. (D&B has no affiliation with this 4-character suffix.)
This 4-character suffix may be assigned at the discretion of the business concern to establish additional CCR
records for identifying alternative Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT) accounts (see the FAR at Subpart 32.11) for the
same parent concern.

Registered in the CCR database means that--

(1) The Offeror has entered all mandatory information, including the DUNS number or the DUNS+4 number, as
well as data required by the Federal Funding Accountability and Transparency Act
of 2006 (see subpart 4.14), into the CCR database; and

(2) The Government has validated all mandatory data fields, to include validation of the Taxpayer Identification
Number (TIN) with the Internal Revenue Service (IRS), and has marked the record `Àctive''. The Offeror will be
required to provide consent for TIN validation to the Government as a part of the CCR registration process.

(b)(1) By submission of an offer, the offeror acknowledges the requirement that a prospective awardee shall be
registered in the CCR database prior to award, during performance, and through final payment of any contract, basic
agreement, basic ordering agreement, or blanket purchasing agreement resulting from this solicitation.

(2) The offeror shall enter, in the block with its name and address on the cover page of its offer, the annotation
DUNS or DUNS +4 followed by the DUNS or DUNS +4 number that identifies the offeror's name and address
exactly as stated in the offer. The DUNS number will be used by the Contracting Officer to verify that the offeror is
registered in the CCR database.

(c) If the offeror does not have a DUNS number, it should contact Dun and Bradstreet directly to obtain one.

(1) An offeror may obtain a DUNS number--

(i) Via the Internet at http://fedgov.dnb.com/webform or if the offeror does not have internet access, it may call Dun
and Bradstreet at 1-866-705-5711 if located within the United States; or

(ii) If located outside the United States, by contacting the local Dun and Bradstreet office. The offeror should
indicate that it is an offeror for a U.S. Government contract when contacting the local Dun and Bradstreet office.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 68 of 148

(2) The offeror should be prepared to provide the following information:

(i) Company legal business.

(ii) Tradestyle, doing business, or other name by which your entity is commonly recognized.

(iii) Company Physical Street Address, City, State, and Zip Code.

(iv) Company Mailing Address, City, State and Zip Code (if separate from physical).

(v) Company Telephone Number.

(vi) Date the company was started.

(vii) Number of employees at your location.

(viii) Chief executive officer/key manager.

(ix) Line of business (industry).

(x) Company Headquarters name and address (reporting relationship within your entity).

(d) If the Offeror does not become registered in the CCR database in the time prescribed by the Contracting Officer,
the Contracting Officer will proceed to award to the next otherwise successful registered Offeror.

(e) Processing time, which normally takes 48 hours, should be taken into consideration when registering. Offerors
who are not registered should consider applying for registration immediately upon receipt of this solicitation.

(f) Offerors may obtain information on registration at https://www.acquisition.gov.

(End of clause)

52.209-6 PROTECTING THE GOVERNMENT'S INTEREST WHEN SUBCONTRACTING WITH
CONTRACTORS DEBARRED, SUSPENDED, OR PROPOSED FOR DEBARMENT (DEC 2010)

(a) Definition. Commercially available off-the-shelf (COTS) item, as used in this clause--

(1) Means any item of supply (including construction material) that is--

(i) A commercial item (as defined in paragraph (1) of the definition in FAR 2.101);

(ii) Sold in substantial quantities in the commercial marketplace; and

(iii) Offered to the Government, under a contract or subcontract at any tier, without modification, in the same form
in which it is sold in the commercial marketplace; and

(2) Does not include bulk cargo, as defined in section 3 of the Shipping Act of 1984 (46 U.S.C. App. 1702), such as
agricultural products and petroleum products.

(b) The Government suspends or debars Contractors to protect the Government's interests. Other than a subcontract
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 69 of 148

for a commercially available off-the-shelf item, the Contractor shall not enter into any subcontract, in excess of
$30,000 with a Contractor that is debarred, suspended, or proposed for debarment by any executive agency unless
there is a compelling reason to do so.

(c) The Contractor shall require each proposed subcontractor whose subcontract will exceed $30,000, other than a
subcontractor providing a commercially available off-the-shelf item, to disclose to the Contractor, in writing,
whether as of the time of award of the subcontract, the subcontractor, or its principals, is or is not debarred,
suspended, or proposed for debarment by the Federal Government.

(d) A corporate officer or a designee of the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, before
entering into a subcontract with a party (other than a subcontractor providing a commercially available off-the-shelf
item) that is debarred, suspended, or proposed for debarment (see FAR 9.404 for information on the Excluded
Parties List System). The notice must include the following:

(1) The name of the subcontractor.

(2) The Contractors knowledge of the reasons for the subcontractor being in the Excluded Parties List System.

(3) The compelling reason(s) for doing business with the subcontractor notwithstanding its inclusion in the
Excluded Parties List System.

(4) The systems and procedures the Contractor has established to ensure that it is fully protecting the Governments
interests when dealing with such subcontractor in view of the specific basis for the partys debarment, suspension,
or proposed debarment.

(e) Subcontracts. Unless this is a contract for the acquisition of commercial items, the Contractor shall include the
requirements of this clause, including this paragraph (e) (appropriately modified for the identification of the parties),
in each subcontract that--

(1) Exceeds $30,000 in value; and

(2) Is not a subcontract for commercially available off-the-
shelf items.

(End of clause)


52.214-35 SUBMISSION OF OFFERS IN U.S. CURRENCY (APR 1991)

Offers submitted in response to this solicitation shall be in terms of U.S. dollars. Offers received in other than U.S.
dollars shall be rejected.

(End of provision)

52.215-2 AUDIT AND RECORDS--NEGOTIATION (OCT 2010)
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 70 of 148

(a) As used in this clause, "records" includes books, documents, accounting procedures and practices, and other
data, regardless of type and regardless of whether such items are in written form, in the form of computer data, or in
any other form.

(b) Examination of costs. If this is a cost-reimbursement, incentive, time-and-materials, labor-hour, or price
redeterminable contract, or any combination of these, the Contractor shall maintain and the Contracting Officer, or
an authorized representative of the Contracting Officer, shall have the right to examine and audit all records and
other evidence sufficient to reflect properly all costs claimed to have been incurred or anticipated to be incurred
directly or indirectly in performance of this contract. This right of examination shall include inspection at all
reasonable times of the Contractor's plants, or parts of them, engaged in performing the contract.

(c) Certified cost or pricing data. If the Contractor has been required to submit certified cost or pricing data in
connection with any pricing action relating to this contract, the Contracting Officer, or an authorized representative
of the Contracting Officer, in order to evaluate the accuracy, completeness, and currency of the certified cost or
pricing data, shall have the right to examine and audit all of the Contractor's records, including computations and
projections, related to--

(1) The proposal for the contract, subcontract, or modification;

(2) The discussions conducted on the proposal(s), including those related to negotiating;

(3) Pricing of the contract, subcontract, or modification; or

(4) Performance of the contract, subcontract or modification.

(d) Comptroller General. (1) The Comptroller General of the United States, or an authorized representative, shall
have access to and the right to examine any of the Contractors directly pertinent records involving transactions
related to this contract or a subcontract hereunder and to interview any current employee regarding such
transactions.

(2) This paragraph may not be construed to require the Contractor or subcontractor to create or maintain any record
that the Contractor or subcontractor does not maintain in the ordinary course of business or pursuant to a provision
of law.

(e) Reports. If the Contractor is required to furnish cost, funding, or performance reports, the Contracting Officer or
an authorized representative of the Contracting Officer shall have the right to examine and audit the supporting
records and materials, for the purpose of evaluating (1) the effectiveness of the Contractor's policies and procedures
to produce data compatible with the objectives of these reports and (2) the data reported.

(f) Availability. The Contractor shall make available at its office at all reasonable times the records, materials, and
other evidence described in paragraphs (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) of this clause, for examination, audit, or
reproduction, until 3 years after final payment under this contract or for any shorter period specified in Subpart 4.7,
Contractor Records Retention, of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR), or for any longer period required by
statute or by other clauses of this contract. In addition--

(1) If this contract is completely or partially terminated, the Contractor shall make available the records relating to
the work terminated until 3 years after any resulting final termination settlement; and

(2) The Contractor shall make available records relating to appeals under the Disputes clause or to litigation or the
settlement of claims arising under or relating to this contract until such appeals, litigation, or claims are finally
resolved.

(g) The Contractor shall insert a clause containing all the terms of this clause, including this paragraph (g), in all
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 71 of 148

subcontracts under this contract that exceed the simplified acquisition threshold, and--

(1) That are cost-reimbursement, incentive, time-and-materials, labor-hour, or price-redeterminable type or any
combination of these;

(2) For which certified cost or pricing data are required; or

(3) That require the subcontractor to furnish reports as discussed in paragraph (e) of this clause.

The clause may be altered only as necessary to identify properly the contracting parties and the Contracting Officer
under the Government prime contract.

(End of clause)

52.215-11 PRICE REDUCTION FOR DEFECTIVE CERTIFIED COST OR PRICING DATA--
MODIFICATIONS (AUG 2011)

(a) This clause shall become operative only for any modification to this contract involving a pricing adjustment
expected to exceed the threshold for submission of certified cost or pricing data at FAR 15.403-4, except that this
clause does not apply to any modification if an exception under FAR 15.403-1 applies.

(b) If any price, including profit or fee, negotiated in connection with any modification under this clause, or any cost
reimbursable under this contract, was increased by any significant amount because (1) the Contractor or a
subcontractor furnished certified cost or pricing data that were not complete, accurate, and current as certified in its
Certificate of Current Cost or Pricing Data, (2) a subcontractor or prospective subcontractor furnished the
Contractor certified cost or pricing data that were not complete, accurate, and current as certified in the Contractor's
Certificate of Current Cost or Pricing Data, or (3) any of these parties furnished data of any description that were
not accurate, the price or cost shall be reduced accordingly and the contract shall be modified to reflect the
reduction. This right to a price reduction is limited to that resulting from defects in data relating to modifications for
which this clause becomes operative under paragraph (a) of this clause.

(c) Any reduction in the contract price under paragraph (b) of this clause due to defective data from a prospective
subcontractor that was not subsequently awarded the subcontract shall be limited to the amount, plus applicable
overhead and profit markup, by which (1) the actual subcontract or (2) the actual cost to the Contractor, if there was
no subcontract, was less than the prospective subcontract cost estimate submitted by the Contractor; provided, that
the actual subcontract price was not itself affected by defective certified cost or pricing data.

(1) The actual subcontract; or

(2) The actual cost to the Contractor, if there was no subcontract, was less than the prospective subcontract cost
estimate submitted by the Contractor; provided, that the actual subcontract price was not itself affected by defective
cost or pricing data.

(d)(1) If the Contracting Officer determines under paragraph (b) of this clause that a price or cost reduction should
be made, the Contractor agrees not to raise the following matters as a defense:

(i) The Contractor or subcontractor was a sole source supplier or otherwise was in a superior bargaining position
and thus the price of the contract would not have been modified even if accurate, complete, and current certified
cost or pricing data had been submitted.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 72 of 148

(ii) The Contracting Officer should have known that the certified cost or pricing data in issue were defective even
though the Contractor or subcontractor took no affirmative action to bring the character of the data to the attention
of the Contracting Officer.

(iii) The contract was based on an agreement about the total cost of the contract and there was no agreement about
the cost of each item procured under the contract.

(iv) The Contractor or subcontractor did not submit a Certificate of Current Cost or Pricing Data.

(2)(i) Except as prohibited by subdivision (d)(2)(ii) of this clause, an offset in an amount determined appropriate by
the Contracting Officer based upon the facts shall be allowed against the amount of a contract price reduction if--

(A) The Contractor certifies to the Contracting Officer that, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge and belief, the
Contractor is entitled to the offset in the amount requested; and

(B) The Contractor proves that the certified cost or pricing data were available before the as of date specified on
its Certificate of Current Cost or Pricing Data, and that the data were not submitted before such date.

(ii) An offset shall not be allowed if--

(A) The understated data were known by the Contractor to be understated before the as of date specified on its
Certificate of Current Cost or Pricing Data; or

(B) The Government proves that the facts demonstrate that the contract price would not have increased in the
amount to be offset even if the available data had been submitted before the as of date specified on its Certificate
of Current Cost or Pricing Data.

(e) If any reduction in the contract price under this clause reduces the price of items for which payment was made
prior to the date of the modification reflecting the price reduction, the Contractor shall be liable to and shall pay the
United States at the time such overpayment is repaid--

(1) Interest compounded daily, as required by 26 U.S.C. 6622, on the amount of such overpayment to be computed
from the date(s) of overpayment to the Contractor to the date the Government is repaid by the Contractor at the
applicable underpayment rate effective for each quarter prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury under 26
U.S.C. 6621(a)(2); and

(2) A penalty equal to the amount of the overpayment, if the Contractor or subcontractor knowingly submitted
certified cost or pricing data that were incomplete, inaccurate, or noncurrent.

(End of clause)

52.215-13 SUBCONTRACTOR CERTIFIED COST OR PRICING DATA--MODIFICATIONS (OCT 2010)

(a) The requirements of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this clause shall--

(1) Become operative only for any modification to this contract involving a pricing adjustment expected to exceed
the threshold for submission of certified cost or pricing data at FAR 15.403-4; and

(2) Be limited to such modifications.

(b) Before awarding any subcontract expected to exceed the threshold for submission of certified cost or pricing
data at FAR 15.403-4, on the date of agreement on price or the date of award, whichever is later; or before pricing
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 73 of 148

any subcontract modification involving a pricing adjustment expected to exceed the threshold for submission of
certified cost or pricing data at FAR 15.403-4, the Contractor shall require the subcontractor to submit certified cost
or pricing data (actually or by specific identification in writing), in accordance with FAR 15.408, Table 15-2 (to
include any
information reasonably required to explain the subcontractor's estimating process such as the judgmental factors
applied and the mathematical or other methods used in the estimate, including those used in projecting from known
data, and the nature and amount of any contingencies included in the price), unless an exception under FAR 15.403-
1 applies.

(c) The Contractor shall require the subcontractor to certify in substantially the form prescribed in FAR 15.406-2
that, to the best of its knowledge and belief, the data submitted under paragraph (b) of this clause were accurate,
complete, and current as of the date of agreement on the negotiated price of the subcontract or subcontract
modification.

(d) The Contractor shall insert the substance of this clause, including this paragraph (d), in each subcontract that
exceeds the threshold for submission of certified cost or pricing data at FAR 15.403-4 on the date of agreement on
price or the date of award, whichever is later.

(End of clause)


52.215-19 NOTIFICATION OF OWNERSHIP CHANGES (OCT 1997)

(a) The Contractor shall make the following notifications in writing:

(1) When the Contractor becomes aware that a change in its ownership has occurred, or is certain to occur, that
could result in changes in the valuation of its capitalized assets in the accounting records, the Contractor shall notify
the Administrative Contracting Officer (ACO) within 30 days.

(2) The Contractor shall also notify the ACO within 30 days whenever changes to asset valuations or any other cost
changes have occurred or are certain to occur as a result of a change in ownership.

(b) The Contractor shall--

(1) Maintain current, accurate, and complete inventory records of assets and their costs;

(2) Provide the ACO or designated representative ready access to the records upon request;

(3) Ensure that all individual and grouped assets, their capitalized values, accumulated depreciation or amortization,
and remaining useful lives are identified accurately before and after each of the Contractor's ownership changes;
and

(4) Retain and continue to maintain depreciation and amortization schedules based on the asset records maintained
before each Contractor ownership change.

The Contractor shall include the substance of this clause in all subcontracts under this contract that meet the
applicability requirement of FAR 15.408(k).

(End of clause)

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 74 of 148

52.215-21 REQUIREMENTS FOR CERTIFIED COST OR PRICING DATA OR INFORMATION OTHER
THAN CERTIFIED COST OR PRICING DATA--MODIFICATIONS (OCT 2010)

(a) Exceptions from certified cost or pricing data.

(1) In lieu of submitting certified cost or pricing data for modifications under this contract, for price adjustments
expected to exceed the threshold set forth at FAR 15.403-4 on the date of the agreement on price or the date of the
award, whichever is later, the Contractor may submit a written request for exception by submitting the information
described in the following subparagraphs. The Contracting Officer may require additional supporting information,
but only to the extent necessary to determine whether an exception should be granted, and whether the price is fair
and reasonable--

(i) Identification of the law or regulation establishing the price offered. If the price is controlled under law by
periodic rulings, reviews, or similar actions of a governmental body, attach a copy of the controlling document,
unless it was previously submitted to the contracting office.

(ii) Information on modifications of contracts or subcontracts for commercial items.

(A) If--

(1) The original contract or subcontract was granted an exception from certified cost or pricing data requirements
because the price agreed upon was based on adequate price competition or prices set by law or regulation, or was a
contract or subcontract for the acquisition of a commercial item; and

(2) The modification (to the contract or subcontract) is not exempted based on one of these exceptions, then the
Contractor may provide information to establish that the modification would not change the contract or subcontract
from a contract or subcontract for the acquisition of a commercial item to a contract or subcontract for the
acquisition of an item other than a commercial item.

(B) For a commercial item exception, the Contractor shall provide, at a minimum, information on prices at which
the same item or similar items have previously been sold that is adequate for evaluating the reasonableness of the
price of the modification. Such information may include--

(1) For catalog items, a copy of or identification of the catalog and its date, or the appropriate pages for the offered
items, or a statement that the catalog is on file in the buying office to which the proposal is being submitted.
Provide a copy or describe current discount policies and price lists (published or unpublished), e.g., wholesale,
original equipment manufacturer, or reseller. Also explain the basis of each offered price and its relationship to the
established catalog price, including how the proposed price relates to the price of recent sales in quantities similar to
the proposed quantities.

(2) For market-priced items, the source and date or period of the market quotation or other basis for market price,
the base amount, and applicable discounts. In addition, describe the nature of the market.

(3) For items included on an active Federal Supply Service Multiple Award Schedule contract, proof that an
exception has been granted for the schedule item.

(2) The Contractor grants the Contracting Officer or an authorized representative the right to examine, at any time
before award, books, records, documents, or other directly pertinent records to verify any request for an exception
under this clause, and the reasonableness of price. For items priced using catalog or market prices, or law or
regulation , access does not extend to cost or profit information or other data relevant solely to the Contractor's
determination of the prices to be offered in the catalog or marketplace.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 75 of 148

(b) Requirements for certified cost or pricing data. If the Contractor is not granted an exception from the
requirement to submit certified cost or pricing data, the following applies:

(1) The Contractor shall submit certified cost or pricing data, data other than certified cost or pricing data, and
supporting attachments in accordance with the instructions contained in Table 15-2 of FAR 15.408, which is
incorporated by reference with the same force and effect as though it were inserted here in full text. The
instructions in Table 15-2 are incorporated as a mandatory format to be used in this contract, unless the Contracting
Officer and the Contractor agree to a different format and change this clause to use Alternate I.

As soon as practicable after agreement on price, but before award (except for unpriced actions), the Contractor shall
submit a Certificate of Current Cost or Pricing Data, as prescribed by FAR 15.406-2.

(End of clause)


52.215-22 LIMITATIONS ON PASS-THROUGH CHARGES--IDENTIFICATION OF SUBCONTRACT
EFFORT (OCT 2009)

(a) Definitions. Added value, excessive pass-through charge, subcontract, and subcontractor, as used in this
provision, are defined in the clause of this solicitation entitled ``Limitations on Pass-Through Charges'' (FAR
52.215-23).

(b) General. The offeror's proposal shall exclude excessive pass-through charges.

(c) Performance of work by the Contractor or a subcontractor. (1) The offeror shall identify in its proposal the total
cost of the work to be performed by the offeror, and the total cost of the work to be performed by each
subcontractor, under the contract, task order, or delivery order.

(2) If the offeror intends to subcontract more than 70 percent of the total cost of work to be performed under the
contract, task order, or delivery order, the offeror shall identify in its proposal--

(i) The amount of the offeror's indirect costs and profit/fee applicable to the work to be performed by the
subcontractor(s); and

(ii) A description of the added value provided by the offeror as related to the work to be performed by the
subcontractor(s).

(3) If any subcontractor proposed under the contract, task order, or delivery order intends to subcontract to a lower-
tier subcontractor more than 70 percent of the total cost of work to be performed under its subcontract, the offeror
shall identify in its proposal--

(i) The amount of the subcontractor's indirect costs and profit/fee applicable to the work to be performed by the
lower-tier subcontractor(s); and

(ii) A description of the added value provided by the subcontractor as related to the work to be performed by the
lower-tier subcontractor(s).

(End of provision)

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 76 of 148


52.215-23 LIMITATIONS ON PASS-THROUGH CHARGES (OCT 2009)


Added value means that the Contractor performs subcontract management functions that the Contracting Officer
determines are a benefit to the Government (e.g., processing orders of parts or services, maintaining inventory,
reducing delivery lead times, managing multiple sources for contract requirements, coordinating deliveries,
performing quality assurance functions).

Excessive pass-through charge, with respect to a Contractor or subcontractor that adds no or negligible value to a
contract or subcontract, means a charge to the Government by the Contractor or subcontractor that is for indirect
costs or profit/fee on work performed by a subcontractor (other than charges for the costs of managing subcontracts
and any applicable indirect costs and associated profit/fee based on such costs).

No or negligible value means the Contractor or subcontractor cannot demonstrate to the Contracting Officer that its
effort added value to the contract or subcontract in accomplishing the work performed under the contract (including
task or delivery orders).

Subcontract means any contract, as defined in FAR 2.101, entered into by a subcontractor to furnish supplies or
services for performance of the contract or a subcontract. It includes but is not limited to purchase orders, and
changes and modifications to purchase orders.

Subcontractor, as defined in FAR 44.101, means any supplier, distributor, vendor, or firm that furnishes supplies or
services to or for a prime Contractor or another subcontractor.

(b) General. The Government will not pay excessive pass-through charges. The Contracting Officer shall determine
if excessive pass-through charges exist.

(c) Reporting. Required reporting of performance of work by the Contractor or a subcontractor. The Contractor
shall notify the Contracting Officer in writing if--

(1) The Contractor changes the amount of subcontract effort after award such that it exceeds 70 percent of the total
cost of work to be performed under the contract, task order, or delivery order. The notification shall identify the
revised cost of the subcontract effort and shall include verification that the Contractor will provide added value; or

(2) Any subcontractor changes the amount of lower-tier subcontractor effort after award such that it exceeds 70
percent of the total cost of the work to be performed under its subcontract. The notification shall identify the revised
cost of the subcontract effort and shall include verification that the subcontractor will provide added value as related
to the work to be performed by the lower-tier subcontractor(s).

(d) Recovery of excessive pass-through charges. If the Contracting Officer determines that excessive pass-through
charges exist;

(1) For other than fixed-price contracts, the excessive pass-through charges are unallowable in accordance with the
provisions in FAR subpart 31.2; and

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 77 of 148

(2) For applicable DoD fixed-price contracts, as identified in 15.408(n)(2)(i)(B), the Government shall be entitled to
a price reduction for the amount of excessive pass-through charges included in the contract price.

(e) Access to records. (1) The Contracting Officer, or authorized representative, shall have the right to examine and
audit all the Contractor's records (as defined at FAR 52.215-2(a)) necessary to determine whether the Contractor
proposed, billed, or claimed excessive pass-through charges.

(2) For those subcontracts to which paragraph (f) of this clause applies, the Contracting Officer, or authorized
representative, shall have the right to examine and audit all the subcontractor's records (as defined at FAR 52.215-
2(a)) necessary to determine whether the subcontractor proposed, billed, or claimed excessive pass-through charges.

(f) Flowdown. The Contractor shall insert the substance of this clause, including this paragraph (f), in all cost-
reimbursement subcontracts under this contract that exceed the simplified acquisition threshold, except if the
contract is with DoD, then insert in all cost-reimbursement subcontracts and fixed-price subcontracts, except those
identified in 15.408(n)(2)(i)(B)(2), that exceed the threshold for obtaining cost or pricing data in accordance with
FAR 15.403-4.

(End of clause)

52.223-18 ENCOURAGING CONTRACTOR POLICIES TO BAN TEXT MESSAGING WHILE DRIVING
(AUG 2011)


Driving

(1) Means operating a motor vehicle on an active roadway with the motor running, including while temporarily
stationary because of traffic, a traffic light, stop sign, or otherwise.

(2) Does not include operating a motor vehicle with or without the motor running when one has pulled over to the
side of, or off, an active roadway and has halted in a location where one can safely remain stationary.

Text messaging means reading from or entering data into any handheld or other electronic device, including for the
purpose of short message service texting, e-mailing, instant messaging, obtaining navigational information, or
engaging in any other form of electronic data retrieval or electronic data communication. The term does not include
glancing at or listening to a navigational device that is secured in a commercially designed holder affixed to the
vehicle, provided that the destination and route are programmed into the device either before driving or while
stopped in a location off the roadway where it is safe and legal to park.

(b) This clause implements Executive Order 13513, Federal Leadership on Reducing Text Messaging while
Driving, dated October 1, 2009.

(c) The Contractor is encouraged to--

(1) Adopt and enforce policies that ban text messaging while driving--

(i) Company-owned or -rented vehicles or Government-owned vehicles; or

(ii) Privately-owned vehicles when on official Government business or when performing any work for or on behalf
of the Government.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 78 of 148

(2) Conduct initiatives in a manner commensurate with the size of the business, such as--

(i) Establishment of new rules and programs or re-evaluation of existing programs to prohibit text messaging while
driving; and

(ii) Education, awareness, and other outreach to employees about the safety risks associated with texting while
driving.

(d) Subcontracts. The Contractor shall insert the substance of this clause, including this paragraph (d), in all
subcontracts that exceed the micro-purchase threshold.

(End of clause)


52.225-13 RESTRICTIONS ON CERTAIN FOREIGN PURCHASES (J UN 2008)

(a) Except as authorized by the Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) in the Department of the Treasury, the
Contractor shall not acquire, for use in the performance of this contract, any supplies or services if any
proclamation, Executive order, or statute administered by OFAC, or if OFAC's implementing regulations at 31 CFR
chapter V, would prohibit such a transaction by a person subject to the jurisdiction of the United States.

(b) Except as authorized by OFAC, most transactions involving Cuba, Iran, and Sudan are prohibited, as are most
imports from Burma or North Korea, into the United States or its outlying areas. Lists of entities and individuals
subject to economic sanctions are included in OFAC's List of Specially Designated Nationals and Blocked Persons
at TerList1.html. More information about these restrictions, as well as updates, is available in the OFAC's
regulations at 31 CFR chapter V and/or on OFAC's Web site at http://www.treas.gov/offices/enforcement/ofac/.

(c) The Contractor shall insert this clause, including this paragraph (c), in all subcontracts.

(End of clause)


52.225-14 INCONSISTENCY BETWEEN ENGLISH VERSION AND TRANSLATION OF CONTRACT
(FEB 2000)

In the event of inconsistency between any terms of this contract and any translation into another language, the
English language meaning shall control.

(End of clause)

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 79 of 148


52.228-2 ADDITIONAL BOND SECURITY (OCT 1997)

The Contractor shall promptly furnish additional security required to protect the Government and persons supplying
labor or materials under this contract if--

(a) Any surety upon any bond, or issuing financial institution for other security, furnished with this contract
becomes unacceptable to the Government.

(b) Any surety fails to furnish reports on its financial condition as required by the Government;

(c) The contract price is increased so that the penal sum of any bond becomes inadequate in the opinion of the
Contracting Officer; or

(d) An irrevocable letter of credit (ILC) used as security will expire before the end of the period of required
security. If the Contractor does not furnish an acceptable extension or replacement ILC, or other acceptable
substitute, at least 30 days before an ILC's scheduled expiration, the Contracting officer has the right to immediately
draw on the ILC.

(End of clause)


52.228-3 WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE (DEFENSE BASE ACT) (APR 1984)

The Contractor shall (a) provide, before commencing performance under this contract, such workers' compensation
insurance or security as the Defense Base Act (42 U.S.C. 1651, et seq.) requires and (b) continue to maintain it until
performance is completed. The Contractor shall insert, in all subcontracts under this contract to which the Defense
Base Act applies, a clause similar to this clause (including this sentence) imposing upon those subcontractors this
requirement to comply with the Defense Base Act.

(End of clause)

52.228-11 PLEDGES OF ASSETS (J AN 2012)

(a) Offerors shall obtain from each person acting as an individual surety on a bid guarantee, a performance bond, or
a payment bond--

(1) Pledge of assets; and

(2) Standard Form 28, Affidavit of Individual Surety.

(b) Pledges of assets from each person acting as an individual surety shall be in the form of--

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 80 of 148

(1) Evidence of an escrow account containing cash, certificates of deposit, commercial or Government securities, or
other assets described in FAR 28.203-2 (except see 28.203-2(b)(2) with respect to Government securities held in
book entry form); and/or

(2) A recorded lien on real estate. The offeror will be required to provide--

(i) A mortgagee title insurance policy, in an insurance amount equal to the amount of the lien, or other evidence of
title that is consistent with the requirements of Section 2 of the United States Department of J ustice Title Standards
at http://www.justice.gov/enrd/ENRD_Assets/Title_Standards_2001.pdf. This title evidence must show fee simple
title vested in the surety along with any concurrent owners; whether any real estate taxes are due and payable; and
any recorded encumbrances against the property, including the lien filed in favor of the Government as required by
FAR 28.203-3(d);

(ii) Evidence of the amount due under any encumbrance shown in the evidence of title;

(iii) A copy of the current real estate tax assessment of the property or a current appraisal dated no earlier than 6
months prior to the date of the bond, prepared by a professional appraiser who certifies that the appraisal has been
conducted in accordance with the generally accepted appraisal standards as reflected in the Uniform Standards of
Professional Appraisal Practice, as promulgated by the Appraisal Foundation.

(End of clause)

52.229-6 TAXES--FOREIGN FIXED-PRICE CONTRACTS (FEB 2013)

(a) To the extent that this contract provides for furnishing supplies or performing services outside the United States
and its outlying areas, this clause applies in lieu of any Federal, State, and local taxes clause of the contract.

(b) Definitions. As used in this clause--

"Contract date," means the date set for bid opening or, if this is a negotiated contract or a modification, the effective
date of this contract or modification.

Country concerned means any country, other than the United States and its outlying areas, in which expenditures
under this contract are made.

"Tax" and "taxes," include fees and charges for doing business that are levied by the government of the country
concerned or by its political subdivisions.

"All applicable taxes and duties," means all taxes and duties, in effect on the contract date, that the taxing authority
is imposing and collecting on the transactions or property covered by this contract, pursuant to written ruling or
regulation in effect on the contract date.

"After-imposed tax," means any new or increased tax or duty, or tax that was exempted or excluded on the contract
date but whose exemption was later revoked or reduced during the contract period, other than excepted tax, on the
transactions or property covered by this contract that the Contractor is required to pay or bear as the result of
legislative, judicial, or administrative action taking effect after the contract date.

"After-relieved tax," means any amount of tax or duty, other than an excepted tax, that would otherwise have been
payable on the transactions or property covered by this contract, but which the Contractor is not required to pay or
bear, or for which the Contractor obtains a refund, as the result of legislative, judicial, or administrative action
taking effect after the contract date.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 81 of 148

"Excepted tax," means social security or other employment taxes, net income and franchise taxes, excess profits
taxes, capital stock taxes, transportation taxes, unemployment compensation taxes, and property taxes. "Excepted
tax" does not include gross income taxes levied on or measured by sales or receipts from sales, property taxes
assessed on completed supplies covered by this contract, or any tax assessed on the Contractor's possession of,
interest in, or use of property, title to which is in the U.S. Government.

(c) (1) Unless otherwise provided in this contract, the contract price includes all applicable taxes and duties, except
taxes and duties that the Government of the United States and the government of the country concerned have agreed
shall not be applicable to expenditures in such country by or on behalf of the United States, except as
provided in subparagraph (c)(2) of this clause.

(2) Taxes imposed under 26 U.S.C. 5000C may not be

(i) Included in the contract price; nor

(ii) Reimbursed.

(d) (1) Except as provided in subparagraph (d)(2) of this clause, the contract price shall be increased by the amount
of any after-imposed tax or of any tax or duty specifically excluded from the contract price by a provision of this
contract that the Contractor is required to pay or bear, including any interest or penalty, if the Contractor states in
writing that the contract price does not include any contingency for such tax and if liability for such tax, interest, or
penalty was not incurred through the Contractor's fault, negligence, or failure to follow instructions of the
Contracting Officer or to comply with the provisions of paragraph (i) below.

(2) The contract price may not be increased to offset taxes imposed under 26 U.S.C. 5000C

(e) The contract price shall be decreased by the amount of any after-relieved tax, including any interest or penalty.
The Government of the United States shall be entitled to interest received by the Contractor incident to a refund of
taxes to the extent that such interest was earned after the Contractor was paid by the Government of the United
States for such taxes. The Government of the United States shall be entitled to repayment of any penalty refunded to
the Contractor to the extent that the penalty was paid by the Government.

(f) The contract price shall be decreased by the amount of any tax or duty, other than an excepted tax, that was
included in the contract and that the Contractor is required to pay or bear, or does not obtain a refund of, through the
Contractor's fault, negligence, or failure to follow instructions of the Contracting Officer or to comply with the
provisions of paragraph (i) below.

(g) No adjustment shall be made in the contract price under this clause unless the amount of the adjustment exceeds
$250.

(h) If the Contractor obtains a reduction in tax liability under the United States Internal Revenue Code (Title 26,
U.S. Code) because of the payment of any tax or duty that either was included in the contract price or was the basis
of an increase in the contract price, the amount of the reduction shall be paid or credited to the Government of the
United States as the Contracting Officer directs.

(i) The Contractor shall take all reasonable action to obtain exemption from or refund of any taxes or duties,
including interest or penalty, from which the United States Government, the Contractor, any subcontractor, or the
transactions or property covered by this contract are exempt under the laws of the country concerned or its political
subdivisions or which the governments of the United States and of the country concerned have agreed shall not be
applicable to expenditures in such country by or on behalf of the United States.

(j) The Contractor shall promptly notify the Contracting Officer of all matters relating to taxes or duties that
reasonably may be expected to result in either an increase or decrease in the contract price and shall take appropriate
action as the Contracting Officer directs. The contract price shall be equitably adjusted to cover the costs of action
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 82 of 148

taken by the Contractor at the direction of the Contracting Officer, including any interest, penalty, and reasonable
attorneys' fees.

(End of clause)


52.232-5 PAYMENTS UNDER FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS (SEP 2002)

(a) Payment of price. The Government shall pay the Contractor the contract price as provided in this contract.

(b) Progress payments. The Government shall make progress payments monthly as the work proceeds, or at more
frequent intervals as determined by the Contracting Officer, on estimates of work accomplished which meets the
standards of quality established under the contract, as approved by the Contracting Officer.

(1) The Contractor's request for progress payments shall include the following substantiation:

(i) An itemization of the amounts requested, related to the various elements of work required by the contract
covered by the payment requested.

(ii) A listing of the amount included for work performed by each subcontractor under the contract.

(iii) A listing of the total amount of each subcontract under the contract.

(iv) A listing of the amounts previously paid to each such subcontractor under the contract.

(v) Additional supporting data in a form and detail required by the Contracting Officer.

(2) In the preparation of estimates, the Contracting Officer may authorize material delivered on the site and
preparatory work done to be taken into consideration. Material delivered to the Contractor at locations other than
the site also may be taken into consideration if--

(i) Consideration is specifically authorized by this contract; and

(ii) The Contractor furnishes satisfactory evidence that it has acquired title to such material and that the material will
be used to perform this contract.

(c) Contractor certification. Along with each request for progress payments, the Contractor shall furnish the
following certification, or payment shall not be made: (However, if the Contractor elects to delete paragraph (c)(4)
from the certification, the certification is still acceptable.)

I hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge and belief, that--

(1) The amounts requested are only for performance in accordance with the specifications, terms, and conditions of
the contract;

(2) All payments due to subcontractors and suppliers from previous payments received under the contract have been
made, and timely payments will be made from the proceeds of the payment covered by this certification, in
accordance with subcontract agreements and the requirements of chapter 39 of Title 31, United States Code;

(3) This request for progress payments does not include any amounts which the prime contractor intends to withhold
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 83 of 148

or retain from a subcontractor or supplier in accordance with the terms and conditions of the subcontract; and

(4) This certification is not to be construed as final acceptance of a subcontractor's performance.

_____________________

(Name)

______________________

(Title)

______________________

(Date)

(d) Refund of unearned amounts. If the Contractor, after making a certified request for progress payments, discovers
that a portion or all of such request constitutes a payment for performance by the Contractor that fails to conform to
the specifications, terms, and conditions of this contract (hereinafter referred to as the "unearned amount"), the
Contractor shall--

(1) Notify the Contracting Officer of such performance deficiency; and

(2) Be obligated to pay the Government an amount (computed by the Contracting Officer in the manner provided in
paragraph (j) of this clause) equal to interest on the unearned amount from the 8th day after the date of receipt of the
unearned amount until--

(i) The date the Contractor notifies the Contracting Officer that the performance deficiency has been corrected; or

(ii) The date the Contractor reduces the amount of any subsequent certified request for progress payments by an
amount equal to the unearned amount.

(e) Retainage. If the Contracting Officer finds that satisfactory progress was achieved during any period for which a
progress payment is to be made, the Contracting Officer shall authorize payment to be made in full. However, if
satisfactory progress has not been made, the Contracting Officer may retain a maximum of 10 percent of the amount
of the payment until satisfactory progress is achieved. When the work is substantially complete, the Contracting
Officer may retain from previously withheld funds and future progress payments that amount the Contracting
Officer considers adequate for protection of the Government and shall release to the Contractor all the remaining
withheld funds. Also, on completion and acceptance of each separate building, public work, or other division of the
contract, for which the price is stated separately in the contract, payment shall be made for the completed work
without retention of a percentage.

(f) Title, liability, and reservation of rights. All material and work covered by progress payments made shall, at the
time of payment, become the sole property of the Government, but this shall not be construed as--

(1) Relieving the Contractor from the sole responsibility for all material and work upon which payments have been
made or the restoration of any damaged work; or

(2) Waiving the right of the Government to require the fulfillment of all of the terms of the contract.

(g) Reimbursement for bond premiums. In making these progress payments, the Government shall, upon request,
reimburse the Contractor for the amount of premiums paid for performance and payment bonds (including
coinsurance and reinsurance agreements, when applicable) after the Contractor has furnished evidence of full
payment to the surety. The retainage provisions in paragraph (e) of this clause shall not apply to that portion of
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 84 of 148

progress payments attributable to bond premiums.

(h) Final payment. The Government shall pay the amount due the Contractor under this contract after--

(1) Completion and acceptance of all work;

(2) Presentation of a properly executed voucher; and

(3) Presentation of release of all claims against
the Government arising by virtue of this contract, other than claims, in stated amounts, that the Contractor has
specifically excepted from the operation of the release. A release may also be required of the assignee if the
Contractor's claim to amounts payable under this contract has been assigned under the Assignment of Claims Act of
1940 (31 U.S.C. 3727 and 41 U.S.C. 15).

(i) Limitation because of undefinitized work. Notwithstanding any provision of this contract, progress payments
shall not exceed 80 percent on work accomplished on undefinitized contract actions. A "contract action" is any
action resulting in a contract, as defined in FAR Subpart 2.1, including contract modifications for additional
supplies or services, but not including contract modifications that are within the scope and under the terms of the
contract, such as contract modifications issued pursuant to the Changes clause, or funding and other administrative
changes.

(j) Interest computation on unearned amounts. In accordance with 31 U.S.C. 3903(c)(1), the amount payable under
subparagraph (d)(2) of this clause shall be--

(1) Computed at the rate of average bond equivalent rates of 91-day Treasury bills auctioned at the most recent
auction of such bills prior to the date the Contractor receives the unearned amount; and

(2) Deducted from the next available payment to the Contractor.

(End of clause)

52.232-17 INTEREST (OCT 2010)

(a) Except as otherwise provided in this contract under a Price Reduction for Defective Certified Cost or Pricing
Data clause or a Cost Accounting Standards clause, all amounts that become payable by the Contractor to the
Government under this contract shall bear simple interest from the date due until paid unless paid within 30 days of
becoming due. The interest rate shall be the interest rate established by the Secretary of the Treasury as provided in
Section 611 of the Contract Disputes Act of 1978 (Public Law 95-563), which is applicable to the period in which
the amount becomes due, as provided in paragraph (e) of this clause, and then at the rate applicable for each six-
month period as fixed by the Secretary until the amount is paid.

(b) The Government may issue a demand for payment to the Contractor upon finding a debt is due under the
contract.

(c) Final Decisions. The Contracting Officer will issue a final decision as required by 33.211 if--

(1) The Contracting Officer and the Contractor are unable to reach agreement on the existence or amount of a debt
in a timely manner;

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 85 of 148

(2) The Contractor fails to liquidate a debt previously demanded by the Contracting Officer within the timeline
specified in the demand for payment unless the amounts were not repaid because the Contractor has requested an
installment payment agreement; or

(3) The Contractor requests a deferment of collection on a debt previously demanded by the Contracting Officer
(see 32.607-2).

(d) If a demand for payment was previously issued for the debt, the demand for payment included in the final
decision shall identify the same due date as the original demand for payment.

(e) Amounts shall be due at the earliest of the following dates:

(1) The date fixed under this contract.

(2) The date of the first written demand for payment, including any demand for payment resulting from a default
termination.

(f) The interest charge shall be computed for the actual number of calendar days involved beginning on the due date
and ending on--

(1) The date on which the designated office receives payment from the Contractor;

(2) The date of issuance of a Government check to the Contractor from which an amount otherwise payable has
been withheld as a credit against the contract debt; or

(3) The date on which an amount withheld and applied to the contract debt would otherwise have become payable to
the Contractor.

(g) The interest charge made under this clause may be reduced under the procedures prescribed in 32.608-2 of the
Federal Acquisition Regulation in effect on the date of this contract.

(End of clause)


52.232-18 AVAILABILITY OF FUNDS (APR 1984)

Funds are not presently available for this contract. The Government's obligation under this contract is contingent
upon the availability of appropriated funds from which payment for contract purposes can be made. No legal
liability on the part of the Government for any payment may arise until funds are made available to the Contracting
Officer for this contract and until the Contractor receives notice of such availability, to be confirmed in writing by
the Contracting Officer.

(End of clause)


W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 86 of 148

52.232-23 ASSIGNMENT OF CLAIMS (J AN 1986)

(a) The Contractor, under the Assignment of Claims Act, as amended, 31 U.S.C. 3727, 41 U.S.C. 15 (hereafter
referred to as "the Act"), may assign its rights to be paid amounts due or to become due as a result of the
performance of this contract to a bank, trust company, or other financing institution, including any Federal lending
agency. The assignee under such an assignment may thereafter further assign or reassign its right under the original
assignment to any type of financing institution described in the preceding sentence.

(b) Any assignment or reassignment authorized under the Act and this clause shall cover all unpaid amounts payable
under this contract, and shall not be made to more than one party, except that an assignment or reassignment may be
made to one party as agent or trustee for two or more parties participating in the financing of this contract.

(c) The Contractor shall not furnish or disclose to any assignee under this contract any classified document
(including this contract) or information related to work under this contract until the Contracting Officer authorizes
such action in writing.

(End of clause)


52.232-27 PROMPT PAYMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS (OCT 2008)

Notwithstanding any other payment terms in this contract, the Government will make invoice payments under the
terms and conditions specified in this clause. The Government considers payment as being made on the day a check
is dated or the date of an electronic funds transfer. Definitions of pertinent terms are set forth in sections 2.101,
32.001, and 32.902 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation. All days referred to in this clause are calendar days,
unless otherwise specified. (However, see paragraph (a)(3) concerning payments due on Saturdays, Sundays, and
legal holidays.)

(a) Invoice payments--(1) Types of invoice payments. For purposes of this clause, there are several types of invoice
payments that may occur under this contract, as follows:

(i) Progress payments, if provided for elsewhere in this contract, based on Contracting Officer approval of the
estimated amount and value of work or services performed, including payments for reaching milestones in any
project.

(A) The due date for making such payments is 14 days after the designated billing office receives a proper payment
request. If the designated billing office fails to annotate the payment request with the actual date of receipt at the
time of receipt, the payment due date is the 14th day after the date of the Contractor's payment request, provided the
designated billing office receives a proper payment request and there is no disagreement over quantity, quality, or
Contractor compliance with contract requirements.

(B) The due date for payment of any amounts retained by the Contracting Officer in accordance with the clause at
52.232-5, Payments Under Fixed-Price Construction Contracts, is as specified in the contract or, if not specified, 30
days after approval by the Contracting Officer for release to the Contractor.

(ii) Final payments based on completion and acceptance of all work and presentation of release of all claims against
the Government arising by virtue of the contract, and payments for partial deliveries that have been accepted by the
Government (e.g., each separate building, public work, or other division of the contract for which the price is stated
separately in the contract).
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 87 of 148

(A) The due date for making such payments is the later of the following two events:

(1) The 30th day after the designated billing office receives a proper invoice from the Contractor.

(2) The 30th day after Government acceptance of the work or services completed by the Contractor. For a final
invoice when the payment amount is subject to contract settlement actions (e.g., release of claims), acceptance is
deemed to occur on the effective date of the contract settlement.

(B) If the designated billing office fails to annotate the invoice with the date of actual receipt at the time of receipt,
the invoice payment due date is the 30th day after the date of the Contractor's invoice, provided the designated
billing office receives a proper invoice and there is no disagreement over quantity, quality, or Contractor
compliance with contract requirements.

(2) Contractor's invoice. The Contractor shall prepare and submit invoices to the designated billing office specified
in the contract. A proper invoice must include the items listed in paragraphs (a)(2)(i) through (a)(2)(xi) of this
clause. If the invoice does not comply with these requirements, the designated billing office must return it within 7
days after receipt, with the reasons why it is not a proper invoice. When computing any interest penalty owed the
Contractor, the Government will take into account if the Government notifies the Contractor of an improper invoice
in an untimely manner.

(i) Name and address of the Contractor.

(ii) Invoice date and invoice number. (The Contractor should date invoices as close as possible to the date of
mailing or transmission.)

(iii) Contract number or other authorization for work or services performed (including order number and contract
line item number).

(iv) Description of work or services performed.

(v) Delivery and payment terms (e.g., discount for prompt payment terms).

(vi) Name and address of Contractor official to whom payment is to be sent (must be the same as that in the contract
or in a proper notice of assignment).

(vii) Name (where practicable), title, phone number, and mailing address of person to notify in the event of a
defective invoice.

(viii) For payments described in paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this clause, substantiation of the amounts requested and
certification in accordance with the requirements of the clause at 52.232-5, Payments Under Fixed-Price
Construction Contracts.

(ix) Taxpayer Identification Number (TIN). The Contractor shall include its TIN on the invoice only if required
elsewhere in this contract.

(x) Electronic funds transfer (EFT) banking information.

(A) The Contractor shall include EFT banking information on the invoice only if required elsewhere in this contract.

(B) If EFT banking information is not required to be on the invoice, in order for the invoice to be a proper invoice,
the Contractor shall have submitted correct EFT banking information in accordance with the applicable solicitation
provision (e.g., 52.232-38, Submission of Electronic Funds Transfer Information with Offer), contract clause (e.g.,
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 88 of 148

52.232-33, Payment by Electronic Funds Transfer--Central Contractor Registration, or 52.232-34, Payment by
Electronic Funds Transfer--Other Than Central Contractor Registration), or applicable agency procedures.

(C) EFT banking information is not required if the Government waived the requirement to pay by EFT.

(xi) Any other information or documentation required by the contract.

(3) Interest penalty. The designated payment office will pay an interest penalty automatically, without request from
the Contractor, if payment is not made by the due date and the conditions listed in paragraphs (a)(3)(i) through
(a)(3)(iii) of this clause are met, if applicable. However, when the due date falls on a Saturday, Sunday, or legal
holiday, the designated payment office may make payment on the following working day without incurring a late
payment interest penalty.

(i) The designated billing office received a proper invoice.

(ii) The Government processed a receiving report or other Government documentation authorizing payment and
there was no disagreement over quantity, quality, Contractor compliance with any contract term or condition, or
requested progress payment amount.

(iii) In the case of a final invoice for any balance of funds due the Contractor for work or services performed, the
amount was not subject to further contract settlement actions between the Government and the Contractor.

(4) Computing penalty amount. The Government will compute the interest penalty in accordance with the Office of
Management and Budget prompt payment regulations at 5 CFR part 1315.

(i) For the sole purpose of computing an interest penalty that might be due the Contractor for payments described in
paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this clause, Government acceptance or approval is deemed to occur constructively on the 7th
day after the Contractor has completed the work or services in accordance with the terms and conditions of the
contract. If actual acceptance or approval occurs within the constructive acceptance or approval period, the
Government will base the determination of an interest penalty on the actual date of acceptance or approval.
Constructive acceptance or constructive approval requirements do not apply if there is a disagreement over quantity,
quality, or Contractor compliance with a contract provision. These requirements also do not compel Government
officials to accept work or services, approve Contractor estimates, perform contract administration functions, or
make payment prior to fulfilling their responsibilities.

(ii) The prompt payment regulations at 5 CFR 1315.10(c) do not require the Government to pay interest penalties if
payment delays are due to disagreement between the Government and the Contractor over the payment amount or
other issues involving contract compliance, or on amounts temporarily withheld or retained in accordance with the
terms of the contract. The Government and the Contractor shall resolve claims involving disputes, and any interest
that may be payable in accordance with the clause at FAR 52.233-1, Disputes.

(5) Discounts for prompt payment. The designated payment office will pay an interest penalty automatically,
without request from the Contractor, if the Government takes a discount for prompt payment improperly. The
Government will calculate the interest penalty in accordance with the prompt payment regulations at 5 CFR part
1315.

(6) Additional interest penalty. (i) The designated payment office will pay a penalty amount, calculated in
accordance with the prompt payment regulations at 5 CFR part 1315 in addition to the interest penalty amount only
if--

(A) The Government owes an interest penalty of $1 or more;

(B) The designated payment office does not pay the interest penalty within 10 days after the date the invoice amount
is paid; and
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 89 of 148

(C) The Contractor makes a written demand to the designated payment office for additional penalty payment, in
accordance with paragraph (a)(6)(ii) of this clause, postmarked not later than 40 days after the date the invoice
amount is paid.

(ii)(A) The Contractor shall support written demands for additional penalty payments with the following data. The
Government will not request any additional data. The Contractor shall--

(1) Specifically assert that late payment interest is due under a specific invoice, and request payment of all overdue
late payment interest penalty and such additional penalty as may be required;

(2) Attach a copy of the invoice on which the unpaid late payment interest was due; and

(3) State that payment of the principal has been received, including the date of receipt.

(B) If there is no postmark or the postmark is illegible--

(1) The designated payment office that receives the demand will annotate it with the date of receipt provided the
demand is received on or before the 40th day after payment was made; or

(2) If the designated payment office fails to make the required annotation, the Government will determine the
demand's validity based on the date the Contractor has placed on the demand, provided such date is no later than the
40th day after payment was made.

(b) Contract financing payments. If this contract provides for contract financing, the Government will make contract
financing payments in accordance with the applicable contract financing clause.

(c) Subcontract clause requirements. The Contractor shall include in each subcontract for property or services
(including a material supplier) for the purpose of performing this contract the following:

(1) Prompt payment for subcontractors. A payment clause that obligates the Contractor to pay the subcontractor for
satisfactory performance under its subcontract not later than 7 days from receipt of payment out of such amounts as
are paid to the Contractor under this contract.

(2) Interest for subcontractors. An interest penalty clause that obligates the Contractor to pay to the subcontractor an
interest penalty for each payment not made in accordance with the payment clause--

(i) For the period beginning on the day after the required payment date and ending on the date on which payment of
the amount due is made; and

(ii) Computed at the rate of interest established by the Secretary of the Treasury, and published in the Federal
Register, for interest payments under section 12 of the Contract Disputes Act of 1978 (41 U.S.C. 611) in effect at
the time the Contractor accrues the obligation to pay an interest penalty.

(3) Subcontractor clause flowdown. A clause requiring each subcontractor to use:

(i) Include a payment clause and an interest penalty clause conforming to the standards set forth in paragraphs (c)(1)
and (c)(2) of this clause in each of its subcontracts; and

(ii) Require each of its subcontractors to include such clauses in their subcontracts with each lower-tier
subcontractor or supplier.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 90 of 148

(d) Subcontract clause interpretation. The clauses required by paragraph (c) of this clause shall not be construed to
impair the right of the Contractor or a subcontractor at any tier to negotiate, and to include in their subcontract,
provisions that--

(1) Retainage permitted. Permit the Contractor or a subcontractor to retain (without cause) a specified percentage of
each progress payment otherwise due to a subcontractor for satisfactory performance under the subcontract without
incurring any obligation to pay a late payment interest penalty, in accordance with terms and conditions agreed to
by the parties to the subcontract, giving such recognition as the parties deem appropriate to the ability of a
subcontractor to furnish a performance bond and a payment bond;

(2) Withholding permitted. Permit the Contractor or subcontractor to make a determination that part or all of the
subcontractor's request for payment may be withheld in accordance with the subcontract agreement; and

(3) Withholding requirements. Permit such withholding without incurring any obligation to pay a late payment
penalty if--

(i) A notice conforming to the standards of paragraph (g) of this clause previously has been furnished to the
subcontractor; and

(ii) The Contractor furnishes to the Contracting Officer a copy of any notice issued by a Contractor pursuant to
paragraph (d)(3)(i) of this clause.

(e) Subcontractor withholding procedures. If a Contractor, after making a request for payment to the Government
but before making a payment to a subcontractor for the subcontractor's performance covered by the payment
request, discovers that all or a portion of the payment otherwise due such subcontractor is subject to withholding
from the subcontractor in accordance with the subcontract agreement, then the Contractor shall--

(1) Subcontractor notice. Furnish to the subcontractor a notice conforming to the standards of paragraph (g) of this
clause as soon as practicable upon ascertaining the cause giving rise to a withholding, but prior to the due date for
subcontractor payment;

(2) Contracting Officer notice. Furnish to the Contracting Officer, as soon as practicable, a copy of the notice
furnished to the subcontractor pursuant to paragraph (e)(1) of this clause;

(3) Subcontractor progress payment reduction. Reduce the subcontractor's progress payment by an amount not to
exceed the amount specified in the notice of withholding furnished under paragraph (e)(1) of this clause;

(4) Subsequent subcontractor payment. Pay the subcontractor as soon as practicable after the correction of the
identified subcontract performance deficiency, and--

(i) Make such payment within--

(A) Seven days after correction of the identified subcontract performance deficiency (unless the funds therefor must
be recovered from the Government because of a reduction under paragraph
(e)(5)(i)) of this clause; or

(B) Seven days after the Contractor recovers such funds from the Government; or

(ii) Incur an obligation to pay a late payment interest penalty computed at the rate of interest established by the
Secretary of the Treasury, and published in the Federal Register, for interest payments under section 12 of the
Contracts Disputes Act of 1978 (41 U.S.C. 611) in effect at the time the Contractor accrues the obligation to pay an
interest penalty;

(5) Notice to Contracting Officer. Notify the Contracting Officer upon--
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 91 of 148

(i) Reduction of the amount of any subsequent certified application for payment; or

(ii) Payment to the subcontractor of any withheld amounts of a progress payment, specifying--

(A) The amounts withheld under paragraph (e)(1) of this clause; and

(B) The dates that such withholding began and ended; and

(6) Interest to Government. Be obligated to pay to the Government an amount equal to interest on the withheld
payments (computed in the manner provided in 31 U.S.C. 3903(c)(1)), from the 8th day after receipt of the withheld
amounts from the Government until--

(i) The day the identified subcontractor performance deficiency is corrected; or

(ii) The date that any subsequent payment is reduced under paragraph (e)(5)(i) of this clause.

(f) Third-party deficiency reports

(1) Withholding from subcontractor. If a Contractor, after making payment to a first-tier subcontractor, receives
from a supplier or subcontractor of the first-tier subcontractor (hereafter referred to as a second-tier
subcontractor) a written notice in accordance with the Miller Act (40 U.S.C. 3133), asserting a deficiency in such
first-tier subcontractor's performance under the contract for which the Contractor may be ultimately liable, and the
Contractor determines that all or a portion of future payments otherwise due such first-tier subcontractor is subject
to withholding in accordance with the subcontract agreement, the Contractor may, without incurring an obligation to
pay an interest penalty under paragraph (e)(6) of this clause--

(i) Furnish to the first-tier subcontractor a notice conforming to the standards of paragraph (g) of this clause as soon
as practicable upon making such determination; and

(ii) Withhold from the first-tier subcontractor's next available progress payment or payments an amount not to
exceed the amount specified in the notice of withholding furnished under paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this clause.

(2) Subsequent payment or interest charge. As soon as practicable, but not later than 7 days after receipt of
satisfactory written notification that the identified subcontract performance deficiency has been corrected, the
Contractor shall--

(i) Pay the amount withheld under paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this clause to such first-tier subcontractor; or

(ii) Incur an obligation to pay a late payment interest penalty to such first-tier subcontractor computed at the rate of
interest established by the Secretary of the Treasury, and published in the Federal Register, for interest payments
under section 12 of the Contracts DisputesAct of 1978 (41 U.S.C. 611) in effect at the time the Contractor accrues
the obligation to pay an interest penalty.

(g) Written notice of subcontractor withholding. The Contractor shall issue a written notice of any withholding to a
subcontractor (with a copy furnished to the Contracting Officer), specifying--

(1) The amount to be withheld;

(2) The specific causes for the withholding under the terms of the subcontract; and

(3) The remedial actions to be taken by the subcontractor in order to receive payment of the amounts withheld.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 92 of 148

(h) Subcontractor payment entitlement. The Contractor may not request payment from the Government of any
amount withheld or retained in accordance with paragraph (d) of this clause until such time as the Contractor has
determined and certified to the Contracting Officer that the subcontractor is entitled to the payment of such amount.

(i) Prime-subcontractor disputes. A dispute between the Contractor and subcontractor relating to the amount or
entitlement of a subcontractor to a payment or a late payment interest penalty under a clause included in the
subcontract pursuant to paragraph (c) of this clause does not constitute a dispute to which the Government is a
party. The Government may not be interpleaded in any judicial or administrative proceeding involving such a
dispute.

(j) Preservation of prime-subcontractor rights. Except as provided in paragraph (i) of this clause, this clause shall
not limit or impair any contractual, administrative, or judicial remedies otherwise available to the Contractor or a
subcontractor in the event of a dispute involving late payment or nonpayment by the Contractor or deficient
subcontract performance or nonperformance by a subcontractor.

(k) Non-recourse for prime contractor interest penalty. The Contractor's obligation to pay an interest penalty to a
subcontractor pursuant to the clauses included in a subcontract under paragraph (c) of this clause shall not be
construed to be an obligation of the Government for such interest penalty. A cost-reimbursement claim may not
include any amount for reimbursement of such interest penalty.

(l) Overpayments. If the Contractor becomes aware of a duplicate contract financing or invoice payment or that the
Government has otherwise overpaid on a contract financing or invoice payment, the Contractor shall--

(1) Remit the overpayment amount to the payment office cited in the contract along with a description of the
overpayment including the--

(i) Circumstances of the overpayment (e.g., duplicate payment, erroneous payment, liquidation errors, date(s) of
overpayment);

(ii) Affected contract number and delivery order number if applicable;

(iii) Affected contract line item or subline item, if applicable; and

(iv) Contractor point of contact.

(2) Provide a copy of the remittance and supporting documentation to the Contracting Officer.

(End of clause)


52.232-33 PAYMENT BY ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFERCENTRAL CONTRACTOR
REGISTRATION (OCT 2003)

(a) Method of payment. (1) All payments by the Government under this contract shall be made by electronic funds
transfer (EFT), except as provided in paragraph (a)(2) of this clause. As used in this clause, the term EFT refers to
the funds transfer and may also include the payment information transfer.

(2) In the event the Government is unable to release one or more payments by EFT, the Contractor agrees to either--
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 93 of 148

(i) Accept payment by check or some other mutually agreeable method of payment; or

(ii) Request the Government to extend the payment due date until such time as the Government can make payment
by EFT (but see paragraph (d) of this clause).

(b) Contractor's EFT information. The Government shall make payment to the Contractor using the EFT
information contained in the Central Contractor Registration (CCR) database. In the event that the EFT information
changes, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing the updated information to the CCR database.

(c) Mechanisms for EFT payment. The Government may make payment by EFT through either the Automated
Clearing House (ACH) network, subject to the rules of the National Automated Clearing House Association, or the
Fedwire Transfer System. The rules governing Federal payments through the ACH are contained in 31 CFR part
210.

(d) Suspension of payment. If the Contractor's EFT information in the CCR database is incorrect, then the
Government need not make payment to the Contractor under this contract until correct EFT information is entered
into the CCR database; and any invoice or contract financing request shall be deemed not to be a proper invoice for
the purpose of prompt payment under this contract. The prompt payment terms of the contract regarding notice of
an improper invoice and delays in accrual of interest penalties apply.

(e) Liability for uncompleted or erroneous transfers. (1) If an uncompleted or erroneous transfer occurs because the
Government used the Contractor's EFT information incorrectly, the Government remains responsible for--

(i) Making a correct payment;

(ii) Paying any prompt payment penalty due; and

(iii) Recovering any erroneously directed funds.

(2) If an uncompleted or erroneous transfer occurs because the Contractor's EFT information was incorrect, or was
revised within 30 days of Government release of the EFT payment transaction instruction to the Federal Reserve
System, and--

(i) If the funds are no longer under the control of the payment office, the Government is deemed to have made
payment and the Contractor is responsible for recovery of any erroneously directed funds; or

(ii) If the funds remain under the control of the payment office, the Government shall not make payment, and the
provisions of paragraph (d) of this clause shall apply.

(f) EFT and prompt payment. A payment shall be deemed to have been made in a timely manner in accordance with
the prompt payment terms of this contract if, in the EFT payment transaction instruction released to the Federal
Reserve System, the date specified for settlement of the payment is on or before the prompt payment due date,
provided the specified payment date is a valid date under the rules of the Federal Reserve System.

(g) EFT and assignment of claims. If the Contractor assigns the proceeds of this contract as provided for in the
assignment of claims terms of this contract, the Contractor shall require as a condition of any such assignment, that
the assignee shall register separately in the CCR database and shall be paid by EFT in accordance with the terms of
this clause. Notwithstanding any other requirement of this contract, payment to an ultimate recipient other than the
Contractor, or a financial institution properly recognized under an assignment of claims pursuant to subpart 32.8, is
not permitted. In all respects, the requirements of this clause shall apply to the assignee as if it were the Contractor.
EFT information that shows the ultimate recipient of the transfer to be other than the Contractor, in the absence of a
proper assignment of claims acceptable to the Government, is incorrect EFT information within the meaning of
paragraph (d) of this clause.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 94 of 148

(h) Liability for change of EFT information by financial agent. The Government is not liable for errors resulting
from changes to EFT information made by the Contractor's financial agent.

(i) Payment information. The payment or disbursing office shall forward to the Contractor available payment
information that is suitable for transmission as of the date of release of the EFT instruction to the Federal Reserve
System. The Government may request the Contractor to designate a desired format and method(s) for delivery of
payment information from a list of formats and methods the payment office is capable of executing. However, the
Government does not guarantee that any particular format or method of delivery is available at any particular
payment office and retains the latitude to use the format and delivery method most convenient to the Government. If
the Government makes payment by check in accordance with paragraph (a) of this clause, the Government shall
mail the payment information to the remittance address contained in the CCR database.

(End of Clause)

52.233-1 DISPUTES. (J UL 2002)

(a) This contract is subject to the Contract Disputes Act of 1978, as amended (41 U.S.C. 601-613).

(b) Except as provided in the Act, all disputes arising under or relating to this contract shall be resolved under this
clause.

(c) Claim, as used in this clause, means a written demand or written assertion by one of the contracting parties
seeking, as a matter of right, the payment of money in a sum certain, the adjustment or interpretation of contract
terms, or other relief arising under or relating to this contract. However, a written demand or written assertion by the
Contractor seeking the payment of money exceeding $100,000 is not a claim under the Act until certified. A
voucher, invoice, or other routine request for payment that is not in dispute when submitted is not a claim under the
Act. The submission may be converted to a claim under the Act, by complying with the submission and certification
requirements of this clause, if it is disputed either as to liability or amount or is not acted upon in a reasonable time.

(d)(1) A claim by the Contractor shall be made in writing and, unless otherwise stated in this contract, submitted
within 6 years after accrual of the claim to the Contracting Officer for a written decision. A claim by the
Government against the Contractor shall be subject to a written decision by the Contracting Officer.

(2)(i) The Contractor shall provide the certification specified in paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of this clause when submitting
any claim exceeding $100,000.

(ii) The certification requirement does not apply to issues in controversy that have not been submitted as all or part
of a claim.

(iii) The certification shall state as follows: I certify that the claim is made in good faith; that the supporting data
are accurate and complete to the best of my knowledge and belief; that the amount requested accurately reflects the
contract adjustment for which the Contractor believes the Government is liable; and that I am duly authorized to
certify the claim on behalf of the Contractor.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 95 of 148

(3) The certification may be executed by any person duly authorized to bind the Contractor with respect to the
claim.

(e) For Contractor claims of $100,000 or less, the Contracting Officer must, if requested in writing by the
Contractor, render a decision within 60 days of the request. For Contractor-certified claims over $100,000, the
Contracting Officer must, within 60 days, decide the claim or notify the Contractor of the date by which the
decision will be made.

(f) The Contracting Officers decision shall be final unless the Contractor appeals or files a suit as provided in the
Act.

(g) If the claim by the Contractor is submitted to the Contracting Officer or a claim by the Government is presented
to the Contractor, the parties, by mutual consent, may agree to use alternative dispute resolution (ADR). If the
Contractor refuses an offer for ADR, the Contractor shall inform the Contracting Officer, in writing, of the
Contractors specific reasons for rejecting the offer.

(h) The Government shall pay interest on the amount found due and unpaid from (1) the date that the Contracting
Officer receives the claim (certified, if required); or (2) the date that payment otherwise would be due, if that date is
later, until the date of payment. With regard to claims having defective certifications, as defined in FAR 33.201,
interest shall be paid from the date that the Contracting Officer initially receives the claim. Simple interest on claims
shall be paid at the rate, fixed by the Secretary of the Treasury as provided in the Act, which is applicable to the
period during which the Contracting Officer receives the claim and then at the rate applicable for each 6-month
period as fixed by the Treasury Secretary during the pendency of the claim.

(i) The Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of this contract, pending final resolution of any request
for relief, claim, appeal, or action arising under the contract, and comply with any decision of the Contracting
Officer.
(End of clause)


52.233-3 PROTEST AFTER AWARD (AUG. 1996)

(a) Upon receipt of a notice of protest (as defined in FAR 33.101) or a determination that a protest is likely (see
FAR 33.102(d)), the Contracting Officer may, by written order to the Contractor, direct the Contractor to stop
performance of the work called for by this contract. The order shall be specifically identified as a stop-work order
issued under this clause. Upon receipt of the order, the Contractor shall immediately comply with its terms and take
all reasonable steps to minimize the incurrence of costs allocable to the work covered by the order during the period
of work stoppage. Upon receipt of the final decision in the protest, the Contracting Officer shall either--

(1) Cancel the stop-work order; or

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 96 of 148

(2) Terminate the work covered by the order as provided in the Default, or the Termination for Convenience of the
Government, clause of this contract.

(b) If a stop-work order issued under this clause is canceled either before or after a final decision in the protest, the
Contractor shall resume work. The Contracting Officer shall make an equitable adjustment in the delivery schedule
or contract price, or both, and the contract shall be modified, in writing, accordingly, if--

(1) The stop-work order results in an increase in the time required for, or in the Contractor's cost properly allocable
to, the performance of any part of this contract; and

(2) The Contractor asserts its right to an adjustment within 30 days after the end of the period of work stoppage;
provided, that if the Contracting Officer decides the facts justify the action, the Contracting Officer may receive and
act upon a proposal at any time before final payment under this contract.

(c) If a stop-work order is not canceled and the work covered by the order is terminated for the convenience of the
Government, the Contracting Officer shall allow reasonable costs resulting from the stop-work order in arriving at
the termination settlement.

(d) If a stop-work order is not canceled and the work covered by the order is terminated for default, the Contracting
Officer shall allow, by equitable adjustment or otherwise, reasonable costs resulting from the stop-work order.

(e) The Government's rights to terminate this contract at any time are not affected by action taken under this clause.

(f) If, as the result of the Contractor's intentional or negligent misstatement, misrepresentation, or miscertification, a
protest related to this contract is sustained, and the Government pays costs, as provided in FAR 33.102(b)(2) or
33.104(h)(1), the Government may require the Contractor to reimburse the Government the amount of such costs. In
addition to any other remedy available, and pursuant to the requirements of Subpart 32.6, the Government may
collect this debt by offsetting the amount against any payment due the Contractor under any contract between the
Contractor and the Government.

(End of clause)


52.233-4 APPLICABLE LAW FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT CLAIM (OCT 2004)

United States law will apply to resolve any claim of breach of this contract.

(End of clause)


52.236-9 PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, UTILITIES, AND
IMPROVEMENTS (APR 1984)

(a) The Contractor shall preserve and protect all structures, equipment, and vegetation (such as trees, shrubs, and
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 97 of 148

grass) on or adjacent to the work site, which are not to be removed and which do not unreasonably interfere with the
work required under this contract. The Contractor shall only remove trees when specifically authorized to do so, and
shall avoid damaging vegetation that will remain in place. If any limbs or branches of trees are broken during
contract performance, or by the careless operation of equipment, or by workmen, the Contractor shall trim those
limbs or branches with a clean cut and paint the cut with a tree-pruning compound as directed by the Contracting
Officer.

(b) The Contractor shall protect from damage all existing improvements and utilities

(1) at or near the work site, and

(2) on adjacent property of a third party, the locations of which are made known to or should be known by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall repair any damage to those facilities, including those that are the property of a
third party, resulting from failure to comply with the requirements of this contract or failure to exercise reasonable
care in performing the work. If the Contractor fails or refuses to repair the damage promptly, the Contracting
Officer may have the necessary work performed and charge the cost to the Contractor.

(End of clause)


52.242-13 BANKRUPTCY (J UL 1995)

In the event the Contractor enters into proceedings relating to bankruptcy, whether voluntary or involuntary, the
Contractor agrees to furnish, by certified mail or electronic commerce method authorized by the contract, written
notification of the bankruptcy to the Contracting Officer responsible for administering the contract. This
notification shall be furnished within five days of the initiation of the proceedings relating to bankruptcy filing.
This notification shall include the date on which the bankruptcy petition was filed, the identity of the court in which
the bankruptcy petition was filed, and a listing of Government contract numbers and contracting offices for all
Government contracts against which final payment has not been made. This obligation remains in effect until final
payment under this contract.

(End of clause)


52.243-4 CHANGES (J UN 2007)

(a) The Contracting Officer may, at any time, without notice to the sureties, if any, by written order designated or
indicated to be a change order, make changes in the work within the general scope of the contract, including
changes--

(1) In the specifications (including drawings and designs);

(2) In the method or manner of performance of the work;

(3) In the Government-furnished property or services; or
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 98 of 148

(4) Directing acceleration in the performance of the work.

(b) Any other written or oral order (which, as used in this paragraph (b), includes direction, instruction,
interpretation, or determination) from the Contracting Officer that causes a change shall be treated as a change order
under this clause; provided, that the Contractor gives the Contracting Officer written notice stating

(1) the date, circumstances, and source of the order and

(2) that the Contractor regards the order as a change order.

(c) Except as provided in this clause, no order, statement, or conduct of the Contracting Officer shall be treated as a
change under this clause or entitle the Contractor to an equitable adjustment.

(d) If any change under this clause causes an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or the time required
for, the performance of any part of the work under this contract, whether or not changed by any such order, the
Contracting Officer shall make an equitable adjustment and modify the contract in writing. However, except for an
adjustment based on defective specifications, no adjustment for any change under paragraph (b) of this clause shall
be made for any costs incurred more than 20 days before the Contractor gives written notice as required. In the case
of defective specifications for which the Government is responsible, the equitable adjustment shall include any
increased cost reasonably incurred by the Contractor in attempting to comply with the defective specifications.

(e) The Contractor must assert its right to an adjustment under this clause within 30 days after

(1) receipt of a written change order under paragraph (a) of this clause or (2) the furnishing of a written notice under
paragraph (b) of this clause, by submitting to the Contracting Officer a written statement describing the general
nature and amount of the proposal, unless this period is extended by the Government. The statement of proposal for
adjustment may be included in the notice under paragraph (b) above.

(f) No proposal by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment shall be allowed if asserted after final payment under
this contract.

(End of clause)

52.244-6 SUBCONTRACTS FOR COMMERCIAL ITEMS (DEC 2010)

(a) Definitions.

"Commercial item", has the meaning contained in Federal Acquisition Regulation 2.101, Definitions.

"Subcontract", includes a transfer of commercial items between divisions, subsidiaries, or affiliates of the
Contractor or subcontractor at any tier.

(b) To the maximum extent practicable, the Contractor shall incorporate, and require its subcontractors at all tiers to
incorporate, commercial items or nondevelopmental items as components of items to be supplied under this
contract.

(c) (1) The Contractor shall insert the following clauses in subcontracts for commercial items:

(i) 52.203-13, Contractor Code of Business Ethics and Conduct (APR 2010) (Pub. L. 110-252, Title VI, Chapter 1
(41 U.S.C. 251 note)), if the subcontract exceeds $5,000,000 and has a performance period of ore
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 99 of 148

than 120 days. In altering this clause to identify the appropriate parties, all disclosures of violation of the civil False
Claims Act or of Federal criminal law shall be directed to the agency Office of the Inspector General, with a copy to

(ii) 52.203-15, Whistleblower Protections Under the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (J UN
2010) (Section 1553 of Pub. L. 111-5), if the subcontract is funded under the Recovery Act.

(iii) 52.219-8, Utilization of Small Business Concerns (Dec 2010) (15 U.S.C. 637(d)(2) and (3)), if the subcontract
offers further subcontracting opportunities. If the subcontract (except subcontracts to small business concerns)
exceeds $650,000 ($1.5 million for construction of any public facility), the subcontractor must include 52.219-8 in
lower tier subcontracts that offer subcontracting opportunities.

(iv) 52.222-26, Equal Opportunity (MAR 2007) (E.O. 11246).

(v) 52.222-35, Equal Opportunity for Veterans (SEP 2010) (38 U.S.C. 4212(a));

(vi) 52.222-36, Affirmative Action for Workers with Disabilities (OCT 2010) (29 U.S.C. 793).

(vii) 52.222-40, Notification of Employee Rights Under the National Labor Relations Act (DEC 2010) (E.O.
13496), if flow down is required in accordance with paragraph (f) of FAR clause 52.222-40.

(viii) 52.222-50, Combating Trafficking in Persons (FEB 2009) (22 U.S.C. 7104(g)).

(ix) 52.247-64, Preference for Privately Owned U.S.-Flag Commercial Vessels (Feb 2006) (46 U.S.C. App. 1241
and 10 U.S.C. 2631), if flow down is required in accordance with paragraph (d) of FAR clause 52.247-64.

(2) While not required, the Contractor may flow down to subcontracts for commercial items a minimal number of
additional clauses necessary to satisfy its contractual obligations.

(d) The Contractor shall include the terms of this clause, including this paragraph (d), in subcontracts awarded
under this contract.

(End of clause)


52.247-63 PREFERENCE FOR U.S.-FLAG AIR CARRIERS (J UN 2003)


International air transportation means transportation by air between a place in the United States and a place outside
the United States or between two places both of which are outside the United States.


U.S.-flag air carrier means an air carrier holding a certificate under 49 U.S.C. Chapter 411.

(b) Section 5 of the International Air Transportation Fair Competitive Practices Act of 1974 (49 U.S.C. 40118) (Fly
America Act) requires that all Federal agencies and Government contractors and subcontractors use U.S.-flag air
carriers for U.S. Government-financed international air transportation of personnel (and their personal effects) or
property, to the extent that service by those carriers is available. It requires the Comptroller General of the United
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 100 of 148

States, in the absence of satisfactory proof of the necessity for foreign-flag air transportation, to disallow
expenditures from funds, appropriated or otherwise established for the account of the United States, for
international air transportation secured aboard a foreign-flag air carrier if a U.S.-flag air carrier is available to
provide such services.

(c) If available, the Contractor, in performing work under this contract, shall use U.S.-flag carriers for international
air transportation of personnel (and their personal effects) or property.

(d) In the event that the Contractor selects a carrier other than a U.S.-flag air carrier for international air
transportation, the Contractor shall include a statement on vouchers involving such transportation essentially as
follows:

STATEMENT OF UNAVAILABILITY OF U.S.-FLAG AIR CARRIERS

International air transportation of persons (and their personal effects) or property by U.S.-flag air carrier was not
available or it was necessary to use foreign-flag air carrier service for the following reasons (see section 47.403 of
the Federal Acquisition Regulation): [State reasons]: ________________

(End of statement)

(e) The Contractor shall include the substance of this clause, including this paragraph (e), in each subcontract or
purchase under this contract that may involve international air transportation.

(End of clause)


52.247-64 PREFERENCE FOR PRIVATELY OWNED U.S. - FLAG COMMERCIAL VESSELS (FEB 2006)

(a) Except as provided in paragraph (e) of this clause, the Cargo Preference Act of 1954 (46 U.S.C. Appx 1241(b))
requires that Federal departments and agencies shall transport in privately owned U.S.-flag commercial vessels at
least 50 percent of the gross tonnage of equipment, materials, or commodities that may be transported in ocean
vessels (computed separately for dry bulk carriers, dry cargo liners, and tankers). Such transportation shall be
accomplished when any equipment, materials, or commodities, located within or outside the United States, that may
be transported by ocean vessel are--

(1) Acquired for a U.S. Government agency account;

(2) Furnished to, or for the account of, any foreign nation without provision for reimbursement;

(3) Furnished for the account of a foreign nation in connection with which the United States advances funds or
credits, or guarantees the convertibility of foreign currencies; or

(4) Acquired with advance of funds, loans, or guaranties made by or on behalf of the United States.

(b) The Contractor shall use privately owned U.S.-flag commercial vessels to ship at least 50 percent of the gross
tonnage involved under this contract (computed separately for dry bulk carriers, dry cargo liners, and tankers)
whenever shipping any equipment, materials, or commodities under the conditions set forth in paragraph (a) above,
to the extent that such vessels are available at rates that are fair and reasonable for privately owned U.S.-flag
commercial vessels.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 101 of 148

(c)(1) The Contractor shall submit one legible copy of a rated on-board ocean bill of lading for each shipment to
both (i) the Contracting Officer, and (ii) the Division of National Cargo, Office of Market Development, Maritime
Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC 20590. Subcontractor bills of lading shall be
submitted through the Prime Contractor.

(2) The Contractor shall furnish these bill of lading copies (i) within 20 working days of the date of loading for
shipments originating in the United States, or (ii) within 30 working days for shipments originating outside the
United States. Each bill of lading copy shall contain the following information:

(A) Sponsoring U.S. Government agency.

(B) Name of vessel.

(C) Vessel flag of registry.

(D) Date of loading.

(E) Port of loading.

(F) Port of final discharge.

(G) Description of commodity.

(H) Gross weight in pounds and cubic feet if available.

(I) Total ocean freight revenue in U.S. dollars.

(d) The Contractor shall insert the substance of this clause, including this paragraph (d), in all subcontracts or
purchase orders under this contract, except those described in paragraph (e)(4).

(e) The requirement in paragraph (a) does not apply to--

(1) Cargoes carried in vessels as required or authorized by law or treaty;

(2) Ocean transportation between foreign countries of supplies purchased with foreign currencies made available, or
derived from funds that are made available, under the Foreign Assistance Act of 1961 (22 U.S.C. 2353);

(3) Shipments of classified supplies when the classification prohibits the use of non-Government vessels, and

(4) Subcontracts or purchase orders for the acquisition of commercial items unless--

(i) This contract is--

(A) A contract or agreement for ocean transportation services; or

(B) A construction contract; or

(ii) The supplies being transported are--

(A) Items the Contractor is reselling or distributing to the Government without adding value. (Generally, the
Contractor does not add value to the items when it subcontracts items for f.o.b. destination shipment); or

(B) Shipped in direct support of U.S. military--
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 102 of 148

(1) Contingency operations;

(2) Exercises; or

(3) Forces deployed in connection with United Nations or North Atlantic Treaty Organization humanitarian or
peacekeeping operations.

(f) Guidance regarding fair and reasonable rates for privately owned U.S.-flag commercial vessels may be obtained
from the Division of National Cargo, Office of Costs and Rates, Maritime Administration, 400 Seventh Street, SW,
Washington, DC 20590, Phone: 202-366-4610.

(End of clause)


52.249-2 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE OF THE GOVERNMENT (FIXED-PRICE) (APR 2012)

(a) The Government may terminate performance of work under this contract in whole or, from time to time, in part
if the Contracting Officer determines that a termination is in the Government's interest. The Contracting Officer
shall terminate by delivering to the Contractor a Notice of Termination specifying the extent of termination and the
effective date.

(b) After receipt of a Notice of Termination, and except as directed by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall
immediately proceed with the following obligations, regardless of any delay in determining or adjusting any
amounts due under this clause:

(1) Stop work as specified in the notice.

(2) Place no further subcontracts or orders (referred to as subcontracts in this clause) for materials, services, or
facilities, except as necessary to complete the continued portion of the contract.

(3) Terminate all subcontracts to the extent they relate to the work terminated.

(4) Assign to the Government, as directed by the Contracting Officer, all right, title, and interest of the Contractor
under the subcontracts terminated, in which case the Government shall have the right to settle or to pay any
termination settlement proposal arising out of those terminations.

(5) With approval or ratification to the extent required by the Contracting Officer, settle all outstanding liabilities
and termination settlement proposals arising from the termination of subcontracts; the approval or ratification will
be final for purposes of this clause.

(6) As directed by the Contracting Officer, transfer title and deliver to the Government (i) the fabricated or
unfabricated parts, work in process, completed work, supplies, and other material produced or acquired for the work
terminated, and (ii) the completed or partially completed plans, drawings, information, and other property that, if the
contract had been completed, would be required to be furnished to the Government.

(7) Complete performance of the work not terminated.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 103 of 148

(8) Take any action that may be necessary, or that the Contracting Officer may direct, for the protection and
preservation of the property related to this contract that is in the possession of the Contractor and in which the
Government has or may acquire an interest.

(9) Use its best efforts to sell, as directed or authorized by the Contracting Officer, any property of the types
referred to in subparagraph (b)(6) of this clause; provided, however, that the Contractor (i) is not required to extend
credit to any purchaser and (ii) may acquire the property under the conditions prescribed by, and at prices approved
by, the Contracting Officer. The proceeds of any transfer or disposition will be applied to reduce any payments to be
made by the Government under this contract, credited to the price or cost of the work, or paid in any other manner
directed by the Contracting Officer.

(c) The Contractor shall submit complete termination inventory schedules no later than 120 days from the effective
date of termination, unless extended in writing by the Contracting Officer upon written request of the Contractor
within this 120-day period.

(d) After expiration of the plant clearance period as defined in Subpart 49.001 of the Federal Acquisition
Regulation, the Contractor may submit to the Contracting Officer a list, certified as to quantity and quality, of
termination inventory not previously disposed of, excluding items authorized for disposition by the Contracting
Officer. The Contractor may request the Government to remove those items or enter into an agreement for their
storage. Within 15 days, the Government will accept title to those items and remove them or enter into a storage
agreement. The Contracting Officer may verify the list upon removal of the items, or if stored, within 45 days from
submission of the list, and shall correct the list, as necessary, before final settlement.

(e) After termination, the Contractor shall submit a final termination settlement proposal to the Contracting Officer
in the form and with the certification prescribed by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall submit the
proposal promptly, but no later than 1 year from the effective date of termination, unless extended in writing by the
Contracting Officer upon written request of the Contractor within this 1-year period. However, if the Contracting
Officer determines that the facts justify it, a termination settlement proposal may be received and acted on after 1
year or any extension. If the Contractor fails to submit the proposal within the time allowed, the Contracting Officer
may determine, on the basis of information available, the amount, if any, due the Contractor because of the
termination and shall pay the amount determined.

(f) Subject to paragraph (e) of this clause, the Contractor and the Contracting Officer may agree upon the whole or
any part of the amount to be paid or remaining to be paid because of the termination. The amount may include a
reasonable allowance for profit on work done. However, the agreed amount, whether under this paragraph (g) or
paragraph (g) of this clause, exclusive of costs shown in subparagraph (g)(3) of this clause, may not exceed the total
contract price as reduced by (1) the amount of payments previously made and (2) the contract price of work not
terminated. The contract shall be modified, and the Contractor paid the agreed amount. Paragraph (g) of this clause
shall not limit, restrict, or affect the amount that may be agreed upon to be paid under this paragraph.

(g) If the Contractor and the Contracting Officer fail to agree on the whole amount to be paid because of the
termination of work, the Contracting Officer shall pay the Contractor the amounts determined by the Contracting
Officer as follows, but without duplication of any amounts agreed on under paragraph (f) of this clause:

(1) The contract price for completed supplies or services accepted by the Government (or sold or acquired under
subparagraph (b)(9) of this clause) not previously paid for, adjusted for any saving of freight and other charges.

(2) The total of--

(i) The costs incurred in the performance of the work terminated, including initial costs and preparatory expense
allocable thereto, but excluding any costs attributable to supplies or services paid or to be paid under subparagraph
(f)(1) of this clause;

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 104 of 148

(ii) The cost of settling and paying termination settlement proposals under terminated subcontracts that are properly
chargeable to the terminated portion of the contract if not included in subdivision (g)(2)(i) of this clause; and

(iii) A sum, as profit on subdivision (g)(2)(i) of this clause, determined by the Contracting Officer under 49.202 of
the Federal Acquisition Regulation, in effect on the date of this contract, to be fair and reasonable; however, if it
appears that the Contractor would have sustained a loss on the entire contract had it been completed, the Contracting
Officer shall allow no profit under this subdivision (iii) and shall reduce the settlement to reflect the indicated rate
of loss.

(3) The reasonable costs of settlement of the work terminated, including--

(i) Accounting, legal, clerical, and other expenses reasonably necessary for the preparation of termination settlement
proposals and supporting data;

(ii) The termination and settlement of subcontracts (excluding the amounts of such settlements); and

(iii) Storage, transportation, and other costs incurred, reasonably necessary for the preservation, protection, or
disposition of the termination inventory.

(h) Except for normal spoilage, and except to the extent that the Government expressly assumed the risk of loss, the
Contracting Officer shall exclude from the amounts payable to the Contractor under paragraph (g) of this clause, the
fair value as determined by the Contracting Officer, for the loss of the Government property.

(i) The cost principles and procedures of Part 31 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation, in effect on the date of this
contract, shall govern all costs claimed, agreed to, or determined under this clause.

(j) The Contractor shall have the right of appeal, under the Disputes clause, from any determination made by the
Contracting Officer under paragraph (e), (g), or (l) of this clause, except that if the Contractor failed to submit the
termination settlement proposal or request for equitable adjustment within the time provided in paragraph (e) or (l),
respectively, and failed to request a time extension, there is no right of appeal.

(k) In arriving at the amount due the Contractor under this clause, there shall be deducted--

(1) All unliquidated advance or other payments to the Contractor under the terminated portion of this contract;

(2) Any claim which the Government has against the Contractor under this contract; and

(3) The agreed price for, or the proceeds of sale of, materials, supplies, or other things acquired by the Contractor or
sold under the provisions of this clause and not recovered by or credited to the Government.

(l) If the termination is partial, the Contractor may file a proposal with the Contracting Officer for an equitable
adjustment of the price(s) of the continued portion of the contract. The Contracting Officer shall make any equitable
adjustment agreed upon. Any proposal by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment under this clause shall be
requested within 90 days from the effective date of termination unless extended in writing by the Contracting
Officer.

(m)(1) The Government may, under the terms and conditions it prescribes, make partial payments and payments
against costs incurred by the Contractor for the terminated portion of the contract, if the Contracting Officer
believes the total of these payments will not exceed the amount to which the Contractor will be entitled.

(2) If the total payments exceed the amount finally determined to be due, the Contractor shall repay the excess to the
Government upon demand, together with interest computed at the rate established by the Secretary of the Treasury
under 50 U.S.C. App. 1215(b)(2). Interest shall be computed for the period from the date the excess payment is
received by the Contractor to the date the excess is repaid. Interest shall not be charged on any excess payment due
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 105 of 148

to a reduction in the Contractor's termination settlement proposal because of retention or other disposition of
termination inventory until 10 days after the date of the retention or disposition, or a later date determined by the
Contracting Officer because of the circumstances.

(n) Unless otherwise provided in this contract or by statute, the Contractor shall maintain all records and documents
relating to the terminated portion of this contract for 3 years after final settlement. This includes all books and other
evidence bearing on the Contractor's costs and expenses under this contract. The Contractor shall make these
records and documents available to the Government, at the Contractor's office, at all reasonable times, without any
direct charge. If approved by the Contracting Officer, photographs, microphotographs, or other authentic
reproductions may be maintained instead of original records and documents.

(End of clause)


52.249-5000 BASIS FOR SETTLEMENT OF PROPOSALS

Actual costs will be used to determine equipment costs for a settlement proposal submitted on the total cost basis
under FAR 49.206-2(b). In evaluating a terminations settlement proposal using the total cost basis, the following
principles will be applied to determine allowable equipment costs:
Actual costs for each piece of equipment, or groups of similar serial or series equipment, need not be available in
the contractor's accounting records to determine total actual equipment costs.
If equipment costs have been allocated to a contract using predetermined rates , those charges will be adjusted to
actual costs.
(3) Recorded job costs adjusted for unallowable expenses will be used to determine equipment operating expenses.
(4) Ownership costs (depreciation) will be determined using the contractor's depreciation schedule (subject to the
provisions of FAR 31.205-11).
(5) License, taxes, storage and insurance costs are normally recovered as an indirect expense and unless the
contractor charges these costs directly to contracts, they will be recovered through the indirect expense rate.

(End of Clause)


52.252-2 CLAUSES INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE (FEB 1998)

This contract incorporates one or more clauses by reference, with the same force and effect as if they were given in
full text. Upon request, the Contracting Officer will make their full text available. Also, the full text of a clause may
be accessed electronically at this/these address(es):

https://www.acquisition.gov
http://farsite.hill.af.mil
http://www.usace.army.mil/cect/pages/efars.aspx

(End of clause)

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 106 of 148


52.252-6 AUTHORIZED DEVIATIONS IN CLAUSES (APR 1984)

(a) The use in this solicitation or contract of any Federal Acquisition Regulation (48 CFR Chapter 1) clause with an
authorized deviation is indicated by the addition of "(DEVIATION)" after the date of the clause.

(b) The use in this solicitation or contract of any Defense Federal Acquisition Regulations Supplement (48 CFR
Chapter 2) clause with an authorized deviation is indicated by the addition of "(DEVIATION)" after the name of the
regulation.

(End of clause)


52.253-1 COMPUTER GENERATED FORMS (J AN 1991)

(a) Any data required to be submitted on a Standard or Optional Form prescribed by the Federal Acquisition
Regulation (FAR) may be submitted on a computer generated version of the form, provided there is no change to
the name, content, or sequence of the data elements on the form, and provided the form carries the Standard or
Optional Form number and edition date.

(b) Unless prohibited by agency regulations, any data required to be submitted on an agency unique form
prescribed by an agency supplement to the FAR may be submitted on a computer generated version of the form
provided there is no change to the name, content, or sequence of the data elements on the form and provided the
form carries the agency form number and edition date.

(c) If the Contractor submits a computer generated version of a form that is different than the required form, then
the rights and obligations of the parties will be determined based on the content of the required form.

(End of clause)


252.201-7000 CONTRACTING OFFICER'S REPRESENTATIVE (DEC 1991)

(a) "Definition. Contracting officer's representative" means an individual designated in accordance with subsection
201.602-2 of the Defense Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement and authorized in writing by the contracting
officer to perform specific technical or administrative functions.

(b) If the Contracting Officer designates a contracting officer's representative (COR), the Contractor will receive a
copy of the written designation. It will specify the extent of the COR's authority to act on behalf of the contracting
officer. The COR is not authorized to make any commitments or changes that will affect price, quality, quantity,
delivery, or any other term or condition of the contract.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 107 of 148

(End of clause)


252.203-7001 PROHIBITION ON PERSONS CONVICTED OF FRAUD OR OTHER DEFENSE-
CONTRACT-RELATED FELONIES (DEC 2008)

(a) Definitions. As used in this clause

(1) Arising out of a contract with the DoD means any act in connection with

(i) Attempting to obtain;

(ii) Obtaining, or

(iii) Performing a contract or first-tier subcontract of any agency, department, or component of the Department of
Defense (DoD).

(2) Conviction of fraud or any other felony means any conviction for fraud or a felony in violation of state or
Federal criminal statutes, whether entered on a verdict or plea, including a plea of nolo contendere, for which
sentence has been imposed.

(3) Date of conviction means the date judgment was entered against the individual.

(b) Any individual who is convicted after September 29, 1988, of fraud or any other felony arising out of a contract
with the DoD is prohibited from serving--

(1) In a management or supervisory capacity on this contract;

(2) On the board of directors of the Contractor;

(3) As a consultant, agent, or representative for the Contractor; or

(4) In any other capacity with the authority to influence, advise, or control the decisions of the Contractor with
regard to this contract.

(c) Unless waived, the prohibition in paragraph (b) of this clause applies for not less than 5 years from the date of
conviction.

(d) 10 U.S.C. 2408 provides that the Contractor shall be subject to a criminal penalty of not more than $500,000 if
convicted of knowingly--

(1) Employing a person under a prohibition specified in paragraph (b) of this clause; or

(2) Allowing such a person to serve on the board of directors of the contractor or first-tier subcontractor.

(e) In addition to the criminal penalties contained in 10 U.S.C. 2408, the Government may consider other available
remedies, such as

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 108 of 148

(1) Suspension or debarment;

(2) Cancellation of the contract at no cost to the Government; or

(3) Termination of the contract for default.

(f) The Contractor may submit written requests for waiver of the prohibition in paragraph (b) of this clause to the
Contracting Officer. Requests shall clearly identify

(1) The person involved;

(2) The nature of the conviction and resultant sentence or punishment imposed;

(3) The reasons for the requested waiver; and

(4) An explanation of why a waiver is in the interest of national security.

(g) The Contractor agrees to include the substance of this clause, appropriately modified to reflect the identity and
relationship of the parties, in all first-tier subcontracts exceeding the simplified acquisition threshold in Part 2 of the
Federal Acquisition Regulation, except those for commercial items or components.

(h) Pursuant to 10 U.S.C. 2408(c), defense contractors and subcontractors may obtain information as to whether a
particular person has been convicted of fraud or any other felony arising out of a contract with the DoD by
contacting The Office of J ustice Programs, The Denial of Federal Benefits Office, U.S. Department of J ustice,
telephone 301-937-1542; www.ojp.usdoj.gov/BJ A/grant/DPFC.html''.

(End of clause)


252.204-7000 DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION (DEC 1991)

(a) The Contractor shall not release to anyone outside the Contractor's organization any unclassified information,
regardless of medium (e.g., film, tape, document), pertaining to any part of this contract or any program related to
this contract, unless--

(1) The Contracting Officer has given prior written approval; or

(2) The information is otherwise in the public domain before the date of release.

(b) Requests for approval shall identify the specific information to be released, the medium to be used, and the
purpose for the release. The Contractor shall submit its request to the Contracting Officer at least 45 days before the
proposed date for release.

(c) The Contractor agrees to include a similar requirement in each subcontract under this contract. Subcontractors
shall submit requests for authorization to release through the prime contractor to the Contracting Officer.

(End of clause)

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 109 of 148


252.204-7003 CONTROL OF GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL WORK PRODUCT (APR 1992)

The Contractor's procedures for protecting against unauthorized disclosure of information shall not require
Department of Defense employees or members of the Armed Forces to relinquish control of their work products,
whether classified or not, to the contractor.

(End of clause)


252.209-7004 SUBCONTRACTING WITH FIRMS THAT ARE OWNED OR CONTROLLED BY THE
GOVERNMENT OF A TERRORIST COUNTRY (DEC 2006)

(a) Unless the Government determines that there is a compelling reason to do so, the Contractor shall not enter into
any subcontract in excess of $30,000 with a firm, or a subsidiary of a firm, that is identified in the Excluded Parties
List System as being ineligible for the award of Defense contracts or subcontracts because it is owned or controlled
by the government of a terrorist country.

(b) A corporate officer or a designee of the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, before
entering into a subcontract with a party that is identified, on the List of Parties Excluded from Federal Procurement
and Nonprocurement Programs, as being ineligible for the award of Defense contracts or subcontracts because it is
owned or controlled by the government of a terrorist country. The notice must include the name of the proposed
subcontractor notwithstanding its inclusion on the List of Parties Excluded From Federal Procurement and
Nonprocurement Programs.

(End of clause)


252.215-7000 PRICING ADJ USTMENTS (DEC 2012)

The term "pricing adjustment," as used in paragraph (a) of the clauses entitled "Price Reduction for Defective
Certified Cost or Pricing Data - Modifications," "Subcontractor Certified Cost or Pricing Data," and "Subcontractor
Certified Cost or Pricing Data - Modifications," means the aggregate increases and/or decreases in cost plus
applicable profits.

(End of clause)

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 110 of 148

252.222-7002 COMPLIANCE WITH LOCAL LABOR LAWS (OVERSEAS) (J UN 1997)

(a) The Contractor shall comply with all

(1) Local laws, regulations, and labor union agreements governing work hours; and

(2) Labor regulations including collective bargaining agreements, workers' compensation, working conditions,
fringe benefits, and labor standards or labor contract matters.

(b) The Contractor indemnifies and holds harmless the United States Government from all claims arising out of the
requirements of this clause. This indemnity includes the Contractor's obligation to handle and settle, without cost to
the United States Government, any claims or litigation concerning allegations that the Contractor or the United
States Government, or both, have not fully complied with local labor laws or regulations relating to the performance
of work required by this contract.

(c) Notwithstanding paragraph (b) of this clause, consistent with paragraphs 31.205-15(a) and 31.205-47(d) of the
Federal Acquisition Regulation, the Contractor will be reimbursed for the costs of all fines, penalties, and
reasonable litigation expenses incurred as a result of compliance with specific contract terms and conditions or
written instructions from the Contracting officer.

(End of clause)


252.223-7004 DRUG-FREE WORK FORCE (SEP 1988)

(a) Definitions.

(1) "Employee in a sensitive position," as used in this clause, means an employee who has been granted access to
classified information; or employees in other positions that the Contractor determines involve national security;
health or safety, or functions other than the foregoing requiring a high degree of trust and confidence.

(2) "Illegal drugs," as used in this clause, means controlled substances included in Schedules I and II, as defined by
section 802(6) of title 21 of the United States Code, the possession of which is unlawful under chapter 13 of that
Title. The term "illegal drugs" does not mean the use of a controlled substance pursuant to a valid prescription or
other uses authorized by law.

(b) The Contractor agrees to institute and maintain a program for achieving the objective of a drug-free work force.
While this clause defines criteria for such a program, contractors are encouraged to implement alternative
approaches comparable to the criteria in paragraph (c) that are designed to achieve the objectives of this clause.

(c) Contractor programs shall include the following, or appropriate alternatives:

(1) Employee assistance programs emphasizing high level direction, education, counseling, rehabilitation, and
coordination with available community resources;

(2) Supervisory training to assist in identifying and addressing illegal drug use by Contractor employees;

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 111 of 148

(3) Provision for self-referrals as well as supervisory referrals to treatment with maximum respect for individual
confidentiality consistent with safety and security issues;

(4) Provision for identifying illegal drug users, including testing on a controlled and carefully monitored basis.
Employee drug testing programs shall be established taking account of the following:

(i) The Contractor shall establish a program that provides for testing for the use of illegal drugs by employees in
sensitive positions. The extent of and criteria for such testing shall be determined by the Contractor based on
considerations that include the nature of the work being performed under the contract, the employee's duties, and
efficient use of Contractor resources, and the risks to health, safety, or national security that could result from the
failure of an employee adequately to discharge his or her position.

(ii) In addition, the Contractor may establish a program for employee drug testing--

(A) When there is a reasonable suspicion that an employee uses illegal drugs; or

(B) When an employees has been involved in an accident or unsafe practice;

(C) As part of or as a follow-up to counseling or rehabilitation for illegal drug use;

(D) As part of a voluntary employee drug testing program.

(iii) The Contractor may establish a program to test applicants for employment for illegal drug use.

(iv) For the purpose of administering this clause, testing for illegal drugs may be limited to those substances for
which testing is prescribed by section 2..1 of subpart B of the "Mandatory Guidelines for Federal Workplace Drug
Testing Programs" (53 FR 11980 (April 11, 1988), issued by the Department of Health and Human Services.

(d) Contractors shall adopt appropriate personnel procedures to deal with employees who are found to be using
drugs illegally. Contractors shall not allow any employee to remain on duty or perform in a sensitive position who
is found to use illegal drugs until such times as the Contractor, in accordance with procedures established by the
Contractor, determines that the employee may perform in such a position.

(e) The provisions of this clause pertaining to drug testing program shall not apply to the extent that are inconsistent
with state or local law, or with an existing collective bargaining agreement; provided that with respect to the latter,
the Contractor agrees those issues that are in conflict will be a subject of negotiation at the next collective
bargaining session.

(End of clause)


252.223-7006 PROHIBITION ON STORAGE AND DISPOSAL OF TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS
MATERIALS (APR 2012)

(a) "Definitions".

As used in this clause --

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 112 of 148

(1) "Storage" means a non-transitory, semi-permanent or permanent holding, placement, or leaving of material. It
does not include a temporary accumulation of a limited quantity of a material used in or a waste generated or
resulting from authorized activities, such as servicing, maintenance, or repair of Department of Defense (DoD)
items, equipment, or facilities.

(2) "Toxic or hazardous materials" means:

(i) Materials referred to in section 101(14) of the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and
Liability Act (CERCLA) of 1980 (42 U.S.C. 9601(14)) and materials designated under section 102 of CERCLA (42
U.S.C. 9602) (40 CFR part 302);

(ii) Materials that are of an explosive, flammable, or pyrotechnic nature; or

(iii) Materials otherwise identified by the Secretary of Defense as specified in DoD regulations.

(b) In accordance with 10 U.S.C. 2692, the Contractor is prohibited from storing or disposing of non-DoD-owned
toxic or hazardous materials on a DoD installation, except to the extent authorized by a statutory exception to 10
U.S.C. 2692 or as authorized by the Secretary of Defense or his designee.

(End of clause)


252.225-7005 IDENTIFICATION OF EXPENDITURES IN THE UNITED STATES (J UN 2005)

(a) Definition. United States, as used in this clause, means the 50 States, the District of Columbia, and outlying
areas.

(b) This clause applies only if the Contractor is--

(1) A concern incorporated in the United States (including a subsidiary that is incorporated in the United States,
even if the parent corporation is not incorporated in the United States); or

(2) An unincorporated concern having its principal place of business in the United States.

(c) On each invoice, voucher, or other request for payment under this contract, the Contractor shall identify that part
of the requested payment that represents estimated expenditures in the United States. The identification--

(1) May be expressed either as dollar amounts or as percentages of the total amount of the request for payment;

(2) Should be based on reasonable estimates; and

(3) Shall state the full amount of the payment requested, subdivided into the following categories:

(i) U.S. products--expenditures for material and equipment manufactured or produced in the United States,
including end products, components, or construction material, but excluding transportation;

(ii) U.S. services--expenditures for services performed in the United States, including all charges for overhead,
other indirect costs, and profit under construction or service contracts;

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 113 of 148

(iii) Transportation on U.S. carriers--expenditures for transportation furnished by U.S. flag, ocean, surface, and air
carriers; and

(iv) Expenditures not identified under paragraphs (c)(3)(i) through (iii) of this clause.

(d) Nothing in this clause requires the establishment or maintenance of detailed accounting records or gives the U.S.
Government any right to audit the Contractors books or records.

(End of clause)


252.225-7012 PREFERENCE FOR CERTAIN DOMESTIC COMMODITIES (FEB 2013)


Component means any item supplied to the Government as part of an end product or of another component.

End product means supplies delivered under a line item of this contract.

Qualifying country means a country with a reciprocal defense procurement memorandum of understanding or
international agreement with the United States in which both countries agree to remove barriers to purchases of
supplies produced in the other country or services performed by sources of the other country, and the memorandum
or agreement complies, where applicable, with the requirements of section 36 of the Arms Export Control Act (22
U.S.C. 2776) and with 10 U.S.C. 2457. Accordingly, the following are qualifying countries:

Australia
Austria
Belgium
Canada
Czech Republic
Denmark
Egypt
Finland
France
Germany
Greece
Israel
Italy
Luxembourg
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Turkey
United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 114 of 148

Structural component of a tent--

(i) Means a component that contributes to the form and stability of the tent (e.g., poles, frames, flooring, guy ropes,
pegs);

(ii) Does not include equipment such as heating, cooling, or lighting.


U.S.-flag vessel means a vessel of the United States or belonging to the United States, including any vessel
registered or having national status under the laws of the United States.

(b) The Contractor shall deliver under this contract only such of the following items, either as end products or
components, that have been grown, reprocessed, reused, or produced in the United States:

(1) Food.

(2) Clothing and the materials and components thereof, other than sensors, electronics, or other items added to, and
not normally associated with, clothing and the materials and components thereof. Clothing includes items such as
outerwear, headwear, underwear, nightwear, footwear, hosiery, handwear, belts, badges, and insignia.

(3) (i) Tents and structural components of tents;

(ii) Tarpaulins; or

(iii) Covers.

(4) Cotton and other natural fiber products.

(5) Woven silk or woven silk blends.

(6) Spun silk yarn for cartridge cloth.

(7) Synthetic fabric, and coated synthetic fabric, including all textile fibers and yarns that are for use in such fabrics.

(8) Canvas products.

(9) Wool (whether in the form of fiber or yarn or contained in fabrics, materials, or manufactured articles).

(10) Any item of individual equipment (Federal Supply Class 8465) manufactured from or containing fibers, yarns,
fabrics, or materials listed in this paragraph (b).

(c) This clause does not apply--

(1) To items listed in section 25.104(a) of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR), or other items for which the
Government has determined that a satisfactory quality and sufficient quantity cannot be acquired as and when
needed at U.S. market prices;

(2) To incidental amounts of cotton, other natural fibers, or wool incoporated in an end product, for which the
estimated value of the cotton, other natural fibers, or wool--

(i) Is not more than 10 percent of the total price of the end product; and (ii) Does not exceed the simplified
acquisition threshold in FAR part 2;

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 115 of 148

(3) To waste and byproducts of cotton or wool fiber for use in the production of propellants and explosives;

(4) To foods, other than fish, shellfish, or seafood, that have been manufactured or processed in the United States,
regardless of where the foods (and any component if applicable) were grown or produced. Fish, shellfish, or
seafood manufactured or processed in the United States and fish, shellfish, or seafood contained in foods
manufactured or processed in the United States shall be provided in accordance with paragraph (d) of this clause;

(5) To chemical warfare protective clothing produced in a qualifying country; or

(6) To fibers and yarns that are for use in synthetic fabric or coated synthetic fabric (but does apply to the synthetic
or coated synthetic fabric itself), if--

(i) The fabric is to be used as a component of an end product that is not a textile product. Examples of textile
products, made in whole or in part of fabric, include--

(A) Draperies, floor coverings, furnishings, and bedding (Federal Supply Group 72, Household and Commercial
Furnishings and Appliances);

(B) Items made in whole or in part of fabric in Federal Supply Group 83, Textile/leather/furs/apparel/findings/
tents/flags, or Federal Supply Group 84, Clothing, Individual Equipment and Insignia;

(C) Upholstered seats (whether for household, office, or other use); and

(D) Parachutes (Federal Supply Class 1670); or

(ii) The fibers and yarns are para-aramid fibers and continuous filament para-aramid yarns manufactured in a
qualifying country.

(d)(1) Fish, shellfish, and seafood delivered under this contract, or contained in foods delivered under this contract--

(i) Shall be taken from the sea by U.S.-flag vessels; or

(ii) If not taken from the sea, shall be obtained from fishing within the United States; and

(2) Any processing or manufacturing of the fish, shellfish, or seafood shall be performed on a U.S.-flag vessel or in
the United States.

(End of clause)


252.225-7027 RESTRICTION ON CONTINGENT FEES FOR FOREIGN MILITARY SALES (APR 2003)

(a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this clause, contingent fees, as defined in the Covenant Against
Contingent Fees clause of this contract, are generally an allowable cost, provided the fees are paid to--

(1) A bona fide employee of the Contractor; or

(2) A bona fide established commercial or selling agency maintained by the Contractor for the purpose of securing
business.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 116 of 148

(b) For foreign military sales, unless the contingent fees have been identified and payment approved in writing by
the foreign customer before contract award, the following contingent fees are unallowable under this contract:

(1) For sales to the Government(s) of Israel, contingent fees in any amount.

(2) For sales to Governments not listed in paragraph (b)(1) of this clause, contingent fees exceeding $50,000 per
foreign military sale case.

(End of Clause)


252.225-7028 EXCLUSIONARY POLICIES AND PRACTICES OF FOREIGN GOVERNMENTS (APR 2003)

The Contractor and its subcontractors shall not take into account the exclusionary policies or practices of any
foreign government in employing or assigning personnel, if--

(a) The personnel will perform functions required by this contract, either in the United States or abroad; and

(b) The exclusionary policies or practices of the foreign government are based on race, religion, national origin, or
sex.

(End of clause)


252.225-7041 CORRESPONDENCE IN ENGLISH (J UNE 1997)

The Contractor shall ensure that all contract correspondence that is addressed to the United States Government is
submitted in English or with an English translation.

(End of clause)


252.225-7043 ANTITERRORISM/FORCE PROTECTION POLICY FOR DEFENSE CONTRACTORS
OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES (MAR 2006)

(a) Definition. United States, as used in this clause, means, the 50 States, the District of Columbia, and outlying
areas.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 117 of 148

(b) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this clause, the Contractor and its subcontractors, if performing or
traveling outside the United States under this contract, shall--

(1) Affiliate with the Overseas Security Advisory Council, if the Contractor or subcontractor is a U.S. entity;

(2) Ensure that Contractor and subcontractor personnel who are U.S. nationals and are in-country on a non-
transitory basis, register with the U.S. Embassy, and that Contractor and subcontractor personnel who are third
country nationals comply with any security related requirements of the Embassy of their nationality;

(3) Provide, to Contractor and subcontractor personnel, antiterrorism/force protection awareness information
commensurate with that which the Department of Defense (DoD) provides to its military and civilian personnel and
their families, to the extent such information can be made available prior to travel outside the United States; and

(4) Obtain and comply with the most current antiterrorism/force protection guidance for Contractor and
subcontractor personnel.

(c) The requirements of this clause do not apply to any subcontractor that is--

(1) A foreign government;

(2) A representative of a foreign government; or

(3) A foreign corporation wholly owned by a foreign government.

(d) Information and guidance pertaining to DoD antiterrorism/force protection can be obtained from HQDA-AT;
telephone, DSN: 312-222-9832 or commercial (703) 692-9832.

(End of clause)

252.225-7045 BALANCE OF PAYMENTS PROGRAM--CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL UNDER TRADE
AGREEMENTS (MAY 2012)


Caribbean Basin country construction material means a construction material that---

(1) Is wholly the growth, product, or manufacture of a Caribbean Basin country; or

(2) In the case of a construction material that consists in whole or in part of materials from another country, has
been substantially transformed in a Caribbean Basin country into a new and different construction material distinct
from the materials from which it was transformed.

Commercially available off-the-shelf (COTS) item--

(1) Means any item of supply (including construction material) that is--

(i) A commercial item (as defined in paragraph (1) of the definition of ``commercial item'' in section 2.101 of the
Federal Acquisition Regulation);

(ii) Sold in substantial quantities in the commercial marketplace; and

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 118 of 148

(iii) Offered to the Government, under a contract or subcontract at any tier, without modification, in the same form
in which it is sold in the commercial marketplace; and

(2) Does not include bulk cargo, as defined in section 3 of the Shipping Act of 1984 (46 U.S.C. 40102), such as
agricultural products and petroleum products.

Component means any article, material, or supply incorporated directly into construction material.

Construction material means an article, material, or supply brought to the construction site by the Contractor or a
subcontractor for incorporation into the building or work. The term also includes an item brought to the site
preassembled from articles, materials, or supplies. However, emergency life safety systems, such as emergency
lighting, fire alarm, and audio evacuation systems, that are discrete systems incorporated into a public building or
work and that are produced as complete systems, are evaluated as a single and distinct construction material
regardless of when or how the individual parts or components of those systems are delivered to the construction site.
Materials purchased directly by the Government are supplies, not construction material.

Cost of components means--

(1) For components purchased by the Contractor, the acquisition cost, including transportation costs to the place of
incorporation into the end product (whether or not such costs are paid to a domestic firm), and any applicable duty
(whether or not a duty-free entry certificate is issued); or

(2) For components manufactured by the Contractor, all costs associated with the manufacture of the component,
including transportation costs as described in paragraph (1) of this definition, plus allocable overhead costs, but
excluding profit. Cost of components does not include any costs associated with the manufacture of the construction
material.

Designated country means--

(1) A World Trade Organization Government Procurement Agreement (WTO GPA) country (Armenia, Aruba,
Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Canada, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany,
Greece, Hong Kong, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Israel, Italy, J apan, Korea (Republic of), Latvia, Liechtenstein,
Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Singapore, Slovak Republic,
Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan (known in the World Trade Organization as ``the Separate Customs
Territory of Taiwan, Penghu, Kinmen, and Matsu'' (Chinese Taipei)), or the United Kingdom);

(2) A Free Trade Agreement country (Australia, Bahrain, Canada, Chile, Colombia, Costa Rica, Dominican
Republic, El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras, Korea (Republic of), Mexico, Morocco, Nicaragua, Peru, or
Singapore);

(3) A least developed country (Afghanistan, Angola, Bangladesh, Benin, Bhutan, Burkina Faso, Burundi,
Cambodia, Central African Republic, Chad, Comoros, Democratic Republic of Congo, Djibouti, East Timor,
Equatorial Guinea, Eritrea, Ethiopia, Gambia, Guinea, Guinea-Bissau, Haiti, Kiribati, Laos, Lesotho, Liberia,
Madagascar, Malawi, Maldives, Mali, Mauritania, Mozambique, Nepal, Niger, Rwanda, Samoa, Sao Tome and
Principe, Senegal, Sierra Leone, Solomon Islands, Somalia, Tanzania, Togo, Tuvalu, Uganda, Vanuatu, Yemen, or
Zambia); or

(4) A Caribbean Basin country (Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize, Bonaire, British Virgin
Islands, Curacao, Dominica, Grenada, Guyana, Haiti, J amaica, Montserrat, Saba, St. Kitts and Nevis, St. Lucia, St.
Vincent and the Grenadines, Sint Eustatius, Sint Maarten, or Trinidad and Tobago).

Designated country construction material means a construction material that is a WTO GPA country construction
material, a Free Trade Agreement country construction material, a least developed country construction material, or
a Caribbean Basin country construction material.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 119 of 148

Domestic construction material means--

(1) An unmanufactured construction material mined or produced in the United States; or

(2) A construction material manufactured in the United States, if--

(i) The cost of its components mined, produced, or manufactured in the United States exceeds 50 percent of the cost
of all its components. Components of foreign origin of the same class or kind for which nonavailability
determinations have been made are treated as domestic; or

(ii) The construction material is a COTS item.

Free Trade Agreement country construction material means a construction material that--

(1) Is wholly the growth, product, or manufacture of a Free Trade Agreement country; or

been substantially transformed in a Free Trade Agreement country into a new and different construction material
distinct from the material from which it was transformed.

Least developed country construction material means a construction material that--

(1) Is wholly the growth, product, or manufacture of a least developed country; or

(2) In the case of a construction material that consists in whole or in part of materials from another country has been
substantially transformed in a least developed country into a new and different construction material distinct from
the materials from which it was transformed.


WTO GPA country construction material means a construction material that--

(1) Is wholly the growth, product, or manufacture of a WTO GPA country; or

been substantially transformed in a WTO GPA country into a new and different construction material distinct from
the materials from which it was transformed.

(b) This clause implements the Balance of Payments Program by providing a preference for domestic construction
material. In addition, the Contracting Officer has determined that the WTO GPA and Free Trade Agreements apply
to this acquisition. Therefore, the Balance of Payments Program restrictions are waived for designated country
construction materials.

(c) The Contractor shall use only domestic or designated country construction material in performing this contract,
except for--

(1) Construction material valued at or below the simplified acquisition threshold in part 2 of the Federal Acquisition
Regulation;

(2) Information technology that is a commercial item; or

(3) The construction material or components listed by the Government as follows:

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 120 of 148

None

(End of clause)


252.229-7000 INVOICES EXCLUSIVE OF TAXES OR DUTIES (J UNE 1997)

Invoices submitted in accordance with the terms and conditions of this contract shall be exclusive of all taxes or
duties for which relief is available.

(End of clause)


252.229-7001 TAX RELIEF (J UN 1997)

(a) Prices set forth in this contract are exclusive of all taxes and duties from which the United States Government is
exempt by virtue of tax agreements between the United States Government and the Contractor's government. The
following taxes or duties have been excluded from the contract price:

NAME OF TAX: (Offeror Insert) RATE (PERCENTAGE): (Offeror Insert)

(b) The Contractor's invoice shall list separately the gross price, amount of tax deducted, and net price charged.

(c) When items manufactured to United States Government specifications are being acquired, the Contractor shall
identify the materials or components intended to be imported in order to ensure that relief from import duties is
obtained. If the Contractor intends to use imported products from inventories on hand, the price of which includes a
factor for import duties, the Contractor shall ensure the United States Government's exemption from these taxes.
The Contractor may obtain a refund of the import duties from its government or request the duty-free import of an
amount of supplies or components corresponding to that used from inventory for this contract.

(End of clause)


252.232-7010 LEVIES ON CONTRACT PAYMENTS (DEC 2006)

(a) 26 U.S.C. 6331(h) authorizes the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) to continuously levy up to 100 percent of
contract payments, up to the amount of tax debt.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 121 of 148

(b) When a levy is imposed on a payment under this contract and the Contractor believes that the levy may result in
an inability to perform the contract, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Procuring Contracting Officer in
writing, with a copy to the Administrative Contracting Officer, and shall provide--

(1) The total dollar amount of the levy;

(2) A statement that the Contractor believes that the levy may result in an inability to perform the contract, including
rationale and adequate supporting documentation; and

(3) Advice as to whether the inability to perform may adversely affect national security, including rationale and
adequate supporting documentation.

(c) DoD shall promptly review the Contractor's assessment, and the Procuring Contracting Officer shall provide a
written notification to the Contractor including--

(1) A statement as to whether DoD agrees that the levy may result in an inability to perform the contract; and

(2)(i) If the levy may result in an inability to perform the contract and the lack of performance will adversely affect
national security, the total amount of the monies collected that should be returned to the Contractor; or

(ii) If the levy may result in an inability to perform the contract but will not impact national security, a
recommendation that the Contractor promptly notify the IRS to attempt to resolve the tax situation.

(d) Any DoD determination under this clause is not subject to appeal under the Contract Disputes Act.

(End of clause)


252.236-7008 CONTRACT PRICES - BIDDING SCHEDULES. (DEC 1991)

(a) The Government's payment for the items listed in the Bidding Schedule shall constitute full compensation to the
Contractor for --

(1) Furnishing all plant, labor, equipment, appliances, and materials; and

(2) Performing all operations required to complete the work in conformity with the drawings and specifications.

(b) The Contractor shall include in the prices for the items listed in the Bidding Schedule all costs for work in the
specifications, whether or not specifically listed in the Bidding Schedule.


252.243-7001 PRICING OF CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS (DEC 1991)

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 122 of 148

When costs are a factor in any price adjustment under this contract, the contract cost principles and procedures in
FAR part 31 and DFARS part 231, in effect on the date of this contract, apply.


252.243-7002 REQUESTS FOR EQUITABLE ADJ USTMENT (DEC 2012)

(a) The amount of any request for equitable adjustment to contract terms shall accurately reflect the contract
adjustment for which the Contractor believes the Government is liable. The request shall include only costs for
performing the change, and shall not include any costs that already have been reimbursed or that have been
separately claimed. All indirect costs included in the request shall be properly allocable to the change in accordance
with applicable acquisition regulations.

(b) In accordance with 10 U.S.C. 2410(a), any request for equitable adjustment to contract terms that exceeds the
simplified acquisition threshold shall bear, at the time of submission, the following certificate executed by an
individual authorized to certify the request on behalf of the Contractor:

I certify that the request is made in good faith, and that the supporting data are accurate and complete to the best of
my knowledge and belief.

----------------------------------------------------------------------
(Official's Name)
----------------------------------------------------------------------
(Title)

(c) The certification in paragraph (b) of this clause requires full disclosure of all relevant facts, including--

(1) Certified cost or pricing data if required in accordance with subsection 15.403-4 of the Federal Acquisition
Regulation (FAR); and

(2) Data other than certified cost or pricing data, in accordance with subsection 15.403-3 of the FAR, including
actual cost data and data to support any estimated costs, even if certified cost or pricing data are not required.

(d) The certification requirement in paragraph (b) of this clause does not apply to----

(1) Requests for routine contract payments; for example, requests for payment for accepted supplies and services,
routine vouchers under a cost-reimbursement type contract, or progress payment invoices; or

(2) Final adjustment under an incentive provision of the contract.


252.247-7023 Transportation of Supplies by Sea (MAY 2002)

(a) Definitions. As used in this clause --

(1) "Components" means articles, materials, and supplies incorporated directly into end products at any level of
manufacture, fabrication, or assembly by the Contractor or any subcontractor.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 123 of 148

(2) "Department of Defense" (DoD) means the Army, Navy, Air Force, Marine Corps, and defense agencies.

(3) "Foreign flag vessel" means any vessel that is not a U.S.-flag vessel.

(4) "Ocean transportation" means any transportation aboard a ship, vessel, boat, barge, or ferry through international
waters.

(5) "Subcontractor" means a supplier, materialman, distributor, or vendor at any level below the prime contractor
whose contractual obligation to perform results from, or is conditioned upon, award of the prime contract and who
is performing any part of the work or other requirement of the prime contract.

(6) "Supplies" means all property, except land and interests in land, that is clearly identifiable for eventual use by or
owned by the DoD at the time of transportation by sea.

(i) An item is clearly identifiable for eventual use by the DoD if, for example, the contract documentation contains a
reference to a DoD contract number or a military destination.

(ii) "Supplies" includes (but is not limited to) public works; buildings and facilities; ships; floating equipment and
vessels of every character, type, and description, with parts, subassemblies, accessories, and equipment; machine
tools; material; equipment; stores of all kinds; end items; construction materials; and components of the foregoing.

(7) "U.S.-flag vessel" means a vessel of the United States or belonging to the United States, including any vessel
registered or having national status under the laws of the United States.

(b)(1) The Contractor shall use U.S.-flag vessels when transporting any supplies by sea under this contract.

(2) A subcontractor transporting supplies by sea under this contract shall use U.S.-flag vessels if--

(i) This contract is a construction contract; or

(ii) The supplies being transported are--

(A) Noncommercial items; or

(B) Commercial items that--

(1) The Contractor is reselling or distributing to the Government without adding value (generally, the Contractor
does not add value to items that it contracts for f.o.b. destination shipment);

(2) Are shipped in direct support of U.S. military contingency operations, exercises, or forces deployed in
humanitarian or peacekeeping operations; or

(3) Are commissary or exchange cargoes transported outside of the Defense Transportation System in accordance
with 10 U.S.C. 2643.

(c) The Contractor and its subcontractors may request that the Contracting Officer authorize shipment in foreign-
flag vessels, or designate available U.S.-flag vessels, if the Contractor or a subcontractor believes that --

(1) U.S.-flag vessels are not available for timely shipment;

(2) The freight charges are inordinately excessive or unreasonable; or

(3) Freight charges are higher than charges to private persons for transportation of like goods.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 124 of 148

(d) The Contractor must submit any request for use of other than U.S.-flag vessels in writing to the Contracting
Officer at least 45 days prior to the sailing date necessary to meet its delivery schedules. The Contracting Officer
will process requests submitted after such date(s) as expeditiously as possible, but the Contracting Officer's failure
to grant approvals to meet the shipper's sailing date will not of itself constitute a compensable delay under this or
any other clause of this contract. Requests shall contain at a minimum --

(1) Type, weight, and cube of cargo;

(2) Required shipping date;

(3) Special handling and discharge requirements;

(4) Loading and discharge points;

(5) Name of shipper and consignee;

(6) Prime contract number; and

(7) A documented description of efforts made to secure U.S.-flag vessels, including points of contact (with names
and telephone numbers) with at least two U.S.-flag carriers contacted. Copies of telephone notes, telegraphic and
facsimile message or letters will be sufficient for this purpose.

(e) The Contractor shall, within 30 days after each shipment covered by this clause, provide the Contracting Officer
and the Maritime Administration, Office of Cargo Preference, U.S. Department of Transportation, 400 Seventh
Street SW., Washington, DC 20590, one copy of the rated on board vessel operating carrier's ocean bill of lading,
which shall contain the following information:

(1) Prime contract number;

(2) Name of vessel;

(3) Vessel flag of registry;

(4) Date of loading;

(5) Port of loading;

(6) Port of final discharge;

(7) Description of commodity;

(8) Gross weight in pounds and cubic feet if available;

(9) Total ocean freight in U.S. dollars; and

(10) Name of the steamship company.

(f) The Contractor shall provide with its final invoice under this contract a representation that to the best of its
knowledge and belief--

(1) No ocean transportation was used in the performance of this contract;

(2) Ocean transportation was used and only U.S.-flag vessels were used for all ocean shipments under the contract;
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 125 of 148

(3) Ocean transportation was used, and the Contractor had the written consent of the Contracting Officer for all non-
U.S.-flag ocean transportation; or

(4) Ocean transportation was used and some or all of the shipments were made on non-U.S.-flag vessels without the
written consent of the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall describe these shipments in the following format:

ITEM CONTRACT QUANTITY
DESCRIPTION LINE ITEMS
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
TOTAL_______________________________________________________________

(g) If the final invoice does not include the required representation, the Government will reject and return it to the
Contractor as an improper invoice for the purposes of the Prompt Payment clause of this contract. In the event there
has been unauthorized use of non-U.S.-flag vessels in the performance of this contract, the Contracting Officer is
entitled to equitably adjust the contract, based on the unauthorized use.

(h) In the award of subcontracts for the types of supplies described in paragraph (b)(2) of this clause, the Contractor
shall flow down the requirements of this clause as follows:

(1) The Contractor shall insert the substance of this clause, including this paragraph (h), in subcontracts that exceed
the simplified acquisition threshold in part 2 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation.

(2) The Contractor shall insert the substance of paragraphs (a) through (e) of this clause, and this paragraph (h), in
subcontracts that are at or below the simplified acquisition threshold in part 2 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation.

(End of clause)

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 126 of 148

Section 00800 - Special Contract Requirements

ISRAEL CLAUSES
IMMUNITY FROM LEGAL PROCESS (USEUCOM CLAUSE JUL 1966-E)

The contractor agrees to indemnify and save harmless the United States Government against all claims and
suits of whatsoever nature arising under or incidental to the performance of this contract by any subcontractor
against the United States Government. The Contractor further agrees to waive his rights to bring suit or other legal
action against the United States Government, except as provided in the Disputes clause of this contract and in the
United States Federal Statutes.

(End of Clause)

BREACH

United States law will apply to resolve any applicable claim of breach of this contract

(End of Clause)

GOVERNMENT OF ISRAEL

The contractor waives any rights it may have to bring legal actions against the Government of Israel with respect to
any matter arising out of or relating to, activities of the Government of Israel with respect to technical reports,
designs, estimates, or similar documents prepared by the Government of Israel, its employees or contractors in
connection with this contract, regardless of whether such legal actions are characterized as sounding in contract or
tort. The contractor further agrees to indemnify and save harmless, the Government of Israel against all claims and
suits of whatsoever nature arising out of or relating to activities of the Government of Israel with respect to
technical reports, designs, estimates or similar documents prepared by the Government of Israel, its employees or
contractors.

(End of Clause)

COMPLIANCE WITH HOST COUNTRY RULES AND CUSTOMS

a. The laws of Host Country may prohibit access to certain areas of the country which are under military control.
The Contractor shall be responsible for advising the Contracting Officer's Representative of the names of personnel,
type, and amounts of equipment, dates and length of time required at the site, and purpose of entering the host
country, so that proper clearances may be obtained from the Host Government. It is understood that areas to which
rights of entry are provided by the Host Government are to be used only for work carried out under the contract and
no destruction or damages shall be caused, except through normal usage, without concurrence of the Host
Government.

b. The following items are the sole responsibility of the Contractor to investigate, estimate as to cost, and assume
the risk, as normally encountered by Contractors. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the effect of
the following on his own cost of performance of the contract and for including sufficient amount in the contract
price:

- Official language and type of accounts required to satisfy the officials of the Local Government.

- Entry and exit visas, residence permits, and residence laws applicable to aliens. This includes any
special requirements of the Host Government, including those required by local Labor Offices, which the
Contractor may have to fulfill before an application for a regular block of visas will be accepted.

- Passports, health and immunization certificates, and quarantine clearance.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 127 of 148

- Compliance with local labor and insurance laws, including payment of employer's share of contribution,
collecting balance from employee and paying into insurance funds.

- Strikes, demonstrations and work stoppage.

- Collection through withholding and payment to local Government, of any Host Country income tax on
employees subject to tax.

- Arranging to perform work in the Host Country, to import personnel, to employ non-indigenous labor, to
receive payments and to remove such funds from the country.

- Operating under local laws, practices, customs and controls, and with local unions, in connection with
hiring and firing, mandatory wage scales, vacation pay, severance pay, overtime, holiday pay, 7th day of
rest, legal notice or pay in lieu thereof for dismissal of employees, slowdown and curtailed schedules
during religious holidays, and ratio of local labor employed in comparison to others.

- Possibility of claims in local bureaus, litigation in local courts, or attachment of local bank accounts.

- Compliance with workmen's compensation laws and contributions into funds. Provisions of necessary
medical service for Contractor employees.

- Special license required by the local Government for setting up and operating any manufacturing plant in
the Host Country, e.g. concrete batching, precast concrete, concrete blocks, etc.

- Sales within the host country of Contractor-owned materials, and equipment.

- Special licenses for physicians, mechanics, tradesmen, drivers, etc.

- Identification and/or registration with local police of imported personnel.

- Stamp tax on documents, payments and payrolls.

- Base passes for permanent staff, day laborers, motor vehicles, etc.

- Compliance with all customs and import rules, regulations and restrictions, including, but not limited to,
local purchase requirements.

(End of Clause)


52.204-4001 DATA UNIVERSAL NUMBERING SYSTEM (DUNS) NUMBER (OCT 2000)

(a) The offeror shall provide a valid DUNS number in accordance with paragraph (a) of FAR clause 52.204-6,
"Data Universal Numbering System (DUNS) Number," contained in this solicitation. Offerors are cautioned
that an award cannot be made to an offeror not having a valid DUNS number.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 128 of 148

(b) Offerors located within the United States shall follow the procedures provided in paragraph (b) of FAR clause
52.204-6, "Data Universal Numbering System (DUNS) Number," contained in this solicitation.
(c) Offerors located outside the United States must obtain a DUNS number from D&B at
http://fedgov.dnb.com/webform/index.jsp .

(End of clause)


52.204-4002 COMMERCIAL AND GOVERNMENT ENTITY (CAGE) CODE (OCT 2000)

(a) The offeror shall provide a valid CAGE code in accordance with paragraph (a) of DFARS clause 252.204-7001,
"Commercial and Government Entity (CAGE) Code Reporting," contained in this solicitation. Offerors are
cautioned that an award cannot be made to an offeror not having a valid CAGE code.
(b) If an offeror does not have a CAGE code, they shall disregard the instructions in paragraph (b) of DFARS clause
252.204-7001. The following guidance hereby supercedes the instructions provided in referenced DFARS clause:
(1) Offerors located within the United States will be provided a CAGE code automatically by Defense Logistics
Agency (DLA) after successfully registering in the Central Contractor Registration (CCR) database at www.ccr.gov
(see DFARS clause 252.204-7003, "Required Central Contractor Registration").
(2) Offerors located outside of the United States must obtain a NATO CAGE code directly from the Codification
Bureau in their respective country prior to registering in CCR at www.ccr.gov . A complete listing of all such
Bureaus may be obtained via the Internet at http://www.nato.int/structur/AC/135/main/links/contacts.htm.

(End of clause)


52.204-4003 Required Central Contractor Registration (CCR)

(a) All offerors located within the United States must be registered in CCR prior to an award being made (see
DFARS clause 52.204-7004, "Required Central Contractor Registration," contained in this solicitation.
(b) Offerors located outside the United States are not required to register in the CCR; however, it is highly advisable
that registration be accomplished regardless of geographical location. Offerors are cautioned that they must obtain a
DUNS number and NATO CAGE code prior to attempting registration in the CCR. If a contractor is not registered
in CCR, clause 52.232-34 is applicable for payment.

(End of clause)

52.211-10 COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION, AND COMPLETION OF WORK (APR 1984)

The Contractor shall be required to (a) commence work under this contract within 7 calendar days after the date the
Contractor receives the notice to proceed, (b) prosecute the work diligently, and (c) complete the entire work ready
for use not later than four hundred eighty five (485) calendar days after Notice to Proceed (NTP).

* The time stated for completion shall include final cleanup of the premises.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 129 of 148

(End of clause)

52.211-12 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES--CONSTRUCTION (SEP 2000)

(a) If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the time specified in the contract, the Contractor shall pay
liquidated damages to the Government in the amount of $2,288.00 for each calendar day of delay until the work is
completed or accepted.

(b) If the Government terminates the Contractor's right to proceed, liquidated damages will continue to accrue until
the work is completed. These liquidated damages are in addition to excess costs of repurchase under the
Termination clause.

(End of clause)

52.211-13 TIME EXTENSIONS (SEP 2000)

Time extensions for contract changes will depend upon the extent, if any, by which the changes cause delay in the
completion of the various elements of construction. The change order granting the time extension may provide that
the contract completion date will be extended only for those specific elements related to the changed work and that
the remaining contract completion dates for all other portions of the work will not be altered. The change order also
may provide an equitable readjustment of liquidated damages under the new completion schedule.

(End of clause)

52.222-50 COMBATING TRAFFICKING IN PERSONS (FEB 2009)


Coercion means--

(1) Threats of serious harm to or physical restraint against any person;

(2) Any scheme, plan, or pattern intended to cause a person to believe that failure to perform an act would result in
serious harm to or physical restraint against any person; or

(3) The abuse or threatened abuse of the legal process.

Commercial sex act means any sex act on account of which anything of value is given to or received by any person.

Debt bondage means the status or condition of a debtor arising from a pledge by the debtor of his or her personal
services or of those of a person under his or her control as a security for debt, if the value of those services as
reasonably assessed is not applied toward the liquidation of the debt or the length and nature of those services are
not respectively limited and defined.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 130 of 148

Employee means an employee of the Contractor directly engaged in the performance of work under the contract
who has other than a minimal impact or involvement in contract performance.

Forced Labor means knowingly providing or obtaining the labor or services of a person--

(1) By threats of serious harm to, or physical restraint against, that person or another person;

(2) By means of any scheme, plan, or pattern intended to cause the person to believe that, if the person did not
perform such labor or services, that person or another person would suffer serious harm or physical restraint; or

(3) By means of the abuse or threatened abuse of law or the legal process.

Involuntary servitude includes a condition of servitude induced by means of--

(1) Any scheme, plan, or pattern intended to cause a person to believe that, if the person did not enter into or
continue in such conditions, that person or another person would suffer serious harm or physical restraint; or

(2) The abuse or threatened abuse of the legal process.

Severe forms of trafficking in persons means--

(1) Sex trafficking in which a commercial sex act is induced by force, fraud, or coercion, or in which the person
induced to perform such act has not attained 18 years of age; or

(2) The recruitment, harboring, transportation, provision, or obtaining of a person for labor or services, through the
use of force, fraud, or coercion for the purpose of subjection to involuntary servitude, peonage, debt bondage, or
slavery.

Sex trafficking means the recruitment, harboring, transportation, provision, or obtaining of a person for the purpose
of a commercial sex act.

(b) Policy. The United States Government has adopted a zero tolerance policy regarding trafficking in persons.
Contractors and contractor employees shall not--

(1) Engage in severe forms of trafficking in persons during the period of performance of the contract;

(2) Procure commercial sex acts during the period of performance of the contract; or

(3) Use forced labor in the performance of the contract.

(c) Contractor requirements. The Contractor shall--

(1) Notify its employees of--

(i) The United States Government's zero tolerance policy described in paragraph (b) of this clause; and

(ii) The actions that will be taken against employees for violations of this policy. Such actions may include, but are
not limited to, removal from the contract, reduction in benefits, or termination of employment; and

(2) Take appropriate action, up to and including termination, against employees or subcontractors that violate the
policy in paragraph (b) of this clause.

(d) Notification. The Contractor shall inform the Contracting Officer immediately of--

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 131 of 148

(1) Any information it receives from any source (including host country law enforcement) that alleges a Contractor
employee, subcontractor, or subcontractor employee has engaged in conduct that violates this policy; and

(2) Any actions taken against Contractor employees, subcontractors, or subcontractor employees pursuant to this
clause.

(e) Remedies. In addition to other remedies available to the Government, the Contractor's failure to comply with the
requirements of paragraphs (c), (d), or (f) of this clause may result in --

(1) Requiring the Contractor to remove a Contractor employee or employees from the performance of the contract;

(2) Requiring the Contractor to terminate a subcontract;

(3) Suspension of contract payments;

(4) Loss of award fee, consistent with the award fee plan, for the performance period in which the Government
determined Contractor non-compliance;

(5) Termination of the contract for default or cause, in accordance with the termination clause of this contract; or

(6) Suspension or debarment.

(f) Subcontracts. The Contractor shall include the substance of this clause, including this paragraph (f), in all
subcontracts.

(g) Mitigating Factor. The Contracting Officer may consider whether the Contractor had a Trafficking in Persons
awareness program at the time of the violation as a mitigating factor when determining remedies. Additional
information about Trafficking in Persons and examples of awareness programs can be found at the website for the
Department of State's Office to Monitor and Combat Trafficking in Persons at http://www.state.gov/g/tip.

(End of clause)

52.228-15 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS--CONSTRUCTION (OCT 2010)


Original contract price means the award price of the contract; or, for requirements contracts, the price payable for
the estimated total quantity; or, for indefinite-quantity contracts, the price payable for the specified minimum
quantity. Original contract price does not include the price of any options, except those options exercised at the time
of contract award.

(b) Amount of required bonds. Unless the resulting contract price is $150,000 or less, the successful offeror shall
furnish performance and payment bonds to the Contracting Officer as follows:

(1) Performance bonds (Standard Form 25). The penal amount of performance bonds at the time of contract award
shall be 100 percent of the original contract price.

(2) Payment Bonds (Standard Form 25-A). The penal amount of payment bonds at the time of contract award shall
be 100 percent of the original contract price.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 132 of 148

(3) Additional bond protection. (i) The Government may require additional performance and payment bond
protection if the contract price is increased. The increase in protection generally will equal 100 percent of the
increase in contract price.

(ii) The Government may secure the additional protection by directing the Contractor to increase the penal amount
of the existing bond or to obtain an additional bond.

(c) Furnishing executed bonds. The Contractor shall furnish all executed bonds, including any necessary reinsurance
agreements, to the Contracting Officer, within the time period specified in the Bid Guarantee provision of the
solicitation, or otherwise specified by the Contracting Officer, but in any event, before starting work.

(d) Surety or other security for bonds. The bonds shall be in the form of firm commitment, supported by corporate
sureties whose names appear on the list contained in Treasury Department Circular 570, individual sureties, or by
other acceptable security such as postal money order, certified check, cashier's check, irrevocable letter of credit, or,
in accordance with Treasury Department regulations, certain bonds or notes of the United States. Treasury Circular
570 is published in the Federal Register or may be obtained from the U.S. Department of the Treasury, Financial
Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, 3700 East West Highway, Room 6F01, Hyattsville, MD 20782. Or via
the internet at http://www.fms.treas.gov/c570/.

(e) Notice of subcontractor waiver of protection (40 U.S.C. 3133(c)). Any waiver of the right to sue on the payment
bond is void unless it is in writing, signed by the person whose right is waived, and executed after such person has
first furnished labor or material for use in the performance of the contract.

(End of clause)

52.236-1 PERFORMANCE OF WORK BY THE CONTRACTOR (APR 1984)

The Contractor shall perform on the site, and with its own organization, work equivalent to at least twenty-five (25)
percent of the total amount of work to be performed under the contract. This percentage may be reduced by a
supplemental agreement to this contract if, during performing the work, the Contractor requests a reduction and the
Contracting Officer determines that the reduction would be to the advantage of the Government.

(End of clause)

52.236-2 DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS (APR 1984)

(a) The Contractor shall promptly, and before the conditions are disturbed, give a written notice to the Contracting
Officer of

(1) subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site which differ materially from those indicated in this contract,
or

(2) unknown physical conditions at the site, of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily
encountered and generally recognized as inhering in work of the character provided for in the contract.

(b) The Contracting Officer shall investigate the site conditions promptly after receiving the notice. If the conditions
do materially so differ and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or the time required for,
performing any part of the work under this contract, whether or not changed as a result of the conditions, an
equitable adjustment shall be made under this clause and the contract modified in writing accordingly.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 133 of 148

(c) No request by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment to the contract under this clause shall be allowed,
unless the Contractor has given the written notice required; provided, that the time prescribed in (a) above for giving
written notice may be extended by the Contracting Officer.

(d) No request by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment to the contract for differing site conditions shall be
allowed if made after final payment under this contract.

(End of clause)

52.236-4 PHYSICAL DATA (APR 1984)

Data and information furnished or referred to below is for the Contractor's information. The Government shall not
be responsible for any interpretation of or conclusion drawn from the data or information by the Contractor.

(a) The indications of physical conditions on the drawings and in the specifications are the result of site
investigations by . . . . . . . . . [insert a description of investigational methods used, such as surveys, auger borings,
core borings, test pits, probings, test tunnels].

(b) Weather conditions . . . . . . . . . (insert a summary of weather records and warnings).

(c) Transportation facilities . . . . . . . . . (insert a summary of transportation facilities providing access from the site,
including information about their availability and limitations.

(d) . . . . . . . . . . (insert other pertinent information).

(End of clause)

52.236-5 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP (APR 1984)

(a) All equipment, material, and articles incorporated into the work covered by this contract shall be new and of the
most suitable grade for the purpose intended, unless otherwise specifically provided in this contract. References in
the specifications to equipment, material, articles, or patented processes by trade name, make, or catalog number,
shall be regarded as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. The
Contractor may, at its option, use any equipment, material, article, or process that, in the judgment of the
Contracting Officer, is equal to that named in the specifications, unless otherwise specifically provided in this
contract.

(b) The Contractor shall obtain the Contracting Officer's approval of the machinery and mechanical and other
equipment to be incorporated into the work. When requesting approval, the Contractor shall furnish to the
Contracting Officer the name of the manufacturer, the model number, and other information concerning the
performance, capacity, nature, and rating of the machinery and mechanical and other equipment. When required by
this contract or by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall also obtain the Contracting Officer's approval of the
material or articles which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the work. When requesting approval, the
Contractor shall provide full information concerning the material or articles. When directed to do so, the Contractor
shall submit samples for approval at the Contractor's expense, with all shipping charges prepaid. Machinery,
equipment, material, and articles that do not have the required approval shall be installed or used at the risk of
subsequent rejection.

(c) All work under this contract shall be performed in a skillful and workmanlike manner. The Contracting Officer
may require, in writing, that the Contractor remove from the work any employee the Contracting Officer deems
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 134 of 148

incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable.

(End of clause)

52.236-6 SUPERINTENDENCE BY THE CONTRACTOR (APR 1984)

At all times during performance of this contract and until the work is completed and accepted, the Contractor shall
directly superintend the work or assign and have on the worksite a competent superintendent who is satisfactory to
the Contracting Officer and has authority to act for the Contractor.

(End of clause)

52.236-7 PERMITS AND RESPONSIBILITIES (NOV 1991)

The Contractor shall, without additional expense to the Government, be responsible for obtaining any necessary
licenses and permits, and for complying with any Federal, State, and municipal laws, codes, and regulations
applicable to the performance of the work. The Contractor shall also be responsible for all damages to persons or
property that occur as a result of the Contractor's fault or negligence. The Contractor shall also be responsible for
all materials delivered and work performed until completion and acceptance of the entire work, except for any
completed unit of work which may have been accepted under the contract.

(End of clause)

52.236-8 OTHER CONTRACTS (APR 1984)

The Government may undertake or award other contracts for additional work at or near the site of the work under
this contract. The Contractor shall fully cooperate with the other contractors and with Government employees and
shall carefully adapt scheduling and performing the work under this contract to accommodate the additional work,
heeding any direction that may be provided by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall not commit or permit
any act that will interfere with the performance of work by any other contractor or by Government employees.

(End of clause)

52.236-10 OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS (APR 1984)

(a) The Contractor shall confine all operations (including storage of materials) on Government premises to areas
authorized or approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall hold and save the Government, its officers
and agents, free and harmless from liability of any nature occasioned by the Contractor's performance.

(b) Temporary buildings (e.g., storage sheds, shops, offices) and utilities may be erected by the Contractor only with
the approval of the Contracting Officer and shall be built with labor and materials furnished by the Contractor
without expense to the Government. The temporary buildings and utilities shall remain the property of the
Contractor and shall be removed by the Contractor at its expense upon completion of the work. With the written
consent of the Contracting Officer, the buildings and utilities may be abandoned and need not be removed.

(c) The Contractor shall, under regulations prescribed by the Contracting Officer, use only established roadways, or
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 135 of 148

use temporary roadways constructed by the Contractor when and as authorized by the Contracting Officer. When
materials are transported in prosecuting the work, vehicles shall not be loaded beyond the loading capacity
recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or prescribed by any Federal, State, or local law or regulation.
When it is necessary to cross curbs or sidewalks, the Contractor shall protect them from damage. The Contractor
shall repair or pay for the repair of any damaged curbs, sidewalks, or roads.

(End of clause)

52.236-11 USE AND POSSESSION PRIOR TO COMPLETION (APR 1984)

(a) The Government shall have the right to take possession of or use any completed or partially completed part of
the work. Before taking possession of or using any work, the Contracting Officer shall furnish the Contractor a list
of items of work remaining to be performed or corrected on those portions of the work that the Government intends
to take possession of or use. However, failure of the Contracting Officer to list any item of work shall not relieve
the Contractor of responsibility for complying with the terms of the contract. The Government's possession or use
shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work under the contract.

(b) While the Government has such possession or use, the Contractor shall be relieved of the responsibility for the
loss of or damage to the work resulting from the Government's possession or use, notwithstanding the terms of the
clause in this contract entitled "Permits and Responsibilities." If prior possession or use by the Government delays
the progress of the work or causes additional expense to the Contractor, an equitable adjustment shall be made in
the contract price or the time of completion, and the contract shall be modified in writing accordingly.

(End of clause)

52.236-12 CLEANING UP (APR 1984)

The Contractor shall at all times keep the work area, including storage areas, free from accumulations of waste
materials. Before completing the work, the Contractor shall remove from the work and premises any rubbish, tools,
scaffolding, equipment, and materials that are not the property of the Government. Upon completing the work, the
Contractor shall leave the work area in a clean, neat, and orderly condition satisfactory to the Contracting Officer.

(End of clause)

52.236-13 ACCIDENT PREVENTION (NOV 1991) ALTERNATE I (NOV 1991)

(a) The Contractor shall provide and maintain work environments and procedures which will

(1) safeguard the public and Government personnel, property, materials, supplies, and equipment exposed to
Contractor operations and activities;

(2) avoid interruptions of Government operations and delays in project completion dates; and

(3) control costs in the performance of this contract.

(b) For these purposes on contracts for construction or dismantling, demolition, or removal of improvements, the
Contractor shall-

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 136 of 148

(1) Provide appropriate safety barricades, signs, and signal lights;

(2) Comply with the standards issued by the Secretary of Labor at 29 CFR Part 1926 and 29 CFR Part 1910; and

(3) Ensure that any additional measures the Contracting Officer determines to be reasonably necessary for the
purposes are taken.

(c) If this contract is for construction or dismantling, demolition or removal of improvements with any Department
of Defense agency or component, the Contractor shall comply with all pertinent provisions of the latest version of
U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Safety and Health Requirements Manual, EM 385-1-1, in effect on the date of the
solicitation.

(d) Whenever the Contracting Officer becomes aware of any noncompliance with these requirements or any
condition which poses a serious or imminent danger to the health or safety of the public or Government personnel,
the Contracting Officer shall notify the Contractor orally, with written confirmation, and request immediate
initiation of corrective action. This notice, when delivered to the Contractor or the Contractor's representative at the
work site, shall be deemed sufficient notice of the noncompliance and that corrective action is required. After
receiving the notice, the Contractor shall immediately take corrective action. If the Contractor fails or refuses to
promptly take corrective action, the Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until
satisfactory corrective action has been taken. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any equitable adjustment of the
contract price or extension of the performance schedule on any stop work order issued under this clause.

(e) The Contractor shall insert this clause, including this paragraph (e), with appropriate changes in the designation
of the parties, in subcontracts.

(f) Before commencing the work, the Contractor shall-

(1) Submit a written proposed plan for implementing this clause. The plan shall include an analysis of the
significant hazards to life, limb, and property inherent in contract work performance and a plan for controlling these
hazards; and

(2) Meet with representatives of the Contracting Officer to discuss and develop a mutual understanding relative to
administration of the overall safety program.

(End of clause)

52.236-14 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES (APR 1984)

(a) The Government shall make all reasonably required amounts of utilities available to the Contractor from existing
outlets and supplies, as specified in the contract. Unless otherwise provided in the contract, the amount of each
utility service consumed shall be charged to or paid for by the Contractor at prevailing rates charged to the
Government or, where the utility is produced by the Government, at reasonable rates determined by the Contracting
Officer. The Contractor shall carefully conserve any utilities furnished without charge.

(b) The Contractor, at its expense and in a workmanlike manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer, shall install
and maintain all necessary temporary connections and distribution lines, and all meters required to measure the
amount of each utility used for the purpose of determining charges. Before final acceptance of the work by the
Government, the Contractor shall remove all the temporary connections, distribution lines, meters, and associated
paraphernalia.

(End of clause)

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 137 of 148

52.236-15 SCHEDULES FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS (APR 1984)

(a) The Contractor shall, within five days after the work commences on the contract or another period of time
determined by the Contracting Officer, prepare and submit to the Contracting Officer for approval three copies of a
practicable schedule showing the order in which the Contractor proposes to perform the work, and the dates on
which the Contractor contemplates starting and completing the several salient features of the work (including
acquiring materials, plant, and equipment). The schedule shall be in the form of a progress chart of suitable scale to
indicate appropriately the percentage of work scheduled for completion by any given date during the period. If the
Contractor fails to submit a schedule within the time prescribed, the Contracting Officer may withhold approval of
progress payments until the Contractor submits the required schedule.

(b) The Contractor shall enter the actual progress on the chart as directed by the Contracting Officer, and upon
doing so shall immediately deliver three copies of the annotated schedule to the Contracting Officer. If, in the
opinion of the Contracting Officer, the Contractor falls behind the approved schedule, the Contractor shall take
steps necessary to improve its progress, including those that may be required by the Contracting Officer, without
additional cost to the Government. In this circumstance, the Contracting Officer may require the Contractor to
increase the number of shifts, overtime operations, days of work, and/or the amount of construction plant, and to
submit for approval any supplementary schedule or schedules in chart form as the Contracting Officer deems
necessary to demonstrate how the approved rate of progress will be regained.

(c) Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of the Contracting Officer under this clause shall be
grounds for a determination by the Contracting Officer that the Contractor is not prosecuting the work with
sufficient diligence to ensure completion within the time specified in the contract. Upon making this determination,
the Contracting Officer may terminate the Contractor's right to proceed with the work, or any separable part of it, in
accordance with the default terms of this contract.

(End of clause)

52.236-17 LAYOUT OF WORK (APR 1984)

The Contractor shall lay out its work from Government established base lines and bench marks indicated on the
drawings, and shall be responsible for all measurements in connection with the layout. The Contractor shall furnish,
at its own expense, all stakes, templates, platforms, equipment, tools, materials, and labor required to lay out any
part of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for executing the work to the lines and grades that may be
established or indicated by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall also be responsible for maintaining and
preserving all stakes and other marks established by the Contracting Officer until authorized to remove them. If
such marks are destroyed by the Contractor or through its negligence before their removal is authorized, the
Contracting Officer may replace them and deduct the expense of the replacement from any amounts due or to
become due to the Contractor.

(End of clause)

52.236-21 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION (FEB 1997)

(a) The Contractor shall keep on the work site a copy of the drawings and specifications and shall at all times give
the Contracting Officer access thereto. Anything mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the drawings, or
shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in
both. In case of difference between drawings and specifications, the specifications shall govern. In case of
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 138 of 148

discrepancy in the figures, in the drawings, or in the specifications, the matter shall be promptly submitted to the
Contracting Officer, who shall promptly make a determination in writing. Any adjustment by the Contractor without
such a determination shall be at its own risk and expense. The Contracting Officer shall furnish from time to time
such detailed drawings and other information as considered necessary, unless otherwise provided.

(b) Wherever in the specifications or upon the drawings the words "directed", "required", "ordered", "designated",
"prescribed", or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the "direction", "requirement", "order",
"designation", or "prescription", of the Contracting Officer is intended and similarly the words "approved",
"acceptable", "satisfactory", or words of like import shall mean "approved by," or "acceptable to", or "satisfactory
to" the Contracting Officer, unless otherwise expressly stated.

(c) Where "as shown," as indicated", "as detailed", or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that
the reference is made to the drawings accompanying this contract unless stated otherwise. The word "provided" as
used herein shall be understood to mean "provide complete in place," that is "furnished and installed".

(d) Shop drawings means drawings, submitted to the Government by the Contractor, subcontractor, or any lower tier
subcontractor pursuant to a construction contract, showing in detail (1) the proposed fabrication and assembly of
structural elements, and (2) the installation (i.e., fit, and attachment details) of materials or equipment. It includes
drawings, diagrams, layouts, schematics, descriptive literature, illustrations, schedules, performance and test data,
and similar materials furnished by the contractor to explain in detail specific portions of the work required by the
contract. The Government may duplicate, use, and disclose in any manner and for any purpose shop drawings
delivered under this contract.

(e) If this contract requires shop drawings, the Contractor shall coordinate all such drawings, and review them for
accuracy, completeness, and compliance with contract requirements and shall indicate its approval thereon as
evidence of such coordination and review. Shop drawings submitted to the Contracting Officer without evidence of
the Contractor's approval may be returned for resubmission. The Contracting Officer will indicate an approval or
disapproval of the shop drawings and if not approved as submitted shall indicate the Government's reasons therefor.
Any work done before such approval shall be at the Contractor's risk. Approval by the Contracting Officer shall not
relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any errors or omissions in such drawings, nor from responsibility for
complying with the requirements of this contract, except with respect to variations described and approved in
accordance with (f) below.

(f) If shop drawings show variations from the contract requirements, the Contractor shall describe such variations in
writing, separate from the drawings, at the time of submission. If the Contracting Officer approves any such
variation, the Contracting Officer shall issue an appropriate contract modification, except that, if the variation is
minor or does not involve a change in price or in time of performance, a modification need not be issued.

(g) The Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer for approval four copies (unless otherwise indicated) of
all shop drawings as called for under the various headings of these specifications. Three sets (unless otherwise
indicated) of all shop drawings, will be retained by the Contracting Officer and one set will be returned to the
Contractor.

(End of clause)

52.236-23 RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ARCHITECT-ENGINEER CONTRACTOR (APR 1984)

(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for the professional quality, technical accuracy, and the coordination of all
designs, drawings, specifications, and other services furnished by the Contractor under this contract. The Contractor
shall, without additional compensation, correct or revise any errors or deficiencies in its designs, drawings,
specifications, and other services.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 139 of 148

(b) Neither the Government's review, approval or acceptance of, nor payment for, the services required under this
contract shall be construed to operate as a waiver of any rights under this contract or of any cause of action arising
out of the performance of this contract, and the Contractor shall be and remain liable to the Government in
accordance with applicable law for all damages to the Government caused by the Contractor's negligent
performance of any of the services furnished under this contract.

(c) The rights and remedies of the Government provided for under this contract are in addition to any other rights
and remedies provided by law.

(d) If the Contractor is comprised of more than one legal entity, each such entity shall be jointly and severally liable
hereunder.

(End of clause)

52.236-24 WORK OVERSIGHT IN ARCHITECT-ENGINEER CONTRACTS (APR 1984)

The extent and character of the work to be done by the Contractor shall be subject to the general oversight,
supervision, direction, control, and approval of the Contracting Officer.

(End of clause)

52.236-26 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE (FEB 1995)

If the Contracting Officer decides to conduct a preconstruction conference, the successful offeror will be notified
and will be required to attend. The Contracting Officer's notification will include specific details regarding the date,
time, and location of the conference, any need for attendance by subcontractors, and information regarding the items
to be discussed.

(End of clause)

52.236-9900 PERMITS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

The Contractor shall, without additional expense to the Government, be responsible for obtaining any
necessary licenses and permits, and for complying with any applicable laws, codes, and regulations, in connection
with the prosecution of the work. It shall be similarly responsible for all damages to persons or property that occur
as a result of his fault or negligence. It shall take proper safety and health precautions to protect the work, the
workers, the public, and the property of others. It shall also be responsible for all materials delivered and work
performed until completion and acceptance of the entire construction work, except for any completed unit of
construction thereof which theretofore may have been accepted.

(End of Clause)

52.242-14 SUSPENSION OF WORK (APR 1984)

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 140 of 148

(a) The Contracting Officer may order the Contractor, in writing, to suspend, delay, or interrupt all or any part of the
work of this contract for the period of time that the Contracting Officer determines appropriate for the convenience
of the Government.

(b) If the performance of all or any part of the work is, for an unreasonable period of time, suspended, delayed, or
interrupted (1) by an act of the Contracting Officer in the administration of this contract, or (2) by the Contracting
Officers failure to act within the time specified in this contract (or within a reasonable time if not specified), an
adjustment shall be made for any increase in the cost of performance of this contract (excluding profit) necessarily
caused by the unreasonable suspension, delay, or interruption, and the contract modified in writing accordingly.
However, no adjustment shall be made under this clause for any suspension, delay, or interruption to the extent that
performance would have been so suspended, delayed, or interrupted by any other cause, including the fault or
negligence of the Contractor, or for which an equitable adjustment is provided for or excluded under any other term
or condition of this contract.

(c) A claim under this clause shall not be allowed

(1) For any costs incurred more than 20 days before the Contractor shall have notified the Contracting Officer in
writing of the act or failure to act involved (but this requirement shall not apply as to a claim resulting from a
suspension order); and

(2) Unless the claim, in an amount stated, is asserted in writing as soon as practicable after the termination of the
suspension, delay, or interruption, but not later than the date of final payment under the contract.
(End of clause)

52.246-12 INSPECTION OF CONSTRUCTION (AUG 1996)

(a) Definition. "Work" includes, but is not limited to, materials, workmanship, and manufacture and fabrication of
components.

(b) The Contractor shall maintain an adequate inspection system and perform such inspections as will ensure that
the work performed under the contract conforms to contract requirements. The Contractor shall maintain complete
inspection records and make them available to the Government. All work shall be conducted under the general
direction of the Contracting Officer and is subject to Government inspection and test at all places and at all
reasonable times before acceptance to ensure strict compliance with the terms of the contract.

(c) Government inspections and tests are for the sole benefit of the Government and do not--

(1) Relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures;

(2) Relieve the Contractor of responsibility for damage to or loss of the material before acceptance;

(3) Constitute or imply acceptance; or

(4) Affect the continuing rights of the Government after acceptance of the completed work under paragraph (i) of
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 141 of 148

this section.

(d) The presence or absence of a Government inspector does not relieve the Contractor from any contract
requirement, nor is the inspector authorized to change any term or condition of the specification without the
Contracting Officer's written authorization.

(e) The Contractor shall promptly furnish, at no increase in contract price, all facilities, labor, and material
reasonably needed for performing such safe and convenient inspections and tests as may be required by the
Contracting Officer. The Government may charge to the Contractor any additional cost of inspection or test when
work is not ready at the time specified by the Contractor for inspection or test, or when prior rejection makes
reinspection or retest necessary. The Government shall perform all inspections and tests in a manner that will not
unnecessarily delay the work. Special, full size, and performance tests shall be performed as described in the
contract.

(f) The Contractor shall, without charge, replace or correct work found by the Government not to conform to
contract requirements, unless in the public interest the Government consents to accept the work with an appropriate
adjustment in contract price. The Contractor shall promptly segregate and remove rejected material from the
premises.

(g) If the Contractor does not promptly replace or correct rejected work, the Government may (1) by contract or
otherwise, replace or correct the work and charge the cost to the Contractor or (2) terminate for default the
Contractor's right to proceed.

(h) If, before acceptance of the entire work, the Government decides to examine already completed work by
removing it or tearing it out, the Contractor, on request, shall promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor, and
material. If the work is found to be defective or nonconforming in any material respect due to the fault of the
Contractor or its subcontractors, the Contractor shall defray the expenses of the examination and of satisfactory
reconstruction. However, if the work is found to meet contract requirements, the Contracting Officer shall make an
equitable adjustment for the additional services involved in the examination and reconstruction, including, if
completion of the work was thereby delayed, an extension of time.

(i) Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the Government shall accept, as promptly as practicable after
completion and inspection, all work required by the contract or that portion of the work the Contracting Officer
determines can be accepted separately. Acceptance shall be final and conclusive except for latent defects, fraud,
gross mistakes amounting to fraud, or the Government's rights under any warranty or guarantee.

(End of clause)

52.246-2100 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION

(a) In addition to any other warranties in this contract, the Contractor warrants, except as provided in paragraph (i)
of this clause, that work performed under this contract conforms to the contract requirements and is free of any
defect in equipment, material, or design furnished, or workmanship performed by the Contractor or any
subcontractor or supplier at any tier.
(b) This warranty shall continue for a period of 2 years from the date of final acceptance of the work. If the
Government takes possession of any part of the work before final acceptance, this warranty shall continue for a
period of 2 years from the date the Government takes possession.
(c) The Contractor shall remedy at the Contractor's expense any failure to conform, or any defect. In addition, the
Contractor shall remedy at the Contractor's expense any damage to Government-owned or controlled real or
personal property, when that damage is the result of--
(1) The Contractor's failure to conform to contract requirements; or
(2) Any defect of equipment, material, workmanship, or design furnished.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 142 of 148

(d) The Contractor shall restore any work damaged in fulfilling the terms and conditions of this clause. The
Contractor's warranty with respect to work repaired or replaced will run for 2 years from the date of repair or
replacement.
(e) The Contracting Officer shall notify the Contractor, in writing, within a reasonable time after the discovery of
any failure, defect, or damage.
(f) If the Contractor fails to remedy any failure, defect, or damage within a reasonable time after receipt of notice,
the Government shall have the right to replace, repair, or otherwise remedy the failure, defect, or damage at the
Contractor's expense.
(g) With respect to all warranties, express or implied, from subcontractors, manufacturers, or suppliers for work
performed and materials furnished under this contract, the Contractor shall--
(1) Obtain all warranties that would be given in normal commercial practice;
(2) Require all warranties to be executed, in writing, for the benefit of the Government, if directed by the
Contracting Officer; and
(3) Enforce all warranties for the benefit of the Government, if directed by the Contracting Officer.
(h) In the event the Contractor's warranty under paragraph (b) of this clause has expired, the Government may bring
suit at its expense to enforce a subcontractor's, manufacturer's, or supplier's warranty.
(i) Unless a defect is caused by the negligence of the Contractor or subcontractor or supplier at any tier, the
Contractor shall not be liable for the repair of any defects of material or design furnished by the Government nor for
the repair of any damage that results from any defect in Government-furnished material or design.
(j) This warranty shall not limit the Government's rights under the Inspection and Acceptance clause of this contract
with respect to latent defects, gross mistakes, or fraud.

(End of clause)

52.248-3 VALUE ENGINEERING--CONSTRUCTION (OCT 2010)

(a) General. The Contractor is encouraged to develop, prepare, and submit value engineering change proposals
(VECP's) voluntarily. The Contractor shall share in any instant contract savings realized from accepted VECP's, in
accordance with paragraph (f) below.

(b) Definitions. "Collateral costs," as used in this clause, means agency costs of operation, maintenance, logistic
support, or Government-furnished property.

"Collateral savings," as used in this clause, means those measurable net reductions resulting from a VECP in the
agency's overall projected collateral costs, exclusive of acquisition savings, whether or not the acquisition cost
changes.

"Contractor's development and implementation costs," as used in this clause, means those costs the Contractor
incurs on a VECP specifically in developing, testing, preparing, and submitting the VECP, as well as those costs the
Contractor incurs to make the contractual changes required by Government acceptance of a VECP.

"Government costs," as used in this clause, means those agency costs that result directly from developing and
implementing the VECP, such as any net increases in the cost of testing, operations, maintenance, and logistic
support. The term does not include the normal administrative costs of processing the VECP.

"Instant contract savings," as used in this clause, means the estimated reduction in Contractor cost of performance
resulting from acceptance of the VECP, minus allowable Contractor's development and implementation costs,
including subcontractors' development and implementation costs (see paragraph (h) below).

"Value engineering change proposal (VECP)" means a proposal that--

(1) Requires a change to this, the instant contract, to implement; and
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 143 of 148

(2) Results in reducing the contract price or estimated cost without impairing essential functions or characteristics;
provided, that it does not involve a change--

(i) In deliverable end item quantities only; or

(ii) To the contract type only.

(c) VECP preparation. As a minimum, the Contractor shall include in each VECP the information described in
subparagraphs(c) (1) through (7) below. If the proposed change is affected by contractually required configuration
management or similar procedures, the instructions in those procedures relating to format, identification, and
priority assignment shall govern VECP preparation. The VECP shall include the following:

(1) A description of the difference between the existing contract requirement and that proposed, the comparative
advantages and disadvantages of each, a justification when an item's function or characteristics are being altered,
and the effect of the change on the end item's performance.

(2) A list and analysis of the contract requirements that must be changed if the VECP is accepted, including any
suggested specification revisions.

(3) A separate, detailed cost estimate for

(i) the affected portions of the existing contract requirement and

(ii) the VECP. The cost reduction associated with the VECP shall take into account the Contractor's allowable
development and implementation costs, including any amount attributable to subcontracts under paragraph (h)
below.

(4) A description and estimate of costs the Government may incur in implementing the VECP, such as test and
evaluation and operating and support costs.

(5) A prediction of any effects the proposed change would have on collateral costs to the agency.

(6) A statement of the time by which a contract modification accepting the VECP must be issued in order to achieve
the maximum cost reduction, noting any effect on the contract completion time or delivery schedule.

(7) Identification of any previous submissions of the VECP, including the dates submitted, the agencies and contract
numbers involved, and previous Government actions, if known.

(d) Submission. The Contractor shall submit VECP's to the Resident Engineer at the worksite, with a copy to the

(e) Government action.

(1) The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of the status of the VECP within 45 calendar days after the
contracting office receives it. If additional time is required, the Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor within
the 45-day period and provide the reason for the delay and the expected date of the decision. The Government will
process VECP's expeditiously; however, it shall not be liable for any delay in acting upon a VECP.

If the VECP is not accepted, the Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor in writing, explaining the reasons for
rejection. The Contractor may withdraw any VECP, in whole or in part, at any time before it is accepted by the
Government. The Contracting Officer may require that the Contractor provide written notification before
undertaking significant expenditures for VECP effort.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 144 of 148

Any VECP may be accepted, in whole or in part, by the Contracting Officer's award of a modification to this
contract citing this clause. The Contracting Officer may accept the VECP, even though an agreement on price
reduction has not been reached, by issuing the Contractor a notice to proceed with the change. Until a notice to
proceed is issued or a contract modification applies a VECP to this contract, the Contractor shall perform in
accordance with the existing contract. The decision to accept or reject all or part of any VECP is a unilateral
decision made solely at the discretion of the Contracting Officer.

(f) Sharing.

(1) Rates. The Government's share of savings is determined by subtracting Government costs from instant contract
savings and multiplying the result by

(i) 45 percent for fixed-price contracts or

(ii) 75 percent for cost-reimbursement contracts.

(2) Payment. Payment of any share due the Contractor for use of a VECP on this contract shall be authorized by a
modification to this contract to--

(i) Accept the VECP;

(ii) Reduce the contract price or estimated cost by the amount of instant contract savings; and

(iii) Provide the Contractor's share of savings by adding the amount calculated to the contract price or fee.

(g) Collateral savings. If a VECP is accepted, the Contracting Officer will increase the instant contract amount by
20 percent of any projected collateral savings determined to be realized in a typical year of use after subtracting any
Government costs not previously offset. However, the Contractor's share of collateral savings will not exceed the
contract's firm-fixed-price or estimated cost, at the time the VECP is accepted, or $100,000, whichever is greater.
The Contracting Officer is the sole determiner of the amount of collateral savings.

(h) Subcontracts. The Contractor shall include an appropriate value engineering clause in any subcontract of
$65,000 or more and may include one in subcontracts of lesser value. In computing any adjustment in this
contract's price under paragraph (f) above, the Contractor's allowable development and implementation costs shall
include any subcontractor's allowable development and implementation costs clearly resulting from a VECP
accepted by the Government under this contract, but shall exclude any value engineering incentive payments to a
subcontractor. The Contractor may choose any arrangement for subcontractor value engineering incentive
payments; provided, that these payments shall not reduce the Government's share of the savings resulting from the
VECP.

(i) Data. The Contractor may restrict the Government's right to use any part of a VECP or the supporting data by
marking the following legend on the affected parts:

"These data, furnished under the Value Engineering-- Construction clause of contract . . . . . . . . . . , shall not be
disclosed outside the Government or duplicated, used, or disclosed, in whole or in part, for any purpose other than
to evaluate a value engineering change proposal submitted under the clause. This restriction does not limit the
Government's right to use information contained in these data if it has been obtained or is otherwise available from
the Contractor or from another source without limitations." If a VECP is accepted, the Contractor hereby grants the
Government unlimited rights in the VECP and supporting data, except that, with respect to data qualifying and
submitted as limited rights technical data, the Government shall have the rights specified in the contract
modification implementing the VECP and shall appropriately mark the data. (The terms "unlimited rights" and
"limited rights" are defined in Part 27 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation.)

(End of clause)
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 145 of 148

52.249-10 DEFAULT (FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION) (APR 1984)

(a) If the Contractor refuses or fails to prosecute the work or any separable part, with the diligence that will insure
its completion within the time specified in this contract including any extension, or fails to complete the work within
this time, the Government may, by written notice to the Contractor, terminate the right to proceed with the work (or
the separable part of the work) that has been delayed. In this event, the Government may take over the work and
complete it by contract or otherwise, and may take possession of and use any materials, appliances, and plant on the
work site necessary for completing the work. The Contractor and its sureties shall be liable for any damage to the
Government resulting from the Contractors refusal or failure to complete the work within the specified time,
whether or not the Contractors right to proceed with the work is terminated. This liability includes any increased
costs incurred by the Government in completing the work.

(b) The Contractors right to proceed shall not be terminated nor the Contractor charged with damages under this
clause, if

(1) The delay in completing the work arises from unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or
negligence of the Contractor. Examples of such causes include

(i) Acts of God or of the public enemy,

(ii) Acts of the Government in either its sovereign or contractual capacity,

(iii) Acts of another Contractor in the performance of a contract with the Government,

(iv) Fires,

(v) Floods,

(vi) Epidemics,

(vii) Quarantine restrictions,

(viii) Strikes,

(ix) Freight embargoes,

(x) Unusually severe weather, or

(xi) Delays of subcontractors or suppliers at any tier arising from unforeseeable causes beyond the control and
without the fault or negligence of both the Contractor and the subcontractors or suppliers; and

(2) The Contractor, within 10 days from the beginning of any delay (unless extended by the Contracting Officer),
notifies the Contracting Officer in writing of the causes of delay. The Contracting Officer shall ascertain the facts
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 146 of 148

and the extent of delay. If, in the judgment of the Contracting Officer, the findings of fact warrant such action, the
time for completing the work shall be extended. The findings of the Contracting Officer shall be final and
conclusive on the parties, but subject to appeal under the Disputes clause.

(c) If, after termination of the Contractors right to proceed, it is determined that the Contractor was not in default,
or that the delay was excusable, the rights and obligations of the parties will be the same as if the termination had
been issued for the convenience of the Government.

(d) The rights and remedies of the Government in this clause are in addition to any other rights and remedies
provided by law or under this contract.
(End of clause)

252.227-7022 GOVERNMENT RIGHTS (UNLIMITED) (MAR 1979)

The Government shall have unlimited rights, in all drawings, designs, specifications, notes and other works
developed in the performance of this contract, including the right to use same on any other Government design or
construction without additional compensation to the Contractor. The Contractor hereby grants to the Government a
paid-up license throughout the world to all such works to which he may assert or establish any claim under design
patent or copyright laws. The Contractor for a period of three (3) years after completion of the project agrees to
furnish the original or copies of all such works on the request of the Contracting Officer.

(End of clause)

252.227-7033 RIGHTS IN SHOP DRAWINGS (APR 1966)

(a) Shop drawings for construction means drawings, submitted to the Government by the Construction Contractor,
subcontractor or any lower-tier subcontractor pursuant to a construction contract, showing in detail (i) the proposed
fabrication and assembly of structural elements and (ii) the installation (i.e., form, fit, and attachment details) of
materials or equipment. The Government may duplicate, use, and disclose in any manner and for any purpose shop
drawings delivered under this contract.

(b) This clause, including this paragraph (b), shall be included in all subcontracts hereunder at any tier.

252.232-7008 ASSIGNMENT OF CLAIMS (OVERSEAS) (J UNE 1997)

(a) No claims for monies due, or to become due, shall be assigned by the Contractor unless

(1) Approved in writing by the Contracting Officer;

(2) Made in accordance with the laws and regulations of the United States of America; and

(3) Permitted by the laws and regulations of the Contractor's country.

W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 147 of 148

(b) In no event shall copies of this contract of any plans, specifications, or other similar documents relating to work
under this contract, if marked Top Secret, Secret, or Confidential be furnished to any assignee of any claim
arising under this contract or to any other person not entitled to receive such documents. However, a copy of any
part or all of this contract so marked may be furnished, or any information contained herein may be disclosed, to
such assignee upon the Contracting Officer's prior written authorization.

(c) Any assignment under this contract shall cover all amounts payable under this contract and not already paid, and
shall not be made to more than one party, except that any such assignment may be made to one party as agent or
trustee for two or more parties participating in such financing. On each invoice or voucher submitted for payment
under this contract to which any assignment applies, and for which direct payment thereof is to be made to an
assignee, the Contractor shall

(1) Identify the assignee by name and complete address; and

(2) Acknowledge the validity of the assignment and the right of the named assignee to receive payment in the
amount invoiced or vouchered.

(End of clause)

252.233-7001 CHOICE OF LAW (OVERSEAS) (J UNE 1997)

This contract shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with the substantive laws of the United States of
America. By the execution of this contract, the Contractor expressly agrees to waive any rights to invoke the
jurisdiction of local national courts where this contract is performed and agrees to accept the exclusive jurisdiction
of the United States Armed Services Board of Contract Appeals and the United States Court of Federal Claims for
hearing and determination of any and all disputes that may arise under the Disputes clause of this contract.

(End of clause)

252.236-7000 MODIFICATION PROPOSALS - PRICE BREAKDOWN. (DEC 1991)

(a) The Contractor shall furnish a price breakdown, itemized as required and within the time specified by the
Contracting Officer, with any proposal for a contract modification.

(b) The price breakdown --

(1) Must include sufficient detail to permit an analysis of profit, and of all costs for --

(i) Material;

(ii) Labor;

(iii) Equipment;

(iv) Subcontracts; and

(v) Overhead; and

(2) Must cover all work involved in the modification, whether the work was deleted, added, or changed.

(c) The Contractor shall provide similar price breakdowns to support any amounts claimed for subcontracts.
W912GB-13-R-0027

Page 148 of 148

(d) The Contractor's proposal shall include a justification for any time extension proposed.

252.236-7001 CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS (AUG 2000)

(a) The Government will provide to the Contractor, without charge, one set of contract drawings and specifications,
except publications incorporated into the technical provisions by reference, in electronic or paper media as chosen
by the Contracting Officer.

(b) The Contractor shall--

(1) Check all drawings furnished immediately upon receipt;

(2) Compare all drawings and verify the figures before laying out the work;

(3) Promptly notify the Contracting Officer of any discrepancies;

(4) Be responsible for any errors that might have been avoided by complying with this paragraph (b); and

(5) Reproduce and print contract drawings and specifications as needed.

(c) In general--

(1) Large-scale drawings shall govern small-scale drawings; and

(2) The Contractor shall follow figures marked on drawings in preference to scale measurements.

(d) Omissions from the drawings or specifications or the misdescription of details of work that are manifestly
necessary to carry out the intent of the drawings and specifications, or that are customarily performed, shall not
relieve the Contractor from performing such omitted or misdescribed details of the work. The Contractor shall
perform such details as if fully and correctly set forth and described in the drawings and specifications.

(e) The work shall conform to the specifications and the contract drawings identified on the following index of
drawings:

Title File Drawing No.

Refer to List of Drawings referenced in the Table of Contents

(End of clause)

SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
BMD Launcher LS 13103
9 May 2013

SR-0 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

The scope of work for this contract includes all works to be executed as detailed within the
Specifications, Drawings, Host Nation Technical Requirements (HNTRs) and the Bid Schedule.

The scope of work for this contract pertains to four buildings identified as #43, #44, #45 & #46
and includes:

1) Facility Construction to include but not limited to reinforced protected concrete
structures, approximate area - 450 sq-m each, including storage and operations areas.
Reinforced concrete pile foundations, protective reinforced concrete walls and
reinforced concrete protected roofs, protective doors/gates and interior & exterior
paint finishes. Building systems to include: electricity, communication, air
conditioning, fire detection and lifting devices.
2) Site Development to include but not limited to roadways connecting the buildings to
existing roads, infrastructure and utility connections for electricity, communication,
water, sewage and drainage pipes, fire detection, earth works, paving, fences and
gates, etc.

SR-1 TAX CLAUSE: TAXES IMPOSED BY THE GOVERNMENT OF ISRAEL

1. General:
Contractors and subcontractors will be required to pay all taxes, duties, or other charges levied by
the Government of Israel (GOI) in accordance with Israeli law and regulations. Certain
expenditures for taxes, duties or similar charges will be reimbursable to the prime contractor as
provided in this clause. Bid prices shall not include the value of taxes for which the contractor
will be reimbursed.

2. Definitions:
a. Direct taxes: As used in this clause, direct taxes are: personal income and employment
taxes for third country national workers imported into Israel exclusively for work on this
contract or other contracts in LOA#IS-B-HBG Direct taxes will be reimbursed based
upon actual expenses incurred by the contractor and subcontractors under procedures set
out in this clause. Third Country National Tax Plan shall be submitted by the
successful offeror within seven (7) calendar days after award.
Personal Income and Employment Taxes for Third Country Nationals:
1) For purposes of this clause, Third Country Nationals (TCNs) are those persons
who are nationals of countries other than the United States or Israel.
2) The tax exemption for TCN personal income and employment taxes on earnings
is limited to those third country nationals who enter Israel as employees of the contractor
or subcontractors to work exclusively on this contract or other contracts under LOA#IS-
B-HBG. As an interim measure, for a limited time only, the GOI has agreed to extend
coverage of this exemption to TCNs who did not enter Israel to work on projects under
this LOA.
3) At least 15 days prior to the arrival of TCNs at the job site, the Contractor will
provide the Contracting Officer with the following information for each TCN employee:
Full Name
Date of Birth
Place of Birth
Citizenship
Passport Number, date and place of issuance
Visa Information
Current Residence
The Contracting Officer will forward this information to the GOI and the GOI
will verify eligibility for tax exemption. The Contracting Officer will notify the
contractor upon verifications by the GOI that the submitted employees have qualified for
tax exempt status.
4) The contractor and/or subcontractors shall not withhold personal income taxes
from the wages of qualifying TCN employees. The contractor and/or subcontractors will
pay all income taxes required by Israeli law to the appropriate agencies/jurisdictions for
qualifying TCN employees.
5) Income and employment taxes paid for qualifying employees of the contractor
and subcontractors will be itemized on the monthly contractor invoices to the U. S.
Government. For each qualifying employee, invoices will include the amount and type of
taxes paid, period for which taxes were paid, and employee earnings for the period. The

contractor will require all subcontractors to provide this information to the contractor for
qualifying employees of the subcontractors. Invoices submitted more than 90 days after
the taxes were paid by the contractor will not be reimbursed.
6) TCN personal income and employment taxes paid will be reimbursed in U. S.
dollars to contractors as part of their regular periodic payments, after approval of invoices
by the Contracting Officer. Reimbursement will be based upon exchange rates in effect
on the date the contractor paid the taxes. For this purpose, the exchange rate shall be the
rate in use by the U. S. Embassy in Tel Aviv.
b. Indirect taxes: As used in the clause, all duties, charges and fees levied by the GOI other than
those defined in this clause as 'direct taxes' will be considered to be 'indirect taxes'.
Reimbursement of indirect taxes will not be done on actual cost basis. Indirect taxes will be
reimbursed to the contractor as a percentage of contract amount. Under this contract,
1.99% of the contract price will be paid to the contractor in U. S. dollars as a full and
complete reimbursement for indirect taxes paid. The percentage of reimbursement is
not subject to adjustment and cannot be the subject of a claim under the dispute
provision of this contract. Payments to the contractor for indirect taxes will be based
upon contract earnings as shown on approved invoices to the U. S. Government for
progress payments.

3. Value Added Tax (VAT)
a. The contractor, or the contractor's legal representative in Israel, will be required to
register with the GOI VAT authorities, in accordance with GOI law and regulation.
b. For Israeli VAT paid by the contractor to subcontractors, suppliers, or others, the
contractor shall seek reimbursement directly from the VAT authorities. For purposes of
this clause, this is considered to be the input tax.
c. For every invoice the contractor submits to the U. S. Government, the contractor should
add a separate line reflecting Israeli VAT at the appropriate rate. The U. S. Government
will not pay the amount of the VAT line. Reimbursement of VAT other than input tax
will occur in the specified way below:
i. The contractor is required to pay VAT to the GOI VAT authorities at the normal
rate (currently17.0%). In this event, the contractor will submit to the MOD an
invoice in Shekels for the VAT. The invoice to the MOD should reflect the VAT
on the amount of the approved U. S. Government invoice. A copy of the
contractor's approved invoice to the U. S. Government should be attached to the
invoice to MOD. The contractor will be paid by the GOI MOD for VAT in
Israeli Shekels, based upon it's invoice to MOD. The contractor will than pay the
VAT to the VAT authorities.
The details of the process for reimbursement will be established between the contractor
and the Ministry of Defense prior to the start of construction.
d. For pricing proposes, the contractor should not include VAT in the contract prices.

4. Third Country National Tax Plan:
a. The Contractor shall submit a Third Country National (TCN) Tax Plan within 7 calendar
days after award which shall include: (1) an estimate of the amount of TCN personal
income and employment taxes expected to be incurred in performance of the contract;
and, (2) a projected expenditure schedule showing when the contractor expects to incur
these costs over the duration of the contract. Submission of the plan and acceptance of the

contractor's proposal by the Contracting Officer will not constitute agreement to
minimum level of reimbursement nor will it be a limitation on reimbursement to the
contractor. The plan must address subcontractors as well as the prime contractor.
b. The TCN Tax Plan submitted is a required submittal under the resultant contract. In the
event of significant changes in expenditure levels or timing of TCN workers during
performance of the contract, an updated plan, along with justification for any changes,
must be resubmitted by the contractor for Contracting Officer approval. The Contracting
Officer will not unreasonably withhold approval for changes in the plan.

c. The requirement for submission of a TCN Tax Plan does not constitute a requirement to
use TCN labor on the project, not is it a warranty of the availability of TCN labor.
Ensuring adequate manpower to perform the work and decision concerning the makeup
of the labor force are the responsibility of the contractor, acting within the laws and
regulations of the State of Israel.

SR-2 EXISTING STRUCTURE AND INSTALLATIONS

Prior to starting work, the contractor shall be in coordination with the COR for
conformance with the contract requirements; and ensure that the contractor has all the
information concerning cables and/or other pipes such as: telephone cables, electric
cables, water pipes, sewage, etc.

The contractor is responsible for the wholeness of existing structures and
installations, above and below the ground, at and in the vicinity of the work location,
and will fix, at his own expense, any damage resulting from performance of his work,
and/or as the result of harm to them in any way during the work performance (hit,
bumped into, etc.) whether or not they are marked in the drawings or information was
provided about them.

In the event it is discovered that an installation interferes with the work of the
contractor, the contractor shall immediately notify the COR and receive orders from
him concerning the required handling of the matter.

Performance of work in the vicinity of underground electric cables, whether or not
marked in drawings of the site or whether notification of their existence was provided by
the COR, is conditioned on the presence of the base electrical engineer or the engineer of
the installation wherein the work is performed.

Performance of work in the vicinity of communications cables - only in the presence
of a representative of Bezeq.

Performance of work in the vicinity of computer lines - in the presence of an
authorized representative of the base and the COR.

Within the framework of the contract price proposed by the Contractor, he is
responsible to coordinate and summon these above mentioned representatives through
the COR. The contractor will pay their costs.

SR-3 BASE SECURITY REQUIREMENTS

The Contractor shall comply with the IAF Base security requirements with respect to employees
as detailed in Document C1

Subject to the security document hereinafter:

d) Entrance to the site is only by approval by name
d) Prior to issuing the Notice to Proceed, the contractor shall submit to the COR, a
list of names of the workers that he intends to employ at the work site, including
all the required personal details.
d) Workers whose entrance is approved shall be supplied with approval by name for
the required performance time.
d) During performance at the site, the contractor and his workers are subject to the
security conditions of the area as will be publicized from time to time by the
proper authorities.
d) A delay of more than four weeks in obtaining entrance approval for a worker of
the contractor shall not be a reason for any financial claim, except extension of
the performance period accordingly.

Israel Base Security Requirements
(Employment of Non-Israeli Employees)

1. The employment of all non-Israeli employees from any country having diplomatic
relations with Israel is allowed. We do not warrant the availability of labor from
these countries nor do we give assurance that individuals will be granted access.
2. The Contractor shall submit to the COR a list of his permanent employees,
enclosing their pictures. Each morning, upon arrival to the site, the employee will
be inspected at the site gate by the base HQ representative according to this list,
and then shall be accompanied by the contractors liaison (refer to Israel Base
General Security Requirements Section, paragraph 7 below) up to the work site.
The employees shall leave their passports at the gate upon arrival, and shall pick
up their passports at the gate upon leaving at the end of the workday.
3. The Contracting Officer retains all rights to refuse or inhibit employment of any
employee or the employment of any group of employees.
4. The following are conditions set forth for the employment of non-Israeli
employees in Israel base areas:

a. The construction site shall be separated from the close military
installations by means of a solid tight fence a minimum of 2 meters
high.

b. The fenced area shall have one gate only for both entering and
exiting the site.

c. Arrival and exit to and from the work site shall be accomplished in
a group only.

d. Work at the sites beyond a standard 8-hour workday will not be
permitted without the prior express written approval of the COR.
No overnight stay at the Base construction site shall be allowed.
The Contractor shall verify that after working hours no employee
is left on site for overnight stay.

e. A liaison on behalf of the Contractor, serving as liaison officer
between the Contractor and the COR, shall be present on site
during the employees stay on site. This person shall be an Israeli
citizen who has completed their Israeli Defense Force (IDF)
service, and shall have the approval of the field security.

f. During work hours, all employees shall stay at the construction site
only. No exit or entrance to the site shall be allowed during work
hours except for material supply trucks.

g. The Contractor shall supply his employees with all necessary
services through the work site areas.

Israel Base General Security Requirements
(All Employees)

1. The base HQ, in coordination with the COR and the Contractor liaison person,
shall oversee the entry and exit of material trucks into the construction sites.
2. The Contractor performing the works shall sign a secrecy obligation document,
according to which the Contractor agrees to fulfill all these present field security
instructions, as well as any future instructions set forth for the construction site by
the base HQ.
3. The Contracting Officer retains all rights to stop the Contractors work if he does
not comply with the field security instructions set forth in this document and this
action shall not be a reason for any financial claim.

4. Prior to issuing the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit the list of the
project designers to the Contracting Officer in order to qualify them for entrance
to the IAF bases.
5. The employees work clothing shall be uniform in appearance with the
Contractor's name on it (not military of any kind).
6. For the matter of entrance and exiting off non Israeli workers (approved
according Israel Base Security Requirements (Employment of Non-Israeli
Employees Section)), material trucks and visitors that do not have an entry permit,
the base HQ in coordination with the COR, will approve a Contractor liaison to
escort them from the gate to the work site and back. The liaison shall be an Israeli
citizen from managerial echelon of the Contactor.
7. The contractor shall appoint a guard (or multiple guards as required by this
paragraph) that will be on site and will prevent any construction employees from
leaving the construction fenced area and will escort any employee that has to
leave the fenced area for any construction activity .The guard will be on site every
working day from the time that the employees are arriving in the morning until
the employees are leaving at the end of the day .The guard will not have any other
assignments on site. The guard will be an Israeli citizen who served in the IDF.
The contractor shall submit the guard's documents for Base approval through the
COR. The Contractor shall supply one (1) guard for each group of ten (10) non-
classified Israeli employees.

Restricted
(Confidential After Filling-in)

Field Security Appendix Contract No. _____________

Form No. 1 List of Employees

Serial
No.
ID Card or
Passport No.
Military
Number
Last
Name
First
Name
Father
Name
Full
Address
A B C D E F

Contractors Signature: _______________________

(END OF THE ATTACHMENT TO THE SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS)

BMD LAUNCHER

LS 13103

Special Specifications

13May2013

Page 1 of 252

TableOfContent
Chapter 01 Earthworks .................................................................................. 2
Chapter 02 - Cast-On-Site Concrete ................................................................. 5
Chapter 05 - Waterproofing Works ................................................................ 17
Chapter 06 Joinery and Metal Works .......................................................... 26
Chapter 07 - Plumbing and sanitary installations ........................................... 34
Chapter 08 - Electrical Works, Special General Specifications ..................... 38
Chapter 11 Painting Works ........................................................................ 140
Chapter 15 Air Conditioning Installations ................................................. 145
Chapter 19 - Structural Steel ......................................................................... 154
Chapter 22 - Prefabricated Elements ............................................................ 156
Chapter 23 Drilled and Cast in Place Piling .............................................. 160
Chapter 24 Dismantling and Demolition Works ....................................... 161
Chapter 33 Cranes and Lifting Installations. ............................................ 163
Chapter 34 - Fire Detection and Extinguishing Systems .............................. 175
Chapter 44 - Fencing and Gates works ......................................................... 205
Chapter 51 - Site Development Works ......................................................... 208
Chapter 57 Water Lines, Sewage and Channeling .................................... 214
Chapter 66 - Protective Doors ....................................................................... 225
Chapter 98 Enclosed Prime Power Generator Set and Fuel tank .............. 246

Page 2 of 252

Chapter 01 Earthworks

01.01 General

Chapter 01 of the Host Nation Technical Requirements shall be read in conjunction with this
Special Specification which constitutes the extent of the Work with regard to Earthworks. In
the event of conflict these special specifications shall prevail over the Host Nation Technical
Requirements (HNTR).

01.02 Additional Standards

Not applicable

01.03 Submittals Required for Earthworks

Drawing showing the proposed sequence and staging of the excavation work.

01.04 Scope of Work

This Chapter covers the earthworks associated with the construction of structures, their
foundation, and re-leveling of the ground surface according to the designed levels.
The earthworks carried out for streets, roads, fences/walls and drainage installations shall be
carried out according to the instructions of Chapter 51 hereinafter.
The earthworks for structures shall be carried out as necessary only, matching the ground
surface to the structure levels.
The detailed design of the excavation works and/or the Contractor designers shall implement
the soil and foundation recommendations prepared by a certified soil and foundation
consultant employed by the Contractor.
In addition to the Host Nation Technical Requirements (HNTR), the Contractor shall exercise
the necessary means, at his expense, in order to: support the excavation walls, the waste and
sub-base layers to allow normal and undisturbed vehicle traffic during the excavation and
return the ground to its original state and/or as designed.
Protect the excavation against damage that may be created by landslide, flooding, wind,
sunlight, etc. throughout the entire construction period of works, until delivery to the
Contracting Officer Representative (COR).
Protect the site against rain or any other water source. The Contractor shall excavate
temporary channels to avoid water penetration and maintain the Site in normal condition
during the rain period. Filling the temporary channels excavated by the Contractor prior to
delivery of the Site.
All earthworks including but not limited to the works necessary to protect the Site and
drainage thereof are covered by the final (lump sum) price proposed by the Contractor for the
performance of his works.
Any damage caused as a result of the aforementioned activities and reasons, both if the
Contractor exercised appropriate protective means or did not do so, shall be repaired by the
Contractor immediately, at his own account, in accordance with the project requirements and
should be coordinated with the COR.
The Contractor prices cover, in addition to all items specified in all documents of this
Contract, the removal of excess soil to authorized waste site, for conformance with the
requirements.
Page 3 of 252

Following the issue of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall have a survey made by a
Licensed Engineering Surveyor of the existing situation and provide the COR with two
copies of the survey.
The Contractor shall remove all rubbish, building materials, natural materials and all
materials representing an obstruction that shall be found on the Work Site. The rubbish and
other obstructions shall be removed to a dumping Site approved by the COR.
Prior to the beginning of work close to existing Buildings, the Contractor shall carry out
excavations/breaking up for probing the attention required for uncovering foundations,
underground pipelines and facilities, all the above in coordination with the COR.

A. Unneeded Excavation/Breaking-up
In such cases where the Contractor shall deepen the excavation/break-up below the
indicated level and/or beyond the limits in the drawings, the Contractor shall fill back
the surplus excavation with imported granular material with controlled compaction of
at least six rollers rounds.

B. Bedding
The various bedding works are detailed in Chapter 51 Roadways and Squares
Paving, of the Special Specification.

01.05 Geotechnical Investigation

Inspection

1. The Contractor shall inspect and record the condition of the site and adjoining
properties prior to commencement. Any discrepancies between the site as
inspected and information otherwise provided are to be reported to the COR
immediately.

Soil Profile

1. Soil Boring Logs are attached to this solicitation package.

01.06 Compaction

The bottom of the excavation and/or the soil surface shall be compacted to a minimum of 15
cm below the surface, to at least 95% of the maximum dry density in accordance with
AASHTO T180 and AASHTO T224.
The compaction shall be made in layers not to exceed 15 to 20 cm thick each after
compaction to a minimum density level of 98% of the maximum dry density. No fill layer
shall be placed on a previous level before the COR inspected the prior one and approved the
prior layer in writing. The compaction shall be carried out by means of approved suitable
methods approved by the COR.

01.07 Soil or Rock Excavation

To remove any doubt - the term excavation whenever mentioned, applied to both rock
excavation and soil excavation.

Page 4 of 252

01.08 Sounding/groping and sounding excavation

The Contractor shall identify all the underground systems existing within the Site boundaries
and mark them up. This shall include the execution of sounding and careful excavation.

A. Sounding/groping and sounding excavation
Prior to the execution of the excavation for the infrastructure and/or any other
excavation, the Contractor shall expose, identify and mark the electricity,
communications, water, sewage, fuel, etc. infrastructures. The exposure shall also be
done by means of a covering exposure kit (detector). The Contractor shall use various
types of detectors & methods to find underground systems.
The Contractor shall submit to the COR a detailed report of the infrastructures found
along the route projected excavation layout.
The Contractor shall peg the electricity, water, sewage, communications, fuel, etc.
infrastructures and execute the excavation following the issue of a written approval by
the COR.
The execution of the excavation works by any equipment that may be required,
including manual work, shall be the choice of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall also deal with the subgrades levels so as to prevent collapse, for
the excavation of access roads to low levels.

End of Chapter 01 Special Specification

Page 5 of 252

Chapter 02 - Cast-On-Site Concrete

02.01 General

A. Chapter 02 of the Host Nation Technical Requirements (HNTR) shall be read in
conjunction with this Special Specifications which constitute the extent of the Work
with regard to Cast-In-Situ Concrete. In case of conflict the special specifications
shall prevail over the HNTR.


A. In addition to Chapter 02, paragraph 02002 add the following to the list of standards
applying to this Chapter:

Not applicable.

02.03 Submittals for Architectural Cast-In-Place Concrete (Exposed Concrete)

A. Shop Drawings

1. The Contractor shall submit shop details and placing drawings for reinforcing
steel.

2. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings of the forms required for
architectural cast-in-place concrete. The Contractor shall show the design,
materials proposed for use, location of form joints, location of construction
joints and location of form ties.

B. Mock-Up for Architectural Cast-In-Place Concrete

1. Do not proceed with construction of the mock-up until samples are reviewed
and approved by the COR.

2. Prior to placing architectural cast-in-place concrete, the Contractor shall erect a
mock-up at the job site, in an isolated place, where directed by the COR, 1.5m x
1.5m x full thickness, consisting of the elements indicated on the Drawings and
conforming to building details. Use reinforcing required for final construction.
Provide weather protection at exposed upper surfaces to prevent penetration of
rain. Provide footings and bracing on interior face to assure continuous stability.

3. Install, patch and finish concrete as specified for permanent work. Mock-up,
when accepted by the COR, shall serve as the sample for architectural cast-in-
place concrete work as to color, finish, texture and appearance.

4. Demolish the mock-up at the end of the work.

Page 6 of 252

02.04 Materials

A. Concrete

1. No site mixing of concrete shall be permitted without specific approval of the
COR. Such approval shall not be granted unless the Contractor can demonstrate
the CORs satisfaction that a Quality Control system is in place to ensure quality
of any site mixed concrete equals or exceeds Ready Mixed concrete.

2. Unless agreed otherwise, all concrete shall be ready mixed concrete in
accordance with IS601, prepared under good control conditions.

3. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, concrete shall have a grade consistency
of S4 according to paragraph 02022 in the General Specifications.

4. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, concrete shall have a minimum
compressive strength of B-30.

02.05 Execution of Cast on Site Concrete Works.

A. General
1. Prior to casting the concrete, all concreted elements belonging to various
systems or linked to other elements shall be attached to the formwork and
approved by the COR. The approval by the COR shall not release the Contractor
from his responsibility for the execution of the works and every correction or
change or replacement due to neglect, mistake or defect due to casting or to the
use of non-appropriate material shall be at the Contractors own cost.

2. All the concrete floor-slabs that are not to be tiled and roofs shall be helicopter
smoothened.

B. Class of Concrete
The class of the concrete for all the Buildings part shall be B-40, unless otherwise
specified in the Drawings.
The required quality control for all the types of concrete in all the Buildings parts
shall be good control conditions.

C. Exactness of the Execution
In order to ensure maximum exactness in the various works, a licensed Surveyor of
the Contractor shall be employed in all the various marking-up works, including the
execution of walls, columns and floors.

Special attention for the roof at +7.00: the exactness of this roof, with its special
concrete (with a superplasticizer), slopes, holes, ML elements is the prior
concern.
Max tolerances up to 1 mm shall be accepted regarding the location (by 3
dimensions) of the ML elements.

D. Holes, Grooves, Sleeves, Concrete Elements, etc.

Page 7 of 252

1. Prior to the casting of the concrete, the Contractor shall find out and make sure
the exact location of all the holes, grooves and sleeves in order to enable
appropriate preparations to be executed prior to the casting, special attention is
required for launcing holes end their metal frames ML-1 and ML-2, they shall
be excectly in place (also in height) without any tolerance .

The steel door frames shall be fixed before the execution of the building of
concrete walls, prior to the concrete elements casting which shall include bond-
bars, in coordination with the COR for conformance with the contract
requirements. The Contractor shall take care of the strengthening and the
supports so that with the casting of the concrete, there shall be no deformations
in the frame.

2. For the sake of eventual clarifications, the Contractor shall check the systems
plans and examine together with the COR, and Sub-Contractors of all the
systems on the Site, all the required preparations, including the matching of the
Buildings drawings with the drawings of the Sanitary, Electrical, Air
Conditioning Installations, etc.

It is hereby emphasized that it shall be necessary that all the preparations and
arrangements shall appear in the Contractors shop drawings and that it shall be
required to check the drawings of all the systems Consultants and Sub-
Contractors.

Prior to casting the concrete, the Contractor shall prepare a drawing of all
holes, grooves, sleeves, depressions, etc. in order to enable appropriate
preparations as well as check with the Sub-Contractors of the
electromechanical systems and all other people involved, all the details related
to their work, so as to prepare for them all that may be needed.

Every hole, passage, slope and opening appearing in one of the system's
drawings and not executed by the Contractor for any reason whatsoever, shall
be performed by him after the casting, with a drill or saw, in coordination with
the COR, free of charge.

E. In addition to limitations for cover described in General Specification clause 02075,
covers shall be not less than the following unless noted otherwise on the drawings:

1. Generally cover not less than 3 cm.

2. Tie Beams & Pile Caps not less than 5 cm.

3. Piles not less than 7 cm.

All exposed corners and arises shall be chamfered by addition of triangular sections
(1.5 cm x 1.5 cm) to forms prior to casting unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
Architectural Cast-In-Place concrete shall not receive chamfered corners unless
shown on the drawings.

Page 8 of 252

F. Reinforcement

1. Reinforcement shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the
requirements as follows:

a. General Requirements: All reinforcing steel shall comply with the
requirements of IS 466. All reinforcing steel shall be of weld-able
steel. All the reinforcing steel shall be cut and bent in accordance with
the Drawings and tied or spot welded. Where required continuous bars
shall be lapped by an amount equal to 60 times the bar diameter unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings. Welding if used shall comply with
IS 466, (Clause 9.5.5). Lap locations shall be in accordance with the
Drawings. Any deviation from the above requires the CORs approval
in advance.

2. Placing of Reinforcement: The reinforcement shall have sufficient bracing to
hold it rigidly together while being lifted and placed. Reinforcement required
for this purpose has not been shown on the Drawings, but shall be allowed for
by the Contractor. Reinforcement shall be adequately braced to ensure that
they remain at their correct level during the placing of the concrete and the
extraction of any temporary lining tubes.

3. Welding of Reinforcement: Steel mesh reinforcement shall be welded to each
other in their overlaps each 20 cm.

4. The minimum distance between reinforcement bars shall be 15 cm in all
directions, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, which will enable regular
concrete flow and prevent shuttering.

02.06 Attachment Details and Attachment Locations

A. The details and locations of attachments of the structures shall be as required in
drawings or those agreed upon by the COR in the process of the detailed designing.

B. If there shall be no detail available, the Contractor shall seek the approval for the
details of the attachment and the location of the attachments he proposes to execute.

C. Each component of each one of the bearing elements in the structure columns,
beams, etc., shall consist of a complete unit and not of joined units.

D. For assurance of precision and comfort during erection, elongated holes shall be
prepared in the elements in a direction where there are no forces in the bolt.

02.07 Floors with Abrasion-proof Floors

The base of these abrasion-proof layers shall be the concrete floor, according to the
details in Chapter 02 of the HNTR.

Page 9 of 252

The execution shall be carried in areas separated by joints, as detailed in the drawings,
including vibration by means of longitudinal vibrators as well as of surface vibrators,
for obtaining a plane and leveled base, as required.

The coating of concrete floors as above with an abrasion-proof layer shall be executed
by the penetration method, as detailed hereinafter.

On the top of the fresh concrete an abrasion-proof layer shall be executed by the
spreading and insertion of anaggregate type at the rate of 5 kg/sq.m inserted into the
concrete layer.

The abrasion rate shall not exceed 1.5 mm at 440 RPM.

The layer shall be straightened and detailed to helicopter finish, in order to obtain
fully smooth and straightened surfaces, while attention shall be given to the drainage
slopes shown in the drawings.

All the works shall be executed according to the Manufacturers instructions. The
Contractor shall have preliminary tests carried out by a certified laboratory on the
concrete mixture. The finished floor shall be covered and protected from damage in
the course of the continuation of works following the plastering.The abrasion-proof
layer shall not be executed without the presence of the COR.

The color of the layer shall be in any tone chosen by the COR and obtained by the
addition of pigments.

The Contractor shall provide a Warranty Certificate relating to the tones quality for a
period of two (2) years.

The above floors shall be covered for canceling the absorptiveness. The application
shall be performed according to the manufacturres instructions.

02.08 Smoothing Concrete Surfaces of Ceilings and Floors.

A. General
The exactness of the leveling shall be 2 mm with respect to the required heights and
levels. For the other smoothened surfaces, the face of the concrete shall be processed
with a precision of 2 mm along a ruler of 5 m (not accumulating).

B. Leveling, Compacting and Primary Smoothing
Upon completion of the vibration, the leveling and compaction of the concrete shall be
performed with an appropriate metal vibration ruler.
In order to obtain surfaces leveled with slopes and heights as in the drawings, the
Contractor shall prepare in due time a system of rulers at distances of 3 m from each
other and precisely leveled.
The rulers shall be made of hollow square steel pipes 30/30 mm, installed on the
formwork with metal legs.
The vibration leveling ruler shall move on these rulers.
Following the leveling, the height of the concrete shall be checked. Every dimple shall
be filled with additional concrete and be vibrated, and surplus concrete removed.
Page 10 of 252

C. Final Smoothing
The Contractor shall take into account that the smoothing requires time and experience
and shall be executed by a well-experienced team, a few hours following the
completion of the casting.

Following the smoothing, as described above, any other activity shall be postponed
until glitter of the water emanating from the concrete shall appear, but prior to its
hardening to a state not allowing the execution of the final smoothing. The final
smoothing shall be executed by means of a rotational leveling and smoothing machine
("helicopter") by a well-experienced operator.

No water shall be sprinkled on the concrete for improved workability in the course of
smoothing. It shall be allowable to spread a dry mixture of 1:1 cement and sand, if
required. (Pure cement shall not be used for this purpose.)

D. Curing
Following the final smoothing, while the concrete shall be still damp, the curing of the
concrete surface shall be done by watering only.

E. Protection of the Smoothened Layer
The Contractor shall protect the smoother floors from any damage, by means of a 0.3
mm thick polyethylene sheets all over the surface, with overlaps of at least 15 cm
between the sheets.

02.09 Exposed Concrete

Exposed concrete in the various Buildings as indicated in the Drawings shall be
executed as follows:

A. General

1. Exposed concrete shall be executed according to par. 0208 of the HNTR for
construction works as the following classification.

2. Service and exposure to atmospheric influence conditions shall be for regular
exposure as defined in par. 02080 of the HNTR.

3. From the appearance aspect, textured exposed concrete in regular grey color
shall be required.

4. The concrete surface shall be plane, smooth without air bubbles nor segregation.
The joints between the forms shall be tight, adjacent one another in such a way
that shall not allow cement water running in the course of the cast and
vibrations.

5. Casting stoppages shall be dealt with by means of special metal sections that
shall be inserted into the formwork. The corners in the castings shall be
truncated.
Page 11 of 252

6. The minimal reinforcement cover on the outer side shall be at least 3 cm.

B. Formwork

1. The formwork shall be made of steel with lined plastic inner coating or epoxy-
painted, or of upright plane timber boards of various widths and thicknesses or
plywood boards with formica coating for smooth finish, as described in the
architectural drawings.

2. The Contractor shall submit to the CORs approval the formwork system he
intends using in the various components of the building.

3. The Contractor shall design the formwork system and shall submit the shop
drawings for approval by the COR. The drawings shall include the arrangement
of the plates or the formwork boards, the strengthening system and ties between
the formworks spacers, and any other element seen on the concrete surface. The
drawings shall show the casting stoppages locations and the accessories that
shall be placed on the formwork to produce these stoppages. Only after the
approval of the COR, the Contractor shall be allowed to execute the formworks.
The Contractor shall remain solely responsible for the quality of the formworks
and for their strength, even if the COR approved them.

4. The Contractor shall call the COR for checking the formworks at the location of
their production and only after their approval, he shall be allowed to bring them
to the site.

5. The Contractor shall prepare in the formwork all that is required for integrating
doors and all the openings and passages for the various systems.

6. It shall not be allowed to leave bars or metal wires penetrating the concrete.

C. Release Agents in the Formworks

The formworks shall be coated with appropriate material according to case. The
material shall be fitted to the type of formwork and the type of concrete and shall be
approved by the COR prior to its use.

D. Experimental Casting

Prior to casting exposed concrete, the Contractor shall execute an experimental casting
of every type of concrete in the building itself, at the location instructed and approved
by the COR. The area of the casting shall be at least 10 sq. m. Only after the checking
of the casting and its approval by the COR, the Contractor shall be allowed to begin
exposed concrete casting works. The sample shall remain until the completion of all
the works for comparison. The exposed concrete shall be identical to the approved
sample. The Contractor shall protect the sample from damage and dirt.

02.10 Smooth Concrete Ready for Painting.
Page 12 of 252

1. All the internal exposed concrete shall have a finish ready for painting as
detailed hereinafter.
2. The formwork shall be executed according to the requirements of SI No. 904.
The formwork shall consist of high quality steel plates, smooth and entire or of
double wood plates made of two plywood layers, all entire as specified in the
General Specification and according to the directives of the COR. The
formwork shall be executed so that they shall ensure clean and fully smooth
concrete surfaces with no defect whatsoever. Protuberances of concrete along
adjacent joints of the plywood shall be polished with a carborandom stone until
smooth concrete surfaces shall be obtained without any remaining signs and
ready for painting.
3. Should the surface, the texture and color of the concrete not be to the
satisfaction of the COR, the Contractor shall perform all the corrections
required, including putty until a smooth and plane surface shall be obtained to
the full satisfaction of the COR.
4. The water content in the concrete shall be especially low so as to protect the
reinforcement bars against corrosion.
5. The Contractor shall pay special attention to the cleanliness of the aggregates
and their fitness to stand against sulfates and corrosive water.
6. Tying wires nor wooden blocks shall be used for determining the spaces
between the formwork's boards or their tying. In order to prevent the use of
tying wires, a method approved by the COR shall be used for joining and
attaching the formwork by means of special tension bars used in exposed and
smooth concrete. In all holes in the building created as a result of the use of
these bars, shall be filled following the dismantling of the formwork with a
special mortar in a method approved by the COR. In water reservoirs and pods,
special spacers shall be used that include a sealing ring and conus-shaped rubber
seals. These spacers shall be cut by the Contractor following the dismantling of
the formwork, at the inner point of the hollow spaces created by the rubber seals
and filled with unschrinkable mortar, as approved by the COR.
7. Special attention shall be given to the order of the smooth concrete casting.
Horizontal formworks for smooth concrete coming close to a cast concrete wall
shall be attached to the cast wall in such a way that shall prevent any leakage of
concrete on top of it. This rule shall also apply to the casting of walls in stages.
The sealing between the formworks and cast concrete surfaces shall be of
utmost importance and all the required means shall be used to prevent leakage,
including sealing with absorbent rubber dipped in bituminous material.
Likewise, the surface of concrete shall be cleaned following the dismantling of
the formwork including the polishing of the joints and projections, should they
occur in the walls, to the satisfaction of the COR. No whetting shall be executed
in the cast concrete following a casting stoppage, so as to prevent widening in
the formwork. Every concrete element shall be seen as a finished surface to be
protected from any damage, by means approved by the COR.

02.11 EMP Protection Specification and verification

1. Structural design
Page 13 of 252

The Concrete of the structure will contain re-enforcement steel mesh grids, in all
walls and ceiling. These grids will be made of weld-able structural steel at least 4 mm
in diameter, welded at the junctions of squares no more than 15 cm on side.
The meshes grids may be of any practical available dimension, such as 2m X 1m.
The mesh grids will be welded at adjoining boundaries, every 20 cm at the most. The
weld length will be 5 cm long at least. See figure 1

Figure 1. Re-enforcement steel mesh grid welds

Verification of compliance: will be performed by visual inspection of the quality of
weld and the required length and spacing of the welds, before concrete is poured.

Inspection reporting-Structural Steel Mesh

Building Identification:

5 cm long weld every 20 cm
Page 14 of 252

Date of inspection:

Name of Inspector:

Name of supervisor:

Visual inspection of welds, for spacing, length and quality
Record failures on structural drawings. Photograph faulty welds.

Area inspected Weld spacing Comments Photo number
Requirement 20 cm or less
Verdict Pass Fail
Ceiling
Front wall
Back wall
Right wall
Left wall

Area inspected Weld length Comments Photo number
Requirement 5 cm or more
Verdict Pass Fail
Ceiling
Front wall
Back wall
Right wall
Left wall

Area inspected Weld quality Comments Photo number
Requirement continuous
Verdict Pass Fail
Ceiling
Front wall
Back wall
Right wall
Left wall

Signature of Inspector:

Signature of Supervisor:

02.12 Casting breaks and casting stages.

The Contractor shall install casting breaks and perform the casting in stages as
indicated in the architectural and structural plans.
Page 15 of 252

02.13 Tolerances

Permitted tolerances shall be in accordance with that indicated in Israel Standard 789,
Table 1, Grade 4. (Horizontal and Vertical)

In the case where deviations are discovered that are greater than those defined in the
aforesaid standard, the Contractor shall bear all expenses necessitated in the
performance of corrections, including demolition and recasting.

02.14. Concrete Testing

1. General

a. All concrete tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS 26, 106
and 466.

b. The Contractor shall allow for the cost of making test specimens,
supplying test equipment and providing suitable personnel to carry out
tests.

2. Certification of Materials: The Contractor shall submit in writing test
certificates from a qualified laboratory, evidence that materials used comply
with the requirements specified. Such tests shall be conducted at the
Contractors expense.

3. Sampling and Testing

a. Concrete shall be sampled and tested in accordance with the
requirements of IS26.
Samples shall be taken from the cast concrete.
b. After a delay of 48 hours the specimens shall be transported to an
independent laboratory for testing (in such a manner as to avoid
excessive jarring).

c. The subsequent curing, capping and testing of the specimens shall be
done by an approved laboratory in accordance with the above Israeli
Standards.

d. One sample shall be tested at 7 days, the remaining one at 28 days.

e. The test certificate shall show, in addition to a cube strength and the
information required when ordering the concrete, the following
information:

1) If appropriate the number of the delivery docket, relating to the batch from
which the sample was taken.

2) The pile or piles in which the sampled concrete was placed.
Page 16 of 252

3) The actual slump of the sampled concrete. The slump should range between
175mm-200mm and concrete with a slump more than 200mm shall be
disqualified.

f. Test results are to be sent direct to the COR as soon as the 28 days test has
been carried out. In addition, the results of the tests shall be kept in tabulated
form in a log retained at the site at all times.

g. The concrete represented by the sample shall be deemed to comply with the
compressive strength requirements of the Specification if it meets the
requirements of IS 26.

h. The concrete cube test results shall not be lower than those required for B-40
concrete. The strength requirement is a minimum requirement which does
not relieve from complying with the other concrete requirements specified in
the Specification.

End of Chapter 02 Special Specification.
Page 17 of 252

Chapter 05 - Waterproofing Works

05.01 General

Section 05 of the HNTR shall be read in conjunction with this Special Specifications
which constitute an extent to the work with regard to Waterproofing Works. In the
case of conflict these special specifications shall prevail over the HNTR


In addition to Chapter 05, paragraph 05002 adds the following to the list of Standards

Israeli Standards (SI)

a. SI 1430, Part 3: Roofs waterproofing sheets: Polyester reinforcement fibers
polymers improved bitumen or unwove fibers polymers improved bitumen sheets
installed by welding.

b. SI 1229, Part 1: Rigid foamed plastic for thermal insulation: Part 1 - Boards.

c. SI 1752, Part 1: Concrete flat roofs waterproofing: Preparation of roofs sub-base
for waterproofing.

d. SI 1476, Part 1: Inspection of water-tightness of the building's envelope - Roofs
and balconies.

e. SI 1463, Part 1: Geotextile materials: Definitions, marking and identification.

05.03 Scope of Works

Prior to commencing the waterproofing works, the Contractor shall obtain in due time
approbation of the waterproofing details by the COR and make sure that the works
shall be carried out only by experienced and trained workers, the whole process being
approved beforehand by the COR.

The work includes waterproofing of all elements of the structure, being constructed at
this point in time, including: floors, reinforcement walls, on-site poured walls with
excavation space, ceilings, pits in the floor, floors of the low yard.
05.04 Waterproofing of the floors

The layers: 25 cm expanded polyurethane void, sharp shape boxes
- Lean concrete well smoothed.
- Spread of whitewash, in order to avoid sticking of the bituminous sheeting
to the lean concrete.
- Two layers of bituminous sheeting enhanced with S.B.S. polymer, each one
5 mm. thick.
Page 18 of 252

- Protection of sealing using cement 4 cm. thick.
- Concrete construction floor.

A. Preparing the basic application
The surface of the lean concrete must be made smooth. If the surface of the
lean concrete is not smooth, it will be necessary to lay down a layer of
plaster to level the surface at the Contractors expense.
Spread of whitewash above the lean concrete, in order to avoid sticking of
the bituminous sheeting to the lean concrete. The spreading is above the
whole area.
Pile heads' above the piles are required, in order to enable good
connection to the bituminous sheeting. The Pile Heads are a part of the
waterproofing system. The pile head are 40 cm larger than the width of the
wall above. A minimum reinforcement of 12 mm diameter is required on
the edges of the pile heads (to prevent concrete cracks).
In order to attach the waterproofing sheets to the existing concrete elements
the concrete to be attached will be exposed to a width of at least 40 cm. so
as to obtain maximum welding of the sheets to the concrete.
The surface of the concrete to be attached to the bituminous sheets shall be
leveled, smooth and completely clean, and shall be cleaned using a sanding
disk to remove any weak or flaking concrete; the surface will then be
cleaned using an industrial vacuum. All of this will be done until the edges
of the aggregates have been exposed and the remaining concrete surface is
strong and stable.
On the lean concrete the Contractor will apply a layer of bituminous primer,
which is spread over the entire surface of the lean concrete. If the lean
concrete has not dried completely it is possible to use primer that adheres to
wet concrete.
B. Waterproofing works
The entire area of the waterproofing layers shall be welded to the basic
application. A second layer shall be welded on its entire area to the first
layer. The second layer shall be placed in the same direction as the first
layer, but 50 cm. overlap
The sheets shall be expertly attached to the tops of the pile caps and the
edges of the existing floor. To do this, the waterproofing will be done on
the tops of the piles and/or the floor, and if necessary on the sides as well.
The width of the overlapping of the sheets on the tops of the pile caps
and/or the edges of the existing floors shall be a minimum of 40 cm.
provided that superior adhesion is achieved along the entire joint area.
Page 19 of 252

For waterproofing on the vertical plane the Contractor shall apply
bituminous sheets S.B.S., 5 mm, which will be completely welded on
primer and application of a bituminous 85/40 compound 1 mm. thick.
Sealing sheets for the floor shall be welded on the aforementioned sheets,
smoothed horizontally (width of overlapping between the sheets a
minimum of 20 cm.).
Waterproofing for the floors shall be continuous and will be perfectly
joined to with waterproofing on the walls. The waterproofing will be placed
continuously underneath the beams, the thick areas and the pits to be
constructed in the basement floor. Any place where the waterproofing
flooring is damaged due to the installation of pipelines, piles, spikes, etc.,
special waterproofing will be carried out around the protruding element to
ensure that the floor is waterproofed in accordance with the waterproofing
special instructions.
C. Protecting of the waterproofing
The waterproofing hall be protected using a layer of concrete 4-5 cm. thick.
Care must be taken not to damage the waterproofing sheets when the
cement concrete is poured. Protection of the waterproofing shall be carried
out as soon as the waterproofing has been completed.
In the event the waterproofing works are carried out in sections, the sheets
must be protected temporarily in order to ensure that the fitted
waterproofing sheets are not damaged by the part of the work already
carried out.
Protection may be achieved by laying down Styrofoam and then pouring
concrete upon this, to a thickness of 5 cm. The concrete shall be
dismantled before continuing with the waterproofing works.
Sealing the walls with bituminous sheeting

05.05 Waterproofing the underground walls with bituminous sheeting

The basic application for the waterproofing must be dried of any moisture.
The basic application for the sealing must be straight (level).
No deviations exceeding 1 cm. shall be permitted when applying a 2-meter
strip, in both directions. (Molds shall consist of panels and not boards.)

A. Primer layer as a basic application for hot spreading of elastomeric bitumen
After completing preparation of the basic application and confirming it
is ready, the area to be sealed must be thoroughly cleaned.
The basic application layer shall be based on a bituminous compound
such as GS 474 or equivalent. One layer should be spread with a total
amount of 300 grams per sq. m. A first layer may be spread as soon as
the molds have been dismantled so that the layer can be used to finish
off the cement, followed by another layer prior to welding the sheets.
Page 20 of 252

The primer layer shall be spread in a uniform layer upon the basic
application surface until it has been fully covered and absorbed. Wait
24 hours before application.
The primer layer must be properly absorbed deep into the cement. The
material may be diluted up to 20% as necessary and with the
manufacturers approval; ensure that the material has been well
absorbed deep into the concrete.

B. Carrying out the waterproofing by spreading hot bitumen
The sealing material shall be bitumen 85/40 that is applied hot.The material
shall be spread on the wall in layers until a minimum thickness of 1 mm. is
obtained and until all holes and small indentations have been filled in.

C. Waterproofing using bituminous sheeting
After completing the application of the hot bitumen, the bituminous sheets are
fully welded over the entire area. The sheets shall be enhance with S.B.S.
polymer, and shall comply with Israeli Standard IS 1430, Part 3, type M.
Sheets covering the top two meters of the walls shall include an anti-root
compound.
Welding of the sheets shall be carried out using at least two workers. One of
them shall hold the sheet and assist in tightening it, while the second welds
and holds the sheet on its other side. Waterproofing of walls shall not be
carried out by a single worker.
The entire area of the sheets shall be welded to the basic application.
Prior to welding the sheets, open and spread them out for about hour in
order to allow them to shrink, then roll them back into a roll.

D. Order of the layers using the aforementioned alternative:
Primer with an overall quantity of 300 grams per sq. m.
Hot bitumen 85/40, at least 1 mm. thick.
Two layers of bituminous sheets enhanced with S.B.S.
polymer, 4 mm. thick each, Type M (sheets on the top two
meters under the ground level, shall include anti-root
compound).
(In ventilation tunnel areas, only one 5 mm thick SBS polymer
modified bituminous membranes (Type M) is required.)

E. Protecting the waterproofing on the underground yard walls
As part of his work the contractor shall also ensure the protection of the
waterproofing.
Protection of the wall waterproofing (exterior) shall consist of hard
polystyrene panels 3 cm. thick (weighing 30 kg./cu. m.), which shall be
adhered to the wall. The adhesive material may be an adhesive, or any other
material on condition that the polystyrene panels adhere sufficiently strongly
so that they do not fall off during the filling work behind the wall.
In the event the filler material includes aggregate that are larger than a bean,
thicker Styrofoam must be used for protection.
05-06 Waterproofing of ceilings
The layers:
Page 21 of 252

1. Two layers of bituminous sheets, 4 mm, or single layer of bituminous,5
mm. thick, according to the details in the plans. The sheets will be
welded to the basic application. Sealing with sheets shall be
continuous over the entire surface of the ceilings without interruption.

2. Tar paper 4 layers (350 gram / sq. m.).

3. Protection of sealing using a layer of protective cement at least 5 cm.
thick, with polygon net reinforcement 6 mm. in diameter, every 15 cm.

Preparation work

A. The waterproofing basic application must be dry and stable throughout
its entire thickness. The surface of the basic application must be
smooth, without protrusions or indentations, holes or cracks.
Cleaning of the cement areas for waterproofing shall include removal
of stains (oil, paint, etc.), removal of loose parts and foreign objects,
sanding down protrusions and thorough cleaning of dust using an
industrial vacuum.

B. Repairs to the horizontal basic application
Repair of cracks in the cement that may be visible shall be made using
spot sheets, and shall be of the same type as the waterproofing to be
used on the entire surface, 4 mm. thick and 33 cm. wide; its length
shall be 20 cm. longer than the crack in every direction.
Order of actions to be carried out:
1) Spreading of primer to a width of 20 cm. on both sides of the
crack.
2) Painting a thick coat of whitewash on the crack, 5 cm. wide.
3) Completely welding a strip of the sheet on the crack so that the
whitewash prevents it from sticking to the crack.

C. Indentations in the basic application
1) Indentations found in the horizontal basic application shall be
filled in so as to obtain a smooth and clean basic application
ready for sealing.
Filling in shall be carried out using cement at a 1:3 sand-
cement ratio enhanced with the addition of an epoxy with water
added at a ratio of 1:1. Material should be used in accordance
with manufacturers instructions.
Prior to the repair you must clean the area and soak it with
water. Before filling in you should spread an epoxy made of
sand : cement and added water at a ratio of 1:1.
2) Finishing for the repairs shall begin on the day of the repair by
spraying it with water, and the next day covering it with wet
burlap sacks that are kept moist for three days.

D. Repairs to vertical basic applications (walls)
The repairs shall be made to areas that are smooth and whose flatness
is damaged, or has holes or protrusions, until the surface is smooth, flat
Page 22 of 252

and uniform.Repairs include: sanding down and polishing protrusions,
thorough cleaning of the area and wetting it down.If the treatment is
insufficient, supplementary work shall be done to fill in holes and
indentations and smooth the area.
Work and filling shall be carried out in layers is with the plaster:
First layer Adhesive whose viscosity is that of cream made of
cement, consisting of fine sand and cement at a ratio of 1:1, with added
adhesive that will guarantee adhesion. Materials should be used in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Additional layers are added until a smooth and uniform surface is
achieved, using cement plaster consisting of sand: cement at a ratio of
1:3 with the additional of adhesive as described above.
Finishing for the repairs shall begin on the day of the repair by
spraying it with water several times a day, to continue for at least four
days.

E. Rounded edges (cant strips)
1. Will be carried out along the edge where the horizontal and
vertical planes meet.
2. The rolled up extremity measures 7 x 7 cm. or as specified in
the drawings.
3. The triangle shall be made of enhanced plaster cement at a ratio
of 1:3, with the addition of an adhesive.
4. The layer should be sanded and smoothed down.
5. Finishing should be as above.
6. The corner to be sealed shall be trimmed. Trimming of corners
shall be at least 3 x 3 cm.

F. Primer layer as a basic application for bituminous sheets
1. After preparation of the basic application has been completed
and it has been approved, the area to be sealed must be
thoroughly cleaned.
2. A layer of primer shall be spread on a basis of bituminous
compound, 250-300 grams per sq. m.
The primer layer shall be spread in an even layer on the basic
application: the surface of the roof, walls or floor, cant
strips, gutter openings, protruding pipes and so on, until they
are completely covered and have absorbed the material. Drying
time is 2-4 hours, and not longer than 24 hours.

G. Waterproofing by spreading hot bitumen
The waterproofing material shall consist of elastomeric bitumen that is
applied hot, to be applied in the amount of 2 kg. per sq. m. until the
surface is smooth. Minimal thickness of the material at any point shall
be 2 mm. (thickness of 1 mm. for the walls).
The bitumen shall be applied to the floor and on the walls.

H. Application of the bituminous sheets
1. Waterproofing may commence only after all of the necessary
preparation work has been completed, including cement cant
Page 23 of 252

strips, applying the layer of primer, welding of the
reinforcement sheets, preparing the gutters, etc., and
thorough cleaning of the basic application and spreading the
hot bitumen layer.
2. Before welding, the Contractor must roll out the roll of sealing
sheets in order to let them rest on the concrete surface for at
least half an hour, then roll them up again from one side to the
middle.
Weld the rolled-up side while unrolling it until it is flat, then
roll up the second half and weld it in the same manner.
Welding should be carried out to the entire surface of the
sheeting, without any empty spaces.
3. The order for laying out the sheets shall always be from the
lower side to the higher side, as is done on tiled roofs.
4. The sheets shall be laid out in a straight line like a
checkerboard so that four sheets do not intersect together.
The sheets should end up on the cant strip.
Overlapping between the sheets shall be 10 cm. in both
directions.
Any place that has two layers of sealing one on top of
the other, the direction of the sheets of the two layers
shall be the same.
The seam of the upper layer shall be moved towards the
lower layer to a distance of 50 cm. and parallel.
5. The entire area of the sheets shall be welded to the basic
application:
The time and strength of the heating shall be
appropriate for the type of sheeting and climatic
conditions at the time of application, and shall be the
minimum required to melt the bitumen uniformly along
the width of the sheet, in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions.
All of the welded seams should be gone over with a hot
trowel so as to iron the edge of the sheet and the
bitumen that seeps out from it. The Contractor shall be
careful as not to damage the sheet while doing this.
For any damage discovered, The Contractor shall weld
a long strip that will go at least 20 cm. beyond the
damage on all sides.
When the sheet is coated with pieces of stone
(aggregate) The Contractor must begin to heat the
sheets in the area of the seam and press down the
aggregates in order to ensure adhesion between the
sheets.

I. Covering sheets placed over cant strips, high spots, joints, etc.
1. This shall be done using strips of sheets similar to the sealing
sheets, with aggregate on top. With regard to cant strips, the
number of sheets shall always be greater than the number of
sealing sheets used for the area (as stated in the Standard).
Page 24 of 252

2. Welding shall be done on the entire surface, from the bottom of
the water barrier and shall overlap the main sealing sheet by 15
cm.
3. If there is no water barrier, the sheet shall end at least 5 cm.
above the reinforcement sheet. The upper edge shall be fixed
to the railing or the wall using an aluminum profile and shall be
sealed with epoxy.
4. The Contractor will be responsible to finish the corners of the
rolled up extremity sealing.
Implementation it should be tailored in accordance with the
implementation rules required when working with bituminous
sheets.

J. Aluminum strip
The waterproofing sealing sheets shall be reinforced to the basement
wall or the building wall using standard aluminum strips cut to 50 x 2
mm. with edges angled to 45 on both sides. The strip shall be fixed so
that the upper bend will be on top of the edge of the sheet in order to
enable sealing with epoxy between the cement and the metal strip on
top of the edge of the sheet.
The strip shall be fixed using anchor screws that are hammered in.
Distance between the anchor screws shall be 25 cm.
Drilling 5/35 mm.
The space between the aluminum strip and the wall at the upper part of
the strip shall be sealed. The wall coating shall descend and cover the
sealing and the fixing strips, should this be necessary.
Protecting the waterproofing from roots
Root protection shall be [provided] on top of the bituminous sheets
with the use of 0.8 mm thick H.D.P.E. black polyethylene sheeting
placed with welded overlaps.
Concrete protecting layer
After installing the waterproofing, minimum 6 cm thick reinforced
concrete protection shall be applied, which includes gradients for
draining water as necessary (the gradients shall be as determined by
the site development/drainage consultant). The reinforcing shall be
made from 6 [mm] diameter reinforcing web in a 15 x 15 cm grid.

05.07 Testing the Waterproofing by Flooding

The details of the testing shall be as required in SI 1476, Part 1.

1. The flooding is to be coordinated with the COR all the necessary
arrangements, in case of a leak, are to be made beforehand. Within the
framework of these arrangements, sensitive accessories within the building are
to be covered and instructions must be given for the immediate opening of the
gutters/downspouts.

2. The sealing of the gutters/downspouts inlets will be done in such a way so as
not to damage the waterproofing system, but it should efficiently prevent the
water from running out from the roof.
Page 25 of 252

3. The flooding shall be executed after the completion of all the waterproofing
works and prior to the installation of the waterproofing protection.

4. A check must be made that, in no way, the under level is anywhere higher than
the upper edge of the covering membranes. Should there be such a spot, local
action must be taken for still enabling the performance of the flooding. This
work is to be coordinated with the COR. Should the need arise, any necessary
temporary masonry work is to be carried out.

5. At the end of the 72 hours period of full flooding of the roof, while the latter is
still full of water but only after that the COR has checked the outlets of the
gutters/downspouts and the dryness of the ceiling, the flooding will be
considered as having been successful.

6. In all cases of interruption of the flooding, of leaks or when leaks were
uncovered at the end of the flooding, the roof will be emptied from its water,
dried up, repaired and reflooded until full water tightness is obtained.

05.08 Contractors Liability during the Defects Liability Period

The stipulations of the present paragraph relate to the renewal of the waterproofing
works during the defects liability period defined in the present Contract as well as the
end of that period.

1. Within the framework of the Contractors liability in the field of the roof/wall
water tightness, the waterproofing state is to be checked out at the end of the
first rainy season. Should any moisture stains or leaks appear, the Contractor
will renew the waterproofing, to an extent determined by the COR, but not
necessarily only locally. Any renewal is to be carried out by the same method,
materials and craftsmanship used for the original works, or as the COR may
determine. The Contractor will make sure that in the course of the renewal of
the waterproofing, no damage might be inflicted on adjacent or other parts of
the building; any such damage will be repaired by the Contractor at the end of
the renewal of the waterproofing works and any rubble will be removed. The
way the waterproofing is to be renewed has to be approved by the COR.


Page 26 of 252

Chapter 06 Joinery and Metal Works

06.01 General

Chapter 06 of the Host Nation Technical Requirements (HNTR) shall be read in
conjunction with this Special Specification which constitutes an extent to the work
with regard to Joinery and Metal Works. In case of conflict these special
specifications shall prevail over the HNTR.


In addition to Chapter 06, paragraph 06002 adds the following to the list of Standards

Israeli Standards (SI)

SI 918 Galvanizing

Foreign Standards

DHI Recommended Locations for Finish Hardware.

a. NAAMM - NAAMM/HMMA 840 Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames

b. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

c. Builders Hardware and Specialties ANSI/BHMA A156 (Complete Series)

d. ANSI/SDI SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames.

e. SDI

f. SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard for Steel, Door and Frames"

06.03 Condition of Works

A. The Special Specification completes the schedules, drawings and the HNTR.

B. Wherever in the existing Schedules, according to the Specification or
equivalent expression is being used; this is a reference to the present Special
Specification.

C. The Contractor shall validate, prior to manufacturing, all the dimensions of all
openings and the direction of opening in the drawings and on Site, and shall
notify the COR of any inconsistency found between his checks and the
drawings and shall receive written instructions about the final decision. If the
Page 27 of 252

Contractor shall not give his notification in due time, he shall bear the full
responsibility. The Contractor shall also be responsible for leaving the
appropriate clearances for correct operation, opening and cleaning possibilities
of the various elements in place and combining them in the overall system. All
the changes required for the solution of problems as described above, shall be
executed by the Contractor at his own expense.

D. Prior to the commencement of work, as said above, the Contractor shall
thoroughly check all the drawings system including schedules, details, general
drawings, cross-sections, elevations, drawings of electricity, A/C, sanitation
and safety facilities, etc. He shall immediately inform the COR of any non-
conformity, difficulty, etc. that may arise, to his mind, in the course of his
work.

Moreover, the Contractor shall be responsible, among other things, for the
coordination and integration of all the various elements into the building and
between themselves.

The Contractor shall also be responsible for the suitability of all the items on
all their parts, their hardware and final operation to the requirements of all the
competent Authorities (such as the Home Front Command in the case of
protection steel works items, the Firefighting Authority, the Israeli Police,
Safety and Security Consultants of the Project in the case of Safety and
Security Doors and Devices, the Design and Construction Regulations
concerning handicapped persons arrangements and handles, etc.). All the
above represents of course just an example, while the Contractors
responsibility shall be to find out all the directives of the various Authorities
and adapt the work, on all its details, to these requirements whether
specifically detailed or not and all this at no additional cost.

E. The Contractor shall prepare, at his own expense, detailed shop drawings and
manufacturing details (at a scale of 1:1 or 1:2, as required by the COR). These
drawings, together with the samples of the sections and the hardware, shall be
submitted to the approval by the COR who shall instruct the Contractor on the
changes and repairs needed for the approval of the drawings for conformance
with the contract requirements. No work shall be executed prior to the final
approval of the drawing details by the COR. In order to leave no doubt, the
approval of the COR does not reduce the sole responsibility of the Contractor
for the adherence of the work to all standards, specifications, regulations and
instructions and from the general responsibility of the Contractor for the
quality of the work and its proper operation as required in the contract
documents.

F. The Contractor shall submit to an authorized laboratory, one sample of each
item prior to the serial manufacturing, or one item chosen randomly by the
COR. After the results, the Contractor shall receive instructions relating to the
continuing of the work. The Contractor shall not start with the serial
manufacturing prior to the approval and shall take into account the time of the
testing in the general schedule for the completion of the job.

Page 28 of 252

G. After the approval of the drawings by the COR, the Contractor shall
manufacture a prototype of each type of the items according to paragraph
12013 in the HNTR. The Contractor shall not begin serial manufacturing prior
to the approval of the prototype and its mode of assembly in the Building and
prior to successful tests of all the tests decided upon by the COR.

H. All the drawings, models, samples, hardware, coating, colors, etc., shall be
submitted to the CORs approval for conformance with the contract
requirements, 14 days following the issue of the order to proceed, or earlier,
according to the decision of the COR for guaranteeing the execution according
to the timetable.

I. In order to remove any doubt, it is stated that each door or louver shall include
both leaves and frames.

06.04 Items

A. Items used as fire resistance barriers shall adhere to SI 1212 and carry a
standard symbol on each item.

B. All steel elements shall be galvanized unless otherwise stated in the Schedules.
The elements shall be galvanized as complete units. The dipping shall be of the
complete units and not of components. Connections between the various
components of a complete unit shall not be allowed, except and only in cases
where there shall be a transportation problem or a problem of the size of the
elements that shall be too large for the dipping pool. In these situations,
connections shall be allowed only according to details that shall be submitted
by the Contractor, to the COR for approval.

06.05 Sealing

A. The complete sealing between the frames and the sides of the openings shall be
guaranteed. The voids behind the frames shall be filled with concrete grout.

The clearance between sides of the openings in exposed concrete and the
frames shall be filled with gray silicon material.

B. The voids between the leaves edges and the frame recesses shall be as small as
possible and equal along their entire length and ensure easy and comfortable
opening and closing. The gap between the lower end of the door and the
surface of the flooring shall be between 1-3 mm, when in a closed situation.

The sealing in fire doors between the leaf and the frame shall be ensured by the
installation of a special elastic padding.

06.06 Steel Works

Material

Page 29 of 252

The steel used for making the steel work elements shall be S235JR (used to be ST-
37), new and flawless. The steel works products shall be prepared by continuous and
clean electrical welding. All steel works products shall be supplied to the building
ready, clean and painted in oven baked paint and properly wrapped.

Manufacturing and Assembly

1. All the metal works items shall be water and wind-proof and for that purpose,
they shall be tested for air passage, water and loading, according to Chapter 12
(Aluminum) denomination 2 (in HNTR).

2. All items shall be adapted for acoustic sealing from surrounding noise,
according to the Standards and the contract requirements, in coordination with
the COR for conformance with the contract requirements.

3. The frames shall be executed according to the instructions of the COR and/or
the details in the drawings and according to SI 1161. All the steel frames shall
be set in place, straight, vertically and horizontally in the formworks before
pouring the concrete. Their stability and proper operation shall be ensured.
The holes for their strengthening shall be filled with 1:2 cement mortar. The
steel frames shall be fixed before the execution of the building of concrete
walls, prior to the concrete elements casting which shall include bond-bars, in
coordination with the COR for conformance with the contract requirements..
The Contractor shall take care of the strengthening and the supports so that
with the casting of the concrete, there shall be no deformations in the frame.

Frame assembly

a. Sections with height less than 3 m shall be executed in one part; wherever a
connection of two parts shall be necessary, the Contractor shall receive the
approval of the COR for the location of the connection and the form of the
welding and its polishing to conform with the contract requirements.

b. Unless otherwise stated, the width of the frame shall be the width of the
finished wall.

c. The holes for the lock and the mortises shall be made by means of tool only.
The locks counterbox shall be closed by welded sheet metal.

d. The anchoring of the frames shall be executed according to the contract
requirements and shall adhere to the HNTR and the Israeli Standards.

e. All the sections shall be in a single straight plane. Sections shall not be
connected at their center, except for connections in corners executed in miter
joint. The Contractor shall be responsible for the execution at a level that
shall ensure the strength of all the structures parts. In the locks areas,
removable and easily cleaned strike-boxes shall be welded. All the
connections shall be strong, rigid and polished until a smooth area shall be
obtained. The connection accessories shall be of a material and finish identical
to the items (unless otherwise stated), without protruding bolts and nuts.
Page 30 of 252

f. Even if not explicitly stated in the Schedules, all metal doors shall have sheet
metal door skins on both sides. All the sheet metal door skins shall be
connected all along the seams and polished as necessary. The sheet metal shall
be straight with no dents or bulges, and the finish shall be galvanization plus
oven baked metallic epoxy paint, in coordination with the COR for
conformance with the contract requirements. The leaves shall include a lower
cut as well as louvers, in coordination with the COR for conformance with the
contract requirements (even if the louvers are not explicitly shown in the
drawings).

g. The dimensions and thickness shall not be less than the following: frames 2
mm; sheet metal door skins 1.5 mm; acoustic door skins 2 mm; steel
sections 4 mm, unless otherwise stated in the contract documents.

h. As stated above, all the parts shall be galvanized. The galvanization shall be
by hot dipping after the manufacturing of the item. The coating of the
galvanization shall be not less than 8.37 kg/sq.m. The final painting of the
galvanized parts shall be executed only after the execution of a special primer.

i. All products shall be supplied wrapped and protected. Every product damaged
prior to the delivery to the Building shall be replaced by the Contractor and at
his own expense.

j. All the items shall also include strengthening sections, brackets and cover
plates up to the structural elements. The amount and types of reinforcements
and covers shall be coordinated with the COR for conformance with the
contract requirements.

k. All the doors closing on beams shall include, among other things, recesses on
the leaves, all the items seals, gaskets necessary for acoustic insulation and
waterproofing, for repelling dust, wind and everything necessary for the
proper and durable operation conforming with the contract requirements.

Finishing and Painting

1. The execution of paint works shall be according to the HNTR and the Special
Specification Chapter 11 as well as to the Specifications of the Manufacturer.
Where a contradiction occurs between requirements, the stricter and/or higher
shall be chosen, and brought to the attention of the COR.

2. Unless otherwise stated in the drawings and the Specification, all steel work
items shall be galvanized and oven baked painted in any shade/color from the
expanded RAL catalog including metallic and textured finishes. The paint
samples shall be approved by the COR prior to the ordering of the paint. The
paint shall be oven baked epoxy paint, no less than 60 micron thick. The
warranty against fading, lifting, bubbling and peeling would be for no less
than two (2) years.
3. All the painted parts shall be laid in the Building, wrapped and protected from
the climates influence, and laid so that damage shall be prevented.
Page 31 of 252

Hardware and miscellaneous

1. The Contractor shall be responsible that the various hardware parts be suited
in their quality, amount, strength, form and color, to the specific item, while
ensuring the proper operation of the item and its location. All hardware parts,
intended to be dismantled and re-assembled, shall be joined by means of brass
bolts. All the other bolts shall be non-corroding.

2. The details of the hardware, sections and the various accessories, shown in the
Specifications and the Schedules are partial. Anyhow, the hardware elements
shall include all that is necessary for their proper operation in their location, in
coordination with the COR for conformance with the contract requirements
and according to the catalog of the Manufacturer.

3. Around the connection of the hinges, the frames and leaves shall be
strengthened by threaded sleeves connected from the inner side and matching
to the hinge and the weight of the leaf.

4. All door hinges shall be from a Manufacturer approved by the COR for
conformance with the contract requirements. The type of hinges, their number
and strength shall fit the weight of the item and its mode of operation. The
hinges shall be connected to the frames and leaves by means of the original
bolts, supplied by the Manufacturer, while using all the bolts and all the
connection points.

5. The hardware shall be complete, so that it shall be possible to operate and use
the item in its place, in a perfect and normal mode.

6. Handles, brackets and locks shall be connected to sections by bolts only. The
use of rivets shall not be allowed.

7. The hardware and accessories shall fit the type of sections, conforming with
the contract requirements.

8. The Contractor shall submit all the hardware components and accessories to
the CORs approval for conformance with the contract requirements.

9. All hardware parts, including handles, roses, escutcheons, hinges, holders,
bolts, etc., shall be made of non-corroding material and their finish shall be
identical to the finish of the complete item.

10. The hardware shall fit the approved sample and shall be of form, number and
quality that shall ensure the proper operation of the item.

11. Each opening door shall include, among the hardware, the following:

- Rubber seals/gaskets for sealing the void between the frame and the leaf,
in coordination with the COR for conformance with the contract
requirements.
Page 32 of 252

- Louvered inserts according to the Schedules or in coordination with the
COR for conformance with the contract requirements.
- Accessories for prevention of closing on hands, in coordination with the
COR for conformance with the contract requirements.

12. The Contractor shall check the safety drawings, security requirements and air-
condition drawings and shall ensure the execution of their requirements.

14. Steel Pipe Railings, Handrails, Guardrails, ladders and gages: Fabricate
railings, ladders and gages to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of
pipe, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support
structural loads.

a. Interconnect railings, ladders and gages by butt-welding or
welding with internal connectors, at fabricator's option, unless
otherwise indicated. At tee and cross intersections, notch ends
of intersecting members to fit contour of pipe to which end is
joined and weld all around.

b. The Contractor shall provide expansion joints at intervals not to
exceed 12m unless otherwise shown on the drawings. The
Contractor shall provide slip joints with internal sleeves
extending 50mm minimum beyond joint each side

c. The Contractor shall provide wall returns at ends of
wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.

d. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: The Contractor shall
provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous
fittings, and anchors for interconnections of pipe and
attachment to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage
devices for connecting to concrete work.

e. All steel elements shall be with hot dipped galvanized finish,
galvanize fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous
components. Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not
less than 50.94 g per .0929 m
2
of coated surface. Painting
according to Chapter 11 Paint Works.

06.08 Contents of the Work

Elements of the various metal works shall also include the design of the
manufacturing, the cover of internal sills, sills on all the thickness of the finished wall,
separations and seals and all that shall be mentioned in the Special Specification and
the details.

Page 33 of 252

The metal works elements shall include waterproofing preventing water penetration,
for closing gaps between frames and other parts of the Building, as well as breakable
metal boxes.

All the metal work elements shall include everything required for their proper
operation to the CORs approval for conformance with the contract requirements.

Page 34 of 252

Chapter 07 - Plumbing and sanitary installations

General

Work and items required by this Special Specification shall include, by incorporation, all
relevant chapters of the Host Nation Technical Requirements concerning items or work
covered by those standard chapters.

Additional Standards

In addition to all relevant chapters add the following standards to the list of standards
applying to this Chapter.

-Israeli Standard Institute Documents
IS 1205 Sanitary plumbing works
IS 2242 (part 2) installing of aluminum reinforced crossed polyethelene pipes.
IS 4476 (Part B) installing of H.D.P.E. pipes and fittings

Israeli Governmental Codes

Regulation for Sanitary Installations (in Hebrew: HALAT)

American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and
Seamless

Submittals Required for Sanitary Installation

All materials (products, equipment, sanitary accessories etc.) shall be submitted for approval
to the COR. Submittal requirements shall include manufacturers data, shop drawings and
Certificates of Compliance.

Scope of Work for Sanitary Installation

This Chapter relates to the execution of sanitary installation. The system is comprised of the
following elements:
- Sanitary fixtures including sink.
- Cold water piping systems
- Waste and drain piping system
- Air conditioning units drain piping system
- Fire extinguishing stations.

General Requirements

All sanitary installations shall be executed in accordance with Chapter 07 Sanitary
Installations of the Host Nation Technical Requirements, and the special requirements listed
hereafter.

Page 35 of 252

Piping penetrating through walls, ceilings, partitions, floors, etc., shall be inserted into PVC
sleeves embedded in concrete, or PVC sleeves installed in a later stage by drilling. Sleeves
shall protrude 2 cm above the floor level.

The gap between the inserted pipe and the sleeve shall be sealed by an elastoseal of
appropriate material.

All hanging and supporting devices, clamps, brackets, etc., shall be approved products, hot-
dip galvanized, with galvanized bolting material.

Water Piping

1. Water pipes 2 size and smaller shall be seamless, Sch. 40 per ASTM A 53.
Fittings shall be screwed malleable iron fittings, hot-dip galvanized, per IS 255.

Exposed piping shall be fastened at a distance of 2 cm from the finished wall surface.
Exposed pipes shall be coated by polyester.

Water pipes installed under floors, in the walls, concrete etc. shall be externally
coated by extruded polyethylene coating. Fittings shall be coated by heat shrinkable
sleeves or tapes of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE).

2. Water pipes 16-32mm will be from aluminum reinforced crossed polyethelene SP
(Super Pipe), Sch 16 bar. Fittings and work will be approved by the manufacturer.

3. Water piping shall be hydraulically tested at a pressure of 12 bar prior to installation
of taps and valves. Once taps and valves are installed, system shall be retested at 6
bar. Water piping shall be maintained under pressure until the end of work in the
building.

Upon completion of testing, piping shall be flushed and disinfected as described in
Chapter 57.

07.07 Soil and Waste Water Piping
Waste Water Pipes up to 2 Inch diameter
Pipes and fittings for these systems shall be made of polypropylene according to the
Standards Institution of Israel Specification No. 55, 53, 147 and IS 1119.

The pipes shall be joined by threading using industrial standard fittings such as bends, elbows
etc.

Fittings such as floor traps, inspection boxes, drum traps and siphons shall be industrial
standard fittings carrying Standard tag.

Finish of box or traps covers shall be made of brass, square frame with cover or mesh,
threadened in epoxy coating mixed with polyester, oven baked.
The finish color subject to the COR decision.

Waste Water Pipes Exceeding 2 Inch diameter
Pipes and fittings HDPE, high-density polyethylene shall be produced and
installed according to IS 4476.
Piping system consisting of tempered pipes and fittings.
Pipes under the floor will be coated with 10cm reinforced concrete.
Supports, hangers, clamps etc. all complete.
Page 36 of 252

Floor Traps
Floor trap 8/4 inch made of polyethylene with 8 inch extender connecting to stainless steel
drain duct outlet (for drain duct installed by others) perforated stainless steel basket / bucket,
including all joints and supports, all complete.

07.08Rain Draining Piping System and Fittings thereof in the Building
1. Steel pipes will be according to IS 530 up to 5/32 inch cement coated internally
and painted externally, weld joined including all fittings such as bends, elbows,
unions, and crosses as well as external painting of the piping system, supports,
hangers, clamps etc. all complete.

2. HDPE will be according to section 07.08

3. Floor drains will be connect to the bitoman sealing of the roof.

4. Free flow of drainage at the bottom of the drain will be with a steel 45 bend, with
internal cement coating.

07.09Air Conditioning Drainage Pipes

Air Conditioning Drainage Pipes will be made of galvanized Schedule 40 pipes, with no
seam, Israeli Standard 593, connected with threads by brass sanitary fittings. The pipes will
be with polyester coating. The pipes on the roof will be installed on top steady supports and
hangers painted against corrosion to the satisfaction of the site supervisor. In the building
interior, the use of polypropylene pipes and fittings is allowed.

07.10Siphons

Siphons for lavatory sink will be 1" (32mm), made of stainless steel.

07.11Fire Extinguishing Station

The fire extinguishing station shall comprise the following items:
- 2" fire hydrant with storz coupler.
- Fiberglas cabinet, 120 x 80 x 30 cm size, with hinged door and a locking device,
painted in red with large lettering FIRE in white letters. The cabinet shall contain a
fire hose reel with 20 m long fire rubber hose 3/4 size fitted with a 1 ball valve
and a jet/spray nozzle.

07.12Sanitary Fixtures

Contractor shall furnish and install all sanitary fixtures shown in the drawings and listed
hereafter. The fixtures shall include all accessories and materials such as hanging devices,
angle bars, traps (siphons), connecting accessories, etc., required for proper operation.

The appliances will be made with all needed fittings required for connection to the waste and
water pipes system.

The sinks will be attached to the walls by pipe consoles around the sink, painted twice in
minimum and white oil paint.

1. Sinks
Hand washing sinks will be 55X45X20 cm, made of stainless steel.
Page 37 of 252

2.Faucets and Batteries
a. Wall mounted faucets will be with 150 mm cost spout.
b. Valves before faucets will be 3/8" "T" type .

07.13 Threaded Ball Valves
Ball valves shall be of reduced port type. The valves shall be 1 size and smaller, BSP
threaded, for water service.The valves shall be equipped with on-off handle operator. Valve
shall be of the following:

- Body: Brass
- Ball: Stainless steel
- Stem: Stainless Steel
- Seat material: Filled TFE

07.14 Equipment Bracing
Mount all overhead utilities and other fixtures weighting 14 kilograms (31 pounds) or more to
minimize the likelihood that they will fall and injure building occupants. Design all
equipment mountings to resist forces of 0,5 times the equipment weight in any direction and
1,5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction. This standard does not preclude
the need to design equipment mountings for forces required by other criteria such as seismic
standards.

End of Chapter 07 Special Specification.
Page 38 of 252

Chapter 08 - Electrical Works, Special General Specifications

Remark: In case of conflict these special specifications shall prevail over the HNTR.

08.01 Description and scope of work
This specification refers to the performance of electrical and communications
works in the LS project buildings and site development.
08.01.1. LS buildings: (43,44,45,46)
1. Foundation grounding and lightning arrestor system.
2. Indoor and outdoor Lighting Installation.
3. Power Installation.
4. Red and Black communications installations including cable
ducts and end-points.
5. Electrical Boards.
6. Control System.
7. EMP protection system including electrical installations,
grounding and filters.
8. Enclosed Prime Power Generator Set and Fuel tank (See chapter
98).
9. Dummy load for the generator.
10. Fire-detection system (see chapter 34).
11. Fire extinguishing system (FM 200) under the floating floors in
electrical and communications rooms, and in Electrical Boards
(see chapter 34), including evacuation system.
12. Feeding pipe system for communications and electricity.
13. Public address system including amplifier, loudspeakers,
cabling, connection boxes end-points etc.
14. Flood detection system under the floating floors and in the floor
cable channels.
15. Anti Rodent Ultrasonic System.
16. Fire sealing of wall penetrations.
17. Integration of the electrical system with the operational system
supplied by IAF.

08.01.2. Electrical and communications installation for site development
including the following:
1. LV feeder lines from the Transformer Room (building no.35).
2. Area switchboards.
3. LV feeder lines to buildings, mobile generator and various
technical installations.
4. Communication piping systems (Bezek Telephone Company
and Red communications).
5. Control lines, by fiber optics cables the Transformer Room.
6. Communication panel in the transformer room (building 35).
7. HMI screens at the site's main control computer.
Page 39 of 252

08.01.3. Communication rooms 1 & 2
1. Foundation grounding.
2. Indoor and outdoor Lighting Installation.
3. Power Installation.
4. Red and Black communications installations including piping
And panels..
5. Electrical board.

08.02 Threshold conditions

08.02.1. The Contractor shall be registered in the Contractors Registry in the
appropriate classification for this scope and type of work. An
authorization shall be submitted.
08.02.2. The Contractor shall be certified with Israel Standard ISO
9000:2008. A certificate shall be submitted.
08.02.3. The Contractor shall employ workers in its company holding the
licenses as specified below.
08.02.4. The Contractor shall have executed at least 3 works during the last 5
years with a value 80% or greater than the value of this work, in
accordance with its various components and of similar engineering
complexity the works shall have included all of the components of
this work.
A list shall be appended in accordance with the attached form that
includes the name of the project, its location, monetary value, size of
electrical connection, systems installed by the Contractor and a
reference (name, position and telephone).

08.03 Licenses

In performing the work, the Contractor shall employ licensed electricians
as follows:
08.03.1. An Electrical Engineer with at least 5 years of experience, who will
be responsible for the work, participate in all coordination and
construction meetings, inspect the electrical boards prior to their
shipment from the manufacturers plant and shall be present on site
at all times as mandated by the Electrical Regulations (Licenses),
and during the execution of high-voltage works, the installation of
electrical boards and testing of the equipment;
08.03.2. An Electrical Engineer who will serve as Foreman.
The Contractor shall submit photocopies of the licenses of the
aforementioned electricians prior to signing of the construction
contract.
Page 40 of 252

08.04 Compatibility with documents

The works shall be performed in accordance with this Specification and
the following sections of the General Specification:
08.04.1. Section 00: Preliminaries, 2007 edition;
08.04.2. Section 08: General Specification for Electrical Works, 2008 edition;
08.04.3. Section 18: General Specification for Communications
Infrastructure, 2005 edition;
08.04.4. Section 34: General Specification for Fire Detection and Firefighting
Systems, 1995 edition.

08.05 Inspections and approvals

08.05.1. Inspections during the performance of the work:
1. The Contractors quality control system.
2. Inspection by a Grade 3 Inspector.
3. On-site inspection by the Contractors Electrical Engineer.
08.05.2. Inspections at the conclusion of the work:
The contractor will perform acceptance tests of all the systems with
the participation of the COR. These tests will check the
compatibility of the systems with the CORs requirements and
needs.
The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying all auxiliary
equipment and testing and measuring devices required for
performing the acceptance tests.
The work shall be considered as having been completed only after
the fulfillment of all terms of the contract, including the completion
of all the tests specified below, submittal of documentation,
certificates etc., without reservations by all the inspectors.
List of inspectors:
1. The Contractors Electrical Engineer;
2. The COR;
3. Grade 3 Inspector for the following installations:
3.1 Electrical installation.
3.2 The lightning arrestor system.
3.3 The grounding and insulation of the ducts system as
specified in Subsection 18064 of the General
Specification.
3.4 The grounding and conductivity of the anti-static floor as
specified in the (standard) Special Technical
Specification.
3.5 Grade 3 electrical inspector shall be provided by the
contractor and submitted for the COR's approval.
4. Thermo-graphic scans + visual inspections of the electrical
boards at the beginning and at the conclusion of the one-year
defects liability period;
The thermo-graphic scans shall be performed by an inspector
approved in advance by the COR;
5. A laboratory certified for automatic gas fire detection and
firefighting systems in the electrical boards;
Page 41 of 252

6. Additional inspections as specified in the various clauses of the
specification;
08.05.3. Inspections of the systems of other contractors:
Inspection and handover of the works shall be performed in stages.
The drawings for the purpose of handover shall be prepared by the
various contractors, who shall also participate in the testing.
08.05.4. Payment for the tests:
Payments for the tests shall be made at the Contractors expense.

08.06 Acceptance of the electrical installation and completion of the work

08.06.1. Acceptance of the electrical installation
Only following completion of all items specified below will the
electrical installation be accepted:
1. Inspections as detailed in the Testing clause;
2. Submittal of documents as specified in the Revision of
drawings following construction and Installation Manual
clause;
3. Handover of the Electrical Installation Handover Form, attach
ed as an appendix to this Specification;
4. Fulfillment of all the terms of the contract, other than the one-
year defects liability period and years of liability and service;
5. Submittal of all warrantee certificates for the equipment that has
been supplied.
08.06.2. Completion of the work
The work will be considered as complete after fulfillment or all the
terms of the contract.
08.06.3. Warranty
The contractor shall providetwo-year warranty
08.07 Equipment requiring approvals

The Contractor shall submit a schedule of the equipment proposed by it
for the CORs approval.
The schedule shall include all proposed accessories and equipment from
among the samples in the contract documents, including lighting fixtures,
board equipment, etc.
The schedule shall be submitted within 60 days of issuance of the Notice
to Proceed.

08.08 Revision of drawings following construction and Installation Manual

At the conclusion of the work, the Contractor shall deliver 4 installation
manuals that shall include all the items detailed below:
08.08.1. Format of the submittal
1. The Installation Manual shall be prepared in a rigid and
aesthetic binder. The manual shall be printed on white wood-
free paper, 70 g weight and in A4 and A3 sizes;
2. Each system shall have a separate section in the manual and a
divider having a color as approved by the COR;
Page 42 of 252

3. The insignia of the COR shall be printed on the binder of the
manual with the CORs title: _______ System _________
Installation. The titles shall be printed in large letters, insofar
as possible;
4. If the manual is compiled from a number of volumes, one of the
volumes shall be the master for all the systems and shall
include a detailing of the contents of all the binders included in
the system, detailed by the various principal subjects. This
volume shall be in a color identical to the system, but in a
darker hue;
5. A page shall be placed at the beginning of each individual
volume with a table of contents. The level of detailing in the
table of contents shall enable the user to easily find drawings or
catalogs or instructions or any other material filed in the binder;
6. The material that will be filed in the binder shall be inserted into
transparent plastic holders. Each plastic holder shall have a
different item drawings, catalogs, operating instructions,
maintenance instructions, parts lists, etc. A sticker shall be
affixed to each plastic holder on which the Item No. found
inside of it and a description of the item shall be printed. The
stickers shall be compatible with the table of contents;
7. All of the binders shall have 4 rings in order to prevent tearing
of the plastic holders;
8. Magnetic media shall be stored in rigid sleeves.
08.08.2. Contents of the manual
1. As-made drawing system;
2. A CD system using AutoCAD 2007 with revised drawings (as-
made);
3. Detailed catalogs for each equipment item and component
included in the system, including piping and electrical
accessories with markings emphasized on the item appearing in
the catalog;
4. Electrical boards:
4.1 Operating and operations instructions.
4.2 Handling and maintenance instructions for all devices in
the boards, including instructions for adjusting delay times
and safeguards for the circuit breakers and instructions for
regulating the various control units.
4.3 As-made drawings that shall include:
a. Single-line diagrams of the boards that shall also
include:
1) Numbering of the terminals and conductors;
2) Conductor cross-sections;
3) Size of switches and a table for regulating over
current;
4) Marking of board components and systems;
5) Number of contacts of the components;
6) Calibration of safeguards of the main breakers;
b. Diagrams of all command and control systems:
c. Drawings of the terminals on the boards;
Page 43 of 252

d. Structural drawings of the boards with the location of
components and equipment;
e. A marking shall appear at the bottom of the drawings
of all the contacts (including reserve contacts) of all
relays and units as distributed (normally closed,
normally open, changeover). A marking shall be
provided for each contact as to which page and
column it appears.
A marking shall be provided next to each contact of a
relay or unit indicating to which relay/unit it belongs
and on which page and column the relay/unit can be
found.
4.4 A schedule of items installed in the board, including the
manufacturers catalog number.
4.5 Catalogs of all equipment items in the installation.
4.6 A schedule of replacement parts indicating all parts data
and catalog numbers.
4.7 Operating ranges (voltage ranges, including short-term)
for all components and units in the board.
4.8 Various instructions:
a. Identifying breakdowns and their correction;
b. Regular maintenance by day, month, year, etc.;
c. Special safety instructions;
d. Emergency instructions.
4.9 Detailed explanations for the operation of all the systems.
4.10 A table of moments for fastening of screws in the board.
4.11 Reports by the person responsible for inspections at the
manufacturers plant in accordance with ISO 9000:2008
procedures.
4.12 A CD system with revised drawings (as-made) using
AutoCAD 2007 software.
5. Installation manual for the UPS systems, as specified in the UPS
specifications.
6. Installation manual for the fire detection and fire extinguishing
system as detailed in the specification;
7. Installation manual for the EMP filters.
8. Installation manuals of other systems installed by the Contractor
(flood detection, anti rodent ultrasonic system, public address
system etc.).
9. Lighting installation:
9.1 A table including all types of lighting fixtures that have
been installed, by type, number of bulbs and quantity of
fixtures;
9.2 Catalog sheets of each type of lighting fixture that has
been installed;
9.3 Inspection reports of the installation by a certified
inspector;
10. Building control system
10.1 As-made drawing system;
Page 44 of 252

10.2 A CD system using AutoCAD 2007 with revised drawings
(as-made);
10.3 Detailed catalogs for each equipment item and component
included in the system, including with markings
emphasized on the item appearing in the catalog;
10.4 Diagrams of all command and control systems:
10.5 Drawings of the terminals on the boards;
10.6 Structural drawings of the boards with the location of
components and equipment;
10.7 Wiring diagram
10.8 A list off all registers including addresses and content.
10.9 Screen shots prints of all control screens .The screen shots
prints will be supplied also on a CD in PDF format.
11. Electrical Installations Handover Form;
12. A list of contact people by subject, including telephone
numbers.

08.09 Surveyor

In any place in which measurement by a surveyor is required in the
General Specification or this Special Specification, the intention is to a
registered surveyor, even if not specifically indicated.

08.10 Standards and testing of compliance with the requirements of
standards

To remove any doubt, and in order to supplement that stated in the various
regulations and in the General Specification, all materials, devices and
equipment that will be used in the work shall be compatible with the
requirements of standards.
All labor for which an Israeli standard exists shall be compatible with the
requirements of that standard.
A standard is as per its definition in the Electrical Regulations, and in
Section 08.01.01 Standards of the General Specification. The obligation
for proving compatibility with standards is [hereby] imposed on the
Contractor.
Tests for compatibility with the standards shall be performed as stated in
the Standards Law and at the Contractors expense.

08.11 Building control software and communications

08.11.1. All software that will be used in equipment or systems shall have an
appropriate license and shall not require renewal of the license.
08.11.2. The software shall be freely accessible without the need for
authorization or the involvement of the equipment or software
supplier.
08.11.3. The equipment and systems shall be supplied with full
documentation for the software used in it.
08.11.4. Equipment and systems with software shall be supplied with RS-232
and RS-485 communications ports for connecting with a MODBUS
Page 45 of 252

type network with all connectors and without the need for special
connectors.
08.11.5. The system shall have full communications compatibility for all
equipment connected to the building control system, including:
1. Compatible open communications protocol, capable and
knowing how to connect to the building control system,
including compatible files;
2. Hardware adapter;
3. Supplementary software, if required;
4. All software development required for installation of the
compatible interface with the building control system.
08.11.6. RS-485 to TCP/IP adaptors shall be supplied and installed in the
existing communications cabinet in building 35 (site 13103).

08.12 Integration with the Operational Systems

The contractor shall participate in the integration process between the
building's and the operational electrical systems (the operational electrical
will be supplied and installed by the IAF).
The Integration will be performed after the handover of the building (but
within the 2 years warranty period) and shall include:
08.12.1. Connection of the power and control cables supplied by IAF in the
building's electrical switchboard.
08.12.2. Performing the functional tests of the interface including:
1. Changeover simulations (mains-generator)
2. Generator starting and shut down
3. Correct information transfer between the systems (dry contacts).

08.13 Electrical installation

08.13.1. Installations
The electrical and communication systems in the building will be
performed in overt installation.
1. The buildings' are EMP protected. Therefore, the entire conduits
and piping system shall be RFI/EMI protected, made of metallic
parts and electrically continuous along their entire path.

08.13.2. Signage for lines and circuits
In addition to that stated in the Subsection 08.01.06 of the General
Specification:
1. Sign colors
1.1 Standard grid voltage White on black background
1.2 Filtered grid voltage (Red) White on red background
1.3 Generator voltage , when the
field is separate from the
board
White on yellow
background
1.4 Standard UPS voltage White on a blue background
1.5 Red UPS voltage Red on white background
1.6 400 Hz White on green background
1.7 Standard 60 Hz Black on yellow background
Page 46 of 252

1.8 60 Hz, UPS Blue on yellow background
1.9 60 Hz, Red Red on yellow background
1.10 Direct-current White on Bordeaux
background
1.11 Very low voltage systems Black on white background

2. Lines and circuits:
2.1 Signs with the number of the circuit shall be installed at
the end of each line and circuit in the board (on all the
conductors and at the end of piping or cable). Signs for
feeder lines arriving from other boards shall also include
an indication of the feeder board.
2.2 Cables shall also be marked at least every 10 m as well as
before and after every fire break.
3. Conduits for very low voltage systems
A sign with an indication of the destination of the conduit shall
be installed at the end of every conduit and at the low voltage
center. The formulation for the writing on the signs shall be
approved in advance by the COR.
4. Reserve conduits.
A sign shall be installed at the end of each reserve conduit as
well as at the other end of the conduit with a Reserve
marking.

08.13.3. Electrical Devices

1. Light switches and pushbuttons
1.1 Devices for outdoor use and for indoor operational areas:
a. The switches and push buttons shall be enclosed in a
thermosetting enclosure.
b. The thermosetting material shall ensure high safety
and continues operation in heavy duty situation.
c. The devices shall meet the following characteristics:
1) Degree of protection: >= IP65
2) Glow Wire test: 960C
3) Self extinguishing V-0
4) Double insulation
5) Operating Temperature: -25C - +70C
d. Impact resistance > 10 Joules
e. The enclosure shall have threaded holes for cable
glands.
1.2 In the communications room, modular type devices with
the following characteristics:
a. Degree of protection: IP55
b. Glow Wire test: 850C
c. Self extinguishing V-1
d. Double insulation
e. Operating Temperature: -15C - +50C
f. Impact resistance > 5 Joules

Page 47 of 252

2. Socket Outlet:
2.1 The wall sockets shall comply with the Israeli standard.
2.2 The sockets shall be of modular type.
2.3 Electrical ratings: 16A/230V/50Hz
2.4 The sockets will be installed in water tight enclosure with
the following characteristics:
a. Degree of protection: IP55
d. Double insulation
e. Operating Temperature: -15C - +50C
f. Impact resistance > 5 Joules

3. Distribution boards and Interlocked socket-outlets:
3.1 High capacity flanged water tight distribution boards for
wall mounting interlocked socket-outlets 16-63A.
3.2 The distribution boards shall meet the following
characteristics:
a. Degree of protection >= IP55
b. Glow Wire test: 960C / 85C
d. Operating Temperature: -25C - +50C
e. Impact resistance > 8 Joules
f. Breaker category: AC23A

4. Water-Tight wall mounted switches
4.1 Safety wall mounted switches shall be installed for the
following equipment:
a. Blowers
b. Crane (including fuse holder)
c. Main door (including fuse holder.
4.2 The device does not burn or smoke/
4.3 The switch is installed in painted aluminum, alloy
enclosure and meets the following characteristics:
a. Degree of protection >= IP65
c. Self extinguishing: V-0
d. Operating Temperature: -25C - +70C
e. Impact resistance > 10Joules
f. Breaker category: AC23A
4.4 The devices shall be supplied with locking device.

5. Emergency pushbutton
5.1 pushbutton with several contacts as required for the
purpose of discontinuing supply, as follows:
a. Feeder line to the building (will be discontinued at
the feeder board).
b. Any additional shutoff (other than UPS).
Page 48 of 252

5.2 The pushbutton shall be of a type that locks (latches)
when pressed; it must be turned one-half turn in order to
release it.
5.3 The pushbutton shall be in installed a red plastic box with
a with transparent plastic cover on a front hinge.
5.4 A sign reading Emergency shutoff for the building or
Emergency shutoff for shall be installed under the
emergency pushbutton.

08.13.4. Junction boxes

1. All junction boxes and covers shall be made of thermoplastic
material, halogen free and silicone free.
2. The box degree of protection shall be at least IP65.
3. The cover shall be attached to the box with 4 stainless steel
screws.
4. No more than five pipes shall be connected to any box.
5. All entrances to the boxes shall be executed through Pg glands.
6. Burning behavior:
6.1 Glow wire test: 960C according to IEC60695-2-11.
6.2 Flame retardant and self extinguishing.
6.3 V-0 grade according to UL94
7. Degree of protection against mechanical load: IK08 (5 Joules).
8. Ambient temperature:
8.1 Average over 24 hours > 40C
8.2 Maximum value > 70C
8.3 Maximum value <-10C
9. Connections to lighting fixtures shall be performed through
junction boxes.
A box shall be installed for each lighting fixture.
08.13.5.
Proximity sensor
1. Inductive proximity sensor.
2. Supply voltage: 20-250Vac/dc
3. Enclosure: Nickel plated brass barrel, plastic face (PBT)
4. IP67 water resistant.
5. Nominal sensing distance: 15 mm
6. LED indication:
6.1 Red: output energized
6.2 360 visibility.
7. Approvals: UL listed, CE marked.
8. Shock: 30g
9. Operating temperature: -2570C
10. Vibration: 55Hz, 1mm amplitude

08.13.6. Terminals
All terminals shall have surface fastening (not point fastening with a
screw).

Page 49 of 252

08.13.7. Conduits

1. All conduits shall be metallic and EMI/RFI shielded as specified
bellow.
2. Galvanized and oven painted sheet metal ducts, according to
section 18031 in the general specifications' but 1.5 mm thick.

The ducts shall be oven painted with the following colors:
Connections shall not be made by welding between trays or
ducts, or connections to the supports.

a. Electric White, RAL 9016
b. Black Communications Grey, RAL 7004
c. Red Communications White, RAL 9003

The marking of the duct shall be performed using 4x8 cm
laminated PVC signage in colors in accordance to chapter
08.17.2.
The installation of red communication ducts shall be performed
according to the requirements of the general specifications,
chapter 1803.

2.2 Shielded flexible conduits with PVC coating, and
RFI/EMI attenuation of at least:
Frequency (MHz) Attenuation (dB)
1 126
10 98
100 75
1000 66

The metallic part of the conduit will be made of steel or
bronze strips as necessary in order to achieve the required
attenuation.

Further screening from a tinned copper braid may be also
added if necessary.

The outer PVC jacket shall be low smoke, low flame spread
and halogen free.

The color of the plastic coating in the buildings shall be:

a. Electric Black
b. Black / Red
Communications
Grey / Blue
c. Fire detection and
extinguishing
Red
d. Building controls Any color in accordance with the
special specification different
from the above colors.
Page 50 of 252

3. The conduit system shall be grounded and electrically
continuous.
The conduits will be connected to the metal sheet ducts by brass
cable glands, nickel plated.
In case that the continuity cannot be achieved by direct joining
of the different metallic parts, bridging with copper conductors
(PVC coated) shall be performed.
The conductors` cross section will be 35 mm
2
for main ducts,
and 16 mm
2
for other conduits.

08.13.8. Underground piping
1. Steel pipes
1.1 The last segment of the conduits entering the building
shall be made of galvanized steel.
1.2 The side wall thickness shall be:
a. 2" diameter 3.65 mm
b. 3" diameter 4.05 mm
c. 4" diameter -4.76 mm.
1.3 The segment shall be as marked in the plans but not less
than 25 m long.
1.4 The pipe segments shall be welded in order to create a
continuous pipe.
The welding shall be painted with Zinc paint.
1.5 The passage through concrete walls (building and
manholes) shall be made using pre manufactured pipe
array as described in the plans.
1.6 Bandings (inside manholes etc.) shall be performed with
shielded flexible conduits. The connection between the
rigid pipe and the flexible conduit shall be via appropriate
metallic gland.
1.7 The contractor shall supply shop drawings for the COR
approval prior to execution.
1.8 Cables inserted in steel pipes will be strung into a
polyethylene sleeve for their protection against scratches.

2. Plastic conduits
2.1 Pipes in the site development (after the 25 m steel
segment) shall be of the following types.
a. Pipes and accessories made from polyethylene as
classified and sorted in accordance with Israel
Standard 1531, as specified below:
1) HDPE made from virgin materials.
2) Reduced friction.
3) UV-protected.
4) Not fire retardant.
5) SDR = 13.5.
6) Resistant to short-term internal hydraulic
pressures.
Page 51 of 252

b. Rigid PVC pipes in accordance with Israel Standard
532 with a pressure rating of 8.
c. Plastic pipes in accordance with Israel Standard 4519
(Cobra).
2.2 Pipe connections
a. Rigid plastic pipes shall be connected using a tongue-
in-groove method or with the use of a suitable
factory-made connecting device (sleeve). Sealing
shall be obtained with the use of a rubber ring
complying with the requirements of Israel Standard
1124, Part 1, which will be assembled within the
groove of the socket and will press on the end of
pipe, or the use of rubber rings that will be assembled
between the sleeve and the two ends of the pipes.
b. Flexible pipes manufactured in accordance with
Israel Standard 1531 shall be connected using a
coupler. The cover shall comply with
therequirements of Israel Standard 5283. Cutting of
the pipes shall be performed perpendicular to their
center lines.

3. Placement of pipes
Placement of pipes in trenches shall be performed in accordance
with the requirements of Section 57 Water, Sewage and
Drainage Lines.
Filling in layers, lining and covering shall be performed as
stated below:
3.1 Sand lining compatible with the requirements of Israel
Standards Institute Detail 444, with a thickness of 10 cm
under the pipes.
3.2 Covering with sand as stated above, with a thickness of
3020 cm above the pipes.
3.3 A sand lining as stated above with a minimum thickness
of 510 cm between the pipe layers.
3.4 Covering with layers and materials according to the
details plan E-113 up to the site development level.
3.5 110 mm and greater diameter PVC pipes shall be
separated from one another with supports. The supports
shall be installed at a distance that shall not exceed 2 m
between them.
3.6 In sandy areas, the flexible pipes shall be anchored to the
trench bed using bent rods at a distance that shall not
exceed 2 m between them. Flexible pipes between any
two manholes shall be continuous without connections.

Pipes shall be placed in straight lines and at the depths as
required in the contract documents. In any case, the
depths shall not be less than that specified in the Electrical
Regulations regarding the installation of conduits. The
gradient of the pipes between any two manholes shall be
Page 52 of 252

uniform, unless otherwise required.

3.7 Entrances to manholes and cabinets (plastic pipes)
a. The distance between the sidewalls of pipes at the
entrance to a manhole or cabinet shall be 50 mm
unless otherwise specified in the details plans.
b. The ends of 110 mm diameter and greater PVC pipes,
in accordance with Israel Standard 532:
1) In walls shall be blocked and connected within
a factory-made manhole connector (factory-
made bell sleeve) that shall be installed in the
wall of the manhole or building.
2) In the floor of the building, the pipe shall
protrude 20 cm from the floor. The sealing of
the ends of the pipes shall be performed using a
factory-made accessory.
c. The ends of the pipes shall be made from
polyethylene in accordance with Israel Standard
1531:
1) In the wall of the manhole, the pipe shall
protrude approximately 20 cm from the interior
sidewall of the manhole.
2) In the floor of buildings, the pipe shall protrude
20 cm from the floor.
3) In the wall of the building, the pipe shall
protrude 5 cm from the wall.
The sealing of the ends of the pipes shall be
performed using a factory-made accessory
compatible with requirements of Israel Standard
5283.
d. The ends of the pipes shall be compatible with Israel
Standard 4519, in accordance with the instructions of
the contract documents. The sealing of the ends of
the pipes shall be performed using a suitable factory-
made accessory.
e. Connections to existing communications manholes
shall be performed with Bezeqs inspector
supervision.

4. Inspection and cleaning of pipes
4.1 After completion of the placement and connection to the
manholes, the interior of the pipes shall be cleaned and the
integrity and cleanliness of the pipe shall be verified.
4.2 After inspection and cleaning, pull cords shall be inserted
into the pipes as specified below.
4.3 Following cleaning, a metal brush shall be passed through
each pipe and it shall be cleaned of any residues of sand,
gravel and dirt. This action shall be repeated until no sand
or dirt comes out of the end of the pipe.

Page 53 of 252

Thereafter, an inspection coil (mandrill) shall be
inserted. The mandrill shall have the following
dimensions:
a. The exterior dimensions of the coil shall be 90% of
the interior diameter of the pipe.
b. The length of the coil shall be 300% of the interior
diameter of the pipe.

5. Sealing of the pipes

Prior to covering of the excavation and after inspection and
cleaning as detailed above, the ends of pipes shall be sealed
using factory-made plugs, where the pull cord is tied to the
cover. The ends of pipes in cabinets and manholes shall be
closed using foamed polyurethane or other method approved by
the COR.
Metal pipes shall be sealed using metallic cap screwed into the
pipe end.

6. Pull cords
Pull cords shall be compatible with the requirements of Israel
Standard 753.
Pull cords made from minimum of 4 mm diameter
polypropylene shall be installed in all empty pipes in the
building.
Minimum 8 mm diameter polypropylene full cords shall be
installed in all empty pipes installed underground.
The ends of the pull cords shall end within the manholes or the
trenches. In any case, a minimum 50 cm long cord shall remain
outside of the pipe. The cord shall be secured against being
pulled back into the pipe.

7. Manholes
7.1 All manholes shall be pre-fabricated.
7.2 Manholes shall be compatible with Subsection 1804 of
Section 18 in the general specifications, whether for
electricity or for the various types of communications.
7.3 Rectangular manholes shall comply with Israeli Standard
466 part 4.
7.4 Manhole covers shall withstand the following loads:
a. 12.5 tons (class B125) for manholes in pavements
and areas that are nor accessible for vehicles. .
b. 40 tons (class D400) for manholes in roads or road
shoulders.
7.5 The covers shall comply with Israeli standard 489.
7.6 The manholes covers shall be sign posted with casted
aluminum signs, 5 mm thick, indicating the manhole
content (e.g "LV electricity", "control" etc.) the sign shall
be attached to the cover by 4 appropriate screws.

Page 54 of 252

8. Marking of alignment
8.1 Marking of the alignment in open areas shall be
performed using posts with signs.
8.2 Posts shall be installed at the end points and at turning
points of the lines, and additionally, between 30 m and 60
meters between these points. The posts shall be made
from 3 diameter steel pipe protruding from the ground
surface by 1.0 m, where its lower end is well anchored in
a B-15 type concrete base with minimum dimensions of
30x30x30 cm. The pipe shall be filled with concrete. The
section protruding from the base shall be cleaned well and
painted as specified regarding the painting of pipes. The
painting shall be performed in red-white colors
(identification colors) in alternating segments of 15 cm. A
4 mm thick aluminum casted sign with the writing
Electrical Cable shall be placed at the upper end of the
post using red letters on a white background.

08.13.9. Cables and conductors
1. Control cables within the building shall be of the N2XY-FR1
type.
2. Underground control cables shall be of the N2XRY-FR1 type.
3. Cables for final circuits shall be N2XY-FR1 type.
4. Feeder cables to boards shall be N2XY-FR1 or NA2XY-FR1
type.
5. Cables for feeding safety loads, such as boards that must
continue to function even during a fire, smoke extraction fans,
fire dampers, etc. shall be Type (N) HXHX FE 180 E60.
Cable insulation shall be inflammable and shall not emit toxic
smoke or gases, such as hydrogen chloride. The cables shall be
compatible with the IEC 60332-3 standard.
6. Cable insulation shall be compatible with voltages of 1/0.6kV.
7. Conductors with a cross-section of 10 sq. mm and greater shall
be braided.
8. Conductor connections
8.1 16 sq. mm and larger cross-section conductors shall have
cable heads installed
8.2 16 sq. mm and larger cross-section conductors, installed
outside the building or that penetrate the building from
outside, shall have shrink-wrapped splitters installed.
8.3 All cables connected to boards shall have shrink-wrapped
ends installed (if shrink-wrapped splitters have not been
installed in them) of the aforesaid manufacture.
9. Communications cable for building control shall be of a 4-pair
strand shielded 6005 type with additional covering for
underground installation1/0.6kV (each pair shall be twisted
around itself).

Page 55 of 252

08.13.10. Modular sealing system for the passage of cables into protected
spaces
1. General

1.1 Passages for conduits and electrical cables through the
protected shelter walls shall be sealed using a sealing
system resistant to the penetration of fire, smoke, gas,
water and shock. The system shall be resistant to fire for
at least 2 hours and shall enable the addition or extraction
of cables and ducts with relative ease while maintaining
their quality and properties.
1.2 The systems shall be installed in a rectangular metal frame
or in a frame made for a round borehole.
1.3 The systems shall have standards approvals for fire
resistance (at least 120 minutes), resistance to shock,
resistance to the penetration of gases, resistance to the
penetration of water under pressure, resistance to
vibrations and resistance to continuous wear and tear for a
period at least 20 years.
2. Description of the system
The sealing system is based on the principle of the compression
of half blocks made from elastomeric material until producing
complete sealing. The system is comprised of the following
components:
2.1 A steel frame of various sizes
The steel frame shall be concreted in place at the time of
casting in the wall through which the cables will pass.
The frame can have one opening, a number of openings in
a row, two rows with one above the other with a large
number of openings, or even more.
The method used for concreting in walls, floors and
drywalls and for exterior coupling shall be in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
2.2 Elastomeric gaskets for filling of the frame
In order to obtain sealing, the gaskets shall be installed in
accordance with a cable passage plan (quantity of cables
and their diameters). Blind gaskets (without holes) shall
be assembled in places reserved for future cabling. A
reserve space of at least 25% of that actually required
shall be provided.
2.3 Interior divider plates between the rows of gaskets
An anchoring plate is placed between the rows of the
gaskets whose function is to serve as a base for an
additional role of gaskets.
2.4 Upper pressure unit
With the use of this unit, all the gaskets are compressed in
order to obtain complete sealing. The pressure units shall
be one of the following types:
a. A standard pressure unit that is compressed with the
use of a screw in the frame.
Page 56 of 252

b. A pressure unit with a conical opening through which
spreading of a front screw spreads the opening and
creates pressure on the sealing system.
c. Assembly of the frame in the wall
A steel frame is assembled in the concrete wall
before casting so as to constitute an integral part of
the wall without possibility of leaking in the area of
contact between it and the concrete.
The casting of the frame must be executed so as not
to damage interior surfaces, the screw and the
threading.
If the frame is concreted at the center of the wall,
gradients should be provided in the concrete in front
of frame so that the opening will be enlarged in order
to facilitate the sealing work afterward. The frame
shall be concreted in place so that the access to the
pressure screw will be optimal and not be impaired
later on by the cables. Styrofoam blocks should be
used for filling of the frames in order to protect the
interior components from dirt during the casting.
The Contractors works include:
1) Supply and assembly of the frame in the casting
form.
2) Preparation of the form for a space for the
openings of the frame.
3) Concreting of the frame, repair of the spaces that
have been produced.
4) Cleaning of the interior of the frame of any
concrete and dirt.
All of these actions shall be performed in accordance
with the manufacturers specifications.
d. Round opening system
The sealing system shall be installed in the wall in
one of the following ways:
1) A steel sleeve is anchored in the wall.
2) A diamond drill bit is used.
3) By standard drilling using an exterior sealing
unit.
The diameter of the borehole/sleeve depends on
the diameter of the lines that will pass through
the opening in accordance with the
e. Installation of the sealing systems
1) If cables will not be passing through a particular
opening, blind gaskets shall be used and they
shall be completely sealed.
2) When sealing an opening with cables, it must be
strictly verified that the cables will be placed
within the opening at an angle true to the frame.
Do not tie the cables to trays after concluding the
Page 57 of 252

installation. Upon completing placement of the
cables, the gaskets shall be installed so that each
cable will have a gasket installed with a drill bit
compatible with the exterior diameter of the
cable.
3) In order to facilitate the installation, use can be
made of a special lubricating paste.
f. Inspection
1) Inspection of the concreting of the frame
includes:
I. Proper location of the frame in the wall.
II. No spaces are formed in the concrete around the
frame.
III. Cleanliness of the interior surfaces of the frame.
IV. Absence of damage to interior surfaces.
V. Formation of a clean 10 cm wide phase around
the frame on both sides of the passage.
2) Testing of sealing
Nondestructive testing shall be performed using
equipment that will be approved by the COR.
This testing is required for sealed openings
without cables and for sealed openings with
cables.

08.13.11. Sealing of passages and cable ducts against fire
1. Blockage with the use of mineral wool batts (large openings):
1.1 The blockage shall be made with the use of 50 mm thick
160 kg per cu. m weight mineral wool batts, coated on
both sides with fire-resistant material.
1.2 Materials from which the fire blockage will be installed
shall be tested in accordance with Israel Standard 755
(Classification of Construction Materials according to
their Response to Fire) and shall be classified at least with
the following ratings:
a. Flammability: V
b. Smoke density: 4
c. Deformation and drip: 4
1.3 The materials shall be compatible for 90 minutes of fire
blockage and shall comply with the requirements of at
least one of the following standards (a laboratory approval
shall be submitted):
a. DIN 4102
b. UL 1479
c. BS 476
1.4 Requirements for the blockage components:
a. The coated material acts on the basis of ablation
(thermo-chemical reaction that absorbs heat energy
and releases gases that expels oxygen) and not
intumescent (formation of an insulating layer that
expands during fire).
Page 58 of 252

b. Components of the caulking shall be resistant to:
1) Water and high and continued humidity.
2) Changes in weather.
3) Pests.
4) Ultraviolet radiation.
1.5 The service life of the fire block (aging) and the cable
coating shall be at least 10 years.
1.6 The fire block shall be made from materials that allow
future changes in the cable system, i.e., the addition and
extraction of tables at any time following the first
installation without damaging the blocking and with the
possibility of simple and easy repair.
1.7 None of the fire block components shall include asbestos
or any other material that is toxic to humans, both during
installation and as the result of fire.
1.8 Cables passing through the block shall be coated with
KBS for a length of 50 cm on each side of the block.
2. Blockage of cable passages and piping using fire-resistant foam
(small openings):
2.1 The blockage shall be made by injecting self-expanding
foam into the opening through which the cables pass. The
material shall penetrate into the opening under pressure
while filling all of the grooves between the cables and the
opening frame and between themselves.
2.2 The material shall carry an approval by a recognized
laboratory.
2.3 About 1 hour after filling of the opening, the hardened
foam shall be cut and sanded in order to obtain a clean
finish.
2.4 Cables passing through the blockage shall be coated with
a fire retardant material compatible with the blocking
material for a length of 50 cm on each side of the
blockage.
3. Blockage of the cable passages using expandable sacks:
3.1 The expandable sacks that will be designated for fire
blockage in cable passages, for interior and exterior use,
shall be resistant to water and industrial chemicals, made
from fire-resistant glass fibers whose contents are
comprised of a mixture of mineral fibers.
3.2 The contents of the sack shall harden at a temperature of
130C that will prevent the spreading of the material. At
a temperature of 280C, the volume of the sack will
increase by 45% of its temperature at 70C and its
contents will become a ceramic mass withstanding
pressures of 10 atmospheres.
3.3 The sacks shall have fire resistant for a period of up to 4
hours, approved in accordance with BS 476, UL 1479 and
DIN 4102. Sacks that are in vertical passages shall be
installed on a 40x40x4 cm metal mesh.
Page 59 of 252

3.4 Coating of electrical cables to prevent fire propagation
using the KBS system
a. Coating of the cables shall not impair their electrical
conductivity (current carrying capacity).
b. The coating shall have affirmation of their
effectiveness in the coating of insulated cables, cable
couplers and cable trays.
c. A 12 mm diameter coated cable shall be capable of
being bent to a diameter of up to 30 mm without
producing cracks.
d. The coating shall be made without the need for
preparation of the cable surfaces.
e. The coating shall be capable of being applied with
the use of a brush, by spraying or compressing until
obtaining the coating thickness as required by the
manufacturer.
f. The coating shall be capable of resistance to water,
industrial chemicals and exposure to sunlight.
g. Service life in interior or exterior use shall be at least
10 years.
h. The coating shall comply with the requirements of
one of the following the detailed standards:
UL 1479, DIN 4102 48476
i. The coating shall comply with the requirements of
Israel Standard 755, flammability rating V, smoke
density 4 and deformation and drip rating of 4.
3.5 Installation
a. Installation of the fire blockage shall be performed by
a company certified by the material manufacturer and
having knowledge and experience in the performance
of works of this type of at least 5 years.
b. The materials required for performance of the work
shall be supplied to the worksite enclosed in their
original containers, including the name of
manufacturer, type of material and date of
manufacture.
c. At the conclusion of the work, the Contractor shall
provide a written guarantee for the quality of
materials and workmanship.
3.6 Documents
The Contractor shall append the following the documents
and approvals:
a. Israel Standards Institute, Israel Standards 751 and
755.
b. An affirmation of testing by a certified laboratory for
the materials in accordance with at least one of the
following standards: BS 476, UL 1479 and DIN 4102
c. Manufacturers warranty for the service life of the
material shall be for a period of at least 10 years.
Page 60 of 252

d. Affirmation of the compatibility of the fire block
material to the type of sheathing and quantity of
cables and cable trays crossing through the passage.
e. Affirmation of the maximum area of the openings
that can be blocked.

08.14 Grounding
08.14.1. Foundation grounding
1. A minimum 40/4 mm, galvanized steel bar shall be used as a
bridging ring, which will be especially embedded for this
purpose in the casting of the foundation beams.
2. The bar shall be marked every 5 meters with a yellow/green
insulating tape for the purpose of its identification.
3. The bridging ring shall connect to the reinforcing in the
columns in the ring alignment to 2 reinforcing bars in each
column.
4. Outlets from the bridging ring shall end in metallic boxes.
5. Connections for maintaining continuity of the bridging ring and
to the outlets shall be made by welding.
08.14.2. The main equi-potential bus bar shall be installed near the main
electrical board and shall have a 60x10 mm cross-section and
minimum length of 600 mm.
08.14.3. Secondary grounding bus bars shall be installed according to the
plans.
08.14.4. Connection to the main equi-potential bus bar:
1. Bridging ring with a 4x40 mm cross-section galvanized steel
conductor.
2. Main water pipe with a 50 sq. mm cross-section conductor.
3. Air-conditioning ducts with a 16 sq. mm cross-section
conductor.
4. Conductors to the secondary grounding bus bars.
5. Metallic conduits according to the specified in the plans.
08.14.5. List of grounding tests
These tests shall be performed by a Grade 3 Inspector, who
shall submit a detailed inspection report. The tests shall
include:
1. Testing of the resistance of the outlets from the bridging ring to
the general mass of the ground using a grounding testing device.
2. Testing of the continuity of the foundation grounding system
using an impedance meter among all of the exterior outlets.
3. Testing of the continuity of the foundation grounding system
using an impedance meter for all the secondary equi-potential
bus bars in the building.
08.14.6. Grounding of anti-static flooring
1. The flooring shall be connected to the grounding at least at its
four corners. The distance between any two grounding
connections shall not exceed 4 m.
The connections shall be made to conductors in an alternating
warp and weave pattern.
2. The connections shall be made in wall-recessed boxes.
Page 61 of 252

3. The grounding shall connect to a dedicated grounding junction
if existing in the room or to the nearest equi potential bus bar if
a dedicated grounding junction is not present in the room.
4. The connecting conductors shall be insulated with a 10 sq. mm
cross-section.
Bridges may be formed from box to box with a single
connection to the junction or to the equi-potential bus-bar.
5. Testing of the flooring shall be performed by a Grade 3
Inspector.

If another test method is not specified, the flooring shall be
tested as specified in the Fourth Addendum of the Electrical
Regulations (Electrical Installations in Medical Sites with
Voltages up to 1000V), 5744-1994.

08.15 Lightning protection

The system shall be as described in the plans and according to the Israel
Standard 1173 and as follows:

08.15.1. Reception system
1. The reception system is comprised of horizontal copper strips,
20x2.5 mm, installed on the roof.
2. The reception conductors shall be insulated from the building
walls by appropriate conductor holders, with maximum 50 cm
separation from each other.
3. The conductors shall be connected together and additional
conductors shall be installed so that a 2.5x2.5 m grid is created
on the roof.
4. The reception conductors shall be installed above the roof
insulation. Outlets shall be formed from the arrestor system and
metallic components on the roof such as the air-conditioning
units shall be connected together.
08.15.2. Down leading conductors system
1. The down leading conductors system is based on copper strips,
20x2.5 mm, installed on the walls.
2. The down leading conductors shall be insulated from the
building walls by appropriate conductor holders, with maximum
50 cm separation from each other.
08.15.3. Grounding system
The down leading conductors shall be connected to the
grounding system:
1. Bridging ring
2. External ground electrodes, that will be executed at least 15 m
from the building (4 electrodes for each building).
The connection between the down leading conductor and the
grounding system shall be in a metallic connection box. The box
dimensions will allow the disconnecting from the grounding for
testing.
Page 62 of 252

08.15.4. Testing of the protection system
The testing shall be performed by a Grade 3 Inspector in accordance
with the specification and Israel Standard 1173.

The Inspector shall submit a detailed testing report on a form as per
the example appended to the standard.

08.16 EMP Protection system

08.16.1. General
1. The LS buildings will be EMP protected according to the
instructions and recommendations of MIL-STD-188-125.
2. EMP protection system is based on the following components:
2.1 Galvanized Steel piping system for all feeding cables
entering the building (Power, control and
communications).
2.2 Metallic conduit system for all cabling in and on the
building.
2.3 Input EMP filters for all copper cables entering the
buildings.
2.4 Grounding system based on the foundation grounding and
an additional local grounding electrode.
2.5 Lightning current arrestors and surge arrestors, installed
after the EMP filters and on critical internal feeding lines.
3. The conduit system shall be grounded and electrically
continuous.
4. If required because of installation constrains, separated parts of
the conduit system shall be electrically connected by copper
conductor with cross section of 16 sq. mm or greater.
5. Please refer to section 08.18.6 for further details of the conduit
system.

08.16.2. Cable shields

All cables, power, communication and controls shall be routed
inside metal pipes or channels, for their entire length.
Pipe sections will be joined by appropriate metal fittings and
finishes, to insure conductivity and durability in the presence of
humidity, to avoid corrosion.
Ducts sections will be either of a full rectangular cross section,
or of a U cross section with a cover of the same material, bolted
to the duct every 20 mm maximum with a captive metal bolt to
a nut welded to the channel.
To overlap of the cover to channel will be 2.5 cm minimum.
The mating surface between the cover and channel at the bolt
area will be conductive and protected from corrosion and rust.
The Junction between duct sections will be welded or bolted at
every 10 cm or 1 per side, whichever is more. The overlap
between adjacent sections and covers will be 2.5 cm at least,
conductive and protected from corrosion and rust.
Page 63 of 252

The resistance across each junction, cover to duct and between
channel sections will be no more than 10m (milli Ohms).
The sheet metal ducts and pipes will be grounded to structure
ground, at least every 5 meters.
Verification of implementation: by review of design drawings,
and by visual inspection of the installation
Verification of resistance: By measurement with a DC milli
ohm meter with a dynamic range of 0.1-100m (milli Ohms)..
The measurement shall be performed at least, for every duct
section and junction, with the meter probed positioned midway
between 2 bolts. The measurement will be performed every 2
meters for the duct length, and at every junction, and recorded.

08.16.3. Filtering

1. Filters are Long Line Protection Modules LLPC as defined by
Mil Std 188-125B.

These will comply with the requirements of the standard, as
given in table I with the residual internal response of table II.

Power line EMP filters will be installed at the power input
panel. These filters will comply with the requirements of Mil
Std 188-125B.
The list of cables to be filtered is given in the design drawings.

The filter will be installed as directed by the manufacturer, on a
grounded galvanized steel plate, 5 cm or more longer on each
side than the size of the filter, and grounded to the facility safety
ground with a short flat galvanized steel strap, 5cm by 5mm.

Signal and telephone lines will be similarly protected by EMP
filters appropriate to the signal type, such as high and low bit
rate data, control or telephone

Installation will be as directed by the manufacturer, and in any
case, installed on a grounded galvanized steel plate, 5 cm or
more longer on each side than the size of the filter, and
grounded to the facility safety ground with a short flat
galvanized steel strap, 5cm by 5mm.

Grounding resistance between the filter and plate will be 5m
(milliOhms) at the most. Grounding resistance between the
plate and facility ground will be no more than 100m (milli
Ohms).

Verification of compliance of the filters to the specification: By
a test report from an independent accredited laboratory.

Verification of installation: By visual inspection of installation.
Page 64 of 252

Verification of grounding resistance: By measurement with a
DC milli ohm meter at every filter and filter panel, and the
recording of the results.

Verification after installation: By testing with injected pulses
representative of Mil Std 188-125B limits. Test procedure per
appendix B of the standard.

08.16.4. Inspection reporting-Filters

1. Building Identification:___________________________

Date of inspection:_______________________________

Name of Inspector:_______________________________

Name of supervisor:______________________________

2. Visual inspection of:
2.1 Installation
2.2 Grounding

3. Measured inspection of:
3.1 Filtering
3.2 Resistance of Grounding to steel plate
3.3 Resistance of Grounding to facility ground

Filter inspected Filter grounding Comments Photo number
Requirement Filter to plate DC
resistance 5m
(milliOhms) or less

Verdict Pass Fail
1. Power line filter
2. Signal filter
3. Control line filter
4. Data Line filter
5
6
7
8
9
10

Page 65 of 252

Filter inspected Filter to facility
grounding
Comments Photo number
Requirement Filter plate to facility
DC resistance
100m (milliOhms)
or less

Verdict Pass Fail
2. Signal filter
4. Data Line filter
5
6
7
8
9

Filter inspected Filter protection Comments Photo number
Requirement
Injected pulse of table I
Residual internal
response, table II

Verdict Pass Fail
1.1. Short pulse common
mode

1.2. Short pulse wire to
ground

1.3. Intermediate pulse
common mode

1.4 intermediate pulse
wire to ground

2. Telephone Line filter
mode

ground

common mode

wire to ground

3. Control Line filter
mode

ground

common mode

wire to ground

Page 66 of 252

Filter inspected Filter installation Comments Photo number
Requirement Filter to plate secure
bond with conductive
surface and corrosion
protection

Verdict Pass Fail
2. Signal filter
4. Data Line filter
5
6
7
8
9
10
Filter inspected Filter grounding Comments Photo number
Requirement Filter plate secure
bond with conductive
surface and corrosion
protection to ground
strap

Verdict Pass Fail
2. Signal filter
4. Data Line filter
5
6
7
8
9
10

Signature of Inspector:_________________

Signature of Supervisor:_________________

08.16.5. Lightening protection at electrical switchboards

All power ports at power panels will be protected by over
voltage limiters, rated to limit the voltage to 1.5kV (Killo
Volts) or less when injected by a 8X20s pulse having a 2.5
internal resistance and a short circuit current of 10kA (Killo
Ampers). These will also serve for EMP protection
Sources of such protectors may be found at DEHN under the
component DEHN Ventile and the like, comprising of varistors
and spark gaps. The units will have a flag for indication of
failure.
Page 67 of 252

These devices require a low resistance connection to facility
ground, so will be mounted on every power line, phase and
neutral, and connected to the panel ground which in turn will be
connected to the facility ground via a metal strap, as detailed by
the electrical designer.

Resistance of protector ground port to facility ground should be
less than 100m (milliOhms).

Verification will be by inspection of the device installation and
measurement of the residual voltage when injected by the
specified lightening pulse.

08.17 Lighting

08.17.1. General

All lighting fixture shall comply with the requirements in section
08.09 of the general specification.

08.17.2. Types of lighting fixtures

1. Parabolic lighting fixtures
lighting fixtures in communications and electricity rooms shall
have four T5 tubes with an output of 14W and a matte parabolic
reflector (dark light).

Each fixture shall include 2 electronic ballasts.

2. Industrial water tight lighting fixtures, T5 2x54W
Lighting fixtures installed on the walls of the operational rooms
and in outdoor areas shall meet the following specifications:
2.1 Body made of AISI 316L stainless steel.
2.2 High purity anodized specular aluminum asymmetrical
reflector.
2.3 Tough ended safety glass, that hinges down for easy
maintenance.
2.4 Silicone rubber anti ageing gasket.
2.5 Stainless steel hinged spring clips.
2.6 Pg16 polyamide cable glands.
2.7 IP66 anti-vacuum breathing device.
2.8 Electronic ballast.
2.9 Degree of protection: IP65
2.10 Degree of protection against mechanical load: IK09 (12
Joules).
2.11 Ambient operating Temperature: -10C - +50C

3. 400W MH Floodlight fixture
Lighting fixtures installed on the ceiling of the operational
rooms shall meet the following specifications:
Page 68 of 252

3.1 Body made of die cast aluminum coated with epoxy
polyester.
3.2 High purity (99.85%) anodized aluminum reflector.
3.3 Diffuser: .Transparent tempered glass
3.4 Gear: Integrated on removable tray.
3.5 Lamp: 400W metal halide, pulse start, E40
4. 4. Outdoor wall lighting fixture
Lighting fixtures installed on the outdoor walls shall meet the
following specifications:
4.1 Body made of die cast aluminum coated with epoxy
polyester.
4.2 Diffuser: .Opal polycarbonate.
4.3 Electronic ballast.
4.5 Lamp: 2x18W TCD lamps
4.6 Diameter: 325 mm

08.17.3. Ballasts
1. Ballasts for lighting fixtures with linear florescent tubes and
fixtures with compact fluorescent bulbs shall be electronicwith a
minimum 0.96 output coefficient, with low losses (EEI = A2 or
A1), with a 5-year warranty.

2. Ballasts for lighting fixtures with other gas-emitting bulbs shall
be Low Loss type with a 5-year warranty.

08.17.4. Bulbs
1. T5 type fluorescent tubes (with a 60 mm diameter, shall be de-
coloring RA = 80 (from the 1B Group), with a lighting
efficiency of 70Lm/W and immediate warm starting of the
Lumilux + type in a color range of 4000C. The tubes shall be
rated for 18,000 work hours in accordance with the
manufacturers catalog.
2. Compact fluorescent bulbs (PL) shall be as per the above for
10,000 work hours in accordance with the manufacturers
catalog.

08.22.5. Emergency lighting units

1. General
1.1 The emergency lighting units are divided into tow
groups:
a. Directional lighting and illuminated signage that
is always operating during normal times and
during an emergency.
b. Single-use emergency lighting fixtures that
operates independently during emergency only.
Page 69 of 252

1.2 Emergency lighting fixtures shall be approved by
ISI according to IS20.2.22.
1.3 The emergency lighting system shall include:
a. Emergency lighting fixtures with integrated self-
test system and audio-visual indications.
b. Communication network with DALI protocol.
c. Central control units integrated in the building's
SWB, with indication display and paging
pushbuttons.
1.4 Management software integrated in the building's
control system:
a. Operation of all emergency lighting fixtures.
b. Graphical display of all lighting fixtures and their
status.
c. Status and fault reports.
d. Self-test timing tools.
e. On-line warnings.
1.5 The Automatic self tests shall be performed according
to IEC62034.
1.6 The test shall detect:
a. Battery fault
b. Lamp fault
c. Charger fault
d. Low emergency lighting duration etc.
1.7 The contactor shall connect the units to the power
after the final connection of the mains.
1.8 Warranty period: 4 years including batteries.

2. Emergency lighting communication system:
2.1 Up to 64 emergency lighting units will be connected
to the control unit.
2.2 The connection shall be without polarity.
2.3 Star topology. Maximal distance 300m.
2.4 The DALI communication lines shall be isolated
from the electrical lines by optic-couplers.
2.5 Isolation level >= 4000V

3. 3. DALI system power supply:
The power supply shall meet the following requirements:
3.1 Output voltage: -6.5Vdc 22.5Vdc..
3.2 Output current: 250mA
3.3 Input voltage: 230V/50Hz
3.4 Output ripple<= 100mV
3.5 Metal enclosure.

4. DALI control unit
4.1 Operation of 64 emergency lighting units.
4.2 Communication with the management software.
4.3 Operation of self test according to pre-determined
schedule.
Page 70 of 252

4.4 Local display for status indications.
4.5 Implementation of all IEC-62034 requirements.
4.6 DIN rail installation.
4.7 TCP/IP connection.

5. Directional lighting and Illuminated Signage:
5.1 The directional lighting and illuminated signage
shall be dual-use type, i.e illuminated during regular
operation and when there is no power supply.
5.2 The lighting fixture shall include LED light source
and internal rechargeable batteries for emergency
independent operation.
5.3 The lighting fixture shall meet all IS 20.2.22
requirements. A full ISI test certificate shall be
submitted.
5.4 Technical requirements:
a. Isolation class II.
b. 15 cm high white Hebrew letters on green
background.
c. Regulated and control batteries' charging.
d. Batteries' low voltage protection
e. Light source: 2x1W LED
f. Emergency duration: 180 min
g. Luminance >= 2cd/m2 with uniformity according
to IS20.2.22
h. Supply voltage: 230V 10% 50Hz..
i. Charging Indication lamp.
j. Audio-visual fault indication
k. Test pushbutton
l. Integral automatic self-test system according to
IEC 62034 and IS1838, initiated by the control
unit and/or the management software via DALI
protocol.
m. High temperature NiMh battery, 3.6V 2200mAh.
n. Metallic enclosure, with tempered glass lens.
o. IP65 water-resistant.
p. Ambient temperature (operating): 0-35C

6. Emergency lighting fixture:
6.1 The emergency lighting system is based on
individual, single use lighting fixtures.
6.2 The lighting fixture shall include LED light source
and internal rechargeable batteries for emergency
independent operation.
6.3 The lighting fixture shall meet all IS 20.2.22
requirements. A full ISI test certificate shall be
submitted.
6.4 Technical requirements:
a. Isolation class II.
b. 15 cm high white Hebrew letters on green
Page 71 of 252

background.
c. Regulated and control batteries' charging.
d. Batteries' low voltage protection
e. Light source: 3W LED
f. Lumen output: 145lm
g. Emergency duration: 180 min
h. Luminance >= 2cd/m2 with uniformity according
to IS20.2.22
i. Supply voltage: 230V 10% 50Hz..
j. Charging Indication lamp.
k. Audio-visual fault indication
l. Test pushbutton
m. Integral automatic self-test system according to
IEC 62034 and IS1838, initiated by the control
unit and/or the management software via DALI
protocol.
n. High temperature NiMh battery, 3.6V 2200mAh.
o. Metallic enclosure, with tempered glass lens.
p. IP65 water-resistant.
q. Ambient temperature (operating): 0-35C

08.22.6. LED warning beacon
1. Audio-visual rotative beacon shall be installed according to
the plans.
2. Light source: 32high output LED array.
3. Functions:
3.1 4 rotating configurations
3.2 4 flashing configurations
3.3 Steady mode
4. Effective intensity: 30cd
5. Lens type: Prismatic
6. IP65 water-resistant.
7. Housing/Lens material: High impact. UL94 VO (f1) PC
8. Operating temperature: -2550C
9. Relative Humidity: 90%@20C
10. Entries: Pg M20
11. Input voltage: 230V/50Hz
Page 110 of 252

08.18 Electrical Boards

08.18.1. The electrical boards shall be manufactured according to the requirements in
section 08.05 of the general specifications.
08.18.2. The manufacturer shall be supervised by the ISI according to IS1419 and
ISO 9001:2008.
08.18.3. The electrical board shall be TTA. The manufacturer shall be qualified by
the original structure manufacturer to build TTA boards.
08.18.4. Signage colors according to paragraph 08.17.2.
08.18.5. The electrical boards and EMP filters' cabinets shall be EMC protected, including
conductive gaskets etc. UL or VDE approvals shall b=e submitted.
08.18.6. The cable entries shall be via metallic glands.

08.19 Red Filters

Red filters for AC and DC .power system will be supplied and install as
designated in the plans.
The filters will comply with the following parameters:
08.19.1. Attenuation of at least 100dB in the frequency range of 14KHz-10GHz per
MIL-STD-220A, with full load.
08.19.2. Voltage drop <= 1% with full load.
08.19.3. Overload capability of 150% for 15 min.
08.19.4. Residual current between the body and un-grounded conduits <= 1mA
(milli-Ampers).
08.19.5. Heating <= 25C above the surroundings in the rated load.
08.19.6. The filters will be manufactured by an approved MOD manufacturer
08.19.7. All phases and the Zero of the RED field shall be filtered.
08.19.8. The current rating of the filter shall be according to the specified un the
plans.

08.20 24KW Dummy load

08.20.1. The contractor shall supply a 24KW, 3 phase dummy load in order to
prevent the generators operation without sufficient load.
08.20.2. The dummy load shall include 2 stages of 12KW each.
08.20.3. The connection of each stage shall be controlled by auxiliary dry contacts.
08.20.4. The dummy load shall be connected to the electrical SWB by N2XY5x10
cable.
08.20.5. The dummy load shall be installed in a metallic cage, made of galvanized
steel.
08.20.6. The dummy load shall include:
1. Appropriate resistive loads installed on ceramic insulators.
2. Ventilation unit with an appropriate electrical protection
3. Mains breaker
4. Control system (2 stage contactors, opto-couplers etc.)
5. Warning signage.
6. Warning red rotative beacon for operation indication, with LED lamps
to be installed over 2/L=2m galvanized steel pipe attached to the cage.
7. Thermal insulation for hot external surfaces.
Page 111 of 252

08.20.7. The contractor shall submit shop drawing (mechanical & electrical) for the
C.O.Rs approval.
Page 112 of 252

08.21 Flood Detection System Technical Specification

08.21.1. General
The flood detection system in the LS Building, designed for early detection
and warning of water or other liquids flooding under the floating floor and
above the acoustic ceiling. The system is comprised of a switchboard and
sensors distributed in locations where water intrusion is highly likely,
connected with a chained Model PL flood cable running from one sensor to
another and to the switchboard.

Both visual and audio warnings shall be provided. All relevant information
is depicted on a Hebrew/English LCD.

The system shall be modular and designed to be expanded by means of
circuit boards with 20 outlets each, up to a maximum of 200 outlets.

The system shall be designed to auto-exchange polarity in order to prevent a
self-coating electrolytic process.

The system shall be protected against water condensation by automatically
sending hot pulses to the sensor electrodes at 30 second intervals.

08.21.2. Technical Description

The system shall be manufactured by a reputable and experienced company.
The companys service and support system shall be proven and all system
components shall be in inventory by law for a period of 7 years.

1. Operating voltage
1.1 The system shall operate on the electricity grid at 230V 7%,
frequency 50Hz 2%.
1.2 The system shall be protected by a 1.5 mA (milli-Amper) quick
response fuse.
1.3 The system shall be operated by a safety guard switch.
1.4 The system shall have a CR2032 lithium battery backup for
memory and real time clock.
2. RFI/EMI interference
2.1 The system shall be RFI/EMI protected, unaffected by cellular
telephone radiation, electro-magnetic interference produced by
AC/DC electric equipment and external electric field.
2.2 The system shall not affect cellular, telephone and fiber optic
cables transmission.
3. .Alarms
The system shall have at least four types of alarms:
3.1 Verbal warnings as displayed on the LCD indicating:
a. Time of event.
b. Location.
c. Nature of event.
3.2 Red LED 1,200 milliCandle lighting intensity, 25 angle.
Page 113 of 252

3.3 Horn, 85dB solid state.
4. Alarm output (hardware)
Dry contact normally open (N.O.) and normally closed (N.C.),
maximum voltage 24V DC, maximum current 150mA.
5. Input resistance
System input resistance shall be 50M (mega-ohms).
6. Control voltage
Maximum control voltage transferred in cable 5V DC, maximum
current in line 10mA (milli Ampers).
7. Data collection
The system shall be equipped with data collection capacity of up to 36
separate events displayed in real-time. Internal memory of up to 1,600
different events retrieved by PC 486 and up.
8. Flood detection sensors

8.1 Addressable sensor.
8.2 1M ohm minimum input resistance.
8.3 5 second response time.
8.4 Auto-changing of polarity to avoid corrosion.
8.5 Auto-condensation prevention.
8.6 IP-65 sensor water-resistance.
8.7 Reliability: 16,000 hours MTBF
8.8 Coatings:
All sensor electrode types shall undergo rigorous selective plating
enabling the sensor to work in harsh environmental conditions
that contain contaminated liquids between 4-14 pH. Sensor
housing is hard anodized plated blue, 75 micron.
9. PL model cable
4-wire shielded 22 AWG Mylar aluminum with continuous grounding
strand, coated with blue PVC, oil and water resistant. Strand size 4 x 22
AWG. Breakdown strand voltage: 1,000V, deployable up to 3000
meter long without amplifier.
10. Signage
10.1 The sensor location shall be marked by a blue anodized sign,
installed in the ceiling with sensor number decal applied to the
sign.
10.2 Numbered aluminum decals, applied on the floating floor.
11. Packaging and mechanical installation
The switchboard shall be wall-mounted in a rectangular box, with the
following dimensions:
11.1 Length 120 mm
11.2 Height 220 mm
11.3 Depth 90 mm
11.4 Suspension on wall by means of eye hangers.

08.21.3. Sensor Deployment in the Area and Installation
The installation shall be carried out by the contractor according to the
following stages:
1. Identification of locations where water access is likely though a survey
carried out in advance.
Page 114 of 252

2. Laser leveling for checking the slope and flow direction and liquid
collection.
3. Placing and securing the sensors using the 3-D device supplied as sensor
installation kit.
4. Electrode height from floor: 1 mm.
5. On concrete floors, anchoring shall be performed by means of a screw
insert up to 10 mm diameter, hole depth 30 mm, arming by means of
arming tool.
6. A round plate shall be used on tile floors supplied with the kit with three
6 mm diameter screw inserts, 20 mm deep.

08.21.4. Electrical Installation
1. The installation shall be performed using the designated cable only.
Cable connections among sensors and junction boxes shall be carried
out by means of connectors. The junction boxes shall be sealed by
means of RTV.

08.22 Building control system
08.22.1. General
1. Functions of the building control system:
1.1 To display the operating condition of the building systems to the
Control Room.
1.2 To gather data on operation of systems such as: electricity supply
data, consumption of electricity, temperature, etc.
1.3 Display of faults in the various systems.
1.4 The control system in any case shall not be used for the operation
or changing of parameters other than control of the electrical
system.
2. Building systems that will be connected to the control system:
2.1 Electrical supply system.
2.2 UPS voltage supply system.
2.3 Generator and fuel tank
2.4 Fire detection and extinguishing.
2.5 Flood detection system
2.6 Other systems according to building use.
3. All of the building systems are supplied with an independent control
system. It is the responsibility of the contractior of each system to
install, activate and check the system that it has supplied. Following
conclusion of the acceptance testing of each system, the contractor shall
deliver all system details to the COR.
A separate control cabinet shall be installed next to the main electrical
board in each building that shall include all components of the control
system.
4. The control system of the building shall be connected to the
communication rack that will be installed in the transformer station.
5. Each control system shall have screens, faults and graphs integrated into
the control center.

Page 115 of 252

08.22.2. Control system components
1. Optical cables for connecting the buildings to the transformer stations
and the transformer stations to the control center. The control center
and the transformer stations shall be connected together in order to
create a redundant fiber optic ring network.
2. A control station based on local local PLC with at least 80DI/4AI/8DO
and local computer with 17" touch screen integrated on the control
cabinet door.
3. Local 10U communication cabinet that includes:
3.1 A switch in the building with at least 8 copper 10/100Mb/s feeds
and 2 fiber optic connections for connecting the building to the
transformer station. The number of copper feeds shall be based
on the type of communications and the quantity of controlled
systems.
3.2 A patch panel for fiber optic connections: The quantity of
connections shall be in accordance with the entering cables.
3.3 A patch panel for copper connections: The quantity of
connections shall be in accordance with the switch, but not less
than 24.
3.4 Category 7 copper communications cables.
3.5 3 Modbus TCP/IP communications adapters to a
Modbus over RS 485.
3.6 Optical and CAT-7 patch cords.
The quantity will be according to patch panels feeds quantity.
4. Programmable PLC controllers serving to transfer various indications in
the building systems.
5. Modbus over RS 485 serial communications network for connecting all
of the controlled systems to the communications adapter.
All communications shall be shielded.
6. Category 7 copper cable network connectors between the controlled
systems and the switch.
7. Controlled systems.
8. 10U Communications cabinet in Transformer room
8.1 A switch with at least 6 copper 10/100MB/s feeds and 12 fiber
optic connections.
8.2 The quantity of fiber optic connections will be determined
according to the number of buildings connected to the
transformer station. A pair of fiber optic connections shall have
the ability to work as a redundant ring network.
8.3 A patch panel for fiber optic connections:
The quantity of connections shall be in accordance with the
entering cables (at least 40 6 buildings x 6 + 2 to the existing
rack).
8.4 A patch panel for copper connections: The quantity of
connections shall be in accordance with the switch cut not less
than 12.
8.5 Category 7 copper communications cables.
8.6 Optical and CAT-7 patch cords.
The quantity will be according to patch panels feeds quantity.
Page 116 of 252

8.7 The contractor will supply install in the existing communication
rack all the necessary hardware and adaptors required for
connecting the communications between the new and existing
racks.
08.22.3. Fiber optic communications network
1. Fiber-optic cables shall be installed between each building and
transformer station that feeds the building. The cable shall be placed in
the feeder cable alignment or in a separate excavation as indicated in
the plans.
2. Reinforced fiber-optic cable
2.1 General description
a. 6-wire fiber optic cable in a mini-cable structure with gel
added in all the conduits. Cable Catalog No.
MC-620-120D-VRP-G1 or equivalent.
b. Each fiber has dimensions of 62.5/125 microns.
c. The fiber is of the multimode type with a graded index
connector.
d. The mini-cables have polyethylene sheathing, with steel
reinforcing around them, jelly, and after that an additional
sheathing of polyethylene or PVC.
e. Description of the mini-cable structure:
All of the mini-cables contain one fiber with a 2.4-2.7 mm
diameter plastic coating. The fiber is sheathed with Kevlar
wires with an additional 25 mm diameter exterior plastic
coating. Each cable shall be made in a different color. The
exterior coating of the mini-cables shall be made from plastic
material that prevents fire spread.
f. Mechanical description
n mini-cables: n mini-cables with the addition of n
reinforcements made from Kevlar wire with a black PVC
coating. Polyester sheeting shall be installed around the
mini-cables and reinforcing strands for the purpose of
separating the core of the cable from the exterior sheathing.
The exterior sheathing shall be made from black plastic
material that prevents fire spread.
g. Markings
Each cable shall be marked by a running number in meters
together with the catalog number of the cable, type of fiber,
number of fibers, production date and name of manufacturer.
The markings shall be in white and shall be indelible.
3. Fiber optic connectors
3.1 SC or ST type connectors, manufactured by 3M.
3.2 Core made from ceramic material.
3.3 The body of the connector shall be made from zinc coated nickel.
3.4 Average attenuation of 0.3 dB.
4. Fiber optic patch cords
4.1 Patch cords shall be made from flexible double fiber optic cable
of the multimode type.
4.2 The patch cords shall be equipped with SC or ST connectors at
both ends.
Page 117 of 252

4.3 Each connector [shall be] equipped with a plastic device around
the connector and the cable to protect against breaking of the
fiber.
4.4 Each fiber shall be marked on both ends for quick identification.

08.22.4. CAT-7 Outdoor cable
1. General Construction:
The cable contains six Cat. 7 S/FTP internal black FR-PVC jacket
cables, cabled together with filler elements, under a common black UV
resistant FR-PVC jacket.
2. General Features Description::
2.1 Wide operational temperature range [-40o C to + 80o C]
2.2 Resistance to most common fuels and oils
2.3 Resistance to abrasion
2.4 Resistance to fungus
2.5 Excellent resistance to UV
2.6 Compatible to most military environmental conditions.
3. Materials
3.1 Conductor Material: Tinned Copper
3.2 Conductor Size: 23/7 AWG
3.3 Conductor Construction: Stranded
3.4 Insulation Material: HDPE
3.5 Conductor unit identification: Solid/stripe
3.6 Color code: Per TIA/EIA 568-B
3.7 Conductor unit lay-up: Pairs
3.8 Overall Shield Design: Aluminum Foil + Braid
3.9 Overall Foil Shield: Yes
3.10 Overall Braid Shield: Yes
3.11 Overall Braid Material: Tinned Copper
Inner Jacket Material: PTR-150
3.12 Inner Jacket Diameter: 9.7 mm nom
3.13 Inner Jacket Color: Black
3.14 Total number of wires: 48
3.15 Outer Jacket Color: Black
3.16 Marking: Per request
4. Standards:
4.1 Standards: IEC 61156, TIA/EIA-568, RoHS
2002/95/EC
4.2 Flamability Rating: IEC 60332-3 , UL 1581 VW-1, UL
1581 FT-1, UL CMG
5. Performance:
5.1 Cat. 7 Work Area Cable:
The supplied cables meet the minimum Cat. 7 transmission
requirements as per IEC 61156-6 Ed. 2
5.2 FrequencyRange: 1 - 600 MHz
5.3 Impedance: 100
5.4 Coupling Attenuation: Type I
5.5 Max. DC Resistance : 73 /km@20C
5.6 Max. Resistance Unbalance: 2 %
5.7 Capacitance Unbalance: 1.2 pF/m max.
Page 118 of 252

5.8 Velocity of Propagation: 72 % nom.
5.9 Propagation Delay Skew: 35 ns/100m max.
5.10 Dielectric Strength: 700 V/minute
5.11 Dielectric Strength to Shield: 700 V/minute
5.12 Min. Insulation Resistance : 5 Gkm
5.13 Max. Tensile Strength - Short Term: 400 N
5.14 Min. Bend Radius: 430 mm
5.15 Max. Operating Temperature: +80 C
5.16 Min. Operating Temperature: -40 C

08.22.5. 17" Panel PC
1. A Panel PC shall be integrated on the control cabinet front door, and
will run the HMI software.
2. Specifications:
2.1 Processor system:
a. Intel i7-620 processor, 2.66 MHz
b. System Memory: 8GB, 1066MHz, DDR3
c. Hard disk: 500GB, SATA
d. I/O ports
1) COM ports: 3xRS232, 1xRS485/RS422
2) USB 2.0 ports: 4
3) Mouse and keyboard : 1xPS/2
4) D-sub VGA port: 1
5) IDE interface
6) Gigabit Ethernet port: 2
7) IEEE1394 port: 2
8) GPIO (4 In/4 Out): 1
9) Type II CF Card: 1
10) PCI expansion slot: 1
11) Mini PCI slot: 1
e. DVD drive: SATA DVD/CD-RW
8D/24W/24E/24R
2.2 Operating System: Windows 7 professional
2.3 Environmental requirements:
a. Front panel protection: IP65
b. Operating Temprature: 0-50C
c. Relative Humidity: 10-95%@40C, non-condensing
d. Shock: 10G for 11mSec
2.4 Display Type:
a. Color TFT LCD
b. Size: 17"
c. Max resolution: 1280x1024
d. Touch screen: 5 wire Analog resistive
e. Luminance: 300 cd/m
2

f. Contrast ratio: 1:800
g. Operating Temprature: 0-50C
h. LCD MTBF: >50,000 hours

Page 119 of 252

08.22.6. Control cabinet
1. The cabinet shall stand next to the electrical board. The cabinet shall be
80 cm wide. The other dimensions of the cabinet, type of cabinet and
other details of the cabinet shall be adapted to the electrical board.
2. The control cabinet shall include the following components:
2.1 Programmed controller.
2.2 17" panel PC with touch screen.
2.3 Input/Output connection terminals for the programmable
controller.
2.4 Communication cabinet 10U:
a. Installed above control cabinet:
1) Patch panel for the optic fiber communications network
cables.
b. Patch panel for the copper communications network cables
c. Switch.
d. Modbus TCP/IP to Modbus over RS 485 communications
adapters.
08.22.7. Switch
1. A switch shall be installed in each communication rack (LS buildings
and transformer rooms)
2. General requirements:
2.1 Operating conditions: 0-60C, 5-90% humidity.
2.2 Each port shall have an indication lamp: link integrity, disabled,
activity.
2.3 Dry contact to the fault indication.
2.4 Dual redundant power supply with hot swap controller:
a. 230VAC 20%, 50 Hz
b. 20% 24 VDC voltage supply if requested
2.5 Auto sensing ports 10 Base-T/100 Base TX RJ-45 connectors.
2.6 Optical ports 1000 Base-T/LX/LH/SX/ZX ports LC connectors.
2.7 Category 7, 4-pair UTP cabling.
3. Minimum number of ports:

4. Transformer station: switch shall work in a redundant ring network.
5. Patch panels for fiber optic connections
6. Optical patch panels shall be compatible with installation of 4/8 ST or
SC double female adapters in the building and at least 12 in the
transformer station, while ensuring full protection, both for cables
arriving from the field and for the fiber optic patch cords. The panels
shall be made from 1 mm thick formed sheet metal with a smooth
epoxy paint finish. The panels shall be constructed from two basic
parts:
7. A 1U height enclosure serving to organize the fiber optic cables arriving
from the field and the storage of surplus fiber optic patch cords. The
Description Typical LS
building
Trans` room
35
Site 13103
RJ-45 ports 12 6
Optical ports 2 12
Page 120 of 252

enclosure shall include means of clamping the fiber optic cables while
maintaining permissible bending radii.
8. The fiber optic panel shall be compatible with installation of 4 female-
female SC or ST adapters in the building and at least 12 in the
transformer station, recessed in the cabinet structure with the intent of
maintaining the permissible maximum bending radius of the patch
cords.
08.22.8. Patch panel for copper connections
The patch panels shall enable the layout of 4/8W cable. The patch panels
shall include 8/12 RJ-45 connectors to the panel. The patch panels shall be
RIT model with switches, or equivalent approved by the COR and comply
with the Category 5 standard. The panel shall be compatible with the
installation of UTP, STP or Gigadoor cables. The panel shall be suitable for
installation in a standard 19 communications cabinet. The panel, wire
layout and all electrical accessories shall be compatible with operating at
speeds of 600 mbps or more.
Grounding of the patch panel shall include all accessories required for
grounding connections, including a grounding strip and clips. Patch panels
in which it will be possible to perform grounding in two configurations will
be preferred:
1. Floating grounding connection, where each outlet will have a separate
grounding connection that will not passed to the other circuits.
2. A general grounding connection in which the entire existing system has a
uniform grounding.
Mechanical devices
The patch panel shall include all devices required for anchoring and
fastening the cables in an orderly and serviceable manner. The contractor
shall specify and emphasize the manner of fastening of the cables in the
panel proposed by it.
Marking of terminal on the patch panel shall be made clearly according to
serial number. The panel shall also enable marking using engraved plastic
signs.
Panels in which suitable recesses are provided for gluing the markings will
be preferred.

08.22.9. Copper communications network
1. HFFR copper cable
1.1 Shielded communications cable with a transmission speed of 600
Mbps. The cable shall be compatible with: Category 7 EIA / TIA
568 # 2841 # 36 UL LVL5.
1.2 Support for the following communications systems:
a. IEEE 802.2
b. IEEE 802.3
c. IEEE 802.5
d. EIA /TIA 568
e. RS-232, -423, -422
f. ANSI x 3 T 9.5 FDDI on copper
g. ATM
1.3 The cable shall include four pairs of braided strands, each rigid
strand having a thickness of 0.23 AWG.
Page 121 of 252

1.4 Each pair shall be independently shielded with an aluminum
strip, and each of the shielded pairs shall be shielded with an
additional network shielding.
1.5 The cable shall be protected with 8.3 mm diameter red HFFR
sheathing.
1.6 The specified cable is HFFR.

2. Shielded patch cord: HFFR S/STP 4x4x26 AWG.

Flexible shielded patch cord 100 nut with double shielding resistant to
600 MHz. The cable shall the Category 7 compatible.

The structure of the cable is made from eight pairs of braided
conductors [compatible with the] EIA color standard, blue/white,
brown/white. Each pair shall be shielded using 100% polyester
aluminum foil.
Exterior shielding: Twisted copper mesh with a minimum 65%
coverage.
Conductor: The conductor shall be made from 0.16 mm 7-strand copper
with a 24 AWG diameter.
Conductor insulation: SFS polyolefin 1.0 mm Max.OD.
Exterior sheathing: halogen-free, flame retardant compound.
The cable shall be suitable for a RJ-45 [connection], with an overall 6.0
mm diameter.

3. Connectors
Shielded modular RJ-45 plug connectors.
3.1 Structure
Connectors shall be polycarbonate plastic with a continuous
metallic copper covering for connecting to the shielding.
3.2 Connection pins
Connectors shall contain eight 1.02 mm slip fittings with gold
plating.
3.3 Connector dimensions:
11.68 mm wide, 2226 mm long.
3.4 Shielding suppression:
30-40 MHz at 20 dB.
3.5 Cable insert:
The opening for the cables shall be oval, enabling inserting of
cables with diameters of up to 5.08 mm.
3.6 Cable dimensions:
The connectors shall enable the insertion of cables with diameters
of up to 5.08 mm.
3.7 Plastic covering:
3.8 The connectors shall have a PVC coating in various colors as
required for the purpose of distinguishing among the computer
systems and telephone systems.

08.22.10. Programmed controller (PLC)
1. The functions of the programmable controller shall be:
Page 122 of 252

2. Transformer station and building: Collection of indications from the
local electrical system.
3. Transformer station and building: Collection of indications from other
systems not directly connected to the main control system.
4. Transformer station: Control of the electrical system.
5. Transformer station: Control of initiated outages and resetting of the
breakers after electrical outage in the buildings.
6. The programmable controller shall be equipped with a local display in
order to enter parameters and display faults.
7. The controller shall be connected to a switch in the network connection
using a standard protocol of the controller manufacturer.
8. Additional details regarding the controller can be found in the
specification for the electrical system in the building.

08.22.11. Modbus over RS485 to Modbus TCP/IP communications adapter
1. Network connector characteristics:
2. Modbus TCP/IP
3. Support for 10/100 speed
4. RJ 45 connector
5. Remote programming for Tel Net, FTP support
6. Serial connector characteristics:
7. Up to 32 Modbus stations
8. Support for Modbus RTU
9. Speed up to 38400
10. RS-422, -485

08.22.12. Serial communications cables
Shielded communications cable for transfer speeds of 128 MBps; the cable
shall support RS-422, -485 communications.
1. The cable contains two braided strands, each rigid strand with a
thickness of 0.23 AWG.
2. Each pair shall be independently shielded with an aluminum strip, and
each of the shielded pairs shall be shielded with an additional network
shielding.
3. Conductor insulation: SFS polyolefin 1.0 mm Max.OD.
4. Exterior sheathing: halogen-free, flame retardant compound.

08.22.13. Copper network cable connections
1. RJ-45 outlet accessories
Single or double outlet device for Gigadoor, UTP or STP cables for
operating speeds of 300 MBps. The device shall include all
components required for surface-mounting using an overhead junction
box, flush wall-mounting in standard 45, 50 or 55 telephone and
electrical boxes, or ducting.
In recessed installation, the device shall be installed using a metal
bracket or screws inside of the electrical box. The cost of the bracket or
screws shall be included in the price of the outlet.
Components of the device for which Israeli electrical standards exist
shall comply with the standards.
The connection interface shall be a totally shielded RJ-45 outlet,
Page 123 of 252

approved for operating speeds of 300 MBps or more; the outlet shall be
as for example RIT outlets or equivalent approved by the COR.
There are two options for anchoring the outlet:
1.1 The outlet shall be anchored to a printed circuit; the circuit shall
have a minimum 1.3 mm thickness with an insulated lacquer
coating to prevent conduction.
1.2 A digital outlet as described below. The cable connection device
shall enable the connection of exposed or insulated copper wires.
The means of connection shall be compatible with
22/24/26/AWG thick copper wires if the device is connected
using exposed copper wire.
The means of connection shall be suitable for minimum 2.5 mm
thick pressing terminal if the device is connected using insulated
wire.
1.3 The area of the connection shall be protected using a general
plastic sheathing.
Connection of the grounding strip shall not cause inductive
interference to the data circuit.
The specified electrical data is the device data with all its
components, and has the following threshold data:
Crosstalk between legs
a. 65 db @ 4 MHZ
b. 48 db @ 10 MHZ
c. 40 db @ 16 MHZ
Insertion loss
a. 0.05 0.1 db @ 4 MHZ
b. 1 1.5 db @ 10 MHZ
c. Less than 2 db @ 16 MHZ
Contact resistance
50 MEGA OHM
Dielectric withstand voltage
100 V AC R.M.S, 50/60 HZ, 1 Min.
Voltage rating
100 V
Current rating
0.5 A MAX

08.22.14. HMI software and screens
1. The contractor will supply HMI software that will present the controlled
systems status in a graphic user friendly format.
2. The graphic representation shall be based on the building's plan, on
which, each of the controlled systems will be shown:
2.1 Electrical boards
2.2 Generator and fuel tank
2.3 Fire detection and extinguishing systems
2.4 Blowers
2.5 UPS
2.6 Crane
2.7 Main doors
2.8 Flood detection System
Page 124 of 252

2.9 Anti Rodent Ultrasonic System
2.10 Emergency Lighting
2.11 Other systems to be specified during execution.
3. The color of each system shall be changed according to it's status:
3.1 Normal operation
3.2 Stand by mode
3.3 Alarm / Fault
4. The position of the doors (open/close)
5. Historical information of the last 180 days shall be gathered by the
control system in 5 minutes intervals.
6. The Historical Information shall include:
6.1 Electrical information of main feeder (voltage, current, PF, THD
etc.)
6.2 Electrical information of generator (voltage, current, PF, THD
etc.) during operation only.
6.3 Alarms and faults.
6.4 Dummy load operation.
6.5 Doors positions each change of position.
6.6 Fuel tank capacity.
6.7 Parameter screen shall be presented in a tabular fashion with
threshold values determined for showing changes in data
protected by PW.
7. The following information shall be represented Graphically:
7.1 Electrical board (approx 5 screens):
a. Electrical information (current, voltage, PF, THD etc.) the
information will be received via RS485 from the multimeter.
b. Breakers positions dry contacts
c. Dummy load operation.
d. Mode of operation:
1) Main changeover status
2) Operational change over status Faults
3) Dry contacts from various equipment
4) Deviation of thresholds of electrical parameters.
7.2 Generator (approx 2-3 screens):
information will be received via RS485 from the generator's
controller.
b. Status and alarms dry contacts
c. Fuel tank capacity ultrasonic sensor, 4-20mA
d. Mode of operation
7.3 Fire detection and extinguishing systems (approx 2-3 screens):
a. Status and alarms for each detector
b. System information.
c. Fire extinguishing information and alarms.
7.4 Blowers (on main screen)
a. Operation On/off
b. Alarms and faults
c. The communication via RS485 or other approved interface.
7.5 UPS (1 screen):
Page 125 of 252

information will be received via RS485.
b. Status and alarms dry contacts
c. Battery Status
7.6 Crane (1 screen):
a. Feeding line status (dry contact from Electrical board)
b. Alarms (from crane controller)
7.7 Main doors (on main screen)
a. Feeding line status (dry contact from Electrical board)
b. Position (Authorized open / Un-authorized open / close)
c. A coder installed in each building shall be used for indicating
"Authorized door operation".
1) By entering the authorization code, within a pre-defined
time delay (can be changed by the central control
operator) the system will identify the entrance as
"Authorized".
2) After a pre-defined time delay from entering the
activation code, a new authorization code will be
required after door opening.
7.8 7.8 Flood detection System (1 screen):
a. Status
b. Flood alarm
7.9 Anti Rodent Ultrasonic System (on main screen)
a. Status
7.10 Emergency lighting system (4-6 Screens):
a. General fixtures status graphical
b. General fixtures status Tabular
c. Individual fixture status and faults.
d. Test scheduling.

7.11 Windows with additional information that are opened by touching
any of the graphical elements will not be considered as separate
screens.
7.12 The total amount of screens is approximately 30.

8. Site 13103 Main control station
8.1 The HMI of existing main control system is based on Wizcon
software.
8.2 The contractor shall implement the following screens in the
existing main control system:
a. General site plan with the LS buildings.
b. The buildings color will represent their status.
c. By selecting a specific building, a set of screens as described
in sections 6 & 7, shall be available to the operator.

08.22.15. The contractor shall submit the following information for the COR`s
approval' prior to execution:
1. Control system content list including models and catalog sheets.
2. General topology and wiring chart.
Page 126 of 252

3. Screen shots prints.

08.22.16. Control system documentation

After completing acceptance testing of the building control system and
connection to the base control system, the supplier of the system shall
supply the following documentation:
1.1 A set of electrical plans.
1.2 Backup CD of the system software.
1.3 The documentation shall include, among other things:
a. A list of input and output ports with descriptions.
b. A list of registers with descriptions
c. Software with documentation.
d. Dedicated software for the system programming.
1.4 Documentation for communications connections of the system.
See also section 08.14.

08.23 Anti Rodent Ultrasonic System Specifications

08.23.1. Central Unit
1. Generates the ultrasonic energy required to repel rodents effectively
2. Drives up to 30 speakers (15 per channel)
3. Drives the two channels alternately at between 0.5 sec and 180 sec dwell
time per channel
4. Built-in 24 hr programmable clock for selective time-of day operation
5. Four different frequency band programs.
6. Programs rotate automatically or can be selected to operate one at a time
- according to user selection by way of front panel pushbuttons
7. Each pushbutton has built-in LED that indicates present selection
8. Frequency range is 20-35 kHz (operation) and 5-18 kHz (test purposes)
9. Six ultrasonic frequency power outputs - 3 per channel
10. Power 230 VAC 50 Hz, 45 VA
11. Packaging for wall mounting, dimensions 28.5X21.7X14.5 cm

08.23.2. Amplifier
1. Amplifies the ultrasonic energy required to repel rodents effectively
2. Drives up to 160 speakers (80 per channel)
3. 2 (two) ultrasonic signal inputs and respective input signal presence LED
indicators (1 per channel)
4. 4 (four) ultrasonic energy outputs and respective output energy LED
indicators (2 per channel)
5. Frequency range compatible with that of the Central Unit
6. Power 230 VAC 50 Hz, 130 VA
7. Packaging for wall mounting, dimensions 28.5X21.7X14.5 cm.

08.23.3. Speaker
1. Ultrasonic power level and frequency range compatible with that of the
Central Unit or the Amplifier (5-35 kHz)
2. Acoustic beam width of 120 horizontal and vertical
Page 127 of 252

3. Built-in LED indicator
4. Plastic material housing, dimensions 10 x 9.5 x 9 cm (H x W x D)
5. Two 0.25 " flat terminals (Faston) with polarity indication
6. Temperature range, operating -5 C to +60 C
7. Built-in threaded inserts on either side for bracket mounting
8. Integral metal bracket for wall/ceiling/floor mounting and 360
adjustable
9. Integral metal bracket oven-painted and free of burrs and sharp edges

08.23.4. Remote Monitoring Unit Control 2000
1. Two inputs for resp. two ultrasonic energy channels
2. One Normally Open dry contact output
3. Provision for mounting on DIN "top hat" 35 mm rail.

08.24 U.P.S. System

08.24.1. General
1. The descriptions of this section refer to uninterruptible power supply
systems (UPS) with an output of 3 kVA with a backup time of 120
minutes.
2. General specification, regulations and standards:
2.1 The General Specification for Construction Works, Chapter 08,
2001 Edition.
2.2 The Electrical Law.
2.3 The Contractors attention is particularly directed to the Electrical
Regulations (Regulation of Static Low Voltage Uninterruptible
Power Supplies) 5753-1993.
2.4 3. The ENV 5009103VFI standard.

08.24.2. Installation Manual
1. The Installation Manual shall be submitted in four copies, and shall
include:
1.1 A set of as-made drawings for the equipment, the installation and
the electrical connections.
1.2 List of items installed, including the manufacturers catalog
number.
1.3 Catalogs of all equipment items in the system.
1.4 A general description of the system and a technical specification.
1.5 Explanations for operation of the system.
1.6 Operating and maintenance instructions in Hebrew.
1.7 The test reports detailed below.
2. In addition to the Installation Manual, a set of operating and maintenance
instructions, as above, shall be supplied for each room in which a UPS
system is installed, provided on a 6 mm thick plywood panel and
covered with a 1 mm thick transparent Perspex sheet.

08.24.3. Certification and Experience
1. The manufacturer shall be certified in accordance with the ISO
9001:2008 standard. A certification shall be submitted proving
compliance with the standard.
Page 128 of 252

2. The manufacturer shall have experience of at least 10 years in the design,
development and manufacture of static UPS systems. An appropriate
certification shall be submitted.
3. The Israeli agent shall be certified in accordance with the ISO 9002
standard. A certification shall be submitted proving compliance with
this standard.
4. The Israeli agent must have proven experience of at least 5 years in the
supply, installation and maintenance of UPS systems. An appropriate
certification shall be submitted.
5. The Israeli agent shall have experience in the supply, installation and
maintenance of at least 5 systems with a similar output (or more) of the
same model proposed by it during the last 5 years.
6. A liar shall be appended on the attached form that includes the model,
manufacture, output, backup time, installation location and reference
(name, a position and telephone number).

08.24.4. General description of the UPS system
The UPS system with the nominal output is designed to feed loads in
filtered, stabilized and continuous voltage, reliably and independent of any
disturbances and outages in the grid voltage.
1. The UPS system shall work continuously in an on-line double
conversion system. The system shall be constructed using the most
highly advanced computerized microprocessor-controlled technology
available in the market.
2. The UPS system shall include:
2.1 Rectifier/charger.
2.2 Converter.
2.3 Active input filter.
2.4 PWM static transistor converter.
2.5 A sealed bank of maintenance-free batteries with a protective
circuit breaker.
2.6 A control panel, display, operation and control.
2.7 An automatic internal static bypass (operational bypass).
2.8 RS-232 and RS-485 communications interfaces and
communications protocol.

08.24.5. Working states and operating description:
1. Normal
The rectifier shall provide direct voltage, filtered and stabilized for the
static converter. The converter shall convert the direct-current to a
high-quality sine wave. The wave shall be stabilized and filtered
without harmonics or other disturbances. At the same time, a charger
shall be operated that charges the batteries with a floating charge in
accordance with the parameters required by the battery manufacturer,
including compensation for rises in temperature.
2. Emergency
During a breakdown or voltage outage in the grid, the static converter
shall continue to supply energy from the bank of batteries for the load
without any interruption or disturbance.
Page 129 of 252

3. Recharging after voltage outage:
When the voltage returns to the grid from the generator, the rectifier
shall supply direct-current to the static converter, which continues to
supply energy to the load without interruption or disturbance. The
charger will charge the batteries with a charging current limited to 10%
of the nominal current.
When voltage is restored to the Israel Electric Company grid, the
system will return to normal operating condition.
4. Operational bypass condition:
In any situation of outage in the UPS or overload beyond permissible
levels, or a breakdown in loading, transfer to the operational bypass
shall be performed, which shall continue to supply energy directly from
the grid to the load without any interruption. At the conclusion of this
condition, the load shall be restored automatically to feeding from the
static converter. The entire process described above shall be performed
automatically without any disturbance.
5. Working without batteries:
For the purpose of servicing the system, the batteries shall include a
current switch system for disconnecting the batteries from the
rectifier/charger and from the converter.
When the batteries are disconnected from the system, the UPS system
will continue to feed the load without interruption or disturbance, other
than in case of a breakdown in the source of the feed.

08.24.6. General requirements of the system
The system shall comply with the general requirements specified below:
1. Ambient temperature
1.1 Operating range: 0 35C averaged over 24 hours and 0 40C
for 8 hours.
1.2 Storage range at 20C70C without batteries, and 20C45C
with batteries.
2. Maximum relative humidity of 95% without condensation.
3. Noise
Noise measured at a distance of 1 meter from the unit shall be less than
55 dBA while the unit is under full load.
4. Disturbances and radiation:
In order to reduce disturbances to sensitive loads, on the one hand, and
to ensure compliance of the UPS system with radio interference, on the
other hand, the system shall comply with the requirements of the
European EN 5 0091/2 and CISPR standards.
Appropriate authorizations shall be submitted.
5. Electrostatic discharge: 20 kV without damage to the system.
6. IP 20 protection rating.
7. System efficiency:
The efficiency of the system shall be defined as the outlet supply after
the isolating transformer (in kilowatts) divided by the feeder output
before filtering (in kilowatts), when the converter is operating in an
output range of between 50% and 100%, the batteries are fully loaded,
normal working conditions apply, the output coefficient of loading is
Page 130 of 252

0.8 and induction is up to 1.0. System efficiency under these conditions
shall be not less than 95%.
8. Reliability
The mean time before failure (MTBF) of the proposed system shall be
not less than 150,000 hours without bypass and 250,000 hours
including bypass.
The mean time to repairs (MTTR) shall not exceed 30 minutes from the
time of arrival of the technician to the site. With its proposal, the
contractor shall submit a document that includes a declaration from the
manufacturer regarding this data.

08.24.7. System components
1. Active input filter
The system shall be supplied with an active input filter for reducing
harmonics in the input current and power factor correction independent
of the load level. The filter shall be integral or external. In any case,
the total harmonic distortion (THDI) in the grid shall not exceed 5%
and the output coefficient shall be corrected to 0.96.
2. Power supply/charger
The supplier/charger shall be static and shall supply current directly to
the converter and charger for the batteries. The supplier/charger shall
include a rectifier and a full bridge type high-frequency transistor
conversion system (corrected power factor).
1. Nominal current: 230V, 1-phase.
2. Input voltage range: 185V-275V without the battery
discharge.
3. Input frequency range: 45-55 Hz
4. Power factor: Minimum 0.96 at 50% or more of
the nominal load.
5. Input current harmonics: Less than 5% in the range of 50%-
100% of the nominal load.
6. Overvoltage and lightning
protection:
In accordance with IEEE 587,
ANCI c 62.41 Category A&B.
7. Input current limitation: Adjustable in the range of 40%-
120% of the nominal current.
8. Limitation of charging
current to the batteries:
10%-25% of the nominal current.
9. Limitation of input current
working with a generator:
10%-100% of the novel current
10. Direct current formation
time:
0-15 seconds.
The supplier/charger shall be capable of feeding a full load and also
charge the batteries with a current not less than that required as described
below and in the specification. Following completion of charging, the
charger shall maintain the batteries with a floating charge until the next
electrical outage. Characterization of the charging shall be fixed
voltage/fixed current in accordance with DIN 41773.
3. Static converter
1. Continuous operating
output:
3KVA/2.4KW.
Page 131 of 252

2. Power conversion: Through a high frequency 3-phase
transistor converter bridge using a
pulse width modulation method
(PWM).
3. Output voltage: 231 volts, 50 Hz
4. Output voltage
stabilization in a static
condition:
1%.
5. Dynamic output voltage
stabilization:
5% at 100% change in load and
transition to working from the
batteries or transition from static
bypass to converter
6. Recovery time:

20 milliseconds to a level of 2%.
7. Grade synchronization
range:
2 Hz in steps of 0.5, 1, 1.5 and 2 Hz
8. Frequency monitoring rate: 0.5-1 Hz per second.
9. Frequency stabilization: 0.0051 Hz.
10. Angle control between
phases:
For linear loads: 1
For nonlinear loads: 2.
11. Output voltage distortion: Less than 3% of linear loads;
5% of nonlinear loads;
2% of isolated harmonics.
12. Ratio of peak current: RMS 3:1.
13. Overload: 105% without limitation;
125% for 10 minutes;
150% for 60 seconds;
300% for 10 grid cycles.
14. Non-symmetrical loads: The system shall be capable of working
without limitation with all kinds of loads, including non-
symmetrical loading up to level of 100% imbalance between
phases. In this condition, the single phase output voltage will not
change more than 2% and the angle deviation between the phases
shall be as above.
15. The reduction capability of the common signal between the input
and output shall not be less than 65 dB in a frequency range of 20-
100 kHz.
4. Static bypass switch (operational bypass)
The static switch shall enable transition of the feed to the load from the
bypass line and return to the converter without disturbance or
interruption in the following cases:
4.1 High overloads beyond converter capacity.
4.2 Breakdown in the converter.
4.3 Provision of a suitable manual command.
The static bypass shall have a high operational speed based on
semiconductor technology. There shall be no switches, contactors or
relays in the static bypass. The static bypass shall be built for a
continuous operation regime and for overloads of the system, as well as
for short circuits of up to 20 times the nominal current without damage
to the switching components.
Page 132 of 252

5. Batteries
5.1 Battery type: Maintenance-free, sealed, lead acid VRLA designed
for quick discharge and loading regimes.
5.2 Backup time at 20C: Full output loads.
5.3 Service life: More than 10 years with at least 900 full loadings
and discharges, compatible with Eurobat + 10 (high integrity).
5.4 Warranty: Full 5-year warranty plus 5 years on a pro rata basis.
5.5 Structure for the batteries: cabinet.
5.6 Manner of operation:
The battery shall operate in a manner that will cause the emitted
gas molecules to combine and become water at a minimum
efficiency of 99%, so that there is no hydrogen omission
(recombination).
5.7 Battery structure:
Plate structure and internal structure in an AGM system: The
material from which the container and cell cover are made shall
be inflammable
5.8 Voltage: 1.70 V final discharge voltage to the cell; 2.25 V
floating charge voltage to the cell.
5.9 Charging time: 10 times the discharge rate.
5.10 Battery protection: From overcharge, overvoltage, circuit
breakers for overcurrent and short-circuit.

08.24.8. Monitoring, measuring, warnings and indicators
The system shall be computerized microprocessor-controlled.
1. Front panel
The front panel of the system shall include (at least) the following
components:
1.1 A keyboard for convenient operation and measuring of the
system.
1.2 LED indicator lamps for warnings and status and quick
identification of the systems condition.
1.3 An alphanumeric display for messages, warnings and
measurements
1.4 The display shall be a minimum 7 LCD.
1.5 It shall be possible to receive an alphanumeric and graphic
display of all input and output voltages, direct voltage, al
currents, power factor, kilowatts, kVA, crest factor, percent
loading and frequency.
1.6 Voice warnings and pushbutton silencing.
1.7 Operation and shutoff pushbuttons (with delay).
a. The system shall include diagnostic functions to quickly
identify breakdowns, as well as a historic recording system
(log) that will enable recording and display of at least 200
events.
The system shall also include instructions that will appear on
the display after pressing on the suitable button for the order of
actions required to operate the maintenance bypass without
impairing the continuity of the supply to the load.

Page 133 of 252

b. Warnings:
1) All actions and unusual events shall be recorded on the
screen, including a memory of at least 200 events.
2) Recording of the statistics of disturbances in the
network by type, as well as a recording of electrical
outages according to time and cumulatively.
3) Provision of a warning regarding actions and unusual
events in permissible ranges of the system operation.
c. Emergency shutoff
The system shall include a port for connecting a pushbutton
or emergency shutdown of UPS.
d. Communications and connection to the network:
1) The UPS unit shall enable its connection to the
computer network, as if it is a personal unit in the
network. The connection to the network is for the
purpose of remote control by the network administrator
over the UPS system. The connection shall be
performed using an intranet connection of the UPS to a
router.
2) In order to enable the transfer information directly from
the UPS system, an adapter shall be installed to connect
to a standard SNMP system, including supply of an MIB
compatible with the SNMP software.
3) The system shall include serial communications
interfaces RS-232 and RS-485.
e. UPS communications software
Communications software to an NT network shall be
supplied with the equipment that will enable downloading of
the server, diagnostics, provision of notifications to users,
recording of breakdowns including the maintenance of a
proper shutoff log of the system, remote operation, real-time
display of all electrical parameters of the system and time
left for battery operation (based on parameters such as type
of batteries, percent of loading, ambient temperature) and a
recording of the number of loadings and discharges of the
batteries. The system shall enable sending of e-mail in a
different formulation for each breakdown. The system shall
enable preprogrammed automatic shutdown.
The system shall be supplied with a compatible
communications protocol for the building control system.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply of the
suitable communications protocol and any information
required by the building control system contractor for the
purpose of interfacing of the connection and integrated
operation with the building control software.
The protocol shall be approved by the building control
contractor.
f. Automatic battery monitoring
The system shall include automatic monitoring of the
batteries, which shall perform a testing of the batteries by
Page 134 of 252

reducing the actual charging and discharging voltage of the
batteries. This test shall be performed at a preprogrammed
time and shall not interfere with the operation of the load.
The system shall enable the printing of a report that contains
the results of the testing.

2. Mechanical structure
The system cabinet shall be designed for an office environment. The
cabinet shall stand on the floor and shall include a platform. The
cabinet shall be constructed from an oven-painted metal. The exterior
sheeting shall be coated with a special paint in order to reduce EMI
impacts on the environment. Cooling of the unit shall be performed
using ventilation as specified below.
All connections required shall be on the rear side of the system.

08.24.9. Equipment schedule
The Contractor shall fill in the appropriate column with proposed system data
compatible with the aforesaid specification, or indicate the system
performance proposed by it.
Specification Requirement
contractor
undertaking
a. Configuration:
UPS system with static breaker, double
conversion Yes ___________V
b. Feed
Voltage 231V ___________V
Voltage range 185V 275V ___________
Frequency 50 Hz ___________Hz
Frequency range 45 Hz 55 Hz ___________Hz
Soft start time 15 seconds ___________sec
Power factor (from 50%-100% of load) > 0.96 induction > ___________
Total harmonic distortion (THDI) of the
input current (from 50%-100% of load) < 5% ___________
Input current limitation working with a
generator Yes ___________
c. Output
Output supply kVA ________ kVA
Output voltage 231V ___________V
Stabilization of output voltage 1% ___________%
Stabilization of output voltage and
phase (100% phase imbalance) 2,2% ___________%
Dynamic response at 100% load steps 5% ___________%
Response time to full recovery at 100%
load steps > 20 milliseconds _________ ms
Harmonic distortion at output under
linear loading (measured in accordance
with ENV50091-3) < 3% __________%>
d. General efficiency (AC-AC) from 50%-
100% loading > 95% _________%<
e. Static bypass switch Fast, without Yes/No
Page 135 of 252

Specification Requirement
contractor
undertaking
interruption
f. Maintenance bypass Exterior/interior
Enables bypass without interruption of
load Yes/No
g. Batteries
Manufacturer ___________
Model ___________
Technology Sealed without
recombination
handling Yes/No
Capacity in ampere hours for 15
minutes ___________AH
Number of cells in a column for 15
minutes ___________cells
Floating voltage (per cell) 2.25V ___________V
Voltage at full discharge (per cell) 1.7V ___________V
Calculated backup time, including data
on the supply battery Required Attached: Yes/No
Total weight including batteries (not
including cabinet) ___________ kg
Battery cabinet dimensions
(length/width/height) ___________ cm
h. Additional data
Dimensions of the UPS system
(length/width/height) not including the
batteries
___________ cm
Serial communications interface RS-
232 and RS-485 Required Yes/No
Set of warning contacts for orderly
shutdown of the computer network Required Yes/No
Weight of the UPS system not including
batteries ___________ kg
Noise of the system under full loading
at a distance of 1 meter < 62 dB(A) ________ dB(A)
i. The Contractor shall also submit a declaration from the manufacturer compatible
with ENV50091-3.

08.25 Power and Communications installations at C-1 & C-2 communications room (site
development)

08.25.1. Communications room C-1
1. Connection to black manhole No. 195 by 4x4" PVC pipes.
2. Electrical system including electrical switchboard, power end point 230V/16A,
with 2 wall-sockets, IEC309 (CEE) type, IP65 water-tight and feeding line
from building no. 71 switchboard.
3. Grounding system, including grounding electrode, grounding bus-bar installed
over okolon insulators, grounding conduits and connection to the room's floor
reinforcement.
Page 136 of 252

4. The concrete floor of the room shall be dismantled as required in order to
install the new pipes.
5. The floor shall be restored to its original condition after pipes installation.

08.25.2. Communications room C-2
1. Connection to black manhole No. 204 by 4x4" PVC pipes.
2. The concrete floor of the room shall be dismantled as required in order to
install the new pipes.
3. The floor shall be restored to its original condition after pipes installation.

08.26 Public address system
08.26.1. General
1. In the framework of its work, the Contractor shall supply and install a
public address system with coverage for the entire building area.
2. The system shall include a public address amplifier, interior and exterior
speakers and microphones.
3. All equipment supplied by the Contractor shall be one of the types
currently in use by the IAF as detailed below.
4. Prior to purchasing any equipment, the Contractor shall submit a detail
of the items that it intends to supply for the COR's approval.
5. Following receipt of the COR's approval for the equipment, the
Contractor shall prepare a plan for performing the installation including
detailed wiring diagrams and shall submit them for the approval of the
COR. Work shall begin only after receiving the COR's approval.

08.26.2. Approved equipment and technical specifications
1. Public address amplifier
1.1 A 200W output public address amplifier shall be supplied for
installation in a 44U/19" rack.
1.2 The amplifier shall include a 75 input adapter for telephone
line connection.
2. Horn Speakers
2.1 Horn loudspeakers for interior and exterior installation shall be
supplied, including a line transformer with winding taps and
galvanized steel painted swivel bracket.
2.2 The horn loudspeaker supplied shall be one of the following
detailed models:
08.26.3. Wiring
1. Speaker connections:
Wiring that will connect the speakers one after the other to the public
address amplifier installed in the Communications Room shall be
installed using 2-wire cable having a cross-section of 2x0.8 sq. mm.

2. Microphone connections
2.1 A 2-wire shielded PVC coated AWG 22x2 microphone cable
shall be installed between the public address amplifier installed in
the Communications Room and each microphone.
2.2 Excess wiring with a length of 1 m shall be supplied at the end of
each cable (microphone end).

Page 137 of 252

08.26.4. Microphone
The microphones shall be connected to the public address amplifier by a
preferential relay system in accordance with the COR's guidelines, which
will be transmitted during the course the work.

08.27 Communications Racks

08.27.1. The contractor shall supply 2 communications racks:
1. 44U/19" in the communications room (for public address system.
2. 10U/19" in the electricity room (for control system communications)
In the communications centers 19", 10U - 44U racks will be installed.

08.27.2. General requirements:
1. All 23" and 25" racks require interior doors operating on hinges on both
sides of the tracks comprising the internal 19" (10-44U).
2. The contractor will present the optimal plan for installing the equipment
in the communications racks while considering the following planning
issues:
2.1 Maintenance and operations
2.2 Human engineering
2.3 Future reserves
2.4 Preplanned active equipment
3. Racks over 20U will be 80 cm deep. For racks up to 20U, the depth will
be between 60-80 cm, based on customer requirements.
4. Any rack up to 30U will be supplied with a shelf for equipment. Shelf
specifications will include 30% perforation, epoxy paint in a shade
determined by the customer. All racks over 30U will be provided with
two such shelves.
5. All racks will include an aluminum frame, a rear door (only in
unsuspended racks), a front door and side partitions. The two doors can
be locked.
6. The front door of the 40/44U racks will be made of shielded glass,
including an aluminum frame, and a revolving bolt and edged key
locking mechanism. The front door of smaller racks will be made of
transparent Perspex, including an aluminum frame and locking
capability. Other racks panels will be made of tin, enabling rapid
disassembly. Door opening and closure can be specified to the right or
left, based on field conditions. All panels will include ventilation slits.
7. The rear door of the 40/44U racks will be made of tin and will have a
revolving bolt and edged key locking mechanism.
8. The door can be opened to the right or left.
9. Communications cable channels will run from the top to the bottom on
both sides of cabinet interiors.
10. 4U- sized lateral front ladders will be installed on both sides of the
cabinet front, including cable threading devices.
11. The 40/44U cabinet will include depth adjustment strips (front and back)
for adjusting the depth of the equipment to be installed in the rack and
for avoiding the protrusion of solid jumpers outside of the rack.
Page 138 of 252

12. The device for affixing the equipment to the 40/44U rack will be in the
form of a trail with a continuous height regulation. No perforated strips
will be used on fixed height differences.
13. The rack must be supplied with 2 fans for racks up to 30U and 4 fans for
a 40/44U rack. Each fan will provide at least 30 CFM.
14. The fan will be operated by 4/8/24V DC or 220V AC voltage, based on
the operating voltage that feeds the equipment in the rack. It will have
a sealed ball bearing and minimal MTBF of 35,000 hours. All fans
combined will generate an acoustic noise of less than 50 DBA at a
distance of 1 meter, in each direction and under a full operating load. A
mesh safety cover will be installed on two sides of the fan.
15. The rack will be oven painted RAL-7032 (Gray) or RAL-5015 blue, or
another color as per the COR.
16. Each rack will be grounded as defined in the "Grounding" specifications
chapter. Rack grounding + all grounding accessories will be included
within rack content including routing panel grounding.
17. The contractor will install blank panels made of plastic and in the color
of the rack in every available space between the passive items
assembled in the rack.
18. The rack will have an assembly of wheels to enable rack movement.
19. Cables will enter the racks through a dedicated passage on the top or
bottom of the rack. This passage will be secured in a manner that will
prevent cable damage by sharp tin edges.
20. The rack will be marked with a Bakelite sign as described in the
"Marking and Signage" specifications below.
21. The contractor will submit specifications and shop drawings of the rack.
22. The rack will be supplied including socket plugs comprised of 6 sockets
each. Each plug will contain a 10A automatic magnetic thermal switch,
which will be protected by a plastic cover (that can be opened and
closed) and a panel cable up to 15m long and a 16 Ampere CEE plug at
its end. One socket plug will be supplied with racks up to 20U, two
socket plugs will be provided with 30U racks and 4 socket plugs with 6
sockets each or 2 socket plugs with 12 socket each will be supplied
with 40/44U racks,. (The contractor will supply the socket array as a
chain or single connection, according to customer requirements).
23. Each rack will be connected to electricity (to a UPS supported or
unsupported network) according to the electrical drawings.
24. Prior to ordering the rack from the manufacturer, the contractor will
submit rack plans and specification for approval.
25. All electrical appliances will meet the 1954 Electrical Law and the 1970
Safety Guidelines and Regulations and any other relevant statutes.


Page 139 of 252

Page 140 of 252

Chapter 11 Painting Works

11.01 General

General

1. Chapter 11 of the Host Nation Technical Requirements (HNTR) shall be read with
this Special Specification which constitutes the extent of the Work with regard to
painting work. In case of conflict these special specifications shall prevail over the
HNTR.

2. Examine the requirements of the drawings and of other special specifications as to the
location, extent and nature of painting work specified therein and include such items
to be painted under this specification as are not included in the other chapters.

3. In general, paint all exposed surfaces except surfaces as pre-finished or not to be
painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint the same as
adjacent materials or areas. Specifically, Paint includes coating systems materials,
primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials
whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats.

11.02 Quality Assurance

Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the
various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's
product identification will not be acceptable. Proprietary names used to designate colors or
materials are not intended to imply that products named are required or to exclude equal
products of other manufacturers.

11.03 Submittals Required for Painting Work

A. Detailed Painting Schedule: The Contractor shall submit a "Detailed Painting
Schedule" for review by the COR. The Contractor shall prepare this schedule on the
basis of the surfaces, types of paint materials, number of coats required, and list the
brand name of the product of the manufacturer proposed for each use.

B. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): The Contractor shall provide a full-coat benchmark
finish sample of each type of coating and substrate required on the Project.

1. The COR will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions
for each type of coating and substrate to be painted.

a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 9 sq. m of wall surface.

b. Small Areas and Items: The COR will designate an item or area as
required.

2. After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been
activated, the Contractor shall apply coatings in this room or to each surface
Page 141 of 252

according to the Schedule or as specified. Provide required sheen, color, and
texture on each surface.

a. After finishes are accepted, the Cor will use the room or surface to
evaluate coating systems of a similar nature.

C. The Contrator should provide the following (according drawing A-206):
1. On the walls of the building (on northern face) 100/100 cm.
2. On two sheets of plywood 20/20 cm each with the above colors.
3. On two metal sheets 20/20 cm each shade RAL 6021

The COR, after checking the actual examples on site, can ask for up to 5 more
examples which will satisfy the purpose of the need of such a building.

11.03 Requirements for Painting Work

A. The Contractor shall use paint boxes, sealed and marked.

B. The Contractor shall prepare several color options, according to the requirement of the
COR, painted on the walls in an area of about 1x1 m each.

C. The painting of the walls and ceilings shall be executed only after explicit instructions
in writing from the COR for executing the painting, and in locations explicitly
indicated by the COR.

D. All painting works shall be executed according to the Manufacturers professional
instructions and the approval of the COR.

E. The painting colors shall be according to the CORs choice.

F. The painting shall be in at least three layers until a uniform color and full coverage
shall be achieved.

11.04 Materials

A. General

1. Material Compatibility: The Contractor shall provide block fillers, primers,
finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one
another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.

2. The Contractor shall use products of the same manufacturer for succeeding
coats. Where primer is shop applied to steel, subsequent coats may be the
product of another manufacturer provided the coatings are mutually
compatible. The Contractor shall review other sections in which primers are
provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates.

Page 142 of 252

3. Colors, textures and degree of luster will be as in the Contract documents. The
Contractor shall tint prime and undercoats approximately to the shade of the
final coat but with sufficient variation to distinguish them from the preceding
coat. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended
to imply that products named are required or to exclude equal products of
other manufacturers.

11.05 Application

A. General: In addition paragraph 1102 adds the following:

B. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat
where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the
color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to
distinguish each separate coat.

C The Contractor shall apply materials with care to a uniform and proper film thickness,
showing no runs, holidays, sags, crawls or other defects. Apply with a minimum of
brush marks. Finish surfaces shall be uniform in sheen, color and texture. Apply
paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to the
manufacturer's directions.

D. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the
application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured
as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is
required to produce a smooth even surface according to the manufacturer's directions.
Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final
coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special
attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and
exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

E. Apply two thin coats of paint to bare wood surfaces in sliding contact so as not to
interfere with proper operation. Do not paint other materials in sliding contact.
Remove paint applied to such surfaces.

F. Paint access doors, plates, panel boxes, steel grilles, louvers, convector covers,
registers, exposed prime painted hardware and the like in colors as selected. Paint
interior surfaces of ducts or piping where visible through registers or grilles with a
flat, non-specular paint type appropriate to surface to be painted. Do not paint
nameplates on equipment or over Underwriter's Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other
code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or
nomenclature plates.

G. Do not paint heating elements and pipes while they contain heat. Keep them cold
until after the final coat has thoroughly dried.

H. Allow coats to dry and cure thoroughly before succeeding coats are applied; allow a
minimum of 24 hours between applications on any one surface unless otherwise
specified by the manufacturer.
Page 143 of 252

J. Surfaces given a prime or body coat of paint under other Sections of these
Specifications will not require such coats of paint under this Section. The Contractor
shall repair existing prime coatings with same primer or undercoat unless otherwise
specified.

K. Contrary to Chapter 11, paragraph 11057A, the Contractor shall prepare the
galvanized surfaces scheduled to be painted by removing grease and oil with a cleaner
recommended and then treating and roughening surfaces using chemical means in
accordance with recommendations of prime paint manufacturer. Chemical compound
shall be rinsed completely with clean, fresh water.

L. The Contractor shall furnish competent technical assistance by the paint manufacturer
on the job to ensure proper application of his material.

M. When using paint with additional mildew inhibitive formulation, observe the
procedures and precautions in the paint manufacturer's printed instructions for the use
of this product.

N. Painting Concrete.

1. Exposed concrete shall be applied as follows:
One layer of primer paint and two layers of a high quality water based acrylic
paint suitable for one coat application.

O. Painting roofs.

1. Upper roof (+8.50) acrylic paint AC-100 shall be applied as follows:
Surface preparation, application with a roller or airless spraying, one layer of
primer paint, Acrylic paint AC-100.

2. Upper roof (+7.00) acrylic paint AC-100 as above but shall be applied on top
of the waterproofing layer including preparations and primers according to the
paint manufacturer.

P. Painting Metal Doors and Door Frames and other Metal Components

1. Metal doors and door frames shall be galvanized in accordance with
paragraph 1904-A of the General Specifications.

2. The galvanized doors and frames and other galvanized and non galvanized
components paint shall be applied as follows:
Surface preparation roughening by light sand blast or thoroughly
mechanical roughening by sandpaper accompanied by removing of oil and
other stains by means of thinner such as thinner 4-100, using a hard hair
brush, removal of grease and slight roughening of surface to remove the gloss,
one layer of primer paint and two layers of acrylic polyurethane top paint as
approved by COR.
3. Painting repairs, if necessary after welding on site, shall be applied as follows:
Page 144 of 252

one layer of zinc rich paint as approved by COR, and two layers of acrylic
polyurethane top paint as approved by COR.

11.04 Painting

The painting shall be executed in the following manner:

A. Cleaning the surface from oily matter and dust.

B. Painting three layers, at least, of COR approved paint in a color according to the
CORs choice, the thickness of each layer should be about 25 micron, until a uniform
color and full coverage is achieved.

11.06 Extra Stock

A. The Contractor shall furnish extra stock, equal to 1/2%, of all types and colors of
paints installed as specified herein, properly packaged and identified with labels
clearly describing contents, delivered to the project site and stored where directed.


Page 145 of 252

Chapter 15 Air Conditioning Installations

15.01 GENERAL

A. Chapter 15 of the Host Nation Technical Requirement (H.N.T.R.) shall be read in
conjunction with this Special Specifications which constitute the extent of work with
regard to H.V.A.C. works.
B. This section serves to describe the Works to be carried out, consisting of the
engineering, manufacturing, supply, delivery, off loading, erection, testing, balancing
and commissioning into service, guarantee and maintenance of an air conditioning and
ventilation installation to the structures.
C. The Works shall be carried out according to the drawings, the specifications, this
Appendix and the Engineers instructions, the relevant Israeli Standards, the
regulations, the safety standards and rules acceptable by the Israel Ministry of
Defense, Building and Construction Department as well as the specifications included
in H.N.T.R. Chapter 15, Air Conditioning.
D. The Contractor certifies that all the above documents are in his possession, that he has
read them and understands their contents and undertake to execute the works subject
to the requirements.
E. All components should be installed according to manufacturer's instructins.
A. All electric wiring should be installed under tile.
Fire breaks through openings in walls and roof by sealing.

15.02 GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK

(a) Provide split air conditioners required for the project
(b) Provide ventilation systems for non air conditioned spaces.
(c) Provide and operate electric, power and control systems for all HVAC systems;
(d) Provide certification that the HVAC systems meets the specified requirements, as per
the instructions in these specifications, MOD, IAF requirements and Israeli laws.

15.03 DESIGN CONDITIONS

OUTDOOR CONDITIONS
Summer Design Extreme
Dry bulb temp. 36.5C 42C
Wet bulb temp. 23C 24C

Winter
Dry bulb 15C 5C

The equipment must be selected to operate normally and in the design capacities at " Design
Conditions".

The equipment must operate without failure in the "extreme conditions".
Page 146 of 252

INDOOR CONDITIONS
In air conditioned spaces
Summer 23 2C
Winter 21 2C
Relative humidity shall not be controlled.

15.04 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND EXPERTISE

A. Certain standards and materials are described by reference to Israeli and US specifi-
cation. The standard specifications are as follows:
ISI - Israeli Standard Institute
AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association;
ANSI - American National Standard Institute;
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Engineers;
SMACNA Sheet Metal Contractors Association;

B. The particular specifications will be identified by appropriate prefix and number only,
with the latest revision being applicable.

C. The detailed design, the construction details, all systems and their components and work-
must comply with such codes and standards requirements.

15.05 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

All equipment and all materials used in this project must be of a known and approved
manufacturing firm.
The equipment must suit the requirements in the specifications and the drawings. The COR
shall have full access to all equipment and materials throughout the construction period, and
visit, as he sees suitable, the manufacturing plants and stores.

15.06 CLEANING OF WORK SITE, RUBBISH AND DEBRIS REMOVAL

The contractor shall daily gather in a designated location at the area of operation, all debris
created by his work or that of his sub-contractors and shall have it removed from the premises
and site each and every working day.

15.07 OPENINGS, REPAIRS, PIPING AND DUCT PENETRATION THROUGH
WALLS, CEILINGS AND FLOORS

The contractor shall cooperate fully with locating all openings on the job. This applies to all
openings required to get apparatus into proper locations within the buildings, openings for
louvers, openings for grilles, etc.
The contractor shall verify the locations and dimensions of all openings, recesses, chases,
etc., indicated on the plans and notify the Engineer of any corrections required.
The contractor shall do all cutting and drill all holes for hangers and other supports that are
required for the work under his contract.
Page 147 of 252

The contractor shall indicate the exact location and dimension of all openings required for
duct pipes etc. in ceilings, roof, concrete slab walls, etc.
The contractor shall supply and securely set all sleeves for pipes, ducts, conduits, as required,
to provide proper openings for work under his contract and also check and coordinate with
the locations of all sleeves left in floors, ceilings and walls by others.
The contractor shall furnish all labor and materials for all work included under his contract in
ample time and sufficient quantities so that all of the work of his contract and other contracts
may be installed in the proper sequence to avoid unnecessary cutting of the floors and/or
walls and/or roofs.

15.8 SHOP DRAWINGS, EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS SUBMITTALS

The contractor shall submit complete large scale detailed and dimensioned working and shop
drawings and specifications, of all equipment, materials, ductwork, piping, specialties,
controls, etc., to be furnished and any additional information as requested by the CORand as
listed hereunder.
Shop drawings shall be in AUTOCAD version 2000 or more recent issue and abide the
project CAD procedures.
All shop drawings submitted for checking shall be clearly identified and marked in a
permanent manner with job number, contractor's name and address and titles, services, and
locations indicating the items the submissions cover.
Shop drawings must show evidence of their having been thoroughly checked by the
contractor for conformance to the contract plans and specifications and to the existing
building conditions.
Submission drawings will be returned and shall be resubmitted as many times as it may be
necessary, until they are completely satisfactory to the COR.
No fabrication of any materials or equipment may begin until shop drawings have been
stamped "APPROVED" or "APPROVED AS NOTED" or "FOR EXECUTION" by the
Engineer. Should the contractor proceed without such approval, he will do so at his own risk.
Approval of shop drawings shall not relieve the contractor from the responsibility for proper
fitting and installation of the work in accordance with the contract requirements, or from
furnishing materials and workmanship required by the contract drawings and specifications,
which may not be indicated on the shop drawings when approved.
The process of shop drawings approvals shall not relieve the contractor from the
responsibility to fully comply with all contract requirements including work schedule and
time tables!
Submit three (3) preliminary copies and then resubmit four (4) copies of the final corrected
working drawings and shop drawings for approval.
List of shop drawings and other submittals shall be as follows:
(1) Shop drawings of all ducts. For these shop drawings the contractor can ask the COR
(who may or may not comply with such a request) to furnish him, on the contractor's
expense, the CAD diskettes or files of the contract ductwork drawings. The contractor
then shall modify these drawings, add details, as measured dimensions, and all other
information required;
(2) Shop drawings for all piping. For these drawings the contractor can ask the COR to
furnish him diskettes as explained above;
(4) Shop drawings for HVAC systems if other than the designed and under approval of the
engineer;
Page 148 of 252

(5) Detailed shop drawings of all sound attenuators, including catalogs;
(7) Sequence of Operation (SOO) for each of the systems, and complete and detailed
control diagrams, electric schematic drawings, hardware, and software supporting these
SOOs.
(8) Shop drawings and catalogs of the HVAC control panels including the view of the front
panels;
(9) Catalog cuts of all vibration isolators for all equipment ducts and pipes as required in
the contract document;
(10) Complete and detailed catalogs, specifications and layout of all fans
(12) Full information and complete catalogs, descriptive documents, etc., as required for all
other equipment such as filters, controls, etc.
(13) Additional shop drawings as will be required during the project duration.
Shop drawings will be prepared on ISI A-0 or A-1 or A-3 size sheets.
Any revision or change shall be listed in the "Revisions" section of the drawing
emblem.
All costs incurred in the process of shop drawings and specification sheets will be
included by the bidder in the various unit or lump sum prices and shall not be paid
separately.

15.9 SAMPLES

Provide samples of all materials, all accessories, ducts, insulation, duct connections and any
other part of any system as will be requested by the COR for approval. The approved samples
will be kept by the COR for reference and will be returned to the contractor at the end of the
project.

15.10 TESTING, BALANCING, ADJUSTMENT

At the final stages of his work, the contractor will start tests balancing and adjustments of
each system and sub-system.
The contractor will nominate a representative who will be familiar with the systems, expert in
such works and will be responsible for all completion works described herein.
Before doing any balancing work, the contractor shall first develop, submit and receive
approval of a Testing and Balancing (TAB) plan before beginning TAB.
The COR will be consulted with, and procedure of test be coordinated and approved by him.
Results of tests will be carefully and systematically registered by the contractor with the
COR's approval on each test.
The contractor will present for the engineers approval all the instrumentation he intends to
use and provide as necessary calibration verification documents.
The contractor will carry out the following operations:
(a) Temperature and static pressure tests in all room:
These tests will eventually take place after the air systems are balanced. The contractor
shall balance and adjust all systems and controls to the designed values. The contractor
shall carry out extensive measurements, when all systems are operating continuously,
logging and recording temperature near the relevant sensor in each location.
The measurements process will be continuous for 48 hours.
In case the measurement show that design goals are not met, the contractor will re-
balance, re-adjust and bring the systems to the correct operation conditions, then redo
Page 149 of 252

all measurements for additional 48 hours;

(c) Measurements of noise and vibrations in the HVAC systems:
All HVAC systems will be measured to find their contribution to the transmission of
vibrations noise and/or attenuation of these factors.
Noise levels will be measured to check compatibility with design criteria.
Any HVAC equipment or device or system or part thereof that does not comply with
design criteria per this report will be handled by the contractor, repaired changed or
else to bring it to the designed noise and vibration level. This will be done on the
contractor's expense with no cost to the COR.
(d) Cooling and heat systems:
(e) The air exhaust systems shall be tested as follows;
- Electric power of all motors.
(f) The contractor will carry out all testing, balancing and adjustments works, as many
times as will be required until the results are to the project managers satisfaction.
(g) Engineer's approval for tests completion:
When all tests are completed, all adjustments made, all controls in operations and the
COR approved that the tests were executed to his satisfaction - running-in period can
start.

15.11 RUNNING-IN AND DEMONSTRATION

(a) Running-in:
The contractor shall run-in the HVAC systems for a period no shorter than 4
consecutive days and nights without any failure.
(b) Demonstration:
When the running-in period is over, qualified representatives of the contractor shall
demonstrate to the owner's facility engineer's staff the system operation.
If parts of the systems are operated at different times, the contractor will have to
demonstrate each part separately.
The duration of this demonstration shall be at least 1 working day.
The demonstration shall include:
* Explanation of normal operation;
* Overcoming failures in equipment and system operation, troubleshooting;
* Periodic maintenance and service;
The demonstration will take place when maintenance team members have the drafts of
the system manuals and the procedures will be according to these manuals. End of this
demonstration period will be only at COR approval.
When the demonstration period is over, the contractor shall correct the manuals per the
CORs instruction and under the COR's approval.

15.12 HVAC WORKS COMMISSIONING

The conditions for work commissioning are as follows:
* The contractor completed all works under this contract;
Page 150 of 252

* The contractor completed all tests, all adjustments all balancing procedures of the
systems, submitted full reports to the full satisfaction and approval of the engineer;
* The contractor completed the running-in and demonstration under his contract;
* The contractor completed a revised "as-built" system manual (as is described in section
15.080).
The contractor should develop a Commissioning Plan ( CX Plan) for COR approval. The
Plan shall detail the measuring points, observations and test required and define the
participants. The CX Plan shall be used as a log during the CX. Once complete, the CX plan
and Log shall be submitted as a CX report.
When all these conditions are fulfilled, the contractor shall ask the project manager to call for
a commissioning day date.
In this date, the contractor's personnel will include the COR and customer representatives that
participated in the final stage of the works so that all questions, problems, simulations and the
like could be performed as required.
The COR will prepare punch list for corrections. When all corrections are made for the
satisfaction of the PM, a date of work completion will be decided upon by the COR.

15.13 DOCUMENTS AND HVAC SYSTEMS MANUALS

Before starting the demonstration period, the contractor shall submit 4 sets of all the as-built
drawings and systems manuals.
After the demonstration period and per the engineer's remarks, the contractor shall correct the
manuals and re-submit the document in neat hard cover binders in 5 sets.
The systems manuals shall include:
All drawings corrected AS BUILTS.
Complete and detailed Operation and Maintenance instructions for the systems as a
whole and for each sub-system.
Spare parts list.
Catalogs of all equipment including their operation and maintenance instructions.
Lists of all equipment installed.
List of all electric motors and electric power elements.
List of all bearings, all drive belts and their catalog numbers.
Full description of the controls and the SOO - Sequence of Operation, for each
subsystem.
Complete Control and system drawings and description - Hardware and Software.

15.14 SMOKE RELIEF FAN:
The contractor will provide and install ventilation fan according to plans, tables and
specifications.
The fan will be resistant at 250
0
c for 2 hours and will be fit to UL standards with approved
certificate
The fan motivated by an electrical motor (direct drive)
The impeller will be dynamic and static balanced and will work with low noise.
The fans shaft will be made from stainless steel.
The fans spherical bearings will be quiet and calculated for 100,000 working hours with no
need for oiling.
The fan box will be made from stainless steel.
Page 151 of 252

The impeller and the impeller box will be provided by the same fans manufacturer
Electrical input to the fan will be by others.

15.15 OVERPRESSURE BLASTE VALVE WITH BLOWER

Enables ventilation of the protected room, it is used to stop explosive blast waves from
entering a bomb shelter.
The blast is testedand certified with accordance with the Israeli standard 4570 by the civil
defense command and the standards institution of Israel

15.16 ELECTRIC WORKS IN HVAC SYSTEMS

(a) The works shall conform to all electrical applicable codes, standards and rules and
shall be coordinated with the electrical contractor of the building in terms of
equipment and connections by the responsibility of the contractor.
(b) In his scope of work, the contractor shall provide all electric systems that serve the
HVAC systems, from the point where the building general electric works stop,
namely from the connections of the power lines to the HVAC electric panel (ACP).
(c) (d) The scope of work of the contractor includes the provision of the ACP, all
connections to the ACP's, power and control alike, testing, operating, and testing by
the electric supply company.
(e) The contractor will prepare the shop drawings showing all wiring systems including
all sleeves, passages, conduits, recesses, etc., that are required by the HVAC electrical
work.
(f) Power lines from the ACP to motors and the other power equipment will generally be
by XLPE cables protected by metal conduits, or laid on a race-way or covered cable
tray. The power disconnect switch, will be installed nearby the equipment on hot-dip
galvanized channel iron structure.
In each case, the final connection to all equipment will be by flexible armored
conduits of ample length that is "Omega" shaped to prevent vibrations transferred
through the conduit.
g) All control wiring shall be installed in the same manner.
(h) Cables in the HVAC electric systems shall be thermoplastic XLPE 1000 volts.
(i) Insulation of all wires to be in various colors per IEC code.
(j) Connections of wires to 6 mm2 section shall be to terminal blocks. Connections of
larger cross section wires will be by "cable shoes", bolts washers and nuts.
(k) All electric power systems shall be by the definition of IAF (mechanical & electrical
section-see also general electrical spec (CHAPTER 8).
(l) Provide in all HVAC electric panel (ACP) dry contacts that close at time of fire alarm
signal.
(m) All HVAC equipment, piping, metal ducts, etc., must be grounded in an equal-
potential value for earth's mass.
The grounding work shall be executed by the general electric works contractor, and is
not under this contract. However the contractor shall prepare grounding bolts on
ducts, pipes and equipment and coordinate his work with the other contractor so no
damage is incurred to insulation and equipment.The preparation of these bolts, etc.
shall be before the duct pipe or equipment are insulated

Page 152 of 252

15.17 HVAC ELECTRIC PANELS COMPONENTS
(a) Select the circuit breakers for 40 KA short-circuit currents.

(b) Indication lights 26 mm diameter will be neon lamps 14 mm diameter will be
incandescent type. Provide series resistor to reduce operating voltage by 20%. Smaller
lights shall be by LEDS.
1. Operation mode lights:green.
2. Failure indication: red.
3. All panels to be equipped with lamp test system.

(c) Provide push buttons for lamp test, alarm test, acknowledge alarm.

(d) Selector switch, control switches No toggle switches in the front of panels, only
rotary switches.
2 position switches for ON-OFF modes will be 90 between each position.
3 position switches for Man-OFF-AUTO model will be 90 between each position.

(e) Contactors (starters) and over-load relays Select contactors for AC-3 mode and 1
million operations. Submit selected equipment for approval.
All contactors shall include at least 2 auxiliary switches unless otherwise specified.

(f) Over-load relay shall be with at least two separate switches, one for cutout, the other
for activation of the over-load alarms.

(g) Select contactors for capacitors for 175% the nominal current.

(h) Control current for all contactors shall be 23010% volts.

(i) Timers for the required, daily or weekly program. Timers will include spring loaded
mechanism for 24 hours operation with electric power interruption.

(j) Control transformer The control circuit transformer shall be calculated so that when
all elements of the panels are ON and the last load starts, voltage in the control circuit
shall be not lower than 90% of the nominal.
Efficiency of this transformer shall be measured and shall be at least 85% when
comparing the input and output KVA.

(k) FANS electric panel will be installed inside the wall in a proper box aluminum
anodize panel.
The panel will include as followed:
working mode lights green
Failure indication light red.
3 position switch for manual/zero/auto

15.18 HVAC CONTROL WORKS COMPLATION

HVAC control works will be considered completed when all control installations are
installed, connected, tested, debugged and the controlled systems balanced, adjusted
and run-in to the engineers satisfaction, all design parameters reached over a period
Page 153 of 252

of 7 consecutive days and nights, all system manuals submitted and approved.

The testing and running in of all systems with their controls shall be fully attended by
the HVAC contractor and his controls subcontractor who will make good any
malfunction of systems and/or equipment within his scope.

Page 154 of 252

Chapter 19 - Structural Steel

19.01 General
Chapter 19 of the Host Nation Technical Requirements (HNTR) shall be read in conjunction
with this Special Specification which constitutes the extent of the work with regard to
Structural Steel. In case of conflict the special specifications shall govern over the HNTR.

19.02 Scope of Work
This Chapter deals with columns, metal external pergolas/sunshades metal stairs,
Steel awnings, steel strengthening of gypsum walls around door openings and other steel
elements.

19.03 Submittals Steel work .
Shop Drawings
A. The Contractor shall employ a Surveyor on the Site, with the appropriate equipment,
at his own cost, for the purpose of measuring on Site of the existing buildings in which
the steel structure work shall be executed.
B. Only after the checking of the existing situation, the Contractor shall be allowed to
begin preparation of the shop drawings, adapted to the existing structure.
C. As part of this work, the Contractor shall prepare by an authorized Engineer, on his
behalf and at his expense, production details and shop drawings of all the various steel
structure elements, including steel attachments, combination of covers with steel
elements, etc., in such a way that shall comply with all the execution details appearing
in the structure and architectural drawings.
D. The assembly drawings and shop drawings, including execution details, shall be
submitted in an orderly manner to the COR and shall receive his approval or remarks,
prior to the beginning of the production.

19.04 Steel
The steel that will be supplied by the Contractor shall be rounded profiles and sheet metal
steel, known as FE360 steel. The steel shall be new, undamaged and/or penetrated by rust
and without scaling or flaking. All the galvanized steel shall be free of liquid metal
embrittlement (LME). The Contractor shall issue a certificate from the steel manufacturer
to the designer indicating that the steel is designated for use compatible with the specification
and standards.

19.05 Workmanship
All work shall be performed in accordance with best professional practices by top rate
professionals. Welds shall bear certificates and shall be compatible with the requirements of
Section 19.033 of the HNTR.

19.06 Dimensions
The Contractor shall employ an on-site surveyor with suitable optical equipment in order to
verify the precision of structural dimensions and their compatibility with portions the
building that have been previously erected using structural steel assembly.
The Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the dimensions and elevations of the
building on-site prior to begin production for the purpose of determining precise dimensions
of the steel construction.
Permitted tolerances for the production of steel elements shall be as follows:
Page 155 of 252

Precision in dimensioning between bolt holes: for connections of the various
types 1.5 mm.
Precision in dimensioning of the general length of transverse beams: 5.0 mm.

19.07 Galvanizing
All the steel shall be galvanized and painted.
Following production of structural elements, the elements shall be shipped to a factory for
galvanizing.
Galvanizing thickness shall be in accordance with the conditions found in Israel Standard 918
and in accordance with the type the steel, but not less than 80 microns.

19.08 Repair of galvanizing
In locations in which galvanizing shall be required to be repaired after being damaged by
welding or transport, etc., the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of any waste and dirt and
painted with a zinc-rich paint in two coats. The painted area shall overlap the existing
galvanized area by at least 5 cm.


Page 156 of 252

Chapter 22 - Prefabricated Elements

22.01 General

Section 22 of the Host Nation Technical Requirements (HNTR) shall be read with this
Special Specification which constitutes the extent of the Work with regard to Prefabricated
(walls and ceilings) Elements work. In case of conflict the special specifications shall prevail
over the HNTR.

22.02 Submittals Required for Prefabricated Elements Work

Scope of Submittal Requirements:
The following areas of Work require submittals by selected
manufacturers as specified below:

Raised access floor.

Shop Drawings:
Raised access floor: The Contractor shall submit details and floor plans of raised access floor
before proceeding with Work. Provide coordination drawings drawn accurately to large scale
and coordinating penetrations and floor-mounted items. Shop drawings shall be signed by the
Contractors qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Show the
following:

Samples:
A set of samples shall show the full range of texture and color to be expected in the
completed work. Sample submittal and the Contracting Officer Representatives (COR)
approval will be for color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the
responsibility of the Contractor and the manufacturer. Submit the following selected samples:

1. Floor: Two (2) tiles or full size.

2. Exposed tees and moldings.

3. Accessories: one of each type.

22.06 Dismountable Floor Tiles (Access Flooring)

Work Included

1. Ready made cementitious filled steel encased floor tiles.

2. Legs (pedestals) and bolt-on stringers.

3. Railings, steps and ramps as shown.

4. All required grounding.

Page 157 of 252

5. All accessories required for a complete installation as shown on the drawings.

Technical Specifications

General

Raised/Access floors shall consist of HPL coated tiles for standard duty in Communication
Room.

Description of Floor

1. Tiles

a) The tiles dimensions shall be 600x600x35 mm.

b) The tiles structure shall consist of a closed sheet metal casing having an at
least 85 RB (Rockwell B) hardness treading surface. The casing shall be
filled with light concrete. The weight of the tile shall not exceed 16 kg.

c) The tile sheet metal box shall stand up to a concentrated load of 575 kg
(1250 lbs) per tile and yield load of 1720 kg (3800 lbs) applied through an
area of 2.54 sq.cm anywhere on the tile with a safety coefficient of at least 3.

d) The tile shall stand up to a rolling load of 455 kg (1000 lbs) through a 6
diameter rigid passages to the length of the tile, in a fixed location, at a
velocity of 30m/minute all over the tiles surface. The permissible residual
deformation shall be 0.5 mm, at the most.

e) The tile shall stand up to an impact load of 80 kg applied from a height of 1
m above an area of 2.5 sq.cm. The maximal permissible residual deformation
shall be 0.5 mm on the entire tiles surface.

f) The tile shall be coated by an oven-baked epoxy paint at least 35 microns
thick. The planeness of the tile shall be at the most 0.7 mm in the entire upper
surface.

g) The floors tiles shall comply with the fire resistance requirements according
to Standard ASTM E 84, Class A. flames and Smoke Spreading: 0.

h) Coating of the tile

1) The tiles shall be coated with reinforced plastic material resistant to
alkali fluids and to abrasion of the HPL type, which are assigned to
floating floors. The tiles in the trainer hall shall be ready to glue carpet
tiles on them.

2) A black painted step shall be executed on the edges of the panel, 3 cm
wide and 0.2 mm deep at the most. The cladding of edges with PVC
shall not be permitted.

Page 158 of 252

The floor including all its parts shall stand up to 10
5
-10
6
ESD
(conductive) requirements and the Contractor shall submit appropriate
Standard Certificate.

2. Pedestals

a) The pedestals shall be made of galvanized steel. The bases and heads thickness
shall be at least 3 mm.

b) The pedestals head shall be adjustable within a 4 mm range and include a
locking device.

c) The pedestals structure shall stand up to an axial load of 3,000 kg.

d) It shall be possible, at the pedestals head, to lock ties.

3. Ties

a) The ties shall consist of galvanized sheet metal, 1.5 mm thick.

b) The ties shall stand up to the loads requested for the tiles and shall transfer
relative horizontal forces.

c) The ties shall be coated with tar appropriate to floating floors.

4. Wall angles

Along concrete walls, it shall be permissible to install wall angles L 40x40x4 mm that
shall be connected to the wall by means of 3/8 dia. anchors set at 60 cm intervals,
while attention shall be given to the floors planeness.

5. Vertical closures

a) The vertical closures shall consist of galvanized sheet steel at least 0.8 mm thick
or of gypsum 10 mm thick, anchored into the concrete and combined with the
tile.

b) Vertical closures for the prevention of the passage of heat/cold and noise shall be
as above with a double wall and 5 mm thick rock wool between them, anchored
into the concrete and combined with the tile.

6. Perforated tiles

a) These tiles shall be similar to those of the floor and their coating, except for the
concrete filling.

b) The tiles shall stand up to all the loading requirements defined in paragraph 1
above.

Page 159 of 252

c) The perforations shall have a diameter up to 7.5 mm, 25% of the tiles area shall
be perforated and enable the passage of 1,000 CFM under a static head of 5 mm
of water.

7. Cable passages

All cable passages, metal sleeves, grommets, etc. shall be included in the scope of
work at no additional cost.

The Contractor will supply and install all required passage in the full satisfaction of
the COR.

Floor Structure

A. The floor structure obtained shall be rigid without any displacement of the tiles. The
leveling of the floor shall be 0.6 mm for 1 m in each direction.

B. The pedestals shall be glued to the concrete floor with resistant and uninflammable
epoxy glue.

C. In sawn tiles, the exposed concrete shall be coated with a material suited to prevent its
disintegration.

Page 160 of 252

Chapter 23 Drilled and Cast in Place Piling

23.01 General

Chapter 23 of the Host Nation Technical Requirements (HNTR) shall be read in conjunction
with this Special Specification which constitutes the extent of the Work with regard to Drilled
and Cast in Place Piling. In case of conflict the special specifications shall prevail over the
HNTR.


In addition to Chapter 23, paragraph 23002 adds the following to the list of standards

Not applicable.

23.03 Structural Consultant Directives

The piles shall be executed according to the Structural consultant directives.

Page 161 of 252

Chapter 24 Dismantling and Demolition Works

24.01 General

A. Document C2 Special Specification, Chapter 24 Dismantling and Demolition
Works is a stand-alone chapter in that there is not a Section 24 of the Host Nation
Technical Requirements to be read in conjunction with this Special Specification. This
Special Specification alone constitutes the extent of the Work with regard to
Dismantling and Demolition Works.

24.02 Execution Instructions

A. Dismantling and demolition works shall be carefully executed.

B. Prior to dismantling and demolition works, the Contractor shall prepare all the
necessary protection for the parts of the buildings that are not to be dismantled or
demolished. Moreover, the Contractor shall mark all the items and parts to be
dismantled or demolished, and shall receive the approval of the COR.

C. The demolition will include asphalt areas, lighting poles, trees, etc.

Prior to the execution of the demolition works, the Contractor shall expose,
identify and mark the fuel, electricity, communications, water, sewage, fuel, etc.
infrastructures.

Page 162 of 252

Page 163 of 252

Chapter 33 Cranes and Lifting Installations.

33.01 General
Work and items required by the Host Nation Technical Requirements shall include, by
incorporation, all relevant chapters of the Host Nation Technical Requirements
concerning items or work covered by those standard chaptersIn the event of conflict
the special specifications shall prevail over the HNTR.

Work Description 33.02

This bid/contract covers the installation of suspended double girder double crab
Gantry Crane units, of 8,000 kg capacity (4,000+4,000) , installed in an operational
fixed launcher site 13102 of five buildings, associated with this Absorption Project in
IAF Base No 13102. The cranes shall be installed and operated according to the
standards and to the professional rules. The work shall comprise production, supply,
installation and run-in of the cranes to be supplied as an assembly; all slab suspended
and fixtures inclusive. The work includes as well the main electrical connections,
EMP over load tension and the feeder cables to be screened,(with grade of
protection , no lower than 85% of maximum screening, as well as the switches and
the fuses (electrical switchboards etc.)

Scope of Work and Execution 33.03
The crane specified in this document constitutes a double girder double identical crab
Gantry Crane units, suspended, that shall be matched to the compartment ceiling and
serve maintenance functions in position. The crane shall be operated through a
pushbutton box suspended on a trolley moving on separate track, in parallel, along the
crane Gantry rail.

Each crane equipped with two identical lift gears (winches), head beams and gantry
travel lift gear (winch), electrical power feed to the lift gear (winch) (through
flexiblescreened electrical cable routed on top of pulleys moving on top of a carrier
track parallel to the gantry all along the crane) shall be installed on longitudinal
tracks, suspended through welding to special retaining blocks produced specially for
this purpose.

Scope of Preliminary Conditions 33.04
All clauses of the Host Nation Technical Requirements Chapter 00 Preliminaries
apply to this bid/contract except for clause 006 and paragraphs 0041, 0042.

Page 164 of 252

The Contractor Representative 33.05
The contractor representative for this work shall be an authorized engineer or
practical engineer

Measurements and Marking 33.06
As specified in the Host Nation Technical Requirements Chapter 00 Preliminaries,
the contractor shall be given fixed points from which the contractor shall construct
the entire axis system and marking. Prior to commencement of his work, the
contractor shall carry out a detailed status survey to include all items existing on site.
This axis system shall be used by the contactor to carry out all works covered by this
bid/contract. The survey shall be carried out in coordination and in presence of the
COR or his representative and will be approved by the COR in writing.

Deployment on Site 33.07
The contractor deployment areas shall be only those areas set forth by the COR while
for the position of any facility within the work site the contractor shall obtain the
COR approval in advance. Whenever the contractor desires to position these facilities
externally to the site, he shall apply to the COR for approval as well.

Signage (Overhead Gantry Crane) 33.08
The contractor shall supply and install all signs required for convenient operation and
maintenance. All signs shall comply with the law and standard orders and shall be
subject to the COR approval.

Delivery of the Facility (Gantry Crane) 33.09
Upon completion of the facility installation, the contractor shall submit to the COR
the test certificates, either already required or may be required by any authority. The
certificates shall have no reservations.

The cost of tests shall be on the contractor account. After the certificates are handled
to the COR, the COR shall carry out a first acceptance test including but not limited
to verifying the compliance of the facilities to the bid requirements. The contractor
shall assist the COR in labor and equipment as necessary to carry out this tests. After
completion of these tests, the contractor shall accomplish within reasonable time
period all repairs and modifications required by the COR and that should have been
executed according to the contract.
After receiving the contractor announcement in writing that all faults has been
repaired and after the facilities had been functioning for 30 days without fault, the
COR will carry out the final acceptance test.
When in this test no fault has been noticed, the contractor shall be handled a
Completion Certificate. The contractor shall instruct the COR and the potential
customer users in using the facility

Page 165 of 252

As Made Drawings 33.10
The contractor shall prepare immediately upon completion of the work and when
required by the COR, after completion of partial works as well, As Made drawings
covering and presenting all deviations from the design (both those allowed according
to the contract and those resulting of inaccuracies in execution). The change shall be
marked on the drawing copies; two copies each drawing, of the work drawings
according to which the contractor had carried out his work. The change/ /modification
shall be emphasized by using different color from that on the drawing. Whenever no
deviation from the design has been marked by the contractor, it shall be regarded as
the contractor statement that the work at these locations has been accomplished
precisely according to the original design drawings.

33.11
Technical Description
Overhead Travelling Gantry Crane
double (2)' girder double (2)' crab

Safety work load

4,000kg x 2 = 8,000kg
Classification

1bM Group according to FEM
Standard
Hoist pulley

Calibrated Crane Cain
Suspension 2:1
Hook Path

Approximately 6.10 meters

Span
(distance between driving tracks)


Bridge length


Traveling track length

Hoist pulley, hoist speed

3.2 0.75 meter / minute
Hoist crab travel speed

14 3.5 meter / minute
Crane travel speed

20.0 5.0 meter / minute
Electrical power supply (through
flexible cable)

400 V / three phase power

Page 166 of 252

Frequency

50 Hz
Control voltage

42 V
Tightness and isolation grade

IP55

33.12 Technical Requirements
Overhead Travelling Gantry Crane
double (2)' girder double (2)' crab

330201 The Lifting
Pulley

The Crane is equipped with two chain-lifting pulleys. each on an
integrated, double stage, Travelling Crab.
The chain-lifting pulley with suspension single chain 2:1, for safety
workload of 4,000 kg. Main lifting speed 3.2 meters per minute and
leveling speed of 0.75 meter per minute. Hook travel ranges
approximately 6.10 meters. Pulley classification group 1bM
according to FEM Standard.
The pulley comprises:
Three phase motor of sliding sleeve rotor type (conical rotor with
integral brake), closed design with self-ventilation. Tightness level
IP55 according to standard DIN 40050. Tropical isolation level B
according to standard DIN 50010.
Conical brake operated automatically by a spring upon interruption
of electric power. Tooth gear immersed in oil bath producing low
noise level.
Calibrated lifting chain, top and bottom limit switches and overload
switch, top block and mobile bottom block, and hook with safety
lock.

330203 The Lifting
Chain
The lift chain shall be of high quality, acid-proof stainless-steel,
calibrated, made of round cross-section steel and designed for a load
5 times larger than the allowed working load, according to DIN 5688
grade 5.

Page 167 of 252

330204 The Motors

All motors type E, tropical type isolation, self-cooling, closed
(IP55). The motors shall be calculated for duty rating. The lift pulley
motor ED 20/10, gantry motors ED 40.
The advanced low power AC three phase motors 400 V, frequency
50 Hz, of squirrel cage type, or sliding ring, frequency controlled
with feedback system , varying the speeds smoothly, by means of
AC motor DYNA control system unit,

330205 The Brake The brake shall be of sliding sleeve type or disc brake, self
adjustable lining, automatically released upon motor start and
immediate full power stop upon power interruption (spring loaded).
The brake design shall allow, without any disassembly, lining status
indication. In case of worn out lining, an indication shall alert the
operator. The crab and gantry brakes shall be of moderate braking
power type.

330206 CraneBridge

The bridge shall consist of a bearing double girder, strengthened IPB
360 structure, or equivalent. The Crane Bridges height above the
floor is approximately 7.26 meters. The bottom section of the Cranes
girders shall consist of the pulley crab-bearing element and shall
bear the horizontal forces. The girder shall be calculated for carrying
safely the effective load.
The bridges girder length shall be approximately 8.43 meters.
The stable design head beams shall be equipped with two bearing
wheels, moving travelling on the lower flange of thetravel track
(bearing rails). Each head beam shall be equipped with a drive motor
used to electrically drive the crane bridge on the rails along the
building..
In parallel to the bridge girder, the contractor shall install two light
bearing rails: one for the two electrical power cables, driving on the
pulleise and crab-bearing; and the other for the mobile control twin
pendant unit moving independently with Its power cable.

Page 168 of 252

330207 Travel Track

The crane carrying tracks, the main beams, shall be manufactured of
standard wide flange IPB 340 profile or equivalent. The rails shall
be anchored suspended to the structure ceiling by means of steel
plates, retaining bases, planted into the ceiling concrete on both sides
of the building. The bearing rails are secured to the building ceiling
by means of tightening bolts, welded to the retaining bases and are
leveled by means of shims.
The distance between two adjacent hangers shall not exceed 2.00
meters.
The rails shall be totally leveled longitudinally and laterally. The
allowed vertical deviation of the rail course is 1/1000 of the distance
between the two rails as well as the longitude of each.
The travel rails shall be painted according to the MOD standards
except for the crane contact surfaces. The rails shall be electrically
grounded according to the IEC requirements.
The contractor shall install at the ends of the rail, rubber bumpers
capable of stopping the crane at the end of the track. The contractor
shall secure, parallel to either bearing rail beams, a carrier rail to
support the crane electrical feeder cable.

330208 Travel Limit
Switches

The lift pulley shall be equipped with top and bottom limit
switches that will stop the lifting or lowering functions
(respectively) when the hook reaches the end of its travel route.
The crane shall be equipped with limit switches to stop its
motion (control) at the end of the bearing rails (the crane travel
track).
The lift pulley crab shall be equipped with limit switches in
order to stop the travel (control) at the ends of the short
suspended track.

Each upper crab shall be equipped with regular limit switch on
its face to the outside, in order to stop the travel (control) at the
ends of the gantry beams and directional aerial (antenna) limit
switch on its face to the inside in order to stop the travel
(control) in a distance from the twin crab.

a pair of rubber bumpers one each side of each upper crab, to
soften the impact when the crab reaches its travel limits. The
contractor shall install bumper and spring assemblies in order to
soften the impact at the crane travel track..

Page 169 of 252

330209 Electric
Power
Feeding

Near the crane, on the wall, the contractor shall install the Main
Switch and appropriate Fuses, in solid metal resisting breakage
and impacts box.
The entire electrical installation for the gantry crane, from the main
switch on, shall be supplied and installed by the contractor and on
his own account, in armored piping, galvanized and Earth connected,
run between IP 55 level sealed junction boxes at a route to be
determined by the COR only.

Electric power to the lift gear (winch), crabs and gantry shall be
supplied through flexible electrical cables, flat, foldable, screened
(with grade of protection, no lower than 85% of maximum
screening).
Gantry supply: by means of flexible electrical screened cable, along
the Traveling track.. The two lift gears: by means of two separated
flexible electrical screened cables, along the gantry.
The cables shall be supported on carts used for this purpose,
traveling on light tracks (see clause Accessories and Power Supply
herein).

All metal parts shall be coated by means of anti-rust metal protective
coat and painted by means of primer and final coats, according to the
Host Nation Technical Requirements.
Page 170 of 252

330210

Electrical
Control

The lift gear operation, crab travel and crane gantry travel shall be
controlled by means of standard control system, run from two Wired
parallel portable pushbutton control boxes, mechanically
combined into one pendant unit.

The pendant unit shall be suspended on a hanger, traveling on a
separate track, run in parallel to the Crane Bridge, suspended on
steel cables, or chains in order to relief stresses. The pendants height
shall be adjustable by extending or shortening the suspension cables
or chains. The pendant shall be suspended at a height of 1.30 meter
from the ground. Each of the pendant boxes is in direct control to
one crab.
An interlock circuit shall assure the simultaneous acting and
move of the two lifting Pulleys and hocks, directed from each
side of pendant controller.
The pendant shall be made in a curved housing design(for
ergonomic handling), of solid metal, resisting breakage and impacts,
shall be properly closed,grounded, tightened, level sealed and
protected according toIP 65andE.M.P regulation demands. The
box incorporates sixteen (16) pushbuttons to control the crane
functions, one (1)interlock key and one (1)mushroom pushbutton for
emergency stop (total stop). Release of this pushbutton shall
immediately start the crane operation.

The lift gear control (the key) matching the pulleys, crab travel and
crane gantry travel fields on the control pendant shall be
reasonably separated to avoid functional errors.
Delay relays shall prevent rough shift from direction to the reverse
direction, and shall control the smooth shift between speeds and
movements.
The control power voltage shall be low voltage (approximately 42
volt).
On the wall, by the main switch, the contractor shall install on his
own account a sheet metal cabinet for out of service pendant, to be
stored. The cabinet shall be securely locked by means of an
appropriate padlock.
The control system is to by installed in steel sheet metal cabinet,
properly closed,grounded, tightened, level sealed and protected
according to IP 65 and E.M.P regulation demands.
Page 171 of 252

All system hardware components, electrical and electronic, shall
be of the highest quality: Current contactors; Forward and reverse
operation control; DC Potentiometer; Torque parameters units.
The system shall incorporate a protection against phase reversal and
missing phase; integrated ajustible motor protection breaker; alarm
reley memory error of over current, over voltage, over load; filters
to release electronics from external noises.

330211 Motor and
Switch
Protections
The adjustable top and bottom limit switches shall be installed on
the lift pulley. These switches are used to interrupt the control
power.
a. Lifting when the hook reaches travel range top end (hook
lowering only is possible).
b. Lowering when the hook reaches travel range bottom end
(hook lifting only is possible).
The bridge is equipped with limit switches, installed on one beam to
interrupt the travel control power when the crane reaches the end to
its travel track. The lift pulley is equipped with limit switches,
installed on the crab to interrupt the travel control power when the
pulley reaches either end of the cranes bridge. The lift pulley shall
be equipped with overload protection device. The device shall be
either mechanical coupling or electrical strain gage. Pulley
unloading resets the strain gage.
A three phase main switch with fuses shall be installed at convenient
accessible location, at the end of the crane travel track.
The system shall incorporate a protection relay against phase
reversal and missing phase, integrated ajustible motor protection
breaker; alarm reley memory error of over current, over voltage,
over load; filters to release electronics from external noises.
Page 172 of 252

330212 Accessories
and Supplies
In parallel to the crane travel track rails the contractor shall install a
light track for the trolleys that carry the main electrical power
screened flexible cable. The track shall be joined to the bottom of
the building girders (between the slab and the cranes bridge). The
track shall be leveled and balanced and suitable for smooth routing
of the cable along the hall.
In parallel to the cranes bridge girder, the contractor shall install at
his account two light tracks as follows:
The first for the trolleys carrying the lift pulley and crab screened
flexible electric cable.
The second shall carry the control joystick and its cabling system.
The tracks shall be connected to the top anchor of the cranes bridge
girders, by means of removable fasteners, set at a distance of 1.00
meter from one another. The tracks shall be leveled and balanced
and suitable for smooth routing of the cables along the tracks.
All steel parts shall be protected by means of non-corroded metal
coating, painted with primer and topcoat, according to the General
Specification.

Structure Specification EMP Protection

Cable shields for the overhead crane1

The flexible cable of the overhead crane will have an optical coverage of 85% minimum, and
be grounded to the crane and to the power panel, circumferentially using appropriate adapters
or connector back-shells.

Inspection reporting-Crane cable shield


Date of inspection:

Name of Inspector:

Name of supervisor:

Visual inspection of:
. Installation1
2. Grounding
3. Shield of cable

Cable inspected shield grounding Comments Photo number
Requirement Circumferential
grounding via back-

Page 173 of 252

shell to crane and
power panel
Verdict Pass Fail
1. Crane power cable
2. Control Cable Shield connected to
ground of Hand held
control unit

Cable inspected shield grounding Comments Photo number
Requirement Optical coverage of
85% minimum
(1)

Verdict Pass Fail
1. Crane power cable
2. Control Cable

(1) Verify by manufacturers data sheet and by visual inspection

Page 174 of 252

Inspection reporting-Lightening protection

Date of inspection:
Name of Inspector:
Name of supervisor:
Visual inspection of:
4. Installation
5. Grounding
6. Shield of cable

Protector verification Installation Comments Photo number
Requirement Protector per power
line, phase and
neutral, and grounded

Verdict Pass Fail
1. Main Power panel
2. Crane power panel
3.
4.

Protector verification Residual voltage Comments Photo number
Requirement
8X20s, 10Ka Pulse
1.5kV maximum, line
to line and to ground

Verdict Pass Fail
1. Main Power panel
3.
4.

Protector verification DC Ground resistance Comments Photo number
Requirement

100m maximum from
protector ground port to
facility ground

Verdict Pass Fail
1. Main Power panel
3.
4.



Page 175 of 252

Chapter 34 - Fire Detection and Extinguishing Systems
34.01 Fire Detection System
34.01.1. General
1. This specification relates to the supply and installation of automatic fire
detection and extinguishing systems.
2. The proposed system shall be submitted for COR's approval.
34.01.2. Specifications and standards
1. Israel Standard 1220.
2. FM and UL standards
3. NFPA 72 and NFPA 2001 standards.
4. All standards shall be with their latest version.
5. In addition to above mentioned standards, the system shall meet all the
IAF requirements as specified bellow. In any case of contradiction, IAF
specifications shall have the priority.
34.01.3. Technical requirements for equipment
1. General equipment approvals
1.1 The contractor shall submit a certificate for system's compliance
with the Israeli Standard and with the UL or FM standards,
according to case.
1.2 In case of explosion proof equipment' the contractor shall submit
the compliance certificate according to BASEEFA standard in
addition to the certificates requires in section 1.1.
1.3 For item types for which such a standard has not been defined, the
Contractor shall submit a No Applicable Standard (NAS) certificate
from the Israel Standards Institute.
Items for which the Israel Standards Institute does not normally
provide a certificate of NAS can be disqualified at the CORs
discretion.
2. Compatibility among equipment items
2.1 The contractor shall submit compatibility/Integration capability for
all proposed items as follows:
a. Products of a single manufacturer and approved for use together
by their manufacturer (included in the list of compatible devices
by the manufacturer).
Or
b. Products of different manufacturers, but approved for use by the
manufacturer of the principal item.
Or
c. Products of different manufacturers, but approved for use
together by the Israel Standards Institute.
Page 176 of 252

2.2 2.2 All items connected to addressable detection system shall be
compatible (including integrative addressable compatibility), except
specific item which are not addressable and that shall be
specifically approved by the COR.
2.3 All items connected to areas detection system shall be compatible
(including integrative work capability compatibility).
2.4 All items for hazardous locations (IS) system shall be compatible
(including integrative work capability compatibility).
2.5 Hydrogen detection items shall be compatible (including integrative
work capability compatibility).
2.6 The contractor shall submit the manufacturer's declaration or Israeli
Standards Institute certification for the ability to implement fire
extinguishing systems, by using the proposed fire detection and
extinguishing systems.
3. In any case, the COR is the sole professional authority when deciding
technical issues related to the equipment approval process on the
basis of the information and knowledge at its disposal.
4. The installation of a system with all its devices shall be performed in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions, the drawings, Israel
Standard 1220 Part 3, NFPA 72 and the special requirements of the
COR.
5. All system items installed in an unenclosed building (such as open
sheds, passageways or exterior installation) shall be dust- and water-
resistant with an IP 65 protection grade. If an original IP 65
equipment item is not available, the device shall be installed in a
case/box with IP 65 protection.
6. Addressable analog fire detection control panel
The panel shall have the following features:
6.1 Basic configuration at least 127 addresses for detectors and
address units.
The control panel shall be capable of being expanded to up to 1000
addresses using loop expansion cards.
6.2 An LCD display with full Hebrew support (4 at least at the level of
Hebrewcharacters for the device addresses).
6.3 Ability to connection of at least one sub-panel supporting the
following capabilities:
a. LCD display identical to the main control panel with full
Hebrew support.
b. Alarm Silence and reset actions.
Page 177 of 252

6.4 Connection of at least five power supply units with the following
features:
a. Current supply capability of at least 5A.
b. Network and batteries voltage control, with indications transfer
to the control panel.
6.5 At least 3 controlled voltage outputs.
6.6 At least 2 auxiliary contacts for fault and alarm.
6.7 Class A and Class B configurations support.
6.8 The control panel shall have the following features:
a. Reporting on alarm/fault at the device address level.
b. Any-2 cross zoning between two detectors or more for the
purpose of activating an addressable unit.
c. Alarm verification.
d. Walk test feature.
e. Faults and alarms history log for at least the last 1000 events.
f. At least two access levels with password for the building's
owner and for maintenance
g. Change of smoke detector sensitivity, drift compensation,
warning of dirty detector at two levels.
6.9 Programming of the control panel using a portable computer
through the panel's COM port and via a modem (see Subsection
6.16).
6.10 220V AC feed voltage without the installation of improvised
transformers by the supplier.
6.11 A secondary feed system (batteries) that maintains system
configuration after grid voltage fault and transition to battery feed:
72 hours on standby and 15 minutes in an alarm condition with all
warning devices operating.
6.12 The control panels shall include at least two auxiliary contacts and
additional two programmable auxiliary contacts for alarm and fault.
6.13 The system shall have the capability to communicate with the
building's control system, by the common communication protocols
(RS485, TCP/IP ModBus etc.).
Page 178 of 252

6.14 Synoptic map
a. The system shall include an LED driver unit for synoptic map.
b. Each driver shall operate at least 30 LEDs.
c. The panel shall operate at least 5 driver units.
d. The synoptic map shall include an Anodized aluminum panel,
on which, the buildings' plan shall be engraved. The LEDs
position on the panel indicates their actual location in the
building.
e. Size: 50x37 m or 50x70 cm.
f. Enclosure: anodized aluminum.
g. At least 30 or 60 LEDs in accordance to the map's size.
h. The configuration of the LEDs shall have a pair of built-in
wires.
6.15 Port for a serial/parallel printer.
6.16 Communications modem
a. The purpose of the modem is to perform remote log-in for the
fire detection system by the IAF maintenance team.
b. The control panel software shall enable upload/download of the
operating software, [determination of the] state of fouling of the
detectors and a history of system events through the modem.
6.17 The control panel shall be approved for the operation of FM-200
gas extinguishing systems.
7. 4- and 8-zones (minimum) conventional fire detection control panels
The panel shall have the following features:
7.1 At least one cross zoning circuit for output activation in 4 zones
system (at least three cross zoning circuits for output activation in 8
zones system).
7.2 A secondary feed system (batteries) that maintains system
configuration after grid voltage fault and transition to battery feed:
72 hours on standby + 15 minutes in an alarm condition with all
warning devices operating.
7.3 Auxiliary contacts for alarm and fault.
7.4 Minimum 0.5A fixed voltage output.
7.5 Horn operation port.
7.6 Connection of a secondary panel.
7.7 Operation unit for a synoptic map for a 4/8-zone control panel.
7.8 The control panel shall be approved by FM, UL or the Israel
Standards Institute for the operation of FM-200 gas extinguishing
systems.
Page 179 of 252

8. Detectors
8.1 General requirements for smoke detectors:
a. The bases of the detectors shall be interchangeable for all types
of detectors installed in the building (photoelectric, heat, flame
etc.).
b. An Indication LED lamp shall be located on the detector or on
its base that lights continuously in an alarm condition.
c. The detectors shall be protected from reverse voltage.
8.2 The following conventional/addressable detector types are
approved for installation::
a. Photoelectric.
b. Heat: of a fixed temperature type.
c. Combined photoelectric and het.
d. Heat: of a fixed temperature type and temperature change rate.
e. Flame detector.
f. The detectors shall ne low profile (the detector height shall nit
exceed 5 cm).
8.3 Beam detectors
a. Passive beam detectors:
receiver and transmitter in the same unit + reflector for
installations at distances of up to 30 m.
b. Active beam detectors:
receiver and transmitter in separate units synchronized for
installations at distances of up to 100 meters.
c. A beam detector neutralization switch with timer shall be
installed in accordance with the requirements of the COR.
Neutralization of the detectors shall be indicated as a fault on the
control panel.
d. The beam detector shall be installed on top of a metal support
with a rubber flange for maintaining detector reset (absorption
of changes in temperature).
e. The beam detector shall be installed on a supporting arm with a
rubber strip' in order to maintain the detector's adjustment (due
to temperature changes).
f. The beam detector system shall include two elements only
a transmitter and receiver or a transmitter and reflector (without
a control unit). The beam detector shall be connected directly to
the fire detection system.
g. The operating voltage of the detector shall be in the range of
18-32 V
DC
.
Page 180 of 252

h. Current consumption of the transmitter shall not exceed 20 mA.
Current consumption of the receiver shall not exceed 40 mA in a
normal condition and 60 mA in an alarm condition.
When providing a configuration with a transmitter and receiver
in a single unit (with a reflector), the current consumption shall
not exceed 4 mA in a standby state and 50 mA an alarm state.

8.4 Flame detectors
The following flame detector types are approved for installation:
a. UV flame detectors.
b. IR3 flame detectors
c. UV/IR flame detectors.
d. Multi IR detector.
8.5 Detectors for air conditioning ducts
The following AC detector types are approved for installation:
a. Case for detectors in return air ducts for interior installation
within the building.
b. Case for detectors in return air ducts for exterior installation on
the building roof with IP65 protection.
8.6 24V flood detectors of the proximity type including a dry NO
contact.
8.7 Detector base with insulation.
8.8 Detector cable operating on a short-circuit principle during alarm,
for outdoor conditions, protected from water, moisture, etc.
The cables shall be supplied at 3 temperature detection levels
68C, 88C and 138C.
9. Fire detection/extinguishing pushbutton
9.1 Fire detection/extinguishing pushbuttons shall not contain
breakable components made from glass or plastic and shall be ready
for reset after operation using anunified reset key.
9.2 The following pushbuttons types shall be used:
a. Addressable fire detection pushbutton.
b. Conventional fire detection pushbutton.
c. Outdoor fire detection pushbutton for exterior, water tight IP65.
d. Addressable double action fire extinguishing pushbutton without
a breakable component and made from metallic materials.
9.3 All of the fire detection/extinguishing pushbuttons shall be red.
Page 181 of 252

10. Horns
10.1 The following Horns types shall be used:
a. Interior fire alarm horn.
b. Exterior fire alarm horn integrated with a protected IP 65 blinker
indicator with separate terminals for operating sound and light
(to be installed so that after silencing of the horn, the blinker
will continue to operate and will serve to direct firefighting
forces until reset of the system).
10.2 The cable entrance to the horn/beacon shall be sealed by silicon or
any other approved means.
10.3 The two types of horns shall have at least two types of sounds:
alarm and all clear.
10.4 The horns shall be attached to the wall/ceiling with screws. The
horn shall not removable without the use of a tool (i.e., a suitable
screwdriver or wrench).
10.5 The horns shall be red.
10.6 Interior horns shall have a sound intensity of at least 85 dB at a
distance of 3 m.
10.7 Exterior horns shall have a sound intensity of at least 100 dB at a
distance of 3 m.
11. Concealed smoke detection indication lamp
11.1 An indication lamp shall be installed whenever a detector will be
installed in a closed room, cabinet, electrical panel, above
suspended ceiling plenum, bellow floating floor space, etc.
11.2 Exterior indication lamps shall be of a waterproof type or installed
within a transparent waterproof box.
11.3 The indication lamp shall be connected to the detector's base.
12. Addressable units
12.1 Input addressable units: a circuit connected to the communications
line of the loop without a separate 24V
DC
connection.
12.2 Mini-type input address units shall be used for connecting to
pushbuttons.
12.3 Output addressable units:
With double dry contact relay for shutting off electricity and air-
conditioning.
12.4 The output addressable units shall have 24V
DC
controlled voltage.
The addressable units shall be approved by UL, FM or the Israel
Standards Institute for the operation of solenoids for fire
extinguishing purposes.
12.5 Interface address for connecting a loop of conventional detectors or
blast-resistant detectors to an addressable analog control panel.
Page 182 of 252

12.6 The installation of addressable units of all types shall be performed
using a plastic box and spacers for attaching the units to the back of
the box using four screws.
13. Explosion proof equipment
13.1 Any equipment designed for installation in areas defined as
explosion proof shall be approved in accordance with BASEEFA
Eex ia IIC T5 or UL Class 1 Division 2.
13.2 Barriers.
13.3 Fire detectors.
a. Point smoke detectors: photoelectric and heat, may be
addressable or conventional.
b. Photoelectric.
c. Heat.
13.4 Fire detection pushbuttons.
13.5 Interior horns.
13.6 Blinker indicators.
13.7 Hydrogen detectors.
a. Two configurations will be accepted based on the
manufacturers concept:
b. Stand-alone hydrogen detector or control panel for the detection
of gases to which sensors are attached.
c. Required functionality:
possibility of calibration of the level of hydrogen concentrations
at least in the HEL-LEL range; two separate relays for warning
and fault.
13.8 Single zone control panel for fire detection cable:
the control panel shall include two dry contacts, one for alarm and
the second for fault. The control panel shall include an LCD-type
display for the cable length measurement during an alarm event.
The unit shall be installed within an IP65 and explosion proof
enclosure.
Operating voltage shall be 24V and the length's measurement
precision shall not exceed 1m.
Page 183 of 252

14. Automatic fire extinguishing system in the electrical boards
14.1 Approved FM-200 gas extinguishing tank: filling of the tank shall
be performed by the manufacturer. An engraved signage with the
fill data on the tank bosy or on an attached metal disk shall serve as
proof.
14.2 NO or NC pressostat.
14.3 Gas discharge pressure switch including a pilot hose for connecting
to the top of the tank.
14.4 180 and 360 stainless steel gas spray nozzle.
14.5 Clamps (of the Unistrat type) for supporting the tank.
14.6 A manual extinguishing tank activator of a pull or push type.
14.7 A 24V solenoid (a fire extinguishing system not based on a
solenoid, as for example, detonators will not be accepted).
14.8 Gas pressure gauge.
14.9 Removable terminal for the connection to the tank.
14.10 Liquid fill gauge for tanks with weights greater than 50 kg.
14.11 Schedule 40 piping system, with various diameters as necessary,
including connectors, junctions and accessories, fastened to the
ceiling by setscrew ("jumbo") and galvanized Z profiles, 5 mm
thick.
15. Telephone dialer
15.1 Two different recorded messages shall be recorded, for fire alarm
and fault, each for four different subscribers in the following
wording:
a. This is a recorded announcement. Fire has broken out
For the following addressees: Firefighting Station,
BaseCommandCenter.
b. This is a recorded announcement. There is a fault in the fire
extinguished system in building
for Ground Equipment Unit.
15.2 Programming of the dialer shall be performed without the use of
coded instruments, but rather only through a keyboard and the
message recording device.
15.3 The dialer shall be of a type that is approved for connection to
telephone lines by the Bezeq Telephone Company. Operating
voltage of the dialer shall be 24V.
15.4 The current consumption of the dialer shall not exceed 20mA in a
standby condition and 40mA in a dialing condition.
15.5 The dialer shall identify the absence of a telephone line.
Page 184 of 252

15.6 The dialer shall be installed within a fire detection control panel or,
alternatively, outside of the control panel within an IP65 metal or
plastic enclosure.
16. Fire detection infrastructure
16.1 Types of infrastructure (according the detailed design):
a. Any item which is not installed in concealed installation shall be
UV resistant.
1) 20 mm diameter red self-extinguishing conduit (Merikef)
fastened to the ceiling/wall every 60 cm using metallic
holders (shells) with a galvanized screw.
2) 20 and 25 mm diameter heavy rigid conduit (Meriron)
fastened to the ceiling/wall every 60 cm using metallic
holders (shells) with a galvanized screw.
3) 20 mm diameter reinforced flexible annular pipe fastened
to the ceiling/wall every 60 cm using metallic holders
(shells) with a galvanized screw.
4) 30x15 mm, 30x60 mm and 60x120 mm white plastic ducts
including end pieces and adapters for the boxes.
5) Standard red fire detection cable: 2-pair cable with a
minimum 1.0 sq. mm cross-section each for wiring of the
detector line; use of a twisted shielded cable shall be
performed in accordance with the control panel
6) Standard red fire detection cable: 2-pair cable with a
minimum 1.5 sq. mm cross-section for wiring of the horn
line.
7) Stranded reinforced NYY cable with a 1.5 sq. mm cross-
section.
8) 30x30 cm CI box, including standard electrical board
terminals.
9) Rigid 10x10 cm branching box (not heavy rigid conduit
(Meriron)) with IP65 protection. A gland shall be
installed at the entry of the conduit (self-extinguishing
(Merikef) or flexible annular conduit) into the box.
10) Metal conduit with all devices: angles, connectors and
supports for installation in a blast-resistant area.
11) Device connection kit for detection cable approved by the
system manufacturer.
Page 185 of 252

17. Suction smoke detection system
17.1 The system is also known as VESDA-Very Early Warning
Aspirating Smoke Detection.
17.2 The suction smoke detection system shall include the following
components:
a. Detection unit.
b. Sampling pipes.
c. Display unit.
d. Buzzer for installation with the secondary-display.
e. Power supply and batteries.
f. Lockable metal enclosure with a transparent front window.
17.3 All electrical and electronic equipment shall have inherent
withstand and shall be installed so that it will not be damaged from
the mechanical, thermal, electromagnetic and overvoltage
standpoints caused as the result of lightning strike and/or electrical
interference from the grid or as a result of proximity to other
systems such as electricity, water, gas, communications, etc.
17.4 The system shall function normally under summer and winter
conditions, humidity as the result of proximity to the sea [or]
sandstorms typical for the Israeli climate.
17.5 All equipment and infrastructure components specified in the
specification and in the contractor's proposals shall conform to the
requirements of the standards enumerated in the applicable
document section.
17.6 Detection unit
a. The detector is designed to detect the byproducts of burning
produced during the incipient stage of fire development, such as
overheating of electrical cable, insulation, paper and film
negatives.
b. The detector unit shall be UL and FM approved.
c. The detector unit shall be water- and dust-resistant with a
minimum IP 30 protection grade.
d. The detector unit shall include the following components:
1) A detector cell with laser source.
2) A fan assembly.
3) An output relay assembly.
e. The area of coverage of the detector shall be at least 300 square
meters of floor space.
f. The detection threshold (the minimum smoke obscuration that
Page 186 of 252

can be detected by the detection unit) shall be 0.005% per meter.
g. Above the detection threshold, the detection unit shall enable at
least three different programmable levels of smoke detection
such as alert, pre-alarm and fire. The appropriate values of
obscuration for each fire detection level shall be determined by
the contractor in accordance with the recommendations of the
detector manufacturer and environmental conditions. The
detector shall have a sufficiently wide sensitivity range in order
to function normally and adapt automatically to variable
environmental conditions: summer/winter, sandstorms (within a
closed building, but not hermetically closed) and day/night
regimes.
h. The detection units shall have an internal memory for storing
smoke levels and events (warnings, alarms and faults) with
timestamps suitable for a period of at least two weeks. After
accumulating data, it shall be possible to adapt optimal detection
value levels based on the data with the use of dedicated software
that shall be supplied together with the detector. According to
UL requirements, the maximum detector threshold for [smoke]
extraction is 2% per meter.
i. The detection unit shall have the following indications:
1) System's status: normal, alarm level and fault
2) Supply status.
3) Airflow status.
4) Detector.
j. The detector unit shall include reset and isolate button/s.
k. The detector unit shall contain an RS-232 communications port
for programming with a computer.
The contractor shall submit the dedicated software by which the
detector can be programmed to the COR.
l. The detector unit shall contain an RS-485 port for establishing a
detector network. For additional details, sees the Network
section.
m. Output relays
1) The detector unit shall include 2A@30V
DC
output relays
for three levels of smoke and fault.
2) The relays shall have programmable latching capability.
3) The relays shall have alarm verification capability allowing
a delay of 0-60 seconds.
Page 187 of 252

17.7 Air sampling piping
a. The air sampling piping shall be made from plastic material,
approved for use in the detector units by the detector
manufacturer and compatible with the environmental conditions
in which the detector is installed.
b. Each detection zone pipes shall be connected to the detector via
a connector which allow the pipes disassembly. The connector
shall be installed as close as possible to the detector unit.
c. The layout of the piping and the location and diameter of
sampling points shall be performed by a technician certified by
the detector manufacturer with the use of dedicated software
approved by the detector manufacturer, and which ensures
obtaining the following objectives:
1) Smoke travel time from the farthest sampling point to the
detector shall not exceed 60 seconds.
2) Equivalency of air volume sampled from various points,
which is to say, identical sensitivity at each sampling point
in the pipe.
3) The layout shall be compatible with the special
requirements existing for the building such as A/C and
return openings, dampers, acoustical ceilings and floating
floors in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations and relevant standards (NFPA 72, 75,
232A).
d. The piping shall be marked with a permanent marking Smoke
Detection Sampling Pipe for its entire length spaced a
maximum of 2 m apart.
e. Layout of the piping shall not interfere with the performance of
regular work of the users of the building. Connection and
support of the piping shall be performed directly to the structural
walls of the building. Design of the pipe layouts shall be
submitted for the CORs approval prior to installation.
17.8 Power supply with batteries
a. The suction detection system shall be connected to a
240V
AC
/50Hz power source, with a separate circuit dedicated
breaker in the electrical board.
All of the systems components shall operate by 24V
DC
and
minimum current. Consumption.
b. During electrical outage, the suction detection system shall
automatically transfer operation to emergency batteries that will
enable continued operation of the system for period of 72 hours
of stand by mode plus 60 min of Alarm mode including horns
and telephone dialer operations.
Page 188 of 252

c. The secondary power supply system shall include batteries that
will enable operation of all system functions, charging unit and
automatic change over system in case of outage in the primary
electricity supply (reduction in voltage to 85% of the nominal
value).
d. The battery capacity shall be calculated in accordance with the
manufacturer instructions and NFPA requirements.
The charger shall be capable of charging an empty battery
within 24 hours with a quantity that is sufficient to supply
maximum alarm loading for a period of 1 hour.
The charging shall automatically begin on mains supply
restoration.
e. The detection system shall invoke an automatic disconnect
circuit of the batteries in the case of a reduction in voltage below
a particular value in order to prevent damage to the batteries by
over-draining.
f. The battery system shall comply with the requirements of the
UL 1236 and UL 1481 standards in their most recent version.
The batteries shall be of a sealed type that does not require
maintenance.
g. The detection system shall be capable of performing a
continuous battery inspection for disconnection, short-circuit
and on-load testing in the case of electrical outage.
17.9 Display units
a. In applications in which a suction detector is located in a locked
and unmanned installation, a secondary display shall be installed
outside of the installation that provides at least the following
indications:
1) Normal
2) Alert
3) Alarm
4) Fault in the detection system.
b. The display unit shall enable control of the detector unit with the
level of the following functions:
1) Reset
2) Isolate
3) Neutralization of devices connected to the outlet relays
4) Test.
Page 189 of 252

17.10 Network
a. A network of suction detectors shall be established.
Since the manner of forming a network is different along various
manufacturers, the following functional characterization is
provided.
b. All of the points in the network (protectors, displays, etc.) shall
be installed in a closed loop.
c. The Contractor shall assume a communications infrastructure
for connecting the network points through an RS-485 port.

34.01.4. Guidelines for installation, signage and marking
1. General
1.1 Unless noted otherwise, signage shall be installed using engraved
white on red laminated signs attached to the wall using two screws.
1.2 Sign text shall be in Hebrew
1.3 All system devices (horns, pushbuttons, addressable units, etc.)
shall bear signs of the name of the device in Hebrew.
1.4 Recessing of the system devices in the wall shall be performed in
accordance with the CORs requirements.
2. Control panel
2.1 The control panel shall be connected to a separate circuit breaker in
the electrical board.
A red sign: Fire Detection Control Panel shall be installed next to
appropriate MCB in the electrical board.
2.2 Wiring in the control panel shall be indicated with flags marked
with a waterproof marker.
A sign for 230V feed shall be installed.
All wires shall be attached to the sidewalls of the control panel
enclosure and, to the extent possible, inserted into a flexible annular
conduit.
2.3 A sign shall be placed on the control panel with the wording [in
Hebrew]: This control panel is fed from the ______ circuit in the
_____ electrical board.
2.4 Near the control panel or on it, a sign shall be installed with
operating instructions:
An A4 size page within a frame with glass front cover.
Contents of the page shall include:
a. Basic instructions for use in the case of an alarm and fault
b. Automatic dialer subscribers and the message contents.
c. The contents of the page shall be approved by the COR.
In addition, an identical sign shall be installed next to each sub-
panel (if existing in the system).
Page 190 of 252

3. Smoke/heat detectors
3.1 The address of each analog smoke detector in a circuit shall be
marked using a laminated sign or with a P-touch sticker in the
direction of the entrance to the room.
3.2 The detector shall be installed so that its LED will be in the
direction of the entrance to the room.
3.3 Installation of smoke detectors in electrical boards and floating
floors shall be performed in accordance with the details found in
Appendix A.
4. Fire detection / extinguishing pushbutton
4.1 The pushbutton shall be installed at a height of 1.10-1.40 cm.
A sign [in Hebrew] reading: Fire Detection Pushbutton shall be
installed next to the pushbutton.
5. Horns
5.1 Interiors horn shall be installed at a height of at least 2.5m.
5.2 Exterior horns integrated with a blinker indicator:
a. Exterior horns shall be installed so as not to be masked by
building beams, awnings and trees from the direction of access
to the building.
b. Sealing shall be performed using silicone between the horn and
the building wall.
5.3 A sign [in Hebrew] shall be installed under the horn reading: Fire
Detection Horn.
The letters height shall be sufficient for comfortable reading (height
dependent).
6. Indication lamps
6.1 Indication lamps for smoke detectors installed above an acoustical
ceiling shall be installed bellow the acoustic ceiling, under the fire
detector.
The indication lamp shall be installed on the T-bars junction.
The indication lamp shall bear a sign [in Hebrew] reading:
Detector in ceiling.
6.2 Indication lamps for smoke detectors installed under a floating floor
shall be installed on the wall closest to the location of the detector
and shall bear a sign [in Hebrew] reading: Detector under floor.
6.3 Indication lamps for concealed smoke detectors shall be installed
on the wall closest to the space in which the fire detector is installed
and shall bear a sign [in Hebrew] reading: Detector in .
precisely describing the location of the detector.
Page 191 of 252

6.4 Indication lamps for smoke detectors installed in an electrical board
shall be installed on a 10x10 cm box attached to the upper side of
the board. The cable shall be inserted into a reinforced flexible
conduit. The connection to the box via cable gland
The box shall bear a sign [in Hebrew] reading: Detector in
electrical board.
7. Automatic fire extinguishing system
7.1 A sign [in Hebrew] shall be attached to the electrical board reading:
This board is protected by an automatic fire extinguishing
system.
7.2 Adjacent to the fire extinguishing tank, a sign [in Hebrew] shall be
installed reading: Automatic fire extinguishing system.
7.3 The gas canisters shall bear the manufacturers original sticker on
which the fill date, gas pressure, net gas weight and weight of the
gas with the tank shall be indicated.
7.4 The Gas tank shall be anchored to the wall. The installation shall be
sufficiently stable to carry the full tank weight.
7.5 The tank shall not be anchored to plaster walls etc.
7.6 The nominal gas pressure shall be 360 psi @ 21C.
7.7 Tanks with weight of 50 Kg or higher shall include liquid level
indicator.
8. Automatic dialer
8.1 An automatic dialer shall be installed in the control panel or within
a sealed metal box outside of the panel.
8.2 The dialer box shall bear a sign [in Hebrew] reading: Automatic
Dialer.
9. Air-conditioning duct detectors
9.1 The detector's location shall be in accordance with the requirements
of NFPA 72, Section A.2.10./ The proposed location shall be
submitted for the COR's approval.
9.2 In exterior installation, the entry of the sampling pipe into the return
air ducts shall be sealed with silicone.
9.3 If damage is caused to the air-conditioning ducts, the contractor
shall seal the damaged location using a suitable sheet metal patch.

10. Installation of flood detectors shall be performed in accordance with the
detail found in Appendix A.
11. Definitions for use of various types of infrastructure
11.1 The following instructions are general and shall be applied if no
other instructions are provided in the plans.
11.2 Within the building above acoustical ceilings self-extinguishing
Page 192 of 252

conduit (Merikaf).
11.3 Within the building in administrative areas in white conduit.
11.4 Within the building in technical areas or outside of the building
heavy rigid conduit (Meriron).
11.5 Outside of the building and in any case where wiring is installed
without conduits (as for example, on trays) NYY cable.
11.6 Within floating floors between branch boxes for detectors flexible
annular conduit.
11.7 In electrical boards between branch boxes for detectors flexible
annular conduit.
11.8 Fire extinguisher system flexible annular conduit.
11.9 Blast-resistant areas metal conduit.
11.10 Selection of type of wiring: 2-pair or twisted shielded as defined by
the control panel manufacturer.
12. Suction detectors
12.1 Following preliminary operation of the suction detection unit, the
Contractor shall perform monitoring for a period of one month in
order to determine optimal values for detector sensitivity, alarm
thresholds and delay times. During the monitoring period, the COR
shall, in coordination with the Contractor, operate all work regimes
at the site that may cause an increase in smoke emissions.
12.2 Acceptance inspection shall also include a practical test of the
systems using a smoke generator.
34.01.5. Description of the work
1. Systems Manual
1.1 A prior condition for performance of acceptance inspections of the
building is the preparation of a System Manual. In addition to the
provisions of the contract, the System Manual shall include:
1.2 Contents of the System Manual:
a. An operating instruction page for the system (identical to the
instruction page installed next to the control panel).
b. A bill of quantities for the equipment installed (description, P/N,
manufacturer, quantity).
c. A listing of zones/addresses (for the analog systems, a software
file of the system on a diskette).
d. A description of operating logic: disconnection of electricity and
air-conditioning, operation of fire extinguishing.
e. Manufacturers catalog sheets with technical data and catalogs
(manufacturers catalog numbers) for each item in the system.
f. As-made drawings + a diskette with the drawings in AutoCAD
Page 193 of 252

DWG format.
g. A report on the calculation of battery capacity in accordance
with NFPA requirements for 72 hours of operation on standby
and 5 minutes of full operation of all devices.
h. For the fire extinguishing systems: computer simulation using
UL-approved software, including 3-D isometrics, parts report,
piping network report, tank data report [and] commissioning
approval report for the protected area.
i. An installation manual for the control panel.
j. In special cases, as for example, a barrier for the explosion proof
system, a detailed connection chart shall be attached.
k. In cases that suction detector is installed, a configuration report
of the programmed parameters shall be attached.
1.3 The system manual will be inspected by the COR during the first
acceptance inspection and shall be revised as necessary in
accordance with his requirements.
1.4 Following COR approval, the manual shall be submitted in five
copies.
2. Acceptance inspection
2.1 The system will be inspected based on the shop drawings in
accordance with the final configuration as approved by the COR,
and according to the requirements of NFPA 72 and IS 1220
standards.
The Contractor shall advise the COR in any case in which it finds
mismatches in the design, or if a constraint is discovered during the
course of installation itself that does not allow full implementation
of the requirements of these standards.
2.2 In the framework of the acceptance inspections, the operation of all
components of the systems will be tested. The Contractor shall be
equipped with materials and tools required to perform functional
tests of the system devices (such as smoke simulation spray for
testing detectors, filters for testing beam detectors and ladders).
Performance of smoke testing [will be performed] at the discretion
of the COR.
2.3 After the installation completion, the contractor shall submit the ISI
test report.
Mismatches caused by IAF reasons (no telephone line, shut down
procedures etc) shall be subject for the COR considerations.
2.4 If defects are found during the inspection, the COR will transmit a
defects report to the Contractor with instructions for performing
corrective actions.
2.5 Following full correction of all defects, the Contractor shall
coordinate a date for again performing acceptance inspections with
the COR. Any additional acceptance inspections that stem from the
Page 194 of 252

failure to fully correct all the defects that arose during the first
inspection by the COR will obligate the Contractor to provide
compensation in accordance with the CORs instructions.
3. Training
3.1 During the acceptance inspections, training shall be provided for
occupants of the building for the following subjects:
a. A general description of the fire protection system.
b. Actions in the case of alarm/fault (silencing/reset).
c. Basic preventive maintenance.
3.2 In addition, during the acceptance inspection, more advanced
training shall be held for a representative of the end-user that shall
include (in addition to the aforesaid) the following subjects:
a. Receipt of information about the control panel (history of
faults).
b. Basic faults in the control panel and means of handling them
(such as batteries, neutralizing faulted devices, etc.).
3.3 Advanced training shall be provided to the main fire protection
department of the IAF. This training is designed to provide the IAF
fire detection department with full information on subjects related
to preventive maintenance and breakdown maintenance of the
system without any commercial secrets withheld by the
Contractor.
a. Comprehensive training of the software used to manage the
detector array (addition of devices, neutralization, operating
logic). The software (including a Hebrew conversion module)
shall be submitted for use by the IDF on a CD-ROM and shall
be installed by the Contractor on the CORs portable computer.
If operation of the software requires a software plug, this shall
also be supplied to the COR. The COR undertakes to use the
software only for the purpose of maintenance of the systems
installed by the Contractor and not to transfer it to any third
party. If revisions of the software are distributed by the
equipment manufacturer (updates, patches), the revised version
shall be transmitted to the COR.
b. Detection control panel installation, according to the installation
manual.
c. Introduction with the control panel's components.
d. Other subjects as required by the COR.
3.4 Acceptance of the installation
a. Acceptance of the installation shall be given only at the
conclusion of the acceptance inspection process, the submittal of
the System Manual and performance of training.
Page 195 of 252

4. General
4.1 Threshold requirements for fire protection works
a. The contractor must be certified in accordance with the ISO
9002 standard.
b. The contractor shall be able to supply all the types of equipment
described in Section 34.
c. The contractor shall have proven experience of at least 5 years
in the installation and maintenance of automatic fire detection
and extinguishing systems.
d. The contractor shall be authorized by the manufacturer to design
and install the specific systems that it proposes. The Contractor
shall have UL-approved commissioning software in its
possession.
e. The contractor shall be capable of supplying replacement parts
for the systems that it is installing for period of at least 7 years.
f. The Contractor shall be obligated for a warranty period of 24
months from the date of acceptance of completion of the
work. This warranty shall include maintenance and service in
accordance with NFPA 72 requirements:
1) Serviceable operation of the system components: end
devices, infrastructure, batteries, etc.
2) Provision of service: Repair of breakdowns and
performance of preventive maintenance during the
warranty period within 24 hours of a call during all hours
of the day.
3) Replacement of parts and assemblies that have faulted or
that have broken down during normal operation of the
system not the fault of the user.
Page 196 of 252

5. Attachments
5.1 Appendix A Detector Installation Details

End of Chapter 34-1 Special Specification

Smoke detector in electrical board top view Smoke detector in electrical board cross-section
Smoke detector in electrical board on stand on the door
Smoke detector in floating floor on a stand
Device for lowering a detector under a ceiling in
exposed installation
Hinge
Hinge
Smoke
detector
Smoke
detector
Smoke
detector
Opening in
board
Detector
panel
Junction box
Flexible
annular
pipe
Upper side
of board
Base
Detector
Board
Board door in
closing direction
R stand
Connection plate to ceiling 4 screws
Stainless steel pipe conduits with
variable length 6-100 cm
Connection plate for detector base
Base connected
with 4 screws

Page 197 of 252

34.02 FM-200 Fire Extinguishing System

34.02.1. General
1. Chapter 34 of the Host Nation Technical Requirements shall be read in
conjunction with this Special Specification which constitutes the extent
of the Work with regard to FM-200 Fire Extinguishing System. In the
event of conflict these special specifications shall prevail over the
HNTR.
2. Description of the work:
2.1 Installation of automatic fire extinguishing systems using
environmentally friendly FM-200 extinguishing agent. The
systems are using a flooding method in each of the rooms and
areas marked in the attached drawings and in the floating floor
spaces.
2.2 The installation of sealants resistant to gas leaks and the fire
spread (in the locations required) in all openings made for the
passage of piping and utilities that will be installed by the
Contractor as part of the extinguishing systems.
2.3 (Note: A system includes a canister or group of canisters is
connected to a single main supply/distribution pipe and services
one continuous space in the building.)
2.4 Performance of all tests required in this Specification, including
participation in the handover of the system.
2.5 Receipt of approval by the Israel Standards Institute for the
installation work performed and with respect to the serviceability
and usability of the extinguishing system and its compliance with
the requirements of relevant standards.
2.6 Preparation of shop drawings and calculations of the extinguishing
system for the C.O.R approval.
2.7 Preparation and handover of the as-built drawings as detailed in
this Specification.
2.8 Provision of training courses for the operation of the system and
its regular maintenance to the CORs operating and maintenance
personnel.
2.9 Provision of a warranty for all components of the system for a
period of 24 months from the date of acceptance of the system by
the COR.
3. Additional guidelines:
3.1 The company/contractor supplying the equipment and installing it
shall be an authorized agent of the equipment manufacturer and/or
authorized by a local agent.
3.2 1.3.2 The Contractor shall submit all certificates and
technical specifications required in accordance with this
Specification for the COR's approval prior to the installation..
3.3 1.3.3 All components of the fire detection and extinguishing
system shall be of a single manufacturer. If a combination of two
systems of different manufacturers is proposed, each of the

Page 198 of 252

systems separately shall have the standards certification as
required by this Specification, and a written certificate from a
recognized laboratory/Standards institute shall be appended
approving the combination of the systems.
3.4 1.3.4 All components of the system, including detectors,
alarm and activation pushbuttons, fire detection/extinguishing
control panels, gas canisters, extinguishing gas, canister activation
mechanisms and all the components specified hereinafter in this
Specification shall have UL and FM approval unless indicated
otherwise hereinafter in this Specification.
3.5 1.3.5 All equipment components specified in this
Specification and all labor at all stages and in all components of
the system shall comply with all the requirements specified in the
standards and codes of the General Specification for Fire
Detection & Extinguishing Systems, Section 34, as well as the
American codes/standard National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA) Code No. 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing
Systems (in its most recent version).
34.02.2. Technical guidelines
1. General
The gas extinguishing system includes a canister or group of canisters
connected to a single main supply/distribution pipe designated for
extinguishing in a single continuous central space in the building.
2. Detection and extinguishing control panel
2.1 Operation of the extinguishing system is performed through a
main fire detection control panel located in the building.
2.2 In addition to the requirements of the detection system as specified
in the technical specification, the detection system control panel
shall integrally include an automatic evacuation system.
2.3 The evacuation system shall include audio amplifiers as required
and an electronic system to record evacuation notifications (at
least three different notifications).
3. Warning and evacuation element
In rooms in which an automatic extinguishing system will be installed,
the following warning and evacuation devices shall be installed:
3.1 Speakers for announcing evacuation notifications prior to
operation of the extinguishing system.
The speakers shall be of an UL approved type and shall include a
case for exterior installation on a wall and a line control device.
The speakers shall include a blinker.
3.2 Illuminated warning signs with a smoke penetrating color with the
writing [in Hebrew] Fire extinguishing system in operation. The
size of the letters shall be at least 12 cm.
4. Shut off of air-conditioning operation
The air-conditioning system in the communications rooms shall shut off
automatically when fire/smoke is detected in the halls.
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the shutoff of the
air-conditioning with the electrical subcontractor.

Page 199 of 252

5. Operation of motorized fire dampers in the air conditioning ducts
5.1 The operation of fire dampers in the air conditioning ducts shall be
performed following the fire alarm signal activated from the
control panel upon discovery of smoke by the system.
5.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the control of
the fire dampers with the air-conditioning subcontractor.
6. Gas fire extinguishing system general
The gas fire extinguishing system shall comply with all the requirements
of the NFPA 2001 standard and the requirements of Section 34 of the
General Specification, other than the requirements that specifically relate
to Halon 1301 gas and which are not applicable or contradict the
requirements of the NFPA standard.
Control of the gas extinguishing system and its operation shall be
performed from the system control panel. A time delay for gas release
operation can be programmed into the system, according to the C.O.R's
instructions.
Supply of the control panel and programming is described in the other
sections of this Specification/Contract.
All components of the extinguishing system gas, canisters, valves and
actuators, gas dispersal nozzles, manual activation pushbuttons, shut off
pushbuttons shall be UL and FM approved as compatible for working
with one another and together with the fire detection and extinguishing
control panel.
Note: Preference will be given to equipment manufactured by the same
manufacturer.
7. Fire extinguishing gas
Fire extinguishing agent in the extinguishing system shall be FM-200
type (Heptafluoropropane) with a quality grade as specified in the NFPA
2001 code, Section in 1.1-2.
The concentration of gas during operation of the extinguishing by
flooding shall be 8% V/V at a temperature of 25C, or another
concentration as shall be decided by the COR at the time of submittal of
the shop drawings by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall inspect on site (and not in accordance with the
drawings) the precise volume of each of the spaces designated for
flooding and shall calculate the quantity of gas required.
The quantity of gas indicated in the drawings is for estimation purposes
only.
The gas shall be stored in dedicated pressure canisters (see below) in a
liquid state under natural pressure of 66 psig at room temperature. For
the purpose of rapid release from the canisters, dry nitrogen gas with a
pressure of 360 psig or other pressure approved by the manufacturer
shall be compressed.
8. Gas canisters and valves
The extinguishing gas shall be stored in modular steel pressure canisters
designed for the storage of FM-200 gas. The quantity of gas in each
canister and the working pressure of the canister shall be subject to the
manufacturers approval.
Each canister shall bear an affixed sign specifying the type of gas, net
weight of the canister, overall weight, and permitted super-pressurization
level.
Each canister shall include an integral safety washer designed to be

Page 200 of 252

broken during an uncontrolled increase of pressure in the canister.
All canisters that are connected to a common manifold shall be
interchangeable and of the same physical size.
Each canister shall be equipped with an integral dedicated pressure
gauge with a color scale enabling quick reading of the pressure range in
the canister.
The gas release valve shall be of the solenoid type designed for
electrical activation by the system control panel.
Use shall not be made of pyrotechnic actuators or other means that
require the replacement of accessories and/or components for the
purpose of reuse after their operation.
The canisters shall in addition include manual actuators (with safety
pins).
The canister, release valves and gas piping array shall be designed and
installed in order to enable flooding of the appropriate space with the
entire quantity of gas in the canister/s within 10 seconds.
9. Extinguishing gas piping
The gas distribution piping shall be made from seamless non-galvanized
steel as specified in the FDA 2001 standard.
The piping shall be cleaned thoroughly by the injection of air under high-
pressure prior to installation in order to ascertain the absence of foreign
particles within it.|
All components of the piping shall be painted using a protective base
paint against rusting and with a red topcoat prior to their installation on
site. Repairs to the paint will be permitted on site only in the pipe
threading area in coordination with and with the knowledge of the COR.
The piping shall be supported and anchored by clasps and standard
hanging devices as specified in the General Specification Section 34 and
the NFPA standard while taking into consideration anticipated static and
dynamic loading.
The diameter of the piping and its various components shall be
determined by computerized calculations of the dual-phase flow in the
pipes (see below).
Extinguishing piping within the room space shall pass above the
suspended ceiling of the rooms and the corridor. Extinguishing piping
within the floor space shall pass under the floating floor.
10. Pipe connection accessories
Pipe connections shall be made by threading with the use of conical
threaded connectors in accordance with the NPT standard.
The connecting accessories shall be made from steel, adapted to working
pressures not less than the maximum working pressure of the gas
canister.
The connecting accessories shall be painted as per the piping.
11. Gas dispersal nozzles
The dispersal nozzles shall be dedicated with coverage of 360 or 180,
individually adapted to the areas, the required gas concentration in each
area, and the flow calculations of the system.
Each nozzle shall bear a manufacturers marking and data regarding gas
apertures diameter.
12. Manual operation extinguishing pushbutton
The system shall include electrical pushbuttons for manual activation of
the gas extinguishing mechanism.
The pushbuttons shall be of a type that requires a two-phase action for

Page 201 of 252

their operation and which prevents erroneous operation of the
extinguishing system.
The activation pushbuttons of the gas system shall be separate from the
alarm pushbuttons with a different structure and color and shall be
marked accordingly to prevent unintended operation.
13. Abort pushbutton
A pushbutton for the cancellation of the gas flooding process at a stage
after fire detection shall have a different form and color than the alarm
pushbuttons and the gas activation pushbuttons.
The pushbutton shall be of a type that requires continuous manual
pressure in order to operate it so as to prevent dispersal of the gas.
Operation of the abort pushbutton shall be accompanied by special
audiovisual indications in the control panel.
34.02.3. Work regime fire detection and extinguishing
1. Activation of any detector whatsoever and/or alarm pushbutton will be
accompanied by:
1.1 A light/sound indication in the control panel, including an
alphanumeric report on the type and address of the detector.
1.2 Activation of the warning alarm from the system horns in the
entire site area.
1.3 Shutoff of all air conditioners.
1.4 Closing of all fire dampers connected to the system.
1.5 Activation of the telephone dialer in the work regime as
preprogrammed.
2. Activation of a second detector (in addition to and simultaneously with
the activation of the first detector) and/or activation of an extinguishing
pushbutton shall be accompanied by:
2.1 The activation of an alarm with a different tone than the warning
alarm in the same area designated for the flooding of gas for the
purpose of evacuating the area of its occupants as preparation for
flooding with gas.
2.2 The start of a countdown for a period of time as determined in
advance (between 0 and 75 seconds) in order to enable a delay to
evacuate the area or to activate the abort pushbutton.
2.3 Activation of the gas system in the area designated for flooding at
the conclusion of the countdown.
2.4 Activation of an illuminated sign (in Hebrew): Extinguishing has
been activated.
3. Operation of the abort extinguishing pushbutton will cause:
3.1 A change in the audio alarm tone and provision of an appropriate
indication in the control panel warning of the operation of the
extinguishing abort mechanism.
3.2 Discontinuation of the countdown process as long as the
pushbutton remains in an operated condition.
Cancellation of the pushbutton activation under conditions of a
continued detected status will bring about the continuation of the
countdown prior to operation of the gas system.

Page 202 of 252

Activation of the extinguishing pushbutton at a time when the
abort pushbutton is operated will have preference over the abort
operation and will bring about activation of the gas system.
4. Signage of system components
The Contractor shall supply all signage for all system components
supplied and installed by him.
The size of the sign, its form, material composition and engraving will be
determined by the COR.
5. Calculation of flow and detailed shop drawings
The quantities of gas required in each of the protected spaces, the
number of canisters, piping runs and characterization of gas nozzles are
based on an estimate and subject to the design principles found in the
NFPA and the various equipment manufacturers.
The Contractor shall submit flow calculations in the pipes for approval
by the the COR, which shall be performed using dedicated software
approved by UL and FM for calculating the flow of FM-200 gas.
The calculations shall show liquid/gas pressures at various points along
the piping, required piping diameters in all components of the system,
the equivalent length of piping accessories and gas canister valves,
dispersal nozzle diameters and pressure drops at the nozzles.
The calculations shall prove the ability of the system to disperse the gas
in the spaces and to reach the required concentration of 8%, or other
concentration as will be determined, within 10 seconds.
The Contractor shall perform repeat computer simulations insofar as
required so that the gas dispersal piping will be as appearing in the tender
drawings.
If the flow calculations indicate a necessity to change the piping run
and/or location of nozzles as described in the drawings, the Contractor
shall prepare suitable flow calculations for the proposed piping run at its
own expense and submit them for the approval of the COR.
6. Sealing of the rooms against gas leak and fire spread
The Contractor shall seal all openings for the passage of cables, piping,
other systems or any other opening in the floating floor spaces and in the
dropped ceilings against gas leak. The Contractor shall reinforce panels
in the suspended ceiling in order to prevent loosening from their location
when the gas is emitted.
7. Acceptance tests
Acceptance tests of the system shall be performed in accordance with a
testing protocol as specified in the relevant NFPA standards, Israel
Standard 1220, Section 34 of the General Specification and in
accordance with existing written testing instructions of the equipment
manufacturer.
All components of the system shall be tested in accordance with the
testing instructions of the manufacturer designated for it.
Any correction and/or change required to be made as a condition for
approval of the system by the COR shall be performed by the Contractor
immediately.
8. As-Built drawings
The Contractor shall prepare detailed as-built drawings that have been
drawn by a professional draftsperson, based on customary drafting
standards, which precisely describe the location of each of the system
components, including (but not limited to) the location and type of gas

Page 203 of 252

canisters, piping runs and diameters, location of hangers, location of
dispersal nozzles, all as installed by it on site.
The as-built drawings shall present each system separately at a scale of
1:50, including isometric drawings; in addition, as-made drawings shall
be submitted in plan view at a scale of 1:100 describing all of the
systems installed on a complete floor for each separate floor.
The as-built drawings shall be drawn using AutoCAD 2007.
The as-built drawings shall be delivered to the COR in five copies as part
of the conditions for acceptance of the system.
9. Israel Standards Institute inspection
In coordination with the COR and at its own expense, the Contractor
shall summon the Israel Standards Institute in order to perform tests of
the system in order to ascertain its compliance with the requirements of
the NFPA 2001 standard and Israel Standard 1220.
Any correction and/or change required to be performed as a condition for
approval of the system by the Israel Standards Institute shall be
performed by the Contractor immediately; performance of the
corrections in accordance with the recommendations of the Israel
Standards Institute and the cost of retesting by the Institute shall be
performed at the Contractors expense.
Note: It is hereby recommended that the Contractor submit the basic
drawings attached to the tender accompanied by detailed drawings and a
detailing of the equipment that it intends to install for prior approval by
the Israel Standards Institute. Approval of equipment items by the COR
does not provide a guarantee for later approval by the Israel Standards
Institute.
Responsibility for ascertaining the compatibility of the equipment and
workmanship with the requirements of the Israel Standards Institute is
imposed on the Contractor.
Note: The COR retains the right not to be assisted by the services of the
Israel Standards Institute for testing of the system, but rather to perform
the compliance testing of the system with the requirements in this
Specification and the mandatory standards using other means at its
disposal.
10. Warranty of the system
The Contractor shall be responsible for the serviceability and faultless
operation of the system with all its assemblies and components for period
of 24 months (the warranty period) from the date of its official
acceptance (approved in writing) by the COR.
During the warranty period, the Contractor shall repair any defect,
deficiency, fault and/or breakdown that will be discovered in the
equipment, in the hardware, software and installations that it has
supplied and/or installed in the framework of its work at its sole expense
and within 24 hours of the time of notification of the defect.
11. Provision of service for the system
The tendering Contractor shall prove that it has the ability to perform
maintenance and service works for the proposed system in accordance
with the instructions of the equipment manufacturer.
The Contractor shall prove that it has the appropriate equipment at its
disposal for testing of the sensitivity of the detectors in the field and in
the laboratory. In addition, it must have in its possession all accessory
instrumentation required for regular maintenance of the proposed
equipment in accordance with the requirements of the equipment

Page 204 of 252

manufacturer.
The Contractor shall maintain all replacement parts in its warehouses
required for the proposed equipment in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations for the equipping of a parts inventory,
as well as a sufficient supply of extinguishing gas, replacement gas
canisters, discharge valves from the canisters with all their components
required for performing the maintenance and service works for a period
of at least nine years.
The Contractor undertakes to respond to any service call within 6 hours
of the time of the call during all hours of the day; a telephone notification
to the Contractors office shall be considered as a notification of a
breakdown.

The offerorshall submit samples of the following specifications:
11.1 A periodic service report specification for every six months.
11.2 A service report specification for every twelve months.
11.3 All approvals and technical specifications for providing periodic
service as required by the manufacturers instructions. Half-year
inspections shall be held for all system components in the presence
of the COR, and the Contractor shall issue an appropriate service
report.

End of Chapter 34-2 Special Specification

Page 205 of 252

Chapter 44 - Fencing and Gates works

44.01 2 Meter High Solid Metal Fence
1. New tin sheets -Type Fence Route
The precise route would be set at the tour with the entrepreneur, COR and the
representatives of the base. The contractor shall mark the fence's route with
pre-made stakes. The inspector should approve the route marked at the plans
receives from the entrepreneur.
2. Groundworks
The contractor, subject to their approval, shall conduct leveling, (excavation
and filling up to 20cm) to at least 97% Mod.AASHTO works. Strip width of
1m at least.
Fence bottom height would be at least 10cm from the leveled ground surface.
3. Foundations
a. Excavation of the foundations for the fence poles and supports would
be conducted after the completion of the fence's route marking,
identification of the existing subsoil infrastructures and leveling of the
area described.
b. Basic size of a fence pole and supporters depth 60cm, diameter
30cm; the profile would be inside the foundation at the depth of 50cm
for pole and 30cm for the support.
c. In a case of landslide from whatever reason, the contractor shall dig or
drill anew and to amend any damage caused by the landslide.
d. Foundations of fence poles and their inclined supports would be made
from concrete B-20.
e. Concrete at the foundations would be condensed along its whole depth.
4. Fence Poles
a. Fence poles would be made of rectangular 80/40 profile with wall
thickness of 2mm at least from galvanized steel.
b. Overall pole length would be 2.60m.
c. The distance between pole axes would be 2m.
d. The poles would be galvanized by deep immersion in hot zinc with
coating layers as required by the standards.
e. The contractor shall procure a document confirming the matching to
the minimal galvanization thickness from the factory for each shipment
for this job.
f. In a case of non-uniform galvanization thickness, profile surface
covered with bubbles, etc., or from any other reason, a laboratory test
(approved by the inspection) shall be carried out on the contractor's
expense to determine the precise galvanization thickness.
5. Supporting Poles
a. The supporting poles would be from a rectangular 60/40 profile with
wall thickness of 2mm, heat-galvanized, according to the standards.

Page 206 of 252

b. Supporting pole length would be 2.40m, the pole would be made from
"galvanizable steel" and shall be galvanized as above.
c. Each fifth pole would have a support pole at the fence perpendicularly
from its inner side.
d. Each corner pole shall have two supporting poles from galvanized
steel.
e. The support poles would be connected to the fence poles at an angle of
30 degrees with a double-nut 3/8 screw.
f. All the connectors and connecting parts shall be made from non-
corrosive steel.
g. The support poles shall be anchored in the ground foundations as
specified.
h. Corner poles would be supported identically at perpendicular
directions.
6. Covering with Tin sheets
a. The covering would be made from cream-colored tin sheets.
b. Tin thickness 0.55cm.
c. Board height 2m.
d. The boards would be lifted from the ground surface by 10cm.
e. Connection of the boards and connection to poles with screws at
proper diameter according to board manufacturer recommendations.
7. Galvanization Repairs
a. All the required galvanization repairs shall be conducted after the fence
installation and shall include:
b. Preparation of the area by mechanical cleaning.
c. Painting , two layers of COR approved gray mat paint.

44.02 Gate

Gate 3.5 m Width
1. Gate Poles
The gate pole is made from square 150/150mm profile, wall thickness 5mm.
To the upper side a "cap" from galvanized 5mm thick tin is welded. The "cap"
should be welded in the profile's interior.
2. Division Frame and Profiles
The wing's division frame and profile would be from square 60/40 profile with
4mm thick wall.
3. Pole Base
The pole would be set in concrete base of 100/100cm size and 100cm depth.
B-30 concrete type cast under medium control conditions, with the base
surface at the development level minus 5cm.
4. Welding

Page 207 of 252

All the welding, with no exception, would be done at the factory prior to the
galvanization process.

5. Gate Net
The net would be made from hard steel wires in a grid of 150/50mm from
strewn steel wires, 5mm in diameter.
The wires would be connected by electric resistant, automatically controlled
electric welding adjusted to the thickness of the wires.
6. Locks and Bars
6.1 Bottom Bar
The gate wing would have bottom bar for stopping and fixing in
industrial steel base. The base would be set in the asphalt road (when
the wing closed) in a B-20 concrete base of 10cm thickness at least.
Additional base would also be set perpendicularly to the gate when the
wing is open by 90 degrees.
6.2 Middle Bar
Bar for closing of the gate would be installed at the middle of the gate
on top on the frame and the dividing profile of the wing.
7. Lock
The middle lock would have an option of locking the wings with a "heavy"
model manual lock with a set of 3 keys. Purchasing of the lock would be done
in the presence of the entrepreneur's representative and would be delivered to
him with the purchase.

8. Galvanization
All the gate parts (except the stainless steel parts) are galvanized by immersion
in hot zinc according to 918 Israeli Standard.
9. Tying
The fence would be connected to the gate poles with galvanized and industrial
accessories only.


Page 208 of 252

Chapter 51 - Site Development Works

51.01 Demolition and Dismantling

A. General

1. Any waste that will be created shall be removed to an approval disposal site
out of the campus. The contractor shell submits authorizations from the
disposal site.

2. Any bore that has been created by demolition works, dismantling or
uprooting will be fill with selected fill material without stones more then 10
cm. including compacting at the material for at least 97% accordance with
AASHTO.
3. Dismantling of any kind of reinforced concrete elements in any size will
include concrete bas dismantling as well in any depth.

4. Mature trees uprooting at any height and of any kind or diameter is include.
Sewing of the tree trunk 1/0 m above ground level and uprooting the stump
and trees roots at any depth.

5. Dismantling of elements for future use such as: traffic signs, flag pole will
include base demolition, storage at working site area and installation
including B-20 concrete bases same as exist.

6. Concrete walkways dismantling, paving walkways or any other kind of
walkways are include evacuate of sand and base material, compacting of the
natural soil after the evacuation to at least 97% Mod. AASHTO.

7. Manholes height fitting of any kind and at any diameter will be execute as
follow:
- Masonry of the manhole concrete to expose steel burrs or drilling
and insertion of 12 mm diameter and 30 cm steel bars rein forced
with concrete every 30 cm.
- Completion with B-30 concrete up to needed elevation.
- Completion with B-30 concrete up to needed elevation.
- Completion of ladder steps if exist.
- Matching of manhole ring and cover to the paving elevation.
- Adaption around the manholes cover. Manholes fitting will be
made prior to paving completion.

8. Dismantling of concrete asphalt pavement includes road structure layers
dismantling and compacting the existing soil (after dismantling) to 100%
Mod. AASHTO.

9. Demolition and dismantling works will be executed in all working site area
including new elements that will be discovered during work.

10. All items above are including in the price.

Page 209 of 252

51.02 Earth works

1. Stripping and area Clean Up
The stripping will be 15 cm. depth at all marked areas in all project borders.
Stripping material will be disposed of to an approved waste site.

2. Excavation
Excavation and or quarrying will be execute in all kind of existing soils at all
project borders including roads, lots and ditches.

3. a. Sub grade and lots compaction
Sub grade and lot compaction will be executed at all areas that are
designated to be cover with bas material includes curbstones base area.
The compaction will be according to section 510263 of the HNTR
b. Soil Boring LogsThe contractor shall refer to the Soil Boring Logs.

4. a. Fill Compaction
Fill material compaction to the requirement at section 510263 of
HNTR at 20 cm. thickness layers and at optional wetness field tests
will be next to layers execution.

b. The fill bellow the subase (capping) shall be granular semi
impervious material that complies with the following requirements:

Fines content (material passing the #200 ASTM sieve) 35% but
20%.
Fine sand content (material passing the #40 ASTM sieve) 40%.
Gravel content (material larger than #4 ASTM sieve) 50%.
Liquid Limit 35%
Plasticity Index 10%
Grain size 50 mm
Does not contain Organic material or waste material of any type.

Soils type A-1-b, A-2-4, A-2-5, A-2-6 and A-2-7 according to
AASHTO may be used.

For A-2 type material the compaction shall be performed at optimal
water content +4%.

The use of fine grained quarry waste, inert material that does not
comply with the above requirements is allowed.

The fill shall be done in no more than 20 cm layers, compacted with at
least 10 passes of a heavy Vibratory roller compactor (Minimal static
weight of 5 Tons) to a Dry Density of 98% obtained from "Modified
AASHTO".
The capping shall not be less than 80 cm bellow the base layers.

Page 210 of 252

The finished slope of the soil cover layer shall be 5% downwards from
the top of the platform (with the addition of 50 cm) to the toe of the
FILL.

5. Imported fill material
The material will be clean and from uniform in gradients without vegetation
waste, organic materials or more then 12 cm. stones and as defined in section
14b this specification.
The material will be from approved quarrying sites, use of clay, marlstone or
marlstone chalk will not be allowed. The material will be outside the camp
from any distance from the site as required.

51.03 Sub Base Materials and Curbstones

1. Sub Base materials
The sub base material works shall be performed using top-quality crushed
quarry material in accordance with the requirements of the HNTR section
51032 and the standards and upon approval of the Supervisor after laboratory
tests for the quality of the material.
The Contractor shall spread the base material in layers in accordance with the
thicknesses indicated in the drawing details.
Prior to commencing with spreading work, the Contractor shall grid the area in
accordance with the drawings and shall inspect all heights for elevation of the
sub grade and inspect for the compatibility of the sub grade with the
construction drawings.
The sub base material shall be compacted to a density of 100% Mod.
AASHTO for roads and yards and 98% Mod. AASHTO for sidewalks.
2. Curb stones
Curb stones shall be made from concrete 17 Cm. wide and 25 Cm. heights
shall be installed on a B-20 concrete base in accordance with the details in the
drawings, including filling of the gaps between the stones with cement. At
curves, the stones shall be installed in factory-made half and quarter meter
lengths. No extra fee will be paid for lower curb stones.
3. Two slopes channel stone
Precast two slopes channel stone 50X30 cm, 10 cm height. The stone will be
executing on 10 cm B-20 concrete base. Longitudinal slope will be according
related drawings.
4. Gutter Through
Precast gutter through 30/45 cm, 10 cm height installed at the bottom of rain
water pipe 4.

51.04 Asphalt works

Page 211 of 252

1. Wearing course concrete asphalt
4 cm of concrete asphalt wearing course.
4 Cm Asphalt for wearing course. Aggregates grading and asphalt mixture will
be according to 3/4 " grade "A" asphalt for wearing course in sections 510421
, 510423 of the HNTR. As opposed to general Inter ministerial Specification
the bitumen shall be Type PG70-10.

2. Binder Course Concrete Asphalt
4 cm of concrete asphalt binder course.
4 cm Asphalt for binder course. Aggregates grading and asphalt mixture will
be according to 1 " grade "A" asphalt for wearing course in sections 510421 ,
510423 of the HNTR. As opposed to general Inter ministerial Specification
the bitumen shall be Type PG70-10.
3. Base asphalt coating
MS-10 bitumen sprays 1 kg/sqm on upper layer of base material after
supervisor approval. The spray will be executed immediately before asphalt
works and according manufacturer instructions.
4. Connecting Asphalt Coating
Connecting Asphalt coating shall be ss-1 bitumen spraying at a rate of 0.30 kg
per sqm on top of lower asphalt.
5. Asphalt cutting
Asphalt cutting will be made in straights and parallel lines or perpendicular to
road center line with mechanical tool. Before cutting the contractor will mark
with color or wires the cutting lines.
6. Joint Connecting to Existing Asphalt
Joint connection to existing asphalt will be executed according detail in
drawing 6093-03-dwg.
The work will includes sawing of existing upper asphalt layer, dismantling of
existing asphalt, spreading the joint with 80q100 bitumen and firm compaction
along connection line.

7. Sidewalk asphalt
4 cm concrete asphalt for sidewalk asphalt.
Aggregates grading and asphalt mixture will be according to 0.5" grade "A"
in sections 510421 , 510423 of the HNTR.

51.05 Concrete and Drainage works

1. Open Drainage Outlet

Page 212 of 252

Open drainage outlet cover with stone to dram upper water flow. The structure
will be 100 cm wide and 30 cm height.
The structure will be made from reinforce B-30 concrete slab 20q40 cm and
20 cm thickness reinforce concrete floor with sink stone in it.
The slabs will be stuck up 5 cm above the final slope level.

2. Lining of Trenches and Slopes
Lining of trenches and slopes with 10 cm plastic cellular confinement system
with B-20 concrete fill including non woven geotechnical fiber 200 gr/m
2
and
20/65 cm concrete slab at perimeter.
The plastic cellular confinement system will be anchor to the grown with 10
mm stake at least every 2 sqm.
The plastic cellular will be adjusted to slope surface.

3. Concrete Drainage Pipe
Channeling pipes shall be made of reinforced concrete, grade 175 with integral
seal according to IS 27, at various depths as specified in the drawings all
according to the Host Nation Technical Requirements Chapter 57 and the
following supplement: The channel bottom shall be graded and cleared of
excess scarified soil. Any excess excavation, over the excavation specified
shall be filled with dune sand at the contractor sole expanse. The base in all
types of soil shall be made of clean dune sand and cover the entire excavation
width, and at 20 cm off the pipe bottom.
Clean dune sand fill from the base up to 20 cm above the back of the pipe. The
channel over the aforementioned sand wrapping shall be filled with dune sand
layers, 20 cm thick and compacted to 95% density minimum of the maximum
laboratory density up to the sub grade level.
The use of earth as backfill is prohibited. The excavated soil shall be removed
externally to the site to an authorized waste site.

4. Entry and exit Installation
Entry and exit installation for water culverts of all sizes shall be made of B-30
reinforced concrete.
Sharp corners shall be chopped at 2/2 cm cross-section, by means of wooden
or plastic bars fixed in the formwork. The wing floor shall be cast on thin
concrete, 5 cm thick and sub-base as specified in the plan details.

5. Draining chambers
Draining chambers will be carried out by plan no. S-110 of the constructor.
Manholes cover size 90/40 cm.
The cover will be installed on galvanized steel profile 50X50 mm. dimensions.
The steel profile shall be set into the sides of the chambers all 15 cm with
welded steel fibers 14 mm40 cm long.

6. Control chambers (manhole)
The ready mixed control chambers shall comply with the plans and the
contract documents.
The cover of the manhole 60 cm type "medium" comply with is 489.
Dimensions of the manholes are 100/80 cm.

Page 213 of 252

Depth of the manholes shall comply with the plans.
The manholes will be guided on 40 cm bedding layer type A compacted in two
layers 20 cm each to 98% mod. AASHTO.
The work includes the drainage pipe connection to the manholes.

7. As Build Drawings
Prior to final handover of site development works, at least two weeks before,
the contractor should submit as build drawings for designer verification and
approval of all works that were executed in this tender including extra works
that he has ordered to execute during his work.
The drawings will be made by certified surveyor.
The drawings will be submitted similar to design drawings and at the same
scale.
Section works, elevations, attributes, T.L. and I,L. that will be measured will
be at exact location of design drawings.
The drawings will be submitted in soft and hard copy.

51.06 Signposting and painting works
All traffic devices, their painting, marking samples and writing on them shall be
compatible with everything required in the "Signpost Instructions" file found in the
guidelines file of the state laws and with the Ministry of Transportation "guidelines"
regarding the manner of placement of signposts.
1. Signpost posts shall be made from new 3 diameter steel pipes and without
defects. They shall be set within a 50 x 35 x 34 cm concrete base clasped with
anchoring steel. The bottom of the base shall be at least 60 cm deep. The posts
shall not have a cap and its surface (where the pipe is cut) shall be galvanized.
2. Posts shall be made from galvanized steel, both inside and out.
3. Other posts shall be 1.10 m high above the sidewalk.
4. The signposts and signs shall be retro reflective and shall be fabricated in
accordance with everything required in the Supply Specification (March 1968)
and the specification "Retro reflective Roadway Signposts" Document 268, and
the specification "Retro reflective Strips and Bands for Roadway Signposts"
Document 190 issued by the Standards Institution of Israel.
5. The form of the markings shall be as specified in the Guidelines for the Manner of
Placement of Signposts, Chapter D.

6. The paint shall be made especially for the marking of roadways and shall be
compatible with the requirements of Israel Standard 935 "Paints for Roadway
Marking". The color shall be white, red, yellow or black as necessary.
7. Preparation of the roadway surface and its painting shall be in accordance with
Israel Standard 934 "Marking of Roadways, Preparation of Asphalt Surfaces and
Painting of Markings". At least 0.5 liters/square meter of paint shall be used for
painting. The paint shall be applied by machine spraying. Painting with a brush
will not be permitted.

Page 214 of 252

8. The Contractor shall measure the location of marks, their direction or their length
and width well and shall strictly verify their precise painting and cleaning. Any
incorrect or unsightly painting shall be erased by scarifying and repainting to the
Supervisor's satisfaction. Prior to painting, the Contractor shall stretch lines over
the layout of the marking and shall receive the Supervisor's approval.
9. Meter of stripes includes the preparation of the roadway for painting in
accordance with the width as executed, all as specified above.
Signposts and signs that are to be hung on walls, including installation using
screws/bolts.
10. "Cat's eyes" double side shall comply with plan R-102.
11. Rubber Stopping Bumper
Execution of 38/56/7 cm of rubes stopping bumper from industrial made rubber.
The installation on concrete floor with concrete screws according bumper
manufacture instruction.
The bumpers will be black and yellow alternately.
Exact location of the bumpers according to COR.

51.07 As Made drawings

The contractor shall prefer up on completion of the works and when required by the
C.O.R, As Made drawings covering all development works including heights,
dimensions, I.L., T.L. of pipes and manholes. The change shell be marked on the
drawing copies, two copies each drawing. In addition, the contractor shall submit all
works carried out on CD.


Chapter 57 Water Lines, Sewage and Channeling

57. 1 General

A. Chapter 57 and Chapter 07 of the Host Nation Technical Requirements shall be read
in conjunction with this Special Specification. In case of conflict the special
specifications shall prevail over the HNTR.

Page 215 of 252

B. All materials, piping, accessories, attachments, etc. shall be compatible with the
requirements of the Israeli standard and shall bear an Israel Standards Institute
certificate. In the absence of Israeli standards, such items shall comply with the other
standards of the country of manufacture of that same material or product. Materials
that do not bear a standards certificate will not be accepted.

C. All tests of all components of the work and materials shall be performed by the
Contractor at its own expense during the course of the work in a manner as shall be
required by the inspector and to his satisfaction. The COR shall be authorized to
disqualify any materials or labor that is of inferior quality to that required with the
contract documents.
D. The Contractor shall submit samples and/or catalogs of equipment and accessories
that it intends to purchase for approval of the designer.

E. The Contractor's work shall be precise and continuous without interruption and shall
be performed in accordance with the plans. In case of doubt, the Contractor shall
consult with the COR. A change performed by the Contractor at its own discretion
without receiving approval shall be performed under its sole responsibility and the
Contractor shall bear any expenses of dismantling and reassembly of its work in
accordance with the plans if required to do so.

In addition to all relevant chapters add the following standards to the list of Standards
applying to this Chapter.

57.3 Israeli Governmental Codes
Regulation for Sanitary Installations (in Hebrew: HALAT)

57.4 American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and
Seamless

57.5 Submittals Required for Sanitary Installation

All materials (products, equipment, etc.) shall be submitted for approval. Submittal
requirements shall include Manufacturers data, shop drawings and Certificates of
Compliance.

57.6 Description of Work

The present Chapter relates to the execution of the main water pipeline around the Building
and the Feedings to the building.

Work comprises, among other things, the following:
- Water pipeline made of P.E and feeding to buildings.
- Connection to the existing water system and to the existing buildings.
- PE sewage system.

Page 216 of 252

Preliminary works:
pipe supplies water to the existing construction. The first phase of the water works
should include relocating the existing pipe according to plans.

57.7 Surveying and Marking

Prior to the commencement of work, the Contractor shall mark the layout of the existing
water pipeline, the location of hydrants, valves, etc.

The distance between the marking pegs shall be not more than 20 m.

On the peg, the final level of the ground shall be written down according to the updated site
development drawing that shall be handed over to the Contractor prior to the execution of the
pipelines.

The Contractor shall have the obligation to check and find out the conformance of the levels
and details in the Site to those in the Drawings as well as to report on any discrepancy as said
above. He shall also have the duty to complete measurements and details that are missing for
the work execution requirements.

The Contractor shall install pegs made of iron angles, outside the Work Site in places which
shall not be disturbed, at the rate of at least six points of the surveying network on the sides of
the Work Site.

The responsibility of the Contractor with respect to the above surveying, marking and
location shall be full and he shall correct, at his own cost, any mistake, deviation or lack of
coordination stemming from the surveying.

57.8 Surveying Equipment

The Contractor shall be bound to keep on the Work Site and during the whole execution time,
a level as well as all the required surveying instruments which he shall put at the disposal of
the COR upon his requests.

57.9 Examination of the Site by the Contractor and Responsibility with Respect to
Existing Equipment and Buildings

The Contractor shall visit the Site and make sure that all the site conditions and other data are
clear to him. The Contractor's signature on the Contract shall represent confirmation that
these conditions are known to him and the situation on the Site is as it was at the time of the
Contractors Visit.

In the Site, are found activated underground pipelines and facilities of all kinds. The
Contractor shall inspect and make sure that the location of all the cables and pipes found
within the limits of his Work Site is correct, whether they are shown in the drawings or not
shown in the drawings, as well as the closeness of the foundations of various facilities, etc.,
so as to take care of their integrity.

Page 217 of 252

The Contractor shall take care of the integrity of all the equipment and facilities and any
expense that may be required for ensuring this integrity or for repairing them should they be
damaged by the Contractor, shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional payment.

57.10 Safety Means

The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of the work, of the workers, of the passerby
and of any other person that may be found on the Site; he shall use all the means required for
avoiding work accidents, including accidents connected with excavation works, break-up
works, the installation of water pipelines, the haulage of materials, the operation of heavy
equipment, etc.

The Contractor shall use all the safety means required for securing property (including
buildings, buildings foundations, etc.) as well as the life of people within the Site or in its
vicinity, in the course of the work's execution; he shall see to it that all the governmental and
municipal Laws, Regulations and Directives concerning the matters are duly followed. The
Contractor shall adapt shoring means appropriate to the excavations and use scaffolding,
handrails, temporary fences, lights and warning boards, as may be required for warning the
public of any accident that may occur to them as a result of the presence of pits, earth piles,
scaffolding, piles of materials and other obstructions on the Site.

Immediately following completion of the work in each part of the Site, the Contractor shall
fill in all the pits and excavations, level the earth piles and remove all the obstacles that
remained on the Site, as a result of his work. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for
any damage that may be inflicted to property, human or animal life due to the misuse or lack
of safety means as required.The said above is specially stressed out in view of the fact that
there shall be deep excavations executed in the course of the work that may require adequate
shoring. In any case, such shoring shall be executed in trenches deeper than 1.20 m.

57.11 Preservation of Finished Work and Temporary Maintenance Arrangements

The Contractor shall use at his own cost, all the means required for preserving the work,
during all the execution period until its handling over to the COR, against any damage that
may be inflicted by earth collapse, floods, wind, etc., and he shall especially use, all the
means required for protecting the Site against rainfall or any other source of water, such as a
burst in the water pipes, drainage to the sewerage lines and the sewage inspection holes, etc.,
including the excavation of temporary trenches for removing the water and their refilling
prior to handing over the work, the maintenance of the Site in regular conditions during the
wet season, etc. All the auxiliary works for temporary drainage, etc. shall not be taken off for
payment and they shall be at the Contractor's own cost.

Any damage caused as a result of the above factors, whether the Contractor shall use
appropriate protection means or not, shall be immediately corrected by the Contractor, at his
own cost and to the full satisfaction of the COR.

57.12 Earthworks for Laying Pipelines

Excavation and/or Break-up

General

Page 218 of 252

All the excavation works shall be performed according to Chapter 01 of the HNTR and this
Special Specifications shall include:
The Contractor shall identify all the underground systems existing within the Site boundaries
and mark them up. This shall include the execution of sounding and careful excavation. The
responsibilities and the bearing of costs by the Contractor if conflicts with existing but
unknown utilities appear

Excavation of trenches according to required dimensions and slopes, leveling of excavation
bottom, fill with appropriate material as required, leveling of area, removal of earth surplus,
etc.
Wherever the word "excavation" shall appear, its meaning is excavation and/or back-up in
soil, mixed soil or rock of any type by mechanical equipment or by hand.
The Contractor shall use all the required warning safety measures in the course of work, in
accordance with the Ministry of Work Regulations and all that concerns the support of the
trenches walls at depths over 1.2 m, fencing, warning boards, etc., so as to secure both the
workers and people found in the vicinity of the Work Site.
All the responsibility for preventing damage to underground systems such as telephone
cables, water pipes, communication, sewage, etc, shall lay solely on the Contractor, even in
the case where previous information shall not be provided regarding the location of the
systems or when such information as passed over to the Contractor shall be wrong and not
complete.

Settlements
The Contractor shall be responsible for the correction of all settlement that may occur in the
filling in of excavations for pipelines and facilities as well as for the correction of any
damage that shall be inflicted following that settlement, whether direct or indirect, both in
open spaces and in the tiled areas (asphalt roads, concrete squares, etc.), during two years
following the issue of the completion certificate.

Sand Padding
All the pipes shall be wrapped up with sand. The sand shall extend to the whole width of the
trench, up to the height indicated in the typical cross-section, but to not less than 10 cm from
the pipe bottom, on each side of the pipe and on the top of it. The sand shall be clean dune
sand, without organic material, stones or salts.

Filling in the Trench
The fill above the sand wrapping shall be with compacted selected backfill (as shown in
trench details of drawing P-203), laid in 20 cm thick layers with 98% Modified AASHTO
controlled compaction.
The Contractor shall be held responsible during a period of two years for any settlement that
may occur after the handing over of the work and he shall correct these settlements at his own
cost, according to the instructions of the COR.

57.13 Water Pipes

Type of Pipes
Pipes will be of steel welded line pipe according to AWWA C200 GR-B and IS 530.

Page 219 of 252

Pipe ends butt welding.
Wall thickness 5/32.
Internal linings protection: centrifugal mortar lining (concrete lining) the C-M lining is
performed in accordance with the AWWA C-205 standard.
External Coatings Protection: Three-Layer Extruded Polyethylene Coating standard:
A.W.W.A C 215.

Laying Crossed Polyethylene Pipes
The laying of crossed polyethylene pipes shall be executed according to Sub-Chapter 57.07
of the HNTR, and the pipes Manufacturer's instructions and SI 1083.Minimum depth
coverage above water pipes 1.2 m.

Prior to the execution, the Contractor shall present to the COR the execution method and the
manufacturing plant directives according to which the Contract proposes to work and for
which he shall seek the approbation of the COR.

The execution of the laying, the completion of the external coating, the testing, etc. shall be
carried out under the supervision of the pipes Manufacturer's Field Service. Upon completion
of the work, the Contractor shall submit a Certificate testifying that the execution of the
system has indeed been carried out under the supervision of the Manufacturer's Field Service
and that the system stands up to the Manufacturer's requirements.

Pressure Tests
Pressure tests both in the water pipes and the water delivery line shall be performed
according to paragraph 57038 of the HNTR. Each ready section of the line, prior to the cover
of the joints, shall be submitted to a hydraulic test under an inner pressure of 12 atmospheres.
The purpose of the pressure test is to check the joints following the assumption that the pipes
have passed pressure tests in the Plant itself and that the Contractor shall submit a Certificate
describing the Pressure Test of the pipes. The pressure test shall be performed in the presence
of the COR. The pressure shall be maintained in the system for at least three hours. Only
following the issue of the CORs approbation, shall the excavation be covered.

The open extremities of the test pipeline shall be plugged in with watertight flanges and plugs
as well as anchored in such a way so as to stand up to the testing pressure of 12 atmospheres,
without opening in the course of the introduction of the pressure into the pipeline. The
anchoring details shall be submitted to the COR. The water for the above tests shall be
supplied by the COR. Should the tests be carried out in sections, upon completion of the work
an additional similar test shall be carried out on the whole system, including its fittings. The
Contractor shall supply all the equipment and tools required for the execution of the water
tightness of the joints as well as the hydraulic tests, including flanges and sealers for shutting
off the pipes extremities, pumps and manometers needed for creating and measuring the
pressure.

Washing and Disinfection of the Pipelines
Upon completion of the pipelines execution, the Contractor shall perform a thorough washing
of the pipelines by introducing water and opening drainage points, firefighting taps, etc. in
order to remove the water. Following the verification by the COR that the water coming out

Page 220 of 252

from each such opening shall be clear, he shall allow the disinfection of the lines as detailed
below.

The disinfection operation shall include all the pipelines and fittings system such as valves,
pipes, hydrants, etc. This operation shall be carried out with the approbation of the Ministry
of Health and in coordination with the COR.

The material used for the disinfection shall be a hypo chloride solution in 50 mg/liter
concentration. The water solution and the chlorine shall be introduced into the pipelines and
left there for 24 hours. At the end of this period, the concentration shall be tested in several
places. Should that concentration be between 1 to 10 mg per liter, the chlorine water shall be
left there for an additional 24 hour period. Should the concentration after 24 or 48 hours be
less than 1 mg/liter of chlorine, the solution shall be removed and the process be carried out
again until the remaining concentration after 24 hours shall be larger than 1 mm per liter.
Upon completion of the disinfection, the system shall be emptied and washed-up and the
pipeline shall be filled in with clean water until the remainder of the chlorine left over at any
consumption point shall not exceed 0.2 mg per liter.

57.14 Valves

Valves of a diameter up to 2" shall be of the ball-type.

Valves of a diameter above a total 3" shall be gate valve of the wedge type (TRL) short with
Rilssen internal and outside coating, or its equivalent for working pressure of 10
atmospheres, stand up to the SI relevant to that type of equipment. The visible fillings shall
be painted as detailed in Chapter 11 in the HNTR, with a painting system consisting of epoxy
materials.

57.15 Hydrants

The hydrants shall be installed according to the drawings, to paragraph 570814 and SI 448
and 449, as specified hereinafter.

Hydrants up to 3" diameter shall be manufactured with flanges, connected to the main line by
means of upright fittings and anchored into a concrete block as specified in the Sanitary
Installation Specification. The underground steel pipe shall be wrapped with a double
industrialized wrapping.

On the opening, an aluminum or brass short connecter of 3" diameter fitting the firefighting
Standards. The hydrants shall be painted according to Chapter 11 of HNTR with an epoxy
paint system. The upper coat shall be alternatively in red and white colors. Cutting and
welding pipes shall be carried out according to paragraphs 57041 and 57042 of the HNTR.

On the connection between the upright and the vertical pipe coming out from the ground, a
standard 4" breaking device shall be installed as shown in the detail.

57.16 Underground Sewage and Drainage Pipes

1. Rigid HDPE pipes for sewage and drainage outside the building will be in accordance
with the requirements of Israeli Standard.

Page 221 of 252

2. The joints for connection of the pipe will be EF.

3. The fittings will be of rigid PE like the pipes.

4. Pipes in concrete walls and in sides of concrete manholes will be installed using
special "Itubiv" joints for manholes supplied by the manhole manufacturer.

57.17 Inspection Manholes and Fittings

1. The inspection manholes will be of pre-cast concrete cylindrical links and pre-cast
roofs and will be placed on a gravel bed.The bottom of the manhole will be pre-cast,
e.g.
The type of concrete at the bottom will be B40. The contractor will transmit to the
factory precise data on the directions of the entrances and exits of the pipes for
purposes of preparing the boreholes for the pipes at works, for each manhole, after
marking of the route in the field and approval thereof by the Supervisor. The pipe
connections will be through flexible manifold joints.
Use of bottoms with combined concrete and polyethylene conduit, will not be
permitted.

2. The links will be according to the requirements of Israeli Standard no. 658 socket-
plug, with a diameter and depth according to the plans, with an extremely smooth
inner surface.If the inside surface is not sufficiently smooth the contractor will
smooth it with cement plaster with a 1:1 ratio of cement and fine sand. Smoothing
will be done with a plasterer's trowel.The contractor will ensure sealing of joints
between the links.

3. The ceiling will be pre-cast, flat, of concrete, for a load of 8 tons in accordance with
Israeli Standard 489.In manholes installed in roads, the ceiling will be D400 for a load
of 40 tons. In manholes of a depth of over 2.0 m installation of a conical upper link
will be allowed.In these manholes the ceiling will be cast in situ as specified in a
standard plan.

4. The cover will be round, of iron casting, or concrete in accordance with Israeli
standard 489.The type of cover for an 12.5-ton load of type B125 in accordance with
Israeli Standard 489 Part 1 and the diameter of the opening in the cover will be 50 cm,
unless otherwise specified in the plans or the bill of quantities.In a depth of over 1.25
m the opening will have a diameter of 60 cm.
In manholes installed in paved areas in the station surface the type of cover for a 40-
ton load will be of type D400 in accordance with Israeli standard 489 Part 1.The cover
frame will be of iron casting.In manholes installed in a road or paved areas, the frame
will be installed over the ceiling surface as specified hereinafter.

5. The cover surface level (T.L.) in the manholes installed in roads or sidewalks will be
up to the level of the road or sidewalk surface.In open areas the level of the cover
surface will be 20 cm higher than the final ground surface.

6. In manholes of a depth of 0.80 m and more, cast iron descent rungs will be installed in
accordance with Israeli standard 631.The rungs will be wide, from steel core and

Page 222 of 252

plastic casing, and will be installed by the links manufacturer at intervals of 33 cm in
vertical installation.The anchoring of the rungs will be inspected in pursuance of the
provisions of Israeli Standard no. 658.

7. Connection of the different elements of the inspection chamber will be effected by a
seal, approved by the Supervisor.

8. Pre-cast concrete accessories manholes
In the accessories manholes will be placed without a bottom on a gravel bed.

57.18 Hydraulic test and rinsing pipes

57.18.1 Hydraulic inspection of main pipe

1. Every section of the ready line must undergo hydraulic inspection.

2. The goal of the pressure inspection is to check the connectors under the assumptions
that the pipes underwent pressure inspection in the factory. The contractor shall
submit a certificate that approves the pressure inspection of the pipes.

3. Before introducing water into the line, ensure the normal order status of the air and
drainage outlet points along the inspected line section.

4. No pressure inspection shall be performed before the passing of the concrete curing
period of the anchoring blocks and the foundations.

5. The inspection shall be done using an internal pressure of 12 atmospheres, unless the
bill of quantities or the engineer required a different inspection pressure.

6. The open ends of the inspected line section must be shut with sealed flanges and
anchored in such a manner as to have them withstand the inspection pressure. The
anchoring details shall be submitted to the inspector for approval.

7. Filling the line with water shall be done slowly, without leaving any quantity of air in
the line. After filling the entire line with water, increase the pressure gradually until
the required inspection pressure is reached. The inspection pressure shall be
maintained in the line for the duration required by the engineer, in order to allow the
inspection of the entire length of the inspected line section.

8. If no leakage or perspiration is discovered between the pipes and the connectors, the
engineer shall approve the line. If defects are discovered, the contractor shall make
all the corrections required by the engineer and repeat the inspection until the line is
found to be in good order and to the complete satisfaction of the engineer.

57.18.2 Hydraulic Inspection of the Sewage Lines

1. Each and every section separately, shall undergo hydraulic inspection to detect
leakages and perspiration.

Page 223 of 252

2. The goal of the pressure inspection is to check the connectors under the assumptions
that the pipes underwent pressure inspection in the factory. The contractor shall
submit a certificate that approves the pressure inspection of the pipes.
3. Before introducing water into the line, ensure the normal order status of the air and
drainage outlet points along the inspected line section.
4. No pressure inspection shall be performed before the passing of the concrete curing
period of the anchoring blocks and the foundations. (At least 16 days).
5. The inspection shall be done using maximal gravitational pressure, unless the bill of
quantities or the engineer required a different inspection pressure. The pressure shall
be tested at the lowest spot of the line.
6. The open ends of the inspected line section must be shut with sealed flanges and
anchored in such a manner as to have them withstand the inspection pressure. The
anchoring details shall be submitted to the inspector for approval.
7. Filling the line with water shall be done slowly without leaving any quantity of air in
the line. After filling the entire line with water, increase the pressure gradually until
reaching the required inspection pressure. The inspection pressure shall be
maintained in the line for the duration required by the engineer to allow the inspection
of the entire length of the inspected line section.
8. If no leakage or perspiration is found between the pipes and the connectors, the
engineer shall approve the line. If faults are found, the contractor shall make all the
corrections required by the engineer and repeat the inspection until the line is found to
be in good order, to the complete satisfaction of the engineer.
9. Filling the line with the present gravitational pressure, and checking leakages for 24
hours shall inspect the sewage lines.

57.18.3 Rinsing the lines
1. After completing the piping and accessories system, and finishing all the works and
the associated inspections, and before operating the system, the contractor shall
implement internal rinsing of the entire system pipes and accessories.
2. The rinsing shall be done by flowing water into the highest points of the system and
removing the water from the lowest points (throw hydrants).
3. The quantity of water introduced into every section shall be sufficient to create a flow
speed in the system of at least 1.0 m/second.
The rinsing shall continue until the leaving water is completely clean to the full
satisfaction of the inspector, but not less than half an hour. Before performing the
rinsing, the contractor shall submit to the inspector for his approval the rinsing plan
detailing water introduction points, removal points, water sources, the proposed
dimensions of the proposed fittings and the manner of removing the water. Only after
obtaining the inspectors approval the contractor shall be able to perform the rinsing.

57.18.4 Disinfection of the Water Lines
With the completion of rinsing the water lines, and after the inspector determines that the
exiting water in every spot is clear, he will allow lines disinfections as detailed below:
The disinfections operation shall include the entire system of pipes and accessories, such as:
valves, pipes, etc. The disinfections material shall be a hypo chlorite solution at a
concentration of 50 mg per liter. The water and chlorite solution shall be introduced to the
lines and remain there for 24 hours. After this period, the concentration shall be inspected at
several spots. If the concentration is between 1 to 10 mg per liter, the chlorite water must

Page 224 of 252

remain for additional 24 hours. If the concentration after 24 hours or 48 hours is less than 1
mg per liter chlorite, the solution must be removed and the process repeated until the
remaining concentration within 24 hours will be greater than 1 mg per liter.
After the inspection is completed to the inspectors satisfaction, the system shall be emptied
and rinsed until the chlorite residue at the consumption outlet points will not exceed 0.2 mg
per liter.

57.19 Additional Remarks

1. The connections between different material pipes will be special manufactory
adapters unions.
2 . The pipes, in all diameters include:
Fittings, ground works (with excavation if needed) and the extra steps required inside
or outside the structure, passage through walls, floors and beams, grooves and
openings, dismantling destruction of existing systems of all types, temporary facilities
for continued function of the base, and proper restoration of the previous state (except
the cancelled systems).
3. The pipes also include:
Exposing existing systems of all types, with all the auxiliary and groundwork needed
(including road opening, curbstone, garden and garden-bed) and restoring to the
previous state.
4. Furthermore all supports needed and passage sleeves, consoles, pipe hanging
consoles, etc.
5. At the end of the works, the contractor will submit, on his expense, five sets of as-
built drawings.

57.20 Pumps
1. Submersible drainage pumps, for 10m
3
/h at 10m.
2. The engine will be equipped with over heating protection.
3. Pumps and electricity panel will not be roof covered.
4. Pumps will be constructed on reinforced cement floor, the dimetions of the floor be
suitable for the pumps and all above the ground equipment.
5. Pumps and all equipment will approved by the designer before purchase.
6. pumps supplier will supervise the pumps assembly on site and will approve it.
7. The constructor will be held responsible for the proper operation of all the equipment
for 12 months starting at the day of the system acceptance.
8. Electricity and Control Panel
The panel will include:
- Main Manual-0-Auto switch.
- Light indicators for operation and for malfunction.
- Automatic control will be based on liquid level in the pit:
* Low level shutting pumps off
* High level operation .
* Overflow - send alarm/light.

57.21 Septic Tank

Page 225 of 252

Septictank will be constructed of PE tank, 2.0 cubic meters, or equivalent. NS4 include 160
mm. Connections, extensions on the top opening to the ground level. The tank will be laid on
40 cm sand and a sand filling all around the tank.


Chapter 66 - Protective Doors

66.01 General

A. Chapter 66 of the Host Nation Technical Requirements (HNTR) shall be read with this
Special Specification which constitutes the extent of the Work with regard to
Protective Doors. In case of conflict these special specifications shall prevail over the
HNTR.

66.02 Submittals Required for Protective Doors

Page 226 of 252

A. Scope of Submittal Requirements: The following areas of Work require submittals by
selected manufacturers as specified below:

1. Shop drawings for alterations in design that were accepted by the COR for
conformance with the contract requirements approved by COR.

2. Raw Materials and off the shelf parts origin certifications.

3. Machined parts quality control tests reports.

4. Operational tests and sealing tests reports.

5. Paint layers thickness tests reports.


This covers the installation of Blast and Splint proof two-wing door-
mechanically actuated. The doors shall be installed and operated according to
the standards and to the professional rules. The work shall comprise production,
supply, installation and run-in of the doors to be supplied as an assembly; all
slab suspended and fixtures inclusive. The work includes as well the main
electrical connections, EMP over load tension and the feeder cables to be
screened,(with grade of protection , no lower than 85% of maximum
screening, as well as the switches and the fuses (electrical switchboards etc.)

Scope of Work and Execution 66.03.01
The door specified in this document constitutes of two heavy wings, suspended
with maintenance-free sliding bearing hinges, to a heavy doorframe. The
doorframe shall be matched to the compartment entrance, by means of
reinforced concrete filling, and serve maintenance functions in position.
The door shall be operated by means of linear electric actuators through a
pushbutton box located on the wall, near the door.

The door is equipped with two identical maintenance-free sliding bearing
hinges at upper suspension and two identical maintenance-free sliding bearing
hinges at lower suspension of each door wing.

Each door wing is equipped with two points latching device and upper and
lower horizontal bars to integrate the two door wings into one unit bolted to
doorframe.
Each door wing is built of mild steel sheet, welding in "honeycomb" structure
with concrete filling.

Page 227 of 252

The Contractor Representative 66.03.02
practical engineer

Measurements and Marking 66.03.03
As specified in the Host Nation Technical Requirements Chapter 00
Preliminaries, the contractor shall be given fixed points from which the
contractor shall construct the entire axis system and marking. Prior to
commencement of his work, the contractor shall carry out a detailed status
survey to include all items existing on site. This axis system shall be used by the
contactor to carry out all work covered by this bid/contract. The survey shall be
carried out in coordination and in presence of the COR or his representative and
will be approved by the COR in writing.

Deployment on Site 66.03.04
The contractor deployment areas shall be only those areas set forth by the COR
while for the position of any facility within the work site the contractor shall
obtain the COR approval in advance. Whenever the contractor desires to
position these facilities externally to the site, he shall apply to the COR for
approval as well.

Signage (Blast and Splint proof door) 66.03.05
The contractor shall supply and install all signs required for convenient
operation and maintenance. All signs shall comply with the law and standard
orders and shall be subject to the COR approval.

Delivery of the Facility (Blast and Splint proof door) 66.03.06
Upon completion of the facility installation, the contractor shall submit to the
COR the test certificates, either already required or may be required by any
authority. The certificates shall have no reservations.

The cost of tests shall be on the contractor's account. After the certificates are
handed to the COR, the COR shall carry out a first acceptance test including but
not limited to verifying the compliance of the facilities to the bid requirements.
The contractor shall assist the COR in labor and equipment as necessary to
carry out these tests. After completion of these tests, the contractor shall
accomplish within a reasonable time period all repairs and modifications
required by the COR and that should have been executed according to the
contract.

After receiving the contractor announcement in writing that all faults have been
repaired and after the facilities have been functioning for 30 days without fault,
the COR will carry out the final acceptance test.

Page 228 of 252

When in this test no fault has been noticed, the contractor shall be handed a

Door Warranty and Regular Service Period 66.03.07
The contractor warranty shall cover the facility and all parts thereof for the
quality of materials and equipment, workmanship, noise level limitation,
meeting all requirements regarding the climate conditions and normal operation
of the facility. After acceptance of the Completion Certificate, the twenty four
(24) month warranty period will begin.
Exceptions of this warranty are faults and damages resulting of intentional or
incidental misuse of the door by the Customer, fire, water flood, uncontrolled
nature forces and any other force major.
The contractor shall submit to the COR according to the terms of the contract,
warranty certificate covering the quality of materials and equipment,
workmanship and normal complete operation of the facility.
The contractor shall supply all services specified in the contract.
In addition to these efforts, the contractor shall carry out during the normal
operating hours any repair or service without any additional payment.

For replacement of damaged parts as a result of misuse contrary to the
manufacturer instructions, the Customer shall pay the part price and hours
invested actually in the part replacement only as common in the market prices.
During the warranty period, all parts and materials shall be supplied with no
additional cost. After each service, repair and/or replacement is completed, the
contractor shall ask the officer in charge to sign the appropriate form on behalf
of the Customer, otherwise the work shall not be considered. Repairs and/or
modifications resulting of new regulations of the authorities shall be considered
in separate.

As Built Drawings 66.03.08
The contractor shall prepare immediately upon completion of the work and
when required by the COR, after completion of partial works as well, As Built
drawings covering and presenting all deviations from the design (both those
allowed according to the contract and those resulting of inaccuracies in
execution). The change shall be marked on the drawing copies; two copies each
drawing, of the work drawings according to which the contractor had carried
out his work. The change/ /modification shall be emphasized by using different
color from that on the drawing. Whenever the contractor has marked no
deviation from the design, it shall be regarded as the contractor statement that
the work at these locations has been accomplished precisely according to the
original design drawings.

66.04
Blast and Splint proof
Two leafs door , mechanically actuated

Page 229 of 252

Width of doorway

Approximately 5000 mm
Height of doorway

Width of door leaf

Height of door leaf


Thickness of door leaf


Doors leaf weight

Approximately 15,000 kg

Doors weight

Approximately 30,000 kg
Hinges

Maintenance free sliding bearings
Electric wire protection grade

General shielding 85%; IP 65
Electric actuator run

Approximately 500 mm.
Actuator driving Power

2500 kgf
Piston winch motor

400 V; 3-phase; 50 Hz; 1.25 kW
Materials

ST-37 ST-57.2; C-50 concrete
Sealing compound

25 Meter of rubber band

66.05
Technical Requirements
Blast and Splint proof
Two leafs door, mechanically actuated

Each door leaf shall be equipped on the interior side with a cremone" and
bolts for locking the two leafs into a single unit when the door is closed and
locked within its frame.The locking handle of the mechanism on the exterior
leaf shall be equipped with a padlock arrangement.
Prior to bringing the door to the site, it shall undergo thorough sandblasting,
cleaning of any oils, painting with a zinc-rich primer (in at least two coats) and
an epoxy finish (in at least two coats).All of this work shall be performed in
accordance with the General Specification for painting and as determined by
the Architect and Supervisor

Page 230 of 252

66.0502 Door leaf The door leaf in reinforced structure shall be constructed from
vertical panels made from formed sheet steel e = 8 mm thick, welded
together in three planes. Each panel will be welded to the other on
each side of the transverse contact and create a unified reinforced
"honeycomb" structure. Thefront surface of the leaf shall becovered
with supplementarye = 8 mm thicksteel sheet. Eachleaf shall be
welded and reinforced around it withsheet metal bent channel
profiles. Everyleaf shall have twohooksat the top,to ensure
convenient lifting of the leafwhen assembled with crane .The door
leafs shall be made of mild steel sheets (ST 37) e = 8 mm thick,
filled with concrete (SCC type B-50 or equivalent).
The surface of each leaf on its exterior side (on the outside of the
building) shall be overlaying with 8 mm (ST 37) sheetmetal that shall
be fastened by welding holes in a square grid (the distance between
the holes shall be not greater than 400 mm) and welded to the outside
frame of the leaf.
The concrete filling of the door leaf shall be performed before
assembling the upper part of the leaf frame, to be assembled after
cleaning concrete casting residue.In this way, a door leaf will be
obtained with a built horizontal cross-section made from 16 mm of
mild-steel on the exterior side, 8 mm of mild-steel on the interior side
and 260 mm of concrete [fill] equivalent to SCC B-50.
Each door leaf shall be equipped on the interior side: 1) next to the
vertical edge with acremone bolt, which by turning of the locking
handle will lock it to the framehead and to the threshold with a spike
42 mm diameter minimum; 2) with two horizontal bolts, connecting
the two leafs into a joined unit.The locking handle of the mechanism
on the exterior leaf shall be equipped with a padlock arrangement.

A robust knuckle prop shall be welded to the top of each leaf, for the
top of the actuator that operates closing and opening of the door.
All door components shall undergo thorough sandblasting and anti-
rust treatment prior to commencing with the door fabrication
process.Following casting of the concrete in the interior voids of the
door, they shall be painted with a zinc-rich primer and epoxy finish
coat in accordance with the General Specification.

Page 231 of 252

66.0503 Door
frame
The structure bearing the door, the door frame cast into the building
(on which the door hinges are assembled and against which the door
closes) shall be constructed from shaped weldable professional sheet
steel ST-57.2 quality and thickness of e =10 mm.
Within the frame, on areas that the leafs rest on the frame, the
Contractor shall prepare compatible graduated punched holes for
anchoring the rubber seals.The distance between each punch hole
shall not exceed 400 mm.

The structure fabricated at the plant in advance shall be transported
to the site and set in place in the building and integrated with the
reinforcing in the concrete jambs and in the concrete casting.
In order to obtain maximum integration of the door bearing structure
and the concrete structure, the Contractor shall fix the jambs of the
frame to the reinforcing by welding.The Contractor shall also leave
holes to release air from the threshold of the bearing structure to
ensure maximum filling of concrete when setting the bearing
structure in place.

The bearing structure shall contain prepared brackets for the hinges
that enable adjustment of each door in place, and when it is
decline.The bearing frame shall also contain holes equipped with
bushings for the door bolts (the holes shall be oval in order to enable
fitting in any adjusted position.
Preparation of the bases and casting of the fill, including repairs to
concrete will be performed by the Main Contractor in full
coordination with the COR.

All steel components shall undergo thorough sandblasting and shall
be painted with a zinc-rich primer and epoxy topcoat in accordance
with the General Specification.
The type and color of paint will be approved by the COR.

Page 232 of 252

66.0503 Hinges
and
bearings
The door has 4 massive hinges that allow it to turn when opening and
closing, bearing its massive weight.Two hinges for each door leaf
(upper and lower) are produced from a block of alloy steel(ST 57.2)
in prismatic structure.The two top hinges are identical and the two
bottom hinges are identical.Each hinge is constructed from two
components:1) Lower component welded in the reinforced structure
to a connecting plate that constitutes an integral part of the jamb; 2)
Upper component welded to the reinforced steel structure connected
with bolts and welded to the door leaf.Each bearing hinge component
contains two radial sliding bearings of the maintenance-free radial
spherical plain bearing (steel/sinter bronze composite type), sealed
on both sides.The lower hinge contains a pressure bearing of the
same family:maintenance-free spherical plain thrust bearings.
Compatible stainless steel washers, of not less than 8 mm thickness
shall be inserted between the components of each hinge and at their
ends.Each hinge shall have an upper security that secures the screw
bolt in the hinge to the jamb.Each top hinge shall have a threaded
built-in device with knot that enables offsetting of minor settlement
of the door leaf.The hinge shall be connected into a single unit with a
machine screw bolt with a head, thick stainless steel washers, a nut
and a counter nut.The hinge shall be equipped with two washers
(from above and below) to prevent dirt from penetrating inside.
All steel components shall be cadmium-coated, passivized and
painted with a primer and finish coat in accordance with the General
Specification.
The type and color of paint will be according to the contract
documents.

66.0504 Actuators The door shall open and close by means of two electric linear
pistons (piston to each leaf).Each piston is connected at its top to the
top of the door leaf, while its base is connected to the frame.The
connections shall have suitable flanges to compatible welded
brackets.Each piston shall have a maximum length of 1850 mm,
built with connecting flanges on both ends.The length of the piston
run is approximately 500 mm and the force required for operation is
2500 kp.Each piston shall have a 3-phase electrical transmission
motor with a suitable output of not less than 1.5 kw operating in
two directions (for pushing and pulling).The drive unit perpendicular
to the direction of movement of the piston shall be equipped with a
flaywheel (on the motor axis) that will be turn to a chain wheel with
a clutch, on which an endless chain reaches a height of 1.0 m from
the floor. The chain wheel shall be at rest at all times that the system
is under electrical tension.When the current to the door operating
system shuts off, the chain wheel will engage the motor axis and
enable manual opening and closing the door leafs.

Page 233 of 252

66.0505 Steel and
welding
The steel used in the construction of the door leafs shall be ST-37
quality (mild steel).Steel that will be used for building the doorframe
shall be ST-57.2 quality (weldable alloy steel).Sheetmetal rolling
shall be perpendicular and free of any roll marks. The radius of
bending of the forming tools for the panels shall be less than 8.0
mm.The welding shall be performed by properly certified
professional welders.Welding of panels together shall be performed
using welding electrodes of the same steel group from which the
sheets are formed. Each panel shall be welded to its neighbors (with
which it is in contact) in continuous seam lines, in alternating
segments of welds and spacing..The length of each seam shall be not
less that 150 mm with gaps of not more than 230 mm Thickness of
the seams shall be not less than 1.3 [times] the thickness of the
thinnest of the two sheets. The welds shall be inspected immediately
by Magnoflex and/or X-ray testing upon completion of each weld
line and prior to covering the location in order to verify weld
continuity..
Disqualified welds and those that interfere with the fitting of
sheetmetal components shall be repaired to the COR's
satisfaction. The Contractor shall notify the COR in advance
prior to each stage and obtain his approval on time in order to
avoid dismantling and reassembling

66.0506 Concrete All voids that are formed in the door leaf structure shall be filled
with B-50 concrete or equivalent, in high compression fill.Casting of
the concrete shall be performed when the welded door (without the
top closer cover) is standing in a stable position, supported and
harnessed, to ensure plumb and stability and to prevent swelling
during casting of the concrete. The concrete shall be cast gradually
into the cells that are formed during fabrication of the door (every
second cell) until all the voids are filled to the top edge of the
leaf.Casting of the concrete shall be performed with the use of
instruments that will ensure complete filling and compression of the
door leaf space.

Page 234 of 252

66.0507 Bolts,
stops and
locks
The door leafs shall be equipped with latches that bolt them to the
bearing frame on the one hand and between them, on the other.
The interior leaf shall be equipped with: 1) cremone (bolt device)
installed on the interior leaf that will enable locking to the bearing
frame in the upper and lower parts in a closed position and an
exterior stop (that shall be assembled in the open area at the front of
the building) in an open position; 2)Two transverse bolts, installed on
the interior leaf, for the purpose of locking the two leafs to each other
when the door is in a closed position.
The exterior leaf shall be equipped with: 1) cremone (bolt device)
shall be installed on the leaf that will enable locking to the bearing
frame in the upper and lower parts in a closed position and an
exterior stop (that shall be assembled in the open area at the front of
the building) in an open position; 2)TwoRabbets shall be installed on
the leaf for the two transverse bolts. The cremone shall have a door
locking arrangement with a padlock.
Stops for the door leafs shall be installed in the area in front of the
building that enable them to be set in a fixed open position with each
leaf opening approximately 100.

66.0508 Gaskets Within the frame, on areas that the leafs rest on the frame, and on
the interior leaf (on the edge between the two leafs), semi-rigid
rubber strips shall be affixed and glued for purposes of providing a
soft closing of the door leaf in the frame, and to seal the gap against
the infiltration of rainwater and dust..

The rubber strips shall be prepared specially for this function. In the
place at the back of the strip that is intended for their gluing, they
shall have compatible anchors equipped with compatible nuts that the
Contractor shall prepare in the bearing frame and in the edge of the
interior leaf.
Rubber hardness shall be approximately 40shore.

Page 235 of 252

66.0509 Paint
All steel components (other than components turned by bearings)
shall be cleaned with a stiff brush and sandblasted prior to
commencing with fabrication.Components that have undergone the
fabricating process shall be sandblasted and degreased no more than
one half-hour before painting with the first coat of paint.
Painting shall be performed with two coats of primer and two
topcoats.Each layer of paint shall be 50 .The primer shall be zinc-
rich paint absolutely compatible with the topcoat, which shall be of
an epoxy type, especially resistant to mechanical damage and
weather impacts.
The type and color of paint will be according to the contract
documents.
The Contractor shall notify the COR in advance prior to each stage of
preparation of painting and receive his approval.

66.0510 Electrical
supply
and
control
Electrical feed to the drive unit (linear pistons) with 3 phase AC
current 400 volts and feed to warning devices (blinker and foreign)
with single phase AC current, 200 volts shall be provided
withflexible electrical cable(separate for each unit) shielded and
professionally connected at the inlet to the junction boxes.The
shielded system shall be properly closed, grounded, tightened sealed
and protected according to IP 65 and accordance with E.M.P
regulations against induced currents.
A sealed metal box containing a control panel and made fromrust-
freecomponents, resistant to a corrosive atmosphere will be installed
by the Owner on the wall near the door opening at the appropriate
height.
The control panel shall include:
A main breaker and compatible fuses;
Operating relays
A timing controller that determines the order of operation of the
door leafs when opening and closing
Operating buttons
Control lamps
A pulse relay for the blinker and a pulse relay for the horn
A siren intensity regulator with the horn

Page 236 of 252

Thermal and overload safeguards for the engine.All solid-state
electronic components shall be superior quality and high
reliability and shall be assembled on corrosion-resistant printed
circuit boards, easily extractable for purposes of replacement.
Control lamps (light emitting diode type) shall enable easy
identification of a defective or faulty card.All electric and
components such as relays and contactors shall be of superior
quality and intended for continuous, quiet and uninterrupted
service.
The following shall be placed on the exposed front of the control
panel:main breaker handle, operating buttons and door position
indicators.
All of the connections shall be made professionally; all fasteners,
connections, cards, wires and cables shall be marked with clear and
legible identifying marks, compatible with the marks in the
manufacturer's drawings.
All electrical installations from the main breaker shall be installed by
the Contractor and at its expense in reinforced, galvanized and
shielded steel conduit with IP 65 level water protected hermetically-
sealed boxes and connections. Electrical installation shall comply
with the requirements of the induced current protection standard
EMP.

66.0511

Control
Control shall be manual of a direct control type with the use of
control buttons.Operation of the gate shall be performed with the use
of a central control panel located in non-rust, IP 55 level sealed and
protected metal box.The control signals shall pass to and from the
panel in electric wires that shall be inserted in reinforced
conduit.The control voltage shall be low voltage (approximately 42
V).
The pushbutton box shall include:
a. An operating handle for the door main breaker.
b. An "Open Gate" button
c. A "Close Gate" button
d. A "Stop" button(red mushroom)
e. A red "Gate Closed" lamp
f. A green "Gate Open" lamp
g. A buzzer "Gate Moving" (buzzer intensity shall be
adjustable).
h. Illuminated inscription "Gate Locked"
i. Illuminated inscription "Warning Emergency Gate Closing"
Activation of the leaf opening and closing actuators shall be
accompanied by blinking of the appropriate control lamps and pulse
buzzing.

Page 237 of 252

66.0512 Motion
for the
agenda of
work
Fabrication:Prior to commencing with the fabrication of the
door leafs; the Contractor shall fabricate all their Accessories,
stiffeners-, hinges and bearings.All steel components, other than
steel sheets from which the door leaf and door frames will be
fabricated shall be cadmium-coated, passivized and painted with
a primer and finish coat in accordance with the General
Specification.
The Contractor shall cut the sheet steel to the required dimensions
and bend it to the basic elements ready for welding. The door leaf
elements shall be constructed from a single longitudinal cut to the
entire height of the leaf.

Welding of the elements to the reinforced leaf structure shall be
performed on a flat and smooth surface where the structure of the
built up honeycomb shall be turned each time that a panel is added, in
order to obtain a weld on the opposite connection (interior or
exterior).
Following joining of the elements into the leaf units, the lifting
hooks shall be welded inside of the top of each leaf, the leaf frame
shall be assembled and welded on three sides (bottom, and the two
sides).The closers at the top of each leaf shall be installed after
filling the leafs with concrete.The concrete shall be filled when the
leafs are standing and supported in their natural position.

The doorframe shall be constructed (lintel, jambs and threshold)
next to the two leafs where each door is placed on a flat and smooth
surface with the exterior surface of the leafs facing upward.Welding
of additional sheet steel protecting the outside (welded through the
holes in the leaf body and welded to the frame around) shall be
enabled to supplement the steel thickness required for protection
against splint.
At this stage, the doorframe can be welded to all of the components
required for its operation and can be positioned in the building
(anchors for connecting the jambs to the building reinforcing; pipes
for the hinges and brackets; support points for the mechanical
actuators for opening and closing of the door, etc.).
It is recommended that the rubber seal be assembled while the leafs
are laying flat on the surface.It is recommended that the metal
accessories of the door leaf be assembled when these are moving on
their axes in place.This shall all be performed after filling the door
leafs and closing in of the top of the leafs with the compatible frame
profiles.

Page 238 of 252

Future settlement of the leafs should be taken into consideration
when determining the location and angle of each hinge in the door.
It is therefore recommended that the door leafs be put in place when
the hinges are assembled in a complete manner on them.

Layout of the leaf shall be such that the upper corner of the edge of
each leaf will touch the center of the lintel and the upper corner of
the back member of each leaf will find its natural position
approximately 15 mm of. Only then should the hinges be set in
place on the jams and welded accordingly.

Assembly:The door frame shall be leveled, stabilized in place and
connected by welding using anchors to the reinforcing prepared in
advance for the door jambs.At this point, the frame shall be filled
with concrete as part of the wall casting.In this way, all of the spaces
in the door frame will be filled in a final manner.
Assembly of the leafs [shall be performed] with use of a crane with a
lifting arm having a of 20 ton capacity.
Connection of the hinges to the assemblies by the setting of the
screw- bolt in each hinge in its place, adjustment and closing of the
safety nuts [completes the work].


This covers the installation of Blasts proof, One wing door, Hand operated.
Installedas a chamber closure. The doors shall be installed and operated
according to the standards and to the professional rules. The work shall
comprise production, supply, installation and run-in of the doors to be supplied
as an assembly; all slab suspended and fixtures inclusive.

Scope of Work and Execution 66.07
The door specified in this document constitutes of one light wing, suspended
with two hinges. Each hinge by means of: Ball bearings Thrust bearing and
Spherical Ball bearing, to a massive doorframe. The doorframe shall be
matched to the compartment entrance, by means of reinforced concrete filling,
and serve maintenance functions in position.
The door shall be operated by hand. The door wing is equipped with two points
latching one unit bolted to doorframe.
The door wing is built of mild steel sheet, welded in "honeycomb" structure
with thermal insulation filling.

Existing Structures - Damage and Interference Avoidance 66.08

Page 239 of 252

The contractor shall be aware that his work is to be carried out at a populated
area that will continue its normal work even during the execution of the
contractors work.
Therefore, the contractor shall coordinate in advance with the COR each work
prior to execution, in order not to interfere with the normal operation of the area.

The Contractor Representative 66.09
practical engineer

Measurements and Marking 66.10
As specified in the Host Nation Technical Requirements Chapter 00
Preliminaries, the contractor shall be given fixed points from which the
contractor shall construct the entire axis system and marking. Prior to
commencement of his work, the contractor shall carry out a detailed status
survey to include all items existing on site. This axis system shall be used by the
contactor to carry out all work covered by this bid/contract. The survey shall be
carried out in coordination and in presence of the COR or his representative and
will be approved by the COR in writing.

Signage (Blast and Splint proof door) 66.11
The contractor shall supply and install all signs required for convenient
operation and maintenance. All signs shall comply with the law and standard
orders and shall be subject to the COR approval.

Delivery of the Facility (Blast proof door) 66.12
Upon completion of the facility installation, the contractor shall submit to the
COR the test certificates, either already required or may be required by any
authority. The certificates shall have no reservations.

The cost of tests shall be on the contractor's account. After the certificates are
handed to the COR, the COR shall carry out a first acceptance test including but
not limited to verifying the compliance of the facilities to the bid requirements.
The contractor shall assist the COR in labor and equipment as necessary to
carry out these tests. After completion of these tests, the contractor shall
accomplish within a reasonable time period all repairs and modifications
required by the COR and that should have been executed according to the
contract.

After receiving the contractor announcement in writing that all faults have been
repaired and after the facilities have been functioning for 30 days without fault,
the COR will carry out the final acceptance test.
When in this test no fault has been noticed, the contractor shall be handed a

Page 240 of 252


As Built Drawings 66.13
The contractor shall prepare immediately upon completion of the work and
when required by the COR, after completion of partial works as well, As Built
drawings covering and presenting all deviations from the design (both those
allowed according to the contract and those resulting of inaccuracies in
execution). The change shall be marked on the drawing copies; two copies each
drawing, of the work drawings according to which the contractor had carried
out his work. The change/ /modification shall be emphasized by using different
color from that on the drawing. Whenever the contractor has marked no
deviation from the design, it shall be regarded as the contractor statement that
the work at these locations has been accomplished precisely according to the
original design drawings.

66.14
Reinforced blast-resistant
Hand operated door Single leaf

Width of opening

Height of opening

Width of door leaf

Height of door leaf


Thickness of door leaf


Doors leaf weight

Approximately 401 kg

Hinges

Supported with ball bearings
Materials

ST-57.2 and ST-60.2
Sealing compound

Approximately 6300 m m

Page 241 of 252

66.15
Technical Requirements
Reinforced Blast-resistant Hand Operated Door Single leaf

The single-leaf door shall be constructed with a honeycomb structure
forresistancetoexternal blast forcesfrom nearby blast, when closed.
Semi-rigid rubber seal shall be attached around the frame on a wide
base softening the blow when closing, and prevent penetration of
rainwater and dust.
The door, assembled within a formed sheet steel frame and be
anchored to the concrete and connected to the building reinforcing
prior to casting of the concretewill open outwardand when
closedwill beagainst theframe on awidesubstratepadded with semi-
rigidrubber seals .Opening and closing the door shall be performed
manually (with the use of handles affixed to the door leaf).
The door leaf shall swing on two massive and leveled exterior
hinges.Each hinge will have ball bearings, pressure bearings and
adjustable roller bearings.

The door shall be equipped with handles on the exterior side:one
will be in a fixed horizontal position (for opening and closing), the
second operates a cremone- two-point latching system and
locking bolts assembled on the front of the door leaf on the interior
side. This exterior handle shall be equipped with a padlock
arrangement (from the outside), for total lock of the door when
closed and locked within its frame.
Prior to bringing the door to the site, it shall undergo thorough
sandblasting, cleaning of any oils, painting with a zinc-rich primer (in
at least two coats) and an epoxy finish (in at least two coats).All of
this work shall be performed in accordance with the General
Specification for Painting and as determined by the contract
documents.
Door
structure

leaf in the reinforced structure shall be constructed from vertical
panels made from e =5 mm thick formed sheet steel, welded together
in three planes.In this way, each panel will be welded to the other on
each side of transverse contact and create a unified reinforced
"honeycomb" structure. The leafs shall be fastened and welded all
around with formed sheet-metal channel-profiles;the door leaf shall
be constructed with
m thick quality steel sheets (ST-57.2) and fastened and welded all
around with e = 5 mm formed sheet metal channel profiles that
provide the frame for the leaf.The door shall be built from a double-
sided insulated leafmade from 4 mm thicksheet steelfilledwith
inflammable foamed polyurethane (or equivalent).The door leaf shall
Door leaf

Page 242 of 252

be equipped on its interior side with a cremone- operating
mechanism and bolts for locking the leaf in place.The locking handle
on the exterior side of the leaf shall be equipped with a padlock
arrangement.
The acoustical fill and seals shall be compatible with the
manufacturer's requirements.
All door components shall undergo thorough sandblasting and anti-
rust treatment prior to commencing with the door fabrication
process. The door shall be painted with a zinc-rich primer and
epoxy finish coat in accordance with the General Specification.
Type and color of paint will be determined by the Architect and
according to the contract documents.

Door bearing structure - doorframe connected by casting to the
building (on which the door hinges are assembled) shall be
constructed from 6.0 mm thick ST57.2 quality professional formed
sheet steel.
Within the frame, in areas where the leaf rests on the frame, the
Contractor shall prepare compatible punched recesses for anchoring
the rubber seals.The distance between each punch hole shall not
exceed 400 mm.Holes shall be punched in the upper surface of the
door threshold in order to enable casting of the final filling of
concrete in the steel door threshold. The structure, fabricated at the
plant in advance, shall be transported to the site and set in place in the
building when casting the concrete.
In order to obtain maximum integration of the frame bearing the door,
the contractor shall weld steel details on the exterior side of the
bearing frame with diameters of not less than 12 mm and more than
400 mm apart.
Door
frame

The Contractor shall also leave holes to release air from the bearing
structure to ensure maximum filling of concrete when setting the
bearing structure in place.The bearing structure shall contain
prepared brackets for the hinges that enable adjustment of each door
in place.The bearing frame shall also contain holes equipped with
bushings for the door bolts (the holes shall be oval in order to enable
fitting in any adjusted position. Preparation of the bases and casting
of the fill, including repairs to concrete will be performed by the
Main Contractor in full coordination with the Contractor and
Supervisor. All steel components shall undergo thorough
sandblasting and shall be painted with a zinc-rich primer and epoxy
topcoat in accordance with the General Specification.
The type and color of paint will be determined by the Architect and
according to the contract documents.

Page 243 of 252

The steel used for constructing the door shall be ST-57.2 and ST-60.2
quality steel rolled perpendicular and free of any stress
marks.Bending radius of the forming tools for the panels shall be not
less than 6.5 mm.The welding shall be performed by properly
certified professional welders.Welding of panels together shall be
performed using electrodes of the same steel group from which the
sheets are formed.Each panel shall be welded to its neighbors (with
which it is in contact) in continuous seam lines, where each seam
will be made from alternating welds and spaces.The length of each
seam shall be not less that 180 mm with gaps of not more than 250
mm.Seam thickness shall be not less than 4.5 mm. Door accessories
made from quality steel shall be welded with electrodes from the
same steel group from which the accessories are fabricated. The
welds shall be inspected immediately by Magnoflex and/or X-ray
testing upon completion of each welds line and prior to covering the
location in order to ascertain weld continuity. Disqualified welds and
those that interfere with the fitting of sheetmetal components shall be
repaired to the COR's satisfaction. The Contractor shall notify the
COR in advance prior to each stage and receive his approval.
Steel and
welding

The door turns on two identical bearing hinges (upper and lower)
constructed to carry vertical and lateral loads through suitable bolts
and bearings.The hinge shall be constructed from two turning
components:1) The first component, assembled to the door leaf, is
machined steel tube into which the bearings are fitted under
pressure; 2)The second turning component shall be welded rigidly
and fastened with cross members to the door leaf in its place.
Two ball bearings shall be assembled in the part of the hinge
connected to the doorjamb, and introduced into both sides of the
tube.In addition, an adjustable pressure bearing closed and sealed
against exterior dirt and moisture shall be assembled, adjusted at the
bottom of the upper part of the hinge.
A spherical roller thrust bearing shall be assembled at the top of the
hinge part attached to the door leaf.
The hinge shall be joined with a machined and reamed screw-bolt
(the bolt) of a diameter precisely compatible with the interior
diameter of all of the bearings.Diameter of the reamed bolt shall be
not less than 25 mm.The bolt shall be inserted from above
downward and the first part to be inserted on it is an angle-bar to be
connects to the doorjamb. After the hinge is assembled in its final
position with suitable washers on both sides, nut and safety nut at its
bottom.
The hinge shall be equipped with two washers (from above and
below) to prevent dirt from penetrating inside.
Hinges

Page 244 of 252

All steel components shall be cadmium-coated, passivized and
painted with a primer and finish coat in accordance with the General
Specification.
The type and color of paint will be determined by the COR and
according to the contract documents

The door leaf shall be equipped with bolts that latch to the threshold
and the lintel of the bearing frame in a closed position, and with an
external stop (that shall be assembled in the open area at the front of
the chamber) in full open position.
The latches constitute the spike components of the cremone arms.A
cremone latch shall be installed within two transverse bolts in the
upper and lower parts in the leaf rabbets that will enable locking it to
the bearing frame. The cremone latch shall have a door locking
arrangement with a padlock.
Doorstops shall be installed in front of the building for the door leafs
that enable them to be set in a fixed open position when the leafis
fully opened.
Bolts,
Stops and
Locks

On the bearing frame of the door, while the door leaf is set in closed
position, (semi-rigid) rubber strips shall be affixed with hot glue for
the purposes of providing soft closing of the door leaf in the frame
and to seal the gap against the infiltration of rainwater and dust.
The rubber seals shall be prepared especially for this purpose, where
the back of the seal shall have compatible anchors to be punched that
the Contractor will prepare in the bearing frame.The anchors shall be
an integral part of the structure of the seal.
The rubber seal, which shall be prepared in advance in a suitable
profile) shall be affixed to the door with hot glue and held with
sheet-metal screws having a wide mortised head in the rubber profile
so that there will be no metal to metal contact.
Seals

The spaces that are created within the door structure shall be filled
with inflammable and non-toxic polyurethane type installation or
equivalent (approved by the Supervisor).The fill shall be high
density.The two outside fields (upper and lower) in the leaf shall be
filled before closing the frame around the leaf.The Contractor shall
leave suitable holes in the middle field for filling with insulating
material before painting the door.
Insulation

All steel components (other than components turned by bearings)
shall be cleaned with a stiff brush and sandblasted prior to
commencing with fabrication.Components that have undergone the
fabricating process shall be sandblasted and degreased no more than
Paint

Page 245 of 252

one half-hour before painting with the first coat of paint.
Painting shall be performed with two coats of primer and two
topcoats.Each layer of paint shall be 50 .The primer shall be zinc-
rich paint absolutely compatible with the topcoat, which shall be of
an epoxy Tamaglass type or equivalent, especially resistant to
mechanical damage and weather impacts.
The type and color of paint will be determined by the Architect and
Supervisor.
The Contractor shall notify the Supervisor in advance prior to each
stage of preparation of painting and receive his approval.

End of Chapter 66 Protective Doors

Page 246 of 252

Chapter 98 Enclosed Prime Power Generator Set and Fuel tank

98.01 Specification For Enclosed Prime Power Generator Set For Outdoor
Applications

98.01.1. General Description
1. Prime power Generator set (GenSet) PF 0.8, 3 ph+N four wires,
400/230V, 50 Hz, for OUTDOOR applications.
2. Prime power rating net output full load At 800 meters above sea level
and 50C >= 63KVA
3. Stand By power rating net output full load At 800 meters above sea level
and 50C >= 70KVA
4. The GenSet shall supply the rated power during load changes of 40%
without any performance degradation (according to ISO8528 para.1).
The power de-rating shall not exceed 20% when operating within the
defined environmental conditions.

98.01.2. Definitions and threshold conditions:
1. Single source supplier
All equipment including: engine, alternator, control panel, enclosure
shall be build and supplied by the original manufacturer.
2. The requested units shall be manufactured after receiving the approval
from the COR.
3. The diesel Manufacturer shall submit a complete set of technical data
describing the dynamic forces, moments, torsional and liner vibration
analysis of GenSet vs frequency which is transmitted to the concrete
floor.
In case that the alternator is not fitted by the diesel engine manufacturer,
the assembler must submit a certificate that he has done a torsional
vibration analysis of the GenSet.
4. Manufacturer Test Report For the complete unit shall be submitted for
the COR approval.

98.01.3. Standards

The following standards are binding. The supplier shall submit the
certificates for the COR approval.

1. Quality System Standard ISO 9001-2000
2. EEC 89/392 Safety and Health, Occupational Safety and Health Act
(OSHA)
3. Electrical Generating Systems Association (EGSA)
4. International Electro technical Commission (IEC)
5. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
7. ISO 3046/1, ISO DIS 8528-3, ISO 8528 according to para. 13.3.2
8. Generator efficiencies shall be calculated according to IEC 34-2, Section
4, with all I^2*R losses corrected to 105C.

Page 247 of 252

9. UL2200 Safety for Stationary Power Generator Assemblies (low
voltage)
10. EMISSIONS EPA CFR 40 PART 89 SUBPART D&E AND ISO8178-1
FOR Nox, HC, CO.
11. EMISSIONS EU 2007 97/68/EC Certified Models Stage 2.
12. BS EN 50081-2 AND EN 50082-2
13. UL 142 listed for fuel tanks
14. NFPA 30, 37, 110 Design and built the fuel tanks.
15. MIL-C 27487, military specification coupling halves, quick-disconnect,
cam-locking type

98.01.4. Technical Requirements
1. Diesel Engine
1.1 M.T.B.O (Mean Time Between Overall) shall be at least 10,000-
15,000 Hours
1.2 The Genset engine shall be applied for prime power service, with
electronic direct injection and water cooled.
The engine shall be installed and matched with the generator by the
engine manufacturer only.
1.3 Rated speed: 1500RPM
1.4 Electronic Governor Speed regulation accuracy: 0.25%
1.5 A tray shall be installed under the engine in order to collect water,
oil, fuel & liquids.
1.6 Engine protective system:
a. Low oil pressure.
b. High coolant temperature
c. Over speed
d. Low water level
e. Over crank
1.7 The speed shall be sensed by a magnetic pickup off the engine
flywheel ring gear, A provision for remote speed adjustment shall
be included.
1.8 The base shall have a robust design. The base shall include a liner
vibration isolator between tank base and engine generator.
1.9 The engine shall be installed and matched with the generator by the

2. Starting system
2.1 Starting system voltage: 12Volt.
The starting system shall assure the ability to crank the engine at
very low temperatures (>= -10C)
2.2 Battery charger input:
a. Voltage: 230Vac/10A/50Hz.
b. The charging system shall include input and output MCB's,
voltage and current meters, and protection against over current,
short circuit, over heating, battery disconnect, opposite polarity.
2.3 Battery capacity 100 Ah (Ampere-Hours) for four cycle starting
interval.

Page 248 of 252

2.4 Charging alternator 45 - 100 A with integral self-regulator
including belt guard.
2.5 The battery system includes: connection cables, battery terminals
plastic cover for each terminal.
The batteries shall be covered wood cover, painted by acid-
resistant paint and secured by screws and wing nuts.
An engraved anodized aluminum sign, 20x40mm shall be installed
on the cover: "Control voltage 12V Verify the right polarity on
connection".
3. Fuel System
3.1 Integral fuel tank with dual wall and fuel capacity for 8-12 working
hours at full load including valve drain.
3.2 The tank's dimensions (Length and Width) will not be larger than
the base frame length and width respectively.
3.3 Period between filters changes >= 250 Hours
3.4 Manual Fuel priming pump
3.5 The fuel system shall include at least 3 filters:
a. Primary fuel filter
b. Main fuel filter
c. Water separator with transparent tank for residuals drain.
The water separator shall include water sensor that will be
connected to the GenSet controller.
An alarm indication shall be installed at the control panel.
3.6 Manual Fuel transfer pump to fill the internal fuel tank from
external source 20 Liters/Hour.
A 3 meters long flexible, armored fueling pipe shall be supplied.
The pipe shall be equipped with a filter at its end.
3.7 Primary tank leak detection switch shall be installed in containment
basin.
A leakage alarm indication shall be installed at the control panel.
3.8 Low fuel level sensor shall be installed.
3.9 Fuel mechanical gauge shall be installed.
3.10 All fuel piping system shall comply with SAJ-30 standard.
3.11 Fuel source selector system:
a. The selector system shall be installed on the Gen set enclosure
adjacent to the engine's fuel feed pipe.
b. The system shall include two 3-way butterball valves,
appropriate for diesel fuel, made of brass or stainless steel, L-
type, 1/2", interlocked between each other.
The 1
st
valve for fuel feed line and the second for the fuel return
line.
c. The interlocking shall be for up/down operation.
d. The valve system shall be installed inside the GenSet enclosure
and shall not disturb the unit doors.
e. The installation will be on a structure made of galvanized and
painted steel profiles, connected to the unit base.
f. The fuel pipes shall be secured by steel clips with neoprene
coating.
g. The connection between the flexible pipes and the incoming
pipes from the external fuel tank (feed & return pipes), shall be

Page 249 of 252

performed by "Fast connection Coupler" (FCC), suitable for
diesel fuel, 1/2" diameter(Female type).
The FCC shall include non-return valve. The FCC shall be
made of aluminum, brass or stainless steel with NPT thread and
chain secured end-cap.
The FCC shall be suitable for diesel fuel systems and comply
with the American standard MIL-C-27487.
h. The pipes between the engine and the integral fuel tank shall be
flexible and armored, made of neoprene, suitable for diesel fuel
and includes 2 original threaded connectors.
i. An engraved anodized aluminum sign 30x30 cm shall be
installed near the system. The sign shall include operating
instructions and flow directions arrows.
j. The system shall be fully tested with all its fuel supply options
at the supplier's site.
3.12 Fuel piping system to the external fuel tank:
a. The system includes two pipes:
1) Fuel feeding pipe
2) Fuel return pipe.
b. 1/2" FCC (male type) shall be installed on both pipe's ends.
c. The connection between the FCC and the fuel pipes shall be
performed by equipment as recommended by the FCC
manufacturer.
d. The flexible pipes shall be made of neoprene, armored, UV-
resistant, suitable for diesel fuel, 1/2" diameter, model HD
ELFAX or equivalent.
4. Oil system
4.1 Period between oil and filters changes 250 Hours
4.2 Oil will be supplied with the unit.
4.3 Oil system includes valve drain with operating handle and chain
secured steel cap.
4.4 The gen-set shall be supplied with oil for 500 Hours.
5. Air Inlet System
5.1 The engine shall include an air cleaning system comprises of filter
house and replaceable, cartridge type dry filter.
5.2 A service indicator shall be provided for the filter status.
6. Cooling System
6.1 Electrical water cooling pre-heater 230VAC 50Hz 1.5KW
6.2 The diesel engine and radiator is filled with EXTENDED LIFE
COOLANT (ELC) for 5,000 hours.
6.3 Radiator with guard sized for ambient air capability 50C , coolant
level side glass window, coolant drain line with valve and chain
secured steel cap.
6.4 The radiator includes coolant level sensor.
6.5 Coolant lines between jacket water heater shall include valves.
6.6 The engine shall be equipped with water pump and thermostat.
6.7 Fan and heavy duty belt guards.
7. Exhaust system
7.1 The exhaust silencer shall be installed in a separate chamber inside
the enclosure.

Page 250 of 252

7.2 Stainless steel flexible fitting for exhaust output, with isolation
(thermal) guard.
The entire exhaust pipe shall be thermally isolated.
8. 3-Phase Alternator
8.1 Brushless synchronous
8.2 Self excitation with PMG Including isolation transformers
8.3 Unit net output prime power 63KVA
8.4 Voltage: 230/400 Volt
8.5 Frequency: 50Hz
8.6 Pitch 2/3 (0.6667)
8.7 Windings insulation class in stator and rotor: CLASS H
8.8 Space heaters
8.9 Water protection: IP23
8.10 Electronic voltage regulator:
a. 3 phases sensing
b. Accuracy: 0.25%
c. Response time for voltage change<20 Sec
8.11 Temperature rise Shall not exceed 105C with full load.
8.12 THDV < 5% with nominal load
8.13 Short circuit: 300% for 15 sec
8.14 The alternator shall be installed and matched with the diesel engine
by the engine manufacturer only.
9. Circuit Breaker
9.1 The following CB will be considered acceptable for use - the C.B
matched and calibrated to the generator rating:
a. ABB Sace
b. Merlin Gerin
c. Westinghouse
9.2 Circuit breaker current rating 100 A
9.3 Icu - Rated for Short Circuit current 30 [KA]
9.4 Adjustable magnetic and thermal protections.
9.5 Trip coil 12V
9.6 Auxiliary contact 2NC+ 2NO.
9.7 The CB shall be installed in a standard enclosure; The load feeding
cable shall be connected to the CB via terminals or bus-bars with
appropriate screws, washers and nuts.
The connection means shall allow the connection of 3 phases and
neutral conductors.
10. Electronic control panel
10.1 The electronic control panel shall be mounted on the generator
inside the enclosure and equipped with vibration isolators. It shall
be an environmentally sealed NEMA 1/IP 22 enclosure and consist
of solid-state, micro-processor based modules for engine control
and AC metering.
10.2 The control panel shall be manufactured by the diesel-generator
manufacturer.
10.3 The control panel shall be protected against:
a. All inputs and outputs must be protected against short circuits,
to (+/-) battery.
b. Reverse polarity connection.

Page 251 of 252

c. Overvoltage and transient surges.
d. Accuracy is maintained over all the operating ambient
temperature range of -40C to +70C.
e. Ambient temperature range:
1) Operating: -40 C to + 70 C
2) Storage: -55C to + 85 C
f. Operating voltage: 10-40 VDC.
g. Shock withstands: 15 g.
h. Vibration: withstand 20 g @ 18-500 Hz
i. Humidity: 0-100% relative humidity
j. EMI immunity complying with IEC 801-2, IEC 801-3, IEC
801-4, EN 5082-2.
10.4 The control panel will display operating information, system
diagnostics, and fault shutdown using one back lighted LCD
(Liquid Crystal Display) and eight or more according to
specification LEDs.
10.5 The control panel will consist of the following features/Indications:
a. 3 phase current, LCD, 0-100 A true RMS, 0.5% accuracy.
b. 3 phase voltage, LCD, 0-500 VAC true RMS, 0.5% accuracy.
c. Frequency, LCD, 45-65 Hz, 0.3 Hz accuracy, 0.1 Hz resolution
d. Engine RPM
e. Generator set operating run hours
f. KW (total and per phase)
g. KVA (total)
h. KVAR (total and per phase)
i. KWh (total)
j. KVAh (total)
k. PF (average, total and per phase).
l. Battery voltage
m. Start crank counter
n. Engine oil pressure
o. Engine coolant temperature
p. Engine crank attempt
q. Service maintenance interval timer.
r. Emergency stop via a red push button (mushroom head)
s. Engine control switch (four-position; stop-off/reset; manual
start, auto cool down stop).
t. Adjustable 1-60 seconds crank/rest periods
u. Indicator/display test switch
v. Voltage / Frequency adjust potentiometer
w. direct connection or connection via MODEMs to host computer
or PLC RS 485, using MODBUS protocol plus applicable
software
x. Panel illumination lights (2) and O/NOFF switch. (1 internal +
1external)With ON/OFF switch
y. 8 digital inputs
z. 16 relay outputs
1) Generator Ready
2) Generator summary fault
3) Overload

Page 252 of 252

4) Over voltage
5) Temperature fault
6) Oil pressure
7) Over speed
8) Start fault
9) Low fuel (int.)
10) 7 reserved programmable output relay contacts.
aa. Flashing LED indicators for protection and diagnostics,
including:
1) Low oil pressure
2) High/Low coolant temperature
3) Low fuel level
4) Engine switch in a non automatic mode
5) Low battery voltage
6) Charging alternator fault
7) Automatic start-stop engine control with programmable
safety shut-downs at the following situations:
8) Low oil pressure
9) High coolant temperature
10) Over crank
11) Overspend
12) Emergency stop
13) Low coolant level
bb. Service panel installed bellow the control panel or other
approved location, which includes:
1) 3x16A MCB
2) 4x25A/30MA earth leakage relay
3) 5x16A CEE wall socket IP65
4) Israeli standard 16A/IP55 wall socket
An opening for cables insertion shall be performed on the
genset enclosure as required. A grooved gasket made of rubber
shall be adopted to the opening perimeter in order to avoid
friction and dirt.

Page 253 of 252

98.01.5. Weather Enclosure
1. Weather protective enclosure built for sound attenuation 66 -70 dBA at
distance of 7 meter at full load.
2. Environmentally friendly, polyester powder baked paint, suitable for
rough environmental conditions (dust, corrosion. UV etc)
3. The exhaust Silencer shall be installed in a separate chamber inside the
enclosure.
4. Emergency stop via a red push button (mushroom head)
5. Two 12V lighting fixtures for the engine with operating pushbutton and
automatic delayed shutdown.
6. The enclosure shall be manufactured and assembled by the GenSet
manufacturer.
7. Enclosure made from Galvanized steel, Constructed of 2-3 mm (14
gauges) sheet metal.
8. The enclosure shall be resistant to acids, fuel, lubricants, and steam
cleaner chemicals.
9. The enclosure is suitable for GenSet operation at ambient temperature
of 50C @ full load
10. All doors on each side will be locked with a single padlock and hinges
made of stainless steel.
11. The oil and coolant drain group shall include a high-quality ball valve in
the drain line, located close to the fluid source. The oil and coolant
drain lines shall be located outside the unit to facilitate maintenance
12. Crankcase fume disposal shall terminate in front of the radiator to
prevent oil from collecting on the radiator core and reducing cooling
capacity (installed).
13. An opening for load feeding cables shall be performed bellow the main
CB enclosure. The opening shall be appropriate for the cable's insertion.
A grooved gasket made of rubber shall be adapted to the opening
perimeter in order to avoid friction and dirt.
14. The batteries and battery rack shall fit inside the enclosure and be held
securely in place.
15. Single point lifting arch. The crane lifting eye shall be 3'' diameter.
16. Welded steel containment basin constructed of 4 mm sheet metal under
the all unit minimum of 110% primary fuel tank capacity & drain cork ,
Dimensions Length and Width will not be larger than the base frame
length and width respectively.
17. A grounding bas-bar shall be installed in the weather enclosure, on the
GenSet's base. All Genset's parts shall be grounded to the bus bar with
appropriate flexible conductors.
Each conductor shall be connected to a separate screw. At least three
spare screws shall be obtained.

98.01.6. English and Hebrew signs
1. Engine steel signs includes: engine model, serial number, production
date, manufacturer name, production country, RPM , Technical genset
data Made from
2. 3-PH generator steel signs includes: model, serial number, KVA, KW,
PF, Voltage, Amperage, Frequency, Temperature, production date,
manufacturer name, production country Made from steel

Page 254 of 252

3. Control panel manufacturer standard signs & Hebrew alarms steel signs
4. I.A.F cat No., I.A.F serial No. , steel signs on both enclosure rear &
front sides (100 x 800 mm).
The above numbers will be provided by the IAF.
5. Local Representative will provide 40 more Hebrew steel sign according
to a list that will be provided by I.A.F.

98.01.7. Warranty
1. Warranty period for the complete unit - 24 Months Or 8,000 Hours from
date of delivery (commissioning) the first event applies
2. All services during the warranty period to be done at installation site at
no charge, by the Israeli dealer of the diesel-generator manufacturer.
3. The warranty period will commence upon customers final acceptance
test approval of generator set installed at the site, in accordance with the
acceptance specifications.
4. Realization of the warranty shall be made through the Suppliers agent in
Israel, who shall be responsible for providing all material, equipment
and work necessary to restore the equipment to its fully operational
condition.

98.01.8. Technical information, Handbook
1. Three (3) copies manufacturer service manuals shall be provided for
each genset including :
1.1 Operating & Maintenance Manual
1.2 Spare Parts Catalog paper
1.3 Full set of Electrical & Mechanical Drawings
1.4 Operation Manual Chart
1.5 Trouble shooting guide
2. Three (3) copies Hebrew operation instruction handbook incluoding :
2.1 All above mentioned in Para. 1.1 - 1.5

98.01.9. Manufacturer acceptance test
1. Factory Acceptance Test: The diesel-generating sets will be completely
assembled and connected at the Manufacturers plant. The first
acceptance test should be conducted at the Manufacturers plant
according to Manufacturers standard acceptance test procedure, and
should meet the requirements of this specification.
2. Manufacturer standard Engine Test
3. Manufacturer standard Generator Test.
4. The manufacturer shall submit the GenSet test report and the engine test
report for the COR approval.
5. The Manufacturer shall submit a COC/COT test certificate and torsional
vibration analyzes made by the original D/G set manufacturer
6. Witness test
The Manufacturer shall submitted to the customer a quote for witness
test, the price to be including in the quoted, the customer will be present
during the test , subject to advance notice to the Manufacturer.

Page 255 of 252

98.01.10. L.R acceptance test
1. Verify all components supplied by the manufacturer according to the
specification.
2. Verify all GenSet protection devices operation including:
2.1 Engine protection:
Oil pressure, over temperature, low coolant, over speed, emergency
shut-off.
The above mentioned protection devices shall trip the main CB,
stop the engine and provide and appropriate indication in the
control panel
2.2 General Alert (indication only at the control panel, the Genset
maintains its operation):
Battery charging fault, water in diesel fuel.
2.3 Over voltage, over frequency, low voltage, low frequency: tripping
of the mains CB.
2.4 Magnetic and thermal adjustable current settings for main CB.
3. General Safety:
Protective means for rotating devices, thermal insulation for the exhaust
pipes and rubber insulators for the battery terminals.
4. Insulation test of the Genset's output terminals with 500Vac tester >= 2
M (Mega Ohm)
5. Grounding continuity test:
The test shall include resistance measurement between the grounding
bus-bar and various metal parts. The resistance shall be <= 0.1.
The test will include also a current of 25A via the grounding system, by
connecting of 3V source.
6. Load Test and recording & measuring the genset in Operation for 12
hours at 30% - 110% service load :
6.1 Operate the engine generator-set for at least 30 minutes at 30% of
service load, then increase load to 50% for additional 30 minutes.
6.2 Increase load to 100% of service load and operate the engine
generator-set for at least 10 hours.
6.3 Increase load to 10% of service load and operate the engine
generator-set for 60 minutes
6.4 Every 30 minutes the following parameters will be measured &
recorded : Engine hour meter , Engine coolant Temp. , Engine oil
pressure, Voltage , Frequency , Average phase Amp , KW Load ,%
Of load.
7. The diesel fuel consumption during the above tests shall be supplied
from the integral fuel tank.
8. All test equipment require to perform the above tests shall be supplied
by the L.R on his expense.
All liquids and disposals required to perform the above tests shall be
supplied by the L.R on his expense.
9. The GenSet shall be supplied to the site with full oil, coolant and diesel
fuel.

98.01.11. Spare parts
The Contractor shall provide, for each generator and at no additional price
the following spare parts for two maintenance intervals as per manufacturers

Page 256 of 252

recommendation: air filters, oil filters, fuel filters.

98.01.12. Training
1. The Manufacturer and/or his authorized representative shall provide all
necessary training and instruction for operating and maintenance of the
generator set to relevant Air Force personnel.
2. The training will be at the expense of the Manufacturer or his authorized
representative, and shall provide periodic training seminars and take at
least 1 day for each unit for at least 15 persons.

98.01.13. Documentation required for Approval:

The contractor shall submit the compliance table attached in the
appendix, with the required additional information as specified in the
table for the COR approval.

Page 257 of 252

Appendix A for Generator's specifications

# REQUEST NOT
COMPLY
COMPLY ATTACHED /
SUBMITTED BY
THE SUPPLIER
REMARKS
A Diesel Generator SET RATED @ 63KVA IAF NO.199170010
1 Prime power generator set PF 0.8, 3
ph+N four wires, 400/230V, 50 Hz,
for OUTDOOR applications
Updated Spec
Sheet

2 Prime power rating net output full
load At 800 meters above sea level
and 50C >= 63KVA
Updated Spec
Sheet

3 Stand By power rating net output
full load At 800 meters above sea
level and 50C
Updated Spec
Sheet

4 The GenSet shall supply the rated
power during load changes of 40%
without any performance
degradation (according to ISO8528
para.1).
The power de-rating shall not
exceed 20% when operating within
the defined environmental
conditions.
Up Dated Spec
Sheet

B Definitions
1 Supplier Shall be manufacturer's
Local Representative (L.R) at least
3 years
Certificate
2 Personnel L.R shall have at least 3
qualified technicians for the
specific alternator/engine offered
Certificate
3 Response time from service call to
technicians arrival to site shall be
less than 24 hours
hours
4 L.R warrants adequate spare parts
stock for supplied systems to be
maintained for 5 years period at
least.
Certificate
5 The L.R Submitted a list of 5 sites
and name of personnel of contact
(POC)
list

Page 258 of 252

6 All equipment - engine-alternator-
control panel- enclosure- build and
supplied by the original
manufacturer 1 (ONE) Source -
single source supplier .
Certificate
7 Unit requested shall be
manufactured after receiving P.O
from GOI MOD

8 The diesel Manufacturer shall
submit complete technical data
describing the dynamic forces,
moments, torsional and liner
vibration analysis of generator set
vs frequency which is transmitted
to the concrete floor. In case the
alternator is not fitted by the diesel
engine manufacturer, the assembler
must show a certificate that he has
done a torsional vibration analysis
of the genset.
Test / COC / COT
9 Manufacturer Test Report For the
complete unit
Certificate
C Standards
1 Quality System Standard ISO 9001-
2000
Certificate
2 EEC 89/392 Safety and Health,
Occupational Safety and Health Act
(OSHA)
Certificate
3 Electrical Generating Systems
Association (EGSA)
Certificate
4 International Electro technical
Commission (IEC)
Certificate
5 National Electric Manufacturers
Association (NEMA)
Certificate
6 National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA)
Certificate
7 ISO 3046/1, ISO DIS 8528-3, ISO
8528 ACCORDING TO para.
13.3.2
Certificate
8 Generator efficiencies shall be
calculated according to IEC 34-2,
Section 4, with all I^2*R losses
corrected to 105C.
Certificate

Page 259 of 252

9 UL2200 Safety for Stationary
Power Generator Assemblies (low
voltage)
Certificate
10 EMISSIONS EPA CFR 40 PART
89 SUBPART D&E AND
ISO8178-1 FOR Nox, HC, CO.
Certificate
11 EMISSIONS EU 2007 97/68/EC
Certified Models Stage 2.
Certificate
12 BS EN 50081-2 AND EN 50082-2 Certificate
13 UL 142 listed for fuel tanks Certificate
14 NFPA 30,37,110 Design and built
the fuel tanks
Certificate
15 MIL-C 27487, military
specification coupling halves,
quick-disconnect, cam-locking type
Certificate
D Diesel Engine
1 M.T.B.O (mean time between
overall) 10,000-15,000 Hours
COC / COT
2 Applied for prime power service,
electronic direct injection, water
cooled , Installed and matched with
the generator by the engine
manufacturer only
Up Dated Spec
Sheet

3 Rated speed 1500RPM Up Dated Spec
Sheet

4 Electronic Governor Speed
regulator , accuracy 0.25%
Up Dated Spec
Sheet

5 Tray under engine to collet water,
oil , fuel & liquids
Up Dated Spec
Sheet

6 Safety System : Low oil pressure,
High coolant temperature, Over
speed , Low water level, Over
crank
Up Dated Spec
Sheet

7 Speed shall be sensed by a
magnetic pickup off the engine
flywheel ring gear, A provision for
remote speed adjustment shall be
included
Up Dated Spec
Sheet

8 Robust base design includes liner
vibration isolator between tank base
and engine generator
Up Dated Spec
Sheet

Page 260 of 252

9 The engine shall be installed and
matched with the generator by the
Up Dated Spec
Sheet

E Starting system
1 Starting system voltage 12V to
crank the engine at -10C
Updated Spec
Sheet

2 Battery charger 230V/10A/50Hz
with the required protections.
Updated Spec
Sheet

3 Battery capacity 100 AH for four
cycle starting interval
Updated Spec
Sheet

4 Charging alternator 45 - 100A with
integral self-regulator include belt
guard
Updated Spec
Sheet

5 The battery system include :
connection cables ,battery terminals
plastic cover for each terminal
Updated Spec
Sheet

F Fuel system
1 Integral fuel tank with dual wall
and fuel capacity for 8-12 working
hours at full load including valve
drain
Spec Sheet &
Drawings

2 Dimensions Length and Width will
not be larger than the base frame
length and width respectively
Spec Sheet &
Drawings

3 Period between filters changes 250
Hours
Updated Spec
Sheet

4 Manual Fuel priming pump Updated Spec
Sheet

5 Primary fuel filter Includes water
separator , the water separator to be
include water sensor and alarm
indication at control panel
Updated Spec
Sheet

6 Manual Fuel transfer pump to fill
the internal fuel tank from external
source 20 Liter/Hour, including 3
meters long flexible armored pipe
and filter on its end.
Updated Spec
Sheet

7 Primary tank leak detection switch
in containment basin and leakage
alarm indication at the control
panel.
Updated Spec
Sheet

Page 261 of 252

8 Low fuel level switch alarm Updated Spec
Sheet

9 Fuel mechanical gauge Updated Spec
Sheet

10 All fuel piping system shall comply
with SAJ-30 standard.

Certificate
11 a. Fuel source selector system:
b. The selector system shall be
installed on the Gen set
enclosure adjacent to the
engine's fuel feed pipe.
c. The system shall include two 3-
way butterball valves,
appropriate for diesel fuel, made
of brass or stainless steel, L-
type, 1/2", interlocked between
each other.
The 1st valve for fuel feed line
and the second for the fuel return
line.
Drawring
11 d. The interlocking shall be for
up/down operation.
e. The valve system shall be
installed inside the GenSet
enclosure and shall not disturb
the unit doors.
f. The installation will be on a
structure made of galvanized and
painted steel profiles, connected
to the unit base.
g. The fuel pipes shall be secured
by steel clips with neoprene
coating.
h. The connection between the
flexible pipes and the incoming
pipes from the external fuel tank
(feed & return pipes), shall be
performed by "Fast connection
Coupler" (FCC), suitable for
diesel fuel, 1/2" diameter
(Female type).
The FCC shall include non-
return valve. The FCC shall be
made of aluminum, brass or
stainless steel with NPT thread
and chain secured end-cap.
The FCC shall be suitable for
diesel fuel systems and comply
with the American standard

Page 262 of 252

MIL-C-27487.
i. The pipes between the engine
and the integral fuel tank shall
be flexible and armored, made of
neoprene, suitable for diesel fuel
and includes 2 original threaded
connectors.
j. An engraved anodized
aluminum sign 30x30 cm shall
be installed near the system. The
sign shall include operating
instructions and flow directions
arrows.
k. The system shall be fully tested
with all its fuel supply options at
the supplier's site.

12 Fuel piping system to the external
fuel tank:
a. The system includes two pipes:
b. Fuel feeding pipe
c. Fuel return pipe.
d. 1/2" FCC (male type) shall be
installed on both pipe's ends.
e. The connection between the
FCC and the fuel pipes shall be
performed by equipment as
recommended by the FCC
manufacturer.
a. The flexible pipes shall be made
of neoprene, armored, UV-
resistant, suitable for diesel fuel,
1/2" diameter, model HD
ELFAX or equivalent.
Drawing
G Oil system
1 Period between oil and filters
changes 250 Hours
Updated Spec
Sheet

2 Oil will be supplied with the unit
(For 500 operation hours)
Oil Grade
3 Oil system include valve drain Updated Spec
Sheet

H Air Inlet System
1 The engine shall include an air
cleaning system comprises of filter
house and replaceable, cartridge
type dry filter.
Updated Spec
Sheet

2 A service indicator shall be
provided for the filter status
Updated Spec
Sheet

I Cooling system

Page 263 of 252

1 Electrical water cooling pre-heater
230VAC 50Hz 1.5KW
Updated Spec
Sheet

2 The diesel engine and radiator is
filled with EXTENDED LIFE
COOLANT (ELC) for 5,000 hours
Updated Spec
Sheet

3 Radiator with guard sized for
ambient air capability 50C ,
coolant level side glass window,
coolant drain line with valve
Updated Spec
Sheet

4 The radiator includes coolant level
sensor Installed
Updated Spec
Sheet

5 Coolant line between jacket water
heater include valves
Updated Spec
Sheet

6 Water pump and thermostat Updated Spec
Sheet

7 Fan and heavy duty belt guards Updated Spec
Sheet

J Exhaust system
1 The exhaust silencer incorporate
internally the enclosure
Updated Spec
Sheet

2 Stainless steel flexible fitting , with
isolation (thermal) guard
Updated Spec
Sheet

K 3-Phase Alternator
1 Brushless synchronous Updated Spec
Sheet

2 Self excitation with PMG Including
isolation transformers
Updated Spec
Sheet

3 Unit net output prime power
63KVA
Updated Spec
Sheet

4 Voltage 230/400 Volt Updated Spec
Sheet

5 Frequency 50Hz Updated Spec
Sheet

6 Pitch2/3 (0.6667) Updated Spec
Sheet

7 Windings insulation In stator and
rotor CLASS H
Updated Spec
Sheet

8 Space heaters Updated Spec
Sheet

9 Water protection IP23 Updated Spec
Sheet

Page 264 of 252

10 Electronic voltage regulator
Sensing 3 phases, accuracy 0.25%
Updated Spec
Sheet

11 Temperature rise Shall not exceed
105C
Updated Spec
Sheet

12 THDv not more than 5% without
load
Updated Spec
Sheet

13 Short circuit 300% for 15 sec Updated Spec
Sheet

15 The generator shall be installed and
matched with the diesel engine by
the engine manufacturer only.
Updated Spec
Sheet

L Circuit breaker
1 The following CB will be
considered acceptable for use the
C.B matched and calibrate to the
generator rating: ABB Sace/ Merlin
Gerin / Westinghouse/ Square D
Updated Spec
Sheet

2 Circuit breaker current rating 100 A Updated Spec
Sheet

3 Icu Rated for Short Circuit
current 30 [KA]
Updated Spec
Sheet

4 Magnetic and thermal protection
Adjusting
Updated Spec
Sheet

5 Trip coil 12V Updated Spec
Sheet

6 Auxiliary contact 2NC+ 2NO Updated Spec
Sheet

7 The CB shall be installed in a
standard enclosure; The load
feeding cable shall be connected to
the CB via terminals or bus-bars
with appropriate screws, washers
and nuts.
The connection means shall allow
the connection of 3 phases and
neutral conductors.
Updated Spec
Sheet and shop
drawings

M Electronic control panel

Page 265 of 252

1 The electronic control panel shall
be mounted on the generator with
vibration isolators. It shall be an
environmentally sealed NEMA 1/IP
22 enclosure and consist of solid-
state, micro-processor-based
modules for engine control and AC
metering
Updated Spec
Sheet

2 The control panel shall be
manufactured by the diesel-
generator manufacturer
Updated Spec
Sheet

3 The control panel shall be protected
against:
Updated Spec
Sheet

3.1 all inputs and outputs must be
protected against short circuits, to
(+/-) battery.
Updated Spec
Sheet

3.2 Reverse polarity connection. Updated Spec
Sheet

3.3 Overvoltage and transient surges. Updated Spec
Sheet

3.4 Accuracy is maintained over an
ambient temperature range of -40C
to +70C.
Updated Spec
Sheet

3.5 Temperature range: Operating: -40
C to + 70 C, Storage: -55C to +
85 C
Updated Spec
Sheet

3.6 Operating voltage: 10-40 VDC. Updated Spec
Sheet

3.7 Shock withstand 15 g. Updated Spec
Sheet

3.8 Vibration: withstand 20 g @ 18-
500 Hz
Updated Spec
Sheet

3.9 Humidity 0-100% relative humidity Updated Spec
Sheet

3.10 EMI immunity complying with IEC
801-2, IEC 801-3, IEC 801-4, EN
5082-2.
Updated Spec
Sheet

Page 266 of 252

4 Will display operating information,
system diagnostics, and fault
shutdown using one back lighted
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) and
eight or more according to
specification LEDs.
Updated Spec
Sheet

5 The control panel will consist of the
following features:
Updated Spec
Sheet

5.1 AC amps, LCD, 0-100 amp true
RMS, 0.5% accuracy, 1 volt
resolution
Updated Spec
Sheet

5.2 AC volts LCD, 0-500 VAC true
RMS, 0.5% accuracy, 1 volt
resolution
Updated Spec
Sheet

5.3 Frequency, LCD, 45-65 Hz, 0.3 Hz
accuracy, 0.1 Hz resolution
Updated Spec
Sheet

5.4 Engine RPM Updated Spec
Sheet

5.5 Generator set operating run hours Updated Spec
Sheet

5.6 KW (total and per phase) Updated Spec
Sheet

5.7 KVA (total) Updated Spec
Sheet

5.8 KVAR (total and per phase) Updated Spec
Sheet

5.9 KW-hr (total) Updated Spec
Sheet

5.10 KVA--hr (total) Updated Spec
Sheet

5.11 PF (average total and per phase). Updated Spec
Sheet

5.12 Battery voltage Updated Spec
Sheet

5.13 Start engine counter Updated Spec
Sheet

5.14 Engine oil pressure Updated Spec
Sheet

5.15 Engine coolant temperature Updated Spec
Sheet

5.16 Engine crank attempt Updated Spec
Sheet

Page 267 of 252

5.17 Service maintenance interval Updated Spec
Sheet

5.18 Emergency stop via a red push
button (mushroom head)
Updated Spec
Sheet

5.19 Engine control switch (four-
position; stop-off/reset; manual
start, auto cool down stop)
Updated Spec
Sheet

5.20 Adjustable 1-60 seconds crank/rest
periods
Updated Spec
Sheet

5.21 Indicator/display test switch Updated Spec
Sheet

5.22 Voltage / Frequency adjust
potentiometer
Updated Spec
Sheet

5.23 direct connection or connection via
MODEMs to host computer or PLC
RS 485, using MODBUS protocol
plus applicable software
Updated Spec
Sheet

5.24 Panel illumination lights (2) and
ON/OFF switch. (1 internal +
1external)With ON/OFF switch
Updated Spec
Sheet

5.25 8 digital inputs Updated Spec
Sheet

5.26 16 relay outputs: Updated Spec
Sheet

5.26.1 Generator Ready
5.26.2 Summary fault
5.26.3 Overload
5.26.4 Over voltage
5.26.5 Temperature fault
5.26.6 Oil pressure

Page 268 of 252

5.26.7 Over speed
5.26.8 Start fault
5.26.9 Low fuel
5.26.1
0
7 reserved output relay contacts

5.27 Flashing LED indicators for
protection and diagnostics,
including:
Updated Spec
Sheet

5.27.1 Low oil pressure Updated Spec
Sheet

5.27.2 High/Low coolant temperature Updated Spec
Sheet

5.27.3 Low fuel level Updated Spec
Sheet

5.27.4 Engine switch in a non automatic
mode
Updated Spec
Sheet

5.27.5 Low battery voltage Updated Spec
Sheet

5.27.6 Charging alternator fault Updated Spec
Sheet

5.28 Automatic start-stop engine control
with programmable safety shut-
downs at the following situations:
Updated Spec
Sheet

5.28.1 Low oil pressure Updated Spec
Sheet

5.28.2 High coolant temperature Updated Spec
Sheet

5.28.3 Over crank Updated Spec
Sheet

5.28.4 Over speed Updated Spec
Sheet

Page 269 of 252

5.28.5 Emergency stop Updated Spec
Sheet

5.28.6 Low coolant level Updated Spec
Sheet

6 Service panel:
A service panel shall be installed
bellow the control panel. The
service panel shal include the
following components:
1. 3x16A MCB
2. Residual leakage relay
4x25A/30mA
3. Wall socket, 5x16A
4. Wall socket , 3x16A,
Israeli standard.
An opening for cables insertion
shall be performed on the genset
enclosure as required. A grooved
gasket made of rubber shall be
adopted to the opening perimeter in
order to avoid friction and dirt..
Drawings
N Weather Enclosure
1 Weather protective enclosure built
for sound attenuation 66 -74 dBA at
distance of 7 meter at full load
Updated Spec
Sheet

2 Environmentally friendly, polyester
powder baked paint
Updated Spec
Sheet

3 Critical exhaust Silencer Group In a
different cell.
Updated Spec
Sheet

4 Emergency stop via a red push
button (mushroom head)
Updated Spec
Sheet

5 Illumination lights (2) for the
engine with ON/OFF switch
Updated Spec
Sheet

6 Factory installed by the engine
manufacturer
Updated Spec
Sheet

7 Enclosure made from Galvanized
steel, Constructed of 2 mm (14
gauge) sheet metal.
Updated Spec
Sheet

8 Resistance to sunlight, fuel and
lubricants, and steam cleaner
chemicals.
Updated Spec
Sheet

9 Built for generator set operating at
temperature of 50C @ full load
Test / COC / COT

Page 270 of 252

10 All doors on each side will be
locked with a single padlock and
hinges made of stainless steel.
Updated Spec
Sheet

11 The oil and coolant drain group
shall include a high-quality ball
valve in the drain line, located close
to the fluid source. The oil and
coolant drain lines shall be located
outside the unit to facilitate
maintenance
Updated Spec
Sheet

12 Crankcase fume disposal shall
terminate in front of the radiator to
prevent oil from collecting on the
radiator core and reducing cooling
capacity (installed).
Updated Spec
Sheet

13 An opening for load feeding cables
shall be performed bellow the main
CB enclosure. The opening shall be
appropriate for the cable's insertion.
A grooved gasket made of rubber
shall be adapted to the opening
perimeter in order to avoid friction
and dirt.
Drawings
14 The batteries and battery rack shall
fit inside the enclosure and be held
securely in place.
Updated Spec
Sheet

15 Single point lifting arch. The crane
lifting eye shall be 3'' diameter.
Updated Spec
Sheet

16 Welded steel containment basin
constructed of 3 mm sheet metal
under the all unit minimum of
110% primary fuel tank capacity &
drain cork , Dimensions Length and
Width will not be larger than the
base frame length and width
respectively
Drawings

Page 271 of 252

17 A grounding bas-bar shall be
installed in the weather enclosure,
on the GenSet's base. All Genset's
parts shall be grounded to the bus
bar with appropriate flexible
conductors.
Each conductor shall be connected
to a separate screw. At least three
spare screws shall be obtained.
Updated Spec
Sheet, Drawings

O English & Hebrew signs
1 Engine steel signs includes: engine
model, serial number, production
date, manufacturer name,
production country, RPM ,
Technical genset data Made from

2 3-PH generator steel signs includes:
model, serial number, KVA, KW,
PF, Voltage, Amperage, Frequency,
Temperature, production date,
manufacturer name, production
country Made from steel

3 Control panel manufacturer
standard signs & Hebrew alarms
steel signs

4 I.A.F cat No., I.A.F serial No. ,
steel signs on both enclosure rear &
front sides (100 x 800 mm). The
above numbers will be provided by
the IAF.
TBD
5 Local Representative will provide
40 more Hebrew steel sign
according to a list that will be
provided by I.A.F
TBD
P Warranty
1 Warranty period for the complete
unit - 24 Months Or 8,000 Hours
from date of delivery
(commissioning) the first event
applies
Certificate

Page 272 of 252

2 All services during the warranty
period to be done at installation site
at no charge, by the Israeli dealer of
the diesel-generator manufacturer.
Certificate
3 The warranty period will
commence upon customers final
acceptance test approval of
generator set installed at the site, in
accordance with the acceptance
specifications
Certificate
4 Realization of the warranty shall be
made through the Suppliers agent
in Israel, who shall be responsible
for providing all material,
equipment and work necessary to
restore the equipment to its fully
operational condition.

Certificate
Q Technical information, Handbook
1 Three (3) copies manufacturer
service manuals shall be provided
for each genset including :

1.1 Operating & Maintenance Manual
1.2 Spare Parts Catalog paper
1.3 Full set of Electrical & Mechanical
Drawings

1.4 Operation Manual Chart
1.5 Trouble shooting guide
2 Three (3) copies Hebrew operation
instruction handbook including :

2.1 All above mentioned in Para. 1.1 -
1.5

R Manufacturer acceptance test

Page 273 of 252

1 Factory Acceptance Test: The
diesel-generating sets will be
completely assembled and
connected at the Manufacturers
plant. The first acceptance test
should be conducted at the
Manufacturers plant according to
Manufacturers standard acceptance
test procedure, and should meet the
requirements of this specification.
Gen Set Test
Report

2 Manufacturer standard Engine Test Engine Test
Report

3 Manufacturer standard Generator
Test
Generator Test
Report

4 The Manufacturer shall submit a
COC/COT test certificate and
torsional vibration analyzes made
by the original D/G set
manufacturer.

TVA / COC / COT
S Witness test
5 The Manufacturer shall submitted
to the customer a quote for witness
test, the price to be including in the
quoted, the customer will be
present during the test , subject to
advance notice to the Manufacturer.
Standard factory
witness test

T L.R acceptance test
1 Verify all components supplied by
the manufacturer according to the
specification

2 Verify all GenSet protection
devices:

2.1 Engine protection:
Oil pressure, over temperature, low
coolant, over speed, emergency
shut-off.
The above mentioned protection
devices shall trip the main CB, stop
the engine and provide and
appropriate indication in the control

Page 274 of 252

panel.
2.2 General Alert (indication only at
the control panel, the Genset
maintains its operation):
Battery charging fault, water in
diesel fuel.

2.3 Over voltage, over frequency, low
voltage, low frequency: tripping of
the mains CB.

2.4 Magnetic and thermal adjustable
current settings for main CB.

3 General Safety:
Protective means for rotating
devices, thermal insulation for the
exhaust pipes and rubber insulators
for the battery terminals.

4 Insulation test of the Genset's
output terminals with 500Vac tester
>= 2 M

5 Grounding continuity test:
The test shall include resistance
measurement between the
grounding bus-bar and various
metal parts. The resistance shall be
<= 0.1.
The test will include also a current
of 25A via the grounding system,
by connecting of 3V source.

6 Load Test and recording &
measuring the GenSet in Operation
for 8 hours at 30% - 110% service
load :
Load Test
6.1 Operate the engine generator-set for
at least 30 minutes at 30% of
service load, then increase load to
50% for additional 30 minutes.
Load Test
6.2 Increase load to 100% of service
load and operate the engine
generator-set for at least 6 hours.
Load Test
6.3 Increase load to 10% of service
load and operate the engine
generator-set for 60 minutes
Load Test

Page 275 of 252

6.4 Every 30 minutes the following
parameters will be measured &
recorded: Engine hour meter,
Engine coolant Temp. , Engine oil
pressure, Voltage , Frequency ,
Average phase Amp , KW Load ,%
Of load
Load Test
7 The diesel fuel consumption during
the above tests shall be supplied
from the integral fuel tank.

8 All test equipment require to
perform the above tests shall be
All liquids and disposals required
to perform the above tests shall be
The GenSet shall be supplied to the
site with full oil, coolant and diesel
fuel.

U Spare parts
1 The Contractor shall provide, for
each generator and at no additional
price the following spare parts for
two maintenance intervals as per
manufacturer's recommendation: air
filters, oil filters, fuel filters.

V Training
1 The Manufacturer and/or his Israeli
representative shall provide all
necessary training and instruction
for operating and maintenance of
the generator set to relevant Air
Force personnel.

2 The training will be at the expense
of the Manufacturer or his Israeli
representative, and shall provide
periodic training seminars and take
at least 1 day for each unit for at
least 15 persons.

Page 276 of 252

98.02 External Rectangular diesel fuel tank

98.02.1. Introduction
1. General Description
Rectangular fuel tank, for on-floor installation, with capacity of 1000 liters.
The tank stores the fuel for diesel generator set, and includes spill
containment.
The tank and the spill containment will be manufactured of steel and will
include additional accessories as specified bellow.

The tank that will be supplied by the contactor will be used for diesel fuel
storage, and shall withstand with all requirements opposed by the ministry
of industry & trade and by the ministry of environmental protection and the
Israeli Standards Institute.
2. Preliminary conditions
2.1 The diesel fuel tank manufacturer shall be approved the ministry of
industry & trade, by the ministry of environmental protection and by the
2.2 The manufacturer shall have the ability to supply maintenance services
in Israel.
2.3 The manufacturer must be well known and with proved experience in
manufacturing fuel tanks according to the Israeli and International
standards as specified in section 3.
2.4 The manufacturer shall have the ability to supply maintenance repairing
and engineering services at the installation site.
The required services shall be preformed by the manufacturer skilled
employees and not by sub-contractors.
The supplier shall employ at least 3 technicians with appropriate training
and authorization.
2.5 The manufacturer shall have the ability to supply emergency services
24/7.
2.6 The manufacturer shall maintain an adequate spare parts stock for
performing maintenances overhauls for 5 years period.
2.7 The system shall be standard product, from which at least 100 units were
already supplied and installed.
The manufacture will submit for the COR's approval, a list of 5
installation sites according to the following format:

# Site Tank description Contact Name Duty Phone No.

2.8 All changes in the standard product that will be required due to the spec's
requirements shall be described in the submittals.

Page 277 of 252

2.9 The manufacture shall have a proved experience of at least 10 years in
fuel tanks production.
The certificates shall be included with the transmittal.

98.02.2. Binding Standards:
1.1 UL 58
1.2 UL 142
1.3 ASME VIII DUV 1
1.4 ISO 2002
1.5 EPA
1.6 Israel Electrical Law
1.7 Israeli Standard 2000 for QA
1.8 Businesses licensing regulations kerosene storage 1976
1.9 Regulations of the ministry of environmental protection for water
pollution prevention 1997

98.02.3. Diesel fuel tank production details:

1. Rectangular diesel fuel tank, with 1000 liters capacity, including stand,
maintenance door and spill containment.
The following details shall be supplied by the tank manufacturer and
submitted for the COR's approval.
2. Tank manufacturer:
2.1 The tank will be manufactured by a manufacture approved by the
ministry of industry & trade, by the ministry of environmental
protection and by the Israeli Standards Institute.
Certificates shall be submitted.
2.2 Reputation:
The manufacture shall have a proved experience of at least 10 years in
fuel tanks production.
A certificate shall be submitted.
3. Principal Production plan shall be submitted for the COR's approval. After
the COR approval, and prior to production, the shop drawings shall be
approved by the ISI.
4. Shop Drawings final Approval:
The tank shall be manufactured according to the standards requirements:
UL142, ASME VIII DUV1.
Shop drawings approved by the ISI shall be submitted for the COR's final
approval.

Page 278 of 252

5. Tank Dimensions:
5.1 Height <= 2250 mm
5.2 Width <= 500 mm
5.3 Length< = 900 mm
6. Steel Description:
6.1 The tank and spill containment shall be made of EN10025 S235JR
steel.
6.2 Wall thickness:
a. Tank: 6mm
b. Spill containment: 4 mm
7. The flanges shall be performed according to B16/5 class 150 standard.
Flanged openings shall be sealed by flanged caps with gaskets appropriate
for fuel systems, 1.5 mm thick or thicker, screws and nuts around the
perimeter.
8. Electrostatic grounding bridges shall be installed on all flanges according to
the electrical law.
9. Service door:
A round cap (door), 500 mm diameter, shall be performed on the tank's
ceiling. The opening will include collar and steel door, 6 mm thick with 1.5
mm thick gasket (diesel fuel resistant). The door shall be attached by screws
and nuts around its perimeter.
10. Tank stand:
The tank stand shall be produced as a separate unit, without any welded
connections to the tank. The stand will be performed of L60/60/6 profiles,
and will include a frame in which the tank will be installed. The stand shall
have 4 legs 250 mm high.
11. Lifting lugs:
The tank shall include 4 lifting lugs, welded to its body. The lugs shall be
calculated for the maximal expected weight that includes the tank's self
weight and the full capacity fuel weight. The hole diameter shall be 2".
12. Grounding connection:
A grounding screw, 15 mm diameter shall be welded to the tank`s body.
The screw will include washers and nuts Similar screw shall be installed on
the stand and on the spill containment.
Grounding bridges shall be installed in order to connect the tank, the spill
containment and the stand.
13. Breathing Device:
A 2" flange shall be installed on the tank`s ceiling. 300 mm long 2" pipe
with 180 curved end and mash cap, shall be threaded into the flange.
14. Refueling caps:
2 welded sleeved shall be installed on the tank's ceiling:
14.1 2.5" sleeve on which a fast connection adaptor, OPW or similar will be
installed. The adaptor shall include a cap secured by welded chain.

Page 279 of 252

14.2 3" sleeve with steel screwed cover. A grip shall be installed on the cap
for open/close operation.
15. Opening for fuel return line from diesel generator engine, by 2" welded
sleeve on the tank's ceiling. A temporary cover shall be supplied and
removed before connection to the fuel line. The sleeve shall be installed on
the rear part of the ceiling and as far as possible from the main output of the
tank towards the diesel engine.
16. Opening for fuel level gauge by 2" welded sleeve on the tank's ceiling.
The sleeve shall be installed on the front part of the ceiling.
A mechanical meter with liters scale and a buoy shall be installed on the
sleeve.
17. Openings for future use:
2 welded sleeves, 3" diameter with screwed cover shall be installed on the
tank's ceiling.
18. Fuel output to the engine by 1" welded sleeve, on the tank's front wall, 30
mm above the bottom, with butterball valve and temporary cap
19. Opening for pressure transducer, by 1" welded sleeve, on the tank's front
wall, 30 mm above the bottom, 200 mm from the fuel output with butterball
valve and temporary cap.
20. Opening for tank's residual drain, by 1" welded sleeve, on the tank's front
wall, adjacent to the bottom, with butterball valve and cap secured by chain.
21. Openings for future use:
2 welded sleeves, 2" diameter with screwed cover shall be installed on the
tank's front wall, 30 mm above the bottom, 200 mm from the pressure
transducer opening and 200 mm from each other.
22. All of the valves that will be installed on the tank and on the spill
containment shall be butterball type, oil resistant and diesel fuel resistant.
Valves for pipes over 2" diameter shall be of flanged type. Data sheet shall
be submitted for the COR's approval prior to installation.
23. Grounding pulley for refueling vehicle shall be installed on a welded holder
near the refueling opening.
The sheave shall include spring driven cable reel, flexible grounding cable
with 25 sqr mm cross section, 15 m long, neoprene insulated and insulated
adaptor for the ground connection to the refueling vehicle.
Data sheet shall be submitted for the COR's approval prior to installation.
24. Spill containment dimensions:
The spill containment volume shall be 10% greater than the tank's volume.
25. The Spill containment shall be performed from U profiles construction, on
which sheet metal walls will be welded.
U profiles supports shall be installed every 500 mm.
The upper edge of the walls shall be bent in U shape.
26. A base, made of 2 U profiles shall be installed bellow the spill containment
at the tank stand legs locations.

Page 280 of 252

27. The tank's stand legs shall be connected to the spill containment body. For
that purpose, 2 U profiles shall be welded inside the spill containment. The
distance between the profiles shall match to the distance between the tank's
stand legs. The legs will be connected to the profiles by screws, washers
and nuts (not by welding).
28. Four anchoring lugs shall be welded at the spill containment bottom
perimeter, for anchoring to the concrete floor.
20 mm hole in each lug.
29. Four lifting lugs shall be welded at the spill containment upper perimeter.
The lugs shall be calculated for the maximal expected weight that includes
the tank`s self weight and the full capacity fuel weight. The hole diameter
shall be 2".
30. Spill containment drain:
A 2" drain welded sleeve, shall be installed on the spill containment front
wall, adjacent to the bottom, with butterball valve and screwed cap secured
by chain.
31. Monitoring probe device:
At one of the inner corners of the spill containment 2" 450 mm long
perforated steel pipe shall be installed by welding.
The pipe will be used as a sleeve for the monitoring probe for fuel leakage.
On the upper end, a screwed metallic cap with cable gland shall be installed.
The pipe shall be installed 20 mm from the spill containment wall.
32. Painting and Cleaning
The preparation for cleaning shall include sandblast for removing dirt and
rust, polishing and honing.
The painting will be performed with two layers of "Zinchromat" paint.
The color to be chosen by IAF.
The paints shall be resistant to oil and diesel fuel. The specifications of the
paint shall be submitted for the COR's approval.
The inner side of the tank shall be cleaned by sandblast.
After general cleaning, and removing of the welding burrs the tank shall be
washed and dried.
33. Spill containment sealing inspection:
After production and painting of the spill containment, sealing inspection
shall be performed.
The spill containment shall be filled by diesel fuel for 48 hour period.
If a leakage is inspected, the leaking welding point shall be re-welded and
painted.
The sealing inspection shall be repeated.
The sealing inspection certificate, including the inspection and inspector
details shall be submitted to the COR prior the delivery to the site. Quality
verification:
34. After the completion of tank and spill containment production, The COR
will verify the quality and the compliance to the specification requirements.
The verification will be held at the manufacturer facilities.
35. Israel Standard Institute approval:
After the completion of tank and spill containment production, these shall

Page 281 of 252

be examined by an authorized inspector of the ISI.
The certificate shall be submitted to the COR prior the Delivery of the tank
to the site.
36. Final Acceptance tests:
After the completion of fixing the rejects given during the 1
st
quality
verification, final verification will be held at the manufacturer facilities.
37. Delivery authorization:
The contractor shall get the COR approval for the delivery of the tank to the
site.
After completing the repair of all rejects the COR will submit a documented
approval for delivery.

98.02.4. Signage
1. The signs shall be made of black anodized aluminum sheets with engraved
letters.
2. The sign shall be bonded to the tank by heat, oil & fuel resistant epoxy glue.
The specifications of the glue shall be submitted for the COR's approval.
3. In any case that the sign cannot be bonded, it will be hanged by stainless
steel chain.
4. Signage list:

# Sign content Location Dimensions
(cm)
Quantity
1
1000
Tank's Front wall 40x50 1
2 , Tank's Front wall 40x50 1
3

Close to grounding pulley 5x10 1
4 Close to grounding pulley 5x10 2
5 Close to tank's drainage valve 5x10 1
6 Close to spill containment's
drainage valve
5x10 1
7 Close to grounding screws 5x10 4
8 Close to tank's valve 5x10 1
9 Close to the transducer in the
tank
5x10 1
10 Close to the probe in the spill
containment
5x10 1
11 Close to the refueling opening 5x10 1
12 Close to the diesel fuel 5x10 1

Page 282 of 252

# Sign content Location Dimensions
(cm)
Quantity
mechanical meter
13 :

Close to tank's drainage valve 20x10 1
14 Close to breathing device pipe 5x10 1
15 :
: ____
: __
: __
' : ____
:
: _____ : ____
: _____ : ___
Tank's Front wall 10x10 1
4.1

98.02.5. Sensors

The following sensors shall be supplied and installed by the contractor:
1. Ultrasonic fuel level sensor, with analogue 4-20 mA current loop output,
and local LCD display.
2. Leakage sensor with dry contact output.
3. Both sensors shall be heavy duty type with stainless steel enclosures,
designed for outdoor installation and application.
4. The sensor's details, data sheets and catalogs shall be submitted for the
COR's approval.

98.02.6. Documentation required for Approval:

The contractor shall submit the compliance table attached in the
appendix, with the required additional information as specified in the
table for the COR approval.

Page 283 of 252

Appendix B for Fuel Tank's specifications

# Description Supplier response
3.1 Rectangular diesel fuel tank, with 1000
liters capacity, including stand,
maintenance door and spill containment.
Yes / No
3.2 Tank manufacturer:
The tank will be manufactured by a
manufacture approved by the ministry of
industry & trade, by the ministry of
environmental protection and by the
Certificates shall be submitted.
Approved supplier Yes / No

Certificates attached Yes/No
3.3 Tank Manufacturer:
The tank shall be supplied by a well known
manufacture. Manufacturer details shall be
submitted for approval
Tank Manufacturer Details:
Name:________________
Address:_______________
Phone No:______________
Contact Name:___________
3.4 Reputation:
The manufacture shall have a proved
experience of at least 10 years in fuel tanks
production.
A certificate shall be submitted.
Manufacturer has ____ years of
experience.

Certificates attached Yes/No
3.5 Principal Production plan shall be
submitted for the COR's approval. After
the COR approval, and prior to
production, the shop drawings shall be
approved by the ISI.

3.6 Shop Drawings final Approval:
The tank shall be manufactured according
to the standards requirements: UL142,
ASME VIII DUV1.
Shop drawings approved by the ISI shall
be submitted for the COR's final approval
Yes / No
3.7 Tank Dimensions:
Height <= 2250 mm
Width <= 500 mm
Length< = 900 mm
Yes / No

Height: _______ mm
Width : _______ mm
Length: _______ mm
3.8 Steel Description:
The tank and spill containment shall be
made of EN10025 S235JR steel.
Yes / No

Page 284 of 252

Wall thickness:
Tank: 6mm
Spill containment: 4 mm
Wall thickness:
Tank: _______mm
Spill containment: ____ mm
3.9 The flanges shall be performed according
to B16/5 class 150 standard.
Flanged openings shall be sealed by
flanged caps with gaskets appropriate for
fuel systems, 1.5 mm thick or thicker,
screws and nuts around the perimeter.
Yes / No
3.10 Electrostatic grounding bridges shall be
installed on all flanges according to the
electrical law.
Yes / No
3.11 Service door:
A round cap (door), 500 mm diameter,
shall be performed on the tank's ceiling.
The opening will include collar and steel
door, 6 mm thick with 1.5 mm thick gasket
(diesel fuel resistant). The door shall be
attached by screws and nuts around its
perimeter
Yes / No

Service door
diameter: ______ mm
3.12 Tank stand:
The tank stand shall be produced as a
separate unit, without any welded
connections to the tank. The stand will be
performed of L60/60/6 profiles, and will
include a frame in which the tank will be
installed. The stand shall have 4 legs 250
mm high.

Yes / No

Legs Height ______ mm
3.13 Lifting lugs:
The tank shall include 4 lifting lugs,
welded to its body. The lugs shall be
calculated for the maximal expected
weight that includes the tank's self weight
and the full capacity fuel weight. The hole
diameter shall be 2".
Yes / No

____ lifting lugs.

Lug`s hole diameter _____"
3.14 Grounding connection:
A grounding screw, 15 mm diameter shall
be welded to the tank's body.
The screw will include washers and nuts.
Similar screw shall be installed on the
stand and on the spill containment.
Grounding bridges shall be installed in
Grounding screws diameter:
________mm

Page 285 of 252

order to connect the tank, the spill
containment and the stand.
3.15 Breathing Device:
A 2" flange shall be installed on the tank's
ceiling. 300 mm long 2" pipe with 180
curved end and mash cap, shall be threaded
into the flange.
Yes / No

Breathing device pipe diameter:
_______mm
3.16 Refueling caps:
2 welded sleeved shall be installed on the
tank's ceiling:
a. 2.5" sleeve on which a fast connection
adaptor, OPW or similar will be installed.
The adaptor shall include a cap secured by
welded chain.
b. 3" sleeve with steel screwed cover. A
grip shall be installed on the cap for
open/close operation.
Yes / No

a. Refueling opening including
fast connection adaptor diameter:
_______"

b. Refueling opening including
screwed cover diameter:
_______"
3.17 Opening for fuel return line from diesel
generator engine, by 2" welded sleeve on
the tank's ceiling. A temporary cover shall
be supplied and removed before
connection to the fuel line. The sleeve
shall be installed on the rear part of the
ceiling and as far as possible from the
main output of the tank towards the diesel
engine.
Yes / No

3.18 Opening for fuel level gauge by 2" welded
sleeve on the tank's ceiling.
The sleeve shall be installed on the front
part of the ceiling.
A mechanical meter with liters scale and a
buoy shall be installed on the sleeve..
Yes / No
3.19 Openings for future use:
2 welded sleeves, 3" diameter with
screwed cover shall be installed on the
tank's ceiling.
Yes / No
3.20 Fuel output to the engine by 1" welded
sleeve, on the tank's front wall, 30 mm
above the bottom, with butterball valve
and temporary cap.
Yes / No

3.21 Opening for pressure transducer, by 1"
welded sleeve, on the tank's front wall, 30
mm above the bottom, 200 mm from the
fuel output with butterball valve and
Yes / No

Page 286 of 252

temporary cap.
3.22 Opening for tank's residual drain, by 1"
welded sleeve, on the tank's front wall,
adjacent to the bottom, with butterball
valve and cap secured by chain
Yes / No
3.23 Openings for future use:
2 welded sleeves, 2" diameter with
screwed cover shall be installed on the
tank's front wall, 30 mm above the bottom,
200 mm from the pressure transducer
opening and 200 mm from each other.
Yes / No
3.24 All of the valves that will be installed on
the tank and on the spill containment shall
be butterball type, oil resistant and diesel
fuel resistant.
Valves for pipes over 2" diameter shall be
of flanged type ASA150. Data sheet
shall be submitted for the COR's approval
prior to installation.
Yes / No

3.25 Grounding pulley for refueling vehicle
shall be installed on a welded holder near
the refueling opening.
The sheave shall include spring driven
cable reel, flexible grounding cable with
25 sqr mm cross section, 15 m long,
neoprene insulated and insulated adaptor
for the ground connection to the refueling
vehicle.
Data sheet shall be submitted for the
COR's approval prior to installation.
Yes / No
3.26 Spill containment dimensions:
The spill containment volume shall be 10%
greater than the tank's volume.
Height: _______ mm
Width : _______ mm
Length: _______ mm
Weight: _______kg
3.27 The Spill containment shall be performed
from U profiles construction, on which
sheet metal walls will be welded.
U profiles supports shall be installed every
500 mm.
The upper edge of the walls shall be bent
in U shape.
Yes / No

Page 287 of 252

3.28 A base, made of 2 U profiles shall be
installed bellow the spill containment at
the tank stand legs locations.
Yes / No
3.29 The tank's stand legs shall be connected to
the spill containment body. For that
purpose, 2 U profiles shall be welded
inside the spill containment. The distance
between the profiles shall match to the
distance between the tank's stand legs.
The legs will be connected to the profiles
by screws, washers and nuts (not by
welding).
Yes / No

3.30 Four anchoring lugs shall be welded at the
spill containment bottom perimeter, for
anchoring to the concrete floor.
20 mm hole in each lug.
Yes / No
3.31 Four lifting lugs shall be welded at the spill
containment upper perimeter. The lugs
shall be calculated for the maximal
expected weight that includes the tank`s
self weight and the full capacity fuel
weight. The hole diameter shall be 2".
Yes / No
3.32 Spill containment drain:
A 2" drain welded sleeve, shall be installed
on the spill containment front wall,
adjacent to the bottom, with butterball
valve and screwed cap secured by chain
Yes / No

3.33 Monitoring probe device:
At one of the inner corners of the spill
containment 2" 450 mm long perforated
steel pipe shall be installed by welding.
The pipe will be used as a sleeve for the
monitoring probe for fuel leakage.
On the upper end, a screwed metallic cap
with cable gland shall be installed.
The pipe shall be installed 20 mm from the
spill containment wall.
Yes / No
3.34 Painting and Cleaning
The preparation for cleaning shall include
sandblast for removing dirt and rust,
polishing and honing.
The painting will be performed with two
layers of "Zinchromat" paint
Yes / No

Page 288 of 252

The color to be chosen by IAF.
The paints shall be resistant to oil and
diesel fuel. The specifications of the paint
shall be submitted for the COR's approval.
The inner side of the tank shall be cleaned
by sandblast.
After general cleaning, and removing of
the welding burrs the tank shall be washed
and dried.
3.35 Spill containment sealing inspection:
After production and painting of the spill
containment, sealing inspection shall be
performed.
The spill containment shall be filled by
diesel fuel for 48 hour period.
If a leakage is inspected, the leaking
welding point shall be re-welded and
painted.
The sealing inspection shall be repeated.
The sealing inspection certificate,
including the inspection and inspector
details shall be submitted to the COR
prior the delivery to the site.
Yes / No

3.36 Quality verification:
After the completion of tank and spill
containment production, The COR will
verify the quality and the compliance to
the specification requirements.
The verification will be held at the
manufacturer facilities.
Yes / No
3.37 Israel Standard Institute approval:
After the completion of tank and spill
containment production, these shall be
examined by an authorized inspector of the
ISI.
The certificate shall be submitted to the
COR prior the Delivery of the tank to the
site.
Yes / No
3.38 Final Acceptance tests:
After the completion of fixing the rejects
given during the 1
st
quality verification,
final verification will be held at the
Yes / No

Page 289 of 252

manufacturer facilities.
3.39 Delivery authorization:
The contractor shall get the COR approval
for the delivery of the tank to the site.
After completing the repair of all rejects
the COR will submit a documented
approval for delivery.
Yes / No

End of Chapter 98 Special Specifications
Supervized by: O Franco
Performed by: Livneh drilling
Page 1 from 2
BH K1 (3)
DATE: J une 14th 10
(kPa) SPT w PL LL FS -#200
0 Ultimate (N) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
1
6
0
.
2
1
5
8
.
0
5
G
(
G
C
)
C
H
8
1
6
0
.
6
5
A
U
G
E
R
4
"
Dark Brown, fat CLAY
Whitish, CHALK may be
boulders & Cobbles
Cobbles and
GRAVEL in a
brownish fat CLAY
matrix (Gravelly CLAY
to Clayey Gravel)
Withish, CHALK to
slightly marly CHALK
(
C
H
)
16+50/12
66/27 cm
28+50/10
78/25 cm
ALTITUDE (MASL)
Total Depth (m)
162.45
10.5
NORTH
EAST
629,292
191,725
Laboratory Tests
A
b
s
.

l
e
v
e
l
2
1.5
1
0.5
2.5
1
9
.
9
5
4.5
7
3
6
3.5
5.5
4
S
t
r
a
t
i
g
r
a
p
h
y

(
U
S
C
S
)
FIELD TESTS
G
R
O
U
N
D

W
A
T
E
R
DESCRIPTION
(LITHOLOGY)
C
a
s
i
n
g
Location
SITE: Tal Shahar Launching Sites
42-43
T
o
o
l
Depth
(m)
DRILL
DETAILS
7.5
6.5
2
2
5
5
5
0
9
5
.
1
Page 2 from 2
BH K1 (3)
DATE: J une 14th 10
8 Ultimate (N) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
The numbers and the lythological descrioption of the soil is based on estimations and subjected to
the personal experience by the author.
Ditto
50/14
50/14 cm
1
5
1
.
9
5
4
"
The exact position of the field tests may vary 0.2 m
A
u
g
e
r
10
The values of the SPT had not been corrected by depth
End of the Borehole at 10.50 m depth
G
R
O
U
N
D

W
A
T
E
R
A
b
s
.

l
e
v
e
l
Location
No groundwater was detected
DESCRIPTION
(LITHOLOGY)
9
9.5
C
a
s
i
n
g
DRILL
DETAILS
T
o
o
l
Laboratory Tests
10.5
Depth
(m)
S
t
r
a
t
i
g
r
a
p
h
y

(
U
S
C
S
)
FIELD TESTS
NORTH
Total Depth (m)
42-43
8.5
10.5
629,292
EAST 191,725
ALTITUDE (MASL) 162.45
Page 1 from 2
BH K2 (2)
DATE: J une 14th 10
0 Ultimate (N) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Location
42-43
T
o
o
l
Depth
(m)
DRILL
DETAILS
7.5
Beige to cream,
whathered CHALK
S
t
r
a
t
i
g
r
a
p
h
y

(
U
S
C
S
)
FIELD TESTS
G
R
O
U
N
D

W
A
T
E
R
DESCRIPTION
(LITHOLOGY)
C
a
s
i
n
g
3
6
3.5
5.5
4
5
4.5
8
Withish yellow,
CHALK to marly
CHALK
C
H

-

C
L
6.5
7
Laboratory Tests
A
b
s
.

l
e
v
e
l
2
1.5
1
0.5
2.5
629,343
191,514
NORTH
EAST
Total Depth (m)
169.4
10.5
ALTITUDE (MASL)
1
6
8
.
7
1
6
5
.
3
4
0
9
8
.
8
A
U
G
E
R
4
"
Whitish CHALK to
10+14+17
31
50/15
50/15 cm
1
7
.
1
2
0
5
3
Page 2 from 2
BH K2 (2)
DATE: J une 14th 10
8 Ultimate (N) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
42-43
8.5
G
R
O
U
N
D

W
A
T
E
R
S
t
r
a
t
i
g
r
a
p
h
y

(
U
S
C
S
)
FIELD TESTS
10
DESCRIPTION
(LITHOLOGY)
9
9.5
C
a
s
i
n
g
DRILL
DETAILS
T
o
o
l
Laboratory Tests
10.5
A
b
s
.

l
e
v
e
l
Location
Depth
(m)
ALTITUDE (MASL)
The numbers and the lythological descrioption of the soil is based on estimations and subjected
to the personal experience by the author.
Ditto
1
5
8
.
9
4
"
A
u
g
e
r
17+21+30
51
The exact position of the field tests may vary 0.2 m
169.4
Total Depth (m) 10.5
NORTH 629,343
EAST 191,514
Page 1 from 2
BH K3 (6)
DATE: J une 14th 10
0 Ultimate (N) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
4
"
7
9
.
5
4
0
3
0
1
8
4
7
1
5
.
8
1
8
4
2
7
8
.
6
Redish brown fat
CLAY with ocasional
small limy gravel
(Gravely CLAY)
0.5
2.5
Light brown to orange
Silty CLAY with Chalk
Whitish yellow,
T
o
o
l
1
5
7
.
2
1
5
6
.
1
A
U
G
E
R
629,189
191,645
NORTH
EAST
43-44
159.6
8.7
ALTITUDE (MASL)
Total Depth (m)
Laboratory Tests
A
b
s
.

l
e
v
e
l
2
1.5
1
6.5
7
G
R
O
U
N
D

W
A
T
E
R
Location
3
6
3.5
5.5
4
5
4.5
Depth
(m)
DRILL
DETAILS
C
a
s
i
n
g
7.5
8
S
t
r
a
t
i
g
r
a
p
h
y

(
U
S
C
S
)
FIELD TESTS
DESCRIPTION
(LITHOLOGY)
C
L
1
7
Page 2 from 2
BH K3 (6)
DATE: J une 14th 10
8 Ultimate (N) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Ditto
Depth
(m)
1
5
0
.
9
A
u
g
e
r
4
"
NORTH 629,189
A
b
s
.

l
e
v
e
l
Location
DESCRIPTION
(LITHOLOGY)
C
a
s
i
n
g
DRILL
DETAILS
T
o
o
l
Laboratory Tests
G
R
O
U
N
D

W
A
T
E
R
S
t
r
a
t
i
g
r
a
p
h
y

(
U
S
C
S
)
FIELD TESTS
43-44
8.5
1
9
4
8
3
0
9
7
.
5
8.7
191,645
159.6
1
8
.
3
C
L

-

C
H
Total Depth (m)
EAST
ALTITUDE (MASL)
Page 1 from 2
BH K4 (4)
DATE: J une 14th 10
0 Ultimate (N) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
1
6
7
.
3
FILL - Beige Clayey
limy GRAVEL
FILL - Uniform
crushed Gravel (filter
material?)
Whitish yellow,
FILL - Light brown
CLAY with gravel
(Gravely CLAY)
1
6
9
.
3
A
U
G
E
R
4
"
1
6
8
.
3
171.1
11
ALTITUDE (MASL)
Total Depth (m)
628,955
191,797
NORTH
EAST
A
b
s
.

l
e
v
e
l
2
1.5
1
0.5
2.5
12+16+23
39
Laboratory Tests
S
t
r
a
t
i
g
r
a
p
h
y

(
U
S
C
S
)
FIELD TESTS
G
R
O
U
N
D

W
A
T
E
R
Location
3
6
3.5
5.5
7
DESCRIPTION
(LITHOLOGY)
6.5
4.5
C
L
4
5
44-45
T
o
o
l
Depth
(m)
DRILL
DETAILS
7.5
C
a
s
i
n
g
8
9
8
.
2
1
3
.
7
2
2
5
7
4
0
Page 2 from 2
BH K4 (4)
DATE: J une 14th 10
8 Ultimate (N) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
Laboratory Tests
S
t
r
a
t
i
g
r
a
p
h
y

(
U
S
C
S
)
NORTH 628,955
EAST 191,797
ALTITUDE (MASL)
1
6
0
.
1
A
u
g
e
r
4
"
A
b
s
.

l
e
v
e
l
G
R
O
U
N
D

W
A
T
E
R
17+21+30
51
10
11
Ditto
C
H
-
C
L
10.5
1
7
.
9
Location
DESCRIPTION
(LITHOLOGY)
9
9.5
C
a
s
i
n
g
DRILL
DETAILS
T
o
o
l
Depth
(m)
44-45
FIELD TESTS
8.5
171.1
Total Depth (m) 11
2
0
5
2
4
0
9
7
.
7
Page 1 from 2
BH K5 (5)
DATE: J une 14th 10
0 Ultimate (N) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
19+50
50/14 cm
1
7
2
.
2
4
"
7.5
Redish brown fat
CLAY with ocasional
small limy gravel
(Gravely CLAY)
Whitish yellow,
8
0.5
C
L
Location
3
6
3.5
5.5
4
5
4.5
Laboratory Tests
A
b
s
.

l
e
v
e
l
2
1.5
1
6.5
7
Depth
(m)
44-45
175.3
11
ALTITUDE (MASL)
Total Depth (m)
628,965
191,720
NORTH
EAST
S
t
r
a
t
i
g
r
a
p
h
y

(
U
S
C
S
)
FIELD TESTS
G
R
O
U
N
D

W
A
T
E
R
DESCRIPTION
(LITHOLOGY) T
o
o
l
DRILL
DETAILS
C
a
s
i
n
g
2.5
A
U
G
E
R
Page 2 from 2
BH K5 (5)
DATE: J une 14th 10
(kPa) SPT w PL LL -#200
8 Ultimate (N) (%) (%) (%) (%)
ALTITUDE (MASL) 175.3
1
6
4
.
3
628,965
191,720
8.5
44-45
DESCRIPTION
(LITHOLOGY)
9
9.5
C
a
s
i
n
g
DRILL
DETAILS
T
o
o
l
Laboratory Tests
G
R
O
U
N
D

W
A
T
E
R
S
t
r
a
t
i
g
r
a
p
h
y

(
U
S
C
S
)
A
b
s
.

l
e
v
e
l
Location
10
Ditto
A
u
g
e
r
4
"
11
C
L
10.5
Depth
(m)
FIELD TESTS
NORTH
EAST
Total Depth (m)
1
4
11
1
8
4
6
4
0
9
5
.
8

SECTION 00 73 15
GENERAL CONDITIONS
04/10
PART 1: GENERAL ............................................................ 3
1. 1 ORGANI ZATI ON AND LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 2 DEFI NI TI ONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 3 PAYMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 4 PERMI TS AND RESPONSI BI LI TI ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 5 COMPLI ANCE WI TH LOCAL LABOR LAWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 6 CONTRACTOR LI ASON AND COMMUNI CATI ON WI TH HOST GOVERNMENT AND OTHER
GOVERNMENT OFFI CI ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. 7 I MMUNI TY FROM LEGAL PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. 8 APPLI CABLE LAWFOR BREACH OF CONTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. 9 SUBMI TTALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. 10 PUBLI C RELEASE OF I NFORMATI ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. 10. 1 Pr ohi bi t i on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. 10. 2 Subcont r act s and Pur chase Or der s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. 11 REFERENCED STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. 12 PROHI BI TED I TEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1. 13 PROPRI ETARY NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1. 14 KEY PERSONNEL, SUBCONTRACTORS AND OUTSI DE ASSOCI ATES OR CONSULTANTS . 6
1. 15 ENGLI SH SPEAKI NG REPRESENTATI VE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1. 16 SUBMI TTAL OF PROOF OF QUALI FI CATI ONS AND EXPERI ENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 17 NO WAI VER BY GOVERNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 18 CONTRACTOR LI AI SON WI TH HOST GOVERNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 19 GENERAL SECURI TY REQUI REMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 19. 1 Access Gui del i nes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 19. 2 Cont r act or Empl oyee Base Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 19. 3 Responsi bi l i t y f or Physi cal Secur i t y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1. 19. 4 Access t o Oper at i onal Ar eas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1. 19. 5 Empl oyment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1. 19. 6 Compl i ance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1. 20 EXPERI ENCE AND QUALI FI CATI ONS OF PERSONNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1. 21 COMMERCI AL POWER I NTERRUPTI ONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1. 22 EQUI PMENT GUARANTEES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1. 23 AS- BUI LT DRAWI NGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1. 23. 1 Gener al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1. 23. 2 Wor ki ng As- Bui l t Dr awi ngs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1. 23. 3 Fi nal As- Bui l t Dr awi ngs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1. 23. 4 Execut i on and Revi ew. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1. 23. 5 Comput er Ai ded Desi gn and Dr af t i ng ( CADD) Dr awi ngs. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1. 24 CORRESPONDENCE AND LANGUAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1. 24. 1 Cor r espondence i n t he Engl i sh Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1. 24. 2 Requi r ed Acknowl edgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
PART 2: PRODUCTS .......................................................... 13
PART 3: EXECUTION ......................................................... 13
3. 1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSI BI LI TY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3. 1. 1 Pr ot ect i ve Measur es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3. 1. 2 Cont r act or s Super vi si on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3. 2 MOBI LI ZATI ON PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3. 3 CONTRACT DRAWI NGS AND SPECI FI CATI ONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3. 4 PERMI SSI ON TO EXCAVATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3. 5 UTI LI TY SERVI CE I NTERRUPTI ONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3. 5. 1 Wr i t t en Appr oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3. 5. 2 Pr e- Out age Coor di nat i on Meet i ng. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3. 6 CONTRACTOR SI TE FACI LI TI ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SECTI ON 00 73 15 Gener al Condi t i ons ( 04/ 10)

Page 2 of 24
3. 6. 1 Avai l abi l i t y and Use of Ut i l i t y Ser vi ces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3. 6. 2 St or age Ar eas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3. 6. 3 Tr ash Di sposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3. 6. 4 Removal of Const r uct i on Debr i s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3. 6. 5 Addi t i onal Requi r ement s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3. 7 ENVI RONMENTAL PROTECTI ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3. 7. 1 Gener al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3. 7. 2 Pr ot ect i on of Land Resour ces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3. 7. 3 Pr ot ect i on of Wat er Resour ces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3. 8 DI SPOSI TI ON OF MATERI AL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3. 8. 1 Tur n- I n Sal vage Mat er i al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3. 8. 2 Ti t l e t o Mat er i al s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3. 9 ROAD MAI NTENANCE AND TRAFFI C CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3. 10 DUST CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3. 10. 1 Requi r ement s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3. 10. 2 Submi t t al Requi r ement s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3. 10. 3 Repor t i ng Requi r ement s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3. 10. 4 Mi ni mumPr ecaut i ons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3. 10. 5 Tr ai ni ng. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3. 10. 6 Mai nt enance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3. 11 USE OF EXPLOSI VE MATERI ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3. 12 BURNI NG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3. 13 PROJ ECT SI GNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3. 14 WARRANTY CALLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24


Page 3 of 24
PART 1: GENERAL
1. 1 ORGANI ZATI ON AND LAYOUT
The headi ngs i n t hi s document and i n ot her document s of t hi s cont r act ar e
f or conveni ence of r eadi ng onl y and shoul d not be ut i l i zed t o i nt er pr et t he
cont ent s of t he document s.
Any pl ace i n t he document s of t hi s cont r act wher e si ngul ar i s used, i t can
al so mean pl ur al and vi ce ver sa.
1. 2 DEFI NI TI ONS
Unl ess st at ed ot her wi se, t he t er mCont r act i ng Of f i cer i n t hese document s
r ef er s t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer or Admi ni st r at i ve Cont r act i ng Of f i cer
( ACO) ( For t he pur poses of t hese speci f i cat i ons, t he t er mACO i s
under st ood t o mean Or der i ng Of f i cer or OO on J ob Or der Cont r act s ( J OC) ;
ACO s have no cont r act ual aut hor i t y on J OC cont r act s.
The t er mCont r act i ng Of f i cer s Repr esent at i ve ( COR) r ef er s t o t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , Admi ni st r at i ve Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , or ot her
speci f i cal l y desi gnat ed r epr esent at i ve. Desi gnat i on of an ACO or COR wi l l
be made i n wr i t i ng by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer and a copy of t he desi gnat i on
pr ovi ded by t he ACO or COR t o t he Cont r act or , who shal l keep a copy wi t h
t hei r f i l es.
1. 3 PAYMENT
Separ at e payment wi l l not be made f or compl i ance wi t h t hi s speci f i cat i on.
Al l cost s associ at ed t her ewi t h shal l be i ncl uded i n t he appl i cabl e uni t
pr i ces or l ump- sumpr i ces cont ai ned i n t he Bi ddi ng Schedul e.
1. 4 PERMI TS AND RESPONSI BI LI TI ES
The cont r act or shal l , wi t hout addi t i onal expense t o t he Gover nment , be
r esponsi bl e f or obt ai ni ng any necessar y l i censes and per mi t s, and f or
compl yi ng wi t h any appl i cabl e l aws, codes, and r egul at i ons i n connect i on
wi t h t he pr osecut i on of t he wor k. I t shal l be si mi l ar l y r esponsi bl e f or al l
damages t o per sons or pr oper t y t hat occur s as a r esul t of t he cont r act or s
f aul t or negl i gence. I t shal l t ake pr oper saf et y and heal t h pr ecaut i ons t o
pr ot ect t he wor k, t he wor ker s, t he publ i c, and t he pr oper t y of ot her s. I t
shal l al so be r esponsi bl e f or al l mat er i al s del i ver ed and wor k per f or med
unt i l compl et i on and accept ance of t he ent i r e const r uct i on wor k, except f or
any compl et ed uni t of const r uct i on t her eof whi ch t her et of or e may have been
accept ed.
1. 5 COMPLI ANCE WI TH LOCAL LABOR LAWS
The Cont r act or shal l compl y wi t h al l :
( 1) Local l aws, r egul at i ons, and l abor uni on agr eement s gover ni ng wor k
hour s; and

Page 4 of 24
( 2) Labor r egul at i ons i ncl udi ng col l ect i ve bar gai ni ng agr eement s,
wor ker s' compensat i on, wor ki ng condi t i ons, f r i nge benef i t s, and
l abor st andar ds or l abor cont r act mat t er s.
The Cont r act or i ndemni f i es and hol ds har ml ess t he Uni t ed St at es Gover nment
f r omal l cl ai ms ar i si ng out of t he r equi r ement s of t hi s par agr aph. Thi s
i ndemni t y i ncl udes t he Cont r act or ' s obl i gat i on t o handl e and set t l e, wi t hout
cost t o t he Uni t ed St at es Gover nment , any cl ai ms or l i t i gat i on concer ni ng
al l egat i ons t hat t he Cont r act or or t he Uni t ed St at es Gover nment , or bot h,
have not f ul l y compl i ed wi t h l ocal l abor l aws or r egul at i ons r el at i ng t o t he
per f or mance of wor k r equi r ed by t hi s cont r act .
Not wi t hst andi ng t he above, consi st ent wi t h par agr aphs 31. 205- 15( a) and
31. 205- 47( d) of t he Feder al Acqui si t i on Regul at i on, t he Cont r act or wi l l be
r ei mbur sed f or t he cost s of al l f i nes, penal t i es, and r easonabl e l i t i gat i on
expenses i ncur r ed as a r esul t of compl i ance wi t h speci f i c cont r act t er ms and
condi t i ons or wr i t t en i nst r uct i ons f r omt he Cont r act i ng of f i cer .
1. 6 CONTRACTOR LI ASON AND COMMUNI CATI ON WI TH HOST GOVERNMENT AND OTHER
GOVERNMENT OFFI CI ALS
Al l communi cat i on by t he Cont r act or wi t h al l of f i ci al s, r epr esent at i ves
and/ or of f i ces of t he Host Gover nment i n al l mat t er s per t ai ni ng t o t he
desi gn or const r uct i on of t hi s cont r act , shal l be t hr ough and i n f ul l
l i ai son wi t h t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . Thi s does not r el i nqui sh Cont r act or
r esponsi bi l i t y f or obt ai ni ng r out i ne i t ems t o conduct day- t o- day busi ness,
such as vi sas, per mi t s, and cust omcl ear ances.
The cont r act or i s f ur t her r emi nded t hat onl y t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer or
t hei r aut hor i zed r epr esent at i ve may gi ve t he cont r act or di r ect i on i n r egar ds
t o cont r act i nt er pr et at i on. As not ed i n t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer s
Repr esent at i ve ( COR) desi gnat i on l et t er , a COR may NOT modi f y t he cont r act
t er ms or condi t i ons; t hi s aut hor i t y i s r eser ved sol el y f or t he Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer or Admi ni st r at i ve Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
1. 7 I MMUNI TY FROM LEGAL PROCESS
The cont r act or agr ees t o i ndemni f y and save har ml ess t he Uni t ed St at es
Gover nment agai nst al l cl ai ms and sui t s of what soever nat ur e ar i si ng under
or i nci dent al t o per f or mance of t hi s cont r act by any subcont r act or agai nst
t he Uni t ed St at es Gover nment . The Cont r act or f ur t her agr ees t o wai ve hi s
r i ght s t o br i ng sui t or ot her l egal agai nst t he Uni t ed St at es Gover nment ,
except as pr ovi ded i n t he Di sput es cl ause of t hi s cont r act and i n t he
Uni t ed St at es Feder al St at ut es.
1. 8 APPLI CABLE LAWFOR BREACH OF CONTRACT
Uni t ed St at es l aw wi l l appl y t o r esol ve any cl ai mof br each of t hi s
cont r act .
1. 9 SUBMI TTALS

Page 5 of 24
Gover nment appr oval i s r equi r ed f or submi t t al s wi t h G desi gnat i on;
submi t t al s not havi ng a G ar e f or Cont r act or Qual i t y appr oval . Submi t t he
f ol l owi ng i n accor dance wi t h Sect i on 01 33 00 SUBMI TTAL PROCEDURES:
SD- 01 Mobi l i zat i on Pl an ( G)
SD- 01 Physi cal Secur i t y Pl an
SD- 01 Pr event i on of Envi r onment al
Pol l ut i on Pl an
SD- 01 Er osi on Cont r ol Pl an *
SD- 01 Tr af f i c Cont r ol Pl an *
SD- 01 Dust Cont r ol Pl an
SD- 01 J ob Si t e Pl an ( G)
SD- 01 Tempor ar y Excavat i on/ Embankment
Pl an ( G) *
SD- 01 Key Per sonnel ( G)
SD- 01 Pr oj ect Si gn ( G)
SD- 07 Pr oof of Qual i f i cat i ons and
Exper i ence*
SD- 11 As- Bui l t Dr awi ngs ( G) .
SD- 11 Equi pment Guar ant i es *
* I ndi cat es submi t t al s onl y r equi r ed i f t hey ar e i dent i f i ed i n t he scope of
wor k. Conf i r mwi t h COR pr i or t o submi t t i ng.
1. 10 PUBLI C RELEASE OF I NFORMATI ON
1. 10. 1 Pr ohi bi t i on
Ther e shal l be no publ i c r el ease of i nf or mat i on or phot ogr aphs concer ni ng
any aspect of t he mat er i al s or ser vi ces r el at i ng t o t hi s sol i ci t at i on,
cont r act , pur chase or der , or ot her document s r esul t i ng t her ef r omwi t hout t he
pr i or wr i t t en appr oval of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
1. 10. 2 Subcont r act s and Pur chase Or der s
The Cont r act or agr ees t o i nser t t he subst ance of above par agr aph
" Pr ohi bi t i on" i n each subcont r act and pur chase or der gener at ed f or t hi s
cont r act .
1. 11 REFERENCED STANDARDS
Unl ess speci f i cal l y cal l ed out i n t he speci f i cat i ons, Host Nat i on St andar ds
shal l be used f or t hi s cont r act . Wher e r ef er ence i s made i n t he cont r act t o
Host Nat i on St andar ds, i ncl udi ng, but not l i mi t ed t o t hose i ssued by t he
Deut sches I nst i t ut f r Nor mung e. V. ( DI N; i n Engl i sh, t he Ger man I nst i t ut e
f or St andar di zat i on) and The Eur opean Commi t t ee f or St andar di zat i on or
Comi t Eur open de Nor mal i sat i on ( CEN) ( EN St andar ds) , i ncl udi ng wher e such
st andar ds ar e i ncor por at ed i nt o t he cont r act i n f ul l t ext or by r ef er ence,
t he r ef er ence / i ncor por at i on appl i es onl y t o est abl i sh a t echni cal st andar d
or l evel of per f or mance or qual i t y and does not cr eat e subst ant i ve r i ght s
under t he cont r act .
Al l cost s r equi r ed t o compl y wi t h t hese st andar ds shal l be i ncl uded i n t he
bi d pr i ce, i ncl udi ng t he per f or mance of any addi t i onal wor k, such as
associ at ed and speci al t asks. Not wi t hst andi ng any l anguage i n any
st andar d, t he r equi r ement t o pr ovi de any necessar y mat er i al , i t emof
equi pment or wor k, r est s wi t h t he cont r act or unl ess anot her cont r act
pr ovi si on cl ear l y st at es t hat such wi l l be gover nment f ur ni shed.
When st andar ds r ef er enced i n a speci f i cat i on ar e i n conf l i ct wi t h each ot her
( such as when a US St andar d conf l i ct s wi t h a Eur opean or Host Nat i on

Page 6 of 24
st andar d wi t hi n t he same speci f i cat i on sect i on) , Host Nat i on St andar d shal l
gover n unl ess ot her wi se speci f i ed wi t hi n t he cont r act document s. A conf l i ct
does not exi st when st andar ds r equi r e separ at e met hods or per f or mance and
bot h ar e achi evabl e. I n t hese si t uat i ons, t he cont r act or shal l compl y wi t h
bot h st andar ds. Thi s does not appl y t o document s wi t h a di f f er ent Or der of
Pr ecedence ( f or exampl e, a st andar d r ef er enced i n a Cont r act cl ause woul d
have a hi gher or der of pr ecedence t han one r ef er enced i n a speci f i cat i on) .
The Cont r act or shal l make avai l abl e i n hi s si t e of f i ce any st andar d
r ef er enced i n t he cont r act speci f i cat i ons or used i n t he pr oj ect desi gn and
const r uct i on.
1. 12 PROHI BI TED I TEMS
The f ol l owi ng i s pr ohi bi t ed i n t hi s const r uct i on pr oj ect :
a. Use of al umi numf or el ect r i cal conduct or s.
b. Embeddi ng al umi numcondui t i n concr et e.
c. Use of f l uor escent l i ght bal l ast s and ot her pr oduct s cont ai ni ng PCB' s.
d. Use of ur ea- f or mal dehyde f oami nsul at i on pr oduct s.
e. Use of any pai nt / coat i ngs havi ng a l ead cont ent of over 0. 06 per cent
by wei ght of non- vol at i l e cont ent .
f . Use of any ozone depl et i ng chemi cal s
g. Use of zi nc- chr omat e
h. Use of mat er i al s cont ai ni ng asbest os
The Cont r act or shal l submi t onl y mat er i al s, equi pment , or syst ems f or
appr oval t hat have been i n ser vi ce/ manuf act ur e f or at l east t wo ( 2) year s.
1. 13 PROPRI ETARY NAMES
Unl ess speci f i cal l y i dent i f i ed i n t he cont r act as a Sol e Sour ce I t em,
manuf act ur er ' s pr opr i et ar y names i ndi cat ed f or col or s, t ext ur es and pat t er ns
of mat er i al s ar e f or t he pur pose of col or , t ext ur e and pat t er n sel ect i on
onl y. Ot her mat er i al s ar e accept abl e pr ovi ded t hey cl osel y appr oxi mat e
col or s, t ext ur es and pat t er ns i ndi cat ed. Any subst i t ut i ons must conf or mt o
al l ot her r equi r ement s and must be appr oved by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
1. 14 KEY PERSONNEL, SUBCONTRACTORS AND OUTSI DE ASSOCI ATES OR CONSULTANTS
I n connect i on wi t h t he ser vi ces cover ed by t hi s cont r act , any i n- house
per sonnel , subcont r act or s, and out si de associ at es or consul t ant s i dent i f i ed
i n t he Cont r act or s pr oposal shal l be l i mi t ed t o i ndi vi dual s or f i r ms t hat
wer e speci f i cal l y i dent i f i ed i n t he pr oposal . The Cont r act or shal l obt ai n
t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer ' s wr i t t en consent bef or e maki ng any subst i t ut i on f or
any desi gnat ed i n- house per sonnel , subcont r act or s, associ at es, or
consul t ant s.
1. 15 ENGLI SH SPEAKI NG REPRESENTATI VE
At al l t i mes when any per f or mance of t he wor k at t he si t e i s bei ng conduct ed
by any member of t he Cont r act or or i t s subcont r act or s, t he Cont r act or shal l
have a r epr esent at i ve pr esent on t he si t e who i s capabl e of expl ai ni ng t he

Page 7 of 24
wor k oper at i ons and r ecei vi ng i nst r uct i ons i n t he Engl i sh l anguage. The
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer shal l have t he r i ght t o det er mi ne, wi t hout appeal of
such deci si on, whet her t he pr oposed r epr esent at i ve has suf f i ci ent t echni cal
and l i ngui st i c capabi l i t i es, and t he Cont r act or shal l i mmedi at el y r epl ace
any i ndi vi dual not accept abl e t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
1. 16 SUBMI TTAL OF PROOF OF QUALI FI CATI ONS AND EXPERI ENCE
Wher e qual i f i cat i ons or exper i ence r equi r ement s ar e set f or t h i n t he
speci f i cat i ons wi t h r espect t o equi pment and equi pment i nst al l er s, wr i t t en
pr oof of such qual i f i cat i ons or exper i ence must be pr ovi ded wi t hi n t hi r t y
( 30) cal endar days af t er cont r act awar d, and bef or e pl aci ng any or der f or
equi pment or bef or e di spat chi ng equi pment i nst al l er s t o t he pr oj ect si t e.
1. 17 NO WAI VER BY GOVERNMENT
The f ai l ur e of t he Gover nment , i n any one or mor e i nst ances, t o i nsi st upon
t he st r i ct per f or mance of any of t he t er ms of t hi s cont r act or t o exer ci se
any opt i on her ei n conf er r ed shal l not be const r ued as a wai ver or
r el i nqui shment t o any ext ent of t he r i ght t o asser t or r el y upon such t er ms
or opt i on on any f ut ur e occasi on.
1. 18 CONTRACTOR LI AI SON WI TH HOST GOVERNMENT
Al l communi cat i on by t he Cont r act or wi t h al l of f i ci al s, r epr esent at i ves
and/ or of f i ces of t he Host Gover nment i n al l mat t er s per t ai ni ng t o t he
desi gn or const r uct i on of t hi s cont r act , shal l be t hr ough and i n f ul l
l i ai son wi t h t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . Thi s does not r el i nqui sh Cont r act or
r esponsi bi l i t y f or obt ai ni ng r out i ne i t ems t o conduct day- t o- day busi ness,
such as vi sas, per mi t s, and cust omcl ear ances.
1. 19 GENERAL SECURI TY REQUI REMENTS
1. 19. 1 Access Gui del i nes
The Cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or adher i ng t o al l gui del i nes
est abl i shed by t he i nst al l at i on, l ocal aut hor i t i es, and t he secur i t y of f i ce
f or access t o t he i nst al l at i on and/ or wor k si t e and wi l l be r esponsi bl e f or
t he dai l y access of t hei r per sonnel and subcont r act or wor ker s. Del ays due
t o di f f i cul t y i n access ont o t he i nst al l at i on wi l l not be j ust i f i cat i on f or
t i me or monet ar y compensat i on f r omt he Gover nment .
The Cont r act or i s caut i oned t o r evi ew any Addi t i onal Secur i t y Gui del i nes
speci f i ed el sewher e i n t hi s cont r act f or mor e st r i ngent r equi r ement s or
speci f i c access condi t i ons.
1. 19. 2 Cont r act or Empl oyee Base Access
The Cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or obt ai ni ng i nst al l at i on access f or
bot h i t s empl oyees and any subcont r act or empl oyees, and ensur i ng t hey r emai n
qual i f i ed f or base access. The Cont r act or must mai nt ai n access t hr oughout

Page 8 of 24
cont r act per f or mance.
1. 19. 3 Responsi bi l i t y f or Physi cal Secur i t y
The cont r act pr i ce shal l i ncl ude an amount suf f i ci ent t o cover al l secur i t y
measur es based on l ocal condi t i ons and as r equi r ed by t he Gover nment and as
di r ect ed by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer t hr oughout t he dur at i on of t he cont r act .
Pr i or t o mobi l i zat i on, t he Cont r act or shal l submi t hi s pr oposed means of
pr ovi di ng secur i t y as def i ned her ei naf t er .
a. The Cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or physi cal secur i t y of al l
const r uct i on mat er i al s, suppl i es, and equi pment of ever y descr i pt i on
( i ncl udi ng pr oper t y whi ch may be Gover nment f ur ni shed or owned)
pr ovi ded and/ or ut i l i zed i n t he execut i on of t hi s cont r act .
b. Adequat e out si de secur i t y l i ght i ng shal l be pr ovi ded at t he
Cont r act or s t empor ar y f aci l i t i es.
c. Cont r act or s per sonnel shal l assur e t hat al l equi pment i s de- ener gi zed
and st or ed i n desi gnat ed st or age ar eas t oget her wi t h suppl i es upon
compl et i on of wor k. When bui l di ngs ar e unoccupi ed, l i ght s, wat er
out l et s and bl ower s shal l be t ur ned of f and wi ndows cl osed and l ocked
on a f l oor - t o- f l oor basi s as wor k pr ogr esses, f ol l owed by l ocki ng of
al l ext er i or door s upon compl et i on of wor k. Keys t o bui l di ngs shal l
be deposi t ed wi t h t he per t i nent i nst al l at i on or bui l di ng dut y of f i cer .
The Cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or any l osses or damages ar i si ng
f r omt hei r f ai l ur e t o secur e bui l di ngs dur i ng and af t er wor ki ng hour s.
d. The Cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e i n t he event of t hef t by t hei r
per sonnel of Gover nment pr oper t y or per sonal pr oper t y of Gover nment
per sonnel , ci vi l i an or mi l i t ar y. Al l l ost or mi spl aced ar t i cl es f ound
by t hei r empl oyees shal l be t ur ned i n t o t he COR.
1. 19. 4 Access t o Oper at i onal Ar eas
Cont r act or per sonnel ar e expr essl y pr ohi bi t ed and shal l be r est r i ct ed f r om
ent er i ng oper at i onal bui l di ngs or ar eas wi t hout t he speci f i c aut hor i zat i on
of t he COR. To per f or mwor k, wher e " secur i t y escor t s" ar e r equi r ed f or
access t o a f aci l i t y, t he Cont r act or shal l coor di nat e wi t h t he Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer f or access t o such f aci l i t i es.
1. 19. 5 Empl oyment
Shoul d t he cont i nued empl oyment of any per son i n connect i on wi t h t hi s
cont r act , or any subcont r act her eunder , be deemed by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer
t o be pr ej udi ci al t o t he i nt er est s of t he Gover nment , t hat per son shal l
i mmedi at el y be r emoved f r omt he wor k. I n t hi s connect i on t he Cont r act or
agr ees t hat :
a. Cases whi ch may i nvol ve di sci pl i nar y act i on agai nst such per sons, or
t he necessi t y of r eassi gnment or t er mi nat i on of t hei r ser vi ces, shal l

Page 9 of 24
be i nvest i gat ed, pr ocessed, r epor t ed and di sposed of , as di r ect ed by
t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
b. Empl oyment cont r act s of al l per sons empl oyed i n connect i on wi t h t hi s
cont r act , or any subcont r act her eunder shal l i ncl ude cl auses
cont ai ni ng t he subst ance of t hi s cl ause.
1. 19. 6 Compl i ance
Compl i ance wi t h t he f or egoi ng pr ovi si ons of t hi s cl ause by subcont r act or s
shal l be t he r esponsi bi l i t y of t he Cont r act or .
1. 20 EXPERI ENCE AND QUALI FI CATI ONS OF PERSONNEL
Not wi t hst andi ng any ot her cont r act ual r equi r ement s, al l key per sonnel
associ at ed wi t h t hi s pr oj ect shal l be f l uent i n and be abl e t o conduct
communi cat i ons i n t he Engl i sh l anguage; abl e t o speak, r ead, wr i t e, and
under st and t he di r ect i ons of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer or t hei r desi gnat ed
r epr esent at i ves. Addi t i onal l y, t hey shal l be abl e t o communi cat e t o si t e
wor ker s and ot her subor di nat es i n t hei r nat i ve l anguage( s) . Key per sonnel
ar e def i ned as t he Si t e Saf et y and Heal t h Of f i cer , al l Qual i t y Cont r ol
Per sonnel , t he Si t e Super i nt endent , Pr oj ect Manager , and any ot her per sonnel
r equi r ed t o communi cat e wi t h t he gover nment on a r ecur r i ng basi s.
When qual i f i cat i ons of key per sonnel r ef er enced i n ot her sect i ons r equi r e
exper i ence or r el at ed exper i ence, t he exper i ence must be on pr oj ect s of
t he same t ype and nat ur e as t he wor k i dent i f i ed i n t he pr oj ect scope of
wor k, and be on cont r act s wi t h t he gover nment of t he Uni t ed St at es of
Amer i ca, ei t her wi t h t he US Ar my Cor ps of Engi neer s or Depar t ment of Def ense
agenci es. Ref er ences and exper i ence must be suf f i ci ent l y det ai l ed t o al l ow
f or ver i f i cat i on of exper i ence. The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer shal l have f i nal
aut hor i t y on det er mi ni ng t he r el evance of any exper i ence submi t t ed. Any
i ndi vi dual f ound t o not be i n compl i ance wi t h t hi s par agr aph shal l be
subj ect t o r emoval by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
1. 21 COMMERCI AL POWER I NTERRUPTI ONS
Commer ci al power i nt er r upt i ons ar e ant i ci pat ed dur i ng t he const r uct i on
per i od. I n t he event of commer ci al power i nt er r upt i ons, t he Cont r act or
shal l pr ovi de backup power i f t hey deemnecessar y, at no addi t i onal cost t o
t he U. S. Gover nment . No t i me ext ensi on, however , wi l l be al l owed because of
commer ci al power i nt er r upt i ons.
1. 22 EQUI PMENT GUARANTEES
When a compl et ed f aci l i t y i s t r ansf er r ed t o t he User and t he f aci l i t y has
equi pment i nst al l ed whi ch i s cover ed by a guar ant ee, t he Cont r act or shal l
f ur ni sh t o t he COR t he f ol l owi ng i nf or mat i on:
a. Cont r act number and a l i st of al l i t ems of equi pment , pr oper l y
i dent i f i ed, t hat ar e cover ed by a guar ant ee per i od under t he t er ms and

Page 10 of 24
condi t i ons of t he cont r act , i ncl udi ng make and model number s.
b. A copy of al l manuf act ur er ' s or vendor ' s guar ant ee document s.
c. The dat es dur i ng whi ch t he Cont r act or ' s guar ant ee i s i n ef f ect under
t he i dent i f i ed i ndi vi dual sect i on and par agr aph of t he cont r act
speci f i cat i ons f or each i t emof equi pment on t he l i st ( i ndi cat i ng f or
each i t emt he dat e of accept ance f or t he begi nni ng of t he guar ant ee
per i od, ei t her f or benef i ci al use or f i nal accept ance, whi chever i s
ear l i er , and t he expi r at i on dat e of t he guar ant ee per i od) .
d. Name of an aut hor i zed r epr esent at i ve of t he Cont r act or wi t h compl et e
addr ess and t el ephone number ; and t he names, addr esses and t el ephone
number s of al l subcont r act or s and/ or equi pment suppl i er s or
manuf act ur er s speci f i cal l y desi gnat ed i n wr i t i ng by t he Cont r act or f or
di r ect cont act by t he COR f or i mpl ement i ng t he guar ant ee af t er
t r ansf er of t he equi pment .
The per f or mance secur i t y wi l l not be r et ur ned unt i l al l i mpl ement i ng
equi pment guar ant ees ar e del i ver ed.
1. 23 AS- BUI LT DRAWI NGS
1. 23. 1 Gener al
The Cont r act or shal l r ecei ve t he f i nal sol i ci t at i on dr awi ngs i n el ect r oni c
f or mat . These dr awi ngs shal l be t he basi s f or t he wor ki ng as- bui l t
dr awi ngs. Dr awi ngs f ur ni shed t o t he Cont r act or i n el ect r oni c f or mat ar e
compat i bl e wi t h t he most r ecent ver si on of Aut oCAD and/ or Mi cr ost at i on
wi t hout t he use of any t hi r d par t y appl i cat i ons, or dat a conver si on or
t r ansl at i on.
The wor ki ng as- bui l t dr awi ngs shal l be pr i nt set s t aken f r omt he cont r act
dr awi ngs. They ar e kept at t he const r uct i on si t e f or mar k- up by t he
Cont r act or t o r ecor d al l as- bui l t condi t i ons. Once appr oved by t he
Gover nment , t he i nf or mat i on r ecor ded as t he wor ki ng as- bui l t dr awi ngs shal l
be t r ansf er r ed t o t he f i nal as- bui l t dr awi ngs.
The f i nal as- bui l t dr awi ng submi t t al shal l consi st of t he f ol l owi ng:
a. Two ( 2) compl et e copi es of t he CADD dr awi ng f i l es i ncl udi ng al l
r ef er ence f i l es on separ at e compact or DVD di scs.
b. Two ( 2) set s of f i nal as- bui l t f ul l - si ze pr i nt s.
c. Two ( 2) set s of f i nal as- bui l t hal f - si ze pr i nt s.
d. One ( 1) set of appr oved wor ki ng as- bui l t pr i nt s.
Dr awi ngs and speci f i cat i ons shal l be bound and l abel ed l i ke t he or i gi nal
cont r act document s.
1. 23. 2 Wor ki ng As- Bui l t Dr awi ngs
The wor ki ng as- bui l t dr awi ng pr i nt s and wor ki ng as- bui l t dr awi ng CADD f i l es

Page 11 of 24
shal l be r evi sed and updat ed cont i nuousl y t o show t he as- bui l t condi t i ons
dur i ng t he pr ogr essi on of t he pr oj ect . Changes f r omt he cont r act pl ans
whi ch ar e made i n t he wor k or addi t i onal i nf or mat i on di scover ed or pr ovi ded
i n t he cour se of const r uct i on shal l be accur at el y and neat l y r ecor ded as
changes or addi t i ons t o t he or i gi nal cont r act dr awi ngs.
a. Wher e cont r act dr awi ngs or speci f i cat i ons al l ow opt i ons, onl y t he
opt i on( s) sel ect ed f or const r uct i on shal l be shown on t he as- bui l t
dr awi ngs.
b. Shop dr awi ngs cont ai ni ng as- bui l t i nf or mat i on shal l be i ncor por at ed
i nt o t he wor ki ng as- bui l t dr awi ngs. Thi s addi t i onal i nf or mat i on may
be added t o an exi st i ng wor ki ng as- bui l t dr awi ng or may r equi r e t he
addi t i on of a new dr awi ng t o t he wor ki ng as- bui l t dr awi ng set .
The wor ki ng as- bui l t mar ked pr i nt s wi l l be j oi nt l y r evi ewed f or accur acy and
compl et eness by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer and t he Cont r act or pr i or t o
submi ssi on of each pay est i mat e. I f t he Cont r act or f ai l s t o mai nt ai n t he
wor ki ng as- bui l t dr awi ngs as speci f i ed her ei n, t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi l l
deduct f r omt he mont hl y pr ogr ess payment an amount r epr esent i ng t he
est i mat ed cost of mai nt ai ni ng t he as- bui l t dr awi ngs and wi l l cont i nue t he
mont hl y deduct i on unt i l an agr eement can be r eached bet ween t he Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer and t he Cont r act or r egar di ng t he accur acy and compl et eness of t he
updat ed dr awi ngs.
1. 23. 3 Fi nal As- Bui l t Dr awi ngs
The f i nal as- bui l t dr awi ngs shal l be t he f i nal r ecor d of const r uct i on as
i nst al l ed and compl et ed by t he Cont r act or and as i ndi cat ed on t he wor ki ng
as- bui l t dr awi ngs. Al l changes, var i at i ons and/ or r equi r ed addi t i ons t o t he
cont r act dr awi ngs shal l be i ncl uded. I n t he event t he Cont r act or
accompl i shes addi t i onal wor k whi ch changes t he as- bui l t condi t i ons of t he
f aci l i t y af t er submi ssi on of t he f i nal as- bui l t dr awi ngs, t he Cont r act or
shal l f ur ni sh r evi sed and/ or addi t i onal dr awi ngs as r equi r ed t o depi ct as-
bui l t condi t i ons. The r equi r ement s f or t hese addi t i onal dr awi ngs wi l l be
t he same as f or t he as- bui l t dr awi ngs i ncl uded i n t he or i gi nal submi ssi on.
1. 23. 4 Execut i on and Revi ew
The Cont r act or shal l mar k up t wo ( 2) set s of paper pr i nt s by t he r ed- l i ne
pr ocess t o show t he as- bui l t condi t i ons. The as- bui l t mar ked pr i nt s shal l
be kept cur r ent on a weekl y basi s and avai l abl e on t he j obsi t e at al l t i mes.
The Cont r act or shal l mai nt ai n cur r ent CADD dr awi ng f i l es t o r ef l ect al l
changes r ecor ded on t he wor ki ng as- bui l t dr awi ngs.
One set of t he wor ki ng as- bui l t dr awi ngs, one copy of t he wor ki ng as- bui l t
CADD f i l es on compact or DVD di sc, and one set of pr i nt s of t he wor ki ng as-
bui l t CADD dr awi ngs shal l be del i ver ed t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer f or r evi ew
and appr oval 30 days pr i or t o schedul i ng of t he f i nal i nspect i on. Fi nal
i nspect i on wi l l not be schedul ed by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer unt i l wor ki ng
as- bui l t dr awi ngs have been r ecei ved. Af t er compl et i on of t he f i nal
i nspect i on t he Gover nment wi l l r et ur n t he copy of t he wor ki ng as- bui l t

Page 12 of 24
dr awi ngs f or cor r ect i ons. The Cont r act or shal l compl et e t he cor r ect i ons and
r et ur n t he wor ki ng as- bui l t dr awi ngs t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi t hi n t en
( 10) cal endar days. Upon appr oval , t he cor r ect ed wor ki ng as- bui l t dr awi ngs
wi l l be r et ur ned t o t he Cont r act or f or use i n pr epar at i on of t he f i nal as-
bui l t dr awi ngs.
Af t er r ecei pt of t he appr oved as- bui l t wor ki ng dr awi ngs, t he Cont r act or
shal l r evi se t he CADD dr awi ngs t o r ef l ect t he as- bui l t changes t o mat ch t he
appr oved wor ki ng as- bui l t dr awi ngs.
The Cont r act or shal l have 30 days af t er f i nal appr oval of t he wor ki ng as-
bui l t dr awi ngs t o compl et e and pr ovi de t he f i nal as- bui l t dr awi ngs
submi t t al .
When t he scope of wor k f or t he pr oj ect i ncl udes phased compl et i on, as- bui l t
dr awi ngs shal l be pr ovi ded wi t hi n t he t i mef r ames est abl i shed her ei n f or each
phase. As- bui l t dr awi ngs submi t t ed f or one phase do not need t o be
r esubmi t t ed f or subsequent phases.
1. 23. 5 Comput er Ai ded Desi gn and Dr af t i ng ( CADD) Dr awi ngs
When f i nal r evi si ons have been compl et ed, each dr awi ng shal l be l et t er ed
wi t h t he wor ds " DRAWI NG OF WORK AS- BUI LT" i n l et t er s at l east 3/ 16" hi gh
pl aced bel ow t he t i t l e bl ock bet ween t he bor der and t he t r i ml i ne. The dat e
of compl et i on and t he wor ds " REVI SED AS- BUI LT" shal l be pl aced i n t he
r evi si on bl ock above t he l at est exi st i ng r evi si on not at i on.
The Cont r act or shal l f ur ni sh f i nal as- bui l t const r uct i on dr awi ngs, i ncl udi ng
modi f i cat i ons t her et o, 30 days af t er t r ansf er of t he compl et ed f aci l i t y.
The per f or mance secur i t y ( i . e. t he Bank Let t er of Guar ant ee) wi l l not be
r et ur ned unt i l t he f i nal as- bui l t dr awi ngs ar e del i ver ed.
1. 24 CORRESPONDENCE AND LANGUAGE
1. 24. 1 Cor r espondence i n t he Engl i sh Language
I n addi t i onal t o FAR 52. 214- 34, i t shal l be t he r esponsi bi l i t y o f t he
Cont r act or t o pr epar e pr oposal s and al l document s r el at ed t o t hi s cont r act ,
t o i ncl ude, change or der s, shop dr awi ngs and submi t t al s, qual i t y cont r ol
r epor t s, comput at i ons, and al l cor r espondence, i n t he Engl i sh l anguage. I n
t he event of di sput es or l i t i gat i on ar i si ng out of per f or mance of t hi s
cont r act , t he cont r act or wi l l pr ovi de Engl i sh l anguage t r ansl at i ons of any
document s t hat ar e pr ovi ded t o t he Gover nment i n suppor t of t he cont r act or ' s
posi t i on or any document s per t i nent t o t he di sput e t hat ar e r equest ed by t he
Gover nment . For t he pur poses of t hi s par agr aph, per t i nent means any
document s t hat woul d nor mal l y be consi der ed t o be wi t hi n t he scope of
di scover y i n an ASBCA or cour t pr oceedi ng concer ni ng t he di sput e. The t er m
' document s' i ncl udes el ect r oni c document s i ncl udi ng but not l i mi t ed t o emai l
and i ncl udes document s gener at ed by subcont r act or s or suppl i er s.

Page 13 of 24
I n t he event a di sput e r esul t s i n l i t i gat i on, i ncl udi ng act i ons at t he ASBCA
or act i ons i n U. S. cour t s, t he cont r act or wi l l be r esponsi bl e f or pr ovi di ng
t r ansl at i ons of any document s t hat ar e wi t hi n t he scope of a di scover y
r equest f i l ed by t he U. S. Gover nment and f or pr ovi di ng cer t i f i ed
t r ansl at i ons upon r equest by t he U. S. Gover nment .
1. 24. 2 Requi r ed Acknowl edgement
The cont r act or shal l acknowl edge r ecei pt of any cor r espondence, t o i ncl ude
l et t er s and e- mai l s, as r equest ed by t he gover nment . Thi s may consi st of
ei t her si gni ng copi es of document s or r epl yi ng t o e- mai l s. Speci f i c
i nst r uct i ons shal l be pr ovi ded by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer s Repr esent at i ve
PART 2: PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3: EXECUTI ON
3. 1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSI BI LI TY
3. 1. 1 Pr ot ect i ve Measur es
The Cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or pr ot ect i ve measur es dur i ng
const r uct i on and shal l pr ovi de bar r i cades and pr ot ect i ve si gns i n bot h t he
Engl i sh and host nat i on l anguages f or t he saf et y of bui l di ng i nhabi t ant s and
passer s- by. For i nsi de wor k, t he Cont r act or shal l pr ot ect f l oor s,
f ur ni t ur e, and f ur ni shi ngs, appl i ances, ot her obj ect s and st r uct ur al par t s
agai nst soi l i ng or damage, by usi ng dr op cl ot hs or ot her sui t abl e cover i ngs.
I f speci f i cal l y st at ed el sewher e i n t hi s cont r act , t he Cont r act or shal l be
r esponsi bl e f or r emoval of f ur ni shi ngs ( i ncl udi ng f ur ni t ur e, car pet s and
dr apes) and equi pment ( such as machi nes whi ch ar e i n addi t i on t o equi pment
whi ch f or ms par t of i nt egr al bui l di ng syst ems r equi r i ng wor k under t he
cont r act ) as r equi r ed f or pr epar at i on of wor k ar eas, and t he r ei nst al l at i on
t her eof . The Cont r act or shal l r epl ace f ur ni shi ngs and equi pment at t hei r
or i gi nal l ocat i ons upon compl et i on of t he wor k. I f not speci f i cal l y st at ed
el sewher e i n t hi s cont r act t o be t he Cont r act or s r esponsi bi l i t y,
f ur ni shi ngs and equi pment as descr i bed above r equi r ed t o be r emoved f or
pr epar at i on of wor k ar eas, and t he r ei nst al l at i on t her eof , shal l be t he
r esponsi bi l i t y of Gover nment f or ces.
Repai r of damages t o per sonal pr oper t y, bui l di ngs, vehi cl es, gr ound or ot her
Gover nment pr oper t y caused di r ect l y or i ndi r ect l y by t hei r per sonnel shal l
be t he Cont r act or ' s r esponsi bi l i t y and shal l be r epai r ed or r epl aced at t he
Cont r act or s expense.
3. 1. 2 Cont r act or s Super vi si on
The Cont r act or shal l pr ovi de adequat e super vi si on of al l empl oyees t o ensur e
compl et e and sat i sf act or y per f or mance of al l wor k r equi r ed i n accor dance

Page 14 of 24
wi t h t he speci f i cat i ons and t er ms of t he cont r act . The Cont r act or shal l be
at t he si t e of t he wor k whenever ser vi ces ar e bei ng per f or med t o r ecei ve
i nst r uct i ons f r omt he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
3. 2 MOBI LI ZATI ON PLAN
The Cont r act or shal l submi t a mobi l i zat i on pl an wi t hi n t wo weeks of cont r act
awar d. Thi s mobi l i zat i on pl an must descr i be:
Fenci ng, gat es and door s
St or age and wor ki ng ar eas
Mat er i al and t ool st or age
st r uct ur es and l ocat i ons
Sani t ar y and per sonnel
cont ai ner s
Connect ed l oads i n kW
Si t e l i ght i ng pl an
Par ki ng spaces f or empl oyees
( i nsi de t he const r uct i on f ence i f
possi bl e)
Ot her , speci f i c i nst al l at i ons and
syst ems
3. 3 CONTRACT DRAWI NGS AND SPECI FI CATI ONS
Upon awar d, t he cont r act or shal l pr ovi de pr i nt ed, har d copi es of t he
f ol l owi ng document s t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer s Repr esent at i ve:
a. One ( 1) f ul l - si ze set of t he awar ded dr awi ngs
b. Two ( 2) hal f - si ze set s of t he awar ded dr awi ngs
c. Two ( 2) set s of t he awar ded cont r act speci f i cat i ons pr i nt ed doubl e-
si ded.
d. Two ( 2) copi es of al l amendment s, i ncl udi ng at t achment s
e. Two ( 2) copi es of al l ot her awar d document s
f . One ( 1) copy of al l of t he above document s i n el ect r oni c f or mat
3. 4 PERMI SSI ON TO EXCAVATE
Bef or e excavat i on begi ns, t he Cont r act or shal l obt ai n al l necessar y per mi t s
i n addi t i on t o wr i t t en per mi ssi on t o excavat e f r omt he appr opr i at e
i nst al l at i on or l ocal aut hor i t y havi ng j ur i sdi ct i on.
The cont r act or r emai ns r esponsi bl e f or i dent i f yi ng and conf i r mi ng t he
l ocat i on of al l ut i l i t i es pr i or t o per f or mi ng any excavat i on and shal l be
r esponsi bl e f or r epai r i ng any damages t o ut i l i t i es caused by t hei r
const r uct i on act i vi t i es at no addi t i onal cost t o t he gover nment .
Addi t i onal r equi r ement s ar e speci f i ed el sewher e i n t he cont r act , i ncl udi ng
but not l i mi t ed t o t he cont r act cl auses and Sect i on 01 35 26 SAFETY AND
OCCUPATI ONAL HEALTH REQUI REMENTS.
3. 5 UTI LI TY SERVI CE I NTERRUPTI ONS
3. 5. 1 Wr i t t en Appr oval
The Cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or coor di nat i on wi t h appr opr i at e
ut i l i t y compani es and i nst al l at i on r epr esent at i ves t o obt ai n al l necessar y
per mi t s and appr oval s f or ut i l i t y ser vi ce i nt er r upt i ons. I f , as a condi t i on
of appr oval , out ages ar e r equi r ed t o be l i mi t ed t o weekends, hol i days, or

Page 15 of 24
non- st andar d wor k hour s, t he Cont r act or shal l per f or mt he wor k dur i ng t he
t i me desi gnat ed.
Addi t i onal l y, t he Cont r act or shal l submi t wr i t t en not i f i cat i on t o t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer not l ess t han 15 cal endar days i n advance of each
i nt er r upt i on f or each ut i l i t y and or communi cat i on ser vi ce t o or wi t hi n
exi st i ng bui l di ngs and f aci l i t i es bei ng used. As a mi ni mum, t he r equest
shoul d i ncl ude t he l ocat i on of t he out age, ut i l i t i es bei ng af f ect ed,
dur at i on of out age and any necessar y sket ches. No si ngl e out age wi l l exceed
4 hour s unl ess appr oved i n wr i t i ng by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
3. 5. 2 Pr e- Out age Coor di nat i on Meet i ng
Speci al r equi r ement s f or el ect r i cal out age r equest s ar e cont ai ned i n Sect i on
01 35 26 SAFETY AND OCCUPATI ONAL HEALTH REQUI REMENTS. Once appr oved, and
pr i or t o begi nni ng wor k on t he ut i l i t y syst emr equi r i ng shut down, t he
Cont r act or shal l at t end a pr e- out age coor di nat i on meet i ng wi t h t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , i nst al l at i on r epr esent at i ve, and ut i l i t y company
r epr esent at i ve t o r evi ew t he scope of wor k and t he l ockout / t agout
pr ocedur es f or wor ker pr ot ect i on. No wor k wi l l be per f or med on ener gi zed
el ect r i cal ci r cui t s unl ess pr oof i s pr ovi ded t hat no ot her means exi st .
3. 6 CONTRACTOR SI TE FACI LI TI ES
The Cont r act or shal l pr ovi de, at i t s own expense, al l f aci l i t i es as may be
necessar y f or t he pur poses of const r uct i on wor k. The l ocat i on,
const r uct i on, mai nt enance, oper at i on and r emoval of t he Cont r act or s
bui l di ngs, shops, st or age ar eas and ot her f aci l i t i es at t he pr oj ect si t e
shal l be subj ect t o t he appr oval of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . The Cont r act or
shal l mai nt ai n a t empor ar y onsi t e of f i ce whi ch wi l l pr ovi de pr oj ect f i l es
and dr awi ngs, t el ephone ser vi ce and space f or t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer t o
conduct onsi t e meet i ngs wi t h t he Cont r act or . Adequat e br eak r oomand a
por t abl e t oi l et f aci l i t y shal l be f ur ni shed by t he Cont r act or f or use by
cont r act per sonnel , and wi l l be t he Cont r act or s r esponsi bi l i t y t o mai nt ai n
i n a sani t ar y condi t i on.
The Cont r act or wi l l be per mi t t ed t o use t he desi gnat ed ar ea wi t hi n t he
cont r act l i mi t s f or oper at i on of t hei r const r uct i on equi pment and pl ant s,
shops, war ehouses, and of f i ces. The Cont r act or i s r esponsi bl e f or obt ai ni ng
any r equi r ed addi t i onal mobi l i zat i on above t hat desi gnat ed. The Cont r act or
wi l l conduct del i ver y and st or age of mat er i al s i n an ar ea appr oved by t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer i n wr i t i ng. I f a r oad must be bl ocked, or any
addi t i onal ar ea i s r equi r ed dur i ng const r uct i on, t hi s must be coor di nat ed
wi t h t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer at l east t en cal endar days i n advance. On
compl et i on of t he cont r act , al l f aci l i t i es shal l be r emoved f r omt he
mobi l i zat i on ar ea by t he Cont r act or and shal l be di sposed of i n accor dance
wi t h t he appl i cabl e host nat i on l aws and r egul at i ons. The si t e shal l be
cl ear ed of const r uct i on debr i s and ot her mat er i al s and t he ar ea r est or ed t o
i t s f i nal gr ade.
The Cont r act or shal l pr ovi de, at i t s own expense, such t empor ar y heat i ng or
cool i ng as may be necessar y f or t hei r of f i ce and per sonnel , or f or t he

Page 16 of 24
pur poses of const r uct i on wor k. Any t empor ar y t ype of heat i ng or cool i ng
pr ovi ded shal l conf or mt o al l appl i cabl e saf et y r equi r ement s and wi l l be
subj ect t o t he appr oval of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
Cont r act or shal l i nsur e t hat gr ounds wi t hi n t he cont r act boundar i es ar e
mai nt ai ned accor di ng t o t he i nst al l at i on st andar ds and t hat gr ass i s
r egul ar l y mowed t o t he sat i sf act i on of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
A scr een t ype f ence i s r equi r ed t o be er ect ed ar ound t he j ob si t e bef or e
const r uct i on begi ns. Fence shal l be r emoved at t he end of t he cont r act and
shal l r emai n t he pr oper t y of t he Cont r act or .
3. 6. 1 Avai l abi l i t y and Use of Ut i l i t y Ser vi ces
I n addi t i on t o t he r equi r ement s of FAR 52. 236- 14, t he wat er and el ect r i ci t y
r equi r ed f or per f or mance of t he wor k wi l l be suppl i ed onl y wher e avai l abl e,
and onl y i n r easonabl e quant i t i es f or pur poses of t he wor k. The cont r act or
i s r esponsi bl e f or maki ng al l necessar y eval uat i ons pr i or t o bi d as t o t he
avai l abi l i t y of ut i l i t y ser vi ces.
Connect i on t o t he sour ces of wat er and el ect r i ci t y and br i ngi ng t hemt o t he
wor k l ocat i on shal l be done by t he cont r act or at hi s own expense.
Pr el i mi nar y coor di nat i on must be accompl i shed wi t h t he COR.
The COR i s not r esponsi bl e f or wat er or el ect r i cal st oppage and t he
cont r act or has t he r esponsi bi l i t y t o make pr i or pr oper ar r angement s at hi s
own expense f or i ndependent suppl y ( wat er st or age, gener at or s, et c. ) i n t he
event of st oppage i n t he suppl y of wat er and el ect r i ci t y. The pr i ce of t he
wor k shal l not be dependent on t he ar r angement s r equi r ed f or suppl y of wat er
and el ect r i ci t y
3. 6. 2 St or age Ar eas
Al l mat er i al s, equi pment , and suppl i es shal l be st or ed i n accor dance wi t h
manuf act ur er s r egul at i ons, EM385- 1- 1, and al l f eder al , st at e, and l ocal
codes. I n t he event of conf l i ct s bet ween r egul at i ons, t he most st r i ngent
shal l gover n. Mat er i al s whi ch ar e st or ed out - of - door s shal l be adequat el y
pr ot ect ed. Unl ess speci f i cal l y aut hor i zed by t he gover nment , no mat er i al s
may be st or ed i n open ar eas exposed t o t he el ement s.
The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer may di r ect t he r emoval of any i t ems whi ch ar e st or ed
i mpr oper l y. I f t he gover nment al l ows f or payment of st or ed mat er i al s, no
payment shal l be al l owed f or mat er i al s, equi pment , or suppl i es whi ch ar e
i mpr oper l y st or ed. Addi t i onal l y, t he gover nment may wi t hhol d suf f i ci ent
f unds f r ompay r equest s t o pr ovi de f or t he r epai r or r epl acement of
mat er i al s, equi pment , or suppl i es whi ch have been i mpr oper l y st or ed and
i nst al l ed.
3. 6. 3 Tr ash Di sposal
Al l wast e mat er i al shal l be t he pr oper t y and r esponsi bi l i t y of t he
Cont r act or . The Cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or col l ect i on and di sposal

Page 17 of 24
of t r ash f r omt he wor k ar eas and f r omt he mobi l i zat i on ar ea i n a manner
compl yi ng wi t h al l l ocal l aws. The Cont r act or shal l l ocat e t empor ar y t r ash
col l ect i on cont ai ner s i n compl i ance wi t h t he cont r act document s and
i nst al l at i on pr ocedur es. The Cont r act or shal l i ncl ude i n t he cont r act pr i ce
t he cost , f ees and per mi t s r equi r ed f or t he r emoval , t r anspor t at i on and
di sposal of mat er i al s.
3. 6. 4 Removal of Const r uct i on Debr i s
Excess soi l mat er i al s gener at ed dur i ng t he cour se of t hi s pr oj ect must be
r emoved f r omt he si t e and di sposed of i n accor dance wi t h l ocal and host
nat i on r equi r ement s. I t i s t he r esponsi bi l i t y of t he Cont r act or t o
cont i nual l y r emove di ggi ng and gr avel - l i ke l i t t er f r omsoi l wor k t o an
aut hor i zed dump. I t i s pr ohi bi t ed t o al l ow di g mat er i al and l i t t er t o pi l e
up i n t he ar ea of t he const r uct i on si t e.
Non- soi l debr i s shal l be r emoved f r omt he si t e and di sposed of at an
appr oved dump si t e at t he Cont r act or s expense unl ess ot her wi se not ed i n t he
speci f i cat i ons.
3. 6. 5 Addi t i onal Requi r ement s.
The Cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or coor di nat i ng use of exi st i ng r oads
as haul r out es wi t h t he host nat i on Gover nment and l ocal aut hor i t i es.
Const r uct i on, and r out i ng of new haul r out es, and/ or upgr adi ng of exi st i ng
r oads t o car r y ant i ci pat ed const r uct i on t r af f i c shal l be coor di nat ed wi t h
t he host Gover nment and l ocal aut hor i t i es and i s t he sol e r esponsi bi l i t y of
t he Cont r act or . I t shal l be t he Cont r act or ' s r esponsi bi l i t y t o obt ai n such
l ocal aut hor i zat i ons, per mi t s, and l i censes necessar y t o est abl i sh quar r y
oper at i ons, bat chi ng oper at i ons, and haul r out es.
3. 7 ENVI RONMENTAL PROTECTI ON
3. 7. 1 Gener al
The Cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or pr ovi di ng a pl an f or t he pr event i on
of envi r onment al pol l ut i on dur i ng and as t he r esul t of const r uct i on
oper at i ons under t hi s cont r act . Dur i ng t he Pr econst r uct i on Conf er ence, t he
Cont r act or wi l l meet wi t h t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer t o devel op an
under st andi ng of t he envi r onment al pol l ut i on cont r ol pr ogr am. The
envi r onment al pr ot ect i on pl an shal l i ncl ude, but shal l not be l i mi t ed t o,
t he f ol l owi ng:
a. A l i st of host nat i on and l ocal l aws, r egul at i ons, and per mi t s
concer ni ng envi r onment al pr ot ect i on, pol l ut i on cont r ol and abat ement
t hat ar e appl i cabl e t o t he Cont r act or s pr oposed oper at i ons and t he
r equi r ement s i mposed by t hose l aws, r egul at i ons and per mi t s
b. Met hods f or pr ot ect i on of f eat ur es t o be pr eser ved wi t hi n aut hor i zed
wor k ar eas l i ke t r ees, shr ubs, vi nes, gr asses and gr ound cover ,
l andscape f eat ur es, ai r and wat er qual i t y, f i sh and wi l dl i f e, soi l ,
hi st or i cal , ar cheol ogi cal , and cul t ur al r esour ces.

Page 18 of 24
c. Pr ocedur es t o be i mpl ement ed t o pr ovi de t he r equi r ed envi r onment al
pr ot ect i on, t o compl y wi t h t he appl i cabl e l aws and r egul at i ons, and t o
cor r ect pol l ut i on due t o acci dent , nat ur al causes or f ai l ur e t o f ol l ow
t he pr ocedur es of t he envi r onment al pr ot ect i on pl an.
d. Locat i on of t he sol i d wast e di sposal ar ea.
e. Dr awi ngs showi ng l ocat i ons of any pr oposed t empor ar y excavat i ons and
embankment s f or haul r oads, st r eamcr ossi ngs, mat er i al st or age ar eas,
st r uct ur es, sani t ar y f aci l i t i es, and st ockpi l es of excess or spoi l
mat er i al s.
f . Envi r onment al moni t or i ng pl ans f or t he j ob si t e, i ncl udi ng l and,
wat er , ar ea, and noi se moni t or i ng.
g. Tr af f i c cont r ol pl an i ncl udi ng measur es t o r educe er osi on of t empor ar y
r oadbeds by const r uct i on t r af f i c, especi al l y dur i ng wet weat her , and
t he amount of mud t r anspor t ed ont o paved publ i c r oads by vehi cl e or
r unof f .
h. Met hods of pr ot ect i ng sur f ace and gr ound wat er dur i ng const r uct i on
act i vi t i es.
i . Pl an showi ng t he pr oposed act i vi t y i n each por t i on of t he wor k ar ea
and i dent i f yi ng t he ar eas of l i mi t ed use or nonuse, i ncl udi ng bor r ow
ar eas, i f any, l ocat ed on gover nment pr oper t y. No war r ant y i s made as
t o t he avai l abi l i t y of any bor r ow ar ea on gover nment pr oper t y. Pl an
shoul d i ncl ude measur es f or mar ki ng t he l i mi t s of use ar eas.
j . A r ecycl i ng and wast e pr event i on pl an wi t h a l i st of measur es t o
r educe consumpt i on of ener gy and nat ur al r esour ces; f or exampl e - t he
possi bi l i t y t o shr ed f al l en t r ees and use t hemas mul ch shal l be
consi der ed as an al t er nat i ve t o bur ni ng or bur i al .
k. A set t l i ng pond r emoval pl an 120 days pr i or t o r emoval wor k. The pl an
shal l i ncl ude t he met hod of r emovi ng and t est i ng of t he col l ect ed
sedi ment .
l . Tr ai ni ng f or Cont r act or s per sonnel dur i ng t he const r uct i on per i od.
3. 7. 2 Pr ot ect i on of Land Resour ces
The l and r esour ces out si de t he l i mi t s of per manent wor k shal l be pr eser ved
i n i t s pr esent condi t i on or r est or ed t o i t s or i gi nal condi t i on af t er
compl et i on of const r uct i on. The Cont r act or shal l conf i ne const r uct i on
act i vi t i es t o ar eas def i ned by t he pl ans or speci f i cat i ons.
a. Pr event i on of Landscape Def acement . Except i n ar eas shown on pl ans or
speci f i ed t o be cl ear ed, t he Cont r act or shal l not def ace, i nj ur e, or
dest r oy t r ees or shr ubs, nor r emove or cut t hemwi t hout t he appr oval
of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . Sur vey monument s and mar ker s shal l be
pr ot ect ed bef or e oper at i ons i n t he vi ci ni t y of t he sur vey mar ker s.

Page 19 of 24
b. Rest or at i on of Landscape Damage. Any l andscape f eat ur e damaged by t he
Cont r act or s oper at i ons shal l be r est or ed t o i t s or i gi nal condi t i on at
t he Cont r act or s expense. The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi l l deci de what
met hod of r est or at i on shal l be used.
c. Tempor ar y Excavat i on and Embankment s. I f t he Cont r act or pr oposes t o
const r uct t empor ar y r oads or embankment s and excavat i ons f or pl ant
and/ or wor k ar eas, t he Cont r act or shal l submi t f or appr oval t he
f ol l owi ng at l east seven ( 7) cal endar days pr i or t o schedul ed st ar t of
such t empor ar y wor k:
A l ayout of al l t empor ar y r oads, excavat i ons, and embankment s t o
be const r uct ed wi t hi n t he wor k ar ea.
Det ai l s of t he compl et ed bor r ow excavat i ons.
d. Post - Const r uct i on Cl eanup. The Cont r act or shal l r emove al l si gns of
t empor ar y const r uct i on such as haul r oads, wor k ar eas, st r uct ur es,
f oundat i ons of t empor ar y st r uct ur es and st ockpi l es of mat er i al s.
e. Weat her Pr ot ect i on. Al l open excavat i on shal l be pr ot ect ed/ cover ed.
Car e shal l be t aken t o mai nt ai n open excavat i ons onl y dur i ng
i nst al l at i on and t est i ng of pi pi ng, f oundat i ons, or ot her f eat ur es.
The Cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or pr ovi di ng t empor ar y dr ai nage
and/ or pumpi ng equi pment necessar y t o keep excavat i ons i n a dewat er ed
condi t i on as necessar y. Pr ovi si ons shal l be made t o pr ot ect
excavat i ons f r omcol l apse and er osi on, and t o ensur e t hat r unof f or
di schar ge of wat er f r omexcavat i ons i s pr oper l y channel ed and di sposed
of t o pr event sedi ment at i on or pol l ut i on of st r eams, dr ai nage syst ems,
or near by pr oper t y.
3. 7. 3 Pr ot ect i on of Wat er Resour ces
The Cont r act or shal l not pol l ut e st r eams or dr ai nage cour ses wi t h f uel s,
oi l s, bi t umens, cal ci umchl or i de aci ds, const r uct i on wast es, or ot her
har mf ul mat er i al s. I t i s t he r esponsi bi l i t y of t he Cont r act or t o
i nvest i gat e and compl y wi t h al l appl i cabl e l ocal l aws and di r ect i ves
concer ni ng pol l ut i on. Al l wor k shal l be per f or med so t hat obj ect i onabl e
condi t i ons wi l l not be cr eat ed.
a. Er osi on Cont r ol . Pr i or t o st ar t of const r uct i on, t he Cont r act or shal l
submi t a pl an f or appr oval of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer showi ng t hei r
pr ocedur es f or cont r ol l i ng er osi on and di sposal of wast e. Fi l l s and
wast e ar eas shal l be const r uct ed by sel ect i ve pl acement t o el i mi nat e
si l t s or cl ays on t he sur f ace t hat wi l l er ode and cont ami nat e adj acent
st r eams and r eser voi r s.
b. Spi l l age. Speci al measur es shal l be t aken t o pr event chemi cal s, f uel s,
oi l s, gr eases, bi t umi nous mat er i al s, wast e washi ngs, her bi ci des and
i nsect i ci des, and cement f r omcont ami nat i ng soi l and gr ound wat er or
f r oment er i ng st r eams.
c. Di sposal . Di sposal of any mat er i al s, wast es, ef f l uent s, t r ash,
gar bage, oi l , gr ease, chemi cal s, et c. , shal l be subj ect t o t he

Page 20 of 24
appr oval of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . Gr ound whi ch has been
cont ami nat ed by Cont r act or act i vi t i es shal l be excavat ed, di sposed of
as di r ect ed by t he COR, and r epl aced wi t h sui t abl e f i l l mat er i al ,
compact ed and f i ni shed wi t h t op soi l al l at t he expense of t he
Cont r act or .
d. Washi ng of Vehi cl es. Cont r act or s and t hei r subcont r act or s and
suppl i er s shal l not wash any vehi cl es, t o i ncl ude t he
cl eani ng/ empt yi ng of concr et e mi x t r ucks on t he i nst al l at i on.
3. 8 DI SPOSI TI ON OF MATERI AL
3. 8. 1 Tur n- I n Sal vage Mat er i al
The Cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or sal vage. Sal vageabl e mat er i al s wi l l
be so desi gnat ed by t he U. S. or l ocal aut hor i t i es. Al l mat er i al t o be
r emoved f r omt he i nst al l at i on i s subj ect t o appr oval of t he l ocal
i nst al l at i on commander .
Al l di smant l ed mat er i al s i ndi cat ed f or t ur n- i n by t he speci f i cat i on or as
di r ect ed by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer shal l be enumer at ed i n a r ost er pr epar ed
by t he Cont r act or and such mat er i al s shal l be t ur ned i n at a l ocat i on
sel ect ed by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . The Cont r act or shal l obt ai n a hand
r ecei pt f or t he mat er i al s t ur ned i n. Tur n- i n t i mes shal l be as di r ect ed by
t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
3. 8. 2 Ti t l e t o Mat er i al s
Unl ess i ndi cat ed ot her wi se, al l mat er i al s and equi pment r emoved and not
r eused or sal vaged, shal l become t he pr oper t y of t he Cont r act or and shal l be
r emoved f r omGover nment pr oper t y. The Gover nment wi l l not be r esponsi bl e
f or t he condi t i on or l oss of , or damage t o, such pr oper t y af t er cont r act
awar d. Showi ng f or sal e or sel l i ng mat er i al s and equi pment on si t e i s
pr ohi bi t ed.
3. 9 ROAD MAI NTENANCE AND TRAFFI C CONTROL
The Cont r act or shal l at al l t i mes coor di nat e t he wor k under t hi s cont r act
wi t h t he aut hor i t i es havi ng j ur i sdi ct i on over t he st r eet s and he shal l be
r esponsi bl e f or obt ai ni ng appr oval by t he l ocal aut hor i t i es.
The saf et y and conveni ence of bot h t he mot or i st and pedest r i ans t r avel i ng on
exi st i ng st r eet s i n t he vi ci ni t y of t hi s pr oj ect shal l be an i mpor t ant
f unct i on of t hi s cont r act and shal l be so r egar ded by t he Cont r act or . The
Cont r act or shal l pr ovi de det our s, bar r i cades, war ni ng si gns, di r ect i onal
si gns, war ni ng l i ght s, and f l ag per sons dur i ng t he per f or mance of t he wor k
under t hi s cont r act . When t hei r use i s no l onger r equi r ed, det our s,
bar r i cades, si gns, and f l asher l i ght s shal l be r emoved and t hei r l ocat i ons
r est or ed t o t hei r or i gi nal condi t i on or , wher e new wor k has been per f or med
under t hi s cont r act , t o a condi t i on mat chi ng t he adj acent sur f aces. Removal
of cur bi ng and const r uct i on of t empor ar y r oadways may be necessar y t o
mai nt ai n t he r equi r ed t r af f i c f l ow condi t i ons.

Page 21 of 24
Tr af f i c cont r ol or st r eet name si gn post s adj acent t o const r uct i on wor k
si t es shal l be pr ot ect ed f r omdamage. I f r el ocat i on or r emoval of such
si gns i s necessar y, t he Cont r act or shal l coor di nat e wi t h t he l ocal
aut hor i t i es. A mi ni mumof seven ( 7) days not i f i cat i on i s r equi r ed. Upon
compl et i on of t he pr oj ect , al l si gns and pavement mar ki ngs r el ocat ed or
r emoved shal l be r epl aced bef or e t he st r eet i s open t o t r af f i c. The
Cont r act or wi l l r epai r any si gn, pavement mar ki ng or suppor t damaged by t he
const r uct i on act i vi t y.
Vehi cul ar access t o f aci l i t i es l ocat ed on st r eet s or r oads r equi r i ng wor k
under t hi s cont r act shal l not be deni ed t o anyone dur i ng t he dur at i on of
t hi s pr oj ect . The pr ovi si ons of t hi s subpar agr aph do not r equi r e vehi cul ar
access f r omt he st r eet s or r oads i n f r ont of f aci l i t i es, but may be pr ovi ded
f r omt he si de st r eet s. The Cont r act or shal l pr ovi de i ndi vi dual si gnage and
di r ect i onal i nst r uct i ons t o di r ect pat r ons t o speci f i c f aci l i t i es as
r equi r ed by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
Tr af f i c shoul d not be al l owed t o cr oss t he r oad cr ossi ng const r uct i on ar eas
unt i l af t er t he excavat i on i s backf i l l ed, compact ed t o gr ade, and ei t her
f i nal bi t umi nous hot - mi x ( wear i ng) sur f aci ng i s compl et e, or a t empor ar y
col d- mi x wear i ng sur f ace has been sat i sf act or i l y const r uct ed. Fi nal
pavement r epl acement shal l be i n accor dance wi t h t he cont r act dr awi ngs and
as speci f i ed.
A t r af f i c cont r ol pl an shoul d be submi t t ed and appr oved at l east 14 days
pr i or t o i ni t i at i ng const r uct i on i n each ar ea or phase. The sequence of
const r uct i on shal l be as appr oved i n t hi s pl an. The Cont r act or shal l
compl et e al l wor k af f ect i ng t r af f i c i n one ar ea pr i or t o movi ng t o t he next
ar ea. St r eet cr ossi ngs i ndi cat ed on t he dr awi ngs shal l be mai nt ai ned wi t h a
mi ni mumof one open l ane at al l t i mes.
The Cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or t he upkeep of t he ent i r e r oad syst em
wi t hi n t he const r uct i on ar ea f r omt he mai n r oad t o t he pr oj ect wor k ar eas.
The r oads shal l be kept i n good dr i vi ng condi t i on f or t he l i f e of t he
cont r act . Any damage or accel er at ed det er i or at i on of exi st i ng r oads wi l l be
t he r esponsi bi l i t y of t he Cont r act or t o r epai r / mai nt ai n. The Cont r act or
must r est or e such r oads t o t hei r pr e- const r uct i on condi t i ons.
Al l t r af f i c cont r ol shal l compl y wi t h t he r equi r ement s of t he US Ar my Cor ps
of Engi neer s SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUI REMENTS MANUAL ( EM 385- 1- 1) , l at est
edi t i on and wi t h t he Cont r act or s Qual i t y Cont r ol pr ogr am.
3. 10 DUST CONTROL
I n or der t o pr event and t o pr ovi de cont r ol of pol l ut i on ar i si ng f r omt he
const r uct i on act i vi t i es dur i ng t he per f or mance of t hi s cont r act , t he
Cont r act or and hi s subcont r act or s shal l compl y wi t h al l appl i cabl e host
nat i on and l ocal l aws and r egul at i ons concer ni ng envi r onment al pol l ut i on
cont r ol and abat ement , and al l appl i cabl e pr ovi si ons of t he US Ar my Cor ps of
Engi neer s SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUI REMENTS MANUAL ( EM 385- 1- 1) , l at est edi t i on
as wel l as t he speci f i c r equi r ement s st at ed i n t hi s sect i on and el sewher e i n
t he cont r act speci f i cat i ons. Compl i ance wi t h t he pr ovi si ons of t hi s sect i on

Page 22 of 24
by subcont r act or s shal l be t he r esponsi bi l i t y of t he Cont r act or .
3. 10. 1 Requi r ement s
The Cont r act or shal l pr ovi de al l l abor , mat er i al s and equi pment and per f or m
al l wor k r equi r ed f or t he cont r ol and pr event i on of f ugi t i ve dust dur i ng and
as t he r esul t of const r uct i on oper at i ons under t hi s cont r act Fugi t i ve i s
def i ned as t he gener at i on of sol i d par t i cl es by t he f or ces of wi nd or
machi ner y act i ng upon exposed mat er i al s. The Cont r act or shal l pr event
f ugi t i ve dust f r omadver sel y af f ect i ng human heal t h or wel f ar e; unf avor abl y
al t er i ng ecol ogi cal bal ances of i mpor t ance t o human l i f e; af f ect i ng ot her
speci es of i mpor t ance t o man; or degr adi ng t he ut i l i t y of t he envi r onment
f or aest het i c and r ecr eat i onal pur poses. Fur t her mor e, t he Cont r act or shal l
cont r ol dust , mud and/ or debr i s on publ i c r oads and mi ni mi ze dust pol l ut i on
wi t hi n newl y const r uct ed or r enovat ed f aci l i t i es
3. 10. 2 Submi t t al Requi r ement s
Pr i or t o commencement of t he wor k, t he Cont r act or shal l submi t f or appr oval
hi s pl an i n wr i t i ng a pr oposal t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer f or i mpl ement i ng
t he pr ovi si ons of t hi s sect i on f or f ugi t i ve dust cont r ol . The Cont r act or
shal l addr ess by submi t t al t he pl ans t o pr event and cont r ol f ugi t i ve dust
t hr ough speci f i c mi t i gat i on and pr event at i ve measur es. The ef f ect i veness of
t he dust cont r ol pr ogr amshal l be per i odi cal l y checked and r evi ewed.
Revi si ons t o t he dust cont r ol pl an shal l be submi t t ed t o t he Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer as changes ar e necessar y dur i ng t he dur at i on of t hi s cont r act .
3. 10. 3 Repor t i ng Requi r ement s
The Cont r act or shal l , on hi s dai l y Qual i t y Cont r ol Repor t i ndi cat e dust
cont r ol measur es t aken, cont r ol met hods ut i l i zed, pr oduct s used, appl i cat i on
r at es, i nspect i ons per f or med, i dent i f yi ng t r eat ed ar ea, oper at or , dat e, and
t i me of t r eat ment .
3. 10. 4 Mi ni mumPr ecaut i ons
Cont r ol t echni ques f or f ugi t i ve dust sour ces may i ncl ude, but ar e not
l i mi t ed t o, wat er i ng, chemi cal t r eat ment , l i ght bi t umi nous t r eat ment , or
r educt i on of sur f ace wi nd speed wi t h wi nd br eaks or sour ce encl osur es, t he
el i mi nat i on of mud and di r t car r y- out ont o paved r oads at const r uct i on
si t es, or cl eanup of spi l l age on paved or unpaved t r avel sur f aces and
cl eanup of mat er i al s spi l l age at t r ansf er poi nt s. The met hods ut i l i zed
shal l be appr opr i at e f or t he si ze and scope of t he f ugi t i ve dust sour ce.
Met hods and cont r ol s shal l not have adver se ef f ect s on pl ant and ani mal
l i f e, or cont ami nat e t he t r eat ed mat er i al .
Met hods shal l be r epeat ed at such i nt er val s as t o keep al l par t s of t he
di st ur bed ar ea t r eat ed at al l t i mes, and t he Cont r act or shal l have
suf f i ci ent compet ent equi pment on t he j ob t o accompl i sh cont r ol t echni ques.
Pr oduct s shal l pr ovi de a met hod t o r educe dust - r el at ed envi r onment al
concer ns and ai d i n compl yi ng wi t h appl i cabl e r egul at i ons.

Page 23 of 24
Pr oduct s shal l not i n any f or mpr oduce any adver se envi r onment al ef f ect s
t hr ough t hei r use and shal l pr ovi de an ef f ect i ve, cl ean, saf e cont r ol of
dust pr ot ect i on agai nst soi l er osi on.
The Cont r act or shal l t ake t he f ol l owi ng mi ni mumpr ecaut i ons:
a. Demol i t i on - Dust r esul t i ng f r omdemol i t i on shal l be cont r ol l ed t o
pr event t he spr ead of dust t o occupi ed por t i ons of t he const r uct i on
si t e and t o avoi d cr eat i on of a nui sance i n t he sur r oundi ng ar ea. The
use of wat er , oi l , or chemi cal t r eat ment f or cont r ol of dust i n t he
demol i t i on of st r uct ur es, i n const r uct i on oper at i ons, i n wor k
per f or med on a r oad, par ki ng ar ea, or i n t he cl ear i ng of l and i s
r equi r ed.
b. St ockpi l es - The Cont r act or shal l appl y wat er or ot her appr oved
sui t abl e chemi cal s or mat er i al s, or cover mat er i al st ockpi l es and
ot her sur f aces whi ch can cr eat e dust .
c. Tr anspor t at i on - Compl et e cover i ng of mat er i al s haul ed f r omt he
const r uct i on si t e i n open- bed vehi cl es i s r equi r ed. Appl i cat i on of
wat er , sui t abl e chemi cal s, or mai nt ai ni ng a mi ni mum300 mmf r ee- boar d
space shal l be r equi r ed i f cover i ng i s i nadequat e.
d. Of f - Si t e Tr acki ng - Dust cont r ol shal l be per f or med as t he wor k
pr oceeds t o mi ni mi ze vehi cl e of f - si t e t r acki ng of sedi ment and
gener at i on of dust . Ever y ef f or t shal l be made t o keep vehi cl es f r om
t r acki ng soi l s f r omt he const r uct i on si t e. Dust gener at i on shal l be
cont r ol l ed by spr i nkl i ng, chemi cal t r eat ment , l i ght bi t umi nous
t r eat ment , or si mi l ar appr oved met hods.
e. Access Roads and Par ki ng Lot s. - I n addi t i on t o pr event at i ve
t echni ques, t he r emoval of soi l or ot her mat er i al s shal l be per f or med
by mechani cal sweeper s or t hei r equi val ent .
3. 10. 5 Tr ai ni ng
Dur i ng t he const r uct i on per i od t he Cont r act or shal l conduct f r equent
t r ai ni ng cour ses f or hi s mai nt enance per sonnel . The cur r i cul a shal l i ncl ude
met hods of dust cont r ol , f ami l i ar i t y wi t h pol l ut i on st andar ds, and car e of
cont r ol s and measur es t o pr event and cor r ect f ugi t i ve dust pol l ut i on.
3. 10. 6 Mai nt enance
The Cont r act or shal l mai nt ai n al l f aci l i t i es const r uct ed f or pol l ut i on
cont r ol under t hi s cont r act as l ong as t he oper at i ons cr eat i ng t he
par t i cul ar pol l ut ant ar e bei ng car r i ed out or unt i l t he mat er i al concer ned
has become st abi l i zed t o t he ext ent t hat pol l ut i on i s no l onger bei ng
cr eat ed.
The Cont r act or shal l f ur ni sh dai l y ser vi ces f or t he t empor ar y cont r ol
measur es at t he pr oj ect si t e and per f or many r equi r ed mai nt enance as deemed
necessar y by and t o t he sat i sf act i on of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer dur i ng t he

Page 24 of 24
ent i r e l i f e of t he cont r act . Ser vi ces shal l be per f or med at such a t i me and
i n such a manner t o l east i nt er f er e wi t h t he oper at i ons.
3. 11 USE OF EXPLOSI VE MATERI ALS
Use of expl osi ve mat er i al s i n t he cont ext of t he wor k def i ned i n t hi s
cont r act i s st r i ct l y pr ohi bi t ed.
3. 12 BURNI NG
Bur ni ng wi l l not be per mi t t ed.
3. 13 PROJ ECT SI GNS
On commencement of wor k on t hi s pr oj ect , t he Cont r act or shal l f ur ni sh and
er ect t he f ol l owi ng t empor ar y si gns i n l ocat i ons sel ect ed by t he Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer near t he pr oj ect si t e. The Cont r act or shal l mai nt ai n t he si gns i n
good condi t i on t hr oughout t he pr oj ect const r uct i on per i od and on compl et i on
of t he pr oj ect shal l r emove t he above si gns f r omt he pr emi ses:
a. Saf et y Si gn. Thi s si gn shal l conf or mt o t he r equi r ement s of St andar d
Dr awi ng Saf et y si gn.
b. Pr oj ect Si gn. Thi s si gn shal l conf or mt o St andar d Dr awi ng Pr oj ect
Si gn.
The Gover nment wi l l pr ovi de t empl at es of t he r equi r ed above si gns at t he
pr e- const r uct i on meet i ng.
3. 14 WARRANTY CALLS
I f t hi s pr oj ect i ncl udes any war r ant y per i od, t he cont r act or shal l pr ovi de
t he names of at l east t wo aut hor i zed r epr esent at i ves of t he Cont r act or wi t h
compl et e addr ess and t el ephone number s ( bot h a mobi l e phone and f i xed phone
number f or each of t he r epr esent at i ves) . These r epr esent at i ves wi l l be
cont act ed i n case of a war r ant y cal l , and must be avai l abl e f or emer gency
cal l s 24 hr s/ day and 7 days/ week. Separ at e r epr esent at i ves may be pr ovi ded
f or di f f er ent t ypes of equi pment .
Once a war r ant y cal l i s made, t he cont r act or shal l i nvest i gat e and pr ompt l y
per f or many r equi r ed act i ons. Nor mal r epai r s shal l be compl et ed wi t hi n 24-
48 hr s and emer gency cal l s shal l be r esponded t o wi t hi n 4 hour s.
- - End of Sect i on - -
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 00 73 15.01

GOVERNMENT FIELD OFFICE
(08/10)

PART 1 GENERAL
1. 1 Gener al
The wor k cover ed by t hi s sect i on consi st s of f ur ni shi ng al l l abor ,
mat er i al s, equi pment , and ser vi ces and per f or mi ng al l wor k r equi r ed f or or
i nci dent al t o t he i t ems her ei n speci f i ed. No separ at e payment wi l l be made
f or t he const r uct i on and ser vi ces r equi r ed by t hi s sect i on, and al l cost s i n
connect i on t her ewi t h shal l be i ncl uded i n t he over al l cost of t he wor k
unl ess speci f i cal l y st at ed ot her wi se.
Thi s speci f i cat i on does not est abl i sh t he r equi r ement s f or t he cont r act or s
si t e f aci l i t i es; t he cont r act or i s r esponsi bl e f or pr ovi di ng adequat e si t e
f aci l i t i es f or t he use of t hei r per sonnel i n accor dance wi t h ot her cont r act
t er ms and condi t i ons.
1. 2 Gover nment Fi el d Of f i ce
The cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or pr ovi di ng an of f i ce f or t he sol e use
of gover nment per sonnel , i n a st r uct ur e physi cal l y separ at ed f r omt he
cont r act or s si t e of f i ces, and shal l be mai nt ai ned i n good condi t i on by t he
Cont r act or unt i l compl et i on of al l wor k under t hi s cont r act .
Faci l i t y shal l be f ur ni shed at a l ocat i on desi gnat ed by t he Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer , appr oved by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , and avai l abl e f or use
concur r ent wi t h avai l abi l i t y of Cont r act or ' s si t e of f i ce or wi t hi n 15
cal endar days of Not i ce t o Pr oceed, whi chever occur s f i r st .
1. 2. 1 Of f i ce
The Contractor shall provide the Government with an office with a minimum of
40 square meters in floor area, wi t h wi ndows and a door wi t h l ockset
i ndi vi dual l y keyed wi t h t wo keys, and one battery operated smoke detector in
each room (contractor shall provide and replace batteries in each smoke
detector at least twice yearly).
The wal l s and cei l i ng of t he of f i ce shal l be i nsul at ed. Al l wi ndows shal l
be scr eened. The wi ndows shal l be openabl e and be secur el y f ast ened f r om
t he i nsi de. Gl ass panel s i n wi ndows shal l be pr ot ect ed by bar s or heavy mesh
scr eens t o pr event easy access t o t he bui l di ng t hr ough t hese panel s.
The of f i ce shal l cont ai n a mi ni mumof ei ght ( 8) st andar d el ect r i cal out l et s
meet i ng l ocal r equi r ement s and addi t i onal l y pr ovi de f or del i ver y of a
mi ni mum3000 Wat t s.
The of f i ce shal l cont ai n an i nt egr al t oi l et f aci l i t y wi t h west er n- t ype ( wi t h
a push- t ype f l ush but t on) t oi l et f i xt ur e ( bowl ) whi ch shal l hol d wat er i n i t
at al l t i mes and a wash basi n. The t oi l et f aci l i t y shal l be suppl i ed wi t h
l i qui d soap, t oi l et paper , and paper t owel s f or dai l y use. Adequat e quant i t y
of t hese suppl i es shal l be mai nt ai ned on si t e and r epl aced as needed.
STR 00 73 15. 01 GOVERNMENT FI ELD OFFI CE ( 08/ 10)

Page 2 of 4
The of f i ce f aci l i t y shal l cont ai n a ki t chenet t e t ype f aci l i t y wi t h a count er
t op/ wor k ar ea wi t h a mi ni mumsur f ace ar ea of 55cm( W) by 150 cm( L) . A
mi ni mumof t wo el ect r i cal out l et s ( l ocal cur r ent ) shal l be l ocat ed adj acent
t o t he count er t op.
Hot wat er f or al l f aucet s shal l be pr ovi ded.
The of f i ce f aci l i t y, i ncl udi ng al l f ur ni t ur e, equi pment , and connect i ons,
wi l l r emai n t he pr oper t y of t he Cont r act or and, upon compl et i on of wor k
under t hi s cont r act , shal l be r emoved f r omt he si t e by t he Cont r act or and
t he si t e r et ur ned as near l y as pr act i cal t o t he or i gi nal condi t i ons.
1. 2. 2 Fur ni t ur e and Suppl i es
The cont r act or shal l f ur ni sh t he of f i ce wi t h t he f ol l owi ng equi pment . Al l
f ur ni shi ng shal l be new and manuf act ur ed by a r ecogni zed suppl i er of of f i ce
equi pment . Al l i t ems shal l be assembl ed, i nst al l ed, and mai nt ai ned by t he
cont r act or .
Two desks ( mi ni mum80 cmx 150 cm) doubl e pedest al wi t h l ockabl e
dr awer s
One Desk chai r f or each desk wi t h ar ms, swi vel t i l t , hydr aul i c hei ght -
adj ust abl e, medi umback, f abr i c cover ed seat cushi on, cast or ed
One conf er ence t abl e ( mi ni mum120 cmx 250 cm) , not l ess t han si x new
ar m- chai r s, cast or ed
Thr ee f i l e cabi net s, capabl e of hol di ng US l et t er - si ze document s, wi t h
a mi ni mumf i ve dr awer s each
Two bookcases wi t h a mi ni mumof f i ve shel ves each. Mi ni mumdi mensi ons
ar e 120 cm( W) x 200 cm( H) x 30 cm( D) .
A cl ock, wal l hung, quar t z, mi ni mum12 di al , bat t er y power ed.
Pl an r acks capabl e of hol di ng t wo f ul l - si ze set of cont r act pl ans.
Pr ovi de a dr y- er ase boar d wi t h a mi ni mumdi mensi on of 1. 5 mby 1. 0 m.
Dr y er ase mar ker s ( mi ni mumf our di f f er ent col or s) shal l be pr ovi ded and
r epl aced as depl et ed.
Mi cr owave ( mi ni mum0. 028 cubi c met er )
Ref r i ger at or ( mi ni mum0. 70 cubi c met er )
The cont r act or shal l not be r esponsi bl e f or pr ovi di ng of f i ce suppl i es,
i ncl udi ng comput er s, copi er s, or paper except as speci f i cal l y i dent i f i ed i n
ot her speci f i cat i ons or t he scope of wor k.
1. 2. 3 Li ght i ng Requi r ement s
The of f i ce f aci l i t y shal l i ncl ude sui t abl e el ect r i c l i ght i ng t o meet t he
mi ni muml i ght i ng r equi r ement s ( l umi nance) of Admi ni st r at i ve ar eas as
i ndi cat ed i n EM385- 1- 1
1. 2. 4 Heat i ng/ Cool i ng Requi r ement s
The contractor shall be responsible for providing heating and cooling
capable of maintaining an interior temperature of between 16 Celsius and
25 Celsius in all seasons.
Refrigerant (if applicable) shall be one of the fluorocarbon gases that has
an Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) of less than or equal to 0.05.

Page 3 of 4
1. 3 Ut i l i t i es
The contractor shall provide connect i ons t o al l ut i l i t i es, i ncl udi ng wat er ,
sewer , and el ect r i c mai ns. Exterior utilities shall be permanently
installed and connected with existing utilities or generator. Exposed
utilities shall be insulated to prevent freezing. Cont r act or shal l ensur e
an adequat e hot wat er suppl y i s avai l abl e such as t hr ough t he use of wat er
heat er s. All utility connections shall be connected and disconnected in
accordance with local codes and to the satisfaction of the Contracting
Officer.
If electrical service is not available in the immediate vicinity the
contractor may request, subject to approval of the Contracting Officer, the
use of generator(s) to provide electrical service. If approved, the
contractor shall be responsible for providing all fuel, maintenance, and
other services necessary to maintain electrical service during all hours the
contractor is on site.
1. 3. 1 Dr i nki ng Wat er
The cont r act or shal l pr ovi de bot t l ed ( dr i nki ng) wat er f or gover nment
empl oyees. Wat er shal l be chi l l ed ( such as t hr ough t he use of a wat er
cool er ) .
1. 3. 2 Tel ephone
The cont r act or shal l pr ovi de t el ephone i nst al l at i on and connect i on t o
t el ephone ser vi ce, i ncl udi ng t el ephone equi pment ( phones) , unl ess no
t el ephone ser vi ce i s avai l abl e wi t hi n 10 kmof t he pr oj ect si t e and
i nst al l at i on of t el ephone ut i l i t i es i s not i ncl uded i n t he scope of wor k of
t hi s cont r act .
The cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or al l connect i on and i nst al l at i on
f ees. Cost s f or t el ephone ser vi ce, i ncl udi ng basi c or mont hl y ser vi ce,
and addi t i onal ser vi ces, such as DSL, shal l be t he r esponsi bi l i t y of t he
Gover nment .
1. 3. 3 Dat a Connect i on
The cont r act or shal l pr ovi de DSL connect i vi t y at a mi ni mumof 2 Mbps/ 512
Kbps ADSL wi t h a f i xed st at i c I P addr ess. Al l net wor k cabl es desi gnat ed f or
Cor ps of f i ces wi l l be r an back t o t he ADSL or i gi nat i on poi nt .
1. 4 Mai nt enance
The cont r act or shal l pr ovi de al l mai nt enance and j ani t or i al ser vi ces, t o
i ncl ude empt yi ng of t r ash at l east t wi ce a week and cl eani ng of t he of f i ce,
i ncl udi ng t he t oi l et f aci l i t i es, weekl y.
1. 5 Secur i t y Requi r ement s
The physi cal secur i t y of t he Gover nment per sonnel , t hei r pr oper t y, and t hei r
of f i ce shal l be t he r esponsi bi l i t y of t he Cont r act or t hr oughout t he dur at i on
of t he cont r act .
I f t he pr oj ect si t e i s out si de of t he cont r ol l ed ar ea of an exi st i ng
mi l i t ar y i nst al l at i on, t he f i el d of f i ce compounds f or Gover nment empl oyees

Page 4 of 4
shal l have 30 met er s st andof f f r oma f ence encl osi ng t he of f i ce and al l
par ki ng or r oads. Addi t i onal f enci ng, ear t h ber ms, concr et e bar r i er s,
cont r ol l ed access poi nt s and t he l i ke shoul d be pr ovi ded t o l i mi t access t o
t he si t e and pr ovi de addi t i onal bui l di ng st andof f or secur i t y
1. 6 RELOCATI ON
The Cont r act or shal l l ocat e t he f aci l i t y such t hat i t wi l l not r equi r e
r el ocat i on t o accommodat e t he sequence of const r uct i on.
SECTION 00 73 15.15

TIME EXTENSIONS FOR UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER
01/09

1. Thi s pr ovi si on speci f i es t he pr ocedur e f or det er mi nat i on of t i me
ext ensi ons f or unusual l y sever e weat her i n accor dance wi t h t he cont r act
cl ause ent i t l ed " Def aul t : ( Fi xed Pr i ce Const r uct i on) " . I n or der f or t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer t o awar d a t i me ext ensi on under t hi s cl ause, t he
f ol l owi ng condi t i ons must be sat i sf i ed:
a. The weat her exper i enced at t he pr oj ect si t e dur i ng t he cont r act
per i od must be f ound t o be unusual l y sever e, t hat i s, mor e sever e t han t he
adver se weat her ant i ci pat ed f or t he pr oj ect l ocat i on dur i ng any gi ven mont h.
b. The unusual l y sever e weat her must act ual l y cause a del ay t o t he
compl et i on of t he pr oj ect . The del ay must be beyond t he cont r ol and wi t hout
t he f aul t or negl i gence of t he Cont r act or .
c. The del ay must occur dur i ng t he cont r act ual per f or mance per i od.
Weat her del ays occur r i ng af t er t he r equi r ed compl et i on dat e, pr i or t o Not i ce
t o Pr oceed, or dur i ng ot her non- wor ki ng days ar e not excusabl e under t he
Def aul t s cl ause.

2. The f ol l owi ng schedul e of mont hl y ant i ci pat ed adver se weat her del ays wi l l
const i t ut e t he base l i ne f or mont hl y weat her t i me eval uat i ons. The
Cont r act or ' s pr ogr ess schedul e must r ef l ect t hese ant i ci pat ed adver se weat her
l ays i n al l weat her dependent act i vi t i es. de

MONTHLY ANTI CI PATED ADVERSE WEATHER DELAY
WORK DAYS BASED ON ( 5) DAY WORK WEEK

J AN FEB MAR APR MAY J UN J UL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
Pr oj ect s Locat ed i n Af r i ca
3 3 4 5 7 6 7 4 4 4 3 3
Pr oj ect s Locat ed i n I sr ael
5 5 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 5
Al l Ot her Count r i es and Locat i ons
8 6 7 6 5 5 5 4 4 6 7 8

Monthly anticipated adverse weather delays shall be adjusted proportionately
should the actual work week be based on more or less than 5 work days (i.e.
if a 6 day work week, the anticipated adverse weather delay work days for a
month would be adjusted by multiplying the number shown above by 6/5).

3. Upon acknowl edgment of t he Not i ce t o Pr oceed ( NTP) and cont i nui ng
t hr oughout t he cont r act per f or mance per i od, t he cont r act or wi l l r ecor d on t he
dai l y CQC r epor t , t he occur r ence of adver se weat her and r esul t ant i mpact t o
nor mal l y schedul ed wor k. I mpact ed act i vi t i es shal l be i dent i f i ed by name and
act i vi t y i d on t he CQC r epor t .

Act ual adver se weat her del ay days must pr event wor k on cr i t i cal act i vi t i es
f or 50 per cent or mor e of t he cont r act or ' s schedul ed wor k day.

The number of act ual adver se weat her del ay days shal l i ncl ude days i mpact ed
by act ual adver se weat her ( even i f adver se weat her occur r ed i n pr evi ous
mont h) , be cal cul at ed chr onol ogi cal l y f r omt he f i r st t o t he l ast day of each
mont h, and be r ecor ded as f ul l days. I f t he number of act ual adver se weat her
SECTI ON 00 73 15. 15 TI ME EXTENSI ONS FOR UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER
01/ 09

Page 2 of 2
del ay days exceeds t he number of days ant i ci pat ed i n par agr aph 2, above, t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi l l conver t any qual i f yi ng del ays t o cal endar days,
gi vi ng f ul l consi der at i on f or equi val ent f ai r weat her wor k days, and i ssue a
modi f i cat i on i n accor dance wi t h t he cont r act cl ause ent i t l ed " Def aul t ( Fi xed
Pr i ce Const r uct i on) " .

4. When t he cont r act per f or mance per i od, or any ext ensi on t her eof , has
passed, no ext ensi ons f or unusual l y sever e weat her wi l l be gr ant ed.
SECTION 00 73 15.50

GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
08/09

PART 1: GENERAL ............................................................ 3
1.1 ORGANIZATION AND LAYOUT............................................. 3
1.2 DEFINITIONS......................................................... 3
1.3 PAYMENT............................................................. 3
1.4 SUBCONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE............................................ 3
1.5 PERMITS AND RESPONSIBILITIES........................................ 3
1.6 CONTRACTOR LIASON AND COMMUNICATION WITH HOST GOVERNMENT AND OTHER
GOVERNMENT OFFICIALS...................................................... 4
1.7 IMMUNITY FROM LEGAL PROCESS......................................... 4
1.8 APPLICABLE LAW FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT............................... 4
1.9 SUBMITTALS.......................................................... 4
1.10 PUBLIC RELEASE OF INFORMATION....................................... 5
1.10.1 Prohibition..................................................... 5
1.10.2 Subcontracts and Purchase Orders................................ 5
1.11 REFERENCED STANDARDS................................................ 5
1.12 PROHIBITED ITEMS.................................................... 6
1.13 PROPRIETARY NAMES................................................... 6
1.14 KEY PERSONNEL, SUBCONTRACTORS AND OUTSIDE ASSOCIATES OR CONSULTANTS. 6
1.15 ENGLISH SPEAKING REPRESENTATIVE..................................... 6
1.16 NO WAIVER BY GOVERNMENT............................................. 7
1.17 CONTRACTOR LIAISON WITH HOST GOVERNMENT............................. 7
1.18 GENERAL SECURITY REQUIREMENTS....................................... 7
1.18.1 Access Guidelines............................................... 7
1.18.2 Responsibility for Physical Security............................ 7
1.18.3 Access to Operational Areas..................................... 8
1.18.4 Employment...................................................... 8
1.19 EXPERIENCE AND QUALIFICATIONS OF PERSONNEL.......................... 8
1.20 COMMERCIAL POWER INTERRUPTIONS...................................... 8
1.21 EQUIPMENT GUARANTEES................................................ 9
1.22 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS................................................... 9
1.22.1 General......................................................... 9
1.22.2 Working As-Built Drawings....................................... 9
1.22.3 Final As-Built Drawings........................................ 10
1.22.4 Execution and Review........................................... 10
1.23 CORRESPONDENCE AND LANGUAGE........................................ 10
1.23.1 Correspondence in the English Language......................... 10
PART 2: PRODUCTS .......................................................... 11
PART 3: EXECUTION ......................................................... 11
3.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY.......................................... 11
3.1.1 Protective Measures............................................ 11
3.1.2 Contractors Supervision....................................... 11
3.2 PERMISSION TO EXCAVATE............................................. 12
3.3 UTILITY SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS...................................... 12
3.4 CONTRACTOR SITE FACILITIES......................................... 12
3.4.1 Availability and Use of Utility Services....................... 13
3.4.2 Storage Areas.................................................. 13
3.4.3 Trash Disposal................................................. 13
3.4.4 Additional Requirements........................................ 14
3.5 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION........................................... 14
3.5.1 General........................................................ 14
3.5.2 Protection of Land Resources................................... 14
3.5.3 Protection of Water Resources.................................. 14
SECTION 00 73 15.50 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (08/09)

Page 2 of 20

3.6 ROAD MAINTENANCE AND TRAFFIC CONTROL............................... 15
3.7 USE OF EXPLOSIVE MATERIALS......................................... 15
3.8 PROJECT SIGNS...................................................... 15
3.9 WARRANTY........................................................... 15
3.10 CONTRACTOR SAFETY PROGRAM.......................................... 15
3.11 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM................................. 15
3.11.1 General Requirements........................................... 16
3.11.2 Personnel Requirements......................................... 16
3.11.3 Control........................................................ 16
3.11.4 Documentation.................................................. 17
3.12 PROJECT SCHEDULE................................................... 18
3.12.1 General Requirements........................................... 18
3.12.2 Basis for Payment.............................................. 18
3.13 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES............................................... 19
3.13.1 Transmittal Form............................................... 19
3.13.2 Scheduling..................................................... 19
3.13.3 Variations / Substitution Requests............................. 19
3.13.4 Disapproved Or Rejected Submittals............................. 19
3.13.5 Approved/Accepted Submittals................................... 20
3.13.6 Withholding Of Payment......................................... 20


Page 3 of 20

PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 ORGANIZATION AND LAYOUT
The headings in this document and in other documents of this contract are
for convenience of reading only and should not be utilized to interpret the
contents of the documents.
Any place in the documents of this contract where singular is used, it can
also mean plural and vice versa.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
Unless stated otherwise, the term Contracting Officer in these documents
refers to the Contracting Officer or Administrative Contracting Officer
(ACO) (For the purposes of these specifications, the term ACO is
understood to mean Ordering Officer or OO on Job Order Contracts (JOC);
ACOs have no contractual authority on JOC contracts.
The term Contracting Officers Representative (COR) refers to the
Contracting Officer, Administrative Contracting Officer, or other
specifically designated representative. Designation of an ACO or COR will
be made in writing by the Contracting Officer and a copy of the designation
provided by the ACO or COR to the Contractor, who shall keep a copy with
their files.
As used in this specification, the term local authorities refers to all
civil and military agencies of the host nation, be they national or local,
having jurisdiction over any respective part of the project. Host Nation
as used herein refers to the country where the work is performed and shall
include all local, federal, national, and any other governmental entity of
the host nation.
1.3 PAYMENT
Separate payment will not be made for compliance with this specification.
All costs associated therewith shall be included in the applicable unit
prices or lump-sum prices contained in the Bidding Schedule.
1.4 SUBCONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE
Compliance with this specification by subcontractors shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
1.5 PERMITS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
The contractor shall, without additional expense to the Government, be
responsible for obtaining any necessary licenses and permits, and for
complying with any applicable laws, codes, and regulations in connection
with the prosecution of the work. It shall be similarly responsible for all
damages to persons or property that occurs as a result of the contractors
fault or negligence. It shall take proper safety and health precautions to

Page 4 of 20

protect the work, the workers, the public, and the property of others. It
shall also be responsible for all materials delivered and work performed
until completion and acceptance of the entire construction work, except for
any completed unit of construction thereof which theretofore may have been
accepted.
1.6 CONTRACTOR LIASON AND COMMUNICATION WITH HOST GOVERNMENT AND OTHER
GOVERNMENT OFFICIALS
All communication by the Contractor with all officials, representatives
and/or offices of the Host Government in all matters pertaining to the
design or construction of this contract, shall be through and in full
liaison with the Contracting Officer. This does not relinquish Contractor
responsibility for obtaining routine items to conduct day-to-day business,
such as visas, permits, and custom clearances.
The contractor is further reminded that only the Contracting Officer or
their authorized representative may give the contractor direction in regards
to contract interpretation. ONLY a Contracting Officer or Administrative
Contracting Officer may modify the contract terms or conditions.
1.7 IMMUNITY FROM LEGAL PROCESS
The contractor agrees to indemnify and save harmless the United States
Government against all claims and suits of whatsoever nature arising under
or incidental to performance of this contract by any subcontractor against
the United States Government. The Contractor further agrees to waive his
rights to bring suit or other legal against the United States Government,
except as provided in the Disputes clause of this contract and in the
United States Federal Statutes.
1.8 APPLICABLE LAW FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT
United States law will apply to resolve any claim of breach of this
contract.
1.9 SUBMITTALS
The Government and Contractor will identify required submittals at the
initial project meeting. Additional submittals may be required when deemed
necessary to adequately describe the work covered in the respective
sections.
Each submittal is to be complete and in sufficient detail to allow
determination of compliance with contract requirements. Contractor's
Quality Control (CQC) System Manager and the Designer of Record, if
applicable, shall check and approve all items prior to submittal and stamp,
sign, and date indicating action taken. Proposed deviations from the
contract requirements are to be clearly identified.
Include within submittals items such as: Contractor's, manufacturer's, or
fabricator's drawings; descriptive literature including (but not limited to)

Page 5 of 20

catalog cuts, diagrams, operating charts or curves; test reports; test
cylinders; samples; O&M manuals(including parts list); certifications;
warranties; and other such required submittals.
1.10 PUBLIC RELEASE OF INFORMATION
1.10.1 Prohibition
There shall be no public release of information or photographs concerning
any aspect of the materials or services relating to this solicitation,
contract, purchase order, or other documents resulting therefrom without the
prior written approval of the Contracting Officer.
1.10.2 Subcontracts and Purchase Orders
The Contractor agrees to insert the substance of above paragraph
"Prohibition" in each subcontract and purchase order generated for this
contract.
1.11 REFERENCED STANDARDS
Unless specifically called out in the specifications, Host Nation Standards
shall be used for this contract. Where reference is made in the contract to
Host Nation Standards, including, but not limited to those issued by the
Deutsches Institut fr Normung e.V. (DIN; in English, the German Institute
for Standardization) and The European Committee for Standardization or
Comit Europen de Normalisation (CEN) (EN Standards), including where such
standards are incorporated into the contract in full text or by reference,
the reference /incorporation applies only to establish a technical standard
or level of performance or quality and does not create substantive rights
under the contract.
All costs required to comply with these standards shall be included in the
bid price, including the performance of any additional work, such as
associated and special tasks. Notwithstanding any language in the
standards, the requirement to provide any necessary material, item of
equipment or work, rests with the contractor unless another contract
provision clearly states that such will be government furnished.
When standards referenced in a specification are in conflict with each other
(such as when a US Standard conflicts with a European or Host Nation
standard within the same specification section), Host Nation Standard shall
govern. A conflict does not exist when standards require separate methods
or performance and both are achievable. In these situations, the contractor
shall comply with both standards. This does not apply to documents with a
different Order of Precedence (for example, a standard referenced in a
Contract clause would have a higher order of precedence than one referenced
in a specification).
The Contractor shall make available in his site office any standard
referenced in the contract specifications or used in the project design and
construction.

Page 6 of 20

1.12 PROHIBITED ITEMS
The following is prohibited in this construction project:
a. Use of aluminum for electrical conductors.
b. Embedding aluminum conduit in concrete.
c. Use of fluorescent light ballasts and other products containing PCB's.
d. Use of urea-formaldehyde foam insulation products.
e. Use of any paint/coatings having a lead content of over 0.06 percent
by weight of non-volatile content.
f. Use of any ozone depleting chemicals
g. Use of zinc-chromate
h. Use of materials containing asbestos
The Contractor shall submit only materials, equipment, or systems for
approval that have been in service/manufacture for at least two (2) years.
1.13 PROPRIETARY NAMES
Unless specifically identified in the contract as a Sole Source Item,
manufacturer's proprietary names indicated for colors, textures and patterns
of materials are for the purpose of color, texture and pattern selection
only. Other materials are acceptable provided they closely approximate
colors, textures and patterns indicated. Any substitutions must conform to
all other requirements and must be approved by the Contracting Officer.
1.14 KEY PERSONNEL, SUBCONTRACTORS AND OUTSIDE ASSOCIATES OR CONSULTANTS
In connection with the services covered by this contract, any in-house
personnel, subcontractors, and outside associates or consultants identified
in the Contractors proposal shall be limited to individuals or firms that
were specifically identified in the proposal. The Contractor shall obtain
the Contracting Officer's written consent before making any substitution for
any designated in-house personnel, subcontractors, associates, or
consultants.
1.15 ENGLISH SPEAKING REPRESENTATIVE
At all times during the performance of work on this contract, the Contractor
shall have a representative available capable of explaining the work
operations and receiving instructions in the English language. The
Contracting Officer shall have the right to determine, without appeal of
such decision, whether the proposed representative has sufficient technical
and linguistic capabilities, and the Contractor shall immediately replace
any individual not acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
Notwithstanding any other contractual requirements, the Site Safety and
Health Officer, all Quality Control Personnel, the Site Superintendent, and
Project Manager shall be able to communicate to site workers and other
subordinates in their native language(s) and take direction from the
Contracting Officer or Contracting Officers Representative through the
designated English Language Speaking Representative.

Page 7 of 20

1.16 NO WAIVER BY GOVERNMENT
The failure of the Government, in any one or more instances, to insist upon
the strict performance of any of the terms of this contract or to exercise
any option herein conferred shall not be construed as a waiver or
relinquishment to any extent of the right to assert or rely upon such terms
or option on any future occasion.
1.17 CONTRACTOR LIAISON WITH HOST GOVERNMENT
All communication by the Contractor with all officials, representatives
and/or offices of the Host Government in all matters pertaining to the
design or construction of this contract, shall be through and in full
liaison with the Contracting Officer. This does not relinquish Contractor
responsibility for obtaining routine items to conduct day-to-day business,
such as visas, permits, and custom clearances.
1.18 GENERAL SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
1.18.1 Access Guidelines
The Contractor shall be responsible for adhering to all guidelines
established by local authorities for access to the project/work site(s) and
will be responsible for the daily access of their personnel and
subcontractor workers. The Contractor is solely responsible for obtaining
any required access for both its employees and any subcontractor employees,
and ensuring they remain qualified for base access throughout contract
performance.
Delays due to difficulty in access will not be justification for time or
monetary compensation from the Government.
The Contractor is cautioned to review any Additional Security Guidelines
specified elsewhere in this contract for more stringent requirements or
specific access conditions.
1.18.2 Responsibility for Physical Security
The contract price shall include an amount sufficient to cover all security
measures based on local conditions and as required by the Government and as
directed by the Contracting Officer throughout the duration of the contract.
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for physical security of all
construction materials, supplies, and equipment of every description
(including property which may be Government furnished or owned)
provided and/or utilized in the execution of this contract.
b. Adequate outside security lighting shall be provided at the
Contractors temporary facilities.
c. Contractors personnel shall assure that all equipment is de-energized
and stored in designated storage areas together with supplies upon

Page 8 of 20

completion of work. When buildings are unoccupied, lights, water
outlets and blowers shall be turned off and windows closed and locked
on a floor-to-floor basis as work progresses, followed by locking of
all exterior doors upon completion of work. Keys to buildings shall
be deposited with the pertinent installation or building duty officer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any losses or damages arising
from their failure to secure buildings during and after working hours.
d. The Contractor shall be responsible in the event of theft by their
personnel of Government property or personal property of Government
personnel, civilian or military. All lost or misplaced articles found
by their employees shall be turned in to the COR.
1.18.3 Access to Operational Areas
Contractor personnel are expressly prohibited and shall be restricted from
entering operational buildings or areas without the specific authorization
of the COR. To perform work, where "security escorts" are required for
access to a facility, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Contracting
Officer for access to such facilities.
1.18.4 Employment
Should the continued employment of any person in connection with this
contract, or any subcontract hereunder, be deemed by the Contracting Officer
to be prejudicial to the interests of the Government, that person shall
immediately be removed from the work. In this connection the Contractor
agrees that:
a. Cases which may involve disciplinary action against such persons, or
the necessity of reassignment or termination of their services, shall
be investigated, processed, reported and disposed of, as directed by
b. Employment contracts of all persons employed in connection with this
contract, or any subcontract hereunder shall include clauses
containing the substance of this clause.
1.19 EXPERIENCE AND QUALIFICATIONS OF PERSONNEL
When qualifications of key personnel referenced in other sections require
experience or related experience, the experience must be on projects of
the same type and nature as the work identified in the project scope of
work, and be on contracts with the government of the United States of
America, either with the US Army Corps of Engineers or Department of Defense
agencies. References and experience must be sufficiently detailed to allow
for verification of experience. The Contracting Officer shall have final
authority on determining the relevance of any experience submitted. Any
individual found to not be in compliance with this paragraph shall be
subject to removal by the Contracting Officer.
1.20 COMMERCIAL POWER INTERRUPTIONS

Page 9 of 20

Commercial power interruptions are anticipated during the construction
period. In the event of commercial power interruptions, the Contractor
shall provide back-up power if they deem necessary, at no additional cost to
the U.S. Government. No time extension, however, will be allowed because of
commercial power interruptions.
1.21 EQUIPMENT GUARANTEES
When a completed facility is transferred to the User and the facility has
equipment installed which is covered by a guarantee, the Contractor shall
furnish to the COR the following information:
a. Contract number and a list of all items of equipment, properly
identified, that are covered by a guarantee period under the terms and
conditions of the contract, including make and model numbers.
b. A copy of all manufacturer's or vendor's guarantee documents.
c. The dates during which the Contractor's guarantee is in effect under
the identified individual section and paragraph of the contract
specifications for each item of equipment on the list (indicating for
each item the date of acceptance for the beginning of the guarantee
period, either for beneficial use or final acceptance, whichever is
earlier, and the expiration date of the guarantee period).
d. Name of an authorized representative of the Contractor with complete
address and telephone number; and the names, addresses and telephone
numbers of all subcontractors and/or equipment suppliers or
manufacturers specifically designated in writing by the Contractor for
direct contact by the COR for implementing the guarantee after
transfer of the equipment.
The performance security will not be returned until all implementing
equipment guarantees are delivered.
1.22 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
1.22.1 General
The Contractor shall receive the final solicitation drawings in electronic
format. These drawings shall be the basis for the working as-built
drawings.
The final as-built drawing submittal shall consist of the following:
a. One (1) complete copies of the CADD drawing files including all
reference files on separate compact or DVD discs.
b. One (1) set of final as-built full-size prints.
c. One (1) set of final as-built half-size prints.
1.22.2 Working As-Built Drawings
The working as-built drawings shall be print sets taken from the contract

Page 10 of 20

drawings. They are kept at the construction site for mark-up by the
Contractor to record all as-built conditions, and shall be revised and
updated continuously to show the as-built conditions during the progression
of the project.
a. Where contract drawings or specifications allow options, only the
option selected for construction shall be shown on the as-built
drawings.
b. Shop drawings containing as-built information shall be incorporated
into the working as-built drawings. This additional information may
be added to an existing working as-built drawing or may require the
addition of a new drawing to the working as-built drawing set.
The working as-built drawings will be jointly reviewed for accuracy and
completeness by the Contracting Officer and the Contractor prior to
submission of each pay estimate.
1.22.3 Final As-Built Drawings
The final as-built drawings shall be the final record of construction as
installed and completed by the Contractor and as indicated on the working
as-built drawings. All changes, variations and/or required additions to the
contract drawings shall be included. In the event the Contractor
accomplishes additional work which changes the as-built conditions of the
facility after submission of the final as-built drawings, the Contractor
shall furnish revised and/or additional drawings as required to depict as-
built conditions. The requirements for these additional drawings will be
the same as for the as-built drawings included in the original submission.
1.22.4 Execution and Review
The Contractor shall mark up one (1) set of paper prints by the red-line
process to show the as-built conditions. The as-built marked prints shall
be kept current on a weekly basis and available on the jobsite at all times.
Upon completion of the project and within 30 days of the final inspection,
the Contractor shall revise the final drawings to reflect the as-built
changes to match the approved working as-built drawings.
1.23 CORRESPONDENCE AND LANGUAGE
1.23.1 Correspondence in the English Language
In additional to FAR 52.214-34, it shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to prepare proposals and all documents related to this contract,
to include, change orders, shop drawings and submittals, quality control
reports, computations, and all correspondence, in the English language. In
the event of disputes or litigation arising out of performance of this
contract, the contractor will provide English language translations of any
documents that are provided to the Government in support of the contractor's
position or any documents pertinent to the dispute that are requested by the

Page 11 of 20

Government. For the purposes of this paragraph, pertinent means any
documents that would normally be considered to be within the scope of
discovery in an ASBCA or court proceeding concerning the dispute. The term
'documents' includes electronic documents including but not limited to email
and includes documents generated by subcontractors or suppliers.
In the event a dispute results in litigation, including actions at the ASBCA
or actions in U.S. courts, the contractor will be responsible for providing
translations of any documents that are within the scope of a discovery
request filed by the U.S. Government and for providing certified
translations upon request by the U.S. Government.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY
3.1.1 Protective Measures
The Contractor shall be responsible for protective measures during
construction and shall provide barricades and protective signs in both the
English and host nation languages for the safety of building inhabitants and
passers-by. For inside work, the Contractor shall protect floors,
furniture, and furnishings, appliances, other objects and structural parts
against soiling or damage, by using drop cloths or other suitable coverings.
If specifically stated elsewhere in this contract, the Contractor shall be
responsible for removal of furnishings (including furniture, carpets and
drapes) and equipment (such as machines which are in addition to equipment
which forms part of integral building systems requiring work under the
contract) as required for preparation of work areas, and the reinstallation
thereof. The Contractor shall replace furnishings and equipment at their
original locations upon completion of the work. If not specifically stated
elsewhere in this contract to be the Contractors responsibility,
furnishings and equipment as described above required to be removed for
preparation of work areas, and the reinstallation thereof, shall be the
responsibility of Government forces.
Repair of damages to personal property, buildings, vehicles, ground or other
Government property caused directly or indirectly by their personnel shall
be the Contractor's responsibility and shall be repaired or replaced at the
Contractors expense.
3.1.2 Contractors Supervision
The Contractor shall provide adequate supervision of all employees to ensure
complete and satisfactory performance of all work required in accordance
with the specifications and terms of the contract. The Contractor shall be
at the site of the work whenever services are being performed to receive

Page 12 of 20

instructions from the Contracting Officer.
3.2 PERMISSION TO EXCAVATE
Before excavation begins, the Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits
in addition to written permission to excavate from the appropriate local
authorities having jurisdiction.
The contractor remains responsible for identifying and confirming the
location of all utilities prior to performing any excavation and shall be
responsible for repairing any damages to utilities caused by their
construction activities at no additional cost to the government.
Additional requirements are specified elsewhere in the contract, including
but not limited to the contract clauses and in EM 385-1-1.
3.3 UTILITY SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with appropriate
utility companies and installation representatives to obtain all necessary
permits and approvals for utility service interruptions. If, as a condition
of approval, outages are required to be limited to weekends, holidays, or
non-standard work hours, the Contractor shall perform the work during the
time designated.
Additionally, the Contractor shall submit written notification to the
Contracting Officer not less than 15 calendar days in advance of each
interruption for each utility and or communication service to or within
existing buildings and facilities being used. As a minimum, the request
should include the location of the outage, utilities being affected,
duration of outage and any necessary sketches. No single outage will exceed
4 hours unless approved in writing by the Contracting Officer.
3.4 CONTRACTOR SITE FACILITIES
The Contractor shall provide, at its own expense, all facilities as may be
necessary for the purposes of construction work. The location,
construction, maintenance, operation and removal of the Contractors
buildings, shops, storage areas and other facilities at the project site
shall be subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer. The Contractor
shall maintain a temporary on-site office which will provide project files
and drawings, telephone service and space for the Contracting Officer to
conduct on-site meetings with the Contractor. Adequate break room and a
portable toilet facility shall be furnished by the Contractor for use by
contract personnel, and will be the Contractors responsibility to maintain
in a sanitary condition.
The Contractor will be permitted to use the designated area within the
contract limits for operation of their construction equipment and plants,
shops, warehouses, and offices. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining
any required additional mobilization above that designated. The Contractor
will conduct delivery and storage of materials in an area approved by the

Page 13 of 20

Contracting Officer in writing. If a road must be blocked, or any
additional area is required during construction, this must be coordinated
with the Contracting Officer at least ten calendar days in advance. On
completion of the contract, all facilities shall be removed from the
mobilization area by the Contractor and shall be disposed of in accordance
with the applicable host nation laws and regulations. The site shall be
cleared of construction debris and other materials and the area restored to
its final grade.
The Contractor shall provide, at its own expense, such temporary heating or
cooling as may be necessary for their office and personnel, or for the
purposes of construction work. Any temporary type of heating or cooling
provided shall conform to all applicable safety requirements and will be
subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer.
3.4.1 Availability and Use of Utility Services
The contractor is responsible for making all necessary evaluations prior to
bid as to the availability of utility services.
Connection to the sources of water and electricity and bringing them to the
work location shall be done by the contractor at his own expense. The
government is not responsible for water or electrical stoppage and the
contractor has the responsibility to make prior proper arrangements, at
their own expense for independent supply (water storage, generators, etc.).
3.4.2 Storage Areas
All materials, equipment, and supplies shall be stored in accordance with
manufacturers regulations, EM385-1-1, and host nation codes. In the event
of conflicts between regulations, the Host Nation regulations shall govern.
Materials which are stored out-of-doors shall be adequately protected.
Unless specifically authorized by the government, no materials may be stored
in open areas exposed to the elements.
The Contracting Officer may direct the removal of any items which are stored
improperly. If the government allows for payment of stored materials, no
payment shall be allowed for materials, equipment, or supplies which are
improperly stored. Additionally, the government may withhold sufficient
funds from pay requests to provide for the repair or replacement of
materials, equipment, or supplies which have been improperly stored and
installed.
3.4.3 Trash Disposal
All waste material, including excess soil materials, shall be the property
and responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible
for collection and disposal of trash from the work areas and from the
mobilization area in a manner complying with all local laws. It is
prohibited to allow dig material and litter to pile up in the area of the
construction site.

Page 14 of 20

3.4.4 Additional Requirements.
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating use of existing roads
as haul routes with the host nation Government and local authorities.
Construction, and routing of new haul routes, and/or upgrading of existing
roads to carry anticipated construction traffic shall be coordinated with
the host Government and local authorities and is the sole responsibility of
the Contractor. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain such
local authorizations, permits, and licenses necessary to establish quarry
operations, batching operations, and haul routes.
3.5 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
3.5.1 General
The Contractor shall be responsible for the prevention of environmental
pollution during and as the result of construction operations under this
contract, and shall comply with all host nation environmental laws and
regulations
3.5.2 Protection of Land Resources
The land resources outside the limits of permanent work shall be preserved
in its present condition or restored to its original condition after
completion of construction. The Contractor shall confine construction
activities to areas defined by the plans or specifications. Any landscape
feature damaged by the Contractors operations shall be restored to its
original condition at the Contractors expense. The Contracting Officer
will decide what method of restoration shall be used.
3.5.3 Protection of Water Resources
The Contractor shall not pollute streams or drainage courses with
construction wastes (solid or liquid), or other harmful materials. All work
shall be performed so that objectionable conditions will not be created.
a. Erosion Control. Fills and waste areas shall be constructed by
selective placement to eliminate silts or clays on the surface that
will erode and contaminate adjacent streams and reservoirs.
b. Dust Control. The contractor shall take all necessary measures to
minimize the creation of dust during their operations.
c. Spillage. Special measures shall be taken to prevent chemicals, fuels,
oils, greases, bituminous materials, waste washings, herbicides and
insecticides, and cement from contaminating soil and ground water or
from entering streams.
d. Disposal. Ground which has been contaminated by Contractor activities
shall be excavated, disposed of as directed by the COR, and replaced
with suitable fill material, compacted and finished with top soil all
at the expense of the Contractor.

Page 15 of 20

3.6 ROAD MAINTENANCE AND TRAFFIC CONTROL
The Contractor shall at all times coordinate the work under this contract
with the authorities having jurisdiction over the streets and shall be
responsible for obtaining approval by the local authorities. Traffic control
or street name sign posts adjacent to construction work sites shall be
protected from damage. If relocation or removal of such signs is necessary,
the Contractor shall coordinate with the local authorities. The Contractor
will repair any sign, pavement marking or support damaged by the
construction activity.
3.7 USE OF EXPLOSIVE MATERIALS
Use of explosive materials in the context of the work defined in this
contract is strictly prohibited.
3.8 PROJECT SIGNS
On commencement of work on this project, the Contractor shall furnish and
erect the following temporary signs in locations selected by the Contracting
Officer near the project site. The Contractor shall maintain the signs in
good condition throughout the project construction period and on completion
of the project shall remove the Safety Signfrom the premises:
a. Safety Sign. This sign shall conform to the requirements of Local
Standard Drawing Safety sign.
b. Project Sign. This sign shall conform to Standard Drawing Project
Sign.
The Government will provide templates of the required above signs at the
pre-construction meeting.
3.9 WARRANTY
During the warranty period, the contractor shall provide the names of at
least two authorized representatives with complete address and telephone
numbers. These representatives will be contacted in case of a warranty call,
and must be available for emergency calls 24 hrs/day, 7 days/week. Once a
warranty call is made, the contractor shall investigate and promptly perform
any required actions. Normal repairs shall be completed within 24-48 hrs
and emergency calls shall be responded to within 4 hours.
3.10 CONTRACTOR SAFETY PROGRAM
The Contractors Safety Program shall be managed in accordance with EM 385-
1-1, Safety and Health Requirements Manaual and applicable local laws and
regulations.
3.11 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM

Page 16 of 20

3.11.1 General Requirements
The contractor shall establish and maintain an effective quality control
(QC) system in compliance with the Contract Clause titled "Inspection of
Construction." QC consists of plans, procedures, and organization necessary
to produce an end product which complies with the contract requirements.
Cover all design and construction operations, both onsite and offsite, and
be keyed to the proposed design and construction sequence.
3.11.2 Personnel Requirements
The project superintendent/site superintendent will be held responsible for
the quality of work and is subject to removal by the Contracting Officer for
non-compliance with the quality requirements specified in the contract. In
this context the highest level manager responsible for the overall
construction activities at the site, including quality and production is the
project superintendent. The project superintendent must maintain a physical
presence at the site at all times and is responsible for all construction
and related activities at the site, except as otherwise acceptable to the
All Quality Control personnel shall be approved by the Contracting Officer
and are subject to removal at any time based on the sole discretion of the
Contracting Officer. Removal shall not be subject to appeal by the
contractor.
Individualized plans or processes for Quality Control may be required by the
Contracting Officers Representative to which the Contractor must comply
within the time specified by the Contracting Officers Representative.
3.11.3 Control
Contractor Quality Control is the means by which the Contractor ensures that
the construction, to include that of subcontractors and suppliers, complies
with the requirements of the contract. To achieve this, the contractor
shall perform regular control checks as follows:
a. Identification of Features of Work: At the project initiation
meeting, the critical features of work will be identified by the
Government and Contractor and documented in the meeting minutes
b. Preparatory Checks: Prior to commencing work on any defined feature
of work, the contractor shall submit a written plan describing their
general plan for accomplishing the work and procedure for verifying
that it complies with the contract. Any associated submittals must be
identified. Document construction tolerances and workmanship
standards. This plan shall identify safety hazards associated with the
work and the measures which will be taken to assure safety
requirements are met.
c. Initial Check: After completion of a representative sample of the
feature of work, the contractor shall check to ensure that it is in

Page 17 of 20

full compliance with contract requirements. This sample will
establish the level of workmanship. Documentation of this check shall
be provided in the CQC Documentation.
d. Daily Checks: Perform daily checks to assure control activities,
including control testing, are providing continued compliance with
contract requirements, until completion of the particular feature of
work. Record the checks in the CQC documentation. Conduct final checks
and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional features
of work which may be affected by the deficient work. Do not build upon
nor conceal non-conforming work. Perform specified or required tests
to verify that control measures are adequate to provide a product
which conforms to contract requirements.
e. Final Acceptance Inspection: The final acceptance inspection will be
formally scheduled by the Contracting Officers Representative upon
notification by the contractor that the work is or will be completed
by a specific date. A minimum of 45 calendar days advance notice must
be given to allow for coordination of Government representation.
Failure of the Contractor to have all contract work acceptably
complete for this inspection will be cause for the Contracting Officer
to bill the Contractor for the Government's additional inspection cost
in accordance with the contract clause titled "Inspection of
Construction".
3.11.4 Documentation
The government utilizes the Resident Managment System (RMS) computer
software system to monitor progress and document quality assurance
activities. The Government will make a stand-alone version of this
software, called Quality Control System (QCS) available to the contractor as
no additional charge. Training will be provided if so requested. The
Government encourages, but does not require, the contractor to utilize this
system to document their quality control activities and to generate progress
payments. When this system is not used, the contractor shall be responsible
for providing all required documents in an electronic format approved by the
Contracting Officer prior to making any payment. Should the contractor
utilize QCS, any hardware (including, but not limited to computers and
internet access) and associated costs with the use of the system (such as
internet or e-mail access) shall be the sole responsibility of the
contractor.
The contractor shall provide the following documentation of on-site and
quality control activities
a. A Weekly Quality Control Report identifying:
Quality Control activities, inspections, and tests, including
results and findings
Deficiencies identified but not yet corrected
Narrative of work accomplished and work scheduled for the following
two weeks

Page 18 of 20

Quantity and Number of labor hours (total) of personnel on-site
Discussion of safety inspections and checks performed
b. Photos shall be taken on a recurring basis and provided to the
Government at least monthly. Photos shall be of a minimum 1024x768
resolution, taken with a minimum 8.0 Megapixel camera, and shall not
be edited in any manner, to include cropping or manipulation of
appearance. Photos shall be in the JPG format with the camera set on
the maximum resolution. The camera shall also be able to place the
date the photo was taken on the image, and the EXIF information shall
include the date the photo was taken as well as the date the file was
modified.
3.12 PROJECT SCHEDULE
A Project Schedule as described below shall be prepared. The scheduling of
construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The approved
Project Schedule shall be in sufficient detail to measure the progress of
the work, to aid in evaluating time extensions, and to provide the basis of
all progress payments.
The schedule shall as a minimum show the beginning and end (calendar) dates
of all major construction features, i.e. building designs, start of onsite
work, construction of foundations, wall, slabs, roofing, interior & exterior
finishing of each structure, site work, installation of plumbing, electrical
systems (if any), mechanical systems (if any), completion of onsite work,
etc. A schedule prepared using computer software systems is required.
The schedule is to be revised when the contractors actual work lags behind
the schedule be more than 30 calendar days, or if there is a modification to
the contract changes the contract duration.
3.12.2 Basis for Payment
The schedule shall be used as the basis for determining contract earnings
during each update period and therefore the amount of each progress payment.
Lack of an approved schedule update or qualified scheduling personnel will
result in an inability of the Contracting Officer to evaluate contract
earned value for the purposes of payment. If the Contractor fails to submit
any schedule within the time prescribed, or if it is determined that the
contractor is not following the approved schedule, the Contracting Officer
may withhold approval of progress payments until the Contractor submits the
required schedule.
In the event schedule revisions are directed by the Contracting Officer and
those revisions have not been included in subsequent revisions or updates,
the Contracting Officer may hold retainage up to the maximum allowed by
contract, each payment period, until such revisions to the Project Schedule
have been made. Activity cost loading shall be reasonable, as determined by

Page 19 of 20

the Contracting Officer. The aggregate value of all activities coded to a
contract CLIN shall equal the value of the CLIN on the Schedule.
3.13 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
3.13.1 Transmittal Form
ENG Form 4025 shall be used for all transmittals. Properly complete this
form by filling out all the heading blank spaces and identifying each item
submitted. Exercise special care to ensure proper listing of the
specification paragraph and sheet number of the contract drawings pertinent
to the data submitted for each item.
Both the Designer of Record (for design-build projects) and the Contractor
Quality Control System Manager are to stamp and sign to certify that the
submittal meets contract requirements.
3.13.2 Scheduling
Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing and processing of submittals
with performance of work so that work will not be delayed by submittal
processing. Allow for potential resubmittal of requirements.
Schedule and submit concurrently submittals covering component items forming
a system or items that are interrelated. Include certifications to be
submitted with the pertinent drawings at the same time. No delay damages or
time extensions will be allowed for time lost in late submittals.
The contractor is solely liable for ensuring that submittals are made with
sufificent time to allow for Government review, ordering, and delivery or
materials to the project site without delaying the project. Each submittal
item must be linked to an activity in the progress schedule. A minimum of
30 days must be allowed for Government review of submittals, unless a
shorter time period is mutually agreed to and documented as part of the
initial project meeting.
3.13.3 Variations / Substitution Requests
Variations from contract requirements require Government approval pursuant
to contract Clause FAR 52.236-21 and will be considered where advantageous
to Government. All variations must be identified on a transmittal and
approved by the Government prior to incorporation into the work.
3.13.4 Disapproved Or Rejected Submittals
Contractor shall make corrections required by the Contracting Officer. If
the Contractor considers any correction or notation on the returned
submittals to constitute a change to the contract drawings or
specifications; notice as required under the clause entitled, "Changes" is
to be given to the Contracting Officer. Contractor is responsible for the
dimensions and design of connection details and construction of work.
Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government requiring

Page 20 of 20

rejection and removal of such work at the Contractor's expense.
If changes are necessary to submittals, the Contractor shall make such
revisions and submission of the submittals in accordance with the procedures
above. No item of work requiring a submittal change is to be accomplished
until the changed submittals are approved.
All resubmittals shall be provided within fifteen (15) days of the receipt
of the Government comments or the original returned submittal with
Government review comments. Resubmittals shall only address the item(s)
identified on the original submittal and shall not include new items these
must be provided on a separate transmittal.
3.13.5 Approved/Accepted Submittals
The Contracting Officer's approval or acceptance of submittals is not be
construed as a complete check, and indicates only that design, general
method of construction, materials, detailing and other information appear to
meet the Solicitation and Accepted Proposal. Approval or acceptance will not
relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for any error which may exist,
as the Contractor under the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) requirements of
this contract is responsible for complying with the contract documents.
Approval of a sample is only for the characteristics or use named in such
approval and is not be construed to change or modify any contract
requirements. Before submitting samples, the Contractor to assure that the
materials or equipment will be available in quantities required in the
project. No change or substitution will be permitted after a sample has been
approved.
3.13.6 Withholding Of Payment
No payment for materials incorporated in the work will be made if all
required approvals have not been obtained. No payment will be made for any
materials incorporated into the work for any conformance review submittals
or information only submittals found to contain errors or deviations from
the Solicitation or Accepted Proposal.
-- End of Section --
Page 1 of 15
SECTION 00 73 16.01

SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR PROJECTS IN ISRAEL
(02/10)

PART 1: GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 1 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE ( ADDI TI ONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 2 PAYMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 3 GOVERNMENT OF I SRAEL I MDEMNI FI CATI ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 4 UNEXPLODED ORDNANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 5 PROPERTY I NSURANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 6 I NI TI ATED WORK I NTERRUPTI ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. 7 CONTRACTOR S WORK FORCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. 7. 1 Non- I sr ael i Empl oyees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. 7. 2 Thi r d Count r y Nat i onal s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. 7. 3 Desi gn St af f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. 7. 4 Addi t i onal Requi r ement s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. 8 HOST COUNTRY LAWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. 8. 1 Compl i ance Wi t h I sr ael i Rul es and Cust oms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. 8. 2 Compl i ance Wi t h I sr ael i Const r uct i on Laws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 8. 3 Compl i ance Wi t h I sr ael i Saf et y Laws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 9 DELI VERY OF TECHNI CAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 10 CERTI FI CATES OF COMPLI ANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 11 WAR RI SK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 12 SPECI AL TAX AND DUTY REGULATI ONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1. 12. 1 Taxes I mposed by t he Gover nment of I sr ael . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1. 12. 2 Val ue Added Tax ( VAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1. 12. 3 Rei mbur sement of VAT f or Cont r act s Funded Under t he For ei gn Mi l i t ar y
Sal es ( FMS) Pr ogr am. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1. 12. 4 Thi r d Count r y Nat i onal Tax Pl an . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1. 12. 5 Taxat i on of U. S. Cont r act or s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1. 12. 6 I mpor t at i on, Use and Expor t at i on of Per sonal Pr oper t y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1. 12. 7 Per sonal Tax Exempt i ons f or U. S. Nat i onal s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
PART 2: PRODUCTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2. 1 LOCAL CONSTRUCTI ON MATERI AL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2. 2 NEWMATERI ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2. 3 MANUFACTURI NG STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2. 4 NEWAND ADVANCED PRODUCTS/ MATERI ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
PART 3: EXECUTI ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3. 1 WORK SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3. 2 BEZEK CORPORATI ON I NSPECTI ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3. 3 I NSPECTI ON OF ELECTRI CAL, COMMUNI CATI ONS, FI RE DETECTI ON AND
EXTI NGUI SHI NG I NSTALLATI ONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3. 3. 1 I nspect i on of el ect r i cal i nst al l at i ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3. 3. 2 I nspect i on of f i r e det ect i on and ext i ngui shi ng syst em. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3. 4 I NTERFACE WI TH OTHER WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

SECTI ON 00 73 16. 01 SPECI AL CONDI TI ONS FOR PROJ ECTS I N I SRAEL ( 02/ 10)
Page 2 of 15

PART 1: GENERAL
1. 1 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE ( ADDI TI ONAL)
Ref er ence i s made t o Cont r act Cl auses 52. 236- 21 I Speci f i cat i ons and
Dr awi ngs ( Al t I ) . I nconsi st enci es bet ween t he Pl ans/ Dr awi ngs and Speci al
Speci f i cat i ons shal l be r esol ved i n accor dance wi t h t hose cl auses.
Ot her i nconsi st enci es shal l be r esol ved i n t he f ol l owi ng or der :
1. Speci al Cont r act Requi r ement s
2. Cont r act Cl auses
3. Speci al Speci f i cat i ons
4. Dr awi ngs
5. Host Nat i on Techni cal Requi r ement s
6. Cont r act or Pr oposal and desi gn and any por t i ons of t he accept ed
pr oposal or desi gn whi ch bot h conf or mt o and exceed t he pr ovi si ons of
t he sol i ci t at i on ( al so r ef er r ed t o as Bet t er ment s)
7. Any desi gn pr oduct s i ncl udi ng, but not l i mi t ed t o, pl ans,
speci f i cat i ons, engi neer i ng st udi es and anal yses, shop dr awi ngs,
equi pment i nst al l at i on dr awi ngs, et c. These ar e del i ver abl es under
t he cont r act and ar e not par t of t he cont r act i t sel f . Desi gn pr oduct s
must conf or mwi t h al l pr ovi si ons of t he cont r act , i n t he or der of
pr ecedence her ei ng.
Amendment s shal l t ake pr ecedence over al l i t ems l i st ed above t o t he ext ent
not ed above and i n t he r ef er enced cl auses. For i nst ance an amendment t o a
Dr awi ng t akes pr ecedence over t he or i gi nal dr awi ng but not over t he Speci al
Speci f i cat i ons and amendment t o t he Cont r act Cl auses t akes pr ecedence over
t he or i gi nal Cont r act Cl auses, but not over t he Speci al Cont r act
Requi r ement s, et c.
Any r ef er ence i n t he cont r act document s t o Gener al Speci f i cat i ons shoul d
be i nt er pr et ed t o r ef er t o Host Nat i on Techni cal Requi r ement s ( HNTRs) .
1. 2 PAYMENT
1. 3 GOVERNMENT OF I SRAEL I MDEMNI FI CATI ON
The cont r act or wai ves any r i ght s i t may have t o br i ng l egal agai nst t he
Gover nment of I sr ael wi t h r espect t o any mat t er ar i si ng out of or r el at i ng
t o, act i vi t i es of t he Gover nment of I sr ael wi t h r espect t o t echni cal
r epor t s, desi gns, est i mat es, or si mi l ar document s pr epar ed by t he Gover nment
of I sr ael , i t s empl oyees or cont r act or s i n connect i on wi t h t hi s cont r act ,
r egar dl ess of t et her such l egal act i ons ar e char act er i zed as soundi ng i n
cont r act or t or t . The cont r act f ur t her agr ees t o i ndemni f y and save
har ml ess, t he Gover nment of I sr ael agai nst al l cl ai ms and sui t s of
what soever nat ur e by cont r act or s ar i si ng out of or r el at i ng t o act i vi t i es of
t he Gover nment of I sr ael wi t h r espect t o t echni cal r epor t s, desi gns,
est i mat es, or si mi l ar document s pr epar ed by t he Gover nment of I sr ael , i t s

Page 3 of 15
empl oyees or cont r act or s i n connect i on wi t h t hi s cont r act .
1. 4 UNEXPLODED ORDNANCE
The Gover nment of I sr ael ( GOI ) has i ndi cat ed t hat no unexpl oded or dnance
( UXO) , muni t i ons, or si mi l ar mat er i al exi st on t hi s si t e. I f any unexpl oded
or dnance, muni t i ons, or si mi l ar mat er i al i s di scover ed, t he cont r act or shal l
i mmedi at el y not i f y GOI and Cont r act i ng Of f i cer s Repr esent at i ve and cease
wor k pendi ng f ur t her di r ect i on f r omt he Gover nment .
1. 5 PROPERTY I NSURANCE
SPECIAL NOTE: This paragraph applies SOLELY to work which is performed
under this contract outside of a military installation owned or operated by
the Israel Ministry of Defense (MOD). Any work which is performed on a MOD
Installation, including those operated by the Israel Air Force (IAF), Israel
Defense Force (IDF/Army), or Israeli Navy, is exempt from the requirements
of this paragraph.
The Cont r act or i s r equi r ed t o pur chase and mai nt ai n pr oper t y i nsur ance
wr i t t en on a bui l der s r i sk, al l r i sk or equi val ent pol i cy f or m, i n t he
amount of t he awar ded cont r act amount pl us t he val ue of any modi f i cat i ons,
wi t hout opt i onal deduct i bl es. Such i nsur ance shal l be mai nt ai ned unt i l
f i nal payment under t he cont r act or unt i l accept ance of t he ent i r e wor k
under t he cont r act by t he Gover nment f or benef i ci al occupancy, whi chever i s
ear l i er .
The pol i cy shal l i ncl ude t he Gover nment of I sr ael ( GOI ) as a named i nsur ed
and shal l pr ovi de t hat t her e be no r i ght of subr ogat i on agai nst t he GOI and
no r i ght of subr ogat i on agai nst t he US Gover nment , except t o t he ext ent t hat
any r i ght may be pr ovi ded under t he t er ms of t he cont r act . Cover age under
t hi s pol i cy shal l i ncl ude t he i nt er est s of t he GOI , t he U. S. Gover nment and
subcont r act or s at any t i er . The pol i cy shal l cont ai n a pr ovi si on t hat i t
const i t ut es pr i mar y cover age and shal l not st i pul at e i n any way t hat t he
cover age i s i n excess of any ot her i nsur ance pol i cy hel d by t he GOI . The
pol i cy shal l not cont ai n, nor be subj ect t o, an under - i nsur ance pr ovi si on.
Cover age of t hi s pol i cy shal l ext end t o al l wor k under t he cont r act and
shal l i ncl ude, wi t hout l i mi t at i on, i nsur ance agai nst t he per i l s of f i r e
( wi t h ext ended cover age) and physi cal l oss or damage i ncl udi ng wi t hout
dupl i cat i on of cover age, t hef t , vandal i sm, mal i ci ous mi schi ef , col l apse,
ear t hquake, f l ood, unusual l y sever e weat her , expl osi on, f aul t y wor kmanshi p
or mat er i al s, f al se wor k, t est i ng and st ar t up, t empor ar y bui l di ngs,
const r uct i on equi pment used on t he pr oj ect , mat er i al s on si t e, but not yet
i ncor por at ed i nt o t he wor k, and debr i s r emoval i ncl udi ng demol i t i on
occasi oned by enf or cement of any appl i cabl e l egal r equi r ement s, and shal l
cover r easonabl e compensat i on f or ar chi t ect - engi neer s and cont r act or s
ser vi ces and expenses r equi r ed as a r esul t of an i nsur ed l oss.
The pol i cy shal l i ncl ude a pr ovi si on t hat t he i nsur ance can not be cancel ed
wi t hout pr i or appr oval of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .

Page 4 of 15
Wi t hi n 15 days af t er dat e of awar d of t hi s cont r act , t he cont r act or shal l
submi t t he i nsur ance pol i cy r equi r ed by t hi s par agr aph t o Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer . At t he sol e di scr et i on of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , t he Gover nment
may wi t hhol d i ssuance of not i ce t o pr oceed or i ssue a condi t i onal not i ce t o
pr oceed, unt i l appr oval of t he pol i cy and submi ssi on of a cer t i f i cat e of
i nsur ance.
The pol i cy r equi r ed under t hi s par agr aph shal l be i ssued ei t her by a company
l i censed t o do busi ness i n I sr ael , or by a company l i censed t o do busi ness
i n t he Uni t ed St at es. I n t he event t he Cont r act or el ect s t o pr ocur e t he
pol i cy f r oma f i r ml i censed t o do busi ness i n t he Uni t ed St at es, such
company need not be l i censed t o do busi ness i n I sr ael and i ssuance of t hi s
pol i cy wi l l not be const r ued as doi ng busi ness i n I sr ael .
I f t he Cont r act or det er mi nes t hat addi t i onal or compl ement ar y i nsur ance i s
appr opr i at e, or r equi r ed by host nat i on l aw, t he cont r act or wi l l obt ai n such
addi t i onal or compl i ment ar y i nsur ance. Any addi t i onal or compl i ment ar y
i nsur ance shal l be subj ect t o t he condi t i ons speci f i ed i n t hi s cl ause.
1. 6 I NI TI ATED WORK I NTERRUPTI ON
The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer shal l be enabl ed t o i nst r uct t he Cont r act or , wi t hout
any pr i or not i ce, t o t empor ar i l y i nt er r upt wor k i n t he base f ol l owi ng
i nst r uct i ons f r omt he Base Management . Wi t h t he i ssuance of such a not i ce,
t he Cont r act or shal l st op al l wor k and l eave t he base t oget her wi t h al l hi s
st af f . The t ot al cumul at ed number of days of expect ed wor k i nt er r upt i on i n
t hi s pr oj ect shal l be t went y ( 20) wor ki ng days. The Cont r act or shal l
i ncl ude consi der at i on f or t hese pot ent i al i nt er r upt i ons i n hi s pr oposal . No
addi t i onal compensat i on f or wor k i nt er r upt i ons wi l l be made unl ess mor e t han
t went y i nt er r upt i ons ar e necessar y.
1. 7 CONTRACTOR S WORK FORCE
1. 7. 1 Non- I sr ael i Empl oyees
The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer r et ai ns al l r i ght s t o r ef use or i nhi bi t empl oyment
of any non I sr ael i empl oyee or t he empl oyment of any gr oup of non I sr ael i
empl oyees. The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer r et ai ns al l r i ght s t o st op t he
Cont r act or s wor k i f he does not compl y wi t h t he addi t i onal secur i t y
measur es speci f i ed i n t he sol i ci t at i on.
1. 7. 2 Thi r d Count r y Nat i onal s
Cont r act or may ar r ange, t hr ough t he appr opr i at e Gover nment of I sr ael
of f i ces, t o br i ng i nt o I sr ael US nat i onal s and nat i onal s of t hi r d count r i es
havi ng di pl omat i c r el at i ons wi t h I sr ael f or pur poses of empl oyment i n
car r yi ng out t hi s cont r act wor k. I nf or mat i on concer ni ng t hi r d count r y
nat i onal s whi ch wi l l be r equi r ed i ncl udes t he f ol l owi ng: I D number , Passpor t
Number , Age, Pl ace of Bi r t h, Ci t i zenshi p, and Pi ct ur e - passpor t si ze.
Cont r act or s shal l be r esponsi bl e f or t i mel y and compl et e submi t t al of t he
necessar y i nf or mat i on and f or ms di r ect l y t o t he appr opr i at e GOI agency f or
t he r equi r ed cust oms cl ear ances, passpor t s, vi sas, l i censes, or per mi t s.

Page 5 of 15
The cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or t he sponsor shi p of i t s empl oyees and
t hei r dependent s and shal l pr ocess sai d per mi t s di r ect l y wi t h t he
appr opr i at e GOI agency. Of f er or s ar e advi sed t hat t he Gover nment of I sr ael
r eser ves t he r i ght t o l i mi t access t o desi gnat ed secur i t y ar eas and r ef use
ent r y i nt o I sr ael or empl oyment of speci f i ed i ndi vi dual s, or t o r equi r e
t hei r depar t ur e f r omI sr ael , i n accor dance wi t h I sr ael i l aw and pr act i ce.
The Gover nment does not have i nf l uence over t he TCN i ssue and does not
war r ant t he avai l abi l i t y of TCN l abor .
1. 7. 3 Desi gn St af f
I f t he cont r act or empl oys I sr ael i wor ker s or desi gner s, he shal l submi t t he
l i st of t he empl oyees f or appr oval appr oxi mat el y t hr ee weeks pr i or t o t he
t i me of empl oyment . The cont r act or shal l coor di nat e wi t h t he COR t o
det er mi ne t he f or mat of t he l i st .
The Cont r act or shal l submi t t he l i st of t he pr oj ect desi gner s t o t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer i n or der t o qual i f y t hemf or ent r ance t o t he base. The
l i st of desi gner s shal l be submi t t ed t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer f or appr oval
at l east t hr ee weeks pr i or t o t hei r ar r i val f or vi si t on si t e.
1. 7. 4 Addi t i onal Requi r ement s
The gover nment r eser ves t he r i ght t o al t er base access and secur i t y
r equi r ement s.
1. 8 HOST COUNTRY LAWS
1. 8. 1 Compl i ance Wi t h I sr ael i Rul es and Cust oms
The l aws of Host Count r y may pr ohi bi t access t o cer t ai n ar eas of t he count r y
whi ch ar e under mi l i t ar y cont r ol . The Cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or
advi si ng t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer ' s Repr esent at i ve of t he names of per sonnel ,
t ype, and amount s of equi pment , dat es and l engt h of t i me r equi r ed at t he
si t e, and pur pose of ent er i ng t he host count r y. Pr oper cl ear ances may be
obt ai ned f r omt he Host Gover nment . I t i s under st ood t hat ar eas t o whi ch
r i ght s of ent r y ar e pr ovi ded by t he Host Gover nment ar e t o be used onl y f or
wor k car r i ed out under t he cont r act and no dest r uct i on or damages shal l be
caused, except t hr ough nor mal usage, wi t hout concur r ence of t he Host
Gover nment .
The f ol l owi ng i t ems ar e t he sol e r esponsi bi l i t y of t he Cont r act or t o
i nvest i gat e, est i mat e as t o cost , and assume t he r i sk, as nor mal l y
encount er ed by Cont r act or s. The Cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or
det er mi ni ng t he ef f ect of t he f ol l owi ng on hi s own cost of per f or mance of
t he cont r act and f or i ncl udi ng suf f i ci ent amount i n t he cont r act pr i ce:
a. Of f i ci al l anguage and t ype of account s r equi r ed t o sat i sf y t he
of f i ci al s of t he Local Gover nment .
b. Ent r y and exi t vi sas, r esi dence per mi t s, and r esi dence l aws
appl i cabl e t o al i ens. Thi s i ncl udes any speci al r equi r ement s of t he

Page 6 of 15
Host Gover nment , i ncl udi ng t hose r equi r ed by l ocal Labor Of f i ces,
whi ch t he Cont r act or may have t o f ul f i l l bef or e an appl i cat i on f or a
r egul ar bl ock of vi sas wi l l be accept ed.
c. Passpor t s, heal t h and i mmuni zat i on cer t i f i cat es, and quar ant i ne
cl ear ance.
d. Compl i ance wi t h l ocal l abor and i nsur ance l aws, i ncl udi ng payment of
empl oyer ' s shar e of cont r i but i on, col l ect i ng bal ance f r omempl oyee
and payi ng i nt o i nsur ance f unds.
e. St r i kes, demonst r at i ons and wor k st oppage.
f . Col l ect i on t hr ough wi t hhol di ng and payment t o l ocal Gover nment , of
any Host Count r y i ncome t ax on empl oyees subj ect t o t ax.
g. Ar r angi ng t o per f or mwor k i n t he Host Count r y, t o i mpor t per sonnel ,
t o empl oy non- i ndi genous l abor , t o r ecei ve payment s and t o r emove
such f unds f r omt he count r y.
h. Oper at i ng under l ocal l aws, pr act i ces, cust oms and cont r ol s, and
wi t h l ocal uni ons, i n connect i on wi t h hi r i ng and f i r i ng, mandat or y
wage scal es, vacat i on pay, sever ance pay, over t i me, hol i day pay, 7t h
day of r est , l egal not i ce or pay i n l i eu t her eof f or di smi ssal of
empl oyees, sl owdown and cur t ai l ed schedul es dur i ng r el i gi ous
hol i days, and r at i o of l ocal l abor empl oyed i n compar i son t o ot her s.
i . Possi bi l i t y of cl ai ms i n l ocal bur eaus, l i t i gat i on i n l ocal cour t s,
or at t achment of l ocal bank account s.
j . Compl i ance wi t h wor kmen' s compensat i on l aws and cont r i but i ons i nt o
f unds. Pr ovi si ons of necessar y medi cal ser vi ce f or Cont r act or
empl oyees.
k. Speci al l i cense r equi r ed by t he l ocal Gover nment f or set t i ng up and
oper at i ng any manuf act ur i ng pl ant i n t he Host Count r y, e. g. concr et e
bat chi ng, pr ecast concr et e, concr et e bl ocks, et c.
l . Sal es wi t hi n t he host count r y of Cont r act or - owned mat er i al s, and
equi pment .
m. Speci al l i censes f or physi ci ans, mechani cs, t r adesmen, dr i ver s, et c.
n. I dent i f i cat i on and/ or r egi st r at i on wi t h l ocal pol i ce of i mpor t ed
per sonnel .
o. St amp t ax on document s, payment s and payr ol l s.
p. Base passes f or per manent st af f , day l abor er s, mot or vehi cl es, et c.
q. Compl i ance wi t h al l cust oms and i mpor t r ul es, r egul at i ons and
r est r i ct i ons, i ncl udi ng, but not l i mi t ed t o, l ocal pur chase
r equi r ement s.
Page 7 of 15

1. 8. 2 Compl i ance Wi t h I sr ael i Const r uct i on Laws
I n addi t i on t o t he r equi r ement s t o compl y wi t h Host Nat i on l aws as
pr escr i bed el sewher e i n t hi s cont r act , t he cont r act or ' s at t ent i on i s
di r ect ed t o compl y, wher e appl i cabl e, wi t h t he var i ous I sr ael i Laws
per t ai ni ng t o const r uct i on i ncl udi ng but not l i mi t ed t o: The Law of
Const r uct i on and Pl anni ng, The Law of Concr et e, The Law of El ect r i ci t y, and
t he Ant i qui t i es Act of 1978.
The Cont r act or i s r equi r ed t o compl y wi t h al l I sr ael i Ant i qui t i es Laws whi l e
per f or mi ng t he wor k of t hi s cont r act . The cont r act or shal l be awar e of al l
ar cheol ogi cal l aws and wor k accor di ngl y i ncl udi ng st oppi ng wor k i n t he
vi ci ni t y and r epor t i ng shoul d ar cheol ogi cal i t ems be uncover ed dur i ng t he
cour se of t hi s cont r act .
1. 8. 3 Compl i ance Wi t h I sr ael i Saf et y Laws
I n addi t i on t o t he r equi r ement s i dent i f i ed i n t he cont r act cl auses and
Speci f i cat i on Sect i on 01 35 26 Saf et y and Occupat i onal Heal t h Requi r ement s,
t he cont r act or shal l compl y wi t h al l I sr ael i saf et y l aws and r egul at i ons.
1. 9 DELI VERY OF TECHNI CAL DATA
Cont r act or s and subcont r act or s wi l l not pr ovi de any t echni cal dat a pr oduced
or ut i l i zed under t hi s cont r act t o t he GOI or any per son or ent i t y not a
ci t i zen of t he Uni t ed St at es of Amer i ca unt i l t he cont r act or s/ subcont r act or s
ar e f ur ni shed wi t h cl ear evi dence t hat such del i ver y of t he dat a i s ( 1)
appr oved by t he U. S. St at e Depar t ment pur suant t o t he I nt er nat i onal Tr af f i c
i n Ar ms Regul at i on, or ( 2) appr oval i s not r equi r ed.
1. 10 CERTI FI CATES OF COMPLI ANCE
Any cer t i f i cat es r equi r ed f or demonst r at i ng pr oof of compl i ance of mat er i al s
wi t h speci f i cat i on r equi r ement s shal l be execut ed i n si x copi es. Each
cer t i f i cat e shal l be si gned by an of f i ci al aut hor i zed t o cer t i f y i n behal f
of t he manuf act ur i ng company and shal l cont ai n t he name and addr ess of t he
Cont r act or , t he pr oj ect name and l ocat i on, and t he quant i t y and dat e or
dat es of shi pment or del i ver y t o whi ch t he cer t i f i cat es appl y. Copi es of
l abor at or y t est r epor t s submi t t ed wi t h cer t i f i cat es shal l cont ai n t he name
and addr ess of t he t est i ng l abor at or y and t he dat e or dat es of t he t est s t o
whi ch t he r epor t appl i es. Cer t i f i cat i on shal l not be const r ued as r el i evi ng
t he Cont r act or f r omf ur ni shi ng sat i sf act or y mat er i al , i f , af t er t est s ar e
per f or med on sel ect ed sampl es, t he mat er i al i s f ound not t o meet t he
speci f i c r equi r ement s.
1. 11 WAR RI SK
I n t he event of host i l i t i es whi ch cause damage t o t he si t e or t o wor k
per f or med under t hi s cont r act , and t o t he ext ent not cover ed by i nsur ance,
cost s f or r epai r s of t hat damage wi l l be bor ne by t he Gover nment . As used
i n t hi s r esponse, t he t er mhost i l i t i es i s l i mi t ed t o war , ar med conf l i ct ,
or i nsur r ect i on. The t er mhost i l i t i es does not i ncl ude st r i kes,
demonst r at i ons, wor k st oppages or ci vi l unr est , t hat t he Cont r act i ng

Page 8 of 15
Of f i cer , i n t hei r sol e di scr et i on, consi der s r easonabl y f or eseeabl e and not
r i si ng t o t he l evel of war , ar med conf l i ct or i nsur r ect i on. I f di r ect ed by
t he Gover nment , t he cont r act or wi l l pr oceed t o r epai r or r epl ace wor k
damaged by host i l i t i es and an equi t abl e adj ust ment f or cost s not cover ed by
i nsur ance wi l l be made under t he change pr ovi si ons of t hi s cont r act . Del ays
caused by host i l i t i es or ci vi l unr est not amount i ng t o host i l i t i es, wi l l be
t r eat ed as excusabl e del ays and may be t he basi s f or t i me ext ensi ons,
wi t hout i ncr ease i n pr i ce. Fai l ur e t o agr ee t o any adj ust ment cont empl at ed
under t hi s cl ause shal l be a di sput e subj ect t o t he di sput es pr ovi si on of
t hi s cont r act .
1. 12 SPECI AL TAX AND DUTY REGULATI ONS
1. 12. 1 Taxes I mposed by t he Gover nment of I sr ael
Cont r act or s and subcont r act or s wi l l be r equi r ed t o pay al l t axes, dut i es, or
ot her char ges l evi ed by t he Gover nment of I sr ael ( GOI ) i n accor dance wi t h
I sr ael i l aw and r egul at i ons. Cer t ai n expendi t ur es f or t axes, dut i es or
si mi l ar char ges wi l l be r ei mbur sabl e t o t he pr i me cont r act or as pr ovi ded i n
t hi s cl ause. Bi d pr i ces shal l not i ncl ude t he val ue of t axes f or whi ch t he
cont r act or wi l l be r ei mbur sed.
As used i n t hi s sect i on, di r ect t axes ar e per sonal i ncome and empl oyment
t axes f or t hi r d count r y nat i onal wor ker s i mpor t ed i nt o I sr ael excl usi vel y
f or wor k on t hi s cont r act . Di r ect t axes wi l l be r ei mbur sed based upon
act ual expenses i ncur r ed by t he cont r act or and subcont r act or s under
pr ocedur es set out i n t hi s sect i on.
Per sonal I ncome and Empl oyment Taxes f or Thi r d Count r y Nat i onal s:
a. For pr oposes of t hi s sect i on, Thi r d Count r y Nat i onal s ( TCNs) ar e
t hose per sons who ar e nat i onal s of count r i es ot her t han t he Uni t ed
St at es or I sr ael .
b. The t ax exempt i on f or TCN per sonal i ncome and empl oyment t axes on
ear ni ngs i s l i mi t ed t o t hose t hi r d count r y nat i onal s who ent er
I sr ael as empl oyees of t he cont r act or or subcont r act or s t o wor k
excl usi vel y on t hi s cont r act . As an i nt er i mmeasur e, f or a l i mi t ed
t i me onl y, t he GOI has agr eed t o ext end cover age of t hi s exempt i on
t o TCNs who di d not ent er I sr ael t o wor k on pr oj ect s under t hi s LOA.
See GOI l et t er at t ached as Appendi x.
c. At l east 15 days pr i or t o t he ar r i val of TCNs at t he j ob si t e, t he
Cont r act or wi l l pr ovi de t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi t h t he f ol l owi ng
i nf or mat i on f or each TCN empl oyee:
Ful l Name
Dat e of Bi r t h
Pl ace of Bi r t h
Ci t i zenshi p
Passpor t Number , dat e and pl ace of i ssuance
Vi sa I nf or mat i on
Cur r ent Resi dence

Page 9 of 15
The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi l l f or war d t hi s i nf or mat i on t o t he GOI and
t he GOI wi l l ver i f y el i gi bi l i t y f or t ax exempt i on. The Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer wi l l not i f y t he cont r act or upon ver i f i cat i ons by t he GOI
t hat t he submi t t ed empl oyees have qual i f i ed f or t ax exempt st at us.
d. The cont r act or and/ or subcont r act or s shal l not wi t hhol d per sonal
i ncome t axes f r omt he wages of qual i f yi ng TCN empl oyees. The
cont r act or and/ or subcont r act or s wi l l pay al l i ncome t axes r equi r ed
by I sr ael i l aw t o t he appr opr i at e agenci es/ j ur i sdi ct i ons f or
qual i f yi ng TCN empl oyees.
e. I ncome and empl oyment t axes pai d f or qual i f yi ng empl oyees of t he
cont r act or and subcont r act or s wi l l be i t emi zed on mont hl y cont r act or
i nvoi ces t o t he U. S. Gover nment . For each qual i f yi ng empl oyee,
i nvoi ces wi l l i ncl ude t he amount and t ype of t axes pai d, per i od f or
whi ch t axes wer e pai d, and empl oyee ear ni ngs f or t he per i od. The
cont r act or wi l l r equi r e al l subcont r act or s t o pr ovi de t hi s
i nf or mat i on t o t he cont r act or f or qual i f yi ng empl oyees of t he
subcont r act or s. I nvoi ces submi t t ed mor e t han 90 days af t er t he t axes
wer e pai d by t he cont r act or wi l l not be r ei mbur sed.
f . TCN per sonal i ncome and empl oyment t axes pai d wi l l be r ei mbur sed i n
U. S. dol l ar s t o cont r act or s as par t of t hei r r egul ar per i odi c
payment s, af t er appr oval of i nvoi ces by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
Rei mbur sement wi l l be based upon exchange r at es i n ef f ect on t he
dat e t he cont r act or pai d t he t axes. For t hi s pur pose, t he exchanger
r at e shal l be t he r at e i n use by t he U. S. Embassy i n Tel Avi v.
I ndi r ect t axes: As used i n t he cl ause, al l dut i es, char ges and f ees l evi ed
by t he GOI ot her t han t hose def i ned i n t hi s cl ause as ' di r ect t axes' wi l l be
consi der ed t o be ' i ndi r ect t axes' . Rei mbur sement of i ndi r ect t axes wi l l not
be done on act ual cost basi s. I ndi r ect t axes wi l l be r ei mbur sed t o t he
cont r act or as a per cent age of cont r act amount , as def i ned el sewher e i n t hi s
cont r act . The per cent age i dent i f i ed wi l l be pai d t o t he cont r act or i n U. S.
dol l ar s as a f ul l and compl et e r ei mbur sement f or i ndi r ect t axes pai d. The
per cent age of r ei mbur sement i s not subj ect t o adj ust ment and can not be t he
subj ect of a cl ai munder t he di sput es pr ovi si on of t hi s cont r act . Payment s
t o t he cont r act or f or i ndi r ect t axes wi l l be based upon cont r act ear ni ngs as
shown on appr oved i nvoi ces t o t he U. S. Gover nment f or pr ogr ess payment s.
1. 12. 2 Val ue Added Tax ( VAT)
The cont r act or , or t he cont r act or ' s l egal r epr esent at i ve i n I sr ael , wi l l be
r equi r ed t o r egi st er wi t h t he GOI VAT aut hor i t i es, i n accor dance wi t h GOI
l aw and r egul at i on.
For I sr ael i VAT pai d by t he cont r act or t o subcont r act or s, suppl i er s, or
ot her s, t he cont r act or shal l seek r ei mbur sement di r ect l y f r omt he VAT
aut hor i t i es. For pr oposes of t hi s cl ause, t hi s i s consi der ed t o be t he i nput
t ax.
For ever y i nvoi ce t he cont r act or submi t s t o t he U. S. Gover nment , t he
cont r act or shoul d add a separ at e l i ne r ef l ect i ng I sr ael i VAT at t he

Page 10 of 15
appr opr i at e r at e. The U. S. Gover nment wi l l not pay t he amount of t he VAT
l i ne.
Except as not ed i n t he f ol l owi ng par agr aph, t he cont r act or wi l l be
r esponsi bl e f or coor di nat i ng wi t h t he appr opr i at e Gover nment of I sr ael
aut hor i t i es t o det er mi ne t he appr opr i at e pr ocedur es f or r ei mbur sement of
VAT.
For pr i ci ng pr oposes, t he cont r act or shoul d not i ncl ude VAT i n t he cont r act
pr i ces.
1. 12. 3 Rei mbur sement of VAT f or Cont r act s Funded Under t he For ei gn Mi l i t ar y
Sal es ( FMS) Pr ogr am
Rei mbur sement of VAT ot her t han i nput t ax wi l l occur i n t he speci f i ed way
bel ow:
The cont r act or i s r equi r ed t o pay VAT t o t he GOI VAT aut hor i t i es at t he
nor mal r at e. I n t hi s event , t he cont r act or wi l l submi t t o t he MOD an i nvoi ce
i n Shekel s f or t he VAT. The i nvoi ce t o t he MOD shoul d r ef l ect t he VAT on t he
amount of t he appr oved U. S. Gover nment i nvoi ce. A copy of t he cont r act or ' s
appr oved i nvoi ce t o t he U. S. Gover nment shoul d be at t ached t o t he i nvoi ce
t o MOD.
The cont r act or wi l l be pai d by t he GOI MOD f or VAT i n I sr ael i Shekel s, based
upon i t s i nvoi ce t o MOD. The cont r act or wi l l t hen pay t he VAT t o t he VAT
aut hor i t i es.
The det ai l s of t he pr ocess f or r ei mbur sement wi l l be est abl i shed bet ween t he
cont r act or and t he Mi ni st r y of Def ense pr i or t o t he st ar t of const r uct i on.
1. 12. 4 Thi r d Count r y Nat i onal Tax Pl an
The pr oposal submi t t ed under t hi s sol i ci t at i on shal l i ncl ude a Thi r d Count r y
Nat i onal ( TCN) Tax Pl an whi ch shal l i ncl ude: ( 1) an est i mat e of t he amount
of TCN per sonal i ncome and empl oyment t axes expect ed t o be i ncur r ed i n
per f or mance of t he cont r act ; and, ( 2) a pr oj ect ed expendi t ur e schedul e
showi ng when t he cont r act or expect s t o i ncur t hese cost s over t he dur at i on
of t he cont r act . Submi ssi on of t he pl an and accept ance of t he cont r act or ' s
pr oposal by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi l l not const i t ut e agr eement t o mi ni mum
l evel of r ei mbur sement nor wi l l i t be a l i mi t at i on on r ei mbur sement t o t he
cont r act or . The pl an must addr ess subcont r act or s as wel l as t he pr i me
cont r act or .
The TCN Tax Pl an submi t t ed as par t of t he cont r act or ' s pr oposal i s made a
par t of t hi s cont r act . I n t he event of si gni f i cant changes i n expendi t ur e
l evel s or t i mi ng of TCN wor ker s dur i ng per f or mance of t he cont r act , an
updat ed pl an, al ong wi t h j ust i f i cat i on f or any changes, must be r esubmi t t ed
by t he cont r act or f or Cont r act i ng Of f i cer appr oval . The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer
wi l l not unr easonabl y wi t hhol d appr oval f or changes i n t he pl an.
The r equi r ement f or submi ssi on of a TCN Tax Pl an does not const i t ut e a
r equi r ement t o use TCN l abor on t he pr oj ect , not i s i t a war r ant y of t he

Page 11 of 15
avai l abi l i t y of TCN l abor . Ensur i ng adequat e manpower t o per f or mt he wor k
and deci si on concer ni ng t he makeup of t he l abor f or ce ar e t he r esponsi bi l i t y
of t he cont r act or , act i ng wi t hi n t he l aws and r egul at i ons of t he St at e of
I sr ael .
1. 12. 5 Taxat i on of U. S. Cont r act or s
Uni t ed St at es cont r act or s shal l not be subj ect t o t axat i on by I sr ael on
t hei r i ncome r ecei ved f r omt he Uni t ed St at es Gover nment , on any ot her i ncome
f r omsour ces out si de I sr ael , or on any movabl e pr oper t y whi ch i s pr esent i n
I sr ael due t o t hei r pr esence t her e f or t he pur pose of t hi s cont r act . I n no
i nst ance shal l t he exempt i ons pr ovi ded by t hi s par agr aph appl y t o
cont r act or s who ar e nat i onal s of or or di nar i l y r esi dent i n I sr ael , or t o
bodi es whi ch ar e i ncor por at ed i n I sr ael or cont r ol l ed by any of t he
f or egoi ng.
1. 12. 6 I mpor t at i on, Use and Expor t at i on of Per sonal Pr oper t y
( a) Uni t ed St at es nat i onal s not or di nar i l y r esi dent i n I sr ael , nor nat i onal s
of I sr ael , empl oyed by t he cont r act or may i mpor t i nt o I sr ael , wi t hi n si x
mont hs of t hei r f i r st ar r i val , r easonabl e quant i t i es of per sonal ef f ect s,
househol d goods, up t o t wo aut omobi l es per f ami l y uni t , and ot her pr oper t y
i nt ended sol el y f or t hei r per sonal use, f r ee of al l dut i es, t axes and ot her
char ges. Thi s per i od may be ext ended upon coor di nat i on wi t h t he GOI , at t he
GOI s di scr et i on.
( b) Pr oper t y i mpor t ed under par agr aph ( a) of t hi s cl ause shal l nor mal l y be
expor t ed or t r ansf er r ed t o ot her Uni t ed St at es per sonnel . Tr ansf er t o
per sons or ent i t i es i n I sr ael not ent i t l ed t o i mpor t pr i vi l eges may onl y be
made under t er ms and condi t i ons, i ncl udi ng payment of appl i cabl e dut i es or
t axes, i mposed by t he aut hor i t i es of I sr ael . Expor t at i on of pr oper t y
r ef er r ed t o i n par agr aph ( a) , or pr oper t y acqui r ed i n I sr ael by Uni t ed
St at es nat i onal s not or di nar i l y r esi dent i n I sr ael , nor nat i onal s of I sr ael ,
empl oyed by t he cont r act or , f or t hei r per sonal use, shal l be f r ee of al l
dut i es, t axes and ot her char ges of I sr ael .
1. 12. 7 Per sonal Tax Exempt i ons f or U. S. Nat i onal s
( a) Per i ods dur i ng whi ch t he Uni t ed St at es nat i onal s not or di nar i l y r esi dent
i n I sr ael , nor nat i onal s of I sr ael , and empl oyed by t he cont r act or , ar e i n
I sr ael f or t he pur poses of t hi s cont r act shal l not be consi der ed as per i ods
of l egal r esi dence or domi ci l e i n I sr ael f or t he pur pose of t axat i on under
t he l aw or I sr ael .
( b) The above descr i bed cont r act or per sonnel shal l not be l i abl e t o pay any
t ax t o I sr ael on i ncome r ecei ved f r omt he Uni t ed St at es Gover nment , Uni t ed
St at es cont r act or s or t he Amer i can Red Cr oss and Uni t ed Ser vi ces
Or gani zat i ons, as a r esul t of t hei r ser vi ce i n I sr ael i n connect i on wi t h
t hi s cont r act , nor on i ncome der i ved f r omsour ces out si de of I sr ael .
( c) The above descr i bed cont r act or per sonnel shal l not be l i abl e t o pay any
t ax t o I sr ael on t he owner shi p, possessi on, use, t r ansf er t o ot her Uni t ed

Page 12 of 15
St at es per sonnel , or t r ansf er by deat h, of t hei r movabl e pr oper t y i mpor t ed
i nt o I sr ael or acqui r ed t her e f or t hei r per sonal use.
( d) Tax exempt i ons pr ovi ded under t hi s cl ause shal l not appl y i n r el at i on t o
i ncome der i ved f r oman i nvest ment or commer ci al ent er pr i se i n I sr ael .

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2. 1 LOCAL CONSTRUCTI ON MATERI AL
Bul k mat er i al s and ot her mat er i al s exempt i n accor dance wi t h t he Bi d
Schedul e pr ovi si on ent i t l ed " Di r ect i on on I sr ael i Cont ent " r equi r ed f or t he
f aci l i t y const r uct i on and si t e wor k may be of I sr ael i or i gi n. Al l ot her
const r uct i on mat er i al s must be manuf act ur ed out si de of I sr ael pr ovi ded such
mat er i al s sat i sf y cont r act r equi r ement s. I f non- I sr ael i mat er i al s sat i sf yi ng
cont r act r equi r ement s ar e not avai l abl e, t he cont r act or wi l l submi t a
cer t i f i cat i on t o t hat ef f ect al ong wi t h t he pr oduct submi t t al f or t he
I sr ael i mat er i al s pr i or t o pur chase. The pur chase must be appr oved i n
advance, i n wr i t i ng, by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer ( not ACO or COR) . I n or der
t o i nsur e cont i nued suppor t f or mechani cal and el ect r i cal equi pment af t er
war r ant y expi r at i on, mechani cal and el ect r i cal equi pment shoul d be obt ai ned
f r omcompani es wi t h qual i f i ed ser vi ce r epr esent at i ves l ocat ed i n I sr ael .
Ref er t o t he not es on t he Of f Shor e Pr ocur ement wor ksheet and t he Bi d
Schedul e Di r ect i on on I sr ael i Cont ent f or f ur t her det ai l s.
2. 2 NEWMATERI ALS
Al l mat er i al s, pr oduct s and f i ni shes t hat ar e used i n t he st r uct ur es shal l
be new, hi gh qual i t y, bear seal s of st andar d appr oval or compl i ance, wel l
sui t ed f or t hei r pr oposed use, per f ect l y saf e f or use f r omal l per spect i ves
and wi l l be accor di ng t o t he r el evant speci f i cat i on i n t hi s cont r act .
Al l mat er i al s/ pr oduct s used i n t he st r uct ur es shal l be of f - t he- shel f
mat er i al s/ pr oduct s so t hat addi t i onal si mi l ar i t ems can be pr ocur ed at any
t i me and f or at l east t en year s af t er compl et i on of t he per f or mance.
2. 3 MANUFACTURI NG STANDARDS
Wi t hout det r act i ng f r omwhat i s wr i t t en above, t he pr oduct s and appl i ances
shal l be i n accor dance wi t h accept ed st andar ds i n t he Uni t ed St at es. Wi t h
al l pr oduct s or equi pment used i n t hi s wor k, t her e must be a r epr esent at i ve
i n I sr ael t o pr ovi de ser vi ce as r equi r ed by t hi s cont r act .
2. 4 NEWAND ADVANCED PRODUCTS/ MATERI ALS
The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer al l ows i nt egr at i on of new and advanced pr oduct s and
mat er i al s i n t hi s cont r act but l i mi t s t hei r use i n accor dance wi t h var i ous
par amet er s.
Accept ance of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer f or use of new and advance pr oduct s
and mat er i al s i n t hi s pr oj ect ar e i n accor dance wi t h t he f ol l owi ng
consi der at i ons:
Page 13 of 15

a. Qual i t y and sui t abi l i t y t o t he r equi r ed condi t i ons of use
b. Meet i ng appl i cabl e I sr ael i st andar ds, and i n t he absence of such
st andar ds, speci f i cat i ons or f or ei gn st andar ds as det ai l ed above.
c. The t i me per i od of act ual use has been pr oven i n I sr ael and/ or i n
si mi l ar cl i mat i c ar eas i n t he Uni t ed St at es and Eur ope.
d. The number and scope of pr oj ect s i n whi ch act ual exper i ence was
obt ai ned as above.
I n t he document s of t he cont r act t her e ar e r equi r ement s f or pr esent at i on of
sampl es whi ch ar e t o be pr esent ed dur i ng t he cour se of appr oval of t he
desi gn document s as det ai l ed above.

PART 3: EXECUTI ON
3. 1 WORK SCHEDULE
Not wi t hst andi ng any ot her l anguage i n t he cont r act document s, dut y hour s and
wor kweek wi l l be i n accor dance wi t h I sr ael i l aw and cust om. Wor k wi l l be
al l owed onl y dur i ng dayt i me hour s ( sunr i se t o sunset ) except f or Sabbat h and
hol i days, and wi t h t he condi t i on t hat t he wor k shal l not i nt er f er e wi t h
act i vi t i es of t he base or i nst al l at i on.
I f t he cont r act or pr oposes t o wor k mor e t han a st andar d 8- hour wor kday,
pr i or appr oval of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer i s r equi r ed. Request f or appr oval
shal l be submi t t ed at l east 48 hour s i n advance.
Wor k shal l not be per f or med on 25 December and 4 J ul y.
3. 2 BEZEK CORPORATI ON I NSPECTI ON
Each phase of al l communi cat i ons wor k cont r ol l ed by t he monopol y Bezek shal l
be i nspect ed by t hi s company t o ensur e compl i ance wi t h t he t echni cal
speci f i cat i ons. The Cont r act or shal l coor di nat e i n advance wi t h Bezek
Cor por at i on t he i nvi t at i on of i nspect i on on Bezek s behal f . The cost s f or
t hi s i nspect i on shal l be at t he Cont r act or s expense. Any def i ci enci es
f ound by t he Bezek i nspect or shal l be i dent i f i ed t o t he COR who wi l l i n t ur n
not i f y t he cont r act or . The Bezek i nspect or may gi ve no di r ect i on t o t he
Cont r act or .
The Cont r act or shal l i nf or mBezek Cor por at i on, Cent er Di st r i ct of f i ce on t he
dat e of st ar t i ng t he wor k appr oxi mat el y t wo weeks pr i or t o t he begi nni ng of
t he wor k. The Cont r act or shal l i nf or mt he COR at t he same t i me t hat Bezek
Cor por at i on has been not i f i ed.
3. 3 I NSPECTI ON OF ELECTRI CAL, COMMUNI CATI ONS, FI RE DETECTI ON AND
EXTI NGUI SHI NG I NSTALLATI ONS
3. 3. 1 I nspect i on of el ect r i cal i nst al l at i ons
I nspect i on of el ect r i cal i nst al l at i ons shal l be done by an aut hor i zed
" i nspect i on el ect r i ci an" . The i nspect or ' s cost wi l l be pai d by t he
cont r act or . The cont r act or shal l pr ovi de t he means and t ool s r equi r ed f or

Page 14 of 15
t he check. I nspect i on f or al l wor k wi l l be i n accor dance wi t h t he det ai l s of
measur ement of t he HNTR f or el ect r i cal i nst al l at i ons.
The el ect r i cal i nst al l at i ons wi l l be accept ed onl y af t er t he i nspect or
appr oves t hemand aut hor i zed t hei r connect i on t o an el ect r i c sour ce.
3. 3. 2 I nspect i on of f i r e det ect i on and ext i ngui shi ng syst em
I nspect i on of t he f i r e det ect i on and ext i ngui shi ng syst emshal l be done by
t he I sr ael St andar ds I nst i t ut e at t he cont r act or ' s cost and r esponsi bi l i t y
i n t wo st ages:
a. I nspect i on of dr awi ngs, af t er appr oval of saf et y consul t ant , unl ess
t he saf et y consul t ant i s aut hor i zed by t he St andar ds I nst i t ut e t o
appr ove t he f i r e det ect i on and ext i ngui shi ng syst em, i n whi ch case hi s
appr oval i s f i nal .
b. I nspect i on and appr oval by t he I sr ael St andar ds I nst i t ut e.
3. 4 I NTERFACE WI TH OTHER WORK
I n addi t i on t o t he pr ovi si ons of 52. 236- 8 OTHER CONTRACTS t he f ol l owi ng
shal l be adher ed t o:
a. The Cont r act or shal l make a speci al ef f or t t o f ul l y cooper at e wi t h
ot her Cont r act or s and base empl oyees engaged i n ot her wor k on and
adj acent t o t he wor k t o be per f or med under t hi s cont r act . The
Cont r act or shal l coor di nat e t he wor k her ei n and t he concur r ent use of
haul r oads and ut i l i t i es shal l become a j oi nt r esponsi bi l i t y. Any
damage r esul t i ng f r omt he use of f aci l i t i es of ot her Cont r act or s shal l
be i mmedi at el y r epai r ed. Sever al concur r ent const r uct i on pr oj ect s
shoul d be expect ed over t he dur at i on of t hi s cont r act .
b. The Cont r act or shal l meet weekl y wi t h t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer al ong
wi t h any ot her Cont r act or s wor ki ng i n t he ar ea i f any t o di scuss
and coor di nat e wor k act i vi t i es. The Cont r act or shal l pr epar e and
pr esent at t he weekl y meet i ng a t wo ( 2) week wi ndow of hi s NAS of
maj or act i vi t i es t o be per f or med wi t hi n t he f i r st week i n det ai l and
t he r emai ni ng weeks i n gener al .
c. The Cont r act or shal l car ef ul l y f i t hi s own wor k t o any ongoi ng or
addi t i onal wor k per f or med by ot her Cont r act or s or Base per sonnel . The
Cont r act or shal l t ake i nt o consi der at i on t hat i n t he l at t er per i od of
const r uct i on i n each bui l di ng, var i ous ot her cont r act or s wi l l be
wor ki ng i nsi de t he bui l di ng i n par al l el wi t h hi m, such as
Communi cat i ons Equi pment cont r act or s, Mobi l e Fur ni t ur e cont r act or s,
et c. The Cont r act or shal l under t ake t o cooper at e and coor di nat e t he
wor k wi t h t he above ot her cont r act or s and enabl e t hemt o per f or mt hei r
wor k wi t hout any obst r uct i on.
d. Ar ea Use Pl an. The Cont r act or shal l submi t an Ar ea Use Pl an
desi gnat i ng pr oposed i nt ended use of al l ar eas at t he pr oj ect si t es
and st agi ng ar eas. Thi s pl an shal l i ncl ude, but not be l i mi t ed t o, t he
f ol l owi ng: bor r ow r emoval pl an and access r oads t o t he si t es; dr awi ngs
showi ng pr oposed r oad det our s; dr awi ngs showi ng t empor ar y t el ephone
and el ect r i cal i nst al l at i ons; t empor ar y wat er and sewage di sposal
i nst al l at i ons; const r uct i on pl ant and bui l di ng i nst al l at i ons, i f any;
concr et e t r uck washout ar ea; mat er i al st or age ar ea; and of f i ce or
admi ni st r at i on f aci l i t i es. Const r uct i on of any f enci ng wi l l be t he

Page 15 of 15
r esponsi bi l i t y of t he Cont r act or and per f or med at no addi t i onal cost
t o t he Gover nment . The Cont r act or st agi ng ar ea shal l be t he l ocat i on
of al l of f i ces and st or age t r ai l er s, par ki ng ar ea f or company and
pr i vat el y owned vehi cl es; st or age of mat er i al s and equi pment ; st or age
and di sbur sement of f uel , oi l and gas; mai nt enance of equi pment ; and
f abr i cat i on of mat er i al s.
e. Addi t i onal r equi r ement s/ condi t i ons ar e r ef er enced i n ot her ar eas of
t he cont r act pl ans and speci f i cat i ons.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
PROJECT SCHEDULE
05/08
PART 1: GENERAL ..............................................................................................................................................2
1. 1 REFERENCES............................................................................................................................................2
1. 2 SUBMI TTALS............................................................................................................................................2
1. 3 QUALI FI CATI ONS...................................................................................................................................2
1. 4 DESI GN- BUI LD REQUI REMENTS........................................................................................................2
1. 5 PAYMENT...................................................................................................................................................3
1. 6 UPDATES VERSUS CHANGES................................................................................................................3
PART 2: PRODUCTS............................................................................................................................................3
PART 3: EXECUTI ON..........................................................................................................................................3
3. 1 GENERAL REQUI REMENTS....................................................................................................................3
3. 1. 1 Appr oved Pr oj ect Schedul e ........................................................................................................3
3. 1. 2 Schedul e St at us Repor t s .............................................................................................................3
3. 1. 3 Def aul t Ter ms .....................................................................................................................................4
3. 2 BASI S FOR PAYMENT AND COST LOADI NG...................................................................................4
3. 3 SCHEDULI NG SOFTWARE REQUI REMENTS........................................................................................4
3. 3. 1 Li cense f or t he Gover nment ......................................................................................................4
3. 3. 2 Compat i bi l i t y wi t h SDEF .............................................................................................................4
3. 4 PROJ ECT SCHEDULE DETAI LED REQUI REMENTS .........................................................................5
3. 4. 1 Cr i t i cal Pat h Met hod....................................................................................................................5
3. 4. 2 Level of Det ai l Requi r ed...........................................................................................................5
3. 4. 3 Schedul ed Pr oj ect Compl et i on and Act i vi t y Cal endar s ..........................................8
3. 4. 4 Ear l y Pr oj ect Compl et i on...........................................................................................................8
3. 4. 5 I nt er i mCompl et i on Dat es...........................................................................................................9
3. 4. 6 Def aul t Pr ogr ess Dat a Di sal l owed........................................................................................9
3. 4. 7 Out - of - Sequence Pr ogr ess...........................................................................................................9
3. 4. 8 Negat i ve Lags and St ar t t o Fi ni sh Rel at i onshi ps ..................................................10
3. 4. 9 Cal cul at i on Mode............................................................................................................................10
3. 4. 10 Mi l est ones .........................................................................................................................................10
3. 5 PROJ ECT SCHEDULE SUBMI SSI ONS...............................................................................................10
3. 5. 1 Pr el i mi nar y Pr oj ect Schedul e Submi ssi on.....................................................................10
3. 5. 2 I ni t i al Pr oj ect Schedul e Submi ssi on...............................................................................10
3. 5. 3 Schedul e Updat es............................................................................................................................11
3. 5. 4 Per i odi c Schedul e Changes ......................................................................................................11
3. 5. 5 St andar d Act i vi t y Codi ng Di ct i onar y...............................................................................11
3. 6 SUBMI SSI ON REQUI REMENTS...........................................................................................................12
3. 6. 1 El ect r oni c Dat a..............................................................................................................................12
3. 6. 2 Nar r at i ve Repor t ............................................................................................................................12
3. 6. 3 Appr oved Changes Ver i f i cat i on.............................................................................................12
3. 6. 4 Net wor k Di agr am..............................................................................................................................12
3. 7 PERI ODI C MEETI NGS .........................................................................................................................13
3. 7. 1 Updat e Submi ssi on Fol l owi ng Pr ogr ess Meet i ng.........................................................14
3. 7. 2 St at us of Act i vi t i es ..................................................................................................................14
3. 8 REQUESTS FOR TI ME EXTENSI ONS...............................................................................................15
3. 8. 1 J ust i f i cat i on of Del ay..............................................................................................................15
3. 8. 2 Submi ssi on Requi r ement s ...........................................................................................................15
3. 8. 3 Addi t i onal Submi ssi on Requi r ement s .................................................................................15
3. 9 DI RECTED CHANGES............................................................................................................................15
3. 10 OWNERSHI P OF FLOAT.......................................................................................................................16
3. 11 TRANSFER OF SCHEDULE DATA I NTO RMS/ QCS .......................................................................16
Page 1 of 16
SECTI ON 01 32 01. 00 10 PROJ ECT SCHEDULE ( 05/ 08)

PART 1: GENERAL
1. 1 REFERENCES
The publ i cat i ons l i st ed bel ow f or ma par t of t hi s speci f i cat i on t o t he
ext ent r ef er enced. The publ i cat i ons ar e r ef er r ed t o wi t hi n t he t ext by t he
basi c desi gnat i on onl y.
U. S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGI NEERS ( USACE)
ECB 2005- 10 ( 2005) Schedul i ng Requi r ement s f or Test i ng
of Mechani cal Syst ems i n Const r uct i on
ER 1- 1- 11 ( 1995) Pr ogr ess, Schedul es, and Net wor k
Anal ysi s Syst ems
1. 2 SUBMI TTALS
Gover nment appr oval i s r equi r ed f or submi t t al s wi t h a " G" desi gnat i on;
submi t t al s not havi ng a " G" desi gnat i on ar e f or i nf or mat i on onl y. When used,
a desi gnat i on f ol l owi ng t he " G" desi gnat i on i dent i f i es t he of f i ce t hat wi l l
r evi ew t he submi t t al f or t he Gover nment . The f ol l owi ng shal l be submi t t ed i n
accor dance wi t h Sect i on 01 33 00 SUBMI TTAL PROCEDURES:
SD- 01 Pr econst r uct i on Submi t t al s
Pr oj ect Schedul e ( G)
Qual i f i cat i ons of Schedul er ( G)
SD- 07 Cer t i f i cat es
Mont hl y Net wor k Anal ysi s Updat es and Nar r at i ve ( G)
SD- 11 Cl oseout Submi t t al s
As- Bui l t Schedul e ( G)
1. 3 QUALI FI CATI ONS
Desi gnat e an aut hor i zed r epr esent at i ve t o be r esponsi bl e f or t he pr epar at i on
of t he schedul e and al l r equi r ed updat i ng ( act i vi t y st at us) and pr epar at i on
of r epor t s. The aut hor i zed r epr esent at i ve shal l be exper i enced i n
schedul i ng and have pr evi ousl y devel oped, cr eat ed, and mai nt ai ned at l east 2
( t wo) el ect r oni c schedul es f or pr oj ect s si mi l ar i n nat ur e and compl exi t y t o
t hi s pr oj ect and shal l be exper i enced i n t he use of t he schedul i ng sof t war e
t hat meet s t he r equi r ement s of t hi s speci f i cat i on.
Thi s posi t i on i s a per manent posi t i on and shal l be f i l l ed f r omt he t i me of
Not i ce t o Pr oceed unt i l compl et i on. The r epr esent at i ve may have ot her
dut i es onl y i f appr oved i n advance by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
1. 4 DESI GN- BUI LD REQUI REMENTS
I f t he scope of wor k of t hi s cont r act cal l s f or t he cont r act or t o per f or m
desi gn, al l r ef er ences her ei n r ef er r i ng t o act i vi t i es or Const r uct i on
shal l appl y t o al l desi gn and const r uct i on act i vi t i es, and al l r ef er ences t o
subcont r act or s shal l be r ead as t o i ncl ude desi gner s.
Page 2 of 16

I f no desi gn i s cal l ed f or as par t of t hi s cont r act , al l r ef er ences t o
desi gn or desi gner shal l be i gnor ed.
1. 5 PAYMENT
1. 6 UPDATES VERSUS CHANGES
As def i ned i n t hi s speci f i cat i on sect i on, updat es t o t he pr oj ect schedul e
r ef er s t o i nf or mat i on associ at ed wi t h an act i vi t y t hat i s changed t o r ef l ect
act ual condi t i ons, and i s pr i mar i l y l i mi t ed t o t he ent r y of act ual st ar t and
f i ni sh dat es or changes i n t he schedul ed st ar t and f i ni sh dat es of an
act i vi t y based on t he act ual dur at i ons of dependent act i vi t i es.
Changes or r evi si ons t o t he pr oj ect schedul e r ef er s t o al l changes i n
act i vi t y l ogi c, di vi si on or j oi ni ng of act i vi t i es, changes i n schedul ed
dur at i on or amount s, and any ot her r evi si ons whi ch al t er t he pl anned
execut i on of t he wor ks. No changes shal l be made t o t he pr oj ect schedul e
wi t hout ei t her t he expr ess wr i t t en di r ect i on of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , or
t hei r pr i or appr oval . Al l changes must be pr ovi ded vi a a f or mal submi t t al
and shown on t he submi t t al r egi st er . Any changes not speci f i cal l y
aut hor i zed by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer may r esul t i n di sappr oval of t he
ent i r e schedul e and t he r ej ect i on of any r equest s f or par t i al payment .

PART 2: PRODUCTS
( Not Appl i cabl e)

PART 3: EXECUTI ON
3. 1 GENERAL REQUI REMENTS
Pr epar e f or appr oval a Pr oj ect Schedul e, as speci f i ed her ei n, pur suant t o
t he Cont r act Cl ause, SCHEDULE FOR CONSTRUCTI ON CONTRACTS. Show i n t he
schedul e t he sequence i n whi ch t he Cont r act or pr oposes t o per f or mt he wor k
and dat es on whi ch t he Cont r act or cont empl at es st ar t i ng and compl et i ng al l
schedul e act i vi t i es. The schedul i ng of t he ent i r e pr oj ect i s r equi r ed.
Schedul i ng i s t he r esponsi bi l i t y of t he Cont r act or . Cont r act or management
per sonnel shal l act i vel y par t i ci pat e i n i t s devel opment . Subcont r act or s and
suppl i er s, Subcont r act or s and suppl i er s wor ki ng on t he pr oj ect shal l al so
cont r i but e i n devel opi ng and mai nt ai ni ng an accur at e Pr oj ect Schedul e. The
schedul e must be a f or war d pl anni ng as wel l as a pr oj ect moni t or i ng t ool .
3. 1. 1 Appr oved Pr oj ect Schedul e
Use t he appr oved Pr oj ect Schedul e t o measur e t he pr ogr ess of t he wor k and
t o ai d i n eval uat i ng t i me ext ensi ons. Make t he schedul e cost l oaded and
act i vi t y coded.
3. 1. 2 Schedul e St at us Repor t s
Page 3 of 16

Pr ovi de a Schedul e St at us Repor t on at l east a mont hl y basi s. I f , i n t he
opi ni on of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , t he Cont r act or f al l s behi nd t he appr oved
schedul e, t he Cont r act or shal l t ake st eps necessar y t o i mpr ove i t s pr ogr ess
i ncl udi ng t hose t hat may be r equi r ed by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , wi t hout
addi t i onal cost t o t he Gover nment . I n t hi s ci r cumst ance, t he Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer may r equi r e t he Cont r act or t o i ncr ease t he number of shi f t s,
over t i me oper at i ons, days of wor k, and/ or t he amount of const r uct i on pl ant ,
and t o submi t f or appr oval any suppl ement ar y schedul e or schedul es as t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer deems necessar y t o demonst r at e how t he appr oved r at e of
pr ogr ess wi l l be r egai ned.
3. 1. 3 Def aul t Ter ms
Fai l ur e of t he Cont r act or t o compl y wi t h t he r equi r ement s of t he Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer shal l be gr ounds f or a det er mi nat i on by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer t hat
t he Cont r act or i s not pr osecut i ng t he wor k wi t h suf f i ci ent di l i gence t o
ensur e compl et i on wi t hi n t he t i me speci f i ed i n t he cont r act . Upon maki ng
t hi s det er mi nat i on, t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer may t er mi nat e t he Cont r act or ' s
r i ght t o pr oceed wi t h t he wor k, or any separ abl e par t of i t , i n accor dance
wi t h t he def aul t t er ms of t he cont r act .
3. 2 BASI S FOR PAYMENT AND COST LOADI NG
The schedul e shal l be used as t he basi s f or det er mi ni ng cont r act ear ni ngs
dur i ng each updat e per i od and t her ef or e t he amount of each pr ogr ess payment .
Lack of an appr oved schedul e updat e or qual i f i ed schedul i ng per sonnel wi l l
r esul t i n an i nabi l i t y of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer t o eval uat e cont r act
ear ned val ue f or t he pur poses of payment . I f t he Cont r act or f ai l s t o submi t
any schedul e wi t hi n t he t i me pr escr i bed, or i f i t i s det er mi ned t hat t he
cont r act or i s not f ol l owi ng t he appr oved schedul e, t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer
may wi t hhol d appr oval of pr ogr ess payment s unt i l t he Cont r act or submi t s t he
r equi r ed schedul e.
I n t he event schedul e r evi si ons ar e di r ect ed by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer and
t hose r evi si ons have not been i ncl uded i n subsequent r evi si ons or updat es,
t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer may hol d r et ai nage up t o t he maxi mumal l owed by
cont r act , each payment per i od, unt i l such r evi si ons t o t he Pr oj ect Schedul e
have been made. Act i vi t y cost l oadi ng shal l be r easonabl e, as det er mi ned by
t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . The aggr egat e val ue of al l act i vi t i es coded t o a
cont r act CLI N shal l equal t he val ue of t he CLI N on t he Schedul e.
3. 3 SCHEDULI NG SOFTWARE REQUI REMENTS
The comput er sof t war e syst emut i l i zed t o pr oduce and updat e t he Pr oj ect
Schedul e shal l be capabl e of meet i ng al l r equi r ement s of t hi s speci f i cat i on.
Fai l ur e of t he Cont r act or t o meet t he r equi r ement s of t hi s speci f i cat i on
wi l l r esul t i n t he di sappr oval of t he schedul e.
3. 3. 1 Li cense f or t he Gover nment
Dur i ng t he per f or mance of t he cont r act , t hr ough f i nal payment , t he
cont r act or shal l pr ovi de, at no addi t i onal cost t o t he gover nment , one ( 1)
l i censed copy of t he schedul i ng sof t war e f or use of t he gover nment . The
sof t war e and l i cense shal l be r et ur ned t o t he cont r act or af t er f i nal payment
has been made, unl ess r equest ed ot her wi se by t he cont r act or .
3. 3. 2 Compat i bi l i t y wi t h SDEF
Page 4 of 16

The schedul i ng sof t war e must meet t he act i vi t y codi ng st r uct ur e def i ned i n
t he St andar d Dat a Exchange For mat ( SDEF) i n ER 1- 1- 11 t o al l ow f or
i nt er change of dat a wi t h t he QCS sof t war e r equi r ed by Sect i on 04 45 01. 10
USACE QUALI TY CONTROL SYSTEM ( QCS) . Shoul d t he cont r act or ut i l i ze sof t war e
whi ch i s not compat i bl e wi t h t he SDEF, t he cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e
f or manual l y ent er i ng and updat i ng al l schedul e i nf or mat i on i n QCS.
3. 4 PROJ ECT SCHEDULE DETAI LED REQUI REMENTS
3. 4. 1 Cr i t i cal Pat h Met hod
Use t he Cr i t i cal Pat h Met hod ( CPM) of net wor k cal cul at i on t o gener at e t he
Pr oj ect Schedul e. Pr epar e t he Pr oj ect Schedul e usi ng t he Pr ecedence Di agr am
Met hod ( PDM) .
Bar char t s or ot her schedul i ng met hods whi ch do not show dependenci es
bet ween act i vi t i es shal l not be al l owed
3. 4. 2 Level of Det ai l Requi r ed
Devel op t he Pr oj ect Schedul e t o an appr opr i at e l evel of det ai l . Fai l ur e t o
devel op t he Pr oj ect Schedul e t o an appr opr i at e l evel of det ai l , as
det er mi ned by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , wi l l r esul t i n i t s di sappr oval . The
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi l l consi der , but i s not l i mi t ed t o, t he
char act er i st i cs and r equi r ement s i dent i f i ed i n t he f ol l owi ng par agr aphs t o
det er mi ne appr opr i at e l evel of det ai l . The gover nment r eser ves t he r i ght t o
di r ect t he cont r act or t o add addi t i onal act i vi t i es or pr ovi de a f ur t her
br eakdown of act i vi t i es t o ensur e t he adequacy of t he schedul e.
3. 4. 2. 1 Act i vi t y Dur at i ons
Reasonabl e act i vi t y dur at i ons ar e t hose t hat al l ow t he pr ogr ess of ongoi ng
act i vi t i es t o be accur at el y det er mi ned bet ween updat e per i ods. Less t han 2
per cent of al l non- pr ocur ement act i vi t i es shal l have Or i gi nal Dur at i ons ( OD)
gr eat er t han 20 wor k days or 30 cal endar days. Pr ocur ement act i vi t i es ar e
def i ned her ei n.
3. 4. 2. 2 Desi gn and Per mi t Act i vi t i es
I ncl ude any desi gn and per mi t act i vi t i es wi t h t he necessar y conf er ences and
f ol l ow- up act i ons and desi gn package submi ssi on dat es, showi ng t he sequence
of event s i nvol ved i n car r yi ng out t he pr oj ect desi gn t asks wi t hi n t he
speci f i c cont r act per i od. I ncl ude t he desi gn schedul e i n t he pr oj ect
schedul e, showi ng t he sequence of event s i nvol ved i n car r yi ng out t he
pr oj ect desi gn t asks wi t hi n t he speci f i c cont r act per i od.
Thi s shal l be at a det ai l ed l evel of schedul i ng suf f i ci ent t o i dent i f y al l
maj or desi gn t asks, i ncl udi ng t hose t hat cont r ol t he f l ow of wor k. The
schedul e shal l i ncl ude r evi ew and cor r ect i on per i ods associ at ed wi t h each
i t em. Thi s shoul d be a f or war d pl anni ng as wel l as a pr oj ect moni t or i ng
t ool .
3. 4. 2. 3 Pr ocur ement Act i vi t i es
The schedul e must i ncl ude act i vi t i es associ at ed wi t h t he submi t t al ,
appr oval , pr ocur ement , f abr i cat i on and del i ver y of l ong l ead mat er i al s,
equi pment , f abr i cat ed assembl i es and suppl i es. Long l ead pr ocur ement
act i vi t i es ar e t hose wi t h an ant i ci pat ed pr ocur ement sequence of over 90
Page 5 of 16

cal endar days. A t ypi cal pr ocur ement sequence i ncl udes t he st r i ng of
act i vi t i es: submi t , appr ove, pr ocur e, f abr i cat e, and del i ver .
3. 4. 2. 4 Mandat or y Tasks
The f ol l owi ng t asks, when i dent i f i ed el sewher e i n t hese speci f i cat i ons or
scope of wor k, must be i ncl uded and pr oper l y schedul ed:
a. Submi ssi on, r evi ew and accept ance of desi gn packages.
b. Submi ssi on of syst ems and/ or shop dr awi ngs.
c. Submi ssi on and appr oval of O & M manual s.
d. Submi ssi on and appr oval of as- bui l t dr awi ngs.
e. Submi ssi on and appr oval of 1354 dat a and i nst al l ed equi pment l i st s.
f . Submi ssi on and appr oval of t est i ng and ai r bal ance ( TAB) .
g. Submi ssi on of TAB speci al i st desi gn r evi ew r epor t .
h. Submi ssi on and appr oval of f i r e pr ot ect i on speci al i st .
i . Submi ssi on and appr oval of t est i ng and bal anci ng of HVAC pl us
commi ssi oni ng pl ans and dat a. Devel op t he schedul e l ogi c associ at ed
wi t h t est i ng and commi ssi oni ng of mechani cal syst ems t o a l evel of
det ai l consi st ent wi t h ECB 2005- 10.
j . Ai r and wat er bal anci ng.
k. HVAC commi ssi oni ng.
l . Cont r ol s t est i ng pl an submi ssi on.
m. Cont r ol s t est i ng.
n. Per f or mance Ver i f i cat i on t est i ng.
o. Ot her syst ems t est i ng, i f r equi r ed.
p. Cont r act or ' s pr e- f i nal i nspect i on.
q. Cor r ect i on of punchl i st f r omCont r act or ' s pr e- f i nal i nspect i on.
r . Gover nment ' s pr e- f i nal i nspect i on.
s. Cor r ect i on of punch l i st f r omGover nment ' s pr e- f i nal i nspect i on.
t . Fi nal i nspect i on.
3. 4. 2. 5 Gover nment Act i vi t i es
Show Gover nment and ot her agency act i vi t i es t hat coul d i mpact pr ogr ess.
These act i vi t i es i ncl ude, but ar e not l i mi t ed t o: appr oval s, desi gn r evi ews,
envi r onment al per mi t appr oval s by St at e r egul at or s, i nspect i ons, ut i l i t y
t i e- i n, Gover nment Fur ni shed Equi pment ( GFE) and Not i ce t o Pr oceed ( NTP) f or
phasi ng r equi r ement s.
3. 4. 2. 6 Act i vi t y Responsi bi l i t y Codi ng ( RESP)
Assi gn r esponsi bi l i t y Code f or al l act i vi t i es t o t he Pr i me Cont r act or ,
Subcont r act or or Gover nment agency r esponsi bl e f or per f or mi ng t he act i vi t y.
Act i vi t i es coded wi t h a Gover nment Responsi bi l i t y code i ncl ude, but ar e not
l i mi t ed t o: Gover nment appr oval s, Gover nment desi gn r evi ews, envi r onment al
per mi t appr oval s by St at e r egul at or s, Gover nment Fur ni shed Equi pment ( GFE)
and Not i ce t o Pr oceed ( NTP) f or phasi ng r equi r ement s. Code al l act i vi t i es
not coded wi t h a Gover nment Responsi bi l i t y Code t o t he Pr i me Cont r act or or
Subcont r act or r esponsi bl e t o per f or mt he wor k. Act i vi t i es shal l not have
mor e t han one Responsi bi l i t y Code. Exampl es of accept abl e act i vi t y code
val ues ar e: DOR ( f or t he desi gner of r ecor d) ; ELEC ( f or t he el ect r i cal
subcont r act or ) ; MECH ( f or t he mechani cal subcont r act or ) ; and GOVT ( f or
USACE) .
3. 4. 2. 7 Act i vi t y Wor k Ar ea Codi ng
Assi gn Wor k Ar ea code t o act i vi t i es based upon t he wor k ar ea i n whi ch t he
Page 6 of 16

act i vi t y occur s. Def i ne wor k ar eas based on r esour ce const r ai nt s or space
const r ai nt s t hat woul d pr ecl ude a r esour ce, such as a par t i cul ar t r ade or
cr af t wor k cr ew, f r omwor ki ng i n mor e t han one wor k ar ea at a t i me due t o
r est r ai nt s on r esour ces or space. Exampl es of Wor k Ar ea Codi ng i ncl ude
di f f er ent ar eas wi t hi n a f l oor of a bui l di ng, di f f er ent f l oor s wi t hi n a
bui l di ng, and di f f er ent bui l di ngs wi t hi n a compl ex of bui l di ngs.
Act i vi t i es shal l not have mor e t han one Wor k Ar ea Code. Not al l act i vi t i es
ar e r equi r ed t o be Wor k Ar ea coded. A l ack of Wor k Ar ea codi ng wi l l i ndi cat e
t he act i vi t y i s not r esour ce or space const r ai ned.
3. 4. 2. 8 Cont r act Changes/ Request s f or Equi t abl e Adj ust ment ( REA) Codi ng
( MODF)
Assi gn Act i vi t y code t o any act i vi t y or sequence of act i vi t i es added t o t he
schedul e as a r esul t of a Cont r act Modi f i cat i on, when appr oved by t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , wi t h a Cont r act Changes/ REA Code. Key al l Code val ues
t o t he Gover nment ' s modi f i cat i on number i ng syst em. Any act i vi t y or sequence
of act i vi t i es added t o t he schedul e as a r esul t of al l eged const r uct i ve
changes made by t he Gover nment may be added t o a copy of t he cur r ent
schedul e, subj ect t o t he appr oval of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . Assi gn
Act i vi t y codes f or t hese act i vi t i es wi t h a Cont r act Changes/ REA Code. Key
t he code val ues t o t he Cont r act or ' s number i ng syst em. Appr oval t o add t hese
act i vi t i es does not necessar i l y mean t he Gover nment accept s r esponsi bi l i t y
and t her ef or e l i abi l i t y f or such act i vi t i es and any associ at ed i mpact s t o
t he schedul e, but r at her t he Gover nment r ecogni zes such act i vi t i es ar e
appr opr i at el y added t o t he schedul e f or t he pur poses of mai nt ai ni ng a
r eal i st i c and meani ngf ul schedul e. Such act i vi t i es shal l not be
Responsi bi l i t y Coded t o t he Gover nment unl ess appr oved. An act i vi t y shal l
not have mor e t han one Cont r act Changes/ REA Code.
3. 4. 2. 9 Cont r act Li ne I t em( CLI N) Codi ng ( BI DI )
Code al l act i vi t i es t o t he CLI N on t he Cont r act Li ne I t emSchedul e t o whi ch
t he act i vi t y bel ongs. An act i vi t y shal l not cont ai n mor e t han one CLI N I t em
Code. CLI N I t emcode al l act i vi t i es, even when an act i vi t y i s not cost
l oaded.
3. 4. 2. 10 Phase of Wor k Codi ng ( PHAS)
Assi gn Phase of Wor k Code t o al l act i vi t i es based upon t he phase of wor k i n
whi ch t he act i vi t y occur s. Code act i vi t i es t o ei t her a Desi gn Phase or a
Const r uct i on Phase. Code f ast t r ack phases pr oposed by t he Cont r act or t o
al l ow f i l t er i ng and or gani zi ng t he schedul e by f ast t r ack desi gn and
const r uct i on packages. I f t he cont r act speci f i es const r uct i on phasi ng wi t h
separ at el y def i ned per f or mance per i ods, i dent i f y a Const r uct i on Phase Code
t o al l ow f i l t er i ng and or gani zi ng t he schedul e accor di ngl y. Each act i vi t y
shal l be i dent i f i ed wi t h a si ngl e pr oj ect phase and have onl y one Phase of
Wor k code.
3. 4. 2. 11 Cat egor y of Wor k Codi ng ( CATW)
Assi gn Cat egor y of Wor k Code t o al l Act i vi t i es based upon t he cat egor y of
wor k t o whi ch t he act i vi t y bel ongs. Cat egor y of Wor k Code must i ncl ude, but
i s not l i mi t ed t o: desi gn, desi gn submi t t al , desi gn r evi ews, r evi ew
conf er ences, per mi t s, const r uct i on submi t t al s, const r uct i on submi t t al
appr oval s, Accept ance, Pr ocur ement , Fabr i cat i on, Del i ver y, Weat her Sensi t i ve
Page 7 of 16

I nst al l at i on, Non- Weat her Sensi t i ve I nst al l at i on, St ar t - Up, Test and
Tur nover . Assi gn a Cat egor y of Wor k Code t o each act i vi t y. Each act i vi t y
shal l have onl y one Cat egor y of Wor k Code.
3. 4. 2. 12 Def i nabl e Feat ur es of Wor k Codi ng ( FOW1, FOW2, FOW3)
Assi gn a Def i nabl e Feat ur e of Wor k Code t o appr opr i at e act i vi t i es based on
t he def i nabl e f eat ur e of wor k t o whi ch t he act i vi t y bel ongs. Def i nabl e
Feat ur e of Wor k i s def i ned i n Speci f i cat i on Sect i on 01 45 01 USACE QUALI TY
CONTROL. An act i vi t y shal l not have mor e t han one Def i nabl e Feat ur e of Wor k
Code. Al l act i vi t i es ar e r equi r ed t o be Def i nabl e Feat ur e of Wor k Coded.
3. 4. 3 Schedul ed Pr oj ect Compl et i on and Act i vi t y Cal endar s
The schedul e i nt er val shal l ext end f r omNTP dat e t o t he r equi r ed cont r act
compl et i on dat e. The cont r act compl et i on act i vi t y ( End Pr oj ect ) shal l f i ni sh
based on t he r equi r ed cont r act dur at i on, as adj ust ed f or any appr oved
cont r act t i me ext ensi ons. The f i r st schedul ed wor k per i od shal l be t he day
af t er NTP i s acknowl edged by t he Cont r act or . Schedul e act i vi t i es on a
cal endar t o whi ch t he act i vi t y l ogi cal l y bel ongs. Act i vi t i es may be assi gned
t o a 7 day cal endar when t he cont r act assi gns cal endar day dur at i ons f or t he
act i vi t y such as a Gover nment Accept ance act i vi t y. I f t he Cont r act or i nt ends
t o per f or mphysi cal wor k l ess t han seven days per week, schedul e t he
associ at ed act i vi t i es on a cal endar wi t h non- wor k per i ods i dent i f i ed
i ncl udi ng weekends and hol i days. Assi gn t he Cat egor y of Wor k Code - Weat her
Sensi t i ve I nst al l at i on t o t hose act i vi t i es t hat ar e weat her sensi t i ve.
Or i gi nal dur at i ons must account f or ant i ci pat ed nor mal adver se weat her . The
Gover nment wi l l i nt er pr et al l wor k per i ods not i dent i f i ed as non- wor k
per i ods on each cal endar as meani ng t he Cont r act or i nt ends t o per f or mwor k
dur i ng t hose per i ods.
3. 4. 3. 1 Pr oj ect St ar t Dat e
The schedul e shal l st ar t no ear l i er t han t he dat e on whi ch t he NTP was
acknowl edged. I ncl ude as t he f i r st act i vi t y i n t he pr oj ect schedul e an
act i vi t y cal l ed " St ar t Pr oj ect " ( or NTP) . The " St ar t Pr oj ect " act i vi t y shal l
have an " ES" const r ai nt dat e equal t o t he dat e t hat t he NTP was
acknowl edged, and a zer o day dur at i on.
3. 4. 3. 2 Schedul e Const r ai nt s and Open Ended Logi c
Const r ai n compl et i on of t he l ast act i vi t y i n t he schedul e by t he cont r act
compl et i on dat e. Schedul e cal cul at i ons shal l r esul t i n a negat i ve f l oat when
t he cal cul at ed ear l y f i ni sh dat e of t he l ast act i vi t y i s l at er t han t he
cont r act compl et i on dat e. I ncl ude as t he l ast act i vi t y i n t he pr oj ect
schedul e an act i vi t y cal l ed " End Pr oj ect " . The " End Pr oj ect " act i vi t y shal l
have an " LF" const r ai nt dat e equal t o t he cont r act compl et i on dat e f or t he
pr oj ect , and wi t h a zer o day dur at i on or by usi ng t he " pr oj ect must f i ni sh
by" dat e i n t he schedul i ng sof t war e. The schedul e shal l have no const r ai ned
dat es ot her t han t hose speci f i ed i n t he cont r act . The use of ar t i f i ci al
f l oat const r ai nt s such as " zer o f ee f l oat " or " zer o t ot al f l oat " ar e
pr ohi bi t ed. Ther e shal l onl y be 2 open ended act i vi t i es: St ar t Pr oj ect ( or
NTP) wi t h no pr edecessor l ogi c and End Pr oj ect wi t h no successor l ogi c.
3. 4. 4 Ear l y Pr oj ect Compl et i on
I n t he event t he Pr el i mi nar y or I ni t i al pr oj ect schedul e cal cul at es an ear l y
Page 8 of 16

compl et i on dat e of t he l ast act i vi t y pr i or t o t he cont r act compl et i on dat e,
t he Cont r act or shal l i dent i f y t hose act i vi t i es t hat i t i nt ends t o accel er at e
and/ or t hose act i vi t i es t hat ar e schedul ed i n par al l el t o suppor t t he
Cont r act or ' s " ear l y" compl et i on. The l ast act i vi t y shal l have a l at e f i ni sh
const r ai nt equal t o t he cont r act compl et i on dat e and t he schedul e wi l l
cal cul at e posi t i ve f l oat . The Gover nment wi l l not appr ove an ear l y
compl et i on schedul e wi t h zer o f l oat on t he l ongest pat h. The Gover nment i s
under no obl i gat i on t o accel er at e act i vi t i es f or whi ch i t i s r esponsi bl e t o
suppor t a pr oposed ear l y cont r act compl et i on.
3. 4. 5 I nt er i mCompl et i on Dat es
Const r ai n cont r act ual l y speci f i ed i nt er i mcompl et i on dat es t o show negat i ve
f l oat when t he cal cul at ed ear l y f i ni sh dat e of t he l ast act i vi t y i n t hat
phase i s l at er t han t he speci f i ed i nt er i mcompl et i on dat e.
3. 4. 5. 1 St ar t Phase
I ncl ude as t he f i r st act i vi t y f or a pr oj ect phase an act i vi t y cal l ed " St ar t
Phase X" wher e " X" r ef er s t o t he phase of wor k. The " St ar t Phase X" act i vi t y
shal l have an " ES" const r ai nt dat e equal t o t he dat e on whi ch t he NTP was
acknowl edged, and a zer o day dur at i on.
3. 4. 5. 2 End Phase
I ncl ude as t he l ast act i vi t y f or a pr oj ect phase an act i vi t y cal l ed " End
Phase X" wher e " X" r ef er s t o t he phase of wor k. The " End Phase X" act i vi t y
shal l have an " LF" const r ai nt dat e equal t o t he speci f i ed compl et i on dat e
f or t hat phase and a zer o day dur at i on.
3. 4. 5. 3 Phase " X" Hammock
I ncl ude a hammock t ype act i vi t y f or each pr oj ect phase cal l ed " Phase X"
wher e " X" r ef er s t o t he phase of wor k. The " Phase X" hammock act i vi t y shal l
be l ogi cal l y t i ed t o t he ear l i est and l at est act i vi t i es i n t he phase.
3. 4. 6 Def aul t Pr ogr ess Dat a Di sal l owed
Do not aut omat i cal l y updat e Act ual St ar t and Fi ni sh dat es wi t h def aul t
mechani sms t hat may be i ncl uded i n t he schedul i ng sof t war e. Act i vi t y Act ual
St ar t ( AS) and Act ual Fi ni sh ( AF) dat es assi gned dur i ng t he updat i ng pr ocess
shal l mat ch t hose dat es pr ovi ded f r omCont r act or Qual i t y Cont r ol Repor t s.
Fai l ur e of t he Cont r act or t o document t he AS and AF dat es on t he Dai l y
Qual i t y Cont r ol r epor t f or ever y i n- pr ogr ess or compl et ed act i vi t y, and
f ai l ur e t o ensur e t hat t he dat a cont ai ned on t he Dai l y Qual i t y Cont r ol
r epor t s i s t he sol e basi s f or schedul e updat i ng shal l r esul t i n t he
di sappr oval of t he Cont r act or ' s updat ed schedul e and t he i nabi l i t y of t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer t o eval uat e Cont r act or pr ogr ess f or payment pur poses.
Updat i ng of t he per cent compl et e and t he r emai ni ng dur at i on of any act i vi t y
shal l be i ndependent f unct i ons. Di sabl e pr ogr amf eat ur es whi ch cal cul at e one
of t hese par amet er s f r omt he ot her .
3. 4. 7 Out - of - Sequence Pr ogr ess
Act i vi t i es t hat have pr ogr essed bef or e al l pr ecedi ng l ogi c has been
sat i sf i ed ( Out - of - Sequence Pr ogr ess) wi l l be al l owed onl y on a case- by- case
basi s subj ect t o appr oval by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . Pr opose l ogi c
cor r ect i ons t o el i mi nat e al l out of sequence pr ogr ess or j ust i f y not
Page 9 of 16

changi ng t he sequenci ng f or appr oval pr i or t o submi t t i ng an updat ed pr oj ect
schedul e. Cor r ect out of sequence pr ogr ess t hat cont i nues f or mor e t han t wo
updat e cycl es by l ogi c r evi si on, as appr oved by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
3. 4. 8 Negat i ve Lags and St ar t t o Fi ni sh Rel at i onshi ps
Lag dur at i ons cont ai ned i n t he pr oj ect schedul e shal l not have a negat i ve
val ue. Do not use St ar t t o Fi ni sh ( SF) r el at i onshi ps.
3. 4. 9 Cal cul at i on Mode
Schedul e cal cul at i ons shal l r et ai n t he l ogi c bet ween pr edecessor s and
successor s even when t he successor act i vi t y st ar t s and t he pr edecessor
act i vi t y has not f i ni shed. Sof t war e f eat ur es t hat i n ef f ect sever t he t i e
bet ween pr edecessor and successor act i vi t i es when t he successor has st ar t ed
and t he pr edecessor l ogi c i s not sat i sf i ed ( " pr ogr ess over r i de" ) wi l l not be
al l owed.
3. 4. 10 Mi l est ones
The schedul e must i ncl ude mi l est one act i vi t i es f or each si gni f i cant pr oj ect
event .
3. 5 PROJ ECT SCHEDULE SUBMI SSI ONS
Pr ovi de t he submi ssi ons as descr i bed bel ow. The dat a CD, r epor t s, and
net wor k di agr ams r equi r ed f or each submi ssi on ar e cont ai ned i n par agr aph
SUBMI SSI ON REQUI REMENTS.
3. 5. 1 Pr el i mi nar y Pr oj ect Schedul e Submi ssi on
Submi t t he Pr el i mi nar y Pr oj ect Schedul e, def i ni ng t he Cont r act or ' s pl anned
oper at i ons f or t he f i r st 90 cal endar days f or appr oval wi t hi n 15 cal endar
days af t er t he NTP i s acknowl edged. The appr oved Pr el i mi nar y Pr oj ect
Schedul e wi l l be used f or payment pur poses not t o exceed 90 cal endar days
af t er NTP. Compl et el y cost l oad t he Pr el i mi nar y Pr oj ect Schedul e t o bal ance
t he cont r act awar d CLI NS shown on t he Pr i ce Schedul e. Det ai l i t f or t he
f i r st 90 cal endar days. I t may be summar y i n nat ur e f or t he r emai ni ng
per f or mance per i od. I t must be ear l y st ar t and l at e f i ni sh const r ai ned and
l ogi cal l y t i ed as pr evi ousl y speci f i ed. The Pr el i mi nar y Pr oj ect Schedul e
f or ms t he basi s f or t he I ni t i al Pr oj ect Schedul e speci f i ed her ei n and must
i ncl ude al l of t he r equi r ed Pl an and Pr ogr ampr epar at i ons, submi ssi ons and
appr oval s i dent i f i ed i n t he cont r act ( f or exampl e, Qual i t y Cont r ol Pl an,
Saf et y Pl an, and Envi r onment al Pr ot ect i on Pl an) as wel l as desi gn
act i vi t i es, t he pl anned submi ssi ons of al l ear l y desi gn packages, per mi t t i ng
act i vi t i es, desi gn r evi ew conf er ence act i vi t i es and ot her non- const r uct i on
act i vi t i es i nt ended t o occur wi t hi n t he f i r st 90 cal endar days. Schedul e any
const r uct i on act i vi t i es pl anned f or t he f i r st 90 cal endar days af t er NTP.
Const r ai n pl anned const r uct i on act i vi t i es by Gover nment accept ance of t he
associ at ed desi gn package( s) and al l ot her speci f i ed Pr ogr amand Pl an
appr oval s. Act i vi t y code any act i vi t i es t hat ar e summar y i n nat ur e af t er t he
f i r st 90 cal endar days wi t h Responsi bi l i t y Code ( RESP) and Feat ur e of Wor k
code ( FOW1, FOW2, FOW3) .
3. 5. 2 I ni t i al Pr oj ect Schedul e Submi ssi on
Submi t t he I ni t i al Pr oj ect Schedul e f or appr oval wi t hi n 45 cal endar days
af t er NTP. The schedul e shal l demonst r at e a r easonabl e and r eal i st i c
Page 10 of 16

sequence of act i vi t i es whi ch r epr esent al l wor k t hr ough t he ent i r e cont r act
per f or mance per i od. The I ni t i al Schedul e shal l be at a r easonabl e l evel of
det ai l as det er mi ned by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . I ncl ude i n t he desi gn- bui l d
schedul e det ai l ed desi gn and per mi t t i ng act i vi t i es, i ncl udi ng but not
l i mi t ed t o i dent i f i cat i on of i ndi vi dual desi gn packages, desi gn submi ssi on,
r evi ews and conf er ences; per mi t submi ssi ons and any r equi r ed Gover nment
act i ons; and l ong l ead i t emacqui si t i on pr i or t o desi gn compl et i on.
3. 5. 3 Schedul e Updat es
The cont r act or shal l updat e t he schedul e on a r egul ar basi s and submi t a
schedul e whi ch has been updat ed wi t hi n t he l ast 72 hour s wi t h al l r equest s
f or payment as a separ at e submi t t al . These submi ssi ons wi l l enabl e t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer t o assess Cont r act or ' s pr ogr ess. I f t he Cont r act or f ai l s
or r ef uses t o f ur ni sh t he i nf or mat i on and pr oj ect schedul e dat a, whi ch i n
t he j udgment of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer or aut hor i zed r epr esent at i ve i s
necessar y f or ver i f yi ng t he Cont r act or ' s pr ogr ess, t he Cont r act or shal l be
deemed not t o have pr ovi ded an est i mat e upon whi ch pr ogr ess payment may be
made.
3. 5. 4 Per i odi c Schedul e Changes
When i t becomes necessar y t o change or r evi se ( not updat e) t he appr oved
schedul e, pr epar e a det ai l ed nar r at i ve i dent i f yi ng al l changes t o t he
pr oj ect schedul e by act i vi t y, t o i ncl ude al l changes i n l ogi c, and di scuss
t he changes wi t h t he gover nment dur i ng t he meet i ng descr i bed i n par agr aph
PERI ODI C MEETI NGS.
No changes or r evi si ons t o t he schedul e shal l be made wi t hout pr i or
coor di nat i on wi t h t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer s Repr esent at i ve. As a r esul t of
t he meet i ng di scussed above, t he gover nment wi l l ei t her al l ow t he cont r act or
t o pr epar e and submi t f or appr oval a r evi sed pr oj ect schedul e, or pr ovi de
ot her wr i t t en di r ect i on.
Request s f or payment shal l not i ncl ude any changes or r evi si ons f r omt he
l ast appr oved pr oj ect schedul e. I f a pr oposed change has not been appr oved
vi a t he compl et i on of a submi t t al , r egar dl ess of any ot her di scussi ons, t hey
shal l not be shown i n any schedul e at t ached t o a r equest f or payment .
3. 5. 5 St andar d Act i vi t y Codi ng Di ct i onar y
Use t he act i vi t y codi ng st r uct ur e def i ned i n t he St andar d Dat a Exchange
For mat ( SDEF) i n ER 1- 1- 11, Appendi x A. Thi s exact st r uct ur e i s mandat or y,
even i f some f i el ds ar e not used. A t empl at e SDEF compat i bl e schedul e backup
f i l e ( sdef . pr x) i s avai l abl e on t he QCS websi t e: www. r mssuppor t . com. The
SDEF f or mat i s as f ol l ows:

Fi el d
Code
Lengt h Descr i pt i on
1 WRKP 3 Wor ker s per Day
2 RESP 4 Responsi bl e Par t y ( e. g. GC, subcont r act or , USACE)
3 AREA 4 Ar ea of Wor k
4 MODF 6 Modi f i cat i on or REA number
5 BI DI 6 Bi d I t em( CLI N)
6 PHAS 2 Phase of Wor k
7 CATW 1 Cat egor y of Wor k
Page 11 of 16

8 FOW1 10 Feat ur e of Wor k ( 1
st
10 char act er s)
nd
10 char act er s)
r d
10 char act er s)
3. 6 SUBMI SSI ON REQUI REMENTS
Submi t t he f ol l owi ng i t ems f or t he Pr el i mi nar y Schedul e, I ni t i al Schedul e,
and ever y Per i odi c Schedul e Updat e or Revi si on t hr oughout t he l i f e of t he
pr oj ect :
3. 6. 1 El ect r oni c Dat a
Pr ovi de one copy of t he schedul e i n el ect r oni c f or mat . Thi s may be pr ovi ded
vi a e- mai l or el ect r oni c/ opt i cal medi a.
3. 6. 2 Nar r at i ve Repor t
Pr ovi de a Nar r at i ve Repor t . The Nar r at i ve Repor t shal l i ncl ude: a descr i pt i on
of act i vi t i es al ong t he 2 most cr i t i cal pat hs wher e t he t ot al f l oat i s l ess
t han or equal t o 20 wor k days, a descr i pt i on of cur r ent and ant i ci pat ed
pr obl emar eas or del ayi ng f act or s and t hei r i mpact , and an expl anat i on of
cor r ect i ve act i ons t aken or r equi r ed t o be t aken.
The nar r at i ve r epor t i s expect ed t o communi cat e t o t he Gover nment , t he
Cont r act or ' s t hor ough anal ysi s of t he schedul e out put and i t s pl ans t o
compensat e f or any pr obl ems, ei t her cur r ent or pot ent i al , whi ch ar e r eveal ed
t hr ough t hat anal ysi s. I dent i f y and expl ai n why any act i vi t i es t hat , based
t hei r cal cul at ed l at e dat es, shoul d have ei t her st ar t ed or f i ni shed dur i ng
t he updat e per i od but di d not .
3. 6. 3 Appr oved Changes Ver i f i cat i on
I ncl ude onl y t hose pr oj ect schedul e changes i n t he schedul e submi ssi on t hat
have been pr evi ousl y appr oved by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . The Nar r at i ve
Repor t shal l speci f i cal l y r ef er ence, on an act i vi t y by act i vi t y basi s, al l
changes made si nce t he pr evi ous per i od and r el at e each change t o document ed,
appr oved schedul e changes. I t shal l al so cl ear l y i dent i f y al l pr oposed
changes i n l ogi c, successor s/ pr edecessor s, dur at i ons, or sequenci ng of
act i vi t i es, and t he pr oposed r eason f or t he change expl ai ned.
3. 6. 4 Net wor k Di agr am
A net wor k di agr ami s r equi r ed f or t he Pr el i mi nar y, I ni t i al and Per i odi c
Updat es. The net wor k di agr amshal l depi ct and di spl ay t he or der and
i nt er dependence of act i vi t i es and t he sequence i n whi ch t he wor k i s t o be
accompl i shed. The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi l l use, but i s not l i mi t ed t o, t he
f ol l owi ng condi t i ons t o r evi ew compl i ance wi t h t hi s par agr aph:
3. 6. 4. 1 Cont i nuous Fl ow
Di agr ams shal l show a cont i nuous f l ow f r oml ef t t o r i ght wi t h no ar r ows f r om
r i ght t o l ef t . Show t he act i vi t y number , descr i pt i on, dur at i on, and
est i mat ed ear ned val ue on t he di agr am.
3. 6. 4. 2 Pr oj ect Mi l est one Dat es
Show dat es on t he di agr amf or st ar t of pr oj ect , any cont r act r equi r ed i nt er i m
Page 12 of 16

compl et i on dat es, and cont r act compl et i on dat es.
3. 6. 4. 3 Cr i t i cal Pat h
Cl ear l y show t he cr i t i cal pat h.
3. 6. 4. 4 Bandi ng
Or gani ze act i vi t i es as di r ect ed t o assi st i n t he under st andi ng of t he
act i vi t y sequence. Typi cal l y, t hi s f l ow wi l l gr oup act i vi t i es by cat egor y of
wor k, wor k ar ea and/ or r esponsi bi l i t y.
3. 6. 4. 5 S- Cur ves
Ear ni ngs cur ves showi ng pr oj ect ed ear l y and l at e ear ni ngs and ear ni ngs t o
dat e.
3. 7 PERI ODI C MEETI NGS
At l east mont hl y, j oi nt l y r evi ew t he act ual pr ogr ess of t he pr oj ect as
compar ed t o t he as pl anned pr ogr ess and t o r evi ew pl anned act i vi t i es f or t he
upcomi ng t wo weeks, as wel l as r evi ewi ng t he Cont r act or ' s pr oposed out of
sequence cor r ect i ons, det er mi ni ng causes f or del ay, cor r ect i ng l ogi c,
mai nt ai ni ng schedul e accur acy and det er mi ni ng ear ned val ue. Thi s meet i ng
may t ake pl ace dur i ng t he nor mal Coor di nat i on Meet i ng as descr i bed i n
Sect i on 01 45 01 USACE QUALI TY CONTROL.
A dr af t of any pr oposed changes i n t he schedul e, i ncl udi ng act i vi t y l ogi c
cor r ect i ons and nar r at i ve r epor t shal l be pr ovi ded t o t he Gover nment 72
hour s i n advance of t he meet i ng. The Cont r act or ' s Pr oj ect Manager and
Aut hor i zed Schedul er shal l at t end t he meet i ng wi t h t he Aut hor i zed
Repr esent at i ve of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
Pr ovi de a comput er wi t h t he schedul i ng sof t war e l oaded and a pr oj ect or
dur i ng t he meet i ng whi ch al l ows al l meet i ng par t i ci pant s t o vi ew t he pr oposed
schedul e updat e dur i ng t he meet i ng. The meet i ng and r esul t ant appr ovabl e
schedul e updat e shal l be a condi t i on pr ecedent t o a f or mal submi ssi on of t he
updat e as descr i bed i n SUBMI SSI ON REQUI REMENTS and t o t he submi ssi on of an
i nvoi ce f or payment . The meet i ng wi l l be a wor ki ng i nt er act i ve exchange
whi ch wi l l al l ow t he Gover nment and t he Cont r act or t he oppor t uni t y t o r evi ew
t he updat ed schedul e on a r eal t i me and i nt er act i ve basi s.
Pr ovi de a bar char t pr oduced by t he schedul i ng sof t war e, or gani zed by Tot al
Fl oat and Sor t ed by Ear l y St ar t Dat e, and a t wo week "l ook- ahead" schedul e by
f i l t er i ng al l schedul e act i vi t i es t o show onl y cur r ent ongoi ng act i vi t i es and
act i vi t i es schedul e t o st ar t dur i ng t he upcomi ng t wo weeks, or gani zed by Wor k
Ar ea Code ( AREA) and sor t ed by Ear l y St ar t Dat e.
The Gover nment and t he Cont r act or shal l j oi nt l y r evi ew t he r epor t s. I f i t
appear s t hat act i vi t i es on t he l ongest pat h( s) whi ch ar e cur r ent l y dr i vi ng
t he cal cul at ed compl et i on dat e ( dr i vi ng act i vi t i es) , ar e not pr ogr essi ng
sat i sf act or i l y and t her ef or e coul d j eopar di ze t i mel y pr oj ect compl et i on,
cor r ect i ve act i on must be t aken i mmedi at el y. Cor r ect i ve act i on i ncl udes but
i s not l i mi t ed t o: i ncr easi ng t he number of wor k cr ews; i ncr easi ng t he number
of wor k shi f t s; i ncr easi ng t he number of hour s wor ked per shi f t ; and
det er mi ni ng i f Gover nment r esponsi bi l i t y coded act i vi t i es r equi r e Gover nment
cor r ect i ve act i on.
Page 13 of 16

3. 7. 1 Updat e Submi ssi on Fol l owi ng Pr ogr ess Meet i ng
Submi t a compl et e updat e of t he pr oj ect schedul e cont ai ni ng al l appr oved
pr ogr ess, r evi si ons, and adj ust ment s, pur suant t o par agr aph SUBMI SSI ON
REQUI REMENTS not l at er t han 4 wor ki ng days af t er t he per i odi c schedul e updat e
meet i ng, r ef l ect i ng onl y t hose changes made dur i ng t he pr evi ous updat e
meet i ng.
3. 7. 2 St at us of Act i vi t i es
Updat e i nf or mat i on, i ncl udi ng Act ual St ar t Dat es ( AS) , Act ual Fi ni sh Dat es
( AF) , Remai ni ng Dur at i ons ( RD) , and Per cent Compl et e shal l be subj ect t o t he
appr oval of t he Gover nment pr i or t o t he meet i ng. As a mi ni mum, addr ess t he
f ol l owi ng i t ems on an act i vi t y by act i vi t y basi s dur i ng each pr ogr ess
meet i ng.
3. 7. 2. 1 St ar t and Fi ni sh Dat es
Accur at el y show t he st at us of t he AS and/ or AF dat es f or each act i vi t y
cur r ent l y i n- pr ogr ess or compl et ed si nce t he l ast updat e. The Gover nment may
al l ow an AF dat e t o be assi gned wi t h t he per cent compl et e l ess t han 100%t o
account f or t he val ue of wor k r emai ni ng but not r est r ai ni ng successor
act i vi t i es. Onl y assi gn AS dat es when act ual pr ogr ess occur s on an act i vi t y.
3. 7. 2. 2 Remai ni ng Dur at i on
Updat e t he est i mat ed RD f or al l i ncompl et e act i vi t i es i ndependent of Per cent
Compl et e. Remai ni ng Dur at i ons may exceed t he act i vi t y OD or may exceed t he
act i vi t y' s pr i or updat e RD i f t he Gover nment consi der s t he cur r ent OD or RD
t o be under st at ed based on cur r ent pr ogr ess, i nsuf f i ci ent wor k cr ews act ual l y
manni ng t he j ob, unr eal i st i c OD or def i ci enci es t hat must be cor r ect ed t hat
r est r ai n successor act i vi t i es.
3. 7. 2. 3 Per cent Compl et e
Updat e t he per cent compl et e f or each act i vi t y st ar t ed, based on t he r eal i st i c
assessment of ear ned val ue. Act i vi t i es whi ch ar e compl et e but f or r emai ni ng
mi nor punch l i st wor k and whi ch do not r est r ai n t he i ni t i at i on of successor
act i vi t i es may be decl ar ed 100 per cent compl et e. To al l ow f or pr oper schedul e
management , cost l oad t he cor r ect i on of punch l i st f r omGover nment pr e- f i nal
i nspect i on act i vi t y( i es) not l ess t han 1 per cent of t he t ot al cont r act val ue,
whi ch act i vi t y( i es) may be decl ar ed 100 per cent compl et e upon compl et i on and
cor r ect i on of al l punch l i st wor k i dent i f i ed dur i ng Gover nment pr e- f i nal
i nspect i on( s) .
3. 7. 2. 4 Logi c Changes
Speci f i cal l y i dent i f y and di scuss al l l ogi c changes. The Gover nment wi l l
onl y appr ove l ogi c r evi si ons f or t he pur pose of keepi ng t he schedul e val i d i n
t er ms of i t s usef ul ness i n cal cul at i ng a r eal i st i c compl et i on dat e,
cor r ect i ng er r oneous l ogi c t i es, and accur at el y sequenci ng t he wor k.
3. 7. 2. 5 Ot her Changes
I dent i f y and di scuss ot her changes r equi r ed due t o del ays i n compl et i on of
any act i vi t y or gr oup of act i vi t i es i ncl ude: 1) del ays beyond t he
Cont r act or ' s cont r ol , such as st r i kes and unusual weat her . 2) del ays
encount er ed due t o submi t t al s, Gover nment Act i vi t i es, del i ver i es or wor k
Page 14 of 16

st oppages whi ch make r e- pl anni ng t he wor k necessar y. 3) Changes r equi r ed t o
cor r ect a schedul e t hat does not r epr esent t he act ual or pl anned pr osecut i on
and pr ogr ess of t he wor k.
3. 8 REQUESTS FOR TI ME EXTENSI ONS
I n t he event t he Cont r act or bel i eves i t i s ent i t l ed t o an ext ensi on of t he
cont r act per f or mance per i od, compl et i on dat e, or any i nt er i mmi l est one dat e,
f ur ni sh t he f ol l owi ng f or a det er mi nat i on by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer :
j ust i f i cat i on, pr oj ect schedul e dat a, and suppor t i ng evi dence as t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer may deemnecessar y. Submi ssi on of pr oof of excusabl e
del ay, based on r evi sed act i vi t y l ogi c, dur at i on, and cost s ( updat ed t o t he
speci f i c dat e t hat t he del ay occur r ed) i s a condi t i on pr ecedent t o any
appr oval s by t he Gover nment . I n r esponse t o each Request For Pr oposal i ssued
by t he Gover nment , t he Cont r act or shal l submi t a schedul e i mpact anal ysi s
demonst r at i ng whet her or not t he change cont empl at ed by t he Gover nment
i mpact s t he cr i t i cal pat h.
3. 8. 1 J ust i f i cat i on of Del ay
The pr oj ect schedul e shal l cl ear l y di spl ay t hat t he Cont r act or has used, i n
f ul l , al l t he f l oat t i me avai l abl e f or t he wor k i nvol ved wi t h t hi s r equest .
The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer ' s det er mi nat i on as t o t he number of al l owabl e days of
cont r act ext ensi on shal l be based upon t he pr oj ect schedul e updat es i n ef f ect
f or t he t i me per i od i n quest i on, and ot her f act ual i nf or mat i on. Act ual del ays
t hat ar e f ound t o be caused by t he Cont r act or ' s own act i ons, whi ch r esul t i n
a cal cul at ed schedul e del ay, wi l l not be a cause f or an ext ensi on t o t he
per f or mance per i od, compl et i on dat e, or any i nt er i mmi l est one dat e.
3. 8. 2 Submi ssi on Requi r ement s
Submi t a j ust i f i cat i on f or each r equest f or a change i n t he cont r act
compl et i on dat e. Such a r equest shal l be i n accor dance wi t h t he r equi r ement s
of ot her appr opr i at e Cont r act Cl auses and shal l i ncl ude, as a mi ni mum:
a. A l i st of af f ect ed act i vi t i es, wi t h t hei r associ at ed pr oj ect
schedul e act i vi t y number .
b. A br i ef expl anat i on of t he causes of t he change.
c. An anal ysi s of t he over al l i mpact of t he changes pr oposed.
d. A sub- net wor k of t he af f ect ed ar ea.
I dent i f y act i vi t i es i mpact ed i n each j ust i f i cat i on f or change by a uni que
act i vi t y code cont ai ned i n t he r equi r ed dat a f i l e.
3. 8. 3 Addi t i onal Submi ssi on Requi r ement s
The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer may r equest an i nt er i mupdat e wi t h r evi sed act i vi t i es
f or any r equest ed t i me ext ensi on of over 2 weeks. Pr ovi de t hi s di sk wi t hi n 4
days of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer ' s r equest .
3. 9 DI RECTED CHANGES
I f a NTP i s i ssued f or changes pr i or t o set t l ement of pr i ce and/ or t i me,
submi t pr oposed schedul e r evi si ons t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi t hi n 2 weeks
of t he NTP bei ng i ssued. The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi l l appr ove pr oposed
r evi si ons t o t he schedul e pr i or t o i ncl usi on of t hose changes wi t hi n t he
pr oj ect schedul e.
I f t he Cont r act or f ai l s t o submi t t he pr oposed r evi si ons, t he Cont r act i ng
Page 15 of 16

Page 16 of 16
Of f i cer may f ur ni sh t he Cont r act or wi t h suggest ed r evi si ons t o t he pr oj ect
schedul e. The Cont r act or shal l i ncl ude t hese r evi si ons i n t he pr oj ect
schedul e unt i l r evi si ons ar e submi t t ed, and f i nal changes and i mpact s have
been negot i at ed. I f t he Cont r act or has any obj ect i ons t o t he r evi si ons
f ur ni shed by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , advi se t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi t hi n 2
weeks of r ecei pt of t he r evi si ons. Regar dl ess of t he obj ect i ons, t he
Cont r act or shal l cont i nue t o updat e t he schedul e wi t h t he Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer ' s r evi si ons unt i l a mut ual agr eement i n t he r evi si ons i s r eached. I f
t he Cont r act or f ai l s t o submi t al t er nat i ve r evi si ons wi t hi n 2 weeks of
r ecei pt of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer ' s pr oposed r evi si ons, t he Cont r act or wi l l
be deemed t o have concur r ed wi t h t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer ' s pr oposed
r evi si ons. The pr oposed r evi si ons wi l l t hen be t he basi s f or an equi t abl e
adj ust ment f or per f or mance of t he wor k.
3. 10 OWNERSHI P OF FLOAT
Fl oat avai l abl e i n t he schedul e, at any t i me, shal l not be consi der ed f or t he
excl usi ve use of ei t her t he Gover nment or t he Cont r act or .
3. 11 TRANSFER OF SCHEDULE DATA I NTO RMS/ QCS
The Cont r act or shal l downl oad and upl oad t he schedul e dat a i nt o t he Resi dent
Management Syst em( RMS) pr i or t o RMS dat abases bei ng t r ansf er r ed t o t he
Gover nment and i s consi der ed t o be addi t i onal suppor t i ng dat a i n a f or mand
det ai l r equi r ed by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer pur suant t o FAR 52. 232- 5 -
Payment s under Fi xed- Pr i ce Const r uct i on Cont r act s. The r ecei pt of a pr oper
payment r equest pur suant t o FAR 52. 232- 27 - Pr ompt Payment f or Const r uct i on
Cont r act s i s cont i ngent upon t he Gover nment r ecei vi ng bot h accept abl e and
appr ovabl e har d copi es and el ect r oni c expor t f r omQCS of t he appl i cat i on f or
pr ogr ess payment .
SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
07/ 09

PART 1: GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 1 DEFI NI TI ONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 1. 1 Submi t t al Descr i pt i ons ( SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 1. 2 Appr ovi ng Aut hor i t y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. 1. 3 Wor k. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. 2 SUBMI TTALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. 3 SUBMI TTAL CLASSI FI CATI ON AND GOVERNMENT REVI EWPERI OD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. 3. 1 Desi gner of Recor d Appr oved ( DA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. 3. 2 Gover nment Appr oved. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. 3. 3 Gover nment Conf or mance Revi ew of Desi gn ( CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. 3. 4 Desi gner of Recor d Appr oved/ Gover nment Conf or mance Revi ew ( DA/ CR) . . . 6
1. 3. 5 Desi gner of Recor d Appr oved/ Gover nment Appr oved ( DA/ GA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1. 3. 6 I nf or mat i on Onl y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 4 PREPARATI ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 4. 1 Tr ansmi t t al For m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 5 QUANTI TY OF SUBMI TTALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 5. 1 Number of Sampl es SD- 04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 6 I NFORMATI ON ONLY SUBMI TTALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 7 VARI ATI ONS / SUBSTI TUTI ON REQUESTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1. 7. 1 Consi der i ng Var i at i ons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1. 7. 2 Pr oposi ng Var i at i ons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1. 7. 3 War r ant i ng That Var i at i ons Ar e Compat i bl e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1. 7. 4 Revi ew Schedul e I s Modi f i ed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1. 8 SUBMI TTAL REGI STER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1. 8. 1 Gover nment Pr ovi ded Submi t t al Regi st er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1. 8. 2 Use of Submi t t al Regi st er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1. 8. 3 Copi es Del i ver ed t o t he Gover nment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1. 9 SCHEDULI NG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1. 9. 1 Cont r act or Schedul e Dat es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1. 9. 2 Gover nment Revi ewed Desi gn or Ext ensi on of Desi gn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1. 10 GOVERNMENT APPROVI NG AUTHORI TY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1. 11 DI SAPPROVED OR REJ ECTED SUBMI TTALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1. 12 APPROVED/ ACCEPTED SUBMI TTALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1. 13 APPROVED SAMPLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1. 14 WI THHOLDI NG OF PAYMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1. 15 STAMPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
PART 2: PRODUCTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
PART 3: EXECUTI ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3. 1 APPROVED SAMPLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

SECTI ON 01 33 00 SUBMI TTAL PROCEDURES ( 07/ 09)
Page 2 of 12

PART 1: GENERAL
The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer may r equest submi t t al s i n addi t i on t o t hose
speci f i ed when deemed necessar y t o adequat el y descr i be t he wor k cover ed i n
t he r espect i ve sect i ons.
Uni t s of wei ght s and measur es used on al l submi t t al s ar e t o be t he same as
t hose used i n t he cont r act dr awi ngs.
Each submi t t al i s t o be compl et e and i n suf f i ci ent det ai l t o al l ow
det er mi nat i on of compl i ance wi t h cont r act r equi r ement s.
Cont r act or ' s Qual i t y Cont r ol ( CQC) Syst emManager and t he Desi gner of
Recor d, i f appl i cabl e, shal l check and appr ove al l i t ems pr i or t o submi t t al
and st amp, si gn, and dat e i ndi cat i ng act i on t aken. Pr oposed devi at i ons f r om
t he cont r act r equi r ement s ar e t o be cl ear l y i dent i f i ed.
I ncl ude wi t hi n submi t t al s i t ems such as: Cont r act or ' s, manuf act ur er ' s, or
f abr i cat or ' s dr awi ngs; descr i pt i ve l i t er at ur e i ncl udi ng ( but not l i mi t ed t o)
cat al og cut s, di agr ams, oper at i ng char t s or cur ves; t est r epor t s; t est
cyl i nder s; sampl es; O&M manual s( i ncl udi ng par t s l i st ) ; cer t i f i cat i ons;
war r ant i es; and ot her such r equi r ed submi t t al s.
Submi t t al s r equi r i ng Gover nment appr oval ar e t o be schedul ed and made pr i or
t o t he acqui si t i on of t he mat er i al or equi pment cover ed t her eby. Sampl es
r emai ni ng upon compl et i on of t he wor k shal l be pi cked up and di sposed of i n
accor dance wi t h manuf act ur er ' s Mat er i al Saf et y Dat a Sheet s ( MSDS) and i n
compl i ance wi t h exi st i ng l aws and r egul at i ons.
1. 1 DEFI NI TI ONS
1. 1. 1 Submi t t al Descr i pt i ons ( SD)
Submi t t al s r equi r ement s ar e speci f i ed i n t he t echni cal sect i ons. Submi t t al s
ar e i dent i f i ed by Submi t t al Descr i pt i on ( SD) number s and t i t l es as f ol l ows:
Submi t t al s r equi r ed pr i or t o commenci ng const r uct i on or t he st ar t of t he
next maj or phase of t he const r uct i on on a mul t i - phase cont r act .
SD- 02 Shop Dr awi ngs
Dr awi ngs, di agr ams and schedul es speci f i cal l y pr epar ed t o i l l ust r at e some
por t i on of t he wor k.
Di agr ams and i nst r uct i ons f r oma manuf act ur er or f abr i cat or f or use i n
pr oduci ng t he pr oduct and as ai ds t o t he Cont r act or f or i nt egr at i ng t he
pr oduct or syst emi nt o t he pr oj ect .
Dr awi ngs pr epar ed by or f or t he Cont r act or t o show how mul t i pl e syst ems
and i nt er di sci pl i nar y wor k wi l l be coor di nat ed.

Page 3 of 12
SD- 03 Pr oduct Dat a
Cat al og cut s, i l l ust r at i ons, schedul es, di agr ams, per f or mance char t s,
i nst r uct i ons and br ochur es i l l ust r at i ng si ze, physi cal appear ance and
ot her char act er i st i cs of mat er i al s, syst ems or equi pment f or some por t i on
of t he wor k.
Sampl es of war r ant y l anguage when t he cont r act r equi r es ext ended pr oduct
war r ant i es.
SD- 04 Sampl es
Fabr i cat ed or unf abr i cat ed physi cal exampl es of mat er i al s, equi pment or
wor kmanshi p t hat i l l ust r at e f unct i onal and aest het i c char act er i st i cs of a
mat er i al or pr oduct and est abl i sh st andar ds by whi ch t he wor k can be
j udged.
Col or sampl es f r omt he manuf act ur er ' s st andar d l i ne ( or cust omcol or
sampl es i f speci f i ed) t o be used i n sel ect i ng or appr ovi ng col or s f or t he
pr oj ect .
Fi el d sampl es and mockups const r uct ed on t he pr oj ect si t e est abl i sh
st andar ds by whi ch t he ensur i ng wor k can be j udged. I ncl udes assembl i es or
por t i ons of assembl i es whi ch ar e t o be i ncor por at ed i nt o t he pr oj ect and
t hose whi ch wi l l be r emoved at concl usi on of t he wor k.
SD- 05 Desi gn Dat a
Desi gn cal cul at i ons, mi x desi gns, anal yses or ot her dat a per t ai ni ng t o a
par t of wor k.
SD- 06 Test Repor t s
Repor t si gned by aut hor i zed of f i ci al of t est i ng l abor at or y t hat a
mat er i al , pr oduct or syst emi dent i cal t o t he mat er i al , pr oduct or syst em
t o be pr ovi ded has been t est ed i n accor d wi t h speci f i ed r equi r ement s.
( Test i ng must have been wi t hi n t hr ee year s of dat e of cont r act awar d f or
t he pr oj ect . )
Repor t whi ch i ncl udes f i ndi ngs of a t est r equi r ed t o be per f or med by t he
Cont r act or on an act ual por t i on of t he wor k or pr ot ot ype pr epar ed f or t he
pr oj ect bef or e shi pment t o j ob si t e.
Repor t whi ch i ncl udes f i ndi ng of a t est made at t he j ob si t e or on sampl e
t aken f r omt he j ob si t e, on por t i on of wor k dur i ng or af t er i nst al l at i on.
I nvest i gat i on r epor t s.
Dai l y l ogs and checkl i st s.
Fi nal accept ance t est and oper at i onal t est pr ocedur e.
St at ement s pr i nt ed on t he manuf act ur er ' s l et t er head and si gned by
r esponsi bl e of f i ci al s of manuf act ur er of pr oduct , syst emor mat er i al

Page 4 of 12
at t est i ng t hat pr oduct , syst emor mat er i al meet s speci f i cat i on
r equi r ement s. Must be dat ed af t er awar d of pr oj ect cont r act and cl ear l y
name t he pr oj ect .
Document r equi r ed of Cont r act or , or of a manuf act ur er , suppl i er , i nst al l er
or subcont r act or t hr ough Cont r act or , t he pur pose of whi ch i s t o f ur t her
qual i t y of or der l y pr ogr essi on of a por t i on of t he wor k by document i ng
pr ocedur es, accept abi l i t y of met hods or per sonnel qual i f i cat i ons.
Conf i ned space ent r y per mi t s.
Text of post ed oper at i ng i nst r uct i ons.
SD- 08 Manuf act ur er ' s I nst r uct i ons
Pr epr i nt ed mat er i al descr i bi ng i nst al l at i on of a pr oduct , syst emor
mat er i al , i ncl udi ng speci al not i ces and Mat er i al Saf et y Dat a sheet s
concer ni ng i mpedances, hazar ds and saf et y pr ecaut i ons.
SD- 09 Manuf act ur er ' s Fi el d Repor t s
Document at i on of t he t est i ng and ver i f i cat i on act i ons t aken by
manuf act ur er ' s r epr esent at i ve at t he j ob si t e, i n t he vi ci ni t y of t he j ob
si t e, or on a sampl e t aken f r omt he j ob si t e, on a por t i on of t he wor k,
dur i ng or af t er i nst al l at i on, t o conf i r mcompl i ance wi t h manuf act ur er ' s
st andar ds or i nst r uct i ons. The document at i on must be si gned by an
aut hor i zed of f i ci al of a t est i ng l abor at or y or agency and must st at e t he
t est r esul t s; and i ndi cat e whet her t he mat er i al , pr oduct , or syst emhas
passed or f ai l ed t he t est .
Fact or y t est r epor t s.
SD- 10 Oper at i on and Mai nt enance Dat a
Dat a t hat i s f ur ni shed by t he manuf act ur er , or t he syst empr ovi der , t o t he
equi pment oper at i ng and mai nt enance per sonnel , i ncl udi ng manuf act ur er ' s
hel p and pr oduct l i ne document at i on necessar y t o mai nt ai n and i nst al l
equi pment . Thi s dat a i s needed by oper at i ng and mai nt enance per sonnel f or
t he saf e and ef f i ci ent oper at i on, mai nt enance and r epai r of t he i t em.
Thi s dat a i s i nt ended t o be i ncor por at ed i n an oper at i ons and mai nt enance
manual or cont r ol syst em.
Document at i on t o r ecor d compl i ance wi t h t echni cal or admi ni st r at i ve
r equi r ement s or t o est abl i sh an admi ni st r at i ve mechani sm.
Speci al r equi r ement s necessar y t o pr oper l y cl ose out a const r uct i on
cont r act . For exampl e, Recor d Dr awi ngs and as- bui l t dr awi ngs. Al so,
submi t t al r equi r ement s necessar y t o pr oper l y cl ose out a maj or phase of
const r uct i on on a mul t i - phase cont r act .
1. 1. 2 Appr ovi ng Aut hor i t y
Of f i ce or desi gnat ed per son aut hor i zed t o appr ove submi t t al .
Page 5 of 12

1. 1. 3 Wor k
As used i n t hi s sect i on, on- and of f - si t e const r uct i on r equi r ed by cont r act
document s, i ncl udi ng l abor necessar y t o pr oduce submi t t al s, const r uct i on,
mat er i al s, pr oduct s, equi pment , and syst ems i ncor por at ed or t o be
i ncor por at ed i n such const r uct i on.
1. 2 SUBMI TTALS
Submi t t he f ol l owi ng i n accor dance wi t h t hi s sect i on.
Submi t t al r egi st er ; G
1. 3 SUBMI TTAL CLASSI FI CATI ON AND GOVERNMENT REVI EWPERI OD
Submi t t al s ar e cl assi f i ed as f ol l ows:
1. 3. 1 Desi gner of Recor d Appr oved ( DA)
Desi gner of Recor d ( DOR) appr oval i s r equi r ed f or ext ensi ons of desi gn,
cr i t i cal mat er i al s, any devi at i ons f r omt he sol i ci t at i on, t he accept ed
pr oposal , or t he compl et ed desi gn, equi pment whose compat i bi l i t y wi t h t he
ent i r e syst emmust be checked, and ot her i t ems as desi gnat ed by t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . Wi t hi n t he t er ms of t he Cont r act Cl ause ent i t l ed
" Speci f i cat i ons and Dr awi ngs f or Const r uct i on, " t hey ar e consi der ed t o be
" shop dr awi ngs. " Cont r act or t o pr ovi de t he Gover nment wi t h t he number of
copi es desi gnat ed her ei naf t er of al l DOR appr oved submi t t al s. The
Gover nment may r evi ew any or al l Desi gner of Recor d appr oved submi t t al s f or
conf or mance t o t he Sol i ci t at i on, Accept ed Pr oposal and t he compl et ed desi gn.
The Gover nment wi l l r evi ew al l submi t t al s desi gnat ed as devi at i ng f r omt he
Sol i ci t at i on or Accept ed Pr oposal , as descr i bed bel ow. Desi gn submi t t al s t o
be i n accor dance wi t h Sect i on DESI GN AFTER AWARD. Gener al l y, desi gn
submi t t al s shoul d be i dent i f i ed as SD- 05 Desi gn Dat a submi t t al s.
For t he pur poses of schedul i ng, t he cont r act or shal l al l ow a mi ni mumof 21
cal endar days f or gover nment r evi ew.
1. 3. 2 Gover nment Appr oved
Gover nment appr oval i s r equi r ed f or any devi at i ons f r omt he Sol i ci t at i on or
Accept ed Pr oposal and ot her i t ems as desi gnat ed by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
Wi t hi n t he t er ms of t he Cont r act Cl ause ent i t l ed " Speci f i cat i ons and
Dr awi ngs f or Const r uct i on, " t hey ar e consi der ed t o be " shop dr awi ngs. "
For t he pur poses of schedul i ng, t he cont r act or shal l al l ow 30 days f or
gover nment r evi ew.
1. 3. 3 Gover nment Conf or mance Revi ew of Desi gn ( CR)
The Gover nment wi l l r evi ew al l i nt er medi at e and f i nal desi gn submi t t al s f or
conf or mance wi t h t he t echni cal r equi r ement s of t he sol i ci t at i on. Sect i on
DESI GN AFTER AWARD cover s t he desi gn submi t t al and r evi ew pr ocess i n det ai l .

Page 6 of 12
Revi ew wi l l be onl y f or conf or mance wi t h t he appl i cabl e codes, st andar ds and
cont r act r equi r ement s. Desi gn dat a i ncl udes t he desi gn document s descr i bed
i n Sect i on DESI GN AFTER AWARD. Gener al l y, desi gn submi t t al s shoul d be
i dent i f i ed as SD- 05 Desi gn Dat a submi t t al s.
1. 3. 4 Desi gner of Recor d Appr oved/ Gover nment Conf or mance Revi ew ( DA/ CR)
1. 3. 4. 1 Devi at i ons t o t he Accept ed Desi gn
Desi gner of Recor d appr oval and t he Gover nment ' s concur r ence ar e r equi r ed
f or any pr oposed devi at i on f r omt he accept ed desi gn whi ch st i l l compl i es
wi t h t he cont r act bef or e t he Cont r act or i s aut hor i zed t o pr oceed wi t h
mat er i al acqui si t i on or i nst al l at i on. Wi t hi n t he t er ms of t he Cont r act
Cl ause ent i t l ed " Speci f i cat i ons and Dr awi ngs f or Const r uct i on" , t hey ar e
consi der ed t o be " shop dr awi ngs. " I f necessar y t o f aci l i t at e t he pr oj ect
schedul e, t he Cont r act or and t he DOR may di scuss a submi t t al pr oposi ng a
devi at i on wi t h t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer ' s Repr esent at i ve pr i or t o of f i ci al l y
submi t t i ng i t t o t he Gover nment . However , t he Gover nment r eser ves t he r i ght
t o r evi ew t he submi t t al bef or e pr ovi di ng an opi ni on, i f deemed necessar y.
I n any case, t he Gover nment wi l l not f or mal l y agr ee t o or pr ovi de a
pr el i mi nar y opi ni on on any devi at i on wi t hout t he DOR' s appr oval or
r ecommended appr oval . The Gover nment r eser ves t he r i ght t o non- concur wi t h
any devi at i on f r omt he desi gn, whi ch may i mpact f ur ni t ur e, f ur ni shi ngs,
equi pment sel ect i ons or oper at i ons deci si ons t hat wer e made, based on t he
r evi ewed and concur r ed desi gn.
1. 3. 4. 2 Subst i t ut i ons
Unl ess pr ohi bi t ed or pr ovi ded f or ot her wi se el sewher e i n t he Cont r act , wher e
t he accept ed cont r act pr oposal named pr oduct s, syst ems, mat er i al s or
equi pment by manuf act ur er , br and name and/ or by model number or ot her
speci f i c i dent i f i cat i on, and t he Cont r act or desi r es t o subst i t ut e
manuf act ur er or model af t er awar d, submi t a r equest ed subst i t ut i on f or
Gover nment concur r ence. I ncl ude subst ant i at i on, i dent i f yi ng i nf or mat i on and
t he DOR' s appr oval , as meet i ng t he cont r act r equi r ement s and t hat i t i s
equal i n f unct i on, per f or mance, qual i t y and sal i ent f eat ur es t o t hat i n t he
accept ed cont r act pr oposal .
1. 3. 5 Desi gner of Recor d Appr oved/ Gover nment Appr oved ( DA/ GA)
I n addi t i on t o t he above st at ed r equi r ement s f or pr oposed devi at i ons t o t he
accept ed desi gn, bot h Desi gner of Recor d and Gover nment Appr oval and, wher e
appl i cabl e, a cont r act modi f i cat i on ar e r equi r ed bef or e t he Cont r act or i s
aut hor i zed t o pr oceed wi t h mat er i al acqui si t i on or i nst al l at i on f or any
pr oposed devi at i on t o t he cont r act ( t he sol i ci t at i on and/ or t he accept ed
pr oposal ) , whi ch const i t ut es a change t o t he cont r act t er ms. Wi t hi n t he
t er ms of t he Cont r act Cl ause ent i t l ed " Speci f i cat i ons and Dr awi ngs f or

Page 7 of 12
Const r uct i on" , t hey ar e consi der ed t o be " shop dr awi ngs" . The Gover nment
r eser ves t he r i ght t o accept or r ej ect any such pr oposed devi at i on at i t s
di scr et i on.
1. 3. 6 I nf or mat i on Onl y
For Desi gn- bui l d const r uct i on al l submi t t al s not r equi r i ng Desi gner of
Recor d or Gover nment appr oval wi l l be f or i nf or mat i on onl y. They ar e not
consi der ed t o be " shop dr awi ngs" wi t hi n t he t er ms of t he Cont r act Cl ause
r ef er r ed t o above.
days f or gover nment r evi ew.
1. 4 PREPARATI ON
1. 4. 1 Tr ansmi t t al For m
ENG For m4025 shal l be used f or al l t r ansmi t t al s. When QCS i s r equi r ed by
t he cont r act , t he cont r act or shal l use QCS t o gener at e t he t r ansmi t t al cover
sheet . Pr oper l y compl et e t hi s f or mby f i l l i ng out al l t he headi ng bl ank
spaces and i dent i f yi ng each i t emsubmi t t ed. Exer ci se speci al car e t o ensur e
pr oper l i st i ng of t he speci f i cat i on par agr aph and sheet number of t he
cont r act dr awi ngs per t i nent t o t he dat a submi t t ed f or each i t em.
1. 5 QUANTI TY OF SUBMI TTALS
Nor mal l y, 4 copi es of FI O submi t t al s wi l l be submi t t ed t o t he Gover nment ;
one copy wi l l be r et ur ned t o t he cont r act or and t he gover nment wi l l r et ai n
t he ot her t hr ee.
5 copi es of al l ot her submi t t al s wi l l be pr ovi ded t o t he gover nment ; one
copy wi l l be r et ur ned t o t he cont r act or and t he gover nment wi l l r et ai n t he
ot her copi es.
1. 5. 1 Number of Sampl es SD- 04
Submi t one sampl e, or t wo set s of sampl es showi ng r ange of var i at i on, of
each r equi r ed i t em. One appr oved sampl e or set of sampl es wi l l be r et ai ned
by appr ovi ng aut hor i t y and one wi l l be r et ur ned t o Cont r act or .
Submi t one sampl e panel or pr ovi de one sampl e i nst al l at i on wher e di r ect ed.
I ncl ude component s l i st ed i n t echni cal sect i on or as di r ect ed.
1. 6 I NFORMATI ON ONLY SUBMI TTALS
Nor mal l y submi t t al s f or i nf or mat i on onl y wi l l not be r et ur ned. Appr oval of
t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer i s not r equi r ed on i nf or mat i on onl y submi t t al s. The
Gover nment r eser ves t he r i ght t o r equi r e t he Cont r act or t o r esubmi t any i t em
f ound not t o compl y wi t h t he cont r act . Thi s does not r el i eve t he Cont r act or

Page 8 of 12
f r omt he obl i gat i on t o f ur ni sh mat er i al conf or mi ng t o t he pl ans and
speci f i cat i ons; wi l l not pr event t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer f r omr equi r i ng
r emoval and r epl acement of nonconf or mi ng mat er i al i ncor por at ed i n t he wor k;
and does not r el i eve t he Cont r act or of t he r equi r ement t o f ur ni sh sampl es
f or t est i ng by t he Gover nment l abor at or y or f or check t est i ng by t he
Gover nment i n t hose i nst ances wher e t he t echni cal speci f i cat i ons so
pr escr i be.
1. 7 VARI ATI ONS / SUBSTI TUTI ON REQUESTS
Var i at i ons f r omcont r act r equi r ement s r equi r e Gover nment appr oval pur suant
t o cont r act Cl ause FAR 52. 236- 21 and wi l l be consi der ed wher e advant ageous
t o Gover nment .
1. 7. 1 Consi der i ng Var i at i ons
Di scussi on wi t h Cont r act i ng Of f i cer pr i or t o submi ssi on wi l l hel p ensur e
f unct i onal and qual i t y r equi r ement s ar e met and mi ni mi ze r ej ect i ons and r e-
submi t t al s. When cont empl at i ng a var i at i on whi ch r esul t s i n l ower cost ,
consi der submi ssi on of t he var i at i on as a Val ue Engi neer i ng Change Pr oposal
( VECP) .
Speci f i cal l y poi nt out var i at i ons f r omcont r act r equi r ement s i n t r ansmi t t al
l et t er s. Fai l ur e t o poi nt out devi at i ons may r esul t i n t he Gover nment
r equi r i ng r ej ect i on and r emoval of such wor k at no addi t i onal cost t o t he
Gover nment .
1. 7. 2 Pr oposi ng Var i at i ons
When pr oposi ng var i at i on, check t he col umn " var i at i on" of ENG For m4025 f or
submi t t al s whi ch i ncl ude pr oposed devi at i ons r equest ed by t he Cont r act or .
Set f or t h i n wr i t i ng t he r eason f or any devi at i ons and annot at e such
devi at i ons on t he submi t t al . I f l ower cost i s a benef i t , al so i ncl ude an
est i mat e of t he cost savi ngs. The Gover nment r eser ves t he r i ght t o r esci nd
i nadver t ent appr oval of submi t t al s cont ai ni ng unnot ed devi at i ons.
1. 7. 3 War r ant i ng That Var i at i ons Ar e Compat i bl e
When del i ver i ng a var i at i on f or appr oval , Cont r act or war r ant s t hat t hi s
cont r act has been r evi ewed t o est abl i sh t hat t he var i at i on, i f i ncor por at ed,
wi l l be compat i bl e wi t h ot her el ement s of wor k.
1. 7. 4 Revi ew Schedul e I s Modi f i ed
I n addi t i on t o nor mal submi t t al r evi ew per i od, an addi t i onal 14 cal endar
days wi l l be al l owed f or consi der at i on by t he Gover nment of submi t t al s wi t h
var i at i ons ( i . e. i f t he submi t t al r evi ew per i od i s 30 days, t he r evi ew
per i od f or a var i at i on woul d be 44 days) .
1. 8 SUBMI TTAL REGI STER
The cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or r evi ewi ng t he pl ans and
speci f i cat i ons and devel opi ng a submi t t al r egi st er wi t hi n 30 cal endar days

Page 9 of 12
af t er Not i ce t o Pr oceed. The submi t t al r egi st er shal l be mai nt ai ned i n
accor dance wi t h Sect i on 01 45 01. 10 USACE QUALI TY CONTROL SYSTEM ( QCS) .
The appr oved submi t t al r egi st er wi l l ser ve as a schedul i ng document f or
submi t t al s and wi l l be used t o cont r ol submi t t al act i ons t hr oughout t he
cont r act per i od. Appr oval of t he submi t t al r egi st er by t he Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer does not r el i eve t he Cont r act or of suppl yi ng submi t t al s r equi r ed by
t he cont r act document s but whi ch have been omi t t ed f r omt he r egi st er .
On desi gn- bui l d pr oj ect s, t he Desi gner of Recor d shal l devel op a compl et e
l i st of submi t t al s dur i ng desi gn and i dent i f y r equi r ed submi t t al s i n t he
speci f i cat i ons, and use t he l i st t o pr epar e t he Submi t t al Regi st er .
1. 8. 1 Gover nment Pr ovi ded Submi t t al Regi st er
Nor mal l y, t he gover nment wi l l not pr ovi de a submi t t al r egi st er as par t of
t he cont r act . I f one i s pr ovi ded as par t of t he sol i ci t at i on, i t shal l be
consi der ed t he mi ni mumnumber of submi t t al s r equi r ed and t he cont r act or
shal l i ncor por at e t hose i t ems i nt o t hei r submi t t al r egi st er .
1. 8. 2 Use of Submi t t al Regi st er
Al l f i el ds on t he submi t t al r egi st er shal l be ut i l i zed by l i nki ng ever y
submi t t al i t emt o t he pr oj ect schedul e t o det er mi ne submi t t al needs dat es,
i ncl udi ng appr opr i at e mat er i al or der i ng and del i ver y per i ods.
1. 8. 3 Copi es Del i ver ed t o t he Gover nment
Del i ver t o t he Gover nment one updat ed copy of submi t t al r egi st er mont hl y or
unt i l al l submi t t al s have been sat i sf act or i l y compl et ed showi ng t he
Cont r act or act i on codes and act ual dat es wi t h Gover nment act i on codes.
Revi se t he submi t t al r egi st er when t he pr ogr ess schedul e i s r evi sed and
submi t bot h f or appr oval .
1. 9 SCHEDULI NG
Schedul e and submi t concur r ent l y submi t t al s cover i ng component i t ems f or mi ng
a syst emor i t ems t hat ar e i nt er r el at ed. I ncl ude cer t i f i cat i ons t o be
submi t t ed wi t h t he per t i nent dr awi ngs at t he same t i me. No del ay damages or
t i me ext ensi ons wi l l be al l owed f or t i me l ost i n l at e submi t t al s.
Coor di nat e schedul i ng, sequenci ng, pr epar i ng and pr ocessi ng of submi t t al s
wi t h per f or mance of wor k so t hat wor k wi l l not be del ayed by submi t t al
pr ocessi ng. Al l ow f or pot ent i al r esubmi t t al of r equi r ement s.
Car ef ul l y cont r ol pr ocur ement oper at i ons t o ensur e t hat each i ndi vi dual
submi t t al i s made on or bef or e t he Cont r act or schedul ed submi t t al dat e shown
on t he appr oved " Submi t t al Regi st er . "
1. 9. 1 Cont r act or Schedul e Dat es
Each submi t t al i t emmust be l i nked t o an act i vi t y i n t he pr ogr ess schedul e
such t hat t he f ol l owi ng dat es may be det er mi ned:

Page 10 of 12
Submi t t al needed by dat e: t he dat e t he submi t t al must be del i ver ed t o t he
gover nment so t hat r evi ew can be made i n accor dance wi t h par agr aph SUBMI TTAL
CLASSI FI CATI ON AND GOVERNMENT REVI EWPERI OD above.
Mat er i al needed by dat e: t he dat e mat er i al s/ equi pment / suppl i es must be on
t he j ob si t e t o al l ow t he act i vi t y t o pr oceed.
Submi t t al appr oval needed by dat e: t he dat e t he submi t t al must be compl et ed
t o al l ow mat er i al s/ equi pment t o be or der ed and shi pped. Thi s dat e i s
det er mi ned by subt r act i ng f r omt he mat er i al needed by dat e t he mat er i al
pr ocur ement per i od ( t he amount of t i me i t wi l l t ake t o del i ver t he i t emt o
t he j ob si t e) .
These dat es must be shown on t he submi t t al r egi st er
1. 9. 2 Gover nment Revi ewed Desi gn or Ext ensi on of Desi gn
The Gover nment wi l l r evi ew al l desi gn submi t t al s f or conf or mance wi t h t he
t echni cal r equi r ement s of t he sol i ci t at i on. Sect i on DESI GN AFTER AWARD
cover s t he desi gn submi t t al and r evi ew pr ocess i n det ai l . Gover nment r evi ew
i s r equi r ed f or devi at i on f r omt he compl et ed desi gn. Revi ew wi l l be onl y f or
conf or mance wi t h t he cont r act r equi r ement s. I ncl uded ar e onl y t hose
const r uct i on submi t t al s f or whi ch t he Desi gner of Recor d desi gn document s do
not i ncl ude enough det ai l t o ascer t ai n cont r act compl i ance.
The Gover nment may, but i s not r equi r ed, t o r evi ew ext ensi ons of desi gn such
as st r uct ur al st eel or r ei nf or cement shop dr awi ngs.
1. 10 GOVERNMENT APPROVI NG AUTHORI TY
When appr ovi ng aut hor i t y i s Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , t he Gover nment wi l l :
a. Not e dat e on whi ch submi t t al was r ecei ved.
b. Revi ew submi t t al s f or appr oval wi t hi n schedul i ng per i od speci f i ed and
onl y f or conf or mance wi t h pr oj ect desi gn concept s and compl i ance wi t h
cont r act document s.
c. I dent i f y r et ur ned submi t t al s wi t h one of t he act i ons def i ned i n
par agr aph ent i t l ed " Revi ew Not at i ons" and wi t h mar ki ngs appr opr i at e
f or act i on i ndi cat ed.
Upon compl et i on of r evi ew of submi t t al s r equi r i ng Gover nment appr oval , st amp
and dat e appr oved submi t t al s. One copy of t he submi t t al wi l l be r et ur ned t o
t he Cont r act or , al l ot her copi es of t he appr oved submi t t al wi l l be r et ai ned
by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
I f t he Gover nment per f or ms a conf or mance r evi ew of ot her Desi gner of Recor d
appr oved submi t t al s, t he submi t t al s wi l l be so i dent i f i ed and r et ur ned, as
descr i bed above.
1. 11 DI SAPPROVED OR REJ ECTED SUBMI TTALS

Page 11 of 12
Cont r act or shal l make cor r ect i ons r equi r ed by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . I f
t he Cont r act or consi der s any cor r ect i on or not at i on on t he r et ur ned
submi t t al s t o const i t ut e a change t o t he cont r act dr awi ngs or
speci f i cat i ons; not i ce as r equi r ed under t he cl ause ent i t l ed, " Changes" i s
t o be gi ven t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . Cont r act or i s r esponsi bl e f or t he
di mensi ons and desi gn of connect i on det ai l s and const r uct i on of wor k.
Fai l ur e t o poi nt out devi at i ons may r esul t i n t he Gover nment r equi r i ng
r ej ect i on and r emoval of such wor k at t he Cont r act or ' s expense.
I f changes ar e necessar y t o submi t t al s, t he Cont r act or shal l make such
r evi si ons and submi ssi on of t he submi t t al s i n accor dance wi t h t he pr ocedur es
above. No i t emof wor k r equi r i ng a submi t t al change i s t o be accompl i shed
unt i l t he changed submi t t al s ar e appr oved.
Al l r esubmi t t al s shal l be pr ovi ded wi t hi n f i f t een ( 15) days of t he r ecei pt
of t he Gover nment comment s or t he or i gi nal r et ur ned submi t t al wi t h
Gover nment r evi ew comment s. Resubmi t t al s shal l onl y addr ess t he i t em( s)
i dent i f i ed on t he or i gi nal submi t t al and shal l not i ncl ude new i t ems t hese
must be pr ovi ded on a separ at e t r ansmi t t al .
1. 12 APPROVED/ ACCEPTED SUBMI TTALS
The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer ' s appr oval or accept ance of submi t t al s i s not be
const r ued as a compl et e check, and i ndi cat es onl y t hat desi gn, gener al
met hod of const r uct i on, mat er i al s, det ai l i ng and ot her i nf or mat i on appear t o
meet t he Sol i ci t at i on and Accept ed Pr oposal . Appr oval or accept ance wi l l not
r el i eve t he Cont r act or of t he r esponsi bi l i t y f or any er r or whi ch may exi st ,
as t he Cont r act or under t he Cont r act or Qual i t y Cont r ol ( CQC) r equi r ement s of
t hi s cont r act i s r esponsi bl e f or compl yi ng wi t h t he cont r act document s.
Af t er submi t t al s have been appr oved or accept ed by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer ,
no r esubmi t t al f or t he pur pose of subst i t ut i ng mat er i al s or equi pment wi l l
be consi der ed unl ess accompani ed by an expl anat i on of why a subst i t ut i on i s
necessar y.
1. 13 APPROVED SAMPLES
Appr oval of a sampl e i s onl y f or t he char act er i st i cs or use named i n such
appr oval and i s not be const r ued t o change or modi f y any cont r act
r equi r ement s. Bef or e submi t t i ng sampl es, t he Cont r act or shal l assur e t hat
t he mat er i al s or equi pment wi l l be avai l abl e i n quant i t i es r equi r ed i n t he
pr oj ect . No change or subst i t ut i on wi l l be per mi t t ed af t er a sampl e has been
appr oved.
Mat ch t he appr oved sampl es f or Mat er i al s and equi pment i ncor por at ed i n t he
wor k. I f r equest ed, appr oved sampl es, i ncl udi ng t hose whi ch may be damaged
i n t est i ng, wi l l be r et ur ned t o t he Cont r act or , at hi s expense, upon
compl et i on of t he cont r act . Sampl es not appr oved wi l l al so be r et ur ned t o
t he Cont r act or at i t s expense, i f so r equest ed.
Fai l ur e of any mat er i al s t o pass t he speci f i ed t est s wi l l be suf f i ci ent
cause f or r ef usal t o consi der , under t hi s cont r act , any f ur t her sampl es of
t he same br and or make of t hat mat er i al . Gover nment r eser ves t he r i ght t o
di sappr oved any mat er i al or equi pment whi ch pr evi ousl y has pr oved

Page 12 of 12
unsat i sf act or y i n ser vi ce.
Sampl es of var i ous mat er i al s or equi pment del i ver ed on t he si t e or i n pl ace
may be t aken by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer f or t est i ng. Sampl es f ai l i ng t o meet
cont r act r equi r ement s wi l l aut omat i cal l y voi d pr evi ous appr oval s, and t he
Cont r act or shal l r epl ace such mat er i al s or equi pment t o meet cont r act
r equi r ement s.
Appr oval of t he Cont r act or ' s sampl es by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer does not
r el i eve t he Cont r act or of hi s r esponsi bi l i t i es under t he cont r act .
1. 14 WI THHOLDI NG OF PAYMENT
No payment f or mat er i al s i ncor por at ed i n t he wor k wi l l be made i f al l
r equi r ed appr oval s have not been obt ai ned. No payment wi l l be made f or any
mat er i al s i ncor por at ed i nt o t he wor k f or any conf or mance r evi ew submi t t al s
or i nf or mat i on onl y submi t t al s f ound t o cont ai n er r or s or devi at i ons f r om
t he Sol i ci t at i on or Accept ed Pr oposal .
1. 15 STAMPS
For desi gn- bui l d const r uct i on, bot h t he Cont r act or Qual i t y Cont r ol Syst em
Manager and t he Desi gner of Recor d ar e t o st amp and si gn t o cer t i f y t hat t he
submi t t al meet s cont r act r equi r ement s.

PART 2: PRODUCTS
Not Used

PART 3: EXECUTI ON
3. 1 APPROVED SAMPLES
Not Used
- - End of Sect i on -
SECTION 01 35 26

SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS

(11/12)

PART 1: GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 1 GENERAL REQUI REMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 2 REQUI RED COMPLI ANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 3 REFERENCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 4 PAYMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 5 SUBMI TTALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 6 DEFI NI TI ONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. 7 ALCOHOL AND DRUGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. 8 SI TE QUALI FI CATI ONS, DUTI ES AND MEETI NGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. 8. 1 Per sonnel Qual i f i cat i ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. 8. 2 Per sonnel Dut i es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. 8. 3 Meet i ngs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1. 9 I D/ I Q & TASK ORDER REQUI REMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 10 ACCI DENT PREVENTI ON PLAN ( APP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 10. 1 EM 385- 1- 1 Cont ent s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. 11 ACTI VI TY HAZARD ANALYSI S ( AHA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1. 12 DI SPLAY OF SAFETY I NFORMATI ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1. 13 SI TE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERI ALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1. 14 EMERGENCY MEDI CAL TREATMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1. 15 REPORTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1. 15. 1 Acci dent Repor t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1. 15. 2 Acci dent Not i f i cat i on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1. 15. 3 Mont hl y Exposur e Repor t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1. 15. 4 Cr ane Repor t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1. 16 HOT WORK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PART 2: PRODUCTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PART 3: EXECUTI ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3. 1 CONSTRUCTI ON AND/ OR OTHER WORK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3. 1. 1 Requi r ed Per sonal Pr ot ect i ve Cl ot hi ng and Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3. 1. 2 Hazar dous Mat er i al Excl usi ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3. 1. 3 Unf or eseen Hazar dous Mat er i al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3. 2 FALL HAZARD PROTECTI ON AND PREVENTI ON PROGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3. 2. 1 Tr ai ni ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3. 2. 2 Fal l Pr ot ect i on Equi pment and Syst ems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3. 2. 3 Per sonal Fal l Ar r est Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3. 2. 4 Fal l Pr ot ect i on f or Roof i ng Wor k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3. 2. 5 Exi st i ng Anchor age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3. 2. 6 Hor i zont al Li f el i nes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3. 2. 7 Guar dr ai l s and Saf et y Net s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3. 2. 8 Rescue and Evacuat i on Pr ocedur es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3. 3 EQUI PMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3. 3. 1 Mat er i al Handl i ng Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3. 3. 2 Wei ght Handl i ng Equi pment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3. 4 EXCAVATI ONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3. 4. 1 Ut i l i t y Locat i ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3. 4. 2 Ut i l i t y Locat i on Ver i f i cat i on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3. 4. 3 Shor i ng Syst ems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3. 4. 4 Tr enchi ng Machi ner y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3. 5 UTI LI TI ES WI THI N CONCRETE SLABS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3. 6 ELECTRI CAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3. 6. 1 Conduct of El ect r i cal Wor k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3. 6. 2 Por t abl e Ext ensi on Cor ds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3. 7 WORK I N CONFI NED SPACES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SECTI ON 01 35 26 Saf et y & Occupat i onal Heal t h Requi r ement s ( 11/ 12)
PART 1: GENERAL
1. 1 GENERAL REQUI REMENTS
The Cont r act or shal l compl y wi t h al l appl i cabl e l ocal , st at e, and nat i onal
( host nat i on) l aws; t hi s speci f i cat i on; and t he l at est EM 385- 1- 1, U. S. Ar my
Cor ps of Engi neer s SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUI REMENTS MANUAL.
Cont r act or s ar e t he Cont r ol l i ng Aut hor i t y, r esponsi bl e f or al l wor k si t e
saf et y and heal t h, i ncl udi ng t hat of subcont r act or s and shal l i nf or mal l
subcont r act or s of t he saf et y pr ovi si ons under t he t er ms of t he cont r act and
t he penal t i es f or noncompl i ance, coor di nat i ng t he wor k t o pr event one cr af t
f r omi nt er f er i ng wi t h or cr eat i ng hazar dous wor ki ng condi t i ons f or ot her
cr af t s, and i nspect i ng subcont r act or oper at i ons t o ensur e t hat acci dent
pr event i on r esponsi bi l i t i es ar e bei ng car r i ed out .
1. 2 REQUI RED COMPLI ANCE
Fai l ur e t o compl y wi t h t he r equi r ement s of t hi s cont r act , i ncl udi ng t he
cont r act or s Acci dent Pr event i on Pl an af t er i t s accept ance by t he Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer , wi l l be consi der ed suf f i ci ent cause f or st oppi ng any or al l wor k
unt i l sat i sf act or y compl i ance has been achi eved.
Al l Qual i t y Cont r ol , Saf et y, Super i nt endent s, and cont r act or / subcont r act or
per sonnel ar e subj ect t o r emoval at any t i me based on t he sol e di scr et i on of
t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer f or noncompl i ance wi t h t hese r equi r ement s,
i ncl udi ng f ai l ur e t o per f or mt he dut i es pr escr i bed by t he cont r act . Removal
shal l not be subj ect t o appeal by t he cont r act or . I f t he SSHO i s di smi ssed,
no const r uct i on wor k shal l be per f or med pendi ng appr oval of a sui t abl e
r epl acement .
The Cont r act or shal l be sol el y r esponsi bl e f or any del ays or addi t i onal
cost s i ncur r ed as a r esul t of any wor k st oppage, r emoval or di smi ssal of any
per sonnel f or noncompl i ance wi t h t hese r equi r ement s.
1. 3 REFERENCES
AMERI CAN SOCI ETY OF SAFETY ENGI NEERS ( ASSE/ SAFE)
ASSE/ SAFE A10. 32 Fal l Pr ot ect i on
ASSE/ SAFE A10. 34 Pr ot ect i on of t he Publ i c on or Adj acent t o
Const r uct i on Si t es
ASSE/ SAFE Z359. 1 Saf et y Requi r ement s f or Per sonal Fal l Ar r est
Syst ems, Subsyst ems and Component s
ASME I NTERNATI ONAL ( ASME)
ASME B30. 22 Ar t i cul at i ng BoomCr anes
ASME B30. 3 Const r uct i on Tower Cr anes
ASME B30. 5 Mobi l e and Locomot i ve Cr anes
ASME B30. 8 Fl oat i ng Cr anes and Fl oat i ng Der r i cks
Page 3 of 18
NATI ONAL FI RE PROTECTI ON ASSOCI ATI ON ( NFPA)
NFPA 10 St andar d f or Por t abl e Fi r e Ext i ngui sher s
NFPA 241 Saf eguar di ng Const r uct i on, Al t er at i on, and
Demol i t i on Oper at i ons
NFPA 51B Fi r e Pr event i on Dur i ng Wel di ng, Cut t i ng, and Ot her
Hot Wor k
NFPA 70 Nat i onal El ect r i cal Code
NFPA 70E El ect r i cal Saf et y i n t he Wor kpl ace
U. S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGI NEERS ( USACE)
EM 385- 1- 1 Saf et y Saf et y and Heal t h Requi r ement s
U. S. NATI ONAL ARCHI VES AND RECORDS ADMI NI STRATI ON ( NARA)
10 CFR 20 St andar ds f or Pr ot ect i on Agai nst Radi at i on
29 CFR 1910 Occupat i onal Saf et y and Heal t h St andar ds
29 CFR 1910. 146 Per mi t - r equi r ed Conf i ned Spaces
29 CFR 1915 Conf i ned and Encl osed Spaces and Ot her Danger ous
At mospher es i n Shi pyar d Empl oyment
29 CFR 1919 Gear Cer t i f i cat i on
29 CFR 1926 Saf et y and Heal t h Regul at i ons f or Const r uct i on
29 CFR 1926. 500 Fal l Pr ot ect i on
1. 4 PAYMENT
Separ at e payment wi l l not be made f or compl i ance wi t h t hi s speci f i cat i on,
and al l associ at ed cost s wi l l be i ncl uded i n t he appl i cabl e Bi d Schedul e
uni t or l ump- sumpr i ces.
1. 5 SUBMI TTALS
submi t t al s not havi ng a " G" desi gnat i on ar e f or Cont r act or Qual i t y appr oval .
Gover nment accept ance i s r equi r ed f or submi t t al s wi t h a " G, A" desi gnat i on.
When used, a desi gnat i on f ol l owi ng t he " G" desi gnat i on i dent i f i es t he of f i ce
t hat wi l l r evi ew t he submi t t al f or t he Gover nment .
The f ol l owi ng shal l be submi t t ed i n accor dance wi t h Sect i on 01 33 00
SUBMI TTAL PROCEDURES:
1. Acci dent Pr event i on Pl an ( APP) ; G, A
2. Act i vi t y Hazar d Anal ysi s ( AHA) : G, A
3. Cr ane Cr i t i cal Li f t Pl an; G, A
4. Pr oof of qual i f i cat i on f or Cr ane Oper at or s; G, A
SD- 06 Test Repor t s
1. Repor t s: Submi t r epor t s as t hei r i nci dence occur s, i n accor dance wi t h
t he r equi r ement s of t he par agr aph ent i t l ed, " Repor t s. "
2. Acci dent Repor t s
3. Mont hl y Exposur e Repor t s
4. Cr ane Repor t s
5. Regul at or y Ci t at i ons and Vi ol at i ons
Page 4 of 18
1. Conf i ned Space Ent r y Per mi t
2. Hot Wor k Per mi t
3. Li cense Cer t i f i cat es
1. 6 DEFI NI TI ONS
a. Compet ent Per son f or Fal l Pr ot ect i on. A per son who i s capabl e of
i dent i f yi ng hazar dous or danger ous condi t i ons i n t he per sonal f al l ar r est
syst emor any component t her eof , as wel l as t hei r appl i cat i on and use wi t h
r el at ed equi pment , and has t he aut hor i t y t o t ake pr ompt cor r ect i ve measur es
t o el i mi nat e t he hazar ds of f al l i ng.
b. Hi gh Vi si bi l i t y Acci dent . Any mi shap whi ch may gener at e publ i ci t y
and/ or hi gh vi si bi l i t y.
c. Medi cal Tr eat ment . Tr eat ment admi ni st er ed by a physi ci an or by
r egi st er ed pr of essi onal per sonnel under t he st andi ng or der s of a physi ci an.
Medi cal t r eat ment does not i ncl ude f i r st ai d t r eat ment even t hr ough pr ovi ded
by a physi ci an or r egi st er ed per sonnel .
d. Recor dabl e I nj ur i es or I l l nesses. Any wor k- r el at ed i nj ur y or i l l ness
t hat r esul t s i n:
( 1) Deat h, r egar dl ess of t he t i me bet ween t he i nj ur y and deat h, or t he
l engt h of t he i l l ness;
( 2) Days away f r omwor k ( any t i me l ost af t er day of i nj ur y/ i l l ness
onset ) ;
( 3) Rest r i ct ed wor k;
( 4) Tr ansf er t o anot her j ob;
( 5) Medi cal t r eat ment beyond f i r st ai d;
( 6) Loss of consci ousness; or
( 7) A si gni f i cant i nj ur y or i l l ness di agnosed by a physi ci an or ot her
l i censed heal t h car e pr of essi onal , even i f i t di d not r esul t i n ( 1)
t hr ough ( 6) above.
e. " USACE" pr oper t y and equi pment speci f i ed i n USACE EM 385- 1- 1 shoul d be
i nt er pr et ed as Gover nment pr oper t y and equi pment .
1. 7 ALCOHOL AND DRUGS
Al cohol and i l l egal dr ugs shal l not be al l owed on t he j ob si t e.
The cont r act or shal l :
( 1) Ensur e t hat no empl oyee, i ncl udi ng t hose of subcont r act or s or any
ot her vi si t or t o t he j ob si t e uses i l l egal dr ugs or consumes al cohol
dur i ng wor k hour s.
( 2) Af t er acci dent s, col l ect bl ood, ur i ne, or sal i va speci mens and t est
t he i nj ur ed and i nvol ved empl oyees f or t he i nf l uence of dr ugs and
al cohol . A copy of t he t est shal l be made avai l abl e t o t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer upon r equest .
1. 8 SI TE QUALI FI CATI ONS, DUTI ES AND MEETI NGS
Page 5 of 18
1. 8. 1 Per sonnel Qual i f i cat i ons
1. 8. 1. 1 Si t e Saf et y and Heal t h Of f i cer ( SSHO)
Pr ovi de a si t e Saf et y and Heal t h Of f i cer ( SSHO) t o per f or msaf et y and
occupat i onal heal t h management , sur vei l l ance, i nspect i ons, and saf et y
enf or cement f or t he Cont r act or . The SSHO shal l have a mi ni mumof 5 year s
saf et y wor k on si mi l ar pr oj ect s; 30- hour OSHA const r uct i on saf et y cl ass*
wi t hi n t he l ast 5 year s; and an aver age of at l east 24 hour s of f or mal
saf et y t r ai ni ng each year f or t he past 5 year s.
I f t he or i gi nal cont r act or t ask or der pr i ce exceeds 1. 5 Mi l l i on Eur os or
1. 5 Mi l l i on US Dol l ar s, t he SSHO shal l be assi gned no ot her dut i es. The
SSHO may be assi gned ot her dut i es i f t he cont r act or t ask or der pr i ce does
not exceed 1. 5 Mi l l i on Eur os or 1. 5 Mi l l i on US Dol l ar s onl y wi t h t he pr i or
appr oval of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . For I D/ I Q or t ask or der cont r act s, see
al so Par agr aph 1. 9.
* I f Host Nat i on equi val ent t r ai ni ng i s subst i t ut ed, cour se i nf or mat i on and
descr i pt i on shal l be submi t t ed t hr ough t he COR t o t he Eur ope Di st r i ct Saf et y
Manager f or r evi ew of accept abi l i t y pr i or t o t he appoi nt ment of t he SSHO.
1. 8. 1. 2 Compet ent Per son f or Conf i ned Space Ent r y
Pr ovi de a Conf i ned Space Compet ent Per son ( CSCP) meet i ng t he r equi r ement s of
EM 385- 1- 1 who i s assi gned i n wr i t i ng
1. 8. 1. 3 Cr ane Oper at or s
Meet t he cr ane oper at or s r equi r ement s i n USACE EM 385- 1- 1, Sect i on 16 and
Appendi x I . I n addi t i on, f or mobi l e cr anes wi t h Or i gi nal Equi pment
Manuf act ur er ( OEM) r at ed capaci t i es of 50, 000 pounds or gr eat er , desi gnat e
cr ane oper at or as qual i f i ed by a sour ce t hat qual i f i es cr ane oper at or s ( i . e.
uni on, gover nment agency, or or gani zat i on t hat t est s and qual i f i es cr ane
oper at or s) . Pr ovi de pr oof of cur r ent qual i f i cat i on.
1. 8. 2 Per sonnel Dut i es
1. 8. 2. 1 Si t e Saf et y and Heal t h Of f i cer ( SSHO)
The Si t e Saf et y and Heal t h Of f i cer ( SSHO) shal l be at t he wor k si t e at al l
t i mes and shal l
( 1) Conduct dai l y saf et y and heal t h i nspect i ons and mai nt ai n a wr i t t en
l og whi ch i ncl udes ar ea/ oper at i on i nspect ed, dat e of i nspect i on,
i dent i f i ed hazar ds, r ecommended cor r ect i ve act i ons, est i mat ed and
act ual dat es of cor r ect i ons. Saf et y i nspect i on l ogs shal l be
at t ached t o t he Cont r act or s' dai l y qual i t y cont r ol r epor t .
( 2) Conduct mi shap i nvest i gat i ons and compl et e r equi r ed r epor t s.
Mai nt ai n an acci dent / i nj ur y l og such as t he OSHA For m300 or host
nat i on equi val ent , and Dai l y Pr oduct i on r epor t s f or pr i me and sub-
cont r act or s.
( 3) Mai nt ai n appl i cabl e saf et y r ef er ence mat er i al on t he j ob si t e.
( 4) At t end t he pr e- const r uct i on conf er ence, pr e- wor k meet i ngs i ncl udi ng
pr epar at or y i nspect i on meet i ng, and per i odi c i n- pr ogr ess meet i ngs.
Page 6 of 18
( 5) I mpl ement and enf or ce accept ed APP s and AHA s. Pr i or t o commenci ng
a new f eat ur e of wor k, conduct t r ai ni ng f or al l af f ect ed empl oyees
based on t he AHA.
( 6) Conduct or i ent at i on f or new empl oyees ( pr i me and subcont r act or ) of
speci f i c si t e hazar ds bef or e t hey begi n wor k. Document at i on of t hi s
or i ent at i on shal l be kept on f i l e at t he pr oj ect si t e.
( 7) Mai nt ai n a saf et y and heal t h def i ci ency t r acki ng syst emt hat
moni t or s out st andi ng def i ci enci es unt i l r esol ut i on. A l i st of
unr esol ved saf et y and heal t h def i ci enci es shal l be post ed on t he
saf et y bul l et i n boar d.
( 8) Ensur e subcont r act or compl i ance wi t h saf et y and heal t h
r equi r ement s.
1. 8. 2. 2 Super i nt endent
The pr oj ect super i nt endent / si t e super i nt endent wi l l be hel d r esponsi bl e f or
compl i ance wi t h t he Acci dent Pr event i on Pl an ( APP) and i s subj ect t o r emoval
by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer f or noncompl i ance wi t h t he APP and/ or t he saf et y
r equi r ement s of t hi s cont r act . I n t hi s cont ext t he hi ghest l evel manager
r esponsi bl e f or t he over al l const r uct i on act i vi t i es at t he si t e, i ncl udi ng
qual i t y and pr oduct i on i s t he pr oj ect super i nt endent . The pr oj ect
super i nt endent must mai nt ai n a physi cal pr esence at t he si t e at al l t i mes
and i s r esponsi bl e f or al l const r uct i on and r el at ed act i vi t i es at t he si t e,
except as ot her wi se accept abl e t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
1. 8. 3 Meet i ngs
1. 8. 3. 1 Pr econst r uct i on Conf er ence
Cont r act or r epr esent at i ves who have a r esponsi bi l i t y or si gni f i cant r ol e i n
acci dent pr event i on on t he pr oj ect shal l at t end t he pr econst r uct i on
conf er ence. Thi s i ncl udes t he Pr oj ect Super i nt endent , SSHO, Qual i t y Cont r ol
Super vi sor , and any ot her saf et y and heal t h pr of essi onal s who par t i ci pat ed
i n t he devel opment of t he APP ( i ncl udi ng t he Act i vi t y Hazar d Anal yses ( AHAs)
and speci al pl ans, pr ogr amand pr ocedur es associ at ed wi t h i t ) .
The Cont r act or shal l di scuss t he det ai l s of t he submi t t ed APP t o i ncl ude
i ncor por at ed pl ans, pr ogr ams, pr ocedur es and a l i st i ng of ant i ci pat ed AHAs
t hat wi l l be devel oped and i mpl ement ed dur i ng t he per f or mance of t he
cont r act . Thi s l i st of pr oposed AHAs wi l l be r evi ewed at t he conf er ence and
an agr eement wi l l be r eached bet ween t he Cont r act or and t he Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer ' s r epr esent at i ve as t o whi ch phases wi l l r equi r e an anal ysi s. I n
addi t i on, a schedul e f or t he pr epar at i on, submi t t al , r evi ew, and accept ance
of AHAs shal l be est abl i shed t o pr ecl ude pr oj ect del ays.

1. 8. 3. 2 Saf et y Meet i ngs
Conduct and document meet i ngs as r equi r ed by EM 385- 1- 1. At t ach mi nut es
showi ng cont r act t i t l e, si gnat ur es of at t endees and a l i st of t opi cs
di scussed t o t he Cont r act or s dai l y qual i t y cont r ol r epor t .

Page 7 of 18
1. 9 J ob Or der Cont r act s ( J OC) TASK ORDER REQUI REMENTS
I f t hi s speci f i cat i on i s made par t of a J OC t ask or der cont r act , t he
r equi r ement s her ei n shal l appl y t o each t ask or der i ssued under t hi s
cont r act . I n t he event of conf l i ct bet ween t hi s speci f i cat i on and t he
r equi r ement s cont ai ned wi t hi n an i ndi vi dual t ask or der , t he r equi r ement s of
t he t ask or der shal l gover n.
I f appr oved i n advance by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , t he cont r act or shal l be
r esponsi bl e f or pr epar i ng an Acci dent Pr event i on Pl an whi ch cover s t he
management of t he ent i r e cont r act , wi t h suppl ement s f or each t ask or der or
l ocat i on. The SSHO and CSCP may be assi gned t o mul t i pl e t ask or der s
pr ovi ded t hey compl y wi t h t he educat i on and exper i ence r equi r ement s
i ndi cat ed and be abl e t o r each any j ob si t e wi t hi n 45 mi nut es. The SSHO
shal l vi si t each j ob si t e at l east t wi ce weekl y.
1. 10 ACCI DENT PREVENTI ON PLAN ( APP)
The Cont r act or shal l use a qual i f i ed per son t o pr epar e t he wr i t t en si t e-
speci f i c APP i n bot h Engl i sh and i n t he host nat i on l anguage. Pr epar e t he
APP i n accor dance wi t h t he f or mat and r equi r ement s of USACE EM 385- 1- 1 and
as suppl ement ed her ei n. Cover al l par agr aph and subpar agr aph el ement s i n
USACE EM 385- 1- 1, Appendi x " Mi ni mumBasi c Out l i ne f or Acci dent Pr event i on
Pl an" .
The APP shal l be j ob- speci f i c and shal l addr ess any unusual or uni que
aspect s of t he pr oj ect or act i vi t y f or whi ch i t i s wr i t t en. Any por t i ons of
t he Cont r act or ' s over al l saf et y and heal t h pr ogr amr ef er enced i n t he APP
shal l be i ncl uded i n t he appl i cabl e APP el ement and made si t e- speci f i c. The
APP shal l be si gned by t he per son and f i r m( seni or per son) pr epar i ng t he
APP, t he Cont r act or , t he onsi t e super i nt endent , t he desi gnat ed si t e saf et y
and heal t h of f i cer .
Submi t t he APP t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer 15 cal endar days pr i or t o t he dat e
of t he pr econst r uct i on conf er ence f or accept ance. No const r uct i on wor k may
begi n wi t hout an accept ed APP. Copi es of t he accept ed pl an wi l l be
mai nt ai ned at t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer ' s of f i ce and at t he j ob si t e.
The APP shal l be cont i nuousl y r evi ewed and amended, as necessar y, t hr oughout
t he l i f e of t he cont r act . Unusual or hi gh- hazar d act i vi t i es not i dent i f i ed
i n t he or i gi nal APP shal l be i ncor por at ed i n t he pl an as t hey ar e
di scover ed. Changes t o t he accept ed APP shal l be made onl y wi t h t he wr i t t en
concur r ence of t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , pr oj ect super i nt endent , SSHO, and
Qual i t y Cont r ol Manager . Shoul d any hazar d become evi dent , st op wor k i n t he
ar ea, secur e t he ar ea, and devel op a pl an t o r emove t he hazar d. Not i f y t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi t hi n 24 hour s of di scover y. I n t he i nt er i m, al l
necessar y act i on shal l be t aken t o r est or e and mai nt ai n saf e wor ki ng
condi t i ons i n or der t o saf eguar d onsi t e per sonnel , vi si t or s, t he publ i c, and
t he envi r onment .
1. 10. 1 EM 385- 1- 1 Cont ent s
I n addi t i on t o t he r equi r ement s out l i nes i n Appendi x A of USACE EM 385- 1- 1,
t he f ol l owi ng i s r equi r ed:
Page 8 of 18
a. Names and qual i f i cat i ons ( r esumes i ncl udi ng educat i on, t r ai ni ng,
exper i ence and cer t i f i cat i ons) of al l si t e saf et y and heal t h per sonnel
desi gnat ed t o per f or mwor k on t hi s pr oj ect t o i ncl ude t he desi gnat ed si t e
saf et y and heal t h of f i cer and ot her compet ent and qual i f i ed per sonnel t o
be used. Speci f y t he dut i es of each posi t i on.
b. Qual i f i cat i ons of compet ent and of qual i f i ed per sons. As a mi ni mum,
desi gnat e and submi t qual i f i cat i ons of compet ent per sons f or each of t he
f ol l owi ng maj or ar eas: excavat i on; scaf f ol di ng; f al l pr ot ect i on; hazar dous
ener gy; conf i ned space; heal t h hazar d r ecogni t i on, eval uat i on and cont r ol
of chemi cal , physi cal and bi ol ogi cal agent s; per sonal pr ot ect i ve equi pment
and cl ot hi ng t o i ncl ude sel ect i on, use and mai nt enance.
c. Conf i ned Space Ent r y Pl an. Devel op a conf i ned and/ or encl osed space
ent r y pl an i n accor dance wi t h USACE EM 385- 1- 1 and Host Nat i on r egul at or y
r equi r ement s i dent i f i ed i n t he cont r act . I dent i f y t he qual i f i ed per son s
name and qual i f i cat i on, t r ai ni ng, and exper i ence. Del i neat e t he qual i f i ed
per son s aut hor i t y t o di r ect wor k st oppage i n t he event of hazar dous
condi t i ons. I ncl ude pr ocedur e f or r escue by cont r act or per sonnel and t he
coor di nat i on wi t h emer gency r esponder s. ( I f t her e i s no conf i ned space
wor k, i ncl ude a st at ement t hat no conf i ned space wor k exi st s and none wi l l
be cr eat ed. )
d. Cr ane Cr i t i cal Li f t Pl an. Pr epar e and si gn wei ght handl i ng cr i t i cal
l i f t pl ans f or l i f t s over 75 per cent of t he capaci t y of t he cr ane or hoi st
( or l i f t s over 50 per cent of t he capaci t y of a bar ge mount ed mobi l e
cr ane' s hoi st s) at any r adi us of l i f t ; l i f t s i nvol vi ng mor e t han one cr ane
or hoi st ; l i f t s of per sonnel ; and l i f t s i nvol vi ng non- r out i ne r i ggi ng or
oper at i on, sensi t i ve equi pment , or unusual saf et y r i sks. The pl an shal l
be submi t t ed 15 cal endar days pr i or t o onsi t e wor k and i ncl ude t he
r equi r ement s of USACE EM 385- 1- 1 and t he f ol l owi ng:
( 1) For l i f t s of per sonnel , t he pl an shal l demonst r at e compl i ance wi t h
t he r equi r ement s of 29 CFR 1926. 550( g) and EM 385- 1- 1.
( 2) For bar ge mount ed mobi l e cr anes, bar ge st abi l i t y cal cul at i ons
i dent i f yi ng bar ge l i st and t r i mbased on ant i ci pat ed l oadi ng; and
l oad char t s based on cal cul at ed l i st and t r i m. The amount of l i st
and t r i mshal l be wi t hi n t he cr ane manuf act ur er ' s r equi r ement s.
e. Fal l Pr ot ect i on and Pr event i on ( FP&P) Pl an. The pl an shal l be si t e
speci f i c and addr ess al l f al l hazar ds i n t he wor k pl ace and dur i ng
di f f er ent phases of const r uct i on. I t shal l addr ess how t o pr ot ect and
pr event wor ker s f r omf al l i ng t o l ower l evel s when t hey ar e exposed t o f al l
hazar ds above 1. 8 m( 6 f eet ) . A qual i f i ed per son f or f al l pr ot ect i on
shal l pr epar e and si gn t he pl an. The pl an shal l i ncl ude f al l pr ot ect i on
and pr event i on syst ems, equi pment and met hods empl oyed f or ever y phase of
wor k, r esponsi bi l i t i es, assi st ed r escue, sel f - r escue and evacuat i on
pr ocedur es, t r ai ni ng r equi r ement s, and moni t or i ng met hods. Fal l
Pr ot ect i on and Pr event i on Pl an shal l be r evi sed ever y si x mont hs f or
l engt hy pr oj ect s, r ef l ect i ng any changes dur i ng t he cour se of const r uct i on
due t o changes i n per sonnel , equi pment , syst ems or wor k habi t s. The
accept ed Fal l Pr ot ect i on and Pr event i on Pl an shal l be kept and mai nt ai ned
at t he j ob si t e f or t he dur at i on of t he pr oj ect . The Fal l Pr ot ect i on and
Pr event i on Pl an shal l be i ncl uded i n t he Acci dent Pr event i on Pl an ( APP) .
1. 11 ACTI VI TY HAZARD ANALYSI S ( AHA)
Page 9 of 18
Bef or e begi nni ng any act i vi t y i nvol vi ng a t ype of wor k pr esent i ng hazar ds
not exper i enced i n pr evi ous pr oj ect oper at i ons or wher e a new wor k cr ew or
subcont r act or i s t o per f or mt he wor k, act i vi t y hazar d anal ysi s ( AHA) shal l
be pr epar ed by t he Cont r act or per f or mi ng t he wor k act i vi t y.
The Act i vi t y Hazar d Anal ysi s ( AHA) f or mat shal l be i n accor dance wi t h USACE
EM 385- 1- 1. Submi t t he AHA f or r evi ew at l east 15 cal endar days pr i or t o t he
st ar t of each phase. For mat subsequent AHA s as amendment s t o t he APP. The
anal ysi s shoul d be used dur i ng dai l y i nspect i ons t o ensur e t he
i mpl ement at i on and ef f ect i veness of t he act i vi t y' s saf et y and heal t h
cont r ol s.
The AHA l i st wi l l be r evi ewed per i odi cal l y ( at l east mont hl y) at t he
Cont r act or super vi sor y saf et y meet i ng and updat ed as necessar y when
pr ocedur es, schedul i ng, or hazar ds change.
Devel op t he act i vi t y hazar d anal yses usi ng t he pr oj ect schedul e as t he basi s
f or t he act i vi t i es per f or med. Any act i vi t i es l i st ed on t he pr oj ect schedul e
wi l l r equi r e an AHA. The AHA' s wi l l be devel oped by t he cont r act or ,
suppl i er or subcont r act or and pr ovi ded t o t he pr i me cont r act or f or submi t t al
t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
1. 12 DI SPLAY OF SAFETY I NFORMATI ON
Wi t hi n 1 cal endar day af t er commencement of wor k, er ect a saf et y bul l et i n
boar d at t he j ob si t e. The saf et y bul l et i n boar d shal l i ncl ude i nf or mat i on
and be mai nt ai ned as r equi r ed by EM 385- 1- 1 and Sect i on 00 73 15 GENERAL
CONDI TI ONS.
1. 13 SI TE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERI ALS
Mai nt ai n saf et y- r el at ed r ef er ences appl i cabl e t o t he pr oj ect , i ncl udi ng
t hose l i st ed i n t he ar i cl e r ef er ences. Mai nt ai n appl i cabl e equi pment
manuf act ur er ' s manual s.
1. 14 EMERGENCY MEDI CAL TREATMENT
Cont r act or s wi l l ar r ange f or t hei r own emer gency medi cal t r eat ment . The
Gover nment has no r esponsi bi l i t y t o pr ovi de emer gency medi cal t r eat ment .
Mi l i t ar y medi cal cl i ni cs may pr ovi de emer gency t r eat ment f or ser i ous
i nj ur i es; t he cont r act or i s r esponsi bl e f or coor di nat i on wi t h t he l ocal
mi l i t ar y medi cal cl i ni c pr i or t o mobi l i zat i on.
1. 15 REPORTS
1. 15. 1 Acci dent Repor t s
For r ecor dabl e i nj ur i es and i l l nesses, and pr oper t y damage acci dent s
r esul t i ng i n at l east $2, 000 i n damages, t he Cont r act or shal l conduct an
acci dent i nvest i gat i on t o est abl i sh t he r oot cause( s) of t he acci dent ,
compl et e t he USACE Acci dent Repor t For m3394 and pr ovi de t he r epor t t o t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi t hi n 5 cal endar day( s) of t he acci dent . The
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi l l pr ovi de copi es of any r equi r ed or speci al f or ms.
1. 15. 2 Acci dent Not i f i cat i on
Page 10 of 18
Not i f y t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer as soon as pr act i cal , but not l at er t han f our
hour s, af t er any acci dent meet i ng t he def i ni t i on of Recor dabl e I nj ur i es or
I l l nesses or Hi gh Vi si bi l i t y Acci dent s, pr oper t y damage equal t o or gr eat er
t han $2, 000. I nf or mat i on shal l i ncl ude cont r act or name; cont r act t i t l e;
t ype of cont r act ; name of act i vi t y, i nst al l at i on or l ocat i on wher e acci dent
occur r ed; dat e and t i me of acci dent ; names of per sonnel i nj ur ed; ext ent of
pr oper t y damage, i f any; ext ent of i nj ur y, i f known, and br i ef descr i pt i on
of acci dent ( t o i ncl ude t ype of const r uct i on equi pment used, PPE used,
et c. ) . Pr eser ve t he condi t i ons and evi dence on t he acci dent si t e unt i l t he
Gover nment i nvest i gat i on t eamar r i ves onsi t e and Gover nment i nvest i gat i on
i s conduct ed.
1. 15. 3 Mont hl y Exposur e Repor t s
Mont hl y exposur e r epor t i ng t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer i s r equi r ed t o be
at t ached t o t he mont hl y bi l l i ng r equest . Thi s r epor t i s a compi l at i on of
empl oyee- hour s wor ked each mont h f or al l si t e wor ker s, bot h pr i me and
subcont r act or . The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi l l pr ovi de copi es of any speci al
f or ms.
1. 15. 4 Cr ane Repor t s
Submi t cr ane i nspect i on r epor t s r equi r ed i n accor dance wi t h USACE EM 385- 1-
1, Appendi x H and as speci f i ed her ei n wi t h Dai l y Repor t s of I nspect i ons.
1. 16 HOT WORK
Pr i or t o per f or mi ng " Hot Wor k" ( wel di ng, cut t i ng, et c. ) or oper at i ng ot her
f l ame- pr oduci ng/ spar k pr oduci ng devi ces, a wr i t t en per mi t shal l be r equest ed
f r omt he I nst al l at i on. CONTRACTORS ARE REQUI RED TO MEET ALL CRI TERI A BEFORE
A PERMI T I S I SSUED. The Cont r act or wi l l pr ovi de at l east t wo ( 2) si x
ki l ogr amABC r at ed ext i ngui sher s f or nor mal " Hot Wor k" . Al l ext i ngui sher s
shal l be cur r ent i nspect i on t agged, appr oved saf et y pi n and t amper r esi st ant
seal . I t i s al so mandat or y t o have a desi gnat ed FI RE WATCH f or any " Hot
Wor k" done at t hi s act i vi t y. The Fi r e Wat ch shal l be t r ai ned i n f i r e
f i ght i ng t echni ques and r emai n onsi t e f or a mi ni mumof 120 mi nut es af t er
compl et i on of t he t ask or as speci f i ed on t he hot wor k per mi t .
When st ar t i ng wor k i n t he f aci l i t y, Cont r act or s shal l r equi r e t hei r
per sonnel t o f ami l i ar i ze t hemsel ves wi t h t he l ocat i on of t he near est f i r e
al ar mboxes and pl ace i n memor y t he emer gency phone number s. ANY FI RE, NO
MATTER HOWSMALL, SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE RESPONSI BLE FI RE
DI VI SI ON/ DEPARTMENT I MMEDI ATELY.
1.17 SEVERE STORM PLAN
I n t he event of a sever e st or mwar ni ng, t he Cont r act or must :
a. Secur e out si de equi pment and mat er i al s and pl ace mat er i al s t hat coul d be
damaged i n pr ot ect ed ar ea.
b. Check sur r oundi ng ar ea, i ncl udi ng r oof , f or l oose mat er i al , equi pment ,
debr i s, and ot her obj ect s t hat coul d be bl own away or agai nst exi st i ng
f aci l i t i es.
c. Ensur e t hat t empor ar y er osi on cont r ol s ar e adequat e.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
Page 11 of 18
Not Used
PART 3: EXECUTI ON
3. 1 CONSTRUCTI ON AND/ OR OTHER WORK
Compl y wi t h USACE EM 385- 1- 1, NFPA 241, t he APP, t he AHA, Host Nat i on, and
ot her r el at ed submi t t al s and act i vi t y f i r e and saf et y r egul at i ons. The
most st r i ngent st andar d pr evai l s
3. 1. 1 Requi r ed Per sonal Pr ot ect i ve Cl ot hi ng and Equi pment
Al l ar eas wher e const r uct i on, demol i t i on, al t er at i on, bui l di ng, or si mi l ar l y
r el at ed act i vi t i es t ake pl ace, al l wor ker s shal l have t he f ol l owi ng mi ni mum
per sonal pr ot ect i ve cl ot hi ng and equi pment :
( 1) Shor t sl eeve shi r t .
( 2) Long t r ouser s.
( 3) St eel - t oed saf et y boot s.
( 4) Har d hat .
3. 1. 2 Hazar dous Mat er i al Excl usi ons
Not wi t hst andi ng any ot her hazar dous mat er i al used i n t hi s cont r act ,
r adi oact i ve mat er i al s or i nst r ument s capabl e of pr oduci ng i oni zi ng/ non-
i oni zi ng r adi at i on ( wi t h t he except i on of r adi oact i ve mat er i al and devi ces
used i n accor dance wi t h USACE EM 385- 1- 1 such as nucl ear densi t y met er s
f or compact i on t est i ng and l abor at or y equi pment wi t h r adi oact i ve sour ces)
as wel l as mat er i al s whi ch cont ai n asbest os, mer cur y or pol ychl or i nat ed
bi phenyl s, di - i socynat es, l ead- based pai nt ar e pr ohi bi t ed. The
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , upon wr i t t en r equest by t he Cont r act or , may consi der
except i ons t o t he use of any of t he above excl uded mat er i al s.
3. 1. 3 Unf or eseen Hazar dous Mat er i al
The desi gn shoul d have i dent i f i ed mat er i al s such as PCB, l ead pai nt , and
f r i abl e and non- f r i abl e asbest os. I f mat er i al , not i ndi cat ed, t hat may be
hazar dous t o human heal t h upon di st ur bance dur i ng const r uct i on oper at i ons
i s encount er ed, st op t hat por t i on of wor k and not i f y t he Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer i mmedi at el y. Wi t hi n 14 cal endar days t he Gover nment wi l l
det er mi ne i f t he mat er i al i s hazar dous. I f mat er i al i s not hazar dous or
poses no danger , t he Gover nment wi l l di r ect t he Cont r act or t o pr oceed
wi t hout change. I f mat er i al i s hazar dous and handl i ng of t he mat er i al i s
necessar y t o accompl i sh t he wor k, t he Gover nment wi l l i ssue a modi f i cat i on
pur suant t o " FAR 52. 243- 4, Changes" and " FAR 52. 236- 2, Di f f er i ng Si t e
Condi t i ons. "

3. 1. 4 Pr e- Out age Coor di nat i on Meet i ng
Cont r act or s ar e r equi r ed t o appl y f or ut i l i t y out ages i n advance. The
r equest shoul d i ncl ude t he l ocat i on of t he out age, ut i l i t i es bei ng
af f ect ed, dur at i on of out age and any necessar y sket ches. Speci al
r equi r ement s f or el ect r i cal out age r equest s ar e cont ai ned el sewher e i n
t hi s speci f i cat i on sect i on. Once appr oved, and pr i or t o begi nni ng wor k on
t he ut i l i t y syst emr equi r i ng shut down, at t end a pr e- out age coor di nat i on
meet i ng wi t h t he cont r act i on of f i cer and I nst al l at i on r epr esent at i ve t o
Page 12 of 18
r evi ew t he scope of wor k and t he l ockout / t agout pr ocedur e f or wor ker
pr ot ect i on. No wor k wi l l be per f or med on ener gi zed el ect r i cal ci r cui t s
unl ess pr oof i s pr ovi ded t hat no ot her means exi st .

3. 1. 5 Cont r ol of Hazar dous Ener gy ( Lockout / Tagout )

Cont r act or shal l ensur e t hat each empl oyee i s f ami l i ar wi t h and compl i es
wi t h t hese pr ocedur es and USACE EM 385- 1- 1, Sect i on 12, Cont r ol of
Hazar dous Ener gy.

Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi l l , at t he Cont r act or s r equest , appl y
l ockout / t agout t ags and t ake ot her act i ons t hat , because of exper i ence and
knowl edge, ar e known t o be necessar y t o make t he par t i cul ar equi pment saf e
t o wor k on f or gover nment owned and oper at ed syst ems.

No per son, r egar dl ess of posi t i on or aut hor i t y, shal l oper at e any swi t ch,
val ve, or equi pment t hat has an of f i ci al l ockout / t agout t ag at t ached t o
i t , nor shal l such t ag be r emoved except as pr ovi ded i n t hi s sect i on. No
per son shal l wok on any ener gi zed equi pment i ncl udi ng, but not l i mi t ed t o
act i vi t i es such as er ect i ng, i nst al l i ng, const r uct i ng, r epai r i ng,
adj ust i ng, i nspect i ng, un- j ammi ng, set t i ng up, t r oubl e shoot i ng, t est i ng,
cl eani ng, di smant l i ng, ser vi ci ng and mai nt ai ni ng machi nes equi pment of
pr ocesses unt i l an eval uat i on has been conduct ed i dent i f yi ng t he ener gy
sour ce and t he pr ocedur es whi ch wi l l be t aken t o ensur e t he saf et y of
per sonnel .

When wor k i s t o be per f or med on el ect r i cal ci r cui t s, onl y qual i f i ed
per sonnel shal l per f or mwor k on el ect r i cal ci r cui t s.

A super vi sor who i s r equi r ed t o ent er an ar ea pr ot ect ed by a
l ockout / t agout t ag wi l l be consi der ed a member of t he pr ot ect ed gr oup
pr ovi ded he not i f i es t he hol der of t he t ag st ub each t i me he ent er s and
depar t s f r omt he pr ot ect ed ar ea.

I dent i f i cat i on mar ki ngs on bui l di ng l i ght and power di st r i but i on ci r cui t s
shal l not be r el i ed on f or est abl i shed saf e wor k condi t i ons.

Bef or e cl ear ance wi l l be gi ven on any equi pment ot her t han el ect r i cal
( gener al l y r ef er r ed t o as mechani cal appar at us) , t he appar at us, val ves, or
syst ems shal l be secur ed i n a passi ve condi t i on wi t h t he appr opr i at e
vent s, pi ns, and l ocks.

Pr essur i zed or vacuumsyst ems shal l be vent ed t o r el i eve di f f er ent i al
pr essur e compl et el y.
Vent val ves shal l be t agged open dur i ng t he cour se of t he wor k.

Wher e danger ous gas or f l ui d syst ems ar e i nvol ved, or i n ar eas wher e t he
envi r onment may be oxygen def i ci ent , syst emor ar eas shal l be pur ged,
vent i l at ed, or ot her wi se made saf e pr i or t o ent r y.

3. 1. 6 Tag Pl acement

Lockout / t agout t ags shal l be compl et ed i n accor dance wi t h t he r egul at i ons
pr i nt ed on t he back t her eof and at t ached t o any devi ce whi ch, i f oper at ed,
coul d cause an unsaf e condi t i on t o exi st .

Page 13 of 18
I f mor e t han one gr oup i s t o wor k on any ci r cui t or equi pment , t he empl oyee
i n char ge of each gr oup shal l have a separ at e set of l ockout / t agout t ags
compl et ed and pr oper l y at t ached.

When i t i s r equi r ed t hat cer t ai n equi pment be t agged, t he Gover nment wi l l
r evi ew t he char act er i st i cs of t he var i ous syst ems i nvol ved t hat af f ect t he
saf et y of t he oper at i ons and t he wor k t o be done; t ake t he necessar y
act i ons, i ncl udi ng vol t age and pr essur e checks, gr oundi ng, and vent i ng, t o
make t he syst emand equi pment saf e t o wor k on; and appl y such l ockout / t agout
t ags t o t hose swi t ches, val ves, vent s, or ot her mechani cal devi ces needed t o
pr eser ve t he saf et y pr ovi ded. Thi s oper at i on i s r ef er r ed t o as " Pr ovi di ng
Saf et y Cl ear ance. "

3. 1. 7 Tag Removal

When any i ndi vi dual or gr oup has compl et ed i t s par t of t he wor k and i s cl ear
of t he ci r cui t s or equi pment , t he super vi sor , pr oj ect l eader , or i ndi vi dual
f or whomt he equi pment was t agged shal l t ur n i n hi s si gned l ockout / t agout
t ag st ub t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . That gr oup' s or i ndi vi dual ' s
l ockout / t agout t ags on equi pment may t hen be r emoved on aut hor i zat i on by t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
3. 2 FALL HAZARD PROTECTI ON AND PREVENTI ON PROGRAM
The Cont r act or shal l est abl i sh a f al l pr ot ect i on and pr event i on pr ogr am,
f or t he pr ot ect i on of al l empl oyees exposed t o f al l hazar ds. The pr ogr am
shal l i ncl ude company pol i cy, i dent i f y r esponsi bi l i t i es, educat i on and
t r ai ni ng r equi r ement s, f al l hazar d i dent i f i cat i on, pr event i on and cont r ol
measur es, i nspect i on, st or age, car e and mai nt enance of f al l pr ot ect i on
equi pment and r escue and evacuat i on pr ocedur es.
3. 2. 1 Tr ai ni ng
The Cont r act or shal l i nst i t ut e a f al l pr ot ect i on t r ai ni ng pr ogr am. As
par t of t he Fal l Hazar d Pr ot ect i on and Pr event i on Pr ogr am, t he Cont r act or
shal l pr ovi de t r ai ni ng f or each empl oyee who mi ght be exposed t o f al l
hazar ds. A compet ent per son f or f al l pr ot ect i on shal l pr ovi de t he
t r ai ni ng. Tr ai ni ng r equi r ement s shal l be i n accor dance wi t h USACE EM 385-
1- 1.
3. 2. 2 Fal l Pr ot ect i on Equi pment and Syst ems
The Cont r act or shal l enf or ce use of t he f al l pr ot ect i on equi pment and
syst ems desi gnat ed f or each speci f i c wor k act i vi t y i n t he Fal l Pr ot ect i on
and Pr event i on Pl an and/ or AHA at al l t i mes when an empl oyee i s exposed t o
a f al l hazar d. Fal l pr ot ect i on must compl y wi t h USACE EM 385- 1- 1 and host
nat i on r equi r ement s, whi chever i s mor e st r i ngent .
Empl oyees shal l be pr ot ect ed f r omf al l hazar ds as speci f i ed i n EM 385- 1- 1.
I n addi t i on t o t he r equi r ed f al l pr ot ect i on syst ems, saf et y ski f f ,
per sonal f l oat at i on devi ces, l i f e r i ngs et c. , ar e r equi r ed when wor ki ng
above or next t o wat er i n accor dance wi t h USACE EM 385- 1- 1. Per sonal f al l
ar r est syst ems ar e r equi r ed when wor ki ng f r oman ar t i cul at i ng or
ext endi bl e boom, swi ng st ages, or suspended pl at f or m. I n addi t i on,
per sonal f al l ar r est syst ems ar e r equi r ed when oper at i ng ot her equi pment
such as sci ssor l i f t s i f t he wor k pl at f or mi s capabl e of bei ng posi t i oned
Page 14 of 18
out si de t he wheel base. The need f or t yi ng- of f i n such equi pment i s t o
pr event ej ect i on of t he empl oyee f r omt he equi pment dur i ng r ai si ng,
l ower i ng, or t r avel .
3. 2. 3 Per sonal Fal l Ar r est Equi pment
Per sonal f al l ar r est equi pment , syst ems, subsyst ems, and component s shal l
meet ANSI Z359. 1 or Host Nat i on equi val ent . Onl y a f ul l - body har ness wi t h
a shock- absor bi ng l anyar d or sel f - r et r act i ng l anyar d i s an accept abl e
per sonal f al l ar r est body suppor t devi ce. Body bel t s may onl y be used as
a posi t i oni ng devi ce syst em( f or uses such as st eel r ei nf or ci ng assembl y
and i n addi t i on t o an appr oved f al l ar r est syst em) . Har nesses shal l have a
f al l ar r est at t achment af f i xed t o t he body suppor t ( usual l y a Dor sal D-
r i ng) and speci f i cal l y desi gnat ed f or at t achment t o t he r est of t he
syst em. Onl y l ocki ng snap hooks and car abi ner s shal l be used. Webbi ng,
st r aps, and r opes shal l be made of synt het i c f i ber . The maxi mumf r ee f al l
di st ance when usi ng f al l ar r est equi pment shal l not exceed 1. 8 m( 6 f eet ) .
The t ot al f al l di st ance and any swi ngi ng of t he wor ker ( pendul um- l i ke
mot i on) t hat can occur dur i ng a f al l shal l al ways be t aken i nt o
consi der at i on when at t achi ng a per son t o a f al l ar r est syst em.
3. 2. 4 Fal l Pr ot ect i on f or Roof i ng Wor k
Fal l pr ot ect i on cont r ol s shal l be i mpl ement ed based on t he t ype of r oof
bei ng const r uct ed and wor k bei ng per f or med. The r oof ar ea t o be accessed
shal l be eval uat ed f or i t s st r uct ur al i nt egr i t y i ncl udi ng wei ght - bear i ng
capabi l i t i es f or t he pr oj ect ed l oadi ng.
a. Low Sl oped Roof s:
( 1) For wor k wi t hi n 1. 8 m( 6 f eet ) of an edge, on l ow- sl ope r oof s,
per sonnel shal l be pr ot ect ed f r omf al l i ng by use of per sonal f al l
ar r est syst ems, guar dr ai l s, or saf et y net s. A saf et y moni t or i ng
syst emi s not adequat e f al l pr ot ect i on and i s not aut hor i zed.
( 2) For wor k gr eat er t han 1. 8 m( 6 f eet ) f r oman edge, war ni ng l i nes
shal l be er ect ed and i nst al l ed i n accor dance wi t h USACE EM 385- 1- 1.
b. St eep- Sl oped Roof s: Wor k on st eep- sl oped r oof s r equi r es a per sonal
f al l ar r est syst em, guar dr ai l s wi t h t oe- boar ds, or saf et y net s. Thi s
r equi r ement al so i ncl udes r esi dent i al or housi ng t ype const r uct i on.
3. 2. 5 Exi st i ng Anchor age
Exi st i ng anchor ages, t o be used f or at t achment of per sonal f al l ar r est
equi pment , shal l be cer t i f i ed ( or r e- cer t i f i ed) by a qual i f i ed per son f or
f al l pr ot ect i on i n accor dance wi t h ANSI Z359. 1 or Eur opean Uni on
equi val ent . Exi t i ng hor i zont al l i f el i ne anchor ages shal l be cer t i f i ed ( or
r e- cer t i f i ed) by a r egi st er ed pr of essi onal engi neer wi t h exper i ence i n
desi gni ng hor i zont al l i f el i ne syst ems.
3. 2. 6 Hor i zont al Li f el i nes
Hor i zont al l i f el i nes shal l be desi gned, i nst al l ed, cer t i f i ed and used
under t he super vi si on of a qual i f i ed per son f or f al l pr ot ect i on as par t of
a compl et e f al l ar r est syst emwhi ch mai nt ai ns a saf et y f act or of 2.
Page 15 of 18
3. 2. 7 Guar dr ai l s and Saf et y Net s
Guar dr ai l s and saf et y net s shal l be desi gned, i nst al l ed and used i n
accor dance wi t h EM 385- 1- 1 or Host Nat i on r equi r ement s, whi chever i s mor e
st r i ngent .
3. 2. 8 Rescue and Evacuat i on Pr ocedur es
When per sonal f al l ar r est syst ems ar e used, t he cont r act or must ensur e
t hat t he mi shap vi ct i mcan sel f - r escue or can be r escued pr ompt l y shoul d a
f al l occur . A Rescue and Evacuat i on Pl an shal l be pr epar ed by t he
cont r act or and i ncl ude a det ai l ed di scussi on of t he f ol l owi ng: met hods of
r escue; met hods of sel f - r escue; equi pment used; t r ai ni ng r equi r ement ;
speci al i zed t r ai ni ng f or t he r escuer s; pr ocedur es f or r equest i ng r escue
and medi cal assi st ance; and t r anspor t at i on r out es t o a medi cal f aci l i t y.
The Rescue and Evacuat i on Pl an shal l be i ncl uded i n t he Act i vi t y Hazar d
Anal ysi s ( AHA) f or t he phase of wor k, i n t he Fal l Pr ot ect i on and
Pr event i on ( FP&P) Pl an, and t he Acci dent Pr event i on Pl an ( APP) .
3. 3 EQUI PMENT
3. 3. 1 Mat er i al Handl i ng Equi pment
a. Mat er i al handl i ng equi pment such as f or kl i f t s shal l not be modi f i ed
wi t h wor k pl at f or mat t achment s f or suppor t i ng empl oyees unl ess
speci f i cal l y del i neat ed i n t he manuf act ur er ' s pr i nt ed oper at i ng
i nst r uct i ons.
b. The use of hooks on equi pment f or l i f t i ng of mat er i al must be i n
accor dance wi t h manuf act ur er ' s pr i nt ed i nst r uct i ons.
c. Oper at or s of f or kl i f t s or power i ndust r i al t r ucks shal l be
t r ai ned/ l i censed i n accor dance wi t h Host Nat i on r equi r ement s.
3. 3. 2 Wei ght Handl i ng Equi pment
a. Cr anes and der r i cks shal l be equi pped as speci f i ed i n EM- 385- 1- 1.
b. The Cont r act or shal l compl y wi t h t he cr ane manuf act ur er ' s
speci f i cat i ons and l i mi t at i ons f or er ect i on and oper at i on of cr anes and
hoi st s used i n suppor t of t he wor k. Er ect i on shal l be per f or med under t he
super vi si on of a desi gnat ed per son. Al l t est i ng shal l be per f or med i n
accor dance wi t h t he manuf act ur er ' s r ecommended pr ocedur es.
c. Under no ci r cumst ance shal l a Cont r act or make a l i f t at or above 90%of
t he cr anes r at ed capaci t y i n any conf i gur at i on.
d. When oper at i ng i n t he vi ci ni t y of over head t r ansmi ssi on l i nes,
oper at or s and r i gger s shal l be al er t t o t hi s speci al hazar d and shal l
f ol l ow t he r equi r ement s of USACE EM 385- 1- 1 sect i on 11.
e. Cr ane suspended per sonnel wor k pl at f or ms ( basket s) shal l not be used
unl ess t he Cont r act or pr oves t o t he sat i sf act i on of t he Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer t hat usi ng any ot her access t o t he wor k l ocat i on woul d pr ovi de a
gr eat er hazar d t o t he wor ker s or i s i mpossi bl e. Per sonnel shal l not be
l i f t ed wi t h a l i ne hoi st or f r i ct i on cr ane.
Page 16 of 18
f . Por t abl e f i r e ext i ngui sher s shal l be i nspect ed, mai nt ai ned, and
r echar ged.
g. Al l empl oyees shal l be kept cl ear of l oads about t o be l i f t ed and of
suspended l oads.
h. The Cont r act or shal l use cr i bbi ng when per f or mi ng l i f t s on out r i gger s.
i . The cr ane hook/ bl ock must be posi t i oned di r ect l y over t he l oad. Si de
l oadi ng of t he cr ane i s pr ohi bi t ed.
j . A physi cal bar r i cade must be posi t i oned t o pr event per sonnel f r om
ent er i ng t he count er wei ght swi ng ( t ai l swi ng) ar ea of t he cr ane.
k. Cer t i f i cat i on r ecor ds whi ch i ncl ude t he dat e of i nspect i on, si gnat ur e
of t he per son per f or mi ng t he i nspect i on, and t he ser i al number or ot her
i dent i f i er of t he cr ane t hat was i nspect ed shal l al ways be avai l abl e f or
r evi ew by Cont r act i ng Of f i cer per sonnel .
l . Wr i t t en r epor t s l i st i ng t he l oad t est pr ocedur es used al ong wi t h any
r epai r s or al t er at i ons per f or med on t he cr ane shal l be avai l abl e f or
r evi ew by Cont r act i ng Of f i cer per sonnel .
m. Cer t i f y t hat al l cr ane oper at or s have been t r ai ned i n pr oper use of al l
saf et y devi ces ( e. g. ant i - t wo bl ock devi ces) .
n. Take st eps t o ensur e t hat wi nd speed does not cont r i but e t o l oss of
cont r ol of t he l oad dur i ng l i f t i ng oper at i ons. Pr i or t o conduct i ng
l i f t i ng oper at i ons t he cont r act or shal l set a maxi mumwi nd speed at whi ch
a cr ane can be saf el y oper at ed based on t he equi pment bei ng used, t he l oad
bei ng l i f t ed, exper i ence of oper at or s and r i gger s, and hazar ds on t he wor k
si t e. Thi s maxi mumwi nd speed det er mi nat i on shal l be i ncl uded as par t of
t he act i vi t y hazar d anal ysi s pl an f or t hat oper at i on.
3. 4 EXCAVATI ONS
The compet ent per son f or excavat i ons per f or med as a r esul t of cont r act
wor k shal l be onsi t e when excavat i on wor k i s bei ng per f or med, and shal l
i nspect , and document t he excavat i ons dai l y pr i or t o ent r y by wor ker s.
The compet ent per son must eval uat e al l hazar ds, i ncl udi ng at mospher i c,
t hat may be associ at ed wi t h t he wor k, and shal l have t he r esour ces
necessar y t o cor r ect hazar ds pr ompt l y.
3. 4. 1 Ut i l i t y Locat i ons
Pr i or t o any excavat i on, al l under gr ound ut i l i t i es i n t he wor k ar ea must
be posi t i vel y i dent i f i ed by t he cont r act or ut i l i zi ng a) a pr i vat e ut i l i t y
l ocat i ng ser vi ce i n addi t i on t o any st at i on l ocat i ng ser vi ce, and/ or b) a
met al and/ or cabl e- det ect i ng devi ce al ong t he r out e of t he excavat i on.
Al l under gr ound ut i l i t i es di scover ed wi l l be f l agged a di st ance of one-
hal f ( 1/ 2) met er on each si de of t he l ocat i on, and any mar ki ngs made
dur i ng t he ut i l i t y i nvest i gat i on must be mai nt ai ned t hr oughout t he
cont r act .
Damage occur r i ng t o exi st i ng ut i l i t i es, when t he above pr ocedur es ar e not
f ol l owed, wi l l be r epai r ed at t he Cont r act or s expense.
Page 17 of 18
3. 4. 2 Ut i l i t y Locat i on Ver i f i cat i on
The Cont r act or must physi cal l y ver i f y under gr ound ut i l i t y l ocat i ons by
hand di ggi ng usi ng wood or f i ber gl ass handl ed t ool s when any adj acent
const r uct i on wor k i s expect ed t o come wi t hi n t hr ee f eet of t he under gr ound
syst em. Di ggi ng wi t hi n 0. 61 m( 2 f eet ) of a known ut i l i t y must not be
per f or med by means of mechani cal equi pment ; hand di ggi ng shal l be used.
I f const r uct i on i s par al l el t o an exi st i ng ut i l i t y t he ut i l i t y shal l be
exposed by hand di ggi ng ever y 30. 5 m( 100 f eet ) i f par al l el wi t hi n 1. 5 m
( 5 f eet ) of t he excavat i on.
3. 4. 3 Shor i ng Syst ems
Tr ench and shor i ng syst ems must be i dent i f i ed i n t he accept ed saf et y pl an
and AHA. Manuf act ur e t abul at ed dat a and speci f i cat i ons or r egi st er ed
engi neer t abul at ed dat a f or shor i ng or benchi ng syst ems shal l be r eadi l y
avai l abl e onsi t e f or r evi ew. J ob- made shor i ng or shi el di ng shal l have
t he r egi st er ed pr of essi onal engi neer st amp, speci f i cat i ons, and t abul at ed
dat a. Ext r eme car e must be used when excavat i ng near di r ect bur i al
el ect r i c under gr ound cabl es.
3. 4. 4 Tr enchi ng Machi ner y
Tr enchi ng machi nes wi t h di ggi ng chai n dr i ves shal l be oper at ed onl y when
t he spot t er s/ l abor er s ar e i n pl ai n vi ew of t he oper at or . Oper at or and
spot t er s/ l abor er s shal l be pr ovi ded t r ai ni ng on t he hazar ds of t he di ggi ng
chai n dr i ves wi t h emphasi s on t he di st ance t hat needs t o be mai nt ai ned
when t he di ggi ng chai n i s oper at i ng. Document at i on of t he t r ai ni ng shal l
be kept on f i l e at t he pr oj ect si t e.
3. 5 UTI LI TI ES WI THI N CONCRETE SLABS
Ut i l i t i es l ocat ed wi t hi n concr et e sl abs or pi er st r uct ur es, br i dges, and
t he l i ke, ar e ext r emel y di f f i cul t t o i dent i f y due t o t he r ei nf or ci ng st eel
used i n t he const r uct i on of t hese st r uct ur es. Whenever cont r act wor k
i nvol ves concr et e chi ppi ng, saw cut t i ng, or cor e dr i l l i ng, t he exi st i ng
ut i l i t y l ocat i on must be coor di nat ed wi t h st at i on ut i l i t y depar t ment s i n
addi t i on t o a pr i vat e l ocat i ng ser vi ce. Out ages t o i sol at e ut i l i t y
syst ems shal l be used i n ci r cumst ances wher e ut i l i t i es ar e unabl e t o be
posi t i vel y i dent i f i ed. The use of hi st or i cal dr awi ngs does not al l evi at e
t he cont r act or f r ommeet i ng t hi s r equi r ement .
3. 6 ELECTRI CAL
3. 6. 1 Conduct of El ect r i cal Wor k
Under gr ound el ect r i cal spaces must be cer t i f i ed saf e f or ent r y bef or e
ent er i ng t o conduct wor k. Cabl es t hat wi l l be cut must be posi t i vel y
i dent i f i ed and de- ener gi zed pr i or t o per f or mi ng each cut . Posi t i ve cabl e
i dent i f i cat i on must be made pr i or t o submi t t i ng any out age r equest f or
el ect r i cal syst ems. Ar r angement s ar e t o be coor di nat ed wi t h t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer and St at i on Ut i l i t i es f or i dent i f i cat i on. The
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi l l not accept an out age r equest unt i l t he Cont r act or
sat i sf act or i l y document s t hat t he ci r cui t s have been cl ear l y i dent i f i ed.
Per f or mal l hi gh vol t age cabl e cut t i ng r emot el y usi ng hydr aul i c cut t i ng
t ool . When r acki ng i n or l i ve swi t chi ng of ci r cui t br eaker s, no
Page 18 of 18
addi t i onal per son ot her t han t he swi t ch oper at or wi l l be al l owed i n t he
space dur i ng t he act ual oper at i on. Pl an so t hat wor k near ener gi zed par t s
i s mi ni mi zed t o t he f ul l est ext ent possi bl e. Use of el ect r i cal out ages
cl ear of any ener gi zed el ect r i cal sour ces i s t he pr ef er r ed met hod. When
wor ki ng i n ener gi zed subst at i ons, onl y qual i f i ed el ect r i cal wor ker s shal l
be per mi t t ed t o ent er . When wor k r equi r es Cont r act or t o wor k near
ener gi zed ci r cui t s as def i ned by t he NFPA 70, hi gh vol t age per sonnel must
use per sonal pr ot ect i ve equi pment t hat i ncl udes, as a mi ni mum, el ect r i cal
har d hat , saf et y shoes, i nsul at i ng gl oves wi t h l eat her pr ot ect i ve sl eeves,
f i r e r et ar di ng shi r t s, cover al l s, f ace shi el ds, and saf et y gl asses. I n
addi t i on, pr ovi de el ect r i cal ar c f l ash pr ot ect i on f or per sonnel as
r equi r ed by NFPA 70E. I nsul at i ng bl anket s, hear i ng pr ot ect i on, and
swi t chi ng sui t s may al so be r equi r ed, dependi ng on t he speci f i c j ob and as
del i neat ed i n t he Cont r act or ' s AHA.
3. 6. 2 Por t abl e Ext ensi on Cor ds
Por t abl e ext ensi on cor ds shal l be si zed i n accor dance wi t h manuf act ur er
r at i ngs f or t he t ool t o be power ed and pr ot ect ed f r omdamage. Al l damaged
ext ensi on cor ds shal l be i mmedi at el y r emoved f r omser vi ce. Por t abl e
ext ensi on cor ds shal l meet t he r equi r ement s of NFPA 70 or Host Nat i on
equi val ent .
3. 7 WORK I N CONFI NED SPACES
The Cont r act or shal l compl y wi t h t he r equi r ement s i n USACE EM 385- 1- 1.
Any pot ent i al f or a hazar d i n t he conf i ned space r equi r es a per mi t syst em
t o be used.
Page 1 of 13
SECTION 01 45 01
USACE QUALITY CONTROL
(03/12)

PART 1: GENERAL .............................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 PAYMENT .................................................................................................................................................. 2
1.4 DESIGN-BUILD REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................................ 2
1.5 ID/IQ & TASK ORDER REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................... 2
PART 2: PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................................... 2
PART 3: EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................................... 3
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................... 3
3.2 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN ................................................................................................................... 3
3.2.1 Content of the CQC Plan ............................................................................................................ 3
3.2.2 Additional Requirements for Design Quality Control (DQC) Plans on
Design-Build Contracts .............................................................................................................. 4
3.2.3 Acceptance of Plan ........................................................................................................................ 5
3.2.4 Notification of Changes ............................................................................................................ 5
3.3 COORDINATION MEETING ................................................................................................................... 5
3.4 QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION ................................................................................................ 6
3.4.1 Personnel Requirements ............................................................................................................... 6
3.4.2 Design Quality Control Manager (Design-Build Projects) .................................. 6
3.4.3 CQC System Manager (Construction) .................................................................................... 6
3.4.4 Site Superintendent ...................................................................................................................... 7
3.4.5 Additional CQC Personnel .......................................................................................................... 7
3.4.6 Additional Requirement ............................................................................................................... 7
3.4.7 Organizational Changes ............................................................................................................... 8
3.5 SUBMITTALS AND DELIVERABLES ................................................................................................... 8
3.6 CONTROL .................................................................................................................................................. 8
3.6.1 Preparatory Phase ........................................................................................................................... 8
3.6.2 Initial Phase .................................................................................................................................... 9
3.6.3 Follow-up Phase ............................................................................................................................... 9
3.6.4 Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases ................................................................. 9
3.7 PHOTOS ....................................................................................................................................................10
3.8 TESTS ......................................................................................................................................................10
3.8.1 Testing Procedure ..........................................................................................................................10
3.8.2 Onsite Laboratory ..........................................................................................................................11
3.8.3 Furnishing or Transportation of Samples for Testing .........................................11
3.9 COMPLETION INSPECTION ................................................................................................................11
3.9.1 Punch-Out Inspection ..................................................................................................................11
3.9.2 Pre-Final Inspection ..................................................................................................................11
3.9.3 Final Acceptance Inspection ..................................................................................................11
3.10 DOCUMENTATION ...................................................................................................................................12
3.11 FORMS ......................................................................................................................................................12

SECTION 01 45 01 USACE QUALITY CONTROL (06/10)
Page 2 of 13
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic
designation only.

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
ER 1110-1-12 (1994) Quality Management
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used,
a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will
review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Design Quality Control Plan (G) Design-Build Projects only
Quality Control Plan (G)
Qualifications of Quality Control Staff (G)
Testing Laboratory Qualifications
1.3 PAYMENT
Separate payment will not be made for providing and maintaining an effective
Quality Control program, and all associated costs will be included in the
applicable Bid Schedule unit or lump-sum prices.
1.4 DESIGN-BUILD REQUIREMENTS
If the scope of work of this contract calls for the contractor to perform
design, all references herein referring to activities or Construction
shall apply to all design and construction activities, and all references to
subcontractors shall be read as to include designers.
If no design is called for as part of this contract, all references to
design or designer shall be ignored.
1.5 ID/IQ & TASK ORDER REQUIREMENTS
If this specification is made part of an ID/IQ or task order contract, the
requirements herein shall apply to each task order issued under this
contract. A quality control plan detailing the quality control requirements
and staffing shall be unique to each task order. In the event of conflict
between this specification and the requirements contained within an
individual task order, the requirements of the task order shall govern.
If approved in advance by the Contracting Officer, the contractor shall be
responsible for preparing a quality control plan which covers the management
of the entire contract, with supplements for each task order or location.
Quality Control personnel may be assigned to multiple task orders provided
they comply with the education and experience requirements indicated and be
able to reach any job site within 45 minutes.

PART 2: PRODUCTS
Page 3 of 13
Not Used

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The contractor shall establish and maintain an effective quality control (QC)
system in compliance with the Contract Clause titled "Inspection of
Construction." QC consists of plans, procedures, and organization necessary
to produce an end product which complies with the contract requirements.
Cover all design and construction operations, both onsite and offsite, and be
keyed to the proposed design and construction sequence.
The project superintendent/site superintendent will be held responsible for
the quality of work and is subject to removal by the Contracting Officer for
non-compliance with the quality requirements specified in the contract. In
this context the highest level manager responsible for the overall
construction activities at the site, including quality and production is the
project superintendent. The project superintendent must maintain a physical
presence at the site at all times and is responsible for all construction and
related activities at the site, except as otherwise acceptable to the
All Quality Control personnel shall be approved by the Contracting Officer
and are subject to removal at any time based on the sole discretion of the
Contracting Officer. Removal shall not be subject to appeal by the
contractor.
3.2 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
Submit no later than 14 days after receipt of notice to proceed, the
Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan proposed to implement the requirements
of the Contract Clause titled "Inspection of Construction." Design and
construction will be permitted to begin only after acceptance of the CQC Plan
or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the particular feature of work
to be started. Work outside of the accepted interim plan will not be
permitted to begin until acceptance of a CQC Plan or another interim plan
containing the additional work.
3.2.1 Content of the CQC Plan
Include, as a minimum, the following to cover all design and construction
operations, both onsite and offsite, including work by subcontractors,
designers of record, consultants, architect/engineers (AE), fabricators,
suppliers, and purchasing agents:
a. A description of the quality control organization, including a chart
showing lines of authority and acknowledgment that the CQC staff will
implement the three phase control system for all aspects of the work
specified. Include a CQC System Manager who reports to the project
superintendent.
b. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities,
and authorities of each person assigned a CQC function.
c. A copy of the letter to the CQC System Manager signed by an authorized
official of the firm which describes the responsibilities and delegates
sufficient authorities to adequately perform the functions of the CQC
Page 4 of 13
System Manager, including authority to stop work which is not in
compliance with the contract. Letters of direction to all other various
quality control representatives outlining duties, authorities, and
responsibilities will be issued by the CQC System Manager.
d. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing
submittals, including those of subcontractors, designers of record,
consultants, architect engineers (AE), offsite fabricators, suppliers,
and purchasing agents. These procedures must be in accordance with
Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
e. Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each
specific test to include the test name, specification paragraph requiring
test, feature of work to be tested, test frequency, and person
responsible for each test.
f. Procedures for tracking preparatory, initial, and follow-up control
phases and control, verification, and acceptance tests including
documentation.
g. Procedures for tracking design and construction deficiencies from
identification through acceptable corrective action. Establish
verification procedures that identified deficiencies have been corrected.
h. Reporting procedures, including proposed reporting formats.
i. A list of the definable features of work. A definable feature of work is
a task which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate
control requirements, and may be identified by different trades or
disciplines, or it may be work by the same trade in a different
environment. Although each section of the specifications may generally be
considered as a definable feature of work, there are frequently more than
one definable features under a particular section. This list will be
agreed upon during the coordination meeting.
3.2.2 Additional Requirements for Design Quality Control (DQC) Plans on
Design-Build Contracts
A Design Quality Control (DQC) plan (DQCP) shall be prepared on all design-
build projects. The level of detail shall be commensurate with the amount of
design and the size of the project. The DQCP shall be approved by the
Contracting Officer prior to the commencement of design.
The following additional requirements apply to the DCQP:
a. Provide for and establish an effective quality control program which will
assure all services required by this design-build contract are performed
and provided in a manner that meets professional architectural and
engineering quality standards. As a minimum, all documents must be
technically reviewed by competent, independent reviewers identified in
the DQC Plan. The same element that produced the product shall not
perform the independent technical review (ITR). The Contractor shall
correct errors and deficiencies in the design documents prior to
submitting them to the Government.
b. The Contractor shall include the design schedule in the master project
schedule, showing the sequence of events involved in carrying out the
project design tasks within the specific contract period. This should be
Page 5 of 13
at a detailed level of scheduling sufficient to identify all major design
tasks, including those that control the flow of work. The schedule shall
include review and correction periods associated with each item. This
should be a forward planning as well as a project monitoring tool. The
schedule reflects calendar days and not dates for each activity.
c. Include discipline-specific checklists to be used during the design and
quality control of each submittal. Submit at each design phase as part of
the project documentation these completed checklists. Example checklists
can be found in ER 1110-1-12.
d. Identify a Design Quality Control Manager (DQCM) responsible for
overseeing the implementation of the DQC plan, and the name of an
alternate person assigned to the position. See Paragraph DESIGN QUALITY
CONTROL MANAGER (DESIGN-BUILD PROJECTS) for the requirements of this
position.
3.2.3 Acceptance of Plan
Acceptance of the Contractor's plan is required prior to the start of design
and construction. Acceptance is conditional and will be predicated on
satisfactory performance during the design and construction. The Government
reserves the right to require the Contractor to make changes in his CQC Plan
and operations including removal of personnel, as necessary, to obtain the
quality specified.
3.2.4 Notification of Changes
After acceptance of the CQC Plan, notify the Contracting Officer in writing
of any proposed change. Proposed changes are subject to acceptance by the
3.3 COORDINATION MEETING
Prior to acceptance by the Government of the CQC Plan, meet with the
Contracting Officer or Authorized Representative and discuss the Contractor's
quality control system. Submit the CQC Plan a minimum of 4 calendar days
prior to the Coordination Meeting. During the meeting, a mutual understanding
of the system details must be developed, including the forms for recording
the CQC operations, design activities, control activities, testing,
administration of the system for both onsite and offsite work, and the
interrelationship of Contractor's Management and control with the
Government's Quality Assurance. Minutes of the meeting will be prepared by
the Government, signed by both the Contractor and the Contracting Officer and
will become a part of the contract file.
Additional meetings shall be scheduled on a recurring or as-needed basis
between the contractor and government personnel to review the progress of
work and upcoming activities, including submittals, RFIs, project schedule,
and deficiencies. The meetings shall be scheduled in coordination with the
Contracting Officer, however the CQC System Manager will be responsible for
managing the meeting. A draft outline of the topics to be discussed shall be
provided to all attendees at least 24 hours prior to the meeting. Meeting
minutes shall be prepared in the English language by the contractor and
submitted within 48 hours of the completion of the meeting. Any translations
or copies in languages other than English shall be for information purposes
only; the English version will govern in the event of a discrepancy.
Page 6 of 13
There may be occasions when subsequent conferences will be called by either
party to reconfirm mutual understandings and/or address deficiencies in the
CQC system or procedures which may require corrective action by the
Contractor.
3.4 QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION
3.4.1 Personnel Requirements
The requirements for the CQC organization are a CQC System Manager and
sufficient number of additional qualified personnel to ensure safety and
contract compliance. The government reserves the right to require the
contractor to supplement their CQC staff at any time if the existing staff is
determined to be inadequate to the satisfactory performance of the work.
Changes in staffing shall be made at no additional cost to the government.
The Safety and Health Manager (reference section 01 35 26 SAFETY AND
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS) must receive direction and authority from
the CQC System Manager and serve as a member of the CQC staff.
Personnel identified in the technical provisions as requiring specialized
skills to assure the required work is being performed properly will also be
included as part of the CQC organization. The Contractor's CQC staff must
maintain a presence at the site at all times during progress of the work and
have complete authority and responsibility to take any action necessary to
ensure contract compliance. The CQC staff will be subject to acceptance by
the Contracting Officer. Provide adequate office space, filing systems and
other resources as necessary to maintain an effective and fully functional
CQC organization. Promptly complete and furnish all letters, material
submittals, shop drawing submittals, schedules and all other project
documentation to the CQC organization. The CQC organization shall be
responsible to maintain these documents and records at the site at all times,
except as otherwise acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
3.4.2 Design Quality Control Manager (Design-Build Projects)
On Design-Build Projects, the contractor shall identify a Design Quality
Control Manager (DQCM) and alternate responsible for being cognizant of and
assuring that all documents on the project have been coordinated.
This individual shall be a person who has a minimum of five (5) years
engineering or architectural experience and is a registered professional
engineer or architect. The DQCM for projects which are to be constructed at
least in part in accordance with host nation standards may be registered in
accordance with host nation requirements.
The DQCM must be directly employed by the prime contractor and may be
assigned other duties if, in the sole discretion of the Contracting Officer,
this will not interfere with their DQC duties. For contracts where the
construction value is equal to or greater than $5 Million (US Dollars) or 5
Million (Euros), whichever is less, the DQCM may be assigned no other duties.
3.4.3 CQC System Manager (Construction)
Identify as CQC System Manager an individual within the onsite work
organization who is responsible for overall management of CQC and have the
authority to act in all CQC matters for the Contractor. The CQC System
Manager must be a graduate engineer, graduate architect, or a graduate of
Page 7 of 13
construction management, with a minimum of five (5) years construction
experience on construction similar to this contract. This CQC System Manager
must be on the site at all times during construction and be employed by the
prime Contractor. The CQC System Manager must be assigned no other duties.
Identify in the plan an alternate to serve in the event of the CQC System
Manager's absence. The requirements for the alternate are the same as the CQC
System Manager.
3.4.4 Site Superintendent
The site superintendent (SS) shall not serve as the CQC System Manager. The
SS must have a minimum ten (10) years experience in work of a nature similar
to that required by this contract, including at least two (2) years
experience as either a SS or assistant site superintendent.
The contractor shall submit documentation showing the SS has experience with
and will be responsible for:
a. Scheduling and supervision of the day to day operations of all workers
and sub-trades (i.e., plumber, electrician, carpenter, etc.),
b. Quality control monitoring
c. Coordination of testing
d. Maintenance of a daily log of ongoing activities,
e. Assisting in development of site safety and fire safety plan, and other
communications to the CQC System Manager,
f. Ensuring that the project schedule and workmanship quality is maintained
IAW the contract requirements,
g. Ordering materials, scheduling their delivery, and frequently conferring
with the on-site CQC System Manager.
3.4.5 Additional CQC Personnel
If Section 01 45 01.01 ADDITIONAL QUALITY CONTROL PERSONNEL is part of this
contract, the contractor shall provide the additional QC staff identified in
that section. All personnel shall meet the requirements of both sections.
3.4.6 Additional Requirement
In addition to the above experience and/or education requirements the CQC
System Manager and all other Quality Control personnel must have completed
the course entitled "Construction Quality Management For Contractors".
Contact the Contracting Officers Representative to obtain this training.
All Quality Control personnel shall be fluent in the English language and be
able to communicate with the workers on site. If a translator is required
for the Quality Control personnel to communicate with the workers, the
contractor shall provide this as part of their QC organization at no
additional cost to the government.
The Contracting Officer shall have the right to determine, without appeal of
such decision, whether any proposed CQC personnel have sufficient technical
and linguistic capabilities, and the Contractor shall immediately replace any
Page 8 of 13
individual not acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
3.4.7 Organizational Changes
Maintain the CQC staff at full strength at all times. When it is necessary to
make changes to the CQC staff, revise the CQC Plan to reflect the changes and
submit the changes to the Contracting Officer for acceptance. Any changes in
CQC staff shall be subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer.
3.5 SUBMITTALS AND DELIVERABLES
Submittals, if needed, must comply with the requirements in Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. The CQC organization is responsible for certifying that
all submittals and deliverables are in compliance with the contract
requirements.
3.6 CONTROL
Contractor Quality Control is the means by which the Contractor ensures that
the construction, to include that of subcontractors and suppliers, complies
with the requirements of the contract. At least three phases of control must
be conducted for each definable feature of the construction work as follows:
3.6.1 Preparatory Phase
This phase is performed prior to beginning work on each definable feature of
work, after all required plans/documents/materials are approved/accepted, and
after copies are at the work site. This phase includes:
a. A review of each paragraph of applicable specifications, reference codes,
and standards. Make available during the preparatory inspection a copy of
those sections of referenced codes and standards applicable to that
portion of the work to be accomplished in the field. Maintain and make
available in the field for use by Government personnel until final
acceptance of the work.
b. Review of the contract drawings.
c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested,
submitted, and approved.
d. Review of provisions that have been made to provide required control
inspection and testing.
e. Examination of the work area to assure that all required preliminary work
has been completed and is in compliance with the contract.
f. Examination of required materials, equipment, and sample work to assure
that they are on hand, conform to approved shop drawings or submitted
data, and are properly stored.
g. Review of the appropriate activity hazard analysis to assure safety
requirements are met.
h. Discussion of procedures for controlling quality of the work including
repetitive deficiencies. Document construction tolerances and workmanship
standards for that feature of work.
Page 9 of 13
i. Check to ensure that the portion of the plan for the work to be performed
has been accepted by the Contracting Officer.
j. Discussion of the initial control phase.
The Government must be notified at least 72 hours in advance of beginning the
preparatory control phase. Include a meeting conducted by the CQC System
Manager and attended by the superintendent, other CQC personnel (as
applicable), and the foreman responsible for the definable feature. Document
the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate minutes prepared by
the CQC System Manager and attach to the daily CQC report. Instruct
applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in
order to meet contract specifications.
3.6.2 Initial Phase
This phase is accomplished at the beginning of a definable feature of work.
Accomplish the following:
a. Check work to ensure that it is in full compliance with contract
requirements. Review minutes of the preparatory meeting.
b. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full contract compliance. Verify
required control inspection and testing.
c. Establish level of workmanship and verify that it meets minimum
acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required sample panels as
appropriate.
d. Resolve all differences.
e. Check safety to include compliance with and upgrading of the safety plan
and activity hazard analysis. Review the activity analysis with each
worker.
f. The Government must be notified at least 72 hours in advance of beginning
the initial phase. Prepare separate minutes of this phase by the CQC
System Manager and attach to the daily CQC report. Indicate the exact
location of initial phase for future reference and comparison with
follow-up phases.
The initial phase should be repeated for each new crew to work onsite, or any
time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met.
3.6.3 Follow-up Phase
Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing,
are providing continued compliance with contract requirements, until
completion of the particular feature of work. Record the checks in the CQC
documentation. Conduct final follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies
prior to the start of additional features of work which may be affected by
the deficient work. Do not build upon nor conceal non-conforming work.
3.6.4 Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases
Conduct additional preparatory and initial phases on the same definable
features of work if: the quality of on-going work is unacceptable; if there
are changes in the applicable CQC staff, onsite production supervision or
Page 10 of 13
work crew; if work on a definable feature is resumed after a substantial
period of inactivity; or if other problems develop.
3.7 PHOTOS
The contractor shall take digital photos on a recurring basis, unless
specifically prohibited by the installation or other security requirements.
Photos shall show the progress of work on the overall site, at each facility,
and from multiple angles, directions, and positions, as well as close-up
views of critical activities and features of work. Prior coordination with
the Contracting Officers Representative to ensure the appropriate photos are
taken is required.
Photos shall be of a minimum 1024x768 resolution, taken with a minimum 8.0
Megapixel camera, and shall not be edited in any manner, to include cropping
or manipulation of appearance. Photos shall be in the JPG format with the
camera set on the maximum resolution (for example, if the camera takes photos
at 6.3, 8.0, and 10.2 megapixel resolution, all pictures shall be taken at
10.2 megapixels). The camera shall also be able to place the date the photo
was taken on the image, and the EXIF information shall include the date the
photo was taken as well as the date the file was modified.
At least twice a month, the contractor shall submit all photos associated
with the project, to include any photos taken at manufacturers or suppliers.
The contractor and government shall agree on a numbering/labeling/naming
convention for the photos to ensure the location of the work can be
discerned. Photos shall be provided in electronic format only and shall not
be submitted via e-mail unless approved in writing by the Contracting
Officers Representative.
3.8 TESTS
3.8.1 Testing Procedure
Perform specified or required tests to verify that control measures are
adequate to provide a product which conforms to contract requirements.
Upon request, furnish to the Government duplicate samples of test specimens
for possible testing by the Government. Testing includes operation and/or
acceptance tests when specified. Perform the following activities and record
and provide the following data:
a. Verify that testing procedures comply with contract requirements.
b. Verify that facilities and testing equipment are available and comply
with testing standards.
c. Check test instrument calibration data against certified standards.
d. Verify that recording forms and test identification control number
system, including all of the test documentation requirements, have been
prepared.
e. Record results of all tests taken, both passing and failing, on the CQC
report for the date taken. The tests shall be recorded in the QCS system
per Section 01 45 01.10 USACE QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS). Failure to
submit timely test reports as stated may result in nonpayment for related
work performed and disapproval of the test facility for this contract.
Page 11 of 13
3.8.2 Onsite Laboratory
The Government reserves the right to utilize the Contractor's control testing
laboratory and equipment to make assurance tests, and to check the
Contractor's testing procedures, techniques, and test results at no
additional cost to the Government.
3.8.3 Furnishing or Transportation of Samples for Testing
Costs incidental to the transportation of samples or materials will be borne
by the Contractor.
3.9 COMPLETION INSPECTION
3.9.1 Punch-Out Inspection
Conduct an inspection of the work by the CQC Manager near the end of the
work, or any increment of the work established by a time stated in the
Contract Clause, "Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion of Work", or by
the specifications. Prepare and include in the CQC documentation a punch list
of items which do not conform to the approved drawings and specifications, as
required by paragraph DOCUMENTATION. Include within the list of deficiencies
the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. Make a second
inspection by the CQC System Manager or staff to ascertain that all
deficiencies have been corrected. Once this is accomplished, notify the
Government that the facility is ready for the Government Pre-Final
inspection.
3.9.2 Pre-Final Inspection
The Government will perform the pre-final inspection to verify that the
facility is complete and ready to be occupied. A Government Pre-Final Punch
List may be developed as a result of this inspection. Ensure that all items
on this list have been corrected before notifying the Government, so that a
Final inspection with the customer can be scheduled. Correct any items noted
on the Pre-Final inspection in a timely manner. These inspections and any
deficiency corrections required by this paragraph must be accomplished within
the time slated for completion of the entire work or any particular increment
of the work if the project is divided into increments by separate completion
dates.
3.9.3 Final Acceptance Inspection
The Contractor's Quality Control personnel, plus the superintendent or other
primary management person, and the Contracting Officer's Representative must
be in attendance at the final acceptance inspection. Additional Government
personnel including, but not limited to, those from Base/Post Civil Facility
Engineer, user groups, and major commands may also be in attendance. The
final acceptance inspection will be formally scheduled by the Contracting
Officer based upon results of the Pre-Final inspection. Notify the
Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to the final acceptance inspection
and include the Contractor's assurance that all specific items previously
identified to the Contractor as being unacceptable, along with all remaining
work performed under the contract, will be complete and acceptable by the
date scheduled for the final acceptance inspection. Failure of the Contractor
to have all contract work acceptably complete for this inspection will be
cause for the Contracting Officer to bill the Contractor for the Government's
additional inspection cost in accordance with the contract clause titled
Page 12 of 13
"Inspection of Construction".
3.10 DOCUMENTATION
Maintain current records providing factual evidence that required quality
control activities and/or tests have been performed. Include in these records
the work of subcontractors and suppliers on an acceptable form that includes,
as a minimum, the following information:
a. Indicate a description of trades working on the project; the number of
personnel working; weather conditions encountered; and any delays
encountered. Cover both conforming and deficient features and include a
statement that equipment and materials incorporated in the work and
workmanship comply with the contract. Furnish the original and one copy
of these records in report form to the Government daily within 48 hours
after the date covered by the report, except that reports need not be
submitted for days on which no work is performed. As a minimum, prepare
and submit one report for every 7 days of no work and on the last day of
a no work period. All calendar days must be accounted for throughout the
life of the contract. The first report following a day of no work will be
for that day only. Reports must be signed and dated by the CQC System
Manager. Include copies of test reports and copies of reports prepared by
all subordinate quality control personnel within the CQC System Manager
Report.
b. Contractor/subcontractor and their area of responsibility.
c. Operating plant/equipment with hours worked, idle, or down for repair.
d. Work performed each day, giving location, description, and by whom. When
Network Analysis (NAS) is used, identify each phase of work performed
each day by NAS activity number.
e. Test and/or control activities performed with results and references to
specifications/drawings requirements. Identify the control phase
(Preparatory, Initial, Follow-up). List of deficiencies noted, along with
corrective action.
f. Quantity of materials received at the site with statement as to
acceptability, storage, and reference to specifications/drawings
requirements.
g. Submittals and deliverables reviewed, with contract reference, by whom,
and action taken.
h. Offsite surveillance activities, including actions taken.
i. Job safety evaluations stating what was checked, results, and
instructions or corrective actions.
j. Instructions given/received and conflicts in plans and/or specifications.
k. Contractor's verification statement.
3.11 FORMS
Section 01 45 01.10 USACE QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS) requires the use of
the QCS software, which will generate any forms required by this section.
Page 13 of 13
3.11 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected
noncompliance with the foregoing requirements. Take immediate corrective
action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the
Contractor at the work site, will be deemed sufficient for the purpose of
notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the
Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until
satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time lost due
to such stop orders will be made the subject of claim for extension of time
or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.

-- End of Section --
SECTI ON 01 45 01. 10
USACE QUALI TY CONTROL SYSTEM ( QCS)
04/08
PART 1 GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 1 Cont r act Admi ni st r at i on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 1. 1 Cor r espondence and El ect r oni c Communi cat i ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 1. 2 Ot her Fact or s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 2 QCS SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 3 SYSTEM REQUI REMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 4 RELATED I NFORMATI ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 4. 1 QCS User Gui de . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 4. 2 Cont r act or Qual i t y Cont r ol ( CQC) Tr ai ni ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 5 CONTRACT DATABASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 6 DATABASE MAI NTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 6. 1 Admi ni st r at i on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 6. 2 Fi nances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. 6. 3 Qual i t y Cont r ol ( QC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. 6. 4 Submi t t al Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1. 6. 5 Schedul e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1. 7 I MPLEMENTATI ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1. 8 MONTHLY COORDI NATI ON MEETI NG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1. 9 NOTI FI CATI ON OF NONCOMPLI ANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
PART 2 PRODUCTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
PART 3 EXECUTI ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Page 1 of 7
SECTI ON 01 45 01. 10 USACE QUALI TY CONTROL SYSTEM ( QCS) ( 04/ 08)

PART 1 GENERAL
1. 1 Cont r act Admi ni st r at i on
The Gover nment wi l l use t he Resi dent Management Syst emf or Wi ndows ( RMS) t o
assi st i n i t s moni t or i ng and admi ni st r at i on of t hi s cont r act . The Cont r act or
shal l use t he Gover nment - f ur ni shed Const r uct i on Cont r act or Modul e of RMS,
r ef er r ed t o as QCS, t o r ecor d, mai nt ai n, and submi t var i ous i nf or mat i on
t hr oughout t he cont r act per i od. The Cont r act or modul e, user manual s,
updat es, and t r ai ni ng i nf or mat i on can be downl oaded f r omt he RMS web si t e.
Al l modul es wi t hi n QCS shal l be used. Thi s j oi nt Gover nment - Cont r act or use
of RMS and QCS wi l l f aci l i t at e el ect r oni c exchange of i nf or mat i on and
over al l management of t he cont r act .
1. 1. 1 Cor r espondence and El ect r oni c Communi cat i ons
For ease and speed of communi cat i ons, bot h Gover nment and Cont r act or wi l l ,
t o t he maxi mumext ent f easi bl e, exchange cor r espondence and ot her document s
i n el ect r oni c f or mat . Cor r espondence, pay r equest s and ot her document s
compr i si ng t he of f i ci al cont r act r ecor d wi l l al so be pr ovi ded i n paper
f or mat , wi t h si gnat ur es and dat es wher e necessar y. Paper document s wi l l
gover n, i n t he event of di scr epancy wi t h t he el ect r oni c ver si on.
1. 1. 2 Ot her Fact or s
Par t i cul ar at t ent i on i s di r ect ed t o Cont r act Cl ause, " Schedul es f or
Const r uct i on Cont r act s" , Cont r act Cl ause, " Payment s" , Sect i on 01 32 01. 00 10
PROJ ECT SCHEDULE, Sect i on 01 33 00 SUBMI TTAL PROCEDURES, and Sect i on 01 45
01 USACE QUALI TY CONTROL, whi ch have a di r ect r el at i onshi p t o t he r epor t i ng
t o be accompl i shed t hr ough QCS.
No separ at e payment f or est abl i shi ng and mai nt ai ni ng t he QCS dat abase shal l
be made; al l cost s associ at ed t her ewi t h wi l l be i ncl uded i n t he cont r act
pr i ci ng f or t he wor k.
1. 2 QCS SOFTWARE
QCS i s a Wi ndows- based pr ogr amt hat can be r un on a st and- al one per sonal
comput er or on a net wor k. The Gover nment wi l l make avai l abl e t he QCS
sof t war e t o t he Cont r act or af t er awar d of t he const r uct i on cont r act . Pr i or
t o t he Pr e- Const r uct i on Conf er ence, t he Cont r act or wi l l be r esponsi bl e t o
downl oad, i nst al l and use t he l at est ver si on of t he QCS sof t war e f r omt he
Gover nment s RMS I nt er net Websi t e. Upon speci f i c j ust i f i cat i on and r equest
by t he Cont r act or , t he Gover nment can pr ovi de QCS on el ect r oni c medi a. Any
pr ogr amupdat es of QCS wi l l be made avai l abl e t o t he Cont r act or vi a t he
Gover nment RMS Websi t e as t hey become avai l abl e.
1. 3 SYSTEM REQUI REMENTS
The cont r act or shal l be r esponsi bl e f or pr ovi di ng a comput er , pr i nt er ,
i nt er net connect i on, and ot her per i pher al s ( i ncl udi ng, but not l i mi t ed t o, a
mouse, moni t or , and keyboar d) f or t he use of QCS by t hei r per sonnel .
The comput er must r un t he Wi ndows Oper at i ng Syst em( Wi ndows XP or hi gher ) ,
be capabl e of connect i ng t o t he I nt er net , and be i nst al l ed wi t h vi r us
pr ot ect i on sof t war e. Al l sof t war e on t he comput er must be updat ed and
Page 2 of 7

l egal l y l i censed f or use by t he cont r act or . The comput er must meet t he
mi ni mumsyst emr equi r ement s necessar y t o oper at e al l i nst al l ed sof t war e and
har dwar e, and shoul d, i n gener al , be no mor e t han si x mont hs ol d at t he t i me
of Not i ce t o Pr oceed.
1. 4 RELATED I NFORMATI ON
1. 4. 1 QCS User Gui de
Af t er cont r act awar d, downl oad i nst r uct i ons f or t he i nst al l at i on and use of
QCS f r omt he Gover nment RMS I nt er net Websi t e. I n case of j ust i f i abl e
di f f i cul t i es, t he Gover nment wi l l pr ovi de t he Cont r act or wi t h a CD- ROM
cont ai ni ng t hese i nst r uct i ons.
1. 4. 2 Cont r act or Qual i t y Cont r ol ( CQC) Tr ai ni ng
The use of QCS wi l l be di scussed wi t h t he Cont r act or ' s QC Syst emManager
dur i ng t he mandat or y CQC Tr ai ni ng cl ass. The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer may
ar r ange f or addi t i onal t r ai ni ng i n t he use of t he sof t war e i f r equest ed,
however t he cont r act or i s expect ed t o under st and t he concept s and pr i nci pl es
of Qual i t y Cont r ol pr i or t o r equest i ng t r ai ni ng on t he use of t he sof t war e.
1. 5 CONTRACT DATABASE
Pr i or t o t he pr e- const r uct i on conf er ence, t he Gover nment wi l l pr ovi de t he
Cont r act or wi t h basi c cont r act awar d dat a t o use f or QCS. The Gover nment
wi l l pr ovi de dat a updat es t o t he Cont r act or as needed, gener al l y by usi ng
t he Gover nment ' s SFTP r eposi t or y bui l t i nt o QCS i mpor t / expor t f unct i on.
These updat es wi l l gener al l y consi st of submi t t al r evi ews, cor r espondence
st at us, QA comment s, and ot her admi ni st r at i ve and QA dat a.
1. 6 DATABASE MAI NTENANCE
Est abl i sh, mai nt ai n, and updat e dat a i n t he QCS dat abase r el at i ng t o t he
cont r act and Cont r act or l i br ar i es t hr oughout t he dur at i on of t he cont r act .
Submi t dat a updat es t o t he Gover nment usi ng t he Gover nment ' s SFTP r eposi t or y
bui l t i nt o QCS expor t f unct i on. I f per mi t t ed i n wr i t i ng by t he Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer , e- mai l or ot her el ect r oni c t r ansmi ssi on, such as vi a memor y st i ck
or CD- ROM may be used i n l i eu of t he SFTP si t e.
The QCS dat abase i ncl udes dat a on t he f ol l owi ng i t ems:
1. 6. 1 Admi ni st r at i on
1. 6. 1. 1 Cont r act or I nf or mat i on
The Cont r act or ' s name, addr ess, t el ephone number s, management st af f , and
ot her r equi r ed i t ems.
1. 6. 1. 2 Subcont r act or I nf or mat i on
Name, t r ade, addr ess, phone number s, and ot her r equi r ed i nf or mat i on f or al l
subcont r act or s, i ncl udi ng amount subcont r act ed. Assi gn each
subcont r act or / t r ade a uni que Responsi bi l i t y Code.
1. 6. 1. 3 Cor r espondence
Page 3 of 7

I dent i f y al l Cont r act or cor r espondence t o t he Gover nment wi t h a ser i al
number . Pr ef i x cor r espondence i ni t i at ed by t he Cont r act or ' s si t e of f i ce
wi t h S. Pr ef i x l et t er s i ni t i at ed by t he Cont r act or ' s home ( mai n) of f i ce
wi t h " H" . Let t er s must be number ed st ar t i ng f r om0001. ( e. g. , H- 0001 or S-
0001) . The Gover nment ' s l et t er s t o t he Cont r act or wi l l be pr ef i xed wi t h " C" .
1. 6. 1. 4 Request For I nf or mat i on ( RFI )
Exchange al l Request s For I nf or mat i on ( RFI ) usi ng t he Bui l t - i n RFI gener at or
and t r acker .
1. 6. 1. 5 Management Repor t i ng
QCS i ncl udes a number of r epor t s t hat Cont r act or management can use t o t r ack
t he st at us of t he pr oj ect . The val ue of t hese r epor t s i s r ef l ect i ve of t he
qual i t y of t he dat a i nput , and i s mai nt ai ned i n t he var i ous sect i ons of QCS.
Among t hese r epor t s ar e: Pr ogr ess Payment Request wor ksheet , QA/ QC comment s,
Submi t t al Regi st er St at us, Thr ee- Phase I nspect i on checkl i st s.
1. 6. 2 Fi nances
1. 6. 2. 1 Pay Act i vi t y Dat a
I ncl ude wi t hi n t he QCS dat abase a l i st of pay act i vi t i es t hat t he Cont r act or
must devel op i n conj unct i on wi t h t he const r uct i on schedul e. Al l pay
act i vi t i es must be l i nked t o t he appr opr i at e f eat ur e of wor k, and i ncl ude
schedul ed st ar t and f i ni sh dat es, updat ed t o t he act ual dat es as t hey begi n
and end. Each pay act i vi t y may onl y be l i nked t o a si ngl e f eat ur e of wor k.
The sumof al l pay act i vi t i es must be equal t o t he t ot al cont r act amount ,
i ncl udi ng modi f i cat i ons. Gr oup pay act i vi t i es Cont r act Li ne I t emNumber
( CLI N) ; t he sumof t he act i vi t i es must equal t he amount of each CLI N. The
t ot al of al l CLI Ns equal s t he Cont r act Amount .
Unl ess appr oved i n wr i t i ng by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , t he Pay Act i vi t i es
shal l be i dent i cal t o t hose i dent i f i ed on t he pr oj ect schedul e.
1. 6. 2. 2 Payment Request s
Pr epar e al l pr ogr ess payment r equest s usi ng QCS. Compl et e t he payment
r equest wor ksheet , pr ompt payment cer t i f i cat i on, and payment i nvoi ce i n QCS.
Updat e t he wor k compl et ed under t he cont r act , measur ed as per cent or as
speci f i c quant i t i es.
A si gned paper copy of t he appr oved payment r equest i s al so r equi r ed, whi ch
wi l l gover n i n t he event of di scr epancy wi t h t he el ect r oni c ver si on.
1. 6. 3 Qual i t y Cont r ol ( QC)
QCS pr ovi des a means t o t r ack i mpl ement at i on of t he 3- phase QC Cont r ol
Syst em, pr epar e dai l y r epor t s, i dent i f y and t r ack def i ci enci es, document
pr ogr ess of wor k, and suppor t ot her Cont r act or QC r equi r ement s. Mai nt ai n
t hi s dat a on a dai l y basi s. Ent er ed dat a wi l l aut omat i cal l y out put t o t he
QCS gener at ed dai l y r epor t .
Page 4 of 7

Pr ovi de t he Gover nment a Cont r act or Qual i t y Cont r ol ( CQC) Pl an wi t hi n t he
t i me r equi r ed i n Sect i on 01 45 01 USACE QUALI TY CONTROL. Wi t hi n seven
cal endar days of Gover nment accept ance, submi t a QCS updat e r ef l ect i ng t he
i nf or mat i on cont ai ned i n t he accept ed CQC Pl an: schedul e, pay act i vi t i es,
f eat ur es of wor k, submi t t al r egi st er , QC r equi r ement s, and equi pment l i st .
1. 6. 3. 1 Cont r act or Qual i t y Cont r ol ( CQC) Repor t s.
QCS i ncl udes t he means t o pr oduce t he CQC Repor t . The Cont r act or may use
ot her f or mat s t o r ecor d basi c QC dat a. However , t he Dai l y CQC Repor t
gener at ed by QCS must be t he Cont r act or ' s of f i ci al r epor t . Summar i ze dat a
f r omany suppl ement al r epor t s by t he Cont r act or and consol i dat e ont o t he
QCS- gener at ed Dai l y CQC Repor t .
Al so pr ovi de t he Gover nment a si gned, pr i nt ed copy of t he dai l y CQC r epor t .
1. 6. 3. 2 Def i ci ency Tr acki ng.
Use QCS t o t r ack def i ci enci es. Def i ci enci es i dent i f i ed by t he Cont r act or
wi l l be numer i cal l y t r acked usi ng QC punch l i st i t ems. Mai nt ai n a cur r ent
l og of punch l i st i t ems i n t he QCS dat abase. The Gover nment wi l l l og t he
def i ci enci es i t has i dent i f i ed usi ng i t s QA punch l i st i t ems. The
Gover nment ' s QA punch l i st i t ems wi l l be i ncl uded i n i t s expor t f i l e t o t he
Cont r act or . Regul ar l y updat e t he cor r ect i on st at us of bot h QC and QA
punchl i st i t ems.
1. 6. 3. 3 Feat ur es of Wor k
I dent i f y al l f eat ur es of wor k and devel op t he pr oposed schedul e ( dat es f or
conduct i ng t he pr epar at or y and i ni t i al i nspect i ons) . I dent i f y al l cr i t i cal
i nspect i on checks usi ng t he 3- Phase I nspect i ons scr eens, and ut i l i ze t he
pr epar at or y and i ni t i al meet i ng mi nut es gener at ed by QCS t o conduct t hese
meet i ngs.
1. 6. 3. 4 QC Requi r ement s
Devel op and mai nt ai n a compl et e l i st of QC t est i ng, t r ansf er r ed and
i nst al l ed pr oper t y, and user t r ai ni ng r equi r ement s.
1. 6. 3. 5 Thr ee- Phase Cont r ol Meet i ngs
Mai nt ai n schedul ed and act ual dat es and t i mes of pr epar at or y and i ni t i al
cont r ol meet i ngs i n QCS.
1. 6. 3. 6 Equi pment
Cont ai n wi t hi n t he Cont r act or ' s QCS dat abase a cur r ent l i st of equi pment
pl anned f or use or bei ng used on t he j obsi t e, i ncl udi ng t he most r ecent and
pl anned equi pment i nspect i on dat es.
1. 6. 3. 7 Labor and Equi pment Hour s
Log l abor and equi pment exposur e hour s on a dai l y basi s and compl et e t he
mont hl y r epor t s f or exposur e hour s usi ng QCS.
1. 6. 3. 8 Acci dent / Saf et y Repor t i ng
Page 5 of 7

The Gover nment wi l l i ssue saf et y comment s, di r ect i ons, or gui dance whenever
saf et y def i ci enci es ar e obser ved. The Gover nment ' s saf et y comment s wi l l be
i ncl uded i n i t s expor t f i l e t o t he Cont r act or . Regul ar l y updat e t he
cor r ect i on st at us of t he saf et y comment s. I n addi t i on, ut i l i ze QCS t o advi se
t he Gover nment of any acci dent s occur r i ng on t he j obsi t e. Thi s br i ef
suppl ement al ent r y i s not t o be consi der ed as a subst i t ut e f or compl et i on of
mandat or y r epor t s, e. g. , ENG For m3394 and OSHA For m300.
1. 6. 3. 9 Hazar d Anal ysi s
Use QCS t o devel op a hazar d anal ysi s f or each f eat ur e of wor k i ncl uded i n
t he CQC Pl an. Addr ess any hazar ds, or pot ent i al hazar ds, t hat may be
associ at ed wi t h t he wor k.
1. 6. 4 Submi t t al Management
Mai nt ai n a compl et e l i st of al l submi t t al s, i ncl udi ng compl et i on of al l dat a
col umns. Dat es on whi ch submi t t al s ar e r ecei ved and r et ur ned by t he
Gover nment wi l l be i ncl uded i n i t s expor t f i l e t o t he Cont r act or . Use QCS t o
t r ack and t r ansmi t al l submi t t al s. ENG For m4025, submi t t al t r ansmi t t al
f or m, and t he submi t t al r egi st er updat e must be pr oduced usi ng QCS. QCS and
RMS wi l l be used t o updat e, st or e and exchange submi t t al r egi st er s and
t r ansmi t t al s, but wi l l not be used f or st or age of act ual submi t t al s.
1. 6. 5 Schedul e
I nput and mai nt ai n i n t he QCS dat abase t he const r uct i on schedul e ei t her
manual l y or by usi ng t he St andar d Dat a Exchange For mat ( SDEF) ( see Sect i on
01 32 01. 00 10 PROJ ECT SCHEDULE) . I ncl ude wi t h each pay r equest t he updat ed
schedul e.
1. 7 I MPLEMENTATI ON
Cont r act or use of QCS as descr i bed i n t he pr ecedi ng par agr aphs i s mandat or y.
Ensur e t hat suf f i ci ent r esour ces ar e avai l abl e t o mai nt ai n t he QCS dat abase,
and t o pr ovi de t he Gover nment wi t h r egul ar dat abase updat es. QCS shal l be an
i nt egr al par t of t he Cont r act or ' s management of qual i t y cont r ol .
1. 8 MONTHLY COORDI NATI ON MEETI NG
Updat e t he QCS dat abase each wor kday. At l east bi - weekl y ( ever y t wo weeks) ,
gener at e and submi t an expor t f i l e t o t he Gover nment wi t h schedul e updat e
and pr ogr ess payment r equest . As r equi r ed i n Cont r act Cl ause " Payment s" , at
l east one week pr i or t o submi t t al , meet wi t h t he Gover nment r epr esent at i ve
t o r evi ew t he pl anned pr ogr ess payment dat a submi ssi on f or er r or s and
omi ssi ons.
Make al l r equi r ed cor r ect i ons pr i or t o Gover nment accept ance of t he expor t
f i l e and pr ogr ess payment r equest . Payment r equest s accompani ed by
i ncompl et e or i ncor r ect dat a submi t t al s wi l l be r et ur ned. The Gover nment
wi l l not pr ocess pr ogr ess payment s unt i l an accept abl e QCS expor t f i l e i s
r ecei ved.
1. 9 NOTI FI CATI ON OF NONCOMPLI ANCE
Page 6 of 7

Page 7 of 7
The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi l l not i f y t he Cont r act or of any det ect ed
noncompl i ance wi t h t he r equi r ement s of t hi s speci f i cat i on. Take i mmedi at e
cor r ect i ve act i on af t er r ecei pt of such not i ce. Such not i ce, when del i ver ed
t o t he Cont r act or at t he wor k si t e, wi l l be deemed suf f i ci ent f or t he
pur pose of not i f i cat i on.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTI ON
Not Used

- - End of Sect i on

SECTION 01 78 00
COMPLETION PROCEDURES

02/10

PART 1: GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 1 REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 2 SUBMI TTALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 3 PROJ ECT RECORD DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 3. 1 As- Bui l t Dr awi ngs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 3. 2 As- Bui l t Recor d of Mat er i al s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 4 EQUI PMENT/ PRODUCT WARRANTI ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 4. 1 Equi pment / Pr oduct War r ant y Li st . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 4. 2 Equi pment War r ant y Tags and Guar ant or ' s Local Repr esent at i ve. . . . . 3
1. 5 MECHANI CAL TESTI NG AND BALANCI NG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 6 REAL PROPERTY RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
PART 2: PRODUCTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
PART 3: EXECUTI ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3. 1 WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3. 1. 1 War r ant y Management Pl an. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3. 1. 2 Per f or mance of War r ant y Wor k. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3. 1. 3 War r ant y Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3. 2 TESTI NG AND VALI DATI ON OF SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3. 2. 1 Gener al Requi r ement s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3. 2. 2 Test i ng Requi r ement s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3. 2. 3 Test i ng Pr ocedur es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3. 2. 4 Test Repor t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3. 2. 5 Addi t i onal Test i ng Requi r ement s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3. 2. 6 Test i ng Exper t i se. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3. 2. 7 Recor ds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3. 3 EQUI PMENT TESTI NG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3. 4 FI NAL CLEANI NG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Page 1 of 10
SECTI ON 01 78 00 COMPLETI ON PROCEDURES ( 02/ 10)
PART 1: GENERAL
1. 1 REFERENCES
ASTM I NTERNATI ONAL ( ASTM) ( 2005) St ewar dshi p f or t he Cl eani ng of
Commer ci al and I nst i t ut i onal Bui l di ngs
1. 2 SUBMI TTALS
submi t t al s not havi ng a " G" desi gnat i on ar e f or Cont r act or Qual i t y Cont r ol
appr oval . When used, a desi gnat i on f ol l owi ng t he " G" desi gnat i on i dent i f i es
t he of f i ce t hat wi l l r evi ew t he submi t t al f or t he Gover nment . The f ol l owi ng
shal l be submi t t ed i n accor dance wi t h Sect i on 01 33 00 SUBMI TTAL PROCEDURES:
Equi pment / Pr oduct War r ant y Li st ; G
Recor d Of Mat er i al s; G
War r ant y Management Pl an; G
Equi pment / Pr oduct War r ant y Tag; G
1. 3 PROJ ECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
1. 3. 1 As- Bui l t Dr awi ngs
As bui l t dr awi ngs shal l be pr epar ed and submi t t ed i n accor dance wi t h Sect i on
00 73 15 GENERAL CONDI TI ONS
1. 3. 2 As- Bui l t Recor d of Mat er i al s
Al l i nst al l ed mat er i al s shal l be r ecor ded i n t he QCS sof t war e syst em
( r ef er ence Sect i on 01 45 01. 10 Cont r act or Qual i t y Cont r ol SYSTEM) by t he
cont r act or i n t he I nst al l ed Pr oper t y por t i on of t he QC Requi r ement s modul e.
Wher e sever al manuf act ur er s' br ands, t ypes, or cl asses of t he i t eml i st ed
have been used i n t he pr oj ect , desi gnat e speci f i c ar eas wher e each i t emwas
used. Desi gnat i ons shal l be keyed t o t he ar eas and spaces depi ct ed on t he
cont r act dr awi ngs.
1. 4 EQUI PMENT/ PRODUCT WARRANTI ES
1. 4. 1 Equi pment / Pr oduct War r ant y Li st
Fur ni sh t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer a bound and i ndexed not ebook cont ai ni ng
wr i t t en war r ant i es f or equi pment / pr oduct s f ur ni shed under t he cont r act , and
pr epar e a compl et e l i st i ng of such equi pment / pr oduct s. The
equi pment / pr oduct s l i st shal l st at e t he speci f i cat i on sect i on appl i cabl e t o
t he equi pment / pr oduct , dur at i on of t he war r ant y, st ar t dat e of t he war r ant y,
endi ng dat e of t he war r ant y, and t he poi nt of cont act f or f ul f i l l ment of t he
war r ant y. The war r ant y per i od shal l begi n on t he same dat e as pr oj ect
Page 2 of 10
accept ance and shal l cont i nue f or t he f ul l pr oduct war r ant y per i od. Execut e
t he f ul l l i st and del i ver t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer pr i or t o f i nal
accept ance of t he f aci l i t y.
1. 4. 2 Equi pment War r ant y Tags and Guar ant or ' s Local Repr esent at i ve
Fur ni sh wi t h each war r ant y t he name, addr ess, and t el ephone number of t he
guar ant or ' s r epr esent at i ve near est t o t he l ocat i on wher e t he equi pment and
appl i ances ar e i nst al l ed. The guar ant or ' s r epr esent at i ve, upon r equest of
t he st at i on r epr esent at i ve, shal l honor t he war r ant y dur i ng t he war r ant y
per i od, and shal l pr ovi de t he ser vi ces pr escr i bed by t he t er ms of t he
war r ant y. At t he t i me of i nst al l at i on, t ag each i t emof war r ant ed equi pment
wi t h a dur abl e, oi l - and wat er - r esi st ant t ag appr oved by t he Cont r act i ng
Of f i cer . At t ach t ag wi t h copper wi r e and spr ay wi t h a cl ear si l i cone
wat er pr oof coat i ng. Leave t he dat e of accept ance and QC' s si gnat ur e bl ank
unt i l pr oj ect i s accept ed f or benef i ci al occupancy. Tag shal l show t he
f ol l owi ng i nf or mat i on:
EQUI PMENT/ PRODUCT WARRANTY TAG

Type of Equi pment / Pr oduct ____________________
War r ant y Per i od __________ Fr om__________ To __________
Cont r act No. ____________________
I nspect or ' s Si gnat ur e _____________________ Dat e Accept ed ____________

Const r uct i on Cont r act or :
Name: ____________________
Addr ess: _______________________
Tel ephone: _______________________

War r ant y Cont act : __________________
Name: ____________________
Addr ess: ________________________
Tel ephone: ________________________

STATI ON PERSONNEL TO PERFORM ONLY OPERATI ONAL MAI NTENANCE
1. 5 MECHANI CAL TESTI NG AND BALANCI NG
Al l cont r act r equi r ement s, i ncl udi ng al l t est i ng, bal anci ng, r evi ews, and
i nspect i on shal l be f ul l y compl et ed pr i or t o cont r act compl et i on dat e,
except as not ed ot her wi se
The t i me r equi r ed t o compl et e al l wor k and t est i ng i s i ncl uded i n t he
al l ot t ed cal endar days f or compl et i on.
1. 6 REAL PROPERTY RECORD
Near t he compl et i on of Pr oj ect , but a mi ni mumof 60 days pr i or t o f i nal
accept ance of t he wor k, compl et e and updat e an account i ng of al l i nst al l ed
pr oper t y on For mDD1354 " Tr ansf er and Accept ance of Mi l i t ar y Real Pr oper t y. "
Cont act t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer f or any pr oj ect speci f i c i nf or mat i on
necessar y t o compl et e t he DD For m1354. The Cont r act i ng Of f i cer wi l l
pr ovi de t he appr opr i at e f or ms f or compl et i on
Page 3 of 10
Submi t t he compl et ed Checkl i st f or For mDD1354 of Gover nment - Fur ni shed and
Cont r act or - Fur ni shed/ Cont r act or I nst al l ed i t ems. At t ach t hi s l i st t o t he
updat ed DD For m1354. I nst r uct i ons f or compl et i ng t he f or mand a bl ank
checkl i st wi l l be pr ovi ded by t he gover nment .

PART 2: PRODUCTS

PART 3: EXECUTI ON
3. 1 WARRANTY
3. 1. 1 War r ant y Management Pl an
The Cont r act or shal l devel op a war r ant y management pl an and submi t t o t he
Cont r act i ng Of f i cer at l east 30 days bef or e t he f i nal i nspect i on. The
war r ant y management pl an shal l i ncl ude al l r equi r ed act i ons and document s t o
assur e t hat t he Gover nment r ecei ves al l war r ant i es t o whi ch i t i s ent i t l ed.
The pl an shal l be i n nar r at i ve f or mand cont ai n suf f i ci ent det ai l t o r ender
i t sui t abl e f or use by f ut ur e mai nt enance and r epai r per sonnel , whet her
t r adesmen, or of engi neer i ng backgr ound, not necessar i l y f ami l i ar wi t h t hi s
cont r act .
The t er m" st at us" as i ndi cat ed bel ow shal l i ncl ude due dat e and whet her i t em
has been submi t t ed or was accompl i shed. Assembl e appr oved i nf or mat i on i n a
bi nder and t ur n over t o t he Gover nment upon accept ance of t he wor k. The
const r uct i on war r ant y per i od wi l l begi n on t he dat e of pr oj ect accept ance
and cont i nue f or t he f ul l pr oduct war r ant y per i od.
Two j oi nt war r ant y i nspect i ons shal l be hel d dur i ng t he war r ant y per i od,
gener al l y 4 mont hs af t er accept ance and 3 mont hs pr i or t o expi r at i on of t he
war r ant y. The Cont r act or , Cont r act i ng Of f i cer ( or t hei r r epr esent at i ve) and
t he Cust omer Repr esent at i ve wi l l at t end.
I nf or mat i on cont ai ned i n t he war r ant y management pl an shal l i ncl ude, but
shal l not be l i mi t ed t o, t he f ol l owi ng:
a. Rol es and r esponsi bi l i t i es of al l per sonnel associ at ed wi t h t he
war r ant y pr ocess, i ncl udi ng poi nt s of cont act and t el ephone number s
wi t hi n t he or gani zat i ons of t he Cont r act or s, subcont r act or s,
manuf act ur er s or suppl i er s i nvol ved.
b. Li st i ng and st at us of del i ver y of al l Cer t i f i cat es of War r ant y f or
ext ended war r ant y i t ems, t o i ncl ude r oof s, HVAC bal anci ng, pumps,
mot or s, t r ansf or mer s, and f or al l commi ssi oned syst ems such as f i r e
pr ot ect i on and al ar msyst ems, spr i nkl er syst ems, l i ght ni ng
pr ot ect i on syst ems, et c.
c. A l i st f or each war r ant ed equi pment , i t em, f eat ur e of const r uct i on
or syst emi ndi cat i ng:
( 1) Name of i t em.
( 2) Model and ser i al number s.
( 3) Locat i on wher e i nst al l ed.
( 4) Name and phone number s of manuf act ur er s or suppl i er s.
( 5) Names, addr esses and t el ephone number s of sour ces of spar e
par t s.
Page 4 of 10
( 6) War r ant i es and t er ms of war r ant y. I ncl ude over al l cont r act
war r ant y of const r uct i on. I t ems whi ch have ext ended war r ant i es
must be i ndi cat ed wi t h separ at e war r ant y expi r at i on dat es.
( 7) Cr oss- r ef er ence t o war r ant y cer t i f i cat es as appl i cabl e.
( 8) St ar t i ng poi nt and dur at i on of war r ant y per i od.
( 9) Summar y of mai nt enance pr ocedur es r equi r ed t o cont i nue t he
war r ant y i n f or ce.
( 10) Cr oss- r ef er ence t o speci f i c per t i nent Oper at i on and
Mai nt enance manual s.
( 11) Or gani zat i on, names and phone number s of per sons t o cal l f or
war r ant y ser vi ce
( 12) Typi cal r esponse t i me and r epai r t i me expect ed f or var i ous
war r ant ed equi pment .
d. The Cont r act or ' s pl ans f or at t endance at t he post - const r uct i on
war r ant y i nspect i ons conduct ed by t he Gover nment .
e. Pr ocedur e and st at us of t aggi ng of al l equi pment cover ed by ext ended
war r ant i es.
f . Copi es of i nst r uct i ons t o be post ed near sel ect ed pi eces of
equi pment wher e oper at i on i s cr i t i cal f or war r ant y and/ or saf et y
r easons.
3. 1. 2 Per f or mance of War r ant y Wor k
Fol l owi ng or al or wr i t t en not i f i cat i on of r equi r ed const r uct i on war r ant y
r epai r wor k, t he Cont r act or shal l r espond i n a t i mel y manner .
I n t he event t he Cont r act or f ai l s t o commence and di l i gent l y pur sue any
const r uct i on war r ant y wor k r equi r ed, t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer may have t he
wor k per f or med by ot her s, and af t er compl et i on of t he wor k, wi l l char ge t he
cont r act or expenses i ncur r ed by t he Gover nment whi l e per f or mi ng t he wor k,
i ncl udi ng, but not l i mi t ed t o admi ni st r at i ve expenses.
3. 1. 3 War r ant y Tags
At t he t i me of i nst al l at i on, t ag each war r ant ed i t emwi t h a dur abl e, oi l and
wat er r esi st ant t ag appr oved by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . At t ach each t ag
wi t h a copper wi r e and spr ay wi t h a si l i cone wat er pr oof coat i ng. The dat e of
accept ance and t he QC si gnat ur e must r emai n bl ank unt i l t he pr oj ect i s
accept ed f or benef i ci al occupancy. Show t he f ol l owi ng i nf or mat i on on t he
t ag.
a. Type of pr oduct / mat er i al _____________________________________.
b. Model number _________________________________________________.
c. Ser i al number ________________________________________________.
d. Cont r act number ______________________________________________.
e. War r ant y per i od___________f r om___________t o__________________.
f . I nspect or ' s si gnat ur e________________________________________.
g. Const r uct i on Cont r act or ______________________________________.
Addr ess______________________________________________________.
Page 5 of 10
Tel ephone number _____________________________________________.
h. War r ant y cont act _____________________________________________.
Addr ess______________________________________________________.
Tel ephone number _____________________________________________.
i . WARNI NG - PROJ ECT PERSONNEL TO PERFORM ONLY OPERATI ONAL MAI NTENANCE
DURI NG THE WARRANTY PERI OD
3. 2 TESTI NG AND VALI DATI ON OF SYSTEMS
3. 2. 1 Gener al Requi r ement s
I t i s t he Cont r act or ' s r esponsi bi l i t y t o adj ust , f i ne t une, bal ance, et c. ,
al l syst ems t o obt ai n t he maxi mumef f i ci ency and pr oper oper at i on. Al l
Cont r act or f ur ni shed syst ems i ncor por at ed i n t he const r uct i on by t hi s
cont r act shal l be t hor oughl y t est ed f or compl i ance wi t h t he speci f i cat i ons
and as necessar y t o demonst r at e pr oper oper at i on. Gover nment Fur ni shed
Pr oper t y shal l be t est ed as r equi r ed by t he speci f i cat i ons and as necessar y
t o demonst r at e pr oper i nst al l at i on. Thi s t est i ng i s i n addi t i on t o t he
moni t or i ng of t he ut i l i t y r ough- i n and i nst al l at i on r equi r ed by t he
Cont r act or Qual i t y Cont r ol Syst em. Syst ems shal l be def i ned as, but not
l i mi t ed t o, such i t ems as pl umbi ng, el ect r i cal ser vi ces, pneumat i c t ube,
ver t i cal t r anspor t at i on syst ems, mat er i al handl i ng, medi cal gas, pr ocessed
wat er , dat a pr ocessi ng, vacuum, HVAC, f i r e pr ot ect i on t emper at ur e cont r ol ,
cl osed ci r cui t t el evi si on, ener gy moni t or i ng, f i r e al ar m, i nt er com, nur se
cal l , pagi ng, communi cat i on, Dr y St or age Bui l di ngs, et c. Al l di st r i but i on
el ement s of a syst emsuch as wat er pi pi ng, medi cal gas pi pi ng, HVAC
duct wor k, pneumat i c t ubi ng, et c. , shal l be t est ed i n segment s as t he wor k
pr ogr esses; however , a f i nal t est of t he compl et e syst emshal l be r equi r ed,
as wel l as i nt er r el at i onshi ps wi t h ot her equi pment and syst ems.
Syst emt est i ng shal l not t ake pl ace unt i l such t i me as al l ut i l i t i es and
suppor t f eat ur es, i ncl udi ng i nt er r el at i onshi ps wi t h ot her equi pment or
syst ems, have been compl et ed. Test i ng shal l be done as necessar y f or
oper at i ons wi t h t ot al composi t e t est i ng bei ng done once al l
i nt er r el at i onshi ps ar e compl et ed. Syst ems whose end r esul t i s a si ngul ar
f unct i on, such as l i ght i ng, pl umbi ng, el ect r i cal , pr ocessed wat er , et c. ,
shal l be t est ed f or pr oper oper at i on such as no l eaks, pr oper out l et
pol ar i t y, pr oper ci r cui t , gr ound f aul t wor ki ng, f i xt ur e pr oper l y wor ki ng,
et c. Syst ems whose t er mi nal ends ar e i n ef f ect f unct i oni ng uni t s such as
pneumat i c t ube st at i ons, nur se cal l st at i ons, mat er i al handl i ng t r ansf er
st at i ons, hypot her mi a uni t s, et c. , and syst emdr i ve uni t s and component s
such as ai r handl i ng uni t s, wat er ci r cul at i ng pumps, ai r compr essor s, st eam
gener at or s, aut omat i c t r ansf er swi t ch, gas mani f ol ds, pneumat i c t ube
bl ower s, et c. , shal l be t est ed as speci f i ed under t he par agr aph EQUI PMENT
TESTI NG. Al l mot or vol t ages and amper age r eadi ngs shal l be t aken under f ul l
l oad. Al l checkout s shal l be val i dat ed and pr oper l y document ed i n a manner
appr oved by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
Thi s par agr aph shal l be used i n conj unct i on wi t h t he cont r act r equi r ement s
f or a Cont r act or Qual i t y Cont r ol Syst emand ot her sect i ons of t he
speci f i cat i ons whi ch r equi r e speci f i c t est i ng. The Cont r act or shal l i nspect
Page 6 of 10
and t est al l equi pment and syst ems, i ncl udi ng i nt er r el at i onshi ps, whet her or
not r equi r ed el sewher e i n t he speci f i cat i ons.
The t est component s shal l be act i vi t i es i n t he net wor k anal ysi s syst em
i nt er r el at ed wi t h ot her wor k act i vi t i es. Updat ed i nf or mat i on shal l be
pr ovi ded i n t he same manner as r equi r ed f or t he speci f i ed schedul i ng syst em.
3. 2. 2 Test i ng Requi r ement s
Wi t hi n 10 but no l at er t han 60 cal endar days af t er not i ce t o pr oceed, t he
Cont r act or shal l pr ovi de a compl et e l i st of al l t est i ng r equi r ement s f or
equi pment and syst ems f or r evi ew by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . Thi s l i st shal l
be mai nt ai ned cur r ent dur i ng t he Cont r act per i od. Omi ssi on of t est
r equi r ement s f r omt hi s l i st i ng shal l not excuse t he Cont r act or f r om
per f or mance of t he t est s f or Gover nment accept ance of t he f eat ur e of wor k.
The submi t t al shal l i dent i f y each t est as f ol l ows:
- Type of t est .
- Sampl e document at i on f or mat .
- I t ems of f unct i ons bei ng t est ed.
- Speci f i cat i on r ef er ence and r equi r ement .
- Any out ages r equi r ed.
- Qual i f i cat i ons of i ndi vi dual s per f or mi ng t est .
- Ot her r equi r ement s.
- Locat i on.
- Equi pment or syst emt est .
- End i t emor component i t em.
- Pr oposed dat e of t est .
- At what l oads or capaci t i es t he syst emwi l l be t est ed.
- Any var i at i ons t o speci f i ed pr ocedur es.
3. 2. 3 Test i ng Pr ocedur es
The Cont r act or shal l submi t t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer f or appr oval t he t est
pr ocedur es t o be used no l at er t han ni net y ( 90) cal endar days pr i or t o
schedul ed t est dat e. The t est pr ocedur es shal l pr ovi de a st ep- by- st ep
descr i pt i on of :
- Cont r act r equi r ement s.
- Code or manuf act ur er ' s r equi r ement s.
- Test met hodol ogy.
- Avai l abi l i t y of t est i ng equi pment .
- Cal i br at i on of t est i ng equi pment ver sus st andar ds.
- Document at i on f or mat .
- Exper t i se of per sonnel .
The t est pr ocedur es shal l al so i ncl ude speci f i c dat a as i ndi cat ed under t he
par agr aphs EQUI PMENT TESTI NG and SYSTEM TESTI NG.
I f t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer det er mi nes t hat a pr ocedur e or r epor t i ng f or m
does not go i nt o enough det ai l , t he Cont r act or shal l be r equi r ed t o r esubmi t
t he dat a f or appr oval at no i ncr ease i n cont r act pr i ce.
3. 2. 4 Test Repor t
A f i nal r epor t l i st i ng al l def i ci enci es f or each equi pment and syst emt est
shal l be pr ovi ded upon successf ul compl et i on of t he r equi r ed t est .
Page 7 of 10
The f or mat f or each t est r epor t shal l pr ovi de f or suf f i ci ent dat a t o ensur e
compl et e val i dat i on of t he t est r esul t s. The t est val i dat i on f or mat shal l
pr ovi de f or t he f ol l owi ng:
- Pr oj ect t i t l e and cont r act number .
- Appl i cabl e speci f i cat i on sect i on and par agr aphs.
- NAS act i vi t y, i f appl i cabl e.
- Type of t est bei ng per f or med.
- I nt er r el at i onshi p wi t h ot her t est i ng r equi r ement s.
- Test number . Al l t est s ar e t o be sequent i al l y number ed f or a
par t i cul ar t est or di sci pl i ne.
- Dat e and t i me of t est .
- Locat i on of pr oj ect at whi ch t est was per f or med.
- Test r esul t s, numer i cal .
- Test r esul t s, pass/ f ai l .
- Cor r ect i ve act i on i f r equi r ed; r emoval , r epai r , modi f i cat i on, et c.
- Name and si gnat ur e of i ndi vi dual s per f or mi ng t est .
- Name and si gnat ur e of Gover nment Repr esent at i ve wi t nessi ng t est . The
si gnat ur e of t he Gover nment Repr esent at i ves does not r el ease t he
Cont r act or f r ommeet i ng al l cont r act r equi r ement s.
- Addi t i onal speci f i c equi pment and syst emdat a speci f i ed.
The t est r ecor d shal l i ncl ude as an at t achment t he appr oved t est pr ocedur e.
Al l t est r ecor ds shal l be si gned by t he Cont r act or Qual i t y Cont r ol Syst em
Manager and shal l cer t i f y t hat t he t est i ng was per f or med i n accor dance wi t h
appr oved t est pr ocedur es.
I n t he event t hat a f eat ur e of wor k i s t est ed accor di ng t o a par t i cul ar code
and t hat code cont ai ns or r ecommends an exampl e r epor t i ng f or mor
cer t i f i cat e, t he code shal l be r ef er enced and t he dat a i ncl uded i n t he
submi t t al t o t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer , and i f appr oved, i t shal l be pr oper l y
execut ed upon per f or mance of t est . These f or mat s do not r epl ace t he t est
document at i on r equi r ed under t he par agr aph TEST RESULTS DOCUMENTATI ON unl ess
wai ved i n wr i t i ng by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer .
3. 2. 5 Addi t i onal Test i ng Requi r ement s
I n addi t i on t o t he t est i ng speci f i cal l y r equi r ed by t he var i ous sect i ons t he
Cont r act or shal l al so per f or mt he f ol l owi ng except wher e t est i ng pr ocedur es
and f or mat s r equi r ed under t he speci f i cat i ons i ncor por at e al l of t he
r equi r ement s of t hi s par agr aph. These t est i ng r equi r ement s do not super sede
speci f i c t est i ng r equi r ement s as out l i ned under t he var i ous sect i ons of t he
speci f i cat i ons, and dupl i cat i on of dat a under t hese r equi r ement s wi l l not be
necessar y.
I ndust r y Pr act i ce: wher e a par t i cul ar t est pr ocedur e f or equi pment or
syst ems i s not speci f i ed i n t he cont r act document s, t hat f eat ur e of wor k
shal l be t est ed based on st andar d i ndust r y pr act i ce and as necessar y t o
det er mi ne t he sat i sf act or y oper at i on of t he equi pment or syst em.
Code or Manuf act ur er Test s: I f a f eat ur e of wor k i s speci f i ed t o be
const r uct ed t o meet a cer t ai n code ( NFPA, ANSI , SI et c. ) and t hat code
cont ai ns an oper at i onal t est pr ocedur e or a r ecommended one, or t he
manuf act ur er r ecommends a par t i cul ar oper at i onal t est , t he equi pment or
syst emshal l be addi t i onal l y t est ed accor di ng t o t hat t est pr ocedur e whet her
or not i t i s speci f i cal l y speci f i ed i n t he speci f i cat i ons, unl ess wai ved i n
wr i t i ng by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer . Thi s does not i ncl ude t est s per f or med by
Page 8 of 10
l abor at or i es t o obt ai n l abel s such as UL, NEMA, et c. , or t o meet f act or y
cer t i f i cat i on.
3. 2. 6 Test i ng Exper t i se
The Cont r act or shal l pr ovi de per sonnel wi t h t he necessar y exper t i se t o
per f or mt est i ng r equi r ement s. The Cont r act or shal l obt ai n f r omt he
manuf act ur er of t he equi pment , sour ces of qual i f i ed per sonnel t o i nspect ,
check, adj ust , cal i br at e, and oper at e t he i nst al l ed equi pment , al l r el ays,
cont r ol s, and subassembl i es i nvol ved i n t he wor k. Thi s exper t i se shal l be
avai l abl e t o t he Cont r act or Qual i t y Cont r ol Syst emManager as necessar y f or
per f or mance of t est pr ocedur es and subsequent eval uat i on.
3. 2. 7 Recor ds
The Cont r act or shal l mai nt ai n cur r ent and accur at e r ecor ds of al l t est s
per f or med. These r ecor ds shal l be avai l abl e f or r evi ew by Gover nment
per sonnel . At t he concl usi on of t he const r uct i on and pr i or t o accept ance of
t he cont r act wor k, t he Cont r act or shal l i ncor por at e compl et e t est
document at i on i nt o t he Oper at i ng and Mai nt enance Dat a t o be f ur ni shed under
Sect i on 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.
3. 3 EQUI PMENT TESTI NG
3. 3. 1 Gener al Requi r ement s
Al l Cont r act or f ur ni shed equi pment i ncor por at ed i n t he const r uct i on by t hi s
cont r act shal l be t hor oughl y t est ed f or compl i ance wi t h t he speci f i cat i ons
and as necessar y t o demonst r at e pr oper oper at i on. Gover nment Fur ni shed
Pr oper t y, i f any, shal l be t est ed as r equi r ed by t he speci f i cat i ons and as
necessar y t o demonst r at e pr oper i nst al l at i on. Thi s t est i ng i s i n addi t i on t o
t he moni t or i ng of t he ut i l i t y r ough- i n and i nst al l at i on r equi r ed by t he
Cont r act or Qual i t y cont r ol Syst em. Equi pment shal l be def i ned as, but not
l i mi t ed t o, such i t ems as r ef r i ger at or s and f r eezer s, st ove, st er i l i zer s,
l i mi t ed scope conveyor s, i cemaker s, car t washer s, dr i nki ng f ount ai ns,
ki t chen equi pment , sur gi cal l i ght s, f umehoods, gener at or s, el ect r i cal
i sol at i on panel s, el ect r i cal power r ecept acl es, dehumi di f i es, pumps et c.
Thi s equi pment t est i ng shal l not t ake pl ace unt i l such t i me as al l ut i l i t i es
and suppor t f eat ur es, i ncl udi ng i nt er r el at i onshi ps wi t h ot her equi pment or
syst ems, have been compl et ed. Test i ng shal l be done as necessar y f or
oper at i ons wi t h t ot al composi t e t est i ng bei ng done once al l
i nt er r el at i onshi ps ar e compl et ed. Equi pment shal l be t est ed under f ul l l oad
and act ual oper at i ng condi t i ons. I ni t i al oper at i onal t est i ng may be done at
pr esent condi t i ons wi t h a f i nal composi t e t est bei ng done under f ul l l oad
condi t i ons wi t h t he except i on of any speci f i cat i on r equi r ement s f or a f ul l
l oad t est of a gener at or wi t h a l oad bank. Equi pment t est i ng shal l i ncl ude
al l oper at i onal f eat ur es, saf et y f eat ur es, mechani cal and el ect r i cal l i mi t s,
ut i l i t y connect i ons, et c. , and an i nspect i on of f i ni shes f or scr at ches,
dent s, et c. , as wel l as t ypes of mat er i al s used and qual i t y of i nst al l at i on.
3. 3. 2 Test Pr ocedur e Dat a
The t est pr ocedur e f or equi pment t est i ng shal l pr ovi de t he f ol l owi ng:
- Make and model number of equi pment .
- Ser i al number and ot her namepl at e dat a such as vol t s, amps, H. P.
capaci t y, GPM, t emper at ur e. . . et c. - A l i st i ng of al l oper at i onal
Page 9 of 10
Page 10 of 10
f eat ur es, saf et y f eat ur es, and l i mi t s whi ch ar e t o be ver i f i ed, Thi s i s
t o i ncl ude ver i f i cat i on of st ar t - up l ubr i cat i on and t hat al l r equi r ed
l i qui d l evel s ar e sat i sf act or y.
- Vol t age and amper age r eadi ngs ver i f i cat i on f or al l mot or s under f ul l
l oad condi t i ons.
- Load condi t i ons i mposed on equi pment .
- Any var i at i on t o speci f i ed pr ocedur es.
3. 4 FI NAL CLEANI NG
Pr ovi de f i nal cl eani ng. Leave pr emi ses " br oomcl ean. " Onl y nonhazar dous
cl eani ng mat er i al s, i ncl udi ng nat ur al cl eani ng mat er i al s, shal l be used i n
t he f i nal cl eanup. Cl ean i nt er i or and ext er i or gl ass sur f aces exposed t o
vi ew; r emove t empor ar y l abel s, st ai ns and f or ei gn subst ances; pol i sh
t r anspar ent and gl ossy sur f aces; vacuumcar pet ed and sof t sur f aces. Cl ean
equi pment and f i xt ur es t o a sani t ar y condi t i on. Repl ace f i l t er s of oper at i ng
equi pment . Cl ean debr i s f r omr oof s, gut t er s, downspout s and dr ai nage
syst ems. Sweep paved ar eas and r ake cl ean l andscaped ar eas. Remove wast e
and sur pl us mat er i al s, r ubbi sh and const r uct i on f aci l i t i es f r omt he si t e.
Recycl e, sal vage, and r et ur n const r uct i on and demol i t i on wast e f r ompr oj ect
i n accor dance wi t h t he Wast e Management Pl an. Pr ompt l y and l egal l y
t r anspor t and di spose of any t r ash. Do not bur n, bur y, or ot her wi se di spose
of t r ash on t he pr oj ect si t e. The pr oj ect ar ea shal l have t empor ar y
st r uct ur es, bar r i cades, pr oj ect si gns, and const r uct i on f aci l i t i es r emoved.
A l i st of compl et ed cl eanup i t ems shal l be submi t t ed on t he day of f i nal
i nspect i on.
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

03/09

PART 1: GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1. 1 REFERENCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1. 2 SUBMI TTALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1. 3 SUBMI SSI ON OF OPERATI ON AND MAI NTENANCE DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1. 3. 1 Package Qual i t y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 3. 2 Package Cont ent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 3. 3 Changes t o Submi t t al s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 4 TYPES OF I NFORMATI ON REQUI RED I N O&M MANUALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 4. 1 Oper at i ng I nst r uct i ons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. 4. 2 Pr event i ve Mai nt enance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 4. 3 Cor r ect i ve Mai nt enance ( Repai r ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1. 4. 4 Cor r ect i ve Mai nt enance Wor k- Hour s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1. 4. 5 Appendi ces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
PART 2: PRODUCTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
PART 3: EXECUTI ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3. 1 TRAI NI NG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

PART 1: GENERAL
1. 1 REFERENCES
ASTM I NTERNATI ONAL ( ASTM) ( 2005) St ewar dshi p f or t he Cl eani ng of
Commer ci al and I nst i t ut i onal Bui l di ngs
1. 2 SUBMI TTALS
submi t t al s not havi ng a " G" desi gnat i on ar e f or Cont r act or Qual i t y Cont r ol
appr oval . When used, a desi gnat i on f ol l owi ng t he " G" desi gnat i on i dent i f i es
t he of f i ce t hat wi l l r evi ew t he submi t t al f or t he Gover nment . The f ol l owi ng
shal l be submi t t ed i n accor dance wi t h Sect i on 01 33 00 SUBMI TTAL PROCEDURES:
Oper at i on and Mai nt enance Manual s; G
Oper at i ons and Mai nt enance Tr ai ni ng cour se schedul e, syl l abus, and
t r ai ni ng mat er i al s; G
Vi deo of Tr ai ni ng Sessi ons
1. 3 SUBMI SSI ON OF OPERATI ON AND MAI NTENANCE DATA
Submi t Oper at i on and Mai nt enance ( O&M) Dat a speci f i cal l y appl i cabl e t o t hi s
cont r act and a compl et e and conci se depi ct i on of t he pr ovi ded equi pment ,
pr oduct , or syst em. Or gani ze and pr esent i nf or mat i on i n suf f i ci ent det ai l
t o cl ear l y expl ai n O&M r equi r ement s at t he syst em, equi pment , component , and
subassembl y l evel . I ncl ude an i ndex pr ecedi ng each submi t t al . Submi t i n
accor dance wi t h t hi s sect i on and Sect i on 01330 SUBMI TTAL PROCEDURES.
SECTI ON 01 78 23 OPERATI ON AND MAI NTENANCE DATA ( 03/ 09)
Page 2 of 6
1. 3. 1 Package Qual i t y
Document s must be f ul l y l egi bl e. Poor qual i t y copi es and mat er i al wi t h hol e
punches obl i t er at i ng t he t ext or dr awi ngs wi l l not be accept ed.
1. 3. 2 Package Cont ent
Dat a package cont ent shal l be as shown i n t he par agr aph t i t l ed " Schedul e of
Oper at i on and Mai nt enance Dat a Packages. " Compl y wi t h t he dat a package
r equi r ement s speci f i ed i n t he i ndi vi dual t echni cal sect i ons, i ncl udi ng t he
cont ent of t he packages and addr essi ng each pr oduct , component , and syst em
desi gnat ed f or dat a package submi ssi on.
1. 3. 3 Changes t o Submi t t al s
Manuf act ur er - or i gi nat ed changes or r evi si ons t o submi t t ed dat a shal l be
f ur ni shed by t he Cont r act or i f a component of an i t emi s so af f ect ed
subsequent t o accept ance of t he O&M Dat a. Changes, addi t i ons, or r evi si ons
r equi r ed by t he Cont r act i ng Of f i cer f or f i nal accept ance of submi t t ed dat a,
shal l be submi t t ed by t he Cont r act or wi t hi n 30 cal endar days of t he
not i f i cat i on of t hi s change r equi r ement .
1. 3. 4 Language
O&M Manual s shal l be pr ovi ded i n bot h Engl i sh and Host Nat i on l anguage.
1. 4 TYPES OF I NFORMATI ON REQUI RED I N O&M MANUALS
1. 4. 1 Oper at i ng I nst r uct i ons
I ncl ude speci f i c i nst r uct i ons, pr ocedur es, and i l l ust r at i ons f or t he
f ol l owi ng phases of oper at i on:
( 1) Saf et y Pr ecaut i ons: l i st per sonnel hazar ds and equi pment or pr oduct
saf et y pr ecaut i ons f or al l oper at i ng condi t i ons.
( 2) Oper at or Pr est ar t : I ncl ude pr ocedur es r equi r ed t o set up and pr epar e
each syst emf or use.
( 3) St ar t up, Shut down, and Post - Shut down Pr ocedur es: Pr ovi de nar r at i ve
descr i pt i on f or St ar t up, Shut down and Post - shut down oper at i ng pr ocedur es
i ncl udi ng t he cont r ol sequence f or each pr ocedur e.
( 4) Nor mal Oper at i ons: Pr ovi de nar r at i ve descr i pt i on of Nor mal Oper at i ng
Pr ocedur es. I ncl ude Cont r ol Di agr ams wi t h dat a t o expl ai n oper at i on and
cont r ol of syst ems and speci f i c equi pment .
( 5) Emer gency Oper at i ons: I ncl ude Emer gency Pr ocedur es f or equi pment
mal f unct i ons t o per mi t a shor t per i od of cont i nued oper at i on or t o shut down
t he equi pment t o pr event f ur t her damage t o syst ems and equi pment . I ncl ude
Emer gency Shut down I nst r uct i ons f or f i r e, expl osi on, spi l l s, or ot her
f or eseeabl e cont i ngenci es. Pr ovi de gui dance and pr ocedur es f or emer gency
oper at i on of al l ut i l i t y syst ems i ncl udi ng r equi r ed val ve posi t i ons, val ve
l ocat i ons and zones or por t i ons of syst ems cont r ol l ed.
Page 3 of 6
( 6) Oper at or Ser vi ce Requi r ement s: I ncl ude i nst r uct i ons f or ser vi ces t o be
per f or med by t he oper at or such as l ubr i cat i on, adj ust ment , i nspect i on, and
r ecor di ng gage r eadi ngs.
( 7) Envi r onment al Condi t i ons: I ncl ude a l i st of Envi r onment al Condi t i ons
( t emper at ur e, humi di t y, and ot her r el evant dat a) t hat ar e best sui t ed f or
t he oper at i on of each pr oduct , component or syst em. Descr i be condi t i ons
under whi ch t he i t emequi pment shoul d not be al l owed t o r un.
1. 4. 2 Pr event i ve Mai nt enance
I ncl ude t he f ol l owi ng i nf or mat i on f or pr event i ve and schedul ed mai nt enance
t o mi ni mi ze cor r ect i ve mai nt enance and r epai r .
( 1) Lubr i cat i on Dat a: I ncl ude pr event at i ve mai nt enance l ubr i cat i on dat a, i n
addi t i on t o i nst r uct i ons f or l ubr i cat i on pr ovi ded under par agr aph t i t l ed
" Oper at or Ser vi ce Requi r ement s" :
a. A t abl e showi ng r ecommended l ubr i cant s f or speci f i c t emper at ur e
r anges and appl i cat i ons.
b. Char t s wi t h a schemat i c di agr amof t he equi pment showi ng l ubr i cat i on
poi nt s, r ecommended t ypes and gr ades of l ubr i cant s, and capaci t i es.
c. A Lubr i cat i on Schedul e showi ng ser vi ce i nt er val f r equency.
( 2) Pr event i ve Mai nt enance Pl an and Schedul e: I ncl ude manuf act ur er ' s
schedul e f or r out i ne pr event i ve mai nt enance, i nspect i ons, t est s and
adj ust ment s r equi r ed t o ensur e pr oper and economi cal oper at i on and t o
mi ni mi ze cor r ect i ve mai nt enance. Pr ovi de manuf act ur er ' s pr oj ect i on of
pr event i ve mai nt enance wor k- hour s on a dai l y, weekl y, mont hl y, and annual
basi s i ncl udi ng cr af t r equi r ement s by t ype of cr af t . For per i odi c
cal i br at i ons, pr ovi de manuf act ur er ' s speci f i ed f r equency and pr ocedur es f or
each separ at e oper at i on.
1. 4. 3 Cor r ect i ve Mai nt enance ( Repai r )
I ncl ude manuf act ur er ' s r ecommended pr ocedur es and i nst r uct i ons f or
cor r ect i ng pr obl ems and maki ng r epai r s.
( 1) Tr oubl eshoot i ng Gui des and Di agnost i c Techni ques: I ncl ude st ep- by- st ep
pr ocedur es t o pr ompt l y i sol at e t he cause of t ypi cal mal f unct i ons. Descr i be
cl ear l y why t he checkout i s per f or med and what condi t i ons ar e t o be sought .
I dent i f y t est s or i nspect i ons and t est equi pment r equi r ed t o det er mi ne
whet her par t s and equi pment may be r eused or r equi r e r epl acement .
( 2) Wi r i ng Di agr ams and Cont r ol Di agr ams: Wi r i ng di agr ams and cont r ol
di agr ams shal l be poi nt - t o- poi nt dr awi ngs of wi r i ng and cont r ol ci r cui t s
i ncl udi ng f act or y- f i el d i nt er f aces. Pr ovi de a compl et e and accur at e
depi ct i on of t he act ual j ob speci f i c wi r i ng and cont r ol wor k. On di agr ams,
number el ect r i cal and el ect r oni c wi r i ng and pneumat i c cont r ol t ubi ng and t he
t er mi nal s f or each t ype, i dent i cal l y t o act ual i nst al l at i on conf i gur at i on
and number i ng.
( 3) Mai nt enance and Repai r Pr ocedur es: I ncl ude i nst r uct i ons and a l i st of
t ool s r equi r ed t o r epai r or r est or e t he pr oduct or equi pment t o pr oper
condi t i on or oper at i ng st andar ds.
Page 4 of 6
( 4) Removal and Repl acement I nst r uct i ons: I ncl ude st ep- by- st ep pr ocedur es
and a l i st r equi r ed t ool s and suppl i es f or r emoval , r epl acement ,
di sassembl y, and assembl y of component s, assembl i es, subassembl i es,
accessor i es, and at t achment s. Pr ovi de t ol er ances, di mensi ons, set t i ngs and
adj ust ment s r equi r ed. I nst r uct i ons shal l i ncl ude a combi nat i on of t ext and
i l l ust r at i ons. Thi s i nf or mat i on shal l al so be r equi r ed f or any t empor ar y
and/ or r el ocat ed st r uct ur es suppl i ed as par t of t he cont r act .
( 5) Spar e Par t s and Suppl y Li st s: I ncl ude l i st s of spar e par t s and suppl i es
r equi r ed f or mai nt enance and r epai r t o ensur e cont i nued ser vi ce or oper at i on
wi t hout unr easonabl e del ays. Speci al consi der at i on i s r equi r ed f or
f aci l i t i es at r emot e l ocat i ons. Li st spar e par t s and suppl i es t hat have a
l ong l ead- t i me t o obt ai n.
1. 4. 4 Cor r ect i ve Mai nt enance Wor k- Hour s
I ncl ude manuf act ur er ' s pr oj ect i on of cor r ect i ve mai nt enance wor k- hour s
i ncl udi ng r equi r ement s by t ype of cr af t . Cor r ect i ve mai nt enance t hat
r equi r es compl et i on or par t i ci pat i on of t he equi pment manuf act ur er shal l be
i dent i f i ed and t abul at ed separ at el y.
1. 4. 5 Appendi ces
Pr ovi de i nf or mat i on r equi r ed bel ow and i nf or mat i on not speci f i ed i n t he
pr ecedi ng par agr aphs but per t i nent t o t he mai nt enance or oper at i on of t he
pr oduct or equi pment . I ncl ude t he f ol l owi ng:
( 1) Pr oduct Submi t t al Dat a: Pr ovi de a copy of al l SD- 03 Pr oduct Dat a
submi t t al s r equi r ed i n t he appl i cabl e t echni cal sect i ons.
( 2) Manuf act ur er ' s I nst r uct i ons: Pr ovi de a copy of al l SD- 08 Manuf act ur er ' s
I nst r uct i ons submi t t al s r equi r ed i n t he appl i cabl e t echni cal sect i ons.
( 3) O&M Submi t t al Dat a: Pr ovi de a copy of al l SD- 10 Oper at i on and
Mai nt enance Dat a submi t t al s r equi r ed i n t he appl i cabl e t echni cal sect i ons.
( 4) Par t s I dent i f i cat i on: Pr ovi de i dent i f i cat i on and cover age f or al l par t s
of each component , assembl y, subassembl y, and accessor y of t he end i t ems
subj ect t o r epl acement . I ncl ude speci al har dwar e r equi r ement s, such as
r equi r ement t o use hi gh- st r engt h bol t s and nut s. I dent i f y par t s by make,
model , ser i al number , and sour ce of suppl y t o al l ow r eor der i ng wi t hout
f ur t her i dent i f i cat i on. Pr ovi de cl ear and l egi bl e i l l ust r at i ons, dr awi ngs,
and expl oded vi ews t o enabl e easy i dent i f i cat i on of t he i t ems. When
i l l ust r at i ons omi t t he par t number s and descr i pt i on, bot h t he i l l ust r at i ons
and separ at e l i st i ng shal l show t he i ndex, r ef er ence, or key number t hat
wi l l cr oss- r ef er ence t he i l l ust r at ed par t t o t he l i st ed par t . Par t s shown
i n t he l i st i ngs shal l be gr ouped by component s, assembl i es, and
subassembl i es i n accor dance wi t h t he manuf act ur er ' s st andar d pr act i ce.
Par t s dat a may cover mor e t han one model or ser i es of equi pment , component s,
assembl i es, subassembl i es, at t achment s, or accessor i es, such as t ypi cal l y
shown i n a mast er par t s cat al og
( 5) War r ant y I nf or mat i on: Li st and expl ai n t he var i ous war r ant i es and
i ncl ude t he ser vi ci ng and t echni cal pr ecaut i ons pr escr i bed by t he
manuf act ur er s or cont r act document s i n or der t o keep war r ant i es i n f or ce.
Page 5 of 6
I ncl ude war r ant y i nf or mat i on f or pr i mar y component s such as t he compr essor
of ai r condi t i oni ng syst em.
( 6) Per sonnel Tr ai ni ng Requi r ement s: Pr ovi de i nf or mat i on avai l abl e f r omt he
manuf act ur er s t hat i s needed f or use i n t r ai ni ng desi gnat ed per sonnel t o
pr oper l y oper at e and mai nt ai n t he equi pment and syst ems.
( 7) Test i ng Equi pment and Speci al Tool I nf or mat i on: I ncl ude i nf or mat i on on
t est equi pment r equi r ed t o per f or mspeci f i ed t est s and on speci al t ool s
needed f or t he oper at i on, mai nt enance, and r epai r of component s.
( 8) Cont r act or I nf or mat i on: Pr ovi de a l i st t hat i ncl udes t he name, addr ess,
and t el ephone number of t he Gener al Cont r act or and each Subcont r act or who
i nst al l ed t he pr oduct or equi pment , or syst em. For each i t em, al so pr ovi de
t he name addr ess and t el ephone number of t he manuf act ur er ' s r epr esent at i ve
and ser vi ce or gani zat i on most conveni ent t o t he pr oj ect si t e. Pr ovi de t he
name, addr ess, and t el ephone number of t he pr oduct , equi pment , and syst em
manuf act ur er s.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

PART 3: EXECUTI ON
3. 1 TRAI NI NG
I n addi t i on t o any ot her cont r act r equi r ement s, t he Cont r act or shal l pr ovi de
oper at i onal and mai nt enance t r ai ni ng f or al l syst ems f ur ni shed under t hi s
cont r act i n accor dance wi t h t hi s sect i on. The t r ai ni ng shal l not t ake pl ace
unt i l t he oper at i on and mai nt enance manual s ar e submi t t ed and appr oved.
Tr ai ni ng wi l l be gi ven t o per sonnel r esponsi bl e f or t he oper at i on and
mai nt enance of t he syst emat t he i nst al l at i on. Or i ent t r ai ni ng t o t he
speci f i c syst embei ng i nst al l ed under t hi s cont r act . Use oper at i on and
mai nt enance manual as t he pr i mar y i nst r uct i onal ai d i n cont r act or pr ovi ded
act i vi t y per sonnel t r ai ni ng. Manual s shal l be del i ver ed f or each t r ai nee
wi t h t wo addi t i onal set s del i ver ed f or ar chi vi ng at t he pr oj ect si t e.
Submi t a t r ai ni ng cour se schedul e, syl l abus, and t r ai ni ng mat er i al s 21
cal endar days pr i or t o t he st ar t of t r ai ni ng. Obt ai n appr oval of t he
t r ai ni ng cour se bef or e begi nni ng t hat phase of t r ai ni ng. Fur ni sh a
qual i f i ed i nst r uct or appr oved by t he syst emmanuf act ur er t o conduct t r ai ni ng
f or t he speci f i c syst em.
Tr ai ni ng manual s shal l i ncl ude an agenda, def i ned obj ect i ves and a det ai l ed
descr i pt i on of t he subj ect mat t er f or each l esson. Fur ni sh audi o- vi sual
equi pment and al l ot her t r ai ni ng mat er i al s and suppl i es. A t r ai ni ng day i s
def i ned as 8 hour s of cl assr oomor l ab i nst r uct i on, i ncl udi ng t wo 15 mi nut e
br eaks and excl udi ng l unch t i me, Monday t hr ough Fr i day, dur i ng t he dayt i me
shi f t i n ef f ect at t he t r ai ni ng f aci l i t y. For gui dance, t he Cont r act or
shoul d assume t he at t endees wi l l have a hi gh school educat i on.
The Cont r act or shal l vi deot ape t he t r ai ni ng sessi on on di gi t al medi a ( DVD)
and pr ovi de t hr ee copi es t o t he Gover nment .
Page 6 of 6
SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION AND DECONSTRUCTION
Page 1 of 11

SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION AND DECONSTRUCTION
05/10
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

EM 385-1-1 Safety and Health Requirements Manual

1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

1.2.1 Demolition/Deconstruction Plan

Prepare a Demolition Plan or Deconstruction Plan and submit proposed
demolition, deconstruction, and removal procedures for approval before work
is started. Include in the plan procedures for careful removal and
disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, coordination with other
work in progress, a detailed description of methods and equipment to be used
for each operation and of the sequence of operations. Coordinate with Waste
Management Plan. Provide procedures for safe conduct of the work in
accordance with EM 385-1-1. Plan shall be approved by Contracting Officer
prior to work beginning.


Do not begin demolition or deconstruction until authorization is received
from the Contracting Officer. Remove rubbish and debris from Government
property daily, unless otherwise directed. Store materials that cannot be
removed daily in areas specified by the Contracting Officer. In the
interest of occupational safety and health, perform the work in accordance
with EM 385-1-1, Section 23, Demolition, and other applicable Sections.

1.3 ITEMS TO REMAIN IN PLACE

Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in
place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the Government. Repair or
replace damaged items as approved by the Contracting Officer. Coordinate
the work of this section with all other work indicated. Construct and
maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required. Ensure that structural
elements are not overloaded. Increase structural supports or add new
supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal,
deconstruction, or demolition work performed under this contract. Do not
Page 2 of 11

overload structural elements or pavements to remain. Provide new supports
and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition,
deconstruction, or removal work. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural
replacement require approval by the Contracting Officer prior to performing
such work.

1.3.1 Existing Construction Limits and Protection

Do not disturb existing construction beyond the extent indicated or
necessary for installation of new construction. Provide temporary shoring
and bracing for support of building components to prevent settlement or
other movement. Provide protective measures to control accumulation and
migration of dust and dirt in all work areas. Remove snow, dust, dirt, and
debris from work areas daily.

1.3.2 Weather Protection

For portions of the building to remain, protect building interior and
materials and equipment from the weather at all times. Where removal of
existing roofing is necessary to accomplish work, have materials and workmen
ready to provide adequate and temporary covering of exposed areas.

1.3.3 Trees

Protect trees within the project site which might be damaged during
demolition or deconstruction, and which are indicated to be left in place,
by a 1.8 m high fence. Erect and secure fence a minimum of 1.5 m from the
trunk of individual trees or follow the outer perimeter of branches or
clumps of trees. Replace any tree designated to remain that is damaged
during the work under this contract with like-kind or as approved by the

1.3.4 Utility Service

Maintain existing utilities indicated to stay in service and protect against
damage during demolition and deconstruction operations. Prior to start of
work, utilities serving each area of alteration or removal will be shut off
by the Government and disconnected and sealed by the Contractor.

1.3.5 Facilities

Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of
existing utilities and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved
barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and temporary services or
connections for electrical and mechanical utilities. Floors, roofs, walls,
columns, pilasters, and other structural components that are designed and
constructed to stand without lateral support or shoring, and are determined
to be in stable condition, must remain standing without additional bracing,
shoring, or lateral support until demolished or deconstructed, unless
Page 3 of 11

directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer. Ensure that no elements
determined to be unstable are left unsupported and place and secure bracing,
shoring, or lateral supports as may be required as a result of any cutting,
removal, deconstruction, or demolition work performed under this contract.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that
will review the submittal for the Government] Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

Existing Conditions; G

SD-07 Certificates

Demolition Plan; G
Deconstruction Plan G
Notification; G

SD-11 Closeout Submittals

Receipts

1.5 REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

The contractor shall conform to the safety requirements contained in the
contract, including, but not limited to, EM 385-1-1, Specification Sections
01 35 26 Safety and Occupational Health Requirements, and, when work is
performed in the European Union, Section 01 35 26.10 Additional Safety and
Occupational Health Requirements for Projects in the European Union, or,
when performed in Italy, Section 01 35 26.15 Additional Safety and
Occupational Health Requirements for Projects in Italy. Work performed in
Germany shall also comply with the requirements of the latest editions of
the German Safety and Health Protection Regulation for Construction Sites,
Baustellenverordnung BaustellV.

1.5.1 Dust [and Debris] Control

Prevent the spread of dust and debris to occupied portions of buildings and
airfield pavements and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in the
surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or
objectionable conditions such as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or
pollution. Sweep pavements as often as necessary to control the spread of
debris that may result in foreign object damage potential to aircraft.

Page 4 of 11

1.6 PROTECTION

1.6.1 Traffic Control Signs

Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the area of removal
work, use traffic barricades with flashing lights. Notify the Contracting
Officer prior to beginning such work.

1.6.2 Protection of Personnel

Before, during and after the demolition and/or deconstruction work
continuously evaluate the condition of the structure being demolished or
deconstructed and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in
and around the project site. No area, section, or component of floors,
roofs, walls, columns, pilasters, or other structural element will be
allowed to be left standing without sufficient bracing, shoring, or lateral
support to prevent collapse or failure while workmen remove debris or
perform other work in the immediate area.

1.7 FOREIGN OBJECT DAMAGE (FOD)

Aircraft and aircraft engines are subject to FOD from debris and waste
material lying on airfield pavements. Remove all such materials that may
appear on operational aircraft pavements due to the Contractor's operations.
If necessary, the Contracting Officer may require the Contractor to install
a temporary barricade at the Contractor's expense to control the spread of
FOD potential debris. The barricade shall include a fence covered with a
fabric designed to stop the spread of debris. Anchor the fence and fabric
to prevent displacement by winds or jet/prop blasts. Remove barricade when
no longer required.

1.8 RELOCATIONS

Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with
workmen skilled in the trades involved. Repair or replace items to be
relocated which are damaged by the Contractor with new undamaged items as
approved by the Contracting Officer.

1.9 EXISTING CONDITIONS

Before beginning any demolition or deconstruction work, survey the site and
examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work.
Record existing conditions in the presence of the Contracting Officer
showing the condition of structures and other facilities adjacent to areas
of alteration or removal. Photographs sized 100 mm 4 inch will be
acceptable as a record of existing conditions. Include in the record the
elevation of the top of foundation walls, finish floor elevations, possible
conflicting electrical conduits, plumbing lines, alarms systems, the
Page 5 of 11

location and extent of existing cracks and other damage and description of
surface conditions that exist prior to before starting work. It is the
Contractor's responsibility to verify and document all required outages
which will be required during the course of work, and to note these outages
on the record document. Submit survey results.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Fill Material

Comply with excavating, backfilling, and compacting procedures for soils
used as backfill material to fill basements, voids, depressions or
excavations resulting from demolition or deconstruction of structures.

Fill shall be free from roots and other organic matter, trash, debris,
frozen materials, and stones larger than 50 mm in any dimension.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED

Inspect and evaluate existing structures onsite for reuse. Existing
construction scheduled to be removed for reuse shall be disassembled.
Dismantled and removed materials are to be separated, set aside, and
prepared as specified, and stored or delivered to a collection point for
reuse, remanufacture, recycling, or other disposal, as specified. Materials
shall be designated for reuse onsite whenever possible.

3.1.1 Structures

Demolish or Deconstruct structures in a systematic manner from the top of
the structure to the ground. Complete demolition work above each tier or
floor before the supporting members on the lower level are disturbed.
Demolish or Deconstruct concrete and masonry walls in small sections.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by means of derricks,
platforms hoists, or other suitable methods as approved by the Contracting
Officer.

Locate demolition and deconstruction equipment throughout the structure and
remove materials so as to not impose excessive loads to supporting walls,
floors, or framing.

Building, or the remaining portions thereof, not exceeding 25 m in height
may be demolished by the mechanical method of demolition.

3.1.2 Utilities and Related Equipment

Page 6 of 11

Refer to Section 00 73 15 General Conditions for requirements related to
utility service interruptions. Do not begin demolition work until all
utility disconnections have been made.

Remove existing utilities, as indicated or uncovered by work and terminate
in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the
specific utility and approved by the Contracting Officer. When utility
lines are encountered but are not indicated on the drawings, notify the
Contracting Officer prior to further work in that area. Remove meters and
related equipment and deliver to a location in accordance with instructions
of the Contracting Officer.

3.1.3 Chain Link Fencing

Remove chain link fencing, gates and other related salvaged items scheduled
for removal and transport to designated areas. Remove gates as whole units.
Cut chain link fabric to 7 m lengths and store in rolls off the ground.

3.1.4 Paving and Slabs

Remove concrete and asphaltic concrete paving and slabs as indicated.
Provide neat sawcuts at limits of pavement removal as indicated. Pavement
and slabs designated to be recycled and utilized in this project shall be
moved, ground and stored as directed by the Contracting Officer. Pavement
and slabs not to be used in this project shall be removed from the
Installation at Contractor's expense.

3.1.5 Roofing
When removing the existing roofing system from the roof deck, remove only as
much roofing as can be recovered by the end of the work day, unless approved
otherwise by the Contracting Officer or their designated representative. Do
not attempt to open the roof covering system in threatening weather. Reseal
all openings prior to suspension of work the same day.
When temporary roofing is permitted by the Contracting Officer or their
designated representative, install temporary roofing and flashing as
necessary to maintain a watertight condition throughout the course of the
work. Remove temporary work prior to installation of permanent roof system
materials

3.1.6 Masonry

Sawcut and remove masonry so as to prevent damage to surfaces to remain[,and
to facilitate the installation of new work. Where new masonry adjoins
existing, the new work shall abut or tie into the existing construction as
specified for the new work. Provide square, straight edges and corners
where existing masonry adjoins new work and other locations.

3.1.7 Concrete

Page 7 of 11

Saw concrete along straight lines to a depth of a minimum 50% of the
thickness of the concrete. Make each cut in walls perpendicular to the face
and in alignment with the cut in the opposite face. Break out the remainder
of the concrete provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished
work, and the remaining concrete is sound. At locations where the broken
face cannot be concealed, grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the
concrete.

3.1.8 Structural Steel

Dismantle structural steel at field connections and in a manner that will
prevent bending or damage. Salvage for recycle structural steel, steel
joists, girders, angles, plates, columns and shapes. Flame-cutting torches
are permitted when other methods of dismantling are not practical.
Transport steel joists and girders as whole units and not dismantled.
Transport structural steel shapes to a designated area as directed by the
Contracting Officer, stacked according to size, type of member and length,
and stored off the ground, protected from the weather.

3.1.9 Miscellaneous Metal

Salvage shop-fabricated items such as access doors and frames, steel
gratings, metal ladders, wire mesh partitions, metal railings, metal windows
and similar items as whole units. Salvage light-gage and cold-formed metal
framing, such as steel studs, steel trusses, metal gutters, roofing and
siding, metal toilet partitions, toilet accessories and similar items.
Recycle scrap metal as part of demolition and deconstruction operations.
Provide separate containers to collect scrap metal and transport to a scrap
metal collection or recycling facility, in accordance with the Waste
Management Plan.

3.1.10 Carpet

Remove existing carpet for reclamation in accordance with manufacturer
recommendations and as follows. Remove used carpet in large pieces, roll
tightly, and pack neatly in a container. Remove adhesive according to
recommendations of the Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI). Adhesive removal
solvents shall comply with CRI 104. Recycle removed carpet cushion.

3.1.11 Acoustic Ceiling Tile

Remove, neatly stack, and recycle acoustic ceiling tiles. Recycling may be
available with manufacturer. Otherwise, priority shall be given to a local
recycling organization.

3.1.12 Airfield Lighting

Remove existing airfield lighting as indicated and terminate in a manner
satisfactory to the Contracting Officer. Remove edge lights and associated
Page 8 of 11

transformers as indicated and deliver to a location on the station in
accordance with instructions of the Contracting Officer.

3.1.13 Patching

Where removals leave holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the finished
work, patch and repair these holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent
finished surfaces, using on-site materials when available. Where new work
is to be applied to existing surfaces, perform removals and patching in a
manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving new work. Finished
surfaces of patched area shall be flush with the adjacent existing surface
and shall match the existing adjacent surface as closely as possible as to
texture and finish. Patching shall be as specified and indicated, and shall
include (where applicable):

a. Concrete and Masonry: Completely fill holes and depressions, left as a
result of removals in existing masonry walls to remain, with an approved
masonry patching material, applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
printed instructions.

b. Where existing partitions have been removed leaving damaged or missing
resilient tile flooring, patch to match the existing floor tile.

c. Patch acoustic lay-in ceiling where partitions have been removed. The
transition between the different ceiling heights shall be effected by
continuing the higher ceiling level over to the first runner on the lower
ceiling and closing the vertical opening with a painted sheet metal
strip.

3.1.14 Locksets on Swinging Doors

Remove all locksets from all swinging doors indicated to be removed and
disposed of. Deliver the locksets and related items to a designated
location for receipt by the Contracting Officer after removal.

3.1.15 Mechanical Equipment and Fixtures

Disconnect mechanical hardware at the nearest connection to existing
services to remain, unless otherwise noted. Disconnect mechanical equipment
and fixtures at fittings. Remove service valves attached to the unit.
Salvage each item of equipment and fixtures as a whole unit; listed,
indexed, tagged, and stored. Salvage each unit with its normal operating
auxiliary equipment. Transport salvaged equipment and fixtures, including
motors and machines, to a designated storage area as directed by the
Contracting Officer. Do not remove equipment until approved. Do not offer
low-efficiency equipment for reuse.

3.1.15.1 Piping

Page 9 of 11

Disconnect piping at unions, flanges and valves, and fittings as required to
reduce the pipe into straight lengths for practical storage. Store salvaged
piping according to size and type. If the piping that remains can become
pressurized due to upstream valve failure, end caps, blind flanges, or other
types of plugs or fittings with a pressure gage and bleed valve shall be
attached to the open end of the pipe to ensure positive leak control.
Carefully dismantle piping that previously contained gas, gasoline, oil, or
other dangerous fluids, with precautions taken to prevent injury to persons
and property. Store piping outdoors until all fumes and residues are
removed. Box prefabricated supports, hangers, plates, valves, and specialty
items according to size and type. Wrap sprinkler heads individually in
plastic bags before boxing. Classify piping not designated for salvage, or
not reusable, as scrap metal.

3.1.15.2 Ducts

Classify removed duct work as scrap metal.

3.1.16 Electrical Equipment and Fixtures

Salvage motors, motor controllers, and operating and control equipment that
are attached to the driven equipment. Salvage wiring systems and
components. Box loose items and tag for identification. Disconnect
primary, secondary, control, communication, and signal circuits at the point
of attachment to their distribution system.

3.1.16.1 Fixtures

Remove and salvage electrical fixtures. Salvage unprotected glassware from
the fixture and salvage separately. Salvage incandescent, mercury-vapor,
and fluorescent lamps and fluorescent ballasts manufactured prior to 1978,
boxed and tagged for identification, and protected from breakage.

3.1.16.2 Electrical Devices

Remove and salvage switches, switchgear, transformers, conductors including
wire and nonmetallic sheathed and flexible armored cable, regulators,
meters, instruments, plates, circuit breakers, panelboards, outlet boxes,
and similar items. Box and tag these items for identification according to
type and size.

3.1.16.3 Wiring Ducts or Troughs

Remove and salvage wiring ducts or troughs. Dismantle plug-in ducts and
wiring troughs into unit lengths. Remove plug-in or disconnecting devices
from the busway and store separately.

3.1.16.4 Conduit and Miscellaneous Items

Page 10 of 11

Salvage conduit except where embedded in concrete or masonry. Consider
corroded, bent, or damaged conduit as scrap metal. Sort straight and
undamaged lengths of conduit according to size and type.

3.1.17 Elevators and Hoists

Remove elevators, hoists, and similar conveying equipment and salvage as
whole units, to the most practical extent. Remove and prepare items for
salvage without damage to any of the various parts. Salvage and store rails
for structural steel with the equipment as an integral part of the unit.

3.2 CONCURRENT EARTH-MOVING OPERATIONS

Do not begin excavation, filling, and other earth-moving operations that are
sequential to demolition or deconstruction work in areas occupied by
structures to be demolished or deconstructed until all demolition and
deconstruction in the area has been completed and debris removed. Fill
holes, open basements and other hazardous openings.

3.3 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL

3.3.1 Title to Materials

Except for salvaged items specified in related Sections, and for materials
or equipment scheduled for salvage, all materials and equipment removed and
not reused or salvaged, shall become the property of the Contractor and
shall be removed from Government property. Title to materials resulting
from demolition and deconstruction, and materials and equipment to be
removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Contracting
Officer of the Contractor's demolition, deconstruction, and removal
procedures, and authorization by the Contracting Officer to begin demolition
and deconstruction. The Government will not be responsible for the
condition or loss of, or damage to, such property after contract award.
Showing for sale or selling materials and equipment on site is prohibited.

3.3.2 Reuse of Materials and Equipment

Remove and store materials and equipment indicated in the scope of work to
be reused or relocated to prevent damage, and reinstall as the work
progresses.

3.4 CLEANUP

Remove debris and rubbish from basement and similar excavations. Remove and
transport the debris in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or
adjacent areas. Apply local regulations regarding hauling and disposal.

Page 11 of 11

3.5 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS

3.5.1 Regulation of Removed Materials

Dispose of debris, rubbish, scrap, and other non-salvageable materials
resulting from removal operations with all applicable Host Nation
regulations as contractually specified in the Waste Management Plan.

3.5.2 Removal from Government Property

Transport waste materials removed from demolished and deconstructed
structures, except waste soil, from Government property for legal disposal.
Dispose of waste soil as directed.

3.6 REUSE OF SALVAGED ITEMS

Recondition salvaged materials and equipment designated for reuse before
installation. Replace items damaged during removal and salvage operations
or restore them as necessary to usable condition.
Introduction: Construction Project Signs
EP 310-1-6a
01 Jun 06
16-1
The use of signs to identify Corps
managed or supervised design, construc-
tion, and rehabilitation projects - both for
military and civil works - is an important
part of efforts to keep the public informed
of Corps work. For this purpose, a
construction project sign package has
been adopted. This package consists of
two signs: one for project identification
and the other to show on-the-job safety
performance of the contractor.
These two signs are to be displayed side
by side and mounted for reading by
passing viewers. Exact placement
location will be designated by the
contracting officers representative.
The panel sizes and graphic formats have
been standardized for visual consistency
throughout all Corps operations.
Panels are fabricated using HDO plywood
or aluminum with dimensional lumber
uprights and bracing. The sign faces are
nonreflective vinyl.
All legends are to be die-cut or computer-
cut in the sizes and typefaces specified
and applied to the white panel back-
ground following the graphic formats
shown on pages 16-2 and 16-3. The
Communication Red panel on the left
side of the construction project sign with
Corps Signature (reverse version) is
screen-printed onto the white back-
ground.
A display of these two signs is shown on
the following two pages. Mounting and
fabrication details are provided on page
16-4.
Special applications or situations not
covered in these guidelines should be
referred to the district Sign Program
Manager.
Construction Project Identification Sign
16-2
EP 310-1-6a
01 Jun 06
Below are two samples of the Construc-
tion Project Identification sign showing
how this panel is adaptable for use to
identify either military (top) or civil works
projects (bottom). The graphic format for
this 4x 6' sign panel follows the legend
guidelines and layout as specified below.
The large 4x 4' section of the panel on
the right is to be white with black legend.
The 2x 4' section of the sign on the left
with the full Corps Signature (reverse
version) is to be screen-printed Commu-
nication Red on the white background
The designation of a sponsor in the area
indicated is optional with Military or Civil
Works construction signs. Signs may list
one sponsoring entity. If agreement on a
sponsor designation cannot be achieved,
the area should be left blank.
This sign is to be placed with the Safety
Performance sign shown on the following
page. Mounting and fabrication details
are provided on page 16-4.
Manager.
Legend Group 1: One- to two-line description
of Corps relationship to project.
Color: White
Typeface: 1.25" Helvetica Regular
Maximum line length: 19
Legend Group 2: Division or District Name
(optional). Placed below 10.5 reverse
Signature (6 Castle).
Color: White
Legend Group 2a: One- to three-line identifica-
tion of Military or Civil Works sponsor
(optional). Place below Corps Signature to
cross-align with Group 5a-b.
Color: White
Maximum line length: 19"
Legend Group 3: One- to three-line project title
legend describes the work being done under
this contract.
Color: Black
Typeface: 3" Helvetica Bold
Legend Group 4: One- to two-line identification
of project or facility (civil works) or name of
sponsoring department (military).
Color: Black
Cross-align the first line of Legend Group 4
with the first line of the Corps Signature (US
Army Corps) as shown.
Legend Groups 5a-b: One- to five-line
identification of prime contractors including:
type (architect, general contractor, etc.),
corporate or firm name, city, state. Use of
Legend Group 5 is optional.
Color: Black
All typography is flush left and rag right, upper
and lower case with initial capitals only as
shown. Letter- and word-spacing to follow
Corps standards as specified in Appendix D.
Sign Legend Panel Post Specification Mounting Color
Type Size (A) Size Size Code Height Bkg/Lgd
CID-01 various 4x6 4x4 HDO-3 48 WH-RD/BK
4.5
2
6.25
10.5
2.5
3 3 42 3
6
4.5
4.5
6
2.25
9.5
1.875
1.875
1.875
1.875
7.75
3 21 1 21 2
Safety Performance Sign EP 310-1-6a
01 Jun 06
16-3
Each contractors safety record is to be
posted on Corps managed or supervised
construction projects and mounted with
the Construction Project Identification
sign specified on page 16-2.
The graphic format, color, size and type-
faces used on the sign are to be repro-
duced exactly as specified below. The
title with First Aid logo in the top section
of the sign, and the performance record
captions are standard for all signs of this
type. Legend groups 2 and 3 below
identify the project and the contractor and
are to be placed on the sign as shown.
Safety record numbers are mounted on
individual metal plates and are screw-
mounted to the background to allow for
daily revisions to posted safety perfor-
mance record.
Manager.
Legend Group 1: Standard two-line title Safety
is a Job Requirement with 8 (outside
diameter) Safety Green first aid logo.
Color: To match Pantone system 347
Typeface: 3" Helvetica Bold
Color: Black
Legend Group 2: One- to two-line project title
legend describes the work being done under
this contract and name of host project.
Color: Black
Legend Group 3: One- to two-line identifica-
tion: name of prime contractor and city, state
address. Color: Black
Legend Group 4: Standard safety record
captions as shown.
Color: Black
Typeface: 1.25 Helvetica Regular
Replaceable numbers are to be mounted on
white .060 aluminum plates and screw-
mounted to background.
Color: Black
Typeface: 3" Helvetica Regular
Plate size: 2.5" x 4.5"
All typography is flush left and rag right, upper
and lower case with initial capitals only as
shown. Letter- and word-spacing to follow
Corps standards as specified in Appendix D.
3 33.030 eq. 8 eq.
6
4.5
10.5
2.25
3
2.25
3
4.875
4.875
6.75
4.875
.75
4.875
4.5
3
3 42 3
2.25 2.25 2.25 2.25
.75
3
.75
Sign Legend Panel Post Specification Mounting Color
Type Size (A) Size Size Code Height Bkg/Lgd
CID-02 various 4x4 4x4 HDO-3 48 WH/BK-SG
Fabrication and Mounting Guidelines EP 310-1-6a
01 Jun 06
16-4
All Construction Project Identification
signs and Safety Performance signs are
to be fabricated and installed as de-
scribed below. The signs are to be
erected at a location designated by the
contracting officer representative and
shall conform to the size, format, and
typographic standards shown on
pages16-2 and 16-3. Detailed specifica-
tions for HDO plywood panel preparation
are provided in Appendix B.
Shown below the mounting diagram is a
panel layout grid with spaces provided for
project information. Photocopy this page
and use as a worksheet when preparing
sign legend orders.
For additional information on the proper
method to prepare sign panel graphics,
contact the district Sign Program
Manager.
The sign panels are to be fabricated from .75"
High Density Overlay Plywood. Panel
preparation to follow HDO specifications
provided in Appendix B.
Sign graphics to be prepared on a white
nonreflective vinyl film with positionable
adhesive backing.
All graphics except for the Communication
Red background with Corps Signature on the
project sign are to be die-cut or computer-cut
nonreflective vinyl, prespaced legends
prepared in the sizes and typefaces specified
and applied to the background panel following
the graphic formats shown on pages
16-2 and 16-3.
The 2x 4 Communication Red panel (to match
Pantone system 032) with full Corps Signa-
ture (reverse version) is to be screen-printed
on the white background. Identification of the
district or division may be applied under the
signature with white cut vinyl letters prepared
to Corps standards.
Drill and insert six (6) .375" T-nuts from the
front face of the HDO sign panel. Position
holes as shown. Flange of T-nut to be flush
with sign face.
Apply graphic panel to prepared HDO
plywood panel following manufacturers
instructions.
Sign uprights to be structural grade 4" x 4"
treated Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine,
No.1 or better. Post to be 12' long. Drill six (6)
.375" mounting holes in uprights to align with
T-nuts in sign panel. Countersink (.5") back of
hole to accept socket head cap screw (4" x
.375").
Assemble sign panel and uprights. Imbed
assembled sign panel and uprights in 4' hole.
Local soil conditions and/or wind loading may
require bolting additional 2" x 4" struts on
inside face of uprights to reinforce installation
as shown.
48
48
18
Construction Project Identification Sign
Legend Group 1: Corps Relationship
1.
2.
Legend Group 2: Division/District Name
1.
2.
Legend Group 3: Project Title
1.
2.
3.
Legend Group 4: Facility Name
1.
2.
Legend Group 5: Contractor/A&E
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Safety Performance Sign
Legend Group 2: Project Title
1.
2.
Legend Group 3: Contractor/A&E
1.
2.
Legend Group 2a: Military/Civil Works Sponsor
1.
2.
Legend Group 5b: Contractor/A&E
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR
EARTHWORKS

Table of Contents

0100 - GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 2
0101 - PREPARATION AND DISMANTLING WORKS ................................................... 4
0102 - EXCAVATION WORKS ............................................................................................. 6
0103 - QUARRYING ............................................................................................................... 9
0104 - COMPACTION AND TAMPING ............................................................................ 10
0105 - WRAPPING AND BEDDING ................................................................................... 12

1993
01

0100 - General
01000 - General
010001 - Scope
These speciIications reIer to common earthworks Ior building constructions. Special
preparation works such as building, demolition or special supports required due to proximity
oI buildings or work under the level oI the aquiIer shall be speciIied in the particular
speciIications.

01002 - Definitions
Earth and soil - the terms reIer to any type oI natural material, including rock.
Layer thickness - is the thickness aIter the compression and compaction, to be
carried out according to the speciIications pertaining to that layer.
Back-Iill (borrowed Iill) - soil taken Irom the building site Ior Iilling purposes.
Brought up Iill - Iill brought Irom places out oI the building site Ior Iilling
purposes.
Surplus soil - excavated soil not used in the construction.

01003 - Standards
Tthe Iollowing is the main standard pertaining to this chapter:
Sorting oI soils according to AASHTO ASTM-D-3282 - ClassiIication oI Soils
and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Ior Highway Construction Purposes.

01001 - Other Chapters
All the provisions in the chapters oI the general construction works speciIications, as detailed
below, are also applicable to the present chapter.
Chapter 02 - In-Situ Cast Concrete Works
Chapter 57 - Water Lines, Sewage and Trenches.

01002 - Casing and Support
The sides oI excavations shall be cased and supported, in case that the soil requires casing,
whether the supervisor has required that this be done or not. The boards and supports shall be
suIIiciently strong and rigid to sustain the pressure oI the soil and prevent collapse or
horizontal movement oI the casing. Alternatively, iI soil conditions permit it, the contractor
shall be able to shape the sides oI the excavations according to their natural slopes , instead oI
casing and supporting the soil.

01003 - Responsibility for Stability
The provisions included in these speciIications are guidelines Ior the best proIessional
execution. Carrying out these instructions is not enough to absolve the contractor oI his legal
responsibility, and he shall be solely responsible Ior the stability oI the excavation and the
saIety oI the earth works carried out at the site, including saIety oI the structures and the roads
in the vicinity oI the site, and all that this entails.

01004 - Collapse
In the event oI a collapse due to insuIIicient support, or any other reason, the contractor shall
re-excavate the pit and repair the casing and support. Moreover, the contractor shall bear the
cost oI all damages to people or property incurred by the collapse, and he hereby absolves the
manager oI any claims, which may arise in this context.

01005 - Drainage
All excavations described above shall be protected against the penetration oI rainwater, by the
adoption oI appropriate means such as excavation oI drainage trenches, or the creation oI
temporary earth banks. II rainwater or sewage water have accumulated in the excavated pits,
despite the means adopted by the contractor, the contractor shall remove the water Irom the
excavations and allow the bottom to dry suIIiciently, to the supervisor's satisIaction, beIore he
resumes work. These instructions also apply to back- Iill.
The excavation and Iill and excavation in back-Iill areas etc. shall be carried out in such a way
as to allow constant drainage oI the water during all the stages oI work. The means oI
drainage shall include works as excavation oI temporary trenches, building oI banks, pumping
oI water, blocking oI pits, etc.

01006 - Ground Water
When work is carried out in areas where ground water is expected or where ground water was
detected during work, the contractor shall pump the water by the means and methods
approved by the supervisor. The pumping shall be consecutive and suIIicient Ior ensuring dry
pits, as required Ior carrying out the work. The contractor shall also take care to dispose oI the
pumped water to a site selected at his own responsibility, with the approval oI the supervisor
given in advance.

01007 - Coordination and Disturbances
The contractor shall carry out the work in coordination with the operating conditions
prevailing at the site, including the Iunction oI electricity, water, irrigation and sewage
systems, etc., subject to the directions oI the responsible authority. Moreover, coordination
and cooperation must be ensured with other parties or contractors working at the site - as
instructed by the supervisor Irom time to time. The contractor shall take all means required to
prevent disturbances and holdups oI traIIic, including marking with lamps and Ilags, signposts
and the positioning oI permanent employees to direct the traIIic, etc.
Special requirements and limitations shall be deIined in the particular speciIications or the
plans.
In built and populated areas, the contractor must carry out the work in such a way that all in-
situ systems shall continue to work and Iunction without disturbance, including access to
buildings, Iree pathways and the proper Iunction oI electricity, water, sewage and irrigation
systems.

01008 - Returning the Area to its Former State
The contractor shall return to its Iormer state, any area dismantled or damaged Iollowing
preparation, dismantlement, or cleaning works, or earthworks oI any kind, Ior any purpose
whatsoever, including in-situ installations such as cells, trenches, drainage installations, etc.
In addition to the above, in paved areas, the contractor shall apply all oI the paving layers -
asphalt, concrete tiling oI various types, etc.
The area shall be returned to its Iormer state by means oI new materials and products, except
where the supervisor has approved the use oI materials and products Irom the dismantlement.
The contractor is responsible to ensure that there are no pits in the area repaired by him.

0101 - Preparation and Dismantling Works
01010 - General
BeIore starting the earth works (excavation and Iill) the contractor shall carry out all the
works required below (removal or exposure oI vegetation, removal oI waste and obstacles), as
well as additional works, as required by the plans or the supervisor's instructions, so that the
soil surIace obtained shall be Iree oI shrubs, weeds, structures, pipes, concrete wastes, etc.
The execution schedules oI each oI these activities shall be determined by the supervisor, in
no case shall an area in which the vegetation has been removed, be exposed.

01011 - Removal of Vegetation and Cleaning
Removal oI vegetation and cleaning, involves the uprooting oI existing vegetation (shrubs and
weeds) including its roots, and removing and dispersing it. The cleaning oI the area includes
removal oI any garbage or alluvial sedimentation and their disposal as detailed in section
01017 below .
Vegetation not deIined as a tree, which has been explicitly described in the particular
speciIications as not included in this section oI "removal oI vegetation", shall be considered as
special vegetation. Such special vegetation shall only be removed according to a plan, or
according to the written instructions oI the supervisor.
II it is required to preserve part oI the vegetation, the contractor shall do so according to the
requirements in chapter 41 - gardening and watering works, and in the particular
speciIications.

01012 9 Exposure
Exposure includes removal oI existing vegetation (shrubs and weeds) and the upper soil layer,
up to a thickness oI 20 cm., and then disposal and distribution oI this layer as described in
section 01017. Exposure shall be carried out according to a plan, or aIter the CO has approved
the execution and its scope in advance.

01013 - The Cutting Down and Uprooting of Trees
010131 - Cutting Down Trees
Any vegetation, whose bark circumIerence is at least oI 15 cm at a height oI 1.0 meter above
ground, shall be considered a tree. Any tree whose circumIerence is less than 15 cm shall be
considered vegetation (section 01011 above). II a number oI tree trunks branch out Irom the
same root, i.e., originate Irom the soil, each one oI them shall be considered as a separate
bark, iI it complies with the above deIinition.
The contractor must cut the trees close to ground, but not less than 5 cm. Irom the surIace nor
higher than required by the CO. II it has not been speciIied otherwise, the contractor shall cut
the trunks and branches with a circumIerence oI 15 cm and above, into segments oI 1.0 to
2.0 meters, according to the supervisor`s instructions. Trunks and branches, with a
circumIerence less than 15 cm., shall be removed as detailed in section 01017.
The contractor shall pile all the trunks and branches cut as above in locations indicated by the
CO within the site, in such a way that they shall not constitute a nuisance and shall be
available to the oIIice. Cut trees Irom which it shall not be necessary to chop branches, shall
be handled separately as detailed in section 010134, or shall be removed as detailed in section
01017.

010132 - Uprooting Tree Stumps
In the event that the contractor received an area with the stumps oI trees cut down by others to
a height oI 5 cm at least, and not arched beIore they were cut, and the circumIerence oI their
section at the cutting level is greater than 15 cm., shall be considered, Ior the purpose oI
uprooting, as iI they were trees with a circumIerence oI 15 cm diameter at a height oI 1.0
meter.
Tree trunks that have been cut shall be uprooted and removed as described in section 01017.
The pits created by the uprooting shall be Iilled with the best local back-Iill or with brought
up Iill, which shall be compacted in 20cm thick layers, up to the planned level oI the
excavation (or the natural ground level, iI there is no excavation).
II required, the pits shall be sprayed with a weed killer (see section 01014 below).

010133 - Trees Uprooting
II not stated otherwise, the work oI uprooting trees shall include all the works included in the
above sections oI uprooting and cutting, but the works may be carried out in the order
suitable to the contractor. In the event than the entire job consists oI uprooting alone, it shall
be classiIied as a separate job.

010134 - Special Trees
The Iollowing shall be included in the category oI special trees: Trees protected by law,
deIective trees which are not suitable Ior sale and trees located in the vicinity oI buildings or
installations. The uprooting oI special trees or their transIer Ior replanting in an alternate
location shall be carried out according to the provisions oI the particular speciIications. This
should be classiIied as a separate job.

01014 - Weed Killers
Areas covered with weeds, areas Irom which the vegetation has been removed, exposed area
and the pits Irom which trees have been uprooted - shall be sprayed with a weed or root killer.
The spraying shall be deIined in the contract document. The contractor must locate and deIine
the weeds at the site and Iind the appropriate chemical material Ior killing that speciIic type oI
vegetation. The herbicide shall be sprayed by a contractor authorized to carry out such work
by the Ministry oI Agriculture.
The contractor shall make sure that the wind conditions are appropriate Ior spraying and shall
ensure that no environmental damage is caused.

01015 - Dismantling
010151 - Dismantling of Buildings
Wherever required to do so, at whatever length and depth, the contractor shall dismantle both
surIace and underground buildings, such as; existing concrete trenches, drainage lines
containing concrete pipes and stone Iill, acquaducts, control-cells, embankments and the like.
Foundations or surIace buildings shall only be dismantled down to a depth oI 1.0 meter below
the subgrade surIace. The work includes removal oI concrete and stone pieces, etc. as detailed
in section 01017 below.

010152 - Dismantling Pavements
II required, concrete pavements and asphalt pavements shall be dismantled along their entire
constructional depth down to the subgrade. In asphalt pavements, iI dismantling is needed
Ior laying a new road or Ior repair - the asphalt layer shall be sawn oII within the dismantling
boundaries. Dismantling the pavements shall include removal oI the waste Irom the area
according to section 01017 and compaction oI the surIace aIter dismantling , until the required

density is obtained. When dismantling concrete plates, the plates shall be broken into parts
small enough to be loaded and disposed oI.

01016 - Blocking of Pits and Trenches.
The contractor shall use local back-Iill oI the quality approved by the CO. In order to block
any pits or trenches created Iollowing the above dismantling . The contractor shall compact
the Iill in layers up to the required level, according to the plan, or the CO`s instructions.

01017 - Removal of Waste
The waste shall be removed.
In those cases where the CO shall allocate an area to which the waste should be removed, the
contractor shall bury the waste in the ground and cover it with a layer oI soil, at least 60 cm.
Thick , in such a way as to allow good drainage and to ensure that the additional height shall
not exceed 100 cm. above the Iinal surrounding surIace area. As an alternative to burying the
waste, the contractor shall be entitled to remove it Irom the site. The selection oI a place Ior
removal, the roads leading to it and the right oI the contractor to use it, are the sole
responsibility oI the contractor.

0102 - Excavation Works
01020 - General
In addition to the provisions oI the "Surveying and Marking" section in Chapter 00: II in the
opinion oI the CO, the ground preparation works (such as the removal oI vegetation, the
uprooting oI trees, etc.) have caused such changes in the topographic state as to require
renewed Surveying - the contractor shall be obliged to survey and mark again.

01021 - Types of Soil and Earth
The present speciIications classiIy the soil and earth into two types only: rock or any other
soil. A rock shall be considered any continuous layer oI solid rock or large stone slabs, which
can only be quarried by means oI penetrometers, compressors, wedges, sledgehammers or the
use oI explosives.
Any soil, which may be handled with tractors oI all kinds, even when operated in their
strongest gear position, shall not be considered rock.
The decision regarding the classiIication oI the soil to one oI the above types is given entirely
to the CO`s discretion and his decision in this regard shall be binding and Iinal.
The term "excavation in all oI the sections oI these speciIications relates to quarrying in
rock, even iI this has not been explicitly noted in each section.
Thus all oI the sections reIerring to excavation works in these speciIications also apply to
quarrying, subject to the additional requirements presented in sub-section 0103 below.

01022 - Excavation
010221 - Area Excavations
Excavation in the area shall be carried out according to the details oI the plans, or as required
in order to lower the level oI the existing soil surIace, down to the levels determined by the
CO. In the case oI soil surpluses, the best excavated soil, which in the CO's opinion conIorms
to the requirements and may serve as an appropriate Iill, shall be transIerred to the planned Iill
areas and distributed there as provided in the section concerning Iill.
Excavation oI aqueducts and excavation oI pits (trenches) shall be discussed below.

010222 - Excavation Below the Required Level
In the event that the excavation has been perIormed by the contractor to a depth greater than
required, the contractor shall reIill it up to the required levels with an appropriate Iill material
as approved by the CO. This Iill material shall be Iree oI stones, silt, organic material, etc. and
shall be distributed in layers no thicker than 20 cm.
Mechanical compacting tools shall be used to compact the layers aIter sprinkling an optimum
amount oI water.
The compaction shall proceed until the natural density characteristic oI soil at this depth is
achieved. Any voids created Iollowing excess excavations below Ioundations, etc. shall be
Iilled with lean concrete.
The provisions oI this section also apply to excessive excavation, even in a multi- layer rock.

010223 - Digging of Trenches
II not stated otherwise, an excavation no wider than 2.0 meters, whose depth is no less than 50
cm. below the original soil surIace shall be deIined as a trench. The bottom and sides oI the
trench shall be shaped to the desired gradient.

010224 - Excavation of Basements
Excavations Ior basements and subterranean structures shall be carried out according to the
dimensions speciIied in the plans and with consideration Ior the ground conditions, the work
spaces and the need Ior casing, Iormworks, supports, sealing and any other goal (see section
01002 above and section 010227 below). The earth Irom the excavation shall be temporarily
stored in nearby heaps. The bottom oI the excavation shall be shaped according to the
required levels and gradients and shall be compacted as detailed in paragraph 0104. The best
the excavated soil, which in the opinion oI the CO may serve as an appropriate Iill, shall be
used both Ior back-Iill as detailed below and Ior Iill in any other place in the site.
The back-Iill around the external walls shall only be carried out when all oI the works to be
covered with soil are completed, and aIter all oI these works have been inspected and
approved by the CO. The back-Iill shall be comprised oI layers, whose thickness aIter
compaction shall not exceed 20 cm., as detailed in paragraph 0104. II the CO shall so
demand, the layers shall be compacted with a heavy manual compactor and sprinkled with
water in the required amount.
The back-Iill restored along structural walls coated on the outside with sealing layers, shall be
Iree oI stones and large clods or any other waste liable to damage the sealing and the entire
work shall be carried out with proper care.

010225 - Excavation for Foundations.
Digging oI trenches Ior strip Ioundations, Ioundation beams, connecting beams, etc. and
digging oI trenches Ior Ioundation stanchions, bases, containers etc. shall be carried out both
at the level oI the original or leveled ground surIace, and Irom the bottom oI the pit excavated
Ior basements and subterranean buildings, as detailed in section 010224 above. Should the
sides oI the excavation remain uncased - loose stones or earth clods shall be removed Irom
them, in order to prevent them Irom sliding.

010226 - Excavation for Pipes
Trenches Ior pipes shall be dug down to the levels corresponding to the design pipe laying
levels (invert level) and shall be suIIiciently wide to accommodate the work, on condition that
in no case shall the width oI the bottom be smaller than the external diameter oI the pipe plus
20 cm on each side. In those places where bedding or a protective covering is required around
the pipes, the trench shall be deepened accordingly. In places where no bedding is to be

placed, pockets shall be excavated at the bottom oI the trench, so as to accommodate pipe
Iixtures or connectors. Each trench in a pipeline shall be excavated in a single session along
its entire length and to its entire depth, between one cell and another - and this shall be done
beIore the pipes are placed in it. Special care shall be taken to thoroughly compact the
bedding or the back-Iill below the pipe and up to halI its height.
Moreover, special attention shall be given to compacting the pipelines below the concrete
surIaces or tiled areas. The excavation Ior cables shall be carried out as required in the
appropriate chapter, i.e., chapter 08 - electrical installation, 43 - external lighting, etc.

010227 - Workspaces
Workspaces Ior the purpose oI casing, Iormworks, sealing or any other purpose, in all types oI
excavation and quarrying works, shall be determined by the contractor according to need, as
stated above.

01023 - Transfering the excavated soil.
The transIer oI excavated soil mentioned in all oI the previous sections or those below shall
be carried out according to the CO's instructions. The CO shall determine the type oI soil, the
part oI the soil to be transIerred to other places, the part to be used Ior Iill and the part to be
removed. When the soil surplus intended Ior transIer is placed in a heap, care should be taken
to ensure appropriate drainage arrangements.
The contractor shall remove any soil surplus outside the site, as described in the particular
speciIications, iI the contractor is given a map, in which the areas Ior excavation surpluses are
marked, the contractor must transIer the soil to the marked area and spread it there in layers,
according to the particular speciIications or the CO's instructions.

01024 - Filling with Soil
010240 - General
The best soil approved as Iill shall be brought Irom the excavation areas and spread in the
layers and levels speciIied in the plan, or according to the CO's instructions, then compacted
to the required density and moisture.

010241 - Borrowed Fill
Should the best oI the excavated soil prove insuIIicient Ior Iilling, the shortage shall be made
up with soil borrowed Irom the surrounding earth. The selection oI a place in which to
excavate borrowed Iill and the quality oI the soil taken Irom that place, both require the CO`s
authorization.
The surIace oI the area intended Ior borrowed Iill excavation, shall be stripped to a depth oI
20 cm. at least, and the soil and vegetation etc. Irom the stripping shall be handled like any
other waste and removed Irom the site.
Filling with borrowed Iill shall be carried out as detailed in regard to Iilling works above.

010242 - Brought up Fill
In the absence oI appropriate local soil suitable Ior making up the shortage oI soil Ior Iilling,
clean soil, Iree oI stones, silt, organic materials or any other undesirable material, shall be
brought Irom outside the site.
The imported soil and its source shall conIorm to the requirements oI the speciIications and
require the CO approval.
When required, trenches and pits shall be wetted beIore casting.

01025 - Approval of Excavation and Filling
The bottom oI the excavation and the Iill surIace and the various types oI bedding, as detailed
below, require all the CO approval Casting, or the works oI covering the castings, shall not be
commenced without the CO approval. When required, trenches and pits shall be wetted beIore
the casting.

01026 - Boring of Piles
Pits Ior piles shall be bored in the diameters and depths marked in the plans or according to
the CO instructions. Vertical bores which penetrate through stable soil layers, shall be bored
without casing, on condition that they are vertical and that the concrete shall be cast into them
on the day they are bored, immediately Iollowing their inspection and approval by the CO.
Inclined bores as well as vertical bores through loose soil lor through types oI soil requiring
casing Ior any reason whatsoever, shall be bored in such a way as to ensure the stability oI the
sides at any depths, by means oI steel pipes.
Expansion at the bottom oI the piles, iI required in the plans, may only be carried out in stable
soil layers. The dimensions oI the bore and oI the expansion shall be inspected by the CO by
means oI appropriate measuring instruments and light beams directed into the bore hole (see
section "Piles and special castings in Chapter 02 - The general speciIications Ior cast in-situ
concrete works).

01027 - The Slurry Method
Stabilization oI the excavation's sides by means oI the slurry method, Ior the purpose oI
casting supporting walls, includes;
A. Cutting the soil with the special equipment required by the slurry method in order
to shape a trench corresponding to the dimensions oI the walls.
B. Preparation oI the slurry itselI, Irom a mixture oI materials prepared at the plant
and supplied in a closed package, to be mixed at the site with water.
C. Insertion oI the slurry into the trench.
Supplying the concrete and casting it into the walls;
D. Removing the slurry pushed out by the pressure oI the concrete as it is cast in the
walls.
The contractor shall present Ior the work plans Ior the CO approval, at least two weeks beIore
the beginning oI work. The plans shall speciIy the length oI the wall sections, the rate oI
casting, etc. The CO shall authorize the work aIter it is shown that all the equipment is
appropriate to the soil's quality, the plan ensures progress without casting interruptions, and
alternative equipment and means are available iI necessary.
Soil cutting works shall be considered excavation rather than quarrying. The concrete
requirements shall be as detailed in Chapter 02 - The general speciIications Ior cast in-situ
concrete works.

0103 - Quarrying
01030 - General
II not noted otherwise, quarrying shall be deIined as an excavation that may only be carried
out with the use oI penetrometers, compressors, wedges or the use oI explosives.
Any work that can be carried out with tractors oI any kind, even when operated in their
strongest gear position, shall not be considered quarrying. Such quarrying shall not be
commenced unless the CO has reached the conclusion that the work cannot be carried out

except through the above detailed means, and aIter the CO has given his written authorization
to quarry the rock as above. The material approved Ior usage as Iill shall be transIerred and
distributed as detailed in section 01032.
The surpluses shall be transIerred and distributed as detailed above in section 01023 (the void
created Iollowing the quarrying shall hereinaIter be termed "excavation", as it is termed when
he soil is excavated). When an excavation has been approved as a quarry, the CO shall
indicate the appropriate quarrying gradients, in contrary to the markings in the plan.
The bottom oI trenches and pits below Ioundations shall be leveled to the required levels and
inclines by means oI a layer oI lean concrete whose average thickness shall not exceed 5.0
cm. The bottom oI the trenches excavated Ior pipes, etc., shall be leveled with a layer oI
course gravel or aggregates (at an average thickness oI 5.0 cm.) compacted as speciIied in
paragraph 0104, unless another requirement has been noted in the plans or in one oI the other
contract documents, or iI the CO has so required.

01031 - Blasting
The use oI explosives requires the written consent oI the CO. The contractor shall obtain all
the licenses and permits required Ior blasting operations.
The blasts shall be conIined to the planned volumes, and no extra blasting shall be permitted.
Loose rocks, or those whose stability has been lessened Iollowing the blast, shall be removed
Irom the site.

01032 - Filling with Quarried Material
The earth Ior Iilling may contain a quantity oI stones Irom the quarrying, as long as the
maximum stone size shall not exceed 2/3 oI the thickness oI the Iill layers, and in no case
shall be larger than 14 cm. The stones shall beintermixed with Iine material , in such as a way
as to prevent the Iormation oI voids in the Iill layers. Larger stones than stated above, shall be
crushed beIore being transIerred to the Iill.
The ridge oI the excavation slope shall be rounded, and all stones rolling down or loosely held
- shall be removed.
The quarried material Iill shall be compacted as required.

0104 - Compaction and Tamping
01040 - General
A distinction shall be made between controlled compaction and regular compaction. Regular
compaction shall be carried out on layers oI quarried material, which cannot be tested under
controlled compaction. The excavation`s subgrade (the Iinal level aIter the earthworks have
been completed), the Iills and any other area marked in the plans or in any oI the other
contractual documents, shall be compacted with appropriate mechanical equipment, at the
level oI wetting required in order to attain the required level oI density. The moisture content
shall be in the range oI 2 Irom the optimum moisture content.
A. The compaction shall be carried out by means oI various types oI mechanical
rollers, aIter the soil has acquired the required moisture content (through the addition oI
water or by drying). The rollers shall be pneumatic, vibrational, lamb's Ieet, etc.
B. In those places where the various types oI mechanical equipment cannot be
applied, the compaction shall be carried out with special equipment such as Irog clamps
and the like.
C. Unless otherwise speciIied , the compaction shall be carried out in layers no
thicker than 20 cm. (aIter compaction).

BeIore compaction oI each layer, it must be leveled to the supervisor's satisIaction. The
Iinish oI the upper layer compaction shall be within the allowed deviation limits.
D. The compaction work includes preservation oI the Iinished layer surIace and its
edges, at the appropriate density and humidity and at the proper height until it is spread
and compacted onto the next and proximate layer. The preservation oI the layer surIace
also means repeated wetting and compaction iI required to this end.

01041 - Tamping of Areas
Tamping oI the subgrade surIace inside the excavation or tamping oI the existing soil surIace
or the soil aIter stripping - shall be carried out by ploughing and raking, wetting and tamping
the soil, until a 20 cm. thick layer is obtained, compacted to the required level oI density.
Unless otherwise speciIied, in those places where the thickness oI the Iill is less than 20 cm.
(aIter compaction) the contractor shall plough the natural soil surIace to such a depth that aIter
the distribution oI the Iill layer, its mingling with the plowed soil surIace and its compaction,
the obtained layer shall be 20 cm. thick.

01042 - Density
Unless otherwise speciIied, the range oI density allowed at the site shall be as Iollows;
Controlled tamping
Type oI soil according to the
AASHO classiIication method
Depth oI layer below the
subgrade surIace
Minimum tamping rate
A-3 (maximum 5 passing
mesh 200)
At any depth 98
A-1 * , A-2-4, A-3 (More than
5 passing mesh 200
At any depth 95
A-2-5,A-2-6,A-2-7,A-4,A-5 Less than 100 cm 95
A-2-5,A-2-6,A-2-7,A-4,A-5 More than 100 cm 93
A-6 to A-7-6(5) At any depth 93
A-7-6(5)** At any depth 90

* The compaction rate required Ior an A-1 type subgrade is at least 98.
** In swelling clays, the CO is entitled to demand a diIIerent compaction rate (Ior example 89
2).

Regular compaction
The compaction oI each oI the layers oI Iill in quarried material which in the opinion oI the
CO, because it contains large stones, the extent oI its compaction cannot be measured by
means oI a density test - shall be carried out by means oI a vibration roller with a minimum
Iorce oI 15 tons/blow and the number oI vibrations per minute shall be no less than 1000.
The compaction shall be carried out along the entire width oI the layer, until the sinking oI the
soil or its movement under the rollshall stop, and each point has been covered with a
minimum oI 8 roller passes - where the thickness oI the layer is up to 30 cm, or double the
number oI passes when the layer thickness is more than 30 cm (up to 60 cm).
The contractor is entitled to suggest compaction with a vibration roller with a greater
minimum Iorce (more than 18 tons/blow), the minimum number oI passes in this case shall be
decided by the CO Iollowing the compaction oI a trial patch.

II in the course oI compaction, it becomes evident that in some places the rate oI compaction
can be tested to the entire depth oI the layer, the CO is entitled to demand the compaction rate
required Ior the controlled compaction.

01043 - Compaction Overlap
In all types oI compaction, the compaction overlap in a mechanical or vibrational roller, at
least halI the width oI the back wheel, and in a pneumatic roller, halI the width oI the back
axle.

01044 - Collection and Testing of Samples
In order to determine the quality oI compaction, samples shall be taken Ior determining the
Iield density. The samples shall be taken as Iollows:
Six samples Ior each lot oI work 2,000 sqm in size or less.
The lot oI work is the area, which the contractor has managed to compact on a given day, the
material and processing properties oI which are uniIorm. The CO is entitled to change the
deIinition oI work lot Ior the same number oI samples, according to the working conditions,
at his sole discretion.
The change instruction shall be given in writing in advance. The samples shall be taken along
random points.
The average oI the above tests shall be smaller than the required density. The test results oI
1/6 oI the tests may reach a lower limit smaller by two than the required level oI density. For
example: II the required density rate is 95, the average oI the six- (6) samples must be 95%,
but no more than one shall reach the low limit oI 93.
In weak spots, such as above and aqueduct, or in places where a crater or swamp is to be, etc.,
samples shall not be taken according to the above working lot, but according to the CO
instructions.
In the event that the area has Iailed to conIorm to the above requirements, the entire working
lot shall be considered deIective, and the entire area shall have to be reworked, aIter which
repeated tests shall be conducted on the entire working lot.

01045 - Permitted Deviations
The contractor must work the areas as detailed in the appropriate sections dealing with
excavation, and those dealing with Iill, within the Iollowing limits oI precision:
The allowed deviation Irom the planned height shall not exceed:
-40 mm (minus 40) - in surIace excavation and Iill.
(-)50 mm., - in the excavation oI trenches and borrowing areas.

0105 - Wrapping and Bedding
01051 - Wrapping
Wrapping around pipes, control cells, Ioundations, walls etc., submerged in clay soils, shall
be made oI sand, gravel-sand, or other granular soil authorized to this end, all according to the
speciIic case, as required in the plans or in one oI the other contractual documents. The
wrapping material shall be clean oI clay, silt and damaging materials and Iree oI stones.
Detailed instructions regarding the method oI execution shall be given in the particular
speciIications.

01052 - Sand Bedding
Sand bedding below concrete surIaces, Iloor tiles or Ioundations shall be applied at the
thickness marked in the plans or according to the CO instructions. The sand shall be taken

Irom an authorized source and shall be course sand, Iree oI all stones, clay, silt, organic
materials or any other damaging materials.
The sand must be spread in layers whose thickness does not exceed 20 cm., and compacted as
detailed in paragraph 0104. The layers shall be spread in parallel with the Iinal surIace oI the
cast or tiled area, and the bedding surIace shall be shaped according to the required levels and
gradients. Bedding made oI another material shall be carried out according to the particular
speciIications.

01053 - Buffering and Blasting Layer
Should one oI the contractual documents require buIIering, layers or blasting layers, these
shall be carried out according to the instructions oI the Rear Command Headquarters.

GENERAL SPECIFICATION
CAST IN-SITU CONCRETE
WORKS

TabIe of Contents

0200 - GeneraI ......................................................................................................... 3
0201 - Concrete MateriaIs ...................................................................................... 5
0202 - Types and Properties of Concrete ............................................................. 6
0203 - Manufacturing the Concrete ............................................................. 7
0204 - Casting the Concrete .................................................................................. 9
0205 - Finishing and Curing of Concrete ............................................................ 13
0206 - Formworks ................................................................................................ 15
0207 - Reinforcement SteeI .................................................................................. 17
0208 - Exposed Concrete ..................................................................................... 18
0209 - QuaIity Assurance ..................................................................................... 27

1998
02

0200 - GeneraI
02001 - Scope
This chapter deals with the quality of the materials and workmanship of concrete and
reinforced concrete works, performed in accordance with the plans and according to
the instructions, and shall apply to all parts of the building, underground and above,
for the whole site at any given depth or height. The specifications apply for ready
mixed concrete and concrete mixed on site.
Self leveling concrete shall be performed according to a specific specification.
The requirements for splashed concrete (including concrete reinforced with steel rods
, see chapter 54 underground digging).

02002 - Standards
Following is a list of the main standards concerning this chapter.

srael Standards:
No. Name
1 Portland Cement
3 Aggregates from natural sources
12 Hollowed blocks for ribbed ceilings
26
Part 1
Part 2
Part 3
Part 4
Part 5
Part 6
Part 7
Preparation of concrete specimens and testing them
Sampling fresh concrete
Properties of fresh concrete
Making the specimens ready and curing
Properties of hardened concrete strength
Testing methods: Properties of hardened concrete except
strength
Sampling, preparing and testing of concrete specimens
hardened on site
Nondestructive tests of hardened concrete
37 Part 1 Plywood regular
118 Concrete strength
466
Part 1
Part 2
Part 3
Part 4
Part 5
Concrete regulations
General principles
Reinforced and non-reinforced concrete structures
Pre-stressed concrete
Pre-cast concrete elements and structures
Pre-cast pre-stressed hollow core slab floors
580 All Parts Welded steel nets for concrete reinforcement

No. Name
601 Ready-mixed concrete
739 Steel rods with improved adhesive capabilities for concrete
reinforcement
789 Building tolerances: principles (part 1)
893 Smooth rolled steel bars for concrete reinforcement
896 Chemical concrete additives
904 Form-works for concrete
Part 1 Principals
Part 2 Telescopic supporters
1209 Coal fly ash for concrete
1378 Pile foundation in rock with hammer drilling
1476 Part 1 mpermeability testing of the building: flat roofs and
balconies

IsraeI Standards Institute document
Standard 12 Ready mixed concrete plants: QA systems: requirements.
Standard15 Ready mixed concrete plants: authorization procedure.

Foreign standards
ASTM C 171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
ASTM C 309 Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds For Curing Concrete
ASTM c 387 Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry Combined Materials for
Mortar and Concrete
DN 18541 Thermoplastic Sealing Strips for Sealing Joints in n-Situ Concrete

02003 - IsraeI Standard Institute documents
srael Standard nstitute Specification 176 steel rods and nets for concrete
reinforcement, cut and bent.

All the said in those chapters about the general specifications of building work,
applies also to this chapter.
Chapter 04 Construction work
Chapter 08 Electric facilities
Chapter 50 Concrete surfaces

0201 - Concrete materiaIs
02011 - Cement
020111 - Type and QuaIity of Cement
The cement shall meet the requirements of S 1 according to the stated type. n case
of no other specifications the cement shall be of the Portland Cement 250 type.
White cement shall meet at least the mechanical requirements for Portland Cement
300 type .
For concrete of B-50 and above the cement used shall be of the Portland Cement
300 type or stronger.

020112 - SuppIy
The cement shall be supplied packaged by the manufacturer or in bulks. The supply
of bulks shall be done in an appropriate container in accordance with the
requirements of the authorities.
Cement supplied in bulks shall be stored in silos with a hermetic closure. t shall not
be allowed to be stored in open containers or crates.
Cement supplied in sacks shall be store on the site for the shortest duration possible
and the contractor shall make sure it shall not get wet. Cement containing small
lumps, not easily crumbled with the fingers shall not be used, unless tested by the lab
and approved. Spilled cement that was gathered shall not be used.
Cement stored for 3 month or more, even if stored as specified, shall not be used,
unless approved by the lab after the appropriate tests.

02012 - Aggregates
020120 - GeneraI
All the aggregates shall be of natural sources and shall meet the
requirements of S 3.
At the beginning of construction, the contractor shall proclaim the
source of the aggregates he chooses for the work.
Aggregates of the B type, according to S 3, shall not be used for
concrete of B-40 or better or exposed concrete, unless it was
approved by certified lab for stated use.

020121 - Coarse Aggregates
The coarse aggregates shall be grounded to cubes (if possible).
The size shall not be more than one of the following:
A.
1
/
5
of the minimal size of the form-works.
1
/
3
of the thickness of the hardened slabs.
/ of the distance between every reinforcement rods, wires or strand or tensioning
cables in the pre-stressed concrete.
25 mm, unless otherwise required in a specific specification.
f not otherwise required, the coarse aggregate shall fit the
above mentioned sizes. t shall be on a single grain or multiple
grains and shall be chosen according to the grading in the S 3
for coarse aggregate.
n cases, with prior approval of the CO, it shall be permitted not
to comply with those specifications, if the methods of spreading
and vibrating are such as to permit the use of a cruder aggregate

without the danger of defects such as gravel pockets, hollows
etc.

020122 - Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates shall be of natural sources (such as seashore
sand, riverbank sands or natural excavations) or grind sands or
both.
The aggregates shall comply with the S 3 for fine aggregates.
Ground sands shall be washed.

02013 - Water
The water for the mixture and for curing shall be of drinking
quality and shall be derived from the drinking pipelines.
Other water shall be tested by a qualified lab and approved for
the use in concrete or in the curing process, not having bad
effects on the quality of the concrete or the reinforced concrete.

02014 - Additives
f not otherwise said, the contractor may add chemical additives ,
complying with the demands of S 896, or minerals as coal fly
ash to change the properties of fresh or hard concrete.
Coal fly ash as a substitute for part of the cement or the sand
shall meet the requirements of S 1209. Coal fly ash shall be
supplied, stored and put into the mixer in accordance with the
cement standards as said above.
The delivery shall be performed according to the regulations of
the authorities.
The use of additives of the microsilika type shall be permitted if
so required in a special specification.
Addition of the Superplasticizer shall conform to the S 896,
according to the type.
The additives shall be approved if qualified by an authorized lab
that it conforms to the qualifications demanded in the standard,
and their effects on other properties of the concrete were taken
into account. The amount of the additives shall be determined
by tests done prior to commence of the structure, taking in
account the casting conditions, and the expected climate when
casting. The additives shall be supplied in the manufacturer`s
packaging, in accordance with the S 896, and shall be stored on
the site according to the manufacturer`s instructions. t shall be
put into the mixer in a method ensuring it`s exact amount and
distribution in the mixture.
The use of air confining additives shall be permitted only if the
concrete is prepared in gconditions and under supervision
according to S 118 and when there is a constant supervision on
the amount of air confined as derived from the primary tests on
the site. Air confining additives shall not be used in concrete
containing coal fly ash .
f using more than one additive , primary tests shall be
performed in certified lab to confirm the compatibility between
the additives .
f it is said in the plans or the contract documents that the
contractor shall use any kind of admixtures to change certain

properties of the concrete, the additive shall comply to all the
above requirements .

0202 - Types and properties of Concrete
02020 - GeneraI
The types of concrete shall be defined according to the concrete
properties as demanded in the special specification:
A. The typical strength according to S 118.
B. The maximum grain size of the coarse aggregate.
C. The consistency.
D. Control conditions
E. Special requirements

02021 - Cement Quantity
The cement quantity shall be determined according to primary
performed tests.
The minimal amount of cement in reinforced concrete shall be
according to S 466.
Unless otherwise stated in a special specification, the maximum
amount of cement for B-50 concrete shall be no more than 480
kg and for B-60 concrete 500 kg.

02022 - Consistency
The consistency shall be according to the grade in S 26 part 2.
The grading of slump for the concrete, white casting into form-
works, shall exceed the grade while shipment to the site, for
casting and vibrating.

02023 - ControI Conditions
The control conditions shall comply to the S 118.
Concrete of B-30 quality or better shall be manufactured under
good conditions.
Concrete of B-50, B-60 or higher strength shall be manufactured
under close lab supervision.

0203 - Manufacturing The Concrete
02030 - GeneraI
The following paragraphs are the requirements for
manufacturing:
A. Ready mixed concrete (manufactured in a plant).
Concrete mixed in-setu.
The more common type shall be ready mixed concrete.

02031 - Ready mixed concrete
A. The PIant

The plant where the concrete is brought, shall be certified for mixing
concrete under good supervision condition according to the S 601.
The contractor shall be responsible for the quality of the concrete.
B. Distance of The PIant From the Site
UnIess otherwise stated in a special specification, the interval time between
pouring the mixture into the mixer in the plant and its cast at the site shall
not exceed 1.5 hours.
According to that requirement the concrete shall be ordered from a plant
complying with this time limit.
C. Shipment Certificate
Every shipment shall have a certificate noting at least the followings:
1) Type of concrete according to its strength (according to S
118).
2) The concrete fitness to the service conditions pumping
concrete, exposed concrete (see paragraph 0208) etc.
3) The nominal maximum size of the coarse aggregate.
4) Slump grading.
5) The minimal amount of cement.
6) The maximum amount of cement, if required by a special
specification.
7) The maximum amount of water in the mixture, if required by a
special specification.
8) Time of adding the water to the mixture.
9) Types of chemical or mineral additives (if added ).
10) The maximum water amount permitted to add in the site.

D. Means of Maintaining the Concrete SIump on Site.
n order to get the right grade of slump, as ordered, it is not permitted to add
water to the mixture on the site, but the amount approved in writing by the
QA CO of the plant, and written on the certificate. Mixture, thickened to a
degree that the permitted allotted amount of water to be added can not
bring it back to the right thickness, shall be disqualified and shall not be
used. n special cases, according to a qualified lab concession, even if the
concrete has thickened as said above, it will be used. The condition is that it
can be stirred when it is brought to the site, and a set amount of super-
plasticizer admixturecan be added, and that it shall be mixed for at least 10
minutes on the responsibility of the contractor. Concrete that started to
hardened small lumps started to form shall not used at any event.

E. Organizing the site
The site has to be organized to be able to receive constant flow of incoming
trucks loaded with concrete as required. The site shall be organized in a
way allowing a quick movement of the trucks to and from the casting site. n
order to prevent from the concrete to separate to components, there shall
be no need to re-grade the slump for the preplanned means of delivery of
the concrete in the site. (For example troughs with too small slope and no
outlet).

F. Concrete SuppIied By Mixers
The concrete shall not be brought by self propelled mixers to the site if the

consistency is smaller than S
3
according to S 26 part 2, unless prior to
shipment the concrete was mixed in a stirring mixer.

02032 - Concrete Mixed On Site
020320 - GeneraI
The use of concrete mixed on the site shall have prior approval of the CO. The
approval shall be submitted only for small amounts of concrete that can not be
ordered from the plant as ready mixed concrete and on condition that it`s strength
shall not be above B-20 and when concrete pump shall not be used for dispersing
the mixture. The concrete shall be mixed under medium supervision conditions as
prescribed in S 118. t is not permitted to mix concrete under lesser conditions.
When the contractor builds a concrete plant on the site, it shall be under the same
requirements as for the plants outside the site as prescribed in paragraph 02031
above, for approved plants.

020321 - Storage of MateriaIs
The aggregates shall be supplied to the site and stored separately, every size under
a different storage. They shall be put on a gravel surface or another surface to
prevent it from mixing with the soil. The mounds shall be separated by partitions to
prevent them from mixing with other aggregates. The heaping shall be done in way to
prevent segregation.
Crushed and washed sand shall be heaped on a platform allowing the water to run of
out till it has a uniform wetness before using it.

020322 - Determining the Proportions for the Mixture
The proportions of the components shall be determined in advance at lab tests, or
according to experimental mixture prepared on site or according to mixtures used in
other sites where the same type of materials were used. On condition that the CO is
convinced that the concrete is suitable for use at the site. The mixture shall also
comply with the strength requirements in the S 118 for concrete made under
medium control conditions. The minimum amount of cement for components that
shall be plastered, shall be 280 kg per 1 m
3
, 300 kg per 1 m
3
for components without
plaster. Under any conditions the contractor shall be responsible for the quality of the
concrete.

020323 - Dosage and Mixing
Mixing shall be done in a mechanical mixer with capacity for mixing concrete
containing at least one bag of cement or weighing the cement with an accuracy of +
3%. The aggregates shall be weighed or measured by volume with an accuracy of
+5%. Measuring with buckets filled and leveled means complying to those
requirements. The water shall be measured by a water gauge mounted on the mixer,
with the accuracy of + 4% or by the use of containers assured of their volume. A
system where the water is running in at the same as it is running out shall not do.
The duration of mixing shall be according to the S 118. Concrete with a consistency
lower than S
3
shall be mixed only in a stir mixer.

02033 - Wrapped Dry Concrete
For casting smaller than 0.5 m
3
, and if required by the CO, it is permitted to use a dry
ready-made mixture dry aggregates with cement and admixtures manufactured in
the plant under good control supervision. The materials and the ready mixed
concrete shall comply with the specifications. The packaging, testing methods and

delivery conditions shall meet the relevant American standard ASTM-C-387. The
dosage and mixinshall be performed according to paragraph 020323.

0204 - Casting the Concrete
02040 - GeneraI
f required by a special specification or by the CO, the contractor shall submit a
schedule for casting. t shall include the description of the equipment used including
the reserves.
f the CO orders a change of the scheduled casting order, before or during the
construction, the contractor shall follow the instructions.
The contractor shall notify the CO about any casting 24 hours prior to the casting and
shall be given the approval to do so at the set date.

02041 - Preparation for Casting
The casting shall commence after the preparations been completed, like the
formworks, supports etc., including the reinforcements. n case of slopes , the
contractor shall make all preparations needed to get the right angle as shown in the
drawings. Before the casting the surfaces of the casting molds shall be wiped clean
of all residues wood chips, nails, wires etc. All the equipment shall be checked and
made ready for the casting.
The casting shall not be performed if the temperature during the casting and for the
next 24 hours shall be lower than 4
0
C unless special measures have been taken to
protect the concrete from damages caused by the cold or freezing. On days of hot
and dry weather, hard blowing winds etc. the casting needs the approval of the CO,
given in advance. The approval shall be given only after making sure all the
necessary arrangements, needed to his opinion, were made to ensure the proper
casting in those weather conditions and if those conditions were taken into account
when the concrete was prepared, cast and cured.

02042 - Transporting the Concrete to the Site
The transportation of the ready mixed concrete from the plant to the casting site shall
be done in appropriate mixers to ensure that the components shall not segregate or
get lost during the transportation. The transportation equipment shall fit conveying
without interruptions that might change the concrete slump between the lots. The
transportation methods have to be approved in advance.
The transportation mixers and containers shall be wetted before the start of the
casting and during it. The concrete shall be transported and cast no later than 10
minutes after it was taken out of the mixer, unless a delay was permitted specially, as
for instance in a case of using an additive, preventing the concrete from hardening
(SLUMP LOSS).
Transporting the concrete in open vats shall be permitted only after getting a prior
approval from the CO and if that fact was taken into consideration when the mixture
was prepared. The vats shall be smooth all along with a half circle profile and set at
the proper angle to ensure the free flow of the concrete without interference. At the
end of each vat there shall be a 60 cm vertical pipe to ensure it shall not segregate.

02043 - Casting the Concrete
The concrete shall be laid as near as possible to the place of its destination. The
method of spreading shall ensure the penetration of the concrete, as it was mixed,

into all crevices of the molds, covering the reinforcement rods from all directions, and
the segregation of the components shall be eliminated. f the concrete was
segregated during the transport, it shall not be used.
Concrete spreading from a higher level than 2 m shall not be permitted unless it is
performed with the use of the proper piping and funnels. n places where the
concrete might be blocked by rods or molds it shall be necessary to use the proper
tools (pipes and funnels) to ensure it flows in a manner that shall eliminate
segregation.
Concrete casting into foundations, ramps, on floors and into ordinary beams shall be
performed in one continuous operation throughout all their depth. While casting walls,
pillars and high beams the concrete shall be laid in horizontal layers of no more than
60 cm thickness.
Concrete that has hardened over the allowed consistency or got mixed with other
materials shall not be used.

02044 - Spreading the Concrete with Pumps
Before starting the casting procedure, the contractor shall present a plan for
conveying the concrete around the site with the pumps.
n case of using a pump the crew shall be briefed and readied to handle the great
amounts of concrete pushed by the pumps, spread and vibration compact it.
During preading, the rubber hose shall be brought as close as possible to the proper
place of casting to eliminate the segregation of the components. While casting
beams, the concrete shall be laid in layers of no more than 60 cm.

02045 - Joints
Unless otherwise stated, the concrete shall be spread in the mold in one continuous
casting to ensure no joints are formed. The concrete shall be spilled into the mold up
to the height set in the drawings.
f undesigned cold joints were created during the casting, they shall be taken care of
in such a manner to ensure that the construction strength or function as defined in
the drawings shall not be damaged. Handling of the joints created because of
unplanned brake during the casting shall be approved by the CO.
Unless otherwise stated in the contract documents, the joints shall be treated as
follows: the excess cement water shall be taken off before the concrete hardened.
The surface shall be roughened till the gravel shows above the concrete. Before the
casting is continued, the surface of the hardened concrete shall be scraped of all
foreign materials accumulated on it. The surface shall be cleaned and wetted without
excess water. The fresh concrete shall be applied to the joint immediately after it was
made wet.

02046 - PiIes and Tremie Casting.
020460 - GeneraI
Casting of piles shall be performed on the same day of drilling, with the aid of a conic
funnel with a wide rim, connected to a casting hose. The hose shall be pushed into
the hole to the depth of at least 50 cm.
When casting a pile drilled in filled ground, the funnel shall be at least 50 cm longer
than the depth of the fill ground.
f the plans or a special specification requires wrapping of the pile to isolate it from
the ground, it shall be done with fiberglass sheets covered with bitumen, or any other
materials qualified for that purpose by the CO. The wrapping shall not be tied to the
pile or to the reinforcements and there shall be no folds or pleats in it.

020461 - SmaII Diameter PiIes
Reinforcement of the piles shall be done with straight longitudinal rodsencircled with
spiral welded hoops, creating a round net (cage) according to the plans.
The cage shall go all the way to the bottom of the hole except the lower 50 cm, or
according to the plans.
Unless otherwise stated in the plans, the thickness of the wrap from the outer pane to
the outer side of the reinforcement rod shall be at least 5 cm. The thickness shall be
assured by spacers at least in three locations (in the cross section and in two other
locations), when the length of the pile is less than 1 m. When the pile is longer than 1
m, in 1 m spacing along the pile.
The hole shall be cleaned of all residues before the casting shall be started. Casting
shall be done on the same day as the drill through pipe that shall reach at least to 50
cm from the hole bottom, while making sure the reinforcement shall not be moved
from the center axis of the hole, as designed. Unless otherwise stated in one of the
contract documents, the slump of the concrete shall be of S
5
. The vibrating method
shall be approved in advance by the CO.
Unless otherwise stated, the concrete shall be of at least B-30

020462 - Tremie Casting Methods
Casting of piles, walls and foundations, or any other elements in water or on unstable
ground with a Tremie pipe shall be done according to special specification.
n the absence of other requirements, the contractor shall meet at least the following
requirements:
A. The commercial mixture of the materials mixed with water, on site to
create the muddy liquid (like Bentonite) shall be approved by a qualified
lab. The certificate from the lab shall proclaim the required characteristic
weight of the compound at the various stages of the work.
The concrete shall be of the B-30 type and slump of S
7
, with at least 400 kg of
cement per m
3
of ready mix, the calculations shall be done by the lab. The water-
cement ratio shall not exceed the requirements in the S 466 part 1 for casting
concrete in water using the Tremie system. Additives to slow hardening and to lower
the water secretion (as air confinement, super plasticizer, coal fly ash , etc.) shall be
added to the concrete as necessary.
The contractor shall have a spare pump and piping for casting of the muddy solution.
The bottom of the hole shall be cleaned with the proper tools.
Before the start of casting, the contractor shall make sure of the uninterrupted flow of
concrete. He shall also check the verticality of the bore and it shall be rechecked
during casting. A pile deviating more than 1% of its length or with its axis deviating
more than
1
/
10
of it`s diameter shall not be cast.
After casting, all residues of concrete mixed with Betonite shall be taken off of the top
of the stilt.
f casting of the pile cannot be done on the day of its drilling, the drilling shall be
stopped 1 m from the bottom and resumed the next day so the pile can be cast on
that same day.

02047 - Vibrating
The concrete shall be vibrated as soon as it is cast into place, using the tools that
shall ensure even and perfect vibration even in the narrowest corners of the
structure, around the reinforcement rods and in the corners. The concrete mixture

shall fit the vibrating method.
Vibrating shall be done with pin (inner) vibrators of 4-6 cm diameter, with at least
9000 vibrations per second.
Walls that are not thicker than 20 cm can be vibrated with external vibrators placed
on the formworks.
There shall be, at least, one spare vibrator of every kind in working condition on the
site. The vibrators shall be inserted vertically into the concrete in a distance that shall
ensure the vibration of all the concrete.
Concrete with super-plasticizer additive , as for instance Self Leveling concrete or
concrete of S
7
slump or higher, shall be compacted manually . t is not allowed to use
vibrators.
The vibrators shall not be used to disperse the concrete to a greater distance than 2
m. The vibration shall be continued till the last of the air bubbles was released, and
shall be stopped as soon as cement water appears. When vibrating a new layer, the
vibrators shall be inserted into the former layer for a few cm. nserting the vibrators
and the vibration itself shall be performed with care so as to eliminate the movement
of the rods.
Floors, ceilings and roofs that are finished with mechanical tools, like the
'helicopter, can be vibrated with surface vibrators as defined in the clause
'Vibrators in chapter 50 concrete surfaces.

02048 - Straightening and Smoothing Concrete
A. HorizontaI Surfaces
The surface of concrete floors, ceilings and hanging floors, upper surfaces
of beams etc. (even if they shall be covered with tiles or other covering)
shall be straightened with a hard wood ruler or a metal tool after the
concrete was vibrated. Straightening shall go on for as long as the concrete
is still plastic. f a crack appears after straightening, the concrete shall have
to be compacted and the cracks closed with a metal tool.
Determining the thickness of the concrete layer shall be performed with a
solid ruler (taking in account the required slope).
B. Surfaces as Base for SeaIing Surface
Surfaces that shall be covered with sealing sheets shall, in addition to the
above said, be smoothened with a 'helicopter after the cement water
evaporated, till the surface conforms to the requirements. n locations that
cannot be reached with the 'helicopter, the surface shall be smoothened
with a metal tool. n case it is needed, it is allowed to spread a mixture of
cement with aggregate as described in the clause 'nsertion methods in
chapter 50 Concrete surfaces. t is not allowed to spray water or disperse
pure cement to make smoothening easier.
f there is need for a special smoothening along with hardening, using the
'helicopter, it shall be done, unless otherwise instructed, as described in
the chapter 'Even laying in paragraph 50 Concrete surfaces.

02049 - SpeciaI Finish for Roofs
Concrete roofs not intended to be covered with a sealing layer, but shall be left with
exposed concrete surface, require a specific specification of the mixture, the
placement of the concrete and the operations of smoothening and curing.

0205 - Finishing and Curing of Concrete
02050 - GeneraI

The concrete shall be protected from drying from the end of the finish operations and
up to the end of the curing. The curing process shall start as soon as the casting was
finished and shall last for at least 7 days, when the cement used is of the regular
Portland kind according to S 1. When using the Quick Hardening Portland Cement, it
is possible to shorten the time to 5 days, if so approved by the CO.
f coal fly ashes used as a substitute for part of the cement or the sand, curing shall
have to be lengthened for at least 2 days, unless otherwise stated in the contract
documents.
f part of the building was not cured according to the requirements, that part shall be
considered not complying with the requirements and shall be dealt with according to
chapter 020936 below.

02051 - Curing HorizontaI Concrete Surfaces
The period for curing horizontal concrete surfaces contains two stages: primary and
continuous curing.
A. Primary curing
Primary curing is intended to prevent 'plastic cracking and damages to the
surface of wet concrete. t shall be started as soon as the finishing
procedures are completed and the sheen of water is gone from the surface
of floors, beams etc. and shall be ended after a few hours. t shall eliminate
drying of the concrete by wind or sun.
Primary cure shall be done in one of the following methods:
Spreading Polyethylene sheets or sheets of geotechnic fabric sheets
covered with Polyethylene, meeting the requirements of the ASTM-C-
171, on the concrete surface.
Wetting the concrete with water, sprinkled it as fog through fitting
apertures, in a way ensuring the concrete surface shall stay wet
without causing any mechanical damage.
Spreading curing materials complying with the requirements of
ASTM-C-309. The amount of material shall be according to the
standard and to the manufacturer`s instructions but not less than
used on the specimens taken for tests. This method shall not be used
in places where the surface of the concrete shall serve as work
surface or when the surface shall be the base for a finishing layer
(mosaic etc.).

B. Continuous Curing
From the end of the primary curing and till the end of the curing period, the
concrete shall be kept wet, using one of the methods mentioned above.
Alternatively, it is possible to wet the surface of the concrete with constant
sprinkling, using sprinklers or pierced irrigation pipes, cover the concrete
with a layer of wet sand, 5 cm thick, or cover the concrete with water.
Discontinuous wetting shall not be permitted (as wetting with a hose a few
times a day).

02052 - Curing Surfaces Cast in Formworks
n elements cast in formworks (walls etc.), the ties between the formworks shall be
loosened as soon as possible according S 904 and water shall be spread several
times a day on the gap between the formworks and the concrete.
After dismantling the formworks, the concrete surface shall be kept wet by constant
water spraying. Alternatively a special curing compound, complying with the
requirements of ASTM-C-309 shall be spread immediately after dismantling the

formworks, or covering with fabric covered with polyethylene sheets complying with
the demands of ASTM-C-171.
For concrete covered with plaster or the like, spraying curing compound shall not be
used.
f curing for the needed period can not be processed, the formworks shall stay
untouched for longer period than stated in paragraph 0206 below.

02053 - Quick Curing
Under special permission from the CO, it shall be possible to use a quick curing
method (e.g. heating) but only after that method was approved by a certified lab that
the method meets that purpose.
The quick curing method shall make sure the concrete retains its properties when the
formworks are dismantled and while loading as designed and as demanded in S
904.
The method shall make sure that no damage shall be done to the building.
The method shall also ensure that the texture of the concrete and the covering of the
reinforcement shall not be damaged and that it shall not cause cracks due to
temperature difference or by 'thermal shock during dismantling the formworks.
Quick curing shall be performed under close supervision according to S 904.
Even when using the quick curing method, the regular curing methods shall be used
after the formworks were dismantled, and the concrete shall be kept wet for at least 4
days after casting, as mentioned before.

0206 - Formworks
02060 - GeneraI
The formworks shall be designed, carried out and dismantled according to the
requirements of S 904 and according to the requirements in the plans and in the
special specification. The contractor shall be the only one responsible for the strength
of the formworks and their stability during all the phases of work and dismantling, the
time of dismantling and its effect on the cast elements.
The design and mounting of the formworks shall ensure the following:
A. Bearing all the loads that shall appearduring the casting work and till the the
formworks are dismantled and lowering them safely to ground or to other
parts of the building, if they have enough bearing strength to carry the loads
without deformation.
B. Maintaining the measurements as shown in the plans for the cast part of the
building, within the allowed tolerances.
C. The plainness of the concrete, the slopes, when needed, and allowed
deformation of the formworks during casting.
D. The finish of concrete surface, the corners, the bulges and the sockets
according to plans.
E. The formworks shall be sealed to prevent running off of the cement water
while the concrete is being vibrated and designed that no damage be
caused to the concrete, in particular on the corners and the edges, caused
by the changes of volume or when dismantling the formworks.
F. Dismantling the formworks without causing any damage or tremors to the
concrete while it is hardening.
Formworks for exposed concrete see pargraph 0208
Requirements for formworks for special building shall be specified in a specific
specification.

02061 - Designing Formworks
Formworks shall be designed according to the required concrete shapes including
levels, bends etc. Casting of bent or sloped components shall be performed on
formworks from the lower part of the component or from both sides. f sloped
formworks shall be cast from both sides, the upper ones shall be ready to be
mounted but that shall be done according to the stages of the casting.
The formworks design shall include all recesses, openings, holes and grooves etc.
and the pipes and sleeves for the different accessories, according to the plans or as
needed for the building performance, shall be placed in them before casting.
Truncation of the edges shall be done with wood, metal or plastic rulers that shall be
set to fit the plans.
At the bottom of the formworks for casting pillars, high walls etc. there shall be a
small space left to allow cleaning of the base before casting. Cleaning shall include
removal of wood chips and other stuff.

02062 - Covering Formworks made of Wooden Boards or PIywood
The cover of the formworks as described in S 904, is the surface that shall be in
contact with the concrete.
f there shall be no other requirement, the thickness of the boards or the plywood
shall be at least 21 mm. The width of the boards shall not be more than 15 cm. The
boards shall not be planed, but they have to be clean. Plywood shall meet the
requirements in S 37 part 1. f the boards are to be reused, all the concrete residues
shall be cleaned and all nails removed. Cleaning shall be done with the appropriate
emulsion, or with a commercial mixture approved by the CO.
n special cases, as the use of premanufactured formworks (wooden formworks with
special frames), the CO may permit the use of boards and plywood of lesser
thickness. Defects in the cover of the formworks shall be mended by changing the
boards or by placing wooden rulers between the boards, plastic caulking, covering
the places with metal sheets etc. Paper shall not be used for that purpose. The
boards shall be adjacent to each other, and if a space of 3 mm or more was found, it
shall be plugged before casting.

02063 - SteeI Formworks
Steel formworks shall be approved by the CO. The approval shall be given after he
was convinced that the steel of the formworks, the thickness and structure are
suitable for a large number of castings.
Before the formworks are to be reused, they shall be treated as mentioned in
paragraph 02061.

02064 - Binding Formworks
The gap between vertical formworks and the walls, beams etc, shall kept only with
steel accessories. Wood shall not be used for that purpose. Formworks for walls in
contact with water or the ground shall not be tied with steel wires (including
galvanized steel). Tying shall be done with special screws or other steel accessories,
that shall be approved by the CO. n any case, the accessory left in the wall shall not
damage the impermeability of the wall and it shall be possible to cut the accessory to
the depth of at least 25 mm from the surface of the wall. mmediately after the
removal of the formworks, the holes shall be filled in with cement enriched with a
polymer, intended for that purpose, of the composition recommended by the cement
manufacturer.
f the formworks are tied with wires, the wires shall be cut immediately after removal

of the formworks. The ends of the wires shall be cut to the depth of at least 15 mm
and covered as mentioned above. n places where formworks were fixed by screws,
or in any other manner, the holes shall be filled in as mentioned above.

02065 - FiIIings for Ribbed CeiIings
Fillings are components that remain in the cast element. Fillings are made of blocks
and crates to fill in ribbed floors and ceilings, and shall be new and whole. tems that
shall break or crumb during the preparations shall be taken out and replaced with
new ones before casting. The surfaces of the fillings that shall come in contact with
the concrete shall ensure good bonding. Hollow filling shall enable drainage of the
cement and curing waters.

02066 - PIacing Accessories in the Concrete
The size and placement of accessories (for sanitation or electricity accessories,
pipes, sleeves etc.) shall be according to the plans. Accessories not on the plan shall
not be put in to the concrete, unless approved by the CO.
Unless otherwise mentioned , the concrete covering those accessories shall be at
least 5 cm thick and shall ensure continuity of the reinforcement, the loops and the
coverings. Stripes fixed to the formworks in order to create grooves for electrical
appliances or for other purposes, shall be made of a material that shall not blot when
absorbing water (wood shall have to be impermeable), shaped as a trapeze and easy
to extract from the concrete.
Chiseling the concrete shall be done only after it was approved by the CO. f the
needed niches, grooves, holes etc. were not done during the casting, the contractor
shall cut them with the appropriate tools, as approved by the CO.

02067 - DismantIing Formworks
The order of the dismantling and the timing shall meet the requirements in S 904.
According to the S 904, there are two possibilities of setting the timing for the
dismantling of the formworks and supporting beams:
A. Without close supervision.
With close supervision of the casting stages, the curing and the developing strengths
of the concrete.
Special requirements for the order and timing of the dismantling shall be specified in
the special specification.
Formworks shall be dismantled only after the CO approval. The order of the
dismantling the formworks shall be determined in a way to ensure there shall be no
load conditions endangering building, or deformations because of crawling and
shriveling of the concrete.
Formworks shall not be dismantled of any part of the building, till the concrete is
hardened and only if the remaining of the formworks and the support beams, with the
aid of the hardened part of the building can carry the load of the building and all the
loads that can be put on the building. Dismantling shall be performed with gradual
release of the wedges or any other strengthening accessories, so as to avoid causing
any damage to the concrete. The timing of the dismantling shall be set to avoid
causing any damage to the concrete surface, edges, corners etc. and no deflection.
mmediately after dismantling the formworks, all the wires shall be cut off as said in
paragraph 02064.

0207 - Reinforcement SteeI
02070 - GeneraI
The reinforcement steel supplied to the site shall be as required in the plans, new
and meeting the requirements of sraeli Standards, to the specific standard
accordingly. The steel shall be stored on the site in separate hips, smooth rods,
improved bonding rods, nets etc.
The steel rod shall be free of peeling rust.
The requirements for the earthing steel bars etc. shall be as stated in the plans and
the specific specifications.
f there shall be a need for reinforcement steel rods for lightning protection system,
that shall be performed, unless otherwise mentioned , according to the specifications
in the paragraph 'Lightning Protection Systems in chapter 08 Electrical
nstallations.

02071 - Reinforcement Preparation
The steel shall be prepared and bent according to the measures in the plans.
Bending shall be performed without heat, and shall comply with the requirements in
the Concrete Regulation, S 466.
Steel rods and nets for the reinforcement of concrete that were cut and bent in
advance in the factory, shall comply to the requirements in the specification of the
Standard nstitute Specification 176.

02072 - InstaIIation of Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be installed in the formworks according to the plans and the
requirements of the concrete regulation. The reinforcement shall be tied down and
placed on concrete or hard plastic spacers, approved by the CO. The spacers and
tying shall ensure that the reinforcement shall not move or sink before and during the
casting.
Reinforcement rods that were put in across direction to each other shall be tied
together at the crossings points alternately, with a wire. The rods in the beams and
columns shall be tied to all the hoops and the whole complex shall be place in the
formworks and supported with spacers to ensure that it shall not be moved during the
casting.
The spacers to be used shall be of industrial manufactured kind, and shall fit the
covering above the reinforcement. The spacers shall be made of a material
withstanding the alkaline compounds, non-corrosive, and not causing corrosion to the
reinforcement rods. The spacers measures shall not deviate from the nominal
measures by more than +1 mm.

02073 - Lengthening the Rods
The rods shall be connected only as shown in the plans. The lengthening method
shall comply with the requirements in S 466.

02074 - CIearance between the Rods
The clearance between parallel rods shall allow for easy casting and insertion of the
vibrators. The clearance, if not otherwise said in the plans or any other contract
documents, shall be as stated in S 466 at least.

02075 - Cover Thickness
Unless otherwise mentioned , the thickness of the covering layer of concrete above
the reinforcement shall be at least as required in the S 466. The contractor shall
make sure the thickness shall comply with paragraph 02072.

02076 - Reinforcement of Joints
f spikes are to be inserted into the foundations of the columns or the piles, their
diameter, length and quantity shall be as shown in the plans. f the reinforcement of
the columns is inserted into the foundations, at least 2 hoops shall be placed in the
foundation.
At the overlapping area it shall be made sure that the covering layer shall be as
required.
Spikes shall be set, according to the plans or the instructions of the CO, in places
where a bonding of the components of the building have to be bonded after being
cast at different times. The protruding spikes, of the finished components, shall be
cleaned from all the residues of the former casting before continuing with the casting.

0208 - Exposed Concrete
02080 - Definitions and CIassification
For the purpose of this specification, exposed concrete shall be any concrete that
shall not be covered with outer cover, as plaster, mosaic etc., except for paint for
decorative purposes.
All said in this sub-paragraph concerning exposed concrete, shall overrule all other
stated in other paragraphs of the general specification concerning the same.
The following classification shall be made:

According to the service conditions and the exposure to weather:
A. NormaI exposure
Outer or regular atmospheric conditions like outer walls or bases in
contact with nonabrasive soils.
B. Exposure to water under pressure
n contact with normal water under hydrostatic pressure, like swimming
pools, underground shelters etc.
C. Exposure to marine air
At sea sites as defined in S 466, but not under direct spray.
D. Exposure to extremeIy aggressive conditions
Concrete exposed to severe conditions, as for instance direct contact with
sea water, aggressive soil, or other materials etc., shall need a special
specification

According to its appearance
A. Exposed appearance concrete
Surface texture for which there are special styling instructions, as for
instance texture imposing, shaped surface, wooden planks, depressions,
projections etc.
The exposed appearance concrete can be divided into the following groups:
1) Exposed appearance concrete of the regular gray color concrete
color derived from the use of regular Portland Cement 250.

2) Exposed appearance concrete with special color any other color of
concrete derived from the use of regular Portland Cement as for
instance white, even gray or other colors.

B. ReguIar exposed concrete
The surface texture that has no special visual architectural requirements, as
concrete for engineering buildings in contact with ground etc.

02081 - QuaIity Requirements
Unless otherwise stated in the contract documents and subject to the quality
requirements in S 466 for the various exposure conditions, the concrete (visual or
regular) shall meet at least the requirements according to the classification in
paragraph 02080 above. The concrete shall be of pumped quality and slump shall be
at least S
5
but no more than

S
6
.
A. Concrete for reguIar exposure
Type of concrete at least B-30
B. Concrete in contact with water under hydrostatic pressure
Type of concrete at least B-40
The time delay for hardening after casting into the formworks, tested according S 26
part 2, shall be at least 2 hours according to the climatic conditions at the time of
casting.
The maximum amount of water for saturated dry surface aggregates 0.16 m
3
water
per 1 m
3
of fresh concrete.
The depth of penetration of water under pressure when tested according to the S 26
part 5 shall be no more than 50 mm.
C. Concrete exposed to marine air
The requirements shall be as for concrete in contact with regular water
under hydrostatic pressure with the following changes:
The maximum ratio of water cement shall be 0.45. The depth of the
average penetration of water under pressure at the test according to the S
26 part 5 shall be no more than 30 mm.
For cases B and C the contractor has to prove in every case the fitting of the mixture
to the requirements by tests done in advance, or by the proper documentation based
on the experience of the concrete supplier.

02082 - MateriaIs and Mixture Ratios for Exposed Concrete
020821 - MateriaIs and mixture ratios for exposed appearance concrete
All aggregates and the rest of the materials for casting the exposed appearance
concrete components shall be prepared at the plant supplying the concrete or at the
site before the beginning of casting. All the cement shall be of one shipment.
The aggregates shall comply with type A of thS 3. Unless otherwise said, the
maximum nominal size of the grain shall be 22 mm. The fine aggregate shall include
gradual washed sand. The grades of the aggregate in the mixture shall mainly be in
succession.
The concrete shall include a super-plasticizer additive meeting the requirements in
the S 896. The amount shall be determined according to prior tests and shall ensure
getting the concrete with maximum permitted amount of water, as mentioned in
paragraph 02081 and of the required consistency.
t is permitted to add a hardening delaying additive , complying with the requirements
in the S 896, if it is required in relation to the distance of transportation and the
climate conditions at the time of casting, to ensure the delay for hardening till all the

concrete is spread. The additive shall be compatible with the super-plasticizer
additive .
The ratio of the mixture shall ensure getting the type of concrete that can be pumped
without segregation , with as little water secretion as possible and with a delayed
hardening that shall ensure that no separation lines shall show on the cast elements.
The ratio of the mixture that shall finally be determined, subject to the said in sub-
paragraph 0203 shall be strictly kept throughout the whole time of casting.
The contractor shall begin casting only after it was proved that the texture of the
concrete surface, as derived during test casting (as defined in paragraph 02083)
meets all the requirements of the special specification. The exposed concrete that
was cast shall be similar to the approved specimen in every aspect. The specimen
castings are part of the scope of work.
Exposed concrete with different color than derived from the use of Portland Cement
250 shall be prepared ccording to a special specification.
The pigments, if needed shall be of natural or artificial materials ensuring even
coloring of the concrete, that shall be stable and not fade, and shall have to comply
to the B.S. 1014. The pigments shall be dry mixed with the cement, and if necessary
with the fine sand, in a separate mixer before using it for concrete mixing. nstead of
the pigments, it is possible to use colored cement, complying with all the above
mentioned requirements and all the quality requirements of the S 1. f needed, the
cement shall be mixed with the fine sand as said above.

020822 - MateriaIs and Mixing Ratios for ReguIar Concrete
The aggregates shall comply to the above said for exposed concrete.
For concrete in contact with water under pressure, the absorption of ground
aggregates shall not exceed 1.5% in test according to the S 3.
The mixture proportion that shall finally be determined, subject to the said in sub-
paragraph 0203 shall be strictly kept throughout the whole time of casting.

020823 - Water SeaIs
Seals to prevent leakage of water, if required according to the contract documents,
shall be of soft PVC and in accordance with DN 18541 for the relevant type. The
width and shape of the seals shall be according to the plans. Seals in contact with
Bitumen shall be of the type compatible with Bitumen. Chemical seals that bloat
when in contact with water shall comply with the special specification.

02083 - ExperimentaI Casting
The experimental casting for exposed decorative concrete shall be done in
accordance with paragraph 020821 and as specified in the plans and the special
specification. The contractor shall perform experimental casting with the mixture he
proposes and with the formworks, the sealing methods for the formworks, the paste
to be used on the formworks, the shipment methods, spreading, thickening and
curing methods that shall be used when casting the element.
t is important to check that the proposed curing method for the decorative concrete
shall not cause stains or uneven coloring to the element.
Experimental casting of regular exposed concrete or other concrete shall be done
according to the special specification.

02084 - Formworks
020840 - GeneraI

Cladding the formworks is the part of the scaffold that comes in contact with the
surface of concrete, defined as exposed concrete. lading shall meet the requirements
of the S 904 and the following requirements:

020841 - CIadding Formworks for Decorative Exposed Concrete.
The cladding of formworks shall be of wood boards, plywood, special cardboard or
polymers, in accordance with the instructions on the plans and the contract
documents.
The contractor shall submit a detailed plan for the mounting the formworks including
caulking. All the joints between the boards, the joining methods and accessories shall
comply with the plan.
For casting a uniform area the contractor shall use wood boards or plywood of the
same kind. t is not permitted to use used and new boards for the same casting.
As required by a special specification, only new boards shall be used.
n any case it shall not be allowed to use boards with damaged surfaces or edges.
The parts of cladding for the formworks made of wood boards, plywood or other
boards, shall be of the same thickness, width and length. To get the even thickness
of the boards they shall be polished only on one side and the casting shall be done
on the polished, or unpolished, surface, according to the plan or the instructions of
the CO. The edges of the boards shall be straight and smooth and shall join perfectly
to a uniform surface.
The horizontal joints of the continued boards shall be at one level the whole length of
the surface. The vertical joints of the horizontal boards shall be entwined with a
distance of at least 60 cm. The joints shall be planed according to the design of the
finished exposed concrete elements, which means, taking into consideration the
openings, recesses, corners etc.
Mounting of the cladding shall be done in a way to ensure that their removal shall
cause no damage to the concrete.
After mounting the cladding including strengthening is finished on the decorative side
of the exposed concrete, and where approved by the CO, it shall be permitted to start
cladding the other sides of the same element.
All parts of the cladding of formworks shall be attached to each other with no spaces
between them, that might get way to leaks of cement water during casting and
vibration.
The bottom of the formworks has to be sealed as well, using appropriate materials.
Spaces between the boards getting way to leaks of cement water shall be considered
a reason to reject the formworks.
Designing the cladding, cutting the corners, projections, depressions water runoffs
etc., if needed shall be done according to the details in the plans, in a way that shall
ensure, that when the cladding shall be taken off, the designed shape of the concrete
shall not be damaged.
f it was stated in the contract documents, that in order to ensure sealing of the joints
between the boards, the contractor shall use formworks made of 2 layers, he shall
use wooden boards of at least 20 mm thickness for the cladding coming in contact
with the concrete and another outer layer made of plywood. The joints of the boards
shall not be parallel to the ones of the plywood.
f it is not possible to use plywood for the outer layer, the contractor shall use a layer
of wooden boards with recesses as deep as half the board thickness, in a way that
the recesses of one board shall complete the ones on the other board to create a
whole surface.
Cladding the formworks with plastic materials, rubber, cardboard , laminates , or with
textile shall be done according to the requirements of the plan. The contractor shall
use them only after an experimental casting (see paragraph 020821) and approval of
the CO.

020842 - CIadding Formworks for ReguIar Exposed Concrete
The cladding of formworks for the regular exposed concrete shall be similar to the
decorative exposed concrete with the following changes:
A. t is permitted to reuse used boards to create continuous surface.
B. t is permitted to use boards of different lengths and widths.
C. There shall be no need to polish industrial boards.
D. Unless otherwise said it is permitted to use metal formworks as defined in
paragraph 02063 above.
E. There is no special requirement about entwining the joints of the boards.
F. Covering of formworks with plywood covered with endurable polymer cover
or with fabric to improve the quality of the surface shall be done according
to the special specification.

020843 - Casting Opening in the Formworks
Temporary openings shall be mounted on the back of the walls and pillars higher
than 4 m, in order to ease cleaning, vibrating and control before and during casting ,
and to enable adding of concrete as needed. f the formworks are made of boards,
the lower board shall be easy to dismount along the whole wall. f the formworks are
made of plywood, a stripe of 15 cm made of plywood, shall be mounted along the
whole length at the lower end of the wall and shall be easy to dismantle.

020844 - Strengthening of Formworks
UnIess otherwise said, formworks shall be tied with industrial connectors of
galvanized steel, breakable at least 2.5 cm from the surface of the concrete. The
connectors shall have small cones, made of plastic on both sides, the smaller base
pointing to the breaking point and the greater bases towards the concrete surface.
The void that shall appear after removal shall be filled in after the formworks shall be
taken off, with ready made industrial cement manufactured for that purpose. The
formworks shall not be tied with wires, including galvanized wires.
The tying clads of formworks, for casting of concrete in contact with pressurized
water shall be performed with the same connectors with small washers, installed
vertically, to eliminate running out of water along the connectors.

020845 - Daubing the Formworks
Wooden formworks (boards or plywood) shall be daubed with a mixture of clean
mechanic oil with kerosene, ratio of 1:1 approximately. The use of a commercial
compound shall be approved by the CO. The formworks made of other materials
shall be daubed according to the special specification.
The use of emulsion or 'formworks milk (oil mixed with water) shall not be allowed if
it contains material which might damage the concrete surface.

020846 - DismantIing Formworks
The connectors between the claddings of formworks shall be released as soon as
possible ( in accordance with the requirements in the S 904) in order to enable
sprinkling of water between the concrete and the formworks.
The time of dismantling formworks shall be according to the said in paragraph 0206,
but no less than 3 days after the casting was finished. Dismantling shall be done only
if it does not damage the concrete. Other requirements for dismantling the formworks
as said in paragraph 0206. Dismantling shall be performed with care to avoid any

vibrations and to keep all the corners edges intact.
Early dismantling shall be approved in advance by the CO. The CO will approve only
if the best of his opinion the dismantling shall not damage the surface of the
concrete, and that curing shall be continued.

02085 - Bonding the Reinforcement
The reinforcement shall be set carefully to maintain its location and the minimum
concrete cover as required in the documents, in the permitted tolerance stated in S
466. Commercial spacers made of fine and very dense concrete or from GRC, that
can be tied to the reinforcement shall be used. The amount of spacers shall ensure
that the reinforcement shall remain on during casting. The contractor shall submit the
CO all the details about the spacers to be used. t shall not be permitted to use
spacers made on site, nor in an industrial process. The use of industrial plastic
spacer shall be permitted for casting of regular exposed concrete.
The reinforcement shall not be supported by metal pieces in contact with the outer
formworks. No nails or any other bonding accessories to strengthen or stabilize shall
be set into the formworks. The spacers shall be approved by the CO as to the
material amount and shape. For requirements concerning the spacers see
paragraph 02072. The concrete cover for the reinforcement including the cover for
the hoops and the distribution rods, shall be according the plans.
For elements in which pipes and other accessories shall be placed, the accessories
shall be placed before setting the reinforcements. The contractor shall start placing
the reinforcement only after checking placement of accessories.

02086 - Casting of the Concrete and Vibrating
The contractor shall submit a plan of the order of casting, the advance of the work
and the succession of placement , casting breaks etc. The placement shall make
sure the concrete has no rubble lumps and other surface defects as cement water
run-off or any surface hollows.
The casting order shall ensure that no unintended casting cold joints develop.
The concrete shall be cast continuously, in horizontal layers of the thickness
approved by the CO, but in any case no more than 60 cm. The contractor shall take
into account, while planing the casting and its rate that he shall not be allowed to cast
but the horizontal layers as said above. There shall be no break while casting whole
elements between the planned joints.
The time between casting layers shall be shorter than the time needed for hardening
to start, so as to make sure that vibrating of the first layer shall be made possible
again, to eliminate any seen joint.
While pumping with a concrete pump, it shall be made sure that the flexible hose at
the end of the pump shall be able to be lowered into the formworks to the placement
height. n any case, the concrete shall not be allowed to fall outside the pipes from a
height of more than 2 m. f it is impossible to insert the pipe, the contractor shall have
to use a suitable funnel.
While casting pillars, walls and beams without using a pump, casting shall be done
using vertical pipes, or through holes in the formworks in a manner that shall ensure
there shall be no break in the casting and that the concrete shall not contact the
formworks or the reinforcement.
The pipes and funnels shall be assembled before beginning of casting, in spaces of
no more than 4 m. Moving the pipes and the funnels during casting shall not be
allowed. The shape of the funnels and their setting-up shall be approved by the CO.
n addition to vibrating (as said in paragraph 02047), the workers shall hammer on
the scaffold, from the outside, with wood or rubber mallets, or with mechanical
hammering tools. Vibrating shall be performed by workers, qualified for that work. n
order to activate the vibrators and control them there shall be openings made in the
formworks as said in paragraph 020843.
The methods of spreading and vibrating, for decorative concrete, shall make sure, in
addition, that no increments shall develop, between the layers, and that it shall not
develop blow holes, of the amount and size greater than the ones in the approved
specimen.

02087 - Joints
020871 - Construction Joints
Construction joints shall be prepared according to the signed places in the plans.
t is very important to dense the concrete at the joint, and to finish the area properly
according to the specification and at the given height. f there are no other instruction,
the treatment of the joints is as follows :
The residue cement water shall be taken off of the joint before the
concrete had time to harden. The surface has to be ruffed till the small
gravel shall show above the concrete. mmediately after that, the concrete
surface shall be cured.
f the water is not removed or the surface is not ruffed, the layer of
hardened concrete shall be taken off by blowing sand on it, or other
mechanical means. Ensuring both the removal of the hardened concrete
and ruffing the surface, to ensure good bonding of the new concrete with
the old.

Before continuing the casting, all foreign layer or material shall be
removed from the joint. For that purpose, openings should be left in the
formworks as defined in paragraph 020843.
A few hours before the casting continues, the surface of the concrete shall
be wetted. mmediately before the casting, all residual water shall be
drained off the joint surface, so that it shall look dry to damp without water
shown . After that, casting shall be continued immediately.
At the places marked according to the plans, the surface shall be covered
with a plastic cement mixture with a polymer additive to improve bonding ,
applied with a brush, 2-3 mm thick. The composition and application shall
be performed according to the manufacturer`s instructions. mmediately
after that and before the concrete starts to harden, casting shall be
continued so that the new cast concrete hardens with the bonding layer.
f it is required in the contract documents, after wetting and drying as
mentioned above, a bonding layer of 10-20 cm of thickness shall be
spread on the joint, of the same composition as the casting mixture, but
with less coarse aggregate.
Joints that were not planed, or caused by a disturbance in the casting
process, shall be made only after being approved by the CO and in a
manner that shall ensure the stability of the building and its function, or
that the surface of the decorative concrete shall not show any defects.

020872 - Fixing Water SeaIs
The seals shall comply with the requirements in paragraph 020823.
Fixing part of the seal that is placed in the first layer of concrete shall be done
according to the plans or the manufacturer`s instructions, in a manner ensuring that
during the casting it shall remain in its place, regarding its placement in the concrete
and the width of the part immersed in the concrete and the part protruding out of the
concrete, on the first stage.
Filling, vibrating and straitening the concrete around the seal and its projections shall
be assured manually so as not to cause water secretion.
The upper part of the vertical seal protruding from the concrete shall be reinforced to
eliminate its bending and folding while the concrete is cast around it. The way of
reinforcement shall be approved by the CO in advance.
f there is the need to weld together parts of the seal, it shall be done only with the
means recommended by the manufacturer.
Joining parts of the seal at cross junctions shall be executed using ready made parts
of the manufacturer, or according to his instructions.
The outer seals, whether horizontal or vertical, shall be attached to the formworks for
all it`s width , using the means recommended by the manufacturer.
The protruding part of the seal shall be cleaned of all residual oncrete and other
materials, immediately after casting of the first layer of concrete was finished. t shall
be cleaned again before casting is continued.
Chemical seals need a separate approval.

02088 - Curing
020880 - GeneraI
The quality of the surface texture and the color of the exposed concrete depend
mainly on the quality and the period of curing. That is the reason that the paragraph
0205 and the following paragraphs have to be strictly followed.

020881 - Curing Period
The curing period shall be at least 7 days for the parts of building, subject to regular
exposure, as defined in paragraph 02081 and 10 days for the rest of the building.
Shortening that period is subject to the conditions stated in paragraph 02053
When using coal fly ash as a partial substitute for cement or sand, the curing period
shall be longer by at least 2 days, unless otherwise required in the contract
documents.
The curing period is divided into 2 parts:
A. Time till the dismantling of the scaffold.
After the dismantling of the scaffold.

02882 - Curing TiII DismantIing of the Formworks
The curing period till dismantling of the formworks shall last for at least 3 days,
unless otherwise stated in a special specification. After releasing the connectors
between the cladding according to paragraph 020846 and creating a gap between
the cover and the concrete, sprinkling of water on the surface is required at least
twice a day. When the cladding is made out of wood or cardboard they shall be
wetted also.

020883 - Continued Curing tiII RemovaI of the Formworks CIaddings
Curing shall be performed in one of the following methods and shall be commenced
before the surface of the concrete starts to dry:
A. Spraying a clear caulking substance, meeting the requirements of Type 1
or Type 1D of the ASTM-C-309 for exposed concrete and Type 1D for
decorative exposed concrete. The substance shall be tested to prove that
it does not cause any stains or change of color on the decorative surface.
The surface shall be wetted before the spraying. The substance shall be
sprayed as soon as the water sheen was gone, when the surface of the
concrete start to appear dry, and shall be performed with tools that
ensure an even layer and the amount recommended by the
manufacturer.
Attaching sheets of geotechnic fabric coated with white Polyethylene or Polyethylene
sheets complying with the requirements of the ASTM-C-171.
Only sheets of geotechnic fabric coated with white Polyethylene shall be attached to
the decorative exposed concrete and the use of Polyethylene sheets is not permitted.
The attaching shall be executed with appropriate means, ensuring that no air flows
between the sheets and the concrete. f the surface of the concrete looks dry,
additional water shall be splashed on the concrete during the process.
Constant, controlled wetting of the concrete by assembling a set of sprinklers or
pierced irrigation pipes to it to ensure the concrete will not dry out. This method shall
not be used on the decorative exposed concrete, unless tested and proven that it
does not cause any damage to the color of the concrete.

02089 - CIeaning the Exposed Concrete
Cleaning the exposed concrete at the end of work shall be done on the whole
building, and after completion of the works, including all the permitted repair work.

0209 - QuaIity Assurance
02090 - GeneraI
The QA specifications shall apply to manufacturing of the
concrete, the characteristics of wet and hardened concrete and
the characteristics of all the components.

02091 - ControIIing the Concrete Manufacturing
A. The ready mixed concrete shall comply to the S 601, and to the
requirements of the contract document.
The plant supplying the concrete shall comply to the requirements in
paragraph 02031
The concrete mixed at the site shall comply to the requirements in paragraph 02032.

02092 - Strength in Pressure Test
For testing the concrete, from any source, specimens shall be
taken from fresh concrete and shaped into cubes. Those cubes
shall be tested 28 days later, unless otherwise said in the
contract documents. The methods for sampling, their shape, and
testing shall comply with the S 26 parts 1-4. f for some reason
no specimens were taken from fresh concrete, the CO can order
for specimens to be taken from the hardened concrete and
testing them according to the S 26 part 6. Sampling and testing
shall be done within 60 days after casting.
The CO shall determine which of the components shall be
sampled according to the requirements above.
Specimen from concrete processed through a quick curing
process, shall be tested under the same curing methods and
conditions (temp., wetting etc.) instead of the regular curing
method. Specimens shall be taken and tested before dismantling
the formworks and also at the age of 28 days.
f so required by the CO, some lumps shall be taken out from the
concrete (according to S 26 part 6) of the elements processed
through a quick curing process to verify the tests results.
f there is a doubt as to quality of the curing process, the CO
may demand to sample the concrete again.

02093 - CompIying With the Requirements
020931 - Strength requirements
The concrete shall comply to the requirements for average
pressure strength (f
c
) and the pressure strength of any specimen
(f
ci
) as defined in the S 118 for that type of concrete.
f the concrete does not comply with one of the requirements of
the S 118 for strength of a specimen taken from fresh concrete
at the age of 28 days, the CO shall permit sampling cylinders to
be taken from that element, providing that the tests shall be
executed within 60 days. The cylinders shall be taken and tested
according to the S 26 part 6. f the cylinder specimens do not
meet the required results, the whole element in question shall be

considered defective and shall be dealt with in one of the
following ways, according to the CO opinion:
A. The CO shall disqualify the element and the contractor shall demolish
that part and rebuild it.
The CO shall accept the defective concrete under specific conditions, and shall
reduce its cost accordingly.

020932 - Strengthening a Component made of Defective Concrete
f the CO agrees to accept the defective concrete component
but required that it shall be strengthened, the cost be reduced
shall be discussed according to that specific case, and the CO`s
decision shall be final. The strengthening method shall be
subject to the CO`s approval.

020933 - Reduced Payment Caused by Defective Concrete
A. f the tests show average strength (f) lower than the required strength, but
not lower than the typical strength the CO may decide to admit the
defective concrete, but shall reduce the sum paid to the contractor
according to the following calculations:
The sum to be reduced shall be 1% of the price for the element for every
1% of difference between the required strength (f
c
), and the average
strength resulting from the tests (f) in comparison with the typical
required strength (f
ck
).
f the tests result show lower average strength (f) than the typical strength, the
defective concrete shall be demolished. f for some reason the CO did not order
demolition but to accepted it, the sum paid shall be reduced by the following
calculations:
The reduction shall be according to paragraph A. above and an additional reduction
of 2% for every 1% difference between the required typical strength (f
ck
) and the
average test results (f), in comparison with the required typical strength (f
ck
).

020934 - ToIerance
Tolerance is the deviation of the actual measures from the nominal. The required
tolerance grade shall be as mentioned in the plans or in the contract documents. The
permitted deviations shall be in cm or levels 1-7 according to the tables in the S 789
part 1. f there is no mark on the plans, or there is no relevant requirement, the
tolerance level shall not exceed level 7. For the decorative exposed concrete and
concrete combined with precast components the level shall not exceed level 6.
Element that do not comply with the tolerance requirements might be disqualified.

020935 - Testing the Thickness of the Concrete Cover over the Reinforcement
f there is a suspicion that the cover over the steel reinforcement does not comply
with the requirements, including the tolerance, and there is no requirement in S 466,
the CO may demand to test the thickness of the cover layer in a nondestructive
method. The test shall be done by mapping the thickness of the cover layer of that
component, with a special tool and by a qualified lab.
The tested component shall be considered as complying with the requirements, if the
average of the cover layer and the cover of the separate rods complies with the
requirements.

020936 - Testing the Effectiveness of Curing
f there is a suspicion that curing of the element was not executed according to the
requirements, the CO can demand a test, destructive or nondestructive, to be
conducted by a qualified lab.

020937 - SeaIant Requirements
f the requirements include sealing of the building against water under pressure, the
concrete shall comply to the requirements in paragraph 02081.
Building that are under water pressure, like basements shelters and water pools shall
be tested and qualified according to a special specification.

02094 - Concrete Repairs
A. For concrete that was not categorized as exposed, all the defective
surfaces shall be repaired according to the CO demand as for instance
filling in cracks and gravel pockets, removing bulges etc. to the
satisfaction of the CO. Such repairs shall not be made in cases the defect
reaches the reinforcement. n those cases the repair shall be executed
according to a special specification.
The CO can permit repair of the exposed concrete, but that permission shall not
hinder him from ordering the element to be demolished, if to his opinion the repair
was not done to his satisfaction, in appearance or otherwise (decorative exposed
concrete). The contractor shall not start repairs untill the concrete tests were run and
the CO approved them.
f after dismantling the formworks and the concrete tests, defects like aggregate
pockets, holes etc. were revealed, that create a flaw in the exposed concrete but do
not penetrate to the reinforcements, the CO can authorize the following repair
procedure:
The CO will mark the areas to be repaired and those shall be chiseled out vertically
to the surface. The chiseled area and 15 cm around it the concrete shall be wetted.
All the area shall be brushed meticulously with cement mixture, as thick as thick
paint, with additional polymer emulsion to improve bonding. The ratio of the mixture
shall be according to the manufacturer`s instructions. After that the hollow is filled in
and dense with a concrete mixture similar to the original one, but without coarse
aggregate. On decorative surfaces, part of the cement shall be replaced with white
cement to improve color. The shade of the filling shall be tested in advance by
experimental filling let to dry. The filling shall protrude a little from the surface, and
after 1-2 hours it shall be straightened with a wooden straightener. Curing shall be
meticulous on the surface of the concrete and on the repaired surface as well. Repair
of joints, formworks crevices etc. shall be applied thus that the appearance of the
surface shall be exactly as it shows in the plans. The holes left after the formworks
connectors were removed and other such holes shall be filled in with cement mixture
as mentioned above, after the area was wetted.

02095 - DisquaIifying EIements of the BuiIding
A. Building parts rejected according to the tests results, for deviations larger
than permitted (including reinforcement cover thickness) or because of
defective curing, not complying with the water resistance requirements, or
any other defect, that the CO believes are reducing the stability or the
duration of the building, the elements cast from that concrete shall be
demolished and recast by the contractor.
n addition to paragraph A exposed concrete with a defective surface or with

cracks, or that the surfaces deviate from the plans, or that the joints do not fit the
plans , or that the surface does not match the specimens etc. shall be considered
as concrete not complying with the requirements. The contractor shall demolish
those elements and shall recast them.
f the CO agreed with the repairs suggested by the contractor, or instructed the repair
or strengthening of a disqualified element, after detecting one of the above
mentioned defects, the contractor shall bear all the expenses for that work. The
method shall always be subject to the approval of the CO.

1
1

GENERAL SPECIFICATTON FOR
PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS

TabIe of Contents

0300 - GeneraI .................................................................................................................... 2
0301 - MateriaIs .................................................................................................................. 4
0302 - FormWorks ............................................................................................................. 5
0303 - Components Manufacturing .................................................................................. 6
0304 - Types Of Finish ....................................................................................................... 8
0305 - Components ControI (in the pIant) ....................................................................... 9
3053 - Concrete ControI .................................................................................................. 10
0306 - Transportation, Storage and InstaIIation ............................................................ 12
0307 - QuaIity ControI In-Situ ......................................................................................... 16
0308 - Precast Prestressed Concrete HoIIow PIates .................................................... 16

03

2
2
0300 - GeneraI
03001 - Chapter Subject
This outline refers to the material and work quality for concrete, precast reinforced concrete and
precast prestressed concrete, manufactured according to the ministry or the contractor plans and it
applies to components cast in the plant or in the site itself, installed all over the structure parts,
underground, over ground, all around the site, in any height or depth, whatsoever. The instructions
of this specification apply also to the precast components included in Chapter 04 -Construction
Works, which are non-supporting components and do not consist part of the supporting structure -
and they have priority on Chapter 04. Floor tiles, precast window sills, precast stairs and stair-
cases according to srael Standard 1182 - outlined in Chapter 10 - Paving and Protection Works.
This chapter does not include precast concrete buildings outlined in Chapter 21. t also does not
contain light concrete products - these require description in a special specification. The chapter
does not deal with concrete prestressing methods see Chapter 13.

03002 - Standards
Following are the main standards relevant to this chapter.

A. IsraeIi Standards

NUMBER NAME
1 Cement Portland
P Concrete Aggregates from natural sources
6 Floor tiles Matrazo and stone slices
26 Sample preparation and inspection of fresh concrete (9including all its parts)
118 Concrete strength
127 Welders tests
466 The concrete law (including all its parts)
580 Welded Steel Nets For Concrete Reinforcement
Part 1 Nets
Part 2 Smooth rods cold processed
Part 3 Poles with improved attachment ability, cold processed
Part 4 Reinforcement cages
601 Ready mixed concrete
739 Steel poles with improved adhesive capability for concrete reinforcement
893 Smooth rolled steel poles for concrete
896 Chemical admixture for concrete
904 Form works for concrete
931 Fire resistance of construction elements

B. Foreign Standards
851014 - Specification for Pigments for Portland Cement and Portland Cement
Products.

3
3
03003 - standards Specifications
x Following is a list of the Standards nstitute specification mentioned throughout the
specification:
institute Specification 143 - Uni-component Elastomeric Sealant based on Acrylic and
Silicone Resins for Use in Buildings.
nstitute Specification 153 - Uni-component and Bi-component Elastomeric Sealant for Use in
buildings
x nstitute Specification 171 - P.V.C. Rigid Profiles for External Temporary Joints in
precast Structures.

03004 - Other
The contents of the following chapters applies also to this chapter, unless otherwise specified:
Chapter 02 Cast Concrete Work at the Site
x Chapter 04 Construction Work
x Chapter 10 Paving and Protection Work
x Chapter 11 Painting Works
x Chapter 13 Prestressed Concrete Works
x Chapter 19 Craftsman Frames

03005 - Contractor Design
Precast concrete components manufactured according to the contractor design, shall be designed
by qualified engineers in the appropriate professional level according to the rules of the profession,
the laws, the standards and the existing specifications.
The design principles shall take into consideration the various situations to which the precast
components shall be subject in all execution stages, from casting to their installation in the
structure, as required by srael Standard 466.
|The contractor shall be responsible for any damage or loss caused by deficient design. While
developing the plans special attention shall be given to indicating the exact location of the
reinforcement rods. The minimal cover thickness (also on the rims, the binding wires and the
dividing iron) shall be as required by srael Standard 466, considering the climate conditions to
which the component is exposed in the structure.

03006 - Production and InstaIIation Instructions
The contractor shall submit to the CO approval - at the CO request - a document containing plans
of the components, description of the production, control, and handling and installation processes
that he undertakes to carry out.

03007 - Production PIant
The components shall be manufactured in a permanent plant or a temporary plant or in a field plant
provided that the CO has approved the site, the conditions and the equipment in advance. n any
case, appropriate leveled areas shall be prepare for raw materials, production and casting means
storage as well as components storage during curing and after their finish. The plant shall have
appropriate working areas for concrete preparation, form works and reinforcement preparation, as
well as regular water supply for curing, and equipment for component extraction from the form
works, lifting and shifting to storage or repair areas. The equipment lifting power shall suit the
heaviest components manufactured in the site. Materials damaged during production - e.g., iron
soiled during storage - shall be cleaned or replaced at the CO request.

4
4
03008 - ModeI Preparation
The contractor shall prepare at least one model of each type of component. The model shall be in
its full size as planned, in shape and finish color as required. The model shall be inspected
according to the requirements, including matching to finish requirements : whole interior texture,
quantity of blow holes, surface flaws. The model shall be approved by the CO prior to giving the
approval to commence production. Has the model been disqualified, the contractor shall prepare a
new model, and shall so proceed until the CO approval is obtained.
An approved model shall be included in the number of similar ordered units.
An approved model shall be kept in a place agreed upon with the contractor until production is
finished and until a component series of the same kind is submitted.

0301 - MateriaIs
03010 - GeneraI
The materials shall comply with the requirements in Chapter 02 - General specification for
Concrete cast n-Situ - as well as with the additional requirements detailed below.

03011 - Concrete
The precast components shall be cast from concrete of the type defined in the plans or one of the
other contract documents. All the concrete works shall be carried out subject to the General
Specification for Concrete cast n-Situ Works, in addition to the additional requirements specified in
this chapter herein.
The concrete shall be manufactured in good control conditions, as defined in srael Standard 118.
Unless otherwise specified in one of the contract Documents, the concrete types shall be
(excluding concrete types in precast prestressed hollow plates, see Clause 0308 below):
MGP-40 at least - in precast prestressed components.
MGP-30 at least - in supporting linear components made of reinforced concrete and in precast
non- prestressed membrane plates.
n other types of components - MGP-20 at least.
The contractor shall allow the CO to inspect the mixture ratio. Should the CO be of the opinion that
the input, compacting, dismantling and curing means used by the contractor do not allow the
generation of a dense concrete with the quality required by the specification, the contractor shall
change the mixture ratio until it reaches the appropriate mixture.
Components having contact with water or with wet earth, as well as fine components exposed to
weather conditions and not having additional protection, shall be subject to caulking inspections at
a rate to be established in one of the contract documents. n the said exposed components (with
thickness less than 6cm), the maximal allowed absorption shall be 6.5%, when inspected
according to srael Standard 26. Components designed for caulking against water under pressure
shall be inspected for caulking under water pressure according to srael Standard 26 Part 5.
Penetration shall not exceed 5 cm.
Requirements for components manufactured with white cement- see Clause 03042.

03012 - Aggregates
The aggregates for supporting precast components shall comply to Class A quality requirement of
srael Standard 3.
The surfaces of the precast components exposed to corrosion shall be made of aggregates of the
quality specified in the Special Specification.

5
5
03013 - Admixtures
The admixture shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 02.
n reinforced, concrete components use shall not be made of admixtures containing chlorides or
other substances that might accelerate corrosion of the reinforcement.

03014 - Reinforcement SteeI
Reinforcement steel shall comply with the requirements of Chapter 02. Nets shall comply with the
requirements of srael Standard 580. The type of net shall be specified in the Special Specification.
Special attention shall be given to the exact location of the reinforcement rods as shall be stated in
the plans, to be done through precast concrete supporters installed in the form works, and distance
keepers made of concrete or rigid plastic, approved by the CO. The distance keepers shall be
threaded on the reinforcement rods. The shape of aforementioned accessories and the distances
between them shall be thus determined to cover the entire length of the reinforcement rods with
concrete, as required, and to avoid interference with the concrete passage to all the component
parts. The minimal cover thickness (also on the rims, the binding wires and the dividing iron) shall
be as specified in the plans (see Clause 03005 above)

0302 - FormWorks
03021 - Formwork MateriaI and Structure
n addition to the specifications of Chapter 02 concerning formworks for exposed concrete, form
works shall also comply with the following requirements: Form works shall be made of steel plates,
wooden boards, plywood or hard plastic or any other material approved by the CO (provided that
the material is not damaged by the concrete, does not damage its shape nor stains it). Wood and
plywood shall be protected against moisture effects.
The CO shall approve all kinds of formworks only after making sure (based on experimental
casting) that the formwork (material, thickness and structure) can withstand conditions of repeated
castings in the production plant, provided that production of each component is guaranteed in the
frame of the allowed deviations.
The form works shall be thus impermeable to prevent cement water from dripping from it during
compacting and vibration, their structure ensuring that no damage is caused to the component - in
particular in the supports and in the corners during dismantling and extraction.
For exposed components, only special oil used shall be used on the formwork; this oil shall not
damage the concrete surface texture, nor generate blisters (hollows) nor surpluses and shall not
stain.

03022 - Fixtures and Accessories
The formworks shall be equipped with fixtures to hold the different accessories in place as
specified in the plans. The fixtures shall be made of steel or any other stable material and shall be
installed in a manner preventing their shifting during all casting and curing stages. Accessories
shall not be installed in formworks until they are held in place with the aforementioned fixtures.
The location of concealed pipes and their accessories shall be according to the plans. nstallation
details shall be as required by the appropriate specifications concerning pipes.

03023 - HandIing Devices
Handling devices shall be as specified in the plans. Lifting loops attached to the component shall
be made of soft steel (according to srael Standard 893). Cold processed steel shall be used for
this purpose.
The accessories attachment, shape and location shall guarantee extraction, handling and
installation of the components considering the safely factors required at each stage of handling and

6
6
installation. Accessories protruding from the components shall not be damaged nor bent during
handling or installation.
Steel parts (fixtures etc.) remaining exposed for a long time prior or following installation, shall be
coated with a special protective coating adequate for anti-corrosion protection.
The coating shall be specified in the Special Specification.

0303 - Components Manufacturing
03031 - GeneraI
Components manufacturing shall be according to the approved plans. The contractor shall submit
to the CO approval the manufacturing and casting methods, including vibrating methods that he
intends to use. Manufacturing shall not commence prior to the model approval, but in any case the
contractor shall assume full and sole responsibility for the product' quality.
The contractor shall notify in advance his intention to cast a component series of any type, and
shall detail the type and number of components in the series to be manufactured by him.
03031 - Manufacturing and Storage Locations
No casting shall be done on a land not prepared by concrete stabilizing or coating, in a manner
ensuring appropriate drainage during curing and in the rainy season.
n uncovered plants, cast components shall be protected by impermeable sheets directly after
concrete casting, against rain, wind, dust and direct radiation.

03032 - Concrete Casting
Concrete casting and the compacting method shall guarantee achievement of compact concrete
components without gravel cells, fractures nor any flaws. Unless otherwise specified, the concrete
shall be compacted in all types of vibration methods. The compacting method requires the CO
approval to be granted only after the CO has been convinced to his satisfaction that the suggested
method with the concrete mixture used, allows the achievement of a component complying with all
the specification requirements.
Concrete components vibration shall be carried out according to the rules specified in Chapter 02.
External vibrators shall not be directly attached to the formwork wall, and they will be activated in a
manner ensuring unified vibration of the component without generating local deformations.

03033 - Curing
All curing processes shall guarantee flawless components without fractures including "plastic"
fractures), bending, etc., with the required mechanical and impermeability properties. The curing
period shall be at least as required in srael Standard 466 but in all cases, the period required for
the concrete to reach 70% of the strength required (the longest period of the two).
a. Curing in normal temperature
f curing is performed in normal temperature, the components shall be kept wet for the time
required above. Wetting may be performed through sprinklers, spraying, immersion in pools or any
other method preventing drying up. The arrangements shall ensure also wetting on non- working
days, and shall not allow partial drying of the concrete surface.
b. Accelerated Heat Curing
Accelerated heat curing may be used provided that preliminary experiments carried out by a
qualified laboratory have proven that the method does not adversely affect the finished component
quality. n any case, regular water curing shall be made following the heat curing until achieving the
above mentioned requirements.
Any curing method different from the above requires preliminary experiments as a condition for its
approval.

7
7
03034 - Formwork DismantIing
The dates for the formwork dismantling and components extraction shall be as established in the
plans or the production instructions. n the absence of an explicit requirement, action shall be taken
according to Concrete Formwork Standard - srael Standard 904.
Formworks dismantling shall be thus made to avoid any damage, breakage or defect in the
component (including finish), or any strain not taken into account in the design.
Concrete strength for handling - see Clause 03038 below.

03035 - Marking
Each precast component shall be especially marked for purpose of identification. Marking shall be
made on the fresh concrete prior to its hardening, using negative stamp in the formwork, or
stamping with a block. Marking shall be easy to identify and durable, in depth not exceeding 2 mm,
and shall be made on the unseen side of the precast component when installed in place. Following
curing, the marking shall be renewed with a clear water-resistant color. Marking shall include the
component name (or nickname), it number and date of casting.

03036 - Registration
The contractor shall maintain an exact registration of the precast components, stating the
component name and marking, its casting date and data regarding the concrete strength. Upon
the CO requirement, registration shall also include the component transportation dates to the
installation site and addition details

03037 - Defects Repairing
Subject to Sub-Chapter 0305, small repairs may be made in the components, such as accidental
flaws on the granulate surface, or small breakage alongside supports and corners, provided that
according to the CO discretion they do not damage the complete component quality, considering
its destination in the structure. Repairs shall be carried out in special repair stations subject to the
CO approval for the manner of repair and the materials to be used. Each repair shall be carried out
by a team especially trained for this work, avoiding any adverse effect on component quality
installed in the structure.

03038 - Storage and HandIing
The concrete strength for purpose of handling shall be established by standard cubes laid adjacent
to the precast component and cured in identical conditions.
The components shall be stored on wooden supports or other soft supports and not directly on the
ground. The component and the support shall be separated by soft materials to protect the
components and to supply good bed in the resting point. The storage area shall be drained. During
their storage and shipment the components shall be supported according to safety regulations, and
in a manner ensuring that they shall not be damaged or excessively strained during handling. The
components handling shall be performed only after they obtain the strength required in the
manufacturing instructions. Has a component been damaged during handling, as specified in
Clause 03037 above, it shall be transferred to a repair station as detailed above. Walls or partitions
components shall be vertically or almost vertically stored, in a manner ensuring that they shall not
be bent by creeping or shrinking. Supports of components horizontally stacked shall be in one
vertical line

8
8
0304 - Types Of Finish
03040 - GeneraI
Precast concrete components shall be classified according to types of finish, as follows:
a. Components with uncovered surface , such as pile or poles, beams, etc. designed for
plastering or other coating. The concrete surface shall be leveled and smooth (or rough as required
for the plaster to adhere), without gravel cells, holes or defects, pigment differences, etc., as
specified in Sub-Chapter 0305.
b. Covered components, such as poles, beams etc. without plastering or coating, for which
the specification specifies requirements concerning surface finish: exposed concrete, granulate
terrazzo etc. Exposed concrete shall be performed as specified in Chapter 02, Sub-Chapter 0207.
One of the contract documents shall state the land of finish required, and whether special support
finish is required.

03041 - CompIiance With The modeI
The finish level of the produced components shall comply with the model finish level (integrity of
the interior texture, quantity of pores and surface flaws).

03042 - White or CoIored Finish
One of the contract documents shall indicate which components shall be manufactured with white
finish or any other finish color. According to the contract documents the required color shall be
applied all over the section thickness or on the exposed finish layer only.
Unless otherwise specified in one of the contract documents, the concrete shall be MGP-30 at
least and shall contain at least 400kg white or colored cement. The cement shall be of an approved
make and except the color requirements shall comply with all other requirements of srael Standard
for Cement Portland 300. n case of doubt as to its freshness (such as lumps), it shall be
inspected by a qualified laboratory. Pigments shall be of a durable mineral of a make-approved
make by the CO. They shall comply with the requirements of the British Standard 851014. The
cements or pigments quantity shall be determined in preliminary experiments to be carried out by
a qualified laboratory. The cement, pigment and stone dust, should it exist, shall be mixed, dry,
until a uniform color is achieved. This compound shall later be mixed with the rest of the
aggregates and the water. The cured concrete color after drying shall comply with the samples
color approved in advance by the CO (see Clause 03008 above). Unless otherwise indicated in the
plans or the Special Specification, the finish layer shall be 3 cm thick at least. The finish layer shall
be cast on the bed layer while still fresh, but only after sufficient delay to avoid the two concrete
layers from mixing together. While casting the concrete in a formwork, only special formwork oil
shall be used, that does damage the concrete texture nor stains it. The curing method shall
guarantee that no stains or color differences shall appear on the exposed surface. Special
protection shall be given to the colored components surface during storage, transport and
installation, against contact with foreign materials that might cause stains to appear.

03043 - Terrazzo
n the absence of other requirements, the cement shall not contain pozolan or other admixture that
might affect color uniformity. For each production batch manufactured in one place, cement from
one shipment shall be used. The requirement of white cement and pigments shall be specified in
the Special Specification. The cement quantity shall be 450kg for 1 cu.m of concrete at least. The
aggregates shall comply with the requirements of srael Standard 1098 and require the CO prior
approval. The terrazzo layer thickness after polishing shall be 2cm at least.
The terrazzo shall be performed according to Sub-Chapter 1006 - Terrazzo Cast n-Situ - excluding
the second polishing that shall be carried out according to the specification of one of the contract

9
9
documents or according to the CO instructions. The abrasion rate shall not exceed the
requirements of the contract documents.
Unless otherwise specified in one of the contract documents, the average abrasion rate of terrazzo
surfaces in public buildings shall be 1.8mm. The average abrasion rate in private sections (such as
housing units) shall be 2.2mm.
nspection of the abrasion rate shall be performed as detailed in srael Standard 6.
The mixture composition shall be determined in preliminary experiments, including polishing as
shall be required for the given component. The terrazzo in the component shall comply with the
samples prepared in the preliminary experiments and approved by the CO in terms of color,
division, uniformity and size of the polished stone seen on the surface.

3044 - GranuIate coating
Granulate coating shall be carried out according to the special specification

0305 - Component ControI (in the pIant)
03050 - GeneraI
The requirements detailed below regarding components production control refer to production,
whether at the plant or the working site.
Should the CO require it, the contractor shall submit prior to commencing production, the
production and inspection plan, including the items to be inspected and the sampling frequency.
The plan requires the CO approval as a production condition.
The following clauses detail the quality control requirements.

03051 - PIant ControI Organization
The plant shall maintain an orderly quality control by an officer and a qualified and experienced
team whose quality control shall be its specified function .The team prepare detailed production
and control instructions for materials and form works, for each kind of component and for each
production line. t shall maintain detailed plans for each component and an updated follow-up
schedule. These shall be submitted to the CO at any time, at his request.
The control shall apply, among others, also to the following: raw materials, formworks, formwork
oil, concrete during production, reinforcement and insulation and all the installations and fixtures,
screws pipes, cases, etc., size compliance with plans, curing method, form work extraction date
and process, finish, storage, marking and repairs.
The plant shall also compile the self-quality control unit repairs, to be put at the CO disposal at any
rime, for his review.
The quality control system shall be approved and be subject to a Qualified laboratory supervision.

03052 - Production Means ControI
New formworks shall all be inspected, for each of the dimensions (plainness, fixtures location,
etc.). Repaired or modified formwork shall be inspected as a new formwork. Should deviations
exceed the tolerated limits, be discovered in the respective formworks, they shall be inspected and
immediately repaired. Used formworks shall be inspected as described every 30 castings, at the
most. Concrete dosage facilities shall be inspected least after fourteen days and after each repair,
with zeroing (resetting calibration) inspection to be performed once a day. Other means of
production, such as cranes, vibrators and mixers shall be inspected according to the manufacturer
instructions or the quality CO.

10
10
3053 - Concrete ControI
30531 - Cube SampIes
A qualified concrete CO shall currently inspect the concrete quality in the plant laboratory, in which
the required equipment for fresh concrete control shall be maintained according to the appropriate
standards, including press. The strength of a regularly cured component (not accelerated curing)
shall be determined according to srael Standard 118. Cubes taken from components undergoing
accelerated curing shall be cured in a method as much as possible similar to that of the
component, to allow their strength to correctly represent the component strength. n that case, the
cubes curing process shall be subject to the CO approval.

030532 - Inspection Method
The sampling method, its quantity, shape and inspection at the age of 28 days shall be according
to srael Standard 26. n the absence of other instructions at least 3 samples shall be taken from
different batches of each concrete quantity smaller than the three following values:
a. The quantity cast in one day for each kind of component.
B. 40 cubic meter concrete.
C. The quantity contained in 30 components.

30533 - CyIinders Inspection
Upon commencement of production, or modification of the curing method, as well as periodically,
cylinders inspection shall be performed according to srael Standard 26 Part 4, to be drilled in
prepared components in points indicated by the CO in order to compare the actual strength to the
cubes strength. n all cases, the cylinders strength shall determine, with 6 cylinders determining the
average strength.
Should the component thickness be less than 10 cm or holes 10 cm in diameter are not required,
the CO may approve drilling of cylinders of smaller diameter, provided that the diameter shall not
be less than 5 cm, and that it shall not be smaller than 2.5 times the maximal rough aggregate
grain. The strength of the small diameter cylinders shall be determined by the laboratory.

03054 - Reinforcement ControI
Formwork reinforcement and its location, shall be currently inspected by the CO, complying with
the production instructions. The reinforcement location shall be established in the frame of the
allowed tolerances.

03055 - Prepared Component ControI
030550 - GeneraI
A first component of each new formwork, or of a modified and renewed formwork, and each 30th
component (at the most) of the same series shall be accurately inspected in terms of compliance
with the components plans.
Following inspection, the component shall be marked according to the subject matter: approved for
storage or disqualified, or to be repaired. Prior to loading on a vehicle, each component shall be
visually inspected and later approved for shipment.

030551 - Defects
n the absence of other requirements, the components shall not have defects exceeding the
following:
A. The component surface
1) A component with exposed front - the exposed surface shall show no color

11
11
flaws or flaws rendering defective the textures integrity beyond the finish
level approved in the model (see Clause 03008 above).
2) Components to be coated shall not carry more than one bulge per 1 sq.
meter that exceeds 2mm in height. n addition, the components to be
painted shall not show more than one depression per 1 sq. meter. The
bulge shall not exceed a depth of 2mm
3) Stitches (fells) profilation - the wall components of the building casing
(surface) shall not deviate from the planned stitch profile by more than 3mm
inside the concrete depth and by more than 30mm alongside it, provided
that one component shall show no more than 2 such deviations.
C. Breakage in the supports and corners
1) External faces shall show no breakage.
2) External corners may show breakage not exceeding 50x50mm in
dimension, provided that it is located only in one place on the component.
3) nternal supports on which concrete is cast in the site may show breakage
not exceeding 500 mm in total length and 50mm in depth.
D. Cracks
1) Separation cracks passing through from support to support and penetrating
the entire component thickness are not allowed.
2) Cracks not penetrating the component by more than 1/3 of its thickness
and with a surface width that does not exceed 0.2 mm, are allowed.

030552 - MarginaI Deviation
Accepted marginal deviations from the nominal measurements shall not exceed the plans
specifications. n the absence of indication in the plans, the marginal deviations in the components
production shall not exceed the deviations allowed in srael Standard 466.
n any case, the concrete cover thickness above the reinforcement shall be at least as required in
the Concrete Regulations.

03056 - Components DisquaIification
n any case, the manufacturer shall be responsible for the components quality and the CO may
disqualify components even if the plant quality CO has approved them, if they do not satisfy the
quality requirements (including finish), all or in part, as defined in the specification.

03057 - Marking DisquaIified Components
Each component not complying with one of the plans or of the specification requirements, or that
may not be repaired in a method approved by the CO in advance and as mentioned above, shall
be disqualified by the plant quality CO and shall be marked upon the defect discovery by a durable
red X. All disqualified components shall be removed from the production and storage site.

03058 - Components Exit from the PIant
Unless otherwise specified in one of the contract documents, components shall be taken out of the
plant or from the production site only after the termination of the curing process and after proving
that the strength has reached at least 70% of the typical strength.

12
12
0306 - Transportation, Storage and InstaIIation
03060 - GeneraI
All the installed precast components shall be new and shall bear a certificate, confirming that they
have underwent the plant quality control. n no case shall a component be installed in the structure,
and that to the CO opinion might endanger the structure stability and orderly function, or might
damage its external appearance. The CO at the site shall decide about the component fitness for
installation.
The installation instruction and the entire quality control system shall be subject to the manager
approval prior to work commencement, and after approval shall consist an integral part of the
contract.
The installation process approval shall not exempt the contractor of his sole responsibility.

03061 - Components Transportation
The conditions for taking the components outside the plant are specified in Clause 03058 above.
Precast components transportation to the erection and the installation site shall be thus carried out
to avoid them any damage and excessive strain .

03062 - Precast Components Storage in the Site
nterim storage of the components in the establishment site shall as much as possible be avoided,
and they shall be directly installed from the transportation vehicle. Should the above be impossible,
a clean and leveled area shall .be designed to prevent the dirt or damage caused by the
construction works. The storage method in the site shall be detailed in the establishment
specification (Clause 03064 below).
The components shall be stored with an appropriate separation between them, to prevent one
component from being damaged by the other and allow convenient lifting of each component. The
components shall be laid similar to their position in the building. Unless otherwise specified, they
shall be supported by supporters at locations designed for it by the designer. Prestressed hollow
core slabs shall be stored as specified above. Appropriate supporters shall be laid between the
plates to maintain their integrity.

03063 - Repairs of Precast Defective Components in the site
The CO shall approve repairs of components showing accidental defects. Repairs may be carried
out in the construction site, while observing the following conditions:
a. The contractor shall submit a repair specification defining the repair execution manner and
the materials and tools required for it. The specification shall be approved by the CO and shall
consist of an integral part of the erection specification described below.
b. The contractor shall maintain at all times all the materials and tools required for the repairs
according to the specification.
c. The defects repairs shall be carried out by a trained team. These workers shall be familiar
with the specification and skilled with appropriate use of the materials and tools required for the
repair.
d. Each repair shall be inspected and approved by the control officer on behalf of the
contractor.
n spite of the above the contractor shall be solely responsible for the repair of the component .

03064 - Erection PIans and specification
All plans required for the erection process shall be maintained in the site, including the following
plans:

13
13
a. Detailed erection plan including the location of each component in building.
b. A detailed erection plan of all the constructive joints between the various building
components.
c. Details of the temporary joints.
Should the contractor be required to prepare an erection specification, it shall detail the following
subjects according to the subject matter. This specification shall be held at the site throughout the
installation time.
a. The various materials description used in the installation process, their quality and method
of inspection.
b. Description of the equipment used for the erection.
c. nspection of the components integrity, brought to the construction site.
d. The mode of components repairs damaged during erection and approved for repairs.
e. Components storage at the construction site.
f. nstallation infrastructure preparation and the tolerated deviations.
g. Components installation mode in the building (lifting, establishment, support and leveling).
h. Constructive joints.
u. Temporary joints installation mode on external walls.
j. Structure impermeability inspection to prevent moisture penetration.
k. Quality control procedures during installation.
l. Equipment required for work and control .The instructions shall also indicate the control
method for each erection stage, the person in charge of each stage, the report method, etc.

03065 - Infrastructure Inspection Marking and ApprovaI
Prior to installation commencement, measurements, leveling and location of all the cast parts and
the various fixtures entered for casting shall be checked. The required accuracy shall be
ascertained.
n case of deviations exceeding the limits, the contractor shall carry out all the repairs required by
the CO, including dismantling of concrete parts and recasting, new accessories, etc., replacing
those that have been installed in the concrete and are not in place.
The component installation infrastructure, whether cast n-Situ or produced of precast components
shall be leveled and clean. The height difference between any two points planned in one level shall
not exceed the specifications of the approved establishment instructions.
The location of the various components attachment devices and their shape shall be according to
the plan, their location tolerance specified in the installation specification. Any deviation in the joint
location or shape relative to the plan, beyond the tolerated deviations shall necessitate designing
of a new joint shape fitting reality.
Prior to the erection commencement, the infrastructure (foundation beams, floor etc.) shall be
clearly marked with the components interior lines, their rest points and the component bottom
distance from the infrastructure at each rest point. The infrastructure compliance with the
requirements shall be confirmed prior to the installation by the control officer in the site.

3066 - Erection MateriaIs And Equipment
All the materials used in the erection process, in addition to the precast components, shall be
according to the standards or shall be produced and inspected according to a specification
approved by the CO based on a qualified laboratory opinion. All the concrete cast n-Situ shall be
of the kind specified in one of the contract documents and shall be performed according to the
requirements of Chapter 02,in medium control conditions at least.
Unless otherwise specified, the concrete to fill temporary joints shall at least comply with MGP-30,
according to srael Standard 118 and shall be inspected according to srael Standard 26.

14
14
The site shall at all times maintain the special equipment required for the marking and erection to
be described in the establishment specification, and shall include among others: aileron, 50m
measurement tape, measurement rod and dies to measure the width and shape of the external
wall temporary joints.

30067 - Components InstaIIation
030670 - GeneraI
The components shall be installed in place according to the plans and with the appropriate
mechanical means. The contractor shall be responsible for the components appropriate
installation, their adequate support during installation and their location in the structure. All
precautions shall be taken during omponent installation and handling to avoid damaging the
component and the structure.
Special attention shall be given to the joints and temporary joints external appearance. Cement
mortar with strength specified in one of the contract documents shall be compacted beneath
components installed on bases and with wedges, to act as a bed. The bed thickness shall be 2cm
at least. The cement shall be well compacted from one side of the space after blocking the other
side with a compriband or the appropriate formwork. Upon concrete sufficient hardening, the
wedges shall be extracted or left, according to the erection specification. Spaces created after
wedges extraction, shall be filled up with cement-mortar.
Each part not entirely stable shall be temporarily supported and reinforced, until its stability is
ensured, by attaching it to adjacent parts.

030671 - Attachment WeIding
Joints requiring reinforcement welding of stays or other steel parts shall be performed according to
plans. This shall be carried out by skilled welders holding qualification certificate according to srael
Standard 127, Part 2, skilled in field welding. The welding process shall be approved by the quality
CO. Welding shall be performed by an electric arc, using electrodes satisfying the design
requirements. Welding shall be performed as required in Chapter 19. Stays or other exposed steel
parts shall be coated with appropriate protective coating to protect them from corrosion. Care shall
be taken, that welding heat shall not damage the concrete component.

030672 - Screws Attachments
Screw joints shall include nuts and washers. The Screw holes shall be clean and the steel around
them without deformation or other flaws. Screws remaining exposed shall be galvanized or coated
with cadmium as specified in the plans or the other contract documents The screw and screwing
length shall be sufficient to allow the nuts to cover the entire screw, the nut being fixed in the
concrete component. Care shall be taken to maintain the hole and screwing slot clean until the
screw in threaded.

030673 - Painting
Exposed steel parts shall be painted as specified in Chapter 11 - General Specification for Painting
Works. The welding points shall not be painted. Should it become apparent prior to welding that
the welding points are painted - paint shall be removed prior to welding.
Contact areas of two accessories to be joined shall be painted as detailed above and care shall be
taken as to the paint integrity in the attachment point.

030674 - Attachment in the Concrete
Attachment through concrete castings in the site as well as filling up of hollows between the
components and between the components and the structure shall comply with the requirements of
the General Specification for Cast Concrete n-Situ, Chapter 02. n the absence of other

15
15
instructions the attachment concrete in supporting components shall be of the component concrete
type or better, in any case no less than MGP-20.
The contact areas between the cast joints in the site and the precast component shall be clean.
Prior to installation of a precast component on another part of the structure, the supporting surface
shall be cleaned, wetted and covered with cement-mortar 1:3, close to the precast component
installation, to allow full surface contact between the precast component and the part underneath it.
The maximal grain size shall not exceed 1/5 of the distance between the joined components. This
shall be performed by shaping the cement layer surface as a dome (slightly higher in the center
than in the rims) to ensure that after the component installation, contact with the concrete shall be
perfect. The concrete shall be cured by prolonged curing as detailed in Chapter 02.
With the precast components installed on fixtures or iron, wood or any other foundations material
approved by the CO in order to accurately determines the component level, the temporary joint
between the precast component and the structure underneath it shall be filled up with cement-
mortar 1:3 , using a dry support compacted with flat-headed chisels into the temporary joint. The
fixtures shall be extracted after filling has hardened. The filling material strength shall be
determined in preliminary experiments according to the plans or one of the contract documents
requirements. Use of swelling admixture or anti-shrinking admixture, as well as gluing concrete to
concrete with epoxy glue shall be described in a special specification.

03068 - Constructive Joints and interfaces
The constructive joints between the installed components shall be carried out according to the
plans. After the joints are completed as required in the plans, the space between the components
shall be filled up with cement-mortar as described in Clause 03067 above. Spaces between
vertical components shall be filled with concrete cast from above, if possible, otherwise it shall be
filled with cement-mortar.
All the vertical and horizontal joints shall be cured after being filled up with cement-mortar or
concrete, in a process to be described in the erection specification.

030682 - Joints Inspection
Prior to filling the joints with concrete or cement-mortar and the removal of the temporary supports,
the control officer shall check the joints orderliness and their compliance with the plan and
specification. Any deviation from the planned joint shape and any deviation from the tolerated
deviation shall necessitate specific solution subject to the CO approval.

030683 - ExternaI Temporary Joints CauIking
External temporary joints shall be performed according plans, specifying dimensions, shape,
cracks, bulges, channels, etc. The plans shall indicate the tolerated deviations. Cracks and
channels shall be filled up with sealant or formed profile.
A formed profile shall comply with the requirements of the Standard nstitute specification No. 171
Hard PVC Profiles for External Temporary Joints in Precast Structures.
The materials to fill up temporary joints shall comply with the following requirements of the srael
Standard nstitute specifications:
143 - Uni-component Elastomeric Sealant Based on Acrylic and Silicone Resins for Use in
Buildings.
153 - Uni-component and Bi-component Elastomeric Sealant for Use in Buildings.
The sealant shall be supplied in their original packing together with application instructions.
Performance shall be precisely according to these instructions. n addition, care shall be taken to
achieve nice and clean temporary joint finish in terms of appearance. All the external temporary
joints between the wall plates, between the ceilings plates as well as between the ceilings and the
walls shall be impermeable to wind and water and shall prevent cold formations. Prior to caulking
the temporary joints, they shall be inspected for integrity as well as forbidden defects and their
compliance with the tolerated deviation. This shall be performed with a special die.

16
16

0307 - QuaIity ControI In-Situ
03071 - GeneraI
All the precast components shall be new and flawless, brought to site on time, to allow their
inspection by the CO. Should defective components be brought to site (caused by production,
handling or transportation) they shall be removed prior to installation commencement. Addition to
Clause 03037 shall be performed only at the CO Sanction.

03072 - ImpermeabiIity controI
Precast concrete products integrated in the structure in a place exposed to rain water or rest room
water, inspection of their joints and temporary joints impermeability shall be performed as detailed
in Chapter 21 General Specification for Precast Concrete Buildings.

03073 - Finish ControI
The CO shall inspect the product finish interior surfaces appearance, supports and corners prior
and following installation. Each defect approved for repairs shall be repaired in the site by a team
described in Clause 03037 above.
Should the opinion of the CO be that following the repairs the component is unsatisfactory, he may
require it to be taken out of the site or the structure and be replaced by another, complying with the
requirements. The CO decision is final and determining.
03074 - Works at the Site
The complementary works carried out at the site in the installation process of the precast products,
such as welding, screws, concrete joints, painting etc. shall be inspected similarly to the structure
erection general inspection.

0308 - Precast Prestressed HoIIow PIates
03080 - GeneraI
Precast hollow plates made of prestressed concrete, hereinafter "hollow plates", shall comply with
the requirements of srael Standard 466 Part 5, as to design and production.
The hollow plates shall be of current production as indicated in the manufacturer catalogue, and as
required by the standard (including the requirements for upper surface finish).
Hollow plates defined by the standard, as special components shall be manufactured subject to the
requirements of the plans and the Special Specification.
03081 - Hollow Plates transport
Transportation of the hollow plates to the site and their handling in the site shall be performed so
as to avoid them damage or strain . The plates shall not be dragged to their final location.

03082 - Storage of HoIIow PIates
Hollow plates shall be stored as specified above in Clause 03062.

03083 - Preparations for InstaIIation
Preparations for installation shall be as detailed above in Sub-Chapter 0306. The marking on the
hollow plates shall be checked to make sure that it complies with the plans or the Special
Specification. Each plate shall be marked with a catalogue number and the marking M (component
complying with all production requirements and not showing any defects).

17
17
f the contractor proposes to use plates carrying the marking "T/M", they shall be approved by the
manager. n any case, plates marked "T/M" shall comply with all the requirements in srael
Standard 466 Part 5.

03084 - PIates InstaIIation
nstallation shall be carried out according to the plans. The number of narrow components (size
400-600mm) shall be minimal, not exceeding 10% of a ceiling total width. No narrow components
shall be laid one adjacent to the other.
The plates shall not be sawn. Holes in the plates shall be made according to the details in the
plates plans and the installation plans.
The plates rest depth shall be according to the plans. Unless otherwise specified the rest depth
shall be according to srael Standard 466 Part 4 and 5. The Plates shall be laid on elastic bands.

03085 - CompIementing Concrete Layer
A complementing concrete layer cast n-Situ shall be performed according to srael Standard 466
Part 5, as detailed above in Sub-Chapter 0306.
The concrete shall be MGP-30 at least.
The hollows edges in the plates shall be filled up with a plastic accessory or another material
approved by the CO.
1

1995

GENERAL SPECIFICATION
FOR MASONRY WORKS

Table of Contents

04001 - Scope ................................................................................................ 2
0402 - Cement for Construction................................................................... 5
0403 - Construction Work ............................................................................ 6
0404 - Attachments (Joining) ....................................................................... 9
0405 - InsuIation WaIIs and Protection WaIIs ........................................... 10
0406 - Precast Components (non-supportive).......................................... 11
0407 - CIeaning and Protection ................................................................. 11

04
2
04001 - Scope
This chapter deals with the quality of the materials and the construction with bricks
and blocks according to the plans and the instructions, and it applies to the execution
of sub-terrain works, over-terrain works, all around the site area and in any height or
depth. n addition the chapter also includes integration of precast non-supportive
components in the construction.
Stone construction works are described in Chapter 14 - Stone Works: construction
with precast boards or plaster boards is described in paragraph 22 - ndustrial
Elements in a Building.

04002 - Standards and Specifications of the Standard Institute
Below is a list of the sraeli standards and the main nstitute specifications relating to
this chapter.
A. IsraeIi Standard
NUMBER TTLE

1 Portland Cement
3 Mineral Aggregates of Natural Resources
5 Part 1 Blocks: Wall Blocks Made of Concrete
Part 2 Blocks: Channel Blocks Made of Concrete
76 Quicklime for Construction Works
268 Blocks made of Cellular Concrete cured in Autoclave
412 Loads in structures: typical Loads
413 Typical Loads in Buildings: Earthquakes
414 Typical Loads in Buildings: Wind Loads
466 The Concrete Legislation
601 Delivered Concrete
783 Hydrate Lime
896 Chemical Admixtures to Concrete
1365 Wall Blocks made of Concrete with improved Thermal nsulation
1540 Plaster Blocks

B . The Specifications of the Standard Institute
Number TitIe

57 Precast components made of Reinforced Cellular Concrete
323 Light Mineral Aggregates for Construction
376 Lime-Sand Products for Construction

C Foreign Standard
BS 1014- Specification for Pigments for Portland Cement and Portland
Cement Products

3
04003 - Definitions
A. Each construction work with thickness not exceeding 10cm (without
coating) shall be termed partition;
B. Each construction work with thickness exceeding 10 cm shall be termed
walls construction;
C. Separate construction poles are poles made of bricks or blocks, free of
all sides.

The contents of all the chapters specified below, of the General Specification for
Construction Works, applies also to this chapter:
Chapter 02 - Concrete Works Cast in-Situ
Chapter 03 - Precast Concrete Works
Chapter 05 - Caulking Works
Chapter 14 - Stone Works

0401 - MATERIALS

04011 - BIocks and Bricks

040110 - GeneraI
All kinds of blocks and bricks shall be new, whole and leveled, and shall comply in all
details with the sraeli Standards or the Specifications of the Standard nstitute.
Decorative blocks, or blocks made in special shapes such as channel, shall comply
also with the sample inspected by the CO and approved by him. The sample shall be
kept in the CO office until the construction work is completed and accepted.

040111 - BIocks and Bricks for CIean Construction Work
Blocks and bricks for construction shall be uniform in dimensions and color. The
planes and the edges shall be whole. Those fractured, or damaged on their surface
or in the corners and planes shall be disqualified from serving for this purpose.
The contractor shall sort out blocks and bricks for clean construction out of the entire
shipment, if no orders have been given for separate shipments.
The sorting accuracy level shall be as specified in the special specification.

040112 - Concrete BIocks
Walls shall be made of hollow blocks or full blocks made of concrete, complying with
the demands of srael Standard 5. The blocks strength, their dimensions, the type of
aggregate (light or regular), the number of holes shall be as specified in the contract
documents.
Channel blocks shall comply with srael Standard 5 Part 2.
4
040113 - WaII BIocks with ThermaI InsuIation
Wall blocks made of concrete, with improved thermal insulation shall comply with the
demands of srael standard 1365. The type of blocks, according to the structure
(hollow, full, made of concrete with light aggregate or made of concrete with regular
aggregate, etc.), and their dimensions shall be as specified in the contract
documents.

040114 - BIocks made of CeIIuIar Concrete
Blocks made of cellular concrete cureded in Autoclave, to be used for the
construction of walls, shall comply with the requirements of srael Standard 268. The
type of blocks (termed according to its specific weight) and their dimensions shall be
as specified in the contract documents.

040115 - PIaster Bricks
Plaster blocks for the construction of interior walls shall comply with the requirements
of srael Standard 1504 Plaster Blocks.
Blocks for construction in "wet areas shall be moisture resistant blocks, as specified
in srael Standard 1504.

040116 - Lime-Sand BIocks
Bricks and blocks made of lime-sand to be used for wall construction shall comply
with the requirements of the Standard nstitute Specification 376 - Lime-Sand
Products for Construction. The bricks shape shall be as required in the special
specification.

04012 - Cement
The cement shall be Portland Cement, of the Regular Portland Cement 250 type at
least, colpying with the requirements of srael Standard 1. ts quality, supply and
storage shall be as specified in Article "Cement" in chapter 02 - General
Specification for Concrete works cast in-Situ.

04013 - SIaked Lime
The slaked lime shall be hydrate lime, in a shape of powder, and shall comply with
the requirements of srael standard 783.

04014 - Water
The mixture water shall be water of drinking quality (potable), coming from a regular
water supply system

04015 - Sand
Fine aggregates shall be of natural sources, or ground sand prepared for the
purpose of cement preparation.
The sand shall be fine aggregate complying in all properties with the requirements of
srael Standard 3 concerning sand used for concrete preparation. ts quality, supply
and storage shall be as specified in the Article "Aggregates" in Chapter 02 - General
Specification for Concrete Works cast in-Situ.
5

04016 - Admixtures
The use of admixtures for cement mixtures is subject to the requirements specified
in the Article "Admixtures" in Chapter 02 - Concrete Works Cast in-Situ, with the
admixture in any case complying with the type of cement, its function and the
conditions of its preparation and application.
04017 - GIues
The use of all kinds of glues is subject to a requirement in the special specification or
to the CO prior approval.
The application of glue shall be according to the manufacturer instructions.

04018 - Pigments
Should colored cement be required to paint blue the temporary joints or for any other
purpose, it shall be prepared by using colored cement, or using pigments based on
mineral oxides of metals.
Colored cement shall comply in all properties with the standard requirement
concerning regular Portland Cement. Pigment powder shall be mineral oxide of
metals, and by no means shall it be of organic source, and it shall comply the
requirements of the British Standard BS 1014.
The preparation of a colored mortar by using pigment powders shall be carried out
as follows:
The powder shall be thoroughly mixed with the dry cement, and the prepared mortar
shall be several times filtered, or alternatively the pigment powder shall be mixed
with water and added to the cement.

0402 - Cement for Construction

04021 - Types of Cement

040210 - GeneraI
Cement for construction shall be composed according to the mixtures detailed below
and shall be used for all types of construction as specified in Sub-Chapter 0403.
Use of admixtures or ready-made industrial concrete shall be according to a
requirement in the special specification, or according to the CO prior approval.

040211 - Lime-Mortar Cement
Lime-mortar cement is a mixture of sand, cement, slaked lime and water.
Each cubic meter of lime-mortar cement shall contain at least 200 kgs of cement, at
least 100 kgs of slaked lime in the shape of powder and the rest of it shall be sand
and water, until the required thickness and processing level are achieved.

040212 - Cement-Mortar
Cement-mortar shall consist of cement, sand and water. Each cubic meter of mortar shall
contain at least 550 kgs of cement.

6
040213 - Lime-Mortar
Lime mortar is designed for spreading or for temporary joints under ceilings only. Each cubic
meter of lime-mortar shall contain at least 450kgs of slaked lime in the shape of powder.
The sand to be used shall be fine sand appropriate for spreading.

040214 - Cement for BIocks made of CeIIuIar Concrete
n the absence of any other instruction, glue shall be used for the constructions of
blocks made of cellular concrete.
Should use of cement be required - it shall be prepared according to the
requirements in the special specification.

040215 - Cement for PIaster BIocks
Cement for the construction of plaster blocks shall comply with the requirements of
the plaster blocks manufacturer.

04022 - Preparation of the Cement In-Situ
Mixing shall be carried out with a mechanical mixer.
The lime-mortar cement shall be prepared in quantities to be used while appropriate
for processing without water added to it.
No cement-mortar shall be used if 90 minutes or more have elapsed since it was
prepared, nor it shall it be used after it started to harden up. t shall not be softened
by adding water to it.

04023 - DeIivered Mortar
Use of delivered mortar (prepared in advance) shall be allowed, provided that it shall
be prepared in a plant complying with the requirements of srael Standard 601
concerning the equipment and control terms.
Method of supplying prepared mortar proposed by the contractor shall be subject to
prior written approval of the CO.
Time limits for the use of prepared mortar without cement - a week.
Delivered mortar to which cement is added - the time limits for use is 90 minutes
from the time at which cement was added to the prepared mortar mixture.

0403 - Construction Work

04030 - GeneraI
Generally speaking all the bricks and blocks shall be thoroughly wet before application.
The construction cement shall be as specified in Sub-Chapter 0402 above. Should prepared
industrial mortar be used, action shall be taken according to the manufacturer instructions,
f scaffoldings are attached to the wall, the depressions shall be filled up by using construction
units led to the wall layers.

04031 - Method of Construction
The construction shall progress upwards, in a successive manner, to prevent any
part of the wall overtaking adjacent part with more than 1.0 meter, unless special
conditions required different progress, in which case the exceptional progress shall
be subject to the CO approval. Should construction works cease, the layers shall be
7
completed with inclined leveling of approx. 45 degrees . After the cessation, the
upper layer shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted prior to resuming the
construction work. All the layers shall be horizontal.
The vertical temporary joints shall be in the middle of the distance between the
temporary joints in near-by rows and shall alternatively form one straight line. The
wall may not be leveled after the application is terminated.
Blocks parts prepared in advance shall be used as retainers.
Prior to construction commencement the contractor shall calculate the belt's heights
so that the space remaining for construction shall be divided to whole layers. No
reduction of the belt's height shall be allowed, compared to the plans.
The bond shall be as planned and in the absence of plan, brick walls shall be built
according to an "English bond ('Heads" layer on "lengths layer). The first layer shall
be "Heads" layer and shall be applied in mortar cement bed.

04032 - Construction on Foundation
Prior to commencing construction on a foundation, its surface shall be leveled with a
layer of cement-mortar according to Article 040212, 10mm thick at least, and it shall
be allowed to harden up. f construction work does not immediately proceed, the
concrete should be cured.
n case of contact between the ground and the foundation, a partition layer shall be
prepared. The partition layer shall be carried out on the above mentioned mortar
layer as described in the Article " Moisture Partitioning Layer in the Foundation",
Chapter 05 - Caulking Works.

04033 - Joints
The joints in the walls and in partitions made of blocks shall be full. The joints shall
be uniform in term of thickness, in the boundaries of the tolerated deviations and
their average thickness shall be 10mm, subject to an additional condition, that the
total size of four construction layers (including three joints) shall not exceed by more
then 30 cm the total height of the bricks or the blocks themselves.
During construction the joints shall be processed to one leveled surface with the
surface of the wall.
n case of wall surfaces that shall be whitewashed or painted without being
plastered, the joints shall be smoothly and cleanly processed, in a way allowing them
a good integration with the wall surface.
Joints in walls constructed of cellular concrete blocks shall be performed according
to the block manufacturer instructions.
Joints in clean construction work - see Article 040361 below.

04034 - PiIIars and BeIts in BIocks
Hollow Block pillars in which concrete has been cast, or a block channel in which a
concrete belt will be cast, shall be built accurately and in a way allowing installation
of arming without disturbance. The joints in built pillars shall be full with thickness as
detailed in article 04033.
Unless otherwise stated, concrete cast in the pillar, belt or blocks channel shall be B-
15.
n blocks pillars and blocks channels, installed reinforcement arming shall join the
reinforcement arming in the constructive framework of the building.
Horizontal or vertical armed concrete belts shall be performed according the plans
and as required in chapter 02 works with concrete cast n-Situ.
8

04035 - DoubIe WaII WaIIs.
DoubIe-waII waIIs shaII be performed according to detaiIs specified in the
pIans and in the speciaI specification.
In doubIe-waII waIIs, openings shaII be Ieft during the construction in the first
Iayer above the fIoor and these shaII be cIosed after construction work is
terminated and the space between the waIIs is thoroughIy cIeaned.
ShouId the anchors between the waIIs be made of bricks or bIocks - their faces
directed at the space shaII be appIied with a seaIant to prevent moisture from
passing between the waIIs.
ShouId metaI anchors be required between the waIIs, they shaII be made of
stainIess steeI, and shaII be anchored 3 mm deep from the externaI surface of
the doubIe-waII. No anchors sIoping inwards shaII be instaIIed.
In a doubIe-waII used to move a window or a door (a dragging pocket), the
externaI waII shaII first be buiIt, and its surface directed at the space shaII be
pIastered with one Iayer of cement-mortar.
The internaI waII shaII be constructed after the above mentioned pIastering
and after the rectangIes are instaIIed and the space between the waIIs is
thoroughIy cIeaned of aII residue of concrete, refuse etc.
In aII cases, the air space shaII be uninterrupted aII around the waII area. A
draining canaI shaII be performed between the waIIs, according to detaiIs
specified in the pIans.

04036 - CIean Construction

040360 - GeneraI
For the purpose of achieving a clean construction work the blocks and the bricks
shall be thoroughly sorted upon their supply to the site, and the flawless bricks with
whole, straight corners shall be selected. Prior using them for construction on the
wall, they shall again be sorted, classified according to their heights, to avoid
difference between the blocks (or the bricks) designed for the same layer.
Each block or brick that according to the CO opinion is defective, shall be
disqualified. For a wall whose construction is clean on both sides, bricks and tiles
identical in thickness shall be selected.
The wall appearance shall be according to the details specified in the plans.
Should the contractor not take care to carry out the selection as outlined above, he
shall demolish the construction according to the CO demand and shall reconstruct it
as required.

040361 - Joints in CIean Construction
The joints in clean construction shall be according to the plan, uniform in terms of
thickness, and if not otherwise specified, shall be sunk and their processing shall be
carried out with a square or a round iron pole. The processing shall be carried out
after the cement has partially joined. All the joints shall be processed using the same
pole, so that their size and shape shall be uniform.

040362 - BIuing the Joints
Bluing of the joints shall be carried out with a lime-cement mortar, whose
composition is outlined in Article 040211 above. The cement shall be gray, white or
colored, as required in the plan or in any other of the contract's documents. n the
9
absence of any other instruction, bluing shall be carried out with mortar containing
white cement only.
Bluing shall be carried out after the construction work is concluded, and prior to
dismantling the scaffoldings and it shall be carried out starting from the upper layer
and going downwards. Together with the progress of the coloring blue, the wall shall
be cleaned of cement sprinkles.

04037 - Reinforced Construction
Constructed walls reinforced in the horizontal joints or the vertical hollows shall be
carried out according to the requirements specified in the plans and in the special
specification.
Vertical joints or horizontal joints with reinforcement shall be filled up with Concrete
MGP-20 at least, or with cement-mortar with the strength of 23 at least. No cement
containing lime shall be used.

04038 - ChanneIs and HoIes in the Construction
Creation of channels and openings in the construction shall be subject to the CO
approval. The creation of channels and openings shall be carried out by sawing or
drilling only.
Chiseling for pipes or holes in the walls and the partitions shall be carried out only
after the cement is well hardened. The fissures depth shall not exceed half of the
thickness of the wall.
No channels shall be chiseled for pipes in partitions made of lime-sand bricks or
made of caked clay with a thickness of 100 mm or less.
After laying the pipes or the accessories, the channels shall be filled up with cement-
mortar or with cement-mortar admixture. The composition of the cement is detailed
in Article 040212 above.

04039 - ToIerated Deviation
Deviation is the difference between the nominal size and the size actually achieved.
The rate of allowed deviation (tolerated) in the interior dimensions of the walls for
each floor is as follows :
x Deviation of the wall's axis from its planned location 20 mm.
x Deviation in a measured plane with a 2.50 meter aluminum ruler 10 mm.
x Deviation for the perpendicular 10 mm at the most of each height of the floor
wall (up to 2.80 meter).
x Deviations in the width or height of an opening dimensions - +15mm; -0mm
x Deviation of an opening axis from its planned location - 15mm.

0404 - Attachments (Joining)

04041 - VerticaI Attachment to the Concrete
The attachment of partitions or walls made of bricks or walls made of blocks to poles
or to concrete walls shall be carried out by casting vertical belts. The construction
work shall stop 100 mm away from the concrete, and after arranging and tying the
reinforcement bars taken out of the wall and the of concrete poles (see article
"Reinforcement for Attachment" in Chapter 02 - Concrete Works Cast at the Site),
the concrete shall be cast. Unless othrqise specified, the reinforcement of the
10
attachment shall be by barsof 6 mm diameters, 0.40 meter spaced, with their
protruding length 0.60 meter. They shall be bent in vertical position- parallel to the
concrete surface at the center of the complementing casting breadth and shall be
inserted into the space between the construction line and the concrete. The space
and the hollows shall be filled with concrete B-15 at least.

Lining of a wall or a partition to an existing concrete structure that has no "thorns
shall be carried out through advanced attachment bars 250/40/3 to be inserted and
glued with epoxy glue into depressions that shall be chiseled in the existing concrete,
50 mm deep at least. The bars shall be inserted in every fourth layer of construction
using Silicate Bricks or in any third layer of blocks construction. The construction
and the casting of the vertical belts shall be as specified above.

04042 - Construction Attachments
Should the partitions be constructed after the walls have already been constructed,
depressions and bulges shall be left in the walls, in the shape of joining teeth, into
which the partition layers shall be integrated.
f no such preparation has taken place, the attachment shall be carried out through
casting of a concrete pole (vertical belt). The concrete for joining the walls and
partitions shall be B-15 at least.

04043 - HorizontaI Attachment to the Concrete
Horizontal attachment between the construction's upper layer and a concrete ceiling or the
bottom of a beam shall be carried out using a joint made of cement-mortar. The joint shall be
full. The joint thickness shall not exceed 15mm. The construction shall be attached to the
concrete using wedges made of bricks pans to be pressed into the cement joint. Wedging and
filling shall be carried out after the wall joints have hardened and allowing sufficient time
interval prior to plastering.

0405 - InsuIation WaIIs and Protection WaIIs

04050 - GeneraI
nsulation walls are walls constructed on the internal side of an external wall. They
shall be constructed according to the plans of bricks or boards, 70 mm in thickness
and 0.20X0.40 meter in dimensions.
Around the openings a recess shall be processed, so that the insulation wall shall
close the opening alongside the covered pans and the sills. Wherever the insulation
wall is supported by an external component (pole, bell, etc.), the contact area
between the insulation and the external component shall be applied with hot
bituminous on which a triple-layer paper shall be glued in the appropriate width.
Should the construction of protective walls be required. on the outside, near caulked
external walls, they shall be constructed with concrete as specified in the special
specification.
11

0406 - Precast Components (non-supportive)
04060 - GeneraI
n the frameworks of this chapter, are included only those precast components , not
having a supportive function in the structure, and not consisting part of the
supportive structure. The precast components are made of concrete, reinforced
concrete, cellular concrete etc,and they are designed for various functions, such as
ventilation boards in kitchens and rest rooms, railings for staircases and balconies,
laundry cover (concealment), light partitions in convenience rooms etc.
n the absence of other instructions, the precast components shall be made of
concrete and reinforced concrete, complying with the requirements in Chapter 03 -
Precast Concrete Products, and shall be manufactured in a manner ensuring their
integrity both during transportation and during installation The installation shall be
carried out according to the rules specified in Chapter 03.
Components for railing banisters included in the boundaries of srael Standard 1142
- "Banisters and Railings in Buildings shall comply with the requirements of this
standard.

04061 - SuppIy and InstaIIation
The contractor shall supply to the site a sample of each precast component of the
required type and shall obtain the CO approval for the sample, prior to his supplying
the components to be installed.
Fixing the precast components consisting part of the wall, such as ventilation grids,
shall be carried out during the construction work according to the plan and the
instruction. All the components shall be leveled and whole, their planes sharp and
clean, and shall be equipped with all the items and devices required, such as
recesses, bulges, reinforcement points, etc, required for their transportation, their
installation and their enforcement onto the structure according to the plan.

0407 - CIeaning and Protection

04070 - GeneraI
The entire clean construction shall be thoroughly cleaned of any cement residue, etc.
This work shall be carried out prior to dismantling the scaffolding. Construction that is
not designed to be plastered, shall be projected by covering it with polyethylene
sheets, or with sacks, or in any other manner to be approved by the CO. The covers
shall remain until all the works are completed and the structure is submitted.
The above mentioned cleaning and covering shall be carried out also in all the
precast components.

a
05 - GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR WATERPROOFING WORKS
DIRECTIVES TO THE DESIGNER

(The present pages shall not represent part of the Contract)

1. The General SpeciIication Ior WaterprooIing Works Iorms Chapter 05 oI the
General SpeciIication Ior Building Works.
2. The Take-oII Procedures Ior WaterprooIing Works products are indicated in
paragraph 0500.00 and are concentrated at the end oI the SpeciIication. The Bill oI
Quantities Ior a given work shall be prepared on the basis oI these Take-oII
Procedures.
3. The General SpeciIication shall be an inseparable part oI the Contract Documents
between the Client and the Contractor. Should it be necessary, the Designer shall
prepare a Special SpeciIication Ior the given work and indicate that all the
requirements oI the Special SpeciIication supersede in any case the requirement oI
the General SpeciIication.
The present General SpeciIication is based on the Iact that it shall represent one oI
the Contract Documents, the conditions oI which are the Contract oI the Israeli
Government Ior the execution oI a Building by a Contractor (ShelI 3210).
The maintenance works at the end oI the warranty period shall be according to the
conditions oI the "Maintenance Contract" (see also paragraph 19 Iurther below).
4. In the Special SpeciIication or the Bill oI Quantities or the Drawings, the Designer
shall indicate his requirements with respect to whatever shall be stated in those
SpeciIication paragraphs in which there shall be more than one alternative. The
Designer shall check the List oI Standards Iound at the beginning oI the Chapter in
order to make sure that it is Iull and updated.
5. The works according to the present Chapter are intended to be executed in new
buildings. Chapter 0509 deals succinctly with the maintenance and repair oI
existing rooIs.
6. In the Iollowing paragraphs (7-19), are indicated the paragraphs which, according to
the topic, shall be dealt with by the Designer in the Special SpeciIication.
The Designer shall pay attention to the reIerences to other Chapters oI the General
SpeciIication. The Designer shall examine the paragraphs written down in the
Directives to the Designer ("the blue page") oI each chapter which shall be
reIerred to and he shall prepare special paragraphs, as may be needed.
7. Edition of Chapter 05 The Designer shall indicate in the Special SpeciIication
that he is basing himselI on Chapter 05, seventh edition - 2004.
8. Waterproofing System The present SpeciIication describes a number oI
waterprooIing systems. The Designer shall indicate in the Contract Documents the
waterprooIing system he shall choose, on all its details, including the type oI
b
membranes and their thickness (whenever the system shall include such
membranes). In the SpeciIications, the minimal requirements Ior each system shall
be indicated. Additional requirements such as resistance against vegetation roots,
shall be indicated in the Special SpeciIication.
The Designer shall detail his requirements concerning materials not covered by a
Standard, which shall be required Ior the execution oI the waterprooIing system,
such as elastomeric hot bitumen.
The Designer shall indicate in the Special SpeciIication the order oI execution and
attention that shall be given to meeting places between the designed waterprooIing
system and other materials in the Building.
9. Underground Water The waterprooIing oI Iloor-slabs and oI walls Iound
permanently or Irom time to time under water, shall be the subject oI a Special
SpeciIication.
10. Slopes Should the Contractor been required to execute slopes, the Designer shall
indicate in the Special SpeciIication and in the Drawings the required slopes and the
material oI which the slopes shall be made.
11. Details of the Waterproofing The Designer shall speciIy his requirements
concerning the execution oI the various waterprooIing details, such as: the
treatment oI casting interruptions, cants ("rolkot"), truncations, corners,
penetrations, pipes, collectors, water drips and unusual elements.
12. EPDM Membranes A requirement Ior Iull bonding to the substrate shall be
speciIied in the Special SpeciIication.
13. The Waterproofing of Basements In the Special SpeciIication, the special
requirements shall be indicated Ior the connection oI the Iloor-slab waterprooIing
with the waterprooIing oI walls, etc., or any other preparations required Ior the
waterprooIing oI basements, with consideration given to the type oI soil, the
Ioundation method, the waterprooIing method as well as the directives Ior the
drainage under and around the basement.
14. The Protection of the Waterproofing Layers The Designer shall speciIy his
requirements Ior protecting the waterprooIing in terraces and other places where the
Iinishing shall consist oI tiling or any other Iinishing that may damage the
waterprooIing, both in the course oI execution and the course oI the use oI the
Building.
15. Tests - The Designer shall indicate in the Special SpeciIication the requirements Ior
the execution oI various tests such as: testing oI the waterprooIing oI basements,
testing oI wet spaces.
16. Requirements for the Protection against Vegetation Roots - Should a protection
against vegetation roots be required, the Designer shall indicate the required method
and speciIy the properties that the membranes or the waterprooIing method shall
stand up to.
17. Vapor Barrier, Breathers and Thermic Insulation - The Designer shall detail the
requirements and method oI execution oI the vapor barriers, the breathers and the
thermic insulation, iI required. The Designer shall determine the requirements Irom
c
the vapor barrier and the thermic insulation, the type, the location and the
application method.
18. Finishing of Roofs - The Designer shall indicate in the Special SpeciIication the
method Ior bleaching the rooI and protecting the rooI's waterprooIing system.
19. The Maintenance of Roofs - Should it be required, the Designer shall indicate in
the Special SpeciIication the requirements Ior the maintenance oI the rooIs in the
course oI two periods:
- The warranty period
- AIter the warranty period.
Subject to the approval oI the Client, a separate agreement shall be attached to
the Contract, especially Ior the maintenance works.|
Should thermographic tests be required Ior the localization oI water leaks,
etc., the Designer shall speciIy Ior these tests the conditions oI acceptance.
20. All the subjects speciIied above (paragraphs 7-19) represent only a reminder to the
Designer, which shall not release him Irom the need to check the compatibility oI
the paragraphs oI the General SpeciIication to the designed work.

- 2004 -

05 - GENERAL SPECIFICATION WATERPROOFING
WORKS AND TAKE-OFF PROCEDURES

Published by the Inter-Ministerial Committee with the participation oI
the Ministry oI DeIense / Construction Branch
the Ministry oI Construction and Housing / Construction Branch
the Ministry oI Transport / the Public Works Department
the Ministry oI Finance / the General Accountant

Seventh edition (amended)

2
All rights reserved - Ministry oI DeIense / Publishing Department
2004

The Inter-Ministerial Committee Ior the Standardization oI
Construction Contract Documents and their Computerization

L. Golan Ministry oI DeIense Chairman
B.
Nachshon
Ministry oI Transport / Public Works Department Member
Y.
Shacham
Ministry oI Finance / General Accountant
S. Fein - Ministry oI DeIense Member oI the Committee and Publishing
Responsible
Y. Lopovitz
-
Ministry oI DeIense Member oI the Committee and Sub-
Committee Coordinator

General Specification for 1oinery and Steel Works

Sub-
Committee:

S. Fein Ministry oI DeIense Chairman
Y. Axelrod Ministry oI DeIense - Member
Y. Lopovitz Ministry oI DeIense Member
Z.
Manoach
Ministry oI DeIense - Member
Y. Sadler Ministry oI Construction and Housing Member
A.
Rosenfeld -
Ministry oI DeIense Member
K.
Reinhorn
IDF - Member

The Committee was assisted by the advise oI Mr. Michael Marton.
06 - The General Specification for 1oinery and Steel Works Products
and the Take-Off Procedures
Table of Contents
Page
0500 General ................................................................................................................ 5
0501 Preparation oI Concrete SurIaces Ior their WaterprooIing ............................... 10
0502 Common WaterprooIing Systems ..................................................................... 14
0503 WaterprooIing by Other Methods ..................................................................... 26
0504 The WaterprooIing oI Basements and Wall Bases............................................ 36
05040 General .............................................................................................................. 36
05041 Multi-layer Bituminous WaterprooIing ............................................................ 36
05042 WaterprooIing with Enhanced Bituminous Membranes ................................... 38
0505 Humidity Separation Course ............................................................................. 39
0506 WaterprooIing oI Wet Rooms ........................................................................... 40
0507 Finishing, WaterprooIing Protection and RooIs Bleaching .............................. 43
0508 Responsibility During the Warranty Period ...................................................... 47
0509 Maintenance oI RooIs ....................................................................................... 48
0500.00 Take-OII Procedures oI WaterprooIing Works ............................................. 52

A "Blue Page"- Directives to the Designer is attached to the Brochure, which
does not represent a part of the Contract Documents.
05 (2004)
5
0500 General
05001 Scope of the Chapter
The present Chapter reIers to the waterprooIing works in the Building against
water penetration, that shall be perIormed by means oI bituminous materials or
products, polymer enriched bituminous materials, polymeric materials in the
Iorm oI membranes or emulsions and solutions. The instructions oI the present
Chapter apply to the waterprooIing oI horizontal, vertical and slant surIaces oI
buildings in the ground or above it anywhere in the Site, at any level or depth
whatsoever and including the preparation oI slopes, etc.
The insulation works (thermic, acoustic or against Iire) shall be executed
according to a Special SpeciIication.
The present Chapter deals with works perIormed directly on concrete or light-
weight concrete. WaterprooIing systems on other substrates such as sheet metal,
or on the surIace oI thermic insulation oI any kind whatsoever shall be speciIied
in a Special SpeciIication.
The present Chapter deals with the maintenance oI the waterprooIing oI rooIs
and the execution oI repairs in the course oI the warranty period, including the
maintenance oI rooIs upon the end oI the warranty period, in a separate
agreement Ior the maintenance that shall be signed by the Client and the provider
oI the Service, hereinaIter the "Contractor."
05002 Standards
Besides what is stated in paragraph "Materials" in Chapter 00 - Preliminaries, the
Iollowing is a list oI the main Israeli and Foreign Standards relevant to the
present Chapter.
a. Israeli Standards
No. oI
the
Standard
Name oI the Standard
1 Portland cement
3 Mineral aggregate Irom natural sources
68, Part
1
The waterprooIing oI Ilat rooIs: Asphalt Iiller
80 Bituminous Ielt and cardboard
325 Anodic platings on aluminum (anodization)
488 Blown bitumen Ior protection against combustion
896 Chemical additives to the concrete
1205,
Part 2
Installation oI sanitary appliances and their testing
1229,
Part 1
Rigid Ioamed plastic Ior thermic insulation: Boards
1229,
Part 2
Rigid Ioamed plastic Ior thermic insulation: Modeled
products
1229,
Part 3
Rigid Ioamed plastic Ior thermic insulation: Sprayed
polyurethane Ioam
05 (2004)
6
1430,
Part 1
RooIs waterprooIing membranes: PVC membranes
1430,
Part 2
RooIs waterprooIing membranes: EPDM membranes and
other elastomeric membranes
1430,
Part 3
RooIs waterprooIing membranes: Polymer enriched
bituminous membranes, reinIorced with polyester Iibers or
by other non-woven Iibers, destined to be installed by
welding
1463,
Part 2
Geotextiles and their products - IdentiIication on Site
1476,
Part 1
Testing oI the tightness oI building envelope against water
penetration: Flat rooIs and terraces
1476,
Part 2
penetration: External walls and openings in external walls
1476,
Part 3
penetration: Sloped rooIs
1513 Lightweight concrete Ior non-structural uses
1536 Structures - WaterprooIing materials - ClassiIication and
requirements
1556 Covering oI light rooIs
1731 Textural coating based on synthetic polymers
1752,
Part 1
Concrete Ilat rooIs waterprooIing systems: WaterprooIing
bases
1752,
Part 2
Concrete Ilat rooIs waterprooIing systems: Bitumen
membranes installed by welding
1920,
Part 1
Plastering: General requirements and plastering mortar
testing methods
1945 Water emulsion paints Ior external use
4518 Elastic coatings on acrylic basis Ior the waterprooIing oI
rooIs, applied as a liquid system based on water

b. Foreign Standards
ASTM-
D 1117
Methods oI testing non-woven Iabrics
ASTM-
D 2823
SpeciIication Ior asphalt rooI coatings

c. Specification of the Institute of Standards
No. oI the
SpeciIication
Name oI the SpeciIication
SpeciIication
451
Bituminous membranes destined Ior installation by
gluing, used Ior the waterprooIing oI rooIs,
separations in waterprooIing systems or vapor
barriers

05 (2004)
7
05003 Other Chapters
All that is stated in the Chapters listed below applies also to the present Chapter
and this as deIined in paragraph "Contradictions in Documents and Priorities
between Documents" in the Israeli Government Contract Ior the Execution oI a
Building by a Contractor (ShelI 3210):
Chapter
00 -
Preliminaries
Chapter
02 -
Cast in Place Concrete Works
Chapter
06 -
Joinery and Metal Works
Chapter
09 -
Plastering Works
Chapter
10 -
Flooring and Cladding Works
Chapter
11 -
Paintworks
Chapter
12 -
Aluminum Works

05004 Materials
Prior to the start oI work, the Contractor shall submit to the approval oI the
Inspector oI Works, a List oI Equipment, Materials and Auxiliary Materials he
shall wish to use.
The Contractor shall perIorm his work by means oI equipment and materials
Iitting the quality stated in the Israeli Government Contract Ior the Execution oI a
Building by a Contractor (ShelI 3210).
The materials that shall be used Ior waterprooIing are indicated in sub-chapters
hereinaIter. The description oI the waterprooIing systems shall include the
materials, testing methods, the application and the testing.
05005 Safety
Without impairing what is stated in Chapter 00 - Preliminaries, during the whole
course oI work, the Contractor shall pay attention to the SaIety rules, as well as
to the rules Ior protection against Iire and against chemicals, that are established
by the appropriate Authorities.
05006 The Performers' of the Work
a. The work shall be perIormed by trained workers, having expertise and
experience in the method that shall be used Ior the perIormance oI the
waterprooIing or such workers certiIied by the ManuIacturer oI the
material.
b. WaterprooIing work on concrete Ilat rooIs consisting oI bituminous
membranes shall be carried out by Contractors certiIied by the Institute
oI Standards according to the procedure oI SI 1752.
05 (2004)
8
05007 Testing of Tightness to Water Penetration
050070 General
Unless otherwise stated in the Special SpeciIication, the tightness test against
water penetration shall be perIormed according to the Iollowing requirements:
050071 Testing oI rooIs by Ilooding
Further to the application oI the upper waterprooIing layer - prior to the
execution oI the bleaching or any other protection, a Ilooding test shall be carried
out to at least a height oI 5 cm above the designed Iinal level oI the Ilooring or oI
any other Iinishing, during 72 hours, as required in SI 1476, Part 1. Should any
humidity or leaks signs be Iound, the Contractor shall correct the deIective place
and perIorm again the Ilooding test, until a watertight rooI shall be obtained.
In order that the whole rooI shall be covered with water, as required, the
Contractor shall create raisings in temporary locations, or seal openings
temporarily.
Should the depth oI the water needed Ior the Iilling Ior the perIormance oI the
test be more than 30 cm, the test shall be perIormed only Iollowing the approval
oI the Inspector oI Works oI the Ilooding method (blocks, "dams," etc.). The
Contractor shall be entitled to partition the rooI into several Ilooded zones, so
that it shall be possible to lower the required maximal water level.
The time Ior the execution oI the Ilooding shall be coordinated with the method
and waterprooIing materials as well as with the Inspector oI Works
(consideration shall be given to the directives oI the ManuIacturer concerning the
time interval between the application and the Ilooding test).
050072 Testing the tightness oI walls above ground level
Should a testing oI the tightness oI the external walls be required, it shall be
perIormed only Iollowing the completion oI the closure oI the various openings
in the Building, according to SI 1476, Part 2.
The testing in the openings and in the products installed in the walls, shall be
executed as stated in Chapter 12 - Aluminum Works or in Chapter 06 - Joinery
and Metal Works products.
050073 Testing oI the tightness oI basement which are not shelters
Following the completion oI the waterprooIing works and oI the reIilling around
the Building up to the Iinal level, should it be required in the Special
SpeciIication, whenever the work shall be perIormed in B soil (soil that shall not
drain Iast), see paragraph 05040 Iurther below, a trench shall be leIt around the
basement Ior water Iilling. The dimensions oI the trench shall be about 50x50
cm. The trench shall be Iilled with running water during 72 hours. The trench
shall be coated on its inner side and stop the Ilow should there be water
penetration; the Contractor shall correct the deIective part and perIorm again the
Ilooding test, until no water penetration signs shall be seen.
050074 Testing oI the tightness oI shelters
05 (2004)
9
The testing oI the tightness oI shelters shall be perIormed as stated in the Civil
DeIense Regulations.
050075 Testing oI the tightness oI protected spaces
The execution oI the test, the number oI tests shall be according to the
requirements in the Special SpeciIication. The test shall be perIormed, iI required
and iI not otherwise stated, according to what is stated in above paragraph
050071.

05 (2004)
10
0501 Preparation of Concrete Surfaces for their Waterproofing
05010 General
The Iollowing paragraphs deal with the preparation oI concrete, concrete Iloat
("meda") or lightweight concrete surIaces Ior their waterprooIing. There shall be
two instances:
a) In slant rooIs - the Contractor shall make sure that the slopes Iit
whatever is required in the Drawings and then perIorm, iI required,
local corrections as speciIied in paragraph 05011 below.
b) In rooIs Ior which the Iormation oI slopes shall be required - the slopes
shall be executed as speciIied in paragraph 05012 below.
The surIaces shall be clean, dry and plane or Iollow the curve oI the Iloor,
smooth without "steps," protuberances, sags, holes, etc. In the Iloor surIaces the
Iormation oI the slopes and their rates shall be checked; the Iormation oI the
gutters outlets and the edges oI the joints between balustrades, cornices, etc. and
the surIaces oI the rooIs and the wall, shall be made Iair. Special attention shall
be given to places where water puddle may occur; in those places, the Contractor
shall correct them as speciIied in paragraph 05011 below.
The Contractor shall cut oII the tying wires leIt behind Iollowing the dismantling
oI the Iormwork to a depth oI 15 mm at least. The sags created Iollowing the
cutting oII, shall be Iilled in with cement to which a bonding enhancement
additive shall be added.
The surIace shall be smoothened so as to Iit its purpose.
Vapor barriers and thermic insulation (iI required) shall be perIormed according
to what shall be speciIied in the Contract Documents / Special SpeciIication.
05011 Local Corrections of Concrete Made Slopes
Unless otherwise speciIied in the Special SpeciIication, local corrections oI the
slopes varying between 0.5 cm to 2.0 cm shall be perIormed by the Contractor, as
Iollows:
a) First layer - a connection layer having a "cream like" viscosity
composed oI a 1:1 sand-cement mixture, the sand being natural, Iine
and sieved sand having a grain under 0.6 mm.
The mixture oI sand and cement shall be poured into mixing water
containing 30 water and 70 oI bonding additive based on rubber (SBR)
or acrylic latex weighing about 20 oI the cement's weight (at least 10 oI
clean resin oI the cement weight). The mixture shall be prepared with
continuous stirring until the "cream like" viscosity shall be obtained.
The above mixture shall be brushed on the places that shall be corrected so
as to ensure the bonding oI an additional layer.
b) Additional layer until an uniIorm plane shall be obtained, shall be
applied when the above bonding layer shall not be dry yet - additional
layers consisting oI cement mortar shall be prepared at the rate oI 1:3,
05 (2004)
11
to the mortar shall be added a bonding additive as above at the rate oI
about 10-15 oI the cement weight.
The Iinishing oI the correction layers shall be smooth at the rate oI a
"helicopter" smoothing.
The Contractor shall cure the repaired areas as required in Chapter 02 - Cast
in Place Concrete Works.
05012 Formation of Slopes
050120 General
Should it be required in the Special SpeciIication, the Contractor shall perIorm
the preparation oI the subgrade including slopes as required in paragraphs
050121 and 050122 Iurther below.
Whenever the slope concrete shall be executed directly on horizontal concrete,
there shall be no need to smoothen the horizontal concrete.
050121 Formation oI slopes made oI concrete or concrete Iloat ("meda")
Should it be required in the Special SpeciIication, the Contractor shall cast the
slopes with Class B-20 concrete at least and straighten the concrete surIace by
means oI stable rulers, installed prior to the casting operation. The Contractor
shall check the accuracy oI the rules slopes and the height oI the slope layer, so
that they shall Iit the requirements oI the Contract Documents.
The smoothening and curing oI surIaces shall be executed as speciIied in Chapter
02 - Cast in Place Concrete Works. Neither curing compound nor Iormwork oil
that may inIluence the waterprooIing bonding on the walls, on which the
waterprooIing shall be executed, may be used.
In those places where the designed thickness oI the slopes concrete layer shall be
less than 4 cm or should the layer be not smooth enough, the Contractor shall
make Iair the surIace oI the concrete with polymer enhanced cementic mortar.
Should there be no slopes plan nor a request Ior a slope in one oI the Contract
Documents, the minimal slope oI the rooI Iinished surIace shall be at least 1.5.
The length oI the running oI water to the collectors shall be under 10 m. The
collectors shall be executed according to the Drawings.
II, according to the requirements oI the Special SpeciIication, slopes shall be cast
on top oI a thermic insulation layer, in the absence oI any other directive, the
Contractor shall execute the waterprooIing as stated hereinaIter:
a) Smoothening oI the concrete base as required Ior a waterprooIing
system as required above;
b) A waterprooIing system as required in one oI the Contract Documents
and as detailed hereinaIter:
c) Bonding thermic insulation system as required in the Special
SpeciIication;
05 (2004)
12
d) Casting oI concrete slopes on the thermic insulation system.
050122 Formation oI lightweight concrete slopes
Lightweight concrete, iI required in the Special SpeciIication and should it not be
stated otherwise, shall be executed by the Contractor as speciIied hereinaIter.
The execution shall be as required in above paragraph 050121 including the
smoothing oI the base concrete. The waterprooIing oI the base (vapor barrier)
and the thermic insulation shall be perIormed as required in the Special
SpeciIication.
Lightweight concrete Ior slopes that shall be executed atop the thermic
insulation, shall meet the requirements oI SI 1513 - Lightweight concrete Ior
non-structural uses. Light concrete shall be cured as speciIied with respect to the
curing oI concrete in Chapter 02, except Ior the use oI curing compounds.
05013 Preparation of Walls and Parapets Surfaces
The surIaces oI concrete walls and parapets having deIective perIorated surIaces
or protuberances and humps shall be chiseled (Ior the humps and protuberances)
and Iilled in (Ior holes, cracks and sags) with layered polymer improved
cementic mortar, until a uniIorm straight surIace shall be obtained.
In casting interruptions, the surIaces shall be prepared as required in the Special
SpeciIication.
05014 Waterproofing Details
050141 Cants ("Rolkot")
In such methods where it shall be required and iI not otherwise stated in one oI
the Contract Documents, cants shall be Iormed at the intersections oI various
planes, by means oI polymer enriched cementic mortar, having the shape oI a
concave triangle 50x50 mm to 70x70 mm.
050142 Finishing oI the waterprooIing edges
The Contractor shall execute the Iinishing oI the waterprooIing edges as shown
in the Drawings and stated in the paragraph hereinaIter.
050143 Various penetrations in the waterprooIing
Various penetrations into the waterprooIing such as pipelines, sleeves, breathers,
systems passages, etc., passing through the base, on which the waterprooIing
systems shall be installed, shall be executed according to the details in the
Drawings.
050144 WaterprooIing around water drainage outlets
WaterprooIing around water drainage outlets in wet spaces, terraces, rooIs and
standing water shall be similar to the one required in the Special SpeciIication,
besides what has been stated in above paragraph 05010.
05 (2004)
13
05015 Keeping the cleanliness
SurIaces oI the building that shall be waterprooIed shall be clean and dry with no
Ioreign material, including dust. The Contractor shall use all the means required
Ior preventing the leakage oI waterprooIing material on surIaces not means to be
waterprooIed and Ior preventing the dirtying oI any part oI the Building.
Special attention shall be given to the protection oI exposed concrete and oI Iair-
Iaced masonry, as well as to all the areas that shall not be plastered nor clad,
Iollowing the completion oI the waterprooIing works.
05016 Approbation of the Start of the Waterproofing Work
The Contractor shall start the waterprooIing works only aIter having ensured that
all the surIaces destined to be waterprooIed shall be prepared as required,
including the correction oI the rooIs slopes and aIter receiving the approval oI the
Inspector oI Works.
WaterprooIing works shall be perIormed only aIter that three weeks elapse Irom
the completion oI the casting oI concrete surIaces or oI concrete Iloats ("meda")
or aIter Iive weeks Iollowing the casting oI light concrete on areas destined to be
waterprooIed.
In any case, the start oI the waterprooIing shall begin not earlier than at least one
week aIter the last wetting (rain).

05 (2004)
14
0502 Common Waterproofing Systems
05020 General
In the Iollowing paragraphs shall be detailed the main common waterprooIing
systems.
a) Polymer enhanced bituminous membranes, single layer and double
layer systems;
b) PVC membranes.
05021 Polymer Enhanced Bituminous Membranes
050210 General
Unless otherwise stated, the proportions oI the membranes shall Iit the
requirements oI SI 1430, Part 3, grade "M" with minimal thickness oI the
membranes oI 4 mm.
Whenever the Contractor shall be requested to perIorm a single layer
waterprooIing membrane having an upper side with coarse aggregate, the
minimal thickness oI these membranes shall be 5 mm.
In those cases where the membranes shall be set on 4 mm thick bitumen
membranes without aggregates (double layer system), it shall be permissible to
use membranes having an upper side with aggregates at least 4 mm nominal
thickness (instead oI 5).
In the Iollowing paragraphs, the single-layer and double-layer systems on
concrete or light concrete slopes shall be speciIied. In any case, the execution
shall be according to the method indicated in the Special SpeciIication and the
other Contract Documents.
050211 Preparation oI the base Ior the waterprooIing and special Iormations
The surIace shall be prepared Ior its waterprooIing by the Contractor as speciIied
above in sub-chapter 0501.
a) At each intersection oI various planes, the Contractor shall perIorm
concrete cants ("rolkot") made oI polymer enhanced cement mortar or oI
bituminous material, as approved by the Inspector oI Works, as stated in
b) The Contractor shall deal with the cracks in the horizontal subgrade
(having a width over 2 mm) and in the area oI the cants ("rolkot") by
spreading a "primer" on a width oI 40 cm. On top oI the concrete, on
both sides oI the crack, the Contractor shall glue or weld a strip made oI
the waterprooIing membrane. The width oI the strip shall be around 33
cm, its length shall be longer by 30 cm that the length oI the crack in
each direction and it shall be Iully welded on the crack's surIace.
Membranes Ior reinIorcement on the cants surIace - the width oI the
reinIorcement membrane shall be at least 30 cm. The Contractor shall make
sure that Ior at least 10 cm on each side oI the cant, the membrane shall be
05 (2004)
15
Iully glued or welded to the base. Prior to the installation oI the
"reinIorcement strip," the Contractor shall spread a "primer" on the cant.
050212 Materials
a) The waterprooIing membranes - the waterprooIing, reinIorcement and
covering membranes shall stand up to the requirements oI above
paragraph 050210.
b) Base layer - the material Ior the base layer ("primer") shall be based on
a bituminous solution standing up to the requirements oI SI 1752, Part
2.
c) The material Ior the separation layer shall be as stated in the Institute oI
Standards SpeciIication no. 451.
d) Blown bitumen Ior straightening or binding waterprooIing membranes -
it shall be a blown hot bitumen oI the 105/25 type.
e) The bitumen Ior an additional and completing Iormation around
pipelines, etc. shall be elastomeric hot bitumen which shall be a
polymer enhanced bitumen having properties as required in the Special
SpeciIication.
I) The Iabric Ior the reinIorcement oI the elastomeric bitumen shall be a
glass Iiber Iabric (net) weighing at least 60 gr. per sq.m. and having a
minimal strength oI 500 Newton to 50 mm width. In both directions the
number oI wires per cm in each direction shall be not less than 3 and
not more than 5.
g) The sections Ior the Iixation oI the upper edges oI the membranes shall
be made oI anodized aluminum not less than 2 mm thick, bent to 45 on
both sides so as to enable the insertion oI "sealing putty" and to prevent
damage to the membrane. The thickness oI the anodic plating shall be
10 microns (type AA10 in SI 325) at least.
h) The Iixation shall consist oI plastic pegs having a widening at the
external end so as to prevent corrosion between the metal screw and the
section, a Iorce oI at least 500 Newton shall be needed Ior pulling them
out Irom the concrete.
i) Metallic clamp - the Contractor shall use corrosion prooI clamp at least
10 mm wide. The clamp shall be attached to the upper end oI
protruding pipes.
j) Putty Ior the upper sealing between the metal section and the base shall
Iit SI 1536 type 12.5E (F).
050213 Single layer waterprooIing system set on a concrete base
The waterprooIing system shall comprise at least one membrane in the
waterprooIing layer as required in paragraph 050210 above.
The base concerning the said layer shall be the layer speciIied in the Contract
Documents: concrete oI the rooI or concrete Iloat ("meda").
05 (2004)
16
Unless otherwise stated in the Special SpeciIication, the single-layer
waterprooIing layer shall be installed by the Contractor by Iull bonding to the
base. For the execution oI the waterprooIing on lightweight concrete, see
paragraph 050214 Iurther below.
Should there be a request in the Special SpeciIication Ior a separation membrane,
the membrane shall Iit the requirements oI the Institute oI Standards
SpeciIication no. 451.
The Iollowing are the instructions Ior the installation oI a waterprooIing system
on ordinary concrete rooI or on concrete Iloat bases.
a) The cleaning oI the base
The Contractor shall make sure prior to the start oI execution oI the work
that the rooI base destined to be waterprooIed shall be devoid oI any loose
materials, smooth with no sharp projection protruding Irom the rooI's plane,
including reinIorcement bars, tying wires, nails, remains Irom the wooden
Iormwork or any other Ioreign material not required in the workshop
drawings.
The Contractor shall perIorm the work aIter he shall obtain the approbation
required in above paragraph 05016, prior to the spreading oI the material.
b) Spreading oI the base material
The Contractor shall spread the base course on the whole area oI the rooI,
including the raisings. The amount oI basic material shall be determined in
Iunction oI the base's absorbency but not less than 250 gr/sq.m.
The Contractor shall spread on the raisings an additional base course.
Prior to setting oI the membranes, the Contractor shall wait until the base
course shall be dry. The required drying time shall be at least 2 hours in
warm days oI the summer, Ior the rooIs, at least 4 hours in cooler days (in a
cold winter, the time required Ior the layer to become dry may be longer).
Following the spreading oI the base course and its drying, the color oI the
surIace shall be black.
c) Installation oI the membrane in the reinIorcement layer
The Contractor shall install "reinIorcement membranes" in all the places
where required by the Contract Documents.
d) Installation oI horizontal membranes in the Iirst waterprooIing layer
The Contractor shall install the membrane Irom the lowest place in the rooI
towards the highest place (similarly to the installation oI tiles on a tiled
rooI).
Prior to welding, the Contractor shall unIurl the membrane in its place, to its
whole length. Then, he shall make sure that it shall be installed in its Iull
area on the base or on a membrane under it and there are no wrinkles, Iolds,
or waves.
05 (2004)
17
The membranes shall be spread out so that the edges oI Iour membranes
shall not meet at one single point.
The Contractor shall roll up the membrane to its Iormer condition Irom both
its edges to its center.
The Contractor shall spread out again one edge oI the membrane and
concurrently "weld" it by a Iull weld to the base. At the end oI the one edge,
the Contractor shall repeat the operation on the second part oI the
membrane.
Should the Contractor renew the welding Iurther to its interruption, attention
shall be given to continue the welding Irom the point where it was
interrupted. For this purpose, prior to the renewal oI the welding, the
Contractor shall draw the roll backwards to the direction oI the welding.
The Contractor shall make sure that the amount oI the molten bitumen
Iound under the membrane shall be enough Ior the Iull bonding oI the
membrane to the base or the membrane under it.
The Contractor shall weld the membrane in straight lines, insoIar that the
Site conditions shall allow it. The Contractor shall prevent the creation oI
un-welded points.
The installed lower membrane shall cover the whole horizontal area oI the
reinIorcement membrane in those places where it shall rest on it and not its
slant and vertical surIaces.
In order to create an overlap between two membranes having a coarse Iinish
oI their upper Iace, such as coarse aggregate, the Contractor shall immerse
the coarse aggregate oI the lower membrane, in the whole area oI the
overlap, into the bitumen. The immersion shall be done by using a heated
putty-kniIe (spatula) with a limited heating oI the membrane itselI (at a rate
that shall melt the bitumen and enable Iull bonding).
The overlaps between the membranes themselves and the overlaps between
one membrane and the reinIorcement membrane shall stand up to the
requirements in the Contract Documents and in any case be not smaller than
10 cm (in a longitudinal direction: 15 cm).
The Contractor shall perIorm the waterprooIing on all the area on which a
base course shall be installed, within 48 hours Irom the completion oI the
spreading and provided that the surIace shall remain clean.
e) Installation oI the cover layer membrane
The Contractor shall install the "cover layer" in the same direction as the
membrane under it.
The overlaps between the cover membranes shall be located so that the
distance between them and the overlaps in the layer under it shall be less
than 1/3 oI the membrane's width.
The Iinishing oI the upper "cover membrane" on raisings shall be executed
by the Contractor, as Iollows:
05 (2004)
18
The heated up (ironed) upper edge oI the upper membrane shall be pushed
in all along the length oI the raising and in a width varying Irom 10 to 20
mm. Putty shall be spread on the "ironed" surIace and above it. The
spreading shall have a total width oI about 20 mm: 10 mm at least above the
membrane's end and about 10 mm under the end oI the membrane. II
Iollowing 24 hours Irom the spreading, the putty shall run, it shall be re-
spread and this during the whole warranty period.
Whenever a mechanical Iixation shall be designed Irom the end oI the upper
end oI the "cover membrane" to the raising, the Iixation shall be perIormed
according to the requirements oI the Drawings.
I) Installation oI membranes around pipes
Around rainwater collectors (the heads oI the gutters), the Contractor shall
install a reinIorcement membrane about 1x1 m.
The installation oI the reinIorcement membrane and the cover membrane
around pipes may be achieved by several methods, such as by a "rose
Iormation," Iormation machine, by a Iormation oI un-reinIorced membrane
or by well-known industrial Iittings. The Iormation method shall ensure Iull
and continuous welding oI the membranes to the base or to the membranes
Iound under them.
Around pipes protruding Irom the rooI's surIace, clamps shall be installed in
order to connect the membranes to the pipes.
g) Installation oI a protection layer
The Contractor shall unroll synthetic geotextile membranes appropriate to
the requirements in paragraph 05075 Iurther below while attention shall be
given to the overlaps between the membranes, as shown in the Drawings.
The haulage oI aggregates (crushed stone) shall not be perIormed on the
geotextile membrane but on the protection surIaces resting on them.
In all the drainage openings, the Contractor shall install hoods (heads oI
gutters) as required in paragraph 5078 Iurther below. The Contractor shall
install the network so that the waterprooIing system in the vicinity oI the
drainage openings shall not be damaged.
The installation oI walking tiles in the designed walking lanes, including on
the periphery oI the rooI, shall be with the utmost care, so as not to
mechanically damage the membranes.
050214 Single layer waterprooIing system set on lightweight concrete base
The Iollowing execution shall relate to a waterprooIing system set on lightweight
concrete that shall include in the rooI's plane, the Iollowing layers: base layer,
separation layer and membrane-made waterprooIing layer.
The installation oI the membranes Iorming the separation layer in the rooI's plane
shall be done by partial welding or partial bonding. The rate oI the welding or the
bonding shall Iit the requirements oI the Special SpeciIication.
05 (2004)
19
The installation oI 50 cm wide waterprooIing membranes on raisings and along
the periphery oI the Iloor, shall be executed by Iull welding.
a) Cleanliness oI the base
The Contractor shall make sure prior to the start oI the work's execution that
the base oI the rooI destined to be waterprooIed shall be clean oI material:
nails, remains oI wooden Iormwork or any other Ioreign matter that shall
not be required in the workshop drawings.
The Contractor shall execute the work aIter the issue oI a consent as
required in above paragraph 05016, prior to the spreading oI the basic
material.
b) Spreading the basic material
The Contractor shall spread the basic material at least 30 days Iollowing the
casting oI the light concrete base and not less than one week aIter the last
rain. Prior to the start oI the spreading operation, the Contractor shall make
sure that the surIace oI the base looks dry.
c) Installation oI a separation layer and ventilations (breathers)
The Contractor shall install the separation layer and the ventilations
according to the details in the Drawings and what shall be required in the
Special SpeciIication. Unless otherwise stated, there shall be two
alternatives, as Iollows:
1. The Iirst layer shall be a separating layer and comprise the
spreading oI a basic material ("primer") at the rate oI 250
gr/sq.m (it shall be an obligation in those places meant Ior
bonding). The rate oI the bonding oI the separation layer to
the base shall be between 30 to 50.
2. The Contractor shall bond by point bonding on the whole
horizontal surIace oI the rooI, a bituminous Ileece or a
perIorated membrane according to the Institute oI Standards
SpeciIication no. 451. The bonding shall consist oI 105/25
blown hot bitumen. The diameter oI the bonding point shall
be 10 cm and the distance between their centers shall be
about 40 cm. A Iull bonding oI this layer along the periphery
oI the rooI (10 cm wide) and next to all the raisings shall be
executed. The overlaps in the membranes (at the rate oI 10
cm) shall be bonded by means oI a hot bitumen as above.
Should it be required in the Special SpeciIication, the Contractor shall
install breathers through the above waterprooIing membranes and the
separation layer. Unless otherwise stated, there shall be one breather Ior
about every 40 sq.m.
d) Installation oI the membranes in the waterprooIing layer
The Contractor shall install the membranes as required in above paragraph
050213. For instance, on the top oI the separation layer shall be welded (or
bonded with hot bitumen, according to the type oI membrane), enhanced
05 (2004)
20
bituminous membranes on their Iull area. The welding oI the membranes
shall start at the center oI the roll towards the ends and this aIter that the
membrane shall be unIurled and straightened and rolled back Irom both
ends to the center oI the membrane.
e) Protection oI the waterprooIing system
In exposed rooIs, Iollowing the welding oI the membrane (having an upper
Iace Iinish consisting oI coarse aggregate), the Contractor shall paint the
overlaps as stated in paragraph 05074 Iurther below. The paint shall be
applied aIter the completion oI the rooI's waterprooIing testing by Ilooding
tests.
The "putty" that shall be applied above the aluminum rulers (mechanical
Iixation sections) and in other sensitive zones, shall be painted by the
Contractor with protective paint Iollowing the end oI the curing period and
the drying required Ior it, all this according to the recommendations oI the
"putty" ManuIacturer.
The Contractor shall install hoods (net Iabric "hats") on the drainage
openings, as required in the Drawings.
050215 Double layer waterprooIing system
The waterprooIing system shall at least include two waterprooI membranes or
more, in the waterprooIing layer. The system may also comprise additional
membranes, a layer oI bitumen oI the 105/25 type with or without glass Iabric net
reinIorcement, etc., all according to the requirements in the Contract Documents.
The Iirst layer shall be executed as stated in paragraph 050213 or 050214 above,
all according to the type oI base. The application oI the second layer shall be by
Iull bonding to the Iirst layer.
In double-layer waterprooIing systems, attention shall be given to the laying
according to the Iollowing rules:
a) The direction oI the laying oI the membranes in two layers shall be
identical, such as in a tiled rooI.
b) The overlaps between the membranes in two adjacent layers, in the
longitudinal direction and the transversal section shall be at least 30
cm.
The waterprooIing shall be executed in two layers oI polymer enhanced
bituminous membranes. The lower membrane shall be bonded by Iull bonding or
point bonding, as required in the Special SpeciIication. The lower membrane
shall be in any case, without aggregates sunk into the membrane; the application
shall be as described in above paragraph 050213.
050216 Bleaching oI sun-exposed membranes
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall perIorm
the bleaching oI the sun-exposed membranes with industrial emulsion paint, as
required in paragraph 05074 Iurther below. Bleaching shall be required also Ior
membranes with light color aggregates, in every place where light color
05 (2004)
21
aggregates shall be missing on the Iace oI the membrane (such as next to
overlaps).
05022 PVC Membranes
050220 General
The present paragraph details the waterprooIing oI rooIs by means oI PVC
membranes. PVC membranes may be used on rooIs according to three methods.
a) Membranes Ireely set, on which a weight shall be installed to prevent the
liIting oI the membrane due to wind suction, as well as a protection
against physical damage to the membrane (see paragraph 050223 Iurther
below).
b) Membranes mechanically Iixed unto the base such as concrete or light
concrete - the execution shall be according to the detail in the Special
SpeciIication.
c) Membranes bonded to the rooI - the execution shall be as required in the
Special SpeciIication.
050221 Materials
a) The waterprooIing membranes shall stand up to the requirements oI SI
1430, Part 1: membranes Ior the waterprooIing oI rooIs. The
Contractor shall use the types oI membranes required in the Contract
Documents.
b) The glue Ior bonding membranes to vertical surIaces and to horizontal
surIaces shall be a glue recommended by the membrane's
ManuIacturer.
c) Putties:
1. The overlaps putty that shall be applied on all the overlap
lines between the membranes shall be based on emulsive
PVC. The "putty" shall be supplied by the membrane's
ManuIacturer.
2. The "putty" Ior the upper Iinishing that shall be applied on
the edges oI the membrane (and between the protective
section and the concrete base) shall be supplied by the
membrane's ManuIacturer.
3. The putty between the membrane and aluminum section
shall be as recommended by the membrane's ManuIacturer
and stand up to the requirements oI SI 1536, type "25HM"
(F) which stands up to wear and to the bonding Iorce oI
concrete and aluminum.
d) Welding strips destined Ior the connection oI membranes between
themselves shall consist oI PVC as required by the membrane's
ManuIacturer, but with a minimal width oI 100 mm both Ior manual
welding and mechanical welding.
05 (2004)
22
e) Fixation Iittings - the type oI Iitting, its shape and its method oI
Iixation shall be according to the details in the Drawings. The Iittings
shall be industrialized parts. The detail is as Iollows:
1. A PVC coated steel section:
The section destined Ior the Iixation oI the membranes edges to
concrete parapets and walls shall consist oI steel sheet 0.6 mm thick,
PVC coated with a thickness oI at least 0.6 mm on one side. The
backside oI the section shall comprise a paint layer at least 60 micron
thick Ior the protection against corrosion, or galvanized. The total
minimal thickness shall be 1.2 mm.
The section shall be bent on both sides at 45 angles so as to enable an
easy application oI the "putty" between the section and the base as well
as to prevent damage to the membrane.
2. An aluminum section:
The Iitting used Ior Iixing the ends oI the membrane shall be made oI
anodized aluminum with minimal 2 mm thickness, bent on both sides
at 45 angles so as to enable the Iitting with "sealing putty" and prevent
damage to the membrane. The thickness oI the anodic plating shall be
at least 10 microns (type AA10 in SI 325).
3. The dowels Ior the Iixation oI the sections:
The Iixation shall be executed by means oI plastic dowels enlarged at
their external end so as to prevent corrosion between the metal screw
and the section, having a pulling-out strength Irom the concrete at a
rate oI 500 Newton at least.
4. Clamps
The clamp Ior the attachment oI the waterprooIing membrane around
round pipes protruding Irom the rooI shall consist oI stainless steel
with a minimal width oI 10 mm.
I) Separation Iabrics
The separation between a concrete base and a waterprooIing
membrane or the separation between waterprooIing membranes and a
thermic insulation layer or crushed aggregate above the waterprooIing
membrane, shall consist oI geotextile (non-woven) Iabric weighing at
least 400 gr/sq.m. or woven polypropylene strips net weighing 180
kg/sq.m. For the properties oI the separation Iabrics Ior protection, see
050222 The base Ior the rooI's waterprooIing
The concrete base shall be prepared as stated above in sub-chapter 0501. For
other bases such as sheet metal, the preparation shall be as required in the Special
SpeciIication.
05 (2004)
23
PVC membranes (except Ior membranes with a lower bracing layer and
membranes Iully bonded to the base) shall be set on the base above the separation
layer made oI synthetic geotextile Iabric (non-woven).
050223 Installation oI PVC membranes by Iree setting
The membranes shall be unrolled and Ireely set on all the horizontal surIace oI
the rooI and Iully bonded on the surIaces oI the raisings (such as parapets) as
well as next to them, in accordance with the design's requirements and the
recommendations oI the ManuIacturer. The membranes shall also be bonded to
the base within 40 horizontal centimeters, next to the bases oI raisings, pipes, etc.
The upper Iinishing shall be Iormed with the section, according to what shall be
required in the Drawings and to the ManuIacturer's recommendations. The
welded membranes shall be larger than the rooI's dimensions by 4 in each
direction, so as to compensate Ior eventual Iuture shrinkage. Surplus membranes
shall be leIt, as stated above, close to the parapets and the zone oI the rooI's ridge
lines.
The connection oI membranes between themselves shall be perIormed by hot
welding or by "bonding" (welding with a solvent), according to the
ManuIacturer's instructions, subject to meeting the requirements oI SI 1430, Part
1.
Manual welding shall be perIormed in two stages:
In the Iirst stage - only inner parts distant by more than 20 mm Irom the edge,
shall be welded.
In the second stage - 20 external mm shall be welded, under control. In the
course oI the welding, a compaction shall be created by the use oI a plastic roller
which shall extrude liquid PVC "paint" Irom the lower part oI the membrane.
Whenever the welding shall be executed by means oI an automatic machine, the
width oI the welding shall not be less than 30 mm. This welding shall be
executed in one single continuous stage.
Following the application, the quality oI the overlaps shall be examined; all the
welds shall be inspected by the use oI a screwdriver. Whenever the screwdriver
shall Iully penetrate any place, it shall be corrected by the welding oI a patch as
stated Iurther below. Following the welding, overlap putty shall be spread along
all the welds, at a thickness oI at least 0.3 mm, within a range oI about 1.5 m on
each side oI the overlap line and in such a way as to "eliminate" the "step"
created between the membranes.
Each deIect in a membrane or an overlap shall be corrected by means oI a patch
welded to the waterprooIing membrane. The size oI the patch shall be so that it
shall be overrun by 7 cm at least in all the directions oI the deIect and be without
sharp corners but rounded oII corners.
The Iormation oI the gutters (rainwater collectors) details and oI the pipelines
shall be executed by the welding oI corners, pipeline parts and ready-made
collectors parts to the waterprooIing membrane. The welding shall be executed
aIter the correct cutting oI the waterprooIing membrane, according to the
membranes ManuIacturer's instructions.
05 (2004)
24
Should it not be possible to manuIacture a ready-made part, it shall be Iormed
with a PVC membrane having properties similar to those oI the waterprooIing
material, but be 2 mm thick, without any internal reinIorcement nor a Ielt base
under it. The upper part oI the elements (except Ior the collectors) shall be
Iormed by a metal section and "putty," according to the ManuIacturer's
instructions.
The Iinishing oI the waterprooIing membrane along the wall's periphery and
around raisings, shall be perIormed as Iollows:
a) The covering membranes shall start Irom the upper end oI the designed
waterprooIing line and be installed according to the shape oI the
parapet by Iull bonding to the parapet and the PVC membrane on the
horizontal surIace, according to the method and with the glues
described above.
b) The upper Iinish shall be with a Iixation aluminum section or with a
PVC coated metal section and "sealing putty" as required in the
Drawings and according to above paragraph 050221.
The section shall be attached to the base at 20 cm intervals.
050224 Consolidation oI the membranes on the rooI
On top oI the membranes a geotextile membrane shall be installed as stated in
above paragraph 050221 I).
Should it not be otherwise stated in the Special SpeciIication, on top oI the
geotextile membrane shall be installed concrete Ilooring tiles at least 5 cm thick,
in walking lines having a width above 60 cm along the rooI's periphery and 4
sq.m in the corners.
In all the rest oI the surIace, aggregate shall be spread having a height oI 5 cm,
according to paragraph 05076 Iurther below.
050225 Installation oI PVC membranes by mechanical Iixation
The membranes shall comprise an inner Iabric reinIorcement, as required in the
Special SpeciIication and according to the deIinitions in SI 1430, Part 1,
denomination [ A or B.
Following the completion oI the work as stated in above paragraph 050223, the
membranes shall be consolidated to the rooI by means oI a mechanical Iixation.
The Iixation Iitting shall Iit the base in which the Iixation shall be perIormed
(concrete, light concrete, thermic insulation or on top a sheet metal, etc.). The
Iixation shall be executed according to the membranes ManuIacturer's
instructions.
The Iollowing are the minimal requirements Ior the Iixation Iitting:
a) It shall have a pulling-out oI not less than 500 Newton in axial pulling;
b) The diameter oI the Iixation washer shall be not less than 50 mm and
the width oI the horizontal Iixation section not less than 2.5 cm
05 (2004)
25
c) The number oI Iixations shall not be less than three Iixations per sq.m
and at intervals under 70 cm between one Iixation to the one next to it.
At the rooI's corners (2 m in each direction) the number oI Iixations
shall not be under six Iixations per sq.m.
05 (2004)
26
0503 Waterproofing by Other Methods
05030 General
In the Iollowing paragraphs are mentioned additional waterprooIing methods.
The waterprooIing, including its Iinish, shall be executed as required in the
Drawings, the Special SpeciIication and the other Contract Documents.
The materials shall be supplied in packs that shall bear all the identiIication
details and the application instructions oI the ManuIacturer.
05031 Multi-layer Bitumen Waterproofing Applied Hot
050310 General
Multi-layer liquid bitumen waterprooIing shall be applied hot (the bitumen's
temperature shall be between 130 to 190 C), with the execution oI a Ileece
bituminous reinIorcement between the layers.
050311 Materials
a) Bituminous fleece - A glass Ileece saturated with bitumen plant-made
(hereinaIter the "bituminous Ileece"). The term Ileece relates to bonded
Iibers Ilakes, reinIorced by entire Iibers passing through a longitudinal
direction at Iixed interval. The properties oI membrane shall be as
required in the Special SpeciIication and Iit the requirements oI IIS
451. The type shall be at least similar to GF50-OB-S-S-1.2-1.3.
b) Glass fibers fabric - The material Ior reinIorcing the Iormation oI
cants and raisings shall be a glass Iibers Iabric (net) weighing at least
60 gr/sq.m, designation GW60 according to the deIinition oI IIS 451.
The minimal strength oI the membrane shall be 500 Newton to 50 mm
width, in both directions.
The number oI wires per cm in each direction shall be not less than three
and not more than Iive.
c) Primer's material - It shall be according to the recommendation oI the
ManuIacturer Iitting a speciIic base.
d) Separation layer material - II required, it shall be as stated in IIS 451.
e) Bitumen - The bitumen shall be blown bitumen oI the 105/25 type.
I) Sand for sinking - The sand Ior sinking in the upper layer shall be
natural sand as deIined in SI 3 and according to the classiIication oI the
range in the sieve 0.15/0.60.
g) The radiation prooI material Ior waterprooIing exposed to the sun shall
be as stated in paragraph 05074 below.
050312 The base Ior waterprooIing the rooI
05 (2004)
27
The rooI's surIaces shall be made ready Ior their waterprooIing as detailed in sub-
chapter 0501. At all the intersections oI various planes, concave cants shall be
Iormed as speciIied above in paragraph 050141.
050313 The composition oI the waterprooIing layers
Unless otherwise required in the Contract Documents, there shall be a Iull
bonding oI the layers to the base's layers, as well as between the layers
themselves. HereinaIter is a characteristic section oI the waterprooIing layers:
a) Characteristic cross-section oI the waterprooIing layers in horizontal
surIaces:
One base layer (or separation layer iI requested in one oI the Contract
Documents), three 105/25 blown hot bitumen layers.
The bitumen shall be heated up slowly, without any direct contact between
Iire and the packing.
Between each pair oI hot bitumen layers, a bituminous Ileece membrane
shall be installed (as speciIied in paragraph 050311); on top oI the upper
bitumen layer, sand shall be spread out and Iollowing that the bleaching
shall be executed.
The average total thickness oI the waterprooIing system in the horizontal
surIace cross-section shall be 6 mm. At each point oI the horizontal surIace,
where a check shall be carried out, the thickness shall not be under 5 mm.
b) Characteristic cross-section oI the waterprooIing layers in raisings and
on vertical surIaces:
One base layer and Iour layers oI 105/25 blown hot bitumen. Between each
pair oI bitumen layers, a glass Iibers Iabric membrane shall be installed. On
top oI the upper bitumen layer, sand shall be spread out and a bleaching
shall be executed.
The average total thickness oI the waterprooIing system in raisings and
vertical surIaces shall be 5 mm. At each point in raisings and vertical
surIaces, where a check shall be carried out, the minimal thickness shall be
4 mm.
050314 WaterprooIing layers atop a separation layer
Should a separation layer be required, it shall be executed as stated in above
paragraph 050214 c).
WaterprooIing layers atop a separation layer shall be as stated in above paragraph
050313.
The waterprooIing layer shall be executed by Iull bonding to the separation layer.
050315 Application oI the waterprooIing layers
The Iollowing is the detail oI waterprooIing layers applications:
05 (2004)
28
a) Spreading the primer on the horizontal and vertical surIaces at the rate
oI about 250 gr/sq.m.
It shall not be permissible to install the Iirst waterprooIing layer beIore that
the primer shall be touch-dry, among others reasons because oI slipping
danger.
b) A Iirst Iormation oI the waterprooIing layers in the zones oI the cants
oI the sides oI the raisings, oI the water outlets, the collectors, etc.; it
shall consist oI one hot bitumen layer and strips oI glass Iibers Iabric at
least 30 cm wide. The thickness oI the bitumen shall be such that it
shall be possible to distinguish that the Iabric has been sunken into it.
c) The layers in the horizontal surIaces shall be as detailed above. The
layers shall be Iully sunk into the liquid hot bitumen and with a little
somehow surplus, in such a way that shall ensure Iull bonding, without
imprisoning air. The Contractor shall pour extra quantities oI bitumen
in Iront oI the roll and while it shall be rolled and sunk into the
bitumen which shall be pushed Iorward. The Contractor shall make
sure that the bitumen shall have an appropriate temperature at the time
oI the sinking oI the membrane into the bitumen Iound ahead oI the
membrane.
d) In raisings, Iollowing the end oI the waterprooIing execution on
horizontal surIaces, an additional Iormation Ior the raisings shall be
carried out, which shall be similar to that in sub-paragraph b) above,
but up to 50 mm below the water drip.
The Iinal Iormation shall include two hot bitumen layers having one glass
Iibers Iabric between them and be carried out up to the bottom oI the water
drip.
e) The spreading oI sand shall be perIormed as the bitumen in the upper
layer shall be still liquid and hot, with Iull cover oI the bitumen layer
with sand.
050316 Protection oI the waterprooIing against sun radiation
The rooI shall be bleached by two layers oI bleaching material as detailed Iurther
below in paragraph 05074. Each one oI the layers shall Iully cover the rooI's
surIace.
05032 Multi-layer Bituminous Waterproofing Reinforced with Glass Fibers
Fabric Applied Hot
Multi-layer bituminous waterprooIing reinIorced by reinIorced Iabrics (and not
by bitumen saturated membrane) shall be installed on basements walls only iI the
soil shall be well drained (type A soil, as stated in paragraph 0504 Iurther below).
The materials and the work shall be as speciIied in above paragraph 05031, but
the waterprooIing reinIorcement shall consist oI glass Iibers Iabrics as stated in
above paragraph 050315, in place oI the bitumen saturated Ileece.
05 (2004)
29
The total thickness oI the waterprooIing system in raisings and vertical surIaces
shall be 4 mm. At each point in raisings and vertical surIaces, where a check
shall be carried out, the minimal thickness shall be 3 mm.
05033 Bitumen Emulsions
050330 General
The materials' properties, their testing methods and the execution oI
the bituminous emulsions described hereinaIter shall be according to
the Special SpeciIication.
050331 Single-component bituminous emulsion
Single-component bituminous emulsion shall be installed on basements walls
only in soils that drain well or on sun radiation protected rooIs.
The waterprooIing system shall include at least Iour layers oI bituminous
emulsion that shall not re-disintegrate in the presence oI water. In the
waterprooIing shall be integrated two glass Iabric layers (net) having a minimal
strength oI 500 Newton Ior a 5 cm width, in both directions.
The average total thickness oI the dry waterprooIing system shall be 5 mm. At
each point where a check shall be carried out, the minimal thickness shall be not
less than 4 mm.
050332 Bituminous emulsion with single-component polymer
The waterprooIing system shall include at least Iour layers oI bituminous
emulsion that shall not re-disintegrate in the presence oI water. In the
waterprooIing shall be integrated two glass Iabric layers (net) having a minimal
strength oI 450 Newton Ior a 5 cm width, in both directions.
The average total thickness oI the dry waterprooIing system shall be 5 mm. At
each point where a check shall be carried out, the minimal thickness shall be not
less than 4 mm.
050333 Sprayed bitumen - two components polymer emulsion
The bituminous emulsion comprising polymer shall be sprayed simultaneously
with material and Iiber glass Iabric (size oI "eyes" 3-4 mm).
The minimal dry thickness oI the material including the reinIorcement layer,
shall be 5 mm.
05034 Cold Bituminous Putty with Bitumen Saturated Glass Fleece
The method detailed hereinaIter shall be a method oI spreading the cold
bituminous putty and oI bonding bituminous saturated glass Ileece. The putty
shall be a viscous bituminous mixture consisting oI bitumen, organic solvent and
unorganic materials, that shall stand up to the requirements oI ASTM-D-2823
Standard.
05 (2004)
30
The application oI the cold bituminous putty shall be according to the
ManuIacturer's instructions. The order oI application shall be as stated
hereinaIter:
a) Spreading on the base and waiting Ior a touch-drying;
b) WaterprooIing along the connection lines oI the surIace with parapets,
outlets, etc. by spreading cold bituminous putty;
c) Execution oI a cold putty layer at the rate oI 2 kg/sq.m down to the
parapets and bonding a bitumen saturated glass Ileece with overlaps oI
at least 10 cm;
d) WaterprooIing along the connection lines oI the surIace with parapets,
outlets, etc. by spreading cold bituminous putty.
05035 Two-layer Thick Bituminous Putty for Installation by a Putty Knife
This method shall be mainly destined Ior basements walls in type A soil (well
drained soil). This type oI system shall be executed according to the instructions
oI the ManuIacturer and as stated hereinaIter:
a) Spreading on the base and waiting Ior touch-drying;
b) Application oI a (cold) bituminous putty at the rate oI 3-5 liter/sq.m.
The putty shall be single or twin component, to a dry thickness oI not
less than 2 mm, Ior application by means oI a putty-kniIe. The layer
shall be compressed by the putty-kniIe on the surIace.
c) The sinking oI glass Iabric with 3-4 mm "eyes" (depending on the
viscosity oI the putty). The Iabric shall be oI a type Iitting the putty.
The minimal strength in both directions oI the Iabric shall be at least
1000 Newton Ior 50 mm width.
d) On the next day, an additional layer shall be executed as stated in
above paragraphs B0 and c), in order to obtain an average thickness oI
at least 6 mm and not less than 5 mm in any checked point.
05036 Acrylic Emulsion
This waterprooIing method shall not be permitted in the Iollowing places: rooIs
that shall be tiled, rooIs having a slope oI less than 2.5 nor rooIs which shall
not be well drained, in the waterprooIing oI basements, wet rooms and spaces.
The properties oI the acrylic emulsion (without the reinIorcement) shall meet the
requirements oI SI 4518, grade "M." The execution oI waterprooIing layers with
a dry thickness over 0.5 mm per layer shall not be permissible. The single
waterprooIing layer shall be executed with material weighing less than 1.5
kg/sq.m. Utmost attention shall be given so as not to execute the waterprooIing
within a range oI 6 hours Iollowing a rainIall or dew or when rain shall be
expected within the coming 24 hours.
The waterprooIing oI rooIs with acrylic emulsion shall be executed in
combination with a Iiber reinIorcement layer set between the waterprooIing
05 (2004)
31
material layers. The minimal dry thickness oI the waterprooIing membrane shall
not be under 2 mm. The membrane shall be applied in at least Iour layers.
The minimal thickness oI the waterprooIing material (net) above the Iibers oI the
reinIorcement material shall be 0.8 mm.
The testing oI the waterprooIing oI the present system shall be carried out at least
one month aIter the completion oI the installation and as stated in above
paragraph 050071.
05037 Foamed Polyurethane
050371 Foamed polyurethane with sealing elastomeric polymer protection
Polyurethane Ioamed on Site, protected by an elastomeric polymer layer, shall be
executed on rooIs with a minimal slope oI 2.5 everywhere. The minimal
thickness oI the Ioamed polyurethane shall be 20 mm. The minimal density shall
be 38 kg/cu.m. The Ioamed polyurethane shall meet the requirements oI SI 1229,
Part 3, denomination "200 kilopascal." The minimal thickness oI the
waterprooIing layer and elastomeric protection shall be 1.5 mm.
The application oI the elastomeric protection shall take place 24 hours Iollowing
the end oI the application oI the Ioamed polyurethane and not later than one
week, as the polyurethane layer shall be dry.
050372 Foamed polyurethane with polymeric plastering
Polyurethane Ioamed on Site shall meet the requirements oI SI 1229, Part 3 and
be protected with polymeric plastering. It shall be perIormed on sloping rooIs
having a minimal slope oI 3 everywhere.
The minimal thickness oI the Ioamed polyurethane shall be 25 mm, the minimal
density shall be 38 kg/cu.m and it shall meet the requirements oI SI 1229, Part 3
denomination "200 Kilopascal."
The minimal thickness oI the polymeric plastering layer shall be 4 mm (at any
point).
The application oI the polymeric plastering layer shall take place 24 hours
Iollowing the application oI the Ioamed polyurethane and not later than one
week. In the course oI the application oI the plastering, there shall be no water
puddle any where in the treated surIace.
05038 Elastomeric Membranes of the EPDM Type
050380 General
EPDM membranes shall be laid on the rooI by one oI the two Iollowing methods:
a) Freely laid membranes - A weight shall be set upon them so as to
prevent the liIting oI the membranes due to wind suction as well as
physical damage to the membrane; see details Iurther below.
b) Fully bonded membranes - This method shall be used whenever
required and speciIied in the Special SpeciIication oI the Building.
05 (2004)
32
050381 Materials
a) The waterprooIing membranes shall meet the requirements oI SI 1430,
Part 2. The membrane's thickness shall be as required in the Contract
Documents, but not less than 1.5 mm.
The membranes and welding strips (should there by any) shall be
waterprooIed, without holes, Ioreign parts nor projections, uniIorm and
devoid oI other deIects that may endanger their integrity.
The edges oI the membranes shall be straight and Ilat so as to enable proper,
continuous and sealed connections between the membranes.
b) Materials Ior the connection between the membranes and auxiliary
materials.
1. Welding ribbons - The ribbons Ior welding the membranes
in the Plant shall be according to the recommendation oI the
ManuIacturer. The minimal width oI the welding ribbons
shall be 25 mm, the overlap between membranes shall be at
least 23 mm (the 2 projections and visible millimeters shall
be the witness to the presence oI the ribbon);
2. Bonding ribbons - The bonding ribbons Ior bonding
membranes on the Site, between themselves, shall be
according to the ManuIacturer's recommendation and oI a
minimal width oI 80 mm;
3. Glues - The glues Ior bonding membranes between
themselves as well as between the membranes and
horizontal as well as vertical surIaces, including parapets,
shall be according to the recommendations oI the
membranes' ManuIacturer;
4. "Putty" - The "putty" used Ior securing overlaps, shall be
applied on all the overlaps lines between the membranes that
shall be glued to the surIace, or between the membranes in a
Plant manuIactured "carpet," in places where the welding
ribbon shall not be visible at the edge oI the overlap. The
"putty" shall suit the membranes and be as recommended by
the ManuIacturer;
The "putty" Ior the upper waterprooIing shall be set upon the Iixation
section or clamp in all the raisings, in order to prevent water
inIiltration, or between membranes and the base under them;
The "putties" shall be as recommended by the membrane's
ManuIacturer and stand up to the requirements oI SI 1536, type
"25HM" (F) in the wear and bonding to concrete and aluminum
paragraphs.
5. The "primer," solvents and other auxiliary materials shall be
according to the recommendations oI the membrane's
ManuIacturer.
05 (2004)
33
c) Details oI corners and pipelines passages - These shall be
industrialized parts and ready made oI a material suiting the
membrane's material. In the absence oI industrialized parts and
Iollowing the consent oI the Inspector oI Works, corners and pipelines
passages in the surIace shall be Iormed with materials similar to
membrane's material, as recommended by the membranes'
ManuIacturer. Shall a Ilashing (on rubberized auxiliary membrane) be
used, its minimal thickness shall be 1.5 mm.
d) The section Ior the Iixation oI the membrane's end - shall be made oI
aluminum with 10 micron anodic plastering (type AA10 in SI 325).
The section shall have a minimal thickness oI 2.0 mm, be bent on both
sides at 45 angles, so as to enable the Iilling with sealing putty and to
prevent damage to the membrane.
e) Dowels - The dowels Ior the Iixation oI the sections unto a parapet or a
raising shall be installed at 20 cm intervals and be as required in above
paragraph 050221.
I) Clamps - The clamps Ior the attachment oI waterprooIing membranes
around pipes projecting Irom the rooI's surIace, shall be made oI
stainless steel and be at least 10 mm wide.
g) Separation Iabrics - The separation Iabrics shall be as stated in
paragraph 050221 I`.
050382 The base Ior the waterprooIing oI the rooI
The base Ior the waterprooIing oI the rooI shall be prepared as stated above in
sub-chapter 0501.
Should the base consist oI concrete that was not "helicopter" smoothened, a
synthetic geotextile (un-woven) Iabric weighing at least 200 gr/sq.m shall be
installed as part oI the waterprooIing system.
050383 Application in loose setting
The membranes shall be brought to the Building Site in two main Iorms:
- standard width membranes
- large "carpets" that shall include membranes welded between
themselves. The membranes shall be welded in the Plant with the use
oI bonding ribbons.
The area on which membranes shall be bonded, shall be thoroughly cleared Irom
dust and then cleaned with a material recommended by the membrane's
ManuIacturer.
The membranes or the "carpets" shall be bonded one to the other on the rooI, by
means oI glue recommended by the membrane's ManuIacturer. The minimal
width oI the overlap between "carpets" shall be 15 cm. The minimal width oI the
overlap between membranes shall be 10 cm (except Ior the longer side where it
shall be 15 cm). On all the overlap lines, an overlap "putty" shall be spread. The
thickness oI the "putty" shall be over 1 mm.
05 (2004)
34
The application oI membranes in Iree laying shall be as speciIied hereinaIter.
a) The membranes shall be set slack and not tight (Iollowing the
"slackness duration" on the rooI). The membranes shall be brought
with a surIace extra, that shall be used mainly the rooI's periphery zone
and the zone oI the ridge lines.
b) The Iormation oI the intersections between various planes in the rooI-
parapet / corners, rooI-raisings, etc. shall be according to the Drawings
and the Iollowing instructions:
1. An EPDM membrane at least 35 cm wide shall be bonded to
the base by means oI a glue, except at a distance oI 5 cm
both sides oI the intersection line and shall serve as a
reinIorcement membrane, so that the membrane shall remain
loose at the center.
The rooIs membranes shall be bonded to the horizontal part oI the
reinIorcement membrane. The minimal width oI the overlap shall be
15 cm.
2. The reinIorcement membrane shall start Irom the upper edge
designed Ior the cessation oI the waterprooIing in the wall or
the parapet (such as under the water drip), go down on the
parapets/raisings surIace and be bonded to the membrane as
well as on at least 15 cm above the horizontal waterprooIing.
At the brink oI the bonding an "overlap putty" shall be
installed, as detailed above.
c) Every deIect in membranes or overlaps shall be corrected by the use oI
a patch, in a process similar to a connection between membranes. The
patch shall be longer than the deIective zone by at least 20 cm in each
direction.
d) The installation oI "carpets" in Iree laying.
1. At the time oI the application oI the "carpets," extras shall be
leIt over as stated in above sub-paragraph a).
2. The carpet shall be raised on the wall or parapet surIace up
to under the water drip. Attention shall be given to the
execution oI the extras by providing Iolds and bends in the
carpet itselI. In the zones oI concave corners and in all the
sections where the carpet shall be cut and made Iair, it shall
be Iormed as stated in sub-paragraph b) 1. and 2.
3. In all the raisings zone, the carpet shall be bonded to the
base by Iull bonding.
4. DeIects shall be dealt with as required in above paragraph c).
050384 Consolidation oI the membranes on the rooI
On top oI the membranes, a geotextile membrane shall be laid as stated in above
paragraph 050221 I).
05 (2004)
35
Unless otherwise stated in the Special SpeciIication, on top oI the geotextile
membranes, concrete Ilooring tiles at least 5 cm thick shall be installed in
walking lanes having a width oI not less than 60 cm, along the rooI's periphery as
well as in about 4 sq.m at the corners.
On the rest oI the surIace, aggregates 5 cm high shall be spread according to
050385 Bleaching
Such places leIt exposed Iollowing the consolidation as stated in paragraph
050384 above, shall be cleaned Irom dust or all Ioreign material and then
bleached as required in the Special SpeciIication and according to what is stated
in paragraph 05074 Iurther below.

05 (2004)
36
0504 The Waterproofing of Basements and Wall Bases
05040 General
The waterprooIing shall be executed as required hereinaIter, according to one oI
the Iollowing methods.
a) Multi-layer bituminous system, as stated Iurther below in paragraph
05041.
b) Polymer enhanced bituminous membranes, as stated Iurther below in
paragraph 05042.
c) WaterprooI systems by spreading, rolling or spraying oI materials and
reinIorcements suited one to the other, as required in the Special
SpeciIication.
The system shall suit the conditions oI the soil in which the basement shall be
Iound. For this purpose, a distinction shall be made between two types oI soil: A
or B.
Type A soil - soil draining quickly
Type B soil - soil not draining quickly.
The waterprooIing oI basements Iound all the time or Irom time to time in
underground water shall be perIormed as required in the Special SpeciIication.
The waterprooIing oI a suspended Iloor shall be executed according to the details
in the Drawings and the Special SpeciIication.
The preparation oI the surIaces shall be carried out as stated above in sub-chapter
0501.
05041 Multi-layer Bituminous Waterproofing
050410 General
In any case, the waterprooIing oI shelters and wall bases shall be executed.
Unless otherwise stated in the Special SpeciIication, the waterprooIing shall be
executed according to the B type oI soil - soil that shall not be drained quickly.
050411 WaterprooIing under the Iloor in type A soil
The work shall be carried out on a concrete base smoothened and clear oI any
dust or deIects and include the waterprooIing or water collecting and draining
pits (the Iloors and the walls oI the pits, on their outer side).
The waterprooIing shall be executed as stated with respect to multi-layers
waterprooIing in paragraph 05031 above, with no obligation to cure and dry the
lean concrete and Iully bond the waterprooIing to it.
The waterprooIing shall be protected until the casting oI the Iloor as a concrete
layer, as stated in paragraph 05073 Iurther below.
05 (2004)
37
050412 WaterprooIing under the Iloor in type B soil
The work shall be identical to what has been stated with respect to waterprooIing
Iloors in type A soil in paragraph 050411 above, with the addition oI one layer oI
bituminous Ileece and one layer oI hot bitumen. The displacement oI the Ileece
between the layers shall be at the rate oI 1/3 oI the width oI the second and third
layers. The minimal total thickness oI the waterprooIing membranes shall be 6.5
mm.
050413 WaterprooIing oI walls in type A soil
The waterprooIing oI the walls shall be carried out as speciIied with respect to
the waterprooIing oI surIaces oI raisings, in above paragraph 050313.
All the layers shall be executed as required in the Drawings and terminate at the
lower level oI the Iloor-slab, with an overlap oI 25 cm with the Iloor's
waterprooIing. The upper edge oI the basement waterprooIing, its Iixation,
concealment and protection, shall be as detailed in the Drawings.
Upon the completion oI the waterprooIing works and Iollowing the inspection
and the approval oI the Inspector oI Works, the Contractor shall execute the
protection oI the bitumen layers.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the bituminous layers shall
be protected by the bonding oI rigid Ioamed polyurethane 5 cm thick plates,
according to SI 1229, Part 1 denomination 150 Kilopascal (P-30).
The reIilling around the outer walls shall be executed only Iollowing the issue oI
the approval oI the Inspector oI Works oI the execution on the protection layers
oI the bituminous layers.
The reIilling around the Building's walls shall be devoid oI large stones and clods
as well as Irom any rubbish that may damage the waterprooIing. The Iilling work
shall be executed with the attention needed Ior protecting the waterprooIing.
050414 WaterprooIing oI walls in type B soil
The waterprooIing shall be executed as stated in above paragraph 050413, with
the addition oI one layer oI glass Iabric and layers oI bitumen. The minimal
thickness oI the waterprooIing shall be 8 mm.
050415 WaterprooIing oI a rooI under the ground level
The waterprooIing shall be executed as stated in paragraph 050412. The rooI's
waterprooIing layers shall overlap on the walls waterprooIing layers, up to 20 cm
below the rooI's casting line.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the bitumen layers shall be
protected by the bonding oI 5 cm thick rigid Ioamed polyurethane plates
according to SI 1229, Part 1, denomination 150 Kilopascal (P-30).
050416 WaterprooIing oI shelters
Unless otherwise stated in the Special SpeciIication, the waterprooIing oI
underground shelters in any type oI soil, shall be executed as required in
05 (2004)
38
paragraph 050414 Ior the walls and in above paragraph 050412 Ior Iloor-slabs
and ceilings.
05042 Waterproofing with Enhanced Bituminous Membranes
The waterprooIing oI the basement (the rooI oI the basement, or under the
basement's Iloor-slab, including the basement's walls) consisting oI enhanced
bitumen membranes shall be executed as a double-layer system, as speciIied in
above paragraph 050215 with respect to rooIs.
WaterprooIing by means oI enhanced bituminous membranes shall be executed
by Iull bonding to the concrete base (except Ior lean concrete).
In type A soils, unless otherwise stated, the waterprooIing shall be executed
under the Iloor-slab and on the walls, in one single membranes layer.
The upper brink oI the enhanced membranes, their Iixation and protection shall
be executed according to the details in the Drawings. Unless otherwise stated, the
upper line oI the membrane shall be at height oI at least 20 cm above the ground
level.

05 (2004)
39

0505 Humidity Separation Course
05050 General
The humidity separation course shall be installed below external walls and
partitions in direct contact with the ground.
No humidity separation course shall be executed in structural cross-sections
indicated in the Drawings.
Special attention shall be given to the cleanliness oI exposed concrete wall bases
or oI any other surIace that shall not be plastered nor clad. Every surplus or
excess oI waterprooIing material or oI visible membrane shall be cut oII in a
clean and straight line aIter the completion oI the work.
The Iollowing are three execution methods. Unless otherwise stated, the humidity
separation course shall be executed according to hereinaIter paragraph 05051.
05051 Bituminous Fleece
Bituminous Ileece membranes - the surIace oI the wall base's top shall be
covered by a basic spread and blown bitumen oI the 75/25 or 85/40 type. On the
spread, a membrane shall be bonded with overlaps oI at least 10 cm. The
overlaps surIaces as well as the membrane's surIace shall be covered by an
additional bitumen layer.
In the absence oI a request in the Special SpeciIication, this alternative shall be
the one to be executed.
05052 Bituminous Membrane
There shall be a bitumen spread Iollowed by the installation oI a membrane with
an aluminum Ioil. The minimal thickness oI the course, including the membrane,
shall be 3 mm.
05 (2004)
40

0506 Waterproofing of Wet Rooms
05060 General
Wet areas whether tiled or not tiled shall be deIined as surIaces being Irom time
to time in humid or with water at a high rate conditions such as: public kitchens,
cloakrooms, toilet rooms, public or private shower rooms, laundry rooms, etc.
The waterprooIing oI cold rooms shall be executed according to a Special
SpeciIication.
The waterprooIing oI rooms such as liquid chemical materials storage rooms,
garages and workshops where work with greases shall be perIormed, car washing
areas or oI other washing liquids which are not water, water reservoirs, shall be
executed according to a Special SpeciIication.
05061 Classification of Wet Rooms
The classiIication according to the waterprooIing requirements oI wet rooms
dealt with the present chapter, shall be at the Iollowing levels:
a) Wet rooms with little water such as in toilet rooms or shower rooms in
residential apartments which are cleaned only with wet rag.
b) Very wet rooms with large amount oI water and intensive washing
such as shower cloakrooms in institutions, public toilets, public
kitchens such as in army camps, hotels, etc.
05062 Preparations Works Prior to the Waterproofing
Along the periphery oI an area deIined as a wet area, on the line separating it
Irom dry areas, a bond-beam (concrete raising) shall be cast on the Iloor concrete
slab on which the walls shall be erected at a later stage (walls consisting oI
various materials including light partitions made oI gypsum plates or gypsum
blocks).
Bond-beams shall also be cast under partitions Iound within the limits oI the wet
areas.
In level A wet rooms, the bond-beams shall have a height oI not less than 4 cm
above the designed Ilooring level.
Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, in level B, the bond-beams shall have a
height oI not less than 10 cm above the designed Ilooring level and their width
shall be identical to the width oI the Iuture wall that shall be built upon them.
The bond-beams shall consist oI grade B-20 concrete, at least. These bond-beams
shall also be cast around openings and shaIts oI all kinds (except in passages).
In the range oI passages and openings (doors, etc.), the upper line oI the bond-
beam shall be at the level oI the tiling bonding. The passage oI horizontal
passage oI pipelines in the rooms' Iloor and especially horizontal penetrations oI
pipelines in the lower part oI walls shall be avoided.
05 (2004)
41
Pipelines penetration through walls shall be above the waterprooIing level,
except Ior the Iloor's drainage, the waterprooIing drainage as well as Ior steel
pipelines or sleeves penetrating vertically through the Iloor.
Around the pipelines, there shall be a Iree gap so as to enable eIIicient
waterprooIing around them.
05063 Waterproofing Works of the Concrete Slabs
Upon completion oI the concrete bond-beams as required in above paragraph
05062, prior to the execution oI the Ilooring works, waterprooIing shall be
executed with materials capable to stand up to permanent resting oI water and to
detergents.
Unless otherwise stated in the Special SpeciIication, the waterprooIing shall be
executed as required hereinaIter.
In level A wet rooms (see above paragraph 05061), the Iirst waterprooIing shall
be executed by means oI industrialized systems based on a made elastic hydraulic
cement and a secondary waterprooIing with a spread bituminous system as
described in paragraph 050412 (between these two systems all the horizontal
pipelines that it shall not be possible to prevent their passage on the Iloor's
surIace shall be executed).
In level B wet rooms (see above paragraph 05061), unless otherwise stated in the
Special SpeciIication, the waterprooIing shall be executed with materials similar
to the material in above paragraph 050412 or in combination with what has been
stated in above paragraph 05042 (only one membrane layer).
The waterprooIing according to the present paragraph shall also be perIormed on
the walls skirting and on the visible or concealed bond-beams, as above.
05064 Waterproofing Around Drains
In class B classiIication wet rooms, according to above paragraph 05061, the
waterprooIing shall be executed around water outlets to the drain at the level oI
the waterprooIing surIace, so that the water drainage above the waterprooIing
layers shall be Iree and undisturbed.
05065 Waterproofing of Walls
The waterprooIing shall be executed with cement mortar, as speciIied Ior
external plastering in Chapter 10 - Flooring and Cladding Works. A lower
sprinkled layer shall be executed as well as a leveling layer. The total thickness
oI the waterprooIing shall not be less than 12 mm.
05066 Testing the Waterproofing
In type B wet rooms, the waterprooIing shall be tested as detailed in paragraph
050071 above.
In type A wet rooms, should it be required in the Special SpeciIication, the
testing oI the Iloor's waterprooIing shall be perIormed Iollowing the execution oI
the Iirst waterprooIing system, prior to the installation oI the protection atop the
05 (2004)
42
waterprooIing, prior to the execution oI the Ilooring. The waterprooIing test shall
be perIormed as speciIied in above paragraph 050071.
05067 Filling and Protection Concrete
Should Iilling concrete be required in the Special SpeciIication, prior to the
execution oI the Iilling concrete above the waterprooIing, the Contractor shall
make sure that all the required preparations have been executed, as required in
paragraphs above, with special attention given to the conIormity oI the drainage
outlets level to the Drawings.
The Iilling concrete shall be oI grade B-20 at least, with aggregates having a
maximal size oI 10 mm. To the concrete shall be added additives oI recognized
acrylic polymeric emulsions types (such as acrylics or SBR) at the rate oI 10 oI
solid material with respect to the cement's weight. No steel reinIorcement mesh-
Iabrics shall be used in the Iilling or protection concrete.
A geotextile protection shall be as required in paragraph 05075 Iurther below.
The thickness oI the Iilling concrete shall be not less than 4 cm. The slope rate
shall be according to the Drawings.
The Iilling concrete shall be cured as required in Chapter 02 - Cast in Place
Concrete Works. The surIace oI the Iilling concrete shall be smooth without
projections nor sags.
Slopes shall not be Iormed by the use oI sand, sand with cement, aggregates,
Ytong, etc.
The Iinal levels oI the Iilling concrete shall Iit the Iinal level oI the Ilooring
surIace that shall be executed by bonding.
05068 Flooring
The Ilooring oI the slab shall be established in the Special SpeciIication, with
ceramic Ilooring tiles or terrazzo tiles as stated in Chapter 10 - Flooring and
Cladding Works.
05 (2004)
43
0507 Finishing, Waterproofing Protection and Roofs Bleaching
05070 General
The Contractor shall protect all the sealed areas against any damage in the whole
course oI the work until the handing-over oI the Building. The waterprooIing
methods requiring protection Irom sun radiation include also the execution oI a
protection layer that shall be executed by the WaterprooIing Contractor with
materials recommended by the ManuIacturer oI the waterprooIing material.
05071 Protection Against Vegetation Roots
Protection against vegetation roots shall be carried out iI required in the Special
SpeciIication.
a) Membranes comprising a chemical additive repelling vegetation roots.
b) Combination oI an assigned membrane comprising into it a "metallic
blocking" oI glass Iabric and copper Ioil in the waterprooIing system.
c) Coating oI the waterprooIing membranes with creamy waterprooIing
materials resistant to vegetation roots.
d) A protection membrane installed in the waterprooIing such as: high-
density polyethylene (HDP) having a thickness oI 1.5 mm.
The Contractor shall submit to the Inspector oI Works a certiIicate attesting to
the properties speciIied in the Special SpeciIication with respect to the method
that shall be chosen.
05072 Protection of the Waterproofing on Walls
The waterprooIing layers oI underground walls shall be protected until the
execution oI the reIilling as well as in the course oI the Iilling operation. For the
details oI the required protection, see above paragraph 050413. The Iilling work
shall be perIormed with care, in layers (see Chapter 01 oI the General
SpeciIication Ior Earthworks). The bituminous waterprooIing layers on
underground walls shall be bleached as long as no other protection work shall be
carried out.
05073 Protection of the Waterproofing Under the Basement's Floor-slab
For the purpose oI protecting the waterprooIed layers against damage in the
course oI the arrangement oI the reinIorcement on the slab as well as during the
casting and the treatment, the waterprooIing shall be protected until the casting oI
the Iloor by a B-15 grade concrete layer devoid oI coarse aggregate or
lightweight concrete at least 5 cm thick. The lightweight concrete shall stand up
to the requirements oI SI 1513 suiting slopes, the leveling oI Iloor-slabs and
waterprooIing bases.
In the course oI the execution oI a protection layer, it shall be make sure that it
shall be possible to remove the protection layer along the periphery without
damaging the waterprooIed layers Iound in the bedding strip projecting beyond
the basement's walls and this in order to enable the bonding oI waterprooIed
layers oI the walls to the Iloor-slab's waterprooIing.
05 (2004)
44
05074 Roofs Bleaching
The bleaching materials that shall be used above the waterprooIed layers shall be
oI the Iollowing types, as required above with respect to any method in the
a) Lime with the addition oI bonding latex comprising solids at the rate oI
5 oI the total amount oI the lime.
b) Industrialized emulsion paint oI the acrylic type standing up to the
requirements oI SI 1945 or SI 1731.
c) Paint based on aluminum Ilakes (iI recommended by the waterprooIing
material ManuIacturer).
d) Bleaching material recommended by the membrane's ManuIacturer.
e) Elastic coating on an acrylic base (or polyurethanic) standing up to the
requirements oI SI 4518, grade "R."
All the bleaching oI a rooI made waterprooI in the summer season shall be
executed not later than 24 hours Iollowing the completion oI the last layer or oI
the Ilooding (as speciIied in above paragraph 05006), all according to the later
date and in winter not later than 48 hours aIter it, or according to the instructions
oI the Inspector oI Works.
The bleaching oI rooIs shall also be required Ior industrialized membranes with
clear aggregates, in all the places where clear aggregates shall be missing on the
membrane's surIace including overlaps and be executed as stated in sub-
paragraph e) above with a thickness not under 1 mm.
With the completion oI the work, the rooI shall be bleached on its entire surIace
during all the warranty period as stated in paragraph 0508 Iurther below.
In the absence oI a request in the Special SpeciIication, the Contractor shall
execute the bleaching oI the rooI as required in above paragraph b). The amount
oI material shall be according to the instructions oI the ManuIacturer.
05075 Separation Layer between Membranes and Heavy Protection
Underneath the aggregates or underneath the tiles (in the walking lanes) a
separation layer shall be installed. The type oI separation shall be according to
the requirements in the Drawings. In the absence oI another instruction, one oI
the Iollowing materials shall be used:
a) Woven polypropylene ribbons net weighing 180 gr/sq.m having the
Iollowing properties:
Tensile strength 750 Newton; elongation 20. The test shall be carried out
according to ASTM-D-1117.
b) Geotextile membranes made oI synthetic polymeric Ielt, acrylene
polypropylene or polyester. The membranes properties shall be as
Iollows:
05 (2004)
45
The weight oI the membranes shall be 400 gr/sq.m; tensile strength 250
Newton in the longitudinal direction, 500 Newton in the transverse
direction; elongation 60; bursting strength 150 Newton. The test shall be
carried out according to ASTM-D-1117.
In the absence oI a request in the Special SpeciIication, the Contractor shall
execute the separation layer as required in above sub-chapter a).
05076 Aggregates Layer
Should it be required in one oI the Contract Documents, aggregates shall be
spread on the waterprooIed layer. Prior to the spreading oI the aggregates, the
Contractor shall install a separation layer as stated in above paragraph 05075.
The aggregates shall be oI crushed stone in a hammer crusher into a cubic Iorm,
as much as possible, or uncrushed river gravel having a clear color as much as
possible. The type oI aggregates Ior this purpose shall be subject to the approval
oI the Inspector oI Works.
The aggregates shall meet the requirements oI SI 3 and their sizes shall be 14 to
19 mm. In the zones oI the gutters, larger aggregates shall be used Irom 25 to 37
mm.
The aggregates shall be delivered washed and then stored on a clean surIace in
such a way that they shall not get mixed with building rubbish, soil nor Ioreign
materials. The spreading shall be executed so that no scraping oI the aggregates
to distances over 2 m shall be needed. For larger distances, wheelbarrows shall
be used. Spreading shall be achieved in such a way as to not damage the
waterprooIing and separation layers.
The thickness oI the aggregates layer shall be 2.5 times that oI the largest
aggregate but not less than 50 mm.
05077 Protection of the Waterproofing of Tiled Roofs and Balconies
The execution oI the waterprooIing oI rooIs, balconies and split-level stories
having underneath them a useIul space where the Iinishing shall be a Ilooring,
shall be as required in the Special SpeciIication.
In the absence oI a request in the Special SpeciIication, the protection underneath
the Ilooring shall be as speciIied hereinaIter:
a) Protection as required in above paragraph 05075.
b) Grade B-20 concrete 4-5 cm thick with no reinIorcement or coarse
aggregate.
The Ilooring shall be executed as required in Chapter 10 - Flooring and Cladding
Works.
05078 Hoods (heads of gutters)
Upon the completion oI the waterprooIing works, the Contractor shall make sure
that industrial hoods (gutter's heads) shall be installed on all the rooI's drainage
openings.
05 (2004)
46

05 (2004)
47
0508 Responsibility During the Warranty Period
05081 The Contractor's Responsibility during the Warranty Period
The instructions oI the present paragraph reIer to the inspection oI the
waterprooIing works during the warranty period deIined in the Contract, but not
less than during three (3) years aIter the day the work shall be handed over and
also at the end oI this period.
Should deIects be uncovered during the warranty period, as stated in paragraphs
55 and 56 oI ShelI 3210 oI the Contract, the Contractor shall perIorm all the
required corrections according to the instructions oI the Inspector oI Works.
The warranty period starts Irom the completion date oI the work as indicated in
paragraphs 54 and 55 oI the Contract's ShelI 3210. Should the Contract be
required to execute corrections during the period between two and three years in
the warranty period, the warranty period shall be extended, in the zone oI the
correction, by one additional winter season, that is until March 31
st
Iollowing the
end oI the three year warranty period.
Within the Iramework oI the Contractor's responsibility Ior the waterprooIing,
the condition oI the waterprooIing and the bleaching shall be inspected aIter the
Iirst rainy season Iollowing the execution oI the waterprooIing, as well as at the
end oI the warranty period. Should humidity stains or leaks be uncovered, the
Contractor shall renew the waterprooIing on a surIace that shall be determined by
the Inspector oI Works and not necessarily as local correction only.
Parts oI the rooI not bleached as required shall be bleached again. Each renewal
shall be executed by a method, materials and proIessional way used Ior the
original waterprooIing, or as shall be instructed by the Inspector oI Works.
The way Ior correcting / renewing the waterprooIing shall need the consent oI the
Inspector oI Works. The Contractor shall make sure that in the course oI the
correction or renewal oI the waterprooIing adjacent and other parts oI the
Building shall be properly protected; all places that shall be damaged, dirtied
shall be corrected and cleaned by the Contractor upon the completion oI the
correction / renewal oI the waterprooIing.
Small corrections that shall be executed without impairing the eIIicient
Iunctioning oI the waterprooIing system or the corrections works oI the
bleaching executed by another Contractor shall not represent a cause Ior the
Contractor to release himselI Irom responsibility Ior the work he shall execute as
stated in the Contract Documents.
05 (2004)
48
0509 Maintenance of Roofs
05090 General
Should the waterprooIing Contractor be required by the Work's Client to perIorm
a maintenance service in the course oI the warranty period or upon the
completion oI the warranty period, a separate Agreement shall be signed Ior the
maintenance, between the Client and the Contractor, hereinaIter "the Contractor."
This Agreement shall be a Special Agreement Ior Maintenance Works (to be
diIIerentiated Irom the Construction Agreement - ShelI 3210). The service in the
Maintenance Agreement shall include all the works Ior the execution oI current
maintenance and preventive maintenance. All the special requirements Ior the
maintenance works detailed Iurther below shall be as indicated in the Special
SpeciIication attached to the Maintenance Agreement.
The instructions oI the present paragraph are here to determine maintenance
ways, maintenance appointed times and documentation ways oI these works.
Likewise, they shall express the corrections requirements as deIined in paragraph
05094 and 05095 Iurther below.
The principles oI the present Chapter relate to rooIs covered with hot bitumen
layers, bitumen membranes, PVC membranes and EPDM membranes. With
respect to the other materials mentioned in sub-chapter 0503, the maintenance
shall be carried out according to a Special SpeciIication.
05091 Time and Process of the Inspection
a) Each year in the course oI the month oI September, or at a time that
shall be determined in the Special SpeciIication, the rooI shall be
inspect in the Iollowing subjects:
1. The cleaning oI the rooI Irom any Ioreign material.
2. The inspection oI the gutters integrity (including the upper
collectors and the lower bowl), their cleaning and the
removal oI obstructions, should they be needed.
3. Make sure oI the presence oI the raised protection net (hood)
at the inlet oI each collector.
4. Make sure that there shall be no tears, cracks nor penetration
oI Ioreign materials through the waterprooIing (the
continuity oI the waterprooIing layer).
5. Make sure that the upper vertical part oI the waterprooIing
shall be Iully bonded to the base and Iixed in such a way that
no water may inIiltrate between the waterprooIing and the
parapet oI the Building's walls.
6. The inspection oI the penetration oI pipelines and sleeves
through the waterprooIing as well as other Iacilities that pass
through the waterprooIing.
b) Once a year in the course oI the month oI March, the whole rooI shall
be inspected in the Iollowing subjects:
05 (2004)
49
1. The integrity oI the bleaching layer upon the entire surIace,
including parts waterprooIed vertically. In rooIs covered
with a bituminous membrane, comprising aggregates, the
presence oI the bleaching shall also be inspected in the
overalls as well as in the places that shall be blackened.
2. Make sure that there shall be no swelling in the surIace oI
the horizontal rooI.
3. Make sure oI the continuity and integrity oI the
waterprooIing layers.
4. In rooIs covered with EPDM or PVC, it shall be make sure
that no shrinkage oI the membrane has occurred ("escape" oI
the waterprooIing), such as in the intersections oI various
planes).
05092 Tests
The Contractor shall perIorm thermographic, electronic, Ilooding and sprinkling
tests, etc. should there be a request Ior them in the Special SpeciIication and
deIinitions oI their acceptance or rejections.
05093 Documentation and Reporting
For each rooI, a "RooI Dairy" shall be held and be Iound at the Client's oIIice.
The "rooI dairy" in which shall be written down the description and details oI the
waterprooIing and bleaching works perIormed on the rooI, according to the
Maintenance Agreement conditions, shall be held by the Contractor and
approved by the Client. In this dairy shall also be recorded the results oI the
periodical tests and the process oI the execution oI corrections - should there
have been a request Ior them.
05094 Corrections
a) The corrections shall be executed in each rooI with materials Iitting the
waterprooIing materials originally used and according to the
instructions oI the materials ManuIacturers.
b) Corrections shall be executed with attention given to the environmental
situation (environment quality) and to the strictness oI the required
saIety rules, both during the haulage oI materials (such as hot bitumen)
and the execution.
c) In each local deIect attention shall be given to create a correction oI at
least about 30 cm on each side oI the damaged Iield.
d) In the course oI the inspection oI the month oI September (the
inspection beIore the winter season), attention shall be specially given
to the zones where there shall be corrections executed in the course oI
the summer.
05095 Corrections of Existing Roofs
050950 General
05 (2004)
50
Corrections oI rooIs shall be executed according to the existing waterprooIing in
the rooIs and to sub-chapters 0502 and 0503 above. The corrections shall be
executed aIter that the base shall be prepared and the conIormity with the
waterprooIing method shall he inspected.
050951 Types oI rooIs Ior the purpose oI the present matter
Existing rooIs dealt with by the present Chapter shall belong to one oI the types
dealt with in sub-chapter 0502 as well as to waterprooIing oI the 05003, 05033,
05038 types above. Any rooIs oI another type shall be corrected according to a
050952 Preparation oI the rooI Ior re-waterprooIing
The need Ior Iull peeling or partial local only peeling oI existing waterprooIing
and base shall be as required in a Special SpeciIication. The thorough cleaning,
cracks corrections, swelling, etc. shall be perIormed as required in the Special
SpeciIication.
Keeping the existing system in the waterprooIed areas dealt with by the
Contractor shall be as stated in the Special SpeciIication.
050953 WaterprooIing
The waterprooIing shall be executed as required in the Special SpeciIication.
050954 Protection oI the waterprooIing and its bleaching
The protection oI the waterprooIing shall be executed as required in the Special
SpeciIication.

05 (2004)
51

05 (2004)
52

0500.00 Take-Off Procedures of Waterproofing Works

0500.01 The Take-Off Method
The waterprooIing in the Bill oI Quantities shall be classiIied according to the
Building parts and the waterprooIing method, the material, the type, the number
oI layers, the reinIorcement layers, etc. described in the Special SpeciIication.
0500.02 Contents of the Unit Prices
Besides what is stated in paragraph "Contents oI the Unit Prices" in Chapter 00 -
Preliminaries, the unit price oI the waterprooIing systems (according to any
method whatsoever) shall include the Iollowing objects, according to the topic:
a) The preparation oI the background as speciIied (except Ior the
Iormation oI slopes), the installation oI the waterprooIing, the
protection oI the surIace at all the stages oI the work and Iollowing the
installation oI the waterprooIing, the protection oI other areas Irom dirt
as well as all the works required Ior obtaining the Iinished layer;
b) The local corrections oI slopes made oI concrete or light concrete;
c) The spreading oI the primer;
d) The penetrations through the waterprooIing and the Iormation around
pipes and outlets;
e) The Iixation oI the membranes, as speciIied;
I) The perIormance oI a Ilooding (or a sprinkling) Iollowing the
application oI the waterprooIing, including the tests and corrections
Iollowing them, the removal oI the water aIter the test as well as the
perIormance oI repeat tests, as may be needed;
g) The inspection oI the waterprooIing oI shelters as required in the Civil
DeIense Regulations;
h) Should it be required, the renewal oI the waterprooIing in the course oI
the warranty period Iollowing mishaps or humidity penetration.
Unless otherwise stated in the Special SpeciIication and additionally to what was
stated above, only the works detailed in the Iollowing paragraphs 0500.13 and
0500.14 shall be taken oII separately.
0500.03 Waterproofed Surfaces
WaterprooIed surIaces oI Iloor-slabs and rooIs shall be taken oII according to the
horizontal projection between parapets, in square metes with the deductions oI all
openings larger than 4 sq.m and the areas not waterprooIed without consideration
given to waste, overlap, etc.
05 (2004)
53
Unless otherwise stated, the unit price oI the waterprooIing shall also include the
raisings up to 40 cm. The Iabric's rolling up, the waterprooIing around
Ioundations, chimneys and outlets, etc. shall not be taken oII. Their cost shall be
seen as in the unit price oI rooI's waterprooIing.
0500.04 Casting of Slopes Consisting of Concrete or Concrete Float
("meda") or Lightweight concrete
The Iormation oI slopes in rooIs and Iloor-slabs by the casting oI concrete or
light concrete shall be taken oII separately, according to one oI the Iollowing
alternatives:
a) Take-oII in square meters as stated in above paragraph 0500.03, with
indication oI the type oI concrete, the average thickness (arithmetic
average between the largest thickness and the smallest thickness) with
the deduction oI areas larger than 0.5 sq.m, in which the slope shall not
be executed.
b) Whenever the quantity shall be less than 5 cu.m, the take-oII shall be
as a Total.
The unit price oI the Iormation oI slopes includes also the smoothening.
0500.05 Cants ("rolkot")
Cants shall be taken oII in meters. The take-oII shall be at the center oI the cant.
The unit price shall also include the cleaning, Iilling and waterprooIing oI the
corner.
0500.06 Thermic Insulation
Thermic insulation shall be taken in square meters with the indication oI the type
oI material and the thickness oI the insulation.
0500.07 Vapor Barrier
Vapor barrier shall be taken in square meters with the indication oI the type oI
material and the thickness.
0500.08 Separation
The take-oII oI the separation (geotextile, polypropylene net Iabric, etc.) shall be
in square meters with the indication oI the membrane's type.
0500.09 Aggregates Layer
An aggregates layer in the upper waterprooIing layer shall be taken-oII in square
meters, with the indication oI the type and size oI the aggregate as well as oI the
aggregates layer.
0500.10 Concrete Flooring Tiles
Concrete Ilooring tiles shall be taken oII in square meters, with the indication oI
the type, the thickness and the size oI the tiles.
05 (2004)
54
0500.11 Bleaching
The bleaching oI rooIs shall be in square meters with the indication oI the
bleaching material, the minimal thickness oI the layer as well as the number oI
required layers.
0500.128 Protective Layers
A protective layer set under a Iloor-slab or a Ilooring or on walls shall be taken
oII separately in square meters with the indication oI the type and thickness oI
the protection material.
0500.13 Humidity Separation Course
A humidity separation course shall be taken oII as stated hereinaIter:
a) A course having a width under 0.50 m shall be taken oII in running
meters.
b) A course having a width over 0.50 m shall be taken oII in square
meters.
0500.14 Maintenance of Roofs
The maintenance oI rooIs shall be taken oII as required in the Special
SpeciIication.

a
06 - GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR 1OINERY AND STEEL WORKS
PRODUCTS
DIRECTIVES TO THE DESIGNER

(This page does not represent part of the Contract)

1. The General SpeciIication Ior Joinery and Steel Works Iorms Chapter 06 oI the
2. The Take-oII Procedures Ior Joinery and Steel Works products are indicated in
paragraph 0600.00 and are concentrated at the end oI the SpeciIication. The Bill oI
Procedures.
3. The General SpeciIication shall be an inseparable part oI the Contract Documents
between the Client and the Contractor. Should it be necessary, the Designer shall
prepare a Special SpeciIication Ior the given work and indicate that all the
requirements oI the Special SpeciIication supersede in any case the requirement oI
The present General SpeciIication is based on the Iact that it shall represent one oI
the Contract Documents, the conditions oI which are the Contract oI the Israeli
Government Ior the execution oI a Building by a Contractor (shelI 3210).
4. In the Special SpeciIication or the Bill oI Quantities or the Drawings, the Designer
shall indicate his requirements with respect to whatever shall be stated in those
SpeciIication paragraphs in which there shall be more than one alternative. The
Designer shall check the List oI Standards Iound at the beginning oI the Chapter in
order to make sure that it is Iull and updated.
5. In the Iollowing paragraphs (6-15), shall be indicated the paragraphs which require
that the Designer speciIically write down his requirements.
6. Edition of Chapter 06 The Designer shall indicate in the Special SpeciIication
that he is basing himselI on Chapter 06, Iourth edition - 2004.
The Designer shall pay attention to the reIerences to other Chapters oI the General
SpeciIication. The Designer shall examine the paragraphs written down in the
Directives to the Designer ("the blue page") oI each chapter which shall be
reIerred to and he shall prepare special paragraphs, as may be needed.
7. Concealed frames The Designer shall detail his requirements Ior concealed
Irames including the type oI material, the Irame Iixation requirements and the type
oI the sealing materials.
8. Protection of the Wood The Designer shall speciIy in a Special SpeciIication the
requirements Ior greasing the wood with special protection materials (such as
against mildew) or with burning protecting material.
b
9. Prototype The Designer shall indicate in the Special SpeciIication the
requirement Ior manuIacturing a prototype Ior approval, prior to the manuIacture oI
the products required in the Contract.
10. Finishing of the Products Surfaces The Designer shall speciIy in the Special
SpeciIication and the Drawings the requirements Ior the Iinishing oI the products
surIaces, the type and the color oI the Iinish.
11. Hardware The Designer shall speciIy in the Special SpeciIication and the
Drawings his requirements Ior the hardware, including the type oI the materials, the
Iinishing and color oI the hardware surIace.
12. Electrical Motion The Designer shall speciIy in the Special SpeciIication the
requirements Irom the Contractor Ior the detail oI the electrical motion
requirements.
13. Workshop Drawings The Designer shall speciIy in the Special SpeciIication the
requirements Irom the Contractor Ior the preparation oI Workshop Drawings Ior the
products with consideration given to the quantity oI the products, their character
and the requirements Ior receiving the approval oI a qualiIied Laboratory.
14. Approbation of the Workshop and Installation Drawings - The Designer shall
determine in the Special SpeciIication the times Ior submitting the Workshop and
Installation Drawings that it shall be required Irom the Contractor to submit to the
approval oI the Inspector oI Works.
15. Testing of the Waterproofing of Products Installed in the Building - Should a
waterprooIing testing model diIIerent Irom the one speciIied in SI 1476 Part 2 be
required, the Designer shall speciIy in the Special SpeciIication the required model.
16. All the subjects speciIied above (paragraphs 6-15) represent only a reminder to the
Designer, that shall not release him Irom checking the matching oI the General
SpeciIication paragraphs to the designed work.

- 2004 -

06 - GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR 1OINERY AND
STEEL WORKS AND TAKE-OFF PROCEDURES

Published by the Inter-Ministerial Committee with the participation oI
the Ministry oI DeIense / Construction Branch
the Ministry oI Construction and Housing / Construction Branch
the Ministry oI Transport / the Public Works Department
the Ministry oI Finance / the General Accountant

Fourth edition (amended)

2
All rights reserved - Ministry oI DeIense / Publishing Department
2004

The Inter-Ministerial Committee Ior the Standardization oI
Construction Contract Documents and their Computerization

Y. Sasson - Ministry oI Construction and Housing Member
B.
Nachshon
Ministry oI Transport / Public Works Department Member
Y. Shaham
-
Ministry oI Building and Housing Member
S. Fein - Ministry oI DeIense Member oI the Committee and Publishing
Responsible
Y. Lopovitz
-

General Specification for 1oinery and Steel Works

Sub-
Committee:

S. Fein Ministry oI DeIense Chairman
A. Aharoni I.D.F. Member
Z.
Manoach
A.
Rosenfeld -
S.
Rotshtein
Ministry oI Construction and Housing Member

The Committee was assisted by the advise oI Mr. R. SternIeld.

06 - The General Specification for 1oinery and Steel Works Products
and the Take-Off Procedures

Table of Contents
Page

0600 General ................................................................................................................ 5
0601 Workshop and Installation Drawings ................................................................ 11
0602 Materials ............................................................................................................ 13
0603 The ManuIacture oI the Products ...................................................................... 15
0604 Transportation, Haulage and Storage ................................................................ 17
0605 Installation oI the Products in the Building ....................................................... 18
0606 Metal Works in Protected Spaces...................................................................... 20
0600.00 Take-OII Procedures...................................................................................... 21

A "Blue Page"- Directives to the Designer is attached to the Brochure, which
does not represent a part of the Contract Documents.
06 (2004)
5
0600 General
The present Chapter relates to joinery products made oI wood, oI wood industries
ready made materials or oI various plastic materials, as well as to steel works
such as doors and windows, that shall be installed in the Building.
The various products shall be as required in the Drawings, the Special
SpeciIication, the various Standards and the Iollowing SpeciIications.
Aluminum products shall be as described in Chapter 12 - Aluminum Works.
The special requirements concerning Irames in precast construction are indicated
in Chapter 21 - General SpeciIication Ior Precast Concrete Constructions.
06001 Standards and Institute of Standards Specifications
Besides what shall be stated in the "Quality oI the Materials and oI the Work" in
the Israeli Government Contract Ior the execution oI a Building by a Contractor
(shelI 3210), the Iollowing is the list oI the main Israeli Standards concerning the
present Chapter.
No. oI
the
Standard
Name oI the Standard
23 Wooden Doors Assemblages
Part
1
Testing methods
Part
2
Hinged doors wooden Irames
Part
3
Hinged plywood doors
Part
4
Massive wood hinged doors
Part
5
Inner sliding doors assemblages
Part
6
Finished assemblages - hinged doors
37 Plywood
Part
1
Usual plywood
Part
2
Plywood with wooden rulers Iilling
77, Part
1
Wooden windows: Hinged windows
93 Tee-hinges
101 Hinged door concealed lock
127,
Part 1
Welders certiIication tests: Melting weld-steels
06 (2004)
6
227 Wooden Irames glaziers putty
242 Electrolytic plating made oI nickel-chrome and copper-
nickel-chrome
265 Electrolytic plating made oI zinc on Ierrous metals
266 Electrolytic plating made oI cadmium on Ierrous metals
293 Metallic handles Ior hinged doors
294 Metallic handles Ior windows
295 Metallic washers Ior doors handles and locks
313 Steel sheets and strips galvanized by dipping in melted zinc
in a continuous process
328 Compressed Iibers boards
417 Straps Ior rolling shutters: external cotton straps
507 Laminated ornamental boards compressed under high
pressure
507,
Part 1
Boards made oI thermostatic resins: ClassiIication and
requirements
507,
Part 2
Boards made oI thermostatic resins: Determination oI
qualities
599 Slats Ior shutters made oI PVC
669 Wavy plates made oI rigid PVC, made by extrusion
755 Building materials reactions to Iire - Testing method and
classiIication
789 Deviations in buildings: Tolerated deviations in construction
works
883 Plastic material handles Ior doors
887 Chips boards: General requirements and testing methods
Part
1
Unclad boards
Part
2
Boards clad with wood layers
Part
3
Boards clad with ornamental layers made oI aminoplastic
resins
912 Plastic washers Ior doors handles and locks
921 Building material reactions to Iire
Part
1
General requirements
Part
2
Requirements Ior residential buildings
Part
3
Requirements Ior oIIices buildings
Part
4
Requirements Ior educational institutions
Part
5
Requirements Ior commercial buildings
Part
6
Requirements Ior entertainment houses and public
community buildings
Part
7
Requirements Ior hotels
Part Requirements Ior hospitals
06 (2004)
7
8
Part
9
Requirements Ior closed institutions
938 Plane glass sheets Ior building purposes
Part
1
General requirements and testing methods
Part
2
Transparent glass
Part
3
SaIety glass
950 Cylindrical mechanism Ior operating concealed locks in
doors
1004,
Part 2
Residential buildings acoustic insulation: Entrance doors,
assemblages
1068 Windows
Part
1
General requirements and testing methods
Part
4
Steel windows
Part
5
Rigid PVC-U windows
1099 Glazing in buildings
Part
1
Design oI the window-pane
Part
2
Design oI the glazing
1142 Balustrades and handrails
1161 Steel Irames Ior hinged doors
1189 Methods Ior testing the resistance to Iire oI door
assemblages
Part
1
Fire doors
Part
2
Smoke doors
1212 Fire doors: Resistance to Iire
Part
1
Fire doors assemblages and smoke doors assemblages:
Hinged Iire doors
1271 Furniture
Part
1
Materials - Wood and its products
Part
11
Kitchen cabinets
1476 Testing oI the building's envelope tightness to water
penetration
Part
2
External walls and openings in external walls
Part
3
Sloped rooIs
1481 MDF average density Iibers boards
06 (2004)
8
1509 Shutters
Part
1
Louvered shutters with metal Irames
Part
2
Rolling shutters
Part
3
Metal louvers Ior shutters
1536 Buildings waterprooIing materials - ClassiIication and
requirements
1542 Elastic sealers Ior doors and windows: Extruded rigid sealers
1547,
Part 2
Workshop drawings Ior the execution oI buildings and
environmental landscaping works; building architecture
1635 Grilles Ior openings and buildings
1878 Plastic glazing plates Ior use in buildings
1984,
Part 1
Elastomeric sections Ior sealing Irames and internal saIety
windows in sheltered and protected spaces
2931 Fire resistance oI buildings components
Part
1
General requirements
Part
3
OIIices buildings requirements
4068,
Part 2
Windows and shutters installed on the Site: Internal saIety
windows in protected spaces
4205 Boards clad with ornamental layers made oI aminoplast
(melamine) resins and molded on their edges
4306 Boards clad with cladding made oI thermostatic laminated
boards and cylinders Ior ornamental purposes (HPL) and
molded on their edges
4422 Metal works parts Ior shelters
Part
1
Parts Ior shelters which are not protected spaces:
Requirements, tests and installation
Part
2
Parts Ior protected spaces: Requirements and tests
Part
3
Parts Ior protected spaces: Installation
5044 Protective doors assemblages: Main entrance doors to
residential apartments, oIIices and business spaces
Part
1
ManuIacture
Part
2
Installation

b. Specification of the Institute of Standards
No. oI the
SpeciIication
Name oI the SpeciIication
SpeciIication
49
Wooden storage Iurniture
SpeciIication PVC windows: Sections
06 (2004)
9
168, Part 1
SpeciIication
251, Part 1
Finished building joinery: Sliding windows
SpeciIication
262, Part 2
Protection oI the building's wood: FireprooI wood
SpeciIication
262, Part 3
Protection oI the building's wood: Immunization
against pests and Iire - Methods, processes and
quality control

All that is stated in the Chapters listed below applies also to the present Chapter
and this as deIined in paragraph "Contradictions in Documents and Priorities
between Documents" in the Israeli Government Contract Ior the Execution oI a
Building by a Contractor (shelI 3210):
Chapter
00 -
Preliminaries
Chapter
04 -
Masonry Works
Chapter
08 -
Electrical Facilities
Chapter
09 -
Plastering Works
Chapter
10 -
Flooring and Cladding Works
Chapter
11 -
Paintworks
Chapter
19 -
Steel Structures
Chapter
21 -
Precast Concrete Buildings
Chapter
22 -
Industrialized Components in the Building (partitions,
ceilings, Iloors)
Chapter
58 -
Shelters
Chapter
59 -
Protected Spaces

06003 The Plant
The manuIactured Plant shall be equipped with the appropriate documentation
certiIying that the products manuIactured there stand up to the requirements oI
the relevant Standards.
06004 Products
The products, including their components shall be as required in the Contract
Documents and the Drawings approved in sub-chapter 0601 below. The products
and their components shall stand up to the requirements oI the documents as well
06 (2004)
10
as to the required tests, both in the documents and the relevant Standard Ior each
part.
06 (2004)
11
0601 Workshop and Installation Drawings
06011 Workshop Drawings
Should it be required in the Special SpeciIication, the Contractor shall prepare
workshop drawings according to the requirements and general drawings attached
to the Contract and as required in other Contract Documents as well as according
to the appropriate Standards - Ior the purpose oI approving the manuIacture oI
the product as required in paragraph 06013 Iurther below. The detailed design
shall be executed by the Contractor through a Designer lawIully entitled to
design what is required.
In the case oI contradictions between the Special SpeciIication and the general
drawings that were submitted to the Contractor in the Contract Documents, or oI
non-compatibility with these drawings, or with respect to the materials, the
Contractor shall draw the attention oI the Inspector oI Works prior to the start oI
the preparation oI the workshop and installation Drawings. For the compatibility
oI the products to the Building, see paragraph 06031 Iurther below.
The Contractor shall detail in the Workshop Drawings at least what is stated
hereinaIter:
a) The type oI wood and the cross-sections oI the parts;
b) The type oI steel and the cross-sections oI the parts;
c) The type oI plastic materials and the cross-sections oI the parts;
d) Fittings and hardware;
e) Glazing materials;
I) Type oI Iinishing (plating) oI the surIace: galvanization, paint, sheets
and plates oI various materials.
g) Following a requirement in the Special SpeciIication, the details oI the
requirements oI an electrical motion, including details oI the motors,
connections, groundings, activation means, etc.;
h) Following a requirement in the Special SpeciIication, the detail oI the
requirements concerning an intercom system;
i) The details oI the drainage according to the type oI the products and
their Iunctioning so that water shall not inIiltrate into the Building and
that there shall be no standing water in the various parts oI the
products;
j) The sealing materials in the product, including the types oI
waterprooIing materials between the parts Iorming the product as an
assemblage;
k) The waterprooIing materials between the installed product in the
Building and the various parts oI the Building;
l) Tolerated discrepancies in the manuIacture.
06 (2004)
12
06012 Installation Drawings
The Contractor shall submit to the Inspector oI Works installation Drawings
Iitted to the installation location in the Building. The detailed design shall be
carried out by the Contractor through a Designer lawIully certiIied Ior the
required design.
In the installation Drawings, the Contractor shall speciIy the material he shall use
and the Standards that they shall stand up to, as stated in sub-chapter 0602 and at
least according to the Iollowing requirements:
a) The direction and type oI the products opening;
b) The list oI materials, parts and Iittings used Ior the installation oI the
products in the Building;
c) The preparations and execution stages as well as the detail oI the stages
Ior the installation oI the products;
d) A concealed Irame, iI required;
e) The details oI the anchoring and attachment oI the products to the wall,
according to the type oI wall (material thickness, cladding, etc.);
I) Tolerated discrepancies Ior the installation oI products;
g) Tests that shall be perIormed prior to the installation oI products;
h) Protection requirements Ior the product assemblages, prior and
Iollowing the installation;
i) Requirements Ior the painting or other Iinishing, carried out on Site,
Iollowing the installation;
j) Requirements Ior the grounding connections, according to the
Electricity Law.
06013 Approval of the Workshop and Installation Drawings
The working Drawings, iI required, and the installation Drawings prepared by the
Contractor shall be submitted to the approval oI the Inspector oI Works at dates
determined in the Contract Documents. This approval, when issued, shall not
relieve the Contractor Irom his Iull and sole responsibility concerning the quality
oI the product and the way it shall be installed.
The Contractor shall not start production prior to the issue oI the written approval
by the Inspector oI Works concerning the compatibility oI the Drawings to the
various requirements.
06 (2004)
13
0602 Materials
06020 General
The materials shall be as required in the Contract Documents and as speciIied
hereinaIter.
Besides what is stated in shelI 3210 in the paragraph "Quality oI the Materials
and oI the Work," the Contractor shall submit to the approval oI the Inspector oI
Works samples oI the materials, the Iittings and the hardware he shall use Ior
manuIacturing and installing the products.
06021 The Quality of the Work and its Type
The quality oI the work and its type shall be as required in the Contract
Documents.
06022 Steel Sections
The steel sections shall be as required in the Contract Documents. For sections in
protected spaces, see sub-chapter 0606 Iurther below.
06023 PVC-U Sections
Rigid PVC-U sections shall be as required in the Contract Documents. For
sections in protected spaces, see sub-chapter 0606 Iurther below.
06024 Fittings and Hardware
Fitting and hardware Ior the required products shall be according to one oI the
two Iollowing alternatives:
a) Fittings and hardware such as hinges, handles, locks, electrical locks,
stoppers, etc. shall be as required in the Contract Documents that were
submitted to the Contractor.
b) II not otherwise speciIied in the Contract Documents, Iittings and
hardware such as: hinges, rolling balls, pumps Ior controlling closure,
including the bolts and all the required attachment means, shall stand
up to the load, the Iuture harassing as well as to the environment
conditions according to their use, all within the requirements oI the
appropriate Standards.
06025 Glazing and Filling Materials
Glass or other glazing materials shall be according to the requirements in the
Contract Documents and Iit the appropriate Standards.
Materials Ior installing the glazing shall Iit the requirements approved to the
Contractor as stated in above sub-chapter 0602.
06026 Sealing Materials
The meeting lines oI moving or Iixed parts shall be sealed with sealing materials
and Iittings that shall not damage the material Irom which the product shall be
06 (2004)
14
manuIactured, such as elastic sealers and hairy brushes. These materials and
Iittings, their shape and the connecting method to the products shall make sure
that no signs oI slackness, separation or tearing shall be seen in them.
The sealing materials shall meet the requirements oI the appropriate Standards
and oI the material Irom which shall be made the components oI the product.
Likewise, they shall Iit the materials on the periphery oI an opening in the
Building, that shall come into contact with the sealing materials, in such a way as
to ensure good bonding between them as well as the required sealing level.
The various sealers shall stand up to the requirements oI the appropriate
Standards Ior the required product.
The Contractor shall use sealing materials prior to their date oI expiry and
according to the ManuIacturer's instructions.
06027 Completion Articles
Unless otherwise stated, completion articles such as rulers, battens Ior covering
gaps between products and the walls oI the Building, or Ior covering intervals,
shall be made oI materials identical to the material oI the products, including the
Iinishing.
06028 Cladding, Finishing and Covering Materials
Cladding, Iinishing and covering materials such as paint, sheets and plates oI
various materials, shall be as required in the Contract Documents.
06 (2004)
15
0603 The Manufacture of the Products
06030 General
All the joinery or metal works products shall be manuIactured as required in the
Contract Documents and the appropriate Standards. The products shall Iit the
classiIication, type and denomination that shall be indicated in the Special
SpeciIication and according to the products Standards.
06031 Adaptation of the Products to the Dimensions of the Openings and the
Reserved Locations in the Building
Prior to the start oI manuIacture the Contractor shall check the dimensions oI all
the openings and reserved locations in the Building and correct, should the need
Ior it occur, the workshop and installation Drawings, as required in sub-chapter
0601 above, prior to the submittal oI the workshop Drawings and to the supply oI
the Iinished products.
The dimension oI the opening shown in the Drawing shall be the construction
dimension. The Contractor shall check the Iitting between the dimensions oI the
openings and the products.
The Contractor shall be responsible Ior the Iitting oI the products to the openings
and the reserved locations, even iI he did not execute the masonry and casting
works.
The Contractor shall advise the Inspector oI Works oI all discrepancies
discovered between the dimensions oI the openings in the reserved locations in
the Building and the dimensions oI the products indicated in the Drawings or the
Joinery or Metal Works Schedule, or the Bill oI Quantities and seek the
instructions oI the Inspector oI Works with respect to the determining
dimensions.
The Contractor's reporting shall be acknowledged only iI it shall be put in writing
prior to the start oI all the works connected with the manuIacture oI the articles
or with the preparation oI material Ior their manuIacture. Should the Contractor
not report the discrepancy, he shall bear all the responsibility, including the
removal oI the joinery and metal works products Iound not Iitting to the openings
or the reserved locations in the Building and their replacement by Iitting products
as well as their installation in their location.
06032 Approval of the Prototype
Besides what has been stated above and upon a request in the Special
SpeciIication, the Contractor shall manuIacture Ior each product Ior which such a
request shall be indicated, a prototype to be tested in the Plant, a Laboratory or
on the Site, Ior the purpose oI its approval, prior to the manuIacture oI the
product required in the Contract.
06033 Installation of Fittings and Hardware and the Execution of
Connections
The assembling and installation oI Iittings and hardware Ior the
products as well as the execution oI connections shall be in accordance
with the ManuIacturer's instructions and what shall be required in the
06 (2004)
16
Special SpeciIication or the Drawings approved in above paragraph
06013.
06034 Testing the Products
The Contractor shall advise the Inspector oI Works beIorehand oI the start oI the
ManuIacture in the Plant.
Besides what is stated in shelI 3210 in the paragraph "The quality oI materials
and the work," the Contractor shall enable the Inspector oI Works at any time he
chooses, to inspect the products, the Iittings, the sealer, the separation material
Ior the insulation oI metals, the connecting Iittings and all the other parts, the
way they shall be Iormed and the quality oI their execution. The Inspector oI
Works shall also be entitled to request the testing oI the materials in the Plant by
a qualiIied Laboratory, prior to their transportation to the Site.
The testing oI the materials shall be carried out according to the sole judgment oI
the Inspector oI Works, by the Inspector oI Works himselI or by a Laboratory in
the ManuIacturer's plant, in a Laboratory or on the Site.
The products shall be delivered to the Site at a time that shall enable their testing,
without causing a delay in their installation in the Building and without impairing
the planned Time Schedule Ior the whole Building. ThereIore, the Contractor
shall take into consideration the lapse oI time needed Ior obtaining the approvals
Ior production, testing and delivery on time oI the products to the Site.
Should the Laboratory require the preparation oI auxiliary means Ior testing the
products, the Contractor shall perIorm them in the presence oI the Tester.
The Contractor shall advise the Inspector oI Works in due time about the planned
dates Ior the delivery oI the products to the Site.
06 (2004)
17
0604 Transportation, Haulage and Storage
06040 General
The joinery and metal works products shall be delivered to the Site assembled
and connected as a Iull part (except Ior covering Iittings as stated in paragraph
06054 Iurther below).
A product or material Iound to be deIective or not in order shall be replaced or
corrected by the Contractor so that the replacement or the correction shall not
aIIect the appearance oI the product.
The joinery or metal works products shall be transIerred to the Site protected and
wrapped up into a plastic envelope.
Parts that cannot be transIerred or hauled in their entity because oI their size,
shall be delivered to the Site in separate parts, but the Contractor shall undertake
beIorehand to prepare appropriate contrivances Ior a proper assembly and their
haulage to the Site, contrivances that shall ensure the integrity oI the Iinished
products so that they shall not be damaged in the course oI the haulage.
06041 Storage
The storage oI the Iinished products in the Site shall be in a way and location that
shall enable the keeping oI the integrity oI the products, oI the wrapping and their
protections Irom climatic or mechanical damages.

06 (2004)
18

0605 Installation of the Products in the Building
06050 General
The Contractor shall install the products in the Site, according to the approved
installation Drawings as stated in above paragraph 0613.
Products which shall be delivered to the Site in separate parts, shall be connected
in such a way that the connections shall not be visible and be according to the
approved installation Drawings.
All the products connections, the details oI the anchoring into the Building shall
be stable, durable as the product they attach to the Building, not dismantle or
shake. They shall also be concealed.
For the installation oI products in protected spaces - see sub-chapter 0606 Iurther
below.
06051 Tolerated Deviations
The tolerated deviations in the installation oI joinery or metal works products
shall be as indicated in the installation Drawings, the Contract Documents and
the appropriate Standards.
06052 Waterproofing
The Contractor shall perIorm the waterprooIing as required and speciIied in the
workshop and installation Drawings as well as in the Contract Documents.
The waterprooIing materials shall be as required in above paragraph 06026.
The waterprooIing between the product and the various parts oI the Building
shall be continuous and perIormed in a proIessional way.
06053 Tests
060531 Testing products installed in the Building
The testing oI products installed in the Building shall be as required in the
Contract Documents and the appropriate Standards.
060532 Testing products installed in openings in the Building's envelope for
uncovering water penetration
The testing oI products installed in openings in the Building's envelope, Ior the
uncovering oI water penetration, shall be executed as stated in SI 1476, Part 3.
06054 Completions
Upon the completion oI the testing oI the waterprooIing against the penetration
oI water into the Building's envelope, as indicated in above paragraph 060532,
the Contractor shall complete the inner covering oI the Building's envelope walls
06 (2004)
19
and install all the covering Iittings detailed in the approved Drawings, as
indicated in above paragraph 06012.
06 (2004)
20

0606 Metal Works in Protected Spaces
06060 General
Metal Works in protected spaces: blast doors, gas doors, noise insulated doors,
Irames Ior the above doors, blast and shrapnel windows, Irames Ior the above
windows, ventilation pipes and pipes used as sleeves Ior the passage oI pipelines,
shall be executed and tested as required in Chapters 58 - Shelters and 59 -
Protected Spaces.

06 (2004)
21

0600.00 Take-Off Procedures

0600.01 The Take-Off Method
Unless otherwise stated in the Special SpeciIication, the Joinery products and the
Metal Works products such as windows, doors, etc. shall be taken oII as numbers
(except Ior paragraph 0600.03 Iurther below) with the indication oI the
dimensions, while the product shall be complete and installed in its planned
location in the Building.
The unit prices oI the Joinery and Metal Works products shall include besides
what is stated in paragraph "Contents oI the Unit Prices" in Chapter 00 -
Preliminaries, the Iollowing objects also:
a) Workshop Drawings, iI required;
b) Installation Drawings;
c) Testing oI the compatibility with the requirements oI the SpeciIications
and the Standards including auxiliary means Ior the test, as stated in
above paragraph 060531;
d) Concealed Irames Ior various products, iI required;
e) Testing on Site oI the tightness against water penetration, as stated in
above paragraph 060532;
I) The products shall be taken oII in their entirety as deIined in the
Contract Documents, including galvanization, painting, glazing,
hardware, screens (iI required), shutters (iI required), including motion
and stopping means oI the moving parts, all as speciIied in the
Contract Documents;
g) Should it be required in the Special SpeciIication, the production and
testing oI a prototype.
0600.03 Balustrades
Balustrades, including their glazing and Iilling, handrails and bumpers shall be
taken oII in running meters with indication oI the height. The unit price oI the
handrail shall be seen as included in the unit price oI the balustrade. A handrail
without a balustrade shall be taken oII in running meters. Bumpers shall be taken
oII in running meters. The attachment and anchoring means shall be seen as
included in the unit prices oI the products.
06 (2004)
22
0600.04 Steel Grilles or Gratings
Steel grilles or gratings as required in the Drawings, shall be taken oII as
numbers with the indication oI the product's dimensions. The attachment and
anchoring means shall be seen as included in the unit prices oI the products.

1

GENERAL SPECIFICATION TOR
SANITARY INSTALATIONS

TabIe of Contents

0700 - GeneraI ............................................................................................... 2
0701 - Piping System and Accessories ....................................................... 6
0702 - CoId and Hot Water SuppIy............................................................... 9
0703 - Drain and Vent System .................................................................... 14
0704 - Sanitary Fixtures .............................................................................. 16
0705 - Rainwater Drainage ......................................................................... 17
0706 - Sewerage and ChanneIing .............................................................. 18
0707 - Fire Fighting InstaIIation ................................................................. 21
0708 - Pipe IsoIation ................................................................................... 21
0709 - Piping System Painting ................................................................... 23

1993
01
2
0700 - GeneraI
07000 - Scope
This specification covers quality of material and workmanship of building sanitary installations in
compliance with the plans and specifications and it to all parts under or above ground on site and
at any height or depth. The public sewerage, drainage and channeling works are specified in
Chapter 57. Requirements for sewerage do not apply to sewage that require special treatment.
Heating installations, central heating and solar energy installations are detailed separately in
Chapter 16 of the General Specification.

07001 - Standards
Relevant srael Standards and Standards nstitution of srael (S) specifications applicable to this
Chapter:

No. Name
9 Percolating pit concrete blocks
27 Reinforced and non reinforced concrete cylindrical pipes
50 part 2 Pipe threads where pressure-tight joints are not made on the threads:
dimensions, tolerances and designation
50 part 3 Pipe threads where pressure-tight joints are made on the threads: dimensions,
tolerances and designation
59 Nominal diameters for water installations, components Pipe flanges
60 Metallic flanges-cast iron flanges
61 Metal wedge gate valve
63 Velocity type cold water meters
69 part 1 Electric water heaters : thermostatically controlled and thermally insulated
heaters
69 part 2 Electric water heaters: quick heaters
94 Hinges for W C. seats
103 Steel pipes suitable for screw threading
104 Water meters velocity type (Voltman)
124 Cast iron pipes for sanitary nstallations
125 Cast ron pipe fittings for sanitary nstallations
146 W.C. bowls
156 Asbestos cement pipes for sanitary installations
169 Domestic tap of copper alloy
171 Copper alloy valves for water installation: stop valves
214 Asbestos cement fittings for sanitary installations: general
222 Threaded copper alloy gate valves
238 Enameled cast iron or steel sheet bath tubs
239 Ceramic wash basins (A.S. 1978)
255 Malleable cast ron pipe fittings
257 Safety fusible plugs for steam boilers
258 Electroplated coatings of nickel plus chromium and of copper plus nickel plus
chromium
3
No. Name
265 Zinc electrolytic coatings on ferrous metals
272 Copper alloy oblique type valves for water nstallation
333 Asbestos cement pressure pipes and couplings
361 Fire hose pressure couplings
365 Hoses for fire fighting
401 Liquid fuel heated steam boilers: heat balanced
405 Safety valves for water heaters
437 Cylindrical non-reinforced concrete elements for sewage pits
448 Copper alloy fire hydrant
448 part 2 Fire hydrant: aboveground, dry-barrel hydrant
449 Threaded couplings for fire fighting appliance
457 Electric water heaters, without thermal solation (A.S. 1977 + A.S. 1978)
462 Central supply of liquefied petroleum gases to buildings not intended for
industry, workshops or agriculture (A.S. 1971)
489 Manhole covers for nspection chambers of sanitary installation
499 Polyethylene Pipes for water supply
500 Lead traps
501 Lead collectors
522 Lead pipes for sanitary installations
530 Steel welded pipes for general use (Correction 1972)
538 Copper alloy drainage fittings:
538 General requirements
538 part 1 Elbows
538 part 2 Single branch
538 part 3 Double branch
576 Hard polyvinyl chloride pipes for domestic waste and sewage water (A.S. 1975)
577 Hard polyvinyl chloride fittings for domestic waste and sewage water (A.S.
1975 + A.S. 1976)
578 Rubber water hoses
579 Solar water heaters: construction and quality (Official)
579 part 1 Solar water heating systems: flat collectors
579 part 2 Solar water heating systems:
579 part 3 Thermal tests for flat collectors
579 part 4 - solar water heating systems: open loop thermo siphonic systems-design,
installation, and testing
593 Seamless steel pipes
595 Cast ron W. C. squatting parts
602 Enameled shower basins
609 Solar water heaters: test methods
630 Cast ron traps
631 Manhole step rons (Errata 1977)
633 Rubber gaskets for hard PVC pipe for domestic waste
4
No. Name
645 Hard polyvinyl chloride fittings for pipes carrying drinking water
656 Cast ron enameled or sheet steel enameled laundry tubs
657 Cast ron enameled or sheet steel enameled kitchen sinks
658 Precast concrete shaft rings for nspection chambers (A.S. 1976)
660 Cast ron oblique valves for water nstallations
661 Rubber rings for hard polyvinyl chloride for domestic use
667 Sheet metal vent pipe heads
679 Copper alloy traps.
680 Covers for traps and collectors
697 Borden type pressure and vacuum gauges
750 Mineral wool for thermal isolation: formed products, (A.S. 1972 + A.S. 1976)
751 solation Mineral Wool: Formed Products
752 Mineral wool for thermal isolation: mattresses
756 Synthetic (alkyd) paints: gloss finishing paints
782 Unions for wastes in sanitary appliances
790 Tap-head of copper alloy with non-rising spindle, for domestic draw-off taps
(official)
802 Water fitting for ceramic kitchen basin and laundry basin
803 Waste fitting for ceramic wash basin
851 W.C. flushing cistern
884 Unplasticized polyvinyl Chloride) (PVC-U) piping system for non-pressure
underground drainage and sewerage : pipes and fittings
888 Ceramic plane wall urinals
958 Unplasticized polyvinyl Chloride) (PVC-U) piping system for housing drainage
and sewerage : pipes and fittings
962 part 1 Central electric water heaters: section a and b - safety regulations and
performance
962 part 2 Central electric water heaters: section c water container
972 Ceramic kitchen sink
173 Use angle valves
1205 nstallation and inspection of sanitary systems
1229 Rigid cellular plastics for thermal isolation : boards
1247 Synthetic (alkyd) primer : red lead
1340 arc welding equipment: power sources with limited duty for manual arc welding
with covered electrodes

SII Specifications
No. Name
34 Working surfaces of reinforced polymeric concrete for kitchen boards
52 Pipes and fittings of PVC with addition of chlorine (C.P.V.C.)
53 Waste fittings made of plastics: waste systems for bath
54 Waste fittings made of plastics: waste system for shower bath
55 Conduits and couplings
5
No. Name
58 Crossed polyethylene pipes for hot and cold water supply
60 Polymeric concrete basin for shower
92 Central solar water heaters: Collector matching network pressure
96 Polybutilene pipes and connectors thereof
97 Central solar systems with non central collectors for water heating in residence
buildings
101 Circulating pumps for solar systems
108 Forced closed apartment solar systems for water heating
109 Forced open apartment solar systems for water heating
132 Plastics piping for domestic waste: instruction for installation and use
145 Bath tubs and wash basins made of acrylic plastics
147 Plastic interceptor for floor installation
153 Single component and dual component elastomeric sealant for use in buildings
191 Diaphragm pumps, hand operated, for shelters
249 Flexible foamed polyurethane sleeve for thermal isolation
259 Polymeric concrete sink
266 Steel pipe with protective coatings: all parts (1-7)
307 Part 1: Precast polyethylene sections for inspection chambers: the sections
308 Reel for fire fighting

07002 - Foreign Standards
Copper pipes shall comply with US Standard ASTM-B-88-72 or German Standard DN 1786.

07003 - Other Specification Chapters
All specification chapters listed below also applies to this chapter, unless otherwise specified.
01 Earthworks
02 On Site Cast Concrete Works
03 Prefabricated Concrete Works
07 Sanitary nstallations
11 Painting Works
19 Foundry Frames
40 Site Development
51 Road and Square Paving

07004 - Laws and ReguIations
All parts of sanitary installations shall be carried out according to the Directives for Sanitary
nstallations (DS) issued by the Ministry of nterior.
Fire extinguishing installation is subject to Fire Fighter Authority approval for acceptance by the
CO.

6
07005 - As Made PIans
AS Made plans, prepared by the contractor shall include all modifications carried out in the
installation contrary to the plans. The contractor shall submit the updated plans to the CO
according to execution phases in format requested by the CO.

07006 - Tests of PipeIines
All pipelines shall be tested as required by the CO and in accordance with the DS .No backfill of
any pipeline section shall be done without CO approval. The CO shall be notified by the contractor
at least 48 hours prior to test date. The CO may request tests of system sections following the
work advancement.
A. Hot/cold water supply piping system shall be tested under hydraulic pressure 1.5 times
the working pressure, but not less than 12 bar. The pressure shall not be reduced for 4
hours, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.
B. Underground drain pipe test shall be carried out by sealing both ends and filling the
lines with water. The lines shall pass the test if the water level does not drop for 1 hour.
C. Sewerage line test terminations of pipe line in control chambers shall be sealed at
each section between chambers by means of plugs. Piezometric heads shall be
installed in the plugs at appropriate heights, in any case 1.20 m minimum above pipe
head at the highest pipeline point.
The pipes, including water head pipes shall be filled with water. The pipe line shall pass
water tightness test if water head level does not drop for hour minimum.
Each inter-chamber line section shall be checked for pipe position and free passage
using light beam (flashlight and mirror).
D. Each control chamber shall be filled wit water up to cover level after sealing entries and
exit in the adjacent chamber.
The control chamber passes the tightness test when no leakage is noticed during 1
hour minimum.
E. Sanitary installation test shall be carried out according to S 1205 part 5.

07007 - Grounding
All metal toilets shall be connected to potential equalization bus as specified in the Electricity Law.
Connections shall be carried out as specified in Chapter 08 Electrical Works.

0701 - Piping System and Accessories
07010 - GeneraI
The basic element of sanitary installations consists pipes of various types and fittings thereof.
The following materials are used for sanitary installations:
F. Metal (such as steel, iron casting, copper)
G. Plastic materials (such as PVC, polybutylene, crossed polyethylene, polypropylene).
Unless otherwise specified is the special specification the use of pipes for certain purpose is set
forth in the following paragraphs.
The pipes shall be new and shall be installed according to the plan routes. The pipes shall comply
with the Standard and type, or kind, specified in this specification or contract documents. No bends
are allowed in pipes unless approved by the CO. Positioning and anchoring of pipes shall ensure
stability, prevention of sedimentation and vibrations.

7
07011 - HoIes and SIots
All holes and slots required for pipe routing and other installation accessories shall be worked
during form installation (see Chapter 02 General Specification for Concrete Cast on Site). When
the contractor fails to prepare these holes and slots, he shall follow the CO instructions and shall
neither excavate nor chisel in the building unless approved by the CO and in compliance with his
instruction. Excavation and chiseling approval does not relieve the contractor of his sole
responsibility for the shape and appearance of the building. After routing the pipes the holes shall
be sealed with mortar cement as specified in Chapter 04. Large holes shall be sealed with
concrete.

07012 - Hangers and Supports
Pipes shall be installed on supports and hangers. Hot water pipes shall be installed so as to allow
free expansion, without damaging the solation. Fixing supports on walls and ceilings shall be
made with split bolts. Hangers or supports shall be spaced not to exceed the following distance
data, while minimum two hangers or two supports shall be provided in each case.
A. Steel Pipes
Vertical Pipes - 3.0 meters, one support minimum at each floor.
Horizontal Pipes -according to the following table:

Diameter (inch) Up to 1 1 4 6 and more
Distance (meter) 2.0 3.0 5.0

Hot water vertical pipes shall be axially, so that pipe weight is supported by the hanger at
one point minimum. Other vertical section hangers shall allow pipe movement axially in
hanger. Other pipes shall be supported on all hangers.
B. Copper Pipes
Horizontal rigid copper pipes up to 1 inch diameter supports shall be spaced 1 meter
maximum.
Horizontal rigid copper pipes 1 inch diameter up supports shall be spaced 1.5
meter maximum.
Soft copper pipes shall be mounted on galvanized metal iron sheet or angle trays.
Trays shall be secured to supports at 2 meter intervals. Clamps shall be of PVC.
All clamps shall be releasable to allow easy pipe removal and replacement. The minimum space
between pipes shall not be less than 6 cm, and between the pipes and the walls 3 cm. The
distance is measured between the plastered wall surface and the nearest part of any of the pipe
accessories or fittings. The spacing applies also to insulated pipes, and dimensions are measured
from the solation surface.

07013 - Covering of Pipes
Pipes installed in walls or slabs (except for prefabricated structures) shall have a cover of 10 cm
minimum. The pipe shall be protected by means of tightened non-corrosive metal mesh or by
other similar means approved by the CO applied with thin layer of mortar cement.
Pipe covering in precast concrete public building shall be carried out as specified in Chapter 21
General Specification for Precast Concrete Buildings.

07014 - SIeeves and Passages
Pipe passage through floors, walls, ceilings or roofs shall be within sleeves made of galvanized
steel or PVC pipes cast or fixed in construction. Sleeve ends shall be cut straight and smooth and
8
equipped with rosettes. Sleeves passing through platform shall protrude of final floor surface in
compliance with the plans or instructions.
Pipes passages through external walls, the gaps between the wall and the sleeve shall be filled
with sealing material according to S specification 153 - Single component and dual component
elastomeric sealant for use in buildings.

07015 - Expansion Joints Fix Points
To avoid hot water piping stresses and allow for expansion, expansion accessories or omega loops
shall be installed as specified in the plans. Between every two expansion joints, one fix point shall
be nstalled to anchor the pipe to a stable building element. For fix point specification see plans
and special specification.

07016 - Unions and FIanges
Unions shall be installed according to the plan or the CO. instruction. n any case, unions shall be
installed after threadened valves in the flow direction and on instrument connections. Counter
flanges for flanged valves and instruments shall match dimensionally the installed flanges. Gaskets
be "Klingerit" types. All unions and flanges shall be installed accessible for maintenance and
service. No flanges and unions shall be installed under flooring.

07017 - Excavation and FiIIing for Underground Pipes
The entire earthwork shall be carried out in compliance with Chapter 01 - General Specification for
Earthwork.
Laying of pipes in ditches shall be carried out as follows:
n sand soils - the pipe shall be laid directly on leveled ditch trench bottom.
n clay and rocky soils - the pipes shall be laid on a clean sand bedding 10 cm thick. Sand shall be
clean of salts and other damaging materials. The pipes shall be sunk in the sand layer. n all soil
type where sand bedding is specified, the pipes shall be coated and covered with another 10 cm
sand layer on top of the pipe through the entire ditch width.
Where, concrete bedding is specified, in rocky soil, the bedding shall consist of 10 cm thick
minimum MGP-10 concrete layer, with edges raised up to half the pipe diameter, properly securing
the pipe in position. The pipes shall then be covered with a clean sand and layer 10 cm thick
minimum through the entire ditch width up to 10 cm minimum on top of the pipes.
Filling shall use best excavated soil, clean and free of stones. Filling material may be either backfill
material or borrowed, or imported, subject to the CO approval. When excavated soil is not
appropriate or insufficient for ditch backfill, the contractor shall supply granular material for this
purpose. The backfill shall be compacted in accordance with the CO instructions.

07018 - Road, Pavement and Path Conduits
070181 - Road and Apron Conduits
A. Existing Roads and Aprons
The conduit shall be executed in coordination with the authority in charge of the road or
apron. When necessary, the contractor shall execute the work in phases, each phase
covering the amount approved for that phase by the authority or alternatively the
contractor shall produce a temporary bypass road. When the work is done in phases,
the full route axis accuracy and slope uniformity shall be ensured. To execute the
conduit, a road strip shall initially be removed, between straight and parallel lines at the
minimum width necessary for the pipeline laying (asphalt cutting shall be carried out
using sharp cutting tool) and then the pipes shall be laid and the remaining specified
works carried out.
9
At locations specified in the plans or the special specifications, pipeline sections laid
under roads, pavements, drain ducts etc. shall be protected by means of minimum
MGP-15 concrete envelope cast around them. The concrete layer shall be 10 cm thick
minimum.
The pipe concrete contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to casting and
unless otherwise specified they shall not be painted or isolated.
Filling shall be of lime stone or other bedding material approved by the CO, such as
riverbed gravel, natural stone fragments etc. n layers up to 25 cm, compacted
mechanically through wetting until controlled compaction is reached according to
Chapter 01, paragraph controlled Compaction, the compaction rate shall be 98%
minimum of laboratory compaction maximum density according to ASTM-1557 (test B
or D). The contractor shall restore the road to original shape with all layers thereof
using new materials and ensuring appropriate attachment to the road surfaces
bordering with the strip. Waste and excess materials shall be disposed of as specified
in Chapter 01 for disposal.
The contractor is regarded fully responsible for sedimentation in the areas repaired by
him.
B. Designed Road
Conduits shall be executed as above, under coordination with the appropriate authority.
070182 - Pavement and Path Conduits
The conduit shall be executed as specified in paragraph 070181 above. When the area is paved
with pavement tiles or interlocking tiles, recycled use of tiles or interlocking stones is allowed,
provided that they are not damaged or broken. The contractor shall restore the pavement to
original condition.

07018 - Expansion Joint
Pipes shall not pass through the expansion joints of a building. However, where such passage is
unavoidable, it shall be accomplished in exposed installation only, according to the plan details.

0702 - CoId and Hot Water SuppIy
07020 - GeneraI
Water Supply Lines consist of pipelines laid outside buildings, either main supply branch or
domestic water meter connection.
All water lines shall be installed according to the plan and contract document details.
Outdoor water supply lines shall be generally laid in ditches 60 cm deep minimum of final ground
surface level (or flooring level).
Pipelines connecting water meter to valves or to feed tank are defined as Distribution Lines. Each
distribution line shall be equipped with gate valve, to allow repair of distribution line without
disconnecting the supply from the remaining distribution lines.
Each feed line serving several consumer points shall be equipped with a shut-off valve.
All hot water pipes installed in the building shall be properly insulated against heat loss (for quality
and thickness of the isolation material, see Section 0708).
Upon completion of work and prior to system delivery the contractor shall accomplish elutriation
and disinfection according to DS and CO instructions.
07021 - Pipe Laying Restrictions
Water supply pipes shall not be laid behind or under sanitary fixtures (such as lavatory seat, sink,
urinal, bath) cabinets and other places with difficult access or where parts of the structure have to
be removed before a line can be repaired. Pipes shall also not be laid under floor tiles or in the
vicinity of electric cables, unless especially approved by the CO.
10
Where the CO approved pipes to be installed under floor tiles, they shall be covered throughout
with lean concrete 10 cm wide and 4 cm minimum thick, or with other anti-corrosive materials. The
pipes shall be laid parallel to tile lines.

07022 - SteeI Pipes
Water supply lines made of steel pipes shall be executed according to the plans, the contract
documents and the following details:
Steel pipes shall be of either following two types:
A. Galvanized steel pipes that shall meet the requirements of S 103 Grade B, unless
otherwise explicitly specified. The galvanized fittings shall be made of malleable cast
according to S 255. The pipes shall threadened entirely down through the threaded
section. Sealing shall be made with flax soaked with red lead paint or other material
approved by the CO, assuring that no excess flax is protruding into or outside the pipe.
Water supply pipe threads shall be conical, length of threading shall comply with S
50.3.
Threading pipes and fittings, as well as valves, taps and other accessories shall cover
through the entire threading length.
B. Seamless galvanized steel pipes Schedule 40, ASTM-A-53 Standard.
C. Black steel pipes with seam according to S 530. The pipes shall be coated with mortar
cement on the inside, and protected from the outside by hot bitumen or with two layers
of polyethylene tape. Any damage caused to the coating ends or to the lining and
isolation during transport and pipe handling shall be repaired by the contractor before
laying of the pipes. The repair material shall be identical with the original.
Accessories shall have internal coating identical to the pipe coating.
Requirements for internal coating steel pipes, without external envelope shall be specified in as
special specification.
070222 - SteeI Pipe WeIding
When welding of steel pipes is required, the welding shall be carried out as follows:
A. Welding works shall be carried out as specified in Chapter 19 General Specification
for Foundry Frames. The specifications herein consist supplements and emphasizes
the relevant welding requirements for pipes.
B. Experienced welders only shall be employed, who have successfully passed an
examination pursuant to srael Standard 127 and who are in possession of valid
certificates which indicate the types of welds they are qualified to perform. Each welder
shall be limited to the types of welding mentioned in the certificate.
Each welder shall have his own personal mark, which shall be stamped on the item
when he starts working on it, for ease of identification and inspection.
C. f the use of galvanized pipes and parts is required in the special specification or in the
contract documents, the galvanized parts shall not be welded. f welding does prove
necessary, the same electrodes and the same welding process specified in this chapter
shall be used.
D. Unless otherwise specified in the plans and the special specification, the electrodes
shall conform to the requirements of S 1340 and to the following:
i For root weld and filling: E-6010
i For weld filling only: E-7018
i For welding galvanized piping, root and filling: E-6010, E-6011, E-6013
E. Welding functions shall be accomplished, unless otherwise specified as follows:
The ends of the pipes shall be inspected before they are welded to ascertain that they
are complete and rounded. Defective ends shall be cut off and discarded. The pipe
ends, at least 10 cm from the end, shall be thoroughly cleaned of any dirt, rust, paint
11
and bitumen residues and any other foreign substance which may to adversely affect
the quality of the welding. A metal brush and suitable solution shall be used to remove
paint and oil residues.
The pipe edges designed for butt welding shall be beveled ("phase" processed) at an
angle of 37.5 degrees with a deviation of 0 to 5 degrees in the direction of the edge
plane, with 1.5 mm being left unleveled.
The root gap between pipes shall be 0.8-2.5 mm to ensure full penetration and it shall
be measured using a standard gage.
Bell pipes shall be welded with a corner weld along the line where the tip of the bell
meets the wall of the pipe adjacent to it.
When the pipes are fitted care shall be taken to avoid any internal "steps between the
ends of adjacent pipes and that there shall be horizontal shift of approximately 50 mm
between the longitudinal seams.
n order to ensure centering of the pipes and gripping of the ends a loop shall be used
which grips the pipes from outside. t is possible to use a bridge made out of flat sheet
metal instead of loops.
Using weld points inside the bevel for gripping the pipe is not acceptable unless the
root cycle is completed immediately. The defective weld points shall be discarded in
course of welding.
The loop or the flat sheet metal shall not be removed until the root weld ensures that
pipes adjacent to each other are properly gripped. The root cycle shall be completed
immediately after the loop has been removed.
The number of welding cycles for each seam shall not be less than two and electrodes
and filling threads of suitable quality and diameter shall be used for each cycle. The
root cycle (which is the first welding cycle) shall be performed in either welding modes,
circular or fixed position. A root seam alone without filling seam shall not be left
overnight. Moving the pipes shall be avoided as much as possible until the entire root
cycle has been completed. The thickness of the cycles shall be 2.5 to 3 mm and their
thickness and number shall be adjusted so that the seam protrudes above the surface
of the pipe no more than 1.5 mm. The top cycle shall be 3 mm larger than the width of
the groove before the welding.
The penetration of the root into the pipe space shall not exceed 3 mm for 3 inch and
larger pipes, while smaller diameter pipes will have root penetration not exceeding 1.5
mm. All welding material shall be thoroughly fused with the base metal and the
previous cycles. Two cycles shall not be started at the same place.
After each cycle the seam shall be thoroughly cleaned of slag, scrapings and dirt.
Similarly the places where the electrodes are replaced shall also be cleaned. Manual
cleaning using a hammer, chisel and steel brush, or sand stone is allowed provided
that cleaning is carried out as required until white metal is exposed.
F. Welding finish shall be as follows: The complete seam shall be thoroughly cleaned
from any base metal residues. The seam shall be uniform and the welding surface shall
be free of any pores, slits or sharp passages. The passage between the base metal
and the welding material shall be gradual and continuous without any markings.
Crossings between lengthwise and widthwise seams shall be gradual and continuous
without steps and sharp breaks.
G. Upon completion of the welding, visual inspection of the welding shall be carried. n
addition to the visual tests of the welds - while they are being made and on completion
of the welding non destructive tests shall be carried out, if specified by the special
specification, or according to the CO requirement.
The non-destructive welding tests shall only be performed after the visual inspection,
which shall certify the completion of the welding area (removal of slag, welding
splinters, repair of external defects etc.)
H. Preparation of the test areas, such as grinding for liquid penetrant testing, shall be
carried out by the contractor at his own expense as integral part of the production.
12
. Analysis of the results and determining the quality of the welds and acceptance or
rejection of the data is the sole decision of the CO.
J. f non-destructive tests are specified, they shall be performed in the workshop and on
site with the full cooperation of the contractor.
The contractor shall supply the inspector with all the assistance required for performing
the tests.
Defective welds or areas encountered in course of the non-destructive tests shall be
repaired by the contractor at his own expense. The repair shall be performed according
to the definitions in the relevant standards.
Any defective weld shall re-tested after it has been repaired under the same test
[procedure two additional photographs shall also be taken of each defective weld. All
photographs and tests arising from a defective weld shall be made by the non-
destructive test inspector at the contractor expense.
K. The CO may instruct destructive tests of welds if he has a good reason to believe that
the quality of the welding does not conform to the specification.

07023 - Copper Pipes
Copper pipes and fittings shall be of electrolytic copper, meeting the requirements of US Standard
ASTM-SS-67 L type or German standard DN 1786. Fittings shall be soldered with silver or with
special alloys containing silver, that does not contain poisonous substances, and those shall be
approved for their purpose by a qualified laboratory.
n exposed pipe lines, connections between pipes and accessories may be done by special Flare
Joint connector.
Bends are allowed in copper pipes up to 10 mm diameter and 0.8 cm wall thickness.
Contact between copper pipes and other pipes or accessories made of different metal shall be
avoided. No galvanized steel pipes shall be connected to copper pipe line down stream.

07024 - PIastic Pipes
A. Polyethylene pipes shall comply with S 499 requirements.
PVC pipes shall comply with S 532 requirements.
B. Polyethylene, CPVC, polypropylene, polybutylene and crossed polyethylene pipes shall
be specified in a special specification.
Assembly, nstallation and connection shall comply with the pipe and accessory manufacturer
instructions.
Pipes and accessories shall be industrial type, and no change or bend shall be attempted on site.
All remaining requirements and connections between plastic piping and other material piping shall
be done according to the plan details or as specified in the contract documents.

07025 - Fixing of Accessories
A. All accessories, such as valves, taps, gate valves, water meters, filters, thermostatic
valves, check valves, pressure reducer valves shall be fixed in central and axial
position in accordance with the precise route and layout marked in the plans.
Exposed metal parts of copper alloy internal tap fixed inside wall shall be chrome
plated.
Underground valves shall be installed in a bottomless concrete chamber built or cast
on site including cover. Chamber and cover details shall as indicated in the plans or in
the contract documents.
B. Taps and cold/hot water mixing batteries shall be installed in symmetrical and central
position to the sinks and the wash basins. The cold water taps shall be installed without
13
exception, on the right hand of an on looking person. Shower batteries shall be
installed on side wall of the cabinet rather than opposite the entrance.
Unless otherwise specified, taps and wall mixing batteries shall be installed in the
following heights measured from the finished floor, with minimum damage to porcelain
tiles:

x Taps or battery for wash basin or kitchen sink 1.05 1.10 meter above
floor
x Tap or mixing battery for a bath tub 0.60 0.65 meter above
floor
x Tap or mixing battery for sitting bath tub 0.75 0.80 meter above
floor
x Bucket tap in the shower cabinet 0.60 meter above floor
x Shower tap or battery 1.00 1.08 meter above
floor
x Flushing valve for seat or slop sink 0.90 - 0.95 meter above
floor
x Garden tap 0.60 meters
x Bathtub mixing battery - 1/3 of tub length on exit side or above exit. Mixing
battery for sitting bath at the center of tub on exit side.

07026 - Pressure Boosters
All installations required for boosting water pressure in pipes, such as pressure vessel, pump and
air compressor as well as water storage tanks installed to avoid direct suction from the lines shall
be carried out as specified in the plans or contract documents.

07027 - Water Storage Tanks
The number, dimensions and type of water tanks shall be as specified in the plans or in the
contract documents.
Water tanks shall be equipped with filler pipe, a float valve, vent, overflow, exit and drain pipes - all
as specified n the DS. Measures shall be taken to ensure tank water rotation.

07028 - Water Heating
070281 - Residence EIectric Water Heater
Electric water heater (electric boiler) shall be of residence type in compliance with S 69.1 and
69.2. and the following conditions:
A. Heater nominal pressure shall not be less than the maximum pressure of the main
water supply system and shall be indicated on the heater nameplate.
B. When the main water supply system pressure is unknown, the heater shall operate at
pressure of 8 Atm minimum.
C. The heater shall be equipped according to S 1025.
D. The heater shall be tested according to S specification 19 pressure tanks: welded
steel tanks.
070282 - Residence SoIar System
A. General
Three solar system are distinguishable:
14
1) Single residence thermo siphon system open
2) Single residence forced system open
3) Single residence forced system closed
These systems shall be installed and tested according to S 579 Solar Water Heaters
and to S 97 Central solar system with non central collectors for water heating in
resident buildings.
B. Flat Collector
Flat collector shall be in compliance with S 579 and installed on mountings to the
south r15
0
. When the architect solution enforces deviation from the south direction, the
collector area shall be increased as specified in the standard.
C. Storage tanks and heat exchangers
Storage tanks and heat exchangers shall comply with Chapter 16 Heating
nstallations. The minimum closed system heat transfer area shall be 0.35 m for each 1
m net area of the collector or as specified in the special specification.
D. Control
Forced systems shall be equipped with differential thermostat including top sensor
(installed at the water exit point from the most hot collector), bottom sensor (installed at
the bottom of the storage tank and control box.
E. Piping System
The piping system shall be as specified above, except for crossed polyethylene piping
that shall not be used for this purpose.
F. solation
The isolation shall comply with S 579. n roof exposed piping the isolation shall be
wrapped with galvanized steel sheet with all joints sealed. For sheet thickness see
paragraph 0708.
G. Pumps
Pumps shall comply with S 101 specification Spin Pumps for solar Systems.

0703 - Drain and Vent System
07030 - generaI
The drain and vent system shall comply with DS requirements.

07031 - GaIvanized Pipes
All galvanized pipes shall comply with S 103 grade B.
The pipes shall be threaded to fittings as detailed in paragraph 07021 and watertight without use of
flax.
The fittings used shall be of Drain Fittings type conforming to the standard. An appropriate fitting
shall be installed for each change in pipeline direction. n places shown on the drawings or as
instructed by the CO, fittings with inspection eye shall be installed. Unless otherwise specified
inspection eye shall be installed wherever the direction change exceeds 45
0
.
The contractor is responsible easy access to drain for cleaning.

07032 - Cast Iron Pipes
Cast iron pipes shall comply with S 124 requirements for normal and heavy type, recessed pipe or
unrecessed pipe. The pipes shall be smooth inside and outside, and are subject to CO approval.
Pipe connection shall be accomplished as follows:
A. Recessed pipe connection
15
The gap between the bell and spigot (coupling) shall be packed with a well-tightened
rope sealed with lead.
B. Unrecessed pipe connection
Unrecessed pipes and accessories shall be connected by means of special connectors
used for these pipes. Connection shall comply with pipe manufacturer instructions.

1) On exposed insulation using dual part connector: rubber ring and
stainless steel clamp, secured by means of two screws.
2) Underground installation using red polypropylene connector, with two
rubber sealing rings on ends. The pipe shall be covered with MGP-10
concrete 10 cm thick.
Securing of vertical pipelines to wall shall be made with strong hooks made of two halves
flat iron rings wound around the pipe.
The hook shall be placed on the pipe below the coupling. For hook spacing see
paragraph 07012.
Securing of horizontal pipelines shall be made with angle or profile iron brackets
shaped to fit the pipe or with steel hangers suspended from the ceiling or venting pipe
vibrations.
All supports, hangers and other pipe retaining means shall be painted as specified in
paragraph 0709.
07033 - DeIeted
07034 - PIastic Pipes
Pipes shall be of two types:
A. Rigid Polyvinyl chloride in compliance with S 576 (accessories with S 577). Pipe type
shall be specified in the special specification and shall comply with the water
temperature.
B. Polypropylene pipes and accessories in accordance with S 958. threadened drain
accessories for polypropylene pipes shall comply with S specification 55: Plastic Drain
Accessories for Waste Water.
The installation shall be carried out according to the manufacturer instruction. The pipes and
accessories shall be industrial and no change or bent shall be attempted on site.
Seals for drain system comprising plastic pipes and accessories shall be of elastomer material
(rubber). No soft plastic material shall be in use.

07035 - Lead Pipes
The pipes shall conform to S 522 and their nstallation shall be n accordance with DS
requirements.

07036 - Vent Pipes
nstallation of vent: pipes shall be carried out as detailed for drain pipes in paragraphs 07030-
07034 above. Unless otherwise specified, each vent pipe is to be extended, at least 30 cm above
the parapet edge or the gutter on the roof, and 1.80 m for residence roofs. The top of the vent pipe
shall be equipped with cowl and mesh made of galvanized metal sheet.

07037 - Interceptors, Traps and Extensions
070371 - Interceptors
nterceptors (control chambers) shall be installed according to the plans and DS requirements.
The walls of the chamber (lead or polypropylene) is indicated in the bill of quantities, Seals shall be
16
made of elastomeric materials. nterceptor covers shall be made of brass while cover to
polypropylene interceptor shall be of same material. The covers shall be leveled with the paving
surface.
Lead interceptors 4 to 5 inch in diameter shall be walls 3 mm thick. Lead boxes inserted in
concrete floor shall be twice coated with blown asphalt prior to installation to avoid contact between
the lead box and the concrete. The bottom shall be of brass or lead, following the CO instructions.
The covers shall be of brass, threaded to brass frame which is soldered to the lead box with tin.
Pipe connections to the interceptor shall be made through appropriate unions soldered to the
control chamber.
Pipes between two control chambers on horizontal plane under flooring shall be laid in straight
lines.
070372 - Traps
Traps shall be made of cast iron, lead or polypropylene.
Floor traps and drum traps shall be produced according to DS requirements and the plans.
Floor trap shall be covered with mesh attached to the trap. Drum trap shall be covered with a
cover, as specified for interceptors.
070373 - Extensions
Extensions shall be installed where instructed by the plans. The interceptor or trap extension shall
be made of lead pipe, 3 cm wall thickness or of the following materials: brass, stainless steel, steel
lined internally with protective material, concrete cast on site and plastered internally with mortar
cement or polypropylene. The extension shall be equipped with a cover or strainer made of brass,
cast iron or polypropylene. n 6 inch interceptor the depth from cover surface to the bottom shall
not exceed 30 cm unless the CO approved otherwise. concrete.

0704 - Sanitary Fixtures
07040 - GeneraI
The Contractor shall submit for the CO approval samples of all the fixtures (WC bowls, sinks,
bathtubs, etc.) and accessories (taps, outlets, mixing batteries, traps etc.). Only types approved by
the CO shall be installed in the building.
Wash basins, kitchen sinks, lavatory seats, clothes washing basins, etc. shall be of white porcelain
and of the best quality and of type specified in the contract documents. The installed fixtures shall
be protected during construction so that they can be handed over at the completion of the works in
normal condition.

07041 - Fixture Accessories
All fixture accessories, such as chains, hinges, nuts and bolts brackets, etc. shall be made of
galvanized steel, brass etc.
Batteries and cold/hot taps shall be of copper alloy, nickel chromium coated. Rosettes shall be
nickel chromium coated. n exposed systems, batteries shall; have no rosettes.

07042 - Fixture InstaIIation
The attachments of the fixtures to walls and floors shall be watertight, strong and stable but also
flexible to avoid stress transfer that can damage the fixture. All bolts, nuts and other fasteners shall
be made of galvanized steel, brass etc.

07043 - Kitchen MarbIe TabIe
Marble kitchen tables shall be made the following materials:
17
A. White marble manufactured locally, healthy and clean, well finished with slopes,
grooves, etc. as specified. The thickness of the marble plate shall be 2 cm.
B. Synthetic "marble in accordance with S 34 Polimer Concrete Working Surfaces for
Kitchen Cupboard.
Marble installation shall be carried out according to the plans.

07044 - Lavatory Seats
Lavatory seats shall be of S or P type and shall be secured to the floor with brass bolts. Unless
otherwise specified the lavatory seats shall be supplied with a white plastic lid with nickel chrome
plated external hinges, or subject to the CO approval, plastic hinges.
Suspended lavatory seats shall be installed on the porcelain tiles in precise accordance to the
manufacturer instructions. The seat shall be nstalled using all assembly accessories supplied by
the manufacture such as: special steel chair, gaskets, drain accessories and wash pipe
accessories. All metal fittings shall be chrome plated. The contact surfaces between the ceramic
tiles and the seat shall be applied with mortar cement of the same shade as the tiles.
The toilet seat exit shall connect to drain through plastic or lead pipe section, 4 inch diameter
through industrial accessory specially produced for this purpose. Joints shall be sealed with putty,
rubber rings or appropriate material to be approved. The connection to the interceptor or drain shall
be through accessory or fitting with inspection eye.

07045 - SIop Sink
Slop sinks shall be equipped with fixed wooden rim and chrome nickel plated copper alloy grating.
Semi automatic flushing valve and inch pouring tap for cold and hot water, of appropriate length
shall be installed above the sink.

07047 - UrinaIs
Urinal shall consist of porcelain plates 50 or 60 cm wide and open semi circular porcelain channel.
t shall be equipped with an automatic flushing cistern made of glazed stoneware or with a semi
automatic flushing tap. Flushing pipes, fittings and accessories shall be all made of chrome nickel
plated copper alloy. Above the channel outlet chrome plated special urinal strainer shall be
installed. A porcelain threshold or of other approved material shall be installed in front of the urinal,
30 cm wide minimum having grooves draining into the channel.

0705 - Rainwater Drainage
07050 - GeneraI
Gutter consists a vertical pipe, that drains rainwater from the roof. t can be concealed (buried in
column or wall) or exposed, with square or round cross section.
The pipes, sheets, accessories and gutter fittings shall be as specified in [paragraph 0703 for drain
and vent pipes except for lead pipes.
Rainwater systems (no free exit) pipes and accessories shall be made of galvanized steel in
compliance with S 103 or black pipes with mortar cement internal coating according to S 530. The
pipes shall be welded by means of special electrodes.
Galvanized iron sheet gutter connections shall be made by means of tin soldering or sheet iron
work connections. The sheet finish shall be smooth, with no protruding edges. Connection of zinc
sheet no. 12 shall be made with tin soldering, sheet overlapping at least 30 cm. Clamps shall be of
the same material as the gutter.
ron sheet gutters, clamps, steel pipes and supports shall be painted as specified in paragraph
18
0709.
The minimum diameter of the gutter shall be 4 inch.

07051 - Gutter InstaIIation
Gutters shall be installed on a straight line from the roof to the outlet at the ground. However, if
bends in cannot be avoided, appropriate openings easily accessible for cleaning, shall be provided
next to the bends.
Top nlet of gutters shall be protected by stainless steel strainer according to detail in the plan, or
by a galvanized wire strainer if no specification given.

07052 - ConceaIed Gutters InstaIIed in Structure Sections
Concealed gutters nstalled in building sections shall be made according to the plans and the
remaining contract documents.
Head of gutter concealed in the building shall be extended beyond the roof parapet and shall be
closed with galvanized sheet with access for cleaning.
Rain pipes laid under the building shall be black steel pipes; cement mortar lined or galvanized
steel pipes.
The pipes sections shall be connected by welding and protected by a concrete surround. Welding
of pipes protected internally with mortar cement lining shall be applied protective paste supplied by
the pipe manufacturer.
Balcony drain lines shall be connected to an exposed, separate gutter.

07053 - Gutter OutIet
Free gutter outlet above ground level shall terminate with a 45 or 68 degree made of galvanized
steel, black steel with internal coating or cast iron. The exit top edge shall be 10 to 15 cm above
final ground level. The Bend shall drain into precast concrete basin, diverting the water away from
the building foundations. An outlet connected to the drain system shall terminate with a cast iron
bend that shall direct the water into channeling control chamber.
No gutters shall be installed with free exit to pavements or pavements designed for pedestrians.
Spouts of balconies pointing to pavements or areas as mentioned shall be connected to special
gutter. A precast basin shall be installed under the gutter outlet.

0706 - Sewerage and ChanneIing
07060 - GeneraI
This paragraph covers the building sewerage and channeling and does not apply to public
sewerage and channeling.

07061 - MateriaIs
The pipes shall be of the following types:
A. Cylindrical pipes of concrete and reinforced concrete - S 27.
B. Rigid polyvinyl chloride pipes - S 884.
C. nternal liner steel pipes S 530.
D. Cast iron pipes - S 124, S 125, light or heavy types.
E. Clay pipes in accordance with the standards of the country of origin.
19
Non-reinforced concrete for bedding, sealing holes and envelopes shall be of lean concrete or
MGP- 20. Reinforced concrete for chambers, manhole, etc. shall be prepared of Grade MGP-20
(See Chapter 02 - General Specification for Cast on Site Concrete).

07062 - PipeIine Marking
Centers of control chambers, manholes, etc. shall be marked by the contractor with marking pegs
and approved by the CO for accuracy of marking before starting earthwork or installation. The
leveling of the line shall be carried out with a level instrument. n rock soil the pegs shall be
installed with concrete in holes excavated for this purpose, stabilized and secured.
The contractor shall inspect all levels marked in the plans in regard to the actual levels in the area
and in any case of discrepancy, he will inform the CO and await his instructions for execution of the
work.
07063 - Line Laying
A. Underground pipelines shall be laid entirely on appropriate bedding such as natural
soil, sand, concrete.
B. Underground pipelines shall be laid at a depth to ensure minimum 30 cm soil cover on
top of the pipes.
C. The building sewerage passing under areas used for vehicle traffic, shall be covered
with 80 cm minimum deep soil on top of the sewerage line.
n case of cast iron sewerage, the cover thickness shall be minimum 60 cm. However,
when these depths are not available, the line shall be covered with reinforced concrete
MGP-20, 10 cm thick.
n case of plastic sewerage, the soil cover thickness shall be 1.0 m minimum on top of
the line.
D. Pipes laid on blown clay bedding shall be protected by reinforced concrete MGP-20, 10
cm thick, reinforcement of 8 mm diameter bars and 6 mm steel rims at 30 cm intervals.
E. Pipes passing parallel to strip foundation or foundation beams shall be laid at a
distance marked on the plans, but not closer than 1.0 meter. The distance shall be
measured horizontally, from the foundation or beam extreme line to the pipe axis.
F. Pipes passing in 90 degrees through foundation beams or slabs or under foundation
beams, shall be protected by sleeves, made of concrete, with diameter larger by three
nominal diameters than the passing through pipes, though no less than 8 inch. The
sleeve shall protrude 10 cm minimum from each side of the foundation beam or slab.
The gap between the external pipe surface and the sleeve shall be sealed at the ends
by means for bitumen material or equivalent, watertight which does not cause pipe
corrosion. The gap between the sleeve to and the bottom of the foundation beams shall
be 8 cm minimum. When the pipe is installed 60 cm minimum away from the
foundation beam, the sleeve installation is not necessary.
Pipes passing in corrosive soil, shall be protected against external corrosion by means
of appropriate anti-corrosive material.
Top precautions shall be taken to secure the ditch. The backfill shall be compacted
manually around the sewerage without causing damage to the pipes. For this purpose
the ditch shall be backfilled with appropriate soil layers, stone and foreign material free,
in order not to damage the line mechanically or start corrosive activity.
G. The ditch required for the pipeline shall be kept open until the laid line is controlled,
inspected and approved.

07063 - GuIIey Traps
Gulley traps shall be made of concrete or vitrified clay. The internal surfaces shall be smooth and
all edges rounded. The nside of concrete traps shall be plastered with cement mortar trawled to a
20
glossy surface. The trap seal shall be minimum 5 cm. The trap shall be placed on concrete
bedding 10 cm thick minimum and shall be wrapped with concrete and covered with the cover.
Extension shall be built or cast on top of the trap into which waste drain shall be connected. The
inside of the extension shall be plastered as above.

07064 - Inspection Chambers
070651 - GeneraI
The various chambers shall be constructed according to the plan. Round chambers shall be of
precast, or cast on site concrete. Rectangular chambers shall be built of bricks or concrete casting
as mentioned.
Concrete reinforcement (floor, walls and roof) shall be as specified in the plan.
Covers shall comply with S 489 and of the type specified in the contract documents. Minimum
diameter of the chamber opening shall comply with S 1205.
070652 - Steps
Steps shall be installed in two vertical columns, alternatively. The vertical clearance between steps
in both columns shall not exceed 70 cm and the horizontal distance between the columns shall not
be less than 25 cm not exceeding 40 cm (inter-axis distance).
The first top step shall be installed at a depth not exceeding 60 cm below the chamber cover level.
n precast units the steps shall be industrial, produced together with the units.
070653 - VaIve Chambers
Valve, gate valve concrete chambers shall comply with the plans. Round chambers shall be
constructed from precast members, following the Standard requirements, and installed on gravel
bedding, with reinforced concrete ceiling and cover according to S 489, of the type specified in the
contract documents. Two steel pipe vents shall be installed, painted on exposed sections and open
ends shall be protected with aluminum fly net.
070654 - ControI Chambers
Control chambers shall be constructed of concrete, reinforced concrete, interconnecting concrete
precast members, full concrete blocks or bricks. The chamber shall be erected on top of concrete
base 10 cm thick and 10 cm from its edges. The chamber shall be built on bedding matching the
type of soil.
The chamber cover shall be 10 cm above ground level in garden areas, or at the ground level in
paths, pavements and internal roads, to include parking lots. Main ducts and duct branches at the
bottom of the chamber shall have appropriate slopes and convenient depths to allow free and non
spilling sewage flow.
The angle between inlets and exits shall not be less than 90 degrees. The main duct width shall be
as the diameter of the connecting pipe and its slope as the entering pipe slope, but not less than
2%.
The ducts shall be built with steps of smooth mortar cement, step higher by 7 cm than duct edge
and with rounded corners.
The stepping shall have top slope to the sides at 30 degrees minimum angle.
All control chamber internal surfaces, except for precast member control chambers, shall be
coated with mortar cement 1:1, one part cement and one part sand. n precast member chambers,
the joints and seams shall be sealed professionally.
070655 - Distribution Chambers
Distribution chambers shall, be equipped with stainless steel or fiberglass reinforced polyester stop
logs, in frames of the same material with non rusting metal handle secured to the log with rivets of
the same metal. The frame shall be installed prior to the casting with the lock inside, temporarily
rigidified to avoid distortion during casting. The lock shall be conveniently and easily movable.
The number of locks shall be one less that the number of channels.
21
070656 - Pits, CesspooIs and Septic Tanks
Septic tanks reinforced concrete cast. Floor at 1:20 slope in the entrance direction.
Fat tank Concrete cast according to plan detail and DS requirements for septic tank.
Percolating pit shall comply with DS requirements, but contrary to these specifications, the blocks
shall be built of cement lime mortar instead of dry construction. Concrete blocks for Percolating pit
shall comply with S 9.
nternal surfaces shall be plastered with cement mortar as specified in Chapter 09 General
Specification for Plaster Works, properly processed with trowel though the plaster requirement is
not applicable to precast concrete chambers, in compliance with S 658.

07067 - Sewerage and Drainage DisposaI InstaIIations
Sewerage and drainage disposal installations shall be executed according to the plans or the
contract documents.

0707 - Fire Fighting InstaIIation
07070 - GeneraI
The following paragraphs specify water fire extinguishing installation only.
The installation is subject to Fireman Authority as condition for CO acceptance.

07071 - MateriaIs
Pipes shall be of steel as specified in paragraph 07022, and accessories as specified in paragraph
07025 A.

07072 - Indoor Fire Extinguishing Posts
The indoor fire extinguishing post shall be constructed according to the plans.
ndoor fire extinguishing post comprises hydrant, or hose reel as required by the special
specifications.
A. Hydrant piping shall be of pipes and accessories mentioned above. Fire valve shall
comply with S 448 requirements.
B. Hose reel made of 25 meter long rubber hose, rolled on reel with multipurpose
nozzle. The reel and accessories thereof shall comply with S 308 specification
requirements.
07073 - Outdoor Fire Extinguishing Posts
The outdoor fire extinguishing post shall be constructed according to the plans. The piping system
shall be as specified above. Underground piping shall have external envelope as specified in
paragraph 070221 C. Each hydrant shall comprise a water line and upright column according to
the plan. The upright diameter shall be 2 inch minimum and it shall protrude over ground surface
level approximately 1.0 meter. The angle between the horizontal section and the upright shall be
anchored in concrete block 40x40x40 cm minimum. Concrete shall be MGP-10. The hydrant shall
be equipped with Storz coupling. s specified, inch garden valve shall be installed.
Protection device against hydrant breaking shall be installed as specified in the special
specification.

07074 - Fire Extinguishing Boxes
Boxes for the fire extinguishing posts shall be as specified in the plans.
22
The bill of quantities shall indicate the dimensions and material of the box.

0708 - Pipe IsoIation
07080 - GeneraI
Water pipes shall be insulated by means of fiberglass; or rock wool or synthetic rubber, each shall
comply with the following requirements. Pipe isolation includes bend, branch, and fitting isolation.
The edges of the isolation material shall be secured with galvanized sheet iron rings.
solation iron sheet envelopes, clamps and joints shall be painted as specified in paragraph 0709
herein. The isolation includes also securing the isolation material layer edges with . The CO shall
approve the material and the method of application. solation work includes the solation of bends,
tea connections and all other fittings.. The minimum thickness of the isolation shall be as follows

07081 - Rock wooI or FibergIass IsoIation
Prefabricated shells compressed and rigidified of fiberglass; or rock wool, of density 120 to 150
kg/m
3
and heat conduction coefficient of 0.032 at 25 degree Celsius.
The shells shall be reinforced with aluminum bands, three times per shell. solation edge cutting
shall be done with sharp knife and the cut shall be straight and smooth. The isolation material
section shall be bonded with appropriate adhesive.
The CO shall approve the material and the method of application. solation work includes the
solation of bends, tea connections and all other fittings. The edges of the isolation material shall
be secured with galvanized sheet rings. The minimum thickness of the isolation shall be as follows

07082 - Synthetic Rubber SheIIs
Synthetic rubber shell shall comply with the following requirements:
A. Synthetic rubber shells shall be a shelf product of recognized manufacturer, approved
by the CO.
B. The shells shall be made of foam plastic polyester mixture, flexible and tubular, made
of sealed cells filled wit inertic gas.
C. The isolation material density and heat conduction coefficient shall be specified in the
special specification, in each event the material shall be self-extinguishable.
D. The shells shall be complete and be dressed on the pipes with no length cuts or
bonding.

07083 - IsoIation Thickness
Minimum thickness of the isolation shall e as follows:

Pipe Diameter (inch) - 1 1 - 2 2 4
Thickness (mm) Rock
wool or fiberglass
Thickness (mm) Synthetic
Rubber Shells
25

19
40

19
50

25

solation envelope shall be of either following types:
A. ndustrial aluminum foil envelope, with length bonding option. The isolation cartridge
including envelope, shall be shelf item of a factory.
B. ndustrial aluminum foil and bitumen saturated fiberglass combination envelope, with
23
length bonding option. The isolation cartridge including envelope, shall be shelf item of
a factory.
C. 0.6 mm thick galvanized iron sheet, for pipes up to 1 inch. 0.8 mm thick galvanized
iron sheet, for pipes over 2 inch. Sheet joints shall include minimum 2 cm overlap and
direction preventing water penetration into the isolation.
D. Polyethylene tape with half tape width minimum overlap (under CO approval in writing).
f specified, the isolation shall comply with S specification 266.3 requirements.
The iron sheet joints shall be accomplished by soldering or iron sheet metal work. The sheet finish
shall be smooth, no protruding edges, and shall be painted as specified herein.
The pipe isolation shall be carried after completion of the hydraulic test and receiving the CO
approval in writing and after pipe painting.

07084 - IsoIation of Pipes InstaIIed in WaIIs
Pipes placed in walls shall be insulated with 10 mm loose or rigid sections of fiberglass, or with
rock wool. Synthetic rubber isolation shall be 4 mm thick. n straight pipeline, the isolation shall be
reinforced with galvanized wires at 0.50 m minimum intervals.

0709 - Piping System Painting
07091 -Exposed Pipe and Accessory Painting
Exposed pipe and accessory painting shall be carried out, unless otherwise specified, as follows:
A. ungalvanized pipes and accessories
Painting of ungalvanized pipes and accessories shall be accomplished in the factory, in
addition to the general requirements detailed in Chapter 11 - General Specification for
Painting Works and surface preparations methods described in the same chapter, the
painting shall be carried out as follows:
Prior to the painting, the area shall be properly cleaned of rust, oil and foreign
materials, as specified in paragraph Area Preparation in the general specification for
painting works. The pipes shall be coated with two red lead coats in compliance with S
1247, on intermediate coat of phenol synthetic resin based paint and one top coat in
compliance with S 756.
The total thickness of the paint system shall be 120 Pm.
B. Galvanized pipes painting
Galvanized pipes shall be painted with one coat of calcium plombate based paint and
one top coat of synthetic paint in compliance with S 756.
The total thickness of the paint system shall be 60 Pm on top of the galvanization.
C. Paint repairs and complements on site shall be using paint is identical with the type and
kind of the industrial painting.
D. Galvanized sheet isolation envelope painting
Galvanized sheet isolation envelope painting shall include one coat of calcium
plombate based paint and one top coat of synthetic paint in compliance with S 756.
The total thickness of the paint system shall be 60 Pm on top of the galvanization.

07092 - Painting Hangers, Supports
Hangers, supports, etc. painting shall be identical with pipe painting requirement.

07093 - Gutter Painting
When galvanized gutter sheets ins required, the requirements for galvanized pipes are applicable.
24

07094 - Piping System Identification Painting
f required, pipes shall be painted in identification colors as specified in the special specification.
a
2001

08 - GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
AND TAKE-OFF PROCEDURES

The Inter-Ministerial Committee Ior the Standardization oI the
Construction
Contract Documents and their Computerization, with the participation oI
the
DeIense Ministry, the Building and Housing Ministry and the
Transport Ministry / Public Works Department

b
All rights reserved to the Ministry oI DeIense / Publications
a
08 - GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS AND DIRECTIVES TO THE DESIGNER
(This page is not part of the Contract)

1. The General SpeciIication Ior Electrical Installations represents Chapter 08 oI the
For the attention of the user: The present version of Chapter 08 combines
together two chapters - Chapter 08 - Electrical Installations and Chapter 43
- Outdoors Lighting.
2. The Take-oII Procedures Ior the Electrical Installations are indicated as No.
0800.00 and they are gathered at the end oI the SpeciIication. The Bill oI
Procedures.
3. The General SpeciIication Iorms an inseparable part oI the Contract Documents
between the Ministry and the Contractor. Should the need Ior it arise, the
Designer shall prepare a Special SpeciIication Ior a given work and indicate that
all the requirements oI the Special SpeciIication supersede in all cases, those oI
The present SpeciIication is based so as to Iorm one oI the Contract Documents,
the stipulations oI which are the Contract with the State oI Israel Ior the execution
oI a structure by a Contractor (shelI 3210).
4. In the Special SpeciIication or the Bill oI Quantities, or the Drawings, the
Designer shall indicate his requirements with respect to what is said in those
SpeciIication Paragraphs in which there are more than one alternative. The
Designer shall also check the List oI Standards at the head oI the Chapter to
ensure that it is complete and updated.
5. In the Iollowing paragraphs (6-29), the Paragraphs, which the Designer must
address in writing and speciIically his requirements, are listed.
6. Chapter 08 Version The Designer shall indicate in the Special SpeciIication
that he is basing himselI on Chapter 08, FiIth Version (2001).
7. Sealing of Passages The Designer shall indicate in the Special SpeciIication his
requirements Ior the sealing system between the various Iire areas in the building
and in the penetration into protected areas.
8. Pipes The various types oI pipes required shall be indicated in the Special
SpeciIication and the Bill oI Quantities and a distinction shall be made between
selI-extinguishing pipes and pipes which are not selI-extinguishing.
9. Cables The Designer shall detail in the Special SpeciIication the required type
oI cables.
10. Aluminum Cables and Conduits They shall be described in the Special
SpeciIication.
b
11. Cables for Very Low Voltage Systems - They shall be described in the Special
SpeciIication.
12. Switching and Control Boards (Electrical Boards) In one oI the documents,
the Iollowing details shall be indicated:
a) Requirements Ior special tightness to dust, gases and humidity;
b) Protection against creepage current;
c) Protection oI boards against lightning and over-voltage;
d) Requirement Ior automatic switches with thermal and adjustable and
replaceable magnetic mechanisms;
e) Requirement Ior submittal oI calculation oI heat emission (in watts),
created when the board is Iully used;
I) Requirement Ior locking the board.
13. Sub-Base for Very Low Voltage Systems The Designer shall include in the
Special SpeciIication, as needed, special requirements oI the Ministry oI Building
and Housing concerning TV centralized reception antennas, cable TV, intercom,
Iire and smoke detection, addressing and patient-nurse.
14. Tightness of Fittings The level oI the protection required (IP) in the Iittings
shall be indicated.
15. Electronic Starters and Ballasts Subjected to special requirement in one oI
the Contract Documents.
16. Emergency Lighting The types oI the units shall be indicated in the Special
SpeciIication. The location oI the indication light and also other types oI units
(should they be requested) shall be indicated in the Special SpeciIication.
17. Painting The requirements Ior the painting oI the elements listed hereinaIter
shall be written in the Special SpeciIication.
a) Painting oI galvanized poles or sheet metal;
b) Oven-painting oI poles;
c) Painting in very corrosive environment (such as industrial areas or in
the vicinity oI the sea);
d) Painting oI electrical boards by methods diIIerent Irom the one
speciIied (type oI paint, number oI layers, etc.);
e) Painting oI bus-bars.
18. Testing the Installation The SpeciIication (Paragraph 0800.02-d) describes
two alternatives oI the payment Ior carrying out the test; should the payment not
be borne by the Contractor, the Designer shall indicate in the Special
SpeciIication that payment shall be according to paragraph 0800.02-d2.
c
19. High Voltage All that is described in the SpeciIication concerning the working
conditions deIined by the Israeli Electric Corporation (IEC). Whenever
compartments Iilled with gas under pressure exceeding 3 atmospheres are
required, all the relevant requirements shall be detailed.
20. Signage and Marking The Designer shall indicate in the Special SpeciIication
all that shall be required with respect to the signage and marking additional or
contrary to the details in the SpeciIication.
21. Protection from Lightning Should a protection Irom lightning be required, the
Designer shall prepare a Special SpeciIication Ior the execution oI the system.
22. Reinforcement of Outdoors Lighting Poles The Designer shall indicate the
type oI reinIorcement, in accordance with the type oI ground around the pole's
base and to all its depth into the ground.
23. Trial Operation of the Outdoors Lighting A special request Ior a trial
operation oI the outdoor lighting shall be indicated in the Special SpeciIication.
24. Lighting Fixtures The Designer shall deIine his requirements Ior the lighting
Iixtures such as shape characteristics, Iunctional characteristics, electrical
characteristics, mechanical characteristics, etc.
25. Lighting Central Board The type oI Ioundation and the type oI cabinet shall
be indicated in the Special SpeciIication.
26. Airplanes Warning Installation Should it be required, the Designer shall
detail his requirements in the Special SpeciIication.
27. Preparations in the Building for Satellite Reception shall be carried out as
required in paragraph 080295 and are included in paragraph 0800.64 oI the take-
oII procedures. There is no paragraph Ior measuring the preparations per units.
The unit in the apartment is used both Ior cable TV and satellite reception.
28. The Preparations in the Building for Cable TV shall be executed according to
the requirements detailed in paragraph 086294 and they are included in
paragraph 0800.54.
Should the Designer wish to measure the preparations in some other way, he
shall indicate the required alternative.
29. Take-off Procedures In some oI the paragraphs, there are alternatives Ior the
take-oII. The Designer shall indicate the required alternative.
30. All the subjects detailed above (6 to 29) only represent a reminder to the
Designer, which does not release him Irom checking the compatibility oI the
General SpeciIication paragraphs to the designed work.

d
- 2001 -

08 - GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
AND TAKE-OFF PROCEDURES

Construction
the

FiIth Version (Revised)

All rights reserved to the Ministry oI DeIense / Publications 2001
1

The Inter-Ministerial Committee Ior the Standardization oI the Construction
Contract Documents and their Computerization:

A. Haber Ministry oI DeIense Chairman
L.
Davidovitz
-
Y. Frankel
-
A. Saguy - Ministry oI Transport / Public Works Department Member
Y. Sasson - Ministry oI Building and Housing Member
S. Fein - Ministry oI DeIense Member oI the Committee and Responsible
Editor oI the Publications
Y. Lopovitz
-

General Specification for the Electrical Installations

Sub-
Committee:

S. Fein - Ministry oI DeIense Chairman
A. Carmel Ministry oI Transport / Public Work Department - Member
M. Praver Ministry oI Building and Housing - Member
M.
Nachman
G. Katzir Ministry oI DeIense Member
A.
Rosenfeld -
S.
Shamonis
IDF - Member
N. Tamari IDF - Member

The Committee was assisted by Mr. D. Sharon
2

08 - The Special Specification for Electrical Installations
(and the Take-Off Procedures)

Table of Contents
Page
0800 Scope .................................................................................................................................. 3
0801 Earthworks ....................................................................................................................... 14
0802 Conduits ........................................................................................................................... 18
0803 Cables and Conductors ..................................................................................................... 41
0804 Earthing and Other Protections ........................................................................................ 51
0805 Overhead Networks and Outdoors Lighting Poles ........................................................... 58
0806 Switch and Control Boards Ior Low Voltage ................................................................... 71
0807 Fittings and their Installation ............................................................................................ 88
0808 Luminaires (lamps) and their Fittings, Ior Indoor and Outdoor Lighting ........................ 91
0809 High Voltage Installations .............................................................................................. 109
0800.00 Take-OII Procedures Ior Electrical Installations ........................................................... 140

A "Blue Page" is attached to the Brochure - Directives to the Designer, which
are not part of the Contract.
08 (2001)
3
0800 Scope
This SpeciIication Chapter covers the quality oI materials and workmanship oI
electric installations to be connected to low voltage, as deIined by the Electricity
Law. Electric Installation as indicated in this SpeciIication means a Iacility used
Ior conducting, distributing and consuming electricity or its transIormation,
including instruments, conductors, accessories and stationary or portable
equipment associated with the installation handed over to the Contractor Ior
execution in the Iramework oI the contract. The Chapter includes also the
preparation oI substrates Ior very low voltage.
The chapter covers also the execution oI outdoors lighting Ior urban and
interurban roads, lanes, parking areas and playgrounds.
Sub-Chapter 0809 deals with High Voltage Installations.
The chapter does not deal with requirements concerning generators nor explosion
prooI installations.
08001 Standards
Besides whatever is stated in paragraph "ConIormity to Standards" in Chapter 00
Preliminaries, the Iollowing list contains the essential Israel Standards
applicable to his chapter.
a. Israel Standards
Standard
No.
Name oI Standard
20, all
its Parts
Electric Lamps
24 Passengers LiIts and Goods LiIts
32 Plugs and Socket-Outlets Ior Household and Similar Uses up
to 16 Amps
33 Switches Ior Household and Similar Fixed Electrical
Installations
33, Part
2.1
Electrical Switches Ior Use in Household and Similar Fixed
Electrical Facilities: Electronic Switches
62 Connecting Devices Ior Low Voltage Circuits Ior Household
and Similar Uses
65 Conductors oI Insulated Cables
78.1 Lamp Holders: Screwed Lamp Holders (Edison Type)
103 Steel Pipes Suitable Ior Screw Threading
105 Connectors Ior Electrical appliances and related Pins
145 Connection Boxes Ior Electrical Installations: Plastic Boxes
153 Boxes Ior Electrical Installations
165 Electrical Products Testing Methods
206 Electrical Products Marking
230, All
Parts
Low Voltage Fuses
231 Screwed Electric Fuses with Iuse-link: 25 Amp and 63 Amp
Iuses, Ior rear-connection
08 (2001)
4
232 Screwed Electric Fuses with Iuse-link: 100 Amp and 200
Amp Iuses, Ior rear-connection
233 Screwed Electric Fuses with Iuse-link: 25Amp and 63 Amp
Iuses, Ior Iront-connection, connection screws and washers
234 Screwed Electric Fuses with Iuse-link: 100Amp and 200
Amp Iuses, Ior Iront-connection, connection screw
235 Screwed Electric Fuses with Iuse-link: 25Amp and 63 Amp
heads, Iuse-links and adjustment screws
236 Screwed Electric Fuses with Iuse-link: 100Amp and 200
Amp heads, Iuse-links and adjustment sheaths
246, All
Parts
Tungsten Filament Incandescent Lights
250 Electronic Equipment Operated Irom the Net and Ior Home
Use and Similar General Use: SaIety Requirements
265 Zinc Electrolytic Coating on Ferrous Metals
302 Low Voltage Switch-Gear and Control-Gear- Switches,
Disconnectors, Switch-Disconnectors and Fuse-combination
Units
325 Anodic Coating on Aluminum (Anodization)
345 Porcelain Insulators Ior Overhead Lines up to 1000V:
Quality Requirements
346 Porcelain Pin Insulators P80, P95 Ior Overhead Lines up to
1000 Volts
347 Shackle Porcelain Insulators S92 Ior Overhead Lines up to
1000 Volts
348 Stay Porcelain Insulators T85, T110 Ior Overhead Lines up
to 1000 Volts
349 Porcelain Insulators P80, P95: Thread Testing Gauges
350 Spindles Porcelain Insulators Ior Overhead Lines up to 1000
Volts: Quality Requirements
351 Straight Cylinder Spindles Ior Porcelain Insulators 80, up to
1000V
352 Straight Conical Pins SCOS Ior Porcelain Insulators up to
1000V
353 Bent Spindles BWS, BWAS Ior Porcelain Insulators up to
1000V
354 Pin Ior Porcelain Shackle Insulators S92 Ior Overhead Lines
up to 1000V
355 Spindles Ior Porcelain Insulators: Thread Testing Gauges
367 Earthing Clamps Ior Pipes and Bars
396 Fluorescent Tubes Accessories: Lamp Holders and Starter
Holders
397 Ballast Ior Tubular Fluorescent Lamps
398 Auxiliaries Ior Discharge Lamps: Capacitors
402 Fluorescent Tubes Accessories: Starters
422 Air and Creep Distances and Clearances Ior Electrical
Equipment Installation
444 Non insulated Steel Conduits Ior Electrical Installations
08 (2001)
5
473 on
all its
parts
Isolated Cables, Cords and Insulated Conductors Ior
Nominal Voltage oI up to 1000V
474 Cables, Cords and Electrical Conductors Ior Nominal
Voltage up to 1000V: Test Methods
489 Pre-cast Slabs and Slabs oI Inspection Manholes
520 Fluorescent Tubes Ior General Use
532 Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes (PVC-U) Ior Water
Supply
544 Flexible Cords Ior Supply oI Electrical Portable Appliances:
IdentiIication Colors oI the Core
547,
Part 1
PVC Insulated Underground Cables Ior Voltage not
exceeding 1000V
575 Capacitors Ior Motors
582 Discharge Lights Accessories: Ballasts Ior Mercury Vapor
Lamps, High Voltage Operated
593 Seamless Steel Pipes
643 Aluminum Conductors Ior Overhead Lines
644 Contactors
658 Pre-cast Concrete Sections Ior Inspection Chambers
728 Plastic Pipes Ior Electrical and Communication Installation
in Buildings
734 ClassiIication oI Electrical Equipment and Electronic
Equipment with regard to Protection Against Electrical
Shocks
745 Automatic Miniature Circuit-Breakers Ior Over-current
Protection oI Household and Similar Installations
758 Graphical Symbols Ior Electricity
786 Electrical Equipment Ior Use in Explosive Gaseous
Atmospheres
799 Common Receiving Antenna Systems (MATV)
812 Steel Lighting Poles
832 Residual Current Operated Circuit-Breakers without integral
over-current protection Ior Household and Similar Uses
(RCCB)
840,
Part 1
Pressure-sensitive Adhesive Tape Ior Electrical Insulation:
Polyvinyl-Chloride Based Tape
858 Conduits and Accessories Ior Insulated Cables and
Conductors Ior Underground Installation oI Electrical and
Telephone Lines: PVC CGKH Conduits, Solid Wall and
their Accessories
899 Isolating TransIormers and SaIety Isolating TransIormers
918 Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings on Steel Products and Cast
Iron Products
931 Fire Resistance oI Building Elements
981 ClassiIication oI Protection Grades Ior Enclosures oI
Electrical Equipment
1038 Residual Current Operated Circuit Breakers with Integral
Over-current Protection Ior Household and Similar Uses
(RCBO)
08 (2001)
6
1058 Power Capacitors
1101 Copper Clad Aluminum Electrical Conductors Ior Insulated
Conductors
1109 Plugs and Housings, Connecting System Ior Industry Use
1121 Data Technologies Equipment SaIety Including Electrical
Equipment Ior OIIice Use
1124 Elastomeric Seals Ior Water Supply, Drainage and Sewage
Pipes: General Requirements
1149 Co-axial Wall Sockets 75 ohm Ior Radio and TV Signals
1164 Discharge Lamps: High Pressure Mercury Bulbs
1165 Discharge Lamps: Low Pressure Sodium Bulbs
1166 Discharge Lamps: High Pressure Sodium Bulbs
1168 Accessories Ior Discharge Lamps: Ballasts Ior Sodium Low
Pressure Lamps
1169, on
all its
Parts
Discharge Lamps Ballasts (excluding Polyurethane Tubes)
1173 Lightning Arrestors Systems Ior Structures and Installations
1206,
Part 1
Low Voltage Control-Gear and Switch-Gear: Circuit
Breakers
1280 Connection Accessories Ior Electric Installation Pipes:
Plastic Accessories
1337 Burglat Detection Alarm Systems
1362 Cable TV Systems
1381,
Part 1
Cable Trunking and Ducting Systems Ior the Passage and
Branching oI Cables in Electrical Installations: General
Requirements
1381,
Part 2.1
Cable Trunking and Ducting Systems Ior the Passage and
Branching oI Cables to be Installed on Walls: Special
Requirements
1419, on
all its
Parts
Low Voltage Control-Gear and Switch-Gear
1451 Starting Devices (other than Glow Starters)
1506 Tungsten Halogen Lamps (non vehicle)
1516 Extruded Solid Dieletric Insulated Power Cables Ior Rated
Voltages Irom 1 KV to 30 KV
1531 Conduits and their Accessories Ior Insulated Cables and
Conductors, Ior Underground Installation oI Electricity and
Communication Lines: Polyethylene Conduits with Solid
Wall and their Accessories
1534 Plugs and Plugs Housings Ior Telephone Appliances
1739 Testing oI Electrical Cables Under Fire Conditions
1740 Bundle Assembled Insulating Cores Ior Aerials Systems Ior
Nominal Voltage oI 0.61 KW
1742 Copper Covered Earthing Electrodes
1907, on
all its
Parts
"Bezek" networks in Customer's Premises
08 (2001)
7
2225 Separation TransIormers, Auto-TransIormers, Variable
TransIormers and Reactors
4376 Utilities Metal Cabinets Ior Installation Into Buildings

b. Specifications of the Standards Institution of Israel
The Iollowing is a list oI SII SpeciIications, applicable to this speciIication:
SII
SpeciIication
22
Low Voltage Electrical Boards: Quality Control
Requirements
SII
SpeciIication
165
Boxes Ior Connection Boards in Electric Installations
Boards Made oI Plastic
SII
SpeciIication
175
ReinIorced Concrete Lighting Poles
SII
SpeciIication
198
Staircase Timers
SII
SpeciIication
236
Communication Systems in Buildings
SII
SpeciIication
262
Structural Wood Preservation
SII
SpeciIication
372
Low Voltage Switching and Control Boards: Special
Requirements Ior Low Voltage Boards to be Installed in
Areas Accessible to Non-QualiIied People: Distribution
Boards
SII
SpeciIication
449
Marking and Lighting Equipment Ior Warning oI Flight
Obstacle

c. Foreign Standards
HEC-60044 Instrument TransIormers
HEC-60056 HVAC Circuit-Breakers
HEC-60071 Insulation Coordination
HEC-60076 Power TransIormers
HEC-60099 Surge Arresters
HEC-60129 A.C. Disconnectors and Earthing Switches
HEC-60137 Insulated Bushings Ior Alternating Voltage Above 1000V
HEC-60168 Tests on Indoor and Outdoor Post Insulators with
Nominal Voltages Greater than 1000V
HEC-60186 Voltage TransIormers
HEC-60243 Methods oI Test Ior Electric Strength oI Solid Insulating
Materials
HEC-60255 Electrical Relays
08 (2001)
8
HEC-
60265.1
High Voltage Switches
HEC-60282 High Voltage Fuses
HEC-60289 Reactors
HEC-60298 A.C. Metal Enclosed Switch and Control Gear Between
1-52 KV
HEC-60305 Insulators Ior Overhead Lines with a Nominal Voltage
Above 1000V
HEC-60364 Electrical Installations oI Buildings
HEC-60383 Insulators Ior Overhead Lines Above 1 KV
HEC-60420 HVAC Switch-Fuse Combinations
HEC-60439 Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies
HEC-60466 A.C. Insulation Enclosed Switchgear and Control Gear
Ior Rated Voltages Above 1 KV and up to and Including
38 KV
HEC-60470 High Voltage Alternating Current Contact
HEC-60502 Extruded Solid Dielectric Insulated Power Cables Ior
Rated Voltages Irom 1 KV up to 30 KV
HEC-60518 Dimensional Standardization Ior Terminals Ior HVACs
and Control Gear
HEC-60598 Luminaires
HEC-60617 Graphical Symbols Ior Diagram
HEC-60621 Electrical Installations Ior Outdoor Sites Under Heavy
Conditions
HEC-60694 Common Clauses Ior High Voltage and Control Gear
Standards
HEC-60726 Dry-Type Power TransIormer
HEC-60826 Loading and Strength oI Overhead Transmission Lines
HEC-60831 Shunt Power Capacitors oI the SelI-Healing Type Ior
A.C. Systems Having a Rated Voltage up to and
Including 1000V
HEC-60871 Shunt Capacitors Ior A.C. Power Systems Having a Rated
Voltage Above 1000V
HEC-60898 Electrical Accessories Circuit Breakers Ior Overcurrent
Protection Ior Household and Similar Installations
HEC-60909 Short-Circuit Current Calculation in Three-Phase A.C.
Systems
HEC-60931 Shunt Power Capacitors oI the Non SelI-Healing Type Ior
A.C. Systems Having a Rated Voltage up to and
Including 1000V
HEC-60932 Additional Requirements Ior Enclosed and Control Gear
in Severe Climatic Condition
HEC-60947 Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear
HEC-61000 Electromagnetic Compatibility
HEC-61082 Preparation oI Documents Used in Electro-Technology
DIN-1026 Hot Rolled Steel Channels
DIN-42530 Bushings up to 1000V and Irom 250 A to 5000 A, Ior
Liquid Filled TransIormers
DIN-43629 Cable Distribution Cubicle
DIN-43671 Continuous Current Carrying oI Conductors
08 (2001)
9
DIN-43673 Drilled Holes and Screw Connections Ior Bus-Bars
DIN-43675 Connectors Ior Terminal Studs
DIN-46200 Current Carrying Connection Bolts up to 1600 A
DIN-47636 Separable Accessories Ior Power Cable Ior Bushing with
Outside Cone
DIN-48201 Copper Standard Conductors
DIN-48204 Steel ReinIorced Aluminum Standard Conductors
NETA Maintenance Testing SpeciIications Ior Electric Power
Distribution Equipment and Systems
BS-5649 (BSEN-40) Road Lighting Columns
CIE-27 Photometry oI Luminaires Ior Street Lighting
CIE-31 Glare and UniIormity in Road Lighting Installations
CIE-34 Road Lighting Lantern and Installation Data-Photometric,
ClassiIication and PerIormance
CIE-61 Tunnel Entrance Lighting: A Survey oI Fundamentals Ior
Determining the Luminance in Threshold Zone
CIE-115 Recommendations Ior the Lighting oI Roads Ior Motor
and Pedestrian TraIIic
CIE-140 Calculation and Measurement oI Luminance and
Illuminance in Road Lighting
EN 10056-
1
Structural Steel Equal and Unequal Leg Angles,
Part I: Dimensions
EN 50022 SpeciIication Ior Low Voltage Switchgear and Control
Gear Ior Industrial Use Mounting Rails: Top Hat Rails 35
mm Wide Ior Snap on Mounting oI Equipment
EN 50086 Conduit System Ior Electrical Installations
VDE-0681 Devices Ior Actuating Testing and Guarding Live Parts
with Rated Voltages Above 1 KV
UL-94 Standard Ior SaIety Test Ior Flammability oI Plastic
Materials Ior Parts in Devices and Appliances

All that is stated in the Chapters oI the General SpeciIication Ior Building Works
listed below applies also to the present Chapter, as deIined in paragraph
"Priorities Between the Chapters oI the General SpeciIication" in Chapter 00
Preliminaries:
Chapter
00 -
Preliminaries
Chapter
01 -
Earthworks
Chapter
02 -
Cast on Site Concrete Works
Chapter
04 -
Masonry Works
Chapter
05 -
WaterprooIing Works
Chapter
07 -
Sanitary Installations
08 (2001)
10
Chapter
11 -
Paint Works
Chapter
19 -
Steel Structures
Chapter
34 -
Fire Detection and Fighting
Chapter
40 -
Site Development
Chapter
51 -
Airport Runways, Roads and Public Squares Construction
Chapter
57 -
Water, Sewage and SWD Lines

08003 Laws, Regulations and Requirements
Besides whatever is stated in Chapter 00 Preliminaries, the Electrical
Installation shall comply with all the requirements oI the Electricity Law 1954,
and with the Regulations set Iorth by the authority oI the law and all the
Regulations on behalI oI QualiIied Authorities. The installation shall also comply
with the special requirements oI the Israel Electrical Company (IEC), the
Ministry oI Communications, the Bezeq Telephone Company and Cable TV
companies. Provisions Ior telephone, Cable TV, Satellite reception, TV, etc.,
installation shall comply with the Law oI Planning and Construction
Requirements.
08004 Equipment, Materials and Samples
Besides whatever is stated in Chapter 00 Preliminaries, the Contractor shall
seek the approval oI the COR oI all the items. The COR shall be entitled to
request the testing oI the materials and equipment in an approved laboratory.
08005 Ancillary Works
In the absence oI other instructions, all the ancillary works connected with the
Electrical Installation, such as concrete, masonry, passages sealing, Iire-blocks,
painting, etc. shall be perIormed according to the requirements indicated in the
appropriate Chapters oI the General SpeciIication. For earthworks, see Sub-
Chapter 0801 below.
08006 Signage and Marking
All the installations and their accessories shall be marked and carry signs as
required in the appropriate paragraphs with respect to each item. The sign-boards
shall consist oI a sandwich 3-ply plastic material in colors, as detailed below or
in the Special SpeciIication and approved by the COR. Unless otherwise
speciIied, the signs shall be in block letters on a white background or another
marking as required (metal labels or marking tapes or letters in relieI or letters
sunk in another material).
The text oI the signs shall be as required in the Drawings, the Special
SpeciIication and as detailed hereinaIter.
08 (2001)
11
Besides whatever is stated above, the list oI the installation and accessories that
shall carry signs and markings is as Iollows:
a) Light switches, plug-housings, plug-housings units and various
accessories units the number oI circuits;
b) Luminaires the number oI circuits sign-board Ior indicating the
emergency light;
c) Electrical Boxes the number oI circuits;
d) Distribution and Passage Boxes Ior Communications and Very Low
Voltage Systems sign-board with indication oI the system's type
(telephone, closed circuit TV, intercom, data communication, etc.);
e) Signage and Marking by means oI boards as per paragraph 080682 and
080664, below;
I) Communication Pipes on each end oI the pipes at the communication
concentrations, a sign shall be installed indicating the purpose oI the
pipe;
g) The Signage and Marking oI High Voltage Installations shall be as
required in paragraph 080905 and 080932, below;
h) Inspection and Signage Chambers Ior passages, as required in
paragraph 080282 and 080283, below.
In household installations, only paragraphs e) and I) shall be required.
08007 As Made Drawings
a) Electrical Installations
Prior to ordering the Iinal and comprehensive test oI the installation and oI
the boards (paragraph 08008 below), the Contractor shall indicate on the
working drawings the situation oI the installations as actually carried out,
including changes and deviations Irom the original drawings that have been
made.
These drawings shall include the wiring and all the signs installed on the
clamps, wires, etc. The COR shall receive two sets oI these drawings and oI
those oI the boards constructed by the Contractor besides the drawings
required Ior submittal to the IEC or to a Tester, Ior the testing oI the
installation.
b) Measurement Sheets oI the Light Intensity
Should the COR require it, the As Made drawings oI the Roads and Parking
Areas Lighting shall be accompanied by measurement sheets oI the lighting
intensity oI characteristic sections.
c) As Made Drawings Ior Buried Lines
08 (2001)
12
The drawings shall include all the work details as executed, such as the level
oI the ground aIter the cover, the depth at which the cables are buried (upper
edge). The drawings shall carry indications oI distances to objects existing
in the area, so as to enable location oI lines, should the need Ior it arise.
The drawings Ior lines in public spaces shall be certiIied by a qualiIied
Surveyor.
08008 Testing of the Installation and Trial Operation
The testing oI the installation shall be carried out as above.
a) Upon completion oI execution, the Electrician responsible Ior the
execution on behalI oI the Contractor shall perIorm the testing oI the
installation; the Contractor shall correct all the deIects uncovered in the
course oI the testing and submit a "Declaration by the Executing
Electrician" in which he shall indicate that the installation was erected
according to the Drawings and the Electricity Law.
b) The testing oI the electrical installation by a "Testing Electrician" (a
tester Irom the IEC or any other tester as determined by the COR).
c) The testing by the Telephone Company.
d) The testing by the Cable TV Company.
e) The testing by the Satellite TV Company.
I) The testing oI the intercom in the building, as per SII 236.
g) The testing oI common reception antenna, as per SII 799, see
paragraph 080293 below.
h) Trial operation and adjustment oI lighting installations.
Upon completion oI the tests by the "Testing Electrician," the Contractor shall
perIorm a trial operation and adjustment oI the lighting. The operation and
adjustment shall be perIormed in evening and night hours. All the deIects that
may be uncovered shall be corrected to the Iull satisIaction oI the COR.
Upon the request oI the COR, photometric tests shall be perIormed by the
Contractor and the intensity oI the lighting shall be measured.
a) Should the outdoors lighting installation be perIormed Ior a Local
Authority, the Contractor shall get a CertiIicate Irom the person
responsible on behalI oI the Authority concerning the lighting oI roads
or streets that he took over the installation.
b) For the testing oI lighting protection systems and compatibility with SI
1173, see paragraph 08047 below.
c) Thermographic scanning shall be as detailed in paragraph 080603
below.
08 (2001)
13
The Contractor shall supply the appropriate personnel, means, tools required Ior
the perIormance oI the above tests and trial operation. The tests shall be carried
out in the presence oI Electricians on behalI oI the Contractor knowing well the
installation, and able to supply answers to the Testers questions and provide their
assistance in the course oI the testing and measurements.
Should the installation be handed over in stages, all the instructions oI the present
paragraph shall apply to each stage separately.
The work shall be seen as achieved, Iollowing its acceptance without reservations
by the "Testing Electrician," the other Testers oI the installation`s various
systems and the COR.
The Contractor shall present the CertiIicates oI all the Testers that the installation
is Iit Ior operation.
Within the Irame oI the corrections and completions towards the end oI the
warranty period, the Contractor shall tighten all the attachment bolts in the
electrical boards and make sure that their integrity is Iull.
08009 Warranty
Besides whatever is stated in the Contract Conditions Ior the Execution oI a
Building by a Contractor (shelI 3210), the Contractor shall be responsible Ior the
integrity oI the roads, sidewalks, lanes, etc., that were dug in Ior setting cables,
during a period oI two additional years beyond the warranty period.
08 (2001)
14
0801 Earthworks
08010 General
Excavations and Earthworks Ior Electrical Installations, within the building, shall
be executed according to the appropriate paragraphs in Chapter 01 Earthworks.
Excavation and Earthworks outside the building, Ior outdoor lighting, etc., shall
be executed according to the appropriate paragraph in Chapter 51 General
SpeciIication Ior the Construction oI Airport Runways, Roads and Public
Squares, in the Sub-Chapter Earthworks.
08011 Approbation for the Setting of Piping or Cables
Besides whatever is stated in the Earthworks Chapters in the General
SpeciIication Ior Earthworks, Chapter 01, prior to the start by the Contractor oI
any casting in pits or oI the installation oI cables in trenches, he shall seek the
COR's approval oI the adequate state oI the excavation and its conIormity to the
dimensions in the Drawings.
08012 Layout and Preparation Works
080121 Laying out beIore execution
Besides whatever is stated in paragraph 12 oI shelI 3210 oI the Contract, the
Contractor shall secure the layout by a parallel system, along the whole length, at
a saIe distance that shall ensure protection Irom the perIormance oI the
excavation works. The line shall be used Ior control and renewal oI the layout,
should it be needed.
Following the layout by the Contractor, the COR shall approve it. The Contractor
shall start excavation only aIter the issue oI the approval.
The layout shall include the alignment as well as the location oI the poles, the
boards (central boards), the earthing electrodes, oI any other electrical equipment
that shall be installed on the site and oI other elements required Ior the execution
oI the work.
080122 Renewal oI the layout in the course oI execution
The Contractor shall check on Site the alignment and the levels, including the
invert levels oI the pipes and those oI the existing installations connected to the
perIormance oI the work, as indicated in the Drawings. Any appeal with regards
to the alignment and the levels indicated in the drawings shall be submitted not
later than two weeks Irom the day on which the COR approved the layout as
detailed in paragraph 080121 above. No appeal shall be accepted aIter the above
date or Iollowing the actual start oI the execution. Should an appeal be accepted,
the points shall be checked together by the COR and the Contractor and the
corrections shall be registered on the Drawings with the signatures oI both
parties.
The Contractor shall renew the layout Iollowing the changes that occurred Ior
any reason whatsoever and he shall have to reinstall the pegs that were taken out
Irom their places Ior any reason whatsoever and all this during the whole
execution period down to its completion and the handing over oI the work. For
08 (2001)
15
these purposes, the Contractor shall employ Surveyors and supply all the
surveying equipment that may be required.
In the course oI the work's execution, the Contractor shall be responsible Ior the
integrity oI the benchmarks and other marks.
For the marking oI the alignment Iollowing execution, see paragraph 080266
below.
08013 Preparation of the Alignment
The Contractor shall prepare a Iree strip oI land along the alignment Ior
executing his work. The strip oI land along the alignment shall provide a passage
Ior the various types oI vehicles needed Ior the execution oI the work. The
vegetation, on all its types, shall be removed and all obstacles disposed oI, all as
described in Chapter 01 Earthworks.
08014 Execution of the Excavation
Prior to the execution oI the excavation oI trenches and to the preparation oI pits
Ior the piles, the vegetation including its roots shall be removed Irom the area.
The excavation and the pits shall be executed by drills, excavation, breaking or
blasting. For the execution oI breaking or blasting, prior approval by the COR
shall be obtained. The dimensions oI the pit shall be in accordance with the pole's
type and as detailed in the present SpeciIication or in the Special SpeciIication.
In order to complete and highlight whatever is stated in Chapter 51 General
SpeciIication Ior the Construction oI Airport Runways, Roads and Public
Squares, Sub-Chapter Earthworks and in the Contract Documents, the excavation
shall include the Iollowing:
a) Removal oI the excavated earth and its temporary storage in the
vicinity;
b) Leveling, straightening out and compaction oI the excavation's bottom;
c) In the case oI over-excavation beyond the required depth, the
Contractor shall be obliged to reIill the excavation up to the required
level including the compaction oI the Iilling material;
d) Removal oI rainwater that may accumulate in the excavation;
e) ReinIorcement and support oI the excavation's walls in those places
where it shall be needed;
I) Filling-in oI sand padding and cover layers as speciIied in paragraph
080262 and 080351, below;
g) Filling-in the excavation immediately aIter the issue oI the COR's
approval;
h) Removal oI the excavated surplus, whenever the COR shall require it
and its transIer to the location indicated by the COR;
i) Layout as detailed in paragraph 080283 below.
08 (2001)
16
The excavation oI the trenches shall be carried out by mechanical means or
manually, as indicated in the Contract Documents and Iollowing the COR's
approval. The trenches shall be dug at the depth and in the width as indicated in
08015 The Crossing of Roads, Sidewalks and Lanes
080151 Crossing through existing roads and public squares
The crossing shall be executed according to the Electrical Regulations and in
coordination with the Authority responsible Ior the road or the public square. The
crossing's plans shall be submitted to the COR's approval prior to execution.
Should the need Ior it arise, the Contractor shall execute the work in stages, as
each stage shall include work at the rate allowed by the Authority or
alternatively, the Contractor shall install a temporary by-pass. Should the work
be carried out in stages, the accuracy oI the integral line axis shall be ensured.
For the execution oI the crossing, a strip oI the road between straight and parallel
lines at the least possible width that may be needed Ior the line's installation
(cutting oII the asphalt within the strip's required limits shall be perIormed by
means oI a sharp cutting tool), shall be executed. Following that, the pipes shall
be laid down and all the other required works executed. In those locations as
indicated in the Drawings, the pipes sections shall be protected with a concrete
envelop, according to the details in the Drawings.
The Iill shall be oI sand-stone ("Kurkar") or sub-grade material approved by the
COR, such as river gravel, natural stone chips, etc. The Iilling shall be executed
in layers oI up to 25 cm in thickness, compacted by means oI mechanical
equipment and moistured until controlled compaction is obtained, according to
the SpeciIications oI the "Controlled Compaction" paragraph in Chapter 01
Earthworks. The compaction rate shall be at least 98 oI the maximal density in
laboratory compaction, as per ASTM 1557.
Should there be no speciIic requirement in the Contract Documents, the crossings
shall be executed as stated in paragraph "Crossings" oI Chapter 51
Construction oI Airport Runways, Roads and Public Squares. The crossings shall
consist oI PVC pipes.
The Contractor shall reconstitute the road's or square's structure into its prior
state including all its layers, with new materials with Iull attention given to
proper connection with the areas adjacent to the crossing. The rubbish and
surplus material shall be removed and disposed oI, as deIined in Chapter 01
Earthworks, with regards to disposal.
080152 Crossing sidewalks and lanes
The crossing shall be carried out as described above with respect to roads and
public squares. Should the existing area consist oI sidewalk tiles or interlocking
stones, the re-use oI the tiles or the stones shall be allowed iI they shall not be
broken nor damaged. The Contractor shall reconstitute the sidewalk or the lane
into its prior state.
08 (2001)
17
080153 Horizontal Boring
The crossing under a road or a railway by means oI horizontal boring shall be
perIormed according to the Drawings, in coordination with the Authority
responsible Ior the road or the railway and subject to the stipulations and
limitations oI the said Authority, with respect to horizontal boring. The depth oI
the boring's suIIit shall be at least 100 cm below the road or the railway.
08 (2001)
18
0802 Conduits
08020 General
080200 DeIinitions
Conduits consist oI pipes and ducts oI various types as speciIied hereinaIter. The
classiIication oI the pipes shall be as detailed in the Regulations regarding
Conduit Installation and in the Israel Standards.
080201 Pipes classiIied according to the installation method
The pipes types shall be determined Iollowing the mode oI installation and as
Iollows:
Visible Installation steel and plastic pipes oI the rigid type ("")).
Concealed Installation steel and plastic pipes oI the rigid type ("")) or oI the
selI-extinguishing Ilexible type ("") or Ilexible pipes (""), according to the
limitations oI paragraph 280241 below.
Exposed Installation steel pipes, rigid plastic pipes ("") or selI-extinguishing
Ilexible pipes. The exposed installation is an installation in empty spaces or
above removable ceilings or in walls built in the shape oI a Irame clad with plates
on both Iaces or in the cavities oI prestressed concrete plates, or in Iurniture.
The pipes installed partly in concealed installation and partly in exposed
installation shall be considered as pipes in exposed installation.
Underground Installation steel pipes, plastic pipes and worm-type plastic
pipes with double wall.
Connections to Motors and to Accessories worm-type reinIorced pipes with
plastic coating.
Connections to Hot Water Boilers in household installations within the
building and whenever the connection is by means oI a cable, it shall be possible
to use Ilexible plastic selI-extinguishing pipes or Ilexible pipes.
080202 Installation in straight lines
Pipes in visible or exposed or concealed installation shall be installed only in
straight lines (vertically and horizontally).
080203 Fire blocks and passages into protected spaces
Fire blocks in passages between Iire sections and between Iloors shall be
installed as in the Regulations and as speciIied Iurther below.
Passages into protected spaces shall be sealed against the penetration oI gases, as
required in the Regulations.
Modular sealing systems, iI required, shall be installed as required in the Special
SpeciIication.
08 (2001)
19
Fire blocks and sealing systems executed by the Contractor shall consist oI
materials resistant to Iire Ior at least two hours. The resistance to Iire shall be as
required in SI 931, Parts 1 and 2.
080204 The diameter oI the pipes
The inner diameter oI pipes installed into buildings shall not be less than 16 mm.
Contrary to what was stated above, the use oI pipes with an inner diameter oI
13.5 mm shall be allowed, under all the Iollowing conditions:
- In household installations, as deIined in the Regulations.
- Whenever the length oI the pipes does not exceed 5 m.
- Whenever the pipe is used as a connection to a lamp-holder or in a
switch or a socket.
- Whenever the use shall be approved in advance by the COR.
080205 Pull wires
In all the empty pipes within the building, plastic or galvanized steel pull wires,
with diameter oI at least 1 mm, shall be installed.
In all the empty pipes installed below ground, an at least 4 mm diameter twisted
wire shall be inserted. In pipes oI 42 mm diameter and above, the wire shall have
a diameter oI at least 8 mm. The extremities oI the pull wires shall end up in the
inspection holes or in the trenches. In any case, at least 50 cm oI wire shall be leIt
out, to be wound on a peg so that it may not go back into the pipe.
080206 Pipes Ior telephone and various systems
a) Telephone pipes shall be as detailed in the Regulations, made oI steel
or rigid plastic or Ilexible plastic, according to the installation method
detailed in paragraph 080201. The inner diameter oI the pipes shall not
be less than 16 mm in household buildings and 23 mm in other
buildings.
b) Pipes Ior various systems pipes Ior communication, Iire detection,
voice, intercom, addressing, TV systems, etc., shall be as detailed with
respect to pipes Ior electrical systems. For these systems, the pipes
shall be made oI steel, rigid or Ilexible plastic, according to the
installation method described in paragraph 080201 above.
The inner diameter oI the pipes shall not be less than 16 mm.
080207 Marking and color oI pipes
All the pipes shall be marked with identiIication tags on which clear and
permanent markings shall be inscribed. The identiIication tags shall be attached
to the extremities oI the pipes in the electrical boards. They shall also be attached
to the extremities oI pipes in various concentrations oI pipes (telephone, cable
TV, low voltage cabinets, etc.) as well as to all the inlets or connections to
distribution boxes.
08 (2001)
20
Flexible plastic pipes shall have colors according to the type oI system and as
detailed hereinaIter:
Electricity green in exposed installation, green or black in concealed
installation.
Telephone blue.
Fire Detection red.
Loudspeakers and Intercom white.
Building Control gray.
Computers brown.
Security Systems (such as Burglar Systems) yellow.
080208 Chiseling
Chiseling shall not be allowed in bearing elements oI the building, such as
columns, beams, walls, etc. unless prior approval oI the COR has been obtained.
Following the installation oI the pipes or the accessories, the grooves shall be
sealed by means oI mortar.
08021 Passages and Distributions
080210 General
The passage Irom a pipes system to a cable system shall consist oI a box to which
the cable shall be attached by means oI a cartridge. For indoor installations, the
cartridge shall be plastic Iorcibly set on the cable, Ior outdoor installations, the
cartridge shall be oI the threaded 'antigon type with sealers.
The passage Irom one type oI pipes to another type shall be achieved by means
oI a box, unless otherwise speciIied. Branching shall be executed only inside
boxes.
Not more than Iour pipes shall be introduced into one transition box, unless the
box shall be destined beIorehand Ior more pipes and include appropriate
openings that were prepared by the ManuIacturer.
Boxes destined Ior more than one circuit or Ior various services, shall have
partitions and appropriate markings.
080211 Outlets to accessories in a household installation
All the outlets to accessories in household installation shall end up in appropriate
closed boxes, with diameter oI 55 mm at least. The box shall be closed with an
accessory or an appropriate lid attached to the box by means oI two screws.
08 (2001)
21
08022 Rigid Plastic Pipe
080220 General
Rigid plastic pipes are usually used Ior visible installation. The pipes shall
comply with the requirements oI SI 728.
080221 Visible installation
The installation shall be perIormed as detailed in the Regulations but the distance
between the clamps shall not exceed 60 cm provided that the distance between a
clamp and the attachment oI the pipe or its outlet shall not exceed 25 cm. The
pipes clamps shall be oI a type that shall be approved beIorehand by the COR.
The clamps shall be anchored by means oI screws into "Phillips" spikes or by
other appropriate bolts, all according to the COR's instructions.
080222 Installation on a metallic structure
The attachment oI a pipe to metal pipes and to parts oI the structure shall be
obtained by means oI special clamps ensuring stable and durable attachment. The
clamps and the method oI their installation shall Iit the type oI the structure and
the sizes oI the pipes. Welding nor drilling into the metal parts oI the structure,
Ior the holding oI the clamps, shall not be allowed without prior consent oI the
COR.
The attachment oI three pipes and above close one to the other, shall consist oI a
galvanized steel section common to all the pipes, having a width oI 30 mm,
grooved all along its length and at its middle, so that the pipes shall be set on it
and connected by means oI appropriate clamps threaded at their extremities unto
the section, by means oI screws inserted through the groove Iound into it. The
section shall be bent at its extremities and anchored into the structure's wall. The
section shall be long enough Ior the pipes shown in the Drawings, with a spare
addition oI up to one third oI their number.
The installation oI pipes in layers shall require prior consent oI the COR.
080223 Protection oI the pipes
In those places where a protective cover shall be required, it shall be executed
according to the details in the Drawings. Unless otherwise speciIied in the
Contract Documents, it shall be made oI an at least 1.5 mm thick galvanized
sheet metal, having a width large enough to cover all the joined pipes. The cover
shall have edges that shall enable its attachment to the building by means oI
bolts. The use oI standard shaped steel rails oI adequate dimensions shall be
allowed Ior the cover. In such a case, the connection oI the section shall consist
oI clamps, one clamp Ior at least 80 cm oI rail.
080224 Expansion joint
The passage oI a pipe through an expansion joint shall be executed according to
the detail in the Drawings. Should there be no such detail, the passage shall
consist oI a worm-type Ilexible plastic pipe 40 cm long, to be connected on the
pipe's extremities on both sides oI the joint. The attachment oI the Ilexible pipe to
the pipe shall be by means oI waterprooI material.
08 (2001)
22
080225 Connection and passage boxes
The connection and passage boxes shall be as detailed below and oI one oI the
Iollowing types:
a) SelI-extinguishing heavy rigid plastic material boxes
b) Cast-metal boxes
c) Sheet metal at least 2 mm thick boxes.
The boxes shall have the dimensions indicated in the Drawings or regular
standard dimensions with the number oI outlet/inlets as needed.
080226 Installation oI boxes
The boxes shall be installed at locations indicated in the Drawings and as detailed
in paragraph 08032 below. The boxes shall be installed at easily accessible
places, at as Iar as possible uniIorm distances Irom the ceiling.
The boxes shall be concentrated in groups, as Iar as possible.
In walls that shall not be plastered nor clad, the boxes shall be installed in such a
way as to ensure that the box lid be in line with the wall surIace. In plastered
walls the transition and distribution boxes shall be stabilized by means oI mortar
only and end up Ilush with the plastering. No timber or gypsum may be used Ior
that purpose. In such places where more than one box and one accessory shall be
installed in the wall (such as a switch, a socket, a phone socket, etc.), they shall
be arranged horizontally or vertically in straight lines and equal distances,
according to the COR's instructions.
Boxes Ior switches or sockets shall be at uniIorm distances Irom the doors
openings. Unless otherwise speciIied, the distance oI the box center Irom the
opening's edge (beIore the installation oI the Irame) shall be 12 cm.
Prior to the throwing oI the mortar on the mesh wherever "rabitz" (mesh)
plastering is perIormed or to the casting oI concrete, the boxes shall be
thoroughly sealed with thick paper, so as to prevent the penetration oI moisture
or concrete into the boxes and the lines.
080227 Boxes lids
The lids oI the metallic boxes shall be made oI the Iollowing materials: rust-less
material or galvanized steel, 0.6 mm thick at least and they shall hermetically
close the boxes. The closure oI the lid shall be achieved by means oI screws
penetrating into the box, as a ring made oI sealing material separates the box
Irom its lid.
The plastic boxes lids shall consist oI heavy rigid plastic material manuIactured
especially Ior closing the box that is used and which can be closed by means oI
screws inserted into the box.
08 (2001)
23
08023 Flexible Plastic Pipe
080230 General
Flexible plastic pipes are mainly used Ior concealed installation in walls and
ceilings. SelI-extinguishing Ilexible plastic pipes are also used Ior exposed
installation. The pipe shall meet the requirements oI SI 728.
In such cases where a protection is required, it shall be perIormed as detailed
above in paragraph 080223.
Pipes between outlets to conductors shall be continuous and no intermediate
connections shall be allowed. Pipes in dilatation joints shall be executed as stated
above in paragraph 080224.
080231 SelI-extinguishing Ilexible pipes between ceilings or in partitions or in Iurniture
(in exposed installation)
In the installation oI selI-extinguishing Ilexible pipes in the space between two
ceilings (Ialse ceilings), the pipe shall be installed in an orderly way and Iastened
by means oI appropriate clamps or some other way approved by the COR. The
Iastening oI the pipe shall be accomplished only on Iixed parts oI the ceiling. In
no case shall the pipe be attached to parts oI the ceiling that may be removed.
The installation shall be executed as stated in paragraph 080221 above, but the
distance between the clamps shall not exceed 90 cm.
The Iastening means and the method oI their installation shall insure the pipe
Irom damage, pressure or distortion oI its round shape. The tying oI the pipe with
any type oI wire shall be Iorbidden.
In the installation oI selI-extinguishing Ilexible pipes into walls in the shape oI a
Irame (timber or metal) clad with plates on both sides, the pipe shall be Iastened
to the Irame according to a method that shall be approved by the COR.
In the installation oI selI-extinguishing Ilexible pipes into Iurniture, the pipe shall
be Iastened by means oI screws set into not-removable parts oI the Iurniture.
080232 Concealed installation
The concealed installation oI pipes into walls shall be vertical up to a height oI
180 cm.
Horizontal installation below a height oI 180 cm shall be allowed between
adjacent accessories installed at distances between the centers oI the accessories,
under 30 cm
Pipes underneath the Ilooring shall be covered along their whole length with
cement-mortar at least 10 mm thick, to provide mechanical protection during the
execution oI Ilooring works.
Pipes in a system Ied Irom one main board and installed into the Iloor in an area
where the system is Ied Irom another main board, shall be installed at a depth oI
at least 7 cm lower than the Iloor surIace (Irom the upper edge oI the pipe to the
Iloor surIace).
08 (2001)
24
Pipes installed into concrete components shall be set in prior to the casting. In
exposed concrete, the pipe shall be covered by a concrete layer at least 5 cm
thick. Prior to the casting, all the necessary preparations shall be executed, such
as the installation oI rulers, the Iormation oI passages, etc. so as to enable easy
installation oI the pipes.
In such cases where the Contractor is installing pipes Ior use by a third party
(IEC, telephone company, etc.), the Contractor shall give notice to the said party
Iollowing the preparation oI the pipes into grooves and their Iastening or
Iollowing the installation oI the pipes into the Iormwork.
The Contractor shall be responsible Ior obtaining the approbation oI the work by
the said third party.
080233 Connection oI pipes and detailing oI extremities
Unless otherwise speciIied, the extremities oI the pipes shall end up in a box. At
the inlet and outlet oI the boards, the pipes shall end up without boxes and be
arranged into rows, with their extremities at the same height.
080234 Connection and passage boxes
It shall be allowed to use boxes oI the Iollowing types:
a) Heavy plastic selI-extinguishing material boxes
b) Light plastic selI-extinguishing boxes
c) Cast metal boxes
d) Sheet metal at least 2 mm thick boxes
The other requirements and instructions concerning the boxes (connection and
passage, installation oI the boxes and their lids) are indicated above in paragraph
080225, 080226 and 080227.
In gypsum walls, special boxes shall be installed Ior that purpose. The Iace oI the
box shall be Ilush with that oI the wall. The boring oI a hole Ior a round box shall
be achieved with the help oI a special "glass-shaped" conical drill or a usual
"glass-shaped" drill with the truncation oI the gypsum board wall.
In industrially constructed buildings (such as tunnels), it shall be allowed to use
boxes with eight openings at the center oI the ceiling oI the room into which
arrives the Ieeding line and Irom which leave the lines to the various accessories.
08024 Flexible Plastic or Steel Pipe
The execution oI conductors made oI Ilexible steel or Ilexible plastic pipe, in the
installation, shall be carried out as Iollows:
080240 General
An installation into a Ilexible steel pipe or a Ilexible plastic pipe shall comprise
pipes oI the Iollowing types:
08 (2001)
25
a) Rust-less Ilexible steel pipe or rust-protected with plastic material,
used mainly Ior connections to motors and their control accessories;
b) Worm-type Ilexible plastic pipe used mainly Ior connection oI end-
accessories in residential installations.
080241 Limitations
The use oI Ilexible pipes shall be limited according to the Electricity Law and the
Iollowing stipulations:
a) They shall not be used in places under danger oI Ilooding;
b) They shall not be used as protection oI the Ieeding conductors oI
mobile appliances;
c) Regarding worm-type Ilexible plastic pipes, their use shall be allowed
under the conditions above but they shall also meet the Iollowing
requirements.
1. The use shall be approved beIorehand by the COR;
2. In household installations, as deIined by the Regulations;
3. The length oI the pipe shall not exceed 5 m;
4. The pipe shall be used Ior connecting the connection box to a
lamp-holder or a switch or a socket;
5. Whenever there is no risk oI mechanical damage.
080242 Passage Irom rigid pipe to Ilexible metallic pipe
The passage Irom a rigid pipe to a Ilexible metallic pipe shall consist oI a
connector that may be removed in case oI emergency. On both extremities oI the
Ilexible metallic pipe, transitions with external threading shall be installed, one at
each end. The extremities oI the pipes shall be properly detailed as well as the
transitions and the connectors, so as to prevent damage to the insulation oI the
conductors inserted into them. The passage to a Ilexible metallic pipe with a
plastic coating shall be achieved by means oI a connector with a Iastening device
on one side (to the Ilexible pipe) and an external thread on the other side.
080243 Fastening a Ilexible metallic pipe to a connection box
Flexible metallic pipes with plastic coating shall be equipped with a connector
with a Iastening device on one side (to the Ilexible pipe) and an external thread
on the other side. The side oI the connector with the thread shall pass through the
opening oI the box and be attached by means oI an appropriate nut on the inner
side oI the box wall.
08 (2001)
26
08025 Steel Pipe
080251 Type oI the pipe and its properties
The steel pipe used as conductor shall be oI one oI the two types detailed
hereinaIter:
a) A protective threaded steel pipe without any insulation Ior electrical
installations, according to the requirements oI SI 444. This pipe shall
be externally covered with a continuous layer oI bituminous coating.
b) A steel pipe suited to thread turning A steel pipe standing up to the
requirements oI Class B in SI 103.
The pipe shall not be covered with plastering or any other cladding prior to its
checking and approval by the COR.
080252 Visible installation
Visible installation oI the steel pipe shall be carried out according to speciIic
requirements detailed in paragraph 080221 and 08022 above, except Ior the
distance between the clamps which shall not exceed 100 cm and also Ior the
distance between the clamp and the attachment location or the outlet oI the pipe
which shall not exceed 80 cm.
080253 Concealed installation
Concealed installation oI the steel pipe shall be carried out according to the
requirements oI paragraph 080232, but it shall not be covered by a layer oI
mortar and besides this, steel pipes laid under the Ilooring shall be covered on
their outer Iace by hot asphalted bitumen. Special care shall be given to a Iull
coating oI the junctions between the pipes. The requirements detailed in
paragraph 080224 regarding the passage through a dilatation joint also apply to
the present paragraph, but the "Ilexible" pipe shall be a "steel pipe."
080254 Connection oI pipes and detailing oI extremities
The connection oI two steel pipe sections shall consist oI a long thread oI a
length equal to that oI the connector, with the addition oI 3 cm on each side oI
the connector.
The extremities oI the pipe at its connections or inlets to connection boxes,
switches, etc., shall be detailed with a conical punch.
080255 Distribution and passage boxes
The boxes shall be boxes oI cast metal or boxes made oI at least 2 mm thick
sheet metal. All the other requirements concerning the shape oI the boxes, their
installation and their lids shall be as detailed above in paragraph 080225, 080226
and 080227.
08 (2001)
27
08026 Underground Pipes Installation
080261 ClassiIication oI the pipes
The present section deals with underground pipes installations set into ready
excavating. The pipes shall be made oI galvanized steel as speciIied in paragraph
080251 or plastic material and they shall meet the requirements oI SI 532, SI
858, SI 153, EN 50086 (Ior worm-type plastic pipes with double wall).
The type oI pipe shall be as required in the Special SpeciIications.
080262 Laying the pipes
The laying oI the pipes in the excavated ground shall be executed as required in
Chapter 57 Water, Sewage and Storm Water Drainage lines.
The sand padding and cover Iill layers shall be at least 10 cm thick under and
above the pipes. A sand padding layer at least 5 cm thick shall be installed
between pipes layers.
Between two manholes, the pipes shall be laid in straight lines and at depths as
required in the Drawings and the Contract Documents, however not less than
speciIied in the Regulations concerning the installation oI conductors. The shape
shall be uniIorm in each section between two manholes (except Ior those places
where the drawings require this to be otherwise), so as to prevent the collection
oI water in the piping system. In the course oI the backIilling operation, care
shall be given to the integrity oI the connections and the stability oI the pipes in
their location.
The distances between the electricity pipes and other services pipes shall be as
detailed in the Regulations.
080263 Connection oI pipes
Steel pipes sections shall be connected by means oI threaded connectors.
Underground plastic pipes sections shall be connected by the ball-socket method
or by means oI an appropriate industrialized accessory (muIIle). The tightness
shall be obtained by a rubber ring, meeting the requirements oI SI 1124, that shall
be mounted into a groove oI the socket and pressured on the extremity oI the pipe
or by a rubber ring that shall be installed between the muIIle and the two
extremities oI the pipes. The edge oI the socket shall also be covered with contact
glue so as to ensure tightness.
080264 Inlet to the inspection holes and the cabinets
The extremities oI the pipes shall end up with the straight surIace oI the wall, the
manhole or the ditch, which shall be cleaned beIorehand Irom any protuberances
that may damage the cables.
The entrance oI rigid plastic pipes into the cabinets shall be achieved by means oI
industrialized elements.
08 (2001)
28
080265 Inspection and cover
Prior to closing the excavation, all the pipes shall be inspected and it shall be
made sure that they are Iree oI Ioreign bodies. Following the inspection oI the
Ireedom oI passing through the pipes, the extremities shall be thoroughly
plugged, so as to prevent penetration oI moisture and Ioreign objects.
The extremities oI the pipes in the boards (central boards) and in the cabinets,
shall be closed with Ioamed polyurethane or any other method approved by the
COR.
080266 Marking the alignment aIter execution
The marking oI the alignment aIter execution shall be perIormed as detailed in
Chapter 57 Water, Sewage and Storm Water Drainage Lines. Pickets shall be
installed according to requirements in the Special SpeciIication. Besides this, a
plastic tape shall be installed at a depth oI 40 cm below the Iinal surIace oI the
ground, as required in the Regulations.
08027 Cables Ditches and Ladders for Installation
080270 General
Ducts and Ladders for Installation The reIerence is to industrialized ready-
made ducts, brought to the Site and installed in parts oI the structure or on
machinery bodies.
Following a request by the COR, the Contractor shall install sections oI ducts or
ladders including accessories, as samples.
Ducts oI all kinds shall be used as conductors Ior the cables and/or the
conductors. The ducts shall have the dimensions indicated in the Drawings and
the Contract Documents. The ducts Ior the installation oI cables shall consist oI
sections connected together, so as to obtain the length required by the drawings.
The requirements relative to the various types oI ducts and ladders Ior the
installation oI cables are detailed below.
080271 Galvanized sheet metal ducts
The ducts shall consist oI sheet metal at least 1.5 mm thick, unless otherwise
approved by the COR. The duct shall be Iull or grooved, painted or without paint,
as required in the Special SpeciIication.
Unless otherwise speciIied, the duct shall be made oI Iull sheet metal and not
painted.
The connections between the ducts oI sections shall consist oI connectors with
bolts.
The painting oI the ducts shall be according to the requirements oI Chapter 11
Paintworks.
In corrosive conditions and iI required, the ducts shall be painted as detailed in
08 (2001)
29
080272 Mesh duct
The duct shall be galvanized and made oI 5 mm diameter steel wire, unless
otherwise approved by the COR. The galvanization oI the duct shall be applied
on ready-made duct sections (Iollowing welding, etc.) and comply with the
requirements oI SI 918 Ior steel having a thickness between 3 to 5 mm. The duct
shall be painted or not, as required in the Special SpeciIication. Unless otherwise
speciIied in the Special SpeciIication, the duct shall not be painted.
The painting oI the ducts shall be according to the requirements oI Chapter 11
Paintworks.
The ducts sections shall be connected between themselves by at least three
connectors.
080273 Plastic ducts
The plastic ducts shall comply with the requirements oI SI 1381. The ducts
sections shall be joined together by means oI connectors and screws. The
connectors and the screws shall be made oI aluminum or stainless steel.
Bends, corners, branching, etc. shall be industrialized parts oI the ducts
ManuIacturer.
Adapters and devices Ior accessories installed in the ducts (sockets, switches,
etc.) and cables holders, shall be industrialized speciIic products.
Ducts sections installed directly on walls or inside Iurniture shall not be
connected between them, but their extremities shall be so detailed that a Iull
contact between the sections shall exist.
The arrangement oI the cables shall be executed as stated in paragraph 08033
below. In vertical ducts arrangements shall be made Ior the support oI the cables.
080274 Other ducts
Ducts oI stainless steel, aluminum sheets or other materials shall comply with the
requirements oI the Special SpeciIication.
080275 The covering oI the ducts
Unless otherwise required in the Special SpeciIication, the ducts inside the
building shall be covered with lids that shall cover the duct all along its length.
The lids shall be made oI a material similar to that oI the duct. The thickness oI
the lids shall be identical to that oI the duct's walls and they shall be connected to
the ducts by means oI metal screws Iitting the type oI the duct. The distance
between the screws shall not exceed 50 cm. Ducts installed outdoors must be
covered. The waterprooIing shall be executed according to the details in the
Drawings.
080276 Installation oI the ducts
The methods Ior installing ducts, according to their location, are detailed
hereinaIter:
08 (2001)
30
a) Ducts Iacing upwards installed along walls, shall rest on consoles oI
appropriate dimensions, so as to be able to support the weight oI the
duct and the cables. The consoles shall be installed by means oI
anchoring bolts at distances not exceeding 120 cm.
b) Ducts Iacing the side installed along walls shall be attached to the wall
by means oI anchoring bolts, at distances not exceeding 60 cm.
c) Ducts attached to the ceiling shall be aIIixed at distances not exceeding
120 cm, so that their connection shall be stable and the insertion oI the
cables be comIortable. The details oI the attachment shall have to be
approved by the COR.
d) The hanging oI ducts Irom the ceiling or the rooI's structure shall
consist oI bars oI adequate cross-section that shall enable the bearing
oI the weight oI the duct, the cables and the accessories mounted into
the ducts. The structure oI the bars shall prevent the movement oI the
duct under the application oI horizontal Iorces such as wind. The
hanging bars system shall allow adjustment oI height in order to level
the duct.
e) The Iorm oI the connection between ducts sections shall ensure
electrical continuity along their whole length.
The consoles and hangers shall be galvanized industrialized parts. Consoles,
hangers and other structural parts made Ior supporting a number oI ducts shall be
executed according to Drawings and the Special SpeciIication.
080277 Outlets and branching Irom the ducts
For the outlets and branching Irom the ducts, see paragraph 08033 and 08034,
below.
080278 Ladders
The ladders as detailed in the Drawings and the Contract Documents, shall be
industrialized Iinished products, made oI shaped, grooved and galvanized steel.
The distance between the rugs shall not exceed 40 cm. The installation oI the
ladders shall be carried out according to the details oI paragraph 080276 above.
The arrangement oI the cables on the ladders shall be as speciIied in paragraph
080332 below.
08028 Underground Ducts
080280 General
Underground Ducts These are ducts installed under the Iloor or the ground,
cast, excavated or built on site. Cast or masonry trenches shall be built according
to the Drawings and the requirements detailed in Chapter 02 Cast in Place
Concrete Works and Chapter 04 Masonry Works
The edges oI the trenches and oI openings in the Iloor (Ior spaces reserved Ior the
cables) shall end up with bases Ior the lids. The bases shall consist oI concreted
angles 50/50/5 mm.
08 (2001)
31
Industrialized ducts made oI other materials shall be deIined in the Special
SpeciIication.
080281 Earthworks
The earthworks shall be executed as detailed in Sub-Chapter 0801 above.
080282 Inspection Holes (manholes)
Inspection holes (manholes) shall be made oI concrete with appropriate slabs and
tops, as detailed in the Drawings and the Contract Documents. The manholes
shall be installed on a 15 cm thick layer oI aggregates.
Unless otherwise speciIied, the manholes shall be oI precast concrete with inner
diameter oI at least 60 cm.
The slab and top shall comply with the requirements oI SI 489.
In roads, the slab shall be oI the "heavy" type and the top Iit Ior 25 tons.
In other places, unless otherwise speciIied in the Contract Documents, the slab
shall be oI the "middle" class and the top Iit Ior 8 tons.
080283 The marking oI crossings
Besides whatever is required in the Regulations regarding the marking oI
conductors set into underground ditches, crossings oI open spaces shall also be
marked. The indication oI the crossings coordinates shall be in the Drawings
only.
a) The marking oI crossings in covered areas shall be perIormed as
Iollows:
Crossings in covered areas (asphalt, interlocking stones, etc.) shall be
marked at each end, turning or branching.
The marking shall be Ilush with the Iace oI the cover.
Marking methods:
1. Inspection Holes, with an identiIying tag on the manhole top.
The Tag an aluminum sheet at least 1.5 mm thick with a durable
identiIying address. The tag shall be anchored to the top by means oI
two screws.
2. Cable marking block (similar to those oI the IEC), with an
identiIying tag, with or without a dummy manhole.
A dummy manhole is a manhole without Iloor, slab or top, Iilled up
with sand. Unless speciIically required in the Special SpeciIication, the
block shall be installed without the dummy manhole.
3. Flooring Stones ("Interlocking Stones") in colors diIIerent
Irom the vicinity, with a tag as detailed above.
08 (2001)
32
b) The marking oI areas without any cladding: in places without any
cladding material over the ground: the marking shall comprise a
manhole with identiIying tag, as in above a) 1.
08029 Preparations in the Building (household installation)
080290 General
The preparations in the building (household installation) Ior the IEC, the
Telephone Company, cable TV, satellite reception and all the other Authorities
mentioned above and in the Special SpeciIication, shall be as detailed below and
comply with the requirements oI the empowered Authorities relative to these
subjects. Unless otherwise stated, the preparations shall include whatever is
stated in paragraph 080291 to 080298, below. The Iollowing requirements reIer
to a household installation as deIined in the Electricity Law: "an installation
within a building Ior use as residence, business, oIIices, or a building in which
the local conditions and the use oI the electrical installation are similar to those oI
a household unit." In any place where the word apartment (residence) is being
used, it shall also mean another household installation also.
All the distribution boxes, at each story and apartment, shall be covered with
plastic lids 1 mm thick, Iixed unto the wall (not the box) by means oI Iour
screws.
080291 Preparations in the building Ior the IEC
The preparations in the building Ior the IEC shall be executed, unless otherwise
required by the IEC, as detailed hereinaIter:
a) Under the main board oI the IEC, a 100 x 100 x 100 cm manhole shall
be built. The manhole shall be Iitted with screws Iollowing the
installation oI the Ieeding cable and covered with tiles;
b) From the manhole to the lot boundary, pipes and manholes shall be
installed as indicated in the Drawings. 110 mm diameter pipes shall
have 5.5 mm thick walls and 160 mm diameter pipes shall have 7.8
mm thick walls. A 8 mm diameter twisted plastic pull-through wire
shall be inserted into the pipe;
c) From the manhole to the main cabinet oI the IEC, a pipe shall be
installed as detailed in b) above;
d) Between the Iloors, sleeves shall be prepared, 110 mm diameter. The
number oI sleeves shall be according to the requirements oI the IEC,
but not less than two. The pipes shall be plugged Iollowing the
installation oI the cables with rock-wool and lean concrete or any other
material approved by the COR;
e) In buildings with concentrations oI meters, pipes or ladders shall be
installed Irom the main cabinet oI the IEC to the concentration cabinets
oI the meters, all according to the request oI the IEC.
08 (2001)
33
080292 Preparations (substrate) in a building, Ior a central television system
Preparations in a building Ior central television system shall comply with the
requirements in the Design and Construction Regulations, Part 10 "The
Installation oI Communication Installations," SI 799, as well as with the
SpeciIications oI the Contract Documents, including the execution oI the mast.
The preparations shall also include all what is detailed hereinaIter:
a) Base Ior an Antenna The base shall be as indicated in the Drawings
and the other Contract Documents. The execution oI the antenna base
shall not damage the rooI, its insulation and the other existing
installations;
b) Anchors on the rooI Ior attaching anchoring cables, shall be as
indicated in the Drawings and the other Contract Documents;
c) Communications cabinets on each Iloor, at least 60 x 80 x 20 cm. The
cabinet shall be metallic and stand up to the requirements oI SI 4376.
The cabinet shall include at least Iour inlets, Iour outlets and Iour
openings Ior pipes to each apartment. The cabinet shall be shared by
the cable TV, the satellite reception, the cable broadcast and the
intercom. In each Iloor cabinet, a copper earthing bar shall be installed,
oI at least, 50 sq.mm section, with at least ten connection screws;
d) For each apartment or Iloor entrance hall, one apartment
communication cabinet shall be installed. The cabinet shall be identical
to the cabinet oI a 24 modules electrical board, plastic, modular, with a
door and recessed into the wall. Should the cabinet be installed into a
recess with external doors, it may be installed on the wall. A
"Communication" label shall be set on the cabinet. The apartment
cabinet shall be used Ior the telephone, intercom, cable TV, satellite
reception and cable broadcasting;
e) Double sockets (cable TV and satellite reception) in the ampliIiers
cabinet, on its wall, with separate 1.5 x 3 sq.mm Ieeding line Irom the
apartment services board and automatic switch 1 x 10A in the board.
I) Transition pipe Ior cables Irom the communication cabinet with the
ampliIiers in the upper story, into the mast. The pipe shall be
galvanized, 1.5" dia. with a 180 elbow at its upper end;
g) For buildings with several entrances a 29 mm dia. horizontal pipe
installed in the course oI the rooI's casting linking the communication
cabinets oI the upper Iloor. The pipe shall have a plastic pull-through
wire, 4 mm dia.;
h) Earthing at the antenna masts unless otherwise stated, the earthing
shall consist oI a twisted copper conductor, exposed and visible, 16
sq.mm section, Iixed to the wall by means oI clamps, installed at
distances oI not more than 2 m.
External conductors shall be protected to a height oI up to 2.50 m by means
oI 16 mm dia. rigid plastic pipes.
08 (2001)
34
Earthing conductors shall be connected to the outlet Irom the bridging ring
(in a box recessed into the wall) on one side and to the antenna mast (by
means oI a clamp) on the other side;
i) Earthing strips in the Iloors communication cabinets shall be connected
between themselves and to the potential equilibrating bar by means oI
a copper conductor oI 10 sq.mm at least;
j) For buildings in which is installed a lighnting arrester system, the
mast shall also be connected to the arrester system.
k) A vertical 50 mm pipe connecting the Iloors communication cabinets.
The pipe shall have in it a 4 mm dia. twisted plastic pull-through wire;
l) A 23 mm dia. pipe connecting the Iloor communication cabinet to the
apartment communication cabinet. The pipe shall have in it a twisted
plastic pull-through wire.
m) TV points in the apartment:
1. Each point shall end up with a 55 mm dia. box, recessed into
the wall, with a TV socket.
2. Each point in the apartment shall be connected to the
communication cabinet by means oI a 16 mm dia. pipe. The
pipe shall have in it a 4 mm dia. twisted plastic pull-through
wire;
n) TV points in protected spaces and shelters each point shall end up
with a 55 mm dia. box recessed into the wall, with a TV socket and be
connected to the Iloor communication cabinet by means oI a 16 mm
dia. pipe. The pipe shall have in it a twisted plastic pull-through wire.
080293 Central TV system
Central TV systems shall be executed according to the requirements oI the
Drawings and the other Contract Documents as well as in conIormity with SI
799. The system shall be tested by an approved laboratory.
080294 Preparations (substrate) in the building Ior cable TV
The preparations in the building Ior cable TV shall be executed according to the
directives oI the cable TV company having a concession in the area. The
preparations shall at least include the Iollowing items:
a) The Ieeding piping shall be as indicated in the Drawings. Unless
otherwise speciIied, a 75 mm dia. pipe shall be installed underground
Ior buildings with more than two apartments and a 50 mm dia. pipe
shall be installed in buildings with up to two apartments. The pipe shall
have in it a 8 mm dia. twisted plastic pull-through wire.
The pipe shall be connected to the cabinet or to a TV manhole in the public
sidewalk.
08 (2001)
35
b) Should there be no cabinet or manhole, a manhole made up oI concrete
rings oI inner diameter oI 60 cm and 100 cm deep shall be installed.
The manhole shall have a bottom made oI aggregates with a thickness
oI 15 cm. The manhole's slab shall be oI the "middle" class and the top
Iitted to 8 tons. On the top, there shall be a "Cable TV" marking;
c) Communication cabinets on each Iloor the cabinet shall be shared by
the cable TV, satellite reception, cable broadcasting and the intercom,
as detailed in paragraph 080292 c) above;
d) Apartment communication cabinet the cabinet, shared by the cable
TV, satellite reception, cable broadcastings, telephone and intercom,
shall be as detailed in paragraph 080292 d) above;
e) Sockets in the entrance Iloor communication cabinet, installed on the
wall oI the cabinet, with a separate 3 x 1.5 sq.mm line, Irom the house
services board and an automatic switch 1 x 10 A in the board. The
automatic switch shall be Ior short-circuits oI at least 6 KA, as per IEC
60898;
I) For buildings with multiple entrances 36 mm dia. horizontal pipes
installed in the ground Iloor slab (or under it) and connecting the
communication cabinets oI the entrance Iloor. The pipe shall have in it
a 8 mm dia. twisted plastic pull-through wire;
g) The earthing oI the Iloors cabinets shall be perIormed as required in
paragraph 080292 i) above;
h) The vertical piping connecting the Iloors communication cabinets shall
be as indicated in the Contract Documents, however not less than one
50 mm dia. pipe connecting all the Iloors cabinets. The piping shall
have twisted pull-through plastic wires, 4 mm dia.
One additional 36 mm dia. pipe shall be installed directly Irom the main
cabinet Ior each set oI eight apartments additional to the Iirst eight
apartments.
For instance: in the case oI Iour apartments on the Iloor, one additional pipe
shall be installed Ior Iloor no. 3, Iloor no. 5, etc.;
i) One 23 mm dia. pipe Ior each apartment, connecting the Iloor
communication cabinet with the apartment communication cabinet;
j) Cable TV points in the apartments:
1. Each point shall end up in a 55 mm dia. box, recessed into the
wall with a lid Iastened by means oI screws.
There shall be at least one point per apartment.
wire;
08 (2001)
36
k) As stated above in paragraph 08008 d), the Contractor shall submit a
CertiIicate Irom the cable TV company attesting that the preparations
were correctly executed.
080295 Preparations (substrate) in a building Ior satellite reception installations
The preparations Ior satellite reception installations shall conIorm with the
requirements in the Design and Construction Regulations, Part 10 "The
Installation oI Communication Installations," SI 799, as well as with the
speciIications oI the Contract Documents. The preparations shall also include all
what is detailed hereinaIter:
a) Base Ior column or device holding the dish see paragraph 080292 a)
above;
b) Communications cabinet the cabinet shall be shared by the cable TV,
satellite reception, cable broadcastings, telephone and intercom and as
detailed in paragraph 080292 c) above;
c) Communication cabinets on each Iloor the cabinet shall be shared by
the cable TV, satellite reception, cable broadcastings, telephone and
intercom and as detailed in paragraph 080292 d) above;
d) Socket Ior Ieeding ampliIiers, as speciIied in paragraph 080292 e)
above;
e) Transition pipe Ior cables Irom the communication cabinet with the
ampliIiers in the upper story, to the column holding the dish. The pipe
shall be galvanized, 1.5" dia. with a 180 elbow at its upper end;
I) For buildings with up to three entrances a 29 mm dia. horizontal pipe
installed in the course oI the rooI's casting linking the communication
cabinets oI the upper Iloor. The pipe shall have a plastic pull-through
wire, 4 mm dia.;
g) The earthing oI the column holding the dish shall be attached by means
oI a common cable to the earthing conductor oI the antenna's mast. The
connection conductor shall be twisted copper oI 16 sq.mm section.
h) The earthing oI the communication cabinet shall be perIormed as
required in paragraph 080292 i) above;
i) For buildings in which is installed a lighnting arrester system, the
column holding the dish shall also be connected to the arrester system.
j) A vertical 50 mm pipe connecting the Iloors communication cabinets.
k) A 23 mm dia. pipe connecting the Iloor communication cabinet to the
plastic pull-through wire;
l) The point in the apartment shall be shared by the cable television and
the satellite reception, as indicated in paragraph 080294 j) above.
08 (2001)
37
080296 Preparations (substrate) in the building Ior intercom systems
The preparations in the building Ior the intercom shall include the Iollowing:
a) A concentration box 15 x 15 x 10 cm recessed in the wall at the
location oI the pushbuttons next to the main entrance Iloor to the
building;
b) A Ieeding line 3 x 1.5 sq.mm Irom the Iloor communication cabinet in
which the system shall be installed up to the electrical lock in the
entrance door;
c) A plug-housing in the Iloor communication cabinet in which the
system shall be installed on the wall oI the cabinet with a separate 3 x
1.5 sq.mm line Irom the house services board and an automatic switch
1 x 10 A in the board. The automatic switch shall be Ior short-circuits
oI at least 6 KA, as per IEC 60898;
d) Communication cabinets on each Iloor the cabinet shall be shared by
the cable TV, satellite reception, cable broadcasting and the intercom,
as detailed in paragraph 080292 c) above;
e) Apartment communication cabinet the cabinet, shared by the cable
TV, satellite reception, cable broadcastings, telephone and intercom,
shall be as detailed in paragraph 080292 d) above;
I) A 36 mm dia. Irom the concentration box next to the entrance door up
to the Iloor communication cabinet. The pipe shall have in it a 4 mm
dia. twisted pull-through wire.
g) A vertical 36 mm pipe connecting the Iloors communication cabinets.
h) A 23 mm dia. pipe connecting the Iloor communication cabinet to the
plastic pull-through wire;
i) Intercom points in the apartment:
1. Each point shall end up in a 55 mm dia. box, recessed into the
wall with a lid Iastened by means oI screws.
wire;
080297 Intercom system in the building
The components oI the intercom shall be as Iollows:
a) A detection and addressing link board. The location oI the board shall
be next to the building's entrance door. The board shall include:
08 (2001)
38
1. Signaling pushbuttons with a Irame or tags indicating the
names oI the dwellers in the Iront oI the board;
2. One loudspeaker and one microphone installed on the inner
side oI the board;
b) A central unit included in the signaling board (on the inner oI the
board) or in a box reserved Ior that purpose on the ground Iloor oI the
building or in a box installed in a separate compartment oI the
electricity board oI the building. The unit shall include:
1. Signaling circuits Ior the apartment;
2. One ampliIier and reception circuits oI the addressing;
3. A supplier oI very low voltage Ior Ieeding the signaling
circuits, an ampliIier and an electrical mechanism Ior the
entrance door;
4. A switchable connections block Ior the connection cables.
Electrical lock on the entrance door the lock shall serve Ior opening oI the
door by means oI a control Irom each apartment. The shutting oI the door
shall be automatic (Iollowing the entrance oI the visitor). The lock shall be
installed in the entrance door.
c) An apartment unit shall include the Iollowing items:
1. A mechanism with a base Ior a manual system;
2. A manual system with microphone and earphone on a coiled
and pressurable cable Ior opening the entrance door;
d) Cables the cables shall be control and voice co-axial cables with
seven strands and they shall connect all the components oI the system;
e) Testing upon completion oI the work, a test shall be carried out in
conIormity with SII 236, by an approved laboratory.
080298 Preparations (substrate) in the building Ior a telephone system
The preparations in the building Ior a telephone system shall be executed
according to the directives oI the Telephone Company and the Drawings
approved by the Telephone Company. The preparations shall include the
Iollowing:
a) Feeding piping, inspection holes and cabinets, Irom the lot's
boundaries, as indicated in the Drawings. The pipes shall have in them
twisted plastic pull-through wires 8 mm dia.
b) A main branching cabinet shall be installed on the Iloor in which the
building's Ieeding piping shall be connected. The dimensions shall be
as indicated in the Drawings, but not less than 60 x 50 x 20 cm. The
cabinet shall be made oI sheet metal or reinIorced polyester with a
08 (2001)
39
wooden back 2 cm thick, a multi-bolt lock and a "Telephone" tag. The
cabinet shall be recessed into the wall.
For buildings with multiple entrances, cabinets as described above shall be
installed in each entrance;
c) A socket in the main branching box, with a separate 3 x 1.5 sq.mm line
Irom the apartment services boards and an automatic switch 1 x 10A in
the board. The automatic switch shall be Ior a short circuit oI 6 KA at
least, as per IEC 60898;
d) Earthing oI the cabinet with a conductor oI 10 sq.mm Irom the bus-bar.
The conductor shall end up with a screw connected to the cabinet wall with
two nuts, two washers and one spring-washer;
e) For buildings with multiple entrances an horizontal 42 mm dia. pipe
installed in the casting oI the Iloor in which the main cabinet shall be
installed (or under it) and connecting the main cabinets oI the
entrances;
I) On each Iloor a branching box with dimensions as indicated in the
Drawings but not less than 40 x 40 x 15 cm, recessed into the wall,
with a wooden back 1 cm thick and a "Telephone" sign;
g) Vertical piping as indicated in the Drawings, connecting the main
cabinet with the Iloors branching cabinets. Unless otherwise speciIied,
there shall be one 29 mm dia. pipe connecting all the cabinets and one
additional 29 mm dia. pipe straight into each Iloor;
h) Telephone points in the apartment:
1. Apartment communication cabinet the cabinet shall be
shared by the cable TV, satellite reception, cable broadcastings,
telephone and intercom and as detailed in paragraph 080292
above.
2. A 16 mm dia. pipe connecting the Iloor cabinet with the
apartment communication cabinet.
3. Each point shall end up with a 55 mm dia. box, recessed into
the wall, with a standard telephone accessory and be connected
to the apartment communication cabinet by means oI a 16 mm
pipe;
i) Telephone points in protected areas (or shelters) each point shall end
up with a 55 mm dia. box, recessed into the wall, with a standard
telephone accessory and be connected to the apartment communication
cabinet by means oI a 16 mm pipe;
j) In all the pipes oI the building, starting Irom the main branching
cabinet, telephone cables shall be installed. The section oI the cables
shall be according to the requirements oI the Telephone Company. In
all the boxes and cabinets, connection blocks shall be installed. For
each telephone outlets, cables oI at least three pairs shall be installed.
08 (2001)
40
The wiring and the connection blocks (clamps) shall conIorm with the
requirements oI the Telephone Company.
08 (2001)
41
0803 Cables and Conductors
08030 General
080301 Cables
Cables shall be reinIorced or not reinIorced, with plastic coating. The cables shall
meet the requirements oI SI 473, SI 474 or SI 1516. FireprooI cables shall meet
the Iire resistance properties as detailed in the Electricity Regulations and the
The type oI cables shall meet the requirements detailed in the Contract
Documents.
Special cables shall be as required in the Special SpeciIication and the Electricity
Regulations.
The condition oI the cables shall be visually inspected on their drum prior to their
installation. Cables discovered by the inspection as damaged shall be removed
Irom the Site. It shall be allowed to use sections in good condition Iollowing the
cutting-oII oI the impaired sections. Unless otherwise speciIied in the Contract
Documents, the installed cables shall be continuous and without muIIles.
High voltage cables shall be as detailed in paragraph 08094 below.
080302 Conductors
The conductors shall be oI the T type or any other type deIined in the Special
SpeciIication. The minimal section oI copper conductors shall be 1.5 sq.mm. In
circuits Ior sockets only, the minimal section shall be 2.5 sq.mm.
080303 Fire blocks and passages into protected areas
Fire blocks and passages into protected areas shall be as detailed in paragraph
080203 above.
080304 Passages Ior cables
Passages Ior cables through existing concrete elements (beams, ceilings, etc.) oI
up to 125 mm dia. shall be executed by drilling Iollowing the approbation by the
COR or by any other method approved by him.
Passages having a diameter larger than 125 mm shall be executed as detailed in
the Drawings and the Contract Documents.
080305 The connection oI cables and conductors
All the connections shall be located at places with easy and comIortable access.
At the location oI the connection, a reserve oI cables and conductors shall be leIt
over that shall be enough Ior their shortening and reconnection, should they be
damaged in the course oI time.
The insulation level at the connection location shall be identical to the insulation
level oI the cable arriving to the connection location.
08 (2001)
42
The connections shall be done in such a manner that no mechanical stresses in
the connection location oI the conductors and the clamps shall be created.
Cables having a section oI 25 sq.mm and above shall have split terminals.
080306 Besides whatever is stated in above paragraph 08006:
a) All the cables shall be marked by means oI identiIication tags bearing
clear and durable letters. The identiIication tags shall be attached to the
external envelope oI the cable. The location oI the identiIication tag
shall be at both ends oI the cables. Besides this, tags shall be attached
at both sides oI the connection box and at each place along the cable
where it shall be diIIicult to identiIy the cable.
All what is stated above applies also to pipes with cables or conductors.
b) All the conductors (including cables conductors) shall be marked at
their inlet into boards and Iixed connections oI electrical equipment,
except Ior equipment in the household apartment and lighting
equipment.
The phase, neutral, earthing and control conductors shall also be marked.
The marking shall be executed by means oI plastic sleeves clamped to the
conductors, carrying the required addressing or by another method approved
by the COR.
c) On each cable coming out Irom the lighting central board or Irom a
lighting pole, an identiIication tag shall be installed carrying the circuit
number and the pole number to which the cable is attached on the other
side.
08031 Exposed Installation of the Cables
The installation shall be executed as detailed in paragraph 080221 above. The
protective cover shall be executed according to the rules oI above paragraph
080223.
The attachment oI the cable to metallic parts oI the building's structure shall be
carried out as stated in the Regulations and above paragraph 08022. Cables shall
not be attached to pipes carrying liquid, cold or warm, or gases or to lightning
arresters or lightning conductors. The clamps shall not damage the external
envelope oI the cable.
08032 The Installation of Cables Into Pipes
The installation oI cables into pipes shall be executed as Iollows:
a) Pipes sections into which cables shall be inserted, shall be straight. In
any case, it shall not be allowed to have bends larger than 120 degrees.
Bends sharper than 120 degrees shall be achieved by means oI a box.
The COR shall be entitled to require the use oI a box at each place
where there is a risk oI damage to the envelope in the course oI the
cable's insertion;
08 (2001)
43
b) The insertion oI cables into the pipes shall be done by means oI
appropriate pull-through wires inserted into the pipes beIorehand. The
attachment between the pull-through wire and the cable shall be
perIormed in such a way that the cable's envelope may not be impaired
in the course oI the insertion. It shall be allowed to use grease in order
to decrease Iriction between the cable and the pipe, however the
material chosen Ior that shall not damage the pipe's external envelope.
Forces that may tear the external envelope oI the cable may not be
applied;
c) In those places where the cable comes out Irom the pipe, care shall be
given to the integrity oI the external envelope; a protective cartridge
shall be installed at the pipe's entrance, made oI rubber, plastic, brass,
aluminum or wood, all according to the pipe's diameter and the COR's
instructions;
d) There shall be no connections box into the pipe. For the installation oI
cables into pipes, it shall be allowed to cut oII the pipe in order to
install a connections box on the structure;
e) The inlet oI conductors into manholes shall be sealed;
In installations where the cables are inserted into pipes set into the ground, there
shall be branching boxes in the manholes. The installation oI the box shall ensure
easy access to the box Ior the inspection oI the connections, repairs and
additions. The boxes shall be attached to the manhole walls in a stable and
durable way. The access oI the cables to the boxes shall be as close as possible to
the manhole walls, so as to leave Iree space Ior the entrance oI a worker in it.
08033 The Installation of Cables Into Ducts
080330 General
DeIinition: The word "duct" reIers to ditches Ior the installation oI cables,
ladders and underground ditches, as detailed in paragraph 08027 and 08027,
above.
The cables shall be laid into the duct by unrolling the drum on which they are
enrolled, or by laying them next to the duct on the ground to all their length and
then transIerring them into the duct. The pulling oI the cable into the duct shall
be executed in a way so as not to damage the integrity oI the cables. In the course
oI the laying, care shall be given not to damage the external envelope oI the
cable.
Cables laid into a duct shall be arranged one next to the other. The distances
between the cables shall be as speciIied in the Contract Documents. Control
cables may be installed in groups.
080331 Installation on the walls oI a masonry ditch
Exposed installation oI cables on the walls oI a masonry ditch shall be executed
as detailed above in paragraph 80301 with respect to the exposed installation oI
cables. The exposed installation shall be carried out by means oI special supports
or vertical attachments to the duct's walls.
08 (2001)
44
Supports shall be attached to the duct's walls or to vertical attachments.
The supports on which the cables shall rest shall have a mechanical strength high
enough to bear all the cables. The structure oI the supports and the distances
between them shall enable the installation oI all the designed cables plus 30 oI
their weight. The maximal distance between supports shall be 120 cm.
The shape oI the support shall ensure the cables Irom damage.
The location oI the cables on the support shall be determined so that the number
oI intersections between the cables shall be as low as possible.
The cables installed on the duct's walls shall be arranged by their voltages or
series. Unless otherwise speciIied in the Special SpeciIication, the cables oI high
voltage shall be installed on one wall and those oI low voltage on the other wall.
This instruction shall be applied subject to the Regulations.
Vertical attachments installed on the duct's wall shall consist oI shaped grooved
and galvanized steel sections, long enough Ior the cables shown in the Drawings
with an addition oI 30. The attachment shall be Iixed on the duct's wall at
distances oI at least 40 cm one Irom the other. The cables shall lean on the
attachments and be anchored by means oI appropriate holders or plastic clamps.
080332 The laying oI cables on ladders or installation ducts
The laying oI cables on ladders or installation ducts shall be done in parallel lines
without intersections, except at the outlet and inlet oI the cables into the ladder.
In un-grooved sheet metal ducts, grooved sections shall be installed Ior the
attachment oI the cables. In plastic ducts, original attachments produced by the
ducts ManuIacturer, shall be installed.
The cables shall be laid straight and anchored to the ladder by means oI
appropriate holders or plastic clamps.
080333 Outlet oI the cables Irom the duct
Outlets Ior the cables Irom the ducts shall be installed at the bottom or on the
walls oI the ducts. Round holes oI diameters appropriate to those oI the cables
shall be Iormed in the ducts, with an adequate enlargement that shall enable the
introduction oI one oI the Iollowing accessories:
a) rubber transition ring
b) metallic sealing cartridge
c) end oI protective pipe
The outlet Irom a metal duct shall be made so as to ensure the integrity oI the
cable wrapping.
080334 The installation oI connection boxes
The branching oII oI a cable Irom the duct shall be perIormed in the connection
box. The box shall be installed on the wall oI the duct Irom outside, in a location
08 (2001)
45
with easy access. The installation oI the connections box shall be perIormed in
such a way as to ensure the Iollowing conditions:
a) The Ireedom oI cables, which do not enter the box, shall not be
hindered.
b) The box shall not represent an obstacle in the duct and shall not hinder
the normal maintenance operations.
08034 Concealed Installation of Cables
Cables in concealed installations shall be installed as detailed in the Regulations.
The passage oI a concealed cable in a dilatation joint shall be through protective
pipes installed according to the instructions oI above paragraph 080224.
For installations in double walls or precast components, the cables shall be
attached in such a way so as to ensure them Irom damage in the course oI the
dismantling oI components or oI parts oI them. The cables shall end up in the
connection boxes into which shall be executed the connection to the other parts
oI the installation. It shall not be permitted to leave out ends oI cables protruding
Irom the precast component, during its transportation. For installations in double
walls, mechanical protection shall be provided to the cables at those places where
there is a risk oI damage Iollowing the installation oI accessories, parts oI
structure, etc., on those walls.
For installations above removable ceilings, the cables shall be Iastened to parts oI
the structure in such a way that they shall not be damaged in the course oI the
dismantling oI acoustic boards, etc. The cables shall be attached at the corners on
both sides oI the corner. The extremities oI the cables too, shall be attached to
parts oI the structure.
08035 Underground Installation of Cables
080350 General
The laying oI a cable within a ditch dug into the ground (excavation) shall be as
stated above in paragraph 080330. The excavation shall be ready and Iinished, at
its Iinal dimensions prior to the laying oI the cable. No excavation work shall be
perIormed by means oI mechanical equipment nor manually, Iollowing the
laying oI the cable in the excavation.
080351 Execution oI underground installations
The installation shall be perIormed as detailed in the Regulations, but the
thickness oI the padding layers and oI the cover shall be at least 10 cm. A 5 cm
thick layer oI padding sand shall also be installed between the layers oI cables.
The protective layer shall be oI uniIorm material. At a depth oI 40 cm below the
Iinal ground level, a plastic tape shall be installed, as required in the Regulations.
All the connections between the cables, as Iar as their locations and execution are
concerned, shall require prior approbation by the COR.
Should it be required in the Contract Documents to protect the cables in the ditch,
the protection shall consist oI a cover made oI concrete plates, plastic plates
08 (2001)
46
specially manuIactured Ior that purpose or any other appropriate material. In such
a case, the width oI the plate shall be 20 cm larger than that oI the cables
assembly and protrude by 10 cm Irom the most extreme cable.
The said protection shall be installed on top oI the sand padding layers, that is 10
cm above the cables.
All the connections between the cables (their location and way oI execution)
shall be approved beIorehand by the COR.
The installation oI the cables shall be loose so that a surplus oI one to two percent
shall be leIt.
080352 The passage oI cables through buildings
Passages (inlets and outlets) oI cables into the building shall be executed
according to one oI the three Iollowing methods:
a) passage through the building's Ioundations;
b) passage under the building;
c) passage through external walls.
According to method a), the passage through the Ioundation or the Ioundation
beam shall be perIormed with the cable being inserted into a pipe large enough
Ior ensuring that the settling oI the building, or its movement due to changes in
the ground, shall not create mechanical pressure on the cable. The passage pipe
shall be strong enough to provide protection against static pressures oI the
building in the said location.
According to method b) the outlet oI the cable Irom the ground shall be close to
the building's wall. The cable shall be eIIiciently and durably mechanically
protected, up to a height oI at least 180 cm above ground level.
The installation oI cables in passages shall be executed so that no mechanical
pressure is put on them. Care shall be given to the sealing oI all the passages.
080353 Crossings under roads
Crossings under roads or railways tracks shall be perIormed as detailed in
paragraph 08015 above. The crossing planning shall be submitted to the
approbation oI the COR prior to its execution.
080354 Installation into inspection holes
The inlet oI the cable into the inspection hole shall be executed as stated above in
paragraph 080352. A spare cable shall be leIt in the inspection hole, its length
being equal to 1.5 times the length oI the manhole. This spare cable shall be bent
to a radius appropriate to the cable's diameter.
08 (2001)
47
08036 Connections of Cables to Outdoors Lighting
080360 General
The connections oI cables and the branching shall be inside the poles or the
electricity board or the central switchboard. No cables connections shall be
perIormed by means oI muIIles. The repartition between the various phases
conductors shall be according to the Drawings and the COR's instructions.
Should the repartition not be shown in the Drawings, the repartition shall be
equal between the phases.
080361 The execution oI the connections
All the cables connections shall be done in straight lines as the wires are laid one
next to the other and not one above the other. The cables shall be Iastened by
means oI clamps so that the cable itselI shall not put its weight on the
connections to the clamps.
The extremities oI the cables shall be attached to the clamps. At the end oI each
cable, a reserve shall be leIt in order to enable the shortening oI wires and outlets
that may be impaired in the course oI time. For the installation oI sheathed cables
the metal reinIorcement shall be leIt there, cleaned all around and connected to
the earthing screw.
080362 Sealing the extremities
The connections at the poles, the electricity boards and the central switchboard
shall be executed immediately Iollowing the cutting oI the cables. Should it be
impossible to perIorm the connections when the cables are being laid down, the
extremities oI the cables shall be immediately sealed aIter the cutting, by means
oI insulation tapes, so as to prevent moisture and dirt inIiltration (and leave it like
this until the Iinal connection).
080363 Inlet oI cables to poles, outdoors electricity boards and lighting central
switchboards
The inlet into the lighting poles, or the electricity boards or the lighting central
switchboards shall be through sleeves having a diameter as indicated in one oI
the Contract Documents. Should there be no such indication, the diameter shall
be 50 mm. The extremities oI the pipes shall be sealed by Ioamed polyurethane
or some other material approved by the COR.
All the cables extremities, with section Irom 10 sq.mm upwards, shall end up
with a shrinking split ("glove").
At those places where the cable rises exposed up to the electrical pole, the cable
shall be protected by a galvanized steel pipe or a galvanized sheet metal duct.
The protective means shall rise up to a height oI at least 180 cm above the ground
or Iloor level. The pipe or the duct shall be attached to the pole by means oI
galvanized Iasteners. The extremities oI the pipe shall be equipped with
cartridges.
The cables shall be tied to the pole's body or to the box structure, so as not to
apply their weight on the electrical connections.
08 (2001)
48
08037 Overhead Installation of the Cables
080370 General
Overhead cables shall be installed hanging on a bearing wire, unless it is oI a
special type where the bearing wire is part oI the cable itselI.
The installation system shall ensure that all the mechanical stresses pass on to the
bearing wire and the cable shall be entirely Iree Irom them. Whenever the
bearing wire is laid horizontally, the link between the cable and the wire shall
enable the movement oI the cable in the direction oI the bearing wire length, so
that changes oI temperatures may not create stresses into the cable due to
diIIerences between the dilatation coeIIicients oI the cable and the wire.
Whenever the bearing cable is laid with a slope, the clamps at the upper
extremity oI the bearing cable shall be oI a type, which holds stably the cable.
The other clamps shall be oI a type, which shall enable the movement oI the
cable along the length oI the bearing wire so as to prevent stresses due to
diIIerences in temperature. The distance between adjacent clamps shall not
exceed 35 cm.
080371 Heavy cables
In overhead installation oI heavy cables it may be possible to prevent settlement
changes resulting Irom changes in temperature by introducing an appropriate
spring in the bearing wire. In such a case, the hanging cable shall be bent so that
a certain distance between the cable and the spring shall be maintained in order to
prevent damage oI the external envelope due to the movement oI the spring.
080372 Passage Ior installation on walls
In such places where the hanging cable passes to an installation on the wall, an
appropriate cable noose shall be used Ior preventing the cable Irom being
submitted to bending stresses, resulting Irom the action oI wind on the hanging
cable. This noose shall be arranged in a U shape and not a V shape. The radius oI
the U shall be at least equal to the allowed bending radius oI the said cable. The
hanging oI several cables on one single bearing wire shall consist oI special
holding arrangements in which each cable shall be held separately Irom the other
cables. The holding arrangements oI each cable shall meet the above
requirements.
The passage Irom a hanging cable to an installation within a pipe shall be
accomplished only by means oI an appropriate accessory. Whenever the cable
itselI is inserted into the pipe while its integrity is being preserved, the insertion
shall be through a special protective cap or another appropriate accessory
(whistle) that shall prevent the penetration oI rainwater into the pipe. The passage
Irom the cable to the conductors' installation in the pipe shall be accomplished
only through an appropriate connections box.
The inlet oI the cable into the box shall be perIormed by means oI an appropriate
cartridge ensuring water tightness and proper attachment oI the cable.
080373 Bearing wire
The bearing wire shall be continuous along its whole length without any
connection. The pulling oI the wire shall be according to requirements oI the
08 (2001)
49
Regulations. Whenever an earthing conductor is installed in the network, the
bearing wire shall be grounded at both extremities.
080374 Connections
Connections in cables set on poles shall be perIormed inside boxes. The boxes
shall be protected Irom mechanical damage and Irom the inIluence oI weather
and solar radiation, in accordance with the conditions oI their installation. The
insulation level shall be IP 657. The connection oI the cables extremities shall be
as required in paragraph 080361.
08038 Insulated Conductors
080381 Installation within pipes
The insertion oI insulated conductors into a pipe shall be achieved by means oI
an adequate pull-wire introduced into the pipe beIore the conductors. All the
conductors inserted into the pipe shall be tied together in such a way as to
prevent unnecessary twisting, their extremities shall be connected in a stable way
and they shall be tied to the pull-through wire. It shall be allowed to use grease in
order to diminish Iriction between the conductors and the pipe, but the material
chosen Ior that purpose shall not impair the conductor's insulation neither
chemically nor otherwise.
In concealed installation whenever the pipes shall be installed under the
plastering, the conductors shall be inserted only Iollowing the installation oI the
passage boxes and the accessories and aIter that the plastering shall dry up and be
ready Ior white-washing or painting and that the Ilooring works have be
completed.
In exposed installation the conductors shall be inserted only Iollowing the
completion oI the pipes installation and Iinal Iastening. The conductors
connections shall be done inside the boxes and with bar-clamps or pressure
clamps or with clamps with Ilat Iastening or with cable-shoes. The connections
locations shall be insulated one Irom the other and Irom the box body, in a way
that shall ensure a level oI insulation at least equal to that oI the conductor along
its whole length.
Whenever conductors belonging to various circuits pass through a common
passage box, the conductors oI each circuit shall be gathered separately by means
oI a tie and their insertion into a Ilexible pipe. The various circuits shall be
marked up in a clear and durable way so as to enable the identiIication without
any mistake.
080382 Flexible twisted conductors
The extremities oI Ilexible twisted conductors shall have bases or cable-shoes
connected to the conductors by pressure.
08039 Bus-bars Ducts
The bus-bars ducts are used Ior the transIer oI currents Irom transIormers to the
main boards, Irom main boards to secondary boards and Irom secondary boards
to the equipment.
08 (2001)
50
The bus-bars ducts shall be built as detailed in the Drawings and the other
Contract Documents.
All the duct's accessories shall be industrialized elements Iitting the requirements
oI IEC 60439 and have an insulation level oI IP 42, at least.
The ducts shall include separation elements resistant to Iire propagation in each
passage oI a story or a Iire area, as well as dilatation elements, as recommended
by the ManuIacturer.
Unless otherwise speciIied, the bus-bar shall be made oI copper. The sections oI
the neutral bus-bar shall be equivalent to those oI the phases bus-bars.
08 (2001)
51
0804 Earthing and Other Protections
08040 General
The present Sub-Chapter reIers to earthings in low voltage installations only and
represents an addition to the Electricity Law, including Ioundation and neutral
earthings as well as to the IEC SpeciIications regarding connections to new
buildings.
08041 Earthing Electrodes
080410 General
The electrodes shall be located so as to be protected Irom accidental mechanical
injury and erosion; Ior that purpose the Contractor shall bury them at an
appropriate depth.
In order to make sure that the electrodes are Iunctioning, the COR shall be
entitled to request a renewed testing oI the earthing at the end oI the summer, not
later than one year Iollowing the completion oI the work.
Metallic water networks shall serve as electrodes only iI required by the Contract
Documents and described there.
080411 Foundation earthing
The Ioundations earthing system shall be executed according to the requirements
oI the Regulations and the details oI the Drawings and the Contract Documents.
Should steel welds be required, attention shall be given to the use oI appropriate
electrodes. The welds shall be executed as required in Chapter 19 Steel
Structures.
The outlets to the electrode Irom the bridging ring shall be at a height oI 30 cm
above the Iinal ground level in the vicinity. The extremity oI the outlet shall be
installed in a wall-recessed connections box. On the box a "Earthing" label shall
be installed.
080412 Earthing rods
The earthing rods are modular electrodes inserted by means oI pneumatic or
electrical hammer, in order to reach depth layers having a relatively lower
speciIic resistance. The electrodes shall be inserted to a depth determined in
Iunction oI the soil quality. The rods shall be composed oI connected sections
with removable joints. The minimal total length shall be 3 m, unless otherwise
speciIied in the Drawings and the other Contract Documents.
The rods shall be made oI copper plated steel and have a minimal diameter oI 19
mm.
The rods shall be an industrialized product. The auxiliary accessories shall come
Irom the same ManuIacturer's plant as that oI the rods.
The earthing rods shall be inserted section aIter section, which shall be at least
1.5 m long each. The Iirst section shall be inserted with a special drill point. The
08 (2001)
52
rod shall be equipped with a special hardening hat protecting the section so that it
shall not change its shape in the course oI the insertion.
The connections between the sections shall ensure Iull electrical and mechanical
contact either by means oI plug/socket or oI a muIIle. The connection oI the
earthing connector to the rod shall be perIormed inside the inspection manhole by
means oI an original connection device.
The number and location oI the electrodes shall be according to the Drawings.
Unless otherwise speciIied, the distance between the electrodes shall be at least
twice the length oI the longest electrode and in any case not less than 6 m.
Should the designed electrodes not provide the resistance required in the Contract
Documents, additional electrodes shall be inserted until the required resistance
shall be obtained.
08042 The Earthing Conductors
080420 General
The earthing conductors shall conIorm to the requirements oI the Regulations.
080421 The continuity oI the earthing conductors
The earthing conductor shall be continuous along its whole length and entirely
made oI the same material. The connections between the sections oI the earthing
conductors shall consist oI appropriate screws equipped with spring rings or
pressure connectors. The contact areas shall be prepared in such a way so as to
ensure total electrical contact. The connections locations shall be coated with
waterprooI and anti-corrosive paint. The connections between Iirm earthing
connectors sections shall enable thermal dilatation, without the creation oI
mechanical stresses.
080422 Connection to earthing conductors
The connection to earthing conductors shall be by means oI an appropriate
threaded device with the same requirements as detailed in paragraph 080421
above.
Whenever an earthing conductor shall be connected with a Iitting, a machine, a
structure, an electrode, etc. made oI materials diIIerent Irom that oI the
conductor, an appropriate special clamp shall be needed that Iits the connection
oI two types oI materials and prevents the creation oI a galvanized cell.
080423 Earthing conductors Ior outdoors lighting
a) Should the earthing conductors be installed separately Irom Ieeding
cable, it shall be allowed to use earthing conductors consisting oI one
oI the Iollowing materials:
1. Exposed twisted electrolytic copper wire, with minimal section
oI 25 sq.mm. Should the copper wire be used as earthing
conductor, its minimal section shall be 35 sq.mm.
08 (2001)
53
2. Twisted galvanized metal wire with minimal section oI 50
sq.mm.
The underground installation oI the earthing conductors shall be executed as
detailed in the speciIications concerning cables in above paragraph 08035.
b) Connections between sections oI exposed earthing conductors shall
only be executed in lighting poles or central switchboards.
Connections in a pole shall be carried out as Iollows:
1. Conductors reaching the pole and continuing aIterwards, shall
be connected by means oI one cable-shoe, without cutting the
conductor.
The connection shall be to an earthing screw welded unto the pole's
body.
2. The connection to the accessories tray shall be by means oI an
Ilexible copper conductor, insulated, with section oI at least 2.5
sq.mm and cable-shoes at its extremities. One extremity oI the
conductor shall be connected to the earthing screw oI the pole,
the other extremity to the earthing screw oI the accessories
tray.
c) It shall be allowed to connect an earthing conductor to a pole, Irom the
main conductor, by means oI a cad weld.
08043 Protection of Earthing and of Electrodes-earthing
080431 Protection oI the earthing conductor
Whenever there shall be a risk oI mechanical injury, the earthing conductor shall
be protected by means oI an appropriate protective pipe.
The earthing conductor shall be protected at its outlet Iorm the building down to
its connection to the earthing electrode, by means oI an appropriate protective
pipe.
080432 The protection oI the electrode
For the protection oI the electrode, its detection and the quality control oI the
connection, an inspection manhole shall be installed at the head oI the electrode,
as detailed in paragraph 080282 above.
080433 The passage through an obstacle
The situation oI an earthing conductor passing through Ioundations or
Ioundation-walls oI a building shall be similar to that oI a cable and all the
requirements oI above paragraph 080352 shall be met in this respect.
The situation oI an earthing conductor passing underneath a road shall be as that
oI a cable and all the requirements oI above paragraph 080353 shall be met in
this respect.
08 (2001)
54
080434 Marking and addressing
The location oI a earthing electrode shall be indicated in a clear way atop the
cover oI the inspection manhole at the head oI the electrode, in yellow-green.
Should it be requested, the sign-plate shall consist oI a metal plate installed on a
50/50/5 angle stuck into the ground.
080435 Corrosion-prooI protection
The connection plates oI the earthing electrodes shall be coated with corrosion-
prooI paint to protect them Irom corrosion. The same rule shall apply to
disconnectable connection places.
Upon completion oI the painting, the connection spot shall be wrapped up with a
yellow-green plastic tape.
08044 Potential Equilibrium
080441 Earthing oI metallic services
All the metallic services installed in the building shall be connected to a bus-bar
as required in the Regulations.
It shall be allowed to install a certain number oI bus-bars in a single Installation,
provided that they shall be connected to one bridging ring with electrical
continuity.
080442 Connection
The method oI connection to a metallic service which is not a pipe shall be as
detailed in paragraph 080421 above. Connecting pipes shall consist oI earthing
clamps Iitting the pipe's diameter.
Appropriate addressing shall be installed on all the connecting conductors, at
both extremities.
080443 Connection oI the neutral conductor
In the method oI protection by means oI a neutral conductor, the installation shall
be achieved according to the Regulations.
080444 Gas and Fuel Piping
The gas and Iuel piping shall be connected to the bus-bar subject to Regulations
and the instructions applying to those pipings.
08045 Water-Meter Continuity Bridge
Unless otherwise required in the Contract Documents, the bridge shall consist oI
35 sq.mm twisted copper conductors, connected to the pipes on both sides oI the
water-meter by means oI clamps Iitting the pipes diameters.
08 (2001)
55
08046 Earthings in the Building (a Household Installation)
The requirements detailed below concern household installations, as deIined in
the Electricity Law: "Installation Ior households, business, oIIices buildings or
Ior buildings in which the location conditions and the use oI electrical
installations are similar to those oI a household apartment."
Wherever the word "apartment" shall be used, it also means other household
installations. The requirements are as Iollows:
a) In a building with a concentration oI electricity-meters in one single
place in the building:
1. From the bus-bar, a 29 mm pipe shall be installed down to the
main board oI the IEC.
2. From the bus-bar, a 25 sq.mm twisted copper conductor set
into a 29 mm pipe shall be installed all along the concentration
oI electricity-meters.
3. In the electricity-meters cabinet or above it, an earthing strip
shall be installed, made oI electrolytic copper, 30 x 3 mm with
screws in a quantity equal to the number oI meters 2.
Should the strip be above the cabinet, the strip shall be connected to the
earthing strip in the cabinet by means oI a 25 sq.mm twisted copper
conductor.
4. Earthing conductors in Ieeding lines oI apartments shall be
connected to the above earthings strip.
5. Each apartment board shall also be grounded, whenever there
shall be a metallic water pipe, to the water pipe by means oI a 4
sq.mm conductor;
b) In a building with Iloor electricity-meters concentrations:
1. From the bus-bar, a 29 mm pipe shall be installed down to the
main board oI the IEC.
2. From the bus-bar an exposed, visible 25 sq.mm twisted
conductor shall be installed to the Iull height oI the building.
On each Iloor, a passage box shall be installed, through which
the conductor shall pass, without being cut.
In buildings with Iour stories and above, besides the above conductor, a
galvanized steel earthing conductor 30 x 3.5 mm shall be installed. This
additional conductor shall be connected to the copper conductor, in the
passage box Iound on each Iloor.
3. In the box, an air clamp shall be installed Ior the connection oI
a 25 sq.mm conductor to the electricity-meters concentration
cabinet.
08 (2001)
56
4. In electricity-meters concentration cabinets an earthing strip
shall be installed, made oI electrolytic copper, 30 x 3 mm with
screws in a quantity equal to the number oI meters 2.
5. Earthing conductors in Ieeding lines oI apartments shall be
connected to the above earthings strip.
6. Each apartment board shall also be earthed, whenever there
shall be a metallic water pipe, to the water pipe by means oI a 4
sq.mm conductor;
c) In buildings with electricity-meters concentration cabinet installed
outside the building:
1. In each apartment board, a bus-bar shall be installed and
connected to the bridging ring.
2. In each apartment board, a cylindrical clamp with inner thread
and blue insulation shall be installed Ior the neutral. The clamp
shall be installed on a rail.
3. A bus-bar and a clamp Ior the neutral shall be installed in the
lower module oI the board, which shall be separated Irom the
rest oI the board, by means oI a partition.
4. The neutral conductor in the Ieeding cable shall pass through
the neutral clamp, without any cutting oI the conductor, up to
the board's neutral strip.
5. A conductor, with section as required but not less than 10
sq.mm, with blue insulation and marking by means oI a
shrinking yellow-green sleeve at its two terminals, shall
connect the bus-bar to the neutral clamp.
6. Water pipes (should there be a metal pipe) shall be earthed to
the bus-bar by means oI a 10 sq.mm conductor.
7. On the board, a sign "Neutralized" shall be set.
d) Besides the above, all the other additional earthings required Ior the
metallic services shall be installed, such as:
1. LIIts rails with 16 sq.mm conductors.
2. Telephone cabinet, as detailed in paragraph 080298 d).
3. Floors communication cabinet, as detailed in paragraph
080298 i).
4. Main water pipes with conductors having sections as indicated
in the Contract Documents, including a bridge over the main
water-meter.
5. Main gas pipe with 10 sq.mm conductor.
08 (2001)
57
6. Metal structure oI the solar-heating systems with 10 sq.mm
conductors.
7. For a building with TV antenna mast, a earthing shall be
installed Ior the mast, as indicated in paragraph 080292 h).
08047 Thunder-Arrester Protection System
Should a thunder-arrester protection system be required in the Special
SpeciIication, it shall be executed according to the Special SpeciIication and in
compliance with the requirements oI SI 1173. The system shall be tested by an
approved laboratory.
08048 Various Earthings
The earthing oI poles in overhead networks see paragraph 08056 below.
The requirements Ior the earthing oI high voltage installation see Sub-Chapter
0809.
Special earthings shall be executed according to details in the Special
SpeciIication.
08 (2001)
58

0805 Overhead Networks and Outdoors Lighting Poles
08050 General
080500 Scope
The present Sub-Chapter reIers to the installation oI overhead lines made oI
exposed or insulated wires installed on poles or consoles. It also deals with the
poles and arms Ior outdoor lighting.
All the accessories, materials and works oI the overhead nets shall comply with
the Regulations, the requirements oI the present Chapter and the IEC
SpeciIications.
080501 Marking the alignment
The marking oI the alignment and the location oI the poles shall be as stated in
paragraph 080121 and 080122, above.
080502 Erection oI the Poles
Following the execution oI the poles pits excavation, as detailed in paragraph
08016 above, the erection oI the poles shall start only aIter their examination and
approval by the COR. The erection shall be carried out by means oI the required
equipment with Iull care given to the integrity oI the pole, on all its parts. All the
necessary arrangements shall be taken Ior keeping a straight line, the verticality
oI the pole and the correct angles oI the pole's head. Following erection, the best
parts oI the excavated material shall be put back in layers that shall be wetted and
compacted.
080503 Galvanization
All the steel accessories oI the overhead net and the lighting poles such as steel
poles, arms, bearing plates, clamps, bolts, anchoring bolts in the Ioundations, etc.
shall be galvanized as required in SI 812.
080504 Steel consoles
Poles shall be marked by means oI a tag made oI galvanized steel sheet or
aluminum sheet 0.5 mm thick. The tag shall be attached to the pole, at a height oI
2.5 m Irom its bottom, by means oI Iour coated nails. The Iollowing inIormation
shall appear on the tag:
a) The name oI the ManuIacturer;
b) The nominal length oI the pole, in meters;
c) Additional details as required in SI 812 regarding metal lighting poles
or in the Special SpeciIication or by the Local Authority;
d) Besides the tags detailed above, the pole shall carry an identiIication
number with single ciphers made oI aluminum sheet 5 cm high,
hammered or stamped.
08 (2001)
59
The numbering oI other poles shall be by means oI painting using a pattern oI
Iigures as detailed here. The color oI the Iigures shall be black.
The marking oI networks by means oI balls shall be executed iI required in the
08051 Wooden Poles
080511 Quality oI the pole
Wooden poles shall be oI red pinewood or any other wood with mechanical
properties. The poles shall be straight, so that a line passing through the middle
oI the top end to the middle oI the bottom edge shall not protrude Irom any part
oI the pole. The poles shall have a Iirm core and rings round and close one to the
other. The poles may have spiral cores with a thread oI not more than 1.5 turns
Ior 7.5 m.
Knots knots shall be allowed provided that the width oI each one oI them shall
not exceed 1/6 oI the perimeter and their added width in the same section shall
not exceed 1.3 times the perimeter.
Cracks the maximal allowable crack shall be:
a) Width: 15 mm;
b) Depth: 1/4 oI the pole's diameter at the location oI the crack;
c) Length: 8 times the pole's diameter at the location oI the crack;
d) The total number oI cracks in one section: three, their added width: 40
mm at the most.
Moisture the moisture content in the wood shall not exceed 25.
Breaking Load the pole shall stand up to an horizontal load oI at least 600 kg
exerted at a distance oI 60 cm Irom the upper extremity, when the pole shall be
held stably at a distance oI 150 cm Irom its bottom.
080512 The dimensions oI the pole
The dimensions oI the poles shall be as detailed in the Drawings and the Contract
Documents.
080513 Immunization
The wood shall be treated as stated in SII 262 Protection oI the Wood in the
Building.
Imported poles shall be immunized in accordance with the Regulations
requirements in their land oI origin. The poles shall be treated with materials in
liquid emulsions and not in organic solvents. The preserving material shall be
introduced by the "vacuum-pressure" impregnation process.
08 (2001)
60
080514 Drilling oI holes
In poles having lengths oI 12 to 14 meters, two 21 mm dia. holes shall be drilled
prior to the impregnation and saturation processes, with the upper hole being at a
distance oI 150 mm below the pole's head, the second hole being 400 mm under
it.
080515 Foundation oI the pole
The depth oI insertion oI the pole into the ground, oI all types, shall be as
indicated in the Drawings but not less than 1.5 m.
The pole shall be reinIorced all around and along its whole depth in the ground,
as detailed in the Drawings and the other Contract Documents. The buried part
shall be coated with bitumen beIore its erection.
08052 Steel Poles
080521 Lighting steel pole
Lighting poles with arms up to 18 m high and lighting poles without arms up to
20 m, shall comply with the requirements oI SI 812. Above those heights, the
pole shall be executed according to the Drawings and the Special SpeciIication.
a) The pole's structure
The pole shall have one oI the Iorms detailed hereinaIter:
- cylindrical pole or prism shaped pole with uniIorm cross-
section along the whole height;
- stepped pole composed oI cylindrical or prismatic sections
with uniIorm cross-section along the whole height oI the
section;
- conical pole with octagonal section;
- conical pole with round section.
The height oI the pole and its shape shall be as indicated in the Contract
Documents. The indicated height reIers to the pole's height without the arm.
The Ioundation plates and the attachments to the pole shall be executed as
required in the Drawings and the Contract Documents.
Poles and decorative components shall be executed according to the
requirements and details in the Contract Documents.
b) Opening in the pole (accessories compartment)
There shall be an opening (or openings) in the pole to enable the installation
oI accessories in the empty space in the pole. The opening's door shall be by
means oI an "Allen" 3/8" bolt, unless otherwise speciIied in one oI the
Contract Documents.
The door oI the opening shall be connected to the pole by means oI a metal
chain. The locking bolt oI the door shall not be removable ("prisoner").
08 (2001)
61
Unless otherwise speciIied, the dimensions oI the opening shall be as
detailed hereinaIter:
- For poles up to 5 m height the opening shall be 40 cm high
with its lower edge at a height oI 40 cm above the base plate;
- For poles higher than 5 m - the opening shall be 60 cm high
with its lower edge at a height oI 50 cm above the base plate.
c) The Iinish oI the pole
The galvanization shall be executed as required in paragraph 080503 above.
The base plate oI the pole and the lower part oI the pole up to a height oI 30
cm above the base plate, shall be coated with hot bitumen.
Should it be so required in one oI the Contract Documents to paint the
poles, the painting shall be executed as detailed in Chapter 11 Paintworks.
The painting shall be executed in the Shop only. The painting shall be
perIormed on top oI the galvanization and the coating oI the pole's lower
part.
The painting oI poles in an oven shall be executed Iollowing a request and
according to the details in the Special SpeciIication.
d) The poles Ioundations
The Ioundations shall be made oI B-30 concrete, at least. The Ioundations
shall be executed according to the dimensions detailed in the Contract
Documents.
The piles Ior the Ioundations shall be executed according to the details oI
The casting shall be executed in the pit Iollowing the COR's approbation oI
the pits. All the casting works and the auxiliary works related to them shall
be executed according to the requirements oI Chapter 02 Cast in Place
Concrete Works. The casting oI the upper 30 cm oI the Ioundation shall be
done with the use oI Iorms.
Pre-cast concrete Ioundations shall comply with the requirements oI
Chapter 03 Pre-cast Products.
Inside the Ioundation, sleeves Ior the passage oI cables and earthing
conductors shall be installed. The sleeves shall consist oI plastic pipes with
diameter as required but not less than 50 mm Ior the cable and 23 mm Ior
the earthing conductor. The number oI sleeves shall be as needed, but not
less than two Ior the cables and two Ior the earthing conductors.
For poles with base plates, Iour anchoring-bolts shall be anchored into the
Ioundation concrete, as required in the Drawings. The anchoring-bolts shall
be tied between them by means oI two steel strips with sections oI 20/2 mm.
For piles with root-base, the Ioundation shall be executed according to the
instructions oI the ManuIacturer or to the Special SpeciIication.
08 (2001)
62
The Iinish oI the Ioundation shall be smooth and leveled. The level oI the
Ioundation upper surIace shall be as indicated in the Drawings. Unless
otherwise speciIied, the levels shall be as Iollows:
- In sidewalks 20 cm below the Iinal level;
- In inter-cities roads 7 cm above the Iinal level;
- In landscaped areas 15 cm above the Iinal level.
The Iinal level is the surIace oI the Iloor, sidewalk or upper line oI an
existing or designed curb. For Ioundations protruding above the Iinal level,
the Iour upper edges oI the Ioundation shall be truncated at an angle oI 45
(20 x 20 mm). The Ioundations oI painted poles (part oI the Ioundation
above ground) shall be painted with the same color as the pole.
e) Installation oI poles
Each anchoring-bolt in poles installed along roads shall receive a nut and a
washer under the Ioundation plate, a washer, a spring-washer and a nut
above the Ioundation plate and an additional nut (Ior securing the upper
nut).
The plate shall be installed so that the upper edge oI the base-plate shall be
5 cm above the Ioundation surIace. The gap between the Ioundation plate
and the Ioundation surIaces shall be Iilled in with lean concrete.
For poles installed on a Ioundation protruding above the Iinal level, a 1.5
mm thick galvanized sheet metal apron shall be set in order to cover the gap
between the Ioundation plate and the Ioundation.
The apron shall be Iastened by means oI two bolts Ior sheet metal and
covered with bitumen.
In painted poles, the apron shall also be painted in the color oI the pole.
The poles shall be installed so that the Iront oI the opening's door shall be
perpendicular to the traveling route.
080522 Steel trusses poles
Poles consisting oI steel angles and channels shall be assembled and installed
according to the Drawings and the IEC SpeciIications. The type oI pole shall be
as required in the Drawings and Contract Documents.
a) Steel Sections angle poles and their extensions shall be made oI steel
angles oI the Iollowing dimensions: 60/70, 70/80, 80/90, 90/110,
120/130 and 140/150 mm.
Channel poles and their extensions shall be made oI U-shaped sections oI
the Iollowing dimensions: 100, 140, 180 and 220 mm.
The sections and poles shall stand up to the requirements oI Standard EN
10056, Part 1.
08 (2001)
63
b) The Length oI the Poles section poles, including their extensions
shall have lengths oI 12, 13, 14, 15 and 16 m. Poles above 12 m shall
be with extensions.
Channels poles including their extensions shall have heights oI 8.5, 10, 12,
13, 14, 15 and 16 m. Poles above 12 m shall be with extensions.
The type oI steel shall be ST52-3 or RST37-2, according to Standard DIN
17100.
The chemical composition oI the steel shall suit the galvanization process.
c) Prevention oI Climbing and Warning Boards all the poles shall be
equipped with means to prevent climbing on them and with boards
warning against such climbing, that shall be Iastened by means oI
bolts.
d) Galvanization and Coating oI Poles galvanization shall be perIormed
as stated in paragraph 080503 above and according to additional
requirements oI the IEC.
e) Foundations Ior Steel Poles steel poles shall be erected on concrete
Ioundations with the lower part oI the pole being inserted into the
concrete. The Ioundations shall be executed as stated above in
relationship to steel poles in paragraph 080521. The dimensions oI the
Ioundations shall be as required in the IEC SpeciIication.
08053 Aluminum Poles
080531 The structure oI the Pole
Aluminum poles shall be oI the type approved Ior lighting streets, according to
British Standard BS-5649 (BSEN 40).
The pole shall have a conical shape and a round cross-section. The minimum
wall thickness shall be 4-5 mm, depending on the height oI the pole. The pole
shall consist oI one single unit without connections, joints nor welds. Pole with
diIIerent shapes shall be according to the Special SpeciIication. The tolerances,
marking and other physical requirements shall be identical to the requirements oI
SI 812. The accessories opening and the compartment shall be as described in
080532 The base oI the pole
The base oI the pole shall be oI one oI the Iollowing types, as indicated in one oI
a) Cast aluminum type the base shall include an aluminum base plate
rounded oII at its edges with holes Ior the Ioundation bolts, one central
hole Ior the passage oI cables; it shall be surmounted by a cone
reinIorced with ribs.
The base shall be executed as one single piece and connected to the concrete
base by means oI Ioundation bolts.
08 (2001)
64
b) Steel base the base shall include a steel base plate on the top oI
which, at its center, shall be installed a pipe detailed on its outer side in
such a way as to perIectly Iit the inner side oI the lighting pole and
provide Iull tightness. The ready-made base shall be galvanized. The
galvanization shall comply with the requirements oI SI 812. The
connection oI the pole to the base shall consist oI epoxy glue and an
attachment by means oI bolts or metal wedges, at least. The bolts or
the wedges shall be coated with epoxy prior to the execution oI the
connection.
c) Root base the lower part oI the pole shall serve as base and it shall be
inserted into a hole in the Ioundation. The part inserted into the hole
and additional 20 cm above it shall be made corrosion-prooI by one oI
the Iollowing systems and as indicated in one oI the Contract
Documents:
1. Asphalt protective coating;
2. PVC tapes wrappings;
3. Polyethylene tapes wrappings;
4. Bitumen layer coating;
5. Bitumen layer on which glass-Iiber Ielt is sunk and then
covered by an additional layer oI bitumen;
6. Any other method approved by the COR.
d) Breakable base an aluminum base manuIactured by a low pressure
casting.
080533 Finishing oI the pole and the base
The Iinish oI the aluminum poles shall be according to one oI the Iollowing
ways:
a) Natural state, without scratches nor grooves, smooth and covered by
one layer oI silicone material;
b) Anodization at least 20 micrometer thick;
c) Painting according to a special speciIication.
The aluminum base shall be coated with a bitumen layer, in addition to whatever
is stated above.
Unless otherwise stated, the Iinish shall consist oI alternative b) above.
080534 Foundations
The Ioundations shall be as Ior the steel poles in paragraph 080521 above.
08 (2001)
65
08054 Concrete Poles
080541 Quality oI the pole
The poles shall be conical, made oI RC oI the type produced Ior the IEC. The
manuIacturing process shall be by the centriIugal method, according to IEC
speciIications. All the concrete components shall be according to IEC
requirements.
080542 Dimensions oI the poles
The diameter oI the poles heads and bases shall be as detailed hereinaIter:
Table No. 1
Length
oI the
pole (in
meters)
8.5 9.0 10 12 13 14
Diameter
(in mm)
oI the
pole's
head
120 120 150 150 150 150
Diameter
(in mm)
oI the
pole's
base
248 255 300 330 345 360

IEC
Drawing
No.

220

227

222

223

224

224

225

080543 The Ioundation oI the pole
The depth oI the erection oI the pole into all types oI ground, shall be as
indicated in the Drawings but not less than 1.5 m. The pole shall be supported all
around and along all its depth in the ground, as indicated in the Drawings and the
other Contract Documents.
08055 Arms, Festive Lighting and Flags Holders
080551 Steel arms
The arms oI steel poles shall consist oI hot-dip zinc galvanized steel piles and
stand up to the requirements oI SI 812. The galvanization shall be executed
Iollowing the completion oI the welds.
The arms shall be made oI pipes with a diameter enabling the passage oI cables
and Iitting the Iorces acting upon them. Unless otherwise indicated, the minimal
diameter oI the pipe shall be 2". The bending oI the pipes shall be machine-made
08 (2001)
66
in a solid state. The bent area shall be smooth and no change in its section shall
be allowed there. The arms shall penetrate the pole to a depth oI 50 cm at least
(except Ior poles up to 5 m height Ior which the above dimension shall be
indicated in the Special SpeciIication) and Iastened by means oI bolts.
The extremity oI the arm shall be clean oI shavings and end up with a transition
Iitting the attachment oI a lantern
A ring and a cap Iorming an integral part oI the arm shall prevent Iurther sliding
into the pole and prevent inIiltration oI water or moisture. Unless otherwise
indicated, the horizontal part oI the arm shall be 80 cm long and at 10 above the
horizon.
The angles between the arms and a number oI lamps shall be as indicated in one
oI the Contract Documents.
The arms oI painted poles shall be painted similarly to the poles.
080552 Steel arms on network poles
The arms shall be as detailed in paragraph 080551 above.
In the course oI production oI the arms, two 30/30/3 angles shall be welded
into them. The Iastening oI the arm to the pole shall consist oI two bars with
diameter oI at least 10 mm, with threading heads and include tightening by
means oI spring-washed and double nuts.
No bolts oI any kind shall be inserted into wooden poles.
The installation oI arms on IEC poles shall be coordinated with the IEC.
080553 Aluminum arms
The arms oI aluminum poles shall consist oI anodized aluminum pipes. The
extremity oI the pipe shall be clean oI shavings and end up with a transition
appropriate Ior the attachment oI a lantern. The Iinish oI the arms shall be
identical to that oI the pole, as stated in paragraph 080533 above.
080554 Festive lighting
Sockets Ior Iestive lighting shall be installed on the lighting poles, upon a request
in the Contract Documents. The sockets shall be Ior 16A, three-pins, with IP54
protection level. The sockets shall be recessed into the pole with minimal
protrusion outwards. The installation shall be carried out at the height indicated
in the drawing but at not less than 4 m above ground level, into an appropriate
opening, parallel to the road axis. The socket shall be connected to an automatic
switch in the accessories compartment by means oI a separate cable oI the N2XY
type, 3 x 2.5 sq.mm section.
080555 Flag-holders
Flag-holders shall be installed on poles, upon a request in the Contract
Documents. The holders shall be installed at the height indicated in the Drawings
but at no less than 4 m above ground level. The Ilag-holder shall consist oI two
1/" dia. water pipes, at an angle oI 30 to the pole's axis. The pipes shall be
08 (2001)
67
welded to a sheet metal clamp 35 x 3 mm. The clamp shall be Iastened to the
pole by pressure only with two 1/2" bolts. The length oI the clamp and its shape
shall Iit the perimeter oI the pole.
All the parts oI the Ilag-holder shall be galvanized. The galvanization shall be
perIormed Iollowing the completion oI the welds. Flag-holders on aluminum
poles shall be made oI aluminum, including the clamp and the pipes.
Unless otherwise stated in one oI the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall
paint the Ilag-holders with a paint system similar to the system used Ior the poles.
08056 Earthings in Overhead Networks and Earthing Surfaces
a) All the steel plates shall be earthed, the concrete Ioundation oI the pole
serving as earthing electrode.
The earthing wire attached to a shackle insulator shall be earthed into the
pole's body;
b) Earthing surIaces shall consist oI 50 sq.mm twisted copper conductors,
buried into the ground at a depth oI 50 cm.
The conductor shall be padded with two layers oI sand 5 cm thick, one
under it and one above it. The conductor shall be installed inside a closed
ring at a distance oI 100 cm Irom the pole's perimeter. The earthing surIace
ring shall be connected to an earthing bolt in the pole by means oI a
conductor, as detailed above.
All the poles with earthing surIaces shall carry a notice-board additionally
to whatever is stated in paragraph 080505 above, with the indication
"earthing surIace."
c) Concrete poles, carrying a line-breaker or an automatic switch, shall be
earthed through the metal core oI the pole, equipped with two 1/2"
earthing nuts, welded to this core and recessed into the upper and
lower parts oI the pole.
The earthing wire, attached to the shackle insulator, shall be connected to
insulators arms, the upper nut and the body oI the equipment mounted on
the pole;
d) Wooden poles carrying line-breakers or automatic switches shall be
earthed into the earthing surIace around the pole;
e) Earthing wire attached to shackle insulators shall be connected to
insulators arms, the body oI the equipment mounted on the pole and
the earthing surIace that shall serve them as earthing electrodes. The
connection Irom the wire to the surIace shall consist oI a 16 sq.mm
copper conductor, protected all along its length by a 24 mm dia. rigid
plastic pipe;
I) Whenever an earthing electrode Ior the pole shall be needed, it shall be
perIormed as detailed in paragraph 080412 and 080432 above and
connected as detailed in paragraph 08056 c).
08 (2001)
68
Should the said pole also carry an earthing surIace, the conductor Irom
which is made the surIace shall be bridged to the electrode inside the
inspection hole.
08057 Insulators
080570 General
The insulated, supports, etc. shall Iit the requirements oI SI 345, 346, 347, 348,
349, 350, 351, 352, 353, 354 and 355.
080571 Types oI insulators
The insulators shall be made oI glazed porcelain or oI special pyrex glass. For the
network poles, the insulators shall be oI the ball type or shackle type. For
terminal-poles or sharp corner poles (over 150), the insulators shall be oI the
shackle type only and installed on arms. The insulator shall Iit the area oI the
wires cross-sections, according to IEC table, but the diameter shall not be less
than 80 mm.
080572 The connection oI the insulators
The connection oI the insulators to the arms shall be achieved only by means oI
bolted supports. The connection oI the arm to the pole shall be achieved in such a
way as not to impair the integrity oI the pole but also as to ensure a stable
connection. The connection oI the arm shall prevent its rotation as a result oI the
stressing oI the wires.
080573 Supports in wooden poles
The attachment oI the support in a wooden pole shall be made only inside a pre-
bored hole, having a diameter equal to the inner diameter oI the support's thread.
Special attention shall be given Ior the prevention oI cracks in the pole in the
course oI the threading oI the support. Following the threading operation, the
support and the connection location shall be painted with asphaltic paint, so as to
prevent inIiltration oI moisture between the support and the pole.
080574 Arms Ior the supports
For the attachment oI an arm to a support oI a concrete pole, it shall be allowed
to use only holes pre-Iormed during the production oI the pole. No hole shall be
drilled in a concrete pole. Should there be no appropriate holes, it shall only be
allowed to use clamps surrounding the pole, without impairing its integrity.
08058 Wires and their Tightening
080580 General
In corner poles, the wire shall be attached to the insulator so that the insulator
shall serve as a support Ior the stressing oI the wire, meaning that the insulator
shall be set into the angle Iormed by the wire. Aluminum wires shall be wrapped
beIore the attachment with an aluminum tape 10 x 1 mm. The length oI the
wrapping and oI the attachment wires shall be in accordance with IEC tables.
Maximal stressing at a temperature oI -5C shall be 10 kg/sq.mm Ior copper
wires and 4 kg/sq.mm Ior aluminum wires.
08 (2001)
69
080581 Attachment to terminal-insulator
The attachments oI terminal insulating wires shall be made in loops around the
insulator's neck. The loop shall be Iastened by means oI special clamps, nailed or
having a conical closure. The use oI threaded clamps shall be allowed, provided
they are destined Ior installation at the extremity oI a line.
080582 The connection oI wires extremities
Connections between two extremities oI a stressed wire shall be achieved only by
means oI special clamps, nailed or with having a conical closure. The connection
oI aluminum wires shall be achieved only by means oI an appropriate small pipe.
080583 The connection oI copper wires to aluminum
In the connection oI copper wires to aluminum, adequate clamps shall be used.
The aluminum wire shall always be above the copper wire. For the connection oI
a Ieeding cable to lamps, the use oI a universal clamp with transition washer shall
be allowed.
080584 Branching oII Irom an overhead line
The attachment oI branching wires Irom an overhead line shall only be by means
oI threaded clamps. The clamps bolts shall be equipped with an additional
counter-nut. The clamp shall be wrapped up with a double-ply plastic tape. The
wire linking to the line shall be bent to an omega shape with a radius large
enough to provide the wire with Ireedom Irom stresses created by shocks in the
net wires.
080585 Overhead cables
Overhead cables shall be installed according to the details in paragraph 08037
above.
080586 Insulated aerial cables
The network's components shall stand up to the requirements oI SI 1740.
Networks oI insulated aerial cables shall be executed according to IEC
speciIications and the directives oI the ManuIacturer.
08059 Anchors
080591 The anchor and its attachment
The surIace oI the cross-section oI the anchor shall Iit the indications oI the
Drawings or oI one oI the Contract Documents.
The anchor shall be attached to the pole in such a way so as to prevent sliding
under the inIluence oI Iorces. The attachment shall be stable and durable,
identical in its strength to the strength oI the anchor and besides this, it shall not
impair the integrity oI the pole at the connection place.
In those anchors in which a stressing mechanism shall be installed, this
mechanism shall be installed in the part oI the anchor Iound between the
separating insulator and the ground, close to the separating insulator. The angle
08 (2001)
70
oI the anchor with respect to the pole shall be as large as possible, but not less
than 30.
080592 Anchoring into the ground
The anchoring into the ground shall be by means oI an at least 2 m long
galvanized hook out oI which 1.5 m shall be in the ground and which is attached
to a sill. The diameter oI the hook shall be 20 mm at least. Around the sill, stones
shall be arranged and the soil well compacted.
The anchoring into rock shall be achieved by means oI a hook as above that shall
penetrate a hole drilled into the rock and be well concreted.
080593 Double anchor
Double anchors shall be attached to one single anchoring hook. The attachment
shall be by means oI a triangle Ior equilibrating the stresses oI the two anchoring
wires. The triangle shall be made oI steel plates at least 6 mm thick. The plates
and bolts shall be galvanized.
080594 Supporting poles
Supporting poles shall be oI the same type as the pole they are supporting. In
wooden poles, the connection between the supporting pole and the supported
pole shall have the shape oI a cut corner in the supported pole, in which it shall
rest on the supporting pole, so that Iorces shall pass directly Irom one pole to the
other pole. The attachment mechanism shall be made in such a Iorm so as to
ensure that the supported pole shall not weaken.. Moreover, the attachment shall
be such that it shall not bend as a result oI shocks.
In concrete poles, the supporting pile shall be attached to the supported pole by
means oI a special device meeting the requirements oI the IEC.
The base oI the supporting pole shall be installed on a rigid surIace oI 0.2 sq.m.
080595 Console anchoring
Anchors Ior consoles shall be without any separation insulator and be connected
to the building in a way that shall ensure that rain may not inIiltrate into the
building, neither through the rooI nor through the walls.
The anchoring wire shall be as required in the Regulations regarding anchoring
wires Ior poles (at least 25 sq.mm).
08 (2001)
71
0806 Switch-Gear and Control-Gear for Low Voltage
08060 General
080600 General
The present Sub-Chapter deals with the products quality, the equipment, the
production method and the installation oI switch-gear and control-gear Ior low
voltage (electrical boards Ior connections and distribution) destined to electricity
supply.
Boards in which the main breaker at their entrance is not larger than 250
amperes, shall stand up to the requirements oI SII 372.
Boards above 250 amperes at the entrance shall stand up to the requirements oI
SI 1419, Part 1 and shall be manuIactured in the Plant oI a ManuIacturer
authorized by the Israeli Standards Institute according to Standard Approval 22
Electricity Board Ior Low Voltage: Requirements Irom the Quality System.
080601 Workshop drawings oI the boards
The boards shall be built according to the connections scheme, the shape oI the
building and the general dimensions in the Drawings. Should a drawing be
submitted to the Contractor showing the Iorm oI the board and the layout oI the
equipment it shall contain, this drawing shall be in principle only, but it is hereby
stressed that all the dimensions in it are the allowable maximum and that they
may not be enlarged. For additional requirements regarding the design oI the
board, see paragraph 08602 below.
The Contractor shall check, measure and Iind out prior to the design oI the board,
the place reserved Ior its installation, its transIer method and its insertion at its
proper place. For that purpose, the Contractor shall measure the recesses that
were prepared on the Site.
The Contractor shall prepare detailed drawings oI the boards that shall include
the Iollowing: distribution, binding external dimensions oI each board, structure,
details oI Iront, the number and dimensions oI the equipment with indication oI
their production. Besides the above, the Contractor shall prepare a single-line
scheme Ior the distribution oI the current and control drawings. In the scheme
and the drawings, the equipment, wiring and the clamps oI the wiring shall be
indicated by the method Iitting the marking system oI the clamps.
The marking shall be done according to Standard IEC 61082.
The above drawings shall be submitted to the COR's approval prior to the start oI
production and only Iollowing the issue oI the approbation, shall the Contractor
be allowed to start the production oI the board. With respect to lighting central
boards, see paragraph 08661 below.
080602 Inspection oI the boards
Upon completion oI the boards production, the Contractor shall invite the COR
to the Plant Ior the inspection oI the board. For boards with control systems
and/or controllers, the test shall also include a simulation oI the systems. Only
08 (2001)
72
Iollowing the issue oI an approbation by the COR, shall the Contractor be
allowed to transIer the boards to the Site.
080603 Thermographic scanning
The scanning shall be perIormed by technicians having received appropriate
training Ior the execution oI such scanning. The scanning shall be perIormed by
means oI a thermal simulation tool, which supplies a color image with the heat
diIIerences oI the tested elements.
For the perIormance oI the scanning, the maximum number oI consumers shall
be put on, during at least one hour. The results oI the scanning shall be submitted
as a computerized report in which the deIective parts detected in the course oI the
scanning shall be indicated together with their precise location, the type oI the
deIect and recommendations Ior correcting it.
In boards oI 250 amperes and above, the Contractor shall perIorm a
thermographic scanning aIter the activation and one additional scanning at the
end oI the warranty year.
According to the results oI the scanning, the Contractor shall perIorm, should it
be needed, reinIorcements in the board. Following that, the Contractor shall
perIorm an additional scanning and this until an acceptable image shall be
obtained.
08061 Preparations for the IEC
The Contractor shall perIorm Ior the IEC preparation works destined Ior the
entrance, the protection and meters system. The Contractor shall coordinate the
execution oI these works with the IEC.
The Contractor shall be responsible Ior coordination with the IEC Ior the
insertion oI the Ieeding cable into the main board- entrance by means oI cables
Irom below or entrance Irom the wall by means oI bus-bars.
08062 The Design of the Boards
080621 Environmental conditions and prevention oI heating
The board shall be Iitted to environment conditions as detailed in the Special
SpeciIication and be calculated Ior maximal environment temperature oI 45C
and average during 24 hours oI 40C, as well as Ior relative humidity oI 95.
The rise oI temperature in the board under maximum load condition shall not
exceed the level allowed Ior the normal operation oI the equipment installed
within the board.
According to a request in the Special SpeciIication, the Contractor shall submit
calculations oI the produced heat exhaust, in watts, in the course oI Iull use oI the
board.
080622 Loading coeIIicient
The board shall be designed according to a loading coeIIicient 1, in accordance
to the size oI the main circuit-breaker.
08 (2001)
73
080623 Level oI protection
The board shall have a protection level (IP) as detailed in the Special
SpeciIication, but not less than IP30. Unless otherwise required, the protection
level oI boards with bus-bars oI over 3000A shall be IP32.
080624 Spare space
Each board shall be designed so as to enable the installation oI additional
equipment by at least 30 oI the installed one.
080625 Compartment Ior drawings
A compartment Ior keeping drawings shall be included in the design oI the board,
installed on the inner side oI one oI its doors or on a side wall oI the board, or at
a place determined by the COR. The compartment shall be metallic or oI rigid
plastic material.
080626 Wiring ducts
The wiring ducts within the board shall be designed so as to provide Iree access
to them, also aIter the completion oI the board and its installation.
080627 Boards sections
Unless otherwise stated in one oI the Contract Documents, the length oI each
board section shall not exceed 1.6 m (Ior the needs oI the transportation).
08063 The Structure of a Sheet Metal Board
080630 General
All the sheet metal components in the board shall consist oI hot-dip galvanized
steel sheets.
Unless otherwise speciIied, the thickness oI the sheet Ior the Irame and structure
shall be 2.5 mm and Ior the doors and Ior the cover, 2 mm.
For industrialized boards in serial production, it shall be allowed to use hot-zinc
galvanized steel sheets having minimal thickness as Iollows:
- Raising Irames 3 mm;
- Frames (structure) 2.5 mm;
- Doors 1.5 mm;
- Covers on all sides 1.5 mm.
The boards shall be composed oI Iields or compartments in the numbers required,
connected between them in a mechanical way. Each compartment or Iield shall
be made oI shaped steel sections and Ilat steel (grooved, iI need be) Ior the
Iastening oI the boards' equipment and oI all its parts. Besides this, all the
openings in the board, Ior the inlet or outlet oI Ieeding and control cables shall be
reinIorced by means oI appropriate steel sections.
08 (2001)
74
080631 The board's structure
The boards shall be built in the shape oI cabinets to be erected on the Iloor with a
sheet metal base or in the shape oI cases to be hung on the wall, all according to
the Drawings and the other Contract Documents. The cabinets shall be installed
on steel Irames and be Iit to transport on the roads, by usual transportation
means.
The boards shall be brought to the Site in separate parts, as may be needed and as
detailed in paragraph 080627 above. Following the installation oI the board in its
place, the Contractor shall connect all the bars and control connections between
the various parts oI the board.
The board shall be constructed with walls on its sides, upper cover sheets, cover
sheets or doors in the back and cover sheets or doors in the Iront, all according to
the Drawings or the other Contract Documents, as well as the COR's
requirements.
Boards meant to be hung on the wall shall consist oI lower cover sheet metal that
may be removed and they shall be equipped with hanging and Iastening means.
All the inlet openings Ior the cables shall be padded with shaped rubber or any
other material approved by the COR. Alternatively, 5 mm thick rubber sealers
shall be prepared, through which the lines shall be inserted into the board, or
industrialized Iittings appropriate Ior the insertion oI the cables.
Should a separation between the compartments be required, it shall be executed
as deIined in the Special SpeciIication. For boards with bus-bars over 3000A, the
separation between the compartments shall be carried out, even iI not speciIically
required.
080632 Details oI the structure
The cabinets shall include bus-bars, insulators, wiring, notice-plates, inlet and
outlet clamps Ior the various Iields composing the board, according to the
directives in the connections schemes and in the basic drawing. The cabinets
shall be built so that all the parts being under voltage shall be protected Irom
accidental contact, even when the doors are open and the board connected.
Shields made oI insulating material shall be installed on the exposed parts.
There shall be a comIortable access to all the instruments and equipment installed
in the Iields or the compartments. In special cases, and upon request, the boards
shall be built in a way that shall guarantee the possibility to deal with each
instrument, without having to stop the operation or to dismantle other
instruments.
080633 Doors and covers
All the doors shall be equipped with locks having the shape oI handles, installed
in a permanent way, so that there shall be no need Ior special keys Ior the doors.
Each column in the board shall have a separate door to the clamps department, to
the lower part and to the equipment. The locking oI the board shall be done
Iollowing a request in the Special SpeciIication.
Each backdoor shall be on hinges opening to 180.
08 (2001)
75
Should the Iront oI the board be built as panels, the access shall be separate Ior
each panel.
The panel shall be removed by the opening oI at least Iour screws and Iour spring
closers. Panels with width oI up to 20 cm may have two spring closers only. For
each panel, there shall be two handles or two holding-buttons.
080634 Coupling Handles
For opening a door or a panel, there shall be no need to dismantle any Iitting
whatsoever nor the handle oI a breaker. Coupling handles shall be installed Ior
that purpose.
080635 Preparations Ior Iire-Iighting systems
For each board with a main 3 x 63A circuit-breaker, preparations Ior the
automatic Iire-Iighting system by means oI gas shall be perIormed; these
preparations shall include the Iollowing:
a) A removable panel, at the back oI the board, Ior the installation oI a
sensor. The opening's dimensions shall be 100 x 100 mm. There shall
be at least one panel in each compartment and at least two panels in
each board.
b) A bore in the back oI each compartment oI the board, Ior a gas
spreading nozzle. The bore shall have the required diameter, in
accordance with the directives oI the Iire-Iighting installation
Contractor.
080636 Earthing oI the board's structure
In each Iield oI the board, an earthing bolt shall be welded. The bolt shall be
connected to an earthing's rail in the board by means oI an insulated twisted
earthing conductor (green-yellow), oI 10 sq.mm section. To each door in the
board an earthing bolt shall be welded and the door connected to the structure by
means oI a conductor, as detailed above.
080637 Painting metallic boards
The painting oI the boards shall be industrialized, by the electro-static method
with polyester epoxy powder, on the inner and outer Iaces. The color oI the Iinal
paint shall be as detailed in the Special SpeciIication.
Should another type oI paint be required, it shall be executed as required in the
08064 Structure of Board Consisting of Plastic Boxes
080640 General
The boards shall be constructed with plastic boxes having transparent selI-
extinguishing polycarbonate lids. The boxes shall stand up to the double
insulation and heating prevention requirements. The details oI the structure shall
be as speciIied in paragraph 08063 above.
08 (2001)
76
080641 The structure oI the board
The boards shall be built so as to stand on the Iloor on a sheet metal or Iiberglass
base, or in the shape oI boxes to be hung on the wall, according to the
requirements oI the Drawings and the Special SpeciIication.
Should the boxes comprise breakable openings, they shall be mechanically
protected.
Micro circuit-breakers (M.C.B.) shall be installed vertically (the handle shall be
operated downwards), unless the COR approved it otherwise.
080642 Doors and covers
The access to the automatic switches and the various accessories shall be through
hinged transparent doors. The doors shall be made oI the same material as the
covers.
Covers on which electrical equipment shall be mounted shall be hinged. All the
switches shall be operated Irom the Iront oI the board. Handles installed on a
board cover shall be coupling handles.
080643 Clamps and Inlet Compartment
Above each board and close to it, a box shall be installed in which shall be
concentrated all the clamps Ior the inlet and outlet clamps. The box shall be oI
selI-extinguishing plastic material with double insulation and stand up to the
requirements oI SII 165 Boxes Ior Connection Boards oI Electricity
Installations; Boards made oI plastic material.
080644 Structure oI boards made oI modular plastic boxes and oI apartment board
Should it be so required, the board shall be constructed oI modular plastic boxes
made oI selI-extinguishing plastic material. The boxes shall stand up to the
requirements oI SII 165.
The structure oI a board in a household apartment shall consist oI a modular box
with door. The structure shall Iit 24 single-phase switches, at least.
The board in a household apartment that shall also include a bus-bar and zeroing
clamp, shall Iit 24 single-phase switches at least and include a partition Ior the
lower module that shall comprise the bar and the clamp.
Unless otherwise speciIied the board shall be recessed into the wall. The
structure shall Iit a recessed installation in the wall.
08065 Structure of reinforced polyester board
The structure is meant to be used outdoor and be composed oI cabinets made oI
polyester reinIorced with glass Iibers, with dimensions as per DIN 43629.
The cabinets shall stand up the outdoors physical conditions as deIined in IEC
60947 with waterprooIing level oI IP 43 at least and be made oI selI-
extinguishing material oI level VO in Standard UL 94.
08 (2001)
77
Should a ventilation shutter be needed Ior the cabinet, the shutter shall be
manuIactured so as not impair the general protection oI the cabinet.
The cabinet door closing system shall have three bolts with multi-bolt or
cylindrical lock, as deIined in the Special SpeciIication.
Unless otherwise speciIied the lock shall be cylindrical.
08066 Street Lighting Central Board
080660 General
The central board Ior the lighting shall be executed according to the details above
and the additions speciIied below.
080661 Shop drawings
Besides whatever is stated in paragraph 080601:
For central boards including also the IEC Iield, approval by the IEC oI the
drawings shall be obtained.
Central boards handed over to the maintenance and operation oI a local Authority
or any other Authority (such as the PWD), the drawings shall have to be
approved by the Authority.
080662 The structure oI the central switchboard
The central switchboard shall be made oI at least 2 mm thick sheet metal cabinet,
galvanized and painted or oI reinIorced polyester cabinets as speciIied in the
Contract Documents. Whenever the central switchboard shall consist oI a sheet
metal cabinet, an awning shall be installed over it.
The electrical equipment in the central switchboard shall be installed in the
panels or in transparent plastic boxes. In sheet metal cabinets with equipment in
the panels, a heating body shall be installed, operated by means oI a thermostat
and a humidity-meter, with capacity Iitting the volume oI the board.
All the cables inlets shall be Irom the bottom. Inlets to the central switchboard
installed on a pole shall be by means oI glands waterprooIed to grade IP54.
The cabinet oI a central switchboard installed on a pole shall be equipped with
appropriate hanging means, to be approved by the COR.
080663 Short-circuits
Unless otherwise stated in one oI the Contract Documents, all the equipment and
the central switchboards shall stand up to short-circuits oI at least 10,000
amperes, in compliance to the requirements oI Standard IEC 60898.
080664 Signage
Besides whatever is stated in paragraph 08682 below, the doors oI the central
switch-board shall carry, on the outside, notice panels with standard warning
signs (lightning arrow)
08 (2001)
78
080665 Central Switch-board Base.
a) Sheet metal cabinet central switchboard it shall be installed on a
concrete Ioundation, as per the drawings. The Ioundation shall be made
oI B-20 concrete cast into a Iorm.
Passages Ior the cables made oI worm-type pipes shall be set into the
Ioundation. There shall be at least Iive passages with diameter oI 110 mm.
Unless otherwise stated, the Ioundation shall be buried at a depth oI 30 cm
at least under the Iinal ground level and protrude by at least 20 cm above the
Iinal ground level. The Iinish oI the Ioundation shall be smooth and leveled,
the Iour upper edges oI the Ioundation shall be truncated at 45 (20 x 20
mm).
The base Irame shall be installed prior to the casting
The Irame shall be made oI angles with bolts welded to the cabinet
reinIorcement and with anchors welded to the attachment oI the Irame to the
concrete. The Irame shall be horizontal.
b) ReinIorced polyester cabinet central switchboard it shall be installed
on a concrete Ioundation as detailed in paragraph a) above or as an
original reinIorced polyester base that shall be anchored into the
ground, as detailed in the Drawings and the Contract Documents.
Unless otherwise speciIied, the base shall be oI reinIorced polyester.
c) Work surIace at the Iront oI the central switchboard and all along its
length, there shall be a horizontal work surIace one meter wide. The
surIace shall be made oI 15 cm thick concrete or oI asphalt or oI
interlocking stones.
08067 Bus-bars and Wiring
080671 Bus-bars
Bus-bars Ior 3 phases, neutral and earthing shall consist oI electrolytic copper
with relative conductivity oI 99.8. The bus-bars shall be arranged into the
board as indicated in the Contract Documents.
The attachment oI the bus-bars shall be by means oI screws made oI steel coated
against corrosion with appropriate washers.
At the edges oI the board a comIortable arrangement Ior connection with the bus-
bars shall be prepared, so as to enable the installation oI bridges, should an
additional Iield be constructed in the board.
The section oI the bus-bar shall comply with the requirements oI DIN 43671, in
the table oI the various bus-bars. This requirement applies also to the base oI
coated, painted or insulated bus-bars.
Bus-bars above 1,000 amperes in main boards and above 2,000 amperes in
secondary boards, shall be insulated along their whole length by means oI
shrinking sleeves.
08 (2001)
79
The painting oI bus-bars shall be perIormed upon request and according to the
details oI the Special SpeciIication.
Bus-bars (phases and neutral) shall be un-accessible.
080672 Earthing and neutral bars
a) The earthing bar shall be set at the lower part oI the board (unless
otherwise speciIied) and attached in a stable way to the board body
with tight electrical contact.
The bar shall be installed all along the length oI the board.
Two brass bolts 5/8" diameter shall be installed on each earthing bar, Ior the
earthing oI the board itselI; there shall also be a direct connection between
each switch and instrument to the earthing bar. The earthing bar shall be
equipped with a separate bolt Ior each circuit with another 30 oI spare
bolts.
The section oI the earthing bar shall be at least 50 oI the phase bus-bar
section.
b) The neutral bar shall be installed along the whole length oI the board.
The minimal section oI the neutral bar shall be like that oI the phase
bar. The neutral bar shall be equipped with a separate bolt Ior each
circuit with another 30 oI reserve bolts.
080673 Resistance oI the bus-bars to short-circuits
The bus-bars and the insulators shall be calculated Ior mechanical resistance
(against developing dynamic Iorces) and thermal resistance in case oI a
symmetrical short-circuit current expected to last 3 seconds, without being
impaired. All the bus-bars system shall be calculated and installed so that it shall
not enter into resonance. The minimal distances between the various phases
themselves as well as between the phases and the body, shall prevent voltage
eruption in the air between the various parts or creepage along the insulators
whenever there shall be an interruption oI current due to a short-circuit.
The bus-bars shall be installed within support insulators and transition insulators,
so that they shall resist the dynamic Iorces developing in the symmetrical short-
circuit current, as detailed in the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall have to show that the conIiguration oI the insulators and the
bus-bars has successIully stood up against the short-circuit current detailed in the
tests carried out by a qualiIied laboratory.
The short-circuit currents shall be deIined in the Contract Documents, but be not
less than 10 KA.
080674 Internal wiring
The conductors Iound inside the boards shall be insulated with the standardized
identiIication colors according to their Iunctions (naming the phase, the neutral
and the earthing), the central system, the signalization and the systems operating
08 (2001)
80
under tensions diIIerent Irom the 280/400V which shall have conductors with
insulations oI diIIerent colors.
Special attention shall be given so that conductors inside the board shall be
attached in an ordered way, without closeness or unnecessary intersections
between them. The conductors belonging to the same circuit or the same system
shall be attached together or inserted into an appropriate wiring plastic duct. The
conductors set into the wiring duct shall be Ilexible conductors, unless otherwise
speciIied.
In such places where there shall be Iive or above conductors, they shall be set
into grooved plastic wiring ducts. The volume oI the ducts shall enable the
eventual addition oI 30 oI the number oI conductors.
Wiring inside boards Ior currents over 125 amperes shall be with Ilexible and
insulated bus-bars.
The extremities oI twisted conductors shall be equipped with squeezable cable-
shoes and insulated by means oI sleeves. Conductors with sections above 16
sq.mm shall be insulated with heat-shrinked sleeves.
The insulation oI the conductors shall Iit a temperature oI 90 C.
The section oI the conductors shall be at least as required in the Electricity
Regulations "Loading and Protection oI Insulated Conductors and Cables Ior
Voltage under 1,000 A," 1992, according to Table 90.1, with a minimal
correction coeIIicient oI 0.72. The Iollowing table includes the correction
coeIIicient oI 0.72.
Table No. 2
Section
(sq.mm)
1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25
Current
in 3-
phase
circuit
(A)
13 17 24 30 42 57 74
Current
in 1-
phase
circuit
(A)
14 20 26 35 48 63 85

The section oI the conductors (include control conductors) shall not be less than
1.5 sq.mm.
08 (2001)
81
08068 Clamps, Signage, Rails and Protective Cover
080681 Inlet and outlet arrangements
The board shall be equipped with clamps rulers and connection blocks Ior all the
entering and outgoing conductors. The sizes oI the clamps shall Iit the section oI
the conductors, but be not less than a conductor's clamp oI 4 sq.mm. The clamps
shall have diIIerent colors Ior the various systems and voltages and be marked
according to the circuits and the requirements oI the COR.
The clamps shall be insulated Ior a voltage oI 500V oI the modular type Ior
installation on a rail with Iastening by means oI a surIace (pressure on all the
surIace). Punctual-connection clamps may not be used. Each clamp shall be
equipped with an identiIication marking.
The clamps shall have the Iollowing colors:
Phases - Brown or gray
Neutral - Blue
Control - White
Supervision
-
Red
Earthing - Yellow-green.
All the connections to the board shall be by means oI the clamps, unless
otherwise approved by the COR.
The neutral clamps shall Iit conductors with sections similar to that oI the phase
conductor.
Inlets and outlets Irom 630A and above shall be by means oI graded bus-bars.
The inlet and outlet clamps shall be gathered according to the indications oI the
Contract Documents, while the motor control clamps shall be concentrated by
means oI the motor-operation system clamps, each system separately. The
remaining control clamps shall be kept together and located according to the
requirements oI the COR.
The clamps rulers shall be installed in that side which provides easy access and
they shall enable comIortable attachment oI the conductors as well as Iree access
to them, even when the said board or compartment shall be under tension. The
clamps shall also enable Iast identiIication and maintenance. The clamps rulers
shall be installed at a distance oI at least 20 cm under the inlets and outlets,
upwards, or above the inlets and outlets downwards. In each case where the
board is to be used Ior receiving aluminum conductors, it shall be equipped with
devices appropriate to the connection oI these conductors.
Between clamps groups Ior diIIerent tensions or diIIerent uses, insulating
partitions shall be installed. Rail-stoppers shall be installed on both sides oI rail-
mounted clamps groups.
08 (2001)
82
080682 Indication signs
The signage shall be perIormed as Iollows:
a) On each board, a sign-plate shall be Iixed that includes the name oI the
board, its number, the name and number oI the Ieeding board, the
number oI the circuit in the Ieeding board and the size oI the protection
(in amperes), the section and type oI the Ieeding line, as well as the
number oI the Ieeding transIormer (in case the installation shall be Ied
by more than one transIormer).
b) On each compartment oI the board, there shall be a notice plate with
the number oI the compartment.
c) On each panel oI the board, there shall be a notice plate with the
number oI the panel and the compartment.
d) All the electrical components, such as switches, pushbuttons,
protectors, contactors, lamps and measuring instruments, shall carry
identiIication plates on the side oI their operation (in the Iront oI the
board) as well as at the location oI their installation in the board.
e) "Foreign Tension" or "Tension prior to the main circuit-breaker"
warning signs shall be installed at every place where there is a Ioreign
tension or a tension preceding the main circuit-breaker.
I) On the main circuit-breakers on Ieeding bus-bars, on each bar
separately and on the protective cover, warning notices shall be
installed "Warning Tension beIore the main circuit-breaker."
g) All the conductors (phase, neutral, earthing and control) connected to
the board and those inside the board, shall carry notice plates at each
extremity oI the conductor, by means oI marked plastic sleeves.
Markings Ior circuit conductors shall carry the number oI the circuit
and the identiIication oI the phase.
h) All the lines entering the board shall be marked by means oI notice
plates.
The marking plates oI lines shall be installed by means oI ties to the extremity oI
the cable or the pipe. All the plates shall have the same size that shall enable
exchanges between them, should the need Ior it arise.
The marking plates, unless otherwise speciIied, shall consist oI three ply
(sandwich) plastic material on which shall be engraved the text oI the notice that
appears on the drawing with respect to each circuit and instrument or a text that
shall be detailed in a Schedule supplied by the COR. The plates shall be Iixed to
the board by means oI metal nickel-plated screws or oI plastic rivets.
The colors shall be as Iollows:
- Regular Iield: white on black background
- Emergency Iield (generator): white on yellow background
08 (2001)
83
- U.P.S. Iield: white on blue background
- Control: black on white background
- Warning: white on red background.
080683 Protective cover
All the places exposed to tension Iollowing the opening or dismantling oI the
door as well as the bus-bars, connection bars and connection points on the door,
shall be covered with a transparent Perspex cover Iastened by means oI screws.
Each circuit, clamp or other part that remains under tension Iollowing the cut-oII
oI the main breaker (board Ieeding and tension Irom a Ioreign source in the
control system), shall be protected Irom accidental contact and carry a clear and
visible warning notice.
In those boards where there is a transition oI cables, boards oI insulating material
shall be installed, that shall separate the cables between the bus-bars Irom other
live parts.
080684 Rails
The rails shall Iit the requirements oI Standard EN 50022. In spans oI 400 mm
and above between anchoring points, 15 mm deep rails shall be used. Rail-
stoppers shall be installed on both sides oI accessories groups.
08069 Description of the Equipment
080690 General
Equipment in the boards shall Iit a speciIied voltage oI at least 500V (3-phase) or
250V (one phase), unless otherwise speciIied.
All the equipment in the boards shall be oI the Iinger prooI type (protection level
oI IP 20).
080691 Lightning and over-voltage strikes
Should it be so required in the Contract Documents, the boards shall be protected
Irom over-voltage created by lightning strikes.
080692 Switches and automatic switches
Load current breakers and automatic switches shall be oI a type capable to
operate under Iull load. They shall interrupt all the poles simultaneously. The
number oI poles shall be as indicated in the drawing and as required Ior the type
oI disconnected circuit.
The structure oI the contactors and their dimensions shall ensure that the breaker
shall be able to bear the speciIied current Ior an indeIinite length oI time without
the creation oI a temperature exceeding the one allowed by the Standard
according to which the breaker was built.
08 (2001)
84
The operation device shall ensure quick break and make. The handle shall
indicate "interrupted" or "connected."
The interruption and connection situations shall be clearly indicated in a durable
way.
Automatic switches are meant to disconnect automatically an electrical
installation, or part oI it whenever one oI the Iour parameters detailed hereinaIter
shall exceed the value speciIied beIorehand. Contrary to their automatic
breaking-oII operation, their restatement is done manually or by means oI a
motor.
a) The Iollowing is a list oI the Iields protected by the automatic breakers:
1. Over-current
2. Short-circuit current
3. Increase oI the short-circuit currents (by their limitation),
should it be required in the Special SpeciIication
4. Creepage currents, should it be required in the Contract
Documents.
b) Three types oI automatic breakers exist:
1. Automatic breaker in open structure (A.C.B.), 3-phase, with
high capacity and high disconnection capacity (H.R.C.) with
thermal and magnetic adjustable protection;
2. Thermal magnetic automatic breaker (M.C.C.B.), compact
made oI molded case insulating material, 3-phase, with thermal
and magnetic adjustable protection;
3. Automatic breaker with one or more poles, with thermal and
magnetic protection, not adjustable.
c) Additional properties oI the breakers:
1. Automatic breakers oI all the types detailed above shall have
mechanisms that can operate and create interruptions, even iI the
handle is Iorcibly kept in a connected position;
2. The mechanical operation mechanisms shall show clearly and not
ambiguously whether the breaker is connected or disconnected;
3. Automatic breakers, except Ior the very small ones, shall also be
seen in an additional situation indicating that a "trip"-mechanism
is on;
4. Small automatic breakers, 3-phased, with a protective mechanism
which does not interrupt the operation handle (or three small
bridged automatic breakers single phased) shall be equipped with
an integral display indicating the disconnected phase;
08 (2001)
85
5. Load current breakers and automatic breakers (M.C.C.B.) shall be
equipped with original protections oI the breakers ManuIacturer
Ior the inlet and outlet clamps;
6. Automatic circuit-breakers shall enable the installation oI auxiliary
contactors, as may be needed;
7. The thermal and magnetic operation limits oI the automatic
circuit-breaker shall Iit the requirements oI SI 745 and SI 1206, as
applicable.
d) The design oI the board shall deIine the Iollowing data and parameters:
1. ClassiIication oI the breakers according to the three types deIined
above;
2. The "extraction" possibility oI the breaker (should it be needed);
3. The speciIied current;
4. The capability to cut oII symmetric short-circuit current- iI not
otherwise speciIied, in automatic circuit-breakers it shall be Ior 25
KA (I.C.S.) and in the miniature circuit-breaker Ior 6 KA, as per
Standard IEC 60898;
5. Capability to limit short-circuit current (iI required);
6. Protection against creepage currents (iI required);
7. Total interruption time with indication oI required delay (iI
required);
8. Electronic protections (iI required) circuit-breaker Ior currents
over 630A shall be with electronic protections, even iI not
expressly required;
9. Auxiliary Iittings such as: motor, operation coil, work coil,
auxiliary contactors, coupling handle, current use situation
indicator, etc., iI required.
Coupling handles shall be installed at any location required by the SpeciIication
and by the installation conditions, even iI not expressly required.
A couple oI auxiliary contactors (N.C. N.o) shall be installed Ior each switch
and circuit-breaker oI 630A and above, even iI not expressly required.
080693 Protectors disconnectors
A protector disconnector is a system combining into itselI a disconnector and a
system oI protectors with high disconnection power and a spring mechanism
ensuring total insulation Irom accidental contact with live parts even in an open
situation (except Ior micro protectors), a handle Ior pulling out the cover Ior the
interruption oI three phases simultaneously as well as windows in the cover
showing the operation oI the Iuses.
08 (2001)
86
080694 Starters, contactors, auxiliary relays and control accessories
a) Unless otherwise speciIically speciIied in one oI the Contract
Documents, the operational voltage oI the starters coils, the contactors
and the control accessories relays, shall be 230V, 50 Hz. The closure
tension shall be not more than 75 oI the speciIied voltage and the
leaving tension not more than 55 oI the speciIied voltage.
Each starter, contactor and control auxiliary relay shall include a holding
contact and open and/or closed auxiliary contacts in the number required
according to the Contract Documents.
b) An on/oII clock shall be activated by a 230V tension with a reserve oI
72 hours. The clock shall enable disconnection and connection oI a
circuit at predetermined Iixed hours, at intervals oI 1/4 hour. Should
the clock not include a by-pass interrupter, a 1 x 10A additional
interrupter shall be installed Ior the purpose oI enabling interruption
and connection oI the circuit without dependence on the clock.
c) An interrupter oI the current Ior control and lighting shall be built Ior a
nominal voltage oI 250 and a speciIied minimal current oI 10A. In the
lack oI other instructions, the control interrupter shall be oI the
"Packet" type or rotational model and the interrupter Ior the operation
oI the lighting oI a modular type.
d) All the indication lamps shall be oI the LED type.
080695 Creepage current relays (protection interrupters)
Creepage current relays shall be oI type A.
Unless otherwise requested the short circuit current creepage relays shall stand
up to at least 6 KA, according to Standard IEC 60898 and be protected Irom
creepage current oI 30 milliamperes.
080696 Measuring instruments
The measuring instruments Ior measuring eIIective true current (True RMS) shall
be oI a type Iitting the current passing through them. The measuring instruments
shall Iit the measurement oI the value measured within the scale area with the
high sensitivity. However, they shall be able to bear values double oI the nominal
value, Ior a period oI 15 seconds without being damaged in any way.
The current-meters shall be protected Irom damage stemming Irom short-circuits
by one oI the two Iollowing methods or by both oI them together:
a) Current-meter with magnetic stopper at the end oI the scale;
b) Current transIormer being saturated by the short-circuit current.
Should it be so required in the Special SpeciIication, current-meters with real
peak demand shall have two pointers and thermal delay oI 15 minutes.
The measurement instruments shall be recessed into the board.
08 (2001)
87
The measurement instruments shall have an accuracy oI 2.
Other measurement instruments shall be according to requirements in the
Contract Documents.
080697 Capacitors
Capacitors Ior improving the double capacity shall be with low losses (less than
0.5W/ KVAR), with selI-repair, external quick discharge resistance and Ior a
tension oI 440V.
The capacitors shall be protected Irom over-current with high harmonies and Iit
Standards IEC 60831, IEC 60871, IEC 60931. The Iorm oI their installation shall
receive prior approbation oI the COR.
080698 Adaptation oI the equipment
The Contractor shall oIIer only equipment existing in Israel in suIIicient stocks
so as to ensure the supply oI parts. All the equipment proposed by the Contractor
Ior installation in the board, including breakers, measuring instruments, etc., shall
be destined Ior operation under the climatic conditions existing in the area.
080699 Apartment board
The apartment board shall be built into a plastic box, as detailed in above
paragraph 080644 and contain accessories as detailed hereinaIter:
a) Main circuit breaker 1 x 40A Ior single phase connection or 3 x 25A at
least, Ior 3- phase connection;
b) Creepage current 4 x 40A Ior single phase connection or 4 x 25A at
least Ior 3-phase connection. In a single phase connection the three
phase clamps at the inlet to the relay shall be bridged. The board
circuits shall be divided between the phase clamps at the outlet Irom
the relay;
c) 1 x 16A circuit breaker Ior the sockets circuits and electrical water
heaters. The number oI circuit breakers shall be as detailed in the
Contract Documents and as required in the Regulations, but not less
than 5;
d) 1 x 10A circuit breaker Ior the lighting circuits. The number oI circuit
breakers shall be as needed but not less than 2.
08 (2001)
88

0807 Fittings and their Installation
08071 Fittings for Wall Recess Installation
080710 General
This description deals with the quality oI the materials and the execution way oI
the installation oI Iittings into recesses in the walls, according to the Drawings
and the Contract Documents. The description applies to items such as: circuit-
breakers, sockets, outlets to very low voltage systems, bells pushbuttons, etc.
080711 Description oI the Iittings
Fitting made of thermostatic plastic material it shall have a lid in a color as
determined in the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise speciIied, the lids shall
be white. Whenever required speciIically, the lids shall be common to several
Iittings as detailed above.
Fitting made of metal it shall be as required in the Special SpeciIication.
080712 The structure oI an interrupter
The structure oI the interrupter shall ensure prevention oI accidental contact
(level oI protection IP 20) with "live" parts oI the interrupter and be Iit to be
installed into a standard box.
The interrupter shall be equipped with a handle, a pushbutton or any other device
made oI insulating material appropriate to its speciIied voltage, its purpose is to
enable connection or disconnection oI the Ieeding.
A single-phase current breaker Ior use in lighting circuits shall be built Ior a
current oI at least 10A and a tension oI 230V, as required in SI 333.
The conductors on the Ieeding side shall be connected to the Iixed contactors in
the breaker. The mobile contactors shall be connected to the conductors Ieeding
the instrument or the Iitting.
The connection oI the conductors in the breaker shall ensure durable electrical
contact.
The breaker's clamps may not be used as devices Ior connecting branchings,
except Ior lighting breakers, as detailed in the Regulation.
080713 The structure oI a socket and a plug
The structure oI the socket shall ensure prevention oI accidental contact with
"live" parts oI the socket (level oI protection IP 20) and be Iitted to installation
into a standard box.
The structure oI the socket and the plug shall ensure disconnection and
connection oI the instrument and the Iitting by which they are used, on all their
poles.
08 (2001)
89
The sockets shall be built Ior currents oI at least 16A and stand up to the
requirements oI SI 32.
Should sockets Ior various tensions or various types oI current be installed within
the same structure or the same installation, the sockets shall Iit, in their structure,
the various types oI current and voltage, so that there shall be no possibility that a
certain circuit oI instruments meant to be Ied by one type oI current, be
connected to other voltages.
080714 The location oI the Iittings and their installation
In the absence oI the indication in the drawings oI the location oI the Iittings, the
Contractor shall receive Irom the COR, prior to the execution oI the work, Iinal
approbation oI the exact locations (sizes and heights) oI the Iittings. Besides this,
the Contractor shall seek approbation oI the way these Iittings shall be installed,
close or adjacent to one another. Scaled measurements Irom the drawings shall
not be relied upon, without the approval oI the COR.
080715 The installation oI boxes Ior the Iittings
All the boxes Ior the accessories shall be attached to the walls by cement mortar
only and be Ilush with the plastering.
Boxes Ior installations in gypsum walls shall Iit their use.
In such places where there are more than one box and one Iitting in the wall and
iI their installation in "compositions" shall not be requested, they shall be
installed vertically or horizontally according to the instructions oI the COR, at
equal distances.
The boxes shall be equipped with threading means so that the Iitting itselI shall
be directly attached to the box by screws which, Iollowing their tightening shall
prevent the removal oI the Iitting Irom the wall by its pulling out. Other Iastening
means shall need prior approval by the COR and this, provided they stand up to
the above requirement.
In the case oI installation within boxes or Iittings on wood, or another
inIlammable material, a separating layer made oI thermal insulation material
shall be installed between the wood or the inIlammable material and the Iitting.
080716 The height oI installation oI the Iitting
The switches and sockets shall be installed at the level required in the Contract
Documents and according to the Regulations.
In household apartments, unless otherwise speciIied, the installation level (oI the
Iitting's center) above the Iloor shall be as detailed hereinaIter:
- switches: 130 cm;
- heater switch: 170 cm;
- sockets in the rooms: 80 cm;
- sockets Ior washing machine, reIrigerator and oven: 170 cm;
08 (2001)
90
- sockets above working area in the kitchen: 130 cm;
- telephone and TV points: 80 cm;
- pushbuttons in staircases: 100 cm.
Fittings in shelter or protected area rooms shall be installed according to the
requirements in the Regulations applying to these Iittings.
08072 Fittings in Visible Installation
080720 General
All that is required Irom Iittings installed in walls recesses (paragraph 08071
above) shall also apply to Iittings in visible installation, except whatever
concerns the concealed installation itselI.
a) Fitting made of thermostatic plastic material - The inlet to the
Iitting shall be adjusted to the threaded pipe or the cable. Fittings with
open bottoms shall not bet allowed Ior use.
b) Reinforced fittings They shall be built oI cast metal material. The
inlet into the Iitting shall be adjusted to the threaded pipe or the cable.
The housing oI the Iitting shall be equipped with a special earthing screw. The
operation lever shall be made oI insulating material or metallic material. Should
the lever be metallic, it shall be built so that the Iloors oI the earthing connection
between the Iitting's body and the Iitting shall be protected.
In those Iittings where the cables inlet does not have a protective pipe, a "gland"
connector with a sealer shall be installed in order to prevent the introduction oI
Ioreign bodies.
080721 The structure oI a switch protector
The structure oI a switch and protector built into a common box shall be as
detailed hereinaIter: the box shall have locking and mechanical attachment means
preventing the opening oI the box when the switch is "on" and the creation oI an
"on" position when the box shall be open. In those cases where the switch and the
protectors shall be installed in the box in a way not enabling accidental contact
with "live" parts when the box shall be open, it shall be possible to do without the
locking and attachment arrangements detailed above.
08073 Waterproofing the Fittings
Fittings tight against dust and water shall be installed in places indicated in the
drawings. The level oI tightness shall be as indicated in the Special SpeciIication,
in adaptation to SI 981.
08074 The Connection of Motors and Control Elements
In the course oI the connection oI motors and control elements, the Contractor
shall see to it that the phases suit the required rotation direction oI the motor.
Moreover, the Contractor shall perIorm the regulation, calibration and adjustment
oI control elements as oI the electromechanical system.
08 (2001)
91
0808 Luminaires (lamps) and their Fittings, for Indoor and Outdoor
Lighting
08080 General
The term "luminaires" reIers to what is called an "electrical lamp" in SI 20, or
lanterns or lamps and shall be used hereinaIter.
Luminaires Ior indoor and outdoor lighting, including lamps, equipment,
Iinishing Iittings, etc., shall be supplied and installed according to the
requirements oI the Special SpeciIication or oI one oI the other Contract
Documents.
The Contractor shall supply in due time samples oI each type oI luminaires he
wishes to oIIer, as required in above paragraph 08004 and this in order to veriIy
the samples and types oI Iittings and auxiliary equipment.
The Contractor shall not order the luminaires, lamps and auxiliary Iittings beIore
the issue oI the approval oI the COR oI the submitted sample, including with
respect to compliance to requests Ior changes and adjustments.
The approbation oI the COR shall be issued Iollowing the inspection oI the
proposed luminaires, in two stages, as detailed below.
The luminaires shall stand up to the requirements oI SI 20 or Standard IEC
60598.
A catalogue oI the luminaires ManuIacturer, including the Iollowing data, shall
accompany each luminaire:
a) The name oI the ManuIacturer, the catalogue number, the name oI the
model, the description, technical data, the materials, the detailed
structure oI the luminaire's body, the tightness level (IP), the level oI
protection against electrical shocks;
b) Photometric data (light eIIiciency, division curve, light intensity);
c) The name oI the other electrical components manuIacturers (ballasts,
switches, igniter, capacitors) approved by the luminaire's
ManuIacturer, catalogue oI ManuIactures and technical data,
operational temperatures, double capacity coeIIicient, capacity losses,
etc.);
d) For a lamp the name oI the ManuIacturer, the catalogue oI the
ManuIacturer, the type oI lamp, the lamp's capacity, nominal liIetime,
starting light overIlow, eIIiciency, adapted light color, color transIer
coeIIicient, the lamp base.
Every ballast, starterr, switch and capacitor shall be Iitted to the type oI the lamp
and to the supply and be approved by the ManuIacturer oI the lamp or by an
authorized laboratory.
Each outdoor lighting luminaire built oI plastic materials shall be accompanied,
besides whatever is detailed above, by a certiIicate Irom the ManuIacturer that it
08 (2001)
92
shall stand up to the climatic conditions (wind and temperature), to UV and inIra-
red radiations prevailing in the country.
The Contractor shall be responsible Ior the dimensions oI luminaires sunken into
recesses into ceilings, walls and Iloors, including into their sunken boxes
whenever required and he shall check the sizes on Site without just relying on the
drawings.
All the luminaires wiring shall Iit the colors required by the Electrical
Regulations. It shall be allowed to use imported luminaires with conductors
having colors not as required in the Regulations, provided that the extremity oI
each oI its conductors be marked with the colors required in the Electrical
Regulations, by means oI shrinking sleeves.
The Iinal acceptance oI the adjustment oI the proposed equipment to the
requirements oI the Electrical Regulations, Iollowing the approval oI the two
stages, shall remain the privilege oI the COR.
a) First stage oI the approval the proposed luminaires shall be inspected
according to the Iollowing characteristics:
1. Shape characteristics (architectural), concerning the color,
quality oI the materials, external Iinish, dimensions, etc.
2. Function characteristics The Contractor shall submit data
Irom an authorized laboratory including all that is detailed in
the present paragraph. Besides this, the Contractor shall submit
calculations oI the lighting intensity by means oI a computer
having a program Ior the calculation oI the intensity. The
calculation shall be a superposition oI the luminaires
requirements as required in the Contract and oI the proposed
luminaire. The calculation shall be Ior the same points (in luces
and candles per sq.m).
The calculated average intensity oI the proposed luminaire shall not
diIIer by more than +5 oI the calculated lighting intensity oI the
luminaire required in the Contract Documents and this provided that it
shall not be smaller than the requirements oI the Standards.
The calculated punctual lighting intensity may not be diIIer by more
than +10 oI the calculated lighting intensity oI the luminaire required
in the Contract Documents and this provided that it shall not be smaller
than the requirements oI the Standards.
3. Electrical characteristics as detailed in paragraph 08080.
4. Mechanical characteristics as detailed in paragraph 08080.
b) Second stage oI approval.
The approbation oI a luminaire shall be conditional, until the actual measurement
oI the lighting intensity that shall be perIormed on one oI the representing sample
oI the luminaires, approved by the COR. The Iactual average lighting intensity oI
the proposed luminaire, shall not diIIer by more than +10 oI the lighting
08 (2001)
93
intensity oI luminaire required in the Contract Documents and this provided that
it shall not be smaller than the requirements oI the Standards.
The Iactual punctual lighting intensity oI the proposed luminaire may not diIIer
by more than +20 Irom the calculated punctual lighting intensity oI the
luminaire required in the Contract Documents, provided that it shall not be
smaller than the requirements o the Standards.
Should the measurement be achieved beIore the end oI 100 hours oI operation oI
the lamps, the measurement results shall be multiplied by the lighting capacity
Iull coeIIicient oI the lamp aIter 100 hours.
The instruments shall be approved by the COR.
08081 Luminaires for Indoor Lighting
080811 The structure oI the luminaires
The luminaires shall comply with the requirements oI the Contract Documents,
according to the classiIication in SI 20: Level oI protection Irom electrical
shocks, level oI protection Irom water and solids penetration (IP XXX) and
according to the way they shall be installed.
Adjustable luminaires shall be equipped with means Ior Iixing the adjustment.
Luminaires with asymmetrical spread shall comprise locking devices to ensure
that the light adjustment and its spread shall not change during maintenance
operations and replacement oI lamps.
Frames Ior recessed or semi-recessed luminaires in the ceiling shall Iit the
Iinishing material oI the ceiling. Frames and tapes shall be made oI one single
piece or welded so that they shall be strong enough to support the luminaire.
Luminaires sunken into light Ialse ceilings (such as mineral acoustic tiles, sheet
metal trays, etc.) shall be equipped with sheet metal adapters at least 1 mm thick,
with an inner opening having dimensions like those oI the recess opening and
external dimensions larger than those oI luminaire supports.
Luminaires meant to house compact Iluorescent tubes shall have closed ballast
housings and close wiring ducts, unless otherwise speciIied in the Special
SpeciIication.
Lids Ior boxes and accessories compartments shall be connected to the luminaire
by means oI a Ilexible hanger coated with PVC. It shall be allowed to use Ior this
purpose a Ilexible earthing conductor.
No notice plate shall be glued unto a visible surIace, except on the emergency
light luminaire.
080812 Optical systems
All the optical systems that shall comprise integral parts oI luminaires shall be
supplied by the ManuIacturer oI the luminaire as one single assembly, as detailed
in the Contract Documents.
a) Light spreaders (lenses, louvers and reIlectors)
08 (2001)
94
The light spreaders shall have the Iollowing properties:
1. They shall Iit the optical parameters oI the luminaire.
2. They shall be made oI glass or selI-extinguishing thermoplastic
materials standing up to the inIluence oI radiation and
environmental conditions.
3. They shall be Iastened by appropriate means to the luminaire
in a durable way ensuring easy replacement oI the lamp.
4. The Iinish oI the light spreader shall have a reIlecting
coeIIicient oI at least 80. The surIace shall be uniIorm,
without strips, cracks and peelings nor stains and it shall not
Iade under regular conditions oI use.
Louvers in luminaires shall be built so that there shall be no light creepage
between the louver and the luminaire Irame.
Colored Iilters shall be supplied wherever required by the Special
SpeciIication and stand up to the requirements oI SI 20, Part 2.7.
b) Light reIlectors
The light reIlectors shall be made oI 99.9 aluminum, polished with
anodized coating or with any other material approved by the COR. The light
reIlector shall have the shape, dimensions and angle needed Ior receiving
the required light spreading and intensity and this in accordance with the
type oI the lamps installed in the luminaire.
080813 The installation oI indoor luminaires
Luminaires to be installed indoor shall be mounted in the places indicated in the
Drawings or according to the instructions oI the COR. Attention shall be given to
the developments and Iacades, should there be any Ior each sector.
Rows and series oI luminaires shall be straightened along one line, unless
otherwise indicated in the lighting drawings. The closures oI identical luminaires
shall be open-able in the same direction.
All the luminaires in one sector shall be installed with lamps installed in the same
direction.
The Iixation oI luminaires on parts oI the building shall Iit the shape oI the
special devices prepared by the luminaire ManuIacturer and ensure stable and
durable installation, taking into consideration the dead load oI the luminaire with
all its Iittings and equipment. No holes shall be drilled into the luminaire and no
additional reinIorcements welded to the luminaire, without the approval oI the
COR.
Supports shall be made according to details in the Drawings. Should the
Contractor be requested to prepare workshop drawings Ior the execution oI the
supports, he shall submit them to the approval oI the COR. The support shall be
built as Iollows:
08 (2001)
95
a) Luminaires sunken into Ialse ceilings shall be Iastened to structural
elements oI the building.
The attachment oI luminaires to the Ialse ceiling structure shall be only
according to a requirement in the Contract Documents and the details in the
Drawings.
b) Luminaires sunken into light Ialse ceilings shall have, besides the
support, an appropriate adapter, as detailed above.
c) Hanging luminaires shall be directly attached to structural elements.
In the case oI installation oI a luminaire on wood or other inIlammable material,
a separation made oI an at least 1 mm thick selI-extinguishing insulation material
shall be inserted between the luminaire and the inIlammable material.
The Contractor shall take into consideration the need Ior adjustments,
preparations as well as the timing Ior the installation oI the luminaires, according
to the type oI ceiling.
For luminaires sunken into cast ceilings, walls and Iloors, original "housings" oI
the luminaire ManuIacturer shall be prepared, into which all the wiring shall be
led. Should there be no such original housing, a housing having received the
prior approbation oI the COR shall be installed instead.
It shall be made sure that the installation shall be perIormed so that no Iinger
signs, scratches, deIects nor creases oI any sort can be seen on the luminaires.
Gloves shall be used Ior the installation oI optical systems.
The installation oI luminaires shall ensure that no light creepage is created
between the sunken and halI-sunken luminaires Iinish and the ceiling.
All the adjustable luminaires shall be set, centered and closed by the Contractor
under the instructions oI the COR. At the end oI the setting, all the locking means
shall be strongly tightened. All the adjustments shall be made during darkness.
Optical systems and Iinishing items oI all the sunken luminaires shall not be
installed prior to the end oI the whitewashing, painting and general cleaning
operations and shall be dealt with in such a way that shall prevent scratches and
painting signs.
Lamps and switching-on equipment shall be installed in the luminaires as
detailed below.
080814 Lamps Ior indoor lighting
All the luminaires shall be equipped with the appropriate lamps according to the
requirements oI the Special SpeciIication and the Drawings. All the lamps in the
same space shall have the same color, unless otherwise required in one oI the
Contract Documents.
At the time when the Iinstallation shall be handed over, all the lamps shall be
new. II the lamps have been used in the course oI the construction works, the
lamps shall be replaced at the time oI the work's hand-over. Blinking lamps shall
be replaced.
08 (2001)
96
080815 Switching-on equipment
Switching-on equipment shall be supplied and installed Ior each luminaire in
which they are required.
Each Iluorescent lamp shall be equipped with an independent ballast. No shared
ballasts shall be used by a number oI lamps, except Ior electronic ballasts or iI
otherwise speciIied in one oI the Contract Documents.
Identical luminaires shall be equipped with identical electrical equipment.
Switching-on equipment Ior discharge lamps shall be installed at a distance Irom
the lamps that shall comply with the switching-on equipment ManuIacturer
instructions.
08082 Luminaires for Outdoor Lighting
080821 Light spreading oI the luminaire
The deIinition oI luminaires according to the diIIusion oI light shall be according
to the Iollowing deIinitions oI CIE:
a) By the old CIE method (publication up to 1965).
1. Cut oII throw luminaire
- Maximal light intensity adjustment 0 to 65;
- Maximal light intensity vector allowed 1000 lumen/10
candles at 90 Irom the vertical.
2. Semi cut oII throw luminaire
- Maximal light intensity adjustment 0 to 75;
- Maximal light intensity vector allowed 1000 lumen/50
candles at 90 Irom the vertical.
b) By the new CIE method (publication 1977)
CIE 34 ClassiIication system Ior the photometric properties oI luminaires
Table No. 3
Throw Spread Control
Short J
max

60
Narrow J
80

45
Limited SLI
2
Intermediate 60 _
J
max
70
Average 45 _
J
90
_ 55
Moderate 2 _
SLI _ 4
Long J
max
~
70
Broad J
90
~
55
Tight SLI
~ 4
08 (2001)
97
SLI SpeciIic Lantern Index
080822 Luminaire structure
a) Structure and Materials The structure oI the luminaire and the
materials used Ior its manuIacture shall meet the requirements oI SI 20
or IEC 60598. The body oI the luminaire shall be made oI non-metallic
(pro-magnetic) material such as cast aluminum, extruded aluminum,
reinIorced polyester coated with protective paint or reinIorced plastic.
The luminaire shall have at least two compartments with separate covers Ior
each compartment (one compartment Ior the lamp and one Ior the
equipment and the cable inlet).
b) Parts The bolts, nuts and other Iittings shall comprise devices against
bending and disengagement Iollowing movements and vibrations.
c) The compartment oI the lamps and the reIlector shall be tight
particularly against dust and moiture at the level oI IP 553 at least, but
shall allow Iiltered air movement in the course oI the heating and
cooling oI the luminaire by means oI a "Iiltering breather" or special
sealer.
d) Connections and Auxiliary Fittings Compartment The inlet oI the
cable shall be in a separate compartment in order to prevent
overheating oI the connections. The attachment oI the cable inside the
compartment shall prevent the transIer oI pulling stresses to the
connection clamps. In the connections compartment there shall be
clamps standing up to a temperature oI at least 105C and Iixed to the
luminaire, as detailed in paragraph 080828 below.
Should there be a request Ior it in the Special SpeciIication, the
compartment shall also include switching-on Iittings, ballasts, capacitors
and igniters.
The compartment shall be closed by a separate lid having a protection level
oI at least IP 45. The Iittings shall be mounted on a tray as detailed in
paragraph 080826 below.
080823 Light spreader
The light spreader shall be transparent, smooth or prismatic made oI unbreakable
plastic material, clean and clear, or oI tempered glass standing up against
mechanical and thermal shocks. The lid shall be tight against penetration oI dust
and rain, at a protection level oI at least IP 553. The lid shall be opened without
the use oI tools and remain attached to the luminaire's structure. When opened,
the electrician dealing with the luminaire shall not have in his hands removable
parts oI the luminaire.
080824 Garden lighting luminaires
Luminaires used Ior the lighting oI lanes and gardens shall be as required in the
Contract Documents.
08 (2001)
98
080825 Security lighting
Luminaires Ior security lighting shall be as required in the Contract Documents.
080826 Accessories tray (small board)
a) General
The tray shall be installed in such a way so as to enable installation and easy
access, as well as be easily replaceable. The tray shall be installed within the
accessories tray in the pole or in a box or in the luminaire and be strongly
Iastened, in order to prevent vibrations and shocks. The dimensions shall be
as required. The tray in the pole shall be protected Irom the Iall oI rubbish
into the electrical equipment.
Should it be required in the Contract Documents, the tray shall have double
insulation.
b) Tray with accessories in the pole's opening.
The tray shall include the Iollowing items:
1. Ballasts, capacitors and starters as detailed below in paragraphs
080832, 080833 and 080834 and according to the number oI
lamps;
2. Protection oI each lamp and socket. Unless otherwise speciIied
the protection shall be a 6A two-pole switch (with neutral
disconnection) Irom the lamp and 16A Ior the socket. The
switch shall be Ior short-circuit current oI at least 10 KA, as
per IEC 60898;
3. Capacity clamps Ior inlet and outlet cables and Ior the
connection oI the lamp shall be rail-clamps with separate
closure Ior each strand. The clamps shall have brass contactors
and screws Iitting the cables sections.
The clamps shall be set into a selI-extinguishing plastic "housing." The
clamp oI the neutral conductor shall be blue. The clamps shall have the
same number oI inlets as the number oI conductors attached to them;
4. Earthing bars with at least three screws or one earthing bolt
made oI brass or copper, 5/16" with three washers and two
nuts;
5. Clamps Ior holding the cables going into the tray or out Irom
it;
6. All the equipment mounted on the tray shall be wired by means
oI Ilexible 2.5 sq.mm conductors with insulation standing up to
a temperature oI at least 105C. Should a a starter be installed
in a tray at an opening in the pole, the cable connecting it to the
luminaire shall be Ior a tension oI at least 3,000 V RMS or a
pulse oI 5,000 V. The capacity oI the cable shall be as per the
instructions oI the equipment's ManuIacturer.
08 (2001)
99
c) Trays without switching-on accessories.
Should the lamp switching-on Iitting be installed within the luminaire
compartment, the tray shall be as detailed in above paragraph b), except Ior
sub-paragraph 1.
In such a case, the insulation oI the conductors on the tray shall Iit a
temperature oI at least 75C.
d) Trays with Iittings inside the luminaire.
The tray shall be made oI sheet metal at least 1 mm thick or aluminum at
least 2 mm thick or oI selI-extinguishing plastic material at least 5 mm
thick.
The tray shall be withdrawable without the use oI tools. The tray shall be
approved by the luminaire's ManuIacturer.
The tray shall include the Iollowing components:
1. Ballasts, capacitors and igniters as detailed below in
paragraphs 080832, 080833 and 080834 and according to the
number oI lamps;
2. The tray shall be connected to a Ieeding cable by means oI a
socket-plug clamp with at least three poles. The outlet oI the
lamp also shall be connected by means oI a socket-plug clamp
to a tension Iitting paragraph 5. above. The clamps shall Iit a
temperature oI at least 105C;
3. An earthing bolt 5/16" oI brass or copper with three washers
and two nuts;
4. Clamps Ior attaching the cables to the tray;
5. The wiring oI the tray with Ilexible 1.5 sq.mm cables standing
up to temperatures oI at least 105C. The lamp connection
conductors shall stand up to temperatures oI 180C and to a
voltage oI at least 3,000 V RMS or pulses oI 5,000 V.
6. Should there be no protection oI the lamp in the accessories
tray at the base oI the pole or in the accessories box installed
separately, the tray in the luminaire shall include a 2-pole 6A
switch (with neutral disconnection). The switch shall be Ior a
short-circuit current oI at least 10 KA, as per Standard IEC
60898.
080827 Accessories tray
The accessories tray shall have a size enabling the insertion oI all the required
auxiliary Iittings. Should the supply network consist oI cables, a branching shall
be set inside the box and it shall include additional clamps and openings Ior
cables.
08 (2001)
100
The box shall be made oI 'decoIirt 1.5 mm thick (or oI some other material
provided it shall be approved by the COR) with a door opening upward. In order
to open or close the door no tools shall be necessary and the electrician dealing
with it shall not be leIt with removable parts oI the box, in his hands.
The box shall be tight to the penetration oI rain and dust at a protection level oI at
least IP 54.
All the sheet metal parts shall be protected against corrosion by chemical
cleaning and hot-dip galvanization, as per the requirements oI SI 918. All the
bolts, hinges, etc., shall be made oI cadmium-plated steel. The bolts, nuts and
other Iittings shall not be loose or released Iollowing movements and vibrations.
The box shall be supplied with all its parts installed and Iastened as well as with
all the required hanging parts.
At the bottom oI the box, holes shall be Iormed with 'antigrun inlets through
which the cables Ior the lamps and the network shall pass.
The box shall be equipped with reinIorcements that shall enable hanging on a
wooden or concrete pole or on another type oI structure. The reinIorcements shall
be Ilat around the pole (or structural sections) with attachment bolts or stainless
steel tapes reinIorcements.
A tray made oI sheet metal at least 1 mm thick or oI aluminum at least 2 mm
thick or selI-extinguishing plastic material at least 5 mm thick shall be installed
inside the box. The Iollowing Iittings shall be mounted on top oI the tray:
a) Ballasts, capacitors and starters as detailed below in paragraphs
080832, 080833 and 080834 and according to the number oI lamps;
b) Protection oI each lamp. Unless otherwise speciIied the protection
shall be a 6A two-pole switch (with neutral disconnection). The switch
shall be Ior short-circuit current oI 10 KA at least, as per IEC 60898;
c) Rail-clamps Ior the connection oI a Ieeding cable and the lamps;
d) Earthing bolt, brass or copper, 8 mm with three washers and two nuts;
e) Clamps Ior Iastening the cables;
I) Wiring oI the tray with 2.5 sq.mm Ilexible conductors, with insulation
standing up to temperatures oI at least 105C.
Should the lamp switching-on Iittings be installed within the luminaire's
compartment, the tray shall be as detailed above, except Ior sub-paragraph a) and
the conductors insulation shall Iit a temperature oI at least 75C.
080828 Wiring Ior outdoor lighting luminaires
a) Feeding cables Irom a tray with switch-on equipment at the base oI the
pole (or inside the Iittings box) up to the inlet to the luminaire shall
stand up to at least 3,000 V RMS or 5,000 V pulses. The section oI the
conductors shall be 2.5 sq.mm.
08 (2001)
101
The capacity oI the Ieeding cable shall be according to the directives oI the
ManuIacturer.
At the inlet oI the luminaire, the cable shall be connected to three-poled
inlet clamps standing up to temperatures oI 105C and to the operational
voltage oI the lamp. The clamps shall be Iixed unto the luminaire.
From the clamps, there shall be conductors standing up to a temperature oI
180C, going to the lamp-holder.
b) Whenever the Iittings are installed inside the luminaire, a cable with at
least 1.5 sq.mm conductors and insulation to at least 90C shall be
installed between the Iittings tray in the pole (or in the accessories box)
and the luminaire.
c) Whenever the Ieeding oI the luminaire shall be Irom the overhead
network, the cable Irom the network to the Iittings box shall have a
section oI at least 4 sq.mm and stand up to an insulation oI 90C at
least. The passage oI the cable Irom the box to the network shall be
through a rigid plastic pipe oI at least 19 mm dia.
08083 Electrical Components
080831 Lamp housing and switch-on housing
In the absence oI some other request, the lamp housing Ior incandescent or
discharge lamps under heavy pressure shall be oI heavy-duty porcelain with sizes
Iitting the thread oI the lamp. The lamp housing shall be attached to the luminaire
by means oI two screws. Neither nipples nor rivets shall be used Ior securing the
lamp housing to the luminaire.
The lamp housing and the starter oI housing oI Iluorescent tubes shall stand up to
the requirements oI SI 396.
The lamp housings Ior outdoor lighting shall have spring or other arrangements
Ior the prevention oI the disengagement oI the lamps due to shocks.
080832 Ballasts
The ballasts shall Iit the requirements oI SI 397 or SI 1168 or SI 1169. The
sealing material shall stand up against the inIluence oI heat and moisture. The
ballast shall Iit the lamp capacity to which it shall be attached. Ballasts with
disturbing humming shall be replaced. All the ballasts shall be guaranteed Ior at
least Iive years.
Each ballast shall Iit the type and capacity oI the lamp and be approved by the
lamp ManuIacturer or by an approved laboratory.
Electronic ballasts shall be installed according to a request in the Contract
Documents.
a) All the ballasts shall be subject to the Iollowing conditions:
1. Fitted to the required voltage and Irequency;
08 (2001)
102
2. Fitted to work temperature (TW) oI at least 130C. The
temperature diIIerence (delta T) shall be 70C at least;
3. Ballasts and auxiliary equipment (igniters, capacitors, relays
and batteries Ior emergency lighting unit) which are separated
Irom the luminaires shall be installed in closed boxes with
ventilation grooves. The connection between the box and the
luminaire shall be by means oI socket-plug clamps.
b) Fluorescent ballasts shall be subject to the Iollowing conditions:
1. With thermal insulation Iitting the appropriate standards
requirements, with selI-neutral Ior the lamp and the coil and a
thermal protection without a selI-neutral Ior the capacitor;
2. Capable oI operating without stutter up to 10 above the usual
network voltage and up to an environment temperature oI
60C;
3. Fitted to operation in surrounding environment oI 10C to
50C;
4. With acoustic insulation standing up to the appropriate
Standard;
5. Approved by the lamps ManuIacturer Ior operation with the
characterized lamps.
c) Ballasts Ior discharge sources under high pressure shall be as Iollows:
1. Auto-regulator or lamp and coil with Iixed capacity;
2. With the possibility to operate in the situation oI an open
circuit or oI a short-circuit without substantial loss oI liIetime;
3. Sealing with acoustic insulation shall Iit, at least, the class A
sound rating;
4. Aluminum casting housing with cooling wings having integral
protection against tension eruptions, whenever installed Iar
away Irom the luminaire;
5. Fuses that shall enable continuation oI the operation oI all the
circuit in case oI deIect in the single ballast;
6. Continuation oI uninterrupted operation oI the lighting source
during the Iall oI tension up to 40, lasting up to 4 seconds;
7. II indicated in the Contract Documents, they shall be equipped
with a secondary circuit including a relay and control ring Ior
the emergency halogen-tungsten lamp operating in the course
oI a "hot operation" or a "drop" oI the main discharge lamp.
The emergency lamp shall operate until it reaches 40 oI its
light capacity.
08 (2001)
103
8. Ballasts shall include thermal protection Iorm over-current
(thermal cut-out).
080833 Capacitors and starters
In each Iluorescent luminaire (including compact Iluorescent luminaires) and in
each luminaire with high pressure discharge, a capacitor shall be installed, as per
SI 398.
The capacitors Ior double capacity correction shall be oI the required size that
shall Iit the lamp, so as to ensure double capacity oI 0.92, at least.
The starters and their housings shall Iit the requirements oI SI 402 or SI 1451.
Starters and capacitors combined in the starting system shall be approved by the
lamp's ManuIacturer or by an approved laboratory.
Electronic starters shall be installed upon request in the Contract Documents.
080834 Starters
In lamps that need starters Ior their operation, the starters shall Iit the type oI
lamp and its capacity and be approved by the lamp's ManuIacturer or by an
approved laboratory. The starters shall be installed within the luminaire, the
starters shall Iit work with the temperature range oI -30C to 90C.
The starters shall be electronic without switches
080835 Dimmers
The dimmers shall be as detailed in the Special SpeciIication.
080836 TransIormers
An independent transIormer shall be installed in each halogen lamp luminaire.
Unless otherwise required, the halogen lamps transIormers shall be electronic.
TransIormers Ior other incandescent lamps shall Iit the requirements oI SI 2225
and have at least three outlets: 80, 90, 100 oI the speciIied tension.
080837 Earthing the luminaire
The metallic part oI the luminaire shall be earthed as required in SI 20. Each part
oI the luminaire carrying a removable electrical equipment shall be earthed by
means oI a Ilexible conductor to the Iixed part oI the luminaire.
080838 Connections and conductors
Besides whatever is stated in paragraph 080828, all the connections between the
luminaire's body and the electrical system shall come out Irom the clamps Iixed
on the Iitting. The clamps oI incandescent luminaires shall be made oI porcelain.
The conductors shall Iit the luminaire, as detailed hereinaIter:
- In incandescent luminaires: conductors with TeIlon insulation
or some other heat insulation material;
08 (2001)
104
- In Iluorescent luminaires: conductors oI the T type;
- In mercury luminaires or other discharge lamps, the contactors
Ior the lamp housing shall be conductors with insulation as
required in paragraph 080828 above.
In passages through metallic parts, all the conductors shall be equipped with
plastic insulation sleeves.
Inner conductors shall be attached to the luminaire by means oI appropriate
plastic clamps. External wiring connections, between the luminaire and the
operation equipment, shall be by means oI socket-plug clamps.
In luminaires where the switching-on and auxiliary equipment shall be installed
in a box separate Irom the luminaire, the connection between the box and the
luminaire shall be by means oI socket-plug clamps.
08084 Lamps
080840 General
The lamps Ior the luminaires shall be Ior a voltage oI 230V, 50 Hz. The
Contractor shall supply Iull inIormation relative to the characteristic properties oI
the lamp, according to the requirements detailed in paragraphs 080841 to 080847
below. The inIormation shall relate to the Iollowing data:
a) Type oI lamps (mercury, sodium, etc.);
b) Name oI ManuIacturer;
c) Lamp's capacity in watts;
d) Light Ilow in lumens;
e) Color oI light in Kelvin grades;
I) LiIetime;
g) Change oI light Ilow during the lamp's liIetime;
h) Connections diagram Ior the proposed lamp, according to the
ManuIacturer catalogue;
i) Installation position (horizontal, vertical).
080841 Fluorescent tubes
The properties oI Iluorescent tubes shall be as detailed hereinaIter:
a) LiIetime oI at least 10,000 work-hours (according to ManuIacturer
catalogue);
b) The maximum light capacity Iall, aIter 50 oI liIetime, shall be oI
30;
08 (2001)
105
c) The color temperature oI the tube shall be according to the deIinition in
the Special SpeciIication;
d) The color transIer coeIIicient shall be at least 55.
Tubes with improved color and light capacity shall be as deIined in the Special
SpeciIication.
080842 Compact Iluorescent lamps
The properties oI Iluorescent tubes shall be as detailed hereinaIter:
catalogue);
20;
c) The operation oI the lamp shall not be linked to the installation
position (horizontal or vertical);
d) The color temperature oI the tube shall be according to the deIinition in
the Special SpeciIication;
e) The color transIer coeIIicient shall be at least 55.
Tubes with improved color and light capacity shall be as deIined in the Special
SpeciIication.
080843 Halogen lamps
The properties oI halogen lamps shall be as detailed hereinaIter:
catalogue);
b) The capacity and light color shall remain unchanged during the whole
above liIetime;
d) The color temperature oI the lamp shall be 3,100 Kelvin degrees at
least;
Lamps with long liIetimes shall be as deIined in the Special SpeciIication.
080844 Mercury lamps
The properties oI mercury lamps shall be as detailed hereinaIter:
catalogue);
08 (2001)
106
30;
c) The color temperature oI the lamp shall be 3,400 Kelvin degrees at
least;
d) The color transIer coeIIicient shall be at least 40.
080845 High pressure sodium lamps
The properties oI high pressure sodium lamps shall be as detailed hereinaIter:
catalogue);
10;
least;
080846 Low-pressure Sodium Lamps
The properties oI Low-pressure Sodium lamps shall be as detailed hereinaIter:
catalogue);
20;
least;
080847 Metal Halide metal lamps
The properties oI metal halide metal lamps shall be as detailed hereinaIter:
catalogue);
20;
08 (2001)
107
least;
08085 Emergency Light Units and Luminaires
Emergency light units and luminaires shall Iit the requirements oI SI 20, part
22.2.
The emergency light units shall activate Iluorescent tubes or incandescent lamps,
single or double purpose. The units shall be installed in independent bodies or as
parts oI Iluorescent luminaires Ior one oI the tubes in the luminaires.
The units shall include batteries, a charger, a relay, a converter Ior the Iluorescent
tubes, a "cut-oII" Ior preventing over-discharge, protection against breakdown in
case oI the absence oI a tube or oI a burnt tube, a LED light indicating the charge
and all the other requirements. Units in independent bodies shall also include a
testing pushbutton.
In dual-purpose bodies, the location oI the indication lamp shall be as mentioned
in the Contract Documents. The batteries shall be tight nickel-cadmium batteries
Ior Iour years normal use in the installation and with capacity larger by 65 than
the required one, this in order to reach the required light intensity aIter Iour years.
The batteries shall be installed so that the temperature next to them shall not
exceed 45C. Should the temperature be higher than that, the emergency unit
shall be installed in a separate and ventilated box, at a distance under 100 cm
Irom the lamp. Unless otherwise indicated, the units shall have batteries Ior 60
working minutes and the light capacity shall be 40 oI the original capacity. A
notice plate shall be installed on each unit containing the Iollowing data:
a) ConIormity to the Standard;
b) SpeciIied voltage;
c) Protection level (IP);
d) Type, number and capacity oI the lamps;
e) Environment temperature Ior which the unit is supposed to be
activated;
I) Operation time during voltage interruption;
g) Light capacity in lumens during voltage interruption;
h) Type, voltage and capacity oI battery;
i) Week and year oI battery's production;
j) Place Ior indicating the time oI the installation.
08 (2001)
108
The emergency units shall be equipped with a warning sign indicating that the
units are under tension, even when the lamp is shut-oII.
08086 Airplane Warning Installation
Should an airplane warning installation be required, it shall be executed
according to the details in the Contract Documents.
08 (2001)
109
0809 High Voltage Installations
08090 General
080900 Range oI the sub-chapter
This Sub-Chapter deals with High Voltage Installations (intermediate voltage)
within the range oI 1 to 52 KV.
080901 Regulations and requirements oI the IEC
High voltage installations shall meet the requirements oI the Electricity
Regulations. For installations that have not been detailed in the Regulations, the
installations shall meet the requirements oI "The Rules oI the National Network
oI the IEC." The Contractor shall submit technical data relative to the equipment,
as required in these Rules.
080902 Standards
The list oI Standards relating to high voltage installations appears in the List oI
Standards in above paragraph 08001.
080903 SaIety clearances
In all the installations, minimal clearances shall be kept in the air, based on the
coordination oI the insulation, in the IEC Regulations and on the Rules oI the
National Network oI the IEC.
The clearances between high voltage lines and other lines shall be according to
the requirements oI the Regulations.
080904 Environment conditions Ior the equipment
The perIormance oI the equipment, described in the tables Iound in the
SpeciIication, shall Iit standard and long-term operation oI the equipment in
normal service conditions, as detailed in Standard IEC 60694.
This Standard determines the standard service conditions in which the switching
and other equipment shall perIorm and they include the Iollowing parameters:
surrounding temperature, height oI location oI installation with respect to seal
level, air pollution, relative humidity and earthquakes.
Should the equipment be installed in an area in which the environment conditions
are unusual and change the above parameters, the equipment shall stand up to the
requirements detailed in the Special SpeciIication.
For outdoor equipment, Standard IEC 60694 requires that within the sheathed
equipment prevail normal service conditions, as detailed above.
080905 HV Room
a) In each HV Room area shall be installed a saIety cabinet meant to be
set on the Iloor. The cabinet shall be made oI 2 mm thick sheet metal
and include a earthing bolt welded to it. On the cabinet a notice panel
08 (2001)
110
"SaIety Equipment" shall be installed. The cabinet shall include the
Iollowing items:
1. A tester Ior 30 KV voltage with a lamp;
2. Two protective helmets;
3. Two protective glasses;
4. Gloves 30 KV in a rigid box;
5. Pneumatic gloves tester;
6. A rescue bar;
7. A Iuse releaser (iI there are Iuses);
8. A set oI Iive three-ply (sandwich) warning notices-panels with
red letters on white background. The notices panels shall be
150 x 200 mm, comprise a twisted hanging 8 mm diameter
wire and carry the Iollowing text:
- 2 x "Warning High Tension"
- 2 x "Warning Do not connect, working on the line"
- 1 x "Danger Keep Away, High Tension"
All the above shall also carry a lightning arrow sign.
9. High tension short Ior 3 phases;
10. Insulating partition Ior 22 KV or 33 KV;
11. Three spare Iuses Ior each type (iI there are Iuses).
b) In each HV room, there shall be besides the above:
1. A rubber carpet Ior use in Iront oI the board, at least 5 mm
thick, Ior at least 40 KV. The dimensions oI the carpet shall be:
length equal to the length oI the electrical board, width at least
1 m. The carpet shall be made oI one piece.
2. Fire-extinguisher oI 2 kg with FM 2000 extinguishing gas;
3. Instructions Ior saIety and revival.
c) Earthing in HV rooms:
1. The earthings in the room shall be connected to the bus-bars
installed in the main L.V. room. Should there not be such a
room in the vicinity, a bus-bar shall be installed in the
protected room. The bar shall be connected to the Ioundation
earthing by means oI a 40 x 4 mm galvanized steel bar. Copper
bus-bars shall have a section oI 60 x 5 mm and be 800 mm
08 (2001)
111
long, at least. In the bar, there shall be at least Iour spare
screws.
A notice "bus-bar" shall be installed next to the bar.
2. A protective earthing oI each transIormer shall be made oI a
conductor having a section oI 95 sq.mm.
3. The earthing oI the HV room shall consist oI a conductor
having a section oI 95 sq.mm.
4. Protective earthing in the room shall consist oI a 30 x 3 mm
copper bar. The bar shall be installed along the room's
perimeter and all the metallic parts in the room shall be
connected to it, such as: door Irames, shutters, Iences, ladders,
cables, etc. The doors wings shall be connected to the Irames
by means oI Ilexible copper bars.
On each earthing conductor connected to the bus-bar, a notice-plate
shall be installed indicating the objective oI the earthing conductor.
Next to each earthing connection a notice-plate shall be installed
carrying the inIormation "Earthing Do not dismantle."
The resistivity oI the earthing shall not exceed 1 ohm.
d) Fences:
A Ience shall be erected in the Iront oI the transIormers, consisting oI
galvanized angles and mesh. The Ience shall be built according to the details
in the Drawings and the requirements oI the Special SpeciIication. Unless
otherwise speciIied, the Ience shall be oI the crepe-mesh type with
galvanized wires coated with PVC. The diameter oI the wires shall be 3
mm. The height oI the Ience shall be 2.50 m. The Ience shall be built so that
it shall be dismountable, in case oI need. A mesh door at least 80 cm wide
shall be installed in the Iront oI each transIormer.
e) Locks:
All the doors and handles shall be equipped with hanging locks openable by
a master-key.
I) Signage in the room:
1. On the entrance door to the room, there shall be a sign
"Warning High Tension," as well as a lightning arrow.
2. On the Ience surrounding the transIormer, there shall be a sign
indicating the number oI the transIormer, the voltage and the
capacity.
08 (2001)
112
08091 High Tension Overhead Networks
080911 Adaptation to the speciIications oI the IEC
All that is required in Sub-Chapter 0805 above shall apply to high tension
overhead networks as well. Unless otherwise required in one oI the Contract
Documents, all the Iittings, materials and works oI overhead networks shall suit
the IEC SpeciIications, the Rules oI the National Network and the Drawings oI
the Master Plan Books oI the IEC. The Iittings shall be similar to models used by
the IEC.
080912 Poles
The poles chosen Ior erection according to the drawings in the Master plan books
shall include additional steel structure components as well as various Iittings
such as: extensions, risings, arms oI all sorts, tables, earthing bends, etc.
080913 Insulators
a) The insulators shall stand up to the requirements oI Standards IEC
60168, IEC 60305 and IEC 60383.
b) The insulators shall stand up to the tests required in Standards IEC
60383 and IEC 60168.
The mechanical resistance oI the insulators under pulling or bending and
pressure (according to the intended use oI the insulator) shall be tested
according to the requirements oI the Standard relevant to the type oI
insulator.
c) Creeping length Ior standing under tension oI up to 2 KV, it shall be
at least 1,050 mm and under tension oI 36 KV, 1,346 mm.
d) Quality oI the material the insulators shall be made oI glazed
porcelain or tempered glass. Insulators made oI synthetic materials
shall be according to a request in the Contract Documents.
In arid areas, the insulator surIace shall be coated witha silicone mixture.
e) Support insulators and supports:
1. Support insulators (pin type) equipped with a steel support, are
usually used Ior bearing the passage oI the network in a
straight line, or the passage oI the network in a corner, without
stressing. They shall have a Iull un-penetrated core and consist
oI porcelain oI the VER 110 type.
According to the pulling Iorces oI the lines, the insulators shall be
attached to "light" supports Iitted to 120 kg, or to "heavy" supports Iitted
to 285 kg pulls.
Should the pulling Iorces, as in corner poles, require a higher
mechanical resistance, insulators with strengthened support or "Dolton
supports," or a combination oI two insulators, one behind, the other as
shown in the Drawings, shall be installed at corners oI the line.
08 (2001)
113
For poles installed at the intersection Iield with communications lines, a
combination oI two or three insulators shall be installed, even in the
passage oI a straight line.
2. The supports shall be made oI steel previously submitted to a
tempering process. The strength and type oI the supports shall
Iit the location oI their installation on the line. In order to liIt
the insulator above the arm, extended supports shall be used.
The attachment oI the support to the insulators shall be by means oI a
material specially suited to that purpose. The attachment material shall
have appropriate expansion coeIIicient and elasticity, in order to prevent
thermal stresses in the insulator.
I) Shackle insulators and insulators bearings under the bearing arm oI
the phase insulator, on each pole shall be installed a shackle insulator
T10 to be used Ior bearing and Iastening earthing conductors.
g) Hanging insulators with cap and pin in strings (Ceramic Cap String
Insulators) shall be installed in stress or corner poles. They shall also
be used in anchors Ior their separation Irom their supporting place.
080914 Network conductors
a) General The networks shall be built oI conductors made oI two types
oI materials: copper conductors produced according to Standard DIN
48201 in sections oI 25, 35, 50, 70 and 90 sq.mm and aluminum-steel
conductors, in which the steel core represents 1/16 oI the aluminum
conductor surrounding it. The aluminum-steel conductors shall be
produced according to Standard DIN 48204, in sections oI 50/8, 95/15,
150/25 sq.mm. etc.
In copper networks and in aluminum-steel networks, the earthing
conductors shall be made oI 50/8 sq.mm steel-aluminum. Earthing
conductors shall be installed in all the networks.
b) Stressing the conductors the IEC tables determine the stressing
strength as 8 kg/sq.mm and 10 kg/sq.mm, Ior the two conductors,
copper and steel-aluminum, when the maximal temperature oI the
conductors due to electrical loading is determined to be 80C Ior the
copper and 70C Ior the steel-aluminum.
c) Fastening the conductors in a straight network line (180), the
conductors shall be attached to a groove Iound at the end oI the
supporting insulators. On poles where there is a change oI direction up
to 160, the conductors shall be attached to the neck oI the insulator, so
that the insulator shall be closed at the corner, or sometimes to a
combination oI two or three support insulators.
The conductors in stressed poles shall be attached to rings oI hanging
insulators (cap/pin insulators) by means oI a Iastening system speciIic to
each type oI conductors section. The Iastening system shall consist oI
standard Iittings including parallel units, stressing units, preIabricated ties,
preIabricated bars, teethed clamps, pad clamps, wedged stressing clamps,
ring connections, eccentric clamps, wrapping tapes, etc., all the above
08 (2001)
114
according to the IEC methods. For the Iastening oI copper conductors, soIt
copper tying wires shall be used, in sections oI 6 and 10 sq.mm. For the
Iastening oI steel-aluminum conductors, 3 mm thick aluminum tying wires
and tying tapes shall be used.
The earthing conductors shall be Iastened as detailed Ior the above steel-
aluminum conductors. The earthing conductors shall be bridged to the steel
poles structure, to the earthing bolt in the concrete poles, to the arm carrying
insulators and to other metallic equipment Iound in wood or concrete poles.
The bridge shall consist oI a 50/8 mm conductor and standard Iittings as
used by the IEC.
d) Protective nets and knees in sheathed networks shall be installed
according to IEC practice. Galvanized metal wires oI 16 sq.mm and 25
sq.mm sections shall serve as conductors oI the protective nets.
Double-directional earthing knees shall be installed on all the poles oI the
network.
080915 Line breakers
The breakers shall be oI the type accepted by the IEC, with extinguishing jaws
and rays or with extinguishing compartments. The breakers shall be manually
operated by means oI a lever.
080916 Ray protectors
Ray protectors combined with discharge rays shall be built and installed as
accepted by the IEC, as protection Iittings oI the network's transIormers and
protective means Irom lightning.
The rays protector may be installed on the arms or directly on the transIormer.
Whenever the rays protector shall be installed on arms, the distance between the
arms and the transIormer's bottom shall be at least 3 m.
Rays protectors system on arms shall be installed at a distance oI 2 m Irom the
pole's head.
08092 Discharge Lighting Arresters and Rays Protectors
a) The use, choice and location oI the discharge lighting and rays
protectors shall be according to the National Network Rules "Lightning
Protectors in High Voltage" Technical Requirements.
For the protection Irom over-voltage created by lighting or switching
operations, discharge lighting and rays protectors shall be installed in the
installations and networks.
b) Discharge rays shall have air clearances Iitted to the network's voltage,
according to IEC data. In areas with concentrations oI birds, discharge
rays shall not be installed. Lightning arresters shall be built and tested
according to IEC 60099.
08 (2001)
115
c) The lightning arresters installed on overhead networks poles shall Iit
the models and types oI external lightning arresters used by the IEC,
adapted to the voltage and type oI the network.
d) Lightning arresters shall be installed according to requirements in the
Special SpeciIication concerning the type, service voltage, discharge
current, adaptation to environmental conditions, height oI installation
relative to sea level and with the indication oI the attachment Iittings.
e) Lightning arresters shall be installed close to the equipment they are to
protect, between the voltage inlet clamps and the earthing protection oI
the equipment.
I) Earthing electrodes Ior the lightning arresters shall not be installed
separately, unless bridged as stated Ior the protected equipment.
g) The lightning arresters connection conductors shall be loose so as not
to transIer vibrations Irom the equipment to the lightning arrester.
h) Lightning arresters with polymeric wrapping, equipped with a device
Ior their disconnection and the dropping oI the Ilexible earthing
connection, shall be installed upon a requirement in the Contract
Documents.
i) Lightning arresters included in socket plugs cables terminals, shall
stand up to all the electrical requirements applying to the other
lightning arresters, including service voltage and testing oI the cables;
they shall also Iit, as Iar as their sizes are concerned, the equipment
close to which or on which they shall be installed.
08093 Distribution Transformer
080930 General
All the transIormers shall be built and inspected according to the requirements oI
IEC 60076, IEC 60289 and IEC 60726. The transIormers supplied by the
Contractor shall be oI types approved by the IEC Ior use in the National
Network. The transIormers shall Iit the required voltage and consideration shall
be given to the earthing method oI the network.
080931 Testing voltage resistance
All the transIormers shall stand up to the testing voltages, according to Table No.
4 below.
Table No. 4
SpeciIied
Combined Voltage
U
N

Insulation Levels
Shock Voltage
1/2/50 s
Voltage standing
up during one
minute 50 Hz
RMS
08 (2001)
116
KV KV KV
0.4 - 3.0
12.6 95.0 38.0
22.0 125.0 60.0
33.0 170.0 70.0

080932 TransIormers sunk into oil
TransIormers sunk into oil shall be liquid-tight or not liquid-tight (with an
expansion reservoir), as required in the Contract Documents. The transIormers
shall be used Ior outdoor installation, in natural cooling conditions.
The electrical data and the dimensions shall Iit the types used by the IEC.
Voltages diIIering Irom those mentioned below shall be according to the Special
SpeciIication.
a) Initial voltage The transIormers shall be 3-phased with speciIied
initial voltage between phases oI: 12.6, 22 and 33 KV, their maximal
service voltages being 13.2, 24 and 36 KV, respectively.
b) Secondary voltage The speciIied secondary voltage: between phases
400V and between phases to the star point: 231V.
c) Short-circuit capacity: in the 12.6V network 400 MVA,
in the 22V or 33V network 500 MVA
d) Frequency 50 Hz.
e) Connections group DYN11 (other connections groups shall be
according to the requirements oI the Special SpeciIication).
I) Short-circuit voltage For transIormers with capacity up to 630 KVA:
(4.4 +0.4). For transIormers oI diIIerent sizes, as required in the
g) Insulation level see Table No. 4 in paragraph 080931.
h) Maximal temperature rise The temperature oI the oil in the upper
layer shall not exceed 60C, and the temperature oI the windings
(which is measured by the change in resistivity) shall not exceed 65C.
i) The material and shape oI the windings The three windings oI the
high voltage shall be identical. A high voltage winding made oI copper
conductors shall be insulated with insulating paper. The high voltage
winding shall be made oI copper Ioil.
Aluminum winding Ior transIormers shall be executed according to a special
speciIication.
08 (2001)
117
j) Losses and noise level The transIormer shall have a low losses level
and a low noise level.
k) Levels exchanger The exchanger shall be manual, on the side oI the
high voltage and be operated Irom the outer side when the transIormer
shall not be under tension.
The exchanger shall enable the Iollowing voltage levels: -5, -2.5, 0,
2.5 and 5.
The exchanger shall be oI the type used by the IEC.
l) Type oI oil The insulating oil oI the transIormer shall be oI the type
approved by the IEC.
m) High voltage insulators The insulators shall be oI the socket-plug
type and Iit plugs oI the Tee connector type Ior 400A.
n) Low voltage insulators Low voltage insulators shall comply with the
requirements oI DIN 42530 Ior transIormers up to 400 KVA oI the
DT-630 model and Ior transIormers oI 630 KVA oI the DT-100 model.
The distance between the insulators shall not be less than 160 mm.
o) Low voltage clamps The clamps Ior the connection to low voltage
shall comply with the requirements oI Standard DIN 43675, as the
exposed copper parts shall be tin-plated. The clamps and the outlets to
the neutral and the phases shall have identical sections.
Clamps Ior transIormers up to 400 KVA shall be Ior 600A.
Clamps Ior transIormers up to 630 KVA shall be Ior 1,000A.
The threading heads oI the 400 and 630 KVA transIormers connection
clamps shall be M-20 and M 30 x 2 respectively.
p) The indicator oI the oil surIace The transIormer shall be equipped
with an indicator Ior the oil surIace, installed on the transIormer's
cover. The indicator shall be oI type used by the IEC.
q) Filling opening The addition oI oil shall be done through a 2" dia.
Iilling opening with threaded cap, installed on the transIormer's cover.
On the cover, there shall also be openings Ior the release oI air, meant to
Iacilitate the Iilling with oil.
In a non-tight transIormer, the addition oI oil shall be done through the
expansion reservoir by opening the openings oI the air release installed on
the upper part oI the installation.
r) The transIormer's base The base oI the transIormer shall serve Ior the
installation oI the transIormer on the pole.
The base shall be oI the model required by the IEC, with two U rails and
Iour sections welded to it. It shall be Iit Ior the installation oI wheels, that
shall be ordered only upon a request in the Special SpeciIication.
08 (2001)
118
s) Drainage oI the transIormer's reservoir At the bottom oI the
transIormer's reservoir, a 1" ball valve shall be installed Ior the
drainage oI the oil Irom the reservoir, whenever needed.
t) Thermometer pocket At the top part oI the transIormer a 3/4" dia.
pocket shall be welded, 150 mm deep and equipped with a plug.
Whenever needed, the plug shall be removed and the thermometer
inserted.
u) SaIety valve Each transIormer shall be equipped with a valve Ior the
release oI over-pressure, oI a model accepted by the IEC. The valve
shall be equipped with a lid Ior the protection oI people in its vicinity
as well as with a thermometer Ior reading the temperature, with two
electrical contactors.
In non-tight transIormers, there shall also be:
1. an expansion reservoir with a dryer;
2. a Bucholz relay, iI required in the Contract Documents.
v) A control and warning board shall be installed close to the transIormer.
The board shall be originally produced by the transIormer's
ManuIacturer.
w) Fastening and liIting lugs At the Iour corners oI the transIormer, Iour
steel Iastening lugs shall be welded, through which tying cables shall
pass Ior the transportation oI the transIormer. Their inner diameter
shall be at least 5 cm.
x) Data notice panel A data notice panel in Hebrew, made oI aluminum
sheet bearing all the details describing the transIormer, as required in
Standard IEC 60076, as well as the Iollowing data: noise level,
connections group, detail oI voltage grades and model oI low voltage
insulators.
y) Earthing bolt The earthing bolt shall be installed at the bottom oI the
reservoir on the outer side, close to the drainage valve. The bolt shall
be a M12 and equipped with spring washer, nut and earthing marking.
A second earthing bolt shall be welded to the transIormer's cover.
z) Marking The outlets Irom the transIormer shall be marked with the
letters A, B and C, capital letters Ior the high voltage, ordinary letters
Ior the low voltage. The neutral insulator shall be indicated by the
letter N. The marking oI the low voltage shall be close to the earthing
bolt. This data together with the transIormer's capacity and the voltage
shall be engraved on tin or aluminum tags, bonded by means oI glue to
the transIormer's cover. The letters shall be 4 cm high. The notice
panel with the serial number oI the transIormer shall be set on the core
oI the transIormer.
aa) The painting oI the transIormer The painting oI the transIormer, oI
the expansion reservoir and oI all the other metal parts that require
painting, shall be as accepted by the IEC.
08 (2001)
119
ab) Testing CertiIicates The transIormer shall be equipped with the
Iollowing Testing CertiIicates:
- Routine Tests CertiIicates, as per IEC 60076 oI the supplied
transIormer, including its serial number.
- Oil Pressure Testing CertiIicate (breakdown voltage).
- Prototype Testing CertiIicate, as per IEC 60076, including
special tests. The tests shall reIer to a transIormer similar to the
one being supplied; these testing data shall include: shock
voltage testing, temperature rise testing, short-circuit tests and
noise tests.
ac) Warning notices on the top side oI the transIormer, there shall be a
notice carrying the Iollowing text.
WARNING! It is Iorbidden to put the
transIormer
under voltage when the plug is not connected
to
the socket

Next to the valve Ior the drainage oI oil Irom the reservoir, there shall be
Iollowing notice.
WARNING! No samples oI oil shall be
taken Irom this valve

080933 Dry transIormers cast in resin
Dry transIormers cast in resin are used Ior installation inside buildings under
natural cooling conditions with environment temperature oI 45C.
The data relative to these transIormers shall be as Iollows:
a) Initial voltage The transIormers shall be 3-phased with speciIied
initial voltage between phases oI: 12.6, 22 and 33 KV, their maximal
service voltages being 13.8, 24 and 36 KV, respectively.
b) Secondary voltage The speciIied secondary voltage between phases:
400V and between phases to the start point: 231V.
c) Short-circuit capacity: in the 12.6V network 400 MVA,
in the 22V or 33V network 500 MVA
d) Frequency 50 Hz.
e) Connections group DYN11 (other connections groups shall be
according to the requirements oI the Special SpeciIication).
08 (2001)
120
I) Short-circuit voltage For 22 KV or 33 KV transIormer - 6.
For 12.6 KV transIormer 4.
g) Insulation level see Table No. 1 in paragraph 080931 above.
h) Temperature rise For each low voltage coil, three temperature
sensors shall be installed. The sensors shall activate Iorced ventilation,
warning devices and disconnecting mechanism.
i) The material and shape oI the windings The conductors oI the low
voltage and the high voltage shall be oI aluminum.
Copper windings shall be according to a request in the Contract Documents.
The high voltage and low voltage coils shall be cast oI epoxy resin.
Between the high voltage and the low voltage coils as well as within the
coils themselves, there shall be air gaps so as to ensure adequate cooling.
The type oI insulation oI the high voltage and low voltage coils shall be F.
j) Losses and noise level The transIormer shall have a low losses level
and a low noise level.
k) Levels exchanger The exchanger shall be manual, on the side oI the
high voltage and be operated when the transIormer shall not be under
tension.
The exchanger shall enable the Iollowing voltage levels: -5, -2.5, 0,
2.5 and 5.
l) High voltage insulators The insulators shall be oI the socket-plug
type according to Standard DIN 47636, Part 1and Iit plugs oI the Tee
connector type Ior 400A.
m) Low voltage insulators They shall be Ior a voltage oI 1 KV.
n) Low voltage clamps The clamps Ior the connection to low voltage
shall comply with the requirements oI Standard DIN 46200, Part 2 and
Iit the connection oI copper cables.
The clamps and outlets to the neutral and the phases shall have identical
sections.
o) Maximal dimensions oI transIormers The transIormers shall have
maximal dimensions as detailed in Standards IEC 60726 and IEC
60076.
p) The mechanical structure oI the transIormer The mechanical
structure oI the transIormer, base, structure and wheels shall comply
with the requirements oI IEC 60726. The base shall include Iour
wheels to enable the movement oI the transIormer in all directions.
Dampers shall also be installed, between the coils and the structure.
08 (2001)
121
q) Fastening lugs The transIormer shall be equipped with two Iastening
lugs Ior transport and haulage and Iour liIting lugs as per IEC 60726
and IEC 60076.
r) Data notice panel A data notice panel in Hebrew, made oI aluminum
sheet bearing all the details describing the transIormer, as required in
Standard IEC 60076, as well as the Iollowing data: noise level,
connections group, detail oI voltage grades and model oI low voltage
insulators.
s) Earthing bolt The earthing bolt shall be M12 welded to the section oI
the transIormer's base. The bolt shall be equipped with a spring
washer, a nut and the marking oI the earthing.
t) Control and warning board It shall be installed close to the
transIormer and include a temperature controller with a display, control
relays Ior the outlets oI the sensors with an indication dry exchange
contactor Ior each outlet and an activation system oI the Iorced
ventilation (should it be required).
u) Marking The marking shall be identical to the marking oI
transIormers sunken into oil, as detailed in 080932 z).
v) Testing CertiIicate The transIormer shall be equipped with the
Iollowing testing certiIicates:
1. Voltage Testing according to List 2 in Standard IEC 60694.
2. Routine tests including partial discharge tests as detailed in
Standard IEC 60726, with the CertiIicates detailing the voltage,
the capacity, the model, the line and the number oI the
transIormer.
3. Type tests as special tests oI a transIormer oI the same type as
the one which shall be supplied. The data relative to these tests
shall include: shock voltage test, temperature rise test, short-
circuit test and noise test.
w) Forced ventilation Forced ventilation shall be installed upon a
request in the Contract Documents.
The ventilation shall enable the increase oI the capacity by 33. The
equipment Ior the Iorced ventilation shall include blowers and ventilation
ducts. The equipment Ior the operation oI the blowers shall be installed in
the control and warning board. In the board, a by-pass switch Ior the manual
activation oI the blowers and a marking lamp (LED) "blowers in operation,"
shall also be installed.
x) Indications In the control and warning board, shall be installed all the
relays required Ior the indications listed hereinaIter:
1. Temperature warning
2. Activation oI the Iorced ventilation by means oI a sensor
08 (2001)
122
3. Activation oI the Iorced ventilation, manually
4. Interruption oI the transIormer.
The indications contactors shall be wired to the control department in the
HT board.
08094 Cables
080940 General
The cables shall be built and tested according to the requirements oI SI 1516
(IEC 60502). Cables oI other models, iI required, shall be according to the details
in the Special SpeciIication.
The cables in H.T. works shall have a solid tempered insulation, EPR-propylene
ethylene rubber cast or XLPE-crossed polyethylene.
In a speciIied voltage oI (3.6) 1.8/3 KV, there shall also be cables with A or B
PVC insulation, based on PE thermoplastic polyethylene.
080941 Description oI the cable according to the voltage
The cables shall have a speciIied voltage U
o
/U (U
M
) (KV), eIIective value as
detailed: 1.8/3, 3.6/6 (7.2), 6/10 (12), 8.7/15 (17.5), 12/20 (24) and 18/30 (36).
The resistance to shock voltage adjusted to the cables shall be as Iollows:
Table No. 5
SpeciIied
Voltage
(KV)
3.6/6
(7.2)
6/10
(12)
8.7/15
(17.5)
12/20
(24)
18/30
(36)
Testing
Voltage
(KV)
60 75 95 125 170

080942 Laying cables in the ground
All the execution oI the works oI laying cables shall be based on the manual oI
the National Network oI the IEC: "Underground Network." All the technical
instructions included in the manual shall bind the Contractor and represent part oI
the SpeciIication.
The earthworks shall be perIormed as detailed in Sub-Chapter 0801 above.
Should the types oI works be diIIerent Irom those described in the IEC manual,
the cables shall be laid according to the instructions oI the cables ManuIacturer
(requirements concerning the maximal pulling Iorces and the maximal bending
radii).
08 (2001)
123
Upon the completion oI the laying oI the cables, the Contractor shall perIorm an
electrical testing oI the cable. The tests shall be perIormed and recorded
according to the requirements oI paragraph "Testing oI the cable Iollowing its
laying" in SI 1516.
It shall be allowed to bring a cable section, the length oI which shall not exceed a
Iew tens oI meters in a coil wrapping, as it is brought to the un-Ioiling area
packed and wrapped Ior the protection oI the cable.
Such a cable section shall be un-Ioiled and laid along the side oI the ready
excavated trench by unrolling the standing drum along the open trench. It shall be
Iorbidden to put the drum on its side and cause the winding oI the cable, even
when the rolling is stopped.
080943 Fittings
The laying oI cables when the environment temperature is lower than 0C, shall
be carried out according to the instructions oI the ManuIacturer. The use oI
Iittings like muIIles, terminals, sockets-plugs and all unusual works relating to
the type oI cable (coiled lighting cables, Ior example) shall be according to the
ManuIacturer's instructions.
The connection oI cable by means oI a muIIle shall be done only with the
approbation oI the COR.
080944 Terminals and Closures
The Contractor shall use terminals and closures appropriate to the cable and the
equipment to which he must be connected, at both ends. The ends shall be
sheathed.
The Contractor shall make sure that those Iittings meet the insulation level and
the resistance to eIIective testing voltages perIormed Iollowing the completion oI
their installation.
For their Iinal installation and the closure, all the steps imposed by the Iittings
ManuIacturer shall be taken and all the auxiliary materials and the tools be used
according to his instructions.
Attention shall be given to the Iittings storing instructions, their covering on Site
during the work and their warming by means oI burners, as required.
Aluminum-copper Iittings shall be used Ior the connection oI aluminum cables.
080945 Going up on the pole
The cable at its outlet Irom the trench in the ground shall be protected by a worm
type plastic pipe oI adequate dimension that shall be set in the Ioundation up to
its upper surIace. As it goes up on the pole, the cable shall be protected up to a
height oI 2.2 m by an appropriate metallic protection with its lower part
concreted into the concrete Ioundation. The cable and its protection shall be
attached to the pole by steel tapes and clamps (according to the need). Above the
protection, the cable shall be attached by special clamps and go up to the height
oI the arm on which the cable shall be stabilized and attached together with the
08 (2001)
124
terminals. The metallic protection, the steel tapes and the cable clamps shall be oI
the types used by the IEC.
080946 Marking the cables layout Iollowing execution
The marking oI the cables layout Iollowing execution shall be as required in
above paragraph 080266.
08095 Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies for High Voltage
080950 General
Switchgear and control gear assemblies shall be built according to the
requirements oI Standard IEC 60298, IEC 60466 and IEC 60694 and have
Prototype Testing CertiIicate, approved according to the above Standards.
The calculations oI the short-circuit current required Ior holding the tests oI the
assemblies shall be done according to IEC 60909.
Besides this, the assemblies with the switching Iittings they contain must be
approved by the IEC Ior use in the relevant network voltages and in network
earthing methods.
080951 DeIinitions and adaptations to the Standards
a) Rated voltage U
N
the voltage between phases.
b) Rated switchgear voltage U
M
the maximal eIIective voltage to which
the equipment insulation stands up.
c) Highest system voltage U
BMAX
the maximal eIIective voltage that
may appear in the network in the course oI normal service conditions,
at any time and in any point oI the network.
d) Rated insulation level nominal insulation level oI the equipment
according to IEC 60071.
This level is expressed by the resistance oI the switchgear equipment under
testing Ior Ur
B
(BIL) and Ur
W
voltages.
1. Impulse withstand voltage rated lighting UF
B
resistance oI
equipment to shock voltage at wave oI 1,2/50/MS.
2. Frequency withstand voltage rated power U
RW
resistance to
over-voltage created by switching operations and short-circuits
to earth, during 1 minute, 50 Hz.
e) Rated normal current I
N
equipment rated current.
I) Short-circuit power S
N
short-circuit power in MVA units.
g) Rated short time withstand current I
th
1 sec or I
th
3 sec thermal
resistance in eIIective short-circuit current during 1 second or 3
seconds.
08 (2001)
125
h) Rated peak withstand current I
dyn
dynamic resistance at peak short-
circuit current.
Momentary value at the peak oI asymmetric current at the moment when the
short circuit is created.
The ratio between the dynamic peak current and the rated peak withstand
current is according to the Iormula.
I
dyn
_ 2.5 I
th
1 sec
i) Rated short-circuit breaking current characterizing automatic circuit-
breakers and Iuses.
j) Operating currents oI the various load currents disconnectors,
characterizing automatic breakers and disconnecting breakers
(breaking under load):
1. Rated (load) breaking current load current under 0.7 capacity
increase equal to the nominal current oI the equipment I
N
.
2. Cable charging breaking current at least 10A.
3. No-load transIormer breaking current with capacity oI at
least 1250 KV.
4. Breaking current oI single capacitor, equal to at least 80 oI
the rated current.
k) Rated short-circuit making current KA binding all types oI switching
equipment and includes even earthing breakers (when required Irom
the latter ones).
l) Frequency all the switching Iittings shall be alternating current at
Irequency oI 5-60 Hz.
m) Main circuit, contrary to measuring control or auxiliary circuits a
circuit used Ior transIerring energy.
n) Switching connection and disconnection activity.
o) Switching Iield closed part (cabinet) oI a sheathed cabinet
comprising all the main circuit and auxiliary circuits components
which, together, represent a single Iunctional unit; Ior example:
automatic breaking Iield or entrance Iield.
p) Compartment closed part (section) in the switching Iield (cabinet)
comprising a Iunctional component such as a control compartment, a
cables compartment or a bus-bars compartment.
q) Sheathed conventional board a board in which the live parts are
insulated one Irom the other, the board's body has air insulation and the
distances between them Iit the minimal distances speciIied in Table 6
below.
08 (2001)
126
r) Sheathed compact board a board in which the live parts are insulated
one Irom the other and the board body has a diIIerent type oI insulation
such as gas SF6 or besides the air insulation, they are insulated by
means oI cast insulation materials, that enable the shortening oI the
minimal distances mentioned above.
s) Type tests the testing oI the prototype oI the switchgear and control
gear assemblies serves Ior the veriIication oI the characteristics oI the
assemblies, the operational Iittings and the auxiliary instruments.
These tests are perIormed in the ManuIacturer's laboratory.
The list oI the prototype tests appear in the Standards appropriate to each
breaking and control Iitting.
t) Routine tests routine tests oI the switchgear and control gear
assemblies Ior uncovering deIects in the material or the structure oI the
Iinished products.
These tests shall not impair the properties and reliability oI the tested
equipment. These tests are perIormed at the ManuIacturer's plant gates Ior
all the equipment ready to be dispatched.
Any routine test may be perIormed on Site, Iurther to approval by the COR.
The list oI the prototype tests appear in the Standards appropriate to each
breaking and control Iitting.
u) The minimal distances in Tables 6 and 7 below, Ior equipment in air
insulation according to List 2, reIer to the installations detailed
hereinaIter:
1. Conventional sheathed breaking boards;
2. Inner transIormers compartments;
3. External and kiosks transIormers compartments.
Table No. 6
Minimal Clearances oI Air Insulation and Testing Voltages in Lightning Shock
Nominal
Voltage oI
the
Equipment
KV
Shock
Testing
Voltage
in List 2
KV
*Inner High
Voltage
Installations,
mm
KV
External
High Voltage
Installations,
mm
KV
3.6 40 60 150
7.2 60 90 150
17.5
(13.8)
95 120 190
08 (2001)
127
24 125 215 260
36 170 325 360
* Clearances as per Standard IEC 60071-1 "Insulation Coordination"
Remark:
The testing oI the insulation oI a measurement transIormer shall be perIormed
only iI it is possible to perIorm it without having to remove the walls or the
partitions oI the board.

08 (2001)
128
Table No. 7
Requirements Ior the insulation resistance oI the equipment under measurement
test
(as per IEC 60694)
Rated
Voltage oI
the
Equipment
U
M

Testing Voltage Under
Lightning Shock (peak rate) in
wave MS
U
RB
1.2/50
Testing oI Over-voltage oI 50
Hz during 1 minute - U
RW
Between
the poles
and
between
the poles
and the
earth,
between
open
contactors
oI the
equipment
At the
saIety
breaking
distance
Between
the poles
and
between
the poles
and the
earth,
between
open
contactors
oI the
equipment
At the
saIety
breaking
distance
List 2 List 2
KV KV KV KV KV
3.6 40 46 10 12
7.2 60 70 20 23
12.0 75 85 28 32
17.5
(13.8)
95 110 38 45
24 125 145 50 60
36 170 195 70 80
Time in micro-seconds: 1.2 MS is the time needed Ior the wave-Iront to reach the
peak; 50 MS is the time needed Ior the return-voltage wave to reach its
momentary value, which is equal to halI the peak.
v) Air insulated equipment with additional insulation.
The encapsulation oI live parts oI breaking equipment and oI bus-bars with
insulating materials enables the lessening oI the minimal clearances
indicated in Table 7, provided that these insulating materials themselves and
the additional insulation equipment they comprise shall successIully pass
the appropriate tests U
RW
. The same rule shall also apply to the bus-bars in
compact boards that they insulate and which are under air insulation.
w) Breaking Iittings and their denominations:
1. Disconnector
2. Earthing switch
3. Switch disconnector
08 (2001)
129
4. General purpose switch disconnector
5. Circuit breaker
6. Switch-Iuse and Iused switch.
080952 Low voltage circuits
The various auxiliary equipment, the electrical protection mechanisms, the circuit
wiring, protections and measurement instruments in the Control Depot are
described hereinaIter.
a) The protection oI control circuits etc. shall be by means oI switches
with neutral disconnection Ior short-circuit current oI 10 KA, as per
IEC 60898. The switches shall have, iI needed, auxiliary contactors.
b) Auxiliary equipment shall Iit the current required by the instruments,
which use it.
Unless otherwise required, all the items in the auxiliary equipment shall Iit a
minimal current oI 10A, Ior a lapse oI time, within the limits oI the allowed
temperature rise.
The auxiliary breakers shall be capable to disconnect and connect current oI
at least 2A in a voltage oI 230V, within the Iramework oI direct circuit
time-Iixation oI 0.020 seconds.
Auxiliary breakers Ied Irom an inner or external source shall operate
regularly with limits oI 85 to 110 oI the rated voltage, within the
declared connecting timeIrame.
Auxiliary breakers Ied by hydraulic or pneumatic energy, shall operate
regularly within 85 to 100 limits oI the rated pressure, within the
declared connecting timeIrame.
Electrical motors Ior the stressing oI a spring, the liIting oI weights or the
motion oI a compressor shall operate regularly within limits to 85 to
110 oI the direct voltage or alternating voltage in the rated Irequency.
Shunt releases shall operate regularly within 85 to 100 limits oI the
rated voltage, on top oI the coil clamps and oI those which are operated by
means oI a capacitor rectiIier coupling their load shall hold a Iurther 5
seconds Iollowing the disconnection oI the voltage Irom the coupling's
clamps.
Under-voltage releases shall operate within the Iollowing limits:
1. The release oI a switching Iitting shall start a Iall oI voltage on the
mechanism only aIter the 35 oI the rated voltage. Reconnection
oI the switching Iitting shall start only Iollowing a rise oI 85 oI
the rated voltage.
2. Interlocks activated by low or high voltage shall operate within
limits oI 85 to 100 oI the rated pressure.
08 (2001)
130
Fuses and other equipment requiring supervision during their operation shall
be accessible without the need to expose conductors or high voltage parts in
order to get access to them.
c) The wiring oI low voltage circuits shall be protected and separated
Irom the equipment and the main circuits in the metallic grounded
rigid or Ilexible ducts (pipes) or the metallic grounded partitions or
partitions made oI insulating material.
All the wiring Irom the control compartment to other compartments and
Iields shall be protected by sheathed earthed pipes. These pipes shall not
pass through the bus-bars compartments.
Separate circuits shall be installed Ior various uses such as current
exchangers, voltage exchangers, heating devices, compartments, etc.
The conductors shall be twisted with PVC insulation and rated voltage oI
1,000V, with minimal section oI 2.5 sq.mm. For circuits in which the
current shall not exceed 0.5A, it shall be allowed to use 1.5 sq.mm sections.
Close to the connections, the conductors shall remain loose.
The extremities oI Ilexible conductors shall be equipped with pressure
sleeves or cable shoes, both oI them made oI copper.
All the threaded contactors shall be closed under pressure (closure moment)
as imposed by the equipment's ManuIacturer.
Clamps shall be insulated Ior 500V by thermostatic molded material, with
non-tracking dielectric resistance oI 100 KV/cm, according to IEC 60243.
The clamps shall be installed as detailed in above paragraph 080681. There
shall be an addition oI 30 clamps Ior reserve.
Conductors passing through the boards Iields shall end up with clamps
rulers Iacing the ruler oI the adjacent ruler.
Clamps Ior current exchangers shall consist oI highest class insulation
material, as described above and be equipped with sliding contactors and
bridges to enable the connection oI the current exchanger, its shortening, its
measurement and the measurement oI the relay.
d) The measurement instruments shall be as required in above paragraph
080696.
e) The high voltage compartments shall be equipped with heating
elements Ior drying the board, according to the recommendations oI
the ManuIacturer. The heating elements oI each board shall be
activated together, by means oI a moisture-meter and with the
possibility to activate them by means oI a by-pass switch. In the
heating elements circuit, a current-meter shall be installed with
indication oI the nominal current oI the heating elements.
I) For secondary protection oI the current-breakers requiring auxiliary
voltage, a U.P.S. system with charger shall be installed. The U.P.S.
system shall have an appropriate capacity but oI not less than 500 VA
08 (2001)
131
Ior 15 minutes. The system shall also have contactors Ior the indication
oI a Iailure in the system's Ieeding and any Iailure at the system's
outlet.
g) The high voltage boards shall be equipped with a capacity indicator oI
the high voltage. The plugs oI the indicator shall be indicator shock
prooI as per VDE 0681.
h) Notice panels shall be installed on the instruments boards behind the
doors, as well as inside the compartments so that it shall be possible to
identiIy the instruments and clamps rulers.
08096 Switching and Control Fittings in the Boards
080960 General
The conditions under which boards switching and control Iittings are
manuIactured and tested, are those oI Standard IEC 60694.
This Standard applies to all the switching and control Iittings used Ior indoor or
outdoor installation and built Ior AC voltages over 1,000V and Irequency up to
60 Hz (inclusive).
All that is stated in the various paragraphs oI IEC 60694 shall apply to all the
switching and control Iittings, unless otherwise stated in a given paragraph oI one
oI other Standards (addition or reduction).
All the switching equipment shall be equipped with two auxiliary contactors
usually open (N.O.) and two auxiliary contactors usually closed (N.C.), besides
the auxiliary contactors needed Ior indications and the operation oI the
equipment.
080961 Disconnectors and earthing switches
Disconnectors and earthing switches shall be built and tested as per Standard IEC
60129.
Whenever these switching Iittings are metal enclosed, there shall be additional
requirements oI the sheathed boards Standard.
080962 Disconnectors and breakers under load
Disconnectors and breakers under load shall be built and tested as per Standard
IEC 60265-1.
The Standard determining requirements Ior three types oI load-disconnectors
characterized by their rated Ieeding current:
- General purpose switch-disconnectors
- TransIormer switch-disconnectors (transIormer with no-load)
- Capacitor switch-disconnectors (capacitors batteries unit).
08 (2001)
132
080963 Switches with Iuses
Switch-Iuse assemblies shall be built and tested as per Standard IEC 60420. The
assembly shall be able to interrupt:
- any load up to the rated Ieeding current oI the switch-
disconnector,
- any over-current up to the rated Ieeding current oI the
assembly, which activates an automatic interruption
080964 Automatic current-interrupters
Automatic current-interrupters shall be built and tested as per Standard IEC
60056.
The Standard does not apply to their closing mechanisms, which are under
manual operating Iorces.
080965 Control gear and indications
The control systems, which are integral parts oI the control gear and switching
gear equipment, are based on equipment designed and supplied in combination
with the switching Iittings or the boards.
This equipment mainly includes the Iollowing components:
Equipment TransIormers current and voltage exchange, used as power sources.
Relays assemblies, used Ior operation and protection.
Auxiliary switches, used Ior control oI auxiliary circuits.
The components oI this equipment, built according to their speciIic Standards,
shall be supplied by the Contractor together with Iull Testing Reports and
identiIication panels, testiIying their quality and characteristic perimeters.
Instruments Transformers these are small capacity transIormers used Ior
Ieeding protection, control and supervision circuits as well as measurement
instruments, as they are separated Irom the high voltage circuits oI the switching
equipment to which they are connected.
These transIormers are built according to Standard IEC 60044 and the current
exchangers shall stand up to the requirements oI IEC 60185 and voltage
exchangers, to the requirements oI IEC 60186. Their insulation level shall be
determined by Standard IEC 60073.
The transIormers shall be tested by the Prototype Test Method Ior Lightning
Shock Current and by Routine Tests Ior over-voltage, 50 Hz as well as by Partial
Discharge Tests.
Voltage Transformer this transIormer which practically operates under a
minimal voltage, shall be protected in the Iirst winding by Iast high switching
power Iuses. The protective earthing clamp oI the transIormer's body shall be
connected to the earthing.
08 (2001)
133
Multiple-Meter the main high voltage board shall be equipped with a separate
multiple-meter or one, which shall be part oI the protective system. The multiple-
meter shall measure three voltages, three currents, current-demand peaks, active
capacity, dummy capacity, active capacity demand peak, capacity coeIIicient,
Irequency and equipment at the RS 485 communication outlet and in the
communication protocol, in view oI transIerring the measurements to the control
system.
Protection Systems electromagnetic and electronic relays, shall be tested
according to Standard IEC 60255. The protection systems shall have
communication outlets. The type oI protections and their calibration shall be
according to the rules oI the IEC National Network.
Watt-metric Protection shall be installed Iollowing a request in the Special
SpeciIications.
Indications auxiliary contactors oI the equipment shall be linked to the control
compartment Ior the indications. The list oI indications Iollows hereinaIter:
- Disconnector or switch: close, open
- Earthing disconnector: close, open
- Switch-Iuse: close, open and indication oI burnt Iuse
- Automatic current interrupter close, open and indication oI
protection activity
- Heating elements system Iailure
- Indications Irom the non-actuating system.
For the transIer oI indications oI high voltage board equipment and the
transIormers Ied Irom it, communication outlets shall be installed in the
controller board.
Alternatively, it shall be allowed to transIer indications through a multiple-meter
or the protective system.
080966 Interlocking
The postulate condition Ior ensuring saIety in the activation oI switching Iittings
in the board is the knowledge oI the operation situation oI the disconnector and
earthing switch. FulIilling one oI the Iollowing requirements shall represent a
satisIactory reply:
a) A clearly visible saIety separation gap oI the disconnector.
b) A visually clearly diIIerentiation between the Iollowing operation
situations oI the pulled-out Iitting:
1. a situation dissociated Irom the service situation;
2. it is possible to clearly identiIy a Iull connection or a Iull
disconnection oI the Iitting;
08 (2001)
134
3. the operation situation oI the disconnector and the earthing
switch is indicated by a reliable mechanism.
c) Drawn-out equipment
The drawing-out or insertion oI an automatic switch, a load disconnector
and a high voltage contactor (hereinaIter the switching Iittings) shall not be
possible, unless the Iitting shall be in a "open-disconnected" situation.
The activation oI the switching Iitting shall be possible in one oI the
Iollowing situations: "service situation," "disconnected situation," "test
situation" or "earthed situation."
The closure oI the connection oI the switching Iitting shall not be possible
in the "service situation" unless it shall be connected to the auxiliary circuit
(by means oI a plug-socket) or iI built Ior operation without the auxiliary
circuit.
d) Equipment that cannot be drawn-out
Interlocks shall prevent the activation oI interrupters, contrary to whatever
was stated in paragraph b) above.
An interlock shall prevent the activation oI an interruption unless the
switching Iitting shall be in a "open-disconnected" situation (not applicable
to boards with double bus-bars).
An interlock shall prevent the activation oI a switch Iitting, unless the
interrupter connected in series, shall be in a "closed-connected" or "open-
disconnected" or "earthed" situation.
In order to prevent Iailures, it is recommended that the earthing-interrupters
shall have over-short circuit connection capacities identical to those oI the
switching Iitting, unless they are combined in their operation, with their
interrupters.
Switching Iittings, permanently Iixed in the board, and that cannot be pulled
out, shall be equipped with locking mechanisms Ior "disconnected
situation."
In compact boards, interlocks shall be installed Ior the prevention oI the
dismantling oI the external covers oI the board, unless the voltage shall be
disconnected and an earthing and short circuit connection has been
perIormed.
Should a disconnector be installed in the board, which is manually activated
by means oI a lever, the disconnector shall be "on" (closed) by the liIting oI
the level and "oII" (open) by the lowering oI the lever.
On top oI the board, a notice shall be displayed to clariIy by means oI a
drawing the activation and combining instructions.
08 (2001)
135
080967 Signage on the board
An identiIication panel with a number shall be installed on each Iield or
compartment.
The serial number oI the transIormer and the identiIication tags oI the main
circuit breaker in the high voltage shall be indicated on Iields and compartments
Ieeding transIormers.
The size oI the Iusible or the models oI the protective relays shall be indicated on
compartments comprising Iuses or protective relays.
The notice board on the main inlet Iield shall be in a prominent color diIIerent
Irom the others.
Warning notices pointing out to danger shall be installed on boards Ied Irom
more than one Ieeding source.
On the compartment oI cables connected to one side oI switching Iittings, a
notice panel Iorbidding the perIormance oI tests under cables voltage, when the
second side beyond the saIety separation gap is still under voltage, shall be
installed.
080968 The construction oI the boards
The construction oI boards, the installation oI the kit oI switchgears and control
gears into the insulating sheathed structure or into a complete sheathed structure
oI an industrialized board (AC metal enclosed switch control gear) comprising
other switch control gears and equipment components, shall be done according to
Standard IEC 60056, including the testing oI the completed board.
The present speciIication shall not apply to the equipment detailed below. This
equipment shall be constructed according to requirements in the Special
SpeciIication.
a) Industrialized sheathed boards including gas reservoirs/compartments
under pressure exceeding 3 atmospheres.
b) Industrialized sheathed boards Ior special uses such as those
Iunctioning in inIlammable or explosible atmospheres.
c) Components installed in industrialized sheathed boards Ior which there
is a Special SpeciIication not covered by Standards Ior switch and
control gear (meaning: main insulation components).
080969 General requirements Ior switching Iittings
The requirements Ior the adaptation oI switching equipment to the conditions oI
the network in the country are as Iollows:
a) Table No. 8 Comparison between the voltages grades

IEC Distribution Network
Voltage Degree oI
Equipment in High
Voltage;
08 (2001)
136
Distribution
Network Nominal
Voltage
Distribution
Network Maximal
Voltage
KV as per IEC
60071
6.3 6.6 7.2
12.6 13.8 17.5
22 24 24
33 36 36

b) For requirements concerning resistance oI the equipment's insulation
under testing loads (as per IEC 60694), see Table 7 in paragraph
080951 above.
Table No. 9
Resistance oI the high voltage equipment in short-circuits currents
Type oI the short-circuits currents Rated Voltage oI Equipment
7
.
2
1
2
(1
3.
8)
1
7.
5
2
4
3
6
Resistance in thermal short circuits
current
I
th
Ior 1 second KA (RMS)
1
6
1
6
1
6
1
2
.
5
8
.
5
Connection ability in peak value
short-circuit current KA 4
0
4
0
4
0
3
1
.
5
2
1
Disconnection ability in short
circuit current KA (RMS) 1
6
1
6
1
6
1
2
.
5
8
.
5

Remarks:
1. The thermal short-circuit current resistance I
th
shall apply to
equipment such as: current interrupters, load disconnectors,
disconnectors without load, earthing disconnectors,
measurement transIormers, Iuses, high voltage boards (bus-
bars).
08 (2001)
137
2. The short-circuit current resistance shall apply to the
equipment listed in the Table according to the Formula.
3. Thermal short-circuit currents (I
dyn
_ 2.55 I
th
) are rated Ior
periods oI time TN longer than 1 second (usually 3 seconds)
shall relate to the values inscribed in the Table according to the
Iormula I
th
_ I
tn
V tn
4. Connection ability in short-circuits currents shall apply to
equipment such as: current interrupters, disconnectors under
load and earthing disconnectors.
5. Disconnecting ability in short circuits currents shall apply to
high voltage Iuses and current breakers.
08097 Metal Enclosed Boards
Sheathed boards are divided into three types:
a) Metal-clad switch gear usually divided along its width into sheathed
switching Iields; each Iield shall include a switching Iitting so that, Ior
example, an automatic disconnecting Iield or a switch-disconnect Iield
or a Iield speciIic to a transIormer or meters, shall be created.
The height oI the Iield or the height oI all the board shall be divided by
horizontal metallic partitions into compartments, such as a bus-bar (separate
Ior each group oI bus-bars) or a control board, etc.
It shall be permitted Ior a drawable disconnector Iield separation shutter
partition to be made oI insulated material, provided that there shall be a
protective level oI IP 2X.
Unless otherwise indicated in the Special SpeciIication, the board shall be oI
the metal-clad type.
b) Compartmented switchgear its width shall be divided into sheathed
switching Iields and the height oI the Iields shall be divided by means
oI horizontal partitions, into compartments.
One or more partitions may be made oI insulating material, provided that
there shall be a protective level oI IP 2X.
c) Cubicle switchgear this is a sheathed metallic cube, the width oI
which shall be divided in switching Iittings columns, columns also
without partitions between them. The column compartment, except Ior
sheathed control compartments, may be also without partitions.
Unless otherwise indicated, the bus-bars in the boards shall be insulated
with highest quality insulating materials.
The insulating material Ior bus-bars and insulation plates Ior protection, oI
which the partitions and shutters are made, shall be tested Ior resistance to
over-voltage oI the network Irequency during 1 minute U
RW
.
08 (2001)
138
The switching boards shall be equipped with the testing certiIicates required
in Standards DIN/VDE and IEC Ior switching Iittings installed in these
boards; they shall be built on the base oI the requirements oI National
Network Rules "High Voltage Switching Equipment Technical
Requirements." The boards shall stand up to the IEC tests, as required in the
above Network Rules.
Imported switching equipment arrives in the country with kits in the Iields
that have stood up, one by one, to the routine tests oI the manuIacturing
plant.
Following the reception oI the consignment, the Contractor shall inspect its
state, transport and assembly the single boards into a Iull board. This
assembling shall be perIormed in a Plant with a license Ior assembling
works, testing and installation.
08098 The Manufacturer's Instructions
The Contractor shall submit to the COR the ManuIacturer an instructions Iile that
shall include at least the Iollowing:
a) Testing CertiIicate;
b) Description and packing instructions oI the consignment, its storage in
such a way so as to protect the equipment Irom moiture;
c) Opening the packing and the transport method oI the equipment;
d) The assembly oI the Iields into one complete board and the separation
oI the auxiliary circuits Irom the main circuit;
e) The execution oI connections, the prevention oI their heating and over-
stressing, while keeping minimal clearances;
I) The execution oI gas connections;
g) The execution oI earthing connections;
h) Instructions Ior testing prior to voltage connections;
i) Maintenance instructions;
j) Rules Ior the required maintenance operations, the number oI
operations, time laps between them and criteria Ior initiated operations.
Preventive maintenance and inspection Iollowing activations in short-
circuit or in a large enough number oI regular activations;
k) Attention to the main circuit, periodical inspection, contactors
regulation and replacement, arc-contactors maximal permissible
corrosion extent, the preservation oI the maximal resistivity value oI
the circuit; the Iits, the opening and closing times;
l) Care oI liquids or gas Ior cooling or arc extinguishing needs;
08 (2001)
139
m) Instructions Ior removing samples Ior testing: drying, Iilling, quality
and purity (no pollution) including the number oI samples;
n) Care oI the activation Iittings: maintenance, regulation oI values,
Iitting procedures;
o) Care oI accessory Iittings maintenance procedures with emphasis on
the inspection oI sensitive items;
p) Care oI bearings inspection oI critical bearings;
q) Care oI electrical connections inspection oI critical bearings;
r) Oiling and greasing, including oil and grease pastes speciIications;
s) Instructions Ior preventing corrosion;
t) Parts and disposable materials schedule;
u) Special tools Ior erection, assembly and restoration.
08099 Inspection of Boards
a) All the switching Iittings, transIormers and main insulation
components, such as current and voltage exchangers, insulators oI all
kinds, lightning arresters and Iuses shall be equipped with prototype
and routine inspections certiIicates prior to leaving the ManuIacturer's
plant. Part oI them, as required in the relevant Standards, shall also be
equipped with testing certiIicates Ior partial dismantling.
These tests shall be carried out in the country oI origin.
b) Upon the arrival oI the above equipment and its assembly in this
country, into equipment Iields or into a Iull board oI equipment Iields,
it shall be submitted to the routine tests required according to IEC
60298, adapted to the relevant execution stage, assembly oI Iields or
Iinal erection oI the board. The tests shall be as Iollows:
1. Activation tests Ior testing the operation oI the switching
Iitting, inspection oI the combination and connection oI other
Iittings and also the instruction oI the operators;
2. Final commissioning test (Ior the handing-over);
3. Part oI the tests shall also be done by IEC representatives,
according to the requirements oI the National Network Rules
"Switching Equipment Technical Requirements."
c) Tests involving the dismantling and re-assembling oI electrical
connections, at the end oI the tests, shall be executed with special care
and according to an index prepared beIorehand, with the Iastening oI
the connector and closing moment imposed by the equipment
ManuIacturer.
All the tests series shall be Iormally recorded in Test Reports.
08 (2001)
140
0800.00 - Take-Off Procedures for Electrical Installations

0800.01 Take-off Methods
Electrical Installations shall be taken oII by one oI the Iollowing methods or the
combination oI some oI them, as instructed in one oI the Contract Documents:
a) Take-oII according to the installation's components;
b) Take-oII per standard measuring units (such as length, weight, etc.);
c) Take-oII per equipment units (luminaires, Iittings, etc.);
d) Take-oII per points;
e) Take-oII per complete work sections (Total).
In paragraphs 0800.68 to 0800.78, the take-oII procedures Ior high voltage
installations in those paragraphs where the take-oII procedures are diIIerent Irom
those related to low voltage installations, are detailed.
0800.02 Contents of the Prices
Besides whatever is stated in paragraph "Contents oI Prices" in Chapter 00
Preliminaries, the prices oI Electrical Installations shall also include the works
listed hereinaIter:
a) All the saIety measures required Ior the execution oI the work;
b) Preparatory works such as: installation oI sleeves prior to casting
concrete, chiseling in walls and ceilings (concrete or blocks),
Iormation oI holes and grooves, passages with diameters up to 125 mm
through walls and ceilings and up to 25 cm thick, Iilling oI grooves
around sleeves, including plastering and paint;
c) Handing over the installation in stages:
1. Ior the execution oI building works and run-in oI the
installation
2. Ior the occupation oI the building in stages;
d) Testing the Installation and Trial Operation, as detailed in paragraph
08008 above. Unless otherwise stated in the one oI the Contract
Documents, the cost oI the tests shall be borne by the Contractor and
included in his unit prices.
The testing oI the Electrical Installation shall be perIormed according to one
oI the Iollowing alternatives, as it shall be indicated in the Special
SpeciIication. Unless otherwise speciIied, the test shall be carried out
according to paragraph 1.:
08 (2001)
141
1. Testing the installation by an IEC Tester or another Testing
Electrician approved beIorehand by the COR. The test shall be
carried out at the Contractor's cost. II the IEC Testing Cost has
been paid by the Client, the amount shall be deducted Irom the
payments to the Contractor. The Contractor shall supply all the
means and tools needed Ior the test, including the participation
oI Electricians on his behalI, who know well the Installation
and are able to provide answers to the Tester's questions and
assist him (should he apply Ior assistance) in executing the
measurements. All the expenses linked with the above tests and
assistance shall be included by the Contractor in his unit prices
and not be paid Ior separately.
2. The testing oI the Installation shall be perIormed by a Testing
Electrician or an IEC Tester invited by the oIIice; the oIIice
shall pay the Tester's Iees but the Contractor shall supply all
the means and tools needed Ior the test, including the
participation oI Electricians on his behalI, who know well the
Installation and are able to provide answers to the Tester's
questions and assist him (should he apply Ior assistance) in
executing the measurements. All the expenses linked with the
above test and assistance shall be included by the Contractor in
his unit prices and not be paid Ior separately.
Return tests shall be borne by the Contractor, as stated in paragraph 35, 11 b
oI the Standard Contract (shelI 3210).
e) Should the Contractor be required, in one oI the Contract Documents,
to provide a detailed design oI parts oI the Installation, such as
switching and control gears (electrical boards), high voltage
installations, etc., the cost oI the design shall be seen as included in the
unit prices.
I) Unless otherwise stated, the prices include supply, installation and
connection. It may happen that the same connection shall be included
in more than one paragraph (such as in the price oI the Iitting and in
the price oI the cable). This Iact shall not be a cause Ior the Contractor
to claim a price supplement relative to the connection included in one
paragraph only.
g) Sealing oI pipes, ducts and cables passage against Iire expansion
and/or the passage oI gases between Iloors, in walls and in penetrations
into protected spaces, iI not indicated separately in the Bill oI
Quantities.
h) Tightening oI bolts at the end oI the warranty year.
i) The prices oI high voltage installations (paragraph 0800.68 to 0800.78
below) shall also include: arms, supports, tables, bolts, stress
insulators, auxiliary and passages insulators, bridging conductors,
earthing knees, locks, etc., unless iI detailed separately in the Bill oI
Quantities.
j) Marking and signage, as detailed in the above SpeciIication paragraphs
and the other Contract Documents.
08 (2001)
142
k) As Made Drawings.
In order to remove any doubt, all what is stated above shall also apply to an
installation comprising a number oI users, such as: apartments, hostels,
commercial centers, etc.
0800.03 Earth, Concrete and Masonry Works
Unless otherwise stated in the paragraphs below, the earth, concrete and masonry
works needed Ior the execution oI the Electrical Installation shall be taken oII
subject to whatever is stated in the Iollowing chapters:
Chapter 01 Earthworks
Chapter 02 Cast in Place Concrete Works
Chapter 04 Masonry
Chapter 51 Construction oI Airport Runways, Roads and Public Squares
Chapter 57 Water, Sewage and Stormwater Pipes
0800.04 Pipes
Pipes shall be taken oII in meters along the pipe's axis, with the indication oI its
type and diameter. The price oI the pipe shall include all the reinIorcements,
supports, clamps, bends, connection boxes, passage boxes, etc., excluding
ladders, as stated below.
The price oI the pipe shall also include a pull-through cord, should there be no
conductors in the pipe and this iI the pull-through cord shall not appear in a
special paragraph oI the Bill oI Quantities.
The price oI underground pipes shall also include the closure oI the extremities
oI the pipe, as detailed.
0800.05 Special Boxes
Special boxes, which are not included in the prices oI the pipes, the cables, etc.,
shall be taken oII separately with the indication oI their dimensions, their
insulation level (IP) and their intended use.
0800.06 Ladders
Vertical ladders and horizontal ladders used Ior bearing various pipes or cables
shall be taken oII by one oI the Iollowing ways:
a) According to the ladder's length in meters, along the ladder's axis, with
the indication oI its width and the material it shall be made oI. The
price shall also include bends, angles, branching, supports, hangers,
reinIorcements, connectors, earthing clamps along the ladder and
various ladder Iittings. The structure bearing a number oI ladders shall
be included in the price oI the ladder.
08 (2001)
143
b) According to the weight oI the metal Iorming the ladder, in kg, with
indication oI the dimensions and oI the material, the weight including
all that is stated in above paragraph a).
0800.07 Ducts for Installation
Ducts Ior installation are taken oII in one oI the Iollowing ways:
a) According to the length oI the duct in meters along the axis oI the duct
with the indication oI its dimensions, the material it is made oI and the
request Ior a cover.
The price shall also include bends, angles, branching, supports, hangers,
reinIorcements, connectors, earthing clamps along the length oI the duct,
various Iittings and inner reinIorcement in the duct. Structures bearing a
number oI ducts are included in the ducts prices. Covers Ior the ducts are
included in the ducts prices, unless otherwise stated.
b) According to the weight oI the metal Iorming the ladder, in kg, with
indication oI the dimensions and oI the material, the weight including
all that is stated in above paragraph a).
c) Non-metallic ducts are taken oII as stated in a) above.
0800.08 Excavation of Trenches
The excavation oI trenches reIers to excavation and/or breaking. The take-oII
shall be according to the length oI the trench in meters, along the axis oI the
trench with the indication oI its width and its depth. Unless otherwise stated, the
depth oI the trench shall be taken oII to be 100 cm and its width 40 cm.
The price shall also include the Iollowing:
- Should it be required in the Contract Documents, concrete or
blocks plates or plastic plates Ior protecting the cables;
- Padding sand around the cables and Ior their cover, including a
sand layer between layers oI pipes;
- Marking tapes;
- The cover oI the trench;
- The restoration oI the ground surIace to its previous state.
Hand excavation shall be taken oII separately, only iI it shall be ordered
beIorehand in writing by the COR.
0800.09 Repair Following Trench Excavation in Existing Roads, Sidewalks
or Lanes
The repair oI existing roads, sidewalks or lanes shall be taken oII according to
the length oI the trench in meters, along the axis oI the trench with the indication
oI the width oI the trench and its type such as: asphalt, concrete, tiles, etc. The
08 (2001)
144
price shall also include breaking layers (sawing) oI asphalt, concrete or
dismantling various Ilooring tiles.
0800.10 Built or Cast Trenches
Built or cast trenches shall be taken oII according to the length oI the trench in
meters with the indication oI the internal dimensions oI the trench. The price
shall also include the earthworks, Iormwork and the auxiliary works such as
reinIorcement, covers, bases Ior the covers, metal sections Ior the support oI
cables and their Iittings.
0800.11 Horizontal Boring
The take-oII oI an horizontal bore shall be according the length in meters with
indication oI the diameter. The price shall also include the Iollowing:
a) All the preparatory works required in all types oI ground;
b) Pipes oI the types and diameter indicated in the Contract Documents;
c) Pull-through cords, as detailed.
0800.12 Cast or Built or Precast Manholes
Cast or built or precast manholes shall be taken oII by unit with indication oI the
type, the inner dimensions oI the manholes and the type oI slab and top
(according to SI 489).
The price shall also include the earthworks, Iormwork, materials and auxiliary
and accompanying works required such as the reinIorcement, slab and top, rungs,
cleaning, aggregates layer Ior manhole without a concrete bottom, signage on the
top.
0800.13 Bus-bars Ducts
Bus-bars ducts shall be taken oII by one oI the Iollowing methods:
a) According to the length oI the duct in meters along the duct's axis with
indication oI the current it shall convey, the bus-bars materials and the
tightness requirements. The price shall also include metal sections,
branching, connections (to transIormers, cables or boards), level and
direction changes elements, Iire isolation elements, expansion
elements, supports, hangers, reinIorcements, legs and all that may be
needed Ior the completion and operation oI the duct.
Outlets Irom the ducts (plug-socket or Iixed) shall not be included in the
price and shall be taken oII separately.
b) Similarly to paragraph a) above but metal sections, branching,
connections, level and direction changes elements shall be taken oII
separately.
In this case, the length oI the Iittings taken oII separately shall not be
included in the length oI the duct when the quantities shall be taken oII.
08 (2001)
145
Unless otherwise expressly speciIied, the duct shall be taken oII according
to method a).
0800.14 Conductors
Conductors shall be taken oII according to their length in meters with indication
oI the type and section between two terminals. The length oI the conductor Iound
inside a conduit shall be taken oII as the length oI the conduit into which it lays.
The prices include also the reserve, the insertion into the pipe or the laying in the
duct, the sections outside the ducts or the pipes which are needed Ior the wiring
and connection into the Iitting and the board, the various clamps, the insulation
sleeves, the cable shoes, the connections at both extremities, the marking Ior the
identiIication oI the conductor at its connection point to the board and the Iitting.
0800.15 Cables
Cables shall be taken oII according to their length in meters with indication oI the
type and section between two terminals. The length oI the cable Iound inside a
conduit shall be taken oII as the length oI the conduit into which it lays. The
price includes also the reserve, the insertion into the pipe or the laying in the
duct, the sections outside the ducts or the pipes which are needed Ior the wiring
and connection into the Iitting and the board, the various clamps, the insulation
sleeves, the cable shoes, boxes and all the reinIorcements (except ladders),
connections at both extremities, split-terminals Ior cables oI 35 sq.mm and above
(Ior outdoor lighting 10 sq.mm and above), marking Ior the identiIication oI the
cable and markings on the cable's conductors at their connecting points to the
board and the Iitting.
In the absence oI a paragraph in the Bill oI Quantities, the price oI the cable shall
also include its protection as it goes up on a wall or on a pole.
0800.16 Aerial Cables
Aerial cables shall be taken oII according to their length in meters oI bearing
wire, with the indication oI their type and section, between anchoring points,
without any supplement Ior sagging nor bridging. The price shall also include
attachments oI the cable to the bearing wire, Iittings Ior the connection oI cables
and branching, connectors and Iittings to the insulated aerial wire network,
anchoring Iitting and Iastening oI the bearing wire.
0800.17 Aerial Network
Aerial networks shall be taken oII according to their length in meters oI wire in
its horizontal projection, with no supplement Ior sag nor bridging and with
indication oI its type and section.
The price shall also include the installation oI insulators, the insulators, including
the base and arms, the stressing, all the Iittings required Ior attaching the wires on
the insulators and their stressing, as well as the Iittings connecting the wires
between themselves. The price shall also include the marking by means oI balls,
should it be so required in the SpeciIication.
08 (2001)
146
0800.18 Insulated Aerial Network
Insulated aerial networks shall be taken oII according to their length in meters oI
network between anchoring points, with no supplement Ior sag nor bridge. The
price shall also include Iittings Ior the connection and installation oI the network.
0800.19 Wooden Poles
Wooden poles shall be taken oII in units with the indication oI their total length.
The price shall also include preservative treatment as required in the
SpeciIication, transport to the Site, dispersal oI the poles in the Site, marking oI
the layout, excavation and breaking oI pits Ior the erection oI the pole, erection oI
the pole, reIilling the pit, removal oI earth surplus and identiIication tags.
0800.20 Concrete Poles
Wooden poles shall be taken oII in units with the indication oI their total length
and the shape oI their section. The price shall also include preservative treatment
as required in the SpeciIication, transport to the Site, dispersal oI the poles in the
Site, marking oI the layout, excavation and breaking oI pits Ior the erection oI the
pole, erection oI the pole, reIilling the pit, removal oI earth surplus and
identiIication tags.
0800.21 Poles Made of Sections and Channels
Poles made oI sections and channels shall be taken oII as units with the
indication oI the pole's type, its height and the sections composing it. The price
shall also include its transport to the Site, the marking oI the layout, the dispersal
oI the poles in the Site, excavation and breaking oI a pit Ior the Ioundation, the
concrete Ioundation according to the dimensions indicated in the Contract
Documents, reIilling oI the pit, the removal oI earth surplus, the erection oI the
pole, identiIication tags, arms, earthing, bolts, installation Iittings, earthing oI the
pole to the concrete Ioundations and means Ior preventing climbing.
0800.22 Anchors
Anchors shall be taken oII as units with indication oI the wire's section. The price
shall also include the anchor's wire, the reinIorcement plate, Iastening elements
to the pole and the plate, separation insulator, stressing mechanism (iI required),
anchoring hook, marking means, excavation oI a pit Ior the Ioundation, large
stones, reIilling oI the pit, removal oI earth surplus and stressing.
0800.23 Metallic Lighting Poles
Metallic lighting poles shall be measured as units with the indication oI the
material, the shape oI the section and the height (the net height without the arm).
The price shall also include the Iollowing:
- Fill oI the gap between the Ioundation plate and the Ioundation
upper surIace;
- Preparations and attachments Ior the arms and the lantern;
08 (2001)
147
- Painting oI the pole, should it be required in one oI the
Contract Documents and iI there shall be no separate paragraph
Ior it in the Bill oI Quantities;
- Marking oI the pole;
- Transport to the Site and dispersal oI the poles in the Site;
- Erection oI the pole.
0800.24 Foundation for the Lighting Poles
a) The Ioundation Ior the lighting poles shall be taken oII as a unit with
indication oI its dimensions.
The price shall include surveying, marking, excavation and breaking oI
Ioundation pit, concrete Ioundation casting, anchoring bolts system
(including steel rails connecting them) and their concreting, nuts and
washers Ior the anchoring bolts, cables passage sleeves, Iilling oI empty
spaces on the sides oI the Ioundation, Iilling oI gap between the Ioundation
plate and the Ioundation, removal or earth surplus, compaction and
reIormation oI asphalt surIace in those places where the Ioundation pit shall
be excavated through the asphalt.
b) The Ioundation oI a lighting pole in inter-cities roads or in gardens
shall be taken oII as in paragraph a) above, but the price shall also
include the truncation oI the Ioundation edges, the apron and the
painting oI the Ioundation and the apron oI painted poles.
0800.25 Arms for the Luminaires
a) Arms Ior the luminaires on top oI a lighting pole (made oI steel or
aluminum) shall be taken oII as units with the indication oI the
material, the diameter, the sizes and number oI the lanterns (double
unit, etc.).
The price shall also include the cap and the passage Ior attaching the
luminaire, as well as the painting oI the arm (should it be installed on a
painted pole and no appropriate paragraph shall appear in the Bill oI
Quantities).
b) The luminaire on a wooden or concrete pole or metal section or
channel shall be taken oII as a unit with indication oI diameter and
dimensions.
The price shall also include galvanized attachments to the pole, a passage
Ior Iastening the luminaire and the required coordination with the IEC,
should the arm be mounted on the IEC pole.
0800.26 Flag-holders on a Pole
Flag holders on a pole shall be taken oII as units and their price shall also include
the required attachments as well as paint.
08 (2001)
148
0800.27 Sockets in Lighting Poles
Sockets in lighting poles shall be taken oII as units. The price shall also include a
protective awning.
0800.28 Accessories Trays in Lighting Poles
Accessories trays in lighting poles installed in the accessories compartment oI the
lighting pole shall be taken oII as units, with indication oI the number oI lamps
and socket connected Irom them.
The price shall also include protections, clamps, connection cables between the
tray and the luminaires and sockets, earthing bolts and connection oI the earthing
Irom the tray to the bolt in the pole.
0800.29 Accessories Boxes for Luminaires
Accessories boxes Ior luminaires on an aerial network shall be taken oII as units
with indication oI the number oI lamps connected Irom them. The price shall also
include attachments, a cable Ior connecting the box to the network, protections,
inlet clamps, clamps Ior connecting to the network or to the insulated aerial wire
or to the cable, connecting cable between the box and the luminaire, as well as
the required coordination with the IEC, should the box be mounted on an IEC
pole.
0800.30 Consoles
Consoles shall be taken oII as units. The prices oI the console shall also include
its attachment to the structure, its earthing, its anchor as well as the accessories
and materials required Ior its anchoring and Iastening.
0800.31 Poles Erection Only
Poles being only erected shall be taken oII as units with the indication oI their
types and length. The price oI the erection only oI the poles shall also include all
that was detailed above in the price oI the pole, except Ior the pole itselI. The
poles shall be supplied at their storage location by the Client (unless it shall be
expressly indicated that they shall be supplied on Site).
0800.32 Electrical Boards and Lighting Central Boards
Electrical boards and lighting central boards shall be taken oII as Iollows:
a) The board's structure
The board's structure shall be taken oII by one oI the Iollowing possibilities:
1. As a complete object, according to the drawings or the other
Contract Documents;
2. According to the area oI the board, in square meters.
In both possibilities, the price shall also include the required materials, such
as: bus-bars, insulators, clamps, wiring, notice panels, attachments, base
08 (2001)
149
Irame, cables inlets arrangements, painting and all the other works and
materials needed Ior completing the board, its attachment and its operation.
The price oI the structure shall also include all that shall be required, except
Ior the Iittings separately detailed in the Bill oI Quantities.
Unless otherwise speciIied the structure shall be taken oII according to
possibility 1.
The price oI street lighting central boards shall also include the IEC
compartment.
b) Equipment and fittings
Equipment and Iittings such as: breakers, contactors, etc., mounted in the
board, shall be taken oII in separate items in the Bill oI Quantities, Ior each
Iitting according to its type and size.
c) Installation
Installations shall be taken oII as units. The price shall also include loading
at the Plant, transport, unloading on Site, concrete Ioundation or reinIorced
polyester base as speciIied, excavation Ior the Ioundation, anchoring bolts,
Irame, erection oI the board or the central board at their place, sealing oI the
inlet oI the cables and the pipes, assembly, testing and trial operation.
For lighting central boards the price shall also include the work surIace, as
detailed above.
Should the installation oI the board or central switchboard not appear as a
separate paragraph in the Bill oI Quantities, the installing price shall be
included in the price oI the structure oI the board or the central switchboard.
The connection oI lines to the board shall be included in the price oI the
lines.
Should the Contractor not be the one who shall execute the lines, the
installing price shall also include the connection oI the board to the lines.
0800.33 Earthing
The earthing shall be taken oII as a complete job, by one oI the methods detailed
hereinaIter:
a) The price oI the earthing shall also include all the materials and works
required Ior perIorming a complete earthing connection, according to
its type, as indicated in the SpeciIications. The price shall also include
the earthing conductor, a protective pipe, excavation, clamps, notice
panel, boxes and all that may be required Ior a normal earthing. The
length oI the earthing conductor shall be according to needs.
Water pipe earthings shall also include the bridging over the water-meter.
b) Electrode earthing the price shall also include all that is stated in
paragraph a) above and besides this, an inspection hole as detailed and
08 (2001)
150
a 3 m long electrode. The extension oI the electrode until the required
resistivity is obtained, as deIined in the Contract Documents, shall be
taken oII as a supplement, in meters, oI additional electrode (beyond
the Iirst 3 m).
0800.34 Foundation Earthing
Foundation earthings shall be taken oII according to one oI the Iollowing
methods detailed hereinaIter:
a) Whenever one oI the reinIorcement bars oI the building serves as a
bridging ring, the earthing shall be taken oII as a complete job Ior the
whole building. The price shall also include the welds required Ior
keeping the continuity oI the bridging ring and its attachment to the
Ioundation columns reinIorcement, the outlets to the electrodes, the
connection oI the bridging ring to the bus-bars, bus-bars (whether
installed in the electricity board or separately) and all that may be
required Ior a normal Ioundation earthing, as per the Law and as
required in Sub-Chapter 0804. The attachments Irom the bus-bars to
the various uses shall be taken oII separately.
b) Whenever a steel bar or rail specially inserted into the Ioundation beam
Ior that purpose serves as bridging ring, the earthing shall be taken oII
as stated in above paragraph a) but it shall also include the bar or the
rail.
c) Similarly to above paragraph b), but the take-oII shall be oI the length
oI the bar or the rail in the casting oI the beams, in meters.
0800.35 Earthings in the Building
The unit price shall also include all that is detailed in paragraph 08046 above as
well as all that may be required, except the Ioundation earthing detailed above.
0800.36 Lightning Arresters Systems
Lighting arresters systems shall be taken oII as complete units. The price shall
also comprise all that is stated in the Contract Documents and in SI 1173,
including all the bars, rails, electrodes, excavations, etc.
0800.37 Luminaires
Luminaires shall be taken oII as units with the indication oI the type oI the
luminaire and that oI the lamp.
The unit price shall also include the lamp, the activation equipment, the
installation oI the luminaire, its connection to the point, the insulation oI the
luminaire Irom inIlammable elements, a trial operation and the adjustment oI the
lighting during darkness hours with all that is involved in it such as power
supply, work, means, etc., and this until the installation shall be taken over.
The detail oI special luminaires Ior which the price includes besides what is
stated above, is as Iollows:
08 (2001)
151
a. For luminaires recessed in Ialse ceilings the attachments to the
ceilings (concrete, Ialse ceiling, etc.), Irames and metal adaptors.
The Iormation oI openings in the ceiling shall not be included in
the price oI the luminaire.
b. For luminaires with switch-on equipment installed in a separate
box the box and the connections between the box and the
luminaire.
c. For luminaires recessed in concrete walls or ceilings or Iloors
the housing oI the luminaire and the detailing oI the socket Ior the
installation oI the luminaire.
0800.38 Emergency Light Units
The price oI the unit shall include all that is detailed in paragraph 08086.
For units installed in the luminaires taken oII separately, the price shall also
include the installation oI the unit into the luminaire.

Take-off According to Points

0800.39 Points - General
In the Iollowing paragraphs (0800.40-0800.56), the take-oII procedures relative
to diIIerent types oI points, are detailed.
Electrical points shall be classiIied as Iollows:
a. according to the conductor's section;
b. according to the circuit single phase or 3-phase;
c. according to the installation method lines in concealed (or
exposed) installation, visible installation.
In each place where conductors are mentioned, the meaning shall be insulating
conductors and cables.
Wherever pipes in visible installation are mentioned, the meaning shall also be
plastic ducts 15 x 15 cm with covers.
0800.40 Lighting Point
a) Lighting points are outlets to a luminaire or a ventilator connected to a
lighting circuit. The price oI the unit shall also comprise the pipes and
conductors (including the emergency light conductor) Irom the board
up to the outlet and the switches, a hanging hook, switches oI various
kinds such as: double, alternate, crossed, twin-poled, pushable,
waterprooI and sheathed.
08 (2001)
152
Points activated by more than one switch shall be taken oII as regular
points. All the switches (or pushbuttons) activating the points and all the
lines going to them shall be included in the unit price.
b) Household lighting points shall be taken oII according to one oI the
Iollowing possibilities:
1. Similarly to paragraph a) above, including ceiling cover, wires,
lamp housing, lamp and the relative part oI the apartment
electrical board, the apartment earthing and the apartment
Ieeding.
2. Similarly to paragraph a) above and including also ceiling
cover, wires, lamp housing and lamp.
Unless otherwise stated, the point's take-oII shall be according to possibility
1. above.
0800.41 Garden Lighting Point
Garden lighting points shall be taken oII like lighting points and comprise also
the excavation Ior the cable, the cable and pipe up to the lighting pole or the
luminaire (should it not be installed on a pole). Outlets to all the lighting poles or
the luminaires shall be taken oII as points. In those places where there are no
poles or luminaires, but there is a tiled area, the point shall include the excavation
Ior the cable, a cable and a pipe up to the limit oI the tiled area.
0800.42 Plug-Housing Point
a) Plug-housings shall be taken oII as points.
Plug-housings shall be also classiIied according to the type oI plug-housing
(regular or waterprooI or installed inside a duct) and according to the
number oI plug-housings connected to the same outlet (single, double,
triple, etc.).
The price oI the unit shall also include the pipes and conductors Irom the
board down to the plug-housing, the plug-housing, adaptors and branching
boxes in the ducts that shall be installed (Ior plug-housings in ducts).
Feeding lines to the central switchboard (alarm, Iire detection, intercom,
etc.) shall be taken oII, each one oI them, as normal plug-housing points.
Unless otherwise speciIied, the conductors shall have 2.5 sq.mm sections
and a plug-housing recessed into the wall.
b) Apartment plug-housings shall be taken oII as in paragraph a) above
and comprise also the relative part oI the apartment electrical board,
the apartment's earthing and the apartment's Ieeding.
0800.43 Bell Points
a) The bell point includes the pipes and conductors Irom the circuit up to
the bell and to the pushbutton, a bell with a transIormer, a lighted
pushbutton with a visit card.
08 (2001)
153
b) The apartment bell point shall be taken oII as in paragraph a) above
and include also the relative part oI the apartment electrical board, the
apartment's earthing and the apartment's Ieeding.
0800.44 Bell Point in the Shelter
The bell point in the shelter shall include pipes and conductors Irom the circuit
up to the bell and the pushbutton, a sheathed bell Ior 12 or 24 watts, a sheathed
pushbutton.
0800.45 School Bell Point
The school bell point shall also include the pipes and conductors Irom the board,
a 260V bell and the indication oI the diameter oI the bell.
0800.46 Hot Water Boiler Point
a) The hot water boiler point shall also include the pipes and conductors
Irom the board (section oI 2.5 sq.mm iI not otherwise speciIied)
through the switch up to the boiler, a two-pole switch recessed into the
wall with an indication lamp and notice panel, protective pipe Iorm the
outlet Irom the wall up to the boiler and the boiler's connection.
Should an additional saIety switch be indicated in the Drawings next to the
boiler, the additional switch shall also be included in the price oI the point.
b) Apartments hot water boilers points shall be taken oII as in paragraph
a) above and include also the relative part oI the apartment's electrical
board, the apartment's earthing and the apartment's Ieeding.
0800.47 Solar Heating Boiler Point
a) Solar heating boiler points shall be taken oII similarly to hot water
boilers points (see paragraph 0800.46 a) above) but shall also include a
sheathed two-pole switch with insulation level oI at least IP 54 on the
rooI next to the boiler, as well as a cable within a worm-type sheathed
pipe with plastic coating, Irom the switch to the boiler and marking.
b) Apartment solar heating boiler points shall be taken oII as in above
paragraph a) and comprise also the relative part oI the apartment's
electrical board, the apartment's earthing and the apartment's Ieeding.
0800.48 Heating Point of Bathrooms
a) The heating points oI bathrooms shall also include the pipes and
conductors Irom the board through the switch, a socket at the outlet to
the heating body, a two-pole switch recessed into the wall with an
indication lamp and a notice "heather."
b) The apartment heating point shall be taken oII as in above paragraph a)
and include also the relative part oI the apartment's electrical board, the
apartment's earthing and the apartment's Ieeding.
08 (2001)
154
0800.49 Electrical Shutter Point
a) Electrical shutter point shall also include the pipes and conductors
Irom the board through the switch and up to the shutter's motor, a two-
directional pushbutton and the connection oI the motor Ior the
operation oI the shutter.
b) The apartment electrical shutter point shall be taken oII as in above
paragraph a) and include also the relative part oI the apartment's
electrical board, the apartment's earthing and the apartment's Ieeding.
0800.50 The Connection of a Motor or an Electrical Element or a Control
Element
The connection oI a motor or an electrical element or a control element shall be
taken oII by one oI the methods detailed hereinaIter:
a) The connection shall be taken oII according to the section oI the
Ieeding cable and the price shall also include the worm-type sheathed
pipe with plastic coating Irom the protection unit (or extremity oI the
Ieeding pipe) up to the motor, appropriate connectors and connection
oI the motor.
The cable and the saIety switch or the protection unit shall be taken oII
separately.
b) Connection and activation oI a motor or an electrical element or a
control element.
The price shall include all that is detailed in paragraph a) above as well as
the adjustment oI the motors revolutions, regulation, calibration and
regulation oI control elements and electromechanical systems.
The connection and activation oI elements supplied by the Contractor within the
Iramework oI the Contract shall be taken oII according to above paragraph a).
II in the Bill oI Quantities "connection and activation" are not indicated, the
connection shall be taken oII according to paragraph a).
0800.51 Telephone Points (preparation)
a) Telephone points (preparation) shall be an outlet to the telephone and
shall be taken oII with the indication oI the number oI sockets
connected to the outlet (single, double, etc.). The price oI the unit shall
also comprise all the pipes and pull-through wires Irom the main
branching box (including pipes between the Iirst box to the secondary
box), transition boxes and telephone Iittings, according to the reports
oI the Telephone Company. The diameter oI the pipes shall be
according to the Drawings. There shall be no supplement paid Ior
points with pipes oI various diameters. Points in the shelters shall be
taken oII in the present paragraph with no price supplement and
include also the pipe with an end-box, Irom the point up to the outside
shelter.
08 (2001)
155
Telephone lines to the central switchboard, such as Ior alarm and Iire
detection, shall be taken oII as points (preparation).
The outlet to a telephone combined in a duct shall not be taken oII as a
telephone point (preparation)
b) Apartment points (preparation) shall be taken oII as in above paragraph
a) and include also the relative part oI the plug-housing in the main
box, oI the earthing oI the main box, oI the secondary boxes, oI the
Ieeding line (pipes, excavation and inspection holes) up to the
connection point in a public space beyond the site's boundaries.
0800.52 Telephone Point (wiring)
Outlets to telephone points shall be taken oII as a unit without dependence on the
number oI sockets connected to the outlet. The price shall also include all the
required cables Irom the building's main box down to the outlet (including cables
between boxes), connection blocks ("corona"), connection oI bridging cables and
all that shall be needed according to the SpeciIication and requirements oI the
Telephone Company.
Telephone lines to the central switchboard, such as alarm and Iire detection, shall
be taken oII as telephone points (wiring).
Outlets cables shall be oI at least three pairs.
0800.53 Central TV Points (preparation)
a) Central TV points (preparation) shall be an exit to TV. The price shall
also include pipes and pull-through wires Irom the TV ampliIiers
cabinet down to the outlet, transition boxes, plastic top Iastened by
means oI screws to the outlet box, the part oI the point in the transition
pipe Irom the TV ampliIiers up to the antenna on the rooI. The
diameter oI the pipes shall be according to the Drawings.
Points in shelters shall be taken oII in the present paragraph without any
price supplement and also include the pipe with the end-box Irom the point
down to outside the building.
Outlets to TV integrated into a duct shall not be taken oII as a central TV
point (preparation).
b) Apartment central TV points (preparation) shall be taken oII as in
above paragraph a) and also comprise the relative part oI the plug-
housing in the main ampliIiers cabinet, the antenna mast's earthing in
the main cabinet and the secondary cabinets.
0800.54 Cable TV Points (preparation)
a) Cable TV points (preparation) shall be an outlet to cable TV. The price
shall also include the pipes and pull-through wires Irom the main TV
ampliIiers cabinet down to the outlet, transition boxes and plastic top
attached by means oI screws to the outlet box. The diameter oI the
pipes shall be according to the Drawings.
08 (2001)
156
b) Apartment cable TV points (preparation) shall be taken oII according
to above paragraph a) and also include the relative part oI the plug-
housing in the main cabinet, oI the earthing oI the main cabinet, oI the
secondary cabinets, oI the Ieeding line (pipes, excavation and
inspection holes) down to the connection in the public space, outside
the limits oI the Site.
0800.55 Cable TV Points (wiring)
All the outlets to systems detailed below shall be taken oII as communication
point. The systems shall be as Iollows: computer, addressing closed circuit TV,
loudspeaker, alarm detector, intercom, electrical clock, etc. The price oI the point
shall also include pipes and pull-through wires Irom the concentration cabinet
down to the outlet, transition boxes and plastic tap Iastened by screws to the
outlet box. The diameter oI the pipes shall be according to the Drawings.
Outlets to communication combined into ducts shall not be taken oII as
communication points (preparation).
0800.56 Fire Detection Preparation Point
All outlets to Iire or smoke or gas detectors, pushbuttons, indication light, siren,
secondary panel oI the central board and door magnets shall be taken oII as units.
The price oI the unit shall also comprise all the pipes and pull-through wires Irom
the central switchboard down to the outlet, accessories boxes and transition
boxes. The diameter oI the pipes shall be according to the Drawings.

Take-off of Complete Work Sections

0800.57 Feeding Lines
The price oI Ieeding lines comprises pipes, conductors (or cables) Irom the
Ieeding board down to the Ied board or equipment, with the indication oI the
pipe's diameter, its type, the conductors or cable, number oI section oI the
conductors, Ieeding board and Ied equipment.
0800.58 Control Line
Control lines shall be taken oII like the Ieeding line but shall include the
respective components oI the central equipment.
0800.59 Airplane Warning Installations
Airplane Warning Installations shall be taken oII as units.
The price oI airplane warning installations shall comprise all that shall be
required in the Contract Documents, including pipes and cables Irom the board.
08 (2001)
157
0800.60 Preparations in the Building for the IEC
The price oI the preparations in the building Ior the IEC shall comprise all that is
detailed in paragraph 080291.
In buildings with meters concentrations, all the Ieeding lines to the apartments
boards shall also be included together with conductors or cables 10 x 5 mm,
pipes oI 29 mm dia. (36 mm Ior the cables), connection boxes at the meters
concentrations, Iour modular clamps in each box and earthing bar next to the
concentration.
In buildings with meters mounted into Iiberglass cabinets outside the building,
the price shall also include the Ieeding lines Irom the meters cabinet down to the
apartments boards a 10 x 4 mm cable, protective pipe 42 mm dia., excavation
oI trenches and their reIilling, connection box at the meters concentration and
Iour modular clamps in the box.
0800.61 Preparations in the Building for Central TV
The price oI preparations in the building Ior central TV shall also comprise all
that is detailed in paragraph 080292.
0800.62 Central TV System
The price oI the central TV system in the building shall comprise all that is
detailed in paragraph 080293 until the handing over oI the complete installation,
including the antenna mast, anchors, ampliIiers, splitters, cables, etc.
0800.63 Preparations in the Building for Cable TV
The price oI preparations in the building Ior cable TV shall comprise all that is
detailed in paragraph 080294.
0800.64 Preparations in the Building for a Satellite TV Reception
Installation
The price oI preparations in the building Ior a satellite TV reception installation
shall comprise all that is detailed in paragraph 080295.
0800.65 Preparations in the Building for Intercom Systems
The price oI preparations in the building Ior intercom systems shall comprise all
0800.66 Intercom Systems in the Building
The price oI intercom system in the building shall comprise all that is detailed in
paragraph 080297.
0800.67 Preparations for Telephone Systems in the Building
The price oI preparations Ior telephone systems in the building shall comprise all
08 (2001)
158

Take-off of High Voltage Installations

0800.68 Line Breaker
The switch/breaker oI a line shall be taken oII as a unit with the indication oI the
line's voltage, the type and the current oI the supply. The price shall also include
an activation mechanism, closing lock, arms (should they be needed), rising or
extension oI the structure (according to the Drawings).
Whenever the line breaker disrupts a line installed on a wooden pole or a
concrete pole, the price shall also comprise the pole's earthing including all the
metal parts as well as the earthing surIace.
0800.69 Rays Protectors
A system oI three rays protectors shall be taken oII as one unit complete with
the indication oI the nominal voltage and current oI the Iuses. The price shall also
include the arm, discharge rays and the Iuses.
0800.70 Lightning Arresters in the Network
A system oI three lightning arresters shall be taken oII as one unit complete
with the indication oI the model and the network's voltage. The price shall also
comprise the connection oI the earthing and oI the arm.
0800.71 Transformers
TransIormers shall be taken oII as units with the indication oI the type, capacity
and voltage. The price shall also comprise all the Iittings as detailed, including
the protection system but not the Buchholz relay.
In dry transIormers, the price shall also include the temperature sensors as
detailed and the control board.
In the absence oI a transIormer installation paragraph, the price oI the
transIormer shall also comprise the installation as detailed in paragraph 0800.72
below.
0800.72 Installation only of a Transformer
a) Should only the installation oI the transIormer be required, the
installation shall be taken oII as a unit with the indication oI the type
and capacity oI the transIormer. The price shall also comprise the
loading, transport and unloading oI the transIormer Irom its hauling
equipment, the installation at its place, its connection to the high
voltage side and the low voltage side, its activation, trial operation and
testing.
b) The price oI installation oI a transIormer on a pole oI the network shall
also comprise, besides whatever is detailed in above paragraph a), an
arm Ior mounting the transIormer, electrodes made oI copper-coated
08 (2001)
159
steel bars 3 m long set at the bottom oI the Ioundation pit oI the pole,
an earthing bar at the bottom oI the pole, the connection oI the earthing
to the transIormer's structure and the connection to the earthing (with
insulated conductors) to the neutral point.
0800.73 Forced Aeration
The price oI Iorced aeration Ior the transIormer shall comprise all that is detailed
in paragraph 080933 w).
0800.74 High Voltage Cables
The high voltage cables shall be taken oII as detailed Ior low voltage cables.
Should they not appear separately in the Bill oI Quantities, the cables heads shall
be included in the cables prices.
0800.75 High Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear
a) R.M.U. high voltage boards (Ior ring installation) shall be taken oII as
complete units with the indication oI the number oI outlets, their types
and the current.
b) A high voltage board built Irom separate units shall be taken oII
according to the units which it shall be comprised with the indication
oI their types (breaker, Iuses-switch, automatic switch, etc.). The price
shall also include the secondary protections (iI not separately detailed
in the Bill oI Quantities) and all that may be required in the
SpeciIication. Entrance and transition shall be included in the unit
price, unless separately mentioned in the Bill oI Quantities.
0800.76 Earthings in the High Voltage Room
The earthings in the high voltage room shall be taken oII as complete units and
include all that is detailed in paragraph 080905 c).
0800.77 Safety Equipment in the High Voltage Room
The saIety equipment in the high voltage room shall be taken oII as complete
units and include all that is detailed in paragraph 080905 a).
0800.78 Fences in the High Voltage Room
Fences in the high voltage room shall be taken oII according to their surIace in
sq.m. The price shall comprise all that is detailed in paragraph 080905 b). Gates
in the Iences shall be included with the Irame oI the Iences surIaces and not be
separately taken oII.

08 (2001)
160

General SpeciIication Ior
Plastering Works

The Interministerial Committee for Standardization of Construction Contract
Documents and their Computerization, with the participation of:
Ministry of Defense/Construction Branch
Ministry of Housing & Construction/Planning & Engineering Administration
Treasury Ministry/Office of the Comptroller
Ministry of Transportation
Ministry of Defense/Publications Department
09 2005
09 General SpeciIication Ior Plastering Works

Issued by the Special Interministerial Committee with the participation oI:
Ministry oI DeIense/Construction Branch
Ministry oI Housing & Construction/Planning & Engineering Administration
Treasury Ministry/OIIice oI the Comptroller
Ministry oI Transportation

4
th
Edition (Revised)

All rights reserved Ministry oI DeIense/Publications Department
General SpeciIication Ior Plastering Works 09

Table of Contents

0900 General .................................................................................................... 1
0901 Materials and products ............................................................................ 7
0902 Mortars used Ior preparing plaster .......................................................... 10
0903 Composition and application oI mortar/cement mixtures Ior plaster ..... 12
0904 Thermal plaster ....................................................................................... 21
0905 Gypsum plaster ....................................................................................... 24
0906 Interior plaster used in protected spaces (shelters) ................................. 26
0907 Testing oI Iinished plaster ....................................................................... 29

1
0900: General
09001
Scope of this
section
This section relates to the quality oI materials and workmanship in the
perIormance oI interior and exterior plastering on various construction
elements such as shelters and protected spaces and as substrate Ior
various claddings (such as: ceramics, mosaics, stone, etc.).
Finishes using cladding elements are not included in this section;
For stone cladding, see Section 14 Stone Works;
For ceramic tile and similar cladding, see Section 10 Flooring and
Cladding Works;
Acoustical plastering shall be perIormed as required in the Special
SpeciIication.
09002
Standards
A. Israeli standards
Standard No. Name oI Standard
1, Part 1 Cement: standard cement
3 Mineral aggregates Irom natural sources
5, Part 1 Concrete blocks: wall blocks
5, Part 2 Concrete blocks: Blocks used to Iill ribbed ceilings
75 Quicklime used in construction
118 Concrete Ior structural uses: production test conditions
and compressive strength
198 Hemihydrate plaster (Plaster oI Paris) used in
construction
268 Autoclave-cured hollow concrete blocks

2
601 Ready-mix concrete
755 ClassiIication oI building materials by Iire response
testing and classiIication methods
783 Hydrated lime
896 Additives to concrete and grout: additives to concrete
918 Hot-dipped zinc coatings oI steel and cast iron products
921 Fire response oI building materials
1045 Thermal insulation oI buildings
1229, Part 1 Rigid Ioamed plastic used in thermal insulation: panels
1380 Threaded components electrolytic coatings
1414
Part 1
Part 2
Part 3
Thermal insulation systems in buildings:
Exterior thermal plastering system
Interior thermal plastering system
Application oI an exterior thermal plastering system
1504 Gypsum blocks
1555 Mosaic and ceramic tile systems Ior Ilooring and
cladding in buildings
1731 Textural coatings on a synthetic polymeric base
1920 Part 1 Plaster: General requirements and test methods oI mortar
used in plastering
1920 Part 2 Plaster: On-site plastering system
2263 Form blocks on a cement base
2931 Fire resistance oI building elements

3
4271 Sherardized zinc coatings
5075 Interior cladding and coating systems in protected spaces
B. Israel Standards Institute Specifications
ISI 50 Mixtures Ior exterior coating made Irom spray cement
ISO 323 Light mineral construction aggregates
ISO 376 Sand-lime construction products
ISO 397 Gypsum plaster Ior interior use: prepared mixtures Ior
mechanical application
C. Foreign standards
EN 12878 Pigments Ior coloring oI building materials based on
cement and/or lime: speciIications and methods oI test
09003
Other
sections
Section 00 Preliminaries
Section 02 Cast-in-place concrete works
Section 04 Masonry works
Section 05 WaterprooIing works
Section 10 Flooring and cladding works
Section 11 Painting works
Section 14 Stone works
Section 21 Precast concrete buildings
Section 22 Industrialized building elements
Section 58 Shelters
Section 59 Protected areas

4
09004
Definitions
A. Mortar: A mixture used Ior plastering and containing a bonding
material, Iine aggregates and water, and occasionally also
additives. The mixture is reIerenced according to the bonding
material that it contains, as Ior example: lime mortar,
cementitious mortar, gypsum mortar, etc.
B. Cementitious mortar: Mortar whose primary bonding material
is Portland cement.
C. Lime-cement mortar: Mortar containing sand, standard
Portland cement and lime.
D. Lime mortar: Mortar whose principal binding material is lime.
E. Gypsum mortar: Mortar whose principal blinding material is
gypsum.
F. Ready-mix dry mortar: A dry mixture containing binding
materials, sand and additives that has been prepared at a plant
and brought to the construction site in well-sealed packages or in
bulk. Water only is added at the site.
G. Site-prepared mortar: A mixture with all its components
mixed on-site or a wet mixture that contains: aggregates,
additives and water to which cement, water and additives are
added at the site as necessary (such a mixture is commonly
reIerred to as: 'ready mix mortar).

5
H. Delayed setting mortar: Wet mortar supplied to the
construction site Irom a plant prepared Ior use and containing
retardants.
I. Plaster: A combination oI binding materials (such as: cement,
lime, or cement and lime, or gypsum) with sand, water and an
additive (as needed) provided as a coating on exterior or interior
surIaces.
J. Substrate (for plaster): The material on which the Iirst plaster
layer is designated to be applied.
K. Scratch coat: A Iirst layer oI plaster provided directly on the
substrate.
L. Leveling layer: The main layer oI plaster.
M. Finish layer: A thin layer oI plaster (generally called the
'veneer layer).
N. Raised edge (reveal): A surIace perpendicular to or slanted
toward the Iront, whose depth does not exceed 22 cm.

09005
Types of
plastering
The Iollowing are types oI plastering according to various
characteristics:
Use Environment Type Section No.
Exterior
plastering
Normal
conditions
Cementitious,
Lime-cement
0903
Corrosive
conditions
Interior plastering
Normal
conditions
Gypsum 0905

6
Wet spaces
Cementitious,
Lime-cement
0903
Base plaster Ior
rigid exterior
coatings
Normal
conditions
Cementitious
Corrosive
conditions
Base plaster Ior
rigid interior
coatings
Normal
conditions
Corrosive
conditions
Plaster used as a
thermal insulator
Interior
Thermal 0904
Exterior
Interior plaster
used Ior protected
spaces
Interior
Cementitious
0906 Thermal
Gypsum
Acoustical plaster Interior
In accordance
with a Special
SpeciIication
09027
Plaster used in
renovations
Interior In accordance
with a Special
SpeciIication
09028
Exterior

09006
Test segments
II required by the Special SpeciIication, the contractor shall prepare a
test segment in order to investigate the properties oI the plaster in
accordance with its type and designated use.

7
0901 Materials and products:
09010 Materials
090101
Cement
Portland cement shall comply with the requirements oI Israel Standard
1, Type CEM I and CEM II. II white cement is required in one oI the
contract documents, it shall be Type CEM I.
090102
Lime
Lime in the Iorm oI powder or 'dough shall be compatible with Israel
Standard 783.
090103
Aggregates
Aggregates shall be compatible with Israel Standard 3 as Iine
aggregates Ior concrete. The total quantity oI dust (passing Sieve
#200) in the aggregates shall not exceed 4.
090104
Water
Water shall be potable and shall be compatible with the requirements
oI Israel Standard 466, Part 1, and that stated in Section 02 Cast in-
place concrete works.
090105
Chemical
additives
The additives shall be compatible with the requirements oI Israel
Standard 896. II more than one chemical additive is used, the
additives shall be compatible.
090106
Pigments
Pigments shall be compatible with the EN 12878 standard and their
use shall be in accordance with that required in the Special
SpeciIication
090107
Fibers
Fibers shall be suitable Ior use Ior plastering; glass Iibers or synthetic
Iibers shall be resistant to an alkaline environment.

8
09011 Products
090111
Glass fiber
mesh

Glass Iiber meshes shall be resistant to alkaline environments as
required by Israel Standard 1920, Part 2. The mesh shall be uniIorm
Ior the entire wall with an opening size oI between 6x6 mm to 10x10
mm. Mesh weight shall be: 140-200 grams per square meter. Tensile
strength oI the mesh shall be at least 250 N/cm. The weight and
tensile strength oI the mesh shall be tested in accordance with the
requirements oI Israel Standard 1920, Part 2.
090112
Steel mesh
Steel meshes shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel Iollowing welding
and shall be compatible with the requirements stated in Israel Standard
1920, Part 2, and as required below:
II required in the Special SpeciIication in a corrosive environment, up
to a distance oI 500 meters Irom the sea, or in proximity to chemical
plants, use shall be made oI welded mesh made Irom non-rust steel
and resistant to chlorides such as stainless steel 316L.
The use oI other meshes shall be perIormed in accordance with the
The distance between wires in all directions shall be between 10 mm
and 50 mm.
When the plaster is applied manually, use shall be made oI meshes
with an opening size oI less than 25x25 mm

9
090113
Polystyrene
boards
Polystyrene boards shall be compatible with the requirements oI Israel
Standard 1229, Part 1. The boards shall be oI the KPS/100 type with a
B
2
1.2 Iire response.
090114
Edge strips
(corners)
Unless noted otherwise in the Special SpeciIication, edge strips at
corners and around openings shall be compliant with Israel Standard
1920, Part 2.
II required in the Special SpeciIication, use may be made oI edge
strips made Irom another material such as PVC.
Joint covering devices shall be installed as required in the Special
SpeciIication.
090115
Accessories
Screws, washers and other accessories shall be made Irom corrosion-
resistant steel. The protection method shall be in accordance with the
requirements oI one oI the Iollowing standards: Israel Standard 918,
Israel Standard 1380 or Israel Standard 4271.

10
0902 Mortars used Ior preparing plaster
09020 General ClassiIication according to binding material and manuIacture oI the
mortars shall be as described in the table in Subsection 09005 above.
When using ready-made mortar, the contractor shall perIorm the work
in accordance with the plaster manuIacturer`s instructions.
09021
Cementitious
mortar
Mortar whose principal binding material is Portland cement shall be
compatible with Israel Standard 1, oI the CEM I and CEM II types.
In addition, mortar whose principal binding material is white cement
shall be compatible with Israel Standard 1, oI the CEM I type.
09022
Lime-cement
mortar
Mortar containing standard Portland cement compatible with Israel
Standard 1, oI the CEM I and CEM II types and lime compatible with
Israel Standard`s 783 and 75.
09023
Lime mortar
Mortar whose principal binding material is lime shall be compatible
with Israel Standards 783 and 75.
09024
Gypsum
mortar
Mortar whose principal binding material is gypsum as speciIied in
Israel Standards Institute SpeciIication 397.
09025
Thermal
plaster mortar
Thermal plaster shall be composed oI Portland cement and light
aggregates as speciIied in Subsection 0904 below and shall be
compatible with the requirements oI Israel Standard 1414, with all its
parts.

11
09026
Mortar used
for plastering
in protected
spaces
Unless speciIied otherwise in the Special SpeciIication, mortar used
Ior plastering in protected spaces shall be compliant with Subsection
0906 below.
09027
Mortar used
for acoustical
plastering
Mortar used Ior acoustical plastering shall be compliant with the
09028
Mortar used
for restoration
purposes
Mortar used Ior restoration purposes shall be compatible with the
character oI the restored structure and the type oI substrate as required

12
0903 Composition and application oI mortar/cement mixtures Ior plaster
09030
General
The plastering work shall begin at least 14 days Irom the date oI
Iinishing the casting and masonry works. Plaster shall not be applied
when the temperature is less than 5C or more than 35C and when
strong winds are blowing.
The Iollowing types oI mortar may be used in plastering works:
- Dry ready-mix mortar.
- Site-prepared mortar.
- Delayed setting mortar.
When ready-mix mortar or delayed setting mortar is used, the plaster
shall be applied in accordance with the mortar manuIacturer`s
instructions.
The application method shall be one oI the Iollowing:
A. Plaster applied with a straightedge in a single direction
(vertical);
B. Plaster applied with a straightedge in two directions vertical
and horizontal;
C. Plaster applied on the wall in strips and smoothed thereaIter.
Unless stated otherwise, application shall be made in accordance with
the single direction straightedge method.
The materials shall be compatible with that stated in the relevant
sections oI this SpeciIication.
In accordance with the requirements oI the Special SpeciIication,

13
when plaster is applied on a substrate whose average tensile strength
is less than 0.5 Mpa, the contractor shall reinIorce the substrate using
a mesh as speciIied in Israel Standard 1555, Part 1 and Israel
Standard 1920, Part 2, with respect to the section dealing with
meshes used in reinIorcing to prevent cracking.
For placement oI the meshes, see Subsections 09035 and 09036
below.
09031
Preparation of
the substrate

The contractor shall ascertain that all electrical, plumbing, Iraming,
door and window Irame and mechanical works have been completed
in the areas designated Ior plastering or in proximity to them prior to
beginning the plastering works.
The contractor shall clean the surIace oI any oil, dust and salts prior
to commencing with the plastering works.
Metal edge strips shall be installed in the Iollowing locations: at
corners and around openings, at expansion joints, cornices, drip
edges, details around doors and windows, connections with
Ioundation walls, at the point oI contact oI the system with all the
materials, at Iinish details in contact with the ground surIace and at
the point oI contact between rooI belts, and shall be installed in
accordance with the requirements oI the Special SpeciIication.
Preparation oI the plastering works related to connections to the
building oI exterior components and accessories such as: laundry
niches, wind barriers, downspouts, pipes and cables, air conditioners,

14
air suction devices, lighting components and accessories and
electrical connections, etc. shall be executed as required by the
The substrate on which the plastering system will be applied shall be
oI a strength suitable Ior application. The contractor shall Iill in any
holes and spaces (joints) between blocks, remove weak layers, cut tie
wires, etc.
In order to ensure adhesion oI the plaster to smooth substrate surIaces
such as smooth concrete, aIter receiving the supervisor`s approval,
the contractor shall use one or more oI the Iollowing means:
A. Roughening oI the substrate surIaces or scratching them;
B. Application oI a scratch coat on the substrate surIaces;
C. Addition oI a special glue to the mortar;
D. Any other means approved by the supervisor.
Areas designated Ior plastering shall be Ilat and compatible with the
design.
In any location at which there is an expansion joint between building
components, the contractor shall also provide an expansion joint in
the plastering system as speciIied in the contract documents.

15
09032 Scratch coat
090321
Composition of
the scratch coat
Mortar used Ior plastering the exterior plaster scratch coat shall
contain at least 350 kilograms oI cement per cubic meter oI Iresh
mortar. The approximate composition oI the scratch coat is 1:2.5-3
(natural sand to cement) (by volume).
Mortar used Ior plastering the interior plaster scratch coat shall
contain at least 220 kilograms oI cement per cubic meter oI Iresh
mortar. The approximate composition is 1:5 (sand to cement) (by
volume) an additive that improves workability and adhesion in a
quantity and manner as determined by the additive manuIacturer.
The use oI the additive shall not impair the adhesive properties oI the
leveling layer to the other plastering layers.
090322
Application of
the scratch coat
In exterior plastering applied directly on the substrate and serving
as a base Ior the leveling layer.
In interior plastering provided in accordance with the requirements
oI the Special SpeciIication.
The scratch coat shall be installed aIter at least 24 hours have passed
Iollowing the completion oI the preparation oI the substrate as
required in Section 09031. The substrate shall be wetted prior to
application oI plaster unless required otherwise by the manuIacturer
oI the mortar or oI the additives contained in the plaster. The
composition oI the layer shall be compatible with that speciIied in
Section 090321. Thickness oI the scratch coat shall be 5 cm (2, -1)

16
and shall be inspected as speciIied in Israel Standard 1920, Part 2, in
a wet condition.
II required by the Special SpeciIication, the contractor shall install
reinIorcing mesh as stated in Section 09030 above.
In locations in which there are thermal bridges covered by
polystyrene panels, a mesh shall be applied as described in Sections
09035 and 09036 below.
The scratch coat shall be cured by the wetting oI the plastered surIace
with water at least twice a day Ior period oI three days or until
application oI the leveling layer, whichever is earlier, unless the
contractor has other speciIic instructions Irom the mortar
manuIacturer or the manuIacturer oI the additives being used.
09033 Leveling layer
090331
Composition of
the leveling
layer
Mortar used Ior plastering the exterior leveling layer shall contain at
least 300 kilograms oI cement per cubic meter oI Iresh mortar. The
approximate composition oI the scratch coat is 1:3-3.5 (sand to
cement) (by volume) an additive that improves workability and
adhesion in a quantity and manner as determined by the additive
manuIacturer. Lime shall not be used. The use oI the additive shall
not impair the adhesive properties oI the leveling layer to the other
plastering layers.
Mortar used Ior plastering the interior leveling layer shall contain at
least 180 kilograms oI cement per cubic meter oI Iresh mortar. The

17
approximate composition shall be 1:1:6 (sand to lime grout to
cement) (by volume). The sand shall be compatible with the
requirements oI Section and 090103 above. One liter oI lime is
obtained Irom 1.3 liters oI lime dust or 0.85 kilograms oI lime dust.
Natural sand only shall be used.
090332
Application of
the leveling
layer
In exterior plastering applied on the scratch coat below it.
In interior plastering usually applied directly to the substrate.
Composition oI the layer shall be compatible with that speciIied in
Section 090331. Thickness oI the layer shall be no more than 30
mm. When a thicker layer is required Ior leveling purposes, steel
mesh shall be used. See Section 09036 below.
In ceilings, thickness oI the leveling layer shall not be greater than 12
mm.
In exterior plastering, thickness oI the layer at any point shall not be
less than 8 mm.
The leveling layer shall be wetted with water at least twice a day Ior
a period oI at least three days.
09034 Finish layer
090341
Composition of
the finish layer
Mortar used in a normal environment shall contain at least 250
kilograms oI cement per cubic meter oI Iresh mortar. The
approximate composition oI the Iinish layer shall be 1.0:5:4.5 (Iine
natural sand to lime dust to cement) (by volume). The sand shall
have a maximum grain size oI 0.6 mm. The lime may be replaced

18
with an additive in a dose and in a manner as determined by the
additive manuIacturer. Use oI the additive shall not impair the
adhesive properties oI the Iinish layer with the leveling layer or with
the coating that will be applied to the Iinish layer.
Mortar used Ior a Iinish layer in a marine environment shall contain
at least 250 kilograms oI cement per cubic meter oI Iresh mortar.
The approximate composition shall be 1:3.5-4.0 (Iine natural sand to
cement) (by volume). This layer is not provided when the plaster
serves as a substrate Ior rigid claddings or when a decorative plaster
is provided.
Mortar used Ior the Iinish layer in interior plastering shall contain
between 80 and 120 kg oI cement per cubic meter oI Iresh mortar.
The approximate composition shall be 1:5:5 (natural Iine sand to lime
grout to cement) (by volume).
090342
Application of
the finish layer
The Iinish layer is applied to the leveling layer. There is no need to
provide this layer iI a decorative plaster is applied as a Iinish layer in
exterior plastering or when a rigid cladding is applied.
Thickness oI this layer shall not be greater than 2 mm. Finish oI the
layer shall be provided by sanding with the use oI a wood block with
a Ielt coating.
The plastered surIace shall be wetted with water at least twice a day
Ior period oI at least three days, unless the contractor has other
detailed instructions Irom the mortar manuIacturer or the

19
manuIacturer oI the additives being used.

09035
Application of
glass fiber mesh

The application oI glass Iiber mesh as part oI a plastering system
shall be provided in the Iollowing circumstances:
A. In locations at the vertical contact between concrete and
masonry made Irom various materials and between cast-in-place
concrete and precast concrete, other than at the connection oI
oIIset block and post patterns;
B. In locations oI horizontal contact between concrete and masonry
made Irom various materials when the concrete is cast prior to
the masonry;
C. Over the pockets oI pocket windows and doors;
D. Over the precast concrete portion oI rollup curtain boxes;
E. In exterior plastering systems applied over surIaces covering
polystyrene panels whose width does not exceed 250 mm and is
not designated to constitute a substrate Ior rigid claddings.
The mesh shall be embedded in the plaster`s scratch coat or in the
leveling layer iI there is no scratch coat.
09036
Application of
steel mesh

Steel mesh shall be applied in the Iollowing circumstances:
A. When the tensile strength in axial pull oI the substrate is less
than the adhesive strength oI the plaster system as required by
Israel Standard 1920, Part 1, in accordance with the
requirements oI the Special SpeciIication and as stated in

20
Section 09030 above.
B. When the thickness oI the leveling layer oI the plaster is greater
than 30 mm but not greater than 50 mm. When the thickness is
greater than 50 mm, it shall be installed in accordance with the
C. In an exterior plastering system serving as a substrate Ior the
gluing oI ceramic and mosaic tiles or as a substrate Ior natural
stone cladding when required in accordance with Israel Standard
1555, Part 1, in accordance with the requirements oI the Special
SpeciIication and as stated in Section 09030 above.
D. In a plastering system applied above a surIace covered by
polystyrene panels whose width is greater than 250 mm.
Steel mesh shall be anchored to the substrate using screws. The
distance between the anchors shall not be greater than 300 mm, and
the extraction Iorce oI each anchor shall not be less than 80 kg. The
mesh shall be at least 10 mm Irom the substrate and shall cover the
leveling layer oI plaster by a thickness oI at least 10 mm.
A steel mesh in plaster designed to serve as a substrate Ior the gluing
oI ceramic and mosaic tile shall be applied as required in Israel
Standard 1555, Part 1.

21
0904 Thermal plaster
09040 General Mortar used in thermal plaster shall comply with all the requirements
oI Israel Standard 1414, Part 1 or Part 2.
The thermal plastering system is comprised oI a scratch coat, thermal
plaster layer and Iinish layer.
Exterior and interior thermal plaster is comprised oI Portland cement
and light aggregates and is designed to provide thermal insulation Ior
buildings in various regions oI Israel.
Mortar used in the thermal plaster layer containing Portland cement
Irom light aggregates such as: perlite or Ioamed polystyrene, with the
addition oI Iillers and Iibers, supplied to the site as a manuIactured
product, usually in sacks. Water is applied at the site prior to
application.
09041
Mortar
The type oI mortar used in the thermal plastering layer is reIerenced
by its maximum bulk density in a dry condition in a Iurnace and in
accordance with its minimum compressive strength indicated by the
type oI aggregate as speciIied in Israel Standard 1414, Part 1 or Part
2.
The type oI mortar used in the plastering layer shall be as required in
the contract documents, as Ior example Ior exterior plastering:
thermal plaster containing perlite aggregates with a weight oI 300 kg
per cubic meter and a compressive strengths oI 0.9 Mpa will be
marked 0.9/300 with an indication oI the type oI aggregate.

22
09042
Preparation of
the substrate
Thermal plaster may be applied on all types oI exterior or interior
plaster substrate.
The substrate shall be prepared as speciIied in the Section 09031.
09043
Scratch coat
The scratch coat shall comply with the requirements oI Section
09032.
09044
Thermal plaster
layer
Materials used in the thermal plaster layer shall be supplied to the
site as a Iinished industrial product, packed in hermetically-sealed
and water-resistant packages. The dry mixture shall be mixed on site
with water only at the required quantity in order to obtain a
consistency suitable Ior application in accordance with the
manuIacturer`s instructions. Mixing shall be perIormed using a
mechanical mixer Ied Irom Iull packages only.
The thickness oI the thermal plaster layer shall be as stated in the
contract documents.
09045
Finish layer

The Iinish layer shall be as stated in the contract documents.
Unless stated otherwise, the Iinish layer shall be executed in one oI
the Iollowing alternative ways:
A. Textural coating on the thermal plaster surIace; its thickness
shall not be less than 5 mm. The material shall comply with the
requirements oI Israel Standard 1731.
B. A sprayed or scratched visual plaster; its thickness shall not be
less than 8 mm.
C. A smooth plaster with a painted Iinish; its thickness shall not be

23
less than 6 mm.
Unless stated otherwise, the Iinish layer shall be as stated in
Alternative A above.

24
0905 Gypsum plaster
09050 General Gypsum plaster is designated Ior interior use only, other than in wet
areas and open balconies.
Mortar used in gypsum plastering shall comply with all the
requirements oI Israel Standard Institute SpeciIication 397. The
mortar shall be supplied to the site as a dry industrial product.
The dry mixture shall be comprised oI gypsum, Iine aggregates and
additives Ior regulating the hardening time and to improve
workability oI the Iresh gypsum plaster or to improve the strength oI
the hardened gypsum plaster, and shall not detract Irom the
compliance oI the gypsum plaster with the requirements oI Israel
Standard Institute SpeciIication 397.
The gypsum shall be compatible with requirements oI Israel Standard
198 and the Iine aggregates shall comply with the requirements oI
Israel Standard 3.
09051
Preparation of
substrate
Gypsum plaster may be applied within the building on all types oI
substrate.
The substrate shall be prepared as speciIied in Section 09031.

25
09052
Plaster layer
Materials used in the gypsum plaster layer shall be supplied to the
site as a Iinished industrial product, packed in hermetically-sealed
and water-resistant packages. The dry mixture shall be mixed on site
with water only at the required quantity in order to obtain a
consistency suitable Ior application in accordance with the
manuIacturer`s instructions. Mixing shall be perIormed using a
mechanical mixer Ied Irom Iull packages only.
The texture and Iinish oI the gypsum plaster surIace shall be as stated
in the contract documents.

26
0906 Interior plaster used in protected spaces (shelters)
09060 General The contractor shall install plaster in protected spaces as required by the
Special SpeciIication, as stated in Israel Standard 5075 and in
accordance with the Iollowing types oI plaster:
A. Cementitious plaster;
B. Thermal plaster;
C. Gypsum plaster.
09061
Cementitious
plaster
When the total thickness oI the plastering system does not exceed 7 mm,
cementitious plaster shall be applied as stated in Subsection 0903 above.
Unless stated otherwise in the Special SpeciIication, the application
method shall be with the use oI a straightedge in a single direction
(vertical).
Plaster whose thickness is greater than 7 mm shall be applied with a
reinIorcing mesh as speciIied herein:
II a scratch coat is required in the Special SpeciIication, it shall be
applied with a thickness oI 5 (+1) mm. The maximum thickness oI the
plaster above the reinIorcing mesh shall be 7 mm. The minimum
thickness oI the plaster above the reinIorcing mesh shall be 2 mm.
The Iinish layer iI required by the Special SpeciIication shall be as
stated in the Subsection 0903 above.
The total thickness oI the plastering system shall not be greater than 20
mm.
The reinIorcing mesh shall be as stated in Subsection 09036 above.

27
09062
Thermal plaster
Thermal plaster shall be installed on walls only (and not on ceilings) as
stated in Israel Standard 1414, Part 2.
The thermal plastering system shall be comprised oI a scratch coat,
thermal plaster layer and Iinish plaster layer Ior protecting the thermal
plaster:
A. A scratch coat is required in all cases, other than on roughened
concrete (such as concrete cast in wood Iorms). This layer shall
improve the bonding between the thermal plaster layer and the wall
and shall be installed in accordance with the thermal plaster
manuIacturer`s instructions.
B. The thermal plaster layer shall be installed using industrial mortar
as required by Section 09041 above and shall contain light
aggregates such as: perlite or Ioamed polystyrene pellets or a
mixture oI these two types oI aggregates.
Thermal mortar is reIerenced according to speciIic weight, as Ior
example: mortar whose maximum speciIic weight aIter oven-
drying is 300 kg per cubic meter is reIerenced as 300.
When thermal plastering is required in the Special SpeciIication
and its reIerence number is not indicated, the plaster shall be
installed using mortar with a reIerence number oI 400.
A reinIorcing mesh shall be embedded in the thermal plaster layer
so that the coverage thickness at any point shall not be greater than
10 mm but not less than 2 mm.

28
The reinIorcing mesh shall be as stated in Section 09036 above.
C. A Iinish plaster layer Ior protecting the thermal plaster shall be
applied using cementitious plaster as required in Subsection 09061
above, other than the requirements Ior a thickness oI 5 (+1) mm
and compressive strength, or shall be made Irom gypsum plaster
with a thickness oI 5 (+1) mm as required in the Subsection 09063
below.
The total thickness oI the thermal plastering system with all its layers
shall not be greater than 65 mm.
09063
Gypsum plaster
The dry mixture, the wet plaster and the hardened plaster shall comply
with the requirements oI Israel Standards Institute SpeciIication 397.
This plaster shall be industrialized and shall be installed with the use oI
suitable mechanized equipment in accordance with the plaster
Plaster with thicknesses greater than 7 mm shall be reinIorced with a
reinIorcing mesh embedded in the plaster layer. There shall be a
covering oI not less than 2 mm and not greater than 7 mm above the
reinIorcing mesh.
The reinIorcing mesh shall be as stated in the Subsection 09035 above,
other than Ior the requirement Ior resistance to alkalinity.
Layer thickness oI the plastering system shall not be greater than 20
mm.

29
0907 Testing oI Iinish plaster
09070
General
The Iollowing tests shall be perIormed in all cases: plumb oI the
plaster, Ilatness oI the plaster, adhesion oI the plastering system and
layer thicknesses.
Tests Ior cementitious plaster shall be perIormed as speciIied in Israel
Tests Ior gypsum plaster shall be perIormed as stated in Israel
Standard Institute SpeciIication 397.
Tests Ior thermal plaster shall be perIormed as required by Israel
Standard 1414 and as stated in Subsection 09075 below.

30

09071
Permissible
vertical
tolerances
Deviation oI the plastered wall from plumb in interior plastering:
In walls up to 3 meters high not greater than an average oI 10 mm
and not greater than 15 mm at any single point.
In walls higher than 3 meters the average deviation (in mm) shall
not be greater than the height oI the wall divided by 300 and not
greater than the height oI the wall divided by 200 at any point (in
mm).
Deviation oI the plastered wall from plumb in exterior plastering:
On substrates used Ior rigid claddings not greater than 3 mm Ior
every 3 meters oI height.
In all other instances: the maximum deviation (in centimeters) shall
not be greater than the height oI the wall (in meters) divided by 300.
09072
Permissible
flatness
tolerances
Deviation oI the plastered wall from flatness in interior plastering:
In walls and ceilings shall not be greater than 8 mm Ior every 2 m
oI length.
Deviation oI the plastered wall from flatness in exterior plastering:
On substrates used Ior rigid claddings not greater than 3 mm in
every 2 m.
In all other instances: not greater than 5 mm in every 2 m.
09073
Permissible
waviness
Deviations oI the plaster walls Irom waviness in the interior
plastering oI walls and ceilings:
When the distance between the measuring points is 0.3 m: the

31
tolerances maximum permissible deviation shall be 4 mm.
When the distance between the measuring points is 1.0 m: the
maximum permissible deviation shall be 5 mm.
09074
Adhesive
strength
required for
cementitious
plaster
In interior plastering: on average 0.12 Mpa and not less than 0.07
Mpa in any individual test.
In exterior plastering in a standard environment: on average
0.25 Mpa and not less than 0.12 Mpa in any individual test.
In exterior plastering in a marine environment: on average 0.30
Mpa and not less than 0.15 Mpa in any individual test.
In exterior plastering as a substrate for ceramics: on average
0.45 Mpa and not less than 0.30 Mpa in any individual test.
In exterior plastering as a substrate for mosaics: on average 0.30
In exterior plastering in protected spaces: on average 0.40 Mpa
and not less than 0.25 Mpa in any individual test. The sample shall
be prepared in accordance with Israel Standard 5075.
09075
Testing of
thermal plaster
Unless stated otherwise in the contract documents, tests Ior thermal
plaster shall be as required in the aIoresaid sections regarding
permissible tolerances Ior plumb, Ilatness and waviness. In addition,
thermal plaster shall comply with the Iollowing test requirements:
A. Resistance oI the plaster to destructive testing: Iailure shall occur
in the thermal plaster layer only. Adhesive strength shall not be
less than 0.07 Mpa.

32
B. Plastering system thickness shall be as required by the contract
documents.
09076
Testing of
gypsum plaster
Unless stated otherwise in the contract documents, tests Ior gypsum
plaster shall be as required in the aIoresaid sections regarding
permissible tolerances Ior plumb, Ilatness and waviness. In addition,
gypsum plaster shall comply with the Iollowing test requirements:
A. Resistance oI the plaster to destructive testing: on average 0.12
B. Plastering system thickness shall be as required by the contract
documents.

a
2001

10 - GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR FLOORING
AND COVERING WORKS AND
TAKE-OFF PROCEDURES

Construction
the

b
All rights reserved to the Ministry oI DeIense / Publications
a
10 - GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR FLOORING AND COVERING
WORKS AND TAKE-OFF PROCEDURES
(This page is not part of the Contract)

1. The General SpeciIication Ior Flooring and Covering Works represents Chapter 10
oI the General SpeciIication Ior Building Works.
2. The Take-oII Procedures Ior the Flooring and Covering Works are indicated as No.
1000.00 and they are gathered at the end oI the SpeciIication. The Bill oI Quantities
Ior a given work shall be prepared on the basis oI these Take-oII Procedures.
3. The General SpeciIication Iorms an inseparable part oI the Contract Documents
between the Ministry and the Contractor. Should the need Ior it arise, the Designer
shall prepare a Special SpeciIication Ior a given work and indicate that all the
requirements oI the Special SpeciIication supersede in all cases, those oI the
General SpeciIication.
The present SpeciIication is so based so as to Iorm one oI the Contract
Documents, the stipulations oI which are the Contract with the State oI Israel Ior
the execution oI a structure by a Contractor (shelI 3210).
4. In the Special SpeciIication or the Bill oI Quantities, or the Drawings, the Designer
shall indicate his requirements with respect to what is said in those SpeciIication
Paragraphs in which there are more than one alternative. The Designer shall also
check the List oI Standards at the head oI the Chapter to ensure that it is complete
and updated.
5. In the Iollowing paragraphs (6-23), the Paragraphs, which the Designer must
address in writing and speciIically his requirements, are listed.
6. Chapter 10 Version The Designer shall indicate in the Special SpeciIication that
he is basing himselI on Chapter 10, Fourth Version (2001).
7. Cement Whenever colored cement is required, the Designer shall indicate it.
8. Testing Section Should the need Ior it arise, the request Ior a testing section and
its dimensions shall be detailed in the Special SpeciIication.
9. Terrazzo Floor Tiles In the SpeciIication Type 1 is required Ior the abrasion and
Type A Ior the tolerated deIects as per SI 6. Any diIIerent requirement has to be
indicated in one oI the Contract Documents (size oI the stone, type oI the stone,
etc.).
10. The Aggregate The Designer shall indicate in one oI the Contract Documents:
a) Requirement Ior special aggregates, such as basalt Ior Iloor tiles, or Ior
the casting oI terrazzo on the Site;
b) Requirement Ior a type oI aggregate Ior the casting oI "granulated"
surIaces or Ior Iloor tiles with a granulated Iinish.
b
11. Skirting (Base) The size oI the required elements shall be indicated.
12. Inspection of the substrate for rigid covers of walls Should the Contractor be
required to perIorm the inspection oI the wall prior to the installation oI rigid
covering and should there be a need Ior reinIorcing the substrate prior to the
installation oI rigid covering, the Designer shall detail his requirements in the
13. Ceramic Flooring and Covering The Designer shall indicate in the Special
SpeciIication the type oI tiles and their color, including the abrasion-prooI level
required, the width oI the joints and their depth as well as the type and color oI the
material to be used Ior Iilling in the joints. The Designer shall indicate the
dimensions oI the tiles and other properties, as may be required.
14. Accessories Installed on Covered Inner Walls The Designer shall indicate in
the Special SpeciIication the type oI accessory, the type oI material, the color, the
attachment detail and its exact location.
15. Resilient Materials Flooring Should such a Ilooring be required and laid on a
sub-grade, the Designer shall indicate the type oI sub-grade and the type oI material
to be used by the Contractor.
16. Flooring in Functional Rooms The requirements Ior Functional Rooms such as
Ireezer rooms, shall be detailed in the Special SpeciIication.
17. Separation Strip in Cast in Place Terrazzo Surfaces The Designer shall
indicate the type oI material and the section required Ior the execution oI the
separation strips. The Designer shall determine the size oI the surIaces and the
length oI the surIace's sides, according to the conditions expected in the Site.
18. Sections used in the Covering of Walls Requirements Ior sections in the corners,
the edges, Iinish or Ior special tiles Ior the upper Iinish, etc. (including protective
sections Ior covered corners in internal walls) shall be indicated in the Special
SpeciIication. The Designer shall indicate in the Special SpeciIication the material,
the type oI section, the installation detail and the height.
19. Thermal or Acoustic Insulation The requirements Ior the thermal and acoustic
insulation shall be detailed in the Special SpeciIication.
20. Filling Concrete in Wet Spaces The Designer shall indicate in the Special
SpeciIication the request Ior adding additives Ior increasing the Iilling concrete
water tightness as well as Ior adding Iibers.
21. Glues The Designer shall indicate in the Special SpeciIication the types oI glue
required Ior the perIormance oI the work.
22. Deleted.
23. Requirements for Stainless Steel Reinforcement The Designer shall detail in
the Special SpeciIication, should it be required, the stainless steel to be used in the
rigid covering oI external walls in the intermediate layer.
24. All the subjects detailed above (6 to 23) only represent a reminder to the Designer
which does not release him Irom checking the compatibility oI the General
SpeciIication paragraphs to the designed work.
c
- 2001 -

10 - GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR FLOORING
AND COVERING WORKS AND
TAKE-OFF PROCEDURES

Construction
the

Fourth Version (Revised)

All rights reserved to the Ministry oI DeIense / Publications 2001
1

The Inter-Ministerial Committee Ior the Standardization oI the Construction
Contract Documents and their Computerization:

A. Haber Ministry oI DeIense Chairman
L.
Davidovitz
-
Y. Frankel
-
Y. Sasson - Ministry oI Building and Housing Member
S. Fein - Ministry oI DeIense Member oI the Committee and Responsible
Editor oI the Publications
Y. Lopovitz
-

General Specification for the Flooring and Covering Works

Sub-
Committee:

S. Fein - Ministry oI DeIense Chairman
Z.
Manoach
1. Katzir Ministry oI DeIense Member
L. Robins Ministry oI Building and Housing Member
A.
Rosenfeld -
S.
Rothstein
D. Shaft IDF Member

The Committee was assisted by Mr. SternIeld and ProIessor H. Yagerman
2

10 - The Special Specification for Flooring and Covering Works
(and the Take-Off Procedures)

Table of Contents
Page
1000 General ............................................................................................................................... 3
1001 Materials ............................................................................................................................. 5
1002 Terrazzo Tiles and Concrete Products Flooring ................................................................. 8
1003 Flooring with Ceramic Flooring Tiles .............................................................................. 11
1004 Flooring with Resilient Materials (including Carpets) ..................................................... 13
1005 Terrazzo and Granulated SurIaces Cast in Place .............................................................. 17
1006 Rigid Covering on Walls .................................................................................................. 20
1007 Stairs and Sills .................................................................................................................. 28
1008 Flooring and Covering in "Wet Spaces" .......................................................................... 30
1009 Curing, Protection oI the Tiling and Quality Control ...................................................... 32
1000.00 Flooring and Covering Works Take-OII Procedures ......................................................... 34

A "Blue Page" is attached to the Brochure - Directives to the Designer, which
are not part of the Contract.
10 (2001)
3
1000 General
This SpeciIication covers the material and workmanship quality oI all kinds oI
Ilooring and covering and applies to works throughout the building.
For terrazzo and granulated surIaces cast in place, see Sub-Chapter 1005 below.
For mosaic or ceramic covering, see Sub-Chapter 1006 below.
For Ilooring and covering in wet spaces (tiled rooIs, showers, kitchen, toilets,
ritual baths, etc.), see Sub-Chapter 1008 below.
For concrete Ilooring slabs in roadways ("interlocking stones"), see Chapter 51
The Construction oI Airport Runways, Roads and Public Squares.
For stone Ilooring and covering, see Chapter 14 Stone Works.
10002 Standards
Besides whatever appears in paragraph "Materials and Workmanship Quality" oI
the Israeli Government Contract Ior the Execution oI a Structure by a Contractor
(shelI 3210), the list oI the main Israeli Standards (SI) relevant to the present
Chapter Iollows hereinaIter:
Standard
No.
Name oI Standard
1 Portland Cement
3 Mineral Aggregates Irom Natural Sources
6 Terrazzo Floor Tiles or Stone Fragments
8 Precast Concrete Products Ior Flooring
19 Concrete Precast Kerb Stones and Channel Stones
42 Precast ReinIorced Concrete Steps
314 Ceramic Wall and Floor Tiles
540 Resilient Chloric Polyvinyl Flooring Products
636 Textile Fabric Carpets: Quality Requirements
636.1 Textile Fabric Carpets: Fringed Carpets
636.2 Textile Fabric Carpets: Felt Tailored Carpets
755 Reactions to Fire oI Building Materials Testing Methods
and ClassiIication
896 Chemical Additives to Concrete
918 Zinc Hot-Dip Coating on Steel Products and Cast Iron
Products
1045 Thermal Insulation oI Buildings
1098 Terrazzo Aggregates
1182 Precast Stairs oI ReinIorced Concrete
1229
Part 1
Rigid Foam Plastic Ior Thermal Insulation: Boards
1353 Ceramic or Glass Mosaics
10 (2001)
4
1536 Materials Ior Sealing Joints and Cracks in the Building
1554 Terrazzo or Concrete Plates with Terrazzo Cladding or Stone
Fragments Cladding Ior the Covering oI Stairs
1555
Part 1
Mosaics and Ceramic Tiles System Ior Flooring and
Covering Works in Buildings: External Cover
1629 Floor Cover Systems with Terrazzo Floor Tiles
1920
Part 1
Plastering: General Requirements and Testing Methods Ior
the Plastering Mortar

b. Specifications of the Standards Institution of Israel
SII
SpeciIication
362, Part 1
Bonding Materials Ior Ceramic and Mosaic Tiles:
Bonding Materials Ior External Walls Finished
Mixture
SII
SpeciIication
431
Glue Concentrates Ior Bonding Ceramic and Mosaic
Tiles on External Walls

c. Foreign Standards
BS
1014
SpeciIication Ior Pigments Ior Portland Cement and Portland
Cement Products

All that is said in the Chapters oI the General SpeciIication Ior Building Works
indicated below applies also to the present Chapter, in accordance to what is
described in the paragraph "Priorities between the Chapters oI the General
SpeciIication," in Chapter 00 Preliminaries:
Chapter
00 -
Preliminaries
Chapter
02 -
Cast in Place Concrete Works
Chapter
03 -
Precast Concrete Products
Chapter
05 -
WaterprooIing Works
Chapter
06 -
Joinery and Steel Works
Chapter
07 -
Sanitary Installations
Chapter
09 -
Plastering Works
Chapter
14 -
Stone Works
Chapter
50 -
Concrete SurIaces
Chapter Airport Runways Construction, Roadways and Public Squares
10 (2001)
5
51 -

10004 Samples
Besides whatever is stated in paragraph "Materials and Workmanship Quality" in
the Contract Ior the Execution oI a Structure by a Contractor (shelI 3210) and
according to the requirements oI the COR, the Contractor shall supply samples oI
each material or product such as tiles, membranes, etc. Following approval by the
COR within seven days, the Contractor shall be entitled to order the required
quantity oI the said material or product. Part oI the sample (such as halI a tile),
signed by the COR and the Contractor shall be kept in the COR oIIice.
The Contractor shall supply materials and products conIorming entirely to the
approved sample quality, appearance, etc.
10005 Testing Section
Should it be so required in the Special SpeciIication, the Contractor shall prepare
a testing section at a location indicated by the COR.
The dimensions oI the section shall be as required in the Special SpeciIication.
The section shall be built oI the same materials and by the same equipment that
shall be used in the course oI the work.
The approbation oI the testing section shall not release the Contractor Irom his
responsibility regarding the quality oI the materials and oI the workmanship
according to all the requirements oI the Contract Documents.
1001 Materials
10010 General
The requirements Ior the materials (products and auxiliary materials) are detailed
hereinaIter.
Requirements Ior Iinished products or materials are also detailed in the Iollowing
sub-chapters, as relevant.
The Contractor shall be responsible Ior compatibility between materials he shall
use, Ior instance between the sub-grade, the glue and the covering material in a
covering system.
10011 Materials
100111 Cement
The cement shall meet the requirements oI SI 1.
100112 Water
The water shall be drinkable.
10 (2001)
6
100113 Sand Ior the sub-grade
The sand Ior the sub-grade shall be natural and clean sand.
100114 Cement-stabilized sand
A mixture oI sand stabilized with cement shall comprise sand and cement at the
rate oI 100 kg cement (2 bags) Ior 1 cu.m. oI sand.
100115 Mortar
a) Mortar Ior the tiling substrate:
The mortar under the Iloor tiles shall be based on cement without any lime.
The cement content shall be at least 250 kg Ior 1 cu.m. oI ready mortar, with
the addition oI additives such as air-trapping additive, workability
improvement additive or polymer emulsions.
b) Mortar Ior the plastering shall be as stated in paragraph 10062 below.
100116 Special aggregates
Special aggregates shall be as required in the Special SpeciIication and meet the
100117 Additives
The additives shall meet the requirements oI SI 896.
100118 Colors (Pigments)
Colors (pigments) used Ior granting a color to the mortar and the terrazzo
mixture shall meet the requirements oI British BS 1014.
100119 Bonding materials Ior Ilooring and covering
The Bonding materials Ior Ilooring and covering shall be as detailed hereinaIter:
a) Ready mixture Ior ceramic and mosaic tiles meeting the requirements
oI SII SpeciIication 362;
b) Glue concentrates shall meet the requirements oI SII SpeciIication 431;
c) The type oI glue Ior bonding resilient Ilooring products shall be subject
to the prior approval oI the Ilooring products manuIacturer and the
COR;
d) Cement-mortar prepared on the Site shall conIorm with the
requirements oI paragraph 100115 above;
e) Other bonding materials, as per the details in the Special SpeciIication.
10 (2001)
7
10012 "Meda"
The concrete "meda" is a substrate layer made up oI cement mortar composed oI
one part oI cement to three parts oI sieved sand with the addition oI an additive
standing up to the requirements oI paragraph 100117 above.
The approval oI the COR shall be required Ior the use oI manuIactured "meda."
"Leveling Meda" shall be deIined in the Special SpeciIication.
10013 1oints Filling Materials ("Roba")
The materials Ior Iilling the joints between the Ilooring and covering tiles
(excluding terrazzo tiles), are called in the proIession "roba." Unless speciIically
otherwise required in the Special SpeciIication, the "roba" shall conIorm to its
purpose, according to what is stated hereinaIter:
a) Unless otherwise stated, the color oI the "roba" shall conIorm to that oI
the tiles.
b) In usual horizontal surIaces and in vertical surIaces, the "roba" Ior the
joints shall be a normal industrialized "roba," ready-made, based on
cement, to which water or a polymer shall be added on the Site, as per
the "roba" ManuIacturer's instructions.
c) The Iilling materials Ior usual joints, in special outdoors and indoor
surIaces shall conIorm to the requirements oI SI 1555, Part 1. They
shall have a low capillary absorptivity, allow the passage oI water
vapor, good bonding capability on the tiles sides and stand up to
various environmental conditions, as required in the Special
SpeciIication (such as: basic and acid prooIness, elasticity in meeting
temperature changes in kitchens, mildew-prooIness, UV radiation-
prooIness, marine environment prooIness, etc.)
10014 Filling Materials in Expansion 1oints
Expansion joints shall be sealed with elastic waterprooIing material standing up
to the requirements concerning waterprooIing materials named E 12.5, E 20, E
25 in SI 1536 and to the requirements oI the Special SpeciIication. The backing
elements oI the waterprooIing elements shall have rounded-oII sections made oI
soIt material, such as Ioamed polyethylene.
10015 Materials for Thermal or Acoustic Insulation
The materials Ior thermal or acoustic insulation shall be as detailed in the Special
SpeciIication.
10016 Precast Concrete Products for Flooring
Precast concrete products Ior Ilooring, Ilooring tiles and Ilooring slabs shall be as
deIined in SI 8 and in conIormity with the requirements oI the Special
SpeciIication.
10 (2001)
8
1002 Terrazzo Tiles and Concrete Products Flooring
10020 General
The present sub-chapter deals with terrazzo or stone Iragments Iloor tiles
(conIorming to the requirements oI SI 6).
All the tiles and precast products supplied to the Site shall conIorm to the
samples already supplied, as stated in paragraph 10004 above.
For outdoors Ilooring see Chapter 51 "The General SpeciIication Ior the
Construction oI Airport Runways, Roads and Public Squares."
10021 Flooring Preparation
Prior to the start oI execution, the Contractor shall make sure that all the required
preparations have been completed, such as: door Irames have been attended to,
water pipeline set into the area to be tiled insulated and protected, various drains
installed, electrical and control pipes installed, tiling backing prepared as
required in the Special SpeciIication and the other Contract Documents.
10022 Thermal or Acoustic Insulation
The thermal or acoustic insulation shall be executed Iollowing to a Request and
according to Details in the Special SpeciIication.
10023 Flooring Substrate
Unless otherwise speciIied in the Special SpeciIication Ior thermal or acoustic
insulation, the Contractor shall execute a lower substrate layer consisting oI sand,
6 cm thick at least. Above that sand layer, a cement stabilized sand layer shall be
set, as detailed in paragraph 10114 above.
The minimal thickness oI this stabilizing layer shall be 3 cm.
The water content oI the sand (in percentage oI the weight) in the lower sub-
grade layer, shall be between 4 to 6, in a drying test at a temperature above
105C.
10024 Flooring with Terrazzo Tiles
Unless otherwise speciIied, the tiles shall conIorm to the Type 1 cement type oI
SI 6, as Iar as abrasion is concerned and to Type A as Iar as tolerated deIects.
The request Ior basalt aggregate or color aggregate or Ior special dimensions
shall be as detailed in the Contract Documents. All the other requirements shall
be as stated in SI 6.
The tiles shall be sorted out on the Site prior to the start oI the tiling so as to
ensure that within deIined areas, single color and texture are kept. The tiles shall
be visually examined prior to the start oI tiling operation. All the tiles with
surIaces or edges, which do not stand up to the requirements shall not be used Ior
tiling and be removed Irom the Site.
Moreover, each tile shall be inspected as it is being laid. All the deIected, stained
or cracked tiles shall be rejected and removed Irom the Site, even iI already
10 (2001)
9
installed at their place. A light stain at the center oI the tile shall be enough a
reason Ior its rejection.
The tiles shall be laid on a cement-stabilized substrate, as required in paragraph
10023 above.
The mortar Ior the tiling shall be as stated in paragraph 100115.
Unless otherwise stated in the Special SpeciIication, the tiles shall be laid at right
angles and in straight and running lines. The joints shall be closed (the space
between the tiles shall be under 0.5 mm).
In the vicinity oI openings and corners, along walls, etc., the tiles shall be cut as
may be required. The cutting oI the tiles on the Site shall be perIormed by means
oI disk-saws.
Unless otherwise stated, in those places where there is a diIIerence oI level
between adjacent surIaces, the tiling shall be ended with a Ilat aluminum strip at
least 30/3 mm, well anchored. Next to doors opening outwards (entrance doors),
gates, in expansion joints or gates rails, the strip shall be executed according to
the detail in the Drawing.
All the places where the tiles are laid over pipes running under the tiling, the
work shall be executed as stated in Chapter 07 Sanitary Installations (paragraph
"Regulations Ior the Installation oI Pipelines").
All those places where a trap or another accessory is installed in the tiling, the
tiles shall be cut around the trap or the accessory in a rounded or square shape, as
close as possible to the accessory or the trap. The cutting shall be achieved by
means oI an appropriate cutting tool. The sealing oI the intervals shall consist oI
an appropriate industrial "roba," as stated in paragraph 10013 above.
10025 Precast Terrazzo Skirting
The terrazzo skirting shall be oI the same type as the terrazzo tiles, in the same
color and conIorm to the tiles surIace texture. The height oI the skirting shall be 7
cm or 10 cm, as indicated in the Drawings or other Contract Documents.
The thickness oI the skirting shall not exceed 12 mm. The skirting shall be set
with Iull thickness on the Ilooring tiles.
The joints between the skirting shall be a continuation oI the joints between the
tiles. The edges oI the contact between the skirting surIace and the vertical plane
to which they shall be attached, shall be truncated at a 45 angle.
The skirting shall be cut-oII in a clean contact line next to the door Irames,
according to the details in the Drawings.
In those places where there is no plastering on the wall, the skirting shall have an
upper edge detailed in a clean way and be bonded to the wall by means oI a glue
as stated in paragraph 10119 above. The skirting shall be bonded to exposed
concrete walls, raisings, gypsum walls and Iair-Iaced masonry walls, in a way
similar to that oI the tiles.
10 (2001)
10
Unless otherwise stated in the Special SpeciIication, the skirting oI all the walls
and raisings shall conIorm to the tiling material.
10026 Concrete Products Tiling (Tiling Slabs)
Tiling with tiling slabs (interlocking stones) shall be executed as stated in
Chapter 51 "The Construction oI Airport Runways, Roads and Public Squares."
10 (2001)
11
1003 Flooring with Ceramic Flooring Tiles
10030 General
The tiling with ceramic tiles shall be as detailed in the Special SpeciIication, as
indicated in one oI the two Iollowing methods:
a) Tiling by means oI cement mortar;
b) Tiling by means oI one brushed glue layer.
For tiling in wet areas, see Sub-Chapter 1008 below.
10031 Ceramic Tiles
The ceramic tiles Ior tiling shall entirely conIorm to SI 314 and be oI the glazed
or not-glazed type, as indicated in the Special SpeciIication. The glazed type
shall in no case, be oI the type called in the Standard "reactive glazing tile."
Unless otherwise indicated, the tiles shall have a low absorptivity.
Unless otherwise stated, the tiles shall be oI Type A, with at least average
abrasion level, as deIined in SI 314. The ceramic tiles shall have uniIorm color
and texture and all oI them shall conIorm to the sample approved by the COR.
All the tiles Iound to be bent or with damaged or cracked surIace, broken edges,
etc., shall be removed Irom the Site. A damaged tile which has been installed
shall be taken out Irom its place and replaced by another tile.
The use oI tiles made up oI crushed mineral material, a Iiller and bonding
material subjected to pressure ("granite porcelain") shall conIorm to the
requirements in the Special SpeciIication and to the approved sample.
10032 Preparation for Flooring by Means of Cement-Mortar
The preparation Ior the Ilooring shall be as stated above in paragraph 10021 in
relation to terrazzo tiles.
10033 Preparation for Flooring by Means of Glue
The preparation Ior the Ilooring shall be as required in the Special SpeciIication.
10034 Flooring
The mortar Ior the tiling shall be as stated in paragraph 100115 above and be put
on all the surIace oI the tile (care shall be given to the Iull cover oI the tile's
surIace in order to prevent the edges oI the tiles Irom breaking). From the other
aspects, the tiles shall be executed as stated in relationship to terrazzo tiles
Ilooring, except Ior the joints.
The width oI the joints between the tiles shall be at least 3 mm. The joints shall
be Iilled with industrial "roba." Unless otherwise stated, the color oI the "roba"
shall be identical to that oI the tiles.
For Ilooring by bonding, according to a requirement in the Special SpeciIication,
the bonding material shall be as detailed in paragraph 10119 above.
10 (2001)
12
10035 Ceramic Skirting
The ceramic skirting shall be executed as stated above in paragraph 10025 in
relation to terrazzo skirting.
10 (2001)
13
1004 Flooring with Resilient Materials (including Carpets)
10040 General
All the materials shall conIorm with the requirements oI the appropriate
Standards. The thickness oI the material shall be as indicated in the Special
SpeciIication. Special requirements such as: Ilammability grade oI the material,
electrical conductibility oI the material in Iunction oI the building's purpose or oI
the part in which the resilient material Ilooring is executed, shall conIorm with
indications in one oI the Contract Documents. The type oI glue Ior the bonding,
as well as its use shall be as stated in the Special SpeciIication and paragraph
100119 above.
Flooring with resilient materials shall be executed aIter the completion oI all the
other activities that may impair the Ilooring and at a time to be agreed upon
beIorehand with the COR.
Resilient materials Ior Ilooring not covered by one oI the Israeli Standards
indicated below, shall be as required in the Special SpeciIication.
10041 PVC Flooring
100410 General
PVC products shall conIorm to the requirements oI SI 540 and be glued onto
plane surIaces (any other surIace shall be described in the Special SpeciIication),
smooth, dry and totally clean, which shall be reIerred to Iurther on as "the
substrate." The substrate shall consist oI one oI the alternatives described below,
unless otherwise stated in the Special SpeciIication.
100411 Preparations Ior PVC Ilooring on leveling "meda"
Preparations Ior PVC on concrete surIaces with a "leveling meda" on top oI the
surIace to be covered, a "leveling meda" shall be cast with the thickness required
Ior leveling the surIace. The "meda" shall be installed according to the "meda"
ManuIacturer's instructions.
100412 Preparations Ior PVC Ilooring on smoothened concrete
The preparations Ior PVC Ilooring on smoothened concrete shall consist oI
smoothening the surIace by means oI a "helicopter" and curing it, according to
the requirements oI Chapter 02 "Cast in Place Concrete Works."
100413 Preparations Ior PVC Ilooring on concrete "meda"
The preparations Ior PVC Ilooring on concrete "meda" shall consist oI the setting
oI the "meda" and oI the detailing oI its surIace according to the requirements oI
the SpeciIication, the levels and slopes shown in the Drawings, including
requirements Ior straightening and smoothening.
There shall be no steel reinIorcement into the concrete "meda."
The concrete "meda" surIaces shall be cured during at least three days.
10 (2001)
14
100414 Preparations Ior PVC Ilooring atop tiles
The Contractor shall polish the tiled surIace, smoothen it and Iill in joints
between the tiles with wax, prior to the installation oI the PVC
100415 Preparations Ior PVC Ilooring atop a soIt substrate
The preparations Ior PVC Ilooring atop a soIt substrate such as Ielt, sponge or
timber shall be as described in the Special SpeciIication.
100416 Flooring with PVC membranes
The membranes rolls shall be unrolled and leIt alone until straightened. The room
in which PVC membranes are to be bonded shall be clean and dust-prooI. The
membranes shall be Iully bonded.
The membranes shall be set atop the substrate while their edges are bonded. Later
on, the contact lines shall be cut to a V shape. For stabilizing the membrane,
pressure shall be applied on the edges by means oI weights or manually by means
oI a cylindrical roll. Small air bubbles shall be released by piercing the
membranes with a sharp tool.
Following the cutting oI the lines, the membranes shall be welded by means oI a
welding-machine specially adapted to PVC, Iunctioning with hot air. The
welding shall be executed with a special string made oI the same material and oI
the same color. Prior to the welding, the cut lines shall be thoroughly cleaned.
Following the welding operation and while the material is still hot, the joints
shall be straightened by means oI a special kniIe.
100417 Flooring with PVC tiles
The bonding oI the tiles shall be achieved in a way similar to that oI the
membranes bonding, except Ior the welding oI the edges. The end oI the Ilooring
next to the walls shall consist oI tiles sections. The thickness and dimensions oI
the tiles shall be as indicated in the Drawings or the Bill oI Quantities.
The bonded surIace shall be rolled by means oI a cylindrical hand-roller. Special
care shall be given to the compaction oI the edges oI each tile, to be executed by
hammering with a rubber hammer.
The tiles shall be adjacent one to the other and their lines straight and running.
100418 PVC skirting
PVC skirting shall be bonded both to the Iloor and the wall. Rigid skirting
(timber, etc.) shall be anchored by means oI appropriate stainless steel screws
and nails, or as required in the Special SpeciIication.
10042 The Laying of Carpets
100420 General
The Contractor shall submit a CertiIicate attesting that the carpets he wishes to
supply according to the requirements oI the Special SpeciIication, stand up to the
10 (2001)
15
The type oI carpets and their various properties such as: thickness, weight,
bonding materials, etc., shall conIorm to the requirements oI the Special
SpeciIication and be submitted to prior approval by the COR beIore their
ordering by the Contractor.
The laying oI the carpets shall be executed aIter the completion oI all the works
in the building, according to the type oI carpet and to what shall be required in
The preparation oI the substrate Ior the laying oI carpets shall be in accordance
with what shall be required in the SpeciIication and in above paragraph 10041
PVC Flooring.
The layout direction oI the carpet and the location oI the seams shall be
submitted to the approval oI the COR. The layout direction shall not be changed
in that same space. The carpets shall be bonded by means oI contact glue or
acrylic glue, according to the recommendation oI the carpet's ManuIacturer.
Seams between carpets edges shall be executed by the Double Cut method.
In the seam between the carpet and Ilooring oI another material, an appropriate
Iinishing section shall be installed. Unless otherwise speciIied in the Contract
Documents, the section shall be oI anodized aluminum, in a suited color.
Felt carpets shall only be laid by gluing. All other types oI carpets may be just
laid or bonded, as required in the Special SpeciIication.
Prior to the handing over, the carpets shall be vacuum-cleaned.
100421 The laying oI carpets by bonding
The laying oI carpets by bonding shall be carried out on a concrete surIace
"helicopter"-smoothened and cured, as required in Chapter 02 Cast in Place
Concrete Works.
Prior to the bonding, the carpets shall be unrolled and leIt alone Ior a Iew hours,
according to the ManuIacturer's recommendations. The minimal glue quantities
shall be as Iollows:
- Acrylic Glue: 300 grams per sq.m.
- Contact Glue: 220 grams per sq.m.
For the bonding oI a carpet with contact glue, the Iloor as well as the underside
oI the carpet shall be covered with the glue, in a uniIorm spreading that shall
cover the whole surIaces. In the course oI the laying, attention shall be given to
prevent waving.
Following the laying oI the carpet, it shall be compacted by means oI an
appropriate roller.
Stitched carpets skirting shall have a Iinish stitched with an appropriate tread.
In bonded carpets atop stairs, at each meeting between treads and risers,
appropriate "locking" as well as "hose protector" sections shall be added, made oI
10 (2001)
16
aluminum, into which the carpet shall be inserted. The sections shall be anchored
into the substrate by means oI spiking bolts, as detailed in the Drawings.
100422 The laying oI carpets by stretching
Should it be so required in the Special SpeciIication, a crossed polyethylene or
Iloccules sponge substrate shall be glued on the surIace, prior to the stretching oI
the carpets.
As preparation Ior the laying oI the carpets, they shall be unrolled on the entire
surIace to be covered, a Iew hours prior to their stretching. The stretching oI the
carpet shall be accomplished by means oI appropriate instruments and shall
include its attachment to the rulers Iollowed by the Iixation oI the rulers.
The Contractor shall stretch the carpets by means oI nailed wooden rulers as
deIined in the Special SpeciIication (or by any other means that shall receive
prior approval by the COR). The rulers shall be Iixed unto the Iloor along the
whole perimeter oI the room by means oI nails or screws at 15 cm intervals and
at a distance oI 5-10 mm Irom the wall.
At junctions and corners, the screws and nails shall be set at a distance oI 5 cm
Irom the edge oI each ruler. The quantity oI screws and nails, their diameters and
lengths shall be according to what shall be stated in the Special SpeciIication.
10 (2001)
17
1005 Terrazzo and Granulated Surfaces Cast in Place
10050 General
The terrazzo surIaces shall be executed as described below.
The required terrazzo and granulated textures, the type and size oI the aggregates,
the color oI the cement, the division into the casting oI various surIaces and the
material Ior the dividers shall be according to the Contract Documents.
10051 Terrazzo Surfaces
100511 Substrate and casting oI terrazzo
The substrate Ior the casting oI the terrazzo in place shall be made oI concrete oI
at least B-20 grade. The Iinish oI the substrate shall be uneven. The thickness oI
the concrete substrate shall be according to the Iinishing layer but not less than 4
cm. The terrazzo layer shall meet, at least, the abrasion requirements detailed
below.
In accordance with what shall be stated in the Special SpeciIication, pigments or
special aggregates shall be added to the terrazzo layer. The inner layer and the
color oI the terrazzo layer aIter its polish, shall correspond to the samples
approved beIorehand by the COR. The aggregate shall meet the requirements oI
SI 1098, the cement shall be Portland cement standing up to the requirements oI
SI 1. The pigments materials (colors) shall be as required in above paragraph
100118.
The colors shall be mixed with cement until a uniIorm color shall be obtained
and later on this mixture shall be mixed with the aggregates and the water, until a
mixture uniIorm in consistency and color is obtained. The addition oI pigments
shall be done according to the directives oI the pigment's ManuIacturer. The
maximal quantity shall not exceed Iour percent oI the cement's quantity.
100512 Casting oI the terrazzo in place
The casting oI the terrazzo in place shall be perIormed according to one oI the
methods described hereinaIter:
a) II the application shall be carried out according to the paragraph
"Method Ior casting two continuous layers" in Chapter 10
Construction oI Airport Runways, Road and Public Squares Concrete
SurIaces, the allowed length oI the side shall be between 100 to 150
cm, depending on the Site's conditions (indoor or outdoor casting,
large temperature diIIerences and the size oI the terrazzo aggregate).
Prior to the start oI the casting oI the terrazzo's substrate, the concrete shall
be thoroughly cleaned and moistened. The substrate layer and the terrazzo
layer shall be cast "Iresh on Iresh," as indicated in Chapter 50 Concrete
SurIaces (the method oI two continuous layers). The thickness oI the
terrazzo layer shall be at least 1.5 cm aIter the grinding.
b) Whenever the terrazzo layer is set directly on the existing concrete
substrate Iurther to its cleaning and moistening, the length oI the side
10 (2001)
18
in one Iield shall be between 80 to 100 cm subject to the climatic
conditions in above paragraph a).
In any case, the ratio between the length and the width oI the ribs in one Iield
shall not exceed 1.1 to 1.5.
All the surIaces, except Ior the smallest surIaces or Ior very short strips, shall be
divided into Iields or sections by means oI dividers. The dividers shall be made
oI a copper alloy, aluminum or glass, as indicated in the Drawings and the
Special SpeciIication. The dividers dimension shall not be less than 30/3 mm and
their section shall correspond to that oI the surIace they divide. The location oI
the dividers shall be shown in the Drawings and they shall be set upright and
strongly into the substrate layer while it is still plastic.
The dimensions oI the Iields, the shape and length oI their sides shall be as
required in the Drawings and the Special SpeciIication. Should there be no
indication oI dimensions in the Special SpeciIication Ior the execution oI the
dividers, the Contractor shall perIorm the divisions as stated above.
The terrazzo layer shall be polished at least twice. The Iirst polishing, with
carborundum stone, shall be done on the day Iollowing the casting under
permanent moisture. Prior to the second polishing (and the third one, iI required),
a cement mixture with a composition similar to that used Ior the terrazzo but with
"marble Ilour" instead oI Iine aggregate, shall be spread on the surIace. The
spreading and the polishing, the second and third ones, shall be done by means oI
a carborundum stone Iiner than the Iirst one and under permanent moistening.
The polishing oI dry terrazzo shall not be allowed.
Unless otherwise stated in the Special SpeciIication, the quality oI the perIormed
surIaces shall be oI Type B and their abrasion resistance oI Type 3, as deIined in
relation to stairs risings in SI 1182.
Window sills, cornices, parapets, etc., shall be detailed including water-drops and
according to the sections and slopes shown on the Drawings. Sills, thresholds,
etc., having a length oI over 1.2 m shall be divided into strips as above.
The cast in place terrazzo skirting shall end up with a rounded edge at their upper
edge and on the sides.
100513 Curing oI the Terrazzo
Upon completion oI the casting and detailing work, the terrazzo areas are to be
kept in a humid state Ior at least seven days.
10052 Cast in Place Granulated Surfaces
100520 General
All the preparations Ior the execution oI granulated surIaces including the
preparation oI the mixture, the execution oI the casting and oI the curing
(excluding the Iinish oI the surIace), besides what is stated in above paragraph
10051 Terrazzo SurIaces, shall be done as stated in the paragraph below.
10 (2001)
19
100521 Substrate, composition and thickness oI granulated layer
The granulated layer shall be cast on RC surIaces with rough Iinish, as stated in
the Special SpeciIication. The granulated layer shall be perIormed not earlier
than 48 hours Iollowing the concrete casting.
The aggregate used Ior the upper layer shall conIorm to the samples approved
beIorehand by the COR. Prior to the start oI work, the Contractor shall prepare a
number oI samples, so as to enable the COR to choose the wanted sample.
The chosen aggregate shall be spread out in a uniIorm way atop the surIace so
that the whole area shall be covered with aggregates. The minimal thickness oI
the layer shall be twice the size oI the largest aggregate. Following the casting
operation, when a uniIorm surIace is obtained, hardening retarding material,
previously approved by the COR, shall be sprinkled or brushed. The spreading
shall be executed at the end oI the casting on concrete Iinish surIaces only.
Should a granulated surIace with colored backing be required, pigments (colors)
shall be used as detailed in paragraph 100511 above.
100522 Exposure oI granulated surIaces
The execution oI the exposure oI granulated upper aggregates shall start at a time
that shall enable brushing and washing without exposing the other aggregates or
removing them Irom their place. Should it be so indicated in the Contract
Documents, the exposure oI the aggregate shall be carried out by careIul sand
blasting or any other procedure approved by the COR.
Granulated surIaces with non-uniIorm pattern, cracked or damaged in any way,
shall be rejected.
10 (2001)
20
1006 Rigid Covering on Walls
10060 General
The present sub-chapter describes the requirements Ior rigid coverings on indoor
and outdoor walls. The coverings are executed in place.
The materials Ior the covering consist oI ceramic tiles standing up to the
requirements oI SI 314 and to additional limitations in SI 1555, Part 1; ceramic
or glass mosaics shall stand up to the requirements oI SI 1353.
The surIace oI the tile shall not exceed 0.10 sq.m.
The method Ior the covering shall be bonding, as described below. Should there
be no requirements detailed in the Special SpeciIication Ior the bonding material,
the bonding material shall conIorm with the requirements oI above paragraph
100119.
The covering shall be glued unto plastering used as an intermediate layer or
directly unto the backing, as required in the Special SpeciIication.
The covering works shall start not earlier than 28 days Iollowing the completion
oI the backing.
10061 The backing of the covering
100610 General
Backing: wall, column or any part oI the building to be covered.
Substrate: the layer upon which the bonding layer shall be set.
The backing oI the covering, which is being dealt with in this SpeciIication,
consists oI concrete, concrete blocks, cellular concrete blocks, or lime blocks
walls. For indoor covering, the backing may also be a gypsum blocks or plates
walls.
Whenever the backing is not suitable Ior direct bonding oI the rigid coverings,
the Contractor shall execute a backing as detailed below.
100611 Preparation oI the backing in outdoor walls
The preliminary works on the backing shall not start earlier than two weeks
Iollowing the completion oI the casting and masonry building works. The
surIaces to be covered shall be straight with allowed deviation tolerances in the
substrate plane, smaller than +15 mm, when measured with a 2 m long ruler.
The preparation oI the backing, should it be required in the Special SpeciIication,
shall include the execution oI plastering as an intermediate layer.
Prior to the start oI work, the backing shall be prepared by sealing holes and
cracks, removing protuberances; the approbation that the surIace is plane and
ready Ior plastering shall be needed. The sealing shall be well cured prior to the
issue oI permission to start the plastering operation. Any visible reinIorcement on
10 (2001)
21
inner or external surIaces shall be dealt with in accordance with the COR's
instructions.
Following the sealing oI the holes, it shall be checked whether the surIace is
plane within the deviations mentioned above.
10062 Plastering as Intermediate Layer on External Walls
The intermediate layer shall include a thrown layer and a straightening layer. On
concrete, it shall be allowed to perIorm the bonding oI the ceramic tiles directly
on the concrete or on a lower thrown layer, or on an insulation layer set on
thermal bridges as detailed in paragraph 100632 below, all as required in the
Unless otherwise speciIied in the Special SpeciIication, the plastering oI the
intermediate layer shall conIorm to the requirements detailed hereinaIter:
One day beIore the execution oI the plastering works, the backing surIace shall
be moistened until saturation, however not until water runs oII the wall. In the
vicinity oI the sea, the watering oI external walls shall be specially taken care oI
in a very thorough way. In the hot season, the backing surIace shall be watered
twice a light watering only prior to the actual start oI the plastering works.
Special care shall be given to the watering oI cellular concrete blocks and sand-
lime blocks.
The thickness oI the lower thrown layer oI the plastering shall be 5+1 mm.
The thickness oI the straightening layer at any point shall not be less than 8 mm
and not exceed 30 mm.
Whenever the thickness oI the straightening layer exceeds 30 mm but is under 50
mm, unless otherwise stated, the layer shall include a steel mesh reinIorcement as
stated in paragraph 100631 below.
In such places where a thickness oI over 50 mm is required, the work shall be
The width oI joints in the structure shall remain as their width in the existing
structure.
The curing oI the intermediate layer shall include the moistening oI the
intermediate layer at least twice a day during the Iirst Iive days oI the curing
period.
The composition oI the plastering layers shall be as detailed in Table 1 with the
addition oI the Iollowing instructions and directives:
a) For setting on particularly smooth backing, an additive improving the
bonding oI the plastering to the backing shall be added to the mortar
used Ior the lower thrown layer.
For setting on particularly perIorated backing, an additive improving the
water trapping capability oI the mortar shall be added to the mortar used Ior
the lower thrown layer.
10 (2001)
22
b) The mortar Ior the straightening layer shall include an additive
improving workability and bonding.
c) The sand in the mortar Ior the lower thrown layer shall be natural sand.
The use oI quarry sand shall be allowed only Ior mortar Ior the
straightening layer, provided that the dust content in it shall not exceed
35.
d) Lime shall not be used in any oI the external plastering layers.
Table 1 - Mortar for external plastering serving as a substrate to rigid
coverings
The Layer
Volume
Ratio
Minimal
Cement
Content
(kg/cu.m.
of Fresh
Mortar)
Additives
Lower
thrown layer
1:2.5-3
cement to
natural sand
350
Additives may
be added in
quantities as
directed by the
additives
ManuIacturer's
directives
Straightening
layer
1additive:3-
3.5
cement
additive to
sand
350
The mixture
shall contain
additives in
quantities as
indicated in
the additives
ManuIacturer's
directives

10063 Reinforcement and Thermal Bridges in the Intermediate Layers
100631 The use oI reinIorcement mesh
Whenever the coverings backing does not meet the resistance requirements Ior
the execution oI rigid coverings, such as in the case oI cellular concrete blocks,
or whenever a reinIorcement is required in the straightening layer, as stated in
paragraph 10062 above, the Contractor shall install a hot-dip zinc galvanized
steel mesh Iollowing the welding. The galvanization shall be as stated in SI 918.
In corrosive environment, such as not Iurther than 500 m Irom the sea, or in an
area with chemical plants, the Contractor shall install, atop external walls, such
meshes as described above but made oI stainless chloride-prooI steel (such as
"Palbam" 316L).
In the absence oI a requirement in the Special SpeciIication, the total surIace oI
the re-bars sections shall be 0.2 sq.cm. Ior each 10 cm oI mesh (in both
10 (2001)
23
directions). The distance between the bars shall not exceed twice the thickness oI
the straightening plastering layer and not be larger than 50 mm.
The mesh shall be kept at a distance oI at least 10 mm Irom the backing wall and
covered with a straightening mortar layer at least 10 mm thick.
The mesh shall be anchored to the backing by appropriate means, while the
strength oI each anchoring to the backing shall be at least 80 kg. The way the
mesh shall be anchored to the wall shall be as required in the Special
SpeciIication. The distance between the anchors shall not exceed 30 cm.
100632 Thermal bridges
The thermal bridges shall be as they are deIined in SI 1045.
Unless otherwise stated in one oI the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall
install insulation on the thermal bridges. On all the concrete surIaces: columns,
walls, beams, slabs edges, etc. oI external walls. The insulation shall consist oI
polystyrene M boards Ior thermal insulation meeting the requirements oI SI
1229, Part 1, while the compressive strength oI the board shall not be less than
0.1 Megapascal, the Iire reaction classiIication oI the boards at least B
2
.1.2 as per
SI 755 and their speciIic mass not higher than 20 kg/cu.m. The polystyrene
boards shall have a minimal thickness oI not less than 20 mm. The boards shall
be bonded to the concrete by means oI appropriate glue.
On top oI polystyrene boards the Contractor shall install a plastering layer, a
lower thrown layer and a straightening layer, as stated in paragraph 10062 above,
including a reinIorcement mesh as stated in paragraph 100631 above.
10064 Rigid Coverings on External Walls
100640 General
Rigid coverings on external walls shall consist oI ceramic tiles or glass mosaics.
The covering material shall be as required in the Special SpeciIication. The
Contractor shall perIorm the covering only aIter the backing and substrate oI the
external walls surIace shall be Iound to be suited Ior the installation oI the
covering, as stated in paragraph 10062 above.
100641 Covering
The testing oI the compatibility oI the backing and the substrate to the
installation oI the rigid coverings shall be accomplished according to the
requirement in the Special SpeciIication.
The wall to be covered shall be smooth and plane, as required in Table 3 below.
The covering oI the Iirst row or oI the Iirst rows oI the external covering close to
the ground, shall be executed as shown in the Drawings' details.
The bonding oI the mosaics and the removal oI the paper shall be carried out
according to the directives oI the mosaics ManuIacturer.
Unless otherwise speciIied in the Contract Documents, the covering shall be in
straight and running lines in both directions, the tiles having uniIorm sizes.
10 (2001)
24
The tiles shall be bonded with glue, as required in the Special SpeciIication and
according to what is stated in above paragraph 100119.
The cutting oI the tile shall be smooth, "toothless" and carried out by a
mechanical cutting tool.
The detailing oI the corners or the use oI corner sections or sections with upper
detailed edge shall be according to the requirements and as detailed in the Special
SpeciIication.
Openings Ior pipes and accessories shall be created by detailing holes in the tiles
by means oI appropriate tools.
The use oI broken tiles shall not be allowed. The edges oI tiles coming into
contact with joinery and metal works shall be most careIully executed.
100642 Joints
The width oI the joints between the ceramic tiles shall be at least 4 mm. The
width oI the joints between mosaic plates shall be identical to that oI the joints
between the mosaic tiles on those plates, as required in SI 1353, so as not to
stress out the outline oI the plates. The Contractor shall use appropriate spacers in
order to obtain the required distances.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the dilatation joints shall be
executed as Iollows:
a) Constructive Joints Dilatation joints passing through the building
shall also pass through the whole covering system, through the
intermediate layer, the bonding layer, the ceramic or mosaic tiles as
well as the Iilling and waterprooIing materials in the joints which all
together represent the cover oI the backing. The joints shall pass
through straight lines and have the designed width;
b) Intermediate Joints Ior the release oI stresses in the covering system
intermediate joints shall be installed at each intersection oI planes
(such as: inner and outer corners). Unless otherwise stated, the
distances between horizontal joints as well as between vertical joints
shall be between 3 to 5 m. The horizontal joints shall be at the height
oI the underside oI the ceilings.
Intermediate joints shall pass through the bonding layer and the tiles;
c) Separation Joints Ior absorbing movement changes in the contact
between various backing materials or covering materials shall pass
through the bonding layer and the tiles only. The separation joints shall
be set in those places where the backing material changes and in places
where the tiles come into contact with components oI the building such
as windows, lighting boards, etc.
The width oI the intermediate joints and the separation joints shall be 6 mm at
least.
Tiles shall not be bonded to the joints.
10 (2001)
25
Upon completion oI the covering works, the joints between the tiles shall be
Iilled with industrial "roba," as indicated in the Special SpeciIication and stated
in paragraph 10013 above.
10065 Rigid Coverings on Inner Walls
100650 The backing Ior the covering
Whenever the backing consists oI gypsum boards or blocks, the rigid coverings
shall be glued directly on the internal covering backing.
The backing oI the covering consisting oI other materials shall be executed as
stated in above paragraph 100611.
100651 Plastering as intermediate layer on inner walls
Unless otherwise stated in the Special SpeciIication, the plastering oI the
intermediate layer (except Ior a backing oI gypsum blocks and plates) shall be
executed according to the requirements Iormulated hereinaIter:
One day beIore the start oI the plastering work, the surIace oI the backing shall
be moistened up to saturation, however not until water starts running out Irom the
wall. In the hot season, the backing surIace shall be moistened again slightly
only prior to the actual start oI the plastering work. Special care shall be given
to the moistening oI cellular concrete blocks and sand-lime blocks.
The composition oI the lower thrown layer shall be as indicated in Table 1 above.
The thickness oI the lower thrown layer oI the plastering shall be 5+1 mm.
The thickness oI the straightening layer at any point shall not be less than 8 mm
and not exceed 30 mm.
Whenever the thickness oI the straightening layer exceeds 30 mm but is under 50
mm, unless otherwise stated, the layer shall include a steel mesh reinIorcement as
stated below.
In such places where a thickness oI over 50 mm is required, the work shall be
The composition oI the plastering layers shall be according to one oI the
alternatives stated in Table 2 below, with the addition oI the Iollowing
instructions and directives.
In the absence oI a requirement in the Special SpeciIication, the straightening
layer shall be executed with a volume ratio oI 1 cement additive to 5 sand, as
stated in Table 2 below.
a) Should it be so required in the Special SpeciIication or whenever the
required intermediate layer shall be 30 mm thick, the substrate shall be
reinIorced with appropriate reinIorcement meshes, as stated in
paragraph 100631 above;
10 (2001)
26
b) For installation on a particularly smooth substrate, an additive
improving the bonding oI the plastering to the substrate shall be added
to the mortar used Ior the thrown layer.
For installation on a particularly cellular substrate, an additive improving
the air-trapping capacity oI the mortar's water shall be added to the mortar
Ior the thrown layer;
c) The mortar Ior the straightening layer shall include an additive Ior
improving workability and bonding;
d) The sand in the mortar oI the lower thrown layer shall be natural sand.
The use oI quarry sand shall be allowed only in the mortar Ior the
straightening layer, provided that the powder content in it shall remain
under 35;
e) Constructive joints shall keep their existing width in the building and
be executed as shown in the Drawings;
I) The curing oI the intermediate layer shall be carried out by watering
the intermediate layer at least twice a day during the Iirst 15 days oI
the curing period.
10 (2001)
27
Table 2 - Mortar for inner plastering serving as a substrate to rigid
coverings
The Layer
Volume
Ratio
Minimal
Cement
Content
(kg/cu.m.
of Fresh
Mortar)
Additives

Straightening
layer
1
cement

additive
to 5
sand
220
The mixture
shall include
additives in
quantities
indicated in
the additives
manuIacturer's
directives

1
cement
1 lime
paste
(*)
6 sand
180 -
Remarks to the Table: (*) 1 liter oI lime paste shall be obtained Irom 1.3 liter oI
lime powder or 0.85 kg oI lime powder

100652 Execution oI rigid covering on inner walls
The execution oI the covering shall be as stated in above paragraph 100641.
10066 Installation of Accessories
Accessories such as soap-holders, handrails, hand-dryers, liquid soap dispensers,
toilet paper holders, hooks, mirrors, etc., shall be installed Iollowing the
requirement and according to the details in the Special SpeciIication.
10 (2001)
28
1007 Stairs and Sills
10071 Precast Stairs
Three types oI precast stairs shall be distinguished:
a) Single stair Resting on two supports or console stair as detailed in SI
42 and meeting all the requirements oI SI 42 and according to one oI
the Iollowing alternatives:
1) with no covering;
2) with terrazzo covering;
3) with granulated covering meeting the requirements oI above
Sub-Chapter 1005
4) with stone Iragments or stone plate covering.
b) Flight oI stairs As deIined in SI 1182 and meeting all the
c) Precast plates For the treads and the risers.
Unless otherwise speciIied the stairs in the three types shall be terrazzo covered
as detailed in paragraph 100511 above and shall be abrasion prooI to the Type 2
level deIined in SI 1182 Ior the tread oI the stair. All the stairs types shall meet
the requirements oI Type A in SI 1182 Ior the tolerated deIects.
Terrazzo or concrete plates with terrazzo or stone Iragments covering Ior the
covering oI stairs shall be as required in SI 1554.
The stairs shall be manuIactured and laid according to the Drawings and the
details in the Contract Documents. For the execution oI landings covered with
cast in place terrazzo, see paragraph 10051 above. For the execution oI landings
covered with stone tiling, see Chapter 14 Stone Works.
10072 Finish of Precast Plates
Visible edges oI the precast plates (tread or riser) shall be tool-polished in neat
and straight lines. Should the plates be cast oI separate units, the Iinish oI the
visible edges shall be neat aIter the removal oI the Iormwork or polished as stated
above. The corners shall be truncated at 45 or rounded-oII.
10073 Stairs Cast in Place
Stairs cast in place shall be made oI at least B-30 concrete with reinIorcement, as
indicated in the Drawings. The Iinish shall be with terrazzo, as stated in
10074 Sills
Unless otherwise stated, precast sills shall be covered with terrazzo on all the
visible parts, polished into a uniIorm and smooth slope, without cracks, holes or
other deIects. The edge oI the sill, which protrudes Irom the wall on three sides,
10 (2001)
29
shall be detailed with rain water-drop. The sills shall be leveled and installed
exactly according to the slope required in the Drawings. Unless otherwise
required in one oI the Contract Documents, the window-sill shall protrude
outwards by at least 1 cm.
The spaces between the sill and the window, as well as between the sill and the
masonry around shall be Iilled with water-repellant elastic synthetic putty, that
shall be approved by the COR.
The window-sills cast in place shall consist oI concrete oI at least the B-20 type
with reinIorcement, as shown in the Drawings. The Iinish shall consist oI
terrazzo, as stated in Sub-Chapter 1005 above.
The window-sills shall conIorm to SI 1554 and be executed as required in the
Drawings and the Special SpeciIication.
Sills made up oI other materials shall be according to a Special SpeciIication.
10 (2001)
30
1008 Flooring and Covering in "Wet Spaces"
10080 General
Wet areas are deIined as areas subject, Irom time to time, to humidity or to a high
rate oI water conditions, such as: public kitchens, tiled rooIs, open terraces, or
balconies without awnings, toilet rooms, laundry rooms, etc., as well as areas oI
split-level stories Iound under spaces commonly used.
The Ilooring oI Ireezer rooms shall be executed according to a Special
SpeciIication.
10081 Preparatory Works Prior to the Flooring
100811 Concrete bond-beam
Along the periphery oI the surIace deIined as wet Iloor, on the line separating it
Irom the dry surIaces, bond-beams (raisings) shall be cast on the Iloor slab. The
bond-beams shall also be cast at the bottom oI walls and partitions existing in the
wet areas. Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, the bond-beams shall have
the width oI the walls or the partitions and be 4 cm high above the designed
Ilooring level. The concrete Ior the bond-beams shall be B-20 at least. The bond-
beams shall also be cast around penetrations into the Iloor and the various pits
(except in passages). In passages between openings (doors, etc.), the upper line oI
the bond-beam shall be at the level oI the Ilooring bonding.
The transition Irom wet areas to dry ones shall be stepped and executed
according to the Drawings. The edge oI the wet area shall be 0.5 cm lower than
that oI the dry area, in the contact line.
100812 WaterprooIing oI the Iloor
Following the completion oI the bond-beam as required in paragraph 100811
above, prior to proceeding with the execution oI the Ilooring, the Contractor shall
make sure that waterprooIing was perIormed as required in Chapter 05
WaterprooIing Works.
100813 Filling-in Concrete
Prior to the execution oI the Iilling-in concrete, the Contractor shall make sure
that all the required preparations have been perIormed as required in paragraph
10021 above and that particular care was given to the conIormity oI the drainage
outlet level to that shown in the Drawings.
The Iilling-in concrete shall be at least B-20 with aggregates oI not more than 10
mm. Should there be a request Ior it in the Special SpeciIication, the Contractor
shall add to the mixture, additives Ior improving the watertightness oI the
substrate and synthetic Iibers Ior preventing plastic cracking. No reinIorcement
steel shall be set into the Iilling-in concrete.
The thickness oI the Iilling-in concrete layer shall be according to the Drawings
but at least 4 cm. The slope rate shall be as indicated in the Drawings.
10 (2001)
31
The Iilling-in concrete shall be cured as indicated in Chapter 02 Cast in Place
Concrete Works. The surIace oI the Iilling-in concrete shall be smoothened,
without bulges nor depressions.
Slopes shall not be Iormed by means oI sand, sand and cement, aggregates,
Ytong, etc.
The Iinal levels oI the Iilling-in concrete shall Iit the Iinal levels oI the Ilooring.
10082 Flooring
The Ilooring oI the Iloor shall be as stated in the Special SpeciIication, Ior
ceramic Ilooring tiles and as stated in paragraph 10031 above, Ior terrazzo tiles.
The terrazzo tiles shall meet the requirements oI SI 6.
In public kitchens, the ceramic tiles shall have a minimal thickness oI 11 mm and
be highly abrasion-prooI. In other public buildings, they shall be highly abrasion-
prooI.
Unless otherwise stated in the Special SpeciIication, the tiles shall be set at
straight angles and in straight passing through lines.
On top oI the Iilling-in concrete, the tiles shall be bonded by means oI mortar or
glue as stated in paragraph 100119 above and as required in the Special
SpeciIication.
A gap oI at least 4 mm shall be leIt between the ceramic tiles. This gap shall be
Iilled, to the Iull height oI the tile with "roba" as stated in paragraph 10013 and as
required in the Special SpeciIication.
For terrazzo Ilooring tiles, the joints shall be closed (the gap between the tiles
shall not exceed 1 mm). Bonding materials oI the terrazzo tiles shall be as stated
in paragraph 100119 above.
The cutting oI the ceramic around Iittings shall be at a distance oI 4 mm between
the edge oI the Iitting and the Iitting. The cutting shall be executed by means oI
diamond cutting disk. The Iilling oI the gap down to the Iitting shall be carried
out to the whole thickness oI the tile, with "roba," as stated above.
10083 Indoor Covering with Ceramic Tiles
Besides what is stated in paragraph 10065 above, the contact between the
horizontal surIace and the vertical covering above it (skirting or wall), shall have
a width oI at least 4 mm and be Iilled continuously along the whole length oI the
contact line and the whole thickness oI the tile, with appropriate silicone putty
approved by the COR.
10084 Watertightness Testing
In tiled rooIs and in open balconies, watertightness tests shall be carried out as
detailed in Chapter 05 WaterprooIing Works.
The test shall be perIormed prior to the execution oI the tiling.
10 (2001)
32
1009 Curing, Protection of the Tiling and Quality Control
10090 General
Following the completion oI the Ilooring or the covering, the surIaces shall be
clean, oI uniIorm color and without stains.
Should other works still be under execution Iollowing the completion oI the tiling
works, the tiling shall be protected by appropriate means.
The cleaning oI the Ilooring with running water or by Ilooding shall not be
allowed.
10091 Plastic Materials
Following the completion oI the work, the area shall be thoroughly washed with
approved cleaning materials, then dried and aIter that waxed with a protective
paste specially suited to plastic materials, as recommended by the ManuIacturer
oI the Ilooring material. SurIaces covered with plastic materials shall be
protected means approved by the COR, until the completion oI the building and
its handing over.
The cleaning oI anti-static PVC Iloors shall be executed according to the details
10092 Cast in Place Terrazzo
All the terrazzo surIaces cast in place, including vertical surIaces, shall be kept in
humid conditions during at least seven days Irom Iollowing the day on which the
last polishing oI the upper layer was carried out. Following that, all the areas
shall be protected Irom rubbish or damage that may impair them in the course oI
the execution oI the work.
Cracks in terrazzo surIaces may be a cause Ior rejecting the surIace.
10093 Cast in Place Concrete
Flooring sections completed by means oI cast in place concrete shall be cured
according to the rules detailed in Chapter 02 Cast in Place Concrete Works.
10094 Stairs and Landings
Stairs and landings shall be protected by means oI timber planks or similar
means, in a stable way, so that they may not be damaged until the Iinal cleaning
oI the building.
10095 Tolerated Deviations
The tolerated deviation is the diIIerence between the nominal dimension and the
actual dimension. The deviations shall be measured using a standard ruler, 2 m
long, water level and plumb bob.
The deviation in planeness shall be measured alongside the ruler in various
directions, both on Ilooring and covering. Planeness deviation consists oI the
10 (2001)
33
maximal gap between the bottom oI the ruler and the surIace. In any case, a
designed slope rates shall be maintained.
Tolerated deviations shall not exceed the values shown in Iollowing Table No. 3.
Table 3 - Maximum Tolerated Deviations (in Millimeters)

Parameter
Area
Planeness
along 2
m
Designed
Level
Height
DiIIerences
Between the
Tiles
Floor tiles 2 + 3 1/2
PVC
membranes
2 + 2 0 at the
contact line
Ceramic
covering
3 + 3 1
Terrazzo cast
in place in
horizontal
surIaces
2 + 2 0 at the
contact line

Remarks: The above does not reIer to the passage Irom the wet spaces to the dry
ones. For deviations in backings and substrates, see paragraph 100611
above.
10 (2001)
34
1000.00 Flooring and Covering Works Take-Off Procedures

1000.01 General
The various types oI Ilooring and covering works shall be measured net,
according to the Iloored or covered area.
The prices oI the Ilooring and covering works include, besides what is stated in
the paragraph "Unit Price Contents" in Chapter 00 Preliminaries, the Iollowing
matters:
a) The preparation oI the sites Ior the execution oI the Ilooring and
covering work, such as cleaning, leveling, removal oI protuberances,
smoothening, etc., as well as the inspection needed Ior making sure
that all the required preparations have been carried out, including the
sorting out oI materials and products, as required in the Special
SpeciIication;
b) The Iilling, in accordance with the requirements oI the SpeciIication
Ior the Ilooring system, except Ior Iloors in wet spaces;
c) One thrown layer and one straightening layer, Ior the covering works
oI walls, iI required, including reinIorcement meshes and their Iixing
to the backing, excluding thermal bridges;
d) The bonding materials Ior the Ilooring, the skirting and the covering;
e) The laying oI the Ilooring, the covering and the skirting as required in
the Drawings, both when the request is Ior combining tiles oI various
dimensions and when there is a request Ior joints oI any width;
I) The Iilling oI joints between the tiles, as speciIied, including in wet
areas;
g) The detailing, cutting, completion and adjustment needed at the edges
oI surIaces, around columns, pipes, next to doors, windows, corners,
sections and Iinishing sections oI wall covering, etc.
h) The curing and the protection oI the integrity oI the work, as speciIied;
i) The grinding oI the cast in place terrazzo works, as speciIied;
j) The cleaning at the end oI all the Ilooring and covering works,
including the use oI industrial vacuum cleaners.
1000.03 Testing Section
Should there be a request in the Special SpeciIication Ior a testing section, the
Iirst section executed by the Contractor shall not be accounted Ior. Additional
sections that the Contractor shall be requested to perIorm, shall be accounted Ior
according to their measurement.
10 (2001)
35
The take-oII and payment Ior testing sections not included in the Special
SpeciIication requirements, shall be based on paragraphs existing in the Contract.
1000.04 Filling-in Concrete
The Iilling-in concrete shall be taken oII net in sq.m. oI horizontal projection; the
price shall also include the execution oI slopes, as speciIied.
1000.05 Flooring
The Ilooring shall be measured in sq.m., with the indication oI the type,
thickness, material and dimensions oI the tiles.
Small or narrow Ilooring areas shall be included in the total area oI the Ilooring.
For the Ilooring and covering in wet spaces, see paragraph 1000.28 below.
1000.06 Thermal Insulation
Thermal insulation shall be taken oII in sq.m., with the indication oI the type and
thickness.
1000.07 Acoustic Insulation
Acoustic insulation, should it be required in the Special SpeciIication, shall be
taken oII in sq.m., with the indication oI its type and thickness.
1000.08 Constructive 1oints
Constructive joints shall be taken oII in meter lengths. The price shall include all
that is required Ior the preparation oI the joint.
1000.09 Skirting
The skirting shall be taken oII in meter lengths, with the indication oI type and
height.
1000.10 Raisings
Raisings (Ior cabinets, pits, etc.) shall be taken oII in meter lengths, with the
indication oI height. The price shall also include the construction oI the
threshold. Skirting set upon the raising shall be taken oII as indicated in
paragraph 1000.09 above.
1000.11 Separation 1oints
Separation joints Ior cast in place terrazzo shall be taken oII in meter lengths with
the indication oI the joint's material and its section.
For Division joints, see paragraph 1000.21 below.
1000.12 Wall Coverings
Wall coverings shall be taken oII net in sq.m. with the indication oI the covering
material and its dimensions. Indoor covering and outdoor covering shall be
10 (2001)
36
measured separately. Small or narrow covering surIaces, such as window jambs
or recesses shall be included in the total area oI the covering.
1000.13 Curved Walls Coverings
The covering oI curved walls (with curved projection on horizontal surIaces)
shall be taken oII in sq.m., with the indication oI the covering material and its
dimensions, while indoor and outdoor coverings are considered separately.
1000.14 Accessories on Covered Walls
Accessories on covered walls such as soap-holders, toilet paper holders,
handrails, hand-dryers, liquid soap dispensers, hooks, mirrors, etc., shall be taken
oII per unit. Their surIaces shall not be deducted Irom the surIace oI the
covering.
1000.15 Thermal Bridges
Thermal bridges shall be taken oII in meter lengths with the indication oI their
width. The price shall also include the insulation layer and the bonding oI the
reinIorcement meshes as well as their anchoring, as required in the Special
SpeciIication.
1000.16 Resilient Materials Flooring
The Ilooring with membranes or tiles oI resilient material including carpets shall
be taken oII in sq.m. with the indication oI the Ilooring material and its
dimensions. The prices shall also include putty, glue and the spreading oI a
protective paste on the PVC.
1000.17 "Meda"
The "meda" shall be taken oII in sq.m. with the indication oI its type and the
details in the Drawings.
1000.18 Soft Substrate for Resilient Materials
Should a soIt substrate Ior resilient materials be required in the Special
SpeciIication, it shall be taken oII separately, in sq.m., with the indication oI its
type and thickness.
1000.19 Skirting for Resilient Flooring
Skirting Ior resilient Ilooring shall be taken oII in meter lengths. The price shall
include all that is stated in Sub-Chapter 1004 above. The above applies also to
wooden skirting.
1000.20 Sections for Fixing and Finishing Carpets
Sections Ior Iixing and Iinishing carpets shall be taken oII in meter lengths, with
the indication oI the material and its section. The price shall also include all the
Iixation accessories (bolts, screws, etc.).
10 (2001)
37
1000.21 Cast in Place Terrazzo Surfaces
Cast in place terrazzo surIaces shall be taken oII in sq.m.
The price includes also the dividers oI any type oI material as speciIied or shown
in the Drawings. It shall also include the substrate layer, the terrazzo, pigments iI
required, the grinding, the Iormation oI water-drops, all as described in Sub-
Chapter 1005.
The structural concrete shall be accounted Ior in Chapter 02 Cast in Place
Concrete Works.
1000.22 Cast in Place Terrazzo Strips
Cast in place terrazzo strips shall be taken oII in meter lengths. The deIinition oI
a strip shall apply to areas with a width under 40 cm. Areas separated by
dividers, even iI they Iit the above description, shall not be considered as strips to
be taken oII but as part oI the whole area and measured in paragraph 1000.21
above.
The price includes all that is stated in paragraph 1000.21 above.
The structural concrete shall be taken oII in Chapter 02- Cast in Place Concrete
Works.
1000.23 Sills
Sills may be measured according to two alternatives:
a) per unit, with the indication oI their dimensions, or the detail in the
Drawings;
b) per meter lengths, with the indication oI their section.
Unless otherwise speciIied, they shall be taken oII in meter lengths.
1000.24 Shower Areas
Terrazzo in shower areas shall be taken oII as units, with the indication oI their
dimensions. The price shall include the Iormation oI slopes, the skirting and the
detailing oI the edges around the water outlets. The surIace oI the area shall be
deducted Irom the total Ilooring area.
The waterprooIing under the Ilooring shall be taken oII separately, see paragraph
1000.05 above.
1000.25 Ditches (Troughs)
Ditches within the Iloored area shall be taken oII in meter lengths, with the
indication oI the dimensions, the type oI material, the section and the developed
width oI the ditch. The price shall also include the cover oI the ditch with the
indication oI its material and the details in the Drawings. The surIace oI the area
in which the ditch is built shall be deducted Irom the Ilooring area.
10 (2001)
38
1000.26 Precast Stairs Covered with Terrazzo
a) Single stairs shall be taken oII as units, with the indication oI the
section's dimensions and their length, as well as oI the detail in the
Drawings. A distinction shall be made between stairs Iixed unto the
wall and stairs Ireely set;
b) Precast plates oI treads and risers shall be taken oII as units with the
indication oI section and the length oI each one oI them;
c) Stairs precast Ilights shall be taken oII as totals with the indication oI
the number oI stairs in the plate or oI the detail in the Drawings;
d) Cast in place concrete stairs shall be taken oII in Chapter 02 Cast in
Place Concrete Works.
The price oI the stairs shall also include, in any case, the concrete and its
reinIorcement.
1000.27 Cast in Place Granulated Surfaces
Cast in place granulated surIaces shall be taken oII in sq.m. and the price shall
also include the substrate. The type oI aggregate shall be indicated as well as
whether there is a request Ior the cement's color. The price shall also include the
dividers oI any type oI material, as speciIied in paragraph 100512 above or as
indicated in the Drawings. Granulated ditches and narrow strips shall be
measured in the same way as described above in relation to cast in place terrazzo.
The structural concrete shall be taken oII in Chapter 02 Cast in Place Concrete
Works.
1000.28 Wet Spaces Flooring and Covering
Wet spaces Ilooring and covering shall be measured separately in sq.m., with the
indication oI the type, the thickness and the dimensions oI the tile. The price shall
also include all what is detailed in Sub-Chapter 1008 above, excluding the
Iilling-in concrete that shall be taken oII as stated in the Take-OII Procedures oI
Chapter 05 WaterprooIing Works.
1000.29 Concrete Bond-Beams on the Periphery of Wet Spaces
Peripheral concrete bond-beams in wet spaces shall be taken oII according to the
take-oII rules in Chapter 02 Cast in Place Concrete Works.
1000.30 Waterproofing under the Flooring
WaterprooIing under the Ilooring in wet areas, or in any other place where it is
requested to execute it, shall be measured as stated in the Take-OII Procedures oI
Chapter 05 WaterprooIing Works.

10 (2001)
39

1

General SpeciIication Ior
Painting Works

Documents and their Computerization, with the participation of:
Ministry of Defense/Publications Department
11 2005

2
11 General SpeciIication Ior Painting Works

Issued by the Special Interministerial Committee with the participation oI:
Ministry oI DeIense/Construction Branch
Ministry oI Housing & Construction/Planning & Engineering Administration
Treasury Ministry/OIIice oI the Comptroller
Ministry oI Transportation

All rights reserved Ministry oI DeIense/Publications Department

3
11 General SpeciIication Ior Painting Works

Table of Contents

1100 General .................................................................................................... 1
1101 Painting and cladding materials .............................................................. 5
1102 Painting workmanship............................................................................. 7
1103 Painting oI concrete, plaster and gypsum ............................................... 11
1104 Painting oI wood surIaces ....................................................................... 19
1105 Painting oI metal surIaces ....................................................................... 23
1106 Painting oI asbestos-cement boards ........................................................ 34
1107 Painting and marking oI roadways .......................................................... 39
1108 Quality control ........................................................................................ 41
1109 Repairs to paint during the product liability and warranty period .......... 43

1
1100: General
11001
Scope of this
section
This section relates to the painting oI buildings or parts oI buildings,
where the painted area is concrete or a concrete product, plaster,
masonry, wood, metal, metal proIiles, pipes, asphalt, asbestos-cement or
other materials.
Painting with various types oI paint used Ior special purposes such as Ior
resistance to heat, Iire, Iungus, mildew, chemicals, etc. shall be
perIormed as required in the Special SpeciIication.
11002
Standards
139 Liquid Based on Synthetic SurIace Active Materials
Ior Hand Dishwashing.
221 Mineral Turpentine (White Spirit).
539 White Synthetic Undercoat.
654 Linseed Oil.
741 Aluminum Paint.
755 Behavior oI Building Materials during Fire: Test
Methods and ClassiIication.
756 Synthetic (Alkyd) Paints: Gloss Finishing Paints
783 Hydrated Lime
785 Paints and Lacquers (Sampling and Testing): with all
its parts
809 Washable Emulsion Paints Ior Interior Use

2
934 Part 1 Road Marking: Preparation oI Asphalt Roads Ior
Marking by Paint and its Application
935, Part 1 Road Marking Materials: Paints
935, Part 2 Road Marking Materials: Thermoplastic Materials
935, Part 4 Road Marking Materials: Glass Beads
1062 Epoxy Primer
1063 Coal Tar Epoxy Coating
1064 Epoxy Finishing Coating
1132 Paints And Varnishes: Tolerances Ior Prepacked
Paints
1225, Part 2.04 Steel Structures Code: Corrosion Protection Types
oI SurIace and SurIace Preparation
1225, Part 2.05 Steel Structures Code: Corrosion Protection
Protective Paint Systems
1225, Part 2.06 Steel Structures Code: Corrosion Protection
Laboratory Test Methods and Requirements Ior
Paint Systems
1267 Fire Retardant Intumescent Paints
1324 Paints and Varnishes: DeIinition oI Terms
1343 Paints and Varnishes: Packaging and Marking
1637 Non-washable Aqueous Emulsion Paint Ior Interior
Use
1731 Texture Coating Based on Synthetic Polymers

3
1922, Part 1 Paint Systems in Buildings: General Requirements
1922, Part 2 Paint Systems in Buildings: Non-Structural Steel
1945 Aqueous Emulsion Paints Ior Exterior Use
1946 Anticorrosive Synthetic (Alkyd) Primer, Chromate
and Lead Free
B. Foreign standards
ISO 8501-1 Preparation oI Steel Substrates beIore Application oI
Paints and Related Products, Visual Assessment oI
SurIace Cleanliness.
11003
Israel
Standards
Institute
Specifications
The Iollowing is a list oI Israel Standards Institute speciIications:
ISI SpeciIication
32
Ready Synthetic Polyurethane Paints: Finishing
Paint
ISI SpeciIication
330
Organic Thinners Ior Paints: General Requirements
ISI SpeciIication
389
Phosphorescent Paint Ior Marking Air-Raid Shelters
11004
Other
sections and
documents
Section 19 Structural steel works
Section 58 Shelters
Section 59 Protected areas
The guidelines oI the National Technical Committee Ior HarmIul Dust,
on the Environmental Subject: Asbestos, acting on the basis oI the
Work SaIety Regulations (Occupational Health and Public Health and
those Working with HarmIul Dust) 5744-1984. These guidelines can be

4
seen at the site: www.sviva.gov.il.
11005
Fire
Protection
Painting Ior Iire protection shall be perIormed as required in this Special
SpeciIication. In the absence oI requirements in the contract documents,
sees the requirements and the appropriate sections below with respect to
each material.

5
1101: Painting and cladding materials:
11010
General
All paints (including compound) shall be 1-part, 2-part or multi-part
ready-made paints. The paints shall be supplied Irom the Iactory in their
original packaging, in closed containers and marked with the
manuIacturer`s label. Paints shall be used only through their expiration
date.
11011
Definitions
A. Compound a product with a paste-like texture used Ior repairing
deIects in the surIace and Ior smoothing it prior to painting.
B. Primer the Iirst paint applied on a substrate in one coat or in a
number oI coats in painting systems.
C. Clear lacquer lacquer, which aIter its application dries into a clear
Iilm coating.
D. Paint a liquid or solid compound based on a binder and pigment,
which provides the surIace with a sealed colored coating.
E. Synthetic paint paint based on alkyd resin.
Other synthetic paints are designated according to the technical name
oI the binder, such as epoxy paint or polyurethane paint.
F. Emulsion paint (emulsion paints, 'plastic paints) paints based
on an aqueous emulsion oI the binder.
G. Paint system Painting applied in a number oI coats such as:
primer, intermediate coats and topcoat.
H. Textural coating coating that provides a texture based on an
aqueous polymeric emulsion or on the basis oI a solvent-based

6
polymeric solution with the addition oI aggregates (in thicknesses oI
2-5 mm).
I. Painting covering oI a surIace with paint, which becomes a solid,
clear or sealed coat in the drying process.
J. Non-galvanized steel steel produced by hot rolling.
K. Cold-rolled steel (~Dekofirt) steel protected by a thin coating oI
oil.
L. Painted surface in any place in which is the term background,
substrate, surIace or base appears in the speciIication, the intention is
to the surIace that is being painted.
11012
Storage of
painting
materials
The storage oI paints, thinners and other accessory materials on site shall
be perIormed in a place suitable Ior this purpose, under conditions as
required by the paint manuIacturer, and in accordance with the
requirements oI saIety and environmental regulations.

7
1102: Painting workmanship
11020
General
Prior to painting, the area designated Ior painting shall be cleaned well oI
any construction residues, waste, sand and dirt.
For treatment oI the surIaces oI various materials, see the sections below
according to the appropriate subjects.
The preparatory and painting works shall be perIormed only by skilled
workers. The painting materials that will be used shall be submitted Ior
approval oI the Supervisor. The work shall be perIormed only in suitable
weather conditions, when the relative humidity does not exceed 80 and
the temperature is greater than 10 Celsius. The painting shall be
perIormed, to the extent possible, in a covered and protected place.
Painting shall not be perIormed outside in rain or sandstorm or during
winds bearing dust and sand, or when dew appears on the surIace.
During all painting works, ascertain that the paint does not soil the Iloors
and other unpainted surIaces, including sanitary Iixtures, hardware and
other accessories. The Iloors, sanitary Iixtures and accessories shall be
covered Ior their protection using plastic, paper or other suitable material
sheeting.
Paint marks shall not be leIt on parts oI the structure not designated Ior
painting.
All painting works shall be considered as a single work, commencing
Irom the stage oI surIace preparation through the Iinish painting oI
products assembled on-site.

8
11021
Painting
methods

The Iollowing is a detail oI the methods (or combination oI them) by
which the painting shall be perIormed:
Brushing.
Rolling.
Air spraying.
Spraying with heated paint.
Airless spraying.
Dipping in accordance with a Special SpeciIication.
Electrostatic spraying (wet or with powder).
11022
Painting at
the
workshop
and on-site

Three possibilities exist Ior perIorming painting, as required by the
contract documents:
A. Complete painting at the workshop and repairs on site prior to and
aIter assembly;
B. Complete painting on site;
C. Partial painting at the workshop and supplementary painting on site.
In the case oI protective paint or painting with a primer perIormed Ior
purposes oI storage or transport, the contractor shall veriIy the
compatibility oI the protective paint or primer with the paint system
required in the contract documents.
11023
Painting
equipment
The contractor shall make use oI suitable and serviceable equipment and
tools Ior each type oI painting work.

9
11024
Dismantling
of
hardware
All hardware parts not designated Ior painting shall be dismantled, stored
in an appropriate place and reassembled upon completion oI the work by
appropriate tradesmen. The items so designated Ior dismantling are
handles, locks, escutcheon plates, signs, chrome-nickel hinges, etc. and
any other item that the Supervisor requires to be dismantled.
11025
Uniformity
of the
painting
system
Each paint system shall be supplied by the same manuIacturer, including
thinners Ior the paints. In no case shall paints manuIactured by diIIerent
manuIacturers be mixed in the same system.
11026
Paint coats
The painting itselI shall be perIormed in a number oI coats. The thickness
oI each coat oI paint shall be compatible with the requirements oI each
method as described in the Iollowing subsections and the requirements oI
11027
Colors
Paint colors shall be compatible with the requirements oI the Special
SpeciIication and shall be approved by the Supervisor Irom the paint
manuIacturer`s color catalog or other approved colors or approved color
sample.
11028
Test
sections
The contractor shall prepare a sample oI the paint system on a test section
Ior the Supervisor`s approval in accordance with the requirements oI the

10

11029
Cleaning at
the
conclusion
of the work
The contractor shall strictly comply with the Iollowing requirements:
A. At the conclusion oI the painting work, all stains shall be removed
Irom Iloors, windowpanes, installed equipment, etc. and the
workplace shall be leIt in a clean and orderly condition.
B. The contractor shall use special containers designated Ior cleaning oI
brushes and the disposal oI waste and used packaging.

11
1103: Painting oI concrete, plaster and gypsum:
11030
General
The painting oI concrete or plaster surIaces shall be perIormed
when the surIace is dry and not less than three weeks Irom the
completion oI the curing process. The painting oI new concrete
slabs shall commence only aIter curing oI the concrete,
approximately 28 days Irom the completion oI the casting process.
Gypsum plaster shall be painted when its surIace is dry in
accordance with the plaster and paint manuIacturers` guidelines.
Painting oI drywall panels can be perIormed when the compound
joining the panels is dry.
In all cases, the painting works shall commence only aIter the
Supervisor`s approval.
11031
Surface
preparation

Plaster and concrete surfaces old plaster and concrete surIaces
shall be cleaned well oI any grains oI sand, mortar tailings, stains,
eIIlorescence, dust and dirt. Any holes and depressions near
reinIorcing steel, and cracks and other deIects shall be Iilled using
cementitious mortar until the surIace is smooth, uniIorm and Ilat.
II there are ends oI reinIorcing wire, these shall be cut to a depth
not less than 10 mm under the surIace and the holes Iilled as stated
above.
Gypsum plaster surfaces light standing, removal oI dust.
Gypsum block and panel surfaces Iilling oI holes, Iilling oI the
joints between the plaster and the panel and between blocks,

12
compounding oI the entire surIace (other than paper coatings on
the drywall panels, which shall not be damaged) Ior the purpose oI
maintaining the Ilatness oI the wall; light sanding in areas in
which the compound has been applied and the removal oI dust
Irom all surIaces; drywall panels that have been exposed to sun
and have yellowed shall be painted with a synthetic matte primer
in order to prevent bleeding oI the Iollowing coats.
Wet surfaces iI wetness has been caused on the surIace due to
water intrusion, treatment shall Iirst be provided by correcting the
source oI the wetness until the water intrusion is prevented and the
surIaces are dry.
11032 Painting with synthetic paints on concrete or plaster interior surfaces
110320
General
Painting on concrete surIaces or plaster shall be perIormed using
synthetic paints in one oI the three alternative methods speciIied
below, as indicated in one oI the contract documents.
110321
Glossy Iinish in
three coats
Preparation oI the surIaces shall be perIormed as speciIied in
Subsection 11031 above, by spreading oI impregnation primer and
the application oI a middle coat and a glossy topcoat above it.
110322
Glossy Iinish in
three coats with
compound
As in Subsection 110321 above, but with the addition oI thin
layers oI compound on an impregnation primer and its smoothing
prior to painting oI middle coats.
110323 As in Subsection 110322 above, but the topcoat shall be a matte

13
Matte Iinish in
three coats with
compound
Iinish color (matte or silk).
11033 Painting with emulsion pants
110330
General
The type oI paint shall be as required in one oI the contract
documents, according to the type oI base material, environmental
conditions (exterior, interior, wet spaces, mildew, etc.) and the
number oI coats required.
The use oI emulsion payments ('plastic paint) shall be perIormed
in accordance with the manuIacturer`s instructions.
110331
Interior painting
using emulsion
paints
A. Smooth plaster aIter cleaning oI the surIaces as required
in accordance with Subsection 11031 above, two layers oI
emulsion paint complying with the requirements oI Israel
Standard 809 or Israel Standard 1945 shall be applied.
B. Concrete aIter curing and cleaning as required in
accordance with Subsection 11031 above, painting shall be
perIormed as stated above with respect to the painting oI
smooth plaster.
C. Gypsum panels a Iirst thinned coat (at a rate oI 30-40)
and two additional coats oI emulsion paint complying with
the requirements oI Israel Standard 809 or Israel Standard
1945 shall be applied. Thinning shall be perIormed in
accordance with the manuIacturer`s instructions.

14
D. Gypsum plaster the paint system shall be applied in
accordance with Paragraph C above. II the surIace oI the
gypsum plaster is very smooth and the thinned Iirst coat does
not adhere to the surIace, the Iirst coat shall be painted using
an impregnation primer and thereaIter with two additional
coats oI emulsion paint complying with the requirements oI
Israel Standard 809 or Israel Standard 1945.
E. Wet areas use shall be made oI emulsion paint that
prevents the development oI mildew in accordance with the
110332
Exterior painting
using emulsion
paint on plaster
and concrete
The paints shall comply with the requirements oI Israel Standard
1945.
The painting shall be perIormed aIter preparation oI the surIace as
required in the Subsection 11031 above until obtaining a Iull and
uniIorm coverage.
11034
Painting with
non-washable
aqueous emulsion
Painting with the use oI non-washable aqueous emulsion
('synthetic lime) Ior the painting oI interior surIaces, generally
ceilings, shall comply with the requirements oI Israel Standard
1637. Ceilings having a drywall panel Iinish shall be painted as
stated in the Subsection 110331 above.
Preparation oI the surIaces shall be perIormed as described above
in Subsection 11031. The painting shall be perIormed in at least
three coats until obtaining a uniIorm coverage oI the required

15
color.
11035
Interior and
exterior painting
with a textured
coating on
concrete or
plaster
The paints shall comply with the requirements oI Israel Standard
1731. The type oI paint shall be as required in the Special
SpeciIication.
Interior and exterior painting with a textured coating on concrete
or plaster shall be perIormed in accordance with the paint
manuIacturer`s instructions. The painting shall be perIormed
Iollowing preparation oI the surIace as required in Subsection
11031 above until obtaining a Iull and uniIorm coverage in the
required quantity in accordance with the paint manuIacturer`s
instructions.
11036
Painting with
special paints for
harsh exterior
conditions
Concrete and plaster surIaces exposed to harsh climatic and
environmental impacts shall be painted using special paints such
as those based on chlorinated rubber, epoxy or polyurethane Ior
withstanding exterior conditions. Preparation oI the substrate Ior
the painting, the type oI paint, the quantity oI coats required and
any other additional instructions shall be as required in accordance
with the Special SpeciIication and the other contract documents.
The painting shall be perIormed in accordance with the

16

11037 Coating or painting of concrete slabs
110371
Preparation
oI concrete
slabs Ior
coating or
painting
The slabs shall be in a dry and clean condition, Iree oI any cement dust on
the surIace (laitance) and any oils and loose particles. Expansion joints
shall be sealed in accordance with the paint or coating manuIacturer`s
instructions.
II the slab is smooth, it shall be roughened by the spraying oI abrasive
material or by the use oI a scariIication machine or any other method
approved by the Supervisor, and thereaIter shall be cleaned oI any dust
residues and loose particles.
Existing unpainted concrete slabs shall be checked to veriIy that they have
not absorbed oils or other materials and are not crumbling. II Iound to be
so, the oils and the disintegrating layer shall be removed using chemical
or mechanical means until obtaining a clean and stable slab.
110372
Coating oI
concrete
slabs

The coatings shall be oI a solvent-less 2-part epoxy resin type with the
addition oI a special sand supplied by the coating manuIacturer intended
Ior the Iloor coatings:
A. SelI-leveling coating with a total dry thickness oI 0.6-4 mm.
The Iirst layer oI epoxy coating shall be applied without sand with
the use oI a brush or roller. AIter drying oI the Iirst layer, holes and
cracks shall be sealed with a special epoxy and sand mixture in the
proportions recommended by the manuIacturer.
The second layer oI special epoxy and sand mixture shall be applied
with the use oI a brush or roller immediately Iollowing the Iinish oI

17
repairs oI the Iirst layer.
B. Cast coating with a total dry thickness oI 5-15 mm:
The Iirst layer oI the epoxy coating without special sand shall be
applied with the use oI a brush or roller in a dry layer thickness oI
0.3 mm.
The second layer oI special sand and epoxy mixture, in proportions
recommended by the coating supplier, shall be applied with the use
oI a wide trowel in a dry layer thickness oI 4-13 mm.
A third layer oI epoxy coating without special sand shall be applied
with the use oI a brush or roller.
110373
Painting oI
concrete
slabs
The Iirst layer primer shall be oI an epoxy-polyamide (solvent-based)
clear penetrating lacquer type.
The second layer shall be oI an epoxy-polyamine paint type. The second
coat shall be applied within 2-4 hours oI Iinishing the painting oI the
primer. The dry layer thickness oI the paint shall be up to 40
micrometers.
The coats shall be applied by brushing or spraying.
11038
Painting of
markings
using light
emitting
paints
The painting oI markings using light emitting paints shall be perIormed as
required in the Special SpeciIication. The painting oI shelters and
protected spaces shall be perIormed as required in the contract documents
and regulations, and as stated in Section 58 and Section 59.
The paint shall comply with the requirements oI Israel Standards Institute
SpeciIication 389 Phosphorescent Paint Ior Marking Air-Raid Shelters.

18
11039
Painting
for
protection
against fire
spread
II painting on concrete, plaster or gypsum is required to protect against
Iire spread, the paint that will be applied shall be oI the types speciIied
below.
Paints protecting against and retarding Iire spread shall be oI a quality, in
a thickness and in accordance with the application requirements as
detailed and the Special SpeciIication. II not stated otherwise, the paints
shall be oI the Iollowing types:
A. Paints Ior interior use that expand upon contact with heat and Iire
complying with the requirements oI Israel Standard 1267.
1-part paints compatible with the requirements oI Israel Standard
755 with a Ilammability grade oI IV (does not withstand high
moisture conditions).
B. 2-part epoxy paint Ior interior and exterior use.
2-part epoxy paints that comply with the requirements oI Israel
Standard 755, and Ilammability grade oI IV.
Application shall be in accordance with the paint manuIacturer`s
instructions. Total paint system thickness shall be at least 75 micrometers
in interior use and 100 micrometers in exterior use.

19
1104: Painting oI wood surIaces
11040
General
The Iollowing sections describe the painting oI wood surIaces, other
than Iinish carpentry with Iinal painting.
II works with solid wood are required to be perIormed in the Special
SpeciIication, in the absence oI requirements in the Special
SpeciIication, the painting shall be perIormed as detailed in these
subsections.
Through the commencement oI the painting work, the covered wood
shall be saIeguarded Irom weather impacts (rain and sun). Moisture
content oI the wood shall be in the range oI 8-14.
11041 Preparation of wood surfaces
110410
General
The surIaces shall be cleaned well and dried. Loose knots or secretions
or resin shall be removed by drilling. The holes shall be Iilled with
wood plugs, compound or other suitable material. Nail heads shall be
countersunk and covered with a solvent-based compound. The surIace
shall be polished well prior to application oI the impregnation coat. All
preparatory works shall be perIormed prior to spreading wood products
with impregnation lacquer.
110411
Oil base
(impregnation)
The oil shall be boiled linseed oil thinned with 25 turpentine or a
clear impregnation lacquer. Application shall be perIormed with a
brush or by a dipping, but not by spraying. The thinner shall be mineral
turpentine compatible with the requirements oI Israel Standard 221,
Type 1. Wait until completely dried in accordance with the

20
110412
Compound
Compound used in painting works shall be industrial compound, easily
spread and Ilexible Ior the work. Ascertain that the compound is
suitable Ior use with the paint system to be applied on it. It is
recommended to use compound produced by the paint manuIacturer.
11042
Painting in
coats
The painting shall be perIormed in several coats. The thicknesses oI the
paint coats shall be compatible with the requirements oI the Special
SpeciIication. DiIIerent colors should be selected Ior each coat in order
to distinguish the coats.
The compound layers shall be very thin and uniIorm. Each layer oI
compound and each intermediate coat oI paint shall be polished well
with sandpaper until obtaining a suitable substrate Ior the coat that
Iollows. Application oI the compound and paint coats shall be
perIormed only in dry air that is completely Iree oI dust. Do not execute
work in hot, humid or rainy weather. The paint coats shall or have no
air bubbles, signs oI dripping, brush strokes, etc. End lines or lines oI
contact between two diIIerent paint colors shall be straight and distinct.
Finish coats oI paint shall be applied only aIter completing all the other
works necessary Ior the construction oI the building, and that under
suitable weather conditions as stated above.

21

11043 Interior painting
110431
Application oI
compound
Thin layers oI compound shall be spread on the oil-based primer coat
until obtaining a uniIorm and smooth surIace. The work shall be
perIormed as speciIied in Subsection 11042 above. The time oI drying
Ior each coat shall be in accordance with the compound manuIacturer`s
instructions.
110432
Intermediate
coat
On the compounded surIace, a coat oI synthetic primer shall be applied
complying with the requirements oI Israel Standard 539 in accordance
with the manuIacturer`s instructions. Drying time at least 24 hours.
110433
Topcoat
Two coats oI synthetic topcoat shall be applied complying with the
requirements oI Israel Standard 756, in a gloss and color as required.
11044
Painting of
exterior
surfaces
The painting system used Ior exterior wood surIaces shall include the
Iollowing stages:
A. Oil base (impregnation) in accordance with Subsection 110411;
B. Do not use compound other than in a case oI cracks in the wood or
Ior the purpose oI smoothing oI exterior carpentry; in such case,
use thin layers oI the compound recommended Ior this purpose by
the manuIacturer. Doors shall be sanded between coats.
C. Two coats oI synthetic-based paint, complying with the
requirements oI Israel Standard 539 shall be applied one day aIter
the other.
D. Two coats oI glossy topcoat, complying with the requirements oI
Israel Standard 756 shall be applied one day aIter the other.

22
11045
Clear lacquer
Wood surIaces that are designated Ior clear lacquer coating shall be
polished until obtaining a uniIorm surIace without stains, etc. Localized
holes and deIects shall be plugged with compound, whose color is
identical to that oI the wood.
Ascertain that the work will be perIormed under suitable weather
conditions in accordance with the lacquer manuIacturer`s guidelines.
In interior painting, the surIaces shall be painted in two coats oI clear
lacquer in the color and gloss as required in the contract documents.
Drying time shall be in accordance with the manuIacturer`s instructions.
In exterior painting 4 coats oI clear lacquer, where the Iirst coat will
be a lacquer that contains anti-rot materials that will be applied on the
clear lacquer impregnation coat that will be applied as required in
accordance with Subsection 110411 above. Drying time shall be in
11046
Painting for
protection
against fire
spread
II painting is required on wood to protect against Iire spread and the
paint has not been speciIied, the paint shall be applied as required in
Subsection 11039 above.
SurIace preparation: sanding and removal oI dust.
instructions. Dry coat thickness shall be at least 150 micrometers on
interior surIaces and 200 micrometers on exterior surIaces.

23
1105: Painting oI metal surIaces
11050 General Painting on non-galvanized steel surIaces, cold rolled steel
('DekoIirt) or galvanized steel shall be perIormed as required in
Subsections 11051 through 11055 below. (The deIinitions relate to
Israel Standard 1225, Part 2.5):
11051
Preparation of
steel surfaces
A. Non- galvanized steel removal oI oils, spraying oI abrasive
material, iI not otherwise stated in the Special SpeciIication up to
a Sa2.5 grade in accordance with the ISO-8501-1 standard.
Slag and weld splatter shall be removed prior to cleaning by
mechanical means. The edges oI the welds shall be rounded by
grinding and the surIace shall be cleaned with a thinner.
The abrasive material shall be basalt, steel grains or aluminum
oxide. Use may be made oI other mineral aggregates approved by
the appropriate competent authorities.
B. 'DekoIirt sheetmetal panels:
1. Removal oI oils with a clean rag dipped in mineral turpentine
or other solvent.
2. Rust shall be removed completely with the use oI a steel
brush or emery cloth and the surIace shall be cleaned again
with a thinner.
C. For preparation oI galvanized steel surIaces, see Subsection
11054 below.

24

11052 Painting
110520
General
In the case oI protective painting or painting with a base paint that is
perIormed Ior purposes oI storage or transport, the contractor shall
check the compatibility oI the protective paint or primer to the paint
system required in the Special SpeciIication.
The Iirst coat oI paint shall be applied where the steel has been
cleaned. No more than Iour hours shall pass between cleaning oI the
surIace and painting. During hot days, this time may be extended
upon approval oI the Supervisor. In any case, iI rust appears, it shall
be removed prior to application oI the primer. The second coat oI
primer shall be applied aIter drying oI the Iirst coat in accordance with
the paint manuIacturer`s instructions.
In corrosive conditions (such as at the seashore), painting shall be
perIormed as required in Subsection 110522 below.
110521
Interior and
exterior
synthetic
system, under
low
atmospheric
corrosion
environmental
This system, with moderate durability, is compatible with the
deIinition Iound in Israel Standard 1225, Part 2.5, Paint System S1.05.
A. Synthetic primer
Application by brushing or spraying oI one coat oI anti-corrosive
primer compatible with the requirements oI Israel Standard 1946,
with a dry coat thickness oI at least 40 micrometers.
Welding perIormed aIter painting shall be repaired by grinding,
removal oI slag and oils with the use oI a thinner and thereaIter,
the primer shall be applied as above with a minimum dry coat

25
conditions thickness oI 40 micrometers that will cover 3-5 cm around the
welded area.
Drying in accordance with the manuIacturer`s instructions.
B. Synthetic topcoat
One coat in the color and gloss required in accordance with the
contract documents with a minimum 40 micrometer dry coat
thickness. The paint shall comply with the requirements oI Israel
Standard 756. Application shall be perIormed by brushing or
spraying in accordance with the paint manuIacturer`s instructions.
Total dry paint system thickness (primer and topcoat) shall be at least
80 micrometers.
110522
Interior and
exterior
synthetic
system, under
corrosive
environmental
atmospheric
conditions Ior
moderate
durability
This system is compatible with the deIinition Iound in Israel Standard
1225, Part 2.5, Paint System S1.09, under C3 conditions.
A. Synthetic primer
Application oI two coats oI anti-corrosive primer compatible with
the requirements oI Israel Standard 1946, with a dry coat
thickness oI at least 40 micrometers Ior each coat. Each coat shall
be applied with a diIIerent color.
Prior to welding, the paint must be removed Irom the area
designated Ior welding. Welding perIormed aIter painting shall
be repaired by grinding and removing oI slag and covering with
two coats oI primer as above extending 3-5 cm around the welded
area.

26
Minimum dry coat oI thickness oI the two primer coats shall be
80 micrometers.
Drying oI each coat shall be in accordance with the
B. Synthetic topcoat
Two sprayed coats oI glossy synthetic paint compatible with the
requirements oI Israel Standard 756 in the required color. Dry
coat thickness oI each coat shall be 40 micrometers. Drying time
shall be in accordance with the paint manuIacturer`s instructions.
The color oI the Iirst coat shall approximate the Iinal color.
Total dry paint system thickness shall be at least 160 micrometers.
110523
Exterior epoxy
system under
highly corrosive
atmospheric
environmental
conditions Ior
moderate
durability
1225, Part 2.5, Paint System S1.34, resistant to C4 conditions.
A. 2-part polyamide epoxy primer
Two coats oI 2-part polyamide epoxy primer shall be applied in
accordance with Israel Standard 1062, with a minimum dry coat
thickness oI 40 micrometers Ior each coat.
Prior to welding, the paint must be removed Irom the area
designated Ior welding. Welding perIormed aIter painting shall
be repaired by grinding and removing oI slag and covering with a
minimum 80 micrometer dry primer coat as above extending 3-5
cm around the welded area.

27
B. 2-part multi-layer polyamide epoxy topcoat
Two coats oI multi-layer polyamide epoxy topcoat shall be
applied in accordance with Israel Standard 1064 in the required
color. Total dry thickness oI the topcoat shall be at least 160
micrometers. Drying time shall be in accordance with the
Total dry paint system thickness shall be at least 240 micrometers.
110524
Exterior paint
system very
highly corrosive
atmospheric
environmental
conditions Ior
industrial and
marine use
1225, Part 2.5, Paint System S5.11, resistant to C5I and C5M
conditions.
A. 2-part polyamide epoxy primer, complying with Israel Standard
1062.
Painting shall be perIormed with two coats oI 2-part polyamide
epoxy primer having a total minimum dry coat thickness oI 80
micrometers.
B. 2-part multi-layer polyamide epoxy topcoat, complying with
Israel Standard 1062.
Painting shall be perIormed with three coats oI multi-layer 2-part
polyamide epoxy topcoat having a total minimum dry coat
thickness oI 200 micrometers.
Total dry paint thickness shall be at least 280 micrometers.

28
11053
Special paints
Use shall be made oI special paints Ior painting oI heating elements,
stacks, tanks Ior special materials, etc. These paints shall be speciIied
in one oI the contract documents.
Painting with a special paint, as Ior example heat-resistant paint,
epoxy paint or polyurethane, shall be in accordance with the
manuIacturer`s recommendations with respect to the number oI coats,
thickness oI each coat and painting conditions unless speciIied
otherwise in one oI the contract documents.
11054 Painting of galvanized steel
110541
Preparation oI
the surIace Ior
painting
The surIace shall be Iree any oil and dirt. The surIace shall be
roughened and the dust shall be removed by the Iollowing means:
For hot-dipped galvanized steel, when the galvanizing thickness
exceeds 50 micrometers, light sandblasting shall be perIormed that
removes 5-12 micrometers Irom the galvanizing thickness.
For galvanized sheetmetal, sanding shall be perIormed using
sandpaper and all white oxidizing shall be removed (iI existing). No
gloss shall appear on the surIace. Any dust shall be removed Irom the
surIace with a thinner.
110542
Painting oI
galvanized
sheetmetal
The Iollowing polymer-based primers shall be used: chlorinated
rubber, vinyl, solvent-based acrylic. Required minimum dry coat
thickness shall be 30 micrometers.
Topcoats shall be based on the same polymer as the primer with a
minimum dry coat thickness oI 60 micrometers.

29
Total dry coat paint system thickness shall be at least 90 micrometers.
110543
Painting oI hot-
dipped
galvanized steel
under
moderately
corrosive
environmental
conditions Ior
moderate
durability
The Iollowing polymer-based primer shall be used: solvent-based
vinyl. Required minimum dry coat thickness shall be 40 micrometers.
Topcoats based on the same polymer as the primer shall have a
minimum dry coat thickness oI 80 micrometers.
Total dry coat paint system thickness shall be at least 120
micrometers.
The system shall be as deIined in the requirements oI Israel Standard
1225, Part 2.5, S9.02 Paint System.
110544
Painting oI hot-
dipped
galvanized steel
under highly
corrosive
atmospheric
environmental
conditions Ior
marine and
industrial uses
The system shall be as deIined in the requirements oI Israel Standard
1225, Part 2.5, S9.12 Paint System Ior moderate durability in
industrial conditions and Ior high durability in marine conditions.
The primer shall be based on a 2-part polyamide epoxy complying
with requirements oI Israel Standard 1064 with a minimum dry coat
The topcoat shall be based on a 2-part polyamide epoxy complying
with requirements oI Israel Standard 1064 with a minimum dry coat
Total dry coat paint system thickness shall be at least 240
micrometers.

30
110545
Repair oI
galvanizing
II the paint and galvanizing has been damaged as a result oI works
perIormed aIter completion oI the products, repairs to galvanizing
shall be perIormed as required in Section 19, subsection 'Zinc steel
coatings.
110546
Repairs to
painting on
painted
galvanized steel
Repairs to paint on painted galvanized steel that has been damaged
aIter completion oI the product, and the galvanizing is in a serviceable
condition or repaired as stated above in Subsection 110545, painting
shall be perIormed aIter cleaning with a steel brush to a distance oI at
least 5 cm beyond the area to be repaired and shall be painted
immediately thereaIter as stated in Subsection 110543 or Subsection
10544, all according to the aIoresaid environmental conditions.
110547
Painting oI
galvanized steel
Ior protection
against Iire
spread
II steel painting is required Ior protection against Iire spread and a
paint has not been speciIied, the paint shall be oI a type as required in
Preparation and application shall be in accordance with the paint
manuIacturer`s instructions. Dry coat paint thickness shall be at least
75 micrometers on interior surIaces and 100 micrometers on exterior
surIaces.
11056 Painting of aluminum
110561
Industrialized
painting
Painting oI aluminum shall be perIormed by industrialized painting at
the plant.
Preparation oI the surIace shall be perIormed in accordance with
Subsection 110221. The painting shall be oven-baked powder or wet

31
painting as recommended by the paint manuIacturer.
110562
Repairs to
painting
The surIace designated Ior the painting repairs shall be sanded and a
quick-drying primer shall be applied suitable Ior use as an aluminum
primer. A synthetic topcoat shall be applied in an industrialized paint
color.
110563
Painting oI
aluminum to
protect against
Iire spread
II painting is required on the aluminum to protect against Iire spread
and a paint has not been speciIied, the paint that shall be applied shall
oI a type as required in Subsection 11039 above.
SurIace preparation: cleaning, removal oI oils and dust.
instructions. Dry coat paint thickness shall be at least 75 micrometers
on interior surIaces and 100 micrometers on exterior surIaces.
11057 Industrialized painting using powdered paints
110571
For interior use
The paint shall be made Irom epoxy polyester and shall be suitable Ior
the Iollowing substrates: aluminum, steel, galvanized steel.
SurIace preparation:
A. Aluminum surIaces passivation shall be perIormed.
B. Steel surIaces treatment shall be perIormed using iron
phosphate or zinc phosphate.
C. Galvanized steel surIaces treatment shall be perIormed using
zinc phosphate.
All preparations, site treatments and painting shall be perIormed in
accordance with the instructions oI the manuIacturer oI the surIace

32
treatments and the paint manuIacturer.
Dry coat thickness: glossy paint 60-80 micrometers; silk gloss paint
40-70 micrometers.
Painting process: electrostatic by spraying and oven-baking in
110572
For interior and
exterior use
The paint shall be made Irom pure polyester.
Sheen: glossy.
Suitable Ior the Iollowing substrates: aluminum, steel, galvanized steel
SurIace preparation:
A. Aluminum surIaces passivation shall be perIormed.
B. Steel surIaces treatment shall be perIormed using iron
phosphate or zinc phosphate.
C. Galvanized steel surIaces treatment shall be perIormed using
zinc phosphate.
All preparations, site treatments and painting shall be perIormed in
accordance with the instructions oI the manuIacturer oI the surIace
treatments and the paint manuIacturer.
Dry coat thickness: 50-70 micrometers.
Painting process: electrostatic by spraying and oven-baking in
110573
Repairs to
powder painting
In the case oI damage to the powder painting (scratches, peeling,
cracks, etc.), the damaged locations shall be repaired as Iollows:
The area around the damage shall be cleaned oI any oil and dirt. Spray

33
synthetic paint oI the appropriate color using a sprayer or paint gun
marketed by the powder paint manuIacturer and in accordance with its
guidelines.

34
1106: Painting oI asbestos-cement boards
11060
General
This section relates to the painting oI pressed, Ilat or corrugated asbestos-
cement boards used in rooIs, walls or building sidewalls with the purpose
oI conIining the asbestos and preventing its release into the air.
This section does not relate to the painting or sealing oI parts oI a
building that contain asbestos Iibers as a brittle substance such as:
acoustical ceilings, thermal insulation, Iire protection, etc.
The painting oI asbestos-cement boards shall be perIormed over the
entire board surIace including the sides oI the boards (edging) and at
their contact with structural components.
It is Iorbidden to sand or polish the surIace oI the boards prior to their
painting.
Means Ior painting shall be with a brush made Irom Ilexible material or
by airless spraying or by other means approved in advance by the
Supervisor.
The painting shall be perIormed without dismantling and extracting the
boards.
11061
Qualification
of workers
Workers shall be qualiIied to work with materials containing asbestos
Iibers.
The process oI preparing Ior painting and the painting oI the asbestos-
cement boards must be perIormed careIully while precisely adhering to
rules oI saIety and health Ior the workers and the environment, including
the removal or protection oI equipment and Iurnishings, all in accordance

35
with the instructions oI the National Technical Committee Ior HarmIul
Dust acting on the basis oI the Work SaIety Regulations (Occupational
Health and Public Health and those Working with HarmIul Dust) 1984.
11062
Preparation
of the
surface for
painting
A. Exterior surfaces: Exterior unpainted asbestos-cement boards shall
be Iirst wetted by spraying with a Iine water mist in order to prevent
the release oI asbestos Iibers into the air. ThereaIter, rinse the
surIace designated Ior painting with a weak Ilow oI water in order
to remove dust, leaves or materials interIering with the painting. II
mechanical means are needed to remove bodies interIering with the
painting such as adhering sand, climbing vegetation, etc., the
aIoresaid wetting oI the surIace designated Ior painting and the
interIering bodies shall be removed manually while the surIace is
wet, and without mechanical means.
The treatment oI asbestos-cement boards covered with mildew shall
be perIormed in accordance with the location oI the boards in the
building, using methods and materials deIined in the Special
SpeciIication.
B. Interior surfaces: use a wet rag on the walls designated Ior
painting. The used rags shall be placed into double polyethylene
bags, which shall be sealed well and removed in accordance with
the guidelines oI the Technical Committee Ior HarmIul Dust.
Interior surIaces on ceilings shall be cleaned, iI required in the

36
C. Preparation of surfaces for repainting of painted asbestos-
cement boards: The preparation shall be perIormed in accordance
with the instructions oI the Special SpeciIication.
In all oI the aIoresaid cases, wait until the wetted surIaces are Iully dried
beIore painting them.
11063
Painting of
exterior
boards
The painting system shall include a penetrating-binding primer and
topcoat, which must be compatible with one another. It is Iorbidden to
sand between the various coats oI paint.
A. Penetrating-binding primer: the penetrating-binding primer shall
be as required in the contract documents and shall be alkaline-
resistant with a substrate-penetrating ability. The material shall
bind the asbestos Iibers and prevent them Irom separating Irom the
boards.
The penetrating-binding primer shall serve as a primer in the paint
system speciIied below.
The applied quantity oI penetrating-binding primer shall be in
accordance with the recommendations oI the material manuIacturer
and the condition oI the boards until absorption oI the penetrating-
binding primer by the boards. Visual inspections shall be
perIormed in order to ascertain that the entire surIace has been
covered. II not, the application shall be supplemented until
obtaining Iull coverage.
Drying shall be in accordance with the manuIacturer`s

37
recommendations.
B. Topcoat: the topcoat shall comply with the requirements oI Israel
Standard 1731; the bridging grade over cracks shall be up to 2 mm.
The quantity oI topcoat applied shall be 500 grams per square
meter.
The color shall be as required in the Special SpeciIication. (White
is preIerable Ior rooIs.)
Application by airless spraying shall be in accordance with the
manuIacturer`s guidelines.
11064
Painting of
interior
boards
A. Primer: See Subsection 11063 (A) above.
B. Topcoat: The paint shall comply with the requirements oI Israel
Standard 1945 - Aqueous Emulsion Paints Ior Interior and Exterior
Use. The painting shall be perIormed in two coats in accordance
with the manuIacturer`s instructions. Application shall be by
airless spraying. The color shall be as required in the Special
SpeciIication.
11065
Touchup
Touchup painting on the painted asbestos-cement boards shall be
perIormed in accordance with the Special SpeciIication.
11066
Inspection of
painting
Inspection oI the painting oI asbestos-cement shall be perIormed as
stated below:
A. Exterior painting shall be inspected in accordance with Israel
Standard 1731, Appendix A.
B. Interior painting shall be inspected in accordance with Israel

38
Standard 785, Part 14 Ior maximum Grade 2.

39
1107: Painting and marking oI roadways
11070
General
The painting shall be perIormed using paints, colors, conIigurations and
dimensions as required in the contract documents based on the guidelines
oI the Ministry oI Transportation.
The work shall be perIormed only aIter obtaining all approvals required
Irom competent authorities.
11071
Preparation
of the
roadway
surface
The roadway surIace shall be cleaned oI any sand and dust and any
adhering material shall be removed. Oil contamination shall be cleaned
using Iluids compatible with Israel Standard 139 and shall be rinsed
thoroughly with water. Loose paint may be removed by mechanical
sanding. All preparatory works Ior painting and marking on the road
surIace shall be perIormed as required in accordance with Israel Standard
934.
11072
Painting
Paints Ior marking oI asphalt roadways shall comply with the
The quantity oI paint shall be at least 0.4 liters per square meter and its
distribution shall be uniIorm until obtaining Iull coverage. The borders oI
the painted areas must be sharp and clear without bleeding into adjacent
areas not designated Ior paint coverage.
Inspection oI the quantity oI paint shall be perIormed during perIormance
oI the work as deIined in Israel Standard 935, Part 1.
Removal oI paint Irom areas that have been covered not in accordance
with the plan shall be perIormed in accordance with the instructions oI

40
Israel Standard 934, Part 1.
11073
Protection
of painting
The contractor shall take all precautionary measures necessary in order to
protect the paint during drying such as warning signs, barriers or
coverings.
11074
Retro-
reflective
paint
II required, glass beads that comply with the requirements oI Israel
Standard 935, Part 4 shall be spread on the painted surIace while still wet.
The type oI beads shall be in accordance with that required in the Special
SpeciIication.
The spreading shall be perIormed at a minimum rate oI 300 grams per
square meter in a manner that ensures uniIormity and suitable adhesion.

41
1108: Quality control
11080
General
Quality control shall be perIormed as deIined in the Special SpeciIication.
In the absence oI guidelines in the Special SpeciIication, quality control
shall be perIormed as stated below.
11081
Paint
quality
The painting materials shall comply with the appropriate standards.
Paints Ior which a standard does not exist shall comply with the
requirements detailed in the Special SpeciIication.
11082
Paint
appearance
The appearance oI the paint shall be uniIorm insoIar as possible without
diIIerences in color and sheen, rivelling, thick dripping or bleeding that
mars the coated appearance, and without bubbles, holes or cracks.
11083
Paint
thickness
A. Metal painting testing shall be perIormed with a magnetic or
electronic thickness gauge as noted in Israel Standard 75, Part 10.
The testing shall be perIormed with a reset and calibrated instrument
in accordance with the instructions oI the instrument manuIacturer
and the requirements oI the standard. II drying oI the paint allows it,
the thickness shall be tested Ior each separate coat.
B. Non-metallic surface painting the testing shall be perIormed using
a suitable reset and calibrated device. Paint thickness shall be tested
as described above.
11084
Testing of
adhesion
Testing oI adhesion shall be perIormed according to the thickness oI the
paint as described in Israel Standard 785, Part 14 or Part 27.
Unless otherwise required in the Special SpeciIication, the adhesion grade
oI the painting on steel and between coats aIter sandblasting shall be a

42
maximum Grade 1 in accordance with the aIorementioned standard. The
painting oI steel aIter cleaning using a brush only shall have a maximum
Grade 2 adhesion in accordance with the aIorementioned standard.
11085
Testing of
painting of
asbestos-
cement
For the testing oI the painting oI asbestos-cement, see Subsection 11066
above.

43
1109: Repairs to paint during the product liability and warranty period
11090
General
The instructions oI this section relate to repair and maintenance work oI
paint during the painting, product liability and warranty period as deIined
in the contract or the Special SpeciIication, as well as through the end oI
these periods.
Visual inspections (such as Ior peeling, cracking or incompatibility oI
color or texture) or other inspections (such as Ior adhesion, corrosion-
protection and thickness) Ior compliance oI the paint with requirements
shall be perIormed during the painting, product liability and warranty
period as required by the Supervisor.
In cases where noncompliance with requirements occurs in up to 20 oI
the painted area, localized repairs shall be perIormed in the aIIected areas.
The existing paint in the aIIected areas shall be removed to substrate up to
a distance oI 10 cm around them and they shall be sanded and repainted
using the original paint system.
In cases where noncompliance with requirements occurs in more than 20
oI the painted area, all the coats oI the existing paint shall be removed Irom
the entire area and the entire area shall be painted using the original paint
system.
In cases where approved by the Supervisor, localized repairs may be made
to paint in locally aIIected areas and an additional coat oI paint applied
over the entire area aIter suitable preparation.
* * *

1

1990

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR
ALUMINUM WORKS

12

2
TabIe of Contents
1200 - GeneraI ............................................................................................... 1
1201 - CIassification and Inspection ........................................................... 4
1202 - MateriaIs ............................................................................................ 5
1203 - Production .......................................................................................... 9
1204 - GIazing ............................................................................................. 10
1205 - QuaIity ControI ................................................................................. 12
1206 - Frames AssembIy in Openings ...................................................... 13

3

1200 - GeneraI

12000 - Scope
This chapter refers to Aluminum frames - doors, windows, shutters, nets, etc. composing
the elements set at the building openings for complete or partial closure, located at any
place, height or depth.
Stutters and net are defined by the frame. For example - Aluminum net is a net constructed
with an aluminum frame and composed of aluminum or other material.

12001 - Standards
Listed bellows are the SRAEL STANDARDS and FOREGN standards relating to this
chapter
A. AIsraeIi Standards
NUMBER NAME AND DESCRPTON
101 Hidden lock for a swiveling door
258 Electroplated coatings of nickel plus chromium and of copper plus
nickel plus chrome
265 Zinc electrolytic coatings on ferrous metals
266 Cadmium electrolytic coatings on ferrous materials
313 Galvanized steel sheets and tapes
325 Anodized coatings of aluminum
414 Characteristics loads on buildings, wind loads
599 Polyvinyl chloride shades for shutters
617 Modular coordination in construction work
785 part 14 Paints and lacquers, crisscross cutting inspection
791 Self adhesive plastic tape pressure applied to wrappings
836 Zinc alloys : cast and poured
868 part 4 Resistance to cracking by Ozone static deformation Method of
inspections of vulcanized -rubber
870 Electrolytic coatings of nickel
883 Plastic door handles
918 Zinc coating of steel products and cast iron by hot dipping
938 Flat transparent glass sheets for construction work
1068 Aluminum windows
1099 Glazing of doors and windows in construction work

B. Foreign Standards:
FED-STD.QQ - 2OOE/GEN - Aluminum Alloy. Bar, Rod, Shapes, Structural Shapes, Tube
and Wire Extruded; General Specification For
AAMA 800-86 - Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants

4
12002 - IsraeI Standards Institute Specifications
Listed below are the sraeli Standard specifications mentioned hereafter

NUMBER TTLE
143 Single component elastomeric sealing material based on acrylic
silicon resins for use in construction work.
153 Single and twin component elastomeric sealing material for use in
construction work.
156 Aluminum shutters with plastic section (sliding).
206 Aluminum and steel shutters shades
211 Aluminum profile rods
263 part 1 Aluminum doors for residential buildings: sliding doors
263 part 2 Aluminum doors for residential building: - swiveling doors for main
entrances
274 Hardware fittings for aluminum windows: general
274.1 Hardware fittings for aluminum windows: arm stops for hanging
windows
274.2 Hardware fittings for aluminum windows: reinforcing hinges
(scissors) for an upward swiveling window
274.3 Hardware fittings for aluminum windows: hinges for hanging window.
274.4 Hardware fittings for aluminum windows: latch for an upward
swiveling window.

All the mentioned in above chapters of the general specification for construction work
applies to this chapter, unless otherwise stated:
i Chapter 06 - Craftsman woodworks and steel formworks
i Chapter 11 - Paint works

12004 - Manufacturing PIants
The contractor shall order framework in a plant authorized in advance by the CO, upon
proving that workmanship and quality control are sufficient to enable the manufacturing of
frameworks as specified by the specification.

12005 - work pIans
n case the contractor was not supplied with detailed plans, but with general plans, the
contractor shall submit production plans for each of the aluminum parts. The contractor
shall be exempted from submitting the plans if it it mentioned that submission is not
required.
n the plans the contractor shall give the following details:
Profiles dimensions , rulers, fastening hardware details , sealing materials (standard
applying), hardware fittings details, methods of assembly, and order of assembly of the item
on the wall.
For doors, in addition to the above, hinge location , corner area and lock placement shall be
detailed.

12006 - Adaptation of Framework to the PIans

5
All aluminum frameworks shall be performed in accordance with plans and specifications.
Should the contractor offer to supply products that differ in construction from the plans, he
shall first submit detailed plans of the modification for approval of the CO. This rule applies
to a contractor supplying frameworks constructed from different profiles than specified.

12007 - Fitting to Openings Dimensions
The contractor shall check all the dimensions of openings in the buildings before placing the
order. t is his responsibility to fit the products in the openings. This rule applies to
contractors executing the framework but not the construction work.
The contractor shall inform the supervisor about any misfit found between the opening
dimensions and the plan list of frameworks or quantity list, and receive instructions as to the
determined dimensions. The contractor notice shall be acknowledged only if received
before any work was started concerning production of part, or with raw material production.
f the contractor has not informed about on misfits - he shall be responsible for removing
the framework misfit items, and replacing them withappropriate ones.

12008 - Transportation
Aluminum framing shall be delivered to the construction site when all profiles, sheets, etc.
are assembled together into a complete part.
Any part or material found defective, or damaged, shall be replaced by the contractor in a
manner that shall not reveal the fact that it was replaced or repaired, and shall not change
appearance of the product.
Articles that can not be transported completely assembled, because of size, shall be
supplied in parts, but it is the contractor responsibility to prepare beforehand, suitable
installations for the proper assembly on site.
All aluminum products shall be transported to the construction site protected and covered
by plastic wrapping.

1201 - CIassification and Inspection
12011 - Requirements by CIassification and Designation
Regarding aluminum windows, t should be differentiated as in sraeli Standard 1068:
i Designation 1 - residential building
i Designation 2 - public and special buildings.
i Buildings of any class intended for the security system or MOD shall have the
appearance of special building and shall apply for designation 2.
The observation applies to any- characteristic- required for an article, but there could be
requirements for different properties of different features for the same article. The
requirements shall be specified in one of the documents of the contracts, and if not noted,
the standard requirement applies.
Outer doors and balcony doors shall be classified as the above.

12012 - Required Properties by CIassification and Designation
The properties that have to be distinguished by requirement:
i Profile thickness - as designated.
i Withstanding operational inspection - as required by function.
i Glazing sheets thickens - as specified in the table.
i Tolerances

6
i Sealing- air passage, water and static loads- in accordance to geographic location,
building height and operational function.
i Anode coating thickness-as required by environment.

12013 - Prototype Inspection.
The contractor shall submit documents, by a certified laboratory, indicating that a prototype
of the product has been checked. The date of inspection shall not be earlier than two years
before the document is submitted to the CO.
The prototype inspection is not to be considered a substitute for routine quality control
carried out by according to the requirements of the inspector.
n the event the article is a first of its kind and has not been in production by the contractor,
it shall be agreed with the CO on a series of tests which shall be carried out by a certified
laboratory. The laboratory shall submit a document certifying the model has passed
inspection and it is in accordance with the approved design. This is a condition for the start
of production.
n the door prototype inspection, the contractor shall prepare samples of parts of the doors
for inspection. The samples shall include the corner area. When there are at least three
doors, the contractor shall prepare a sample also of the hinge.

12014 - Certification for Production
The contractor shall not start production of any part of a product before:
A. The contractor has submitted designs that were approved by the CO.
B. The contractor has submitted and has received approval of any hardware-fitting
sample. (one part of each item shall be kept for safe keeping in the CO office)
C. The contractor has submitted a sample of the finished product upon the explicit
CO request.
D. The contractor has submitted a document from a certified laboratory confirming
the prototype inspection as stated above.
The certification for production does not free the contractor from full responsibility for the
quality of the product, or to any ramification mistakes, errors, misfits and defects that could
occur at a later date.
The products supplied by the contractor shall be identical in construction and level of
performance to the sample inspected and certified.

12015 - Inspection at the Production PIant
The contractor shall notify the CO in advance of production start. The contractor shall
enable the supervisor to inspect at any time the profiles, hardware fitting, sealers, fasteners,
and all other parts, the production process and quality.
The CO shall be entitled to request an inspection of the product at the plant, before
transport to the construction site. n the event the product was not found complying with the
requirements, the production process shall be changed, until the product meets the
requirements.

12016 - Laboratory Tests
The Sample to be tested shall be taken from the production plant or construction site, left to
the CO discretion.
The product shall be delivered to the construction site in time to enable inspection at a
certified laboratory, without causing delay in their assembly in the building, or delay in the
timetable set for the building as a whole. The contractor has to take into account the time

7
period required for inspection and deliver the frameworks in advance. Alternatively he can
supply some items to be sent for inspection in such a manner that would not cause delays
in execution.
The contractor shall prepare any auxiliary devices for inspection, at the laboratory request,
at the laboratory and in the presence of the CO.
n the event the part has passed the inspection after performing repairs, the production lot
shall be approved only after the repairs have been carried out in the whole lot of production,
and a full re-inspection has been performed.

1202 - MateriaIs
E. 12020 General
All the metallic parts shall be new, without inner or outer defects, wrinkles or deformation.
The profiles forming part of the frameworks structure shall be open, hollow or with a
geometrical form granting them the required stiffness.

12021 AIIoys
Aluminum parts shall be made of alloy whose composition complies with the following
requirements, unless if a different requirement has been mentioned in the contract:
a. Profiles Alloy designated AA 6063 or AA 6061 according to the American
Standard FED.STD.QQ-A-200 E/GEN
b. Sheets AA 5050 or AA 5052 alloy of the above standard.
Tensional strength of the profiles shall be at least 200 Newtons per square meter.
Choosing the alloy shall be done while complying to the colors of the different items of the
frame, even after anodizing.
Should the contractor propose the use of an alloy different from the up mentioned, he shall
prove according to certified testing laboratory that it complies with the above American
standards.

12022 ProfiIes and sheets
The thickness of the aluminum profiles depend upon the required level, and the minimal
thickness is defined as follows:
A. The thickness of the profile wall for the framework shall be as follows :

1) Profiles designated 1 thickness shall be 1.45 mm. At all points the
thickness shall not be less than 1.2 mm .
2) Profiles designated 2 shall be according to one document of the
contract, but no less than 1.45 mm at all points.
3) The minimal thickness in hollow profiles shall not be less than 1.35
mm at all points.

B. Thickness of profiles serving for glazing rulers shall be as follows :
1) n framework designated 1 thickness of 1.0 mm.
2) n framework designated 2 the thickness shall not be less than 1.2
mm.

8
C. The thickness of sheets serving for covering, etc., whose object is for
appearance covering only shall be no less than 1.2 mm and they shall
withstand wrinkling and ramming.

D. Materials for threshold The alloy for threshold shall be as defined above for
sheets. The dimensions of thresholds shall be detailed in special requirement.
E. n doors, the thickness of profiles shall be according to standard 263.

12023 ProfiIes Finishing
120230 - GeneraI
Aluminum frames shall be protected from atmospheric corrosive influence, by anodize or
paint.

120231 - Anodize
The level of plating shall be decide according to the environmental conditions. Quality of
plating (thickness, sealing, etc.) and its inspection shall be performed according to sraeli
Standard 325. The required level shall be mentioned in one document of the contract.
Unless otherwise stated, the minimal local thickness of anodize shall be:
20 microns (type AA25 in sraeli standard 325) on products installed in the vicinity of sea or
in areas with particular atmospheric conditions concerning humidity, pollution, etc.
16 microns (type AA20 in sraeli standard 325) for the other cases.
The shade of anodized materials shall be determined by the CO, after receiving samples.
A sample approved shall be placed in safe keeping for purposes of comparison .
f anodize is required without being specified - anodizing shall be transparent, to show the
material color of the aluminum. The anodized surface shall exhibit a uniform, stainless look
without defects.
Thickness of anodize on hardware shall be as required in sraeli standard 1068.

120232 - Paints.
Painting shall be performed in a controlled process comprising surface preparation
(including conversion coating). Drying shall be carried out in suitable ovens. Temperature
and duration shall be such as not to damage profiles or coatings. Paints thickness shall be
not less than 30 micron at all points.

120233 - PoIishing
Polishing profiles to be anodized shall be performed only if mentioned in the contract
documents. n an explicit request the type of polishing shall be specified.

12024 - Connecting Hardware
Screws and bolts, frames washers and other connecting hardware shall be made of
nonmagnetic stainless steel, aluminum or from other non rusting materials, suitable for
connecting aluminum and of sufficient mechanical strength for their use.
Screws and other parts not exposed to weather when the window it opened or closed, can
be made of steel coated with cadmium or zinc. Coating shall meet srael Standards 266 and
918.

9
12025 -Fastening Hardware
Fastening hardware for frames shall be made of galvanized steel, aluminum, stainless steel
or other non-rusting material .

12026 -Accessories and Hardware
Accessories and hardware of the frames shall be made of coated steel, stainless steel or
other non rusting material , suitable for use with aluminum, and not damaged by t.
Hardware accessories shall meet sraeli Standard 1068 or sraeli Standard 274, and be
approved by the CO. The fastening hardware shall be built in a manner that shall enable
convenient execution of all operation such as, sliding, rolling, swiveling, locking, closing,
with a force, not exceeding 4 Kg. These parts shall be inspected as required by sraeli
Standard 1068.
The accessories shall be assembled in a manner that shall not make it possible to
disassemble the frames from the outside, unless required otherwise. Rollers and bearings
shall be made of non-rusting material such as "okulon" or others, which have undergone
special treatment against corrosion.
Hardware accessories and hinges for doors shall be as detailed below. nspection shall be
as described in srael Standards nstituted Standard 263 (Parts 1,2).
A. Hinges
1) Pin hinge for use in door-flaps, for a wing up to 1.20 m, shall be as described in
the plans.
2) Side hinges- for use in door flaps for a wing up to 1.20m. The hinges shall be
constructed of aluminum profiles with side thickness of 5mm at least. The pin shall
be made of stainless steel placed in an "okulon" sleeve. Pin thickness shall be 8
mm. Each door shall be attached by 3 side hinges. "Butterfly" hinges shall have a
pin of 6 mm thick at least. n side "butterfly hinge the minimal pin thickness shall
be 6 mm.

Between moving parts in the hinges, 2 mm "okulon rings shall be installed..
B. Hidden locks as in sraeli Standard 101 - And in addition shall be coated as
required in the standard.
After being locked the latch shall penetrate 20 mm inside the notch
C. Door bolts shall be hidden and will not protrude from the surface of the door
profile. The bolts shall be made of a round rod of 10 mm diameter at least. These
shall be inserted into pipes in a depth of 25 mm underneath the floor surface.
D. All hardware fitting for doors (handles, springed devices, shock absorbers etc.)
shall be attached by backing plates.

12037 - GIazing RuIers
Rulers for fastening pane glass inside the glazing grooves shall be placed as in the plans.
Their thickness shall be as described above (section 12022 B.). The rulers shall be of the
same shade as the frame, and cut to fit the corner type (straight or 45q) precisely and clean
and tightened by springs or screws.

12028 - SeaIing MateriaIs
Sealing materials shall be used for the following objectives:
i Sealing of stationary parts in frames (section 120334).
i Sealing of moving parts in frames ( section 120335)
i Sealing of glazing (section 12043).

10
i Sealing at assembly (section 12065).

11

1203 - Production

12031 - Corner Joint
i Corner joints shall be done with the following mechanical means: bolts, screws, (at
least 2 at each corner), press, gluing or any combination of these.
i Flank joining shall be accomplished by corner joints.
i Seams shall be accomplished with corner joints, unless stated otherwise.
i Corner joints shall be constructed of aluminum or zinc alloy designated ZEMAK 3
or ZEMAK 5-as in sraeli Standard 836. Corner joints shall not be made of steel.
n all cases the corner joint shall be assembled seale and tight , along its tangential plane
throughout the entire length. The mode of assembly shall ensure a long lasting fit and
sealing, in a permanent way to withstand loosening of screws or other fasteners.
Should a corner joint be made by gluing, it shall be done using Epoxy Glue, leaving no
traces of glue visible.
Sealant for this use shall stand adhesion tests as in sraeli nstitute of Standards, Standard
153.
The sealant at the lower part of the frames shall have silicon sealant in addition to the seam
sealant.
Door joints shall include the following:
i Profile joints shall be at 45q.
i Corner joints used for doors shall be constructed only of aluminum. The joints
shall have penetrating arms to fit in the profiles. the arms shall have a length of 60
mm on each side.

12032 - Fittings
All fittings assembly shall be done in such manner to enable replacement, and adjustment
in case of failure.
Fitting exposed to loads such as hinges, corner fitting, spring devices, and door stops etc.,
shall not be fastened to frames with screws inserted perpendicular to the profiles wall
without a fastening plate from behind the wall. The fastening plate in doors shall be no less
than 5 mm thick.
Friction should be avoided between aluminum moving surfaces, by separating them by
means of brushes or flexible seals with the proper shape.

12033 - Contact between AIuminum and Other MateriaI.
There shall not be direct contact between aluminum parts and steel, or other metals of
framework in the building, except for stainless steel and zinc coated steel. All contact
surface shall be insulated in one of the following means:
i The other metal part shall be painted with primer paint (such as zinc chromate) and
on top two layers of unleaded paint.
i Separation by a non-spongy plastic material.
i Steel flanges and other fasteners not exposed, shall be galvanized or zinc coated,
after production

Aluminum parts sunk in concrete, cement, etc., shall be coated with bitumen paint.

12

12034 - SeaIing of Permanent Fits to Frames
Materials for sealing between frame parts attached permanently by mechanical means,
shall consist of:
i Narrow point seams sealer AAMA 800-86 Voluntary Specification and Test
Methods Corner Joints see article 12031 above.

12035 - SeaIing of MoveabIe Frame Parts
The interface line and points in moveable frame parts shall be isolated and sealed with
flexible seals. The seals shall be composed of a material such that do not damage
aluminum and withstand weathering.
The sealing materials listed below and approved by the CO shall be used.
i Brushes- the brushes material, and attachment shall ensure resistibility in use.
They will withstand an inspection of 5000 operations.
i Flexible formed sealers see section 120433.
i n door requiring sealing for air-conditioning, dust etc, the details shall be given in
the designs.
Sealing operation shall be achieved by "pressure between moveable parts and the
stationary ones, or between them . The number of points shall be given in the design, or
stated in as special specification. f not mentioned, there shall be at list one "pressure
point.

1204 - GIazing
12040 - GeneraI

Glazing shall conform to sraeli Standard 1090 and shall be performed as below.
i "Glazing with materials other then glass shall be described in a special
specification.
i "Glazing with insulating glass (constructed of two glass sheets) shall be described
in a special specification.

12041 - GIass
A part of a glass sheet cut or manufactured by size and intended for glazing is designated
as a glass pane.
Unless otherwise instructed, glass panes shall be flat, except for use in rest rooms, there it
shall be flat and matte. Glass for panes shall be smooth, transparent, and conform to sraeli
Standard 938.
n any case netted glass shall no be used in shades.
The minimal thickness of glass shall be determined by the continuous area of the glass in
frame, the quality of the glass, and the designation of frame.
The thickness shall not be lower then stated in table 1, and in any case shall conform to
loading tests described in table 1.
The thickness of glass in any area of a part shall be identical to the required thickness in
the largest area of that part.

13

Table 1: Flat transparent Glass
The continuous glass area in m2 (up to and
including)
0.5 - 1.0 - 1.5 - 2.0 - 2.5 - 3.0
Glass thickness in mm Designation 1 3.0 - 3.0 - 4.0 - 4.0 - 5.0 - 5.0
Designation 2 3.0 - 4.0 - 4.0 - 4.0 - 6.5

A glass pane in area greater than 2 square meters shall withstand a bending test according
to a special specification.
Shutters shall be manufactured of 3.5 mm thick glass.
Requirements for reinforced glass and security glass shall be detailed in a special
specification.
The minimal thickness of glass in doors shall be according to sraeli Standard 1099, but in
any case no less then 5.0 mm.

12042 - Location and Attachment
The covering of glass edges surrounding, in the frame or between the frame and the glass
ruler shall be in a depth of 1.5 times the thickness of the glass, but not less then 5mm.
Expansion and contraction thermal gaps, in length and width shall be kept between glass
edge and the frame.
Glass panes shall be assembled in a way that can enable replacement from within the
building.
Glass panes shall not be placed inside frame on top of aluminum parts of the frame, but on
spacers made of wood or other material approved by the CO. Spacers shall be placed at
the distance of the width of glass, and at lesst 150mm from the corner.
The (hardness), shore a durometter hardness of 85+/- 5.
Before glazing, neoprene or sealant tape shall ce placed on the frame as described in
section 12043 below.
The glass pane shall be padded on both sides and there shall not be contact between
aluminum parts and glass.
Doors shall have additional spacers on each side at 1/3 the height.

12043 - GIazing SeaIing
Glazing sealing shall be applied using materials ensuring absolute sealing, long lasting
operation at temperature changes and sun radiation, good flexibility for the relative
movement between the glass and aluminum parts.
The seal shall not pollute the building walls or the frames by secretion of oils or corrosive
materials.
f the use of these materials leaves them exposed they should be of a type that dries,
develops a crust that does not absorb dust and contamination.
Sealant shall be chosen from 3 groups described below and detailed in the design or other
document of the contract. The sealant and mode of application shall conform to
manufacturer instructions and as required by the group as specified in the specification
described below. The contractor should inform, in writing, about the standards and to which
characteristics of the standards the sealant he proposes to use, complies with. This shall be
approved by the CO before application.

The use of materials not detailed below shall be possible, if they are checked and found
complying with the suitable standards, and approved for use by the CO before commencing
work.

14

120431 - SeaIing MateriaI- Group A
Sealant of the type "bulk sealing compound" applied with special gun shall be used for
sealing. This compound shall have the property to adhere to aluminum and glass.
The sealing compound should be used for sealing purposes only, and applied before the
glass placement. The glass pane shall be placed on wood spacers and locked in place by
glazing rulers.
The rulers shall be precisely cut and fastened in place.

120432 -SeaIing MateriaI - Group B
Tapes and stripes made of flexible material, capable of adhering. They shall be supplied
with paper or cloth backing. The sealant should be of suitable thickness so as to be well
fastened between the glass and frame.

120433 - SeaIing MateriaI - Group C
Flexible shaped sealing materials that are not adhesive shall be made of P.V.C, neoprene
or other elastomeric material. They shall be applied to the glass, or frame before glazing. n
frame designated 2, the spacers shall be of Neoprene or E.P.D.M.
"Neoprene or E.P.D.M. with a shore a durometer hardness of 65+/-5.
The seals shall withstand tests as required in sraeli Standard 1068. n addition, the sealant
shall withstand UV radiation exposure tests for a duration of 500 hours. Tearing strength
and elongation strength should not deviate by more than 15%.
The seals shall be fastened and well pressed along the whole length of the frame, between
the glass and the glazing rulers, or the profile blades.
The seals must have a geometric fit to the base of the frame, and its size.
The sealers edge section must be coated with a suitable material.

1205 - QuaIity ControI
12050 - GeneraI
n addition to details above in 12013, 121015, 12016: all tests for quality control of
aluminum windows as part of general aluminum frameworks, shall be performed in
accordance with sraeli Standard 1068, and also with the following requirements:

120521 -ToIerances
The deviation from the length and width in measurement of frames shall not exceed the
following rates in mm:

Outer Dimensions (mm) Deviation Allowed (mm)
Up to 1500 r1.0
Over 1500 r1.5

The difference between the diagonals of the rectangles, when assembled in a test frame
shall not exceed 1mm for every 1 m in length of diagonal.

15

12052 - FunctionaI Checks

120521 - GeneraI
All frame units shall be capable of preventing air and water penetration when closed and
locked, as specified below. All frame assemblies shall be capable of withstanding static
loads as specified below. The test shall be carried on a random typical specimen frame with
the greatest dimensions included in the contract.
Tests shall be carried out after hardware fittings have passed inspection -as in sraeli
Standard l068.
The CO is authorized to inspect additional random models of completed frames.

120521 - Air Penetration
The frames shall be tested and comply with air penetration requirements as required in
sraeli Standard 1068.
Frames designated 2 (as dedicated), unless required by building location or number of
floors, shall at least conform to the requirements for windows designated B (by function).
That is air penetration shall not exceed 7 m3 per hour for every 1m in length (as specified in
sraeli Standard 1078.). Air pressure in tests by the standard shall be 150 n/m2.

120522 - Water Penetration
Frames shall be tested and comply with water penetration according to sraeli Standard
1068.

120523 - Loading
Frames shall be tasted and comply with static and maximum loading according to sraeli
Standard 1068.

1206 - Frames AssembIy in Openings
12061 - Protection and Storage
n accordance with the described in section 12998, all frames shall be packed so that they
are protected from weather effects especially parts left exposed after assembly.
The contractor shall store aluminum products in a closed and clean place, in such a manner
as to avoid damage up to the time of assembly.

12062 - ConceaIed Joints
Aluminum frames shall be assembled on concealed joints made of wood, galvanized steel
or aluminum. n special cases the CO can waiver the concealed joint, if an installation item
does include such a joint.
At the CO request, concealed squares shall be placed in molders before the wall plates are
cast .
No part of the concealed square shall be exposed after assembly of frames, either when
the door or window is opened or closed. Wood and steel squares shall be assembled
before plastering work is executed. Wood squares should be impregnated in a preserving
substance that does not attack aluminum.
Concealed steel squares shall be constructed of galvanized steel plates with a minimal
thickness of 1.5 mm. Concealed steel squares used for doors of a width exceeding 90 cm,

16
and double winged doors shall be constructed of plates with a minimal thickness of 2.0 mm.
Aluminum concealed squares shall be constructed of plates with a minimal thickness of 1.5
mm.
Concealed squares shall be assembled as in the design, leveled without deformation and
well fit to the openings. Modes of fastening, their number and density shall be as specified
in the designs, but the distance between them shall not exceed 0.70 m and the distance
from a corner to the first fastener shall not exceed 0.20 m. Fastening with a rivet gun is
forbidden.
Unless otherwise specified, fasteners shall be cast in block walls by cast concrete with a
minimal dimension of 10x10x10cm.
Concealed squares in doors shall be assembled so that their bottom part shall reach a level
of 6 cm below floor surface. This part covered by the flooring shall be covered by a material
approved by the CO.

12063 - Door SiIIs
Door sills shall be assembled so that their bottom part shall reach a level of 6 cm below the
floor surface. This part covered by the flooring shall be covered by a material approved by
the CO.

12064 - CIeaning.
An aluminum part stained by paint or plaster shall be cleaned immediately.
mmediately following assembly, all parts shall be cleaned using a clean cloth and lukewarm
water with mild detergent. After drying, the part shall be covered width a thin coat of
paraffin, all this without staining the wall in the area surrounding the frame.
The contractor shall not use aggressive chemicals that react with aluminum like alkaline nor
mechanical means like steel wool nor steel tolls that leave scratches.
When accepted by the CO the aluminum shall be clean and free of any mechanical damage
like wrinkles, scratches or breaks, or chemical damage like corrosion, roughening caused
by cement or lime, pitting or staining. The remains of any materials shall be removed using
appropriate methods and cleaning materials.

12065 - SeaIing between Frames and WaIIs
The assembled frames and concealed squares in the openings shall be sealed from air and
water penetration. The sealing shall be continuous and executed in a professional method.
The type of sealing materials shall conform to the type that adheres to walls, concrete and
aluminum. The sealing material shall not damage the aluminum, absorb moisture nor
secrete oils or contaminating materials.
The sealing materials shall conform to the following srael Standards nstitute
Specifications:
143 single component elastomer sealant based on acrylic and silicone resins, for use in
construction.

153 - single and twin component elastomer sealant for use in construction.

12066 - ThreshoIds.

Thresholds shall be installed according to details of the plans.

17
For doors opened towards outside, unless otherwise documented in the plans, the
difference heights between the inner and outer side shall be 15 mm.

12067 - Inspection after AssembIy.
The inspection and tests after the assembly shall be executed according to contract, or the
CO request.

General SpeciIication and
Methods oI Measurement Ior
Prestressed Concrete Works
Issued by the Special Interministerial Committee with the participation of:

Fourth Edition (Amended)

All rights reserved - Ministry of Defense/Publications Department - 2006
13

i
13 (2006)

Documents and their Computerization:

Y. Sasson Ministry oI Housing & Construction Member
S. Cohen Ministry oI Transportation Member
L. Liachiovsky Ministry oI Transportation Member
Y. Shocham Treasury Ministry/Comptroller's
OIIice
Member
S. Fine Ministry oI DeIense Member and Editor-in-
ChieI oI Publications
Y. Lupovitch Ministry oI DeIense Member and Coordinator oI
Subcommittees
General Specification for Prestressed Concrete: Subcommittee
S. Fine Ministry oI DeIense Chairman
Y. Axelrod Ministry oI DeIense Member
Y. Lupovitch Ministry oI DeIense Member
Y. Sadler Ministry oI Housing & Construction Member
M. Keonigsberg Ministry oI Transportation Member
E. Rosenfeld Ministry oI DeIense Member
K. Reinhorn Israel DeIense Forces Member

The Committee was assisted by the advice oI Mr. Shlomo Lieberman, Mr. Yitzhak
Stern and Mr. Yehuda Oved

The Committee was also assisted by: Dr. Moni Ben Bassett (on the subject of concrete
works) and Mr. Arye Weiler.

ii
13 General SpeciIication and Methods oI
Measurement Ior Prestressed Concrete Works

Table of Contents
1300 General .................................................................................................. 1
1301 Concrete ............................................................................................... 5
1302 Prestressing steel .................................................................................. 7
1303 Anchorage systems for post-tensioning ............................................ 13
1304 Grout ................................................................................................... 19
1305 Stressing method ................................................................................ 43
1306 General performance requirements ................................................. 34
1307 Performance requirements for pre-tensioning ................................ 39
1308 Performance requirements for post-tensioning of bonded cables . 41
1309 Performance requirements for post-tensioning of unbonded
monostrand cables ............................................................................. 43
1300.00 Methods of measurement for prestressed concrete works ............. 41

Appendix No.1 Stressing Report - Pretensioning, Contract No. ............................ 41
Appendix No.2 Stressing Report - Post-tensioning, Contract No. .......................... 41
Appendix No.3 Stressing Report -Unbonded Post-tensioning: Stressing of
Monostrand Cables ............................................................................ 41
Appendix No.4 Monitoring Report -Vertical and Horizontal Camber .................. 41

13 (2006)
1
1300: General
13001
Scope of this
section
This section makes reIerence to the quality oI materials and
workmanship oI prestressed concrete works in accordance with the
drawings and instructions oI the special speciIication, and pertains to
prestressed building components, whether situated in the ground or
above it throughout the site area, at any height or depth whatsoever,
whether stressed at the site or brought to the site already stressed and the
stressing is perIormed at another site or at a special Iactory Ior
producing concrete and Ior its stressing.
This section includes both pretensioning and post-tensioning and also
makes reIerence to stressing using unbonded cables and unbonded
monostrands.
Requirements Ior perIorming stressing works Ior hollow panels are
included in this section; Ior product requirements, see Section 03
Precast Concrete Products.
Exterior stressing or stressing with unbonded multistrands shall be
perIormed as detailed in the special speciIication.
13002
Standards
In addition to that stated in the section 'Quality oI materials and
workmanship in the Government oI Israel Contract Ior Building
Construction by a Contractor (Standard Contract 3210), the Iollowing is
a list oI principal Israeli and Ioreign standards related to this section.

13 (2006)
2
1 Cement
Part 1 Common Cements
Part 2 SulIate-Resisting Portland Cements
Part 3 Low Heat Common Cements
3 Mineral Aggregates Irom Natural Sources
26 Methods oI Testing Concrete, with all its parts
118 Concrete Ior Structural Uses: Production Control and
Compressive Strength
127, Part 1 Accreditation Testing oI Welders: Fusion Welders
Steels
252 Load Tests on Slabs and Beams oI ReinIorced and
Prestressed Concrete
466 Concrete Code:
Part 1 General Principles
Part 2 ReinIorced and UnreinIorced Concrete Structures
Part 3 Prestressed Concrete
Part 4 Precast Concrete Elements and Structures
Part 5 Precast Prestressed Hollow Core Slab Floors
601 Ready Mixed Concrete
789, Part 1 Deviations in Buildings: Permitted Deviations in
Construction Works
896 Chemical Admixtures Ior Concrete
904 Formwork Ior Concrete :
13 (2006)
3
Part1 Principles
Part 2 Telescopic Props
1225 Steel Buildings Code: General
1735 Steel Ior the Prestressing oI Concrete:
Part1 General Requirements
Part 2 Cold Drawn Wire
Part 4 Strand
Part 5 Hot-rolled Steel Bars with or without Subsequent
Processing
4466 Steel Ior the ReinIorcement oI Concrete:
Part 2 Plain Bars
Part 3 Ribbed Bars
Part 4 Welded Fabric
Part 5 Cut and Bent Bars and Fabrics
9001 (ISO 9001) Quality Management Systems- Requirements

B. Foreign standards
In addition to the Ioreign documents detailed in Israel Standard 466, Part
3, the Iollowing is a list oI Ioreign documents relating to this section:
Fib: Guide to Good Practice Bulletin No. 7 (2000)
Fip: 1986: Corrosion Protection Ior Unbonded Tendons
Fip - 1993: Recommendations Ior the Acceptance oI Post Tensioning
Systems
13 (2006)
4
13003
Other
sections
Everything stated in the sections denoted below also pertain to this
section as speciIied in the section "Contradictions among documents and
preIerences among documents" in the Government oI Israel Contract Ior
Building Construction by Contractors (Standard Contract 3210):
Section 00: Preliminaries
Section 02: Cast-in-Place Concrete Works
Section 03: Precast Concrete Products
Section 04: Structural Steel
13004
Definitions
Insert: a device set into the concrete Ior extending reinIorcing bars or as
preparation Ior Iuture structural connections.
Strand: a tendon made Irom two or more round wires braided around a
straight central wire and constituting a single unit.
Soft reinforcing: concrete reinIorcing steel in accordance with Israel
Standard 4466, with all its parts, and which is not intended Ior
prestressing.
Initial concrete setting time: the time that has elapsed Irom the creation
oI a contact between the cement and water until obtaining resistance to
penetration (using the Proctor method) oI 3.5 Mpa (500 PSI) in the
cement that has been screened Irom the concrete as detailed in Israel
Pocket former: an element that connects to the exterior side oI a pull
anchor and is attached to the Iormwork in order to create a pocket that
enables access by the jack to the anchor.
13 (2006)
5
Prestressing cable: a tendon or a bunch oI tendons provided in a single
duct and anchored with a common anchor according to the prestressing
method.
Unbonded monostrand: a cable made Irom a single strand, the bonding
oI which to the concrete is prevented, and which includes a steel cable, a
protective layer and grease with a plastic sheathing.
1ack: a hydraulic device combined with monitoring and measuring
instruments designed to perIorm prestressing actions and adapted to the
structure oI the cable and anchors.
Bar: a steel bar Iormed by hot rolling, generally supplied as a smooth
straight bar with threading at the ends or with threading Ior the Iull
length oI the bar.
Coupler: a mechanical device connecting two tendon sections to one
another and that transIers the prestressing Iorce in one section to
another.
Tendon: a steel component: a wire, strand or bar used to create a
tensioned condition in a stressed concrete structure.
Sealed cover: a plastic element that covers the edge oI a strand
protruding Irom the exterior side oI a pull anchor.
Intermediate anchor: an anchor that is not placed at the end oI the
cable, but rather at any point whatsoever along it; intended Ior
tensioning at the conclusion oI casting and Ior shortening the Iree length
oI the cable.
13 (2006)
6
Deadhead: an anchor that is used in post-tensioning Ior anchoring the
unstressed end oI the tensioned cable at the other end.
Pull anchor: an anchor that is placed at the tensioned end oI a cable.
Grease layer: in unbonded cables, material that coats the strand
continuously Ior its entire length and having two Iunctions: corrosion
protection and reducing Iriction between the strand and the plastic
sheathing.
Wire: a cold drawn tendon supplied in reels.

13 (2006)
7
1301: Concrete
13010
General
All concrete works and materials shall be perIormed as required in a
Section 02 Cast-in-place Concrete Works, the requirements oI Israel
Standard 466 and the other requirements as indicated in this
speciIication.
13011
Concrete
materials

130111
Coarse
aggregates
Unless stated otherwise in the contract documents, concrete materials
shall be as stated in Section 02 Cast-in-place Concrete Works.
Course aggregates shall comply with requirements Ior Type A in
accordance with Israel Standard 3. Course aggregates shall be cubic
inasmuch as possible.
The maximum nominal size oI the aggregate shall not exceed the lesser
oI the Iollowing Iour values:
a. 1/5 oI the minimum dimension between the walls oI the Iormwork;
b. 1/3 oI the thickness oI solid slabs;
c. 3/4 oI the Iree space between individual reinIorcing bars, ducts,
strands and Iormwork;
d. 40 mm
Aggregate size, when diIIering Irom than that indicated above, shall be
approved only in special circumstances by the Supervisor.
13 (2006)
8
In cases where aggregates larger than 40 mm are used, concrete strength
testing shall be perIormed under the special conditions speciIied in
Israel Standard 26.
130112
Fine
aggregates
Fine aggregates shall be natural aggregates (such as sand produced Irom
a stream or natural excavation) or crushed sand, or a combination oI
these two types. They shall comply with the grading and quality
requirements oI Israel Standard 3. Crushed sand shall be washed.
130113
Cement
Cement used in prestressed concrete shall be Portland cement CEM I R
or CEM I N with a minimum strength oI 42.5 Mpa as speciIied in Israel
Standard 1, Part 1.
130114
Water
Water shall be potable water and shall be compatible with the
requirements oI Israel Standard 466, Part 1 and as stated in Section 02
Cast-in-place Concrete Works.
130115
Additives
The Contractor may propose the use oI chemical additives Ior modiIying
certain properties oI the Iresh or hardened concrete, complying with
requirements oI Israel Standard 896 and this speciIication. It shall be
veriIied at an approved laboratory that the additives do not deleteriously
impact the properties oI the concrete, the grout and the stressing steel.
The use oI any additive whatsoever shall only be perIormed based on
the Supervisor's approval.
13 (2006)
9
II speciIically stated in the drawings or in one oI the other contract
documents that the Contractor must use an additive Ior the purpose oI
modiIying particular properties, such additive shall also comply with the
Iollowing requirements:
The additive will be approved on the condition that it has been proved
by testing at an approved laboratory that it complies with all the
requirements indicated in respect thereoI in the standard, and under the
condition that it has been proved that it will not deleteriously impact the
durability oI the concrete and steel. For example: use shall not be made
oI additives that include chlorides such as calcium chloride (CaCl
2
).
Use oI an air-entrained additive will be permitted only when required in
the special speciIication, and only when continuous monitoring oI the
quantity oI entrained air exists as determined in previous testing at the
construction site or at the Iabrication plant.
The additive dosage shall be determined on the basis oI prior laboratory
testing in consideration oI anticipated casting and climatic conditions
during casting.
When using two or more additives, their compatibility with one another
shall be veriIied by prior testing.
13 (2006)
10
Additives shall be supplied in manuIacturer packaging in accordance
with the requirements oI Israel Standard 896 and shall be stored at the
site and at the plant in accordance with the manuIacturer's instructions.
The additive shall be introduced into the mixer in a manner that ensures
precise dosage and complete dispersal in the mixture.
13012
Concrete
types and
mixture
ratios

130120
General
The types oI concrete used in prestressed structures shall be in
accordance with the requirements oI the contract. In any case, the type
oI concrete shall not be less than B-40.
Mixture ratios shall be determined on the basis oI prior testing at an
approved laboratory in consideration oI environmental conditions,
material quality, casting conditions, casting order, required initial
concrete setting time, and transport, application and vibration times.
In designing the concrete mix, standard strength requirements oI the
designed concrete shall be taken into consideration, as well as additional
requirements as detailed in the special speciIication and the drawings
such as: strength at the time oI perIorming pretensioning or post-
tensioning, concrete tensile strength during the transIer oI stressing
Iorces, etc.
13 (2006)
11
130121
Cement
content
Unless stated otherwise, the minimum cement content shall be in
accordance with the requirements oI Israel Standard 466, Part 3.
The concrete mixture shall be determined in a manner that will obtain
the required strength with the appropriate minimum quantity oI cement
in order to reduce, insoIar as possible, rates oI shrinkage and creep.
Unless stated otherwise in one oI the contract documents, the quantity oI
cement shall not exceed 350 kg per cubic meter oI concrete in Type B-
40 concrete, 420 kg per cubic meter oI concrete in Type B-50 concrete
and 500 kg per cubic meter oI concrete in Type B-60 concrete.
130122
Concrete used
in
supplementary
casting
Concrete used in supplementary casting shall be compatible with
requirements oI the special speciIication and drawings, as required in
Section 02 Cast-in-place Concrete Works.
Minimum Type B-30 concrete shall be used in supplementary castings
in composite elements (such as Ior a cast-in-place slab on a pre-cast
beam). II the supplementary casting is tensioned, the concrete shall be a
minimum Type B-40.
130123
Ready mixed
concrete and
The requirements related to ready mixed concrete (including permanent
stations at concrete Iabrication plants) shall be as stated in Section 02
13 (2006)
12
concrete
produced on-
site
The use oI concrete Iabricated on-site shall be permitted only in unusual
circumstances and requires the prior written approval oI the Supervisor.
When the Contractor establishes a permanent station on site Ior
Iabricating concrete, all oI the requirements pertaining to ready mixed
concrete production shall pertain as stated in Section 02.
13013
Casting of
concrete

130130
General
All preparatory, transport and concrete application works shall be
perIormed as required in the subsection "Concrete casting" in Section 02
Prior to commencing with casting, the Contractor shall submit the
Iollowing Ior the Supervisor`s approval: a detail oI site mobilization Ior
the purpose oI casting the concrete, the casting order and process,
including equipment, source oI concrete, vibration method, planned
casting duration and process, casting method and initial set time Ior the
designed concrete mix.
The concrete works shall be controlled, applied, vibrated and cured
under the on-site supervision oI an engineer representing the Contractor
having proven experience in concrete control works.
13 (2006)
13
In the absence oI any other provision, the concrete shall be applied in the
cast member in a continuous action in a manner so as not to Iorm
unplanned joints. The concrete shall be cast up to the casting break
joints indicated in the drawings.
The casting oI the concrete shall be perIormed so that the Iresh concrete
that will be cast on the concrete has been cast beIore it not later than 1
hours prior to the time oI the completion oI the initial set time oI the
concrete that has already been cast.
130131
Sampling Ior
concrete
testing
In addition to the battery oI tests required in accordance with Israel
Standard 26 and Israel Standard 118, additional concrete samples shall
be taken Ior the purpose oI testing actual compressive and tensile
concrete strength at an early age in accordance with the required
strength on the day oI stressing (see Subsections 130781 or 130981).
Concrete samples shall be taken Ior each concrete test in a quantity
identical to the requirements oI Israel Standard 26 Ior the properties oI
hardened concrete strength.
The samples that will be taken Irom the casting oI structural members
Ior the purpose oI testing oI actual concrete strength at an early age shall
be placed on the cast member and shall be cured in a curing process,
while using curing methods that are precisely identical to those oI the
cast member.
The concrete strength oI each sample on the day oI stressing shall be not
less than the strength required in the contract documents.
13 (2006)
14
130132
Casting
during
darkness
Casting during darkness or at night shall be perIormed only iI the
Contractor has received prior written approval Irom the Supervisor.
In such cases, the Contractor shall install lighting that will also enable
visual inspection oI the surIaces oI the Iorms during the entire casting
process.
130133
Vibrating oI
the concrete
The concrete shall be vibrated during its application as required in
Section 02 by means that will ensure uniIorm and complete aggregation
oI all the concrete (in narrow members as well) around the reinIorcing
bars, the prestressing cables and ducts, anchors and embedded devices
(inserts) and at corners. Complete aggregation shall also be strictly
ascertained in the anchorage area.
In long and/or high precast members, exterior needle vibrators shall be
installed on the sidewalls oI the steel Iorms.
130134
Curing
Concrete curing oI all types oI members shall be perIormed subject to
the requirements oI Section 02, Subsection "Curing oI concrete and its
protection".
130135
The texture oI
the exterior
Iaade oI
members
Unless stated otherwise in the special speciIication, be Iace oI the
concrete shall be smooth, without stains, waviness or visual warping as
Ior example concrete cast in a steel Iorm, and shall comply with all the
requirements Ior standard exposed concrete as detailed in the "Exposed
concrete" subsection oI Section 02 Cast-in-place Concrete Works.
13 (2006)
15
130136
Preparation oI
precast
members Ior
receiving a
supplementary
layer
Preparation oI precast members Ior receiving a supplementary layer
shall be as required in the "Joints" subsection oI Section 02.
130137
Embedded
items
II embedded items are required to be included according to the drawings
(such as: inserts, liIting devices, couplers to soIt reinIorcing steel), they
shall be manuIactured oI the type as detailed in the special speciIication.
Couplers Ior prestressing tendons: see Subsection 13023 below.
The Contractor may propose embedded items oI another type on
condition that that required below will be submitted prior to construction
and that the Supervisor`s written approval will be received Ior this.
The Contractor shall submit the type oI embedded items and documents
testiIying to their quality Ior the approval oI the Supervisor. These
documents shall include, inter alia, tests and opinions oI a certiIied
laboratory that aIIirm the compatibility oI the embedded items to their
purpose, including test results Ior strength, elongation, dynamic load
withstand, etc.
13 (2006)
16
The Supervisor shall be entitled to send several embedded items Ior
testing. The samples shall be taken randomly by the laboratory; at least
three embedded items oI each type |shall be taken|. The testing results
shall be not inIerior in any case to the results noted in the manuIacturer's
documentation.
The Contractor shall strictly veriIy the exact location oI the embedded
items and the orientation (angle) at which they are placed.
13014
Formwork

130140
General
The planned Iormwork system shall be designed, executed and
dismantled in accordance with the requirements oI Israel Standard 904
and Israel Standard 466 as stated below.
Design oI the Iormwork shall be in any case perIormed by the
Contractor and under its responsibility.
The quantity oI Iormwork shall be compatible with the timetable and the
order oI casting. The Contractor shall also take into consideration the
volumes oI concrete oI each casting, waiting time Ior dismantling, etc.
130141
Guidelines Ior
design oI
Iormwork and
supports Ior
prestressed
The Contractor shall plan the Iormwork, with all its components, so that
it will enable shortening oI the concrete during tensioning and Iorecast
upliIt oI the members. The Iorms shall accept all loadings transIerred to
them resulting Irom upliIt oI the structure resulting Irom the stressing
Iorces and absorption oI all longitudinal displacements during transIer oI
the stressing Iorces. The Contractor shall take suitable measures that
13 (2006)
17
concrete will enable such movements without causing any damage whatsoever to
the integrity oI the member and the concrete. These measures shall
ensure that cracks, broken corners etc. will not be created during release
and/or tensioning processes.
130142
Formwork Ior
casting oI
precast
members
Unless stated otherwise, Iormwork used Ior prestressed precast members
shall be made Irom steel at the bottom and sides. Corners at connections
oI the sidewalls shall be chamIered with dimensions oI 15 x 15 mm.
The Iormwork shall be strong and stable without distortion Irom the
standpoint oI horizontal and vertical line and Irom the standpoint oI the
Ilatness oI the edges. The bottom and sides shall be straight without
waviness. Locations Ior exterior vibrators and various accessory
connection details, liIting and assembly devices, etc. shall be designed
by the Contractor.
In precast prestressed members with diaphragms or stiIIening members
Ior the sidewalls, the Iorm shall enable shortening oI the concrete
without blockage, such as with the use oI interior Iormwork. The
Contractor shall make arrangements and use suitable means, such as
telescopic couplers or the gluing oI a sealing sponge to the exterior
sidewall oI the diaphragm.
At the bottom oI channel beams or in members in which water may
accumulate, the Contractor shall install PVC drainage pipes having the
color oI the concrete as required in the drawings, or according to the
Supervisor's requirements
13 (2006)
18
130143
Stopper
In any precast member, the Iorm shall end with a stopper. This
component shall enable the passage and the installation oI all tendons,
cables, stressing ducts, anchors, reinIorcing steel and all devices
required in the drawings and speciIication. The Contractor shall design
the member through the use oI a licensed engineer in the structural
division having experience in the design oI Iormwork Ior prestressed
concrete, so that it will be able to be dismantled without causing cracks
or damage at the edge oI the member resulting Irom Iorecast
displacement during tensioning and release.
Holes provided Ior the passage oI cables shall be at least 2 mm larger
than the cable diameter. These holes shall have rounded edges in order
to prevent damage to the cables during the stressing action. The gap
between the cables and the holes shall be sealed with a material
approved by the Supervisor to prevent leakage oI cement water.
The stopper shall enable shrinkage and expansion oI the concrete
without applying Iorce to it. It is hereby emphasized that no
modiIication whatsoever shall be allowed in the Iorm oI "inserts" and/or
devices and the Contractor shall prepare the member as required in the
drawings.
130144
Sealing oI the
Iorms
The Contractor shall strictly ascertain the sealing oI the Iorms and
prevention oI leakage oI cement water during casting and vibrating. The
Contractor shall be especially diligent with respect to the connection
between the sidewalls and the bottom oI the Iorm
13 (2006)
19
The sealing shall be accomplished with the use oI corner angles and
rubber or soIt neoprene gaskets. The gaskets shall not be damaged in
the corners by the triangular chamIer Iorm.
130145
Form coating
material
Contact between the prestressing cables or their sheathing (to the extent
that the cables are sheathed) and the coating material on the Iorms shall
be prevented. The prestressing cables/their sheathing shall be Iree oI
any material that may prevent their adhesion to the concrete. Placement
oI coating materials on the lower Iorm shall be perIormed in a manner
that will avoid contact oI the coated Iorm with the prestressing cables.
The Iorm oil shall not damage the concrete texture and shall not leave
stains on the surIace oI the members.
130146
Dismantling
oI Iorms
In addition to that stated in the "Form dismantling" subsection oI
Section 02, the Contractor shall take into consideration the deIormations
that will be caused by the stressing works so that no damage will be
caused to the concrete and to its appearance during dismantling.
Dismantling shall be perIormed without applying any Iorce to the
concrete. Furthermore, no Iorce shall be applied on the upper
component oI the beams.
In any case, responsibility Ior any damage whatsoever that may be
caused Irom early dismantling shall be imposed on the Contractor.
13 (2006)
20
The Iormwork system shall not be dismantled Irom any part oI a
member unless the hardened concrete together with the Iormwork
system remaining in place aIter dismantling is capable oI bearing itselI
and the additional loading that may be applied to the member. The
dismantling work shall be perIormed careIully in order to avoid
damaging the concrete. The date oI dismantling shall be determined so
that no damage will be caused the concrete.
II dismantling and reassembly oI the Iormwork and oI the support
Iooters is perIormed, such as in ceilings as preparation Ior casting oI the
level above them to ensure that Iorces will not be transIerred to ceilings
that have already been cast as a result oI over-tightening oI the support
Iooters.
13015
Defective
concrete
A concrete member in which cracks or deIects will be discovered shall
not be tensioned other than upon receipt oI special approval by the
Supervisor and instructions regarding appropriate corrective actions.
DeIects in the prestressed concrete casting that have been discovered
Iollowing quality control testing and can be repaired such that the
member will Iunction as planned shall be repaired in accordance with
the Supervisor's instructions.
Conditions regarding the acceptance oI deIective concrete as speciIied in
the Section 02 also pertain to prestressed concrete members.
13 (2006)
21
In a case where cracks are discovered in a prestressed member that do
not impair strength or durability oI the member, the Supervisor will be
entitled to permit the repair works. The Contractor shall submit
drawings or a repair perIormance method prepared by an engineer
registered in the structural division, having experience in the design oI
prestressed members. The repair proposal submitted by the Contractor
shall include the resources, materials and methods required Ior its
execution. The Contractor is not entitled to perIorm any repairs
whatsoever beIore the Supervisor has approved the repair method
proposed by the Contractor.
Granting oI approval by the Supervisor Ior the repair method proposed
by the Contractor does not derogate Irom the Supervisor`s right to
disqualiIy the member later on iI the repair does not comply with
requirements.
Elements that have been disqualiIied shall be demolished and shall be
removed Irom the work site. The Contractor shall supply new members
in their place.
Core samples shall not be extracted Irom prestressed members Ior the
purpose oI testing the hardened concrete other than upon the speciIic
approval oI the Supervisor.
Castings whose appearance is unacceptable to the Supervisor shall be
disqualiIied, unless approval has been received in writing Irom the
Supervisor to perIorm repairs on them at the Contractor's expense.
13 (2006)
22
Approval Ior a repair by the Supervisor does not derogate Irom the
Contractor`s responsibility Ior the Iunctioning and integrity oI the
members aIter the execution oI the repair.
13016
Supports
(benches)
Supports Ior prestressing cables shall be made Irom reinIorcing bars as
detailed in the drawings or as approved by the Supervisor. The supports
shall be made as units separate Irom the stirrups. Support Iooters shall
not be placed directly on the Iormwork, but rather on concrete brackets
or spacers made Irom hard plastic with a suitable thickness Ior the
required covering, but not less than 20 mm.
13017
Soft
reinforcing
steel
ReinIorcing steel shall be compatible with all requirements oI the
appropriate Israeli standards as detailed in the drawings or the Bill oI
Quantities, all subject to Section 02 Cast-in-place Concrete Works.
The welding oI soIt reinIorcing in stirrups or in other reinIorcing details
shall be perIormed as required in the drawings or as approved by the
Supervisor. In such a case, the steel shall be oI weldable type as
speciIied in the standard. Welding shall be perIormed by a certiIied
welder as required by Israel Standard 127 and as stated in Section 19
Structural Steel.
For the use oI couplers to extend bars: see Subsection 130137 above and
Subsection 130230 below.

13 (2006)
23
1302: Prestressing Steel
13020
General
Prestressing steel shall comply with requirements oI Israel Standard 1735,
with all its parts, and with additional requirements Iound in Israel
Standard 466, Part 3, speciIied below in Subsection 130210.
As required by Israel Standard 1735, the Contractor shall submit
documentation proving compatibility oI the steel with requirements,
including independent tests and identiIying tags. The steel shall be
supplied Irom a recognized manuIacturer.
VeriIication oI the data detailed in the documentation with the
requirements oI Israel Standard 1735 will be reviewed by an approved
laboratory in Israel as speciIied in Israel Standard 1735, Part 1.
13021
Steel
quality

130210
General
The Contractor shall execute the work as detailed in the contract
documents, while using prestressing steel having minimum properties as
detailed in Israel Standard 1735, with all its parts, in addition to the
requirements oI the special speciIication.
All oI the properties oI all products in the shipment as detailed in the
documentation shall be compatible with the requirements oI the standard.
13 (2006)
24
Use shall be made only oI cables Irom the same manuIacturer in any
particular prestressed member. In that same member, use shall be
permitted only oI steels having the identical properties, manuIactured by
an identical manuIacturing process.
130211
Unbonded
cables
In addition to the requirements oI Subsection 13020 above, the Iabrication
oI unbonded prestressing cables, wrapping oI the strand with a protective
layer and sheathing in plastic shall be perIormed in a manuIacturing
process at a plant specializing in the production oI unbonded prestressing
cables compliant with Fip requirements.
Shipments shall be accompanied by a certiIicate Irom an approved
laboratory oI the country oI manuIacture; the certiIicates shall indicate
that the materials comply with the requirements Iound in Fip
recommendations as required below.
Unbonded cables shall be made Irom strands (comprised oI seven wires)
having one oI the Iollowing diameters: 0.5 inch diameter, 0.5 inch super,
0.6 inch or 0.6 inch super as required in the contract documents, having a
mean nominal strength oI 1860 N/mn
2
(270K). Nominal cross-section
area shall be 98.7 mm, 100 mm, 139 mm or 150 mm, respectively.
The type oI grease shall comply with requirements speciIied in the Fip
recommendation document Corrosion Protection oI Unbonded Tendons.
13 (2006)
25
The minimum quantity oI protective layer shall be:
x In 0.5 inch cables: 370 g per meter
x In 0.6 inch cables: 450 g per meter
x In 0.6 super cables: 470 g per meter
The quantity oI grease shall be suIIicient to Iill all oI the spaces between
the strand and the plastic sheathing. The grease shall cover the strand
continuously Ior the entire length oI the cable.
The plastic sheathing oI the cable shall be made Irom polypropylene and
shall comply with all requirements indicated in the Fip recommendations
document Corrosion Protection oI Unbonded Tendons.
Application oI the plastic sheathing shall be perIormed only by threading
and in accordance with the requirements oI the aIorementioned document
Ior Class A exposure. Sidewall thickness oI the plastic sheathing shall be
not less than 0.75 mm Ior 0.5 inch cables and 1.0 mm Ior 0.6 inch cables;
the interior diameter oI the plastic sheathing shall be greater than the
maximum strand diameter by 0.75 mm.
13022
Supply and
storage
Wires, strands and cords shall be supplied in standard manuIacturer reels
in packaging that will ensure protection Irom damage or contamination,
particularly Irom substances or liquids that may cause or worsen the
Iormation oI rust.
13 (2006)
26
Prestressing bars shall be supplied in separate units, in the required
lengths, with standard threading rounded at their ends, in the appropriate
dimensions or ribbed with a rounded continuous threading Ior their entire
length.
Each reel or bundle oI bars shall bear the manuIacturer's mark as speciIied
in Israel Standard 1735, Part 1, including a speciIic description oI the type
oI steel and serial number by which they can be identiIied in the
manuIacturer's original certiIicates.
The steel shall be stored at the site in a location protected Irom rain and
dew, raised above the ground by a concrete Iloor, wood sleepers, etc. The
prestressing steel shall be protected Irom impact, banging, etc.
Protection oI the plastic sheathing against denting, tearing or cutting shall
be strictly ensured in unbonded cables.
13023
Couplers

130230
General
The use oI couplers in post-tensioning Ior soIt reinIorcing bars,
prestressing bars or prestressing cables shall be approved only iI required
in the contract documents.
The couplers shall be manuIactured oI the type as speciIied in the special
speciIication.
The Contractor may propose couplers oI a diIIerent type on condition that
that required below will be submitted prior to execution, and written
approval will be received Irom the Supervisor.
13 (2006)
27
The Contractor shall submit the types oI couplers and documents
testiIying to their quality Ior the Supervisor's approval. These documents
shall include, inter alia, tests and opinions by a certiIied laboratory
aIIirming the compatibility oI the couplers Ior their designated use,
including the results oI strength, elongation, dynamic loading withstand
and other tests.
The Supervisor shall be entitled to send several couplers Ior testing. The
sample shall be taken randomly by the laboratory, at least three couplers
oI each type. The test results shall not be inIerior in any case to the results
recorded in the manuIacturer`s documentation.
130231
Couplers
aIIixed to
prestressing
bars
There are two types oI couplers Ior bars:
a. Couplers Ior lengthening bars oI the same type.
b. Couplers Ior connecting a bar oI one type to another type such as a
bar with a rolled threading to a bar with an embedded threading.
The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the coupler manuIacturer's
instructions with respect to minimum required length oI the threaded
section on each side oI the coupler.
130232
Couplers
aIIixed to
unbonded
monostrands
There are two types oI connectors Ior unbonded monostrand cables:
a Extension coupler: to be installed when there is a requirement in the
drawings to lengthen the structure in the Iuture or upon the
Supervisor's approval during construction in the case where the
stressing cable is too short and cannot be replaced because the
member is already situated within the cast section.
13 (2006)
28
The cable with the coupler shall be threaded within a minimum 50
mm diameter rigid PVC pipe, with a length that will enable
movement oI the coupler during tensioning in the correct direction,
and not less than 50 cm.
The pipe shall be Iilled with grease Ior the purpose oI corrosion
protection; the pipe shall be closed on both ends with a pocket Iormer
that will have been threaded in advance on the strands.
All oI the arrays between the pocket Iormer cable coating and the
PVC piping shall be sealed with the use oI an adhesive tape.
The coupler shall be installed only in a section in which the cable is
straight and will continue to be straight in each direction Ior a length
oI at least 60 cm.
The concrete covering thickness oI the PVC pipe shall be at least 30
mm.
In the case oI Iuture extension oI the structure, the structure shall be
ended at the Iirst stage with a standard anchor and a cable shall be leIt
Ior Iuture connection, where the system is well protected Irom
corrosion.
b Connecting and prestressing coupler: this coupler (intended Ior
connecting two ends oI a cable and its stressing at the point oI
connection) shall be installed in accordance with the requirements oI

13 (2006)
29
130233
Couplers
aIIixed to
multistrand
cables
Couplers to multistrand cables shall be installed in accordance with the
requirements oI the contract documents.
There are two types oI couplers:
a. A coupler having a conical Iorm that is aIIixed to a live anchor.
Couplers oI this type shall be supplied by the manuIacturer oI the
anchors and shall be part oI the prestressing system.
b. A coupler made Irom a group oI couplers to monostrand cables
provided within a steel pipe Iilled with anti-corrosion material and
enabling movement oI the couplers. This coupler may be behind the
live anchor or be used Ior extension purposes only.
Couplers oI this type shall be placed in a graduated Iashion and not in
a single cross-section; the length oI the protective pipe must allow
them any movement required during tensioning.
The Contractor shall install an air outlet pipe Ior the purpose oI Iilling
oI the duct with grout.
130234
Couplers in
prestressing
lines
The Contractor shall submit the types oI couplers and documents
testiIying to their quality Ior the Supervisor's approval. These documents
shall include, inter alia, tests by a certiIied laboratory aIIirming the
compatibility oI the couplers to their designated use.
The use oI couplers and pretensioning lines shall be perIormed as stated in
Subsection 130723 below.
13 (2006)
30
1303: Anchorage systems Ior post-tensioning

13030
General
a. Anchoring methods shall comply with requirements oI Israel
Standard 466, Part 3. In addition to that stated in Israel Standard
466, Part 3, imported systems shall comply with Fip requirements
and require the prior approval oI the Supervisor.
Each anchoring method shall be accompanied by documentation
Irom an approved laboratory Irom the country oI manuIacture that
the method complies with the requirements oI the authorization.
Quality control and assurance at the manuIacturing plant shall
veriIy the compatibility oI the anchoring to the anchoring method
in accordance with the authorization certiIicates. Quality
assurance and quality control shall be aIIirmed by a competent
authority. The plant shall have valid certiIication Ior Israel
Standard 9001 or an equivalent certiIication system.
Laboratory certiIicates oI the anchorage systems shall also include
that speciIied in Israel Standard 466, Part 3.
Each shipment oI an anchorage system, with all oI its components,
shall bear the manuIacturer's mark, including the serial number oI
that same manuIacturer by which it will be possible to identiIy the
anchorage system in the manuIacturer's laboratory certiIicates.
b. The anchorage systems with all oI their accessories and
components shall be new and original anchorage systems oI the
approved prestressing system, compatible in every detail with the
13 (2006)
31
type and size oI cable that has been selected Ior use. The
anchorage systems shall also include couplers Ior extending
prestressing cables by post-tensioning.
c. The anchorage systems shall also include components and devices
such as: wood bases and plastic or other accessories by which the
Contractor places the anchors in place at the appropriate angle as
required in the drawings; |the system| shall also include devices
Ior protecting the anchors Irom corrosion.
d. Each anchorage system shall be accompanied by special
reinIorcing Ior conIining the concrete (reel, etc.) as required,
compatible with the method approved in accordance with the
e. The anchorage systems shall include means to prevent the escape
oI grout into the anchorage areas during post-tensioning such as
original gaskets associated with the approved stressing method.
13031
Post-
tensioning
anchoring
method

130310
General
Post-tensioning anchorage systems shall be installed using the
Iollowing means as required in the contract documents and in
Subsection 13030 above:
13 (2006)
32
a. Anchoring wedges;
b. Anchoring oI the tensioning bars with threading;
c. Fixed connection oI the anchor to the cable, specially made Ior the
stressing method, and compliant with the requirements oI
Subsection 13030 above; anchoring oI strands using elements that
clamp the strand under pressure (Ior deadheads only).
130311
Anchoring
wedges
Anchoring the oI strands oI various types shall be perIormed using
wedges that clamp them separately or in bundles, and that apply high
compressive Iorces on them, while pushing them between the tendons,
that create increased Iriction that prevents mutual displacement between
the tendon and the body oI the anchor.
The are two principal types oI anchoring wedges:
a. Disposable;
b. Multiuse (several uses as deIined in the manuIacturer's use
instructions).
130312
Anchoring
with threaded
stressing bars
Threaded stressing bars Ior anchoring designed on special bars and
anchoring nuts shall be one oI the Iollowing types:
a. Bars ribbed Ior their entire length with a continuous ribbing design
allowing the threading oI special anchoring nuts on them.
The cross-section area oI the bar shall be determined based on the
net bar diameter, less the ribbing.
b. Smooth bars whose end are rolled with Iine and dense threads Ior
the purpose oI their anchoring with special anchoring nuts, all as
13 (2006)
33
deIined in the letter oI authorization.
The cross-section area shall be determined according to the
minimum bar diameter.
c. Smooth bars in which the threading at their ends is Iormed by
engraving within the cross-section oI the bar shall be made in
accordance with the provisions oI the special speciIication, and
shall be subject to inspection by an approved laboratory in
accordance with the requirements oI the Supervisor and upon his
approval.
130313
Deadheads
A special deadhead shall be adapted to the stressing method and shall be
approved Ior use as a deadhead by a certiIied laboratory in the letter oI
authorization Ior the method.
Anchoring by the distribution oI strands within the concrete will not be
permitted in deadheads.
The use oI a button anchor method shall not be permitted.
13032
Pretensioning
anchoring
method
The pretensioning anchoring method shall be perIormed with the use oI
anchoring wedges as described above with respect to post-tensioning.
Any other type oI anchoring requires the prior approval by the
Supervisor.
13033
Unbonded
prestressing
cable

13 (2006)
34
anchoring
method
130330
Unbonded
cable
anchorage
system
The anchorage system includes, inter alia, the steel anchor and other
devices to protect against corrosion, which include the sealing sleeve
between the plastic sheathing and the sealing anchor and a cover that
covers the end oI the strand protruding Irom the outside end oI the
anchor.
130331
Anchoring
ability oI the
anchorage
system
All anchors: pull anchors (interior and exterior), deadheads and
intermediate anchors shall comply with the detailed requirements,
including all documentation required in Subsection 130300 above.
130332
Protection oI
the anchor
against
corrosion
A sealing sleeve shall be applied on the cable in each anchor. One end
oI the sleeve shall be placed overlapping the plastic sheathing with a
gasket that will prevent intrusion oI water between the sleeve and the
sheathing. The other end shall be attached to the anchor with a
compatible and stable connector that ensures sealing and prevention oI
water intrusion. The grease-Iilled sealing cover shall cover the end oI
the strand at the exterior side oI the anchor.
13034 Storage The anchorage systems with all their members shall be stored in a
closed structure.

13 (2006)
35
1304: Grout
13040
General
The properties oI Iresh grout shall be as speciIied in Israel Standard 466,
Part 3, in addition to that stated below.
When the temperature in the area oI the ducts in the structure during the
injection oI grout is expected to exceed 35C as a result oI external
temperature or heat oI hydration oI the concrete, the Contractor shall
design the grout mixture so that early hardening oI the grout and blockages
created as a result oI the high temperatures will be prevented during its
injection.
13041
Grout
materials

130410
General
All grout materials shall comply with the requirements oI relevant Israeli
standards.
130411
Cement
Cement used Ior the preparation oI grout shall be Portland cement
compatible with the requirements oI Israel Standard 1, Part 1, having a
hardness oI 42.5 or 50.5 with a standard hardening rate. The types oI
cement permitted to be used are: CEM I, CEM II / A-V, CEM II / A-LL.
Cement used Ior grout at the building site shall be oI that same type, Irom
that same manuIacturer and Irom that same plant on which basis oI the
prior grout tests were perIormed. The cement shall be stored under strictly
dry conditions as required in Section 02 Cast-in-Place Concrete Works.
The sacks shall be stored on a surIace raised above the ground and
13 (2006)
36
wrapped in polyethylene sheets. Sacks shall not be stacked more than 12
high.
130412
Water
Water used Ior preparation oI grout shall be potable water.
130413
Additives
Additives used Ior improving properties oI the grout, such as improving
workability, retarding hardening and preventing shrinkage shall be as
stated in Subsection 130115 above. The other requirements |shall be| as
indicated in Section 02 Cast-in-place Concrete Works.
130414
Filler
Filler used in the grout mixture shall be as speciIied in Israel Standard 466,
Part 3.
13042
Grout tests
Prior to perIorming grouting in any work, preliminary tests shall be
perIormed Ior the purpose oI proving compliance oI the grout mixture with
all requirements.
Preliminary tests and Iollow-up tests Ior the grouting shall be perIormed
Ior the Iollowing detailed properties:
a. Properties based on Israel Standard 466, Part 3:
1) Fluidity compatible with the diameter oI the ducts and their
length;
2) The grout mixture shall be cohesive without bleeding and
without settlement oI coarse materials;
3) The period oI time during which liquidity is maintained shall be
designed in accordance with weather conditions and manner oI
use. In any case, liquidity shall be maintained Ior a period oI at
13 (2006)
37
least 20 minutes beyond the time allocated Ior perIormance oI
injection;
4) Initial set time shall be at least 3 hours Irom the start oI mixing
oI the cement in the water.
b. In addition to that stated in Israel Standard 466, Part 3, the Iollowing
requirements shall be met:
1) Change in volume shall be - 0.5, 4 oI the initial volume
oI the Iresh grout;
2) General absorbability and Iilament absorbability tests, iI
required by the special speciIication. The tests shall be
perIormed in accordance with Israel Standard 26;
3) Limitation oI the quantity oI chlorides in the grout, iI
required, shall be in accordance with the special speciIication;
4) Design strength at 7 days and 28 days: in any case,
compressive strength at 7 days on 10 cm cube tests in
accordance with Israel Standard 118 shall be not less than 27
Mpa in Iollow-up testing.
II additional strength tests are required at an age diIIerent than
that required according to Israel Standard 466, Part 3, these
tests shall be perIormed at the times as required in the special
speciIication.
5) Grout injection testing under temperature conditions shall be
as required by the special speciIication.
13 (2006)
38
Additional tests beyond the above list oI tests shall be perIormed, iI
required, and as detailed in the special speciIication.
Monitoring tests shall be perIormed in accordance with the
instructions Iound in Israel Standard 466, Part 3.
All tests shall be perIormed by an approved laboratory.
13 (2006)
39
1305: Stressing Method
13051
Stressing
method

13052
Prestressing
contractor
The prestressing contractor shall be knowledgeable, skilled and with
proven experience in the perIormance oI prestressing works and shall
submit documents proving the aIoresaid.
The work crew shall be managed by an engineer registered in the
structural division with experience in the perIormance oI prestressing
works or by a person having experience in prestressing works who has
been certiIied in writing by the manuIacturer oI the required prestressing
method.
The workers who will be perIorming the work shall be expert in the
prestressing method and inIormation about their experience shall be
submitted Ior the Supervisor's approval.
Following the written approval oI the Contractor's crew by the
Supervisor, the Contractor may begin its work
13053
Alternative
prestressing
method
The Contractor may, unless speciIically stated otherwise in the special
speciIication, propose the use oI an alternative prestressing method under
the condition that it has been proven to the Supervisor by way oI any
required testing certiIicates that the method complies with the
requirements oI the contract documents, Israel Standard 466, Part 3 and
the recommendations oI:
Fip Recommendations Ior Acceptance oI Post Tensioning Systems
13 (2006)
40
That stated above in Subsection 13052 pertains also to any alternative
prestressing method.
An additional condition Ior approval oI an alternative method is that no
delay will occur in the commencement oI the prestressing concrete works
as a result oI its use and the overall construction period will not be
extended.
The alternative prestressing method shall be represented in Israel by a
recognized company that maintains the required equipment and
accessories.
The Contractor shall submit its alternative proposal in advance Ior the
Supervisor's approval together with any drawings and details, technical
speciIications, detailed bill oI quantities, such as the original Bill oI
Quantities and unit prices compatible with the various items, as well as
other items iI necessary, where everything has been prepared by an
engineer registered in the structural division who is a specialist in the
prestressing method. II the Contractor's proposal is approved, these shall
be deemed as an integral part oI the contract and the works shall be
perIormed in accordance with them solely.
The detailing submitted by the Contractor shall include, inter alia,
calculations, data regarding Iriction coeIIicients oI the various types,
elongation calculations, etc.
It is hereby speciIically emphasized that although the Contractor has been
granted the right to propose the use oI an alternative stressing method, as
13 (2006)
41
stated above, the Supervisor is under no obligation to accept the
Contractor's proposal in any manner whatsoever.
II the Contractor's proposal to perIorm an alternative stressing method
has been rejected, it shall perIorm the work in accordance with the
original stressing method and drawings that were determined in the
contract documents and in accordance with the prices indicated in the
original Bill oI Quantities.
13054
Warranty
In addition to that stated in Standard Contract 3210, in Section 35
"Quality oI materials and workmanship", the Contractor shall be
responsible Ior the works perIormed by it, whether perIormed using the
stressing method required in the contract documents or iI the work has
been perIormed by an alternative method proposed by it as stated in

13 (2006)
42
1306: General perIormance requirements
13060
General
This subsection pertains to pretensioning works, post-tensioning works in
bonded cables and post-tensioning works in unbonded cables. The
prestressed concrete works, with all their members, shall be perIormed as
required in the drawings and contract documents.
PerIormance requirements shall be as stated in Israel Standard 466, Part
3, Israel Standard 466, Part 1, and in accordance with additional
instructions in the contract documents.
Prior to perIorming stressing works, the Contractor shall inspect whether
there are components that interIere with these works and shall dismantle
them.
All oI the requirements Ior precast members shall be as stated in Section
03 Precast Concrete Products, in addition to the requirements speciIied
below.
13061
Inspection
and
preparation
of stressing
steel at the
site

In addition to that stated in Subsection 1302 above, the actions detailed
below shall be perIormed prior to the use oI the stressing steel:
a. The straightness oI the steel shall be inspected: when a strand
section is placed Ireely on a Ilat surIace, the maximum bow Irom
the baseline Ior length oI 1 m, measured to the inside oI the arc,
shall not exceed 25 mm;
b. Cutting oI strands and wires Ior preparation oI tendons or cables
and the cutting oI their protruding ends Irom the member shall be
perIormed with a Carborundum blade or with the use oI special
13 (2006)
43
pliers.
The use oI a Ilame Ior the purpose oI cutting tendons is prohibited;
c. During cutting oI the tendons and preparation oI the stressing
cables, veriIy that the tendons are Iree oI any rust, other than light
rust.
The tendons shall be Iree oI any Ioreign material such as oil, dirt or
other contamination and Iree oI any deIects, dents, bending and
cracking, and anything else that may undermine their compliance
with strength requirements;
d. Use shall not be made oI a stressing tendon that has been damaged
by being struck, dented and straightened, that occurred during its
cutting or has been grasped by an anchor that leaves scratch marks,
and the like;
e. Welded tendons shall not be used;
I. The cleanliness oI the tendons shall be maintained, primarily Irom
the lubricating materials used on the Iorm, both those that have
been spread prior to layout oI the tendons and those that have been
spread thereaIter;
g. The Contractor shall submit two 2 m long samples to the Supervisor
Irom the stressing tendon reels and Irom the stressing bars that will
be used in order to enable laboratory testing, iI necessary.
13 (2006)
44
13062
Electric arc
welding
From the time that the stressing tendons are laid out in the Iorms or in a
stressing bed, or Irom the time oI insertion oI stressing cables in ducts, it
is prohibited to make any welds by electric arc welding near them, even
iI such welding is not perIormed directly on the stressing tendons and
cabling, unless appropriate measures have been taken against heating,
sparks and spray resulting Irom the welding work. Furthermore, it is
prohibited to weld using electric are welding in proximity to or
connected to a current conductor to the stressing steel, whether during
preparation oI the cables or prior thereto.
Electric arc welding, iI required by the special speciIication or approved
by the Supervisor, shall be permitted in post-tensioning only aIter
suIIicient a hardening oI the grout, and in pretensioning only aIter release
oI the tendons.
13063
Layout and
tensioning of
tendons

For layout and tensioning oI tendons in the various types oI stressing, see
the appropriate subsections below.
The Contractor shall notiIy the Supervisor oI stressing times at least 24
hours in advance and receive the Supervisor`s approval Ior stressing at
that time. The stressing shall be perIormed by the stressing crew as
stated in Subsection 13052 above.
13064
Measuring
and
reporting

13 (2006)
45
130641
Stressing and
measuring
devices
Stressing shall be perIormed with the use oI devices speciIic to the
stressing method; the range oI measurement oI the devices shall be
compatible with the required stressing values. The device and its
measurement scale shall be in a range not less than 125 and not more
than 180 oI the measured value. The precision that can be read Irom
the measurement devices shall be in the range oI + 1 oI the required
stressing Iorce.
The stressing installation shall be equipped with pressometers connected
to the hydraulic jacking system. Furthermore, use can be made oI one oI
the measurement devices Ior inspecting the Iorces applied to the stressing
tendons as speciIied below:
a. Dynamometer Ior direct measurement oI tensile Iorces on the
tendon;
b. Pressure cells integrated into the stressing system;
c. A device Ior testing stressing Iorce in the tendon aIter completion
oI tensioning (in pretensioning).
When the installation is equipped with only one device Ior measuring
Iorce, the Supervisor may require that the Contractor add an additional
device.
130642
Calibration oI
stressing and
measurement
Stressing and calibration devices shall be calibrated at least once every 6
months and suitable calibration certiIicates prepared by an approved
laboratory shall be submitted to the Supervisor prior to perIormance oI
the work. Furthermore, the Supervisor may acquire retesting in order to
13 (2006)
46
devices prove the precision oI the devices.
Devices that will be Iound to be unserviceable shall be replaced with
others.
Calibration oI the stressing and measurement devices is also required
aIter any repair oI the device and in any case where a pressometer or jack
is replaced.
130643
Measurement
oI stressing
Iorce and
elongation
Stressing Iorce and elongation oI tendons shall be measured in locations
in which the cables are stressed at all stages oI stressing, prior to and
aIter anchoring, and compatibility oI the measured elongation shall be
checked against the anticipated elongation as calculated by the
Contractor and approved by the Supervisor.
The stressing procedure and its stages, and permissible deviations in
elongation shall be as speciIied in the appropriate items oI the
subsections below with respect to pretensioning or post-tensioning.
When the deviation is greater than that stated in these sections, the
Supervisor will determine the required corrective action, including
release oI the cables, their replacement with new ones, etc.
130644
Reporting
During stressing, a log shall be maintained (see Appendices 1, 2 and 3
below), that shall include the measurement results, all details required Ior
identiIying the members in the structure and the subject tendon, as well
as a Iull detailing oI the stressing process.
The camber measured in stressed members at the times as speciIied in
Subsection 13065 shall be recorded in Appendix 4.
13 (2006)
47
The logs in the appendices shall be signed by the Contractor's engineer
(see Subsection 13052 above). A copy oI the logs shall be submitted to
the Supervisor.
13065
Camber

130650
General
Immediately aIter perIorming stressing and during the stages mentioned
below, the vertical camber measured shall be compared with that
indicated in the drawings.
The camber oI stressed beams during stressing oI the concrete shall be as
marked in the drawings. Permissible deviation Irom design values in the
horizontal direction shall not exceed L/1000 (where L is the length oI the
stressed member) or 25 mm, whichever is less, in any oI the stages oI
execution oI the works.
In the case oI a deviation greater than 30 Irom that indicated in the
drawings, the Supervisor`s approval shall be obtained Ior continued
perIormance oI the work.
130651
Camber in
precast
prestressed
beams
Camber shall be checked in several stages. The number oI stages shall
be based on the type oI work:
a. Following removal oI the side Iorms and prior to execution oI
stressing;
b. Immediately aIter cutting oI the pretensioning tendons;
c. Prior to and aIter perIormance oI post-tensioning oI the beam (iI
post-tensioning is perIormed);
13 (2006)
48
d. Prior to transport oI the beam to the Iield;
e. Prior to assembly oI the members in its designated place (Ior
members that are stored or produced on site);
I. AIter assembly oI the member in its designated place aIter
additional tensioning, iI existing.
The measurement oI camber shall be perIormed where the beams are
supported on the axis oI the planned support.
Reporting on camber shall be made as stated in Appendix 4.
130652
Anticipated
camber in
panels
Measurement oI camber shall be perIormed in the Iollowing stages:
a. Prior to stressing;
b. AIter stressing and dismantling oI the Iormwork.
In a structural ceiling, when the weight oI the Iresh concrete in the
ceiling during casting rests on the ceiling below it, the level oI the upper
surIace oI the ceiling shall be veriIied with the use oI a measurement
device placed in a location that is not inIluenced by settlement oI the
bearing ceiling.
13066
Safety
during
stressing
works
The Contractor shall take all precautionary measures required according
to applicable law and as required by the Work SaIety Order, with all its
regulations, and Israel Standard 466, Part 3.
13067
Conveyance
The conveyance oI precast members shall be perIormed only aIter the
Contractor's engineer has made calculations Ior checking the stability oI
13 (2006)
49
of precast
members
the members, Ior preventing collapse including lateral collapse, and any
other damage to the member as a result oI static and dynamic, and
vertical and horizontal, loads. These calculations shall be perIormed on
the basis oI data in the contract documents and shall be submitted to the
Supervisor.
Suitable padding material shall be placed between the chains or the
liIting and tying devices and the concrete member in order to avoid
abrasion oI the corners oI the concrete.
13068
Storage of
members
In addition to that stated in Section 03 Precast Concrete Products,
members shall be stored aIter Iabrication on a Ilat level surIace.

13 (2006)
50
1307: PerIormance requirements Ior pre-tensioning
13070
General
This section reIers to materials and workmanship in the perIormance
oI pretensioning works on precast concrete members only, whether
these members have been cast at a plant designated Ior their
Iabrication or cast at a Iabrication site that has been prepared Ior this
purpose near the construction site.
All that stated in Subsection 1306 above pertains to the perIormance
oI pretensioning works.
13071
Pretensioning
materials

130710
General
Everything stated above in the appropriate sections with respect to
concrete and anchorage systems shall also apply equally to
pretensioning. With respect to stressing steel, that stated below also
pertains.
130711
Steel
Steel shall be as required in a Subsection 1302 above. For
perIorming pretensioning, use shall be permitted only oI steel oI the
types detailed below in accordance with that required in the contract
documents:
a.. Indented round or crimped wires with diameters oI up to 7 mm,
low-relaxation in accordance with Table 2 oI Israel Standard
1735, Part 2, and Level 2 relaxation (low relaxation).
b. Strands with diameters oI up to " oI a standard or super type:
13 (2006)
51
cold drawn stressing steel, low relaxation with Level 2
relaxation properties (low relaxation) compatible with the
13072
Layout of
tendons

130720
General
The layout oI tendons along the stressing bed and Iorms shall be as
detailed in the drawings.
In addition to that stated in Subsection 13061 above, tangling and
twisting oI the tendons shall be strictly avoided during layout oI the
tendons in the stressing bed in accordance with the drawings, and it
shall be veriIied that they are is no Iriction in the passages through
the anchorage system, through the end oI Iorms that cross between
the members and through the reinIorcing cages.
130721
Location oI
tendons
Permissible deviation Irom location oI the tendons shall be as
indicated in Israel Standard 466, Part 3.
When stressing long members and in long stressing lines, the
Contractor shall also ensure the location oI the cables in
consideration oI the settlement oI the stressed cables as a result oI
their selI weight. The Contractor shall submit a solution Ior support
oI the cables Ior the Supervisor's approval.
Ladder trays or supports Ior cables shall be separated Irom the
stirrups and shall not cause damage to the integrity or Iunctioning oI
13 (2006)
52
the member.
Stressing with bar tendons shall be perIormed in accordance with the
special speciIication.
130722
Neutralization
oI strands
In structures stressed by pretensioning using tendons made Irom
strands only, neutralization oI the strands shall be perIormed in the
locations indicated in the drawings.
This neutralization shall be perIormed by sheathing oI the strand in
the designated segment by using plastic pipes. Minimum sidewall
thickness oI these pipes shall be 1 mm with an internal diameter that
enables Iree passage oI the cable. The sheathing oI strands using
adhesive tape, layers oI oil or other materials that may damage the
concrete or the stressing steel over time shall not be permitted.
The neutralization pipe shall at least reach the stopper.
Covering oI the cable shall continue Ior the entire length oI
neutralization and shall prevent the entry oI water or cement water.
The ends oI the neutralization shall be blocked to prevent the
intrusion oI cement water.
The neutralization length shall be as indicated in the drawings and
shall be checked, iI necessary, by measuring the rate oI slippage oI
the neutralized tendons as a result oI their release.
130723
Connection oI
tendons
The connection between two tendons segments into a single tendon
in a single stressing line will be permitted under the Iollowing
conditions:
13 (2006)
53
a. The connection shall be made using standard couplers the
quality oI which has been checked and approved as described
in Subsection 130234;
b. It shall be ascertained that the direction oI twist oI the two
ends oI the coupler in the connection between strands will be
identical in order to avoid opening oI the weave during
tensioning;
c. The tendon segment located within the members shall be oI a
type that does not stretch beyond a Iorce that exceeds 80 oI
its strength. In tendons that have been stressed and released,
the segment that is grasped will not be within the member;
d. AIter perIorming stressing, the connections shall not be
located within the members, but rather in the gaps between
them. Installation oI the couplers shall be perIormed so that
they will be a distance oI at least 60 cm outside oI the Iorm oI
the stressed member;
e. The number oI couplers in a single stressing line is not limited
iI the stressing is perIormed separately on each tendon.
II the stressing is bundled, the number oI connections in a
single stressing line shall not exceed 10 oI all the tendons.
In any case, up to two connections are permitted Ior each
tendon;
I. Prior to installation oI the coupler, the ends oI the tendons
13 (2006)
54
meeting at the coupler shall be cut with the use oI a
Carborundum disk;
g. When the density oI stressing tendons is great, the location oI
the couplers shall be oIIset so that there will be a Iree distance
between the couplers Ior perIorming the stressing, their
installation and their dismantling;
h. The installation oI couplers on the tendons and their
dismantling Ior reuse shall be perIormed in accordance with
the coupler manuIacturer's instructions;
i. The use oI couplers shall be permitted only in cables oI the
same manuIacturer, with steel having identical properties,
manuIactured by an identical Iabrication method;
j. Usage logs Ior each coupler shall be prepared according to the
plant's quality assurance procedures and shall be submitted to
the Supervisor upon his demand.
130724
Reuse oI
couplers
Following any release oI stressing and cutting oI tendons, the cut
tendon shall be replaced on the side Iacing the direction oI the
stressed member. Prior to reuse oI the coupler, the released halI oI
the coupler shall be cleaned with a brush, air pressure and oil
remover.
AIter 10 uses, and no more, the tendons on both sides oI the coupler
shall be released, thorough cleaning oI all parts oI the coupler shall
be perIormed and its serviceability inspected. A coupler that is
13 (2006)
55
Iound to be unserviceable shall be disqualiIied and replaced. The
clips in the connector shall be the type intended Ior multiple use.
Reconnection oI tendons to the coupler shall be permitted only aIter
cutting oI 20 cm oI the end in the area that was connected to the
clips.
The number oI reuses permitted Ior any coupler and clips in the
coupler shall be in accordance with the instructions oI the
manuIacturer oI the couplers and clips, but not more than 100.
13073
Arrangement
of members
and casting
of concrete in
the stressing
bed

130730
General
The arrangement oI members within the stressing bed, casting oI
concrete, casting order and dismantling oI Iorms, in addition to that
stated in Subsections 13013 and 13014 above, shall be as stated
below:
130731
Arrangement
oI members
within the
One or more members can be Iabricated in a single stressing bed.
The total length oI the members in a single line shall not exceed 90
oI the length oI the line.
The Iree distance between adjacent members and members oI the
13 (2006)
56
stressing bed anchorage system shall be apportioned equally, but shall be not less
than the height oI the member or 50 cm, whichever is larger.
The maximum Iree length oI an exposed cable in a stressing line
shall not exceed 60 m. For the purpose oI calculating Iree length,
the length oI neutralized cables within the member shall also be
included.
Components having the same stressing shall be constructed within a
single stressing line. Neutralization oI a cable Ior the entire length
oI the member shall be perIormed only upon the Supervisor's
approval.
130732
Casting oI
concrete in the
stressing bed
Casting oI the daily quota oI members shall be perIormed
continuously in accordance with the casting plan and within the
planned time Irame and as approved by the Supervisor.
Casting on the same day shall be perIormed with the same concrete
mixture and Irom the same source.
The casting oI more than one member shall be permitted on the same
day, in the same casting bed and under the Iollowing conditions
only:
a. The members shall be cast continuously so that the period oI
time Irom the start oI casting oI the Iirst member to the
completion oI the casting oI the last member shall not exceed
the initial set time oI the concrete less 1 hours.
b. Members that have additional members between them that have
13 (2006)
57
been cast more than 24 hours previously.
130733
Concrete
casting time in
a single
member
The casting oI concrete in a single member shall not exceed the
initial set time oI the concrete, less 1 hours.
13074
Pretensioning
stages
Unless stated otherwise in the special speciIication, stressing shall be
perIormed in two stages as described below.
Preliminary stressing Iorce shall Iirst be applied to each unit Ior
creating preliminary tensioning and straightening oI the tendons.
This Iirst stressing shall be at a rate oI 15 to 25 oI the Iinal
stressing Iorce, but less than:
x 250 kg in wires having diameters oI up to 5 mm
x 500 kg in wires having diameters oI up to 7 mm
x 1000 kg in wires having diameters oI up to 3/8"
x 2000 kg in wires having diameters oI up to "
Stressing may be perIormed at the Iirst stage with a Iorce greater
than 25 but not greater than 50 oI the initial stressing Iorce iI,
prior to the start oI Iabrication it has been thoroughly proven by
means oI more than one measuring device that the total stressing
Iorce at the two stages reaches the required stressing Iorce.
Following completion oI the Iirst stressing in the tendons, stressing
Ior the Iull stressing Iorce shall be completed. When the Iinal
13 (2006)
58
stressing is perIormed on each separate tendon, there is no barrier to
continuing the Iirst stressing immediately aIter marking oI the zero
point up to the Iull Iorce.
Prior to perIorming the Iirst casting, in any series oI castings in a
stressing bed, the Contractor shall check the existing stressing Iorce
in the line, and shall obtain the Supervisor`s approval Ior continued
execution oI the works.
13075
Measurement
of stressing
force

130750
General
The stressing Iorces in tendons shall be measured by one or more oI
the measuring devices as speciIied in Subsection 13064 above, and
by measuring oI the elongations obtained during stressing and
comparing them to the calculated elongation rates.
On stressing lines in which there are bar tendons, the actual stressing
Iorce shall be measured on the stressed side and on the dummy side
oI the installation.
130751
Correction oI
the measured
stressing Iorce
The stressing Iorce as measured by the pressometers in the hydraulic
jacking system shall be corrected while taking into consideration the
Iollowing listed impacts:
a. Friction in the jacks: determines the magnitude oI Iriction and
deducts it Irom the measured stressing Iorce. This correction is
13 (2006)
59
not required iI the Iriction in the jacks is taken into
consideration during calibration oI the pressometers (see
Subsection 130642). The magnitude oI Iriction to be deducted
shall be determined by experience and in consideration oI and
in comparison with the jack manuIacturer's data.
b. Friction in the anchorage systems: in anchorage systems in
which there are bar tendons between the jack and the end oI the
member, these Iriction deviations shall also be deducted.
c. Thermal impacts: this Iactor is taken into consideration when
the diIIerence between the ambient temperature during
stressing oI the tendons and the temperature oI the concrete
during casting and hardening is greater than 5C.
For every 5C diIIerence in temperature, the stressing Iorce is
modiIied by approximately 1. This modiIication is taken into
consideration in correcting the measured stressing Iorce. The
temperature oI the tendons during stressing shall be measured,
and the stressing Iorce corrected in accordance with the
temperature oI the tendons during casting.
When the concrete is cured with a thermal treatment, the
thermal impact is more signiIicant and also includes relaxation
oI the tendons and is taken into consideration accordingly. It is
hereby emphasized that curing by thermal treatment shall be
perIormed only upon special authorization as speciIied above in
13 (2006)
60
Subsection 130134.
130752
Bundled
stressing
When stressing is perIormed as bundled stressing on a group oI
tendons belonging to the same line in the stressing installation, in
addition to the measurement oI elongation and stressing Iorce as
above, direct measurement oI stressing Iorce shall be perIormed oI
each stressing action using load cells or by means that shall be
approved by the Supervisor on the non-stressed side on at least 10
oI the tendons within the stressed line and not less than one tendon.
13076
Elongation of
tendons

130760
General
Prior to and during the perIormance oI stressing, calculations oI
anticipated elongation, |as well as| measurements oI the elongations
oI the tendons and a comparison oI the measured elongations and
calculated elongations shall be perIormed. These measurements
shall be recorded in the Stressing Report (see Appendix 1 below)
and shall constitute an integral part oI the requirements oI the
speciIication.
130761
Calculation oI
anticipated
elongations
The calculation oI anticipated elongation shall be perIormed in
advance by the Contractor`s engineer Ior each separate stressing line
based upon the planned stressing Iorces, the properties oI the steel in
the stressing reel, and in consideration oI the operating losses oI the
anchorage systems as detailed above.
13 (2006)
61
Plants Iabricating precast pretensioned members shall be equipped
with testing and measurement devices required to determine the
actual stressing Iorces while considering the losses as detailed in
Subsection 130751. The plant shall supply the data Ior determining
the calculated elongations oI the tendons. The calculated
elongations shall be determined on the basis oI this data.
The Supervisor shall be entitled to demand perIormance oI
additional tests and measurements at the plant to determine these
loss values in order to prove their compatibility with the values that
have been taken into consideration in the design. These tests shall
be perIormed by the Contractor in coordination with the Supervisor.
130762
Measurement
oI elongations
The measurement oI elongations shall be perIormed on all oI the
tendons that are in the stressing line with a measurement device
having a dial measured in millimeters.
The elongation measurement process shall be perIormed as stated
below:
Following the Iirst stressing stage as described in Subsection 13074
above, the zero point shall be marked by etching on the paint Ior
monitoring the elongations and shall constitute the initial condition
Ior purposes oI monitoring the stressing Iorce and the elongations
compatible with it.
Following application oI the Iinal stressing Iorce, whether by
stressing on each tendon separately or by stressing the entire bundle
13 (2006)
62
oI tendons that belong to the same stressing line at the same time, the
elongation oI the tendons shall be measured Ior the additional
stressing Iorce that has been applied in the second stage.
The Iinal elongation under the Iull stressing Iorce is obtained on the
basis oI the elongations that have been measured as stated above,
while correcting through extrapolation and a proportional addition oI
elongation Ior the Iirst stressing Iorce.
130763
Correction oI
measured
elongation
The measured elongations oI the distances shall be corrected while
taking the consideration the Iollowing detailed impacts:
a. Slippage of the tendons: slippage oI the tendons shall be
measured by marking all oI the tendons at a given distance
Irom the anchors and checking the changes in relation to the
anchor plates.
The change in this distance aIter anchoring is the rate oI
slippage. The rate oI slippage oI the tendons measured with
respect to the anchor is deducted Irom the measured
elongations.
Slippage greater than that permissible shall be corrected by re-
stressing or by replacing the anchors;
b. Displacement of the anchor plates: the displacement oI the
anchor plates at the level oI the stressing tendons caused as a
result oI displacement oI the bases oI the uprights and their
turning as a result oI bending oI the anchorage system itselI
13 (2006)
63
(the plates and plates that support the anchors) shall be
deducted Irom the measured elongations.
Similarly, the average elastic shortening oI the Iorms that are
intended to bear the stressing Iorce are checked.
II bundled stressing is perIormed, in addition to the aIoresaid,
the elongation oI the pull bars, through which the Iorces are
transIerred to the anchorage system, shall also be taken into
consideration.
During the stressing, all oI the aIoresaid displacements shall be
measured occasionally in order to aIIirm the values that have
been taken into consideration during the design;
c. Twisting of the jack: twisting oI the jack, which causes the
opening oI the strand weave, may change the length oI the
strand. This phenomenon should be prevented by proper
harnessing oI the jack. In any case, twisting oI the jack beyond
one twist Ior every 30 m oI stressed tendon shall not be
allowed.
130764
Permissible
deviations
Irom
calculated
elongations
Permissible deviations between the measured elongation and
anticipated elongation in a single tendon in the Iull required stressing
Iorce shall not exceed +3 oI the straight stressing lines and shall
not exceed +5 in the bar stressing lines under the conditions that
the stressing Iorce oI all stressing tendons will not deviate Irom the
required initial stressing Iorce by more than +2.
13 (2006)
64
When a deviation greater than that permissible is obtained,
instructions shall be obtained Irom the Supervisor Ior continued
perIormance oI the work.
13077
Dismantling
of forms
In addition to that stated in Subsection 130146 above, side Iorms
may be dismantled under the condition that the concrete has reached
an actual strength oI at least 6 Mpa.
13078
Stressing of
the concrete

130780
General
Release oI the stressing Iorces shall be perIormed only aIter the
concrete has reached the required strength as proven by cube tests
that have been placed on the beam under identical curing conditions
as stated in Subsection 130131 above.
Prior to release, members oI the Iorm and tying devices that may
interIere with shortening oI the members, their displacement and
upliIt above the bottom oI the Iorms or above the bottom oI the
stressing bed shall be removed. It shall be ensured that the Iorms,
ties and other devices located within the members that may prevent
longitudinal deIormation oI the stressed members within the
stressing line will be removed prior to releasing the stressing Iorce.
In each oI the concrete stressing methods detailed above, the
Contractor shall submit the order oI relaxation or cutting actions oI
the tendons Ior approval oI the Supervisor, such that the stressing
13 (2006)
65
Iorces on both sides oI each member will not cause damage to the
member.
In any case, sliding oI the members on the Iorms shall be enabled,
primarily when being released as a bundle; in order to do this, the
Iriction between the members and the bottom shall be reduced to a
minimum.
The transIer oI stressing Iorces to the concrete shall be perIormed in
one oI the ways detailed in Subsections 130782-130785 below:
130781
Concrete
strength as a
condition Ior
stressing oI
the concrete
Minimum concrete strength, both in compression and tension, during
the stressing oI the concrete shall be as indicated in the drawings or
the special speciIication. Unless noted otherwise, the compressive
strength oI the concrete shall be at least 75 oI the concrete strength
required at 28 days. Concrete tensile strength shall be as determined
by nonlinear tensile testing in accordance with Israel Standard 26,
Part 5. The strength shall be at least 2 Mpa.
130782
Release oI
tendons
Release oI the tendons shall be perIormed as stated in Subsections
130783 and 130784 below. The Iirst stage oI the release oI the
tendons shall be the partial decrease in Iorces in the tendons at the
ends oI the stressing bed by means such as by the dismantling oI the
rings that have been installed previously on both sides oI the
stressing bed.
130783
Release oI
Individual tendons are disconnected by slow heating and cutting
with an oxidizing Ilame so that the stressing Iorce will be gradually
13 (2006)
66
individual
tendons
released. The tendons shall be cut and released according to the
order as indicated in the drawings.
Cutting oI the tendons shall be perIormed such that the Iorce in them
will not be suddenly released. At Iirst, suitable heating shall be
perIormed in order to reduce insoIar as possible deIormations during
this connection oI the tendons. This shall be perIormed with the use
oI an oxidizing Ilame so that aIter heating Ior a period oI 5 seconds,
the Iorce in the tendon will begin to be released through the yielding
oI the stressing steel.
Unless stated otherwise in the special speciIication, cutting oI the
tendons shall be perIormed symmetrically, both in the vertical and
the horizontal direction. At each oI the stages oI release, the
centrality oI the stressing Iorces transIerred to the members around
the axis oI their center oI gravity shall be maintained, and the
maximum eccentricity that will be allowed shall be that oI the
tendon or the individual strand.
When stressing exists in the upper area and in the lower area oI a
member, the stressing shall be released in the order as required by
The release oI individual tendons is also required when more than
one member is cast in a stressing bed. The section between the
members shall be released in accordance with this method even iI
release oI the bundle has been perIormed as described below
13 (2006)
67
130784
Release oI a
bundle oI
tendons
The simultaneous and gradual release oI all oI the tendons that are in
a single stressing line as a complete bundle shall be perIormed with
the use oI a piston release system constituting a part oI the anchorage
system.
When Iorce remains in the tendons aIter partial release oI a piston
process in Iull, cutting oI the tendons shall be perIormed in
accordance with instructions Ior the release oI individual tendons as
detailed above.
130785
Release oI bar
stressing lines
The order oI release and stages oI the release oI bar stressing lines
shall be in accordance with the instructions Iound in the contract
documents.
The phenomenon oI tensile stresses or cracking as a result oI stages
in the transIer oI Iorces shall be prevented.
II the total oIIset oI Iorces may cause tensile stresses that will cause
cracking in the member, steps shall be taken that require the prior
approval oI the Supervisor that will cancel out these tensile stresses.
13 (2006)
68
1308: PerIormance requirements Ior post-tensioning oI bonded cables
13080
General
Everything stated in Subsection 1306 above pertains to the perIormance
oI post-tensioning oI unbonded cables.
13081
Scope of
stressing
works
The post-tensioning contractor and its crew shall conIorm to the
requirements oI Subsection 13052 above.
PerIormance oI the post-tensioning works includes, inter alia, that
detailed below:
a. Preparation oI stressing ducts and Iabrication oI supports;
b. Assembly oI stressing ducts including ventilation pipes on the
supports;
c. Preparation oI tendons;
d. Assembly oI anchorage systems including end reinIorcements Ior
conIining the concrete and their sealed connection to the ducts (aIter
inspection oI all required installations, execution oI the casting oI
the members);
e. Insertion oI the tendons in the ducts;
I. Measurement oI actual elongation;
g. Recording and documentation oI the stressing works;
h. Cutting oI excess tendon lengths;
i. Cutting oI the surplus ends oI the ducts;
j. Closing oI the ends oI the ducts;
k. Holding oI preliminary and Iollow-up inspections oI the grout,
injection oI the grout within the stressing ducts, sealing oI the
13 (2006)
69
ventilation pipes;
l. Filling with manuIactured non-shrink concrete (grout) in the
recesses behind the anchors.
13082
Preparation
of stressing
ducts

130820
General
Cable ducts used in post-tensioning shall be as speciIied in Israel
Standard 466, Part 3. The Iollowing sections reIer to the Iabrication oI
stressing ducts with diameters exceeding 20 mm (cable ducts) using
corrugated pipe. Each method or other material requires prior approval
by the Supervisor.
130821
Sheetmetal
ducts
a. These ducts shall be made Irom sheet steel strips in various
diameters according to the type oI stressing cable and its size.
These ducts shall be sealed against the intrusion oI cement water.
The ducts shall be Ilexible and capable oI obtaining the designed
curvatures.
b.

The ducts shall be suIIiciently strong to maintain their shape,
resistant to damage during Iabrication, assembly, casting and
stressing and to prevent entry oI a mixture oI cement and water into
the duct.
Minimum sidewall thicknesses oI the sheetmetal ducts shall be as
required by the stressing method and in any case not less than the
13 (2006)
70
Iollowing:
Duct diameter (mm) Up to 35 36-50 51-70 Over 70
Sheetmetal thickness (mm) 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35
c. II the diameters oI the ducts are not determined in the drawings or
special speciIication, the Contractor shall propose a diameter
appropriate to the type oI stressing cable and its dimensions so that
it will enable Iree Ilow oI grout. The cross-section area oI stressing
cables shall not exceed 40 oI the interior area oI the sheetmetal
pipes.
II the bar or cable in the duct includes couplers, the diameter oI the
ducts shall be increased so as to enable Iree Ilow oI the grout. In
any case, the gross cross-section area oI the coupler shall not exceed
50 oI the cross-section area oI the duct.
The diameter oI the ducts shall be compatible in any case with the
recommendations Ior the approved stressing method.
The Contractor shall obtain the approval oI the Supervisor Ior its
proposal prior to beginning preparation oI the ducts.
d. Any segment oI a duct that is damaged, crushed or perIorated shall
be replaced with another and its sealing shall be ensured against the
penetration oI cement water.
130822
Assembly oI
the ducts
Assembly oI the ducts shall be perIormed in the alignment and at the
heights as detailed in the drawings. They shall be placed on special
supports ("ladder trays") and shall be connected to them in a manner that
13 (2006)
71
shall not allow vertical and horizontal movement. Do not rest the ducts
on stirrups or on pretensioning cables.
In the absence oI detailing oI the supports in the drawings, the Contractor
shall install stable supports at distances not to exceed 1.0 m. Permissible
deviation in the location oI the ducts and in the spacing between them
shall be as indicated in Israel Standard 466, Part 3. In any case, suIIicient
space shall be ensured Ior applying the concrete.
The Supervisor will approve the alignment and the Iinal layout oI the
stressing cables beIore the Contractor will be allowed to continue with
additional stages oI work.
In locations required, the Contractor shall apply an interior coating using
a water-soluble lubricating material. The lubricating material shall be
appropriate Ior use in stressing ducts and shall not be damaged by the
properties oI the grout. The Contractor shall submit the type oI
lubricating material Ior the Supervisor`s approval prior to use.
The segments shall be connected between them into a single duct by
inserting the end oI one section into another to a depth oI at least 4.0 cm,
or shall be connected using special sheetmetal sleeves, approximately 10
cm long, whose interior diameter is compatible with the exterior diameter
oI the duct and can be threaded onto them. In any case, the seal shall be
ensured by sheathing oI the connection area with a sealing tape.
Ventilation pipes Ior extracting air during injection oI the grout shall be
installed as required in the contract documents. II not stated otherwise,
13 (2006)
72
pipes shall be installed at the Iollowing points:
a. At anchorage points;
b. At high points and at a low point about halI oI the diameter Irom the
top level, but not more than 1 m Irom it in the direction oI the
injection oI the grout;
c. At low points where the radius oI curvature is less than 10 m;
d. At points oI change in cross-section oI the duct, Ior example at
couplers (as stated in Subsection 130233 above), etc.;
e. The maximum spacing allowed between ventilation pipes along the
duct shall be 30 m, measured horizontally along the entire length oI
the beam.
13083
Preparation
of tendons

130831
Cutting oI
stressing
tendons
The cutting oI stressing tendons shall be perIormed at appropriate
lengths, as well as additional lengths at the ends needed Ior perIorming
stressing oI the tendons themselves, all in accordance with the guidelines
oI the stressing method that has been approved in advance by the
Supervisor.
130832
Spacers
In stressing cables that include three or more tendons, and in which all oI
the tendons cannot be simultaneously stressed, tensioning oI the cables
shall be perIormed one at a time upon approval by the Supervisor only
and on the condition that use will be made oI special spacers around
13 (2006)
73
which and through which the tendons will pass as required by Israel
The shape oI the spacer shall not interIere with the Ilow oI grout Ior the
entire length oI the stressing cable and the cross-section area oI the broad
dimension oI the spacer together with the cross-section oI the stressing
cable shall not exceed 50 oI the interior cross-section area oI the
sheetmetal sheathing pipes.
13084
Assembly of
the
anchorage
system
The anchorage system shall comply with the requirements oI Subsection
1303 above.
End reinIorcing shall be installed Ior conIining the concrete as necessary
in accordance with the method and type oI anchors that have been
approved.
The anchor Irom which injection will be perIormed shall be installed so
that the grout injection pipes will be in the lower part oI the anchor, and
the outlet pipes Ior the grout on the other end oI the cable will be in the
upper portion.
Complete sealing at the points oI connection to the duct shall be ensured.
In an interior system, the system shall be placed at the planned angle and
shall be connected to the Iormwork using wood bases, gradient wedges,
etc. The axis oI the anchor shall be tangential to the curve oI the cable
axis
Exterior anchorage systems shall be placed against the concrete aIter
hardening above areas perpendicular to the axis oI the stressing cables,
13 (2006)
74
which have been prepared especially Ior this purpose. Full contact
between the exterior anchors and the concrete surIaces shall be ensured
by appropriate means such as soIt material panels, grout or other means
as required by the approval provided Ior the stressing method.
13085
Integrity of
the system
and casting

130850
General
Casting oI the concrete shall be perIormed as required in Subsection
13013 above. In addition, the Contractor shall comply with the
requirements oI the Iollowing sections.
130851
Integrity and
sealing oI the
ducts
Prior to casting, the tensioning contractor shall check the integrity oI the
ducts and their sealing, anchors, injection pipes, outlet pipes and
ventilation pipes.
The Contractor shall strictly veriIy that the vibrators will not be damaged
in the ducts and will not be moved Irom their places. II a concern exists
that concrete has penetrated the ducts, the ducts shall be rinsed
immediately with water and cleaned with compressed air.
130852
Stressing
tendons,
including
dummy
Prior to casting oI the concrete, the stressing contractor shall insert the
stressing steel tendons into the ducts, or, alternatively dummy cables or
an interior plastic pipe made Irom resistance to temperatures oI at least
80C without warping, having a diameter not less than 5 mm than the
interior diameter oI the duct.
13 (2006)
75
cables The stressing cables or the dummy cables, iI provided, shall be moved
aIter casting at the stage oI the initial setting oI the concrete in order to
ensure their Iree movement.
13086
Stressing of
the cables

130861
Stressing
times

The stressing oI cables shall be perIormed aIter testing that the concrete
has reached the required strength (see Subsection 130131 above);
minimum concrete strength during stressing shall be as indicated in the
contract documents.
II not stated otherwise in the special speciIication, tensioning oI the cable
shall be perIormed not later than 14 days Irom the date oI casting oI the
member.
II the stressing works have been delayed Ior any reason whatsoever, the
Supervisor shall be entitled to demand that the Contractor execute a
certain part oI the stressing works in order to protect the structure Irom
damage.
130862
Calculation
oI expected
elongation
Calculation oI expected elongations shall be perIormed in advance by the
tensioning contractor Ior each separate cable. This computation shall
take into consideration all tensioning losses deriving Irom Iriction,
curvature oI the ducts and slippage oI the anchor.
The calculation oI elongations shall be based on the cross-section area oI
the cable and its modulus oI elasticity in accordance with the testing
13 (2006)
76
results as appearing in the documentation required in Israel Standard
1735, Part 1.
The Contractor shall issue elongation calculations to the Supervisor at
least one week prior to the date oI the planned tensioning work.
AIter obtaining the Supervisor`s approval Ior the elongation calculations
perIormed by the Contractor, this calculation shall constitute a binding
document Irom the standpoint oI allowable tolerances and compatibility
with the elongations actually measured.
130863
The stressing
works
In addition to that stated in Subsection 13063 above, the stressing works
shall be perIormed in accordance with the tensioning order as deIined in
advance that will be determined in the Iramework oI the tensioning
instructions in the contract documents: Irom one side, or Irom one side
and supplemented on the other side, or simultaneously. These
instructions shall not be modiIied other than upon the speciIic approval
oI the Supervisor.
The Contractor shall record a report Ior each stressing cable in
accordance with Appendix 2 below, which shall be signed by the
Supervisor, the tensioning contractor and the Contractor's engineer. This
report shall be prepared in three copies, two oI which shall be submitted
to the Supervisor.
a. The stressing work shall be perIormed through a tensioning device
that stretches all oI the strands oI the cable simultaneously, unless
otherwise approved Ior the Contractor in advance by the Supervisor.
13 (2006)
77
The tensioning device shall be equipped with a piston anchor
designed to actively anchor the anchoring wedges.
An initial tensioning Iorce shall be applied in order to create
preliminary tension and to avoid slackness in the cables in the ducts.
This preliminary tensioning shall be at a rate oI 15 to 20 oI the
Iull tensioning Iorce. From this point Iorward, the cable shall be
tensioned in several continuous stages, in at least Iour stages.
b. Tensioning Irom one side and supplementing Irom the other side
shall be perIormed aIter completion oI the tensioning (on one side)
and anchoring oI the cable. Completion oI the tensioning on the
second side shall be perIormed with the Iull design tensioning Iorce
Irom the second side.
c. II simultaneous tensioning is required Irom both sides oI the cables,
the tensioning shall be perIormed Irom both sides or, alternatively,
in stages (at least Iour equal stages). From this point Iorward, the
cable shall be tensioned in several continuous stages, in at least Iour
stages, by using two separate jacking systems and high-pressure
pumps.
The Contractor shall ascertain that there is no slippage oI some oI the
tendons and that all oI them are well anchored.
II some oI the tendons oI the cable have slipped, the instructions oI the
Supervisor shall be obtained Ior continuing the work.
130864 Stressing Iorces shall be measured using measurement devices as detailed
13 (2006)
78
Measuring oI
stressing
Iorces and
elongations
above in Subsection 13064, as well as by measuring oI elongations oI the
cables obtained during tensioning and comparing them with the
calculated elongation rates.
Measurement oI the stressing Iorces shall be perIormed simultaneously
with the measurement oI elongation oI the cables during tensioning.
Measurement oI the elongations shall be perIormed using a measurement
device with a millimeter dial.
AIter initial tensioning, the relative start point on the tensioning piston
shall be determined Ior monitoring elongation, and it shall be in an initial
condition Ior purposes oI monitoring the stressing Iorce Ior its
appropriate elongation. When intermediate anchoring is required, the
elongation measurement shall be taken into consideration in the length oI
additional slippage.
Elongation oI the cable during the preliminary tensioning stage shall be
calculated on the basis oI a linear interpolation oI the average elongation
in the Iollowing stages and shall not bring into consideration the actual
elongation oI the initial tensioning. A cable stressing report shall be
completed in which all oI the data appearing in Form 2 in the appendix
appear.
The Contractor shall immediately provide notiIication oI any discrepancy
between the rates oI calculated elongation and the rates oI elongation that
have been measured in actuality Ior the stressing Iorces indicated in the
drawings. II deviations greater than + 5 are obtained with respect to
13 (2006)
79
the calculated elongations, guidelines shall be received Irom the
Supervisor Ior continued perIormance oI the work.
No Iurther action shall be taken such as cutting oI the cables, grouting,
etc. prior to receiving approval Irom the Supervisor Ior the adaptation oI
the measured elongations.
130865
Cutting oI
excess
tendons
The cutting oI excess tendons beyond the anchoring points shall be
perIormed in the location as indicated in the drawings or at a distance oI
at least 2 cm Irom the anchor using a Carborundum cutting blade or with
special scissors.
130866
Closing and
sealing oI the
duct ends
Following cutting oI the excess tendons and prior to starting the grouting
works, the ends oI the ducts and the anchorage areas shall be closed and
sealed in order to prevent escape oI the grout during grouting.
13087
Performance
of grout
injection

130870
General
Preparation oI the grout and its inspection shall be perIormed as speciIied
in Subsection 1304 above.
The Contractor shall perIorm grout injection immediately aIter receiving
approval Irom the Supervisor in writing regarding the compatibility oI
the measured elongations with the calculated elongations as stated in
13 (2006)
80
The injection oI the grout shall be perIormed using special equipment
suitable Ior mixing and injecting grout (see Subsection 130872 above).
The Contractor shall ensure the presence oI substitute equipment Ior use
immediately in the case oI breakdown.
The Contractor shall notiIy the Supervisor oI the grouting times at least
24 hours in advance and shall obtain the Supervisor's approval Ior
grouting at that time. The grouting shall be perIormed by the tensioning
crew as stated in Subsection 13052 above.
130871
Preparation
oI grout
Following approval oI the mixture by the Supervisor, the Contractor shall
prepare the grout in that same dosage, in that same work order and in that
same timeIrame as the same mixture that had been tested and approved in
accordance with Subsection 13042 above.
a. The dosage oI the components oI the grout shall be measured by
weight with an accuracy oI +3;
b. The mixing shall be perIormed using a special mechanical mixer
that ensures a uniIorm grout mixture;
c. Mixers shall have a capacity that enables preparation oI a grout
batch in the quantity required Ior injection oI grout in the ducts to
its Iull length without stopping;
d. The mixing shall continue until obtaining a uniIorm grout mixture,
about 2-4 minutes, as tested in the test mixture. The temperature oI
the mixture shall be maintained between 5 and 25C, unless the
grout mixture tests have shown compatibility with all oI the grout
13 (2006)
81
requirements even iI the temperature oI the grout exceeds 25C. In
any case, the temperature oI the mixture shall not exceed 35C;
e. The grout shall be transIerred to the injection pump through a Iine
sieve immediately Iollowing completion oI the mixing;
I. II injection oI the grout has been delayed, it shall continue to be
mixed slowly; use oI a grout mixture shall not be approved 30
minutes aIter the start oI mixing;
g. Water shall not be added to grout that has become viscous in order
to thin it. Such grout shall be disqualiIied.
130872
Injection oI
grout
The injection oI the grout shall be perIormed as stated immediately aIter
tensioning and approval oI the elongations, and no more than 21 days
aIter insertion oI the cables.
The grouting activity shall not be perIormed when the temperature during
grouting, or Ior a period oI 48 hours aIterward, is likely to Iall below a
temperature oI 5C.
Following tensioning and prior to injection oI the grout, the Contractor
shall rinse the stressing cables and ducts with a strong Ilow oI water with
pumps having a strength and output that will ensure the cleaning oI the
cables and sidewalls oI the ducts. ThereaIter, the water shall be extracted
by compressed air. The rinsing and drying equipment requires approval
oI the Supervisor. Grouting shall not be perIormed beIore receiving the
Supervisor's approval
Injection oI the grout shall be perIormed Irom the lower end oI the cable
13 (2006)
82
toward the upper end.
Injection oI the grout shall be perIormed using a pressure pump that
contains a calibrated pressometer. Injection shall be perIormed Irom one
side and continue without stopping at a slow and steady rate that does not
exceed 10 m oI length oI duct per minute until removal oI air Irom the
duct space and until grout having viscosity compatible with preliminary
requirements will appear on the other side oI the cable. The Supervisor
shall be entitled to demand that the Contractor perIorm slump tests oI the
grout that shall be extracted in order to veriIy compatibility with
requirements.
All oI the ventilation pipes shall be open during the injection process.
The pipes shall be closed aIter grout having a viscosity compatible with
the requirements appears that has been approved during the preliminary
tests. The pipes shall be closed in the direction oI the Ilow oI the grout.
Pipes situated aIter the high point, shall be closed beIore the pipes that
are located at the top point.
At the conclusion oI the grouting activity and closing oI the grout outlet
opening, the pressure oI the grout shall be increased to 7 Atmospheres Ior
a period oI minute. Immediately aIterward, the injection opening shall
be closed well to ensure against the loss oI grout.
Do not move and do not cause any vibrations whatsoever in the grouted
member until at least 24 hours have passed Irom the time oI the
completion oI the grouting.
13 (2006)
83
AIter the grout has hardened, the pipes shall be reopened and its proper
Iilling should be veriIied. Following approval oI the Supervisor, the
pipes shall be sealed Iinally using suitable means.
II doubt exists that the duct has not been Iilled completely by the grout,
the Supervisor shall be entitled to demand additional tests that prove this.
130873
Reporting
The Contractor shall submit a report to the Supervisor that shall include
all oI the details Ior identiIying the duct in the structure and the results oI
grout measurements and testing that have been held during the injection
process, as well as a description oI any unusual event during the injection
process, including the solution provided Ior the problem and the extent oI
its success.
The report shall be signed by the tensioning contractor and shall be
submitted to the Supervisor in three copies.
13088
Filling of
recesses in
the
anchorage
area
Following the grouting activities, all recesses in the anchorage area shall
be Iilled with non-shrink manuIactured concrete that does not include
materials that cause steel corrosion, and that will anchor the member
well. II not speciIied in the contract documents, the anchoring shall be
perIormed using 6 mm diameter reinIorcing steel bars every 15 cm
around the anchor. Prior to execution, the Contractor shall receive the
Supervisor`s approval Ior the Iill material
II not stated otherwise in the contract documents, sealing against the
intrusion oI wetness into the head oI the anchor shall be perIormed using
a cementitious sealing material.

13 (2006)
84
1309: PerIormance requirements Ior post-tensioning oI unbonded
monostrand cables
13090
General
Everything stated in Subsection 1306 above also pertains to the
perIormance oI post-tensioning oI unbonded monostrand cables unless
stated speciIically otherwise in this subsection.
In any case in which unbonded cables are indicated below, the intention
is to unbonded monostrand cables.
The tensioning contractor and its crew shall comply with the
requirements oI Subsection 13052 above.
13091
Scope of the
stressing
works
PerIormance oI the stressing works includes the Iollowing detailed items:
a. Cutting oI the steel cables to their required lengths, assembly oI the
deadheads and their locking;
b. Preparation oI supports and their placement;
c. Assembly oI the cables on the supports;
d. Assembly oI the anchors on the cables and their connection to the
Iormwork;
e. Sealing oI the connections between the cables and the anchors;
I. Inspection oI conIinement oI concrete reinIorcing in the anchor
area;
g. Tensioning oI the cable;
h. Recording and documentation oI the stressing works, reporting oI
elongations;
i. Cutting oI excess length Irom the cables;
13 (2006)
85
j. Filling oI the tensioning recess.
13092
Protection
during
transport
and storage
In addition to the stated in Subsection 13022 above, conveyance oI the
unbonded cables, their storage and installation shall be perIormed so that
any damage whatsoever shall be prevented to the strands and plastic
coating as a result oI their high susceptibility to damage.
13093
Assembly of
the
deadheads
on the cable
The deadhead shall be assembled on the cable and locked to it through
the application oI Iorce that is equivalent to 80 oI the nominal rupture
Iorce oI the cable. Additional devices shall be assembled on the anchor
to protect against corrosion.
13094
Preparation
of the
supports for
the cables
and their
placement
The supports shall be made Irom minimum 12 mm diameter ribbed steel
bars, where each horizontal bar has Iooters welded with a Irequency that
will ensure that the horizontal bar oI the support will not settle.
The supports shall be placed at a maximum distance oI 1.0 m apart Ior
cables having 0.6 inch diameter at a maximum spacing oI 0.8 m Ior
cables having a 0.5 inch diameter.
In segments in which the cables are straight and are at the lowest height,
they can be placed directly on the lower soIt reinIorcing steel without
additional supports on the condition that the Iorms are Ilat and that this
does not prevent Ilatness in the cables, such as changes in diameter oI the
soIt reinIorcing bars, electrical cable conduit, etc.

13 (2006)
86
13095
Assembly of
the cables
on the
supports

130951
Assembly oI
dummy
cables in
place
Dummy cables shall be installed in place in a manner that will not allow
their movement. The anchors shall be installed in the locations and at the
angles as indicated in the drawings. In concrete panels, the anchors shall
be installed so that the cable will be parallel with the Iorm up to a
distance oI 90 cm Irom the anchor.
Strictly ascertain that the plane oI the anchor will be perpendicular to the
axis oI the cable.
The anchor axis shall be at a distance oI at least 11 cm Irom the surIace
oI the concrete Ior 0.6-inch cables and at least 9 cm Ior 0.5 inch cables.
VeriIy concrete coverage oI at least 3.5 cm over the anchor in any
direction.
Ascertain that the sealing sleeve produces a continuous seal oI the strand
and next to the anchor, and that the sealing cover is aIIixed well to the
exterior side oI the anchor.
130952
Placement oI
the cables
The cables shall be placed in accordance with the vertical and horizontal
alignments indicated in the drawings.
II indicated in the contract documents that it is permissible to bunch
cables, they may be placed next to one another in one horizontal plane up
13 (2006)
87
to three cables in a bunch. (In horizontal curves, they should be separated
Irom one another in order to create a minimum net space oI 5 cm.) The
anchors shall be installed in accordance with the distances between the
cables indicated in the drawings. Horizontal oIIset oI the cables Ior the
purpose oI layout in the anchorage area shall be perIormed where the
oIIset angle shall not exceed 1:12 with respect to the original axis oI the
cable. A segment oI at least 90 cm in Iront oI the anchor shall be straight
in parallel with the original axis oI the cable.
In proximity to an opening or space, the cables shall be straight without
any horizontal oIIset along the opening and at least an additional 60 cm
beIore and aIter the opening.
Tying oI the cables to the supports and to one another shall be perIormed
with the use oI tie wire while taking care to avoid damage to the plastic
sheathing and to avoid horizontal and vertical movement.
130953
Permissible
tolerances
and location
oI the
stressing
cables

Plate thickness
Vertical
tolerance
Horizontal
tolerance
In direct
segments near
the upper and
lower Iace oI
the plate
Any thickness 2 mm 20 mm
In any other h _ 200 mm h / 40 mm 20 mm
13 (2006)
88
location in the
plate
h ~ 200 mm 5 mm 20 mm
130954
Installation
oI interior
pull anchors
The anchors shall be attached to the side oI the Iorm in a stable manner
that will prevent displacement. The plane oI the anchor shall be
perpendicular to the cable axis.
The cable shall be straight and horizontal Ior length oI at least 90 cm
Irom the anchor.
The anchor axis shall be at a distance oI at least 11 cm Irom the surIace
oI the concrete Ior 0.6 inch cables and at least 9 cm Ior 0.5 inch cables.
The anchors shall be attached to the side oI the Iorm at a depth oI
approximately 55 mm with a pocket Iormer compatible with the anchor,
which is produced and supplied by the anchor manuIacturer.
II a horizontal angle exists between the edge oI the plate and the cable
axis, a pocket Iormer shall be used that is compatible with the angle.
130955
Exterior pull
anchors
Exterior pull anchors shall be installed in accordance with the
requirements oI the contract documents.
130956
Casting
breaks and
intermediate
anchors
Casting breaks shall be made only in locations as indicated in the
drawings.
The intermediate anchor can be installed in casting breaks directly to the
side oI the Iorm without a pocket Iormer. The anchor axis shall be at a
distance oI at least 11 cm Irom the surIace oI the concrete Ior 0.6 inch
cables and at least 9 cm Ior 0.5 inch cables.
13 (2006)
89
Intermediate anchors shall be installed where the cable beIore and aIter
the anchor is straight up to a distance oI at least 60 cm and parallel with
the concrete surIace.
The cable may be leIt exposed without a plastic sleeve aIter the casting
break Ior a length that shall not exceed 40 cm, measured aIter
perIormance oI the stressing works.
13096
Inspection
of the cables
prior to
casting
Following completion oI all the soIt reinIorcing works, the Contractor
shall perIorm an inspection oI all the cables and report in the work
journal. It shall be veriIied that all the cables are tied and stationed in
place. It shall be veriIied that there are no tears in the plastic sheathing; iI
there are slight tears, additional suitable grease shall be applied in this
location and it shall be sealed with a strong sealing tape; iI the tear is a
large one, the cable shall be replaced.
It shall be veriIied that the other corrosion protection devices in the
anchors are attached well to the anchors.
It shall be veriIied that the conIining reinIorcing is applied next to each oI
the anchors.
13097
Casting of
the concrete
and it
curing
The casting shall be perIormed as stated in Subsection 13013 above and,
in addition, the Contractor shall veriIy that all voids have been Iilled well
during casting, particularly in the anchor areas.
Curing oI the concrete shall be perIormed strictly in accordance with the
guidelines oI Section 02, including preliminary curing and continued
curing; however, continued curing shall be perIormed by continual
13 (2006)
90
wetting until execution oI the tensioning, and in any case not less than 7
days.
13098
Stressing

130981
Stressing
times
Stressing oI the concrete shall be perIormed within 7 days oI casting and
when the concrete has reached a strength oI approximately 65 oI its
characteristic concrete strength, unless indicated otherwise in the contract
documents.
Testing oI the concrete strength prior to tensioning shall be perIormed as
stated in Subsection 130131.
II the perIormance oI the stressing works has been delayed Ior any reason
whatsoever, the Contractor shall be entitled to demand that the Contractor
perIorm a certain part oI the stressing works in order to protect the
structure Irom damage.
130982
Preparation
Ior stressing
The pocket Iormer shall be extracted careIully without damaging the
integrity oI the concrete. A visual inspection shall be perIormed oI the
concrete in the anchor area. II there is any concern Ior voids, cracks or
segregation oI the concrete, the Supervisor shall be notiIied and his
instructions received prior to tensioning.
130983
PerIormance
oI stressing

the order oI tensioning shall be in accordance with the instructions oI the
drawings and shall not be deviated Irom without approval oI the
Supervisor
The tensioning oI each cable can be perIormed continuously.
13 (2006)
91
130984
SaIety during
stressing
In addition to that stated in Subsection 13066 above, in the case oI
tensioning at a level above ground level, the tensioning equipment shall
be attached with a chain or a cable to the structure.
During tensioning, personnel shall not stand behind the tensioning jack or
on the panel being tensioned above and near the cable alignment.
130985
Measurement
oI
elongations
The measurement oI elongation oI each cable shall be perIormed by
measuring the length oI the strand protruding Irom the anchor prior to
and aIter tensioning. The calculated elongation shall be in accordance
with the modulus oI elasticity oI the strand. The measurement device
shall have a millimeter dial. A cable stressing report shall be completed
as per the example in Appendix 3.
In the case oI a deviation greater than 5 between the measured and
calculated elongation, the instructions oI the Supervisor shall be obtained
beIore continuing the work.
II the deviation is systematic and not random, the tensioning shall be
stopped and the reason Ior it shall be determined prior to continuing with
the work.
130986
Works
perIormed
aIter
tensioning
Following completion oI the stressing works and approval oI the
elongations, the end oI the excess strand shall be cut. The cutting shall be
perIormed about 20 mm Irom the anchor. The cutting shall be perIormed
using a cold cutting tool. The cutting shall enable installation oI a sealing
cover on the anchor.
Following cutting oI the strand, it shall be covered with a grease Iilled
13 (2006)
92
sealing cover.
Following installation oI the cover, veriIy that the recess in the concrete
is clean and dry and shall be Iilled with a non-shrink concrete mixture
with adhesive enhancers that do not contain materials that may attack the
steel.
13 (2006)
93
1300.00: Methods oI measurement Ior prestressed concrete works
1300.01
General
Prestressed concrete works shall be measured on a net basis when
Iinished, completed and aIIixed in their designated place in the structure
in accordance with the drawings.
Additional works such as: soIt reinIorcing and any other component that
is not included in the prestressing works as detailed in the contract
documents shall be measured as stated in the appropriate sections.
1300.02
Price
inclusions
The prices oI the prestressed concrete works also include, in addition to
that stated in the "Price inclusions" section oI Section 00 Preliminaries,
the Iollowing items:
a. The supply oI any materials and accessories required (with all
documentation and testing certiIicates) and the perIormance oI all
works required until obtaining the prestressed structure as required
by the contract documents;
b. Expenses necessitated in submitting authorization documents Ior
the prestressing method and anchoring method, or certiIicates that
testiIy to the compatibility oI the method with the requirements oI
the speciIication;
c. The value oI concessionaire Iees or royalties Ior the use oI patents
oI any type whatsoever related to the special equipment or to the
special devices required Ior perIormance oI the prestressing works
as detailed in the drawings and in the other contract documents;
d. Tendons, ducts, grout, injection and ventilation pipes, anchorage
13 (2006)
94
systems, unbonded cables, soIt reinIorcing, various inserts and
sealing covers;
e. Supports, ladder trays, and any connectors required in order to
ensure the precise location oI the stressing cables, both in the
vertical and horizontal alignment as indicated in the drawings;
I. Survey expenses Ior the tensioning Iorce and elongation
inspections, and preparation oI reports such as: tensioning,
monitoring oI camber, etc., Ior each tensioning action in at least
three ducts as detailed in the appendices;
g. Tensioning in stages iI required by the contract documents.
The preparation oI alternative proposals Ior tensioning, detailed
drawings, speciIications and bills oI quantity are subject to that stated in
Subsection 13053;
II any deIects are discovered whatsoever in the stressing works as a
result oI deIective materials or Iaulty workmanship, any repairs or
changes that will be required Ior completion oI the work in accordance
with the contract documents shall be included in the prices oI the
original work and shall not be paid Ior separately.
1300.03
Measuring
method Ior
pretensioning
The unit prices Ior pretensioning works shall be calculated as including
all materials, labor and other expenses as speciIied in Subsection
1300.02.
Measurement oI pretensioning shall be perIormed in accordance with
one oI the Iollowing two alternative ways:
13 (2006)
95
a. The price oI the stressing works in their entirety, included in the
unit price oI the Iinished precast product in the drawings and
speciIications as stated in Section 03 Precast Concrete Products;
b. In accordance with the weight oI the steel tensioning tendons
included in the precast unit in accordance with their length aIter
cutting. The weight oI the steel shall be calculated in accordance
with Section 1300.06.
The length oI the tendon shall be measured between the edges oI the
concrete at points oI their penetration into it, whether or not their ends
are connected to it, and whether or not they are isolated Irom it by
special means Ior breaking contact such as plastic pipes. The price Ior
these shall be considered as included in the price oI the stressing steel.
II there has been a speciIic requirement in the drawings Ior protruding oI
the tensioning tendons outside oI the ends oI the concrete, this additional
length oI the tendons shall also be measured.
Additional works such as: concrete, reinIorcing steel and any other
component that is not a pretensioning work as detailed above shall be
measured as stated in the appropriate sections.
1300.04
Method oI
measuring
post-
tensioning
The measurement oI post-tensioning works shall be perIormed in
accordance with one oI the Iollowing three alternative methods as
indicated in the special speciIication. The unit prices oI each oI the three
alternative methods includes the supply oI all materials and labor as
described in Subsection 13081 above Ior bonded cables and Subsection
13 (2006)
96
works 13091 above Ior unbonded cables, as well as any other expenses as
detailed in Subsection 1300.02 above. These three alternatives are:
a. Measurement shall be perIormed in accordance the two items Ior
each type oI cable, as Iollows:
1) Cables shall be measured in length in meters while indicating
the type oI cable, i.e., a general description that includes the
number, diameter and type oI tensioning tendons (wires,
strains, etc.) as well as the type and diameter oI ducts;
2) Anchors shall be measured in pairs while indicating the type
oI cable, number, diameter and type oI tensioning strands, as
well as indicating the types oI anchors.
b. According to the total weight oI stressing steel in the cables within
a deIined length, while indicating the type oI cable, i.e., a
description including the number, diameter and type oI tensioning
tendons (wires, strands, etc.), type and diameter oI ducts as well as
type oI anchors. Changes in the actual length oI cable in the
deIined area in contrast with the length indicated in the contract
drawings shall not change the price per unit by weight. The weight
oI the steel shall be measured as detailed in Subsection 1300.06
below.
c. According to units oI stressing cable, while indicating the length oI
the cable, number and type oI tensioning tendons (wires, strands,
etc.), type and diameter oI ducts as well as type oI anchors. A
13 (2006)
97
deviation oI + 5 in the actual length oI the cable, in contrast with
the length indicated in the contract documents shall not change the
unit price.
In each oI these three measurement methods detailed above, unless
stated otherwise in the contract documents, the length oI the stressing
cable shall be calculated as the measured distance oI the length oI the
cable axis between the exterior Iaces oI the anchoring bodies that are
common to the same cable.
In determining the length oI stressing cable, the additional length oI the
cables required Ior perIorming the tensioning activities beyond the
anchors shall not be included.
1300.05
Measurement
oI
intermediate
anchors and
couplers
Intermediate Anchors - intermediate anchors that have been marked in
the drawings shall be measured separately in units and their price shall
include all labor required, including assembly, tensioning and measuring
oI elongation. Intermediate anchors not marked in the drawings shall
not be measured.
Couplers - Couplers that have been marked in the drawings shall be
measured separately in units, while indicating the type oI coupler and
whether it includes an intermediate anchor or not. Couplers that have
not been marked in the drawings shall not be measured.
II the coupler includes an intermediate anchor, the unit price shall also
include the anchor and all labor required including assembly, tensioning,
measurement oI elongation and grouting.
13 (2006)
98
1300.06
Determination
oI the weight
oI the
stressing steel
The weight oI stressing steel shall be calculated according to the length
oI stressing cable as deIined above, and in accordance with the nominal
steel cross-section in square centimeters as deIined in the relevant
standard, multiplied by 0.785 in order to obtain the weight in kilograms
per meter, without any addition Ior deviations in the nominal cross-
section area.
In unbonded cables, no separate payment shall be made Ior plastic
sleeves and grease. The weight oI the steel shall be calculated as stated
in the previous paragraph.

* * *

SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
BUILDING LS 13103

CONTRACTOR SPECIFICATION SECTION
TYPE OF SUBMITTAL DESIGN-
ER
CLASSI-
FICATION
CONTRACTOR
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
GOVERNMENT
ACTION

TRANS- MIT-
TAL
NO.

ITEM
NO.

SPECIFI-
CATION
PARA. NO.

DESCRIPTION OF
ITEM SUBMITTED
D
A
T
A

D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S

I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

R
E
P
O
R
T
S

C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
S

S
A
M
P
L
E
S

R
E
C
O
R
D
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

G
O
V
E
R
N
M
E
N
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
.

R
E
V
I
E
W
E
R

SUBMIT

APPROVAL
NEEDED BY

MATERIAL
NEEDED BY

CODE

DATE

SUBMIT TO
GOVERN-
MENT

CODE

DATE

REMARKS
1 01.03 Drawings of Excavation X X X X

TITLE AND LOCATION
BUILDING LS 13103

ER
CLASSI-
FICATION
CONTRACTOR
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
GOVERNMENT
ACTION

TRANS-
MIT-
TAL
NO.

ITEM
NO.

SPECIFI-
CATION
PARA. NO.

DESCRIPTION OF
ITEM SUBMITTED
D
A
T
A

D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S

I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

R
E
P
O
R
T
S

C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
S

S
A
M
P
L
E
S

R
E
C
O
R
D
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

G
O
V
E
R
N
M
E
N
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
.

R
E
V
I
E
W
E
R

SUBMIT

APPROVAL
NEEDED BY

MATERIAL
NEEDED BY

CODE

DATE

SUBMIT TO
GOVERN-
MENT

CODE

DATE

REMARKS
1 02 Concrete tests X X X
2 02 Shop drawings X X X
3 02 Mock Ups Exposed concrete X X X X

TITLE AND LOCATION
BUILDING LS 13103

ER
CLASSI-
FICATION
CONTRACTOR
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
GOVERNMENT
ACTION

TRANS-
MIT-
TAL
NO.

ITEM
NO.

SPECIFI-
CATION
PARA. NO.

DESCRIPTION OF
ITEM SUBMITTED
D
A
T
A

D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S

I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

R
E
P
O
R
T
S

C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
S

S
A
M
P
L
E
S

R
E
C
O
R
D
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

G
O
V
E
R
N
M
E
N
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
.

R
E
V
I
E
W
E
R

SUBMIT

APPROVAL
NEEDED BY

MATERIAL
NEEDED BY

CODE

DATE

SUBMIT TO
GOVERN-
MENT

CODE

DATE

REMARKS
1 05.04 Flood Test X X X X X
2 05. Waterproofing Membrane Sheets X X X X X x

SUBMITTAL REGISTER - Architecture
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
BUILDING LS 13103

ER
CLASSI-
FICATION
CONTRACTOR
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
GOVERNMENT
ACTION

TRANS-
MIT-
TAL
NO.

ITEM
NO.

SPECIFI-
CATION
PARA. NO.

DESCRIPTION OF
ITEM SUBMITTED
D
A
T
A

D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S

I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

R
E
P
O
R
T
S

C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
S

S
A
M
P
L
E
S

R
E
C
O
R
D
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

G
O
V
E
R
N
M
E
N
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
.

R
E
V
I
E
W
E
R

SUBMIT

APPROVAL
NEEDED BY

MATERIAL
NEEDED BY

CODE

DATE

SUBMIT TO
GOVERN-
MENT

CODE

DATE

REMARKS
1 06 ML metal items
X
COE+MLM

2
06 M5 metal item
X
COE+MLM
Cover and
cardle
examples
3 06 M18 metal item
X
COE+MLM Sleeves
examples
4 06 M3 metal item
X

COE+
protection
consultant

5 06 M13 metal item
X

COE+
protection
consultant

6 06 M14 metal item
X

COE+
protection
consultant

7 06 Ladders
X

COE+
structure
consultant
Connections
to building
8 06 Handrails and rails
X

COE+
structure
consultant
Connections
to building
9 06 Rain water pipes
X

COE+
structure
consultant
Connections
to building
10 06 M17 metal item
X
COE+
architect

11 06 M19 metal item
X
COE+
architect

12 06 M4 metal itemaccessories
X
COE

13 06 M16 metal itemaccessories
X
COE

14 06 Inside concrete finishing
X
COE+
architect

SUBMITTAL REGISTER - Architecture
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
BUILDING LS 13103

ER
CLASSI-
FICATION
CONTRACTOR
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
GOVERNMENT
ACTION

TRANS-
MIT-
TAL
NO.

ITEM
NO.

SPECIFI-
CATION
PARA. NO.

DESCRIPTION OF
ITEM SUBMITTED
D
A
T
A

D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S

I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

R
E
P
O
R
T
S

C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
S

S
A
M
P
L
E
S

R
E
C
O
R
D
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

G
O
V
E
R
N
M
E
N
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
.

R
E
V
I
E
W
E
R

SUBMIT

APPROVAL
NEEDED BY

MATERIAL
NEEDED BY

CODE

DATE

SUBMIT TO
GOVERN-
MENT

CODE

DATE

REMARKS
15 06 Outside concrete finishing
X
COE+
architect

16 06 Concrete floor finishing
X
COE+
structure
consultant

17 06 Concrete stairs
X

COE+
architect
Brashed
surface
example
18 06 Metal finishing
X
COE+
architect

19 06 Raised floor
X
COE

TITLE AND LOCATION
BUILDING LS 13103

Designer: Gideon Graubart Specification Sections: 08, 18, 34

TYPE OF SUBMITTAL

CLASSI-
FICATION

CONTRACTOR
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
GOVT
ACTION
DESIGNER
T
R
A
N
S

M
I
T

T
A
L

N
O
.

I
T
E
M

N
O
.

S
P
E
C
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N

P
A
R
A
.

N
O
.

DESCRIPTION OF
ITEM SUBMITTED
D
A
T
A

D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S

I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

R
E
P
O
R
T
S

C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
S

S
A
M
P
L
E
S

R
E
C
O
R
D
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

G
O
V
E
R
N
M
E
N
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D

R
E
V
I
E
W
E
R

S
U
B
M
I
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

N
E
E
D
E
D

B
Y

M
A
T
E
R
I
A
L

N
E
E
D
E
D

B
Y

C
O
D
E

D
A
T
E

S
U
B
M
I
T

T
O

G
O
V
E
R
N
-
M
E
N
T

C
O
D
E

D
A
T
E

R
E
M
A
R
K
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

1 Electrical Accessories X X X X X
2 Lighting Fixtures X X X X
3 Emergency lighting system X X X X X X
4 Electricity cables X X X
5 Sheet metal ducts X X X X
6 Conduits X X X X
7 Electricity Switchboards X X X X X X
1 Enclosure X X X X X
2 Shop drawings X X X
3 Electrical equipment X X
4 Thermal calculations X X X
5 Selectivity calculations X X X
6 Short circuit withstanding calculations X X X
7 Operating tests X X X
8 Signs X X
8 UPS System
1 Manufacturers specification X X X X
2 Shop drawings X X
3 Installation drawings X X X
TITLE AND LOCATION
BUILDING LS 13103


TYPE OF SUBMITTAL

CLASSI-
FICATION

CONTRACTOR
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
GOVT
ACTION
DESIGNER
T
R
A
N
S

M
I
T

T
A
L

N
O
.

I
T
E
M

N
O
.

S
P
E
C
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N

P
A
R
A
.

N
O
.

DESCRIPTION OF
ITEM SUBMITTED
D
A
T
A

D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S

I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

R
E
P
O
R
T
S

C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
S

S
A
M
P
L
E
S

R
E
C
O
R
D
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

G
O
V
E
R
N
M
E
N
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D

R
E
V
I
E
W
E
R

S
U
B
M
I
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

N
E
E
D
E
D

B
Y

M
A
T
E
R
I
A
L

N
E
E
D
E
D

B
Y

C
O
D
E

D
A
T
E

S
U
B
M
I
T

T
O

G
O
V
E
R
N
-
M
E
N
T

C
O
D
E

D
A
T
E

R
E
M
A
R
K
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

4 Manufacturers instructions X X X
5 Battery type X X
6 Operating tests X X X X
7 Signs X X X
8 Standard compliance X X
9 EMP filters X X X X X
1 Manufacturers specification X X X X X
2 Shop drawings X X
3 Installation drawings X X X X
5 Standard compliance X X X X
10 Flood detection system X X X X X X
1 Manufacturers specification X X
2 Shop drawings X X
11 Ultra Sonic System
TITLE AND LOCATION
BUILDING LS 13103


TYPE OF SUBMITTAL

CLASSI-
FICATION

CONTRACTOR
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
GOVT
ACTION
DESIGNER
T
R
A
N
S

M
I
T

T
A
L

N
O
.

I
T
E
M

N
O
.

S
P
E
C
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N

P
A
R
A
.

N
O
.

DESCRIPTION OF
ITEM SUBMITTED
D
A
T
A

D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S

I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

R
E
P
O
R
T
S

C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
S

S
A
M
P
L
E
S

R
E
C
O
R
D
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

G
O
V
E
R
N
M
E
N
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D

R
E
V
I
E
W
E
R

S
U
B
M
I
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

N
E
E
D
E
D

B
Y

M
A
T
E
R
I
A
L

N
E
E
D
E
D

B
Y

C
O
D
E

D
A
T
E

S
U
B
M
I
T

T
O

G
O
V
E
R
N
-
M
E
N
T

C
O
D
E

D
A
T
E

R
E
M
A
R
K
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

12 Building Control System
2 Shop drawings X X
4 Software specifications X X X X X
5 Screen shots X X X
6 Operating Instructions X X X
13 Fire detection system
2 Shop drawings X X
4 Manufacturers instructions X X X X
5 Operating tests X X
6 Standards Compliance X X X
14 Fire extinguishing system
TITLE AND LOCATION
BUILDING LS 13103


TYPE OF SUBMITTAL

CLASSI-
FICATION

CONTRACTOR
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
GOVT
ACTION
DESIGNER
T
R
A
N
S

M
I
T

T
A
L

N
O
.

I
T
E
M

N
O
.

S
P
E
C
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N

P
A
R
A
.

N
O
.

DESCRIPTION OF
ITEM SUBMITTED
D
A
T
A

D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S

I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

R
E
P
O
R
T
S

C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
S

S
A
M
P
L
E
S

R
E
C
O
R
D
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

G
O
V
E
R
N
M
E
N
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D

R
E
V
I
E
W
E
R

S
U
B
M
I
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

N
E
E
D
E
D

B
Y

M
A
T
E
R
I
A
L

N
E
E
D
E
D

B
Y

C
O
D
E

D
A
T
E

S
U
B
M
I
T

T
O

G
O
V
E
R
N
-
M
E
N
T

C
O
D
E

D
A
T
E

R
E
M
A
R
K
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

2 Shop drawings X X
5 Operating tests X X
7 Performance calculations
15 Communication system X X X X X X X
1 10U Rack X X X
2 15U Rack X X X X X
3 44U Rack X X X X
4 Optical Patch Panel X X X X
5 Optical Switch X X X
6 Fiber optics cable X X X X X X
7 SystemDocumentation X X X X X X X
16 Public Address Sysytem
17 Diesel Generator set X X X X
TITLE AND LOCATION
BUILDING LS 13103


TYPE OF SUBMITTAL

CLASSI-
FICATION

CONTRACTOR
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
GOVT
ACTION
DESIGNER
T
R
A
N
S

M
I
T

T
A
L

N
O
.

I
T
E
M

N
O
.

S
P
E
C
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N

P
A
R
A
.

N
O
.

DESCRIPTION OF
ITEM SUBMITTED
D
A
T
A

D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S

I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

R
E
P
O
R
T
S

C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
S

S
A
M
P
L
E
S

R
E
C
O
R
D
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

G
O
V
E
R
N
M
E
N
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D

R
E
V
I
E
W
E
R

S
U
B
M
I
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

N
E
E
D
E
D

B
Y

M
A
T
E
R
I
A
L

N
E
E
D
E
D

B
Y

C
O
D
E

D
A
T
E

S
U
B
M
I
T

T
O

G
O
V
E
R
N
-
M
E
N
T

C
O
D
E

D
A
T
E

R
E
M
A
R
K
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

1 Manufacturers specification X X X X X
2 Shop drawings X X X
3 Standards compliance X X X X X
5 Operating Instructions X X X


TITLE AND LOCATION
BUILDING LS 13103

ER
CLASSI-
FICATION
CONTRACTOR
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
GOVERNMENT
ACTION

TRANS-
MIT-
TAL
NO.

ITEM
NO.

SPECIFI-
CATION
PARA. NO.

DESCRIPTION OF
ITEM SUBMITTED
D
A
T
A

D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S

I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

R
E
P
O
R
T
S

C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
S

S
A
M
P
L
E
S

R
E
C
O
R
D
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

G
O
V
E
R
N
M
E
N
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
.

R
E
V
I
E
W
E
R

SUBMIT

APPROVAL
NEEDED BY

MATERIAL
NEEDED BY

CODE

DATE

SUBMIT TO
GOVERN-
MENT

CODE

DATE

REMARKS
1 11.03 Mock-ups X X X X X X X
2 11. Interior Finish Paint X X X X x
3 11. Exterior Finish Paint X X X X x
x

TITLE AND LOCATION

ER
CLASSI-
FICATION
CONTRACTOR
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
GOVERNMENT
ACTION

TRANS-
MIT-
TAL
NO.

ITEM
NO.

SPECIFI-
CATION
PARA. NO.

DESCRIPTION OF
ITEM SUBMITTED
D
A
T
A

D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S

I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

R
E
P
O
R
T
S

C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
S

S
A
M
P
L
E
S

R
E
C
O
R
D
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

G
O
V
E
R
N
M
E
N
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
.

R
E
V
I
E
W
E
R

SUBMIT

APPROVAL
NEEDED BY

MATERIAL
NEEDED BY

CODE

DATE

SUBMIT TO
GOVERN-
MENT

CODE

DATE

REMARKS
1 15.17 smoke relief fans X X X X X X
2 Arranging plan X X X X
3 a/c system X X X
4 15.18 Overpressure blast valvewith
blower
X X X X X X

TITLE AND LOCATION
BUILDING LS 13103

ER
CLASSI-
FICATION
CONTRACTOR
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
GOVERNMENT
ACTION

TRANS-
MIT-
TAL
NO.

ITEM
NO.

SPECIFI-
CATION
PARA. NO.

DESCRIPTION OF
ITEM SUBMITTED
D
A
T
A

D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S

I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

R
E
P
O
R
T
S

C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
S

S
A
M
P
L
E
S

R
E
C
O
R
D
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

G
O
V
E
R
N
M
E
N
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
.

R
E
V
I
E
W
E
R

SUBMIT

APPROVAL
NEEDED BY

MATERIAL
NEEDED BY

CODE

DATE

SUBMIT TO
GOVERN-
MENT

CODE

DATE

REMARKS
1 23 Pile tests X X X X X X X X

UBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
BUILDING LS 13103

TYPE OF SUBMITTAL CLASSI-
FICATION
CONTRACTOR
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
GOVERNMENT
ACTION

DESIGN-
ER

TRANS-
MIT-
TAL
NO.

ITEM
NO.

SPECIFI-
CATION
PARA. NO.

DESCRIPTION OF
ITEM SUBMITTED
D
A
T
A

D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S

I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

R
E
P
O
R
T
S

C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
S

S
A
M
P
L
E
S

R
E
C
O
R
D
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

G
O
V
E
R
N
M
E
N
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D

R
E
V
I
E
W
E
R

SUBMIT

APPROVAL
NEEDED
BY

MATERIAL
NEEDED
BY

CODE

DATE

SUBMIT
TO
GOVERN-
MENT

CODE

DATE

REMARKS
I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

33.03.I Rectifiers x
Shop Drawings X X x
Manufacturers Instructions X x x
Operating Tests X x

33.03.II Reference Electrodes
Manufacturers Instructions X X x
33.03.III Anodes x
Shop Drawings X X x x
Manufacturers Instructions X x
33.03.IV Coke Backfill
Chemical Components X x x

CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
BUILDING LS 13103

ER
CLASSI-
FICATION
CONTRACTOR
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
GOVERNMENT
ACTION

TRANS-
MIT-
TAL
NO.

ITEM
NO.

SPECIFI-
CATION
PARA. NO.

DESCRIPTION OF
ITEM SUBMITTED
D
A
T
A

D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S

I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

R
E
P
O
R
T
S

C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
S

S
A
M
P
L
E
S

R
E
C
O
R
D
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

G
O
V
E
R
N
M
E
N
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
.

R
E
V
I
E
W
E
R

SUBMIT

APPROVAL
NEEDED BY

MATERIAL
NEEDED BY

CODE

DATE

SUBMIT TO
GOVERN-
MENT

CODE

DATE

REMARKS
1 51. Concrete pavers
X X X X X X
X X
2 Edge stones X X X X X

SUBMITTAL REGISTER - Cathodic Protection
CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
BUILDING LS 13103

ER
CLASSI-
FICATION
CONTRACTOR
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
GOVERNMENT
ACTION

TRANS-
MIT-
TAL
NO.

ITEM
NO.

SPECIFI-
CATION
PARA. NO.

DESCRIPTION OF
ITEM SUBMITTED
D
A
T
A

D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S

I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

R
E
P
O
R
T
S

C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
S

S
A
M
P
L
E
S

R
E
C
O
R
D
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

G
O
V
E
R
N
M
E
N
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
.

R
E
V
I
E
W
E
R

SUBMIT

APPROVAL
NEEDED BY

MATERIAL
NEEDED BY

CODE

DATE

SUBMIT TO
GOVERN-
MENT

CODE

DATE

REMARKS
1 57 Potential Test Station X X X
30 days
before
execution

2
Insulating J oint Test Station
Enclosure

X X X X
30 days
before
execution
3 Insulating J oint Spark Gap
X X X
30 days
before
execution

CONTRACT NO.
TITLE AND LOCATION
BUILDING LS 13103

ER
CLASSI-
FICATION
CONTRACTOR
SCHEDULE DATES
CONTRACTOR
ACTION
GOVERNMENT
ACTION

TRANS-
MIT- TAL
NO.

ITEM
NO.

SPECIFI-
CATION
PARA. NO.

DESCRIPTION OF
ITEM SUBMITTED
D
A
T
A

D
R
A
W
I
N
G
S

I
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
T
A
T
E
M
E
N
T
S

R
E
P
O
R
T
S

C
E
R
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
E
S

S
A
M
P
L
E
S

R
E
C
O
R
D
S

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

F
O
R

A
P
P
R
O
V
A
L

I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N

O
N
L
Y

G
O
V
E
R
N
M
E
N
T

A
P
P
R
O
V
E
D
.

R
E
V
I
E
W
E
R

SUBMIT

APPROVAL
NEEDED BY

MATERIAL
NEEDED BY

CODE

DATE

SUBMIT TO
GOVERN-
MENT

CODE

DATE

REMARKS
1 66 Lifting pulley x x x x

2 66 Traveling crab x x x x
3 66 The motor x x x
4 66 The brack x x x
5 66 Crane bridge x
6 66 Travel track x
7 66 Limit switches x x x
8 66 Electric power
feeding
x x x x
9 66 Electrical control x x x x
10 66 Motor and swich protection x x x x
11 66 Accessories and supplies x x x x
x x
x x
x

Architecture
NO. DRAWING ID# DRAWING TITLE File name Date Created/Revised
1 A-002 Scope of work (drawing list) A-002-A 15/2/2013
2 A-200 Systemroutes and penetration to buildings A-200-A 15/2/2013
3 A-201 Ground floor plan A-201-A 15/2/2013
4 A-202 Yard and lower floor plan A-202-A 15/2/2013
5 A-203 Roof plan A-203-A 15/2/2013
6 A-204 Sections A-A, B-B, C-C A-204-A 15/2/2013
7 A-205 Sections D-D, E-E, F-F A-205-A 15/2/2013
8 A-206 Elevations A-206-A 15/2/2013
9 A-207 Stairs plans and section A-207-A 15/2/2013
10 A-208 Stairs elevations and details A-208-A 15/2/2013
11 A-209 Metal schedule A-209-A 15/2/2013
12 A-210 ML metal details A-210-A 15/2/2013
13 A-211 ML metal details A-211-A 15/2/2013
14 A-212 Frame ML-1 - welding A-212-A 15/2/2013
15 A-213 Cables channels details 1 A-213-A 15/2/2013
16 A-214 Cables channels details 2 A-214-A 15/2/2013
17 A-215 M-18 itemdetails A-215-A 15/2/2013
18 A-216 M-18 itemdetails A-216-A 15/2/2013
19 A-217 Metal details - M-4, M-6, M-15 A-217-A 15/2/2013
20 A-218 Metal details - M-7, M-9, M-10, M-11, M-12 A-218-A 15/2/2013
21 A-219 communication niche A-219-A 15/2/2013
Structural and Waterproofing
1 S-002(1) Foundations 1 buildings 44 45 S-201 15/2/2013
2 S-002(2) Foundations 2 building 46 S-201 15/2/2013
3 S-209 J et deflector yard floor and sections S-209 15/2/2013
4 S-210 Floor plan S-210 15/2/2013
5 S-211 Floor sections 1 S-210 15/2/2013
6 S-212 Floor sections 2 S-210 15/2/2013
7 S-215 Floor bottomreinforcement comm. Roof S-210 15/2/2013
8 S-216 Floor top and middlereinforcement S-210 15/2/2013
9 S-217 Floor beamreinforcement S-210 15/2/2013
10 S-230 Walls and sections S-230 15/2/2013
11 S-240 Stairs and sections S-240 15/2/2013
12 S-250 Roof plan S-250 15/2/2013
13 S-251 Roof sections S-250 15/2/2013
14 S-255 Roof reinforcement S-250 15/2/2013
15 S-270 communication niche S-270 15/2/2013
16 S-280 Allowed liveload on structureelements S-280 15/2/2013
17 S-290 Roof waterproofing S-290 15/2/2013
18 S-291 Floor and walls waterproofing S-290 15/2/2013
AIR CONDITIONING
1 AC-200 Ground floor and roof plans, section D-D, details 2474-22-13103 15/2/2013
BMD Launcher - LS 13103 - LIST OF DRAWINGS
SU-R1
Drawing List-BMD Launcher-LS13103-1Apr2013.xlsx
SITE DEVELOPMENT
1 R-201A General Plan R-201 15/2/2013
2 R-201B General Plan R-201 15/2/2013
3 R-202A Traffic & SignageLayout R-202 15/2/2013
4 R-202B Traffic & SignageLayout R-202 15/2/2013
5 R-203 Details R-203 15/2/2013
6 R-204A Long Sections Road 2 R-204 15/2/2013
7 R-204B Long Sections Roads: 3,4,11 R-204 15/2/2013
8 R-205 DrainageDetails Cross Sections R-205 15/2/2013
9 R-206 DrainageDetails 100 Culvert R-205 15/2/2013
10 R-207 DrainageDetails 2100 Culvert R-205 15/2/2013
11 R-208A-UT Superposition Underground Utilities R-208 15/2/2013
12 R-208B-UT Superposition Underground Utilities R-208 15/2/2013
13 R-209 Road No. 11 Cross sections 1100-1105 R-209 15/2/2013
20 R-216 Road No. 3,4 Cross sections 301-303, 400-402 R-209 15/2/2013
21 R-217 Cross sections Rampart 5800-5808 R-217 15/2/2013
26 R-222 Building No. 46 Cross sections 1-3 R-222 15/2/2013
SAFETY
NO. DRAWING NO. DRAWING TITLE File name Date Created/Revised
1 SA-200 Safety plan SA-200 15/2/2013
SU-R1
Electricity and Communication
1 E-201 Grounding thefoundations & lightning grounding plan 2267-1_E201-E201_GROUND_COLOR 15/2/2013
2 E-202 Power & communications installation 2267-1_E202-E202_POWER_COLOR 15/2/2013
3 E-203 Lighting plan 2267-1_E202-E203_LIGHT_COLOR 15/2/2013
4 E-204 Firedetection 2267-1_E202-E204_FIRE_COLOR 15/2/2013
5 E-205 Ultrasonic anti rodent system 2267-1_E202-E205_Ultrasonic_COLOR 15/2/2013
6 E-206 Roof floor - electricity and lighting 2267-1_E206-E206_ROOF_COLOR 15/2/2013
7 E-207 Roof floor - lightning grounding plan 2267-1_E206-E207_ROOF_BR_COLOR 15/2/2013
8 E-208 Sections A-A, B-B, E-E, G-G, A1-A1, B1-B1 2267-1_E209-E208_SECT_COLOR 15/2/2013
9 E-209 Sections D-D, F-F 2267-1_E209-E209_SECT (2)_COLOR 15/2/2013
10 E-210 Main switchboard A 2267-1_E210-E210_SWB_SHAHOR 15/2/2013
11 E-211 Main switchboard A - control terminals 2267-1_E211-E211_SWB_CONTR_COLOR 15/2/2013
12 E-212 Connection charts - electrical, control & P.A lines 2267-1_E212-E212_CHARTS1_COLOR 15/2/2013
13 E-213 Connection charts 2 - electrical, control & communication lines 2267-1_E213-E213_CHARTS2_COLOR 15/2/2013
14 E-214 250A mobilegenerator connection box 2267-1_E214-E214_GEN-SHAHOR 15/2/2013
15 E-215 Elevations & lightning grounding plan 2267-1_E215-E215_MABAT_COLOR 15/2/2013
16 E-216 Details 1 2267-1_E216-E216_DET1_SHAHOR 15/2/2013
17 E-217 Details 2 2267-1_E217-E217_DET2_SHAHOR 15/2/2013
18 E-218 Communication rooms 1 & 2, power & communications installation 2267-1_E218-E218_ROOM_COLOR 15/2/2013
19 E-221 Electricity and communications installation in sitedevelopment 2267-1_E221-E221_PIT2_COLOR 15/2/2013
PLUMBING
1 P- 201 Siteplan. water supply & sewage P- 201 15/2/2013
2 P- 202 Floor plans and sections P- 202 15/2/2013
3 P- 203 Details P- 203 15/2/2013
Crane and Special Doors
1 M-201-1 Doublegirder doublehook overhead traveling crane- General assembly M-201-1 15/2/2013
2 M-201-2 Doublegirder doublehook overhead traveling crane-Hoist unit crab - oneof two units & details M-201-2 15/2/2013
3 M1-202-11 Blast and splint proof two winged door mechanical actuated - general - assembly & details M1-202-11 15/2/2013
4 M1-202-21 Blast and splint proof two winged door mechanical actuated - Details of lock device M1-202-21 15/2/2013
5 M1-202-31 Blast and splint proof two left door mechanical actuated - Details of hinges - doors axles M1-202-31 15/2/2013
6 M1-203-1 Blast proof - onewinged door - General assembly & details M1-203-1 15/2/2013
Superposition
1 Z-101 Ground floor plan 101 15/2/2013
2 Z-102 Yard & lower floor plan 102 15/2/2013
3 Z-103 Roof plan 103 15/2/2013
4 Z-104 section a-ab-b c-c 104 15/2/2013
SU-R1
73x73
*
A
C
1
T
A
C
1
30.0
*
A
C
-
2
0
0
M
A
H
O
D
4
4
6
6
5
5
7
7
9
9
8
8
10
10
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
10
10
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
10.10
9
.3
0
8.50
2.50
1
1
3
3
2
2
4
6
6
5
10.40
2.50
M
A
H
O
D
R=17.50
R
=
1
5
. 0
0
R
=
1
5
.0
0
R=15.00
R
=
1
5
.0
0
R=
17.50
R=
17.50
R = 1 5 . 0 0
Road barrier type N2(W4)
according to Israely standart
M
A
H
O
D
R=17.50
M
A
H
O
D
7.00 1.50
20 cm BASE MATERIAL TYPE A
7 cm ASPHALTIC CONCRETE BINDER COURSE
BASE ASPHALT COATING 1kg/sq.m
5 cm ASPHALTIC CONCRETE WEARING COURSE
1.50
1:2.5
1:1.5
ASPHALT ROAD SHOULDER
TYPICAL SECTION
SHOULDER
SCALE 1:50
CONNECTING ASPHALT COATING 0.25 kg/sq.m
1:1.5
section no. 1100-1108
section no. 217-225
1:2.5
47 cm.
COMPACTION OF FILLING MATERIAL
0
.3
0
DITCH
PRECAST GARDEN STONE 10/20 cm
TYPICAL DETAIL FOR GARDEN STONE
SCALE 1:20
DETAIL No. 3
1
:1
.5
CONCRETE BASE B-20
20 cm OF BASE MATERIAL TYPE A
4 cm ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
1
.5
:
1
7.00 1.50
1.50
1:2.5
1:1.5
ASPHALT ROAD SHOULDER
TYPICAL SECTION
SHOULDER
SCALE 1:50
1:1.5
0
.3
0
m
in
.
1:2.5
72 cm.
COMPACTION OF FILLING MATERIAL
CONNECTING ASPHALT COATING 0.25 kg/sq.m 12 cm BASE MATERIAL TYPE A
DITCH
section no. 200-217
section no. 225-235
section no. 300-303
section no. 400-402
section no. 1108-1111
ASPALT SAWING
EXISTING ROAD NEW ROAD
DISMANTLING UPPER ASPHALT LAYER
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE WEARING COURSE
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE BINDER COURSE
30
BASE MATERIAL LAYERS BASE MATERIAL LAYERS
OF EXISTING LAYERS OF NEW LAYERS
DETAIL No. 5
SCALE 1:10
JOINT CONECECTION TO EXISTING ASPHALT
2.50
SECTION A-A
SCALE 1:50
BUILDING
BUILDING No. 44
CONCRETE PLATE(SEE STRUCTURAL PLAN)
47 cm.
0.00
0.00
SITE 13103
ROCK EXCESS TO BE REMOVED FILLING GAPS WITH LEAN CONCRETE
CEMENT OR HYDRATED LINE
5
3
5
DETAIL A SCALE 1:20
7.00 1.50 1.50
1:1.5
ASPHALT ROAD SHOULDER SHOULDER
1:1.5
1:2.5
DITCH
1
:1
.5
1
:1
.5 1:2.5
DITCH
40cm DEPTH OF SOIL EXCHANGING IN
EXCAVATION OR REFILLING UPTO 80 cm.
TAKING CARE OF SUBSOIL ACCORDING
TO EARTH CONSULTANT
SCALE 1:1000
0
.4
0
0
-
8
0
c
m
SOIL EXCHANGING DETAIL
IN EXCAVATION
TYPICAL BUILDING
B

A

C,D C,D
B

A

SECTION A-A
SCALE 1:50
BUILDING No. 43,45,46
2.50
BUILDING
CONCRETE PLATE(SEE STRUCTURAL PLAN)
72 cm.
0.00
0.00
DETAIL No. 4
DETAIL No. 1 DETAIL No. 1
DETAIL No. 3
SECTION D-D
SCALE 1:50
BUILDING No.43,45,46
72 cm.
1:1.5
1
.5
:1
1:1.5
1
.5
:1
DETAIL No. 4
DETAIL No. 2
DETAIL No. 2
DETAIL No. 3
SECTION C-C
SCALE 1:50
47 cm.
BUILDING No.44
1:1.5 1:1.5
1
.5
:1
1
.5
:1
4cm ASPHALTIC CONCRETE WEARING COURSE
SECTION B-B
SCALE 1:50
3.40(1.50) 0.50
-0.10 -0.15
DETAIL No. 3
1:1.5
1
.5
:1
BUILDING
2.00
1.50 1.00
ROAD BARRIER TYPE -H1(W3)
1.50
TYPICAL SECTION
SCALE 1:50
SHOULDER
ASPHALT
SIDEWALK
1:1.5
0.50
0.30 1.20
2.00
16.00
0
.7
2
2.00 2.00
DETAIL
SCALE 1:50
2.00 2.00 2.00
0
.2
0
1
:1
.5
1
.5
:
1
PRECAST GARDEN STONE 10/20 cm
TYPICAL DETAIL FOR GARDEN STONE
SCALE 1:20
DETAIL No. 4
CONCRETE BASE B-20
PRECAST CURB STONE 17/25 cm
TYPICAL DETAIL FOR PRECAST CURB STONE
DETAIL No. 1
SCALE 1:20
72 cm.
CONCRETE BASE B-20
BUILDING No.43,45,46
PRECAST CURB STONE 17/25 cm
TYPICAL DETAIL FOR PRECAST CURB STONE
DETAIL No. 2
SCALE 1:20
47 cm.
CONCRETE BASE B-20
BUILDING No.44
1:2.5
0
-
8
0
c
m
SOIL EXCHANGING DETAIL- IN FILL
SCALE 1:1000
COMPACTED WITH LEAST 80 L/M2 OF
RIPPING UP TO 40 CM. WETTING AND
WATER WITH A SMOOTH 3 WHELL ROLLER
3 TON STATIC WEIGHT
LAY DOWN INTO THE RIPPED SOIL GRAVEL
AND COBBLES "BAKALASH" TYPE 50 TO 250 mm SIZE.
SOILS TYPE A-1B, A-2-4, A-2-5, A-2-6, A-2-7
FOR A-2 TYPE MATERIAL THE COMPACTION
SHALL BE PERFORMED AT OPTIMAL WATER CONTENT +4%
THE FILL SHALL BE DONE IN NO MORE THEN 20 cm LAYERS
COMPACTED WITH AT LEAST 10 PASSESF A HEAVY
VIBRATORY ROLLER COMPACTOR(MINIMAL STATIC WEIGHT OF 5 TONS)
TO A DRY DENSITY OF 98% OBTAINED FROM "MODIFIED AASHTO"
7.00 1.50 1.50
ASPHALT ROAD SHOULDER SHOULDER
0
.4
0
DETAIL -A
1:2.5
B-20 CONCRETE
STEEL ANCHORS
GEOTEX TILKE SHEETS
POLYETHILENE MESH
10 cm HIGH WITH 40 CELLS PER m
WEIGHING 200 GR/METER
51.11.05 OF THE GENERAL SPECIFICATION
0.50
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
ROAD3
ROAD 4
ROAD11
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
M
A
H
O
D
CROSS SECTION 1-1
BUILDING
46
CROSS SECTION 2-2
CROSS SECTION 3-3
curbstone
garden stone
garden stone
garden stone
10 cm plastic cellular
syatem wite concrete
see detail in drawing
no.-R-203
no.-R-203
no.-R-203
no.-R-203
M
A
H
O
D
CROSS SECTION 4-4
BUILDING
45
CROSS SECTION 5-5
CROSS SECTION 6-6
ROAD
curbstone
garden stone
garden stone
garden stone
no.-R-203
no.-R-203
no.-R-203
no.-R-203
M
A
H
O
D
CROSS SECTION 7-7
BUILDING
44
CROSS SECTION 8-8
CROSS SECTION 9-9
curbstone
garden stone
garden stone
garden stone
clayey material
clayey material
no.-R-203
no.-R-203
M
A
H
O
D
CROSS SECTION 10-10
BUILDING
43
CROSS SECTION 11-11
CROSS SECTION 12-12
(OPTION)
curbstone
garden stone
garden stone
garden stone
no.-R-203
no.-R-203
M
A
H
O
D
1
C
opper strip
V
esda system
pipes
C
o
l
o
r

L
e
g
e
n
d

:
C
o
l
o
r

L
e
g
e
n
d

:
N
o
.
D
is
c
ip
lin
e
S
y
s
te
m
C
o
lo
r
C
olor N
o.
Line T
ype
P
attern
01
S
tructure
W
alls / C
olum
ns
7
02
B
eam
s
8
03
S
labs
7
04
S
teal
11
05 06
O
penings &
S
hafts
21
07
A
rchitecture
G
ypsum
board w
alls
7
08 09
10
M
echanicals
11
12 13 14
H
V
A
C
E
qpm
.
84
15 16
3
17 18 19 20
E
lectrical
21
P
lum
bing
D
om
estic C
old W
ater
4
22
S
torm
D
rains
200
G
A
S
P
ipes
51
G
A
S
P
ipes
galvanized sheet m
etal duct
E
lectricity
1
194 1
C
om
m
unication
galvanized sheet m
etal duct
for under ceiling instalation
galvanized sheet m
etal duct
E
lectricity
23
for ultrasonic cables
2xLA
S
-12 pipes
1
F
ire detection
galvanized sheet m
etal duct
1
S
anitary D
rains
6
B
lack C
om
m
unication
194
R
ad C
om
m
unication
240 1
pipes system
, as m
arked
pipes system
, as m
arked
244
20/2.5 m
m
C
opper strip to roof
1
20/2.5 m
m
C
opper strip
23 24 25 26 25 26
6
X
4
U
.K
. =
-2
.7
5
o
p
e
n
in
c
e
llin
g
h
o
le
6
X
4
U
.K
. =
-0
.5
0
h
o
le
T
.L
. =
0
.3
0
T
.L
. =
0
.3
0
B
.L
. =
0
.2
5
h
o
le
T
.L
. =
0
.3
0
h
o
le
T
.L
. =
0
.3
0
B
.L
. =
0
.2
5
T
.L
.=
-1
.0
h
o
le
h
o
le
h
o
le
1
C
opper strip
V
esda system
pipes
C
o
l
o
r

L
e
g
e
n
d

:
C
o
l
o
r

L
e
g
e
n
d

:
N
o
.
D
is
c
ip
lin
e
S
y
s
te
m
C
o
lo
r
C
olor N
o.
Line T
ype
P
attern
01
S
tructure
W
alls / C
olum
ns
7
02
B
eam
s
8
03
S
labs
7
04
S
teal
11
05 06
O
penings &
S
hafts
21
07
A
rchitecture
G
ypsum
board w
alls
7
08 09
10
M
echanicals
11
12 13 14
H
V
A
C
E
qpm
.
84
15 16
3
17 18 19 20
E
lectrical
21
P
lum
bing
D
om
estic C
old W
ater
4
22
S
torm
D
rains
200
G
A
S
P
ipes
51
G
A
S
P
ipes
galvanized sheet m
etal duct
E
lectricity
1
194 1
C
om
m
unication
galvanized sheet m
etal duct
galvanized sheet m
etal duct
E
lectricity
23
2xLA
S
-12 pipes
1
F
ire detection
galvanized sheet m
etal duct
1
S
anitary D
rains
6
B
lack C
om
m
unication
194
R
ad C
om
m
unication
240 1
pipes system
, as m
arked
pipes system
, as m
arked
244
20/2.5 m
m
C
opper strip to roof
1
20/2.5 m
m
C
opper strip
23 24 25 26 25 26
1
2
x
6
O
.K
. =
9
.0
5
6
x
6
U
.K
. =
4
.7
0
6
x
6
O
.K
. =
9
.0
5
1
2
x
6
O
.K
. =
9
.0
5
1
2
x
6
O
.K
. =
9
.0
5
h
o
le
1
2
x
6
O
.K
. =
9
.0
5
h
o
le
1
C
opper strip
V
esda system
pipes
C
o
l
o
r

L
e
g
e
n
d

:
C
o
l
o
r

L
e
g
e
n
d

:
N
o
.
D
is
c
ip
lin
e
S
y
s
te
m
C
o
lo
r
C
olor N
o.
Line T
ype
P
attern
01
S
tructure
W
alls / C
olum
ns
7
02
B
eam
s
8
03
S
labs
7
04
S
teal
11
05 06
O
penings &
S
hafts
21
07
A
rchitecture
G
ypsum
board w
alls
7
08 09
10
M
echanicals
11
12 13 14
H
V
A
C
E
qpm
.
84
15 16
3
17 18 19 20
E
lectrical
21
P
lum
bing
D
om
estic C
old W
ater
4
22
S
torm
D
rains
200
G
A
S
P
ipes
51
G
A
S
P
ipes
galvanized sheet m
etal duct
E
lectricity
1
194 1
C
om
m
unication
galvanized sheet m
etal duct
galvanized sheet m
etal duct
E
lectricity
23
2xLA
S
-12 pipes
1
F
ire detection
galvanized sheet m
etal duct
1
S
anitary D
rains
6
B
lack C
om
m
unication
194
R
ad C
om
m
unication
240 1
pipes system
, as m
arked
pipes system
, as m
arked
244
20/2.5 m
m
C
opper strip to roof
1
20/2.5 m
m
C
opper strip
23 24 25 26 25 26

Details On Secret Israeli Missile Base Accidentally Posted To US Government Website

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Details On Secret Israeli Missile Base Accidentally Posted To US Government Website

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

W2SDXXXXXXXXXX

Project Title: BMD Launcher LS 13103, Israel

You might also like